PHB2022 Vol 1

Product handbook
2021
Click here
for contents
2022/09
2021/03 CLICK HERE FOR VOLUME 2
Contents
How to use the 2022 digital product handbook 1.1 1

Introduction 1.2
Our global reach

1.3
Worldwide contacts
Product overview sales brochure 1.4
Product highlight videos 1.5
Our capability videos 1.6
Section 2 Boiler house
Section 3 Flowmetering
Section 4 Control systems

Product areas
Section 5 Compressed air products
Section 6 Heat transfer solutions
Section 7 General information

spira xsarc o.c om 1
How to use the 2022
digital product handbook
PRODUCT HANDBOOK
Product 2022
handbook
VOLUME 1
2021 1.1
1
1
Click here
for contents
2021/03
2022/01
Table of contents
These should be left on before continuing
into the Product Handbook
2 3 4 5
There are various options to look through the handbook:
- Left click the arrow on the right or left hand side of the pages.
- Use the buttons below
To search for an item use the text field at the top right of the screen and enter a Spirax Sarco product
name or reference number.
You will often get more than one result, this is because all the instances are listed.
1 Search function
By selecting any entries in the list, you will jump directly to that document, with the word you searched
for highlighted.
(Note: please do not use spaces between nomenclature .i.e. type PN1000 rather than PN 1000 and
when typing a reference number please use hyphens i.e. P612-14).
2 Table of contents These should be left on before continuing into the Product Handbook.
3 Download This option allows you to download single pages
4 Magnifier tools This enables you to zoom in and out of the page for closer detail. There is a zoom bar at the bottom.
Introduction
The Spirax Sarco Product Handbook contains the technical information for our most popular range of products for steam
and other industrial fluids. You can search for products by product nomenclature / name, product range and by document
number.
As well as the products, many Spirax Sarco companies can supply further products or services on request. These may
include steam trap surveys and complete packaged solutions which can provide you with plant automation. If the product
or service you need is not listed in this handbook, contact your local Spirax Sarco sales company representative.
1.2
The documents shown are for initial specification purposes only. Safety information together with installation and
maintenance instructions are provided with every product supplied. Consult your local Spirax Sarco office if you require
1
help in correctly selecting your product.
The latest technical information is available for our full product range on spiraxsarco.com. The website also offers
other practical information, such as the Steam Engineering Tutorials, which provides useful advice on the design and
maintenance of steam and condensate systems, and other resources such as a Unit Conversion Calculator and Steam
Tables, to help you with day-to-day engineering calculations.
Please note that this is an international publication and not all products are available in all countries.
Spirax-Sarco Limited, Charlton House, Cheltenham,

Gloucestershire, GL53 8ER, UK
T +44 (0)1242 521361
F +44 (0)1242 573342
E enquiries@uk.spiraxsarco.com
© Copyright 2022 Spirax Sarco is a registered trademark of Spirax-Sarco Limited
Some of the products may not be available in certain markets.

Local regulations may restrict the use of the products shown to the conditions quoted.
In the interests of development and improvement of the product, we reserve the right to change the specification without notice.
1
1.3
2
Operating Companies Manufacturing Sites
Sales Offices Distributors

Our global reach
1.3
3
1
EUROPE AMERICAS
BELGIUM PORTUGAL
Tel: +32 9 244 67 10 Tel: (351) 21 417 5093 NORTH
spirax@pt.SpiraxSarco.com
1.3 Info@be.SpiraxSarco.com
CANADA
Tel: (800) 265 7747
BOSNIA & HERZEGOVINA ROMANIA
4 Tel: +387 (0)65 022 297 Tel: 0364 404752
office@ro.spiraxsarco.com
sales@spirax.ca
marko.sovic@ba.spiraxsarco.com
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
RUSSIA Tel: (800) 883-4411
CZECH/SLOVAK REPUBLIC
Tel: 8 800 55 00 25. orders@spirax.com
Tel: 420 274 001 351
info@cz.spiraxsarco.com sales@ru.spiraxsarco.com
DENMARK SPAIN LATIN

Tel: (45) 38 10 4288 Tel: (34) 9 3 685 79 29
Webmaster@dk.SpiraxSarco.com SpiraxSarco@es.SpiraxSarco.com ARGENTINA
Tel: 54 11 4589-1300
FINLAND SWEDEN info@ar.SpiraxSarco.com
Tel: 358 (0)9 4136 1611 Tel: 46 (0)8 556 322 30
info@fi.SpiraxSarco.com info@se.SpiraxSarco.com BRAZIL
Tel: (55) 11 4615 9000
FRANCE SWITZERLAND vendas.brasil@br.spiraxsarco.com
Tel: (33) 01 30 66 43 43 Tel: (41) 044 396 80 00
courrier@fr.SpiraxSarco.com Info@ch.SpiraxSarco.com CHILE
Tel: (+56 2) 2616 2550
GERMANY TURKEY ventas@cl.SpiraxSarco.com
Tel: 49 (7531) 5806 0 Tel: (0216) 600 08 00
Vertrieb@de.SpiraxSarco.com info@tr.spiraxsarco.com COLOMBIA
Tel: 57 2 5142626
GREECE UKRAINE info@co.spiraxsarco.com
Tel: +30 6945290130 Tel: 380 44 585 3495
ilias.vakouras@gr.spiraxsarco.com info@ua.spiraxsarco.com MEXICO
Tel: (81) 82-20-36-00
HUNGARY UNITED KINGDOM ventas.mexico@mx.spiraxsarco.com
Tel: 36 (1) 222 3708 Tel: 44 (0)1242 521361
info@spirax.hu WebEnquiries@SpiraxSarco.com PERÚ
Tel: (511) 339 4005
ITALY marketing@pe.spiraxsarco.com
Tel: 39.0362.49171
marketing@it.SpiraxSarco.com
KAZAKHSTAN
Tel: +77018003698
cis@ru.spiraxsarco.com
NETHERLANDS
Tel: +31 10 892 03 86
Info@nl.SpiraxSarco.com
NORWAY
Tel: +47 67 06 76 80
info@no.SpiraxSarco.com
POLAND
Tel: 48 22 853 35 88
biuro@pl.spiraxsarco.com
Wor ldwide c ontacts
Operating c ompanies
ASIA PACIFIC MIDDLE EAST AND AFRICA
AUSTRALIA EGYPT
Tel: (61) 2 9852 3100 Tel: (202) 24 17 44 91
1.3
info@au.SpiraxSarco.com Info@eg.spiraxsarco.com
CAMBODIA GHANA
Tel: +855 68 789 055
Tes.Bunheang@sg.spiraxsarco.com
Tel: +233 (0)20 450 1377 5
Solomon.Ackumey@gh.spiraxsarco.com
CHINA JORDAN
Tel: 021-2416 3666 Tel: 962 776602727
Sales@cn.SpiraxSarco.com Yahya.AlMowaqet@jo.spiraxsarco.com
INDIA
KENYA
Tel: +91 44 67414800
Tel: 254-20-4443340
spiraxindia@in.spiraxsarco.com
info@ke.spiraxsarco.com
INDONESIA
Tel: 62 21 8379 7233 MIDDLE EAST
enquiries.id@id.spiraxsarco.com Tel: (971) 6 5575226
info@ae.spiraxsarco.com
JAPAN
Tel: (0) 43 274 4811 MAGHREB
infojp@spiraxsarco.com Tel: 00 212 (0)5 37 60 38 00
courrier.maroc@fr.spiraxsarco.com
KAZAKHSTAN
Tel: +77018003698 SOUTH AFRICA
cis@ru.spiraxsarco.com Gauteng
Tel: 27 (11) 230 1300
KOREA, SOUTH info@za.spiraxsarco.com
Tel: 82 (02)3489-3489
SSK@kr.SpiraxSarco.com Port Elizabeth
Tel: 27 (0) 41 364 2004
MALAYSIA info@za.spiraxsarco.com
Tel: (60) 3 556 996 50
Sales@my.SpiraxSarco.com Capetown
Tel: 27 (0) 41 364 2004
MYANMAR
info@za.spiraxsarco.com
Tel: +95 1 934 5065 Ext1224
Spirax.Myanmar@sg.spiraxsarco.com
KwaZulu Natal
NEW ZEALAND Tel: +27 (0) 31 512 5122
Tel: (64) 0800 800 229 info@za.spiraxsarco.com
sales@nz.spiraxsarco.com
Nelspruit
PAKISTAN Tel: +27 (0) 13 752 7779
Tel: +44 (0) 1242 521361 info@za.spiraxsarco.com
Info@pk.spiraxsarco.com
Secunda
PHILIPPINES Tel: 27 (17) 631 1957
Tel: (63) 2 812 8654 info@za.spiraxsarco.com
Sales.Philippines@ph.spiraxsarco.com
SINGAPORE
Tel: (65) 6349 0480
Spirax.Singapore@sg.spiraxsarco.com
TAIWAN
Tel: 886-2-2662-6689
simon.yang@tw.spiraxsarco.com
THAILAND
Tel: +66 2 055 0888
SalesTeam@th.SpiraxSarco.com
VIETNAM
Tel: +84 028 3997 6000
Spirax.Vietnam@vn.spiraxsarco.com
1.4
1
Spirax Sarco
the products
for steam and related
industrial fluids
Introduction Contents
1 P r o d u c t o v e r v i e w
1.4
2
At Spirax Sarco, we aim to be the first choice

provider of efficient solutions in the use of
steam and related industrial fluids.
We aim to be the first choice provider through use of our

collective expertise
With over 100 years experience in steam, condensate and related fluid systems, we are able to help our customers effectively
1.4
solve their problems and improve the effectiveness of their plant.
3
We have over 5,000 employees across 38 operating companies worldwide. Our philosophy is to use our knowledge and
experience to help our customers reduce costs by improving process efficiency and saving energy.
We aim to be the first choice provider by having a comprehensive

product offering
From the most sophisticated packaged system to the smallest pressure gauge, Spirax Sarco is able to provide the largest
product choice, within its area of expertise, to the widest geographic area. This extensive range of products isn’t just limited
to the steam and condensate loop but covers applications in most related industrial fluids. Our product offering enables us to
provide total solutions for our customers.
We aim to be the first choice provider by offering the right solution

for our customers business
We fully appreciate today’s demands on our customers. Our aim is to solve their plant problems and provide fully
integrated solutions tailored to their business – everything from a simple product replacement right through to a major
turnkey project. In providing this comprehensive support we allow our customers to focus on their core business.
It is the combination of expertise, comprehensive product offering and

our worldwide capability as a solutions provider, that makes
Spirax Sarco an unequalled business partner for our customers.
Sales Main
brochure handbook
contents page contents page 3
Contents
Complete integrated solutions 06
Packaged heat exchangers, product assemblies, system audits, design, installation, maintenance and
project management.
1.4
4
Boiler controls and systems 10
Feedtanks, level controls and alarms, feedpump check valves, boiler blowdown valves, TDS control
systems, steam injection systems, sample coolers, heat recovery systems, conductivity meters, condensate
contamination detectors, blowdown vessels and vent heads.
Flowmeters 12
Variable area flowmeters, orifice plates, flow computers and display units.
Control systems 13
Pneumatically/electrically actuated two-port and three-port valves, positioners, programmable electronic
controllers, pneumatic transmitter controllers, pressure reducing valves, surplussing valves, safety valves,
self-acting temperature control valves and high limit temperature cut-outs.
Steam traps 16
Thermodynamic, ball float, balanced pressure, inverted bucket and bimetallic steam traps, sealed and
quickfit steam traps, Spiratec steam trap performance monitors and steam trapping stations.
Condensate pumps and energy recovery 18
Automatic steam (or gas) powered fluid pumps, pump-trap combinations, electric powered condensate
recovery units and flash steam recovery vessels.
Humidifiers 19
Direct steam injection humidifiers and Hygromatic self-generative humidifiers.
High purity products 20

Steam generators, stills, temperature controls, pressure controls instrumentation, steam traps, sample coolers,
ball valves, separators and filters.
1.4
5
Pipeline ancillaries 21
Manifolds, separators, bellows sealed stop valves, check valves, diffusers, piston actuated isolation valves,
strainers, sight glasses, pressure gauges, air vents, vacuum breakers, hosedown stations, ball valves and
compressed air filters/regulators/lubricators.
10exchange 12
packages
06 13 16
18 19exchange 20exchange 21
packages packages
Main
handbook
contents page 5
1.4
6
Customer focused solutions Ready assembled control System audits Steam condition monitoring
partner systems
Complete integrated solutions

Businesses today are increasingly relying on outside expertise for management of their energy sources. This allows them
to concentrate more on their core business activities.
Spirax Sarco has the expertise and products our customers require regarding the use of steam and other related
industrial fluids. Our offering makes us the perfect partner as a solutions provider. These solutions can range from simple
product assemblies to major turnkey projects such as boiler house upgrades.
1.4
7
System services
At Spirax Sarco we offer a complete range of services to ensure the effective and safe management of steam, condensate
and other industrial utility fluid systems.
These services include:

• Tailored audits to identify areas for improving • Provision of commissioning and routine
system efficiency, and ensure compliance with servicing, in addition to advice on Planned
Health, Safety and Environmental legislation Preventative Maintenance programs, to fully
optimise process performance and uptime
• Steam System Conditioning and Quality
• Project management to ensure seamless
Testing programs that deliver reduced cost
on-time, on-budget completion of large
of ownership and optimised heat transfer
turnkey contracts
throughout the system
• Equipment recalibration and repair facility
• Design of customer-specific energy saving
to help maintain system safety and process
schemes and strategies
availability.
• Design of process improvement schemes to
increase product quality and/or yield
• Installation of new and replacement products

to improve energy utilisation, system reliability
and reduce water and chemical usage
Sales Main
brochure handbook
Heat transfer solutions Packaged products
• High purity generators Assemblies of products all selected and sized to provide an
A range of generators which produce clean steam, integrated solution. Some examples of packaged
1.4 pure steam or WFI (water for injection) conforming to solutions are:
8 recognised standards using plant steam as the primary

heat source. • Condensate pump/steam trap assemblies
Condensate pumps with steam trap and/or receiver for
• Heat transfer solutions the effective removal and return of condensate.
Packaged heat exchange solutions can be provided
to meet your exact requirements, offering a highly • Control valve/flowmeter stations
efficient solution to heating with steam. Compact units, Pre-assembled stations including matched products to
which include the unique EasiHeat™ and QuickHeat™ condition the fluid prior to controlling its temperature,
systems, are pre-assembled to offer quick, simple pressure etc., or measuring its flowrate. Includes all
installation, and speedy commissioning. To provide necessary downstream products.
complete flexibility we will also design and provide
unassembled heat exchange solutions to meet your
individual requirements.
• Bespoke heat transfer solutions

Specifically and individually designed to suit your
application requirements.
Pressure reducing valve system
Compact standard heat Clean and pure steam Specially designed heat Bespoke engineered systems
transfer packages generators transfer solutions
1.4
9
Sales Main
brochure handbook
Boiler control and systems

An extensive range of boiler controls and systems are available. Whether it’s a completely new boiler house plant or a
simple blowdown valve replacement, Spirax Sarco will have the answer.
1. Feedtanks 4. Steam injection systems

1.4 The Spirax Sarco feedtank is an atmospheric deaerator fully Steam injection systems can be used to inject steam into
10 constructed in stainless steel - no rusting, no linings, coatings feedtanks to drive off the dissolved oxygen. This reduces
or joints to leak. It is fitted with a flash condensing deaerator the amount of oxygen scavenging chemicals required,
head which combines: cold make-up, condensate return and and maintains a high and steady feedwater temperature
flash recovery. Flash steam is condensed whilst heating and to the boiler.
deaerating the cold make-up.
5. Level controls and alarms
The deaerator head is also available for fitting into existing Significant developments have taken place in recent
feedtanks. years considerably improving the standards of safety and
reliability of boiler level controls.
2. Boiler blowdown systems
As steam forms it leaves behind impurities in the boiler water Probes without moving parts and modern electronic
that will concentrate unless removed. The TDS (Total Dissolved controllers are so reliable that major boiler accidents
Solids) in the boiler must be accurately controlled. High TDS should be a thing of the past.
can result in carryover of boiler water and impurities causing
problems with production and plant. Low TDS due to too much The range offered has been approved as complying
blowdown increases fuel and water treatment chemical costs. with the relevant Codes of Practice and European
Systems are available for all sizes and types of boiler. regulations.
3. Sample coolers 6. Feedpump check valves

To be sure that a boiler is operating at the desired Feedpump check valves are fitted with heavy-duty
concentration of TDS it is necessary to take a sample of the springs and soft seats to prevent a shutdown boiler
water and test it. The stainless steel sample cooler lets the from flooding with feedwater.
operator do this safely and accurately.
1 2 3 4
spiraxsarco.com
7. Heat recovery systems 10. Blowdown vessels

Flash steam recovery from blowdown has two advantages. In Blowdown vessels are now manufactured to ASME VIII 1.4
addition to the heat recovered the flash steam is condensed to allow operation to an ambient temperature of -10°C.
11
to ‘pure’ water, reducing the amount of make-up water and
chemical treatment required. 11. Conductivity meters
The temperature compensated conductivity meter is
For certain conditions it may be more economical to pass the an essential instrument to have in the boiler house for
blowdown directly to a heat exchanger without using a flash checking boiler water and feedwater TDS levels, and
vessel. Spirax Sarco can provide a range of alternative heat calibrating control instrumentation.
recovery solutions.
12. Condensate contamination detection systems
8. Bottom blowdown valves Even low levels of contamination can cause foaming,
For the precise and regular control of precipitated solids in scaling and corrosion in the boiler.
steam boilers. A choice of manual key operated or
fully, automated valves are available. The contamination detection system monitors the
conductivity of the condensate and will raise an alarm
9. Vent heads and divert it to drain if a pre-set limit is passed.
The vent head separates condensate from flash steam and
vents it safely without spray. Vent heads are manufactured in
stainless steel for a corrosion resistant long life.
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
Sales Main
brochure handbook
Flowmeters
Whatever your process or system requirements, there is a flowmeter to suit your needs from the Spirax Sarco range. Our
flowmeters have an unrivalled reputation for accuracy, turndown and reliability. They are versatile, being suitable for steam
as well as most liquids and gases. A comprehensive selection of flow computers and display units, all of which can be
linked to plant and building management systems, complement the range.
1.4 1. Gilflo ILVA Flowmeters 4.TVA Flowmeters

12 The Gilflo ILVA range of flowmeters offers an unrivalled The innovative Spirax Sarco TVA Flowmeter range has
turndown ratio of up to 100:1 and can be used to meter been designed to meet the challenge of measuring both
most industrial fluids including steam and gases. minimum and maximum flowrates to deliver pinpoint
Available in pipeline sizes from DN50 to DN300. steam metering accuracy combined with quick and easy
installation.
2. Orifice Plate Flowmeters
Accurate and repeatable measurement over a wide flow
Spirax Sarco orifice plate flowmeters are especially suited for
range of turndown of 50:1.
installations in pipelines where the need for high accuracy
and turndown is not critical. Available in pipeline sizes from DN50 to DN100.
They can be interfaced with flow computers to give

5.TFA Flowmeters
up-to-the-minute data at the touch of a button.
The TFA Flowmeter is a high performance meter,
Available in pipeline sizes from DN25 upwards. designed to meet the challenges of economically
monitoring steam flow in small line sizes, allowing
3. Flow computers accurate assessment of energy consumption at the point
A range of flow computers is available to give automatic of use. One of the smallest installation requirements on
density compensation plus analogue, pulse and the market means the TFA Flowmeter can be installed
RS 485 Modbus outputs. The units also have within previously unsuitable pipework, removing the
built-in timers and event loggers enabling peak flows, need for expensive line changes. Combining this with a
temperatures, pressures and totals to be recorded. Units for highly reliable no moving parts design makes this a cost
heat metering applications are also available. effective point of use metering solution.
2 3 4 5
spiraxsarco.com
Control systems
To enable you to make the right choice for your application Spirax Sarco has developed a range of control systems ranging
from simple self-acting controls to systems that will fit into highly sophisticated control loops.
1. Electrically actuated control valves 3. Positioners

Two-port or three-port valves manufactured in a wide choice of
materials for pressures up to 40 bar and having connections in
To complement the range of pneumatically actuated
control valves, pneumatic and electropneumatic
1.4
sizes up to DN200. positioners will allow small actuators to close against 13
higher differential pressures, eliminate hysteresis and
The actuators are suitable for HVAC or industrial process improve accuracy and positioning time.
applications and are available with VMD, mV or mA input
signals. Variants are available with automatic commissioning,
smart control, programmable functions and digital
Options include: spring reserve and, where more accurate communications.
control is required, a valve positioning card.
4. Programmable electronic controllers
2. Pneumatically actuated control valves Panel mounted single loop controllers suitable for single
Two-port or three-port control valves manufactured in a wide or multi-setpoint control. They incorporate PID, auto
choice of materials for pressures up to 40 bar and having TUNE and ADAPTIVE algorithms. Multi-input options are
connections in sizes up to DN200. available.
Pneumatic actuators are low profile to NAMUR standard, 5. Pneumatic controllers

spring-to-open or spring-to-close, and incorporate a fully rolling For the control of pressure or temperature. Pneumatic
diaphragm. A handwheel option is available. controllers are available with simple proportional control
action, or with the addition of integral and derivative
action. Temperature sensing is via a nitrogen filled
direct expansion system and pressure sensing by
interconnecting pipework to an internal bourdon tube.
1 2
3 4 5
Sales Main
brochure handbook
6. High specification control valves 9. Safety valves

A range of high specification control valves manufactured Vital for the protection of people and plant. A
in a wide choice of materials and internal trims making them comprehensive range of safety valves is available in
suitable for the more arduous application. bronze, iron and carbon steel body materials. These
valves conform to ASME and EN standards with a range
Internal trims include: multi-stage, balanced, unbalanced, of pipe end connections and sizes up to DN150. Options
low noise and anti-cavitation. include: soft seal, open or closed bonnet, with or
1.4 without easing lever.
14 These valves are used in conjunction with high power,

pneumatically operated actuators. 10. High limit temperature cut-out
Designed to protect personnel and product, the high
7. Direct acting pressure reducing and surplussing valves limit temperature cut-out is a self-powered, independent
These are self-powered valves designed to control the pressure overheat safeguard for use with two-port and three-port
of water, steam and gases up to 40 bar. They are available in valves.
a wide range of materials, and have pipeline connections up to
DN100. It is inherently ‘fail-safe’, and can provide remote
indication of operation.
8. Pilot operated pressure reducing and surplussing valves
Like direct acting pressure reducing valves, these valves are 11. Self-acting temperature controls
self-powered. Pilot operation provides accurate control under Self-acting temperature control systems are ideal for
large load change conditions. applications demanding rugged reliability and low
maintenance. They are particularly suited to harsh or
Available in SG iron, cast steel and stainless steel in sizes up hazardous environments.
to DN80.
They are used in conjunction with two-port or three-port
Options include: soft seats for gas applications with solenoid control valves to form a flexible control system in terms
valve or pneumatic actuator for remote operation. of capillary length and temperature range.
6 7 8 10 11
spiraxsarco.com
1.4
15
Sales Main
brochure handbook
Steam traps
It is essential, without loss of live steam, to remove condensate and often air and other incondensable gases from steam
systems. The Spirax Sarco range of steam traps allows the best choice to be made for all applications. A steam trap
performance monitoring system complements the range.
1.4 1. Thermodynamic steam traps 3. Balanced pressure thermostatic steam traps

Thermodynamic steam traps combine reliability, simplicity and Balanced pressure thermostatic steam traps adjust
16 efficiency of operation; with just one moving part (a hardened automatically to varying steam pressures and have
stainless steel disc) they give a blast discharge with clean, tight excellent air venting characteristics during plant start-up
shut-off. They are able to withstand: superheat, waterhammer, and during normal operation. They have large discharge
corrosive condensate, freezing and vibration. The TD trap is the capacities for their size and the robust design of the
first choice for removal of condensate from steam internals gives a good life expectancy.
distribution systems.
Sizes up to DN25.
Sizes up to DN25. For pressures up to 32 bar.
For pressures up to 250 bar. Body material: brass, cast steel or stainless steel.
Body material: carbon steel, stainless steel or alloy steel.
4. Sealed steam traps
2. Ball float steam traps Sealed maintenance free steam traps.
Ball float steam traps are extremely versatile and work efficiently
on both light and heavy condensate loads. Although compact in Range: balanced pressure, inverted bucket and
size, their discharge capacity is high and continuous, ensuring bimetallic versions.
maximum heat transfer. These traps are the best choice for
draining plant with automatic temperature control. Sizes up to DN25.
For pressures up to 45 bar.
An integral air vent is fitted as standard and an adjustable Body material: stainless steel.
needle valve is available as an option to prevent steam locking.
Sizes up to DN100.
Body material: cast iron, SG iron, cast steel or stainless steel.
1 2 3 4
spiraxsarco.com
5. Inverted bucket steam traps It will detect if traps are passing live steam or if they are 1.4
waterlogged.
Inverted bucket traps are the most robust type of the
mechanical traps and will resist waterhammer. When the check
17
valve option has been fitted in the inlet, they can be used with The system either uses sensor chambers mounted
superheated steam. They are available with a wide selection of upstream of conventional steam traps, or integral
valve orifices for precise pressure and load matching. sensors in pipeline connectors or steam traps, giving a
signal to an external test point.
Sizes up to DN80.
For pressures up to 190 bar. Sizes up to DN50.
Body material: cast iron, cast steel, alloy steel or For pressures up to 32 bar.
stainless steel. Body material: carbon steel, SG iron or stainless steel.
6. Bimetallic thermostatic steam traps 8. Quickfit steam traps

Bimetallic steam traps can conserve energy by discharging The comprehensive range of pipeline connectors
sub-cooled condensate in those applications which can utilise coupled with world leading steam trap technology
sensible heat. They are the most robust of all the thermostatic reduces plant downtime, maintenance costs and ensures
steam traps, being able to withstand waterhammer and zero emissions, whilst maintaining system efficiency.
corrosive condensate.
Range: Suitable for use with balanced pressure,
Sizes up to DN100. thermodynamic, inverted bucket, float and bimetallic
For pressures up to 210 bar. steam traps.
Body material: cast steel, alloy steel or stainless steel.
Sizes up to DN25.
7. Spiratec steam trap monitors For pressures up to 46 bar.
Every steam trap that fails to operate properly can cause Body material: generally stainless steel.
problems elsewhere in the steam system. Spiratec can
continuously monitor your steam traps to show their operation
and warn of malfunctions.
5 6 7 8
Sales Main
brochure handbook
Condensate pumps and energy recovery

To maximise energy efficiency it is essential to return clean condensate to the boiler house. Spirax Sarco’s range of
condensate handling equipment allows you to achieve this effectively and economically.
1.4 1. Automatic steam (or gas) powered condensate pumps 3. Electric powered condensate recovery units
This range of self-contained pumps uses steam or other A range of electrically powered condensate return pumps
18 pressurised gas as motive power and is designed to remove specially designed with low NPSH (Net Positive Suction
and recover condensate (or other fluids) under all operating Head) requirements to handle hot condensate in a
conditions. compact size.
They are ideal for use in hazardous areas where electrical

pumps would not be suitable, and for the efficient drainage of 4. Flash steam recovery vessels
heat exchangers. Flash steam is allowed to separate from the condensate
in the vessel. The flash steam may then be used in a low
pressure steam system and the separated condensate
2. Automatic steam powered condensate pump traps returned to the boiler house.
APT’s (Automatic Pump Traps) offer the benefit of both
pump and steam trap as one item. This ensures complete
condensate removal from plant, even under vacuum, thus
maximising thermal efficiency at all times as well as recovering
valuable condensate for re-use.
1 2 3 4
spiraxsarco.com
Humidifiers
Control of relative humidity is growing in importance as new technologies and health requirements in the workplace demand
tighter environmental management. With both direct steam injection and self-generative humidifiers, Spirax Sarco can provide
the correct solution for your specific humidification needs.
1. Direct steam injection humidifiers 2. Hygromatik self-generative humidifiers 1.4

When plant steam is available the direct steam injection A comprehensive range of self-generative humidifiers
humidifier will provide optimum control and efficiency. is available complete with all the necessary control
19
equipment.
Models are available for use with mains or fully

demineralised water.
1 2
Sales Main
brochure handbook
High purity products

Avoidance of the risk of contamination across many industries has resulted in a growing need for clean steam, pure steam and
water of WFI (Water For Injection) quality. Products suitable for these high purity systems must be designed and manufactured
to a high standard to ensure compliance with the exacting rules and regulations set for example by the biopharmaceutical and
healthcare industries. Spirax Sarco’s extensive range of high purity products extends from generation through distribution to usage.
1.4
20 1. Generation 3. Pure and clean steam trapping
A comprehensive range of clean and pure steam generators A comprehensive range of thermodynamic and
and WFI distillation units designed and manufactured to cGMP, thermostatic steam traps developed specifically for clean
ISPE, ASME BPE and FDA guidelines to produce steam and and pure steam applications. This range includes traps
water in compliance with International Pharmacopia and that minimise condensate back-up for critical
HTM 2031/EN 285 standards. steam-in-place applications.
2. Sanitary control and instrumentation 4. Sanitary ancillary products

Accurate control is essential for the successful operation of To complete your high purity system, Spirax Sarco offers
your process. Spirax Sarco offers a wide range of electrically a broad range of products including: steam traps, check
and pneumatically actuated control valves as well as direct valves and sample coolers, sanitary ball valves and
acting pressure regulators. steam separators.
A variety of sanitary instrumentation is also available to Custom sanitary systems are also available including:
complete your control loop as well as sanitary safety valve to pure steam humidifiers, sanitary heat exchangers, pure
protect your system. steam and steam generators
1 1 2 2
3 3 4 4 4
spiraxsarco.com
Pipeline ancillaries
To achieve long and reliable service from steam plant equipment it is necessary that the steam is clean, dry and that
maintenance can easily be carried out.
Spirax Sarco provides the complete range of products to ensure the condition of the steam and the steam system itself is
properly maintained.
1.4
1. Manifolds 3. Check valves 21
A compact range of forged steel manifolds designed for steam This range of valves offers an effective, low maintenance
tracing applications. The manifolds have 4, 8 or 12 tracer line solution for the prevention of reverse flow in pipelines.
connections and are supplied with integral piston type isolation
valves. Pipeline sizes up to DN300.
Screwed, socket weld, butt weld and flanged connections. Body material: bronze or stainless steel.
Connections: wafer pattern or screwed.
2. Bellows sealed stop valves
Bellows sealed stop valves are ideal for any application where 4. Separators
minimal maintenance and zero emissions are required. Separators remove moisture from steam or gas
pipelines. They provide a drain point for condensate
Pipeline sizes up to DN250. droplets moving along the pipe wall and deflect entrained
For pressures up to 40 bar. droplets out of the main flow. Separators therefore
Body material: cast iron, SG iron, carbon steel or ensure that steam or gas is delivered to its point of
stainless steel. use dry - particularly important with highly rated plant
or equipment like sterilisers, where steam comes into
contact with the product.
Pipeline sizes up to DN350.

Body material: cast iron, SG iron, carbon steel or
stainless steel.
1 2
3 4
Sales Main
brochure handbook
5. Diffusers 10. Air vents and vacuum breakers

When fitted to the outlet of a steam/air trap that is discharging Air vents and vacuum breakers, for use on steam
to atmosphere, the diffuser will greatly reduce the noise level and water systems, are designed to protect plant and
and will offer protection from high velocity discharge. process equipment.
6. Strainers Pipeline sizes up to DN25.

Strainers protect expensive downstream equipment such as For pressures up to 50 bar.
1.4 control or flowmetering devices from damage. Body material: brass, carbon steel or stainless steel.
22 Pipeline sizes up to DN250. 11. Ball valves

For pressures up to 100 bar. Spirax Sarco has a broad range of ball valves to suit
Body material: bronze, cast iron, every application requirement.
SG iron, cast steel or stainless steel.
These ball valves are available as a manual valve or can
7. Piston actuated valves be supplied with a pneumatic actuator.
Robust and compact bronze or stainless steel pneumatically
actuated valves with PTFE soft seat providing a tight shut-off Pipeline sizes up to DN200.
making them suitable for a wide range of media, up to 180°C. For pressures up to 140 bar.
Body material: cast steel or stainless steel.
Pipeline sizes up to 2”.
For pressures up to 20 bar. 12. Compressed air products
Body material: bronze or stainless steel. The condition of compressed air is critical to plant
efficiency. Poor quality air can lead to shortened air tool
Connections: screwed, flanged, sanitary clamp, butt weld or life, increased manufacturing times and even health
socket weld. risks. The Spirax-Monnier range of compressed air
products; filters, regulators and lubricators, guarantees
8. Sight glasses, sight checks and pressure gauges high quality air at the point of use.
A wide range of sight glasses, sight check valves and pressure
gauges are readily available. The compressed air product range is complemented
by: soft seated pressure reducing valves, safety valves,
9. Hosedown stations separators, strainers, ball valves and drain traps.
For general cleaning and washdown applications the
hosedown station is the perfect tool. Hot water is economically
provided by safely mixing steam and cold water.
spiraxsarco.com
1.4
5 6 7
23
5 6 7 8
8 9 10
9 10 11 12
11 12
Did you know...

Our website has more detailed information about all our products.
For more information, please visit our website at www.spiraxsarco.com
Sales Main
brochure handbook
Product highlights
1.5
1
TFA Flowmeter - point of use metering STAPS ISA100 wireless steam trap SP400/500 the world’s most energy
monitoring solution efficient electropneumatic valve
positioners
Spirax Sarco STAPS Wireless Steam Trap Improve the energy performance of your
Monitoring Solution plant with The Spirax EasiHeat™
These videos are linked to

To view these videos, an internet
YouTube, but will play within the
connection is required
product handbook window.
Our c apabilities
1.6
1
Spirax Sarco - First for steam solutions 2017 sustainability highlights Manufacturing capability
These videos are linked to

To view these videos, an internet
YouTube, but will play within the
connection is required
product handbook window.
Boiler house 2
Section 2
2.1 Feedtank ancillaries
2
2.2 Steam injectors
2.3 Level controls
2.4 TDS blowdown controls
2.5 Conductivity sensors
2.6 Sample coolers
2.7 Conductivity meters
2.8 Heat recovery systems
2.9 Blowdown vessels
2.10 Vent heads
2.11 Bottom blowdown systems
2.12 Boilerhouse computers

Boiler house
2 Bottom blowdown systems
Boiler house
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.
Feedtank ancillaries
In the interests of development and improvement of the product, we reserve the right to change the specification without notice. © Copyright 2019 2
TI-P401-25
EMM Issue 4
DH Type
Flash Condensing Deaerator Heads
A simple low cost solution for deaerating boiler feedwater at atmospheric pressure
- Mixes hot and cold incoming flows 2.1

- Liberates oxygen and other gases 1
- Stainless steel for long maintenance free life
- Easy to install
Description
Spirax Sarco flash condensing deaerator head is designed to mix incoming
flows of cold make-up, condensate return and flash steam to the boiler
feedtank. This mixing action is achieved by directing the downward flow
through a baffle arrangement within the unit. This liberates dissolved gases
from the cold make-up, which are vented to atmosphere. The cold make-up
inlet is fitted with a spray screen which diffuses the flow, increasing its surface
area to promote thorough mixing with the condensate and flash steam.
A Spirax Sarco flash condensing deaerator head consists of three parts:
- A mixing unit, which is bolted to the top of the tank and is supplied with
connections to customer specification for cold make-up, condensate
return, flash steam from blowdown etc.
- An immersion tube, which distributes the mixed fluids into the tank and
has an integral plate flange which is sandwiched between the tank and
mixing unit flanges.
Immersion tubes are fully described in separate literature.
- Gaskets. Two gaskets are required, one fitted each side on the immersion
tube flange. They are ordered separately.
Available types
The mixing unit is available in five nominal diameters (DN150, DN200, DN250,
DN300 and DN400) flanged to EN 1092 PN16 or BS 7076 Class 150.
Immersion tubes are available in diameters to suit the deaerator heads and
lengths of 950, 1200, 1600 and 2100 mm to suit TM metric feedtanks. Since
each deaerator head is built to suit specific plant requirements we recommend
that your local Spirax Sarco Engineer is contacted for a connection layout
sheet and to discuss your requirements.
Page 1 of 3
Boiler house
2 Feedtank ancillaries
Head comprises
Item Quantity Description Material
1 1 Mixing unit Austenitic stainless steel
2 1 Immersion tube Austenitic stainless steel
3 2 Gasket Silicone rubber
Application
Spirax Sarco flash condensing deaerator heads are ideal for boiler feedtank
applications. They are suitable for both new and retrofit applications. Each
head is fitted with a connection for air vent and recirculating feedwater spray
nozzle. The air vent is for the immediate venting of liberated gases (the
connection should also include a vacuum breaker). For further details on the
RFS recirculating feedwater spray systems see separate literature.
1
2.1
Limiting conditions
2 PN2.5 rating. Suitable for saturated steam 1 bar g, 120 °C.
3
The mixing unit only is hydraulically tested to 2 bar g.
2
Selection table
Total steam Mixing unit Tank depth
generation rate
(kg/h) 1250 1500 2000 2500
Mixing unit/immersion tube selection
MU150 MU150 MU150 MU150

5 000 DN150
IT-950 IT-1200 IT-1600 IT-2100
MU200 MU200 MU200 MU200

10 000 DN200
IT-950 IT-1200 IT-1600 IT-2100
MU250 MU250 MU250 MU250

20 000 DN250
IT-950 IT-1200 IT-1600 IT-2100
MU300 MU300 MU300 MU300

30 000 DN300
IT-950 IT-1200 IT-1600 IT-2100
MU400 MU400 MU400 MU400

50 000 DN400
IT-950 IT-1200 IT-1600 IT-2100
Page 2 of 3 TI-P401-25
EMM Issue 4
DH Type Flash Condensing Deaerator Heads
Boiler house
Feedtank ancillaries 2
Dimensions/weights (approximate) in mm and kg
Mixing unit
Type A B Weight
MU150_ 175 484 30
MU200_ 200 522 50
MU250_ 220 557 65
MU300_ 250 617 90
MU400_ 290 680 125
For details of immersion tube and gaskets see separate literature.
65 mm
Connection for recirculating feedwater spray nozzle

2.1
Connection for air vent/vacuum breaker
3
100 mm
20 mm
B
Centre line of connections
for cold make-up,
condensate return,
blowdown flash steam, etc.
Flange for mounting on feedtank
How to specify
Atmosperic deaerator head in austentic stainless steel consisting of mixing unit, immersion tube, and two gaskets. DN150, DN200,
DN250, DN300 and DN400. Flanged EN1092-1 PN16/BS 7076 Class 300.
How to order
To specify a 150 mm flash condensing deaerator head flanged EN1092-1 PN16 (mixing unit plus immersion tube and gaskets to suit a
1250 mm deep feedtank):
- MU150 - PN16
- IT150 - 950 PN16
- 2 off gaskets to suit IT150 - 1200 PN16
- Connection details also need to be specified
TI-P401-25 Page 3 of 3
EMM Issue 4
DH Type Flash Condensing Deaerator Heads
Boiler house
2.1
4
Boiler house
TI-P401-08
EMM Issue 4
RFS1 and RFS2

Recirculating Feedwater Spray Systems
• Increases flash steam condensing capability
• Improves thermal efficiency of the feedtank 2.1

• Improves deaeration within the feedtank 5
• Energy saving three speed pump
4
Description
The Spirax Sarco RFS1 and RFS2 recirculating feedwater spray
systems are designed to provide additional flash steam
condensing capacity on boiler feedtank applications. When the
condensate return flowrate is high and the cold make-up flowrate
is intermittent it is likely that valuable flash steam will be lost
through the vent. To ensure that this flash steam is condensed it
is often worthwhile to take feedwater from a relatively cool part
of the feedtank and pump it to a spray nozzle. Approximately 20%
of the feedtank content can be circulated per hour to provide this
additional flash condensing capacity. By using a low energy pump
the thermal efficiency of the feedtank can be improved.
Application
The RFS1 and RFS2 systems are specifically designed for use
with Spirax Sarco flash condensing deaerator heads. The mixing
unit of each head is fitted with a connection for the spray nozzle.
System components
System Isolating Y-Type Spray
Pump
type valve strainer nozzle
RP1
1" BSP
M10 Fig 12 1" BSP
RFS1 male
1" BSP 1" BSP 240 V
taper
50 Hz
1
1" BSP
RP2
M10 Fig 12 male 2
RFS2 1¼" BSP
1¼" BSP 1¼" BSP taper
240 V
50 Hz
3
1
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Isolating valve Carbon steel with stainless steel internals
2 Y-type strainer SG iron with stainless steel screen
3 Electric pump Cast iron with stainless steel internals
4 Spray nozzle Stainless steel
Page 1 of 3
Boiler house
Limiting conditions
The system is designed for pumping water up to 100 °C from an atmospherically vented tank. Maximum ambient temperature 80 °C.
Selection
A system is selected based on circulating approximately 20% of the feedtank contents.
Gross feedtank contents Recirculating feedwater spray systems
litre (kg)
Designation Speed setting
£ 3 000 RFS1 1
3 000 to 6 000 RFS1 2
6 000 to 8 000 RFS1 3
8 000 to 10 000 RFS2 2
10 000 to 30 000 RFS2 3

2.1
6 How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco RFS1 recirculating feedwater spray system.

Spray nozzle
M10
140
For details of the M10 isolating valve refer to separate literature.
Fig 12
For details of Fig 12 Y-type strainer refer to separate literature.
28
Spray nozzle
A specially designed stainless steel nozzle for distributing the
recirculated feedwater within the flash condensing deaerator
head. Screwed 1" BSP taper male. Kv = 6.65.
RP type pump RP1 type pump 133

Three speed induction rotor.
BSP union suction and discharge connections. 75 55
Single phase 240 V, 50 Hz.
System pump Connection Input power Weight
type watts kg
RP1 1" BSP Union 40 to 100 2.5

130
186
RP2 1¼" BSP Union 85 to 100 2.5
32
RP2 type pump 130
82 52
180
271
EMM Issue 4
RFS1 and RFS2 Recirculating Feedwater Spray Systems
Boiler house
Installation
For new applications
For new applications a specific connection should be incorporated into the feedtank design. This connection should be the same nominal
size as the pump and should be positioned as near as possible to the bottom of the tank. The suction side isolating valve, strainer and
pump should be positioned as near to the tank as possible whilst allowing access for operating the ball valve and removing the strainer
screen. The discharge side pipework should be as short in length as possible. On RFS2 systems the discharge pipework should be
reduced to 1" at the spray nozzle.
The pump must be wired in accordance with The Electricity at Work Regulations, that is, using a direct on-line (DOL) starter fitted with
a thermal overload plus local isolator.
For retrofit applications

Where no suitable spare connection is available it is recommended that the drain connection be utilised by fitting a 'T' piece as follows.
It should be noted that the tank does not need to be drained to fit these pieces.
Existing drain valve
2.1
New drain valve
7
To recirculating pump suction
Caution
For all applications the pump shaft must be horizontal, or slightly higher at the vent plug end to prevent premature wearing of the top
bearing and shaft.
Operation
The pump should run continuously when the boiler(s) is on load. Water should flow through the pump at all times while the pump is
running.
Maintenance
At convenient regular intervals it is recommended that the strainer screen is inspected and any debris removed.
EMM Issue 4
RFS1 and RFS2 Recirculating Feedwater Spray Systems
Boiler house
2.1
8
Boiler house
TI-P401-07
EMM Issue 7
IT
Immersion Tubes
Description
Spirax Sarco immersion tubes may be:
- Connected directly to the pipeline, to distribute condensate into feedtanks.
- Used with a mixing unit to form a flash condensing de-aerator head (not applicable to the IT100 unit).
2.1
Note: A flash condensing de-aerator head can be used to mix flash steam (from a TDS control system), cold make-up water, and
9
condensate, and sparge it into a feedtank. It is described in separate literature.
Immersion tubes offer a much neater solution than traditional sparge pipes, and can reduce many of the problems associated with
them, for example vibration, rusting, and waterhammer.
Immersion tubes are suitable for both new and retrofit applications where the feedtank is adequately constructed and braced.
Available types
Available as types IT100_, IT150_, IT200_, IT250_, IT300_, and IT400_ with an integral inside
bolt circle sandwich flange to suit ANSI 150 or EN 1092 PN16. They are available in lengths to
suit TM metric feedtanks. Other lengths can be made to special order.
Immersion tubes are designated by IT followed by DN followed by length of immersion tube in
mm. e.g. IT250-1600 is DN250 and is 1 600 mm long from the underside of the flange. It is
suitable for a 2 000 mm deep tank.
Capacity - when used without a Mixing Unit (MU)

* Gravity condensate Pumped * For other quantities of
(with 5% Flash) condensate flash steam the capacity
may be determined pro
IT type DN kg/h kg/h rata i.e. for 10% flash
c apacit y is half that
IT100_ 100 1 015 2 500
shown.
IT150_ 150 2 285 5 000
IT200_ 200 4 065 10 000
IT250_ 250 6 350 20 000
IT300_ 300 9 145 30 000
IT400_ 400 16 255 50 000
As a general rule the size of an immersion tube should be at least one DN larger than the
condensate return main.
Important note:
The above table is only valid for condensate, where the flash steam content has to be considered.
When sizing an immersion tube for use with a de-aerator head, use the guidelines in the flash
condensing de-aerator head TI. The DH/IT has a higher overall capacity as it is able to condense
the flash steam content of the fluid before it enters the tank. We do not make a mixing unit to suit
the IT100.
Limiting conditions
PN2.5 rating. Suitable for condensate at up to 1 bar g, 120 °C.
EMM Issue 7
IT Immersion Tubes
Boiler house
Materials Installation
We recommend the immersion tube is positioned in the middle
No. Part Material of the top of the tank.
The immersion tube can be fitted to a boiler feedtank by the
1 Immersion tube Austenitic stainless steel
following methods:
2 Gaskets Silicone rubber (colour may vary)
1. Using an existing flange.
The immersion tube is designed so that it can pass through
an apper ture with dimensions according to BS 1600
Schedule 40. The sandwich flange of the immersion tube is
2 equal to the raised face diameter of the flange for which it
is suitable. Gaskets are to be placed above and below the
sandwich flange.
1
2. On new installations a specific connection should be
incorporated, as described in separate literature.
2
It is essential that a vacuum breaker is fitted to the condensate
return main near to the immersion tube. Consider the use of
2.1 a Spirax Sarco VB14 vacuum breaker.
10
How to order example:
1. Immersion tube IT150-950 in austentic stainless steel to suit
DN150, PN16 flanges complete with:
2. Silicone rubber gaskets to suit DN150, PN16.
EMM Issue 7
IT Immersion Tubes
Boiler house
A lter natively, f it a
vacuum breaker here,
as near to the elbow
as possible.
Ideally fit a vacuum breaker here
Use a blind flange of same DN as tank connection and

drill a hole to suit DN of condensate return main.
2.1
Gasket 3 mm 11
ØB
Immersion tube 6 to 10 mm
Gasket (to be installed prior to passing the immersion tube through the nozzle)

Model A B B C Weight Pipe to BS 1600
PN16 ANSI 150 Schedule 5, 10 or 40
Top of Tank
IT100 - 950 100 162 157 950 7
IT100 - 1200 100 162 157 1 200 9

C
IT100 - 1600 100 162 157 1 600 11
IT150 - 950 150 212 216 950 10
IT150 - 1200 168 212 216 1 200 12
IT150 - 1600 150 212 216 1 600 16
IT200 - 950 200 268 270 950 13
IT200 - 1200 200 268 270 1 200 16
IT200 - 1600 200 268 270 1 600 21 Each immersion

tube has a number
IT200 - 2100 200 268 270 2 100 28 of holes in a
particular pattern
IT250 - 1200 250 320 324 1 200 20
to suit the stated
IT250 - 1600 250 320 324 1 600 27 capacity.
ØA
IT250 - 2100 250 320 324 2 100 35
IT300 - 1200 300 378 381 1 200 24
IT300 - 1600 300 378 381 1 600 32
IT300 - 2100 300 378 381 2 100 42
IT400 - 1200 375 490 470 1 200 29
IT400 - 1600 375 490 470 1 600 39
IT400 - 2100 375 490 470 2 100 51
EMM Issue 7
IT Immersion Tubes
Boiler house
2.1
12
Boiler house
TI-P409-04
EMM Issue 4
WG2
Water Level Gauge
• Simple gauge glass for low pressure duties
• Recommended for boiler feedtank applications 2.1

• Available in lengths up to 2 200 mm 13
• Supplied in modular form for maximum versatility
Description
The Spirax Sarco WG2 level gauge enables an instant visual check to be made of liquid
level in tanks and process vessels.
It consists of a glass tube (plastic also available) mounted in top and bottom support arms,
with packing seals and washers to prevent leakage and accommodate expansion. The
bottom arm incorporates a three port plug cock to allow isolation and checking of gauge
operation.
An intermediate arm provides additional support and sealing for gauges with centres
longer than 1100 mm, and enables two unequal length tubes to be used together to give
a wide choice of overall lengths.
Two protector rods mounted either side of the tube reduce the risk of accidental damage.
For greater protection 'C' section protectors are also available (used with rods).
Limiting conditions
Glass Plastic tube
Maximum working pressure (Pmax) 6.9 bar g 2.0 bar g
Maximum working temperature (Tmax) 152 °C 134 °C
Maximum saturated steam conditions 4.1 bar g 2.0 bar g
Cold hydraulic test pressure 13.8 bar g 3.0 bar g
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
Available lengths (approximate) in millimetres
WG 2 level gauge glasses are designated Glass 1 Glass 2 Intermediate Gauge
Designation
WG2 followed by/(centres dimension). length length arm centres
Protector rods (in sets of two) and 'C'
section protectors are available in 700, 800, 686 - No 700 WG2/700
1000 and 1100 mm lengths. Two sets are
786 - No 800 WG2/800
required for gauges with intermediate arms.
The glasses themselves are available in 986 - No 1000 WG2/1000
four lengths which may be paired in the
following combinations to give the gauge 1086 - No 1100 WG2/1100
centre dimensions opposite.
686 686 Yes 1400 WG2/1400
686 786 Yes 1500 WG2/1500
786 786 Yes 1600 WG2/1600

Plastic tubes (complete with 2 off tube 686 986 Yes 1700 WG2/1700
supports) are supplied in 1100 mm nominal
lengths which can be cut to length with a 786 986 Yes 1800 WG2/1800
2.1 knife.
786 1086 Yes 1900 WG2/1900
14 986 986 Yes 2000 WG2/2000
986 1086 Yes 2100 WG2/2100
1086 1086 Yes 2200 WG2/2200
Materials 5
9
No. Description Material
1 Arm body Gunmetal BS 1400 LG2 1

2 Protector rods Brass BS 2874 CZ121
8
3 Glass tube Glass Borosilicate
4 Gland nut Brass BS 2874 CZ121
5 Top plug Brass BS 2874 CZ121
6 Gauge cock Gunmetal BS 1400 LG 2

7
7 Packing sleeve Rubber Nitrile
10
8 Packing washer Permanite AF 2000 2
9 Top plug gasket Red fibre BS 216 Grade B 4
10 'C' section protector Stainless steel Type 304/304L

1
11 Plastic tube FEP
12 Tube supports Brass BS 2874 CZ132

(used with item 11) (Dezincification resistant)
4
Note: 11 and 12 not illustrated for clarity
3
7
10
1 6
EMM Issue 4
WG2 Water Level Gauge
Boiler house
Installation
WARNING
Your attention is drawn to Safety information leaflet IM-GCM-10. Tanks or vessels must be drained, vented to atmosphere,
and inlets isolated before work is commenced.
In particular, make sure that any connections which could carry hot fluids, for example condensate return or flash steam
from blowdown, are isolated.
Top, intermediate, and bottom arms have a ½" BSP taper male thread (R½) for connection to the tank.
- The tank should have ½"BSP Pl (Rp ½) screwed sockets to take the top and bottom arms, and intermediate arm if fitted.
Notes:-For certain lengths, the intermediate arm is not equidistant between the top and bottoms arms. The socket for the
intermediate arm does not need to pierce the tank.
- Fit arms to tank using PTFE tape or a suitable jointing compound.
- Align arms vertically.
- Slacken all gland nuts and remove the 3/8" BSP top arm plug and gasket.
- Trim plastic tube to the required length (686, 786, 986, or 1086 mm). Each end of the tube requires an internal brass support,
(supplied with the tube).
- Sligthly flatten the ends of the tube with thumb and forefinger before fitting the supports, to stop them moving during positioning.
2.1
- Pass glass/plastic tube through 3/8" BSP thread in top arm and lower into position. When an intermediate arm is fitted, the ends of
the two glasses/tubes should touch and the joint should sit between the intermediate arm glands. 15
- Gently tighten gland nuts and refit top arm plug and gasket.
- Fit the 'C' section protector (if used) to the front of the unit, then rotate it so that its hooked edges line up with the protection rod
drillings.
- Fit the protector rod(s) through the drillings in the top and intermediate arms and locate in the blind drillings in the bottom arm.
- Use the cutouts in the side of the protector to ensure the rods are correctly positioned.
- The drain connection must not be plugged. It can either be left open to a tundish, or may be piped to drain.
Operation
The plug cock has three positions:-
Up Purge water connection.
Horizontal Normal operation.
Down Drain glass. This position also isolates the water connection in case of a broken glass.
Drain glass
Purge water Normal
An indication of the plug position is marked on the lever. We recommend that the water connection is purged and the glass drained
periodically. It is important to check that water flows to drain and that the level is rapidly re-established in the glass. A slowly rising
level could indicate a partial blockage.
Maintenance
No specific maintenance is required. We recommend that the arms are checked for leakage periodically and the packing sleeves and
washers renewed if necessary. Always fit new packing sleeves and washers if the tube has to be replaced.
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
Dimensions/weights (approximate) in mm and kg Available spares
Glass 686 mm
Weight Glass 786 mm
Glass 986 mm
Top arm 0.65
Glass 1086 mm
Intermediate arm 0.62 Plastic tube (1100 mm) with 2 internal supports
Spare packing seal set consisting of:-
Bottom arm 0.69 4 off Packing sleeves
8 off Washers (1 fitted each side of the sleeve)
Glass 100 mm length 0.145 2 off Top plug gaskets
The set is suitable for two re-packings of a gauge with
Protector rod 100 mm length 0.015
no intermediate arm or one re-packing of a gauge with
'C' section protector 100 mm length 0.12 an intermediate arm.
Order:- 1 spares pack for Water Level Gauge WG 2.
Plastic tube (1100 mm) 0.4
How to specify
Non-ferrous water level gauge with 3 port plug cock
Top plug
and protector rods (and 'C' section protector), glass
2.1 Gasket tubes/plastic tubes.
16 Top arm How to order

85 Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco WG 2/1000 water level
gauge with 'C' section protector and rods.
Washer
Seal
Washer
Glass
Ø12.7
82 Intermediate arm
Gland nut
Protector rod Ø4.8
'C' section
protector
Bottom arm
70
½" BSP Tr (R½)
¼" BSP Pl (Rp¼)

52.5
4090050/4
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
TI-P409-03
EMM Issue 5
Dial Thermometers
Dial thermometer -
2.1
Aluminium body
(supplied with pocket) 17
Description
Spirax Sarco dial thermometers are reliable and robust instruments which operate
on the bimetallic coil principle.
Dial thermometer -
Austenitic stainless steel body
Applications
Spirax Sarco dial thermometers are ideal for boiler feedtanks, condensate pumping
and many other industrial processes. Where a pocket is installed it is possible to
remove the thermometer without draining the vessel contents.
Available types
Austenitic stainless steel body, horizontal mounting, with a glass window.
Optional pocket, with a 150 mm extension to facilitate lagging of the tank/vessel.
Aluminium body, vertical mounting, with a glass window. Supplied complete

with brass slip-on pocket.
Optional version with acrylic window and stainless steel pocket.
Optional extra
Surface finish 0.4 µm
Process condition 1½" sanitary clamp

Sanitary pocket
Horizontal stainless steel temperature dial 274 mm
Insertion length
Vertical aluminium temperature dial 174 mm
Note: Surface finish certification is available if stated at the time of order placement.
Page 1 of 3
Boiler house
Limiting conditions
Pressure maximum 25 bar g
Stainless body protection rating IP54 With or without pocket
Temperature maximum 120 °C
Pressure maximum 6 bar g

Aluminium body Maximum pressure rating of pocket
Temperature maximum 20/160 °C
Range
Stainless body 0-120 °C
Aluminium body 0-120 °C and 0-160 °C
Accuracy
2.1 Stainless body Complies with DIN 16203 Class 1
18 Aluminium body
Complies with DIN 16203 Class 2
Zero adjustment at pointer.
Materials
Body Stainless steel
Bezel Stainless steel
Window Glass
Stem Stainless steel
Standard pocket Stainless steel
Optional sanitary pocket Stainless steel
Body Aluminium
Bezel Stainless steel
Window Glass (acrylic optional)
Stem Brass
Standard pocket Brass (stainless optional)
Optional sanitary pocket Stainless steel
Safety information, installation and maintenance

For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the product.
Installation note:
Screw the pocket into a ½" BSP connection on the vessel, using PTFE tape as a thread sealant. The austenitic stainless steel dial
thermometer can be screwed directly into the vessel if required.
Position the thermometer so that it will measure a representative temperature in the vessel. Vertical mounting thermometers have a minimum
insertion depth - see dimension 'H'. Heat conducting paste is not normally necessary, but may be used if desired.
EMM Issue 5
Dial Thermometers
Boiler house
Dimensions/weight (approximate) in mm and kg
Weight
A B C D E F G H I
Austenitic stainless steel body Thermometer Pocket
100 274 35 8 13 150 18 113 28 0.25 1.0
H Weight
A B C D E F G
min including pocket
Aluminium body
100 48 16 174 35 160 13 65 0.4
Thermometer (Austenitic stainless steel body) Thermometer (Aluminium body) with pocket
½" BSP Tr
A B
(R½)
D
2.1
A 19
B C
C
E
½" BSP Tr
(G½A)
Optional pocket (Stainless steel) D

F
E ½" BSP Tr (R½) I
H min
G
H F
G ½" BSP Pl
(G½)
How to specify
1 - Horizontal mounting dial thermometer with stainless steel wetted/exposed parts, IP54 rating.
1 - Pocket with ½" BSPT thread (R½)
1 - Vertical mounting dial thermometer with slip-on pocket 0-120 °C range.

1 - Spirax Sarco dial thermometer, having an austenitic stainless steel body for horizontal mounting, 0-120 °C.
1 - Pocket with 150 mm extension for the above.
1 - Spirax Sarco dial thermometer having an aluminium body and c/w brass pocket. 0-120 °C range.
EMM Issue 5
Dial Thermometers
Boiler house
2.1
20
Boiler house
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Steam injectors 2
In the interests of development and improvement of the product, we reserve the right to change the specification without notice. © Copyright 2012
TI-P401-05
AB Issue 11
IN15, IN25M and IN40M

Steam Injectors
Description Available types
Spirax Sarco steam injectors use steam to raise the temperature The IN15 is supplied with a ½" female and 1" male thread, available
of water or other liquids. They work by using a jet of steam to draw in BSPT or NPT.
in the liquid through radial ports, mix it, and distribute the heated Options for the larger injectors are shown below:
liquid throughout the tank or vessel. The circulation induced by the
injector ensures thorough mixing and avoids temperature IN25M IN40M 2.2
stratification. Three sizes of injector are available to suit a wide BSPT male 1" 1½"
range of flowrates.
The smallest, the IN15, has a male and female thread for direct NPT male 1" 1½" 1
mounting to a tank wall from the outside, or to pipework within the Butt-weld 1" Schedule 80 1½" Schedule 80
tank.
The IN25M and IN40M are available with either male thread or
butt-weld connection and are fitted to pipework in the tank, or to a
tank wall connection. IN40M
For higher capacities, two or more injectors may be mounted in (available screwed
parallel. or butt-weld)
Principal features:
- All stainless steel.
- Ideal for boiler feedtank heating and de-aeration.
- For efficient steam heating of water and other fluids.
- Heats, mixes and circulates - no moving parts.
- Compact design - minimises noise and vibration.
Pressure /temperature limits
Body design rating PN25
Minimum operating pressure 0.5 bar g
Maximum saturated steam condition 17 bar g @ 207°C
Maximum heated liquid temperature
(tank /vessel vented to atmosphere) 90°C
Materials
Austenitic stainless steel ASTM A351 CF3M.
Dimensions /weights (approximate) in mm and kg

Type A B C Weight
IN15 ½" 205 28 0.4 IN25M
(available screwed
IN25M 1" 84 71 0.8 or butt-weld)
IN40M 1½" 115 88 1.6
1" BSP taper or NPT male
IN15 A C
BSP taper or B
NPT female
IN15
IN25
IN40M A C
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco IN25M steam injector having a 1" BSPT
screwed connection.
Boiler house
2 Steam injectors
Safety information, installation and maintenance Capacity - selecting a steam injector

This document does not contain sufficient information to install the The choice of steam injector depends on the flowrate of steam
product safely. See the Installation and Maintenance Instructions required to heat the liquid. The table below shows steam injector
supplied with the product. capacities in kg /h of injected steam when heating tanks are vented
to atmosphere, and are up to 3 metres deep. The choice of control
Important: valve can affect the steam capacity.
Your attention is drawn to Safety Information Leaflet IM-GCM-10.
For higher capacities use two or more injectors in parallel.
Installation note:
The injectors are installed at a low level in a tank, ideally along the Injector type IN15 IN25M IN40M
centre line, and discharging horizontally along the length. Pipework
may be routed inside or outside the tank. In all cases, steam supply System pressure Saturated steam
pipework must be firmly anchored to prevent vibration and stress bar g capacity kg /h
in the tank wall. We recommend the use of a suitable thread locking
compound on all threaded connections. 0.5 11 75 222
Use the same size pipe as the injector, i.e. 25 mm pipe for IN25M. 1 20 135 400
Pipe sizes for multiple injector installations are as follows:- 2 48 175 580
No. of Type Minimum 3 66 280 805
injectors pipe size
4 84 350 970
2 IN15 20 mm
5 102 410 1 125
2.2 2
3
IN40M
IN40M
65 mm
80 mm 6 120 500 1295
2
7 138 580 1445
Allow a minimum of 150 mm between the injector(s) and the sides
and bottom of the tank, and as much as possible between the injector 8 156 640 1620
outlet and the end of the tank. See the IMI for the minimum limits. 9 174 700 1820
Space multiple injectors equally across the tank width.
10 192 765 1950
System examples 11 210 830 2250
The tables below give steam capacities for some typical injector /
valve/controller combinations for tanks vented to atmospheric 12 228 900 2370
pressure. Intermediate values may be obtained by linear interpolation. 13 246 975 2595
For alternatives or special applications refer to specific Spirax Sarco
literature or contact our sales engineers. 14 264 1045 2710
The tables below are examples only, and the valve /controller 15 282 1095 2815
combinations shown may not be available in all markets.
Note: Steam pressure at the injector will be much reduced and 16 300 1170 3065
proper injection and mixing may not occur if a smaller valve (or 17 318 1 225 3200
larger injector) is fitted.
Self-acting control system examples

Injector type IN15 IN25M IN40M
Number off 1 2 1 1 2 3
Valve type /size BX6 DN15 SB DN15 SB DN20 KB51 DN25 KC51 DN40 KC51 DN50
Valve Kv 1.65 2.58 3.81 9.8 16.48 34.0
Controller Self-acting control with 2 m capillary Self-acting control with 2 m capillary
type Range 1. -20°C to 110°C Range 2. 40°C to 105°C
Steam supply System saturated steam capacity
pressure bar g kg /h
2 47 82 110 350 580 1 150
4 78 140 200 550 1 000 1750
6 109 195 280 750 1 400 2525
8 142 236 360 1 000 1 750 3200
10 171 310 450 1 200 2 075 3800
12 201 365 - - 2 500 4500
13 218 393 - - 2 675 5000
Electric or pneumatic control system examples

Injector type IN15 IN25 IN40M
Number off 1 2 1 1 2 3
Valve type / KE71/KE73 KE71/KE73 KE71/KE73 KE71/KE73 KE71/KE73 KE71/KE73
size DN15 DN15 DN15 DN25 DN32 DN50
Valve Kv 1.6 4 4 10 16 36
Steam supply System saturated steam capacity
pressure bar g kg /h
2 47 96 110 350 580 1 150
4 78 168 200 550 1 100 1750
6 109 240 280 750 1 400 2525
8 142 312 360 1 000 1750 *
10 171 384 450 1 200 2075 *
12 201 456 650 1 650 * *
13 218 492 750 1 750 * *
The information given in the tables is empirical and must not be used for critical applications. Use PN5123 or EL5601 actuator,
EP5 positioner (PN), SX65 controller (available with mA output for PN actuator, or VMD output for EL actuator), EL2270 sensor or pocket, and
MP2 regulator.
* Consult your local Spirax Sarco sales engineer for information.
TI-P401-05 AB Issue 11 IN15, IN25M and IN40M Steam Injectors

Boiler house
Steam injectors
TI-P401-04
EMM Issue 4
INS6 and INS10

Direct Steam Injection Heating Systems
A complete system for boiler feedtank,
hot water storage and other industrial process heating requirements.
Principal features: • Stainless steel injector for long life 2.2

• Simple installation 3
• Self-acting system requiring no external power supply
• Efficient and economic heating
• Single seated valve giving tight shut-off
General description
Spirax Sarco INS direct steam injection heating systems are designed to inject steam into tanks of water or process liquor to ensure
quiet and efficient heating of the tank contents. The injector draws in cold liquid, mixes it with steam within the injector nozzle and
distributes the hot liquid throughout the tank. In many applications the circulation induced by the injector is an advantage ensuring
thorough mixing and avoiding temperature stratification.
Available system types

INS6 and INS10, screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT. The injectors are for horizontal installation. The selection of a system depends
on the flowrate of steam required to heat the tank contents and the steam supply pressure to the correct valve.
Boiler feedtank applications

Oxygen must be removed from boiler water if corrosion is to be prevented. Oxygen can be removed in two ways, either by the use of
oxygen scavenging chemicals or by thermal deaeration.
The dissolved oxygen content of water:
- At 20 °C is 9 ppm By heating the boiler feedwater typically to 85 - 90 °C to remove most of the oxygen, and using
oxygen scavenging chemicals, the use of chemicals can be reduced by up to 75%. Additionally,
- At 60 °C is 5 ppm
boiler efficiency may be increased since blowdown requirements may be lowered. The fitting of
- At 90 °C is just under 2 ppm. a dial thermometer on the tank is recommended and is available from Spirax Sarco.
Stop valve 5
Y-type
strainer 1
System components Dial

thermometer
No. Part Material
1 Control valve Bronze/gunmetal 3

2 Controller and sensor Brass 2
3 Sensor pocket Stainless steel
4
4 Injector Stainless steel
5 Vacuum breaker Brass

Boiler house
2 Steam injectors
Capacities
System capacities in kg/h of injected steam when heating tanks vented to atmospheric pressure.
System type INS6 INS10
Control valve size ½" BSP with 6 mm orifice ½" BSP
Steam supply pressure

Capacities in kg/h of saturated steam
bar g psi g
2 29 47 82
3 44 63 110
4 58 78 140
5 73 94 168
6 87 109 195
2.2 7 102 125 223
4
8 116 142 236
9 131 155 282
10 145 171 310
11 160 186 338
12 174 201 365
13 189 218 393
Where steam supply pressures are higher consider the use of a pressure reducing valve or alternatively, the use of a combined pressure
reducing and temperature control valve. Please consult Spirax Sarco for a suitable type.
Equipment details
Note: All equipment is available screwed BSP or NPT.
System type Control valve* Controller type Range Sensor pocket Steam injector Vacuum breaker
1 x IN15
INS6 BX6
SA128 with 2 m Range 1 Stainless steel - 1" ½" female x 1" male
½" VB14 - ½"
capillary -20 to 110 °C to suit SA128 2 x IN15
INS10 SB
½" female x 1" male
* BX6 and SB control valves are bronze, single seat, normally open, direct acting.
A Y-type stainer is recommended upstream of the control valve. The Y-type strainer should normally be the same size as the steam
supply pipeline. Consider a Spirax Sarco brass/bronze Fig 12 strainer.
An isolating valve is recommended upstream of the Y-type strainer.

Consider the use of an M10 Spirax Sarco carbon steel ball valve or a HV3 bronze stop valve.

This document does not contain sufficient information to install the system safely. See the relevant Installation and Maintenance
Instructions supplied with system components.
Safety note: Your attention is drawn to Safety Information Leaflet IM-GCM-10.
Installation note: Spirax Sarco direct steam injection heating systems are designed to operate with the minimum of noise provided
the installation is correct.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco INS6, ½" screwed BSP, direct steam injection heating system.
TI-P401-04
EMM Issue 4
INS6 and INS10 Direct Steam Injection Heating System
Boiler house
TI-P401-03
AB Issue 5
INS
Direct Steam Injection Heating Systems
A complete system for boiler feedtank, hot water storage
and other industrial process heating requirements.
5
1 2.2
5
Stop valve
Y-type strainer
Dial
thermometer
Principal features: 2
• Stainless steel injector for long life 4
• No moving parts - maintenance free

• Self-acting system requiring no external power supply
• Efficient and economic heating
General description System components

Spirax Sarco INS direct steam injection heating systems are
No. Part Material
designed to inject steam into tanks of water or process liquor to
ensure quiet and efficient heating of the tank contents. The injector 1 Control valve Bronze/ gunmetal
draws in cold liquid, mixes it with the steam within the injector nozzle 2 Controller and sensor Brass
and distributes the hot liquid throughout the tank. In many
applications the circulation induced by the injector is an advantage 3 Sensor pocket Stainless steel
ensuring thorough mixing and avoiding temperature stratification. 4 Horizontal injector Stainless steel
Available system types 5 Vacuum breaker Brass
INS15, INS20, INS25, INS40, INS50, INS65 and INS80, screwed
BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT.
The injectors are for horizontal installation.
The selection of a system depends on the flowrate of steam required
to heat the tank contents and the steam supply pressure to the
control valve.
Boiler feedtank applications
Oxygen must be removed from boiler water if corrosion is to be
prevented. Oxygen can be removed in two ways, either by the use
of oxygen scavenging chemicals or by thermal de-aeration.
The dissolved oxygen content of water:
- At 20°C is 9 ppm
- At 60°C is 5 ppm
- At 90°C is just under 2 ppm.
By heating the boiler feedwater typically to 85 - 90°C to remove most
of the oxygen, and using oxygen scavenging chemicals in the
feedline after the tank, the use of chemicals can be reduced by up
to 75%. Additionally, boiler efficiency may be increased since
blowdown requirements may be lowered. The fitting of a dial
thermometer on the tank is recommended and is available from
Spirax Sarco.
Boiler house
2 Steam injectors
Capacities
System capacities in kg/ h of injected steam when heating tanks vented to atmospheric pressure.
System type INS15 INS20 INS25 INS40 INS50 INS65 INS80

Control valve Size ½" BSP ¾" BSP 1" BSP 1½" BSP 2" BSP 2½" BSP 3" BSP
Steam supply pressure
Capacities in kg /h of saturated steam
bar g psi g
2 29 87 110 350 580 1 150 2 500 3 700
3 44 120 160 425 750 1 400 3 350 4 900
4 58 150 200 550 1 000 1 750 4 200 6 000
5 73 180 240 650 1 150 2 100 5 000 7 200
6 87 215 280 750 1 400 2 525 5 800 8 400
6.9 100 237 316 840 1 535 2 800 6 500 9 450
7 102 240 320 850 1 550 2 950 6 600 9 550
2.2 8 116 275 360 1 000 1 750 3 200 7 400 10 700
8.2 118 278 370 1 020 1 780 3 280 7 550 10 950
6 9 131 290 410 1 100 1 900 3 600 8 200 11 850
10 145 315 450 1 200 2 075 3 800 9 000 13 000
10.3 150 325 460 1 230 2 135 3 920 - -
11 160 350 - - 2 275 4 200 - -
12 174 375 - - 2 500 4 500 - -
13 189 400 - - 2 675 5 000 - -
Where steam supply pressures are higher consider the use of a pressure reducing valve or alternatively, the use of a combined pressure
reducing and temperature control valve. Please consult Spirax Sarco for a suitable type.
Equipment details
Note: All equipment is available screwed BSP. For options of NPT or API connections refer to relevant literature.
System type Control valve* Controller type Range Sensor pocket Steam injector Vacuum breaker
Range 1 Stainless steel - 1"
INS15 SB ½" SA128 with 2 m capillary 1 x IN25M - 1" VB14 - ½"
-20 to 110°C to suit SA128
INS20 SB ¾" SA128 with 2 m capillary 1 x IN25M - 1" VB14 - ½"
INS25 KB51 1" SA128 with 2 m capillary 1 x IN40M - 1½" VB14 - ½"
INS40 KC51 1½" SA121 with 2 m capillary 2 x IN40M - 1½" VB14 - ½"
40 to 105°C to suit SA121
INS50 KC51 2" SA121 with 2 m capillary 3 x IN40M - 1½" VB14 - ½"
INS65 NS 2½" SA121 with 2 m capillary 5 x IN40M - 1½" VB14 - ½"
INS80 NS 3" SA121 with 2 m capillary 7 x IN40M - 1½" VB14 - ½"
* SB control valve is bronze, single seat, normally open, direct acting.

KB51 and KC51 control valves are bronze, single seat, normally open, bellows balanced, direct acting.
NS control valve is gunmetal, double seat, normally open, stainless steel trim, direct acting.
A Y-type strainer is recommended upstream of the control valve. The Y-type strainer should normally be the same size as the steam
supply pipeline. Consider a Spirax Sarco brass / bronze Fig 12 strainer.
An isolating valve is recommended upstream of the Y-type strainer.
Consider the use of an M10 Spirax Sarco carbon steel ball valve or a HV3 bronze stop valve.

This document does not contain sufficient information to install the system safely. See the relevant Installation and Maintenance Instructions
supplied with the system components.
Safety note:
Your attention is drawn to Safety Information Leaflet IM-GCM-10.
Installation note:
Spirax Sarco direct steam injection heating systems are designed to operate with the minimum of noise provided the installation is correct.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco INS15, ½" screwed BSP, direct steam injection heating system.
TI-P401-03 AB Issue 5 INS Direct Steam Injection Heating Systems

Boiler house
TI-P401-06
AB Issue 5
SD
Steam Distributor
Description Available types
Spirax Sarco steam distributors distribute low pressure flash steam SD40S, SD50S and SD80S screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT.
into atmospheric water tanks. They ensure rapid condensation of the SD80, SD100 and SD150 flanged to suit EN 1092 PN16 or
steam and efficient heating of the water. The hole configuration ASME Class 150.
provides a self-regulating control feature ensuring that holes
progressively come into use as the steam flowrate increases. An
2.2
7
internal stainless steel mesh ensures quiet operation.
Principal features:
- Simple installation - no special supports required. Screwed SD
- Compact, lightweight and strong. type steam
- Stainless steel for long life. distributor
- Eliminates waterhammer. shown.
Note:
- Quiet operation. flanged
Application - Boiler blowdown heat recovery connections
Steam distributors are ideal for supplementing the heating of boiler are
feedwater tanks using flash steam. When used in conjunction with available.
a flash vessel, as part of a boiler blowdown heat recovery system,
flash steam recovery is simple, of low capital cost and is maintenance
free. Additionally, the flash steam is condensed to pure water reducing
the amount of make-up water and chemical treatment required.
Generally for sizing purposes use a differential pressure of 0.4 bar.
Steam distributors are not recommended for condensate recovery
or live steam injection duties, as they may be damaged by Limiting conditions
Not suitable for live steam applications.
waterhammer.
Maximum saturated steam conditions 1 bar g @ 130°C
Recommended maximum flash vessel operating pressure is 0.4 bar.
Materials
Austenitic stainless steel 304. Capacities
Each distributor has a number of holes. The flow of steam through
Dimensions (approximate) in millimetres the holes depends on the differential pressure available. The table
Steam distributor Connection D L below shows capacities in kg / h of distributed steam when heating
tanks which are vented to atmospheric pressure.
Screwed
SD40S 1½" BSP or NPT Female 100 70 Steam supply Steam distributor
pressure bar g SD40S SD50S SD80S & 80 SD100 SD150
Screwed
SD50S 2" BSP or NPT Female 150 85 0.2 99 176 396 643 935
0.4 135 240 540 877 1275
Screwed
SD80S 3" BSP or NPT Female 215 110 0.6 171 304 684 1111 1615
0.8 198 352 792 1287 1870
Flanged
SD80 DN80 PN16 or Class 150 215 180 Intermediate values may be obtained by linear interpolation.
For higher capacities use 2 or more distributors in parallel.
Flanged
SD100 DN100 PN16 or Class 150 235 210
Safety and installation information
Flanged Steam distributors operate at temperatures which could cause
SD150 DN150 PN16 or Class 150 305 220 severe scalding, and produce strong currents of very hot
steam / water. Do not touch or lean over open tanks which are being
heated, even if the water still appears to be cold. Ensure closed
tanks are adequately vented and that the vent is unobstructed.
Steam supply pipework must be firmly anchored to prevent vibration
and stress in the tank wall. Tanks must be adequately constructed
and braced / stayed as necessary to avoid vibration. Consult your
local Spirax Sarco engineer if in any doubt.
Installation note:
Fit the end of a vertical downpipe in the tank so that the bottom of
the distributor is at about 1/3 off the working depth of tank. The piping
L between the steam source and distributor should be the same
nominal size as the connection on the distributor. It is recommended
that the piping is less than 10 m in length in order to minimise the
pressure drop.
Disposal:
This product is recyclable. No ecological hazard is anticipated
with the disposal of this product, providing due care is taken.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco 1½" SD40S steam distributor having
D a screwed BSP connection.
Boiler house
2 Steam injectors
2.2
8
Boiler house
Level controls
AI-P693-37
EMM Issue 1
Tank Level Control (On /Off)

Description
Warning: This document does not contain sufficient information to install the system safely. See the Installation and
Maintenance Instructions supplied with the products for full details.
The Spirax Sarco (on/off) tank level control system is suitable for most qualities of industrial waters down to a nominal 1μS/cm or
1 ppm at 25 °C minimum. The controllers must be mounted in an enclosure or panel to provide environmental protection. They
are DIN rail mounting.
2.3
1
Applications
On/off tank level control can be achieved using the Spirax
Sarco LCS1350 controller in conjunction with LP11-4
level probes. The LCS1350 controller is able to provide
LCS1350 controller the following functions:-
a) Pump-in control with low or high alarm or
b) Pump-out control with low or high alarm or
c) High or low alarm plus extra low alarm.
Typical arrangements
We recommend the probe is in a protection tube. The
metal tank generally forms the earth return. However,
where the tank is of a non-conductive material one of the
probe electrodes should be used to provide the earth
LP11-4 probe
return.
Pump
Pump High level alarm
t t
contactor
Pump off
Pump on
t t
Low level alarm
LCS1350 controller
Fig .1 Pump fill with low level alarm
LP11-4 probe
Solenoid
valve High level alarm
t t
Valve closed
Valve open
t t
Low level alarm
Fig. 2 Valve control fill with low level alarm

Boiler house
2 Level controls
Fig. 3 Tank alarms on glass lined vessel
LCS1350 controller
Pump contactor LP11-4 probe
2.3 High level
t
2
Alarm
Low level
t
Earth return
t
Glass lining
Fig. 4 Pump fill with high level alarm (with polypropylene tank)
LCS1350 controller
Pump contactor LP11-4 probe
Pump High level

t
Pump off
t
Pump on
t
Earth return
t
Flow to process
AI-P693-37
EMM Issue 1
Tank Level Control (On/Off or Modulating)
Boiler house
Level controls
AI-P693-31
EMM Issue 1
Tank Level Control

(On/Off or Modulating)
using Capacitance Probes
Description
The system comprises a Spirax Sarco LP21 level probe and PA420 preamplifier together with either an LCR2250 or LCR2251
controller, associated valves and fittings, depending on the application. Separate literature is available which explains the individual
equipment in detail.
2.3
Typical arrangements
Applications The system provides the following options:- 3
Spirax Sarco capacitance probe based systems
Modulating fill control with high alarm
can be used to monitor and control the level of a
wide range of conductive liquids. Using the Modulating fill control with low alarm
The controllers may be used in a variety of LCR2250
configurations for many different filling or emptying controller Modulating empty control with high alarm
applications.
For modulating level c ontrol, Spirax Sarc o Modulating empty control with low alarm
supply a control valve with an electric actuator,
the controller uses the valve travel time to On/off fill control with high alarm
determine its position Using the On/off fill control with low alarm
The controllers must be mounted in an enclosure LCR2251
or panel to provide environmental protection. They controller On/off empty control with high alarm (with pump contactor)
are DIN rail mounting.
If the tank or vessel contents are turbulent the On/off empty control with low alarm (with pump contactor)
probe should be mounted in a protection tube.
Examples of the many level control duties possible
LCR2250 LCR2251
Control valve controller controller
LP21 probe/ LP21 probe/

PA420 preamplifier PA420 preamplifier
Make-up water High level alarm
Valve modulates to Pump on

maintain water level
Pump
within this band
contactor
Pump off
Low level alarm
Condensate return
to boiler house
Pump
Fig. 1 Boiler feedtank make-up with modulating control Fig. 2 Condensate return tank on/off emptying control
and low level alarm with high level alarm
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Examples of the many level control duties possible (continued)
Control valve
LCR2250
LP21 probe/ controller
PA420 preamplifier
Make-up water
High level alarm
2.3
4
Fig. 3 Valve modulates to
Process water tank with modulating fill control, maintain water level
and high level alarm within this band
Flow to process
LCR2250
LP21 probe/ controller
PA420 preamplifier
Fig. 4
Drainage control of a large process
pressure vessel; modulating control
with high level alarm
Control valve
High level alarm
Valve modulates to
maintain water level
within this band
To drain
AI-P693-31
EMM Issue 1
Tank Level Control (On/Off or Modulating) using Capacitance Probes
Boiler house
Level controls
AI-P693-30
EMM Issue 1
LCSR1000
Level Control Systems - Chamber Mounted
Installation and testing of on/off boiler water level controls in external chambers
Typical installation 2.3

Warning: This document does not contain sufficient information
5
to install the system safely. See the Installation and Maintenance
Instructions supplied with the products for full details.
LCSR1000 boiler level control systems are suitable for automatically

controlled steam boilers and provide the control and alarm functions
specified by HSE/CEA/SAFed Guidance BG01 arrangement 1.
The LCSR1000 systems require daily manual testing as specified in BG01
and a competent boiler operator should be on site at all times the boiler
is in operation.
The level controls and level alarms are probably the most important
controls on the boiler for ensuring safety and should only be installed and
maintained by suitably trained personnel. Spirax Sarco can install, LCS1350 LCS1350
commission and provide a regular maintenance service.
LP11-4 LP11-4
probe probe
Boiler
Chamber
Not used Not used

High alarm
Pump off
Pump on
1st low
2nd low
Sequencing purge valves
To drain tundish or
blowdown vessel
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Daily test (or once per shift)
1. With the burner firing, operate the sequencing purge valve on the 1st low alarm chamber to purge through the water connection to the
chamber and to empty the chamber to drain. Check that the burner shuts down and that the 1st low alarm lamp and bell operates.
2. Return the sequencing purge valve to 'normal'. The alarm should cancel and the burner refire.
3. With the burner firing repeat the test on the 2nd low alarm chamber. The alarm should 'lockout' and should require manual resetting
before the burner will refire.
4. On completion of the test, check that all valves and controls are in their normal operating position and that the water level is correct
in the level gauge glass. The boiler should not be left until the person carrying out the test is satisfied it is operating normally.
Weekly test
The weekly test should be carried out or witnessed by a responsible person who appreciates the hazards involved and has been suitably
trained in the safe operation of the boiler and its controls. At no time during the test should the water be lowered to the extent that it
disappears from the gauge glass.
2.3 1. With the feedpump switched off, allow the water level to fall by evaporation until the burner shuts down at 1st low alarm.
6 2. Blow down the boiler until the 2nd low alarm sounds and the burner controls go to lockout.
3. Raise the water level to normal, reset the lockout, then continue to raise the water level to the high alarm level. Check that the high
alarm sounds.
4. Return all valves and controls to normal and monitor the boiler until satisfied that it is operating normally.
Quarterly inspection
The Health and Safety Executive recommend from experience that the boiler controls should be serviced at least at quarterly intervals.
Where the regular tests are carried out properly in a well run boiler house with good water treatment, it may be that only an annual
inspection of the probes etc. is required. This is a matter, however, for the user to decide in liaison with his insurance company inspector
in order to determine a sensible inspection programme to suit the individual boiler plant. We recommend a regular inspection as follows:
1. Inspect the probe plugs for moisture.
2. Unscrew the probes and wipe away any dirt from the probe tips. If any hard scale is present it may be an indication of more serious
scale formation elsewhere in the boiler. Investigate water treatment.
3. Remove the covers from the sequencing purge valves and inspect the water connections to the boiler. Clean as necessary.
4. Inspect the wiring and controllers for damage.
5. Reassemble, refill the boiler and carry out a full functional check.
AI-P693-30
EMM Issue 1
LCSR1000 Level Control Systems - Chamber Mounted
Boiler house
Level controls
AI-P693-35
EMM Issue 1
LCSR1100
Level Control Systems
Installation and testing of on /off boiler water level controls direct mounted in the boiler
Typical installation
2.3
Maintenance Instructions supplied with the individual products for full details.
The Spirax Sarco LCSR1100 boiler water level control systems are suitable for automatically controlled steam boilers and provide the 7
control and alarm functions specified by HSE/CEA/ SAFed Guidance BG01 arrangement 1.
The LCSR1100 series systems require daily manual testing as specified in BG01 and a competent boiler operator should be on site at
all times the boiler is in operation.
The level controls and level alarms are probably the most important controls on the boiler for ensuring safety and should only be installed
and maintained by suitably trained personnel. Spirax Sarco can install, commission and provide a regular maintenance service.
Minimum conductivity Nominal 1 µS/cm @ 25°C minimum
Daily test
The test should be carried out or witnessed by a responsible
person who appreciates the hazards involved and has been
suitably trained in the safe operation of the boiler and its controls.
At no time during the test should the water be lowered to the
extent that it disappears from the gauge glass.
1. With the feedpump switched off, allow the water level to fall
by evaporation until the burner shuts down at 1st low alarm.
2. Blow down the boiler until the 2nd low alarm sounds and the
burner controls go to lockout.
3. Raise the water level to normal, reset the lockout and allow
the burner to refire. LCS1350 LCS1350
4. Under hand control raise the water level to the high alarm controller controller
level. Check that the high alarm sounds.
5. Return all valves and controls to normal and monitor the boiler LP11-4 LP11-4
until satisfied that it is operating normally. probe probe
The Health and Safety Executive recommend from experience
that the boiler controls should be serviced at least at quarterly
intervals. Where the regular tests are carried out properly in a Boiler
well run boiler house with good water treatment, it may be that
only an annual inspection of the probes etc. is required. This is
a matter, however, for the user to decide in liaison with his
insurance company inspector in order to determine a sensible
inspection programme to suit the individual boiler plant. Not
Not Protection tubes used
We recommend a regular inspection as follows: used
2. Unscrew the probes and wipe away any dirt from the probe High alarm
tips. If any hard scale is present it may be an indication of
more serious scale formation elsewhere in the boiler. Pump off
Investigate water treatment.
3. Inspect the wiring and controllers for damage. Pump on
4. Reassemble and carry out a full functional check.
1st Low
2nd Low
Boiler house
2 Level controls
AI-P693-33
EMM Issue 1
LCSR2000
Level Control Systems - Chamber Mounted
Installation and testing of modulating boiler water level controls in external chambers
2.3 Typical installation

Warning: This document does not contain sufficient information to install
LCR2250
controller
8 the system safely. See the Installation and Maintenance Instructions

supplied with the individual products for full details.
The Spirax Sarco LCSR2000 boiler water level control systems are suitable for
automatically controlled steam boilers and provide the control and alarm functions
specified by HSE/CEA/SAFed Guidance BG01 arrangement 1.
The LCSR2000 series systems require daily manual testing as specified in BG01 Feedwater
and a competent boiler operator should be on site at all times the boiler is in control valve
operation.
The level controls and level alarms are probably the most important controls on
the boiler for ensuring safety and should only be installed and maintained by suitably
trained personnel. Spirax Sarco can install, commission and provide a regular
maintenance service.
5 µS/cm or 5 ppm but conductivity must not vary by
LP21 and
Minimum more than 2:1 (consult Spirax Sarco if conductivity
LCR2250
conductivity variation is greater).
LP21 probe /
LCS1350 Nominal 1 µS/cm @ 25°C minimum. PA420 preamplifier
LCS1350 controller
LP11-4
probe Adaptor
1" to ½" BSP
Boiler
Chamber
Not used
High alarm
Modulating
control band
1st Low
2nd Low
Sequencing purge valves
To drain tundish or blowdown vessel

Boiler house
Level controls 2
Daily test (or once per shift)
1. With the burner firing, operate the sequencing purge valve on the 1st low alarm chamber to purge through the water connection
to the chamber and to empty the chamber to drain. Check that burner shuts down and that the 1st low alarm lamp and bell
operates.
2. Return the sequencing purge valve to normal. The alarm should cancel and the burner refire.
3. With the burner firing repeat the test on the 2nd low alarm chamber. The alarm should 'lockout' and should require manual resetting
before the burner will refire.
4. On completion of the test check that all valves and controls are in their normal operating position and that the water level is correct
in the level gauge glasses. The boiler should not be left until the person carrying out the test is satisfied it is operating normally.
Weekly test
The weekly test should be carried out or witnessed by a responsible person who appreciates the hazards involved and has been suitably
trained in the safe operation of the boiler and its controls. At no time during the test should the water be lowered to the extent that it
disappears from the gauge glass.
1. With the feedwater isolated, allow the water level to fall by evaporation until the burner shuts down at the 1st low alarm.
2.3
2. Blowdown the boiler until the 2nd low alarm sounds and the burner controls go to lockout. 9
3. Raise the water level to normal, reset the lockout, then continue to raise the water level to the high alarm level. Check that the high
alarm sounds.
The Health and Safety Executive recommend that boiler controls should be serviced at least at quarterly intervals. Where the regular
tests are carried out properly in a well run boiler house with good water treatment, it may be that only an annual inspection of the probes
etc. is required. This is a matter, however, for the user to decide in liaison with their insurance company inspector in order to determine
a sensible inspection programme to suit the individual boiler plant. We recommend a regular inspection as follows:

3. Remove the covers from the sequencing purge valves and inspect the water connections to the boiler. Clean as necessary.
5. Remove the actuator cover from the feedwater control valve, inspect actuator linkages etc. For tightness and correct operation, and
inspect the wiring. Test the feedwater control valve for correct operation over its full stroke, for gland leakage and for tight shut-off.
AI-P693-33
EMM Issue 1
LCSR2000 Level Control Systems - Chamber Mounted
Boiler house
2 Level controls
2.3
10
Boiler house
Level controls
AI-P693-29
EMM Issue 1
LCSR3000
Installation and testing of self-monitoring low level alarms on/off level controls
Typical installation 2.3

11
The Spirax Sarco LCSR3000 boiler water level control systems are suitable for automatically controlled steam boilers and provide the
control and alarm functions specified by Standard BS EN12953 and in the BG01 which is a joint document by the CEA and SAFed,
originally produced in consultation with the HSE.
The LCSR3000 low level alarms are of the high integrity type and whilst a competent boiler operator should check the boiler plant daily,
he need not be on site at all times. There should, however, always be someone available on site who is suitably trained to respond to
alarms and take appropriate action.
Minimum LCS3050 30 µS/cm or 30 ppm

conductivity LCS1350 Nominal 1 µS/cm @ 25 °C minimum LCS3050 LCS1350
controller controller
Weekly test
High integrity self-monitoring level controls do not require daily testing
but the weekly test should be carried out or witnessed by a responsible
person who appreciates the hazards involved and has been suitably
trained in the safe operation of the boiler and its controls.
At no time during the test should the water be lowered to the extent that
LP40 LP40 LP10-4
it disappears from the gauge glass.
probe probe probe
1. With the feedpump switched off, or the control valve forced closed,
allow the water level to fall by evaporation until the burner and the
panel lockout at the low alarms.
2. Raise the water level to normal, reset the lockout and allow Boiler
the burner to refire.
3. To independantly test inputs of a 2 probe system external test buttons
have to be installed that create low level alarms on each probe input.
For each probe input press the test button and ensure the burner
shuts down, afterwards reset the lockout and allow burner to refire.
4. Include in monthly test - Under hand control raise the water level to
the high alarm level. Check that the high alarm sounds. High alarm
5. Return all valves and controls to normal and monitor the boiler until Pump off
satisfied that it is operating normally. Not
used Pump on
The Health and Safety Executive recommend from experience that the
boiler controls should be serviced at least at quarterly intervals. Where Protection tubes
the regular tests are carried out properly in a well run boiler house with
good water treatment, it may be that only an annual inspection of the
probes etc. is required.
This is a matter, however, for the user to decide in liaison with his insurance company inspector in order to determine a sensible
inspection programme to suit the individual boiler plant. We recommend a regular inspection as follows:
Boiler house
2 Level controls
AI-P693-34
EMM Issue 1
LCSR4000
This document does not contain sufficient information to LCS3050
install the system safely. See the Installation and controller
Maintenance Instructions supplied with the products for
2.3 full details.
The Spirax Sarco LCSR4000 boiler water level control and alarm
12 system is suitable for automatically controlled steam boilers and
provides the control and alarm functions specified by Standard
BS EN12953 and in the BG01 which is a joint document by the
CEA and SAFed, originally produced in consultation with the
HSE. The low level alarms are of the high integrity type and
whilst a competent boiler operator should check the plant daily,
LP21 probe /
he need not be on site at all times. There should, however, always
PA420 preamplifier
be someone available on site who is suitably trained to respond
to alarms and take appropriate action.
The level controls and level alarms are probably the most LP40 LP40
important controls on the boiler for ensuring safety and should probe probe
only be installed and maintained by suitable trained personnel.
Spirax Sarco can install, commission and provide a regular
maintenance service.
LCS3050 30 µS / cm or 30 ppm
Minimum LCR2652/ 5 µS / cm or 5 ppm Boiler

conductivity BHD50 Note: Consult Spirax Sarco if
and conductivity is less than 100 µS / cm
LCR2250 and is likely to vary by more than 2:1
High alarm
Weekly test Modulating

High integrity self-monitoring level alarms do not require daily control
testing but the weekly test should be carried out or witnessed by band
a responsible person who appreciates the hazards involved and
has been suitably trained in the safe operation of the boiler and
its controls. At no time during the test should the water be lowered
to the extent that it disappears from the gauge glass.
Protection tubes
1. With the feedpump switched off, or the control valve forced
closed, allow the water level to fall by evaporation until the LCR2652 /
burner and the panel lockout at the low alarms. BHD50 LCR2250 LCR2251
2. Raise the water level to normal, reset the lockout and allow controller controller controller
the burner to refire.
3. To independantly test inputs of a 2 probe system external
test buttons have to be installed that create low level alarms or
on each probe input. For each probe input press the test
button and ensure the burner shuts down, afterwards reset
the lockout and allow burner to refire.
4. Include in monthly test - Under hand control raise the water
level to the high alarm level. Check that the high alarm sounds.
5. Return all valves and controls to normal and monitor the
Feedwater control valve
boiler until satisfied that it is operating normally.
Boiler house
Level controls 2
The Health and Safety Executive recommend that boiler controls should be serviced at least at quarterly intervals. Where the regular
tests are carried out properly in a well run boiler house with good water treatment, it may be that only an annual inspection of the probes
etc. is required. This is a matter, however, for the user to decide in liaison with their insurance company inspector in order to determine
a sensible inspection programme to suit the individual boiler plant. We recommend a regular inspection as follows:
3. Remove the actuator cover from the feedwater control valve and inspect the actuator linkages etc. for tightness and correct operation,
and inspect wiring. Test the feedwater control valve for correct operation over its full stroke, for gland leakage and for tight shut-off.
2.3
13
AI-P693-34
EMM Issue 1
LCS4000 Level Control Systems
Boiler house
2 Level controls
AI-P693-32
EMM Issue 1
LCSR5000
Installation and testing of self-monitoring low level alarms on/off boiler water level controls
2.3 Typical installation

The Spirax Sarco LCSR5000 series boiler water level control systems are suitable for automatically controlled steam boilers and provide
14 the control and alarm functions specified by Standard BS EN12953 and in the BG01 which is a joint document by the CEA and SAFed,
originally produced in consultation with the HSE.
The LCSR5000 series low level alarms are of the high integrity type and whilst a competent boiler operator should check the boiler
plant daily, he need not be on site at all times. There should, however, always be someone available on site who is suitably trained to
respond to alarms and take appropriate action.
For details of installation, wiring and maintenance see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions of the individual components of
the system.
LCS3050 LCR2251 LCR2652 BHD

controller controller controller controller
or
LP21 probe/PA420 preamplifier
LP40 LP40
probe probe
Boiler
High alarm
Pump off
Pump on
Protection tubes
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Weekly test
High integrity self-monitoring level controls do not require daily testing but the weekly test should be carried out or witnessed by a
responsible person who appreciates the hazards involved and has been suitably trained in the safe operation of the boiler and its
controls.
At no time during the test should the water be lowered to the extent that it disappears from the gauge glass.
1. With the feedpump switched off, or the control valve forced closed, allow the water level to fall by evaporation until the
burner and the panel lockout at the low alarms.
2. Raise the water level to normal, reset the lockout and allow the burner to refire.
3. To independantly test inputs of a 2 probe system external test buttons have to be installed that create low level alarms on each probe input.
For each probe input press the test button and ensure the burner shuts down, afterwards reset the lockout and allow burner to refire.
4. Include in monthly test - Under hand control raise the water level to the high alarm level. Check that the high alarm sounds.
The Health and Safety Executive recommend from experience that the boiler controls should be serviced at least at quarterly intervals.
2.3
Where the regular tests are carried out properly in a well run boiler house with good water treatment, it may be that only an annual
inspection of the probes etc. is required. 15
This is a matter, however, for the user to decide in liaison with his insurance company inspector in order to determine a sensible inspection
programme to suit the individual boiler plant. We recommend a regular inspection as follows:
AI-P693-32
EMM Issue 1
LCSR5000 Level Control Systems
Boiler house
2 Level controls Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.
TI-P402-29
AB Issue 7
Electrical Enclosures
- General Purpose
- Plastic
Description
Spirax Sarco general purpose plastic electrical enclosures are
supplied with a tinted transparent cover and DIN mounting rail as
standard. They are suitable for housing either one or two Spirax Sarco
2.3 controllers. The enclosure rating is to IP67. The maximum ambient
temperature is 40°C.
16
Installation
The enclosure can be screwed directly to a vertical surface, using
the holes located outside the gasketed area. There are pre-pressed
knockouts in the base for Pg 13.5 to Pg 16 or Pg 21 cable glands.
Materials
Grey glass-filled polycarbonate base with tinted transparent
polycarbonate cover.
How to order example

1 off Spirax Sarco single plastic electrical enclosure.
Dimensions (approximate) in millimetres

A B C D E F G H
Single enclosure 175 125 100 50 167 117 157 107
Double enclosure 255 180 100 50 245 170 237 163
136.8 mm F
39 mm
Ø4.5 mm
3.2 mm
E G A
41 mm
Ø23 mm Pg 13.5 - Pg 16
Ø29 mm Pg 21
24 mm H
D B
Supplied complete with symmetrical rail to DIN 46277-3
Fastening of enclosure
to wall with screws
D
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-16
EMM Issue 1
LP11-4
Level Probe
Description
The Spirax Sarco LP11-4 level probe is used with the Spirax Sarco
LCS1350 level controller to provide on/off level control and alarm
functions in steam boilers, tanks or other vessels.
The four tip probe is particularly suitable where 3-lamp 'electric gauge 2.3
glass' alarm/level indicators are fitted. The probe body is earthed
through its screwed connection and the boiler or tank normally forms
the earth return path. The probe may also be used in concrete or plastic
17
tanks by using one of the tips as an earth return, or by providing a
separate earth rod or plate. The LP11-4 probe has four detachable level
sensing tips which are cut to length on installation to give the required
switching levels. Note: Tips are ordered separately. When a tip is
immersed in conductive liquid it completes an electrical circuit to earth.
When the level drops below the tip, the resistance to earth becomes
high, indicating to the controller that the tip is out of the liquid.
Caution:
The probe is not suitable for outside installation without
additional environmental protection.
Available tip lengths mm (inches)

Tips are 1000 mm (39.4") long. Two sets of tips may be connected for
a maximum probe length of 2095 mm (82.5")
Pressure/temperature limits
Nominal pressure rating PN40
Standard 32 bar g (464 psi g)

Maximum pressure
UL certified 30 bar g (435 psi g)
Standard 239 °C ( 462 °F )

Maximum temperature
UL certified 235 °C ( 455 °F )
Maximum 70 °C (158 °F )
Ambient temperature
Minimum -20 °C ( -4 °F )
Technical data
Maximum cable length (probe to controller) See controller IMI
Maximum sensing depth 2 095 mm ( 82.5" )
Minimum sensing depth 75 mm ( 3")
Degree of protection IP54
Minimum conductivity (when used with an LCS1350 level controller )

0.5 µS/cm @ 25 °C ( 77 °F ).
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Materials
1 7
2.3 4
18
3 No. Description Material
1 Probe body Austenitic stainless steel BS EN 10088-3 (1.4306)
2 Probe tips Austenitic stainless steel Type 316/316L
3 Tip insulation sleeving PFA (Per Fluor Alkoxy)
4 Lower housing PPS (Polyphenyline sulphide)
5 Upper housing PPS (Polyphenyline sulphide)
6 Gland support pad Thermoplastic elastomer

2
7 Cable gland PA (Polyamide)
8 Tip steady PEEK (Polyaryletherketone) Grade 450G
EMM Issue 1
LP11-4 Level Probe
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Dimensions/weight (approximate) in mm (in) and kg (lb)
A B C D Weight
60 25 75 50 1.15
(2.4) (1.0) (3.0) (2.0) (2.5)
2.3
D
19
B
1" BSP taper (Rp1) connection

C
Available spares
LP11- 4 connector set (electrical) Comprising: 6 flat crimp connectors and 2 ring crimps.
LP11- 4 tip mounting kit Comprising: 1 set of 4 tip connectors, 8 lock-nuts and 2 tip supports.
EMM Issue 1
LP11-4 Level Probe
Boiler house
2 Level controls
This document does not contain sufficient information to install the product safely. See the Installation and Maintenance Instructions
supplied with the unit for full details.
Warning: This product contains materials including plastics which can give off toxic fumes if exposed to excessive heat.
Installation note:
The LP11-4 is designed for installation in a BSP Rp1 (1" BSP tapered) threaded flange or cover.
Note: Always specify these thread for new installations.
A minimum 80 mm (3") nominal bore protection tube is recommended if installing the probe in a boiler, or in a tank which is subject to
very turbulent conditions.
Additional environmental protection is needed for installation outdoors.
Wiring note:
Wiring is straightforward on the LP11-4, as crimp connectors are used. Extra connectors are available as a spares kit. Terminal posts
are colour coded for easy identification.
The wiring loom may be disconnected and removed without disturbing the cable gland by lifting the gland carrier out of the lower housing.
2.3 Maintenance note:

No special maintenance is required, though boiler water level controls do require periodic testing and inspection which is described in
20
separate literature.
How to specify
Conductivity probe with austenitic stainless steel body and probe tips, PFA tip insulation, suitable for steam boiler operation up to
32 bar g @ 239 °C.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco LP11-4 probe (BSP) with 1000 mm tip assembly.
EMM Issue 1
LP11-4 Level Probe
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-15
EMM Issue 1
LP21
Capacitance Level Probe
Description PA420
The Spirax Sarco LP21 is a capacitance probe designed for modulating level control in Preamplifier
conductive liquids, in conjunction with a PA420 preamplifier, which is supplied separately. It connector
can also be used for adjustable on/off control.
The LP21 may be used with one or more controllers or transmitters to provide level control, 5 2.3
level alarms, and/or outputs to a building management system.
The probe is normally installed in a steam boiler or metal tank where it is earthed through
the ½" BSP screwed connection, the boiler or tank forming the earth return path.
21
It may be used in a non-conductive tank (e.g. plastic or concrete) if an earth rod is provided.
The PA420 preamplifier (described in separate literature), is screwed to the top of the probe
and hand tightened, enabling easy removal without the need to disturb the probe. 6
Caution:
The probe is not suitable for outside installation without additional environmental
protection. 2
Available probe lengths (approximate) in mm

370, 470, 550, 600, 650, 750, 800, 900, 950, 1 050, 1 200, 1 350 or 1 500.
Note: Probe length includes the 25 mm 'dead' length at its tip.
The probe must not be cut to length.
1
Maximum pressure 32 bar g
Maximum temperature 239 °C
Maximum 70 °C
Ambient temperature 3
Minimum 5 °C
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of 60 bar g
Technical data
4
Sensing depth Probe length minus 25 mm
Minimum conductivity 5 µS/cm or 5 ppm
Materials
1 Probe body Austenitic stainless steel BS EN 10088-3 (1.4306)
2 Cover assembly Austenitic stainless steel Type 316L
3 Probe (sheathed) Stainless steel tube ASTM A269 Gr. 316L
4 Probe sheathing PTFE BS 6564 Grade UA Type 1
5 'O' ring Nitrile rubber
6 Name-plate Polycarbonate
Page 1 of 3
Boiler house
2 Level controls
L - Probe length 370 470 550 600 650 750 800 900 950 1 050 1 200 1 350 1 500
M22 x 1.5
2.3 162
22
27 A/F
½" BSP taper connection
(L)
Probe length
25 mm 'dead' length
Weights (approximate) in kg
Probe length 370 470 550 600 650 750 800 900 950 1 050 1 200 1 350 1 500
Weight 0.57 0.60 0.62 0.67 0.72 0.74 0.75 0.77 0.80 0.82 0.93 0.96 1.00
EMM Issue 1
LP21 Capacitance Level Probe
Boiler house
Level controls 2
This document does not contain sufficient information to install the system safely. See the Installation and Maintenance
Instructions supplied with the probe for full details.
Installation note:
Do not install the probe outdoors without additional weather protection.
The probe is installed in a ½" BSP female connection. If the probe is to be installed in a boiler shell or a turbulent tank, fit a protection
tube. This should be as long as possible, and at least long enough to cope with expansion of the probe at higher operating temperatures.
The Table below shows the maximum probe expansion possible 0 - 239 °C.
Probe length in mm Maximum expansion in mm (inc. 'dead' length)
470 13
550 15
600 16
650 17
750 20 2.3
800 21
23
900 23
950 25
1 050 27
1 200 30
1 350 34
1 500 38
Do not cover the vent and drain holes on the body.
Maintenance note:
No special maintenance is required. Boiler water level controls and alarms do, however require periodic testing and inspection, which
is described in separate literature.
How to specify
Capacitance level probes shall be Spirax Sarco type LP21 with stainless steel body, cover assembly and probe, and PTFE probe
insulation. They shall be suitable for modulating and on/off level control and be fitted with a screwed connection for attaching a
Spirax Sarco PA420 preamplifier.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco LP21 capacitance level probe with BSP connection. Probe length 470 mm.
EMM Issue 1
LP21 Capacitance Level Probe
Boiler house
2 Level controls
2.3
24
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-17
EMM Issue 1
LP40
High Integrity, Self-monitoring
Low Level Alarm Probe
Description
The Spirax Sarco LP40 level probe is used with a Spirax Sarco LCS3050 level switch to
provide a high integrity, self-monitoring low level alarm signal, usually in a steam boiler. It
consists of a probe body with a removable cable socket, and a separate screw-on probe tip
which is retained by a lock-nut and pin. 2.3
The probe has a level sensing tip (probe tip), and a comparator tip. The earth return path is
via the body connection.
Under normal operating conditions the probe tip is partially immersed, and the resistance to
25
earth is low. When the water level drops below the probe tip the resistance to earth becomes
high, causing the controller to give a low level alarm signal.
The comparator tip compensates for any leakage to earth caused by scale, dirt, or internal
moisture, ensuring a low water alarm signal even under adverse conditions.
Principal features:
- High integrity, self-monitoring low level alarm probe.
- Suitable for pressures up to 32 bar g at 239 °C.
- No maintenance required.
- Positively retained probe tip.
Caution:
protection.

500 (19.7), 1 000 (39.4) and 1 500 (59).
Maximum boiler pressure 32 bar g (464 psi g)
Maximum temperature 239 °C (462 °F)
Maximum ambient temperature 70 °C (158 °F)
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic pressure test of: 60 bar g (870 psi g)
Technical data
Maximum probe cable length See level switch IMI
Minimum conductivity (when used with LCS3050) 10 μS/cm
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Materials
Pg 11 Cable gland
5

3
1 Probe body Austenitic stainless steel BS EN 10088-3(1.4306)
2 Cover assembly Austenitic stainless steel Type 316L
2.3 4
Cable socket and probe
Polyamide, glass filled
connector
26 1
5 Connector gasket Silicone elastomer
6 Comparator tip Austenitic stainless steel Type 316L
Primary insulator and

7 PTFE BS 6564 Grade UA Type 1
6 secondary insulator
10 8 Retaining pin Austenitic stainless steel Type 302 / 304
8 9 Probe tip Austenitic stainless steel Type 316L
10 Lock-nut Austenitic stainless steel BS 6105 A4 80
EMM Issue 1
LP40 High Integrity, Self-monitoring Low Level Alarm Probe
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Dimensions (approximate) in millimetres (inches)
Withdrawal distance for cable socket 15 (0.6)
200 (7.88) 285 (11.22)
2.3
27
27 A/F
½" BSP taper

(R½) connection
55 (2.2)
Probe length minus the

additional tip length
Tip length Weight (approximate) in kg (lb)

500 (19.7), 1000 (39.4)
or 1500 (59) 500 mm 1 000 mm 1 500 mm
Tip length Probe
(19.7") (39.4") (59")
0.25 0.20 0.41 0.62

Weight
(0.55) (0.43) (0.90) (1.36)
Ø10 (0.4)
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
provided with each unit.
Installation note:
The probe is designed to work with a Spirax Sarco LCS3050 controller. Two level probes and a limit switch are normally installed on
each boiler for safety reasons. In many countries a first and second low alarm is used. The LP40 in conjuction with the LCS3050 is
used to provide the second low alarm.
The first low alarm can be provided using the MIN alarm output of the level controller.
A protection tube is required for boiler shell or turbulent tank fitting.
Install the probe in a ½" BSP female connection.
Note: Do not install the probe outdoors without additional weather protection.
Warning: It is essential that the probe tip of the LP40 low level alarm probe does not touch any part of the boiler.
Standards require that the tip is at least 14 mm from the protection tube, and this must be checked when the probe is
installed.
The product is supplied with a spring clearance checking set. Refer to separate literature for details.
Spare sets are available - see below.
2.3 Maintenance note:

28 No special maintenance is required.
Boiler water level controls do, however, require periodic testing and inspection, which is described in separate literature.
How to specify
High integrity self-monitoring low level alarm probes shall be Spirax Sarco type LP40 with austenitic stainless steel bodies and probe
tips, PTFE probe sleeving, and cable socket with Pg 11 cable gland. They must have a comparator tip to compensate for scaling, and
a positively located probe tip. They must be used with an appropriate Spirax Sarco controller.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco LP40 high integrity, self-monitoring, low level alarm probe with 1 000 mm (39.4") tip.
Spare parts
The spare parts available are detailed below. No other parts are supplied as spares.
Available spares
LP40 tip retaining pins Stock No. 4024780 Pack of 10
Spring clearance checking set Stock No. 4024781 1 set (2 springs)
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state which product they are for.
Example: 1 off Spring clearance checking set for a Spirax Sarco LP40 high integrity, self-monitoring low level alarm probe.
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-18
EMM Issue 1
LP41
High Integrity, Self-monitoring
High Water Level Alarm Probe
Description
The Spirax Sarco LP41 is used in conjunction with an LCS3051 level switch to provide a high
integrity, self-monitoring alarm for detection of high water levels in steam boilers and other
vessels.
The probe is normally installed direct in the boiler shell in a protection tube, but can be 2.3
mounted in an external chamber if regulations permit.
The LP41 is supplied in three nominal tip lengths, and is cut to the exact length required prior
to installation.
29
In normal operation, the tip is above the water level, and has a high resistance path to earth.
If the water level rises to touch the probe tip, the resistance to earth drops, causing the alarm
relays in the controller to be de-energised and the alarm to sound.
The LP41 is designed so that its tip and wiring connection integrity is monitored by the
controller, causing an alarm signal in the event of a fault occurring.
The LP41 can also be used as a simple (non self-monitoring) high or low level probe with an
LC1350 level switch.
A DIN 43650 cable socket with Pg 11 cable gland is supplied with the unit.
Caution:
protection.

500 (19.7"), 1 000 (39.4") and 1 500 (59").
Limiting conditions
Maximum temperature 239 °C (462 °F)
Technical data
Maximum probe cable length See level switch/controller IMI
LCS1350 0.5 μS/cm

Minimum conductivity
LCS3051 10 μS/cm
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Materials
Cable socket
1
Pg 11 Cable gland
2
3
4 1 Cable socket Polyamide, glass filled
2 Flat gasket Silicone rubber
3 Probe connector Polyamide, glass filled

5 4 Cover assembly Austenitic stainless steel
2.3 5 Name-plate Polycarbonate
6
30
Body Austenitic stainless steel BS EN 10088-3 (1.4306)
7 Probe tip sleeving PTFE
8 Probe tip Austenitic stainless steel ASTM A276 316L
6 Probe body
Probe tip
EMM Issue 1
LP41 High Integrity, Self-monitoring High Water Level Alarm Probe
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Withdrawal distance for

cable socket 15 (0.6")
39 (1.5")
Weights (approximate) in kg (lb)

Tip length 500 mm 1000 mm 1500 mm
Weight 0.61 (1.34) 0.75 (1.64) 0.88 (1.94)
2.3
183 (7.2")
31
Ø28 (1.1")
27 A/F
½" BSP taper

(R½) connection
Ø6 (0.24")
Tip length
500 (19.7"), 1000 (39.4") or 1500 (59")
Ø5 (0.2")
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
provided with each unit.
Installation note:
The LP41 tip is cut to length and de-burred prior to installation. The LP41 has been designed to work with a Spirax Sarco LCS3051
level switch or LCS1350 level switch.
A protection tube is required for boiler shell or turbulent tank fitting.
Install the probe in a ½" BSP parallel female connection using PTFE tape.
Maintenance note:
No special maintenance is required.
Spare parts
There are no available spare parts for this unit.
2.3
32 How to specify
High integrity high level alarm probes shall be Spirax Sarco self-monitoring type LP41 with an austenitic stainless steel body and probe
tip, PTFE probe sleeving, and DIN 43650 cable socket with Pg 11 cable gland. They shall be cut to length on installation and be used
with an appropriate Spirax Sarco controller.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco LP41 high integrity, self-monitoring, high water level alarm probe with 1 000 mm (39.4") tip.
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-25
EMM Issue 1
LCS1350
Level Switch
Description
The LCS1350 level switch can be used in conjunction with an LP10-4, LP11-4 or LP41 conductive level probe as an interval level control
system in pressurised steam and hot-water plants and in condensate and feedwater tanks. The LCS1350 level switch also indicates
two alarm states, which can be configured as MIN or MAX. 2.3
The LCS1350 level switch measures using the conductivity principle and makes use of the electrical conductivity of the water to do this.
33
The level switch is designed for use with various conductive liquids from salt solutions or boiler water to condensate having an electrical
conductivity as low as 0.5 μS /cm at 25 °C.
The level switch operates as an interval level control system (inlet/discharge configurable by code switch), and also indicates when the
water reaches two independent alarm states, which can be configured as MIN or MAX.
The switchpoints for water level control and for the MIN or MAX levels are determined by the length of the respective probe tips. Up to
four probe tips can be connected.
For water level control, the level switch recognises whether the probe tips are immersed or out of the water and, depending on which
function is set, it switches the switch output contact, which then turns the feedwater pump on or off, for example. The Pump LED lights
up when the level switch has switched the feedwater pump on, for example.
Alarm and fault indications are displayed by LEDs.
Directives and standards

VdTÜV Bulletin BP WASS 0100-RL
The LCS1350 level switch, in combination with the LP10-4/LP11-4/
LP41 level probes, is type approved to the VdTÜV Bulletin "BP
WASS 0100-RL".
The VdTÜV "BP WASS 0100-RL" describes the requirements for
water level control and limiting equipment.
LV (Low Voltage) Directive and EMC (Electromagnetic

Compatibility)
RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances)
The equipment conforms to the requirements of the Low Voltage
Directive 2014/35/EU, the EMC Directive 2014/30/EU and the
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU.
ATEX (Atmosphère Explosible)

The equipment must not be used in potentially explosive
atmospheres, in accordance with European Directive 2014/34/ EU.
Typical applications
- Pressurised Steam Systems
- Hot-water plants
- Condensate and feedwater tanks
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Technical data LCS1350
Supply voltage 24 Vdc +/– 20%
Fuse External 0.5 A (semi-delay)
Power consumption 2W
Connection of level probe 4 x inputs for LP10-4, LP11-4 or LP41 level probe, four-pin, reference and shield
Probe tip voltage 5 Vss
Sensitivity
> 0.5 μS/cm < 1000 μS/cm or
(water conductivity at 25 °C),
> 10 μS/cm < 10,000 μS/cm
switchable
2 floating changeover contacts, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1 (MIN/MAX)
De-energizing delay 3 seconds (MIN/MAX alarm)
Outputs 1 floating open/close contact, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1 (pump)
Inductive loads must have interference suppression (RC combination) as per the manufacturer's specification
Contacts requires an external T2.5A fuse for protection
1 push-buttons for test function
2.3 1 x multicolour “ON” LED (green/red) - for indicating the operating state and internal errors (green = running, red = power up,
malfunction or internal error)
34 Displays and controls 1 x red “Alarm 1” LED for indicating a MIN/MAX alarm
1 x red “Alarm 2” LED for indicating a MIN/MAX alarm
1 x green “Pump” LED for indicating the ON/OFF pump status
1 4-pole code switch for configuration
Housing material, base: black polycarbonate; front: grey polycarbonate
Conductor size: 1 x 4.0 mm 2 solid, per wire, or
1 x 2.5 mm2 per lead with sleeve to DIN 46228, or
Housing
2 x 1.5 mm2 per lead with sleeve to DIN 46228 (min. Ø 0.1 mm)
Terminal strips can be removed separately
Housing attachment: Mounting clip on support rail TH 35, EN 60715
Degree of contamination 2 for installation in control cabinet with degree of protection IP 54, fully insulated
Electrical safety
Overvoltage category III
Housing: IP 40 to EN 60529
Degree of protection
Terminal strip: IP 20 to EN 60529
Weight approx. 0.2 kg
At moment of switch on – 0 ° to 55 °C
Ambient temperature
In operation – 10 to 55 °C
Transport temperature –20 ... +80 °C (<100 hours), only switch on after a defrosting period of 24 hours
Storage temperature –20 ... +70 °C, only switch on after a defrosting period of 24 hours
Relative humidity max. 95%, no moisture condensation
2 3
EMM Issue 1
LCS1350 Level switch
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Dimensions (approximate) in mm
17 18 19 20 21 22
Item
46
1 Upper terminal strip
3 4 2 Lower terminal strip
3 Housing
4 Support rail TH 35,

74 EN 60715
17 18 19 20 21 22
1 Installation in control cabinet
The LCS1350 level switch is clipped
onto a type TH 35, EN60715 support
rail into a control cabinet, item 4.
2.3
120 35
ON 1 2 3 4
2
2 3 4 5 6 7
Code switch
ON 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 6 7
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Wiring diagram
MIN/MAX PUMP MIN/MAX
17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3
2.3
36 2 3 4 5 6 7
10
M 0.5 A (semi- delay)
(-) (+)
4 5 7 9
6 8
Item
1 Alarm 2 (MIN/MAX) output contact, de-energizing delay 3 seconds
2 Output contact (ON/OFF) for pump activation
3 Alarm 1 (MIN/MAX) output contact, de-energizing delay 3 seconds
4 Supply voltage connection 24 Vdc with semi-delay fuse M 0.5 A provided on site
5 Alarm 2 (MIN/MAX) probe tip
6 Pump low probe tip (see nameplate)
7 Functional earth in the LP10-4, LP11-4 or LP41 probe (tank or reference probe tip), with screen connection
8 Pump high probe tip (see nameplate)
9 Alarm 1 (MIN/MAX) probe tip
10 Central earthing point (CEP) in control cabinet
Fig. 4
How to specify
ON-OFF level switch, 2 volt-free change-over contacts for MIN/MAX alarms, 1 volt-free relay contact for pump/valve control, supply
voltage 24V DC 2W.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco LCS1350 level switch.
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-22
EMM Issue 1
LCR2250
Level Controller
Description
The LCR2250 level controller is used in combination with a LP20/LP21/PA420 level transmitter as a limit switch and water level controller,
e.g. in steam and water boiler systems, or in condensate and feedwater tanks. The level controller indicates when a MIN or MAX water
level has been reached, and opens or closes a control valve.
The LCR2250 level controller processes the level-dependent current signal from the LP20/LP21/PA420 level transmitter. This input
2.3
signal is recognised by the controller as 0 and 100 % of the boiler measuring range, and shown as an actual value on the 7-segment
LED display. The controller is suitable for use with liquids having an electrical conductivity of 5 μS / cm or 5 ppm, when used with LP20/
37
LP21 capacitance probe and PA420 level transmitter.
The level controller works with an electrically actuated control valve (VMD - Valve Motor Drive) as a 3-position stepping controller with
proportional-plus-integral control action (PI controller). If the actual value deviates from the setpoint, the electric actuator is triggered
by two output contacts and two flashing LEDs indicate whether the control valve is opening or closing.
The controller can be configured for fill or discharge control.
A further output contact indicates when a MIN or MAX water level is reached (the desired function can be selected by a switch). After
the de-energizing time has elapsed, the output contact switches over and the MIN or MAX LED lights up.
Faults in the level transmitter, the electrical connection or the settings are indicated as error codes on the 7-segment LED display. In
the event of a malfunction, the MIN/MAX alarm is triggered. If faults occur only in the LCR2250 level controller, the MIN/MAX alarm is
triggered and the system is restarted.
Parameters can be changed or the MIN/MAX alarm simulated by operating the push buttons. For external level indication, the LCR2250
level controller has a 4 - 20 mA actual value output.

VdTÜV Bulletin "Wasserstand 100" (Water Level 100)
The LCR2250 level controller, in combination with the LP20/LP21/
PA420 level transmitter, is type approved to the VdTÜV Bulletin "Water
Level 100".
The VdTÜV " Wasserstand (=Water Level) 100" describes the

requirements for water level control and limiting equipment for boilers.
LV (Low Voltage Directive) and EMC (Electromagnetic

Compatibility)
Directive 2014/35/EU and the EMC Directive 2014/30/EU.

The equipment must not be used in potentially explosive atmospheres,
in accordance with European Directive 2014/34/EU.
- Steam and Water Boilers

Page 1 of 3
Boiler house
2 Level controls
46 120
Item
1
4 1 Upper terminal strip
2 Lower terminal strip
3 Housing
4 Support rail TH 35, EN 60715
74 3
Installation in control cabinet

The LCR2250 level controller is clipped
onto a type TH 35, EN 60715 support
rail in a control cabinet, see item 4.
2
2.3
38
Wiring Diagram
MIN/MAX
1 2
5
0.5 A (semi- delay)
6
6
2 1 E
3 4
7
Item
1 Output contact for control valve actuation
2 MIN/MAX output contact, de-energizing delay 3 seconds
3 Supply voltage connection 24 Vdc with semi-delay fuse 0.5 A provided on site
4 Actual value output 4-20 mA
6 Earthing point at auxilliary equipment (e.g.PA420/LP20/LP21).
7 Level transmitter LP20/LP21/PA420 4-20 mA.
EMM Issue 1
LCR2250 Level Controller
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Technical Data
Connection of level
1 analogue input 4-20 mA, e.g. for LP20/LP21/PA420 level transmitter, 2 poles and screen
transmitter
Supply voltage to level
12 Vdc/max. 20 mA
transmitter
2 floating changeover contacts, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1 (control valve open/closed)
1 floating changeover contact, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1
De-energizing delay 3 seconds (MIN/MAX alarm, can be switched)
Outputs:
Inductive loads must have interference suppression (RC combination) as per the manufacturer's
specification
1 analogue output 4-20 mA, max. load 500 ohms, e.g. for an actual value display
3 push-buttons for MIN/MAX alarm test and parameter setting
1 green 4 digit 7-segment LED display 2.3
Displays and controls 2 red LEDs for MIN/MAX alarm
2 amber LEDs for control valve opening/closing
39
1 x 2.5 mm 2 per lead with sleeve to DIN 46228, or
Housing
2 x 1.5 mm 2 per lead with sleeve to DIN 46228 (min. Ø 0.1 mm)
Electrical safety Degree of contamination 2 for installation in control cabinet with degree of protection IP 54, fully insulated
Degree of protection Housing: IP 40 to EN 60529 Terminal strip: IP 20 to EN 60529
At moment of switch-on 0 ° to 55 °C
Ambient temperature
In operation –10 to 55 °C
Transport temperature –20 to +80 °C (<100 hours), only switch on after a defrosting period of 24 hours
Storage temperature –20 to +70 °C, only switch on after a defrosting period of 24 hours
How to specify
3-position stepping PI controller with MIN or MAX alarm, 1 volt-free change-over contact for MIN or MAX alarm, 1 volt-free relay contact
for valve open/stop/closed, supply voltage 24V DC, 4W.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco LCR2250 level controller.
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
2.3
40
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-24
EMM Issue 1
LCR2652 BHD50
Level Controller, Operating and Display Unit
Description
The functional unit consisting of the operating and display unit BHD50 and the LCR2652 level controller in conjunction with level
transmitter LP20/LP21/PA420 is used as water level controller and as a limit switch, for instance in steam boilers, (pressurized) hot-
water installations as well as condensate and feedwater tanks. One BHD50 can be used with a LCR2652 and a BCR3250 controller to
provide a combined level and TDS control system.
2.3
A level limit switch (LCS3050 and/or LCS3051) can be connected to the LCR2652 to signal and log level alarms on the BHD50.
41
The LCR2652 level controller processes the level-dependent current signal from the LP20/LP21/PA420 level transmitter. This input
signal is recognised by the controller as 0 and 100 % of the boiler measuring range.
The operating and display unit BHD50 and the level controller LCR2652 form a functional unit featuring the following properties:
- 3-position stepping controller with proportional-plus-integral

control action (PI controller) and control of an electrically
actuated control valve (VMD - Valve Motor Drive)
- Continuous controller as PI controller for the control of an

electro-pneumatically operated control valve and a relay for
pump ON/OFF control
- Indication of MIN/MAX water level limit
- Fill or discharge control
- Level damping filter
- Current inputs for steam and feedwater flowrate (2 or

3-element control)
- Actual value output 4-20 mA BHD50

- Level limit switch alarm input (24Vdc), to display the status
of any LCS3050 or LCS3051 level limit switch
- Indication of actual value (indicated in percent and as

bar graph)
- Standardized measuring range when the level transmitter

LP20/LP21/PA420 is connected
- Indication/adjustment of control parameters
- Adjustment and evaluation of current inputs for steam and

feedwater flowrate (2 or 3-element control)
- Trend record
- Indication and listing of errors, alarms and warnings
- Test of MIN/MAX output relays Typical applications

- Manual/automatic operation - Steam Boilers
- Modbus RTU (RS232, RS422 or RS485) and Modbus TCP - Hot-Water Installations
(Ethernet 10/100Mb) communication
- - Condensate and Feedwater Tanks

Password protection
Page 1 of 6
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Technical data LCR2652
Fuse external 0.5 A (semi-delay)
Connection of level
1 analogue input 4-20 mA, e. g. for level transmitter LP20/LP21/PA420, with 2 poles and screen
transmitter
Supply voltage of
12 Vdc
level transmitter
1 analogue input 4-20 mA (steam flowrate)

Inputs 1 analogue input 4-20 mA (feedwater flowrate)
1 volt-free digital input (level limit alarm switch), 24 Vdc +/– 20%, 10mA
1 or 2 volt-free change-over contacts, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1 (pump/VMD control)

2 volt-free change-over contacts, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1
2.3 De-energizing delay: 3 seconds (MIN/MAX alarm)
Outputs 1 analogue output 4-20 mA, max. load 500 ohm (manipulated variable Y)
42 1 analogue output 4-20 mA, max. load 500 ohm (actual value indication)
Provide inductive loads with RC combinations according to manufacturer's specification to ensure
interference suppression
Data line 1 interface for data exchange with operating and display unit BHD50
Indicators and 1 tri-colour LED indicator (start-up = amber, power ON = green, malfunction = red)
adjustors 1 code switch with four poles for configuration
Housing material: base: polycarbonate, black; front: polycarbonate, grey

Conductor size: 1 x 4,0 mm² solid per wire or
1 x 2.5 mm² per stranded wire with sleeve to DIN 46228 or
Housing
2 x 1.5 mm² per stranded wire with sleeve to DIN 46228 (min. Ø 0.1 mm) terminal strips can be
detached separately
Fixing of housing: Mounting clip on supporting rail TH 35, EN 60715
Electrical safety Pollution degree 2 for installation in control cabinet with protection IP 54, completely insulated
Protection
Ambient temperature when system is switched on: 0° ... 55 °C, during operation: –10 ... 55 °C
Transport –20 ... +80 °C (<100 hours), defrosting time of the de-energized equipment before it can be put into
temperature operation: 24 hours
Storage temperature –20 ... +70 °C, defrosting time of the de-energized equipment before it can be put into operation: 24 hours
EMM Issue 1
LCR2652 BHD50 Level Controller Operating and Display Unit
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagram (LCR2652) - Valve Motor Drive Controller (VMD)
ALARM
13
MIN CLOSE OPEN MAX
1 1
2.3
2 3 3 4
43
1 1
M 0.5 A
(semi-delay) 11
12 12
12 12
5
2 1 LP20/LP21/PA420
6 7 8 9
10
Fig. 4
Item
1 Fixing screws for terminal strip
2 MIN output contact, de-energizing delay: 3 sec.
3 Output contacts for activating the control valve. External link wire necessary for function
4 MAX output contact, de-energizing delay: 3 sec.
5 Connection of supply voltage 24 Vdc with fuse 0.5 A (semi-delay) provided on site
7 Feedwater flowrate input, 4-20 mA
8 Steam flowrate input, 4-20 mA
9 Data line for operating and display unit BHD50
10 Level transmitter LP20/LP21/PA420, 4-20 mA
12 Earthing point at the auxiliary equipment (e.g. PA420/LP20/LP21)
13 Input for level limit switch (24Vdc), ON = alarm, OFF = normal water level
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Wiring diagram (LCR2652)
For continuous controller (4 - 20 mA) or Pump ON/OFF controller
ALARM
14
MIN PUMP MAX
1 1
2.3
2 3 4
44
1 1
M 0.5 A
(semi-delay) 12
13
13
5
2 1 LP20/LP21/PA420
6 7 8 9 10
11
Fig. 5
Item
2 MIN output contact, de-energizing delay: 3 sec.
3 Pump output contact
4 MAX output contact, de-energizing delay: 3 sec.
7 Output 4-20 mA manipulated variable Y
8 Feedwater flowrate input, 4-20 mA
9 Steam flowrate input, 4-20 mA
11 Level transmitter LP20/LP21/PA420, 4-20 mA.
13 Earthing point at the auxiliary equipment (e.g. PA420/LP20/LP21)
14 Input for level limit switch (24Vdc), ON = alarm, OFF = normal water level
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Technical data BHD50
Fuse internal automatic
Power consumption 14.4 W
User interface 5" colour display with analogue capacitive touch screen, resolution 800 x 480 pixels, illuminated
Communication
RS232, RS422, RS485 and Ethernet 10/100Mb (USB for maintenance only)
interface
Data line For connection to a LCR2652 and BCR3250 (in parallel)
Front panel: 147x107 mm

Dimensions Panel cut-out: 136x96 mm
Depth: 52 + 8 mm
Protection
Front: IP 66 to EN 60529 2.3
45
Rear: IP 20 to EN 60529
1 power connector with 3 poles

1 D-SUB connector with 9 poles
Electrical connection 2 Ethernet (10/100Mb) RJ45 connector
1 USB Port V2.0, max. 500 mA - for maintenance only
1 Serial connector with 8 poles

VdTÜV Bulletin "Wasserstand 100" (Water Level 100)
The functional unit consisting of the operating and display unit BHD50/level controller LCR2652 in conjunction with level transmitter
LP20/LP21/PA420 is type approved to the VdTÜV Bulletin "Water Level 100".
The VdTÜV Bulletin "Wasserstand (Water Level) 100" specifies the requirements made on water level control and limiting equipment
for boilers.
Type approval no. TÜV · WR · XX-XXX (see name plate).
LV (Low Voltage) Directive and EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)

The equipment meets the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU and the EMC Directive 2014/30/EU.

According to the European Directive 2014/34/EU the equipment must not be used in explosion risk areas.
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Dimensions (LCR2652) (approximate) in mm
100 120
Item

1 4
3 Housing
4 Support rail TH 35,

3 EN 60715
74
The blowdown controller

LCR 2652 is clipped onto the
support rail type TH 35, EN 60715
in the control cabinet. Item 4.
2.3 2
46
Dimensions (BHD50) (approximate) in mm
147
107
2 1
52
136
96
Item
3
1 Cut-out in control cabinet 136 x 96 mm
2 Gasket
3 Fixing elements Fixing element detail.
How to specify
Level Controller with Operating and Display Unit, 4 volt-free change-over contacts for MIN/MAX alarm & control valve supply voltage
24V DC 4W.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco LCR2652 Level Controller, 1 off Spirax Sarco BHD50 Operating and Display Unit.
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693- 49
EMM Issue 1
LCS3050
Low Water Level Switch for one probe
Description
The level switch LCS3050 is used in conjunction with level probe LP40 to limit the water level in steam boilers and (pressurised) hot-
water plants. Water level limiters switch off the heating when the water level falls below the set minimum level (low water).
The level switch LCS3050 for one probe is designed for connecting one probe. A version for two probes is available as well. 2.3
When the water level falls below the low level the level probe is exposed and a low level alarm is triggered in the level switch. This
switchpoint is determined by the length of the probe rod (level probe LP40). After the de-energizing delay has elapsed, the two output
47
contacts of the level switch will open the safety circuit for the heating. The switching-off of the heating is interlocked in the external
safety circuit and can only be deactivated when the level probe enters the water again.
In addition, a signal output for external signalling devices closes instantaneously.
An alarm will also be raised if a malfunction occurs in the level probe and/or the electrical connection. An automatic self-testing routine
monitors the safety functions in the level switch and the level probes. In the event of a malfunction the safety circuit opens instantaneously
and switches the heating off.
Alarm and error messages are indicated by LEDs and a signal output is energized without delay.
An alarm can be simulated by pressing a test button.
Directives and Standards

Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 2014/68/EU
Water level limiters are safety accessories as defined in the Pressure
Equipment Directive (PED). The level switch LCS3050 in conjunction with
level probe LP40 are EU type approved according to EN 12952/EN 12953.
These Directives state, among other things, the requirements made on
limiting systems and equipment for steam boiler plants and (pressurised)
hot-water installations.
Functional Safety acc. to IEC 61508

The level switch LCS3050 is certified acc. to IEC 61508 only if used in
combination with level probe LP40. This standard describes the functional
safety of safety-related electrical/electronic/programmable electronic
systems. The equipment combination LP40 + LCS3050 corresponds to
a type B subsystem with Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3.
VdTÜV Bulletin “Wasserstand 100” (Water Level 100)

The level switch LCS3050 in conjunction with the level probe LP40 is type approved according to the VdTÜV Bulletin “Water Level 100”.
The VdTÜV Bulletin “Wasserstand (Water Level) 100” specifies the requirements made on water level control and limiting equipment
for boilers.
LV (Low Voltage) Directive and EMC (ElectromagneticCompatibility)

The level switch LCS3050 meets the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU and the EMC Directive 2014/30/EU.

According to the European Directive 2014/34/EU the level switch LCS3050 must not be used in potentially explosive areas.
Typical Applications
- Steam boilers
- Pressurised hot-water plants
TI-P693- 49 Page 1 of 4
EMM Issue 1
LCS3050 Low Water Level Switch for one probe
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Supply voltage 24 Vdc +/- 20%
Electrical connection of level probe 1 input for level probe LP40, 4 poles, with screen
Response sensitivity
> 10 ... < 10000 μS/cm
(electrical conductivity of water at 25 °C)
2 volt-free make contacts, 6 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1
Delay of response: 3 seconds

Safety circuit
Provide inductive loads with RC combinations according to manufacturer's specification
to ensure interference suppression
2.3 Signal output

1 volt-free output for instantaneous external signalling, 24 Vdc, max. 100 mA
(semiconductor output)
48 1 button for test and diagnosis
Indicators and adjustors 1 red/ 1 green LED for indicating the operating mode and alarm
3 red LEDs for diagnosis
Housing material: base: black polycarbonate; front: grey polycarbonate
Maximum Conductor size
Cross section of connection: 1 x 4.0 mm 2 solid per wire or
1 x 2.5 mm 2 per stranded wire with sleeve to DIN 46228 or

Housing
2 x 1.4 mm 2 per stranded wire with sleeve to DIN 46228
*Please see IM for recommended cable specifications
Terminal strips can be detached
Electrical safety Degree of contamination: 2, overvoltage category III to EN 61010-01
Protection
At moment of switch on: 0 ° to 55 °C

Ambient temperature
In operation: -10° to 55 °C
-20 to +80 °C (<100 hours), defrosting time of the de-energized equipment before it can
Transport temperature
be put into operation: 24 hours
-20 to +70 °C, defrosting time of the de-energized equipment before it can be put into
Storage temperature
operation: 24 hours
Site altitude max. 2000 m
Page 2 of 4 TI-P693- 49
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Wiring diagram
1 2
3 3
(+) (-) - +
4
M 0,5A
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
LCS3050
ONE PROBE
2.3
1 2 3
ON
AL
49
AL
Test
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
6 LP40
3 2 1
Item
1 Supply voltage
2 Signal output for external alarm 24 Vdc, 100 mA (semiconductor output)
3 Safety circuit, input and output
4 Wire link, on site, when used as water level limiter according to EN 12952 / EN 12953
5 CEP Central earthing point in control cabinet
6 Level probe LP40
TI-P693- 49 Page 3 of 4
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
100
4
5
74
1 120
2.3
50
2 3
Item
3 Fixing screws (cross recess head screws M3)
4 Enclosure
5 Supporting rail type TH 35, EN 60715
How to specify
Low Water Level Switch for one probe, 2 volt-free make contacts for safety circuit, 1 signal output for external alarm, supply voltage
24 Vdc, 7 W.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco LCS3050 level switch for one probe.
Page 4 of 4 TI-P693- 49
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-693-26
EMM Issue 1
LCS3050
Low Water Level Switch for two probes
Description
The level switch LCS3050 is used in conjunction with level probe LP40 to limit the water level in steam boilers and (pressurised) hot-
water plants. Water level limiters switch off the heating when the water level falls below the set minimum level (low water).
The level switch LCS3050 is designed for connecting one or two level probes. 2.3
When the water level falls below the low level the level probes are exposed and a low level alarm is triggered in the level switch. This
switchpoint is determined by the length of the probe rod (level probe LP40). After the de-energizing delay has elapsed, the two output
51
contacts of the level switch will open the safety circuit for the heating. The switching-off of the heating is interlocked in the external
safety circuit and can only be deactivated when the level probe enters the water again.
In addition, two signal outputs for external signalling devices close instantaneously.
An alarm will also be raised if a malfunction occurs in the level probe and/or the electrical connection. An automatic self-testing routine
monitors the safety functions in the level switch and the level probes. In the event of a malfunction the safety circuit opens instantaneously
and switches the heating off.
Alarm and error messages are indicated by LEDs and a signal output for each level probe is energized without delay.
Alarms can be simulated by pressing a test button.

Water level limiters are safety accessories as defined in the Pressure Equipment
Directive (PED). The level switch LCS3050 in conjunction with level probe LP40
are EU type approved according to EN 12952/EN 12953. These Directives state,
among other things, the requirements made on limiting systems and equipment
for steam boiler plants and (pressurised) hot-water installations.

The level switch LCS3050 is certified acc. to IEC 61508 only if used in
combination with level probe LP40. This standard describes the functional safety
of safety-related electrical/electronic/programmable electronic systems. The
equipment combination LP40 + LCS3050 corresponds to a type B subsystem
with Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3.

The level switch LCS3050 in conjunction with the level probe LP40 is type approved according to the VdTÜV Bulletin “Water Level 100”.
The VdTÜV Bulletin “Wasserstand (Water Level) 100” specifies the requirements made on water level control and limiting equipment
for boilers.
LV (Low Voltage) Directive and EMC (ElectromagneticCompatibility)


- Steam boilers
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Electrical connection of level probe 2 inputs for level probe LP40, 4 poles, with screen
> 10 ... < 10000 μS/cm

Safety circuit
2.3 Signal output

2 volt-free outputs for instantaneous external signalling, 24 Vdc, max. 100 mA
52 2 buttons for test and diagnosis
2 red/green LEDs for indicating the operating mode and alarm

Indicators and adjustors
2 two-pole code switches for setting the number of probes
Conductor size: 1 x 4.0 mm 2 solid per wire or

Housing
Protection

Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
operation: 24 hours
Page 2 of 4 TI-693-26
EMM Issue 1
LCS3050 Low Water Level Switch for two probes
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Wiring diagram
1 2 2
3 3
(+) (-) - + - +
4
M 0,5A
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
2.3
53
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
5 5
6 LP40 LP40 6
3 2 1 3 2 1
Item
1 Supply voltage
2 Signal output 1/2 for external alarm 24 Vdc, 100 mA (semiconductor output)
4 Wire link, on site, when used as water level limiter according to EN 12952 / EN 12953
6 Level probe LP40
TI-693-26 Page 3 of 4
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
100
6
7
74
1 120
2.3 4 5
54
2 3
The code switches are accessible after removing the lower terminal
strip. The terminal strips can be unplugged after undoing the right
and the left fixing screws.
Item
4 Code switch for switching on/off level probe 1/2
5 Code switch for switching on/off level probe 1/2
6 Enclosure
How to specify
Low Water Level Switch for one or two probes, 2 volt-free make contacts for safety circuit, 2 signal outputs for external alarm, supply
voltage 24 V DC, 7 W.
How to order
Page 4 of 4 TI-693-26
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-38
EMM Issue 1
BCR3150
Blowdown Controller
Description
The BCR3150 blowdown controller in conjuction with conductivity probes CP10, CP30/CP40 and CP32/CP42 is used as blowdown
controller and limit switch, for instance in steam boilers, (pressurised) hotwater installations as well as condensate and feedwater tanks.
A Pt100 temperature sensor may be connected to the controller to provide temperature compensation.
This is recommended if the boiler is working at varying pressures, or for other applications such as condensate monitoring or coil boilers,
2.3
where the temperature may vary.
55
The blowdown controller indicates when the preset MAX TDS/Conductivity is reached and opens or closes a blowdown valve. The
controller can provide a MAX alarm.
The blowdown controller BCR3150 features the following properties:

- TDS/Conductivity control and limit switch using conductivity probes CP10 or CP30/CP40, with or without a separate temperature
sensor Pt 100 (TP20) to provide temperature compensation (0 - 250 °C)
- TDS/Conductivity control and limit switch using conductivity probe CP32/CP42, with an integrated temperature sensor (temperature
compensation)
- Manual electronic probe cleaning, to remove scale from probe tip
- ON/OFF control of blowdown valve, optional with purge time for probe in pipeline installations
- An optional filter to increase damping effects, to avoid overfrequent valve operation
- Conductivity to TDS conversion (unit in μS/cm or ppm)
- Standby/burner input (24 Vdc), to reduce boiler water loss, if the boiler is on standby or low demand
- Actual value output 4-20 mA
- Password protection

VdTÜV Bullet in " Wasser üb er wachung 10 0" ( Water
Monitoring 100)
Blowdown controller BCR3150 and conductivity probes CP10,
CP30/CP40 and CP32/CP42 are type approved according to VdTÜV
Bulletin "Wasserüberwachung (Water Monitoring) 100".
The VdTÜV Bulletin "Water Monitoring 100" states the requirements

made on water monitoring equipment.
Type approval no. TÜV · WÜL · XX-XXX (see name plate).

Compatibility)
- Steam Boilers
- Hot-Water Installtions
Page 1 of 3
Boiler house
2 Level controls
46 120
Item
1
3 Housing
74 3

The BCR3150 blowdown controller is
clipped onto a type TH 35, EN 60715
support rail in a control cabinet, see item
2 4.
2.3
56
Standby/burner
input
(24 Vdc)
Wiring diagram 1
2 3
Control
valve Max
0.5 A (semi- delay)
Conductivity
4 5 6 Probe
7
Item
1 Output contacts for activating the control valve
2 MAX alarm output contact
3 Standby/burner input (24 Vdc), ON = standby/burner on, OFF = normal running/burner off
6 2 wire Pt 100 temperature sensor input
7 Conductivity probe input
EMM Issue 1
BCR3150 Blowdown Controller
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Technical data
1 five-wire connection to CP32/CP42 or three-wire connection to CP30/CP40 and two-wire connection to
the CP10 (Drive+Sense bridged at controller)
Inputs
1 two-wire Pt100 temperature sensor (range 0 - 250°C)
1 two-wire standby or burner connection (24Vdc +/– 20%, 10mA)
1 volt-free change-over contacts, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1 (valve control)
1 floating open/close contact, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1 (MAX alarm)
Outputs: Provide inductive loads with RC combinations according to manufacturer's specification to ensure
1 analogue output 4-20 mA, max. load 500 ohms, e.g. for an actual value display
3 push-buttons for MAX alarm test and parameter setting
1 green 4 digit 7-segment LED display
Displays and controls 1 red LED for MAX alarm 2.3
1 amber LED for control valve open, 1 amber LED for standby/burner input indication
1 4-pole code switch for configuration 57
Maximum Conductor size*: 1 x 4.0 mm 2 solid, per wire, or
1 x 2.5 mm 2 per stranded wire with sleeve to DIN 46228, or
Housing 2 x 1.5 mm 2 per stranded wire with sleeve to DIN 46228 (min. Ø 0.1 mm)
*Please see IMI for recommended cable specifications
Terminal strips can be detached separately
Electrical safety Pollution degree 2 for installation in control cabinet with degree of protection IP 54, fully insulated
Protection
when system is switched on: 0° ... 55 °C
Ambient temperature
during operation: –10 ... 55°C
–20 ... +80 °C (<100 hours), defrosting time of the de-energised equipment before it can be put into
operation: 24 hours
–20 ... +70 °C, defrosting time of the de-energised equipment before it can be put into operation: 24
Storage temperature
hours
How to specify
Blowdown Controller, 2 volt-free contacts for MAX alarm & blowdown valve, supply voltage 24V DC 4W.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco BCR3150 Blowdown controller.
EMM Issue 1
BCR3150 Blowdown Controller
Boiler house
2 Level controls
2.3
58
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-21
EMM Issue 1
BCR3250
BHD50
Blowdown Controller, Operating and Display Unit
Description
The functional unit consisting of the operating and display unit BHD50, blowdown controller BCR3250 and conductivity probes CP10,
CP30/CP40 and CP32/CP42 is used as blowdown controller and limiter. Typical applications include steam boilers, (pressurised) hot-
water installations as well as condensate and feedwater tanks.
A Pt100 temperature sensor may be connected to the controller to display the boiler water temperature and provide temperature
2.3
compensation. This is recommended if the boiler is working at varying pressures, or for other applications such as condensate monitoring
or coil boilers, where the temperature may vary.
59
The blowdown controller indicates when the preset MAX TDS/Conductivity is reached, opens or closes a blowdown valve and may also
control a bottom blowdown valve. The controller can provide either a MIN alarm or a bottom blowdown timer function. One BHD50 can
be used with a LCR2652 and a BCR3250 controller to provide a combined level and TDS control system.
The operating and display unit BHD50 and the blowdown controller BCR3250 form a functional unit featuring the following properties:
- TDS/Conductivity control and limiter using conductivity

probes CP10 or CP30/CP40, with or without a separate
temperature sensor Pt 100 (TP20) to provide temperature
compensation (0 - 250 oC)
- TDS/Conductivity control and limiter using conductivity probe

CP32 /CP42, with an integrated temperature sensor
(temperature compensation), scale management and optional
alarm
- Electronic probe cleaning, to remove scale from probe tip
- Modulating control using a valve motor drive (VMD) by

proportional-plus-integral control action (PI controller) on an
electrical blowdown valve
A 3-position stepping control is used, therefore no feedback
potentiometer is required
- ON/OFF control with purge time for probe in pipeline

installations
- An optional filter to increase damping effects, to avoid over- - Indication/adjustment of control parameters and settings
frequent valve operation
- Trend record
- Indication of MAX TDS/Conductivity limit (TDS/Conductivity
limiter) - Indication and listing of errors, alarms and warnings
- Indication of MIN TDS/Conductivity limit or control of a bottom - Test of MIN/MAX output relays
blowdown valve
- Manual/automatic operation
- Conductivity to TDS conversion (unit in μS/cm or ppm)
- Modbus RTU (RS232, RS422 or RS485) and Modbus TCP
- Standby/burner input (24 Vdc), to reduce boiler water loss, if (Ethernet 10/100Mb) communication
the boiler is on standby or low demand
- Password protection
- Real time clock controlled Bottom Blowdown (BB), with limit
switch box and priority link for multiple boiler applications
(interlocking up to 9 BCR3250 or BT1050 controllers)
- Steam Boilers
- Actual value output 4-20 mA
- Hot-Water Installations
- Indication of actual value (indicated in ppm or µS/cm and as
bar graph) - Condensate and Feedwater Tanks
Page 1 of 5
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Technical data BCR3250

Fuse external 0.5 A (semi-delay)
1 five-wire connection to CP32/CP42 or three-wire connection to CP30/CP40 and two-wire connection
to the CP10 (Drive+Sense bridged at controller)
1 two-wire Pt100 temperature sensor (range 0 - 250°C)
Inputs
1 two-wire bottom blowdown valve switch
1 two-wire bottom blowdown link (blowdown valve interlocking)
1 two-wire standby or burner connection (24Vdc +/– 20%, 10mA)
1 or 2 volt-free change-over contacts, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1 (valve control)
2 volt-free change-over contacts, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1, (MIN/MAX alarm)
Outputs 1 analogue output 4-20 mA, max. load 500 ohm (actual value indication)
Provide inductive loads with RC combinations according to manufacturer's specification to ensure
2.3 Data line 1 interface for data exchange with operating and display unit BHD50
60
1 tri-colour LED indicator (start-up = amber, power ON = green, malfunction = red)
Indicators and adjustors
1 code switch with four poles for configuration
Housing material: base: polycarbonate, black; front: polycarbonate, grey
Conductor size: 1 x 4,0 mm² solid per wire or
1 x 2.5 mm² per stranded wire with sleeve to DIN 46228 or
Housing
2 x 1.5 mm² per stranded wire with sleeve to DIN 46228 (min. Ø 0.1 mm) terminal strips can be
detached separately
Electrical safety Pollution degree 2 for installation in control cabinet with protection IP 54, completely insulated
Protection
Ambient temperature when system is switched on: 0° ... 55 °C, during operation: –10 ... 55°C
operation: 24 hours
–20 ... +70 °C, defrosting time of the de-energised equipment before it can be put into operation: 24
Storage temperature
hours
Technical data BHD50

Fuse internal automatic
Power consumption 14.4 W
User interface 5" color display with capacitive touch screen, resolution 800 x 480 pixels, illuminated
Communication interface RS232, RS422, RS485 and Ethernet 10/100Mb (USB for maintenance only)
Data line For connection to a LCR2652 and BCR3250 (in parallel)
Front panel: 147x107 mm
Dimensions Panel cut-out: 136x96 mm
Depth: 52 + 8 mm
Front: IP 66 to EN 60529
Protection
Rear: IP 20 to EN 60529
1 power connector with 3 poles
1 D-SUB connector with 9 poles
Electrical connection 2 Ethernet (10/100Mb) RJ45 connector
1 USB Port V2.0, max. 500 mA - for maintenance only
1 Serial connector with 8 poles
EMM Issue 1
BCR3250 BHD50 Blowdown Controller Operating and Display Unit
Boiler house
Level controls 2
VdTÜV Bulletin "Wasserüberwachung 100" (Water Monitoring 100)
The functional unit consisting of the operating & display unit BHD50, blowdown controller BCR3250 and conductivity probes CP10,
CP30/CP40 and CP32/CP42 are type approved according to VdTÜV Bulletin "Wasserüberwachung (Water Monitoring) 100".
The VdTÜV Bulletin "Water Monitoring 100" states the requirements made on water monitoring equipment.
Type approval no. TÜV · WR · XX-XXX (see name plate).

The equipment meets the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU and the EMC Directive 2014/30/EU.

According to the European Directive 2014/34/EU the equipment must not be used in explosion risk areas.
Dimensions (BCR3250) (approximate) in mm 2.3

100 120
61
1 4
3
74
Item
3 Housing
The blowdown controller BCR3250 is

clipped onto the support rail type TH 35, EN
60715 in the control cabinet, see item 4.
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Wiring Diagram
STANDBY/
BURNER INPUT
(24Vdc)
MIN/ BB CLOSE OPEN MAX 14

VALVE
1 1
2.3 2 3 3 4
62
1 1
M 0.5 A
(semi-delay) 12
13 13 13
11
7
Conductivity Probe
5 6 8 9 10
Item
2 MIN alarm output contact or Bottom Blowdown (BB) output contacts
3 Output contacts for activating the control valve
4 MAX alarm output contact
7 2 wire Pt 100 temperature sensor input
8 Bottom blowdown (BB) link input
9 Bottom blowdown (BB) switch input
11 Conductivity Probes - See figure 5
13 Earthing point at the auxiliary equipment (e.g. CP30/CP40)
14 Standby/burner input (24 Vdc), ON = standby/burner on, OFF = normal running/burner off
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Dimensions (BHD50) (approximate) in mm
147
107
2 1
52 8
136
2.3
96
63
Control panel cut-out with the dimensions indicated
in Fig. 2a, showing gasket item 2.
Fig. 2a
Item 3
1 Cut-out in control cabinet 136 x 96 mm

2 Gasket
3 Fixing elements
Fixing element detail.
How to specify
Conductivity Controller with Operating and Display Unit, 4 volt-free change-over contacts for MIN/MAX alarm & blowdown valve, supply
voltage 24V DC 4W
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco BCR3250 Blowdown Controller, 1 off Spirax Sarco BHD50 Operating and Display Unit
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
2.3
64
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-19
EMM Issue 1
CP40
Conductivity Probe
Description
The Spirax Sarco CP40 conductivity probe is used in conjunction with a controller to measure
the conductivity (or TDS) of water, usually in a steam boiler for the purpose of monitoring and
controlling blowdown.
The probe may be installed in a Spirax Sarco probe elbow, a screwed flange, or directly in 2.3
a boiler connection. The CP40 is supplied in four nominal tip lengths, and is cut to the exact
length required prior to installation.
A DIN 43650 cable socket with Pg 11 cable gland is supplied with the unit.
65
Principal features:
- Conductivity probe for use with blowdown controllers.
- Suitable for use in steam boilers up to 32 bar g, 239 °C.
- All wetted parts in austenitic stainless steel/PTFE.
- Easily cut to length.
Caution:
protection.

300 (11.8), 500 (19.7), 1 000 (39.4) and 1 500 (59).
Maximum operating temperature 239 °C (462 °F)
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 60 bar g (870 psi g)
Technical data
Minimum distance from boiler tubes 20 mm (¾")
Minimum immersion depth (Vertically installed probes) 100 mm (4")
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Materials
2 Pg 11 Cable gland
5 No. Description Material
1 Cable socket Polyamide, glass filled
2 Flat gasket Silicone rubber
2.3 3 Probe connector Polyamide, glass filled
66 4 4 Cover assembly Austenitic stainless steel
6 Body Austenitic stainless steel Type 316Ti W/S No. 1.4571
7 Probe tip Austenitic stainless steel ASTM A276 316L

6
8 Probe tip sleeving PTFE
9 Tip shroud PTFE
10 Spring (not shown) Austenitic stainless steel BS 2056 316 S42
EMM Issue 1
CP40 Conductivity Probe
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Withdrawal distance for

cable socket 15 (0.6)
39 (1.5)
Weights (approximate) in kg (lb)

Tip length 300 mm 500 mm 1 000 mm 1 500 mm
Weight 0.49 (1.08) 0.58 (1.28) 0.71 (1.55) 0.85 (1.86)
178 (7.0) 2.3

67
Ø28 (1.1)
27 A/F
" BSP taper

(R½) connection
Tip length
300 (11.8),
500 (19.7), 1000 (39.4) or 1500 (59)
Ø6 (0.24)
Ø11 (0.43)
Tip shroud and

spring assembly
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
This document does not contain sufficient information to install the product safely. See the Installation and Maintenance
Instructions provided with each unit.
Installation note:
Probes with tip lengths up to 500 mm can be installed vertically or horizontally. Longer probes must be installed vertically.
The probe must be installed in a position where it can sense the conductivity of the boiler water, away from the feedwater inlet if
possible.
Install the probe in a " BSP female connection.
Maintenance note:
Probe elbow
2.3 Typical installation on a probe elbow, ideally on the
horizontal centre line of the boiler.
68 A maximum tip length of 500 mm must be adhered to
on horizontal applications.
To blowdown valve
Typical horizontal installation on a boiler standpipe

(screwed or flanged).
How to specify
Conductivity probes shall be Spirax Sarco type CP40 with a PTFE probe and stainless steel tip and body. They shall have a DIN 43650
cable socket with a Pg 11 cable gland.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco CP40 conductivity probe with a " BSP taper connection and a tip length of 500 mm.
Spare parts
Available spares
Tip shroud and spring assembly Stock No. 4031282
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state which product they are for.
Example: 1 off Tip shroud and spring assembly for a Spirax Sarco CP40 conductivity probe.
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-20
EMM Issue 1
CP42
Twin Tip Conductivity Probe
Description
The Spirax Sarco CP42 conductivity probe is used in conjunction with a controller to measure
the conductivity (or TDS) of water, usually in a steam boiler, for the purpose of monitoring
and controlling blowdown.
The CP42 has a built-in temperature sensor, and when used with an appropriate controller,
is able to detect scaling. It also automatically initiates a probe conditioning cycle. This causes
2.3
any scale on the probe to become porous or fall off, allowing the probe to continue to sense
at its original calibration level.
69
WARNING: This feature is not a substitute for adequate boiler water treatment. If
scale is occuring on a probe, it is also accuring inside the boiler, and a competent
water treatment specialist must be consulted to avoid a potentially dangerous
situation.
The CP42 is supplied in three nominal tip lengths, and has a " BSP male thread for
connection to a Spirax Sarco probe elbow, a screwed flange, or directly into a boiler
connection.
Principal features :
- Twin tip conductivity probe for use in TDS control systems.
- Built-in temperature sensor - only one boiler connection needed.
- Suitable for use in steam boilers up to 239 °C @ 32 bar g (462 °F @ 464 psi g).
- Patented scale detection and compensation.

300 (11.8), 500 (19.7) and 1 000 (39.4).
Note: 1 000 mm probes can only be installed vertically.
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 60 bar g
Technical data
Minimum tip distance from boiler tubes 10 mm (0.4")
Minimum immersion depth (vertically installed probes) 100 mm (4.0")
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Materials
2
(internal)
1
No. Part Material
2.3 4 1 Terminal head Aluminium

70 3 Cover tube Austenitic stainless steel Type 316L
5 Body Austenitic stainless steel Type 304L 1.4306

5
6 Spring Austenitic stainless steel 302 S26
7 Insulator PEEK
8 Driver tip Austenitic stainless steel Type 316
9 Sensor tip Austenitic stainless steel UGINE 4632
10 Rod Austenitic stainless steel Type 316 / 316L
10
7
6 and 8
(Internal)
EMM Issue 1
CP42 Twin Tip Conductivity Probe
Boiler house
Level controls 2
M20
109 (4.3)
Weights (approximate) in kg (Ib)

Tip length 300 mm 500 mm 1 000 mm
Weight 0.85 (1.87) 0.97 (2.14) 1.22 (2.69)
2.3
71
153 (6.02)
27 A/F
" BSP taper

(½" NPT)
Tip length
300 (11.8),
500 (19.7)
or 1 000 (39.4)
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the product, which gives full wiring, commissioning and
operating instructions.
Warning:
This product contains materials including PTFE which can give off toxic fumes if exposed to excessive heat.
Installation note:
Do not install the probe outdoors without additional weather protection.
300 mm and 500 mm probes can be installed vertically or horizontally. CAUTION: 1 000 mm probes must be installed vertically
only. The probe must be installed in a position where it can sense the conductivity of the boiler water, away from the feedwater inlet if
possible.
The CP42 contains no user serviceable components, and periodic cleaning is all that is required. Any attempt to dismantle the probe
will result in permanent damage.
Spare parts
There are no available spare parts for this product.
2.3
72 How to specify
TDS conductivity probes shall be Spirax Sarco type CP42 with nickel alloy sensor tips and built-in temperature sensor. They must
incorporate a patented facility to check the sensor tips for scaling. When used in conjunction with an appropriate Spirax Sarco controller,
they must also be able to automatically initiate a patented probe cleaning feature, which, if unable to clean the probe, will activate a
warning on the controllers display panel and/or a remote alarm. The system must also be able to automatically compensate for any
polarisation effects at the sensors. They must be suitable for boiler pressures up to 32 bar g and a maximum working temperature of
239°C. They must be available in 300 mm, 500 mm and 1 000 mm lengths, and have a " BSPT boiler connection.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco CP42, twin tip conductivity probe having a ½" BSP connection and 300 mm tip length.
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693- 40
EMM Issue 1
BTS1050
Boiler Blowdown Timer
Description
The BT1050 is a timer for the control of a bottom blowdown valve. It allows the bottom blowdown valve to open, removing precipitated
2.3
solids that could otherwise build up and eventually cause damage.
The BT1050's timers are controlled from a battery backed up Real Time Clock.
73
A separate blowdown timer can be enabled for each weekday with different start, stop and repeat times.
A simple copy feature allows the parameters to be copied to all days if required.
A test function provides the operator with a diagnostic tool.
Up to nine BTS1050 (or BCR3250) units can be installed and priority linked for multi-boiler installations.
A limit switch box can be connected to monitor proper valve opening / closing action.
Principal features:
- Purpose designed for bottom blowdown duties
- Comprehensive timer options
- Straightforward to commission – quick set-up option, using copy function
- Power supply: 24V dc
- Priority link and a recovery timer prevent boilers from blowing down in rapid succession
- Warns if valve fails to open or close
- Standby input to reduce boiler water loss if the boiler is on standby or low demand

Compatibility)
Page 1 of 3
Boiler house
2 Level controls
46 120
Item
1
3 Housing
74 3

The BTS1050 Boiler Blowdown Timer is
clipped onto a type TH 35, EN 60715
support rail in a control cabinet, see item
2 4.
2.3
74
Standby
Wiring diagram 1 input (24 Vdc)
2
BB
Alarm 3
valve
0.5 A (semi- delay)
4 BB BB
Link Switch
5 6
Item
1 Bottom Blowdown (BB) output contacts
2 Alarm output contact
3 Standby input (24 Vdc), ON = standby, OFF = normal operation
5 Bottom Blowdown link input
6 Bottom Blowdown switch input
Page 2 of 3 TI-P693- 40
EMM Issue 1
BTS1050 Boiler Blowdown Timer
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Technical data
1 two-wire connection to Bottom Blowdown Link
Inputs 1 two-wire connection to Bottom Blowdown Switch
1 two-wire standby connection (24Vdc +/– 20%, 10mA)
1 volt-free change-over contacts, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1 (Bottom Blowdown valve)
Outputs:
1 floating open/closed contact, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1 (Alarm Relay)
3 push-buttons for parameter setting
1 green 4 digit 7-segment LED display
Displays and controls
2 red LEDs for Bottom Blowdown Delayed and Alarm indication
2 amber LEDs for Bottom Blowdown Valve and Standby Input activity indication
Maximum Conductor size*: 1 x 4.0 mm 2 solid, per wire, or
1 x 2.5 mm 2 per stranded wire with sleeve to DIN 46228, or
2.3
Housing 2 x 1.5 mm 2 per stranded wire with sleeve to DIN 46228 (min. Ø 0.1 mm)
*Please see IMI for recommended cable specifications
75
Terminal strips can be detached separately
Electrical safety Pollution degree 2 for installation in control cabinet with degree of protection IP 54, fully insulated
Protection
when system is switched on: 0° ... 55 °C
Ambient temperature
during operation: –10 ... 55°C
operation: 24 hours
Storage temperature –20 ... +70 °C, defrosting time of the de-energised equipment before it can be put into operation: 24 hours
How to specify
Boiler Blowdown Timer, 2 volt-free contacts for Alarm & bottom blowdown valve, supply voltage 24V DC 4W.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco BTS1050 Boiler Blowdown Timer.
TI-P693- 40 Page 3 of 3
EMM Issue 1
BTS1050 Boiler Blowdown Timer
Boiler house
TI-P402-68
AB Issue 3
APS1
Probe Simulator
Description
The APS1 probe simulator is used in place of a level or conductivity probe to verify the correct operation of Spirax Sarco controllers. It can also
be used to diagnose wiring / probe faults. It is connected to the level probe or conductivity probe wiring, avoiding the need to fire the boiler or
alter water levels, and is quick and easy to use.
2.3 The APS1 has switch settings covering all Spirax Sarco probe types and ranges.
A potentiometer provides the variable input to a capacitance controller, and 4 mm test sockets are provided for connection of a multimeter, which
76 is used to check the voltage when simulating capacitance probes.
Switches simulate wet or dry (high or low resistance) conductivity level probe conditions, and resistors are built in to represent various conductivity
probe ranges.
The APS1 is powered by the controller under test, so needs no batteries or external power supply.
The unit is fitted with two inputs, connected in parallel. One is for connection of a PT2 or PT3 plug tail, and the other is a DIN 43650 connector as
used on conductivity and capacitance probes.
Full operating instructions are supplied with each unit.
Principal features:
- A valuable diagnostic aid for Spirax Sarco boiler control installations.
- Compatible with all TDS / level probes and controllers.
- No need to fire boiler or alter water levels.
CP10

- No battery or power supply needed.
connector

Test
sockets
- Easy to operate.

Limiting conditions
Toggle
switches
Maximum ambient temperature 55°C
Protection rating IP40

Potentio-
meter
Technical data
22 Ω, 68 Ω, 220 Ω, 680 Ω
Conductivity probe settings

2.2 kΩ, 6.8 kΩ, 22 kΩ Selector
switch
LP30 6.8 kΩ / 15 kΩ

Level probe LP31 6.8 kΩ / 15 kΩ
DIN 43650
settings (High sensitivity) 68 kΩ / 150 kΩ connector

LP10-4
(Low sensitivity) 6.8 kΩ / 15 kΩ
Capacitance probe range 0 - 10 volts output
Materials How to order

Case Die-cast aluminium Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco APS1 probe simulator.
Coating Nylon (grey)
Dimensions 138 86
(approximate) 85
in mm
Weight 450 g
110
132
Note: This is to illustrate the connection of an

LP20 / LP30, which must be ordered seperately
as it is not supplied with the APS1 as standard.
Boiler house
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Level controls 2
TI-P402-41
AB Issue 5
C2
Probe Chamber
Description
The Spirax Sarco C2 probe chamber enables level control or alarm
probes to be fitted in situations where direct boiler shell mounting
is not desired or is not possible.
The C2 probe chamber is of all welded carbon steel construction, 2.3
with DN25 steam and water connections flanged to EN 1092 PN40.
A 1" BSP x ½" BSP reducing bush to BS 1740 will be required if
fitting a ½" BSP probe.
77
A Spirax Sarco sequencing purge valve is normally fitted to the C2
base of the chamber. probe chamber
The sequencing valve allows the daily (or once per shift) test of the
low level alarm system, and blow through of the probe chamber
water and steam connections in accordance with the Health and
Safety Executive Guidance Notes BG01 and INDG436.
Principal features:
- Purpose designed level probe chamber.
- Suitable for pressures of up to 32 bar.
- All welded carbon steel construction.
- Designed for use with Spirax Sarco level probes and sequencing
valves.
Pressure / temperature limits

Design pressure 32 bar g
Design temperature 239°C
Hydraulic test pressure 60 bar g
Material
Chamber Carbon steel ASTM A106 Gr. B or Gr.WPB
Dimensions / weights (approximate) in mm and kg

A B C D E F G Weight
457 65 73 83 65 310 147 7.5
DN25 flanged EN 1092 PN40.

D 1" BSP
C
B E Highest
permissible
alarm level
F
A
Lowest
permissible
alarm level
G How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco C2 probe chamber.
Boiler house
2 Level controls
TI-P402-42
AB Issue 4
SPV1 and SPV3

Sequencing Purge Valves
Description
The Spirax Sarco sequencing purge valve is normally fitted to
a Spirax Sarco C2 probe chamber.
It allows the daily (or once per shift) test of the low level alarm
2.3 system, and blow through of the probe chamber water and steam
connections in accordance with UK Health and Safety Executive
78 Guidance Note BG01 and INDG436.
The valve opens the connections to drain separately and in
sequence to blow them through and prevent the accumulation of
deposits.
When the steam connection is opened to drain, the chamber is
emptied of water, which simulates a low water level alarm.
Its design ensures that it is impossible to leave the valve in the
wrong position since the drain connection is always open when
either the steam or water connection is shut-off.
An index plate behind the handwheel indicates the valve position.
Two versions of the valve are available;
SPV1 having a Cast iron body or SPV3 having a bronze body.
Principal features:
- Special valve seat provides tight shut-off.
- Index plate indicates valve position.
- Replaces individual isolating valves - increased safety.
Sizes and pipe connections

SPV1 DN25 Flanged to EN 1092 PN16
SPV3 DN25 Flanged to EN 1092 PN40 or BS 10 Table H
Limiting conditions
SPV1 SPV3 SPV3
PN16 PN40 Table 'H'
Maximum boiler pressure 13 bar g 25 bar g 25 bar g
Designed for a maximum 24 bar g 60 bar g 51 bar g
cold hydraulic test pressure of:
Standards
The SPV3 fully meets BS 759: Part 1: 1984.
Materials
Part Material
SPV1 Body and cover Cast iron BS 1452 Gr. 220 (min)
SPV3 Body and cover Bronze BS EN 1982 CC491K

83 204
83
Model SPV1 SPV3
½" BSP drain Weight 9 10
139
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Face view of index plate
Illustrating blow-through sequence
Position 2
Blow-through water
Position 3
Blow-through chamber 2.3
79
Water shut-off
Position 1
Normal working
Operation of sequencing valve Valve sequence
With the handwheel turned fully anticlockwise the valve is in the
NORMAL WORKING position and the back seating shuts off the
drain connection. Position 1.
Slowly turn the handwheel clockwise until the indicating pointer is at
the first PAUSE position.
The chamber connection is closed, the drain connection is open, and
the water connection is blown through.
Pause for 5 to 8 seconds.
Slowly move the handwheel further clockwise to full travel.
The water connection is closed, the drain valve remains open, and
the chamber and steam connections are blown through.
Pause for 5 to 8 seconds. The low level alarm should sound.
Slowly turn the handwheel fully clockwise to shut-off against the back
seating in the NORMAL WORKING position.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN25 SPV3 sequencing purge valve
with flanged connections to EN 1092 PN40.
Position 2.
Position 3.
SPV1 and SPV3 Sequencing Purge Valves TI-P402-42 AB Issue 4

Boiler house
2 Level controls
In the interests of development and improvement of the product, we reserve the right to change the specification without notice.
© Copyright 2017
TI-P402-03
TI-P402-07
EMM Issue 9
AB Issue 5
ProbeWV1Flanges
for External Level- Pilot
Water Valve Control Chambers
Operated
Description
Description
These
The WV1flanges are designed
is a pilot operatedtodiaphragm
allow the valve
fitting for
of Spirax Sarco
use with level
water control
at up to 80/ alarm probes
°C. The valvetohas
existing float-type
a brass body andboiler side chambers.
corrosion resistant
internals. The solenoid is encapsulated, and is supplied with a removable cable socket to IP65 suitable for 3 core cable maximum
Available
7 mm diameter types
and terminal maximum 1.5 mm². Square flange
2.3 ½" valves
Square have the 114
flanges solenoid
mm ormounted
133 mm. centrally over the valve. The solenoid is mounted towards the outlet connection on larger sizes.
80 Round flanges
Principal features:
178 mm, 222 mm or 275 mm.
All flanges centrally tapped ½" or 1" BSP.
- For use with water up to 80 °C.
Limiting
- Full bore,conditions
except for 1¼" which has a reduced bore of 25 mm, normally closed operation.
The maximum working pressure and temperature is dependent on
- Wide,
the chamber to which the
non-critical flangeranges.
voltage is fitted, up to a maximum pressure
of 32 bar g at 239°C.
- Ideal for boiler feedtank supply.
Material
Carbon
Sizessteel
and BSpipe
4360 Gr. 43A.
connections
Painted
½", ¾", finish.
1", 1¼", 1½" and 2" screwed BSP

Round flanges Square flanges
Maximum
Outside design pressure
Mounting hole Mounting hole 16 bar g Overall
Mounting holes Mounting hole Mounting hole Mounting holes
diameter PCD diameter No. dimensions centres diameter No.
Maximum design temperature 80 °C
178 146 15 8 114 86 15 4
Minimum
222 design temperature
191 19 6 10 °C 133 100 15 4
275
Maximum 235
operating temperature 22 8 80 °C ½" WV1
Maximum ambient temperature 55 °C
Minimum operating temperature 10 °C
Maximum differential pressure 16 bar
Minimum differential pressure 0.2 bar

Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of 24 bar g1 off Spirax Sarco 114 mm square probe flange tapped ½" BSP.
Electrical data
Version Voltage range Frequency range
Power 110 V 99 V to 121 V 50 to 60 Hz
Supply 230 V Round

207 Vflange
to 253 V 50 to 60 Hz
24 VA (inrush) ¾" to 2" WV1 valve

Power consumption
14 VA/8 W (hold)
Protection rating IP65 *
*With cable plug correctly fitted and secured
Materials
Part Material
Body Brass
Seals Nitrile rubber
Coil housing Polyamide
Cable socket Polyamide
Page 1 of 3
Boiler house
Level controls 2
TI-P402-06
AB Issue 3
Probe Flanges
for Protection Tubes
2.3
81
Flange for single probe Flange for double probes
Description Double probe type:

Probe flanges enable Spirax Sarco level / alarm probes to be fitted DN100
to protection tubes mounted in the boiler shell. BS 4504 PN16 or PN40 (PN40 also suits BS 10 Table F and H.)
Flanges are tapped and spot-faced to take either one or two probes. Probe tappings available:
½" + ½" BSP
Limiting conditions ½" + 1" BSP
For maximum working pressures and temperatures please refer to Tapping centres are offset 25 mm from the centre of the flange.
the relevant flange standard.
Probe connection ½" + ½" BSP
Available types Flange standard BS 4504 BS 10
Single probe type:
DN15 to DN100 Flange type PN16 PN40 Table F Table H
BS 4504 PN40 or PN16 and BS 10 Table F and H. Flange size Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No.
Probe tappings available:
½" BSP (All flanges) DN100 (4") 4026693 4026695 4026695 4026695
1" BSP (DN25 to DN100)
Probe connection ½" BSP Probe connection ½" + 1" BSP

Flange standard BS 4504 BS 10 Flange standard BS 4504 BS 10
Flange type PN16 PN40 Table F Table H Flange type PN16 PN40 Table F Table H
Flange size Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No. Flange size Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No.
DN15 (½") 4026760 4026760 4026760 4026791 DN100 (4") 4026694 4026696 4026696 4026696
DN20 (¾") 4026761 4026761 4026761 4026791
DN25 (1") 4026762 4026762 4026792 4026792 Material
DN32 (1¼") 4026763 4026763 4026793 4026793 Flanges to BS 4504:
DN40 (1½") 4026764 4026764 4026794 4026794 Carbon steel BS 1501 Pt 1-161 Gr. 360 or
Carbon steel BS 1501 Pt 1-151 Gr. 430A or
DN50 (2") 4026765 4026765 4026765 4026765 Carbon steel ASTM A515 Gr. 55
DN80 (3") 4026767 4026767 4026797 4026797
DN100 (4") 4026769 4026768 4026768 4026768 Flanges to BS 10 Table F and H:
Carbon steel BS 1501-151 Gr. 360 or
Carbon steel BS 1503-161 Gr. A.
or equivalent.
Probe connection 1" BSP
Flange standard BS 4504 BS 10 How to order example:
1 off Spirax Sarco DN100 probe flange to the following standard:
Flange type PN16 PN40 Table F Table H BS 4504 PN16 with 1 x ½" BSP probe connection. Part No. 4026769.
Flange size Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No.
DN15 (½") - - - -
DN20 (¾") - - - -
DN25 (1") 4026862 4026862 4026892 4026892
DN32 (1¼") 4026863 4026863 4026893 4026893
DN40 (1½") 4026864 4026864 4026894 4026894
DN50 (2") 4026865 4026865 4026865 4026865
DN80 (3") 4026867 4026867 4026897 4026897
DN100 (4") 4026869 4026868 4026868 4026868
In the interests of development and improvement of the product, we reserve the right to change the specification. © Copyright 2004
Boiler house
2 Level controls
2.3
82
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P402-03
EMM Issue 9
WV1
Water Valve - Pilot Operated
Description
The WV1 is a pilot operated diaphragm valve for use with water at up to 80 °C. The valve has a brass body and corrosion resistant
internals. The solenoid is encapsulated, and is supplied with a removable cable socket to IP65 suitable for 3 core cable maximum
7 mm diameter and terminal maximum 1.5 mm².
½" valves have the solenoid mounted centrally over the valve. The solenoid is mounted towards the outlet connection on larger sizes. 2.3
- For use with water up to 80 °C.
- Full bore, except for 1¼" which has a reduced bore of 25 mm, normally closed operation.
- Wide, non-critical voltage ranges.
- Ideal for boiler feedtank supply.

½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½" and 2" screwed BSP

Maximum design pressure 16 bar g
Minimum design temperature 10 °C
Maximum operating temperature 80 °C ½" WV1

Maximum differential pressure 16 bar
Minimum differential pressure 0.2 bar
Electrical data
Version Voltage range Frequency range
Power 110 V 99 V to 121 V 50 to 60 Hz
Supply 230 V 207 V to 253 V 50 to 60 Hz
24 VA (inrush) ¾" to 2" WV1 valve

Power consumption
14 VA/8 W (hold)
Protection rating IP65 *
*With cable plug correctly fitted and secured
Materials
Part Material
Body Brass
Coil housing Polyamide
Cable socket Polyamide
Page 1 of 3
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Size A B A/F Weight*
½" 65 91.1 27 0.54
¾" 80 99.6 32 0.89
1" 95 106.6 41 1.30
1¼" 95 111.6 50 1.50
1½" 126 125.6 60 3.00
2" 164 119.9 70 4.50
* Note: The weight is approximate and includes immediate packaging.
2.3
84
½" A/F B ¾" to 2" A/F B
A A
Capacities
WV1 Size ½" ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"
Kvs (m³/h) 3.8 8.5 12 12 30 40
200
40
100 Kvs
80
30
60 Kvs
40 12
Kvs
Flow m³/h
8.5
Kvs
20
3.8
10 Kvs
8
6
4
2
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 16
Pressure drop bar
Page 2 of 3 TI-P402-03 EMM Issue 9
W V1 Water Valve - Pilot Operated

Boiler house
Level controls 2
WARNING: Your attention is drawn to Safety Information Leaflet IM-GCM-10 and in the UK, to IEE Regulations (BS 7671), as
well as to any National or Regional regulations.
This product is designed and constructed to withstand the forces encountered during normal use.
Use of the product for any purpose other than as a pilot operated diaphragm valve for water could cause damage to the
product and may cause injury or fatality to personnel.
Installation notes:
- We recommend that a strainer is fitted upstream of the valve to IEE Regulations (BS 7671).
- Fit the valve with the flow in the direction of the cast arrow.
- The valve may be mounted in any position, but preferably with the solenoid uppermost.
- PTFE tape may be used on the pipe connections.
Caution - Do not overtighten screws, nuts, or pipework as this could distort the valve body.
2.3
Wiring note:
The rated voltage is printed on the name-plate. Note that the flat terminal is the earth connection. For ease of installation the solenoid
unit can be moved through 360° by slackening the solenoid nut. Indentations at 90° intervals in the base of the solenoid allow it to be
positively retained, though it may be positioned at any other angle if required. The cable socket may be connected horizontally or 85
vertically by removing the central plastic screw and turning the connector through 90°. Ensure the cable socket gasket is slightly
compressed on refitting.
Maintenance note:
As the valve does not contain any lifed items, no spares are required or available. If it becomes necessary to dismantle the valve,
proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the mains supply.
2. Remove the solenoid retaining nut and withdraw the solenoid coil.
3. Check the condition of the 'O' ring at the base of the solenoid coil.
4. Note the position of the valve bonnet in relation to the valve body. (Aligned arrows on both components indicate correct position).
5. Remove the four bonnet retaining screws.
6. Note the positioning of the spring and diaphragm.
7. Remove the spring and diaphragm, and clean and inspect all valve components.
8. Check the condition of the 'O' rings.
9. Reassemble the valve in the reverse order of dismantling.
How to specify
Pilot operated solenoid valves shall be Spirax Sarco type WV1 normally closed valve with brass body and screwed connections,
complete with corrosion resistant internals and nitrile rubber soft seat for use with water up to 80 °C.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco WV1 pilot operated water valve, having a 1" BSP connection supplied and ready for a 230V power supply.
4023150 / 9
TI-P402-03 EMM Issue 9 Page 3 of 3
W V1 Water Valve - Pilot Operated

Boiler house
TI-S75-11
AB Issue 4
Selection of
Modulating Feedwater Valves
Electrically Actuated
Safety Valve Kv selection graph
Your attention is drawn to
Pressure drop across the fully open valve psi
Safety Information Leaflet IM-GCM-10
1.45 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 50 100 145
2.3 1. Selection of the valve body size 100 000
90 000 200 000
The standard valve for modulating boiler water level control is
86 DN40 (1½") nominal pipe size (40 mm). A range of seat sizes
to suit this body is available to suit most sizes of boilers.
80 000
70 000
However, for smaller or larger boilers, alternative sized valves
can be selected from the Spirax Sarco range - See overleaf. 60 000
Valve stem seals are available in normal (PTFE) or high 50 000
temperature (graphite) material. We recommend the use of the 100 000
high temperature seal to decrease the possibility of leakage 90 000
over long term use. Valves with high temperature stem seals 40 000
are suffixed 'H'. 80 000
5
70 000
v2
2. Selection of the valve body material 30 000
K
60 000
and pressure rating
Boiler feedwater lb / h (1 imperial gallon = 10 lb)

The valve body must be suitable for the maximum pressure and 50 000
temperature in the feedwater line.
6
20 000
v1
Standard valve types are as follows: 40 000
K
Boiler feedwater flowrate kg / h
KE71 Screwed PN25 rating

SG iron body 15 000
KE73 Flanged (Pmax 25 bar g at 120ºC) 30 000
0
Cast steel body KE43 Flanged PN40 rating
v1
(Pmax 40 bar g at 120ºC)
K
10 000
3. Selection of the valve Kv 9 000
.3
20 000
The DN40 valve body size is available with various seat sizes 8 000
v6
giving a choice of Kv values.

K
Use the graph to select a suitable Kv as follows: 7 000

a) The feedwater flowrate is the actual maximum steam 6 000
generation rate of the boiler plus any blowdown rate where
this is significant. In practice the use of the 'from and at' 5 000
boiler rating will give a small safety margin. In the example 10 000
this is 15 000 kg/h. 9 000
4 000
b) The pressure drop across the valve is the feedpump 8 000
pressure at the maximum flowrate, minus the boiler
pressure, minus any valve and pipework losses. In the 7 000
3 000
example the available pressure drop is 1.5 bar. 6 000
c) Select the larger Kv value, 16 in this example. If right on the
line, or if in doubt, select a larger Kv. 5 000
2 000
4. Selection of the actuator + valve adaptor 4 000
The actuator has to be capable of shutting off against the
maximum feedpump pressure when the boiler is not under
pressure.
3 000
Select the actuator + valve adaptor from the table below:
220 / 240 Vac AEL52211JXA AEL53211JXA AEL54211JXA
1 000
Actuator 110 Vac AEL52212GXA AEL53212GXA AEL54212GXA
type 24 Vac AEL52213FXA AEL53213FXA AEL54213FXA 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 10
24 Vdc AEL52214FXA AEL53214FXA AEL54214FXA Pressure drop across the fully open valve bar
Size Kv value Maximum feedpump pressure bar g
Standard 25.0 12.0 (8.5) 28.5 (25) 40.0 (40)
valve size 19.8 (14.3) 40.0 (40) - -
16.0
DN40 38.3 (27.7) 40.0 (40) - -
10.0
6.3 40.0 (40.0) - - - -
Valve adaptor AEL6911 AEL6911 AEL6911
Mounting flange EL5970 EL5970 EL5970
Figures in brackets denotes the differential pressures for
valves fitted with high temperature graphite stem sealing.
These valves have a suffix 'H'.
Valve stroke is 20 mm. Actuator speed is 0.5 mm/s
Boiler house
Level controls 2
For alternative sizes Valve Kv selection graph

to the standard DN40 (1½") Pressure drop across the fully open valve psi
1.45 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 50 100 145
100 000
2. Selection of the valve body material 90 000 200 000
and pressure rating 80 000
The valve body must be suitable for the maximum pressure and 70 000
temperature in the feedwater line.
Standard valve types are as follows: 60 000
KE71 Screwed PN25 rating 50 000
6
SG iron body 100 000
v3
KE73 Flanged (Pmax 25 bar g at 120ºC)
90 000
K
40 000
PN40 rating 80 000
Cast steel body KE43 Flanged (Pmax 40 bar g at 120ºC)
30 000 70 000
Valve stem seals are available in normal (PTFE) or high temperature 60 000
(graphite) material. We recommend the use of the high temperature
Boiler feedwater lb / h (1 imperial gallon = 10 lb)

seal to decrease the possibility of leakage over long term use. Valves
with high temperature stem seals are suffixed 'H'.
50 000
2.3
6
20 000
v1
40 000
87
K
3. Selection of the valve Kv
Boiler feedwater flowrate kg / h

0
v1
this is significant. In practice the use of the 'from and at'
K
this is 15 000 kg / h. 9 000 20 000
b) The pressure drop across the valve is the feedpump
3
8 000
.
v6
K
c) Select the larger Kv value, 16 in this example. If right on the
line, or if in doubt, select a larger Kv. 5 000
v4
10 000
K
4. Selection of the actuator + valve adaptor 4 000 9 000
The actuator has to be capable of shutting off against the 8 000
maximum feedpump pressure when the boiler is not under
pressure. 7 000
3 000
Select the actuator + valve adaptor from the table below: 6 000
220 / 240 Vac AEL52211JXA AEL53211JXA AEL54211JXA 5 000
6
2 000
.
Actuator 110 Vac AEL52212GXA AEL53212GXA AEL54212GXA
v1
type 4 000
K
24 Vac AEL52213FXA AEL53213FXA AEL54213FXA

24 Vdc AEL52214FXA AEL53214FXA AEL54214FXA 3 000
Size Kv value Maximum feedpump pressure bar g
v1
K
Valve size 36.0 6.7 (4.7) 16.3 (14.3) 29.7 (27.2) 1 000
25.0 12.0 (8.5) 28.5 (25.0) 40.0 (40.0)
DN50 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 10
16.0 19.8 (14.3) 40.0 (40.0) - - Pressure drop across the fully open valve bar
10.0 38.3 (27.7) 40.0 (40.0) - -
Valve size 16.0 19.8 (14.3) 40.0 (40.0) - -
10.0 38.3 (27.7) 40.0 (40.0) - -
DN32
6.3 40.0 (40.0) - - - -
4.0 40.0 (40.0) - - - -
Valve size 10.0 38.3 (27.7) 40.0 (40.0) - -
6.3 40.0 (40.0) - - - -
DN25
4.0 40.0 (40.0) - - - -
Valve size 6.3 40.0 (40.0) - - - -
4.0 40.0 (40.0) - - - -
DN20
1.6 40.0 (40.0) - - - -
1.0 40.0 (40.0) - - - -
Valve size 4.0 40.0 (40.0) - - - -
1.6 40.0 (40.0) - - - -
DN15
1.0 40.0 (40.0) - - - -
Valve adaptor AEL6911 AEL6911 AEL6911
Mounting flange EL5970 EL5970 EL5970
Figures in brackets denotes the differential pressures for valves

fitted with high temperature graphite stem sealing. These valves
have a suffix 'H'.
Valve stroke is 20 mm. Actuator speed is 0.5 mm/s
TI-S75-11 AB Issue 4 Selection of Modulating Feedwater Valves Electrically Actuated

Boiler house
2 Level controls
2.3
88
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-S75-12
CTLS Issue 5
Selection of
Modulating Feedwater Valves
Pneumatically Actuated
Safety
Your attention is drawn to Safety Information Leaflet IM-GCM-10
2.3
89
1. Selection of the valve body size
The standard valve for modulating boiler water level control is DN40 (1½") nominal pipe size (40 mm).
A range of seat sizes to suit this body is available to suit most sizes of boilers.
However, for smaller or larger boilers, alternative sized valves can be selected from the Spirax Sarco range - See page 3.
Valve stem seals are available in normal (PTFE) or high temperature (graphite) material.
We recommend the use of the high temperature seal to decrease the possibility of leakage over long term use.
Valves with high temperature stem seals are suffixed 'H'.
2. Selection of the valve body material and pressure rating

The valve body must be suitable for the maximum pressure and temperature in the feedwater line.
Standard valve types are as follows:
KE71 Screwed
SG iron body PN25 rating (Pmax 25 bar g at 120 ºC)
KE73 Flanged
Cast steel body KE43 Flanged PN40 rating (Pmax 40 bar g at 120 ºC)
To select the valve, please go to page 2
TI-S75-12 Page 1 of 4
CTLS Issue 5
Selection of Modulating Feedwater Valves Pneumatically Actuated
Boiler house
2 Level controls
3. Selection of the valve Kv Valve Kv selection graph
The DN40 valve body size is available with various seat sizes
giving a choice of Kv values. Pressure drop across the fully open valve psi
1.45 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 50 100 145
90 000 200 000
70 000
this is 15 000 kg/h. 50 000
100 000
40 000 90 000
80 000
pressure, minus any valve and pipework losses. In the
5
70 000
v2
K
60 000
Boiler feedwater lb/h (1 imperial gallon = 10 lb)

c) Select the larger Kv value, 16 in this example. If right on
the line, or if in doubt, select a larger Kv. 50 000
6
20 000
v1
40 000
2.3
K
Boiler feedwater flowrate kg/h
15 000
4. Selection of the actuator + valve adaptor
90 30 000
0
v1
K
maximum feedpump pressure to Class IV when the boiler is
not under pressure. 10 000
9 000 20 000
.3
v6
K
7 000
Actuator type PN9123E PN9223E
6 000
Maximum feedpump
Valve size Kv value 5 000
pressure bar g
10 000
25.0 11.0 (8) 40 (40) 4 000 9 000
8 000
16.0 11.0 (8) 40 (40) 7 000
DN40 3 000
10.0 11.0 (8) 40 (40) 6 000
6.3 11.0 (8) 40 (40) 5 000

2 000
4 000
These valves have a suffix 'H'. 3 000
Valve stroke is 20 mm.

1 000
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 10
Pressure drop across the fully open valve bar
5. Electropneumatic positioner
Specify EP6 positioner (4 - 20 mA input).
Page 2 of 4 TI-S75-12
CTLS Issue 5
Boiler house
Level controls 2
For alternative sizes to the standard DN40 (1½")
2. Selection of the valve body material and pressure rating

The valve body must be suitable for the maximum pressure and temperature in the feedwater line.
Standard valve types are as follows:
KE71 Screwed
SG iron body PN25 rating (Pmax 25 bar g at 120 ºC)
KE73 Flanged
Cast steel body KE43 Flanged PN40 rating (Pmax 40 bar g at 120 ºC)
Valve stem seals are available in normal (PTFE) or high temperature (graphite) material. We recommend the use of the high temperature
seal to decrease the possibility of leakage over long term use. Valves with high temperature stem seals are suffixed 'H'.
2.3
To select the valve, please go to page 4
91
CTLS Issue 5
Boiler house
2 Level controls
3. Selection of the valve Kv Valve Kv selection graph
The DN40 valve body size is available with various seat sizes
giving a choice of Kv values. Pressure drop across the fully open valve psi
1.45 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 50 100 145
90 000 200 000
70 000
this is 15 000 kg/h. 50 000
6
100 000
v3
90 000
K
pressure at the maximum flowrate, minus the boiler 40 000
example the available pressure drop is 1.5 bar. 30 000 70 000
60 000
Boiler feedwater lb/h (1 imperial gallon = 10 lb)

c) Select the larger Kv value, 16 in this example. If right on
the line, or if in doubt, select a larger Kv. 50 000
6
20 000
v1
2.3
40 000
K
Boiler feedwater flowrate kg/h
15 000
4. Selection of the actuator + valve adaptor
92 30 000
0
v1
K
maximum feedpump pressure to Class IV when the boiler is
not under pressure. 10 000
9 000 20 000
.3
v6
K
7 000
Actuator type PN9123E PN9223E
6 000
Maximum feedpump
Valve size Kv value 5 000
pressure bar g
v4
10 000
K
36.0 7 (5) 38 (36) 4 000 9 000
8 000
25.0 7 (5) 38 (36) 7 000
DN50 3 000
16.0 7 (5) 38 (36) 6 000
10.0 7 (5) 38 (36) 5 000
.6
2 000
16.0 29 (23) 40 (40) v1 4 000
K
10.0 29 (23) 40 (40)

DN32 3 000
6.3 29 (23) 40 (40)
v1
K
4.0 29 (23) 40 (40) 1 000
10.0 37 (29) 40 (40) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 10

Pressure drop across the fully open valve bar
6.3 37 (29) 40 (40)
DN25
4.0 37 (29) 40 (40)
1.6 37 (29) 40 (40)
6.3 40 (40) - -
4.0 40 (40) -
DN20
1.6 40 (40) - -
1.0 40 (40) - -
4.0 40 (40) - -
DN15 1.6 40 (40) -
1.0 40 (40) - -

These valves have a suffix 'H'.
5. Electropneumatic positioner
Valve stroke is 20 mm. Specify EP6 positioner (4 - 20 mA input).
CTLS Issue 5
Boiler house
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Level controls 2
TI-S75-06
AB Issue 3
Remote Alarm and Shutdown Panels

for Boilers
The requirements of PM5
The Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note PM5 'Automatically controlled steam and hot water boilers' specifies some requirements
for remote alarms and the remote shutdown of boilers.
Some of the relevant sections are:
Paragraph 50 ......... when a boiler is not continually supervised it is not enough to have an alarm on the boiler. Alarms should be provided
2.3
at points where they can be heard by persons who are competent to take appropriate action
Paragraph 51 ........ When a boiler is subject to partial supervision it is recommended that an emergency device which will shut off the
93
burners should be located remote from the boiler house and should be clearly marked. (See paragraph 13).
Paragraph 13 ......... there should always be someone available on site who is competent to respond to alarms, and to take appropriate
action which at a minimum, may be to shut the boiler down safely before calling for the assistance of a trained boiler attendant.
Remote alarm panel

These requirements can be met by the installation of a 'hard wired' remote alarm panel installed at a continuously manned location such
as a telephone exchange or security point. Suitable procedures should then be established and training given on the action to take in the
case of an alarm. A typical installation is shown below.
Equipment required
1. To be fitted in each boiler panel: Boiler house
1 off Transformer 240 V (or 110 V) to 48 V. Provides low
voltage power supply to panel.
1 off Boiler shutdown relay 48 V coil. Shuts down burner
when de-energised.
3 off Boiler alarm relays 240 V (or 110 V) coils. For
signalling 1st low, 2nd low and high level alarms. Multi-core cable, 4 cores per boiler
Any number of additional alarms may easily be Typically 1000 m long using standard cable
signalled.
1 off Key operated local /remote switch. Can be used to
prevent remote alarms during manual tests and
maintenance of the boiler. Alarm and shutdown panel in remote location
2. To be fitted at the remote location:

1 off Alarm and shutdown panel for one or more boilers. Incorporates for each boiler an alarm lamp, alarm buzzer, mute button with
relay and a mushroom headed stop button which latches in the stop position and can only be reset by a key. 4 terminals per boiler.
Three boiler alarm and shutdown panel shown.
Panel dimensions:
For 1 or 2 boilers 300 x 300 x 140 mm deep
For 3 or 4 boilers 500 x 400 x 140 mm deep
3. Cable
4 cores per boiler. PVC insulated, PVC sheathed, unscreened multi-core cable can be used. Cable lengths up to 1000 m are possible
using cable size 0.5 mm² per core. Longer lengths would require large cable. A suitable cable can be obtained from ESD Electronic
Services of Harlow in lengths up to 500 m, their type numbers are:
4 core 16-2-4 A 8 core 18-2-8 A 12 core 16-2-12 A 18 core 16-2-18 A
System operation
During normal operation the local /remote switches must be in 'remote'. The boiler alarm relays in each boiler panel are normally energised
which in turn keep the alarm relays in the remote panel energised and no lights show. In the case of a boiler alarm, the relays are
de-energised, the boiler alarm lamp in the remote panel lights and the buzzer sounds. The operator should then press the stop button
and may mute the buzzer. The alarm lamp continues to show whilst there is an alarm.
When the boiler attendant goes to the boiler house he should switch to 'local', rectify any faults on the boiler and set it running. The remote
stop button must then be reset with a key, and the switch in the boiler house returned to 'remote'.
If a boiler panel is switched off all power is removed from that section of the remote alarm panel so no boiler alarm is signalled. Similarly
when a boiler is switched to 'local' the alarm lamp and buzzer in the remote panel will not operate. In the case of a break in the cable the
boilers will be shut down immediately but could be restarted by switching to 'local' in the boiler house.
Testing
Any alarm system should be tested regularly. In the case of high integrity self-monitoring low level alarms, the remote panel can be tested
during the regular weekly test of the low level alarms.
Boiler house
TI-P402-121
AB Issue 5
DCV3/B
Boiler Feed Check Valve
Description
The Spirax Sarco DCV3/B boiler feed check valve is designed
specifically for use on boiler feedwater systems. It is a stainless
steel disc check valve with a soft EPDM seat to ensure tight
2.3 shut-off against boiler pressure, even under poor water
conditions. The DCV3/B is normally installed between flanges in
94 the boiler feed water line. Cast-in lugs on the valve body allow
the valve to be centralised easily. Face-to-face dimensions
conform to EN 558 part 1, series 49.
Note: The Spirax Sarco DCV3HE is similar in specification and
appearance, but has a slightly different seat design. We only
recommend the DCV3/B for boiler feedwater applications.
Standards
Designed and manufactured in accordance with BS 7438.
Standard shut-off
Shut-off standard meets EN 12266-1 rate A, providing a
differential pressure exists.
Certification
These products are available with a Typical Test Report. 5 3 4 2 1
The products are also available with certification to EN 10204 3.1.
Note: All certification / inspection requirements must be stated at
the time of order placement.
WARNING:
The DCV3/ B must not be used on any fluids categorised as
Group 1 according to the E.C. directive on the classification of
dangerous substances, e.g. explosive, flammable, toxic and
oxidising substances.

DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50. Materials
The valves are selected to suit the feedwater line size and are suitable
for installation between the following flanges:- No. Part Material
EN 1092 PN6, 10, 16, 25, 40 and BS 10 Table D, E, F, and H. 1 Body Austenitic stainless steel WS 1.4581
2 Disc Austenitic stainless steel BS 1449 316 S11
Pressure /temperature limits 3 Spring retainer Austenitic stainless steel BS 1449 316 S11
Body design conditions PN40 4 Spring Austenitic stainless steel BS 2056 316 S42
Maximum body design temperature 400°C 5 Seat EPDM
Minimum allowable temperature -10°C
Maximum boiler pressure 32 bar g Operation
Maximum feedpump pressure 40 bar g The DCV3/B is opened by the boiler feedwater pressure and is closed
Maximum feedwater temperature 120°C by its spring as soon as the flow ceases, preventing reverse flow.
The strong spring supports the head of water in an elevated feedtank
Maximum feedwater head 6m
when there is no pressure in the boiler, preventing the boiler flooding.
Approximate opening pressure 0.8 bar g A vacuum breaker is recommended on the boiler to prevent the valve
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of 60 bar g being drawn off its seat as the boiler cools.
Open Closed
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Kv values Dimensions /weights (approximate) in mm and kg
Size DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 Size A B C D Weight
Kv 6.8 10.8 17 26 43 DN20 69.5 53 45 19.0 0.19
For conversion: Cv (UK) = Kv x 0.963 Cv (US) = Kv x 1.156 DN25 80.5 63 55 22.0 0.32
DN32 90.5 75 68 28.0 0.55
Pressure drop (approximate) through the DCV3/B DN40 101.0 85 79 31.5 0.74
DN50 115.0 95 93 40.0 1.25
Locating lugs

2.3

95

Water flowrate in m3 /h

A
B

D
C

Pressure drop in bar

Warning
This document does not contain enough information to install
the DCV3/ B safely.
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions
supplied with the product.
Note: Flanges, bolts (or studs), nuts and joint gaskets are to be
provided by the installer. Disc check valves are non-maintainable
(no spares are available). Disc check valves are not suitable for use
where heavily pulsating flow exists.
Installation note:
The DCV3/B is installed in the feedwater line with the flow in the
direction of the arrow on the valve body. It may be installed in any
plane, and is sandwiched between flanges using suitable gaskets.
The valve is centralised by rotating it until the lugs on the body contact
the flange joint bolts. The valve must be installed at least 1 metre
from the feedpump.
It is essential that there is water on both sides of the valve at all
times – steam temperatures above 120°C will cause damage to the
EPDM seal.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN40 DCV3/B boiler feed check valve.
DCV3/B Boiler Feed Check Valve TI-P402-121 AB Issue 5

Boiler house
2 Level controls
2.3
96
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-23
EMM Issue 1
LCR2251
Level Controller
2.3
97
Description
The LCR2251 level controller is used in combination with the LP20/LP21/PA420 level transmitter as a limit switch and water level
controller, e.g. in steam and water boiler systems, or in condensate and feedwater tanks. The level controller indicates when a MIN and
MAX water level has been reached, and controls a control valve or pump.
The LCR2251 level controller processes the level-dependent current signal from the LP20/LP21/ PA420 level transmitter. This input
signal is recognised by the controller as 0 and 100 % of the boiler measuring range,and shown as an actual value on the 7-segment
LED display.
The controller is suitable for use with liquids having an electrical conductivity of 5 μS / cm or 5 ppm, when used with LP20/LP21
capacitance probe and PA420 level transmitter.
The level controller works with an electro-pneumatically actuated control valve as a continuous controller with proportional-plus-integral
control (PI controller). In the event of deviations from the setpoint, it outputs a current of 4-20 mA as manipulated variable Y.
Alternatively the controller can be configured to control a pump (on/off control) and transmit a 4 - 20 mA to provide an external level
indication (actual value output).
The controller can be configured for fill or discharge control.
If the MIN or MAX water level is reached, after the de-energizing delay the MIN or MAX output contact switches over in the level
controller, and the MIN or MAX LED lights up.
Faults in the level transmitter, the electrical connection or the settings are indicated as error codes on the 7-segment LED display. In
the event of a malfunction, the MIN and MAX alarm is triggered.
If faults occur only in the LCR2251 level controller, the MIN and MAX alarm is triggered and the system is restarted.
Parameters can be changed or the MIN/MAX alarm simulated by operating the push buttons.
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
2 Level controls
The LCR2251 level controller, in combination with the LP20/LP21/PA420 level transmitter, is type approved to the VdTÜV Bulletin "Water
Level 100".
The VdTÜV "Wasserstand (=Water Level) 100" describes therequirements for water level control and limiting equipment for boilers.

The equipment conforms to the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU and the EMC Directive 2014/30/EU.

The equipment must not be used in potentially explosive atmospheres, in accordance with European Directive 2014/34/EU.
- Steam and Water Boilers
- Condensate and Feedwater tanks
2.3
Dimensions
98 (approximate) in mm
46 120
1
4
3
74
Item
3 Housing

The LCR2251 level controller is clipped onto a type TH 35, EN60715 support rail into a control cabinet, item 4.
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Wiring diagram
1 2 3
2.3
99
8
0.5 A (semi- delay)
7
7
2 1 E
4 5
6
Item
1 MIN output contact, de-energizing delay 3 seconds
2 Pump output contact. Not used in continuous controller
3 MAX output contact, de-energizing delay 3 seconds
4 Supply voltage connection 24 Vdc with semi-delay fuse 0.5 A provided on site
5 Output 4-20 mA, manipulated variable Y for continuous controller or actual value output for ON/ OFF controller (pump control)
6 Level transmitter LP20/LP21/PA420, 4-20 mA
7 Earthing point at auxilliary equipment (e.g.PA420/LP20/LP21)
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Technical data LCR2251
Connection of level
1 analogue input 4-20 mA, e.g. for LP20/LP21/PA420 level transmitter, 2 poles and screen.
transmitter
Supply voltage to level

12 Vdc/max. 20 mA
transmitter
2 floating changeover contacts, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1. De-energizing delay 3 seconds (MIN/
MAX alarm)
Outputs: 1 floating open/close contact, 8 A 250 Vac/30 Vdc cos f = 1 (pump on/off control)
1 analogue output 4-20 mA, max. load 500 ohms (manipulated variable Y or actual value)
Inductive loads must have interference suppression (RC combination) as per the manufacturer's specification
2.3 3 push buttons for MIN/MAX alarm test and parameter setting
1 green 4-digit 7-segment LED display
100 Displays and controls 2 red LEDs for MIN/MAX alarm
1 amber LED for pump active or manipulated variable Y

1 x 2.5 mm 2 per lead with sleeve to DIN 46228, or
Housing
2 x 1.5 mm 2 per lead with sleeve to DIN 46228 (min. Ø 0.1 mm)
Electrical safety Degree of contamination 2 for installation in control cabinet with degree of protection IP 54, fully insulated
Degree of protection Housing: IP 40 to EN 60529 Terminal strip: IP 20 to EN 60529
At moment of switch-on 0 ° ... 55 °C

Ambient temperature
In operation –10 ... 55 °C
Transport temperature –20 ... +80 °C (<100 hours), only switch on after a defrosting period of 24 hours
Storage temperature –20 ... +70 °C, only switch on after a defrosting period of 24 hours
How to specify
Continuous PI or ON/OFF level controller with MIN and MAX alarm, 2 volt-free change-over contacts for MIN and MAX alarm, 1 volt-
free relay contact for pump / valve control, supply voltage 24V DC 4W.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco LCR2251 level controller.
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-693-27
EMM Issue 1
LCS3051
High Water Level Switch
Description
The level switch LCS3051 is used in conjunction with level probe LP41 as high level alarm in steam boilers and (pressurised) hot-
water plants. A high level alarm prevents the water level from exceeding the preset max. water level (HW) and for this purpose
switches off e.g. the feedwater supply.
The level switch LCS3051 is designed for connecting one level probe.
2.3
When the water level exceeds the MAX limit, the level probe enters the liquid and an alarm is triggered in the level switch. This
101
switchpoint is determined by the length of the probe rod (level probe LP41).
After the de-energizing delay has elapsed, both output contacts of the level switch will open the safety circuit, e. g. for the feedwater
supply. If the deactivation of the feedwater supply is interlocked in the external safety circuit, the lockout can only be deactivated
when the level probe is exposed again.
An alarm will also be raised if a malfunction occurs in the level probe and/or the electrical connection. An automatic self-testing
routine monitors the safety functions of the level switch. In the event of a malfunction the safety circuit opens instantaneously and
switches off e. g. the feedwater supply.
Alarm and malfunction messages are indicated by LEDs, and the signal output is instantaneously energized.
An alarm can be simulated by pressing a test button.

The level switch LCS3051 in conjunction with level probe LP41 is EU type
approved according to EN 12952/ EN 12953. These Directives state, among
other things, the requirements made on limiting systems and equipment for
steam boiler plants and (pressurised) hot-water installations.

The level switch LCS3051 is certified according to IEC 61508 only if used in
combination with level probe LP41. This standard describes the functional safety
of safety-related electrical/electronic/programmable electronic systems. The
equipment combination LP41 + LCS3051 corresponds to a type B subsystem
with Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 2.

The level switch LCS3051 in conjunction with the level probe LP41 is type approved according to the VdTÜV Bulletin "Water Level
100". The VdTÜV Bulletin “Wasserstand (Water Level) 100” specifies the requirements made on water level control and limiting
equipment for boilers.


- Steam boilers
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
2 Level controls
Electrical connection of level probe 1 input for level probe LP40, 4 poles, with screen
> 10 ... < 10000 μS/cm

Safety circuit
2.3 Signal output

1 volt-free output for instantaneous external signalling, 24 Vdc, max. 100 mA
102 1 button for test and diagnosis
Indicators and adjustors 1 red/green LED for indicating the operating mode and alarm
Conductor size: 1 x 4.0 mm 2 solid per wire or

Housing
Protection

Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
operation: 24 hours
Page 2 of 4 TI-693-27
EMM Issue 1
LCS3051 High Water Level Switch
Boiler house
Level controls 2
Wiring diagram
1 2
3 3
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
2.3
103
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
6 LP41
Item
1 Power supply
2 Signal output 1 for external alarm 24 Vdc, 100mA (semiconductor output)
4 Wire link, fitted on site, when used as high water level alarm acc. to EN 12952/EN 12953
6 Level probe LP41
TI-693-27 Page 3 of 4
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
2 Level controls
100
4
5
73
1 118
2.3
104
2 3
Item
4 Enclosure
How to specify
High Water Level Switch for one probe, 2 volt-free make contacts for safety circuit, 1 signal output for external alarm, supply
voltage 24 V DC, 7 W.
How to order
Page 4 of 4 TI-693-27
EMM Issue 1
Boiler house
Level controls
TI-P693-28
EMM Issue 1
PA420
Preamplifier
Description Materials
The PA420 preamplifier, used with a Spirax Sarco capacitance
probe, is a loop powered two wire 4 - 20 mA level transmitter.
It amplifies the capacitance measured and converts it to a
4 - 20 mA output proportional to the liquid level. It is compatible
with all Spirax Sarco current input controllers/transmitters.
2.3
The preamplifier consists of a tubular austenitic stainless steel
body which screws onto the top of the probe, and has a Type A 2
105
EN 175301-803 (DIN 43650)/ISO 4400 connector with Pg 11
cable gland. The PA420 has two buttons and a dual coloured
light (red and green) for use during commissioning. 3
Principal features:
- Compact, rigidly mounted.
1
- Can be removed/replaced without disturbing the probe.
- No maintenance needed. 4
- Suitable for all probe lengths (370 - 1 500 mm).
Approvals:
- TÜV, VdTÜV-Merkblatt, Wasserstand 100 - 2017.
- Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU.

Caution: No Part Material
The probe is not suitable for outside installation without
additional environmental protection. 1 Body Austenitic stainless steel 300 series
2 Cable connector Polyamide (Glass filled)

Limiting conditions 3 Connector gasket Silicone rubber
Ambient temperature range 0 - 70 °C
Pollution degree 3
Water conductivity 5 µS / cm or 5 ppm
Maximum cable length 100 m (screened)
Technical data
Voltage drop (across the device) 9 - 26.4 Vdc
Loop current 4 - 20 mA
Maximum load 500 Ω
Linearity 2% FSD
Isolation 100 Vdc (capacitive)

Boiler house
2 Level controls
39 mm Pg 11 cable gland
Withdrawal distance for cable socket 15 mm
105 mm
2.3
106
½" BSP
5 mm Weight
approximately 0.25 kg
Ø28
mm

This document does not contain sufficient information to install the product safely. See the Installation and Maintenance
Instructions provided with each unit.
Installation note:
The PA420 is screwed into the top of the capacitance probe and hand tightened. An 'O' ring is supplied to provide a seal. An 'O' ring
is also supplied with the probe. Use only one 'O' ring.
Caution: Do not install the probe outdoors without additional weather protection.
Maintenance note:
Spare parts
There are no available spare parts for this unit.
How to specify
Preamplifiers shall be Spirax Sarco type PA420 for use with Spirax Sarco capacitance probes. Preamplifiers shall have austenitic
stainless steel bodies and a screwed connection, with a DIN 43650 connector and Pg 11 cable gland.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco PA420 preamplifier.
TI-P693-28
EMM Issue 1
PA420 Preamplifier
Boiler house
TDS blowdown controls
2
TI-P403-57
AB Issue 4
BCS1
Pipeline Set
Blowdown Please note:
from The inter connecting pipework is to be supplied by the customer.
boiler
M10 ball valve

2.4
¼" BSP plug
1
BCV1 blowdown valve
Fig 12 strainer
PT2 plug tail

LCV1 check valve
CP10 sensor
S10 sensor chamber
Description
The BCS1 pipeline set is a kit of components selected to enable
straightforward installation of a TDS control system where the probe
assembly is to be mounted in the pipeline, rather than directly in M10 ball valve
the boiler shell.
The BCS1 pipeline set consists of the following items:-
1 x S10 sensor chamber ½" BSP. Blowdown
1 x CP10 sensor and gasket. to heat recovery system
1 x PT2 plug tail.
1 x Sensor chamber plug ¼" BSP.
1 x BCV1 solenoid valve ½" BSP, 230 V. Pressure / temperature limits
1 x LCV1 check valve ½" BSP. Maximum boiler pressure 14 bar g.
1 x Fig 12 SG iron strainer ½" BSP. Capacities
2 x M10 ball valves ½" BSP. The capacity of the system is limited by the blowdown valve capacity
Alternative products are available, but not as part of a kit. at various boiler pressures.
A controller is also required, and should be selected from the Spirax
Sarco range. Boiler Low to medium Medium to high
The BC3150 and BC3250 are both suitable, and offer a choice of pressure flowrates flowrates
features. Full details are available in separate literature. (bar g) (Standard setting*) (High setting*)
1 60 175
Principal features:
2 85 250
- For TDS systems with probe in pipeline.
- Complete pipeline kit - choice of controller. 4 115 350
- Suitable for boiler pressures of 14 bar g. 6 130 385
- For blowdown rates up to 590 kg / h.
8 150 445
Weight 10 165 495
Boxed kit approximately 3.7 kg.
14 200 590
Materials * At 'Standard setting' the controller is set to open the valve for
S10 sensor chamber Stainless steel BS 970 303 S31 10 seconds every 30 seconds.
When blowing down at 'High setting' the controller opens the valve
CP10 sensor body and pin Stainless steel BS 970 303 S31 continuously.
PT2 plug tail Brass body
Sensor chamber plug Carbon steel Electrical data
BCV1 solenoid (blowdown) valve
Brass body, stainless steel seat,
BCV1 solenoid valve Voltage range 209 V to 264 V
PTFE seal.
LCV1 check valve Bronze Frequency range 50 to 60 Hz
Fig 12 strainer SG iron 40 VA (inrush)
Power consumption
M10 ball valve Zinc plated forged carbon steel 16 VA /10 W (hold)
See individual product literature for further information. Protection rating IP65
Boiler house
2 TDS blowdown controls

For full details see the installation and maintenance instructions supplied with the product.
Warning:
The BCV1 valve and CP10 sensor contain PTFE which can give off toxic fumes if exposed to excessive heat.
Installation note:
The products contained in the BCS1 pipeline set are designed and constructed to withstand the forces encountered during normal use.
Use of the BCS1 pipeline set other than for the control of TDS could cause damage to the products and may cause injury or fatality to personnel.
Spare parts
Armature and spring set for the BCV1 blowdown valve (kit) Stock No. 4034080
How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco BCS1 pipeline set.
2.4
2
TI-P403-57 AB Issue 4 BCS1 Pipeline Set

Boiler house

TI-P403-60
EMM Issue 6
BCV1 and BCV20

Blowdown Valves
Description
The BCV1 and BCV20 valves are small bore, normally closed
valves with a brass body and corrosion resistant internal
components. They are primarily intended for low and medium
pressure boiler blowdown applications. 2.4
BCV1 and BCV20 valves are identical apart from the orifice size,
the BCV1 having a 3 mm (1/8") orifice and the BCV20 a 6 mm (¼")
orifice. Valves are supplied complete with a mains connector,
3
which is protected to IP65 and is suitable for 3 x 1 mm² (18 AWG)
cable.
Available sizes and pipe connections

½" screwed BSP - 230 V version
½" screwed BSP - 110 V version
½" screwed NPT - 120 V version
Electrical data
230 V version 207 V to 253 V
Frequency 50 - 60 Hz
40 VA (inrush)
Maximum power consumption
16 VA/12 W (hold)
Protection rating IP65 (Nema 4)
Materials
Body Brass
Soft seal PTFE
Internal components Stainless steel
Limiting conditions
Blowdown valves BCV1 BCV20
Maximum boiler or steam pressure -
14 bar g 203 psi g 4 bar g 58 psi g
Intermittent operation
Medium temperature range - 40 to +200 °C - 40 to +392 °F - 40 to +180 °C - 40 to +356 °F
Maximum ambient temperature 55 °C 130 °F 55 °C 130 °F
Medium Water and steam Water and steam
Page 1 of 3
Boiler house
Dimensions/weight (approximate) in mm (ins) and kg (Ibs)
A B C D E Weight
40 110 74.5 94.5 73 0.75

(1.57) (4.33) (2.93) (3.72) (2.87) (1.65)
E
A
D
B
½" BSP/NPT ½" BSP/NPT
2.4
4
C
Capacities
Model BCV1 BCV20
For conversion:
Orifice size 3 mm (1/8") 6 mm (¼") C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Kv value 0.25 0.8
When used for boiler blowdown Boiler pressure Capacities

purposes, the valve will be
controlling a mixture of water BCV1 BCV20
and flash steam, so the
bar g psi g kg / h lb / h kg / h lb / h
following capacity table
applies: 1 14.5 175 385 560 1 232
2 29 250 550 790 1 738
4 58 350 770 1 120 2 464
6 87 385 847
8 116 445 979
10 145 495 1 089
14 203 590 1 298
When the BCV20 valve is used Head across valve Capacities

as part of the BCS2 blowdown
control system, downstream of Cold water Hot water with flash steam
a steam trap, the following
m ft kg / h lb / h kg / h lb / h
capacity table applies:
1 3 253 557 63 138
2 6 358 787 90 198
3 9 438 963 110 242
5 15 566 1 245 142 312
10 30 800 1 760 200 440
EMM Issue 6
BCV1 and BCV20 Blowdown Valves
Boiler house
TDS blowdown controls 2
How to specify
BCV1
Solenoid valves shall be Spirax Sarco normally closed blowdown valve type BCV1 with brass bodies and stainless steel valve seat with
a PTFE seal.
BCV20
Solenoid valves shall be Spirax Sarco normally closed, low pressure blowdown valve type BCV20 with brass bodies and stainless steel
valve seat with a PTFE seal.
Spare parts
Available spares
Armature and spring set (kit). Stock No. 4034080
Solenoid coil 230 V Stock No. 4034081 2.4

Solenoid coil 110/120 V Stock No. 4034082
5
How to order spares
Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the valve type.
Example: 1 off Armature and spring set (Stock No. 4034080) for a Spirax Spirax BCV20 blowdown valve.
Solenoid coil
Spring
Armature with PTFE valve seat
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco BCV1 or BCV20 blowdown valve having screwed BSP connections, 230 V 50-60 Hz.
EMM Issue 6
BCV1 and BCV20 Blowdown Valves
Boiler house
2.4
6
Boiler house

TI-P403-102
EMM Issue 6
BCV
Blowdown Control Valves
DN15 to DN50 (½" to 2")
Description
Spirax Sarco's BCV blowdown control valves are manufactured using the market proven Spira-trolTM body. These valves have been
specifically designed for the blowdown of steam boilers or for other high pressure drop, low flow applications, and are generally used
with a blowdown controller as part of an automatic BCV control system.
The flowrate is adjusted by setting the stroke of the valve spindle.
These valves have been specially designed to minimize seat
2.4
erosion and ensure consistent tight shut-off.
A ¼" BSP plug at the base of the valve may be removed to allow
7
a sample cooler to be fitted.
Two versions are available:
- Electrohydraulically actuated BCV blowdown control valve.
- Pneumatically actuated BCV blowdown control valve. Electrohydraulically
actuated
Available models:
Connections
Material
Screwed Socket weld Flanged Butt weld
Carbon steel BCV41 BCV42 BCV43 BCV44
Stainless steel BCV61 BCV62 BCV63 BCV64
SG iron BCV71 BCV73
Alloy steel BCV82 BCV83 BCV84
Spira-trol TM valve body options:

Graphite
Stem sealing High temperature applications
packing
Hard 316L stainless steel with Stellite

Seating
facing 6 facing
BCV blowdown control valves are compatible with

the following actuators:
Version Actuator
Electric AEL3 series
Pneumatic PN9_ _ _ series
Pneumatically
actuated
Operation
BCV blowdown control valves are supplied loaded to the
closed position.
Electrical version: When the power is connected to the actuator
the valve opens to the position set by the internal limit switch.
Pneumatic version: When the solenoid valve opens, air is
admitted to the actuator activating the valve to open to the
selected stroke.
Page 1 of 14
Boiler house
Standards
These products fully comply with the requirements of the EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment (Safety) Regulations.
Certification
These products are available with material certification to EN 10204 3.1.
Note: All certification/inspection requirements must be stated at the time of order placement.
Size and pipe connections

½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½" and 2" Screwed BSP or NPT, Socket weld and Butt weld.
DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50 Flanged:

EN 1092 PN25, PN40, PN63 and PN100
ASME class 125, 150, 250, 300 and 600
JIS / KS 10K, 20K, 30K and 40K
Materials
2.4 No. Part Material
8 Carbon steel 1.0619+N/WCB
Stainless steel 1.4408/CF8M

1 Body
SG iron EN-GJS-400-18-LT/A395
Alloy steel 1.7357/WC6
Forged steel 1.0460/A105N or 1.0619/WCB
Stainless steel 1.4408/CF8M

2 Bonnet
SG iron EN-GJS-400-18-LT/A395
Alloy steel 1.7357/WC6
3 Seat
Stainless steel 316L
retainer
4 Seat Stainless steel 316L with Stellite

Please note that the spare
5 Plug Stainless steel 316L with Stellite par ts available for the
blowdown control valve are
the same for both the:
- electrically and
- pneumatically
actuated versions.
Page 2 of 14 TI-P403-102
EMM Issue 6
BCV Blowdown Control Valves DN15 to DN50 (½" to 2")
Boiler house
Electrical data
Actuator AEL3 series
Supply voltage Standard 24 Vac/dc, Optional card 230 Vac and 110 Vac
Supply frequency 50 to 60 Hz
Power consumption 10 to 18
Actuator speed 2 mm / s, 4 mm / s or 6 mm / s
Actuators thrust maximum 2 kN
Size Actuator Maximum shut-off value
DN15 to DN25 ½" to 1" AEL3 series/PN9123E-B

103.4 bar g
DN32 to DN50 1¼" to 2" AEL3 series/PN9223E-B 2.4
9
Warnings:
If the temperature of the medium in the valve is high, the drive columns and the shaft may also reach high temperatures.
High Temperature Extension:

The extension kit is to be used on applications above 130 °C to
up to 240 °C. There are two kit options of up to 180 °C and another
for up to 240 °C
1. Unscrew the actuator mounting plate screws for pillars.
2. Screw the extension pillars into actuator pillars and tighten

to 12 Nm.
3. Screw the actuator mounting plate screws into pillars and

tighten to 25 Nm.
4. Mount the coupling extension into the actuator coupling until

it snaps closed.
High temperature
extension kit
for up to 180 °C
High temperature
extension kit
for up to 240 °C
TI-P403-102 Page 3 of 14
EMM Issue 6
Boiler house
Pressure/temperature limits – BCV4_
PN40, PN63 or PN100 ASME class 150, class 300
Body design conditions:
JIS / KS 20K, 30K or 40K or ASME class 600
PN40 40 bar g @ 50 °C
EN PN63 63 bar g @ 50 °C
PN100 100 bar g @ 50 °C
ASME 150 19.6 bar g @ 38 °C 284 psi g @ 100 °F
PMA Maximum allowable pressure ASME ASME 300 51.1 bar g @ 38 °C 741 psi g @ 100 °F
ASME 600 102.1 bar g @ 38 °C 1 480 psi g @ 100 °F
JIS / KS 20K 34 bar g @ 120 °C
JIS / KS JIS / KS 30K 51 bar g @ 120 °C
JIS / KS 40K 68 bar g @ 120 °C
PN40 300 °C @ 27.6 bar g
EN PN63 400 °C @ 37.5 bar g
2.4 PN100
ASME 150
400 °C @ 59.5 bar g
425 °C @ 5.5 bar g 797 °F @ 80 psi g
10 TMA Maximum allowable temperature ASME ASME 300

ASME 600
425 °C @ 28.8 bar g
425 °C @ 57.5 bar g
797 °F @ 418 psi g
797 °F @ 834 psi g
JIS / KS 20K 300 °C @ 20 bar g
JIS / KS JIS / KS 30K 425 °C @ 30 bar g
JIS / KS 40K 425 °C @ 40 bar g
PN40 -10 °C
EN PN63 -29 °C
PN100 -29 °C
ASME 150 -29 °C -20 °F
Minimum allowable temperature ASME ASME 300 -29 °C -20 °F
ASME 600 -29 °C -20 °F
JIS / KS 20K -10 °C
JIS / KS JIS / KS 30K -29 °C
JIS / KS 40K -29 °C
PN40 31.1 bar g @ 237 °C
EN PN63 47.0 bar g @ 261 °C
PN100 70.8 bar g @ 287 °C
ASME 150 13.9 bar g @ 197 °C 201 psi g @ 386 °F
Maximum operating pressure for
PMO
saturated steam service ASME ASME 300 41.7 bar g @ 254 °C 605 psi g @ 489 °F
ASME 600 80.0 bar g @ 295 °C 1 160 psi g @ 563 °F
JIS / KS 20K 30.6 bar g @ 236 °C
JIS / KS JIS / KS 30K 44.6 bar g @ 258 °C
JIS / KS 40K 58.5 bar g @ 276 °C
PN40 300 °C @ 27.6 bar g
EN PN63 400 °C @ 37.5 bar g
PN100 400 °C @ 59.5 bar g
ASME 150 425 °C @ 5.5 bar g 797 °F @ 80 psi g
TMO Maximum operating temperature ASME ASME 300 425 °C @ 28.8 bar g 797 °F @ 418 psi g
ASME 600 425 °C @ 57.5 bar g 797 °F @ 834 psi g
JIS / KS 20K 300 °C @ 20 bar g
JIS / KS 40K 425 °C @ 40 bar g
PN40 -10 °C
EN PN63 -29 °C
PN100 -29 °C
ASME 150 -29 °C -20 °F
Minimum operating temperature ASME ASME 300 -29 °C -20 °F
ASME 600 -29 °C -20 °F
JIS / KS 20K -10 °C
JIS / KS 40K -29 °C
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 1.5 x PMA of the relative end connection of choice
Page 4 of 14 TI-P403-102
EMM Issue 6
Boiler house

B C D
Temperature °C

A
BCV41 Screwed BSP
Steam
BCV43 Flanged EN 1092 saturation
curve

A A
C D

Pressure bar g
The product must not be used in this region.
2.4
A - B Flanged EN 1092 PN40 and Screwed BSP
B - C Flanged EN 1092 PN63
B - D Flanged EN 1092 PN100

11
Pressure psi g

E G H
Temperature °F
Temperature °C
BCV41 Screwed NPT

BCV42 Socket weld
Steam
BCV43 Flanged ASME saturation

BCV44 Butt weld curve
F G H

Pressure bar g

E-F Flanged ASME class 150
E - G Flanged ASME class 300, Screwed NPT and Socket weld class 3000 (B 16.11)
E - H Flanged ASME class 600, Socket weld class 6000 (B 16.11) and Butt weld

K L M
Temperature °C

J
BCV43 Flanged JIS / KS
Steam
saturation
curve
J J
L M

Pressure bar g

J-J Flanged JIS / KS 20K
K - K Flanged JIS / KS 30K
L-L Flanged JIS / KS 40K
TI-P403-102 Page 5 of 14
EMM Issue 6
Boiler house
PN40, PN63 or PN100 ASME class 150, class
JIS / KS 20K, 30K or 40K 300 or ASME class 600
PN40 40 bar g @ 100 °C
EN PN63 63 bar g @ 100 °C
PN100 100 bar g @ 100 °C
ASME 150 19.0 bar g @ 38 °C 275 psi g @ 100 °F
PMA Maximum allowable pressure ASME ASME 300 49.6 bar g @ 38 °C 719 psi g @ 100 °F
ASME 600 99.3 bar g @ 38 °C 1 440 psi g @ 100 °F
JIS / KS 20K 34 bar g @ 120 °C
JIS / KS JIS / KS 30K 51 bar g @ 120 °C
JIS / KS 40K 68 bar g @ 120 °C
PN40 400 °C @ 27.4 bar g
EN PN63 580 °C @ 39.5 bar g
2.4 PN100
ASME 150
580 °C @ 62.7 bar g
538 °C @ 1.4 bar g 1 000 °F @ 20 psi g
12 TMA Maximum allowable temperature ASME ASME 300

ASME 600
538 °C @ 25.2 bar g
538 °C @ 50.0 bar g
1 000 °F @ 365 psi g
1 000 °F @ 725 psi g
JIS / KS 20K 425 °C @ 20 bar g
JIS / KS 40K 490 °C @ 40 bar g
PN40 -10 °C
EN PN63 -29 °C
PN100 -29 °C
ASME 150 -29 °C -20 °F
ASME 600 -29 °C -20 °F
JIS / KS 20K -10 °C
JIS / KS 40K -29 °C
PN40 32.2 bar g @ 240 °C
EN PN63 49.2 bar g @ 264 °C
PN100 75.1 bar g @ 291 °C
ASME 150 13.8 bar g @ 197 °C 200 psi g @ 386 °F
PMO
saturated steam service ASME ASME 300 33.8 bar g @ 242 °C 490 psi g @ 467 °F
ASME 600 64.6 bar g @ 281 °C 937 psi g @ 538 °F
JIS / KS 20K 30.6 bar g @ 236 °C
JIS / KS 40K 58.5 bar g @ 276 °C
PN40 400 °C @ 27.4 bar g
EN PN63 580 °C @ 39.5 bar g
PN100 580 °C @ 62.7 bar g
ASME 150 538 °C @ 1.4 bar g 1 000 °F @ 20 psi g
TMO Maximum operating temperature ASME ASME 300 538 °C @ 25.2 bar g 1 000 °F @ 365 psi g
ASME 600 538 °C @ 50.0 bar g 1 000 °F @ 725 psi g
JIS / KS 20K 425 °C @ 20 bar g
JIS / KS 40K 490 °C @ 40 bar g
PN40 -10 °C
EN PN63 -29 °C
PN100 -29 °C
ASME 150 -29 °C -20 °F
ASME 600 -29 °C -20 °F
JIS / KS 20K -10 °C
JIS / KS 40K -29 °C
Page 6 of 14 TI-P403-102
EMM Issue 6
Boiler house

B C D
Temperature °C

A
BCV61 Screwed BSP
BCV63 Flanged EN 1092
Steam

saturation
A curve A

C D

Pressure bar g

2.4
B - C Flanged EN 1092 PN63
B - D Flanged EN 1092 PN100

13
Pressure psi g
E

Temperature °F
Temperature °C
F G H
BCV61 Screwed NPT

BCV62 Socket weld

BCV63 Flanged ASME Steam
saturation
BCV64 Butt weld curve

F G H

Pressure bar g

E-F Flanged ASME class 150
E - G Flanged ASME class 300, Screwed NPT and Socket weld class 3000 (B 16.11)
E - H Flanged ASME class 600, Socket weld and Butt weld class 6000 (B 16.11)
K L M

Temperature °C
J

BCV63 Flanged JIS / KS
Steam
saturation
J curve
J
L M

Pressure bar g

J-J Flanged JIS / KS 20K
K - L Flanged JIS / KS 30K
K - M Flanged JIS / KS 40K
TI-P403-102 Page 7 of 14
EMM Issue 6
Boiler house
PN25 ASME class 125 or

JIS / KS 10K ASME class 250
EN PN25 25.0 bar g @ 120 °C
ASME 125 11.5 bar g @ 140 °C 166 psi g @ 284 °F

PMA Maximum allowable pressure ASME
ASME 250 26.7 bar g @ 140 °C 387 psi g @ 284 °F
EN PN25 300 °C @ 20 bar g
ASME 125 232 °C @ 8.6 bar g 449 °F @ 125 psi g

TMA Maximum allowable temperature ASME
ASME 250 232 °C @ 17.2 bar g 449 °F @ 249 psi g
2.4 JIS / KS JIS / KS 10K 300 °C @ 9.8 bar g
14 EN PN25 -10 °C
ASME 125 -29 °C -20 °F

Minimum allowable temperature ASME
ASME 250 -29 °C -20 °F
EN PN25 22.5 bar g @ 220 °C
Maximum operating pressure for ASME 125 10.0 bar g @ 184 °C 145 psi g @ 363 °F
PMO
saturated steam service ASME
ASME 250 18.0 bar g @ 209 °C 261 psi g @ 408 °F
EN PN25 300 °C @ 20.0 bar g
ASME 125 232 °C @ 8.6 bar g 449 °F @ 125 psi g

TMO Maximum operating temperature ASME
ASME 250 232 °C @ 17.2 bar g 449 °F @ 249 psi g
JIS / KS JIS / KS 10K 300 °C @ 9.8 bar g
EN PN25 -10 °C
ASME 125 -29 °C -20 °F

Minimum operating temperature ASME
ASME 250 -29 °C -20 °F
Page 8 of 14 TI-P403-102
EMM Issue 6
Boiler house

A B
Temperature °C

BCV71 Screwed BSP Steam
BCV73 Flanged EN 1092 saturation
curve

B

Pressure bar g

2.4
15
Pressure psi g
E

C D
Temperature °F
Temperature °C

BCV71 Screwed NPT Steam
saturation
BCV73 Flanged ASME curve

D E

Pressure bar g

C - D Flanged ASME class 125
C - E Flanged ASME class 250 and Screwed NPT

F G
Temperature °C

BCV73 Flanged JIS/KS
Steam
saturation
curve
G

Pressure bar g

F - G Flanged JIS / KS 10K
TI-P403-102 Page 9 of 14
EMM Issue 6
Boiler house
PN63 or PN100
Body design conditions: ASME class 600
JIS / KS 30K or 40K
PN63 63 bar g @ 300 °C

EN
PN100 100 bar g @ 300 °C
PMA Maximum allowable pressure ASME ASME 600 103.4 bar g @ 50 °C 1 500 psi g @ 122 °F
JIS / KS 30K 51 bar g @ 120 °C

JIS / KS
JIS / KS 40K 68 bar g @ 120 °C
PN63 490 °C @ 42.8 bar g

EN
PN100 490 °C @ 68.0 bar g
2.4 TMA Maximum allowable temperature ASME ASME 600 538 °C @ 29.8 bar g 1 000 °F @ 432 psi g
16 JIS / KS 30K 490 °C @ 30.0 bar g

JIS / KS
JIS / KS 40K 510 °C @ 40.0 bar g
PN63 -29 °C
EN
PN100 -29 °C
JIS / KS 30K -29 °C

JIS / KS
JIS / KS 40K -29 °C
PN63 63.0 bar g @ 280 °C

EN
PN100 99.0 bar g @ 310 °C
PMO
saturated steam service ASME ASME 600 85.7 bar g @ 300 °C 1 243 psi g @ 572 °F
JIS / KS 30K 44.6 bar g @ 257 °C

JIS / KS
JIS / KS 40K 58.6 bar g @ 274 °C
PN63 490 °C @ 42.8 bar g

EN
PN100 490 °C @ 68.0 bar g
TMO Maximum operating temperature ASME ASME 600 538 °C @ 29.8 bar g 1 000 °F @ 432 psi g
JIS / KS 30K 490 °C @ 30.0 bar g

JIS / KS
JIS / KS 40K 510 °C @ 40.0 bar g
PN63 -29 °C
EN
PN100 -29 °C
JIS / KS 30K -29 °C

JIS / KS
JIS / KS 40K -29 °C
Page 10 of 14 TI-P403-102
EMM Issue 6
Boiler house

A B C

Temperature °C

BCV83 Flanged EN 1092
Steam
saturation
curve
B C

Pressure bar g

A - B Flanged EN 1092 PN63
A - C Flanged EN 1092 PN100

2.4
17
Pressure psi g

D E
Temperature °F
Temperature °C

BCV82 Socket weld
BCV83 Flanged ASME Steam
BCV84 Butt weld saturation
curve
E

Pressure bar g

D - E Flanged ASME class 600, socket weld and butt weld
G H

F
Temperature °C

BCV83 Flanged JIS/KS Steam
saturation
curve
F H

Pressure bar g

F-F Flanged JIS / KS 20K
G - H Flanged JIS / KS 30K
Kvs values
Valve size DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50
Kvs value 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.6 1.6 1.6
For conversion: C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
TI-P403-102 Page 11 of 14
EMM Issue 6
Boiler house
DN DN DN DN DN DN C1
Size ASME PN
15 20 25 32 40 50
JIS/KS
125 - - 184 - 222 254
10K
JIS/KS
300 190.5 197 - 235 267
20K
JIS/KS
A 30K
600 203 206 210 251 251 286
JIS/KS
40K
Pneumatic
40 130 150 160 180 200 230 actuation
100 210 230 260 260 300
125 JIS/KS B1
10K
2.4 300
JIS/KS
392 421 416
40 20K
18 B
JIS/KS
30K
600 100 422 449
JIS/KS
40K
125 JIS/KS
10K
300 378 432 427
JIS/KS
40 20K
B1
JIS/KS
30K D
600 100 408 460
JIS/KS
40K
C 230
C
C1 170 300
125 JIS/KS
10K
300 42.5 57.0 54.5 65.5 76.5 84.5
JIS/KS
40 20K
D
JIS/KS
30K
600 100 49.5 56.5 71.5 85.5
JIS/KS
40K
Electric
Weight actuation
125 JIS/KS
B
10K
300 12 12.8 13 19.5 20 23
JIS/KS
40 20K
Electric
version
JIS/KS
30K
600 100 16 18 19 25 28 33
JIS/KS
40K
125 JIS/KS
10K
300 12 12.8 13 30.5 31 34
JIS/KS
40 20K
Pneumatic
version
JIS/KS
30K D
600 100 16 18 19 36 39 44
JIS/KS
40K
A
Page 12 of 14 TI-P403-102
EMM Issue 6
Boiler house
BCV selection guide
DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50

Valve size DN15
½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½" and 2"
Valve series BCV BCV
4 = Carbon steel
6 = Stainless steel
Body material 4
7 = SG iron
8 = Alloy steel
1 = Screwed - Not available for the BCV8_

2 = Socket weld - Not available for the BCV7_
Connections 3
3
4
=
=
Flanged
Butt weld - Not available for the BCV7_ 2.4
19
Stem sealing H = Graphite H
Seating W = Stainless Steel 316L with Stellite W
Type of trim S = Standard trim S
Trim-balancing U = Unbalanced U
Bonnet type S = Standard S
Bolting S = Standard S
Flow coefficient To be specified Kvs 0.5
Connection type To be specified Flanged ASME 300
PN = Pneumatic
Actuation PN
230 Vac,
EL = Electrical 110 Vac or
24 Vac/dc
Selection example
Flanged
DN15 - BCV 4 3 H W S U S S - Kvs 0.5 - ASME 300
PN
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN15 BCV43 pneumatically actuated control valve having flanged ASME 300 connections.
TI-P403-102 Page 13 of 14
EMM Issue 6
Boiler house
(IM-P403-103) supplied with the product.
Installation note: The blowdown control valve should preferably be

installed with the actuator vertically above the pipework and the flow
direction as indicated on the valve body. It can be fitted in other positions,
but not upside down.
Disposal: This product is recyclable. No ecological hazard is anticipated

with the disposal of the product, providing due care is taken.
Spare parts
The spare parts available are detailed below. No other parts are supplied
as spares.
Please note that the spare parts available for the BCV blowdown control
2.4 valve are the same for both the electrically and pneumatically actuated
versions.
20
Available spares
Actuator clamping nut (Only for high pressure version) A
Gasket set B, G
A
Stem seal kits Graphite packing C1
Linear trim
Plug stem and seat kit D2, E
(No gaskets supplied)
How to order spares C1

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed
'Available spares', and state the size and type of valve and specify clearly
the full product description as found on the label of the blowdown control
valve body, as this will ensure that the correct spare parts are supplied.
Example: 1 off Actuator clamping nut for a Spirax Sarco DN15 BCV43
blowdown control valve.
D2
E
G
Page 14 of 14 TI-P403-102
EMM Issue 6
Boiler house
2
TI-P403-96
AB Issue 3
Model 556 / TF56-N

Turbidity Monitoring System
Description
The Turbidity Monitoring System consists of a TF56-N Turbidimeter and a 556 Converter designed to continuously monitor for oil and
grease contamination in make-up water and condensate circulated back to the boiler feedwater system. It can also be used to monitor the
supply from mains raw water, demineralisation and reverse osmosis water treatment plants.
The turbidimeter is a precise, dual channel, scattered light turbidity monitor that uses light in the visible range (VIS) and Near Infrared 2.4
Range (NIR) from 400 to 1100 nm. A precisely defined constant light beam penetrates the fluid medium and the light scattered from any
particles (trace suspended solids, undissolved liquids or gas bubbles) in the medium is detected by four hermetically sealed silicon 21
photodiodes at an angle of 11°. Simultaneously the unscattered light is detected by a reference photodiode. This unique dual channel
design compensates for colour and disturbances in the medium. The sensor can measure very low particle sizes and concentrations.
The converter has four fixed and one variable measuring range calibrated in ppm, providing continuous, real-time monitoring of a fluid
medium’s turbidity. A 3-digit LED indicator displays turbidity as a percentage of the selected measuring range. Two independent set points
and a 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA output are provided by the converter for alarms and real-time remote display of turbidity monitoring. An additional
failsafe relay output is built in for remote sensing of converter lamp or power failure.
Principle features: MV11

- Real-time process monitoring.
- 2 independent alarm set points. 2-port
DCV3 ball valve
- Failsafe relay. Condensate
flow
- 3-digit LED display.
M10S M10S
- 0 - 20 or 4 - 20 mA output.
- Dual channel compensation design. 500 mm 2-port
- Low maintenance. (min) ball valve MV11 PN
- CIP / SIP compatible. Fill air
- Compact dimensions. M10S M10S TF56

sensor
- Reliable, cost effective measurement.
Associated products: 100 mm (Sump) Divert 3.0 ppm

alarm relay
- MS10 isolating ball valve. Bypass
M10S
- DCV3 check valve. 556
- Ball valve actuator (BVA). Drain
converter
- M21 two-port ball valve.
- MV solenoid valve for BVA. 5.0 ppm divert relay
- Three-port QL valve. Recommended installation for the 556 / TF56-N turbidity monitoring system
Requirements
Many countries ensure the protection and safe operation of boiler equipment, buildings and personnel through Legislation and Standards.
For example shell boilers operated in the European Community must comply with requirements of the harmonised standard EN 12953
that specifies maximum contamination levels for boilers operated unsupervised for periods of 24 or 72 hours.
Function
To protect the boiler feedwater system from oil and grease contamination, the Turbidity Monitoring System has two independent alarm
set points:
- Alarm 1 can be set to divert and discharge contaminated water above 3.0 ppm to a blowdown vessel or directly to drain.
- Alarm 2 can be set to shut down the boiler if contamination level rises above 5.0 ppm.
Diversion of contaminated supplies may be achieved with two 2-port ball valves with a ¼ turn actuator or a 3-port actuated valve.
Spare parts
For available spares and options please contact your local Spirax Sarco representative.
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
Technical data
TF56-N Turbidimeter 556 Converter

Material Sensor body stainless steel 316 Ti, 1.4571 Enclosure
Aluminium
material
Line size DN25
W19 mounting assembly:
Process Mounting
DIN flange (EN 1092) For 482.6 mm (19") rack mounting
connection plate
(front IP40, rear IP20), 3HE / 21TE
Gaskets Viton seals 106 x 116 x 190 mm deep
Dimensions
(4.18" x 4.57" x 7.49" deep)
Windows Sapphire
Weight 2.0 kg
Optical path
40 mm
length 1 digital display, 3-digits, LED, height 7 mm
Process - 1 LED: power on (red)
10 bar
2.4 pressure
Display
- 1 LED: Zero (green)
Continuous - 5 LED: Range (yellow)
22 process
temperature
0°C to +100°C (+32°F to 212°F) - 2 LED: Alarms 1 (red) and Alarm 2 (red)
- 1 LED: Lamp or system failure (red)
Peak process +120°C (+248°F) for maximum duration of
Factory set:
temperature 15 minutes / day
Measuring 0 - 25 ppm, 0 - 50 ppm, 0 - 100 ppm,
Ambient range 0 - 250 ppm, 0 - 500 ppm,
0°C to +40°C (+32°F to 104°F) Variable range: 0 - 25…500 ppm
temperature
Air purge Connections available as standard Resolution < ± 0.5% of respective measuring range
Incandescent tungsten lamp: 5.0 Vdc, Repeatability < ± 1% of respective measuring range
Light source
775 mA (typical life span 3 to 5 years) Specific to application, < ± 2% with standard
Linearity
Wave lengths 400 nm – 1100 nm solution
Detector Silicon photodiodes hermetically sealed Response

1 second
time
Calibration Basic calibration in ppm (DE), FTU, EBC
Power supply Selectable 115 / 230 Vac at 50 / 60 Hz
Any measuring range between
Power
- 0 - 25 to 500 ppm (DE) 30 VA
Measuring consumption
range - 0 - 10 to 200 FTU Cable length 5.0 m (16 ft)
- 0 - 2.5 to 50 EBC
0 - 20 or 4 - 20 mA (load: 0 - 500 Ohm)
mA output
Resolution < ± 0.5% of respective measuring range galvanically isolated (> 500 Vdc)
Repeatability < ± 1% of respective measuring range Alarm output 2 independent adjustable SPDT relays.
Specific to application, 1 SPDT relay to alarm in case of lamp or

Linearity Failsafe
< ± 2% with standard solution system failure (active)
Protection All optical parts protected according to IP65 In operation 0°C to +50°C (+32°F to +122°F)
Ambient
Cable length 5.0 m (16 ft) temperature Storage temperature:
-20°C to +70°C (-4°F to +158°F)
VA-plug-
Special ultra-shielded cable sets Requirements EN 61010-1 / 202-08 / class 1
protection
Certificates ISO 9001:2000, PED, CE, HPO Certificates ISO 9001:2000, GS, CE
Converter options
Turbidimeter options Power supply 24 Vac / dc at 50 / 60 Hz
Flange
- Flanged ASME class 150 - B19-21 Housing: ABS plastic IP66
specification (1 converter)
High - Continuous: Housing - B19-42 Housing: ABS plastic IP66

temperature -20°C to +190°C (-4°F to +374°F) (2 converters)
Turbidimeter:
TF56-HT
- Peak: -20 to +210°C(-4°F to +410°F) S19-42 Housing: Stainless steel, IP65
for maximum duration of 15 minutes / day (2 converters)
Process Metric: 10, 20, 35, 50, up to maximum of 250 m

connection - ASME: 1" Cable lengths Imperial: 33, 66, 115, 164 ft, up to a
maximum of 820 ft
Alternative
cable Rigid stainless steel connector
connectors
TI-P403-96 AB Issue 3 Model 556 / TF56-N Turbidity Monitoring System Page 2 of 4

Boiler house
TF56-N Turbidimeter
Weight: 4.0 kg (8.8 lbs)
Ø 92 mm G1
96 mm
2.4
23
195 mm
160 mm
150 mm
556 Converter
Weight: 2.0 kg (4.4 lbs)
128.4 mm
(5.06")
106.3 mm 18 mm 190 mm
(4.19") (0.71") (7.48")

Boiler house
Warning: This document does not contain sufficient information to install the system safely. The system operates at a potentially
fatal mains voltage. Before attempting to install the system read the Instruction Manual supplied with the equipment.
2.4
24
Option 24 Vac / dc
PA / PE
24 Vac / dc
PA / PE
115 / 230 Vac
How to specify How to order example

Spirax Sarco dual-channel scatter light turbidity monitoring 1 off Spirax Sarco Model 556 / TF56-N turbidity monitoring
system. system.

Boiler house
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Conductivity sensors
2
TI-P403-22
AB Issue 5
Probe Flanges
for TDS Conductivity Probes
2.5
2.5.5
1
Boiler house
2 Conductivity sensors Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.
TI-P403-45
AB Issue 6
S20
Sensor Chamber and Sensors
Description
The Spirax Sarco S20 sensor chamber is fitted with conductivity and S20 sensor chamber
temperature sensors used to determine the conductivity of liquids.
The use of a temperature sensor enables an accurate measurement
2.5 to be made when the temperature varies, as in the case of condensate
return monitoring systems.
2 The hexagonal in-line sensor chamber is available screwed

1¼" BSP or 1" NPT.
Adjacent radial female screwed connections are provided for:
- CP10 conductivity sensor ( " BSP).
- TP20 temperature sensor (¼" BSP).
An additional ¼" BSP (¼" NPT) connection is provided on the other
side of the chamber for taking a sample if required. CP10
Spirax Sarco can supply a sample cooler for cooling hot samples, conductivity
or a blanking plug if the connection is not required. sensor
Principal features:
- Allows continuous temperature compensated measurement
TP20
- Purpose designed sensor chamber for in-line mounting temperature
- Simple removal of sensors for cleaning sensor
Limiting conditions Maintenance

The sensor chamber assembly inclusive of sensors is limited to:- The equipment requires no specific maintenance other than periodic
Maximum pressure 11 bar g inspection and cleaning as described in the Installation and
Maintenance Instructions.
Maximum temperature 150°C
Minimum conductivity 10 µS /cm or 10 ppm How to specify
In-line sensor chamber with conductivity and temperature sensors.
Materials
How to order
S20 sensor chamber Stainless steel BS 970 303 S31 Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco S20 sensor chamber complete with
Body Stainless steel BS 970 303 S31 CP10 sensor, PT2 plug tail, ¼" BSP blanking plug, and TP20
temperature sensor.
Insulator PEEK
CP10 Pin Stainless steel BS 970 303 S31 Dimensions (approximate) in millimetres
conductivity
sensor Seal PTFE
Disc springs Stainless steel DIN 1.4122 98
Washer Stainless steel A2 BS 4320

60 A /F
Body and Stainless steel ASTM A269 Gr. 316
TP20 probe 316 Standard
temperature CP10 sensor shown
sensor Cable length with PT2 plug tail
PFA 1 250 fitted
insulation
Safety information
This document does not contain enough information to install
the product safely. Refer to the Installation and Maintenance * 120
Instructions provided with the product.
The CP10 sensor contains PTFE wich can give off toxic fumes 1 250
if exposed to excessive heat.
TP20 temperature sensor
Installation
Caution: Do not install the sensor outdoors without additional
weather protection.
The sensor chamber may be fitted in a vertical or horizontal pipeline * ¼" BSP sample connection
with suitable isolation valves to allow inspection / cleaning of the Bore Ø35
sensors. Reducers may be fitted if required. Flow can be in either 1¼" BSP
direction. The sensors themselves must be horizontal. For full or
information see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions. Bore Ø26
Caution: Ensure the PT2 wire is not exposed to a temperature Weight 1.9 kg 1" NPT
greater than 120°C.
Boiler house
Sample coolers
TI-P403-09
EMM Issue 10
SC20
Sample Coolers
Description
The Spirax Sarco SC20 sample cooler is used to cool samples of boiler water or steam. The cooler consists of a stainless steel coil,
through which the sample flows, and a stainless steel body, through which cooling water flows in the opposite direction.
A pre-drilled mounting bracket is incorporated into both end caps. The SC20 is also available with a clamp adaptor for connecting to
an industry standard ½" sanitary clamp fitting. 2.6
- For boiler water, steam, or condensate sampling. Sample IN
- Stainless steel body and coil to minimise corrosion.
- Counter current flow for efficient cooling.
Available types:
BSP connections (6 mm O/D tube). Sample inlet valve
NPT connections (6 mm O/D tube). A ¼" NPT male x 6 mm O/D stud coupling
is supplied loose for connecting the sample inlet tube to an NPT inlet valve Alternative
or fitting. clamp
adaptor
BSP sample cooler kit (SCS20), complete with sample inlet valve, cooling
water inlet valve, and carbon steel fittings.
A kit (SCS20), as above, but with stainless steel fittings.
A sample cooler (BSP or NPT) with a clamp adaptor suitable for connection
to an industry standard ½" sanitary clamp fitting (clamp not supplied).
Special sanitary sample coolers (SSC20) are also available in BSP and NPT.
They have a stated coil internal finish. See separate literature for further
details.
Cooling water OUT
Note: The SC20 sample cooler is not polished or specially treated to drain or tundish
internally, and the internal finish of the coil is not specified.
Stainless steel couplings are also available separately:-

¼" BSP male x 6 mm O/D tube.
¼" NPT male x 6 mm O/D tube.
SC20 Sample cooler
Cooling water IN
Sample OUT to
drain or tundish
Cooling water
inlet valve
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
2 Sample coolers
BSP version ½" BSP
Cooling water inlet and outlet connections NPT version ½" NPT
Clamp adaptor versions ½" BSP or ½" NPT
BSP version 6 mm O/D
Sample tube inlet and outlet connections NPT version 6 mm O/D*
Clamp adaptor versions 6 mm O/D with ½" adaptor for clamp fitting
* A ¼" NPT male x 6 mm O/D stud coupling is provided.

Coil
Temperature °C

2.6

2

Pressure bar g
Body
Maximum design pressure 10 bar g @ 100 °C
Maximum design temperature 100 °C @ 10 bar g
Note: The pressure/temperature limits for the clamp adaptor are dependant on the manufacturer's recommendations
Materials
Coil Austenitic stainless steel Grade 316L
Body Austenitic stainless steel
EMM Issue 10
SC20 Sample Coolers
Boiler house
Sample coolers 2
Performance
The tables below show typical sample outlet temperatures above cooling water inlet temperatures for several pressures and cooling
water flowrates.
Example
A sample flowrate of 30 I/h is required from a boiler operating at 10 bar g.
For a cooling water flowrate of 0.3 I/s from Table 1 the sample outlet temperature would be 4 °C above the cooling water inlet temperature.
If the cooling water is at 15 °C, the sample temperature would be 19 °C.
Table 2 is used in the same way for steam.
Samples may not be taken where marked '-' as the flow is limited by the sample inlet valve capacity.
Table 1 Saturated water (e.g. boiler water)

Cooling water flowrate Cooling water flowrate Cooling water flowrate
Sample 0.1 l/sec 0.3 l/sec 0.6 l/sec
flowrate
Boiler pressure bar g
l/h
1 3 7 10 20 1 3 7 10 20 1 3 7 10 20 2.6
10 1 °C 1 °C 3 °C 6 °C 6 °C 0 °C 0 °C 1 °C 1 °C 4 °C 0 °C 0 °C 0 °C 0 °C 2 °C
3
Table 2 Saturated steam

flowrate
l/h
0.5 2 5 7 10 20 0.5 2 5 7 10 20 0.5 2 5 7 10 20
5 3 °C 3 °C 4 °C 5 °C 6 °C 6 °C 2 °C 2 °C 3 °C 3 °C 4 °C 4 °C 1 °C 1 °C 1 °C 2 °C 2 °C 2 °C
10 - 7 °C 8 °C 8 °C 8 °C 9 °C - 4 °C 4 °C 4 °C 4 °C 5 °C - 1 °C 2 °C 2 °C 2 °C 2 °C
15 - - 9 °C 10 °C 10 °C 11 °C - - 5 °C 6 °C 6 °C 7 °C - - 2 °C 2 °C 3 °C 4 °C
20 - - - 12 °C 13 °C 14 °C - - - 8 °C 9 °C 9 °C - - - 4 °C 5 °C 6 °C
30 - - - - 21 °C 21 °C - - - - 14 °C 14 °C - - - - 9 °C 10 °C
40 - - - - - 28 °C - - - - - 20 °C - - - - - 13 °C
50 - - - - - 35 °C - - - - - 25 °C - - - - - 17 °C
60 - - - - - 42 °C - - - - - 30 °C - - - - - 21 °C
70 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EMM Issue 10
SC20 Sample Coolers
Boiler house
2 Sample coolers
Dimensions (approximate) in millimetres Cooling water out
A B C D E F G H J ½" BSP or NPT
410 350 300 90 27 23.5 13 450 55 E F
Sample in
Weights (approximate)
Cooler 3.1 kg ØG
SCS20 system 4.2 kg
H A C
2.6
B
'Adaptor' cooler Standard cooler
2.6.4
4
Spare parts J
The spare parts available are listed below.
No other parts are supplied as spares. ½" BSP or NPT
Cooling water in
Available spares:
Component Stock number
D
Sample inlet valve BSP 4037900
Sample out
Sample inlet valve NPT 4037990
Stud coupling carbon steel BSP 0962373
Stud coupling stainless steel BSP 0963243
Stud coupling ¼" NPT male x 6 mm stainless steel

0963209
(for connecting SC20 to an NPT valve or fitting)

Warning:
- To avoid the risk of scalding, it is essential that a full flow of cooling water is present before opening the sample
inlet valve.
- Always close the sample inlet valve before turning off the cooling water.
- Sample pipework becomes very hot under normal working conditions, and will cause burns if touched.
Installation note: The sample inlet to the cooler can be taken direct from a boiler or steam line isolating valve, or if a Spirax Sarco
TDS control system is fitted, from the take-off point provided on the blowdown valve. We recommend that a tundish piped to drain is
located under the outlet, with sufficient space below it for a beaker or similar sample container.
Maintenance note: No routine maintenance is required.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco SC20 sample cooler having BSP connections.
EMM Issue 10
SC20 Sample Coolers
Boiler house
Sample coolers
TI-P403-82
EMM Issue 7
SSC20
Sanitary Sample Cooler
Description Sample IN
The Spirax Sarco SSC20 sanitary sample cooler has been specifically designed for taking high
quality chemical, conductivity and microbiological samples quickly and safely from clean/pure
steam, water for injection (WFI) and other high purity media systems.
The unit consists of high quality 316L stainless steel components and utilises a counter current Clamp 2.6
2.6.5 flow to maximise cooler efficiency, resulting in a compact, space saving design.
The unit is provided with integral pre drilled mounting brackets to allow simple installation at point
of use.
5
Surface finish
Sample contact surfaces are compliant to current ASME BPE requirements.
Ra Maximum 0.5 µ-m Ra (20 µ-in Ra).
Principal features:
- Internal surface finish of coil better than 0.5 µ-m Ra (20 µ-in Ra) to ensure high sterility.
- Coil manufactured from fully traceable 316L stainless steel.
- Self-draining design to eliminate sample retention.
- Fully sterilisable /autoclavable - to ensure integrity of unit between samples.
- Integral mounting bracket to facilitate simple installation.
WARNING: The SSC20 is not sterile as supplied.
Sterilisation in Place (SIP) prior to testing or at periodic intervals. It may be appropriate to sterilise
the SSC20 to ensure that sample integrity is maintained during testing.
For further details on SIP, to include recommended installation, refer to Spirax Sarco.
Example of Customer sterilization process (recommendation) - Expose to saturated steam for
20 minutes at 122 °C, or 5 minutes at 134 °C.
The inlet temperature should be high enough so that the outlet too can be fully sterilised.
Packaging
All packaging of the SSC20 sanitary sample cooler is conducted in an environment segregated
from other non stainless steel manufacture and is in accordance with ASME BPE.
- Sample inlet and outlet connections are capped.
- Each Sample Cooler is individually packaged within an "ISO CLASS 7" clean environment
with cooling water ends and sampling ends fitted with protective end cap. The product is then
sealed in a protective plastic bag.
Standards
The SSC20 has been manufactured and built in general accordance with ASME BPE standards.
Certification
The SSC20 can be supplied with the following certification if requested at the time of ordering:
Sample OUT
EMM Issue 7
SSC20 Sanitary Sample Cooler
Boiler house
2 Sample coolers
- Full EN 10204 3.1 Validation Pack - Chargeable.
- Typical Internal Coil Bore and Adaptor Face Surface Finish - F.O.C.
- Certificate of Compliance for FDA, and ADI Free Statement - F.O.C.
- TSE-BSE Statement - F.O.C.
- EC1935:2004 Declaration of Compliance - F.O.C.
- Declaration of Conformity BS EN ISO 14644-1:2015 Class 7 Clean Room - F.O.C.
- Typical Test Report - F.O.C.

BSP version ½" BSP
Cooling water inlet and outlet connections
NPT version ½" NPT
2.6 ½" ASME BPE compatible adaptor for clamp fitting (clamp not supplied) on
Sample tube inlet and outlet connections
6 sample inlet. 6 mm O/D on sample outlet.
Materials
Body and coil Stainless steel 316L (1.4404)
Coil
Temperature °C
Pressure bar g
Body
Note: The pressure/temperature limits for the clamp adaptor are dependant on the manufacturer's recommendations
EMM Issue 7
Boiler house
Sample coolers 2
Performance
Tables below show typical sample outlet temperatures above cooling water inlet temperatures for several pressures and cooling water
flowrates.
Example
A sample flowrate of 30 I/h is required from a boiler operating at 10 bar g. For a cooling water flowrate of 0.3 I/s from Table 1 the sample
outlet temperature would be 4 °C above the cooling water inlet temperature. If the cooling water is at 15 °C, the sample temperature
would be 19 °C.
Table 2 is used in the same way for steam.
Samples may not be taken where marked '-' as the flow is limited by the sample inlet valve capacity.
Table 1 Water (e.g. WFI - water for injection)

Cooling water flowrate Cooling water flowrate Cooling water flow
flowrate
l/h
1 3 7 10 20 1 3 7 10 20 1 3 7 10 20
10 1 °C 1 °C 3 °C 6 °C 6 °C 0 °C 0 °C 1 °C 1 °C 4 °C 0 °C 0 °C 0 °C 0 °C 2 °C 2.6
20 2 °C 2 °C 6 °C 8 °C 8 °C 1 °C 1 °C 2 °C 2 °C 6 °C 0 °C 0 °C 0 °C 1 °C 4 °C 7
Table 2 Saturated steam

flowrate
kg/h
0.5 2 5 7 10 20 0.5 2 5 7 10 20 0.5 2 5 7 10 20
5 3 °C 3 °C 4 °C 5 °C 6 °C 6 °C 2 °C 2 °C 3 °C 3 °C 4 °C 4 °C 1 °C 1 °C 1 °C 2 °C 2 °C 2 °C
10 - 7 °C 8 °C 8 °C 8 °C 9 °C - 4 °C 4 °C 4 °C 4 °C 5 °C - 1 °C 2 °C 2 °C 2 °C 2 °C
15 - - 9 °C 10 °C 10 °C 11 °C - - 5 °C 6 °C 6 °C 7 °C - - 2 °C 2 °C 3 °C 4 °C
20 - - - 12 °C 13 °C 14 °C - - - 8 °C 9 °C 9 °C - - - 4 °C 5 °C 6 °C
30 - - - - 21 °C 21 °C - - - - 14 °C 14 °C - - - - 9 °C 10 °C
40 - - - - - 28 °C - - - - - 20 °C - - - - - 13 °C
50 - - - - - 35 °C - - - - - 25 °C - - - - - 17 °C
60 - - - - - 42 °C - - - - - 30 °C - - - - - 21 °C
70 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EMM Issue 7
Boiler house
2 Sample coolers
Dimensions (approximate) in millimetres Weight (approximate) in kg
A B C D E F G H Cooler 3.1
450 350 300 90 27 23.5 13 55
F
E
½" BSP or NPT
Sample in Cooling water out
ØG
2.6 A B C
½" BSP or NPT

Cooling water in Sample out
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco type SSC20 sanitary sample cooler with ½" sanitary clamp sample inlet connection and maximum coil
internal surface finish of 0.5 µ-m Ra. The cooling water connections are to be BSP.
EMM Issue 7
Boiler house
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Conductivity meters 2
TI-P403-25
AB Issue 5
MS1
Conductivity Meter
Description
The Spirax Sarco MS1 is a battery powered conductivity meter
designed for use with liquids. It is particularly suitable for measuring
the conductivity of boiler water, feedwater, or condensate samples
in order to estimate the level of Total Dissolved Solids, or TDS. 2.7
The instrument is fitted with a permanently wired carbon electrode
sensor with integral temperature sensor.
A plug-in extension lead is also provided to allow ac resistance
1
measurements to be made on installed conductivity probes in order
to check their condition. Calibration to a master instrument or
standard solution is possible using the adjustment screw on the
side of the case. The instrument is supplied in a protective wallet.
Principal features:
- Automatic temperature compensation.
- Wide selectable range.
- Automatic switch-off.
Limiting conditions
Maximum recommended sensor operating temperature 45°C.
Specification
Ext =100/R
200 2 20
µS/cm mS/cm mS/cm
0 to 1.999 µS / cm
Ranges11mS/cm
Ranges mS / cm=1000µS/cm
= 1000 µS / cm
Ranges 0 to 19.99 µS / cm
MS
MS11
0 to 199.9 µS / cm Conductivity ON
Meter OFF
Range indication Decimal point and LED above selection key Meter
Temperature Automatic, 2% / °C
compensation Reference temperature 25°C
Made in UK
Resolution 0.1 µS / cm
±1.5% or ± 3 digits (whichever is greatest)
Accuracy
at 25°C
Calibration range ± 20%. 20 turns (approximately)
On / off Auto-off timer
Sensor PVC cell with carbon electrodes
Twin core
Extension cable
3.5 mm jack plug and crocodile clips
PP3 or equivalent
Battery
A low battery warning indicator is fitted
Dimensions / weight (approximate) in mm and kg

Instrument 80 x 147 x 39
Sensor 140 x 21 diameter
Sensor cable 1000
Extension cable 1000
Weight 430 g with case
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco MS1 conductivity meter.
Boiler house
2 Conductivity meters
2.7
2
Boiler house
Heat recovery systems
2
AI-P404-07
AB Issue 7
Boiler Blowdown Heat Recovery Systems -

Installation, Operation and Maintenance
General layout Vent head
Note: Water supply to cold water
make-up tank not shown.
Optional flash condensing
head piping
2.8
Cold water (instead of Type SD)
make-up tank 1
9
4
Condensate
8
3 Boiler
feedwater
tank
1 5
To boiler feedpumps
7
9 Condensate from
high pressure uses (TDS)
10
12 6 Table of parts
(closed)
Part no. Description Type
1. Flash vessel FV
4" dial 0.4 bar g C/W
11 2. Pressure gauge
'U' syphon and cock
3. Safety valve SV615
* 4. Vacuum breaker VB14
5. Steam distributor SD
Optional * Residual blowdown to Monnier
drain valve grade or receiver. 6. Flash vessel drain valve
(non-venting) ball valve
(closed) Note: Swan neck to
prevent the primary side 7. Float trap FT14-4.5
of the heat exchanger 8. Recirculating pump RP (240 V)
drying out.
Monnier
9. Tank isolating valves
(non-venting) ball valve
Fig. 1
Fig 12 SG iron or
10. Pump strainer
Fig 13 cast iron
11. Plate heat exchanger Type M3 or M6
12. Thermostat Type HTS3
Note: Item 5 can be replaced with a flash condensing head
(if present) as shown in the diagram above.
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
2 Heat recovery systems
Safety information
Your attention is drawn to Safety Information sheet IM-GCM-10 as well as to any national or regional regulations concerning boiler blowdown.
In the UK guidance is given in HSE Guidance Note PM60.
General information
This information describes the Spirax Sarco heat recovery system which is designed to recover the heat in discharged boiler water from
automatic TDS control systems, and a proportion of this water in the form of flash steam. The heat recovery system must only be used to
recover heat from the TDS blowdown. There will be another blowdown point on the bottom of the boiler used for the intermittent removal of
precipitates. This should be kept entirely separate from the heat recovery system. Refer to separate literature for system selection details.
This equipment is designed to save energy. All pipework and the flash vessel should be lagged.
Installation
Flash vessel
As water passes through the blowdown valve it is reduced in pressure. Flash steam is formed and the pipework downstream of the valve will
contain a mixture of steam and blowdown water travelling at high velocity. If the pipeline to the flash vessel is too small in diameter the result
may be erosion of the pipework with turbulence and carryover as it enters the flash vessel.
The best arrangement is to increase the size of the pipework after the blowdown valve:
2.8 - Install the flash vessel at a high level adjacent but not bolted to the feedtank.
2 -
-
Fit the pressure gauge set, safety valve and vacuum breaker as shown in Figure 2.
Pipework from the flash vessel to the feedtank should match the vessel’s vent size.
- The safety valve should always be fitted with the centreline of the spring housing vertically above the valve.
- The discharge pipework must be installed so that undue stresses are not imposed upon the safety valve that could cause distortion and
leakage.
- Discharge pipework should be as short and straight as possible and discharge where it can not cause damage or injury to property or persons.
Discharge pipework must not be smaller in diameter than the valve outlet. Where it is necessary to install discharge pipework over a long
distance lowering of the performance and possible chatter can be avoided by fitting larger diameter pipe.
- There must be no shut-off device on the inlet or outlet of the safety valve.
- The size of pipework to drain should match the flash vessel drain connection size.
- The vacuum breaker must be installed in a vertical position above the flash vessel in the flash steam line to prevent a vacuum forming when
the blowdown valve shuts off.
Vacuum breaker
Flash steam
to feedtank
Safety valve fitted

on a full bore 1 m (max.)
Pressure gauge,
gauge cock swept bend. 2 m (min.)
and Discharge piped
'U' syphon to a safe area.
Auto TDS
blowdown
inlet
Drain valve
piped to open drain
Residual blowdown
to drain Fig. 3 Example showing two float traps in parallel when
Fig. 2 Flash vessel capacity demands
Float trap
The build up of water in the flash vessel must be avoided so a float trap with continuous drainage of condensate at saturation temperature is
essential. The trap must be fitted so that the float arm rises and falls vertically with the direction of flow as indicated on the body. Where capacity
demands two float traps should be fitted in parallel (see Figure 3). The flowrate of residual blowdown through the trap is dependent on the head
of water above it. For the full rated capacity of the system the trap should be positioned at least 2 m below the flash vessel as shown in Figure 3.
It is usually most convenient to fit the trap at a low level for easy access immediately above the heat exchanger. No more than 1 m of horizontal
pipework should be used between the flash vessel and the float trap inlet to prevent the float trap from becoming steam locked.

AI-P404-07 AB Issue 7 Installation, Operation and Maintenance Page 2 of 4
Boiler house
Heat recovery systems 2
Heat exchanger (see Figure 4)
All piping to and from the plate heat exchanger and shut-off valves should match the connection size of the exchanger. Pipes should be fitted
so that any thermal expansion does not affect the plate heat exchanger or the fittings. This may be accomplished inherently within the piping
or by flexible connections. Valves and piping are to be mounted without tension on the heat exchanger connections.
We recommend that the residual blowdown being discharged to drain is visible to provide a means of checking that the system is operating
correctly. Use a swan neck to ensure the primary side of the heat exchanger is always full of water. This prevents problems caused by sludge,
and damage to gaskets.
Heated water Residual blowdown

outlet to tank inlet from flash vessel
2.5 m (min.)
Cold water inlet Residual blowdown

from tank out to drain
2.8
3
Fig. 4 Heat exchanger - Piping Fig. 5 Pump installation
Pump
The pump should be situated in a vertical pipe pumping upwards as shown in Figure 5. This position ensures that the pump shaft is horizontal
which reduces the thrust bearing load and ensures positive air purging from both the rotor chamber and impeller housing. Where pumps
can only be installed in horizontal pipework, it is imperative that the pump shaft is horizontal, or slightly higher at the vent plug end. The shaft
must not fall below the horizontal plane, even by a few degrees, as this causes premature wear of the top bearing and shaft. Pumps are not
to be installed with the shaft in the vertical plane, as this may lead to dry running of the top bearing, noise and possible pump failure. Try to
position the pump motor away from hot surfaces and allow access to the switch on the terminal box. Ensure that the pump is not stressed
by the pipework and that the pipework is properly supported either side of the pump. If necessary use proprietary mounting brackets. Pipework
downstream of the pump is to match the outlet connection of the pump including the isolating valve.
Arrows on the pump base indicate the water flow direction through the pump. When connecting the pump to pipework, the gasket and union
nut should be assembled dry:
- It is not necessary to use any sealants.
- Ensure that the gasket is positioned correctly and tighten the union nut firmly. Do not over tighten and take care not to displace or distort
the gasket.
- The pump should not be subjected to extremes of temperature. Do not attempt to start the pump until the system has been filled with water
and both the pump and system have been vented. To avoid any possible sediment do not fit the pump in the lowest part of the system and
position the take off point from the cold treated water storage tank above the base of the tank.
- The return line should be below the lowest water level in the storage tank.
- The minimum inlet pressure to avoid cavitation of the pump is equivalent to 2.5 m head of water. It is recommended therefore that the
pump is installed at least 2.5 m below the lowest water level of the cold treated water storage tank as shown in Figure 5.
Thermostat
The HTS3 thermostat should be installed on the pipework leading from the flash vessel drain to the heat exchanger inlet, near to the heat
exchanger, allowing easy access to the setting arrow. The base of the HTS3 should be held in good contact with the metal of the pipe
removing insulation as required. The plastic covered spring fixing cable should be cut to an unstretched length slightly less than the
circumference of the pipe and the hook and eyelet screwed into the ends. Stretch the cable round the pipe and position it in the groove
across the front of the HTS3. Engage the hook and eyelet.
Electrical connection
Pump
Contactor overload protection is not required for these pumps. A
3 amp fuse must be fitted in conjunction with a proprietary switch
capable of disconnecting the electricity supply to the motor:
- The cable size to be used is 3-core, 0.75 mm².
- The cable should be capable of withstanding a minimum
temperature of 80°C.
- Remove the terminal box screw and cover.
- Thread the cable through the gland and connect as indicated in
the wiring diagram.
- Tighten the cable gland to ensure that the cable is gripped securely.
- Replace the terminal box cover and fasten securely.
WARNING : This pump must be earthed.
HTS3
Run sufficient 3-core electrical connecting cable to reach the HTS3 Thermostat
installation position without being under tension. HTS3
- Remove the HTS3 cover by undoing the central retaining screw
and connect the cable as shown in Figure 6, HTS3 Wiring diagram.
- Replace and secure the cover. Pump
- The HTS3 is double insulated and no earth connection is required.
WARNING : Disconnect mains supply before removing the cover. Fig. 6 HTS3 Wiring diagram - When hot 2 and C make contact

Boiler house
Commissioning
General
Following the installation and wiring of the blowdown heat recovery system and prior to refilling the cold treated water storage tank as required
all isolating valves should be closed.
- Ensure that the auto TDS system is isolated from the flash vessel until commissioning of the recovery system is complete.
- Turn the dial of the HTS3 clockwise to read an arbitrary figure and ensure that the voltage supply to the pump is off.
- Never run the pump whilst the system is dry or before the pump has been vented.
Heat exchanger Pack
Confirm that the plate pack length is correct, see the table below: length
Heat exchanger Plate pack length
type (mm)
M3-8 23
M3-10 29
M3-21 61
M3-31 90 Note:
This drawing is only a
2.8 M6-12
M6-15
30
38
representation of a
heat exchanger.
4 M6-19
M6-21
48
53
M6-25 63
M6-33 83 Fig. 7
Gradually open the isolating valve leading from the cold treated water storage tank to the heat exchanger inlet. Static pressure must be
increased slowly to spare the gaskets any undue stress. Open the isolating valve downstream of the pump. Open the isolating valve on the
remaining heat exchanger inlet.
Pump / HTS3
Close the isolating valves either side of the pump i.e. on the pump outlet and on the heat exchanger inlet:
- Slacken the vent plug and remove carefully. Normally the amount of water escaping will be minimal. Take care that water does not enter
the terminal box.
- Insert a small screwdriver into the slot in the shaft end and rotate several times to ensure that the shaft is free to move.
- Replace the vent plug but do not tighten.
- Open the isolating valves either side of the pump as previously described. Switch on the power supply to the system. Using a screwdriver
turn the setting arrow of the HTS3 fully anti-clockwise. The setting marks outside the temperature scale provide a positive on and off position.
Only when fully anti-clockwise should the pump come on.
- When any remaining air has escaped and water only is present tighten the vent plug.
- The pump may be noisy when first switched on due to air remaining in the chamber this should cease after a few minutes running. If noise
persists then re-vent.
- Position the HTS3 setting arrow to the desired temperature for switching. 65°C is recommended as a typical setting on this application but if
this is not exactly suitable it may be adjusted later. The requirement being that the pump should run whenever there is any useful heat to recover.
WARNING : Do not start the pump until the system has been filled with water and both the pump and system have been vented in
accordance with the above instructions.
TDS system
For commissioning of auto TDS systems refer to separate literature. Open up the TDS blowdown to the flash vessel. By blowing down through
the auto-TDS system check the operation of the blowdown heat recovery system and adjust the HTS3 switching temperature if required. Observe
in particular the operating pressure of the flash vessel that should not exceed 0.5 bar g under normal conditions and that the heat exchanger
is working correctly. The temperature of the residual blowdown flowing to drain will be below 40°C in most cases but this depends
on the temperature of the water in the cold treated water tank.
Operation
Boiler water at saturation temperature is blown down from the boiler through a valve to the flash vessel. A percentage of this blowdown water
will flash to steam as its pressure is reduced typically to 0.2 bar g. The flash steam is allowed to separate in the flash vessel and is then
directly introduced into the feedtank through a steam distributor. This increases the temperature within the feedtank thus reducing heating
requirements and driving off corrosion-causing dissolved oxygen. Also reduced is the quantity of expensive treated water required to replenish
the feedtank. Residual blowdown from the flash vessel flows through a float trap to the heat exchanger where its heat content is used to
raise the temperature of water from the cold, treated water storage tank. The circulating pump is thermostatically controlled to ensure that
it only runs when the system receives blowdown and there is useful heat to be recovered.
Maintenance
Daily
There are no specific checks to be carried out daily on this system.
Weekly
Take a boiler water sample and check the TDS. Adjust the blowdown controller accordingly. Observe the system under operating conditions
for any system faults. Open the flash vessel drain valve whilst there is flow from the TDS system and check that the vessel drain is clear.
Operate the isolating valves throughout the system to ensure that they do not seize. Check that the residual blowdown discharge rate
increases as the blowdown valve opens. When the valve closes check that the residual blowdown discharged to drain eventually stops.
Annually
Examine the blowdown valve for any damage and replace parts as required. Normally it is not necessary to open a heat exchanger until it
is so dirty that its function is impaired. When required open the heat exchanger according to the manufacturers dismantling instructions and
clean each plate separately. Cleaning with the plates in the frame is recommended. Clean the plates using a water jet not an abrasive brush.
If removed the exchanger plates must be numbered to ensure that they are assembled correctly after cleaning. Inspect the float trap on the
flash vessel drain and clear out any deposits checking for any wear of the internals and free movement in all components. Re-commission
the system. For the maintenance instructions of TDS systems refer to separate literature.
Boiler house
2
TI-P404-01
AB Issue 6
M3 and M6
Plate Heat Exchangers
for Residual Blowdown
Carrying bar
2.8
2.8.7
5
ä
Water out ä Plate pack
Blowdown in
Pressure plate
Frame plate
Tightening bolt
Guiding bar
ä
Water in
ä
Blowdown out
4 1 2 3
Description Materials
The M3 and M6 plate heat exchangers have been specifically No. Part Material
selected for residual blowdown applications, having all wetted
parts in 316 grade stainless steel. They are generally used as part 1 Plates Stainless steel (316)
of the Spirax Sarco boiler blowdown heat recovery system. 2 Gasketing EPDM
Principal features: 3 Frame Mild steel
- Easily dismantled for cleaning without need for removing pipework. 4 Connections Stainless steel (316)
- Clip-on EPDM gaskets.
- All wetted parts in 316 stainless steel. Pressure / temperature limits
- ALFA-LAVAL designed heat exchanger. Note: The M3 and M6 heat exchangers comply with PED and are
- High heat transfer efficiency. SEP products, except M6-33 which is a Category 1 product.
Sizes and pipe connections Maximum temperature 140°C

Screwed 1¼" BSP (BS 21 male), 2" ISO R threads. Maximum working pressure 10 bar g @ 140°C
Note: Heat exchangers can be supplied with flange connections to
special order. Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of 13 bar g
Boiler house
Dimensions /weights (approximate) in mm and kg

Number Weight
Size A B C D E F G L of Empty Full
plates of water
M3-8 480 180 357 60 62 1¼" 60 300 8 31 32
M3-10 480 180 357 60 62 1¼" 60 300 10 31 32
M3-21 480 180 357 60 62 1¼" 60 300 21 34 35
M3-31 480 180 357 60 62 1¼" 60 300 31 37 40
M6-12 920 320 640 140 140 2" 60 585 12 94 97
M6-15 920 320 640 140 140 2" 60 585 15 96 100
M6-19 920 320 640 140 140 2" 60 585 19 99 104
M6-21 920 320 640 140 140 2" 60 585 21 100 106
M6-25 920 320 640 140 140 2" 60 585 25 103 110
M6-33 920 320 640 140 140 2" 60 585 33 111 120
2.8 B L Sizing
6
When the heat exchanger is used as part of the Spirax Sarco boiler
D G blowdown heat recovery system - refer to the appropriate literature.
Otherwise:
Plate heat exchanger Maximum blowdown capacity
F Type (kg /h)
S4 S1 M3-8 648
M3-10 860
M3-21 1 450
M3-31 2160
A C
M6-12 2 750
M6-15 4 900
M6-19 5915
S3 S2 M6-21 7110
M6-25 8040
E
M6-33 11 000

This document does not contain enough information to install the product / system safely. For full details see the Installation and Maintenance
Instructions supplied with the product.
Installation notes:
The preferred method of installation is to bolt the heat exchanger rigidly to the floor, in a vertical position. We recommend the use of a
swan neck on the primary outlet (S2) to ensure the heat exchanger does not dry out - this can otherwise cause problems with debris and
can damage the gaskets.
Maintenance note:
An annual inspection is recommended to check for leaking gaskets and the build up of scale and sludge.
Spare parts
Spare plates with integral gaskets are available from Spirax Sarco.
How to order
Example: 1 off M6-23 plate heat exchanger having 2" screwed ISO R connections.
TI-P404-01 AB Issue 6 M3 and M6 Plate Heat Exchangers for Residual Blowdown

Boiler house

TI-P404-03
EMM Issue 11
FV
Flash Vessel
Description
The Spirax Sarco FV flash vessel is designed and constructed to ASME VIII
DIV 1 2004 + ADD06. The design is free-draining which is essential in boiler
blowdown applications.
Applications
2.8
These vessels are particularly suited to boiler blowdown heat recovery systems
where efficient separation of the flash steam from the blowdown is essential
7
to prevent contamination of the boiler feedtank and / or heat transfer surfaces.
Spirax Sarco flash vessels are equally suited to condensate flash steam
applications.
Principal features:
- Designed and constructed in compliance with the European Pressure

Equipment Regulations 2014/68/EU.
- Low separation velocity to produce drier steam.
- Free-draining.

Connections available as standard:
Screwed connections to BS 21 taper.
Flanged connections to EN 1092 PN16.
Note: Vessels are available flanged to ASME B16.5 Class 150 or 300, or
screwed NPT.
Model FV15 and FV18 shown
Limiting conditions
Maximum design conditions (body) are 14 bar g @ 198 °C (saturation temperature of steam).
Minimum design (operating) temperature -10 °C
Cold hydraulic test pressure in accordance with European Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
Note : Maximum design Pressure and Temperature can be further limited, lower than that stated on the nameplate depending on the
chosen flange rating of the system.
PN16 13.3 bar g @ 198 °C
Class A150 13.8 bar g @ 198 °C
Note: These vessels will withstand full vacuum conditions.
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
Flash steam outlet
3
3
2.8 7
8
6
5 1
Inlet
10
Model
FV15 and FV18 shown 5
Condensate/residual blowdown outlet
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Shell cylinder ASTM A106B C. Max. 0.25%
2 End cap ASTM A234 WPB C. Max. 0.25%
3 Nozzle - Half coupling ASTM A105N C. Max. 0.25%
4 Nozzle - Full coupling ASTM A105N C. Max. 0.25%
5 Nozzle - Flange ASTM A516-70 C. Max. 0.25%
6 Nozzle - Pipe ASTM A106B C. Max. 0.25%
7 Blanking plug ASTM A105N C. Max. 0.25%
8 Wrapper plate ASTM A516-60 C. Max. 0.25%
9 Name-plate bracket BS EN 10028-2 P265GH C. Max. 0.25%
10 Support foot/gusset BS EN 10025 S275
FV Flash Vessel
Boiler house
Heat recovery systems 2
How to size
Use the chart below to select the appropriate flash vessel. It is necessary to know the pressure on the steam traps or boiler pressure
in the case of blowdown heat recovery, the flash steam pressure (desired or existing), and the condensate or blowdown flowrate.
Example 1: (solid lines)

A boiler plant operating at 12 bar g has a TDS control blowdown flowrate of 2 500 kg/h (3 boilers at 833 kg/h each). The flash steam
from the blowdown is to be added to the low pressure steam system operating at 1 bar g.
1. From boiler pressure move horizontally to flash steam pressure - A
2. Drop vertically to blowdown flowrate in kg / h - B
3. Follow curve to right-hand scale and across to same flash pressure - C
4. Move upwards to flash vessel size. Select flash vessel - in this case an FV8 is required.
Example 2: (dotted lines)

A plant operating on steam at 11 bar g condenses 4 000 kg/h of steam. Flash is to be recovered at 0.5 bar g.
1. From pressure on steam traps move horizontally to flash steam pressure - A1

2.8
2. Drop vertically to condensate flowrate in kg/h - B1
3. Follow curve to right hand scale and across to same flash pressure - C1 9
4. Move upwards to flash vessel size. Select flash vessel - in this case an FV12 is required.
Flash steam pressure bar g

boiler pressure for blowdown applications bar g

Pressure on steam traps or

Example 1
Example 2

Flash vessel size

FV
FV
FV
FV
FV
15
6
8
18
12

Flash steam pressure bar g

Condensate or blowdown flowrate kg/h

FV Flash Vessel
Boiler house
B
J
B B
J
J
L
K
L K
L
K
M
M
G
G M
E G
E
E
2.8 D
D
D
10 C
C C
H H H
A A A
F F F
FV6 FV8 and FV12 FV15 and FV18
Dimensions/weights (approximate) in ins, mm and kg Installation

The vessel should be mounted with the flash steam outlet at the
FV6 FV8 FV12 FV15 FV18 top, and connected as indicated below. Each vessel incorporates
a " screwed boss for a pressure gauge. For drainage, it is
A 168 219 324 406 457
recommended that a float trap is fitted. A safety valve connection
B 104 210 262 303 329 is provided on the vessel. It should not be assumed that the safety
valve will be the same size as the connection. Safety valve sizing
C 370 413 418 390 514 and selection should be in accordance with National and Local
Regulations.
D 620 663 668 640 764
Flash steam outlet
E 1 225 1 391 1 400 1 275 1 521
F 230 281 411 492 544
G 2" DN80 DN100 DN150 DN150
H 2" 2" 2" DN80 DN80
J 2" DN80 DN100 DN150 DN150

Pressure
K " " " " " Safety gauge
valve connection
L ¾" 1" 1½" 1½" 2" connection
Inspection
M 2" 2" 2" 2" 2" cover
Weight 45 76 130 150 193

Inlet
Installation
supports
Inspection
How to order cover
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco FV6 flash vessel having screwed
BSP connections. The unit is to be constructed to ASME VIII DIV Model FV15 and
1 2004 + ADD06. FV18 shown
Condensate/ residual blowdown outlet
FV Flash Vessel
Boiler house
2
AI-P404-12
AB Issue 3
Sizing a Flash Vessel

on up to Three Trap Pressures
Note: The full table for flash vessel sizing is shown overleaf.
Example:
The example below considers condensate from three steam systems at different pressures, 20 bar g, 10 bar g and 6 bar g, discharging into
a flash vessel designed to operate at 2 bar g.
The condensate loads are 1 000 kg / h, 2 000 kg / h and 4 000 kg / h respectively.
2.8
By consulting the table and entering the relevant data into the boxes below, the total amount of flash steam can be calculated in kg / h.
This is multiplied by the 'LP factor' according to the flash vessel pressure to give total volume flow in m3 / h.
11
Five 'Velocity factors' are shown: 67, 138, 243, 385, 560 each of which relate to a 3 m / s take-off velocity for flash vessels FV6, FV8,
FV12, FV15, and FV18 respectively. By dividing the 'Total volume' by each of the 'Velocity factors', five take-off velocities are obtained.
Choose the smallest flash vessel with a take-off velocity of less than 3 m / s.
The example shows an FV8 being the smallest flash vessel with a take-off velocity of 2.7 m / s.
Trap Flash pressure bar g

pressure 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
bar g % flash
25 24.5 22.6 21.2 20.0 18.9 18.0 17.2 15.7 14.4 13.3 12.2 11.3 10.4 9.5
24 24.1 22.2 20.7 19.5 18.5 17.6 16.7 15.3 14.0 12.8 11.8 10.8 9.9 9.0
23 23.6 21.7 20.3 19.1 18.0 17.1 16.3 14.8 13.5 12.3 11.3 10.3 9.4 8.5
22 23.2 21.3 19.8 18.6 17.6 16.6 15.8 14.3 13.0 11.8 10.8 9.8 8.9 8.0
21 22.7 20.8 19.3 18.1 17.1 16.1 15.3 13.8 12.5 11.3 10.3 9.3 8.4 7.5
20 22.2 20.3 18.8 17.6 16.6 15.6 14.8 13.3 12.0 10.8 9.7 8.7 7.8 6.9
19 21.7 19.8 18.3 17.1 16.0 15.1 14.2 12.7 11.4 10.2 9.2 8.2 7.2 6.4
18 21.2 19.3 17.8 16.6 15.5 14.5 13.7 12.2 10.8 9.7 8.6 7.6 6.7 5.8
17 20.6 18.7 17.2 16.0 14.9 14.0 13.1 11.6 10.3 9.1 8.0 7.0 6.1 5.2
16 20.1 18.2 16.7 15.4 14.3 13.4 12.5 11.0 9.7 8.5 7.4 6.4 5.4 4.5
15 19.5 17.6 16.1 14.8 13.7 12.8 11.9 10.4 9.0 7.8 6.7 5.7 4.8 3.9
14 18.9 16.9 15.4 14.2 13.1 12.1 11.2 9.7 8.4 7.1 6.0 5.0 4.1 3.2
13 18.2 16.3 14.8 13.5 12.4 11.4 10.6 9.0 7.6 6.4 5.3 4.3 3.3 2.4
12 17.5 15.6 14.1 12.8 11.7 10.7 9.8 8.3 6.9 5.7 4.6 3.5 2.6 1.7
11 16.8 14.8 13.3 12.0 10.9 10.0 9.1 7.5 6.1 4.9 3.8 2.7 1.8 0.9
10 16.1 14.1 12.5 11.3 10.1 9.2 8.3 6.7 5.3 4.1 2.9 1.9 0.9 -
9 15.2 13.2 11.7 10.4 9.3 8.3 7.4 5.8 4.4 3.2 2.0 1.0 - -
8 14.4 12.3 10.8 9.5 8.4 7.4 6.5 4.9 3.5 2.2 1.1 - - -
7 13.4 11.4 9.8 8.5 7.4 6.4 5.4 3.8 2.4 1.2 - - - -
6 12.3 10.3 8.7 7.4 6.3 5.2 4.3 2.7 1.3 - - - - -
5 11.2 9.1 7.5 6.2 5.0 4.0 3.1 1.4 - - - - - -
4 9.8 7.7 6.1 4.8 3.6 2.6 1.7 - - - - - - -
3 8.3 6.2 4.5 3.2 2.0 0.9 - - - - - - - -
2 6.3 4.2 2.6 1.2 - - - - - - - - - -
1 3.8 1.7 - - - - - - - - - - - -
LP Factor = 1.673 1.149 0.881 0.714 0.603 0.522 0.461 0.374 0.315 0.272 0.240 0.215 0.194 0.177
Trap pressure Flash pressure % Flash Condensate load Mass flash

20 bar g 2 bar g 16.6% X 1 000 kg / h = 166 kg / h
Total flash steam
10 bar g 2 bar g 10.1% X 2 000 kg / h = 202 kg / h 620 kg / h
6 bar g 2 bar g 6.3% X 4 000 kg / h = 252 kg / h

Velocity factor * Velocity Choose on < 3 m / s
67 = 5.6 m / s FV6
Total
flash steam LP factor Total volume 138 = 2.7 m / s FV8 3
620 kg / h X 0.603 = 374 m / h3 ÷ 243 = 1.6 m / s FV12
385 = 1.0 m / s FV15
560 = 0.7 m / s FV18
* Note: Size on a take-off velocity of 3 m / s or less.
Boiler house
Sizing a Flash Vessel on up to Three Trap Pressures

Trap Flash pressure bar g
pressure 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
bar g % flash
40 29.9 28.1 26.8 25.6 24.6 23.7 22.9 21.5 20.3 19.2 18.2 17.3 16.5 15.6
39 29.6 27.8 26.4 25.3 24.3 23.4 22.6 21.2 20.0 18.9 17.9 17.0 16.1 15.3
38 29.3 27.5 26.1 25.0 23.9 23.1 22.3 20.9 19.6 18.5 17.5 16.6 15.7 14.9
37 29.0 27.2 25.8 24.6 23.6 22.7 21.9 20.5 19.3 18.2 17.2 16.2 15.4 14.6
36 28.7 26.8 25.4 24.3 23.3 22.4 21.6 20.2 18.9 17.8 16.8 15.9 15.0 14.2
35 28.3 26.5 25.1 23.9 22.9 22.0 21.2 19.8 18.5 17.4 16.4 15.5 14.6 13.8
34 27.9 26.1 24.7 23.5 22.5 21.6 20.8 19.4 18.2 17.0 16.0 15.1 14.2 13.4
33 27.6 25.8 24.4 23.2 22.2 21.3 20.5 19.0 17.8 16.7 15.7 14.7 13.8 13.0
32 27.2 25.4 24.0 22.8 21.8 20.9 20.1 18.7 17.4 16.3 15.3 14.3 13.4 12.6
31 26.9 25.0 23.6 22.4 21.4 20.5 19.7 18.3 17.0 15.9 14.9 13.9 13.0 12.2
2.8 30 26.5 24.7 23.2 22.0 21.0 20.1 19.3 17.9 16.6 15.5 14.4 13.5 12.6 11.8
29 26.1 24.3 22.9 21.7 20.6 19.7 18.9 17.5 16.2 15.1 14.0 13.1 12.2 11.3
12 28 25.7 23.9 22.4 21.3 20.2 19.3 18.5 17.0 15.8 14.6 13.6 12.6 11.7 10.9
27 25.3 23.5 22.0 20.8 19.8 18.9 18.1 16.6 15.3 14.2 13.2 12.2 11.3 10.5
26 24.9 23.1 21.6 20.4 19.4 18.5 17.6 16.2 14.9 13.8 12.7 11.7 10.8 10.0
25 24.5 22.6 21.2 20.0 18.9 18.0 17.2 15.7 14.4 13.3 12.2 11.3 10.4 9.5
24 24.1 22.2 20.7 19.5 18.5 17.6 16.7 15.3 14.0 12.8 11.8 10.8 9.9 9.0
23 23.6 21.7 20.3 19.1 18.0 17.1 16.3 14.8 13.5 12.3 11.3 10.3 9.4 8.5
22 23.2 21.3 19.8 18.6 17.6 16.6 15.8 14.3 13.0 11.8 10.8 9.8 8.9 8.0
21 22.7 20.8 19.3 18.1 17.1 16.1 15.3 13.8 12.5 11.3 10.3 9.3 8.4 7.5
20 22.2 20.3 18.8 17.6 16.6 15.6 14.8 13.3 12.0 10.8 9.7 8.7 7.8 6.9
19 21.7 19.8 18.3 17.1 16.0 15.1 14.2 12.7 11.4 10.2 9.2 8.2 7.2 6.4
18 21.2 19.3 17.8 16.6 15.5 14.5 13.7 12.2 10.8 9.7 8.6 7.6 6.7 5.8
17 20.6 18.7 17.2 16.0 14.9 14.0 13.1 11.6 10.3 9.1 8.0 7.0 6.1 5.2
16 20.1 18.2 16.7 15.4 14.3 13.4 12.5 11.0 9.7 8.5 7.4 6.4 5.4 4.5
15 19.5 17.6 16.1 14.8 13.7 12.8 11.9 10.4 9.0 7.8 6.7 5.7 4.8 3.9
14 18.9 16.9 15.4 14.2 13.1 12.1 11.2 9.7 8.4 7.1 6.0 5.0 4.1 3.2
13 18.2 16.3 14.8 13.5 12.4 11.4 10.6 9.0 7.6 6.4 5.3 4.3 3.3 2.4
12 17.5 15.6 14.1 12.8 11.7 10.7 9.8 8.3 6.9 5.7 4.6 3.5 2.6 1.7
11 16.8 14.8 13.3 12.0 10.9 10.0 9.1 7.5 6.1 4.9 3.8 2.7 1.8 0.9
10 16.1 14.1 12.5 11.3 10.1 9.2 8.3 6.7 5.3 4.1 2.9 1.9 0.9 -
9 15.2 13.2 11.7 10.4 9.3 8.3 7.4 5.8 4.4 3.2 2.0 1.0 - -
8 14.4 12.3 10.8 9.5 8.4 7.4 6.5 4.9 3.5 2.2 1.1 - - -
7 13.4 11.4 9.8 8.5 7.4 6.4 5.4 3.8 2.4 1.2 - - - -
6 12.3 10.3 8.7 7.4 6.3 5.2 4.3 2.7 1.3 - - - - -
5 11.2 9.1 7.5 6.2 5.0 4.0 3.1 1.4 - - - - - -
4 9.8 7.7 6.1 4.8 3.6 2.6 1.7 - - - - - - -
3 8.3 6.2 4.5 3.2 2.0 0.9 - - - - - - - -
2 6.3 4.2 2.6 1.2 - - - - - - - - - -
1 3.8 1.7 - - - - - - - - - - - -
LP Factor = 1.673 1.149 0.881 0.714 0.603 0.522 0.461 0.374 0.315 0.272 0.240 0.215 0.194 0.177
Trap pressure Flash pressure % Flash Condensate load Mass flash

bar g bar g % X kg / h = kg / h
Total flash steam
bar g bar g % X kg / h = kg / h kg / h
bar g bar g % X kg / h = kg / h
Velocity factor * Velocity Choose on < 3 m/s
67 m /s FV6
Total
flash steam LP factor Total volume 138 m /s FV8
kg / h X = m /h
3 ÷ 243 = m /s FV12
385 m /s FV15
560 m /s FV18
* Note: Size on a take-off velocity of 3 m / s or less.
AI-P404-12 AB Issue 3 Sizing A Flash Vessel On Up To Three Trap Pressures

Boiler house
Blowdown vessels
TI-P405-33
EMM Issue 9
BDV60
Blowdown Vessels
Description
BDV60 blowdown vessels are marked and comply with the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED).
They also comply with Blowdown Systems, Guidance for Industrial Steam Boilers (Ref: BG03), for the construction of vessels used in
boiler blowdown applications, issued by the Health and Safety Executive. 2.9
BDV60 blowdown vessels are designed to accept discharges from: 1
- Manual/automatically controlled bottom blowdown.
- Automatic TDS blowdown control valves and systems.
- Controlled bleed valves for continuous blowdown.
- Level control chambers and level gauge glasses.
- Heat recovery equipment.
Design and construction

Design code ASME VIII DIV 1 2015
Material Carbon steel
Standard EN 1092 PN16 flanges

Connection ASME Class 150 and
Optional ASME B16.5
ASME Class 300 flanges
Paint finish Temperature resistant silver paint
Associated equipment
- VH vent head
- M21S2 ball valve
- DCV2 check valves
- Pressure gauge and 'U' syphon
- Vessel drain valve
- Cooling water system
For further details please refer to the appropriate literature.
Page 1 of 7
Boiler house
2 Blowdown vessels
Materials
3
9
9
12, 13 and 14
1 5
2.9
2
6 and 7
10
11
No. Part Material No. Part Material
1 Shell cylinder BS EN 10028-2 P265GH 9 Lifting lug BS EN 10028-2 P265GH
2 Dished ends BS EN 10028-2 P265GH 10 Wrapper plate BS EN 10028-2 P265GH
3 Nozzle, pipe ASTM A333 Gr.6 11 Support leg/foot BS EN 10025 S275
4 Nozzle, flange A105N 12 Nameplate stand-off BS EN 10028-2 P265GH
5 Nozzle, coupling ASTM A350 LF2 13 Nameplate bracket BS EN 10025 S275
6 Inspection opening BS EN 10028-2 P265GH 14 Nameplate Aluminium
7 Inspection opening gasket Rubber, NR/SBR Long radius butt weld elbow ASTM A420 WPL6
15
(Internal)
8 Impingement plate ASTM A240, 304
EMM Issue 9
BDV60 Blowdown Vessels
Boiler house
Blowdown vessels 2
Vent head
with internal separator removes moisture from
the steam.
Lifting lugs
for safe positioning of vessel on site.
Inlet number 3
Pressure gauge and 'U' syphon
2.9
for level control chamber or TDS blowdown.
for monitoring operation.
3
Inlet number 2
for discharges from
Outlet to drain
automatic TDS control
maintains internal standing
system or level control
water level to cool incoming
chamber/gauge glass
blowdown.
blowdown.
Oval inspection opening

DCV2
Check valve control
M21S2 Cooling water system

Ball valve for applications where
blowdown is very frequent.
Line drain valves

for emptying a shutdown boiler.
Note: BDV60/6, BDV60/8 and

BDV60/10 have two inspection
openings - see page 6.
Inlet number 1
for main blowdown from the
bottom of the boiler only.
Vessel drain valve for clearing sludge from the blowdown vessel.
This is only a representation of a possible set-up, the product may have 3 or 4 legs and the inspection
port may be different on the product.
EMM Issue 9
Boiler house
2 Blowdown vessels
Sizing and selection
The selection of a blowdown vessel depends on the flowrate and the proportion of flash steam released.
The following factors affect the selection:
- The boiler pressure.
- The number of boilers.
- The duration of blowdown.
- The blowdown line size.
- The length of blowdown line between the boiler and the blowdown vessel.
- The blowdown regime.
For example the sizing below assumes the blowdown line has an 'equivalent straight length' of at least 7 m.
When estimating 'equivalent straight length' the lengths shown in Table 1 should be added to the length of straight pipe to allow for
valves and fittings.
2.9 From Table 1 it will be seen that in most practical applications it would be unusual for the equivalent straight length to be less than 7 m.
If the length is less than 7 m multiply the actual boiler pressure by 1.15 before using the sizing table, Table 2.
4 The blowdown regime:
- Typical normal bottom blowdown of, perhaps, 5 seconds duration.
- Weekly low level alarm testing where practice is in accordance with BG01 and INDG436 - steam down from normal level to first low
water level and blow down from first to second low water level.
- Blowdown discharges from sequencing valves on external chambers, gauge glasses etc.
- Automatic TDS control discharges.
The selection table (Table 2) only applies if the blowdown duration is no longer than 20 seconds in total, starting with a cold
vessel (water at a temperature of 15 °C to 20 °C).
If this time is exceeded, carryover of water with the flash steam may occur through the vent. The water may also be too hot to discharge
safely and legally into a public drainage system.
Always incorporate a cooling water system for multi-boiler applications or in instances where the frequency or duration of blowdown
is considerably in excess of the requirements stated in Blowdown Systems, Guidance for Industrial Steam Boilers (Ref: BG03), BG01
and INDG436.
If there is any doubt about correct vessel selection, please contact Spirax Sarco outlining the specific conditions and
blowdown regime.
Table 2 Blowdown vessel selection
Table 1 Equivalent straight lengths 25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm
Blowdown line size
(1") (1¼") (1½") (2")
25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm
Blowdown line size
(1") (1¼") (1½") (2") Boiler pressure
Blowdown vessel BDV60/_
Pipe fitting or valve Equivalent length in metres bar g psi g
Long radius bend 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.9 5.5 80 3 3 3 4
Manifold inlet 1.1 1.5 1.7 2.2 7.6 110 3 3 4 5
Globe valve 9.6 12.2 13.9 17.8 8.3 120 3 4 4 6
Check valve 3.6 4.3 5.0 6.3 10.3 150 3 4 5 6
Blowdown valve 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 12.1 175 4 4 5 8
17.2 250 4 5 6 8
20.7 300 5 6 8 10
24.1 350 5 6 8 10
27.6 400 6 8 8 -
Note: For intermediate pressures go to the next higher pressure.
EMM Issue 9
Boiler house
Blowdown vessels 2
Table 1 Equivalent straight lengths Table 3 Vent head selection
Note: The vent head required depends on the vessel selected
25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm
Blowdown line size
(1") (1¼") (1½") (2") For a BDV60/3 select a VH4 vent head
Pipe fitting or valve Equivalent length in metres For a BDV60/4 select a VH4 vent head
Long radius bend 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.9 For a BDV60/5 select a VH6 vent head
Manifold inlet 1.1 1.5 1.7 2.2 For a BDV60/6 select a VH6 vent head
Globe valve 9.6 12.2 13.9 17.8 For a BDV60/8 select a VH8 vent head
Check valve 3.6 4.3 5.0 6.3 For a BDV60/10 select a VH8 vent head
Blowdown valve 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5
Graph 1 Blowdown flowrates

This graph will give the flowrate of blowdown in litres per second.
Table 2 Blowdown vessel selection When this value has been read, multiply it by the duration of
blowdown (seconds), and the answer will be the maximum volume
Blowdown line size
25 mm
(1")
32 mm
(1¼")
40 mm
(1½")
50 mm
(2")
discharged.
Blowdown
2.9
Boiler pressure
Blowdown vessel BDV60/_
line size
5
bar g psi g

5.5 80 3 3 3 4
7.6 110 3 3 4 5

8.3 120 3 4 4 6
Blowdown flowrate (I/s)

10.3 150 3 4 5 6

12.1 175 4 4 5 8

17.2 250 4 5 6 8

20.7 300 5 6 8 10
24.1 350 5 6 8 10
27.6 400 6 8 8 -

Note: For intermediate pressures go to the next higher pressure.

Boiler pressure (bar g)
How to select the blowdown vessel:

Step 1. With the aid of Table 1, determine the equivalent straight length of the blowdown line.
Step 2. Use Table 2 to initially establish the correct size of vessel. Note that if the result of Step 1 is less than 7 m, multiple
the boiler pressure by 1.15.
If the vessel is to be used in the conditions set out above, then continue to Step 4.
Step 3. Using Table 4 which contains the vessel data, establish the volume of standing water in the selected vessel.
This volume should be at least twice that of the maximum volume of blowdown. The maximum volume of blowdown is
usually the volume discharged when blowing down from 1st low level to 2nd low level alarm. If this volume is unknown,
it can be calculated with the aid of Graph 1, where details on its use are given.
If it is determined that the volume of standing water is insufficient, then a larger blowdown vessel must be
selected in order to satisfy this requirement.
Step 4. With the aid of Table 3, the correct vent head can be selected to suit the vessel.
The selection is now complete.
Selection example:
For a 10 bar g boiler with 40 mm blowdown line at least 7 m long select, from Table 2, a BDV60/5.
From Table 3 select a VH6 vent head.
EMM Issue 9
Boiler house
2 Blowdown vessels
Table 4 Sizes, pipe connections, dimensions, weights and capacities (approximate) in mm, kg and L
Blowdown vessel type BDV60/3 BDV60/4 BDV60/5 BDV60/6 BDV60/8 BDV60/10
A Flanged PN16 * 100 100 150 150 200 200
B Flanged PN16 * 80 80 100 100 150 150
Oval Height (Internal) 100 100 100 100 100 100

C Inspection
opening Width (Internal) 150 150 150 150 150 150
D 460 610 765 915 1205 1500
Sizes,pipe E 400 400 400 400 400 400

connections and
F 500 540 580 630 705 770
dimensions
G 310 350 390 440 525 590
H 1830 1910 1995 2095 2240 2370

2.9 J 1080 1125 1165 1215 1290 1355
6 K 330 405 485 560 705 850
X 1080 1120 1163 1568 1612 1676
Y - - - 864 962 1026
Number of legs 3 3 3 3 4 4
Empty 185 220 275 392 630 910

Weights
Full (e.g. for hydraulic test) 376 580 861 1267 2252 3610
Capacities - standing water 96 180 293 437 811 1350
* Note: Flanged ASME B16.5 Class 150 and 300 connections are available at extra cost. For further details contact Spirax Sarco.
K K Inlet 3
DN25 PN16
D (Level control chamber and gauge glass blowdown or TDS blowdown)
A vent
Inlet 2
G DN25 PN16
F (TDS control system or
level control chamber/
C
gauge glass blowdown)
" BSPT
pressure
gauge
Name-plate
H B
outlet Inlet 1
DN50 PN16
X
(Main bottom blowdown) ¾" BSP cooling water
J inlet
1" BSP temperature sensor

Y
This is only a representation of a possible set-up, the
E 2" BSP product may have 3 or 4 legs and the inspection port may
drain be different on the product.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco BDV60/5 blowdown vessel and a VH6 vent head to suit a 10 bar g boiler having a 40 mm blowdown line.
EMM Issue 9
Boiler house
Blowdown vessels 2
Please note:
For the application of boiler blowdown and to comply with the HSE Guidance Note Blowdown Systems, Guidance for Industrial Steam
Boilers (Ref: BG03) the vessel internal pressure should not exceed 0.35 bar g.
Body design conditions PN16
Minimum design temperature -10 °C
Maximum operating pressure re. Blowdown Systems, Guidance or Industrial Steam Boilers (Ref: BG03) 0.35 bar g
Maximum operating temperature re. Blowdown Systems, Guidance for Industrial Steam Boilers (Ref: BG03) 109 °C

2.9
7
Maintenance note:
The vessel must be drained every six
months to remove concentrated blowdown
water/sludge. Before reusing, the vessel
must be refilled with fresh water.
Blowdown vessels should be thoroughly
examined by a 'competent person' every
14 months or at ever y major boiler
inspection.
Spare parts:
New gaskets for the inspection openings
are available as spares from Spirax Sarco. Note: There is a second inspection
opening on the BDV60/6, BDV60/8 and
BDV60/10 which is fitted 180° to the
top opening. Other sizes have a single
central opening, similar to the one shown
on page 2.
EMM Issue 9
Boiler house
2 Blowdown vessels
2.9
8
Boiler house
Blowdown vessels
TI-P405-47
EMM Issue 2
KBV21i and KBV40i

Key Operated Boiler Blowdown Valves
Description
The key operated boiler blowdown valve consists of a carbon steel reduced bore ball valve with carbon reinforced PTFE seats and a
key operated mechanism in stainless steel. Two types of key are sold as optional extras and are available as follows:
- Standard length key.
- Extended length 'T' bar type key for use where access to the valve is limited. 2.9
To ensure compliance with boiler regulations the key cannot be removed when the valve is open.
Note: The standard length key and extended length 'T' bar type key are sold separately. It is recommended that an extended length 'T'
9
bar type key is purchased for valve sizes DN50 and DN65.
Standards
These products comply with the requirements of the European Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU and carries the mark
when so required.
ISO mounting in accordance with ISO 5211.
Antistatic device complying with ISO 7121 and BS 5351.
Certification
These products are available with certififcation to EN 10204 3.1.
Note: All certification / inspection requirements must be stated at the time of
order placement.

DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50 and DN65
Flanged PN40 (F4), PN40 (BS) or ASME (ANSI) B 16.5 Class 300.
Available flange options:
Flange Face-to-face Flange thickness
PN40 (F4) DIN 3002 F4 EN 1092 Part 1
PN40 (BS) BS 2080 EN 1092 Part 1
ASME (ANSI) 300 ASME B 16.10 ASME B 16.5
Materials
Body and insert Zinc plated carbon steel ASTM A216 WCB
Stem seals Antistatic R-PTFE
Vented ball Austenitic stainless steel AISI 316
DN65 Austenitic stainless steel AISI 316

Stem
DN25 - DN50 Martensitic stainless steel AISI 420
Seats Carbon and graphite reinforced PTFE PDR 0.8
Page 1 of 5
Boiler house
2 Blowdown vessels
The product must not be used in this region
Temperature °C
KBV21i Steam
saturation
curve
Pressure bar g
PMA Maximum allowable pressure 40 bar g @ 120°C
TMA Maximum allowable temperature 260°C @ 0 bar g

2.9 PMO Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service 17.25 bar g
10 TMO Maximum operating temperature 260°C @ 0 bar g
Minimum operating temperature. Note: For lower operating temperatures consult Spirax Sarco -29°C
PMX Maximum differential pressure is limited to the PMO
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of : 60 bar g
The product must not be used in this region

Temperature °C
KBV40i Steam
saturation
curve
Pressure bar g
Body design conditions ASME 300
PMO Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service 17.25 bar g
TMO Maximum operating temperature 260°C @ 0 bar g
Minimum operating temperature. Note: For lower operating temperatures consult Spirax Sarco -29°C
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of : 76.5 bar g
Valve coefficients
Size DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65
Kv value 30 40 81 103 197
How to specify
DN40 key operated boiler blowdown valve, flanged PN40 with carbon reinforced seats and stainless steel key.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN40 KBV21i key operated boiler blowdown valve having PN40 (F4) flanged connections.
KBV21i and KBV40i Key Operated Boiler Blowdown Valve

Boiler house
Blowdown vessels 2
Valve size Flange A B C D E F Weight
F4 125 119 35 19 3.9
DN25 BS 165 119 35 19 4.1
A300 165 119 35 19 4.3
F4 130 130 35 25 5.3
DN32 BS 178 130 35 25 5.7
A300 178 130 35 25 5.5
F4 140 131 35 30 6.7
DN40 BS 190 131 35 30 7.1
A300 190 131 35 30 8.0
F4 150 139 35 37 9.0
DN50 BS 216 139 35 37 9.9
A300
F4
216
170
139
140
35
35
37
50
10.1
12.4
2.9
DN65 BS 241 140 35 50 13.9 11
A300 241 140 35 50 15.0
Standard length key 32 258 0.4
Extended length 'T' bar key 500 375 0.9
'T' bar key
E Standard key
D
C
B
F

Boiler house
2 Blowdown vessels
Spare parts - DN25 to DN50
The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn in a grey line are not supplied as spares.
To ensure correct operation and maintain the warranty, use only Spirax Sarco original parts.
Before actioning any maintenance programme observe the 'Safety Information' in Section 1 of the Information and Maintenance
Instructions IM-P405-48 supplied with the unit.
Available spares
Seats, insert 'O' ring and stem seals 5, 6, 9, 10
Insert tool - Required to aid the removal of the ball valve insert (2) Not shown
Please note: Spare parts are common for both the KBV21i and KBV40i.
Caution - The ball must be installed with the vent hole on the upstream side of the valve.
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of ball valve.
Example: 1 set of seats, insert 'O' ring and stem seals for a Spirax Sarco DN50 KBV21i boiler blowdown valve.
2.9
12
10
5 5 6
Ball valve insert (2)

(not an available spare).
Please note: You will need to order the Insert tool listed in the table above to aid removal.

Boiler house
Blowdown vessels 2
Spare parts - DN65
Before actioning any maintenance programme observe the 'Safety Information' in Section 1 of the Information and Maintenance
Instructions IM-P405-48 supplied with the unit.
Available spares
Seats, insert 'O' ring, seat 'O' ring, stem 'O' ring, lower stem seals and upper stem packing 5, 6, 7, 8, 11, 12
Please note: Spare parts are common for both the KBV21i and KBV40i.
How to order spares

Example: 1 set of seats, insert 'O' ring, seat 'O' ring, stem 'O' ring, lower stem seals and upper stem packing for a Spirax Sarco DN65
KBV40i boiler blowdown valve.
2.9
13
12
8
11
7 5 5 7 6


Boiler house
2 Blowdown vessels
2.9
14
Boiler house
Blowdown vessels
TI-P405-45
EMM Issue 3
ABV21i and ABV40i

Air Actuated Boiler Blowdown Valves
Description
The Spirax Sarco ABV21i and ABV40i one piece end entry, reduced bore ball valves are fitted with 90° rotary spring return pneumatic
actuator, for boiler blowdown duties.
They are used in conjunction with a Spirax Sarco blowdown timer to provide timed control of bottom blowdown, ensuring that the
recommended boiler blowdown cycles occur with minimum heat loss, avoiding duplication or omission. 2.9
The pneumatic actuator, (which can also be operated with other non-corrosive gases), moves through 90° to open the valve, and has
a spring return fail-close operation.
A switch box is mounted on the actuator, and either or both microswitches may be wired to a Building Management System if required.
15
Note: The BT1050 blowdown timer uses one switch only to indicate 'valve fully closed' or 'valve not fully closed' positions, and does
not indicate that the valve has opened fully.
A solenoid valve is required, which may be directly mounted to the NAMUR
(VDI / VDE 3845) interface on the actuator.
A suitable solenoid valve may be selected from the Spirax Sarco MV range.
Alternatively, an air supply may be connected directly to the actuator port
'A' (¼" BSP), where it is necessary to install the solenoid valve remote from
the actuator.
A standard ¼" BSP 3-way solenoid valve may also be used.
3-port / 2-way NAMUR mounting solenoid types:
MV11 - 230 Vac, MV12 - 110 Vac, MV13 - 24 Vac, MV14 - 24 Vdc
LSB31
The ABV21i and ABV40i must be installed with the flow in the direction of switch
the arrow on the body. box
Principal features:
- Automatic timed blowdown minimises wasted heat.
- Suitable for boiler pressures up to 17.25 bar g.
- Spring return for fail-safe operation.
- Pneumatic actuator for fast response.
Standards
These products comply with the requirements of the European Pressure
Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU and carries the mark when so required.
ISO mounting in accordance with ISO 5211.
Antistatic device complying with ISO 7121 and BS 5351. Port 'A'
Certification
These products are available with certififcation to EN 10204 3.1.
Note: All certification / inspection requirements must be stated at the time NAMUR
of order placement. mounting
holes

DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50 and DN65
Flanged PN40 (F4), PN40 (BS) or ASME B 16.5 Class 300.
Available flange options:

Flange Face-to-face Flange thickness
PN40 (F4) DIN 3002 F4 EN 1092 Part 1
PN40 (BS) BS 2080 EN 1092 Part 1
ASME 300 ASME B 16.10 ASME B 16.5
Page 1 of 7
Boiler house
2 Blowdown vessels
Technical data
Operating time (full stroke) 0.25 - 0.6 seconds
Clean compressed air

Operating media
Non-corrosive gas
DN25 BVA315S/14 0.0002 (N)m 3 / stroke
DN32 BVA320S/14 0.0006 (N)m 3 / stroke

Compressed air consumption @ 6 bar g DN40
BVA325S/14 actuator 0.0008 (N)m 3 / stroke
DN50
DN65 BVA330S/14 actuator 0.0011 (N)m 3 / stroke
LSB31 switch rating 10 A 250 Vac
Protection rating IP67
Switch sensor Mechanical 2 - SPDT
2.9
16 Pressure / temperature limits The product must not be used in this region.
ABV21i ABV40i
Temperature °C
Temperature °C
Steam Steam
saturation saturation
curve curve
Pressure bar g Pressure bar g

Valve
ABV21i PN40
Body design conditions
ABV40i ASME 300
ABV21i 40 bar g @ 120 °C

PMA Maximum allowable pressure
ABV40i 51 bar g @ 38 °C
TMA Maximum allowable temperature 260 °C @ 0 bar g
Minimum allowable temperature -29 °C
TMO Maximum operating temperature 260 °C @ 0 bar g
Minimum operating temperature (Note: For lower operating temperatures consult Spirax Sarco) -29 °C
ABV21i 60 bar g
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of:
ABV40i 76.5 bar g
Actuator
Minimum ambient temperature 0 °C
Maximum air supply pressure 8 bar g
Minimum air supply pressure Depends on operating conditions
MV series solenoid
ABV21i and ABV40i Air Actuated Boiler Blowdown Valves

Boiler house
Blowdown vessels 2
Valve coefficients
Size DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65
Kv value 30 40 81 103 197
Materials
Valve Actuator
Body and insert Zinc plated carbon steel ASTM A216 WCB Body, piston
Aluminium - anodised
and end caps
Stem seals Antistatic R-PTFE
Pinion Carbon steel - nickel plated
Vented ball Austenitic stainless steel AISI 316
'O' ring seals Nitrile rubber
DN65 Austenitic stainless steel AISI 316
Stem
DN25 - DN50 Martensitic stainless steel AISI 420
Seats Carbon and graphite reinforced PTFE PDR 0.8 2.9

17
How to specify
Air actuated ball valve, DN40, PN40 with carbon reinforced seats, 90 degree rotary pneumatic actuator and switch box.
NAMUR compatible solenoid valve 220 / 240 Vac.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN40 ABV21i air actuated boiler blowdown valve having PN40 (F4) flanged connections plus 1 off
MV11 solenoid valve 220 / 240 Vac.

Boiler house
2 Blowdown vessels
Valve size Actuator type Flange A B C D E F G H Weight
PN40 (F4) 417 125 63 115 196 98 140 56 6.7
DN25 BVA315S/14 PN40 BS 417 165 103 115 196 98 140 56 6.5
Class 300 421 165 103 124 196 98 140 56 6.8
PN40 (F4) 456 130 65 140 217 108.5 140 66 9.2
DN32 BVA320S/14 PN40 BS 456 178 113 140 217 108.5 140 66 9.6
Class 300 450 178 65 134 217 108.5 140 66 9.4
PN40 (F4) 475 140 70 150 258 129 140 71 11.7
DN40 BVA325S/14 PN40 BS 475 190 120 150 258 129 140 71 12.2
Class 300 478 190 120 156 258 129 140 71 13.0
PN40 (F4) 488 150 75 165 258 129 140 71 14.1
DN50 BVA325S/14 PN40 BS 488 216 141 165 258 129 140 71 15.0
Class 300 488 216 141 165 258 129 140 71 15.1
2.9 PN40 (F4) 530 170 91 185 299 149.5 140 78 20.7
18 DN65 BVA330S/14 PN40 BS

Class 300
530
533
241
241
162
162
185
191
299
299
149.5
149.5
140
140
78
78
22.2
23.3
G E
H F
Port A
air connection
¼" BSP (G).

Boiler house
Blowdown vessels 2
Spare parts
The spare parts available are detailed below. No other parts are available as spares.
Please note: There are no spares available for the switch box.
Before actioning any maintenance programme observe the 'Safety Information' in Section 1 of IM-P405-46 supplied with the unit.
Actuator
Spare parts for the BVA300S /14

The available spare parts for the BVA300S /14 are listed on pages 6 and 7.
No other parts are available as spares.
2.9
13
14
19
15
Exploded view of the
spring set 12
6
5 6 8 17 11
5 16
10
18
11 17 8
7
Spare parts
Available spares
'O' rings set (NBR) 7, 8, 11, 12, 16
BVA300 series maintenance kit Pinion washers 13, 14, 15
Others 5, 6, 10, 17, 18
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the nomenclature of the pneumatic
actuator that they are intended for.
Note: all the spares mentioned above are sold together in one spare part kit.
Example: 1 - BVA300 series maintenance kit with 'O' rings in NBR for a Spirax Sarco BVA320S /14 pneumatic actuator.

Boiler house
2 Blowdown vessels
Valve
DN25 to DN50 Spare parts

Available spares
Seats, insert 'O' ring and stem seals 5, 6, 9, 10
Please note: Spare parts are common for both the ABV21i and ABV40i.
2.9
20
10
5 5 6

How to order spares

Example: 1 set of seats, insert 'O' ring and stem seals for a Spirax Sarco DN50 ABV21i boiler blowdown valve.

Boiler house
Blowdown vessels 2
DN65 Spare parts

Available spares
Seats, insert 'O' ring, seat 'O' ring, stem 'O' ring, lower stem seals and upper stem packing 5, 6, 7, 8, 11, 12
Please note: Spare parts are common for both the ABV21i and ABV40i.
2.9
21
12
8
11
7 5 5 7 6

How to order spares

Example: 1 set of seats, insert 'O' ring, seat 'O' ring, stem 'O' ring, lower stem seals and upper stem packing for a Spirax Sarco DN50
ABV40i boiler blowdown valve.

Boiler house
2 Blowdown vessels
AI-P693-36
EMM Issue 1
BCSR3
Blowdown Control System
The Spirax Sarco BCSR3 Blowdown Control System provides accurate, automatic control of boiler water total dissolved solids (TDS)
2.9 and is suitable for shell and water tube boilers. Accurate control of TDS minimises blowdown and reduces the risk of carryover.
Carryover of boiler water can cause waterhammer, corrosion and deposits within a steam system. The accumulation of deposits in
22 control valves, steam traps and on heat transfer surfaces will adversely affect their performance resulting in decreased productivity
and reduced efficiency.
An automatic TDS control system can significantly reduce operating costs whilst maintaining good quality steam production.
Operation
The CP40 probe continuously monitors the conductivity of the boiler water, which is directly related to the level of TDS present. This
measured value is compared with a ‘set point’ utilising the controller. If the measured value is lower than the ‘set point’, the BCV
blowdown valve remains closed. If it is higher, the blowdown valve will open, purging the boiler of high TDS concentration water. The
boiler water is replenished by clean make-up water, lowering the measured conductivity and closing the blowdown valve.
The optional SCS20 sample cooler system provides a safe and
effective method of taking regular boiler water samples for
analysis. The cooling water jacket prevents flashing due to the BCR3250/BHD50
controller BCR3150
pressure drop and sub-cools the boiler water sample to an
controller
acceptable analysis temperature.
The BCR3250/BHD50 can operate a bottom blowdown valve by
a real time clock controlled timer. BCR3150
Available options or
Blowdown valve Actuation Connections
Probe CP40
230 Vac elbow Probe
BCV 24 Vac see BCV TI
Pneumatic
Controller Voltage Min. conductivity

BCR3250/BHD50
24 Vac ≥ 1 μS @ 25 °C Stop valve
BCR3150
Conductivity probe Probe length

300 mm
500 mm
CP40
1000 mm
Check valve
1500 mm
Probe elbow Size/connection (boiler) BCV

PE1 DN15/PN40 blowdown
valve
PE2 DN20/PN40 SCS20 sample
PE3 DN25/PN40 cooler system
PE4 DN20/BS10 Table H
PE5 DN25/BS10 Table H
Available options continued on next page Note: See specific product TI's for further information.
Boiler house
Blowdown vessels 2
Available options - continued
ABV Bottom Blowdown valve Connections Solenoid valve Voltage
DN25 ABV21i PN40/ANSI 300 MV11 230 Vac
DN32 ABV21i PN40 MV12 110 Vac
DN40 ABV21i PN40/ANSI 300 MV13 24 Vac
DN50 ABV21i PN40/ANSI 300 MV14 24 Vdc
DN65 ABV21i PN40/ANSI 300

Note: See specific product TI's for further information.
BCR3250/BHD50
controller
2.9
23
Probe
elbow CP40 Probe
Stop valve
Check valve
SCS20 BCV blowdown

sample cooler system valve
Switchbox
Solenoid valve
ABV bottom blowdown valve
AI-P693-36
EMM Issue 1
BCSR3 Blowdown Control System
Boiler house
2 Blowdown vessels
2.9
24
Boiler house
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Vent heads 2
TI-P405-42
AB Issue 2
VHT
Vent Heads
Description
Spirax Sarco VHT vent heads are designed for fitting to vertical
open ended steam vent pipes. The vent head will discharge dry
steam safely to atmosphere, avoiding the possibility of
discomfort or even injury to personnel and material damage
to buildings. 2.10
The vent head incorporates an internal baffle to separate
entrained water from the steam. 1
Principle features:
- Efficient separation.
- Stainless steel body for long maintenance free life.
- A simple and effective vent head for general applications.
Applications
Vent heads are ideal for use on blowdown vessels, condensate
vessels, boiler feedtanks, hot water storage tanks etc.
Warning: Vent heads must not be used for safety valve outlets.
Vent heads are selected to be the same nominal size as the
vent pipe.
Materials
Body Austenitic stainless steel 304L
Flanges Carbon steel, black electrophoretic coating
Sizes and pipe connections Dimensions / weights (approximate) in mm and kg

Description Size Inlet connection A B C Weight
Screwed BSP 203 137 - 2.08
VHT2 DN50 2"
Screwed NPT 203 137 - 2.08
Screwed BSP 203 145 - 2.70
VHT3 DN80 3" Screwed NPT 203 145 - 2.70
Flanged EN 1092 PN16 or ASME 150 203 173 192 3.65
VHT4 DN100 4" Flanged EN 1092 PN16 or ASME 150 304 237 224 6.31
VHT6 DN150 6" Flanged EN 1092 PN16 or ASME 150 403 302.5 280 10.76
VHT8 DN200 8" Flanged EN 1092 PN16 or ASME 150 403 314 334 12.28
Safety information, installation and maintenance A

Installation note:
Installation of the screwed and flanged vent heads is relatively Screwed
straight forward. The flanged vent heads have a lightweight flange B
drilled to suit both the PN and ASME flange standards.
Disposal:
The product is recyclable. No ecological hazard is anticipated with
the disposal of this product providing due care is taken.
A
How to specify
Spira x Sarc o t ype VHT with austenitic stainless steel
construction and screwed / carbon steel flanges.
Vent heads shall incorporate an internal baffle and a screwed
drain outlet connection.
Flanged
How to order B
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN100 VHT4 vent head having a
flanged EN 1092 PN16 inlet connection.
C
Boiler house
2 Vent heads
2.10
2
Boiler house
Bottom blowdown systems
2
TI-P405-51
EMM Issue 4
BBV
Automatic or Manually Actuated
Boiler Blowdown Valves DN15 to DN50
Description
The BBV is specifically designed for the removal of suspended/deposited solids and water from the bottom of steam boilers.
The BBV is available in air-actuated and manual versions. The air-actuated version is supplied with a manual hand lever. The valve is
spring-to-close on power failure and the manual version can easily be upgraded to an automatic version.
When used with a Spirax Sarco blowdown controller the automatic version provides timed control of blowdown, ensuring that the 2.11
recommended blowdown occurs with the minimum of heat loss and avoids duplication and omissions.
The valve can be fitted with a mechanical switchbox. This can be linked to the blowdown controller or a BMS system to indicate when 1
the valve has not closed.
WARNING:
This product should only be used to purge boiler water containing non-
metallic sludge and sediment within the pressure and temperature limits.
For optimum performance, ensure that TDS value is in accordance with
the boiler's instructions.
Principal features:
- Easily upgraded from manual to automatic operation.
- Dedicated self-adjusting and self-cleaning spindle seals.
- Engineered for the specific application of bottom blowdown.
- Flow pressure assists closing.
Available types of boiler blowdown valve:

DN15
BBV43 PN/M Steel body BBV_3 PN/M
Air pneumatically actuated supplied shown
BBV63 PN/M Stainless steel body
with a manual actuation lever
BBV83 PN/M Alloy steel body
BBV43 M Steel body

Manually actuated complete with a
BBV63 M Stainless steel body
manual actuation lever
BBV83 M Alloy steel body
Please note: All of the 'M' versions can be automated to ' PN/M'.
Optional extras:
- Automatic bottom blowdown timer controller.
- Mechanical switch (with mounting kit).
- Pneumatic actuator upgrade kit.
- Physical lock kit.
Standards
This product range fully complies with the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED).
Certification
This product is available with material certification to EN 10204 3.1.
Page 1 of 4
Boiler house
Size and pipe connections:
Other available options:
½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½", 2" Butt weld
Socket weld
Flanged EN 1092 PN40, PN63 and PN100 JIS/KS 30 and JIS/KS 40
For alternative connections to those stated opposite please contact Spirax Sarco.
Flanged ASME 300 and ASME 600
Materials
BBV4_ Carbon Steel 17 Nut Carbon Steel
1 Body BBV6_ Stainless Steel 18 Upper housing Carbon Steel
BBV8_ Alloy Steel 19 Diaphragm Reinforced NBR

2.11 2 Plug Stainless Steel + stellite 20 Gasket Reinforced Graphite
2 3 Seat Stainless Steel + stellite 21 Vent plug Brass
4 Seat gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite 22 Bolt Carbon Steel
5 Seat retainer Stainless Steel 23 Diaphragm plate Aluminium
BBV4_ Carbon Steel 24 Spindle Stainless Steel
6 Cover BBV6_ Stainless Steel 25 Lever stem Stainless Steel
BBV8_ Alloy Steel 26 Screw Carbon Steel
BBV_ _P PTFE 27 Seal Polyurethane

7 Packing
BBV_ _H Graphite 28 Spring Spring Steel
8 Cover gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite 29 Spring guide Stainless Steel
BBV_ _H Stainless Steel 30 Connector Stainless Steel
9 Bonnet nuts BBV6_ 31 Lever SG Iron
Other Carbon Steel 32 Axis Stainless Steel
BBV_ _H Stainless Steel 33 Roller Stainless Steel
10 Bonnet studs BBV6_ 34 Spring graphite Spring Steel
Other Carbon Steel 35 Elastic ring Carbon Steel
Actuator BBV6_ Stainless Steel 36 Elastic ring Carbon Steel

11
clamp nut Other Carbon Steel 37 Washer Carbon Steel
12 Gland nut Stainless Steel 38 O'ring Viton
13 Scraper ring PTFE 39 Spacer Carbon Steel
14 Yoke SG Iron 40 Washer Carbon Steel
15 Closed plate Stainless Steel 41 Plastic protection Plastic
16 Hex. head screw Carbon Steel 42 Screw Stainless Steel
Kvs values
Seat diameter (mm) 22 25
Kvs values 4.9 7.2 10 18
For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Page 2 of 17 TI-P405-51
EMM Issue 4
BBV Automatic or Manually Actuated Boiler Blowdown Valves DN15 to DN50
Boiler house
Bottom blowdown systems 2
23 40 18
25 21
22
16, 17
39
38
37
27
2.11
19
3
26
20
15
28
34
24
31
32 - 35 29
33 - 36 30
12 13
6 11
14
9, 10
DN15 BBV_3 PN/M shown
5 3 2 4
TI-P405-51 Page 3 of 17
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
Minimum air pressure/Differential pressure
Differential pressure (ΔP) across the Minimum air pressure bar g
valve DN15 - DN25 DN32 - DN50
10 bar g 0.7 1.8
15 bar g 0.9 2.6
20 bar g 1.1 3.3
25 bar g 1.2 4.0
30 bar g 1.4 4.7
32 bar g 1.4 5.0
42 bar g 1.7
63 bar g 2.4
2.11 68 bar g 2.6
80 bar g 2.9
4 100 bar g 3.6
Capacities
Size DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 180
Kv 4.9 7.2 10 18
160
Capacity (m 3 /h)
0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 140 DN32 - DN50
0.5 3.5 5.1 7.1 12.7

120
1 4.9 7.2 10.0 18.0
Capacity (m3/h)
10 15.5 22.8 31.6 56.9 100

20 21.9 32.2 44.7 80.5
80 DN25
30 26.8 39.4 54.8 98.6
Pressure
40 31.0 45.5 63.2 113.8 60
(bar) DN20
50 34.6 50.9 70.7 127.3
40 DN15
60 38.0 55.8 77.5 139.4
70 41.0 60.2 83.7 150.6 20
80 43.8 64.4 89.4 161.0

0
90 46.5 68.3 94.9 170.8 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
100 49.0 72.0 100.0 180.0 Pressure (bar)
Page 4 of 17 TI-P405-51
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
BBV43 Pressure/temperature limits - EN 1092
A D C B
Temperature °C
An extended cover is required for use in this

Steam region.
saturation
curve High temperature packing required for use in
D D this region.
C B
Pressure bar g
Notes:
1. Where the process fluid temperature is sub-zero and the ambient temperature is below +5 °C, the external moving parts of the valve
and actuator must be heat traced to maintain normal operation.
2.11
2. When selecting a valve with a bellows scaled bonnet, the pressure/temperature limits of the bellows must be read in conjunction
with the valve pressure/temperature limits shown in table below. 5

100 bar g @ 50 °C
PMO Maximum operating pressure
TMA Maximum allowable temperature 400 °C @ 59.5 bar g

A-B-B
PN100
Standard packing PTFE chevron (P) 250 °C @ 76.1 bar g
TMO Maximum operating temperature
High temperature packing (H) 400 °C @ 59.5 bar g
Minimum operating temperature -29 °C
Design for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 156 bar g

63 bar g @ 50 °C

A-C-C
PN63
Design for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 94.5 bar g

40 bar g @ 50 °C

A-D-D
PN40
TI-P405-51 Page 5 of 17
EMM Issue 4

Boiler house
2

Bottom blowdown systems

BBV43

Pressure/temperature limits - ASME

Pressure psi g

The product must not be used in this
A F E region.
Temperature °C
Temperature °F

An extended cover is required for use in
Steam
this region.
saturation
curve
High temperature packing required for
G F E
use in this region.

Pressure bar g
Notes:
1. Where the process fluid temperature is sub-zero and the ambient temperature is below +5 °C (+41 °F), the external moving parts of
2.11 the valve and actuator must be heat traced to maintain normal operation.
6
with the valve pressure/temperature limits shown in table below.

102.1 bar g @ 38 °C 1480 psi g @ 100 °F
TMA Maximum allowable temperature 425 °C @ 57.5 bar g 797 °F @ 834 psi g
A-E-E
Minimum allowable temperature -29 °C -20 °F
ASME 600
TMO Maximum operating Standard packing PTFE chevron (P) 250 °C @ 83.6 bar g 482 °F @ 1212 psi g
temperature High temperature packing (H) 425 °C @ 57.5 bar g 797 °F @ 834 psi g
Minimum operating temperature -29 °C -20 °F
Design for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 156 bar g 2 262 psi g

51.1 bar g @ 38 °C 740 psi g @ 100 °F
A-F-F
ASME 300

19.6 bar g @ 38 °C 284 psi g @ 100 °F

A-G
ASME 150
Page 6 of 17 TI-P405-51
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
BBV43 Pressure/temperature limits - JIS/KS
A I H
Temperature °C

region.
Steam
saturation High temperature packing required for use in
curve this region.
I H

Pressure bar g

Notes:

2.11


7



Body design conditions JIS/KS40

68 bar g @ 120 °C

A-H-H
JIS/KS 40
Standard packing PTFE chevron (P) 250 °C @ 60 bar g
High temperature packing (H) 425 °C @ 40 bar g
Body design conditions JIS/KS30

51 bar g @ 120 °C

A-I-I
JIS/KS 30
TI-P405-51 Page 7 of 17
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
A K J

A L
Temperature °C

region.

Steam High temperature packing required for use in
saturation this region.
curve
L K J

Pressure bar g
Notes:
2.11 and actuator must be heat traced to maintain normal operation.
8 with the valve pressure/temperature limits shown in table below.

100 bar g @ 100 °C

A-J-J
PN100

63 bar g @ 100 °C

A-K-K
PN63

40 bar g @ 100 °C

A-L-L
PN40
Page 8 of 17 TI-P405-51
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
BBV63 Pressure/temperature limits - ASME
Pressure psi g
A
N M
region.
Temperature °C
Temperature °F

Steam this region.
saturation
curve High temperature packing required for

O N M use in this region.

Pressure bar g
Notes:
2.11
with the valve pressure/temperature limits shown in table below. 9

99.3 bar g @ 38 °C 1 440 psi g @ 100 °F
TMA Maximum allowable temperature 538 °C @ 50 bar g 1000 °F @ 725 psi g

A-M-M
ASME 600 Standard packing PTFE chevron (P) 250 °C @ 66.8 bar g 482 °F @ 967 psi g
TMO Maximum operating
temperature High temperature packing (H) 538 °C @ 50 bar g 1000 °F @ 725 psi g
Design for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure

156 bar g 2 262 psi g
of:

49.6 bar g @ 38 °C 1 440 psi g @ 100 °F
A-N-N
ASME 300

19 bar g @ 38 °C 275 psi g @ 100 °F

A-O
ASME 150
TI-P405-51 Page 9 of 17
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
A Q P
Temperature °C

region.
Steam
curve this region.
Q P

Pressure bar g
Notes:
2.11 1. Where the process fluid temperature is sub-zero and the ambient temperature is below +5 °C, the external moving parts of the valve
10 2. When selecting a valve with a bellows scaled bonnet, the pressure/temperature limits of the bellows must be read in conjunction
Body design conditions JIS/KS 40

68 bar g @ 120 °C

A-P-P
JIS/KS 40

51 bar g @ 120 °C

A-Q-Q
JIS/KS 30
Page 10 of 17 TI-P405-51
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
A S R


Temperature °C

region.
Steam
curve this region.
S R

Pressure bar g
An extended cover is required for use in this region. 2.11

High temperature packing required for use in this region. 11
Notes:

100 bar g @ 250 °C

A-R-R
PN100

63 bar g @ 250 °C

A-S-S
PN63
High temperature packing (H) 490 °C @ 40,9 bar g
TI-P405-51 Page 11 of 17
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
BBV83 Pressure/temperature limits - ASME
Pressure psi g

A
region.
Temperature °C
Temperature °F

this region.
Steam
saturation
curve High temperature packing required for
T use in this region.

Pressure bar g
Notes:
1. Where the process fluid temperature is sub-zero and the ambient temperature is below +5 °C (+41 °F), the external moving parts of
2.11 the valve and actuator must be heat traced to maintain normal operation.
12 2. When selecting a valve with a bellows scaled bonnet, the pressure/temperature limits of the bellows must be read in conjunction

103.4 bar g @ 38 °C 1 499 psi g @ 100 °F
A-T
ASME 600
Page 12 of 17 TI-P405-51
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
A
A

Temperature °C

region.

Steam
curve this region.
V U

Pressure bar g
Notes:
and actuator must be heat traced to maintain normal operation. 2.11
13



68 bar g @ 120 °C



A-U


JIS/KS 40

51 bar g @ 120 °C

A-V
JIS/KS 30
TI-P405-51 Page 13 of 17
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
Dimensions/Weights (approximate) in mm and kg
Flanged EN 1092
Size A B C C1 D E F Weight
PN40 PN63/PN100 PN40 PN63/PN100 PN40 PN63/PN100 PN40 PN63/PN100
DN15 130 210 103 105 330 335 242 247 10.0
DN20 150 230 103 108 330 335 242 247 10.8
DN25 160 230 103 108 330 335 242 247 11.0
170 246 388
DN32 180 260 132 132 359 359 271 271 17.5
DN40 200 260 132 132 359 359 271 271 18.0
DN50 230 300 127 127 354 354 266 266 21.0
Flanged ASME
2.11 Size A B C C1 D E F Weight
14 ASME 300 ASME 600 ASME 300 ASME 600 ASME 300 ASME 600 ASME 300 ASME 600
DN15 190.5 203 103 105 330 335 242 247 170 200 272 10.0
DN20 190.5 206 103 108 330 335 242 247 170 200 272 10.8
DN25 196.9 210 103 108 330 335 242 247 170 200 272 11.0
DN32 251 132 359 271 200 17.5
DN40 235.0 251 132 132 359 359 271 271 170 200 272 18.0
DN50 266.7 286 127 127 354 354 266 266 170 200 272 21.0
Butt weld and Socket weld

Size A B C C1 D E F Weight
DN15 203 105 335 247 10.0
DN20 206 108 335 247 10.8
DN25 210 108 359 247 11.0

170 246 388
F DN32 251 132 359 271 17.5
DN40 251 132 359 271 18.0

D
DN50 286 127 354 266 21.0
DN15
C BBV_3 M
shown
DN15 C1
BBV_3 PN/M B
shown
Page 14 of 17 TI-P405-51
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
Spare parts A
PN40
ASME 150 and ASME 300
The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn in a grey line are
not supplied as spares.
Note: When placing an order for spare parts please specify clearly the full product
description as found on the label of the valve body, as this will ensure that the correct
spare parts are supplied.
Available spares - BBV series

Actuator clamping nut A C2
Gasket set (Non-bellows sealed) B, G
C1
PTFE to Graphite conversion kit C1
2.11
Stem seal kits
Graphite packing C2
Plug stem and seat kit

Fast opening trim
D1, E 15
How to order spares
Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available
spares', and state the size and type of valve including the full product description of
the product.
Example: 1 - PTFE stem seal kit for a Spirax Sarco BBV43 PWSUSS DN25 PN40
control valve.
How to fit spares

Full fitting instructions are given in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions
supplied with the spare.
D1
TI-P405-51 Page 15 of 17
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
Spare parts
A
PN63 and PN100
ASME 600
JIS/KS 30 and JIS/KS 40
The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn in broken
line are not supplied as spares.
Note: When placing an order for spare parts please specify clearly the full
product description as found on the label of the valve body, as this will
ensure that the correct spare parts are supplied.
Available spares – BBV

Actuator clamping nut A
Gasket set B, G
2.11 Stem seal kits Graphite packing C1

C1
16 Plug stem and seat kit

Fast opening trim
D1, E
How to order spares

'Available spares', and state the size and type of valve including the full
product description of the product. D1
Example: 1 - Plug stem and seat kit for a Spirax Sarco BBV43 PWSUSS
DN25 PN63 two-port control valve having flanged PN63 connections.
How to fit spares

Full fitting instructions are given in the Installation and Maintenance
Instructions supplied with the spare.
D1
H G
Page 16 of 17 TI-P405-51
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
BBV selection guide:
Valve series BBV = Boiler blowdown valve BBV
4 = Carbon steel
Body material 6 = Stainless steel 4
8 = Alloy steel
1 = Screwed
Connections 3
3 = Flanged
P = PTFE
Stem sealing P
H = Graphite 2.11
Seating W = Stellite W 17
Type of trim S = Standard trim S
Trim balancing U = Unbalanced U
Bonnet type S = Standard S

Valve size =
½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½" and 2"
DN20
EN standard = Flanged EN 1092 PN40, PN63 and PN100
Connections
For alternative ASME standard = Flanged ASME 300 and ASME 600
connections to those PN40
stated please contact Butt weld
Spirax Sarco.
Socket weld
Air pneumatically actuated supplied with a manual actuation

PN/M =
lever
Version PN/M
M = Manually actuated complete with a manual actuation lever
Selection example: BBV 4 3 P W S U S S DN20 PN40 PN/M
How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco BBV43PWSUSS DN20 PN/M
TI-P405-51 Page 17 of 17
EMM Issue 4
Boiler house
2.11
18
Boiler house
Energy monitor
TI-P408-01
EMM Issue 5
B850
Boiler House Energy Monitor
Description
The B850 is a flexible and easy to use Boiler House Energy Monitor that accurately calculates the efficiency of the boiler based on
measured inputs from fuel, feedwater, steam output, condensate return and blowdown.
The B850 is a boiler house energy monitoring solution that has been designed for organisations operating boilers on an existing
installed base and for boiler OEM's where customers specify a requirement for energy monitoring. The B850 calculates a boiler's 'real
2.12
time' energy transfer efficiency from fuel to steam. It will also measure for energy losses from the boiler due to blowdown applications.
1
Being fully compatible with a wide range of Spirax Sarco flowmetering products the B850 is the heart of a fully integrated system that
will provide Operating Managers in an increasing range of industries detailed information to be able to review boiler efficiency against
past performance.
The unit is available for either wall or panel mounting. The B850-W-2 and B850-W-2-UL are wall mounted versions are mains powered
(100 to 250 Vac), while the B850-P-2 panel mounting version is intended for direct connection to a Low Voltage power supply typically
found inside PLC panels, i.e. 24 Vdc.
The B850 is supplied with a default configuration that makes configuration easy, either off-line with the free PC based software wizard
provided with each product. When the configuration has been completed, it can be saved to file or to the free USB memory stick
provided, from where it can be plugged in and up-loaded directly into the unit. Alternatively, commissioning can be carried out via a
hierarchical menu structure through the front panel. Full commissioning details are included in the Installation and Maintenance
Instructions (IMI) supplied with the unit.
Spirax Sarco offers a complete range of flowmeters for the measurement of: Gas, Feedwater, Steam and make-up water.
For existing installed flowmeters the B850 can accept 4 - 20 mA, Pulse and RTD inputs.
The B850 is compatible with a large number of interfaces and protocols including: RS-485, Modbus RTU, BACnet MSTP,
RJ-45 Ethernet, Modbus TCP / IP, BACnet IP, USB and Hosted http web.
A GSM module can be connected to the RS-485 port which enables transfer of information about failures, alarms and measurement
values in the form of SMS text messages.
B850-W-2
wall mounted version
B850-P-2
panel mounted version
For selection of the optimum

unit for your application, please
visit page 3 'Available options'
before placing an order.
Page 1 of 8
Boiler house
2 Energy monitor
Standards and certification
This range of products fully comply with the requirements of the European Directives and carry the mark when so required.
In addition there is an cULus certified version of the wall mount variant available
The B850 is available with the following certification:
- Uncertainty Certificate / Inspection Report.
Note: All certification / inspection requirements must be stated at the time of order placement.
The B850 can calculate and display:
- Energy transfer efficiency from fuel to steam
- Potential energy losses from TDS and bottom blowdown applications
- Energy recovery from condensate return
- Steam flow and pressure
- Feedwater flow and temperature
- Fuel flow
2.12
2
Applications
Application Proposed flowmeter (B850 is the example supplied ) Meter output
Gas (Oil, Coal) Thermal mass flowmeter for gas (MTL10) (0) 4 - 20 mA
Boiler feedwater Magnetic flowmeter (ELM) (0) 4 - 20 mA
Boiler steam output Flowmeter (Gilflo, ILVA) (0) 4 - 20 mA
Make-up water Magnetic flowmeter (ELM) (0) 4 - 20 mA
TDS blowdown TDS valve Relay (State)
BB blowdown BBD valve Relay (State)
B850 Boiler House Energy Monitor

Boiler house
Energy monitor 2
Typical boiler house application
Condensate return temperature measurement
Treated
water
Steam flowmeter
supply
and optional steam
temperature and
pressure
Feedwater flowmeter and Process
temperature measurement
BC3250 2.12
Fuel Controller Blowdown vessel
supply 3
TDS valve
Fuel flowmeter
BBD bottom blowdown valve
Available options
The following versions of the B850 series have the same functions and are available as follows:
B850-P for panel mounting and is powered by 24 Vdc. Each version is equipped with two
B850-W for wall mounting and has been adapted to be powered by 100 / 240 Vac. analog outputs
Offered versions of the instruments:
B850 -x -2 -x
B850-W-2
Panel mounted version.
-P (CE and cULus approved as standard)
wall mounted
version
Wall mounted version. B850-P-2

-W (CE approved as standard, cULus panel mounted
approval optional) version
-2 Two analog 4 - 20 mA outputs.
Option with cULus approval

-UL (required for wall mount
version only)

Boiler house
2 Energy monitor
Technical data for the B850 series flow computers
User interface, front panel

Display type LCD TFT color, 3.5", with LED backlight
Display size / resolution 43.8 mm x 77.4 mm / 272 (RGB) x 480 px,
LED indication 3 two-color LEDs, red / green: ALARM, REC, USB
Keyboard 19 membrane buttons
Inputs organization
6 x I type (0 / 4 - 20 mA): IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4, IN5, IN6
Number of inputs 3 x RTD (4-wire): IN7, IN8, IN9
3 x PULS: IN10, IN11, IN12
2.12 I type (0 / 4-20 mA current loop analog inputs)
4 Signal type 0 - 20 mA or 4 - 20 mA
2-wire passive transmitter (supplied from B850) or active

Transmitter connection
transmitter (current source transmitter)
Input resistance 95 W ± 10% (protected with PTC 50 mA fuse in series)
24 Vdc +10% / -20%; max 22 mA per channel (protected with

Transmitters supply
PTC 50 mA fuse and 100 Ω resistor in series)
A / C converter resolution 18 bit (24 bit Sigma-Delta ADC)
50 Hz / 60 Hz filter Sinc3 digital filter
Damping (1st order Low Pass Software Filter time constant) 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 20 s / 30 s / 1 min / 2 min / 3 min / 5 min
Measurement resolution > 0.01% of FS
Accuracy (at Tamb = +25 °C / +77 °F) ± 0.1% of FS (typical W0.05% of FS)
Temperature drift Maximum ±0.02% of FS / °C
Maximum input voltage ± 40 Vdc / SELV
Galvanic isolation between inputs No; common potential of functional GND for all inputs
Galvanic isolation to Analog Outputs, RS-485 / RS-422, Ethernet 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
RTD type (3 analog inputs for temperature sensors)

Pt-100 x K; Ni-100 x K; where K = 1..11
Sensor types
(K – multiplier, e.g.: K = 2 for Pt-200)
-200 .. +850 °C / -328 .. +1562 °F for Pt100 x K

Measuring range
-60 .. +150 °C / -76 .. +302 °F for Ni100 x K
Sensor connection 4-wire (2-wire with wire bridges)
Wire resistance compensation Automatic , additional manual in range -99.99 .. +99.99 W
M aximum resistance of connecting wires 50 W
Damping (1st order Low Pass Filter time constant) 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 20 s / 30 s / 1 min / 2 min / 3 min / 5min
Measurement resolution > 0.05% of reading or 0.1 Ω (TBV)
Accuracy (at Tamb = +25 °C / +77 °F) ± 0.5 °C / ± 0.9 °F (typical ± 0.3 °C / ± 0.54 °F)
Temperature drift Maximum ±0.02 °C / °C / 0.036 °F / °F
Max input voltage ± 40 Vdc / SELV

Boiler house
Energy monitor 2
PULS type inputs (binary / pulse / frequency)
0 .. 20 kHz (cut off for f < 0.001 Hz)
Measuring range
(0 ..1 kHz with filter jumper J1 / J2 / J3 ON)
Minimum pulse width 25 μs (0.5 ms with filter jumper J1 / J2 / J3 ON)
Accuracy for frequency measurement

0.02%
(at Tamb = +25 °C / +77 °F)
Configuration (default): OC or Contact open / closed (Internal jumper J4 / J5 / J6 ON)
Open circuit voltage 5 Vdc
Short circuit current 5 mA
On / off threshold 2.7 V / 2.4 V

2.12
Configuration: Voltage Input (Internal jumper J4 / J5 / J6 OFF) 5
Signal amplitude 4 .. 36 Vdc
Input resistance ≥10 k W
Compensated flow and heat energy measurement

Calculation update rate 1s
Total accuracy of compensated steam, water, other liquid or

Typical: better then ± 0.5% (worst case: better then ± 2%)
technical gas flow measurement
4-20 mA analog outputs

Number of outputs 2
Output signal 4 - 20 mA passive (external current loop supply required)
Resolution 16 bit DAC
Loop resistance (R L) range for U CC = 24 V 0 .. 600 Ω
Minimum loop power supply voltage U CCmin = RL x 0.022 + 8
Maximum loop power supply voltage 28 Vdc / SELV
Accuracy (at Tamb = +25 °C / +77 °F) Better than ± 0.2% of FS / °C
Temperature drift Maximum ± 0.02% of FS / °C
Galvanic isolation to Analog Inputs, RS-485 / RS-422, Ethernet 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Binary outputs (B850-W-2 and B850-W-2-UL)

Number of outputs 4
Type of outputs 3 pole (COM, NO, NC) electromechanical relay
Contact rating (resistive load) 3 A at 85 .. 250 Vac / 30 Vdc
Maximum switching voltage 250 Vac / 125 Vdc
Maximum switching power 750 VA / 90 W
Binary outputs (B850-P-2)

Number of outputs 4
Type of outputs 2 pole Solid State Relay
Contact rating (resistive load) 0.1 A at 24 Vac/dc (max 42 Vac 60 Vdc) / SELV
Maximum ON resistance 20 Ω
Galvanic isolation (optoisolation) 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute

Boiler house
2 Energy monitor
RS-485 / 422
Transmission protocol ASCII Modbus RTU, BACnet MSTP and GSM
Number of nodes in network 256
Maximum line length 1 200 m (depends on quality of data cable and baud rate)
Baud rate 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2, 230.4 kbps
Parity control Even, Odd, None
Frame 1 start bit, 8 data bits, parity 1 bit, 1 stop bit
Internal terminating resistor Yes, activated with DIP switch
Maximum bus terminal voltages -8 V … +13 V / SELV
Minimal driver differential output voltage 1.5 V (for R L = 54 W)
Minimum receiver sensitivity 200 mV

2.12 Short-circuit / thermal protection Yes
6 Galvanic isolation to Analog Inputs, Analog Outputs, Ethernet 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Ethernet port
Transmission protocol Modbus TCP, ICMP (ping), DHCP server, http server, BACnet IP
Interface 10 BaseT Ethernet
Data buffer 300 B
Number of opened connections (simultaneously) 4
Connection type RJ-45 / SELV
LED indication 2 (build in RJ-45 socket)
USB port
Socket type A type, according to USB standard
Version USB 2.0
Recording format FAT16 (within a limited scope)
Power supply (B850-W-2 and B850-W-2-UL)

Rated supply voltage 100 - 240 Vac; 50 / 60 Hz
Supply voltage range 85 .. 264 Vac; 47 .. 63 Hz
Power consumption Maximum 20 VA
Over voltage category CAT III
Power supply (B850-P-2)

Rated supply voltage 24 Vdc (SELV and Limited Energy Supply)
Supply voltage range 18 .. 36 Vdc
Power consumption Maximum 8 W
Wire terminals (B850-W-2 and B850-W-2-UL)

Wire connection / terminals Spring type terminal block
Solid 0.2 .. 2.5 mm 2

Stranded 0.2 .. 1.5 mm 2
Conductor cross Section
Stranded with ferrule 0.25 .. 1.5 mm 2
AWG 26 .. 12
Non cULus Version cable entry 4 glands type M20, 2 glands type M16
cULus Version cable entry 4 conduit hubs ½" NPT

Boiler house
Energy monitor 2
Wire terminals (B850-P-2)
Wire connection / terminals Screw type terminal blocks, plug type
Solid 1.5 mm 2 max

Stranded 1 mm 2 max
Conductor cross Section
AWG 30 / 14
Enclosure (B850-W-2 and B850-W-2-UL)

Enclosure type Wall mounting, Polycarbonate material
217 mm x 257 mm x 134 mm (without cable glands)

238 mm x 257 mm x 134 mm (with conduit hub cULus version)
Dimensions (height x width x depth) 247 mm x 257 mm x 134 mm (with cable glands - non cULus
version)
290 mm x 300 mm x 165 mm (in cardboard box)
Weight net (gross) approx. 1.7 kg (cULus version 2.5 kg)
Protection class IP65 (not UL evaluated)

2.12
Enclosure (B850-P-2) 7
Enclosure type Panel mounting, Lexan Resin 920 material
110 mm x 206 mm x 63.5 mm (without terminals)

Dimensions (height x width x depth) 110 mm x 206 mm x 72 mm (with terminals)
Panel cut-out dimensions 186 mm x 92 mm
Panel thickness 1 .. 5 mm
Weight net (gross) approx. 0.6 kg (0.7 kg)
Protection class (front / rear) IP65 / IP20 (not UL evaluated)
Environmental conditions
Ambient temperature 0 .. +55 °C (32 .. 131 °F)
Relative humidity 5 .. 95% (non-condensing)
Altitude ≤ 2000 m (6 562 ft) above sea level
Storage temperature -30 .. +70 °C
3 Panel version (when installed in an enclosure)

Pollution degree
3 Wall version
EN 61010-1
Electrical safety UL 61010-1, 3rd Edition
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1, 3rd Edition
Immunity EN 61326-1 Table 2

EMC
Radiated and conducted emissions EN61326-1 Group 1 Class B
Installation location Indoor use only

Boiler house
2 Energy monitor
B850 A B C D E Weight
B850-W-2 (wall mounted) 257 217 134 30 * - 1.70
B850-W-2-UL (wall mounted) 257 217 134 21 - 2.5
B850-P-2 (panel mounted) 206 110 72.3 - 9.5 0.60
* Approximate dimension as the cable glands are adjustable.
B850-W-2 (wall mounted) B850-P-2 (panel mounted)

A C A C
B
2.12 B850
B
8 B850
E
B850-W-2-UL version
A C
B
B850

Installation notes:
1. The wall mounted B850-W requires 3 mounting screws (not supplied) to mount to a wall or has optionally a DIN rail mounting.
2. The panel mounted B850-P is supplied with mounting clamps.
Disposal
This product is recyclable. No ecological hazard is anticipated with the disposal of this product, provided due care is taken.
How to order
For the correct product nomenclature for the unit that best suits the intended application please revisit page 2 'Available options' before
placing an order.
Example 1: 1 off B850-P-2 panel mounted energy monitor with two analog 4-20 mA outputs, 24 Vdc supply
Example 2: 1 off M850-W-2-UL wall mounted energy monitor with two analog 4-20 mA outputs, 240 Vac supply
Spare parts
There are no spare parts available for the B850 energy monitors.

Flowmeter ing 3
Section 3
3.1 Flowmetering selection guide and UKAS accreditation
3.2 Gilflo and ILVA flowmeters
3.3 Target flowmeters

3
3.4 Orifice plate flowmeters
3.5 Flowmetering ancillaries
3.6 Vortex flowmeters
3.7 Turbine flowmeters
3.8 Electromagnetic flowmeters

Flowmetering
3
Flowmetering
Flowmetering
Local regulations selection
may restrict the use of this guide
product to below the and UKAS accreditation
conditions quoted.
3
TI-GMI-19
MI Issue 1
Flowmeter
Selection Guide
Water Acids
Viscous Hydro-
Flowmeter type / fluid Turndown and and Gas Steam Sizes
liquids carbons
Condensate chemicals
Differential Pressure
Up to 100:1
   DN50 - DN400 3.1
3.1.1 Variable Area
Target Variable Area

with Up to 50:1
 DN50 - DN100
Saturated
Integral flow computer
steam only
Target Fixed Area

with Up to 10:1
 DN25 - DN50
Saturated
steam only
Ultrasonic
Transit Time
with
Up to 40:1
   DN15 - DN2000
Vortex
with
Up to 20:1
     DN25 - DN300
Turbine Insertion
with
Up to 25:1
    DN80 - DN2000
Electromagnetic
with Up to 4:1
WirelessHARTTM
and
Up to 50:1
 DN50 - DN100
TEG heat scavenging Saturated
power supply steam only
Flowmetering
3 Flowmetering
selection guide and UKAS accreditation

TI-F21-20
EMM Issue 2
UKAS Accredited Calibration Datasheet for

Spirax Sarco Flowmeters
Spirax Sarco flowmeters are now available with UKAS Accreditation to ISO 17025. This is a
special requirement that must be stated at the time of the order. To ensure that the customer’s
requirements are fully understood, this datasheet must be completed with all the relevant data.
Selection of type of accredited calibration required:

3.1 Flowmeter type
(tick as appropriate):
TVA ILVA Compact Stem ILVA Spiraflo Gilflo TFA VLM20 Other Non-SPIRAX
2
DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN80 DN100 DN150 DN200 DN250 DN300
TFA
ILVA
Compact stem ILVA
Flowmeter size Spiraflo

(tick as appropriate): Gilflo
TVA
VLM20
Other
Non-SPIRAX
Standard (new flowmeter)

Standard (recalibration)
Custom
Number of points
Number of readings per point
Points, as percentage of maximum water flow Or user selected points
1
3
5
Type of calibration 7
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
Flowmetering
Gilflo and ILVA flowmeters

3
TI-F21-20
TI-P337-06
EMM Issue 2
MI Issue 7
Gilflo ILVA
UKAS Accredited Flowmeters
Calibration Datasheet for
System
Spirax SarcoOverview
Flowmeters
Description
Spirax Sarco flowmeters are now available with UKAS Accreditation to ISO 17025. This is a
special requirement
The Spirax that
Sarco Gilflo must
ILVA be stated at
flowmetering the time
system of theoforder.
consists two To ensure that theEL2271
customer’s
requirements
major parts: are fully understood, this datasheet must be completed with all the relevant data.
temperature
transmitter
1. The Gilflo ILVA pipeline unit. This is installed in the line where
the flow is to be measured. Using impulse pipework, this is Gilflo ILVA
connected to:
Selection of type of accredited calibration required:
2. The M610 DP transmitter assembly. This measures the
differential pressure across
Flowmeter type TVAthe ILVA
Gilflo ILVA pipeline
Compact unit
Stem and
ILVA
converts it to a 4 -20 mA output signal. This output signal can
Spiraflo Gilflo
EL2600
TFA VLM20 Other Non-SPIRAX
3.2
be used in a number of ways: pressure
i- To act as a suitable input to an EMS / BEMS which can be
transmitter 1
programmed by the user to carry out the linearising DN25 of DN32
the DN40 DN50 DN80 DN100 DN150 DN200 DN250 DN300
output signal based on the calibration data that is supplied F50C isolation valves
TFA
with each Gilflo ILVA flowmeter. Additional inputs from the
ILVA
EL2600 pressure transmitter and EL2271 temperature
transmitter can be used to carry out density compensation
for compressible flowCompact stem ILVA
applications.
Flowmeter
ii- To supply Spiraflo
sizean M750 display unit. This gives a non- M610
compensated
(tick as appropriate):display Gilflo
of rate of flow and totalised flow. It is DP transmitter assembly
suitable for liquid, gas and steam applications where density (for gas applications the
TVA
compensation is not required. M610 DP transmitter is
mounted above the
VLM20
iii- To supply a Spirax Sarco M850 flow computer. Use of the Gilflo ILVA)
pressure and temperature transmitters enables automatic
Other
density compensation to be carried out for compressible
flow applications. See the relevant TI for details of
Non-SPIRAX
pressure / temperature limits for flow computers.
The Gilfo ILVA pipeline unitStandard (new flowmeter)

can be used to measure the flow of
most industrial liquids, gases and vapours within the pressure
Standard (recalibration)
and temperature limits detailed in the TI's.
Custom
Installation Number of points
Care must be taken to meet all the requirements of the Installation EMS/
BEMS
and Maintenance InstructionsNumber
that areof included
readings per point
with the equipment.
Some installation points to watch are noted overleaf.
Points, as percentage of maximum water flow Or user selected points
In addition, heat metering is possible on saturated steam systems or
by replacing the EL2600 pressure transmitter with an EL2271 1
temperature transmitter in the condensate return line (M850 M750
3 display unit
system only). Outputs,
5 alarms,
Electrical wiring
Type of calibration 7
etc.
All electrical
(tick wiring must be carried out to the appropriate standards.
as appropriate): or
Full wiring interconnection details are included with the equipment. 10
M850
20 flow computer
Associated equipment (steam / gas)
30
Item Description Outputs,
EL2271 Temperature transmitter 40 alarms,
etc.
EL2600 Pressure transmitter 50
F50C Isolation valve 60
Gilflo ILVA Pipeline unit
70
M610 DP transmitter assembly
M750 Display unit 80
M850 Flow computer Steam or gas flow computer 90
100
Flowmetering
3 Gilflo and ILVA flowmeters
Installation points to watch: TI-P337-05

EMM
1. Ensure that all pipework is adequately supported and properly aligned. Special care should be taken to ensure that the Issue
Gilflo 16
ILVA
pipeline unit is concentrically mounted in the line.
2. The Gilflo ILVA pipeline unit should be selected on capacity rather than line size. Where line size changes on steam systems are
necessary, use eccentric reducers to avoid build-up of condensate.
3. The minimum recommended lengths of straight pipe upstream and downstream are 6 D and 3 D respectively. See other literature
for more details concerning the Gilflo ILVA.
Gilflo ILVA
4. Take care to ensure the correct direction of flow as indicated by the arrow on the flowmeter body.
5. Take care to avoid reverse flow through the flowmeter.

Flowmeter
6. Avoid installing the flowmeter downstream of a pressure reducing valve (especially on steam systems) as this may cause inaccurate
Description
readings. Similarly, avoid installing the flowmeter downstream of a partially open valve.
The Gilflo ILVA flowmeter operates on the spring loaded variable area principle and produces a differential pressure related to the rate
of flow. It can be used with most industrial fluids, gases and both saturated and superheated steam. A general description of the ILVA
7. Remember that actuated valves may cause rapid pressure fluctuations which could cause damage.
flowmetering system and its associated equipment is given in a separate TI sheet.
8. On steam or liquid systems, the M610 DP transmitter assembly is mounted below the flowmeter. Take care to ensure that all impulse
lines remain full to prevent damage to the DP transmitter through contact with steam or high temperature liquid.
DN50, DN80, DN100, DN150, DN200. For DN250 and DN300 sizes see separate literature.
Suitable for fitting between the following flanges:
9. For steam applications, care should be taken to ensure adequate line drainage, trapping etc., to avoid condensate slugs impacting
3.2 EN 1092 PN16, PN25 and PN40.
the flowmeter. Where practicable, steam separators should be fitted. These should be drained using a float trap set.
BS 10 Table H.
2
ASME
10. ForBgas
16.5applications,
Class 150, 300
the and
M610600.
DP transmitter assembly is installed above the pipework. Ensure that the impulse lines allow
JIS free
20. drainage of moisture away from the DP transmitter and back into the pipeline.
KS 20.
The Gilflo ILVA flowmeter should be installed in pipework manufactured to BS 1600 or ASME B 36.10 Schedule 40.
For different pipe standards / schedules downstream spool pieces with equivalent internal diameter as in BS 1600 or ASME B 36.10
Schedule 40 should be used. If this is not possible, please contact Spirax-Sarco Limited.
Pressure/temperature limits Materials

Part Material
Temperature °C
Body Cast stainless steel S.316 (CF8M / 1.4408)
Steam Internals 431 S29 / S303 / S304 / S316

saturation
curve Spring Inconel X750
Pressure bar g
PMA Maximum allowable pressure 102 bar g @ 20 °C
Maximum operating pressure is dependant on the

PMO
flange specification

Note: For lower operating temperatures consult Spirax Sarco.
Maximum viscosity 30 centipoise
∆PMX Maximum differential pressure 498 m bar
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test

155 bar g
pressure of:
Page 1 of 3
TI-P337-06 MI Issue 7 Gilflo ILVA Flowmeters System Overview
Flowmetering

TI-P337-05
EMM Issue 16
Gilflo ILVA
Flowmeter
Description

DN50, DN80, DN100, DN150, DN200. For DN250 and DN300 sizes see separate literature.
EN 1092 PN16, PN25 and PN40.
BS 10 Table H.
3.2
3
ASME B 16.5 Class 150, 300 and 600.
JIS 20.
KS 20.
The Gilflo ILVA flowmeter should be installed in pipework manufactured to BS 1600 or ASME B 36.10 Schedule 40.
For different pipe standards / schedules downstream spool pieces with equivalent internal diameter as in BS 1600 or ASME B 36.10
Schedule 40 should be used. If this is not possible, please contact Spirax-Sarco Limited.
Pressure/temperature limits Materials

Part Material
Temperature °C
Steam Internals 431 S29 / S303 / S304 / S316

saturation
curve Spring Inconel X750
Pressure bar g

PMO

∆PMX Maximum differential pressure 498 m bar
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test

155 bar g
pressure of:
Page 1 of 3
Flowmetering
Performance
The Gilflo ILVA is designed to be used in conjunction with linearising electronics such as the range of flow computers or M750 display
unit. Alternatively the output signal linearisation can be performed on an EMS / BEMS or equivalent.
Accuracy when used with Spirax Sarco flow computers or M750:
±1% of measured value from 5% to 100% of maximum rated flow.
± 0.1% FSD from 1% to 5% of maximum rated flow.
Repeatability better than 0.25%
Turndown: up to 100:1
Caution: Scanner 2000 steam mass flow transmitters are uniquely configured at the factory to work with a single, specific Gilflo ILVA
flowmeter. For correct operation the configured Scanner 2000 transmitter must always be installed with its allocated flowmeter. Labels
on the packaging give the serial numbers of the matched products.
Pressure drop
The maximum pressure drop across the Gilflo ILVA pipeline unit is 498 m bar (200 ins water gauge) at maximum rated flow.
Flow capacity
To determine the capacity of the Gilflo ILVA for different fluids, it is necessary to calculate the equivalent water flowrate Q E (in l / min)
as described in Step 1, under the section 'sizing the Gilflo ILVA' then selecting the appropriate size of flowmeter from the Table under
Step 2 overleaf.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN150 Gilflo ILVA flowmeter for installation between flanges to EN 1092 PN40. Body material 316 stainless
3.2 steel. Flow medium saturated steam at 10 bar g, maximum flow 8 000 kg / h.
4 Dimensions/weights (approximate) in mm and kg

Size A B C D E Weight E
Note: Pressure tappings
DN50 35 63 140 103 17.5 2.0 (2 off located at 180°)
DN80 45 78 150 138 22.5 3.9
DN100 60 103 205 162 30.0 8.3

D
DN150 75 134 300 218 37.5 14.2
DN200 85 161 360 273 42.5 23.6
Note:- Pressure tappings are threaded ¼" NPT
A
B
C
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with
the product.
Installation note: The following main points are given here for guidance:
1. The Gilflo ILVA should be mounted with a minimum of 6 straight pipe diameters upstream and 3 downstream. No valves, fittings or
cross sectional changes are permitted within these pipe lengths. Where an increase in nominal pipe diameter is required upstream
of the flowmeter, the length of straight pipe should be increased to 12 diameters. Similarly, where a Gilflo ILVA is installed downstream
of two 90 degree bends in two planes, a pressure reducing valve or a partially open valve, 12 upstream pipe diameters should be
allowed.
2. It is important that the internal upstream and downstream diameters of pipe are smooth. Ideally seamless pipes should be used. It
is recommended that slip-on flanges be used to avoid any intrusive weld beads on the internal diameter of the pipe.
3. Care should be taken to install the Gilflo ILVA concentrically in the line. If this is not done, flow measurement errors may occur.
4. The Gilflo ILVA should be mounted horizontally. For vertical installations, consult Spirax Sarco.
5. For steam applications, good basic steam engineering practices should be followed:
- Correct line drainage through adequate trapping.
- Good alignment and support of associated pipework.
- Line size changes achieved by the use of eccentric reducers
Maintenance note: There are no user serviceable parts in the Gilflo ILVA. A visual check together with confirmation that the
orifice/cone reference dimension is within tolerance is possible.
EMM Issue 16
Gilflo ILVA Flowmeter
Flowmetering
Gilflo and ILVA flowmeters 3
Sizing the Gilflo ILVA for saturated steam - kg/h
Minimum and maximum flowrates in kg/h at different pressures (bar g)
Note: Maximum steam flowrates are calculated at maximum differential pressure.
Sizing the Gilflo ILVA flowmeter

In order to determine the flow capacity of a Gilflo ILVA pipeline unit, it is necessary to calculate the equivalent water flowrate (Q E) based
on the anticipated actual flow (see Step 1). The Table below is used to select the appropriate unit (steam only).
Step 1. Determine equivalent water flowrate (Q E) in l/min:- Step 2. Using the value of Q E as determined in Step 1, select
the correct size of the Gilflo ILVA flowmeter using the Table below.
Mass flow units Volumetric units
In practice, it will often be the line size that determines the choice
qm of the flowmeter.
Liquids QE = QE = QL SG
SG QE litres / min Maximum DP
Flowmeter
Gases type Maximum Minimum Wg m bar
and steam 1 000 DF DN50 149 1 200 498
Q = qM QE = QF DN80 585 6 200 498
actual flow E DF 1 000
conditions DN100 1 200 12 200 498
qM DN150 2 900 29 200 498
Gases QE = DS PS TF DN200 5 700 57 200 498
standard DS PF TS QE = QS x x
conditions x x 1 000 PF TS
1000 PS TF
Example: Determine which Gilflo pipeline unit is required to
measure the flow of compressed air when:
Where:
1: Estimated maximum rate of flow = 500 s m³/h at 7 bar g and 20 3.2
QE = Equivalent water flowrate (litres / min)
°C
qm = Mass flowrate (kg / min)
QL = Maximum liquid flowrate (litres / min)
Note: Standard conditions = 1.013 bar a, 0 °C giving a standard 5
density of 1.29 kg / m³
QS = Maximum gas flowrate at standard conditions (litres / min)
2: Calculate QE from: QE = QS DQ S
P TD P
x QSS x F S x F x F
P
QF = Maximum gas flowrate at actual flow conditions (litres / min) E =
1 000 PF 1T000 P T
SG = Specific gravity S S S
DS = Density of gas at standard conditions (kg / m³) 1.29 1.013 293

DF = Density of gas at actual flow conditions (kg /m³) QE =(500 x 16.667) x x x
1 000 8.013 273
PS = Standard pressure: 1.013 bar a, 1.033 kg /cm2 a, 14.70 psi a
QE = 110 litres /min
PF = Actual flow pressure in same absolute units as PS
TS = Standard temperature (K) = °C + 273 So a DN50 ILVA is recommended.
TF = Actual flow temperature (K) = °C + 273 Note: 1 m³ / h = 16.667 litres /min
Steam pressure bar g

Size
1 3 5 7 10 12 15 20 25 30 40
Maximum 307 427 517 594 693 752 832 952 1 060 1 160 1 341
DN50
Minimum 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 10 11 12 13
Maximum 1 206 1 675 2 032 2 332 2 721 2 951 3 268 3 740 4 163 4 554 5 265
DN80
Minimum 12 17 20 23 27 30 33 37 42 46 53
Maximum 2 475 3 435 4 167 4 784 5 581 6 054 6 703 7 671 8 540 9 341 10 800
DN100
Minimum 25 34 42 48 56 61 67 77 85 93 108
Maximum 5 981 8 301 10 071 11 562 13 487 14 631 16 119 18 538 20 639 22 573 26 101
DN150
Minimum 60 83 101 116 135 146 162 185 206 226 261
Maximum 11 756 16 317 19 796 22 726 26 509 28 757 31 840 36 437 40 566 44 368 51 301
DN200
Minimum 118 163 198 227 265 288 318 364 406 444 513
How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN50 Gilflo ILVA flowmeter suitable for fitting between EN 1092 PN40 connections.
EMM Issue 16
Flowmetering
3.2
6
Flowmetering

TI-P337- 46
EMM Issue 4

DN250 and DN300
Description

DN250 and DN300. For DN50, DN80, DN100, DN150 and
DN200 sizes see separate literature.
EN 1092 PN16, PN25 and PN40.
3.2
ASME B 16.5 Class 150, 300 and 600.
JIS 20. 7
KS 20.
The Gilflo ILVA flowmeter should be installed in pipework
manufactured to BS 1600 or ASME B 36.10 Schedule 40.For
different pipe standards / schedules, downstream spool pieces
with an equivalent internal diameter to BS 1600 or ASME B 36.10
Schedule 40 should be used. If this is not possible, please contact
Spirax Sarco Limited.

Pressure psi g
Temperature °F
Temperature °C
Materials
Part Material
Pressure bar g Internals 431 S29 / S303 / S304 / S316

Spring Inconel X750

PMO
Minimum operating temperature -29°C
DPMX Maximum differential pressure 498 m bar
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure

of: 155 bar g
Page 1 of 3
Flowmetering
Performance Safety information, installation
The Gilflo ILVA is used in conjunction with linearising electronics and maintenance
such as Spirax Sarco flow computers or M750 display unit.
Alternatively the output signal linearisation can be performed on For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions
an EMS / BEMS or equivalent. supplied with the product.
Accuracy when used with Spirax Sarco flow computers or M750:
±1% of measured value from 5% to 100% of maximum rated flow. Installation note:
±0.1% FSD from 1% to 5% of maximum rated flow. The following main points are given here for guidance:
Repeatability better than 0.25% 1. The Gilflo ILVA should be mounted with a minimum of 6
Turndown: up to 100:1 straight pipe diameters upstream and 3 downstream. No
Caution: The Scanner 2000 mass flow transmitters can be valves, fittings or cross sectional changes are permitted within
configured at the factory to work with a single, specific Gilflo ILVA these pipe lengths. Where an increase in nominal pipe
flowmeter. For correct operation the configured transmitter must diameter is required upstream of the flowmeter, the length of
always be installed with its allocated flowmeter. Labels on the straight pipe should be increased to 12 diameters. Similarly,
packaging give the serial numbers of the matched products. where a Gilflo ILVA is installed downstream of two 90 degree
bends in two planes, a pressure reducing valve or a partially
open valve, 12 upstream pipe diameters should be allowed.
Pressure drop 2. It is important that the internal upstream and downstream
The maximum pressure drop across the Gilflo ILVA pipeline unit diameters of pipe are smooth. Ideally seamless pipes should
is 498 m bar (200 ins water gauge) at maximum rated flow. be used. It is recommended that slip-on flanges be used to
avoid any intrusive weld beads on the internal diameter of the
Flow capacity pipe.
To determine the capacity of the Gilflo ILVA for different fluids, it is 3. Care should be taken to install the Gilflo ILVA concentrically
necessary to calculate the equivalent water flowrate QE (in l / min) in the line. If this is not done, flow measurement errors may
3.2 as described in Step 1, under the section 'sizing the Gilflo ILVA'
then selecting the appropriate size of flowmeter from the Table
occur.
4. The Gilflo ILVA should be mounted horizontally. For vertical
under Step 2 overleaf. installations, consult Spirax Sarco.
8 5. For steam applications, good basic steam engineering
How to order practices should be followed:
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN250 Gilflo ILVA flowmeter for - Correct line drainage through adequate trapping.
installation between EN 1092 PN40 flanges. The body material - Good alignment and support of associated pipework.
is to be 316 stainless steel. The flow medium will be saturated - Line size changes achieved by the use of eccentric reducers
steam at 10 bar g and the maximum flow will be 28 000 kg / h.
Maintenance note:
There are no user serviceable parts in the Gilflo ILVA. A visual
check together with confirmation that the orifice / cone reference
Dimensions / weights (approximate) in mm and kg dimension is within tolerance is possible.
Size A B C D E F Weight
DN250 104 204 444 330 35.0 35 41.5
DN300 120 250 530 385 42.5 35 67.0
Note:- Pressure tappings are threaded ¼" NPT
F Note: Pressure tappings

E (2 off located on one side only)
A
B
C
Page 2 of 3 TI-P337- 46
EMM Issue 4
Gilflo ILVA Flowmeter DN250 and DN300
Flowmetering
Sizing
Gilflo ILVA flowmeter minimum and maximum saturated steam flowrates in kg / h
Notes:
1. These capacities are based on a differential pressure across the flowmeter of 498 m bar H 20 (200 Inches).
2. Minimum flow is 1% of maximum (100:1 turndown).
3. The table below is a guide only.

Size QE
1 3 5 7 10 12 15 20 25 30 40
Max 7 750 15 985 22 185 26 915 30 899 36 043 39 099 43 292 49 541 55 155 60 325 69 758
DN250
Min 78 160 222 269 309 433 391 433 495 552 603 698
Max 10 975 22 637 31 417 38 115 43 758 51 042 55 369 61 307 70 157 78 107 85 428 98 778
DN300
Min 110 226 314 381 438 510 554 613 702 781 854 988
Sizing the Gilflo ILVA flowmeter

In order to determine the flow capacity of a Gilflo ILVA pipeline unit, it is necessary to calculate the equivalent water flowrate (Q E)
based on the anticipated actual flow (see Step 1). The Table below is used to select the appropriate unit (steam only).
Step 1. Step 2.
Determine equivalent water flowrate (Q E) in l/min:-
Mass flow units Volumetric units
Using the value of QE as determined in Step 1, select
the correct size of the Gilflo ILVA flowmeter using the Table below. 3.2
In practice, it will often be the line size that determines the choice
Liquids QE =
qm
QE = QL SG
of the flowmeter. 9
SG
Gases Flowmeter Max. Q E Max. pressure drop
and steam 1 000 DF type litres / min Wg
Q = qM QE = QF
actual flow E DF 1 000
conditions DN250 7 750 200
DN300 10 975 200

Gases DS PF PF DS PS TF
standard QE = QS x x QE = QS x x
1 000 PS TS 1 000 PF TS
conditions Example: Determine which Gilflo pipeline unit is required to
measure the flow of compressed air when:
1: Estimated maximum rate of flow = 28 000 s m³/h at 7 bar g and
Where:
20°C.
QE = Equivalent water flowrate (litres / min)
Note: Standard conditions = 1.013 bar a, 0°C giving a standard
qm = Mass flowrate (kg / min)
density of 1.29 kg / m³
QL = Maximum liquid flowrate (litres / min)
QS = Maximum gas flowrate at standard conditions (litres / min) 2: Calculate QE from: QE = QS DS x PS xDTF P PF
QE000
1 = QSP S
T x
F
x
QF = Maximum gas flowrate at actual flow conditions (litres / min) F
1 000S PS TS
SG = Specific gravity
DS = Density of gas at standard conditions (kg / m³) 1.29 1.013 293
QE = (28 000 x 16.667) x x x
DF = Density of gas at actual flow conditions (kg /m³) 1 000 8.013 273
PS = Standard pressure: 1.013 bar a, 1.033 kg /cm2 a, 14.70 psi a
PF = Actual flow pressure in same absolute units as PS QE = 6 174 litres /min
TS = Standard temperature (K) = °C + 273
So a DN250 ILVA is recommended.
TF = Actual flow temperature (K) = °C + 273
Note: 1 m³ / h = 16.667 litres /min
How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN250 Gilflo ILVA flowmeter suitable for fitting between EN 1092 PN16 connections.
TI-P337- 46 Page 3 of 3
EMM Issue 4
Gilflo ILVA Flowmeter DN250 and DN300
Flowmetering
3.2
10
Flowmetering

TI-P337-70
EMM Issue 5
ILVA20 Flowmeter and

MVT10 Differential Pressure Transmitter
for Saturated and Superheated Steam Service
Description
The Spirax Sarco DN150 to DN300 flowmeter with MVT10 is a calibrated system designed for use on saturated and superheated
steam only, and can also be used as a net energy meter on steam applications. It operates on the spring loaded variable area
principle and produces a differential pressure related to the rate of flow. The Electronics provide current loop, frequency, RS485
and Modbus outputs. Steam flow is density corrected. Pipeline pressure is also measured.
Standards This flowmeter complies with the requirements of the EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment
(Safety) Regulations, carries the and falls within the following PED categories:
3.2
Product
Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2 11
Gases Gases Liquids Liquids
DN150 shown DN150 - DN200 3 3 2 SEP

ILVA20
DN250 - DN300 3 3 2 1
IP rating IP65 with correct cable glands
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU
Calibration ISO 17025
Designed to ASME BPVC section V111
Safety requirement for electrical EN61010-1:2010

equipment for measurement,
control, and laboratory use UL/CSA 61010-1:2012 (third edition)
IP Testing EN60529:1992/A2:2013
Electromagnetic Compatibility –
EN 61326-2-3:2013
Emissions and Immunity
Sine Vibration Sequence EN61298-3:2008 Section 7
Transportation Vibration EN60068-2-6:2008
Certification
This product is available with certification to EN 10204 3.1.
Note: All certification/inspection requirements must be stated
at the time of order placement.
Page 1 of 5
Flowmetering
Available in DN150, DN200, DN250 and DN300 pipeline sizes.
This flowmeter is a wafer design suitable for fitting between the following flanges:
- EN 1092-1 PN16, PN25 and PN40
- ASME B 16.5 Class 150 and 300
- Japanese Industrial Standard JIS 20
- Korean Standard KS 20
Note:
The Spirax Sarco flowmeter should be installed in pipework manufactured to BS 1600, ASME B 36.10 Schedule 40 or EN 10216-2/
EN10216-5 equivalent.
Materials Technical data

Flowmeter body Stainless steel 1.4408 CF8M 24 Vdc if it is loop powered
Power supply
Internals Stainless steel 316 24 Vdc, 0.25 A when using an RS 485
2 way manifold Stainless steel 1.4408 CF8M Outputs 4-20 mA loop (proportional to mass flow)
3 way manifold Stainless steel 316L Pulsed output V max. 28 Vdc, R min. 10 kΩ
3.2 Impulse hoses Stainless steel Communications port RS485/Modbus
12 MVT housing Aluminium

Copper free aluminium,
max 0.5 mg
Pressure sensor Stainless steel
Spring Inconel X750
400
The product must not be used in this area.
Temperature °C
300
239 Outside of operating range.
200
Steam saturation curve
100 Steam is superheated in this area.
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
32*
Pressure bar g
Maximum design pressure 49.6 bar g @ 21 °C
Maximum design temperature 400 °C @ 29.4 bar g
Minimum design temperature 0 °C (non-freezing)
Maximum operating pressure * 32 bar g @ 239 °C
Maximum operating temperature (saturation) 239 °C
Minimum operating temperature 0 °C (non-freezing)
Maximum electronics ambient temperature 55 °C
Maximum electronics humidity level 90% RH (non-condensing)
Glass on the display is rated for impact of maximum 4J
Environment Protection IP65
EMM Issue 5
ILVA20 Flowmeter and MVT10 Differential Pressure Transmitter for Saturated and Superheated Steam Service
Flowmetering
Pressure drop
The maximum pressure drop across the ILVA pipeline unit is 498 mbar (200 ins water gauge) at maximum rated flow.
Performance
The Flowmeter is a calibrated system and consists of two parts, the ILVA20 (pipeline element) and the MVT10 (differential pressure
transmitter) that includes the electronics, display and static pressure transmitter.
The MVT10 flowmeter has inbuilt electronics which give a density compensated output. An LCD display is incorporated within the
electronics head. The M750 display unit can be used to provide a remote display function if required, utilising the 4 - 20 mA output.
±2% of measured value from 12% to 100% of maximum rated flow.

±0.5 %FSD from 2%-12% of flow.
Turndown 50:1 typical
Flowmeter sizing To view the sizing suite, please go to http://prs.spiraxsarco.com/sizingsuite.
Flow (kg/h)
Pressure bar g
0.6 1 3 5 7 10 12 15 20 25 30 32
3.2
Max 5526 6137 8519 10335 11866 10692 15017 16627 19007 21183 23157 23915
DN150
Min 110 122 170 206 237 213 300 332 380 423 463 478
13
Max 10436 11591 16090 19520 22411 26144 28361 31403 35898 40008 43736 45167
DN200
Min 208 231 321 390 448 522 567 628 717 800 874 903
Max 14969 16627 23079 27999 32147 37500 40682 45044 51492 57387 62735 64788
DN250
Min 299 332 461 559 642 750 813 900 1029 1147 1254 1295
Max 20894 23207 32213 39080 44869 52341 56781 62870 71869 80098 87561 90427
DN300
Min 417 464 644 781 897 1046 1135 1257 1437 1601 1751 1808
EMM Issue 5
Flowmetering
ILVA20 Dimensions/weights Size A B C D E F Weight
(approximate) in mm and kg
DN150 75 134 293 218 18
DN200 85 161 354 273 28

193 221
DN250 104 204 443 330 47
F DN300 120 250 540 385 70
E
3.2 A
E
B
14 C
MVT10 Dimensions/weights MVT10 mass flow transmitter, manifold, impulse hoses and fixing clamp
(approximate)
D in mm and kg
A B C Weight
209 264 220 8
The ILVA20/MVT10 can be supplied with either 1 m or 2 m long impulse hoses, with
3/8" NPT screwed ends.
It can also be supplied without hoses (Hard piping supplied by customer).
A
B Impulse hoses Weight
C 1m F 0.5 (pair)
3/8" NPT
2m 1 (pair)
'U' bolts to suit DN50 pipe
EMM Issue 5
Flowmetering
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-P337-69) supplied with the product.
Installation note
The following main points are given here for guidance only:
The flowmeter should be mounted with a minimum of 6 straight pipe diameters upstream and 3 downstream. No valves, fittings or cross
sectional changes are permitted within these pipe lengths. Where a single plain bend or an increase in nominal pipe diameter is required
upstream of the flowmeter, the length of straight pipe should be increased to 12 diameters. Similarly, where a flowmeter is installed
downstream of two 90° bends in two planes, a pressure reducing valve or a partially open valve, 12 pipe diameters should be allowed
upstream and 6 downstream.
It is important that the internal upstream and downstream diameters of pipe are smooth. Ideally seamless pipes should be used. It is
recommended that slip-on flanges be used to avoid any intrusive weld beads on the internal diameter of the pipe.
Care should be taken to install the flowmeter concentrically in the line. If this is not done, flow measurement errors may occur.
The flowmeter should be mounted horizontally. For vertical installations, consult Spirax Sarco.
For steam applications, good basic steam engineering practices should be followed:
- Correct pipeline drainage through adequate trapping.
- Pipeline size changes achieved by the use of eccentric reducers.
3.2
Spare parts
15
3374380 - Gasket and fastener spares kit
3374381 - 2 way manifold and fastener spares kit
3374382 - Pressure sensor and cable spares kit
3374383 - Electronics spares kit
3374384 - MVT10 spares kit (Option 1)
A new MVT10 with the original ILVA20 calibration data downloaded.

Note: The system accuracy cannot be guaranteed.
3374385 - MVT10 spare (Option 2) - Full Recalibration (DN150)
The original ILVA20 returned for recalibration and a new MVT10 supplied with recalibration data.
Disposal
The product is recyclable. No ecological hazard is anticipated with the disposal of this product providing due care is taken.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN150 flowmeter for installation between EN 1092 PN40 flanges. The flow medium is saturated steam
at 10 bar g, maximum flow 10 692 kg/h.
EMM Issue 5
Flowmetering
3.2
16
Flowmetering
Gilflo
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. and ILVA flowmeters
3
TI-S41-10
MI Issue 10
Gilflo Flowmeters
System Overview
Description Note: This drawing is schematic only, please see Installation
The Spirax Sarco Gilflo flowmetering system consists of 3 major and Maintenance Instructions for specific installation
parts: information.
1. The Gilflo 'B' pipeline unit. This is installed in the line where the
flow is to be measured. Using impulse pipework, this is
connected to: EL2271
2. A differential pressure transmitter which measures the temperature
differential pressure across the Gilflo and converts it into a transmitter
4 - 20 mA signal. This signal can then be transmitted to:
3. a - A Chart recorder, EMS / BMS or M750 display unit. High DP Low DP
3.2
b - An M850 flow computer.
Note: The Gilflo pipeline unit can be used to measure the flow of
most industrial liquids, gases and vapours within the pressure and
Gilflo 17
temperature limits detailed in the appropriate TI document(s).
F50C
M850 - Pressure and / or temperature compensated saturated or isolating valves
superheated steam. In addition heat metering is possible by
replacing the EL2600 pressure transmitter with an EL2271 Impulse pipework
temperature transmitter in the condensate return line.
High Low
Caution: Steam mass flow transmitters are uniquely configured
at the factory to work with a single, specific Gilflo, ILVA or
M410 orifice plate flowmeter. For correct operation the configured DP
transmitter must always be installed with its allocated flowmeter. EL2600 transmitter assembly.
Labels on the packaging give the serial numbers of the matched pressure
products. transmitter
Installation
Care must be taken to meet all the requirements of the Installation
and Maintenance Instructions, which are provided with the
equipment.
Installation points to watch:
1. Ensure all pipework is adequately supported and properly EMS /
aligned. BEMS
2. The Gilflo pipeline unit should be selected on capacity rather
than line size. Where pipe size reduction on steam systems is
necessary, use eccentric reducers to avoid waterlogging. or
3. The minimum recommended lengths of straight pipe are 6D M750
upstream and 3D downstream. display unit
4. Take care to ensure the correct direction of flow as indicated Outputs,
by the arrow on the flowmeter body. alarms, etc.
5. Take precautions to avoid reverse flow through the flowmeter. or
6. Avoid installing the flowmeter downstream of a pressure
reducing valve (especially on steam systems) as this may M850
flow computer
cause inaccuracies and/or possible damage. Similarly avoid (steam / gas)
installing the flowmeter downstream of a partially open valve.
7. Remember that actuated valves may cause rapid pressure Outputs,
fluctuations which could cause damage. alarms, etc.
8. On steam or liquid systems take care to ensure that all impulse
lines remain full to prevent damage to the DP transmitter
through contact with steam or high temperature liquid.
9. For steam applications, care should be taken to ensure
adequate line drainage, trapping etc., to avoid condensate
slugs impacting the flowmeter. Where practicable, steam
separators should be fitted. These should be drained using a
float trap set.
10. For gas applications ensure that the DP cell and impulse lines
are positioned above the pipework. Also ensure that the
impulse lines allow free drainage of moisture away from the
DP cell and back into the pipeline.
Electrical wiring
All electrical wiring must be carried out to the appropriate
standards. Full wiring interconnection details are included with the
equipment.
How to order
For details of how to specify system components refer to the
relevant TI document.
Flowmetering
TI-P337-08
MI Issue 7
Gilflo 'B' Flowmeter

Pipeline Unit
Description
The Gilflo 'B' flowmeter is installed in the pipeline and produces a
differential pressure which is related to the rate of flow. It can be used with
most industrial fluids, gases and both saturated and superheated steam.

DN50*, DN80, DN100, DN150, DN200, DN250, DN300 and DN400
Flanges available to EN 1092 PN40* and ASME B 16.5 class 300.
3.2 * Note - DN50 flowmeter: flanges on the PN40 are thicker (to ASME 300,
22.2 mm) to accommodate pressure tappings. Low DP tapping
18 On the DN400 flowmeter, the pressure tappings are on the body.
Note:
DN200, DN250, DN300 and DN400 flowmeters incorporate an
additional shaft support together with a revised spring location.
High DP tapping
Pressure / temperature limits Materials

Part Material
A
Temperature °C
Body Carbon steel ASTM A105 / A106 / A234

Internals Mostly stainless steel S304 / S316
Spring Inconel X750
Steam
saturation
curve C D

B Performance
When used in conjunction with a Spirax Sarco flow computer,
Pressure bar g
accuracy is better than ±1% of actual flow from 5% to 100%
of maximum rated flow. For flows from 1% to 5% of maximum
A - B Flanged ASME 300 DN50 -DN300 rated flow, accuracy will be better than ± 0.1% FSD.
A - D Flanged ASME 300 DN400
A - C Flanged EN 1092 PN40 Repeatability is better than 0.25%. Note: the accuracy figures
quoted are for the pipeline unit only.
Caution: Scanner 2000 steam mass flow transmitters are
uniquely configured at the factory to work with a single specific
Gilflo flowmeter. For correct operation the configured Scanner
Minimum allowable temperature 0°C
2000 transmitter must always be installed with its allocated
50 bar g @ 50°C
PMO Maximum operating pressure flowmeter. Labels on the packaging give the serial numbers
DN400 49 bar g @ 50°C
of the matched products.
Minimum operating temperature 0°C
Pressure drop
Less than 349 m bar (140 inches H2O) at rated capacity.
DPMX Maximum differential pressure 349 m bar
Flow capacity
To determine the maximum flow capacity of a Gilflo 'B', it is necessary
Designed for a maximum cold ASME 78 bar g to calculate the equivalent water flowrate (QE). See under section
hydraulic test pressure of: PN40 60 bar g "Sizing the Gilflo 'B' flowmeter".
Flowmetering
Size A B Weight
DN50* 480 89 14
DN80 543 114 22 Pressure tappings: The H.P. and L.P.
B pressure tappings are threaded ¼" NPT (female).
DN100 716 168 48
On the DN400 flowmeter, the pressure tappings
DN150 797 219 87 are on the body.
DN200 990 324 123
DN250 1 458 406 257
DN300 1 599 457 340 A
DN400* 1 995 610 900
* Note - DN50 flowmeter: flanges on the PN40 are thicker (to ASME 300, 22.2 mm) to accommodate pressure tappings.
Safety information, installation and maintenance Sizing the Gilflo 'B' flowmeter
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions In order to determine the flow capacity of a Gilflo 'B' flowmeter for a
supplied with the product. particular application, it is necessary to calculate the equivalent water
flowrate (QE) based on the maximum anticipated actual flow.
Installation:
Installation and Maintenance Instructions are supplied with each
flowmeter. The following main points are given for guidance:- Mass flow units Volumetric units
1. The Gilflo flowmeter should be installed with a minimum of qm
Liquids QE = QE = Q L SG
6 straight pipe diameters upstream and 3 downstream. No SG
valves, fittings or cross sectional changes are permitted
within these pipe lengths. Where an increase in pipe diameter
is necessary upstream of a Gilflo flowmeter, the length of straight
Gases and
steam QE = qm 1 000
DF 3.2
QE = QF
pipe should be increased to 12 diameters. Similarily, where a
Gilflo flowmeter is installed downstream of two 90° bends in
two planes, a pressure reducing valve or a partially open valve,
actual flow
conditions
DF 1 000
19
12 pipe diameters should be allowed. qm
2. The Gilflo flowmeter should normally be mounted horizontally. Gases QE = QE = QS DS P T
standard x S x F
Vertical installation (with flow vertically downward) is also DS x PF x TS 1 000 PF TS
permissible and must be specified at the time of ordering. conditions
1 000 PS TF
Ensure flow is in the correct direction and avoid reverse flow.
3. For steam applications, good basic steam engineering practice Where:
should be followed: QE = Equivalent water flowrate (litres / min)
- Ensure all pipework is adequately lagged. qm = Mass flowrate (kg / min)
- Ensure correct line drainage through adequate trapping. QL = Maximum liquid flowrate (litres/min)
- Where practicable, fit a steam separator upstream of the QS = Maximum gas flowrate at standard conditions (litres / min)
flowmeter. This should be drained using a float trap set.
- Ensure good alignment and support of all associated pipework. QF = Maximum gas flowrate at actual flow conditions (litres / min)
SG = Specific gravity
- Achieve line size reduction by the use of eccentric reducers.
DS = Density of gas at standard conditions (kg / m3)
- Avoid close installation (less than 25 pipe diameters) upstream
or downstream of a pressure reducing valve or modulating DF = Density of gas at actual flow conditions (kg / m3)
valve. PS = Standard pressure (atmospheric) = 1.013 bar a
4. See the 'Gilflo flowmeters - system overview', TI-S41-10 which = 1.033 kg / cm2 a
provides information on the installation of a Gilflo flowmetering = 14.70 psi a
system. PF = Actual flow pressure in same absolute units as PS
Maintenance note: TS = Standard temperature (K) = °C + 273
There are no user serviceable parts within the Gilflo 'B' flowmeter. TF = Actual flow temperature (K) = °C + 273
Sizing - Gilflo 'B' flowmeter minimum and maximum saturated steam flowrate in kg / h
Notes:
1. QE = The equivalent water flowrate litres / min for a Gilflo 'B' flowmeter. These equivalent water flowrates are based on a differential
pressure across the flowmeter of 349 m bar (140 inches H2O).
2. Minimum flow is 1% of maximum (100:1 turndown).
3. The table below is a guide only.

Size QE
1 3 5 7 10 12 15 20 25 30 40
Max. 355 732 1 016 1 233 1 415 1 651 1 791 1 983 2 269 2 526 2 763 3 195
DN50 Min. 4 7 10 12 14 17 18 20 23 25 28 32
Max. 1 165 2 403 3 335 4 046 4 645 5 418 5 877 6 508 7 447 8 291 9 068 10 485
DN80 Min. 12 24 33 40 46 54 59 65 74 83 91 105
Max. 1 870 3 857 5 353 6 494 7 456 8 697 9 434 10 446 11 954 13 308 14 556 16 830
DN100 Min. 19 39 54 65 75 87 94 104 120 133 146 168
Max. 4 550 9 385 13 025 15 802 18 141 21 161 22 955 25 416 29 085 32 382 35 416 40 951
DN150 Min. 46 94 130 158 181 212 230 254 291 324 354 410
Max. 8 085 16 675 23 144 28 078 32 235 37 601 40 789 45 163 51 683 57 539 62 932 72 767
DN200 Min. 81 167 231 281 322 376 408 452 517 575 629 728
Max. 11 120 22 936 31 832 38 619 44 335 51 716 56 101 62 116 71 084 79 139 86 556 100 083
DN250 Min. 111 229 318 386 443 517 561 621 711 791 866 1001
Max. 19 305 39 818 55 262 67 044 76 970 89 783 97 395 107 838 123 406 137 390 150 267 173 750
DN300 Min. 193 398 553 670 770 898 974 1 078 1 234 1 374 1 503 1 738
Max. 31 360 64 682 89 770 108 910 125 033 145 847 158 213 175 177 200 467 223 183 244 101 282 248
DN400 Min. 314 647 898 1 089 1 250 1 458 1 582 1 752 2 005 2 232 2 441 2 822
How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN150 Gilflo 'B' flowmeter flanged to EN 1092 PN16.
TI-P337-08 MI Issue 7 Gilflo 'B' Flowmeter - Pipeline Unit

Flowmetering
TI-P335-10
MI Issue 7
M610 Series II
DP Transmitter Assembly
Description
The M610 Series I I DP transmitter assembly is designed to accept a differential pressure input from a primary flow element such as an
orifice plate or Gilflo flowmeter and convert it into an analogue 4 - 20 mA output signal. The standard version comes with digital
communications in the form of HART® 5.2 which is superimposed on the 4 - 20 mA output. The 3-way manifold which is supplied already
assembled to the DP transmitter acts as a means of secondary isolation and as a pressure equalisation valve to check the zero of the DP
transmitter.
The M610 Series II DP transmitter assembly consists of two items:
3.2 - A high accuracy (0.1%) differential pressure transmitter.

- A 3-way carbon steel isolation manifold.
20 Note: These items are supplied already assembled.
Pipe connections
The process ports on the 3-way manifold are threaded ½" NPT at 54 mm centres.
Electrical connections - M20 x 1.5 screwed terminals.
M610 Series I I technical data

0 - 1 326 mm H 2O (0 -13 kPa) minimum
Span
0 - 13 256 mm H 2O (0 -130 kPa) maximum
Output 4 - 20 mA dc and HART® protocol 5.2
16 V to 45 Vdc (for non-certified application)
Power supply
16 V to 28 Vdc (for E Ex ia 11c T4 / T5)
Pressure limits -1 to 140 bar g
- 40 °C to + 85 °C
(ambient for non-certified application)
Temperature limits
- 40 °C to + 100 °C
(process)
± 0.1% of calibrated span to include effects of
Accuracy
linearity, hysteresis and repeatability
Body - Stainless steel
Diaphragm - Austenitic stainless steel 316L
Materials of construction
3-way manifold - Carbon steel
Fluid fill - Silicone oil
ATEX Ex II 1GD - E EX ia 11c T4/T5 Ga
Intrinsic safety
Ex ia 111C T100 °C/T135 °C Da
Enclosure rating IEC IP67 (NEMA 6 / 6P)
EMC emissions and immunity To BS EN 61326:1997
Note: If HART® communications are required in intrinsically safe applications, barriers must be used which are designed to pass the
HART® signal.
Calibration
The M610 Series I I DP transmitter assembly is supplied with a span factor set to suit a particular application. However, should load conditions
and/or details of actual installation change, the range of the M610 can be adjusted within the limits 0 - 1 326 mm H 2O (0 - 13 kPa) and
0 - 13 256 mm H2O (0 - 130 kPa) as described in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the product.
Installation
Full installation details are given in the literature that accompanies the M610 Series I I DP transmitter assembly.
Flowmetering
A B C DP transmitter 3-Way manifold M610 assembly
220 193 175 6.5 kg 1 kg 7.5 kg
3.2
21
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco M610 Series I I DP transmitter assembly calibrated to give an output of 20 mA at an applied differential
pressure of specified value.
Associated equipment:
- Orifice plate flowmeter
- Gilflo flowmeter system
TI-P335-10 MI Issue 7
M610 Series II DP Transmitter Assembly

Flowmetering
3.2
22
Flowmetering
Gilflo
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. and ILVA flowmeters
3
TI-P335-23
MI Issue 3
Scanner 2000
Steam Mass Flow Transmitter
Description
The Scanner 2000 steam mass flow transmitter takes its inputs
from a primary flowmeter, (Gilflo or ILVA) through impulse lines. It
converts the differential and static pressure into a corrected mass
flowrate of saturated steam, which is accessible via the RS485
Modbus link or optionally via a 4 - 20 mA signal.
Configuration
Scanner 2000 steam mass flow transmitters are uniquely
configured at the factory to work with a single, specific Gilflo or 3.2
ILVA flowmeter, for a specific flow application.
For correct operation the Scanner 2000 transmitter must be
installed with its allocated flowmeter. A label on the packaging
23
gives the serial number of the matched product.
The Scanner 2000 can be configured using an RS485 equipped
PC with the supplied configuration software.
Note: A DB9 Serial RS232 to RS485 converter will otherwise be
required to connect your PC to the Scanner 2000.
If your PC only has USB ports a USB to DB9 Serial port converter
will be required. These are available from most electronic
equipment suppliers.
Available types and approvals

Explosion proof types available:
- Class 1, Div 1, Groups B, C and D
CSA - Type 4 Enclosure
- T6 Temperature Class
- ATEX II 2 GD
- Ex d IIC T6 (- 40°C to +70°C) or
ATEX
- Ex td A21 IP68 T85C (- 40°C to +70°C)
- All Scanner 2000’s are compliant
Features
In head LCD providing local indication of density compensated
rate and total saturated steam flow.
RS485 Modbus RTU slave functionality for remote indication, data
logging and configuration.
- Gilflo flowmeter
- ILVA flowmeter
- M750 flow indicator Technical data
- Optional local display Minimum 2" H 20 (4.98 mbar)
Range
Maximum 200" H 20 (498 mbar)
Materials 4 - 20 mA (expansion board required)
Cast aluminium RS485 Modbus RTU slave
Enclosure Outputs
(painted with epoxy and polyurethane) (baud rate 300 to 38.4 K)
Body Stainless steel AISI 316 Solid state relay, configurable as pulse or alarm
3-way manifold Stainless steel AISI 316 Power supply 6 V to 30 Vdc at 31 mA
Fluid fill Silicone oil Pressure limits 155 bar
Temperature - 40°C to 70°C (- 40°F to 158°F)
Pipe connections
The process ports on the 3-way manifold are threaded ½" NPT limits LCD contrast is reduced below -30°C (-22°F)
connections at 54 mm (2 ") centres. ± 0.05% for Spans >10% of the URL
Accuracy ± 0.005 (URL / SPAN) for Spans <10% of
Electrical connections the sensor
¾" NPT Non approved and ATEX units Enclosure
IEC IP68
¾" NPT CSA units rating
Page 1 of 3
Flowmetering
Dimensions 145 127

(approximate) in mm
126
125
244
MVT adapter
MVT
3.2 8
24 135
Gilflo / ILVA
flowmeter
54
DP transmitter 3-way manifold Scanner 2000 assembly
5 1 6
Flow
Take care to
connect impulse
lines correctly
Lo
Safety information, Installation and Maintenance

Warning: This document does not give sufficient information for
safe installation of the product.
Full details are given in the Installation and Maintenance
Hi
Instructions supplied with the Scanner 2000.
Building management
system or
SCADA or (4 - 20 mA
versions only)
M750 or Chart recorder
TI-P335-23 MI Issue 3 Scanner 2000 Steam Mass Flow Transmitter Page 2 of 3

Flowmetering
How to order
Each Scanner 2000 is uniquely configured to suit the application that it is going to be fitted to. To ensure that the Scanner 2000 is
correctly configured the table below must be completed and sent with the corresponding order.
Configuration data sheet

Customer: P.O No.
Application details (Tick as appropriate)
Primary element GILFLO ILVA Orifice Plate
Serial number of primary element
Flowmeter size: 2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" 16"
Flow units: kg / h Ib / h btu / h kJ / h

3.2
25
Dryness fraction (60 - 100%)
Scanner approval CSA ATEX
Analogue board requirements

Analogue:
kg / h Ib / h btu / h kJ / h
output units
Analogue output scaling (4 mA) (Normally zero)
Analogue output scaling (20 mA) (Normally maximum flowrate)
Pressure sensor requirements
Pressure units: in H 2 O mbar Pa kPa mmHg psi kg / cm 2 in Hg
Maximum range:
(Normally 2 to 200 in H 2 O or 2.49 to 498 mbar)
differential pressure
Temperature requirements
Temperature units: °C °F
Orifice plate requirements
Tappings type: Flange Radius (D-D / 2) Corner
Device material: Monel Carbon Inconel Brass Stainless Nickel Hast

steel steel C22
Pipe internal 2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" 16"
diameter: (2.07") (3.07") (4.03") (6.07") (7.98") (10.01") (11.94") (15")
Orifice bore:
TI-P335-23 MI Issue 3 Scanner 2000 Steam Mass Flow Transmitter Page 3 of 3

Flowmetering
3.2
26
Flowmetering
Target flowmeters
TI-P192-01
MI Issue 3
TVA
Flowmeter for
Saturated and Superheated Steam Service
Description
The Spirax Sarco TVA flowmeter is designed for use on saturated and superheated steam (with the dedicated pressure sensor kit) and
operates on the target principle, by measuring the force produced on a moving cone by the fluid flow. This force is then converted into
density compensated mass flowrate and is transmitted via a single loop powered 4 - 20 mA and pulsed output. TVA flowmeters also
incorporate a totalised flow function and EAI 232C (RS 232) or EAI 485C (RS485) Modbus communications.
Pressure/temperature limits Sizes and pipe connections

DN50, DN80 and DN100
The TVA flowmeter is of wafer design, suitable for fitting between 3.3
Temperature °C
the following flanges:

Steam EN 1092 PN16, PN25 and PN40 1
saturation BS 10 Table H
curve ASME B 16.5 Class 150 and Class 300
Japanese Industrial Standard JIS 20
Korean Standard KS 20
Pressure bar g Note: Spirax Sarco TVA flowmeters should be installed in

pipework manufactured to BS 1600, ASME B 36.10 Schedule 40
The product should not be used in this region due to or EN 10216-2 / EN 10216-5 equivalent. For systems with different
software limitations. standards / schedules , please contact Spirax Sarco.
Minimum design temperature 0 °C (non-freezing)

*
Horizontal Superheated steam 23 bar g @ 239 °C
Maximum flow Saturated steam 32 bar g @ 239 °C
operating
pressure Vertical
Saturated steam only 7 bar g @ 170 °C
flow
Maximum operating temperature (saturation) 239 °C
Maximum electronics ambient temperature 55 °C
Maximum electronics humidity level 90% RH (non-condensing)
High pressure syphon tube assembly
Maximum working conditions 60 bar g @ 450 °C
Pressure sensing kit
Maximum operating temperature 125 °C
Maximum operating pressure 50 bar g
Maximum ambient temperature (cable+connector) 70 °C
Page 1 of 4
Flowmetering
3 Target flowmeters
* Sensor cable
* Pressure sensor TVA flowmeter body
Fl ow
¼"
NPSM
boss
Earth cables
Flowmeter stem
3.3 * 'U' syphon assembly

2
Electronics housing
* Items required for
superheat operation
Materials
Unit Part Material
Flowmeter body Stainless steel S.316 1.4408 CF8M
Internals 431 S29 / S303 / S304 / S316
TVA Spring Inconel X750 or equivalent
Flowmeter stem Stainless steel 300 series
Electronics housing Aluminium LM25
Cable Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
Sensor housing AISI 304 Stainless steel 1.4301
Pressure sensing kit Sensor AISI 630 Stainless steel 1.4542
'O' ring Nitrile Butadiene Rubber (NBR)
Adaptor AISI 431 Stainless steel 1.4057
Tube Carbon steel BS 3602: Part.1 1987 CFS 360 (zinc plated / passivated)
High pressure syphon tube assembly Body Carbon steel

Valve
Seat PEEK/ Polymain
Technical data
Power supply Loop powered
with optional RS485: 24VDC
4-20mA (not available with RS485 option)

Outputs
Pulsed output (Vmax 28 Vdc R min 10 kW)
Communication port Modbus EIA 232C (RS 232C)
with optional RS485: EIA 485 (RS 485C)
Page 2 of 4 TI-P192-01 MI Issue 3
TVA Flowmeter for Saturated and Superheated Steam Service

Flowmetering
Target flowmeters 3
Weight
Size A Flowmeter C D E F G X TVA Superheat 'U' syphon
OD kit
DN50 35 103 322 125 65 250 160 300 2.67 0.3 0.5
DN80 45 138 334 115 65 270 160 300 4.38 0.3 0.5
DN100 60 162 344 155 65 280 160 300 7.28 0.3 0.5
Note: A
Dimension 'X' is a recommended
minimum distance between the pressure X D F
tapping and the flowmeter. However it
can be installed at any distance
provided the cable allows
(Standard cable length is 1 m).
G
3.3
3
C
Performance
The TVA flowmeter has inbuilt electronics which give a density compensated output. An LCD display is incorporated within the electronics
head. The M750 display unit can be used to provide a remote display function if required, utilising the 4 - 20 mA output.
System uncertainty, to 95% confidence (2 STD):

(in accordance with ISO 17025)
± 2% of measured value from 10% to 100% of maximum rated flow.
± 0.2% FSD, from 2% to 10% of maximum rated flow.
Turndown : up to 50:1
As the TVA flowmeter is a self contained unit, the uncertainty quoted is for the complete system. Many flowmeters claim a pipeline unit
uncertainty and for a true system uncertainty, the individual uncertainty values of any associated equipment, such as DP cells, need to
be added to the pipeline value.
Pressure drop
The pressure drop across the TVA is nominally 750 mbar (300 ins water gauge) at maximum rated flow for the DN50, and 500 mbar (200
inches water gauge) for the DN80 and DN100.
TVA flowmeter flow capacities and pressure drops

QE litres / min Maximum DP
Flowmeter type
Maximum Minimum Wg m bar
DN50 300 3 300 750
DN80 770 8 200 498
DN100 1 200 12 200 498
TI-P192-01 MI Issue 3 Page 3 of 4

Flowmetering
3 Target flowmeters
Sizing the TVA flowmeter for saturated steam (kg/h) (Horizontal orientation)
Maximum flowrates in kg/h at different pressures (bar g).
Notes:
1 - Maximum steam flowrates are calculated at maximum differential pressure.
2 - For vertical capacities please contact Spirax Sarco.
3 - The table below is a guide only.
4 - For superheated capacities please use the sizing software on our website www.spiraxsarco.com
Size Steam pressure bar g 1 3 5 7 10 12 15 20 25 30 32 bar g
Max. flow 619 859 1 042 1 196 1 395 1 513 1 676 1 918 2 135 2 335 2 409 kg / h
DN50 QE = 300
Min. flow 12 17 21 24 28 30 33 38 43 47 60 kg / h
Max. flow 1 588 2 204 2 674 3 070 3 581 3 885 4 301 4 922 5 480 5 994 6 183 kg / h
DN80 QE = 770
Min. flow 32 44 53 61 72 78 86 98 110 120 128 kg / h
Max. flow 2 475 3 435 4 167 4 784 5 581 6 054 6 703 7 671 8 540 9 341 9 637 kg / h
DN100 QE = 1 200
Min. flow 49 69 83 96 112 121 134 153 171 187 192 kg / h
3.3 Safety information, installation and maintenance

4
The following main points are given for guidance only:
1. The TVA flowmeter should be mounted with a minimum of 6 straight pipe diameters upstream and 3 downstream. No valves, fittings or
cross sectional changes are permitted within these pipe lengths. Where an increase in nominal pipe diameter is required, upstream of the
flowmeter, the length of straight pipe should be increased to 12 diameters. Similarly, where a Spirax Sarco TVA is installed downstream
of two 90° bends in two planes, a pressure reducing valve or a partly open valve, 12 upstream pipe diameters should be allowed.
2. It is important that the internal upstream and downstream diameters of pipe are smooth. Ideally seamless pipes should be used and
there should be no intrusive weld beads on the internal diameter. It is also recommended that slip-on flanges are used to avoid this.
3. Care should be taken to install the TVA flowmeter concentrically in the line. If this is not done, flow measurement errors may occur.
4. The TVA flowmeter can be installed in any orientation up to a line pressure of 7 bar g whilst conditions are saturated. When conditions
are superheated then the TVA flowmeter can only be installed in horizontal pipework, with the electronics below the pipeline.
5. As for all steam flowmetering installations, good basic steam engineering practices should be followed:
- Line size changes achieved by the use of eccentric reducers.
- Do not lag (insulate) the TVA body or the mating flanges.
6. The TVA flowmeter must not be installed outside where it can be subjected to driving rain or where it is liable to freeze.
How to order
Saturated Service Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN100 TVA flowmeter for installation between EN 1092 PN40 flanges for use on saturated
steam at 10 bar g - Maximum flow 5 581 kg / h.
Superheated Service Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN100 TVA flowmeter, Pressure sensing kit and 'U' syphon, for installation between
EN 1092 PN40 flanges for use on superheated steam at 10 bar g.
Note: For details of the optional remote display see the relevant Spirax Sarco M750 literature.
Spare parts and accessories

- Spare electronics front panel (with standard RS 232C Communications)
- Spare electronics front panel (with RS485 Communications converter)

Flowmetering
Target flowmeters
TI-P193-01
MI Issue 4
TFA
Flowmeter for
Saturated Steam Service
Description
The Spirax Sarco TFA flowmeter is designed for use on saturated steam only and
operates on the target principle, by measuring the force produced on a target by
the fluid flow. This force is then converted into density compensated mass flowrate
or power and is transmitted via a single loop powered 4-20 mA and pulsed output. TFA flowmeter
TFA flowmeters also incorporate a totalised flow function and EIA 232C (RS232) body
or EIA 485C (RS485) Modbus communications.
D i r e c t i o n of
flow within the
pipeline
3.3
5
Where applicable the installation requires: 2 x Centralising bushes over
the lower two bolts of the flange connection - Ensure that the direction
See the selection table for 'Centralising bush kits' on page 4). of flow in the pipeline
matches the directional
Note: The centralising bush kit must be ordered for the installation flange type flow arrow on the body.
used on your application - See 'How to order' on page 4 for a typical example.

The TFA flowmeter is of wafer design, available in the listed specified sizes suitable
for fitting between the following flanges: Flowmeter stem
DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50
Flanged EN 1092-1 PN16, PN25 and PN40,
Japanese Industrial Standard JIS 20 and
Korean Standard KS 20
1", 1¼", 1½" and 2"
Flanged ASME B 16.5 Class 150 and Class 300
Note:
The Spirax Sarco TFA flowmeter should be installed in pipework manufactured
to BS 1600, ASME B 36.10 Schedule 40 or EN 10216-2 / EN 10216-5 equivalent.
For systems with different standards / schedules, please contact Spirax Sarco.
Electronics
Technical data housing

Power supply Loop powered
with optional RS485: 24VDC
Outputs - 4-20mA (not available with RS485 option) Materials
proportional to mass
Pulsed output: Flowmeter body Stainless steel 300 series
flow or power
Vmax 28 Vdc R min 10 kW
Internals Stainless steel 431 S29 / 300 series
Communication port Modbus EIA 232C (RS 232C)
Flowmeter stem Stainless steel 300 series
with optional RS485: EIA 485 (RS 485C)
Electronics housing Aluminium LM25
Performance
The TFA flowmeter has inbuilt electronics which give a density compensated output. The LCD display is incorporated within the electronics
head and can show totaliser, flowrate, power, pressure and temperature. An M750 display unit can be used to provide a remote display
function if required, utilising the 4 - 20 mA output.
System uncertainty, to 95% confidence (2 STD): (in accordance with ISO 17025)
± 2% of measured value from ≥ 20% and ≤ 100% of maximum rated flow
± 2% of full-scale value from ≥ 10% and < 20% of maximum rated flow
Turndown : up to 10:1
As the TFA flowmeter is a self contained unit, the uncertainty quoted is for the complete system. Many flowmeters claim a pipeline unit
uncertainty but for a true system uncertainty, the individual uncertainty values of any associated equipment, such as DP cells, need to
be added to the pipeline value.
Page 1 of 4
Flowmetering
3 Target flowmeters
Pressure psi g
0 100 200 300 400
239
Temperature °F
200 400
Temperature
150 Steam 300
°C
saturation
100 200
curve
50 100
0
0.6 5 10 15 20 25 30 32
Pressure bar g
The product should not be used in this region due to software limitations.
Maximum design pressure 32 bar g @ 239 °C (464 psi g @ 462°F)
Maximum design temperature 239 °C (462°F)
Minimum design temperature 0 °C (non-freezing) 32°F (non-freezing)
3.3 * Maximum operating pressure

Horizontal flow 32 bar g @ 239 °C (464 psi g @ 462°F)
Vertical flow 7 bar g @ 170 °C (101 psi g @ 338°F

6 * Note: See the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the TFA (IM-P193-02 and IM-P193-03) for full operation restrictions
Minimum operating pressure 0.6 bar g (8.7 psi g)
Maximum operating temperature (saturation) 239 °C (462°F)
Maximum electronics ambient temperature 55 °C (131°F)
Maximum electronics humidity level 90% RH (non-condensing) 90% RH (non-condensing)
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of 52 bar g (754 psi g)
Differential pressure drop
mbar
%Qmax 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
DN25 6 25 56 100 156 225 306 399 505 624
DN32 5 19 43 76 118 170 232 303 383 473
DN40 3 10 23 42 65 94 127 166 210 260
DN50 2 6 14 25 39 56 76 100 126 156
Inches H2 0
%Qmax 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
DN25 2.5 10.0 22.5 40.1 62.6 90.1 122.7 160.2 202.8 250.4
DN32 1.9 7.6 17.1 30.4 47.5 68.3 93.0 121.5 153.8 189.8
DN40 1.0 4.2 9.4 16.7 26.1 37.6 51.1 66.8 84.5 104.3
DN50 0.6 2.5 5.6 10.0 15.6 22.5 30.7 40.1 50.7 62.6
TFA Flowmeter for Saturated Steam Service

Flowmetering
Target flowmeters 3
Dimensions / weights
A
Size A B C D E Weight
DN25 2.85
DN32 2.95 B
35 105 323 80 105
DN40 2.86
DN50 2.91
(approximate) in inches and lbs

DN25 6.28
DN32 6.50 C
1.38 4.13 12.72 3.15 4.13
DN40 6.30
DN50 6.41
3.3
Sizing the TFA flowmeter for saturated steam -
7
Horizontal orientation
D E
Notes:
1 - Maximum steam flowrates are calculated at maximum differential pressure.

2 - For vertical capacities please contact Spirax Sarco.
3 - The tables below are a guide only.
Flow in kg/h
Maximum flowrates in kg/h at different pressures bar g.
Size Steam pressure bar g 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 25 30 32
Maximum flow 155 187 215 239 260 281 299 316 333 349 378 418 479 534 584 603
DN25
Minimum flow 15 19 21 24 26 28 30 32 33 35 38 42 48 53 58 60
Maximum flow 254 307 352 391 427 460 490 519 546 572 621 686 786 876 957 989
DN32
Minimum flow 25 31 35 39 43 46 49 52 55 57 62 69 79 88 96 99
Maximum flow 396 480 550 611 667 718 765 809 853 894 969 1 071 1 227 1 367 1 494 1 544
DN40
Minimum flow 40 48 55 61 67 72 77 81 85 89 97 107 123 137 149 154
Maximum flow 619 749 859 955 1 042 1 122 1 196 1 265 1 333 1 396 1 514 1 673 1 918 2 136 2 335 2 412
DN50
Minimum flow 62 75 86 95 104 112 120 126 133 140 151 167 192 214 233 241
Flow in lb/h
Maximum flowrates in lb/h at different pressures psi g.
Size Steam pressure psi g 14.5 29 44 58 73 87 102 116 131 145 174 218 290 363 435 464
Maximum flow 342 412 474 527 573 619 659 697 734 769 833 922 1 056 1 177 1 287 1 329
DN25
Minimum flow 33 42 46 53 57 62 66 71 73 77 84 93 106 117 128 132
Maximum flow 560 677 776 862 941 1 014 1 080 1 144 1 204 1 261 1 369 1 512 1 733 1 931 2 110 2 180
DN32
Minimum flow 55 68 77 86 95 101 108 115 121 126 137 152 174 194 212 218
Maximum flow 873 1 058 1 213 1 347 1 470 1 583 1 687 1 784 1 881 1 971 2 136 2 361 2 705 3 014 3 294 3 404
DN40
Minimum flow 88 106 121 134 148 159 170 179 187 196 214 236 271 302 328 340
Maximum flow 1 365 1 651 1 894 2 105 2 297 2 474 2 637 2 789 2 939 3 078 3 338 3 688 4 228 4 709 5 148 5 318
DN50
Minimum flow 137 165 190 209 229 247 265 278 293 309 333 368 423 472 514 531
TI-P193-01 MI Issue 4 Page 3 of 4

Flowmetering
3 Target flowmeters
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-P193-02 and IM-P193-03) supplied with the product.
The following main points are given for guidance only:
1. The TFA flowmeter should be mounted with the 'concave' side of the target facing upstream, with a minimum of 6 straight pipe diameters
upstream and 3 downstream. No valves, fittings or cross sectional changes are permitted within these pipe lengths. Where an increase
in nominal pipe diameter is required, upstream of the flowmeter, the length of straight pipe should be increased to 12 diameters.
Similarly, where a flowmeter is installed downstream of two 90° bends in two planes, a pressure reducing valveor a partly open valve,
12 upstream pipe diameters should be allowed.
2. It is important that the internal upstream and downstream diameters of pipe are smooth. Ideally seamless pipes should be used and
there should be no intrusive weld beads on the internal diameter.
3. The TFA flowmeter must be installed concentrically in the line using the centralising bush kit (ordered separately). If this is not done,
flow measurement errors may occur.
4. The TFA flowmeter can be installed in any orientation up to a line pressure of 7 bar g (102 psi g).
5. As with all steam flowmetering installations, good basic steam engineering practices should be followed:

3.3
- Line size changes achieved by the use of eccentric reducers.
8 - Do not lag (insulate) the TFA body or the mating flanges.
Centralising bush kits

Flange type
TFA size EN 1092 ASME ASME JIS 20

PN16 150 300 KS 20
PN25
PN40
DN25 1" 1930283 1930283 1930283
DN32 1¼" 1930283 1930283 1930283
DN40 1½" 1930283 1930483
DN50 2" 1930283 1930283 1930583
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN25 TFA flowmeter supplied with centralising bush kit 1930283 suitable for mounting between
EN 1092 PN40 flanges for use on saturated steam at 10 bar g - Maximum flow 349 kg / h.
Note: For details of the optional remote display see the relevant Spirax Sarco M750 literature.
Software copyright
Certain computer programs contained in this product [or device] were developed by Spirax-Sarco Limited ('the Work(s)').
Copyright © Spirax-Sarco Limited 2016
All Rights Reserved

Spirax-Sarco Limited grants the legal user of this product (or device) the right to use the Work(s) solely within the scope
of the legitimate operation of the product (or device). No other right is granted under this licence. In particular and without
prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, the Work(s) may not be used, sold, licensed, transferred, copied or reproduced
in whole or in part or in any manner or form other than as expressly granted here without the prior written consent of
Spirax-Sarco Limited.

Flowmetering
Orifice plate flowmeters
3
TI-P176-02
MI Issue 5
M410
Orifice Plate Flowmeter
and Carrier Assembly
Description
The M410 orifice plate and carrier assembly is a primary flow element
consisting of a tab handled square edged orifice plate and optional
carrier. The orifice plate is designed and manufactured to meet the
requirements of British Standard BS 1042 and International Standard
Organisation ISO 5167 in all respects and is suitable for the M410 orifice plate
measurement of the rate of flow for most liquids, gases and steam.
The tab handled orifice plate can be used for either:
a: on its own fitted between flanges with pressure tappings in the 3.4
users pipework or flanges.
or 1
b: fitted into a carrier with integral flange tappings designed to fit
between customer flanges.
Limiting conditions
The pressure and temperature limitations of both the tab handled plate
and the carrier assembly are the same as the specified flange ratings.
Performance
To BS 1042 and ISO 5167.
The performance of an orifice plate flowmetering system can be
greatly influenced by installation variables, so the figures given below
are for guidance only:
Typically ±3% of actual flow
Accuracy (equivalent to ±1.5% full scale deflection at 50%
of rated maximum flow)
Repeatability Typically ±0.3%
Turndown Typically 4:1
Pipe sizes available

Tab handled plates with or without carriers are available to suit the
following pipe sizes:
DN25, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80, DN100, DN125, DN150, DN200,
DN250, DN300, DN350, DN400, DN450, DN500 and DN600.
Connections
Tab handled plates and carriers are available to suit the following
flange specifications:
EN 1092 PN16, PN25 and PN40.
BS 10 Table H.
ASME B 16.5 Class 150, 300, 600.
Japanese Industrial Standard JIS 20.
Korean Standard KS 20.
Materials
Tab handled orifice plate BS 1449 S 316
Carrier Passivated zinc plated carbon steel
Gaskets Exfoliated graphite
Pressure tappings
When the tab handled orifice plates are used without the optional
carrier, it is the responsibility of the user to provide appropriate
presssure tappings in either his flanges or upstream and downstream
pipework in line with BS 1042 / ISO 5167.
The optional carrier assembly incorporates upstream and downstream
pressure tappings threaded ½" NPT. These tappings are 25.4 mm M410 orifice plate
either side of the orifice plate face in line with the requirements of BS and carrier assembly
1042 / ISO 5167.
Flowmetering
3 Orifice plate flowmeters

EN 1092 EN 1092 EN 1092 BS 10: ASME ASME ASME JIS KS Maximum
PN16 PN25 PN40 Table H 150 300 600 20 20 weight
Size A A A A A A A A A kg
DN25 73 73 73 71.4 66.7 73.0 73.0 74 74 2.36
DN40 94 94 94 88.9 85.7 95.3 95.3 89 89 3.72
DN50 109 109 109 111.1 104.7 111.1 111.1 104 104 4.91
DN65 129 129 129 130.1 123.8 130.2 130.2 124 124 6.21
DN80 144 144 144 149.2 136.5 149.3 149.3 140 140 7.91
DN100 164 170 170 174.6 174.6 181.0 193.7 165 165 13.75
DN125 194 196 196 215.9 196.9 216.0 241.3 203 203 20.98
DN150 220 226 226 241.3 222.3 250.9 266.7 238 238 23.51
DN200 275 286 293 304.9 279.4 308.0 320.6 383 383 31.25
DN250 331 343 355 358.8 339.7 361.9 400.0 356 356 47.95
DN300 386 403 420 415.9 409.6 422.2 457.1 406 400 58.74
DN350 446 460 477 469.9 450.8 485.7 492.1 450 450 60.20
DN400 498 517 549 527.0 574.3 539.7 565.1 570 570 85.99
DN450 559 567 574 581.0 549.2 596.8 612.7 575 575 94.38
3.4 DN500
DN600
620
737
627
734
631
750
644.5
749.3
606.4
717.5
654.0
774.7
682.6
790.6
630
734
630
734
117.69
146.37
2 Notes:
1: Dimension C is 25.4 mm for all sizes in line with BS 1042 / ISO 5167.
2: For line sizes DN25 to DN350, orifice plate thickness T is 3 mm, above DN350, T is 6 mm.
3: Gaskets are 1.6 mm thick.
4: For line sizes up to DN350, carrier assembly thickness B is 82 mm, above DN 350, B is 85 mm.
5: An optional drain hole that meets BS 1042 can be incorporated if required.
6: Maximum weights shown above are based on ASME 600 flanges.

supplied with the product. T, Note 2
Installation note:
It is important that all details of the installation conform to BS 1042 /
ISO 5167. Of special note, is the long, straight lengths of pipe that C, Note 1
must be present upstream of the orifice plate. As an approximate
guide, 20 to 30 pipe diameters upstream and 5 downstream should
be adequate but it is recommended that reference is made to the
relevant standard (BS 1042 / ISO 5167). A summary of the basic
requirements is included with the M410 equipment.
Maintenance note:
A visual inspection of the orifice plate should be made at regular
intervals to check for dirt build-up, damage or a loss of sharpness
of the upstream edge of the plate. Replacement orifice plates and
gaskets are available from Spirax Sarco.
How to specify
Orifice plate primary element with / without optional carrier assembly
conforming to BS 1042 / ISO 5167.
A
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco M410 orifice plate and carrier assembly.
Important note: In order that a correctly sized orifice plate can be
supplied, it is essential that full details of the installation and estimated
flowrates are supplied to Spirax Sarco. This is best done using a
customer orifice plate datasheet available from Spirax Sarco.
Note 5
Item Description
EL2211 Temperature sensor / transmitter
Note 3
EL2230 Temperature sensor/transmitter
EL2600 Pressure transmitter
EL2810 Temperature sensor/transmitter
F50C Isolation valve
B
M610 Transmitter assembly (Note 4)
M750 Display unit
M850 Steam flow computer
For a general description of Spirax Sarco orifice plate flowmetering
systems, see TI-P176-03 (density compensated system) and
TI-P176-01 (non density compensated system).
TI-P176-02 MI Issue 5 M410 Orifice Plate Flowmeter and Carrier Assembly

Flowmetering
Orifice plate flowmeters
3
TI-P176-04
MI Issue 7
Orifice Plate Flowmeters

Customer Data Sheet
This customer data sheet is intended to gather together all Section C: Options available
relevant information necessary to size and specify a Spirax Sarco The Spirax Sarco oriface plate flowmetering system is available in a
orifice plate flowmetering system. All equipment will be supplied number of options, at least one of which will suit the needs of a
to the customer based on the information received. customer. Options 1 to 4 are for simple systems where automatic
density compensation is not required. These are shown at the top of
Company name the next column...simply tick the option that meets your needs.
Options for use with flowcomputers that DO NOT include density

compensation:
Address
Option List of equipment in each package option 3.4
1 M410 orifice plate and gaskets
2 M410 orifice plate and gaskets, M610 DP transmitter 3
M410 orifice plate and gaskets with carrier ring,
3
Contact F50C isolation valves
M410 orifice plate and gaskets with carrier ring,
Project reference 4
F50C isolation valves, M610 DP transmitter assembly
Notes Option product code
Options 5 to 10 include equipment that allows automatic density

compensation for maximum accuracy. These are shown
below...simply tick the option that meets your needs.
Options for use with flowcomputers that DO include density

Please complete all sections and supply drawings, sketches etc. compensation:
where appropriate.
Option List of equipment in each package option
Section A: Working fluid details 5
M410 orifice plate and gaskets, M610 DP transmitter
Type of fluid (e.g., steam, air, water etc) assembly, EL2600 pressure transmitter
M410 orifice plate and gaskets, M610 DP transmitter
6
Min. value Normal value Max. value Units assembly, EL2271 temperature transmitter
Operating M410 orifice plate and gaskets, M610 DP transmitter
pressure
7 assembly, EL2600 pressure transmitter,
Operating
temperature EL2271 temperature transmitter
Estimated M410 orifice plate and gaskets with carrier ring,
rate of flow 8 F50C isolation valves, M610 DP transmitter assembly,
Notes: The pressure drop at specified maximum rate of flow will EL2600 pressure transmitter
be 24.9 kPa (100 inches water gauge) unless otherwise stated. M410 orifice plate and gaskets with carrier ring,
Below 25% of specified maximum rate of flow, system accuracy
cannot be guaranteed due to turndown limitations of orifice plates. 9 F50C isolation valves, M610 DP transmitter assembly,
(BS 1042 / ISO 5167). EL2271 temperature transmitter
Section B: Pipeline details M410 orifice plate and gaskets with carrier ring,
Value Units F50C isolation valves, M610 DP transmitter assembly,
10
Nominal line size EL2600 pressure transmitter,
Line inside diameter EL2271 temperature transmitter
Line schedule (if known) N /A Option product code
Flange specification N /A Note: For all options, please state if a vent or drain hole is required
Number of straight pipe diameters in the M410 orifice plate.
available upstream N /A
Number of straight pipe diameters Section D: Associated equipment required
available downstream N /A The M850 steam flow computer will provide automatic density
compensation for all steam flowmetering applications over the
Pipe material N /A range 100°C @ 0 bar g to 500°C @ 42 bar g.
Please provide a sketch showing all details of pipework including Wall Panel
any valves, bends, fittings etc. in the area where the M410 orifice mounted version mounted version
plate is to be fitted. This is important as the performance of all
orifice plates can be affected greatly by installation factors. Using M750 local display N/A 99 / 264 Vac
the information from sections A and B, Spirax Sarco will size the
correct orifice plate in line with the parameters laid down in M850 flow computer 24 Vdc 99 / 264 Vac
BS 1042 / ISO 5167.
Flowmetering
3 Orifice plate flowmeters
Sketch showing details of installation:
3.4
4
TI-P176-04 MI Issue 7 Orifice Plate Flowmeters Customer Data Sheet

Flowmetering
Flowmetering ancillaries
TI-P333-29
EMM Issue 4
M850-W and M850-P

Flow Computers
Description
The M850 is a flexible and easy to use flow computer that accurately calculates mass and energy flow for steam, gas and liquids across
a wide variety of applications.
Standards
These products fully comply with the requirements of the
M850-W-x
European Directives and carry the mark when so
required.
3.5
In addition there is an cULus certified version of the wall
mount variant available 1
The M850 is available with the following certification:
- Uncertainty Certificate / Inspection Report.
Note: All certification / inspection requirements must be
stated at the time of order placement.

M850-P-x

Available options
Both versions of the M850 series have the same functions and are available as follows:
M850-P for panel mounting and is powered by 24 Vdc.
M850-W for wall mounting and has been adapted to be powered by 100 / 240 Vac.
Additionally, each version can be optionally equipped with one or two analog outputs 4-20 mA.
Offered versions of the instruments:

M850 -x -x -x
-P Panel mounted version. (CE and cULus approved as standard)
-W Wall mounted version (CE approved as standard, cULus approval optional)
-0 Option without analog 4 - 20 mA output.
-1 Option with one analog 4 - 20 mA output.
-2 Option with two analog 4 - 20 mA outputs.
-UL Option with cULus approval (required for wall mount version only)
Page 1 of 6
Flowmetering
3 Flowmetering ancillaries
Technical data for the M850 series flow computers
User interface, front panel

Display type LCD TFT color, 3.5", with LED backlight
Display size / resolution 43.8 mm x 77.4 mm / 272 (RGB) x 480 px,
LED indication 3 two-color LEDs, red / green: ALARM, REC, USB
Keyboard 19 membrane buttons
Inputs organisation
6 x I type (0 / 4 - 20 mA): IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4, IN5, IN6
Number of inputs 3 x RTD (4-wire): IN7, IN8, IN9
3 x PULS: IN10, IN11, IN12
I type (0 / 4 - 20 mA current loop analog inputs)

Signal type 0 - 20 mA or 4 - 20 mA
2-wire passive transmitter (supplied from M850) or

3.5 Transmitter connection
active transmitter (current source transmitter)
2 Input resistance 95 W ±10% (protected with PTC 50 mA fuse in series)
24 Vdc +10% / -20%; max 22 mA per channel (protected with

Transmitters supply
PTC 50 mA fuse and 100 Ω resistor in series)
Damping (1st order Low Pass Software Filter time constant) 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 20 s / 30 s / 1 min / 2 min / 3 min / 5 min
Measurement resolution > 0.01% of FS
Accuracy (at Tamb = +25 °C / +77 °F) ± 0.1% of FS (typical W0.05% of FS)
RTD type (3 analog inputs for temperature sensors)

Pt-100 x K; Ni-100 x K; where K = 1..11
Sensor types
(K – multiplier, e.g.: K = 2 for Pt-200)
-200 .. +850 °C / -328 .. +1562 °F for Pt100 x K

Measuring range
-60 .. +150 °C / -76 .. +302 °F for Ni100 x K
Sensor connection 4-wire (2-wire with wire bridges)
Wire resistance compensation Automatic , additional manual in range -99.99 .. +99.99 W
Maximum resistance of connecting wires 50 W
Damping (1st order Low Pass Filter time constant) 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 20 s / 30 s / 1 min / 2 min / 3 min / 5min
Measurement resolution > 0.05% of reading or 0.1 Ω (TBV)
Accuracy (at Tamb = +25 °C / +77 °F) ± 0.5 °C / ± 0.9 °F (typical ± 0.3 °C / ± 0.54 °F)
Temperature drift Maximum ± 0.02 °C / °C / 0.036 °F / °F
Max input voltage ± 40 Vdc / SELV
Galvanic isolation to Analog Outputs, RS-485 / RS-422, Ethernet 250 Vac continuous; 1 500 Vac for 1 minute
M850-W and M850-P Flow Computers

Flowmetering
Flowmetering ancillaries 3
PULS type inputs (binary / pulse / frequency)
0 .. 20 kHz (cut off for f < 0.001 Hz)
Measuring range
(0 ..1 kHz with filter jumper J1 / J2 / J3 ON)
Minimum pulse width 25 μs (0.5 ms with filter jumper J1 / J2 / J3 ON)
Accuracy for frequency measurement (at Tamb = +25 °C / +77 °F) 0.02%
Galvanic isolation to Analog Outputs, RS-485 / RS-422, Ethernet 250 Vac continuous; 1 500 Vac for 1 minute
Configuration (default): OC or Contact open / closed (Internal jumper J4 / J5 / J6 ON)
Open circuit voltage 5 Vdc
Short circuit current 5 mA
Configuration: Voltage Input (Internal jumper J4 / J5 / J6 OFF)
Signal amplitude 4 .. 36 Vdc

3.5
Input resistance ≥10 kW 3
Compensated flow and heat energy measurement
Calculation update rate 1s
Total accuracy of compensated steam, water, other liquid or

Typical: better then ± 0.5% (worst case: better then ± 2%)
technical gas flow measurement
4 - 20 mA analog output (optional)

Number of outputs 1 or 2
Output signal 4 - 20 mA passive (external current loop supply required)
Resolution 16 bit DAC
Loop resistance (R L) range for U CC = 24 V 0 .. 600 Ω
Minimum loop power supply voltage U CCmin = RL x 0.022 + 8
Maximum loop power supply voltage 28 Vdc / SELV
Accuracy (at Tamb = +25 °C / +77 °F) Better than ± 0.2% of FS / °C
Galvanic isolation to Analog Inputs, RS-485 / RS-422, Ethernet 250 Vac continuous; 1 500 Vac for 1 minute
Binary outputs (M850-W-x and M850-W-x-UL)

Number of outputs 4
Type of outputs 3 pole (COM, NO, NC) electromechanical relay
Contact rating (resistive load) 3 A at 85 .. 250 Vac / 30 Vdc
Maximum switching voltage 250 Vac / 125 Vdc
Maximum switching power 750 VA / 90 W
Binary outputs (M850-P-x)

Number of outputs 4
Type of outputs 2 pole Solid State Relay
Contact rating (resistive load) 0.1 A at 24 Vac/dc (max 42 Vac 60 Vdc) / SELV
Maximum ON resistance 20 Ω
Galvanic isolation (optoisolation) 250 VAC continuous; 1 500 Vac for 1 minute

Flowmetering
RS-485 / RS-422
Transmission protocol ASCII, Modbus RTU, BACnet MSTP, GSM
Number of nodes in network 256
Maximum line length 1 200 m (depends on quality of data cable and baud rate)
Baud rate 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2, 230.4 kbps
Parity control Even, Odd, None
Frame 1 start bit, 8 data bits, parity 1 bit, 1 stop bit
Internal terminating resistor Yes, activated with DIP switch
Maximum bus terminal voltages -8 V … +13 V / SELV
Minimal driver differential output voltage 1.5 V (for R L = 54 W)
Minimum receiver sensitivity 200 mV
Short-circuit / thermal protection Yes
Galvanic isolation to Analog Inputs, Analog Outputs, Ethernet 250 Vac continuous; 1 500 Vac for 1 minute
3.5 Ethernet port
4 Transmission protocol Modbus TCP, ICMP (ping), DHCP server, http server, BACnet IP
Interface 10 BaseT Ethernet
Data buffer 300 B
Number of opened connections (simultaneously) 4
Connection type RJ-45 / SELV
LED indication 2 (build in RJ-45 socket)
USB port
Socket type A type, according to USB standard
Version USB 2.0
Recording format FAT16 (within a limited scope)
Power supply (M850-W-x and M850-W-x-UL)

Rated supply voltage 100 - 240 Vac; 50 / 60 Hz
Supply voltage range 85 .. 264 Vac; 47 .. 63 Hz
Power consumption Maximum 20 VA
Over voltage category CAT
Power supply (M850-P-x)

Rated supply voltage 24 Vdc (SELV and Limited Energy Supply)
Supply voltage range 18 .. 36 Vdc
Power consumption Maximum 8 W
Wire terminals (M850-W-x and M850-W-x-UL)

Wire connection / terminals Spring type terminal block
Solid 0.2 .. 2.5 mm 2

Stranded 0.2 .. 1.5 mm 2
Conductor cross section
AWG 26 .. 12
Non cULus version cable entry 4 glands type M20, 2 glands type M16
cULus version cable entry 4 conduit hubs ½" NPT

Flowmetering
Wire terminals (M850-P-x)
Wire connection / terminals Screw type terminal blocks, plug type
Solid 1.5 mm 2 max

Stranded 1 mm 2 max
Conductor cross section
AWG 30 / 14
Enclosure (M850-W-x and M850-W-x-UL)

Enclosure type Wall mounting, Polycarbonate material
217 mm x 257 mm x 134 mm (without cable glands)

238 mm x 257 mm x 134 mm (with conduit hub cULus version)
Dimensions (height x width x depth)
247 mm x 257 mm x 134 mm (with cable glands - non cULus version)
Weight net (gross) approx. 1.7 kg (cULus version 2.5 kg)
Protection class IP65 (not UL evaluated)
Enclosure (M850-P-x)
Enclosure type Panel mounting, Lexan Resin 920 material
3.5
110 mm x 206 mm x 63.5 mm (without terminals)
Dimensions (height x width x depth) 110 mm x 206 mm x 72 mm (with terminals)
5
Panel cut-out dimensions 186 mm x 92 mm
Panel thickness 1 .. 5 mm
Weight net (gross) approx. 0.6 kg (0.7 kg)
Protection class (front / rear) IP65 / IP20 (not UL evaluated)
Environmental conditions
Ambient temperature 0 .. +55 °C (32 .. 131 °F)
Relative humidity 5 .. 95% (non-condensing)
Storage temperature -30 .. +70 °C
3 Panel version (when installed in an enclosure)

Pollution degree
3 Wall version
EN 61010-1
Electrical safety UL 61010-1, 3rd Edition
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1, 3rd Edition
Immunity EN 61326-1 Table 2

EMC
Radiated and conducted emissions EN61326-1 Group 1 Class B
Installation location Indoor use only

Flowmetering
M850 A B C D E Weight
M850-W-x (wall mounted) 257 217 134 30 * - 1.70
M850-W-x-UL (wall mounted) 257 217 134 21 - 2.5
M850-P-x (panel mounted) 206 110 72.3 - 9.5 0.60
* Approximate dimension as the cable glands are adjustable.
M850-W-x (wall mounted) M850-P-x (panel mounted)

A C A C
B
M850
B
M850
E
3.5
6 D
M850-W-x-UL version
A C
B
M850

Installation notes:
1. The wall mounted M850-W-x requires 3 mounting screws (not supplied) to mount to a wall or optionally has a DIN rail mounting.
2. The panel mounted M850-P-x is supplied with mounting clamps.
3. An adaptor plate is available as a separate kit, should the M850 be replacing an existing M200 or M800 flow computer.
Disposal
This product is recyclable. No ecological hazard is anticipated with the disposal of this product, provided due care is taken.
How to order
For the correct product nomenclature for the unit that best suits the intended application please revisit page 1 'Available options' before
placing an order.
Example 1: 1 off M850-P-1 panel mounted energy monitor with one analog 4-20mA output, 24 Vdc supply
Example 2: 1 off M850-W-2-UL wall mounted energy monitor with two analog 4-20mA outputs, 240 Vac supply
Spare parts
There are no spare parts available for the M850 flow computers.
Available accessories - Panel mounting adapter plate to replace M800 M200 flow computers.

Flowmetering
TI-P332-08
EMM Issue 3
M750
Display unit
Description
The Spirax Sarco M750 is an intelligent digital panel display unit that is fully programmable from the front panel. It can accept inputs
from a wide variety of sensors, and digitally processes and displays the relevant signal.
The M750 totaliser function enables non-volatile storage of the integrated total to be maintained within the unit, even after loss of power.
The M750 is ideally suited as a display unit for use with Spirax Sarco flowmeters. It can provide an indication of flowrate and totalised
flow for Gilflo, ILVA, DIVA, orifice plates and vortex flowmeters as well as providing a 24 Vdc loop power supply where required.
The M750 has Modbus RTU protocol using RS485 serial communications.
Up to two 'Option Pods' can be fitted to the M750 to provide the following functions:
- An isolated 4 - 20 mA retransmission pod. 3.5

- A pod with two normally-open relays.
7
It is possible to have one or two relay pods, but only one 4 - 20 mA retransmission pod. The Option Pods can be selected to operate
on Process Variable (Rate), or Total.
Technical data
See pages 2 and 3.
Weight
230 grams (0.5 lbs)
Page 1 of 4
Flowmetering
Technical data (at 20 °C)
90-264 Vac 50/60 Hz
90-253 Vac 50/60 Hz for compliance with LVD and UL

Power supply
BS EN 61010-1 for connection to an installation over-voltage Category II supply
(Pollution degree 2)
Power consumption 10 VA (worst case)
500 V
Isolation (tested to)
Supply to I/O 3 750 V
BS EN 61010-1 for connection to an installation over-voltage Category II supply

Relay supply
(Pollution degree 2)
IP rating IP65 (front panel only)
Ambient operating temperature -30 to +60 °C (-22 °F to +140 °F)
Ambient storage -50 to +85 °C (-58 °F to +185 °F)

Environmental
Ambient humidity 10 to 90% RH
EMC: Emissions and immunity BS EN 61326

3.5 Safety BS EN 61010-1
8
Universal input types
Sensor Sensor range and linearisation
mA 4-20 mA, ± 20 mA, ± 10 mA
RTD Pt 100, NI 120, custom
T/C K, J, T, R, S, B, N, L, B, E, Custom*
Sensor and Sensor range and
linearisation mV ± 100 mV
Volts ± 10 V, ± 5 V, 1 - 5 V, ± 1 V
Any span within the range can be selected, but the

Minimum span
recommended span is > 10% of range.
Basic accuracy 0.05% FS ± 0.05% of reading
Thermal drift 200 ppm/ °C

Current input
Input impedance 20 Ω
Linearity Linear, X1/2, X3/2, X5/2, custom*
A 19 V @ 25 mA isolated power supply is provided to power the current loop.
* Custom can be up to 60 co-ordinate pairs or up to 7 segments of 15th order polynomial.
Communications
RS485 Modbus communications The M750 has Modbus RTU protocol with RS485 serial communications as standard.
Physical layer 4 wire or 2 wire half duplex RS485
Protocol Modbus RTU format
Isolation 500 Vac
Maximum fan out 32 units (this can be increased with repeaters)
Termination standard RS485
EMM Issue 3
M750 Display unit
Flowmetering
Option pods
The M750 has interchangeable output pods that are automatically recognised by the unit. The dual relay pod has two independent
mains rated relays that can be configured for high or low alarms or pulse output. The isolated re-transmission pod provides 0-10 mA,
0-20 mA or 4-20 mA active or passive outputs.
Dual relay alarm pod

Two independent mains rated relay outputs, which can operate as alarms or pulsed output
Contacts 2 x changeover relays with common
Ratings ac dc
Maximum load 5 A @ 250 V 5 A @ 30 V (inductive load 2 A)
Maximum power 1 250 VA 150 W
Maximum switching 253 volts 125 volts
Termination 5 way tension clamp connector
Isolated 4-20 mA re-transmission pod

Isolated analogue retransmission for use with chart recorders, Building Management Systems, etc.
3.5
Ranges 0-10 mA (Active or Passive), 0-20 mA (Active or Passive), 4-20 mA (Active or Passive)
Minimum current output 0 mA

9
Maximum current output 23 mA
Accuracy 0.07% FS
Active 1 K Ω
Maximum output load
Passive [(Vsupply - 2)/20] K Ω
Maximum external supply voltage 30 V (Passive mode)
Isolation 500 Vac
Termination 5-way tension clamp connector
How to specify:
M750 panel mounted digital display unit that accepts all commonly used process signals. Designed to allow current retransmission or
dual relay output option pods to be easily installed without the need for dismantling or recalibration.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco M750 display unit complete with dual relay and 4 - 20 mA current retransmission option pods.
EMM Issue 3
M750 Display unit
Flowmetering
Rear elevation
Side elevation
140 mm (5.5") Front elevation
10 mm (0.39") 95 mm (3.78")
Maximum panel thickness
Option pod
Panel cut out 48 mm
92 mm (3.62") x 45 mm (1.77") (1.89")
Clamping screw
Panel clamp
3.5
10
Plan elevation Option pod
11 mm 16 mm 13.5 mm
(0.43") (0.63") (0.53")
131 mm (5.16") (Behind bezel) 53.5 mm
(2.11")
43.5 mm
(1.71")
19.5 mm
(0.77")
EMM Issue 3
M750 Display unit
Flowmetering
TI-P322-02
MI Issue 7
EL2600
Pressure Transmitter
and 'U' Syphons
Description
The EL2600 is a combined pressure sensor and transmitter which is
designed for general and industrial use.
It has a 2-wire 4-20 mA current loop, and a ¼" NPT process
connection. Two syphon tube and valve assemblies are available,
one with a maximum design pressure of 25 bar g, and one with a
maximum design pressure of 80 bar g.
Available ranges
m bar g 0-100 0-250 0-600 3.5
0-0.1 0-0.25 0-0.6 0-1 0-1.6 0-2.5 0-4 0-6
bar g
0-10 0-16 0-25 0-40 0-60 0-100* 0-160* 0-250* 11
bar a 0-1.6 0-2.5
* No 'U' syphon is available for these ranges, therefore maximum
operating temperature is limited to 100°C
Limiting conditions
Pressure /temperature limits EL2600
Minimum operating temperature -30°C (medium)
-20°C (ambient)
Maximum operating temperature 100°C (medium)
(without syphon tube) 80°C (ambient)
Low pressure syphon tube /valve

Maximum design pressure 25 bar g Technical data
Maximum design temperature 260°C
0 -1.6 bar a to 0 -16 bar g Piezorresistive
Maximum working conditions 21 bar g @ 217°C Sensor type
0 -40 bar g to 0 -400 bar g Thin film
High pressure syphon tube Supply voltage 10 Vdc to 30 Vdc
Accuracy £ 0.5%
Maximum design temperature 450°C
Repeatability £ 0.05 of span
Maximum working conditions 60 bar g @ 450°C
Hysteresis £ 0.1% of span
Overpressure limit table Protection rating IP65
Calibrated pressure range Overpressure P max (bar)
0 - 1.6 bar a, 0-2.5 bar a 10 Approvals
0 - 0.1 bar g 1 EMC
2004/108/EC, EN 61 326 Emission (Group 1, Class B)
0 - 0.25 bar g 2 emissions
0-0.6 bar g 4 EMC 2004/108/EC, EN 61 326 Emission (Group 1, Class B)
0-1 bar g 5 susceptibility and Immunity (industrial locations)
0-1.6 bar g, 0-2.5 bar g 10
0-4 bar g 17 Materials
0-6 bar g, 0-10 bar g 35 EL2600
0-16 bar g, 0-25 bar g 80 Part Material
0-40 bar g 120 Body Stainless steel 316L WS 1.4435
0-60 bar g 200 Connector Moulded plastic Polyamide PA 66
0-100 bar g 320
Low pressure syphon tube assembly (Valve ordered separately)
0-160 bar g 500
Part Material
0 - 250 bar g 800
Tube Carbon steel ASTM A 106 Gr. B. Phosphated
Note: High pressure 'spikes' above maximum overpressure, even of Body Brass
very short (milli-seconds) duration, could damage sensors. If pressure Valve
peaks are likely to occur in your application, we recommend the use of Handle Phenolic
a pressure snubber. Alternatively, a higher range pressure transmitter
High pressure syphon tube assembly
could be used, though this would mean some loss of signal resolution.
Part Material
Process connection
For fluids below 100°C the EL2600 may be mounted directly via its Tube Carbon steel BS 3602: Part.1 1987 CFS 360
¼" NPT connection. (zinc plated /passivated).
Above 100°C, a 'U' syphon and isolating valve must be fitted between Body Carbon steel
the EL2600 and the vessel or pipeline. Valve
Seat PEEK /Polymain
Flowmetering
Dimensions /weights (approximate) in mm and kg Safety information, installation and maintenance

EL2600 This document does not contain sufficient information to install the
product safely. See the Installation and Maintenance Instructions
A B C D Weight supplied with the product.
104 57 28 48 0.2 Safety note:
You attention is drawn to Safety Information Leaflet IM-GCM-10.
'U' Syphon and isolating valve
Installation note:
E F G H J K Weight It is essential to use a 'U' syphon and valve for temperatures above
160 50 150 160 60 150 0.5 100°C to avoid damage to the unit.
Maintenance note:
EL2600 D No specific maintenance is required, but we recommend inspection
and re-calibration of the transmitter once a year.
C
How to order
Example: 1 - Spirax Sarco EL2600 pressure transmitter, range
0 - 16 bar g, with low pressure 'U' syphon and isolating valve.
A B
3.5
12 Low ¼" NPT
pressure
E
'U' syphon
¼" NPT
parallel
(NPSM)
G
High ¼" NPT

pressure
'U' syphon H
¼" NPT
parallel
(NPSM)
K
EL2600 Pressure Transmitter and 'U' Syphons TI-P322-02 MI Issue 7

Flowmetering
TI-P322-06
EMM Issue 13
EL2270 and EL2271

Temperature Probes
Description
EL2270
The EL2270 is a Pt100 platinum resistance temperature sensor for general industrial use. The sensing device is an RTD 3 wire device
that meets EN 60751: Class A. This sensor can be connected directly to any temperature indicator or controller that has a 3 wire Pt100
input. A quick response version (40 mm insertion length only) is also available for applications such as plate heat exchanger control.
A miniature version of the EL2270 may also be ordered. This has a ¼" BSP taper thread, and a tip length of 39 mm.
EL2271 3.5
The EL2271 is a combined Pt100 sensor and transmitter assembly. The sensing element is a 3 wire device that meets EN 60751:
Class A and the transmitter has a 4 - 20 mA output. 13
An ATEX approved version is available to special order.
A comprehensive standard range is normally available from stock. Non-
standard ranges can be obtained to special order, subject to a low limit of
-50 °C, and a maximum of +500 °C. The 4 - 20 mA output can be connected
directly to any temperature indicator, controller or flow computer that has
a 4 - 20 mA input. Contact Spirax Sarco for further details. Transmitters
with 3 point calibration are available to special order.
Pockets (thermowells)
General
Three types of pockets are available:
1. Thin wall with a ½" NPT process connection for non-flow applications
only.
2. Drilled taper with a ½" NPT process connection.
3. Sanitary pocket, with a 1½" sanitary clamp connection (ASME BPE)

electropolished to 0.4 µm.
This pocket is available with certification to EN10204 3.1.
Note: All certification/inspection requirements must be stated at the
time of order placement.
Note: No pocket is available for the miniature EL2270.

Material 316 stainless steel
Maximum temperature 500 °C
Selection
Pockets are sized to suit the probe tip length 'D', and are specified as
'pocket to suit a _ _ mm probe'.
Note 1 - The pocket dimension 'F' is 25 mm shorter than the probe length
'D', which appears to be incorrect. The reason is that the threaded body
of the pocket acts as a stand-off, and therefore allows adequate clearance
between the probe tip and the end of the pocket.
Note 2 - Pockets to suit 225 mm and 725 mm probes are for non-flow
applications only (maximum flow velocity 0.65 m/sec).
EL2270 and EL2271
EMM Issue 13
EL2270 and EL2271 Temperature Probes
Flowmetering
EL2270* EL2271
Product range Standard Miniature Quick repsonse and

duplex quick response
A 88 58 88 88
B 130 62 150 130
C 75 63 75 75
D 25, 50, 75,125, 225, 725 39 40 25, 50, 75, 125
E 6 6 4.5 6
* Note: The quick response EL2270 is only available with an insertion length of 40 mm.
Pockets
Standard Hygenic
Product range 1½" sanitary clamp connector
Fabricated Solid drilled Fabricated
F 200, 700 25, 50, 100 25, 50, 100, 200

3.5
14
EL2270 and EL2271
½"
NPT
Enclosure
Pocket
27 A/F
½" NPT
C Probe
½" NPT
(¼" BSPT EL2270 miniature version) Drilled taper version
F shown dotted
EMM Issue 13
Flowmetering
Mechanical data
EL2270*
Product range Note: A quick response version of the EL2270 is EL2271
also available to order
Enclosure KNE - aluminium alloy - epoxy coated KNE - aluminium alloy - epoxy coated
Probe 316 stainless steel 316 stainless steel
Process connection ½" NPT ½" NPT
Electrical connection M20 with cable gland fitted M20 with cable gland fitted
Enclosure rating IP65 IP65
Ambient Minimum -50 °C -50 °C

temperature Maximum +70 °C +85 °C
* The EL2270 quick response sensor has a time constant of 1.7 seconds.
Electrical data
-50 °C to +50 °C
3.5
Available ranges -50 °C to +500 °C 0 °C to +100 °C
100 °C to +250 °C
15
Output Pt100 to EN 60751: Class A Loop powered 4 - 20 mA
Output on sensor failure - 23 mA typical
Supply - 10 to 30 Vdc
636  at 24 Vdc
Maximum loop resistance -
909  at 30 Vdc
Transmitter - Thermal drift measuring deviation - ± 0.1% / 10 KTAMB per EN 60770 ± 0.2%
U o = 30 Vdc I o = 120 mA
Maximum values for connection of the current loop
- Pi = 800 mW C i = 6.2 μF
circuit (connections + and -)
L i = 110 μH
U o = 6.4 Vdc I o = 42.6 mA
Po = 37.1 mW
Maximum values for connection of the sensor circuit Group II B:

-
(connections 1 up to 3)
C o = 500 μF L o = 50 mH
Group II C:
C o = 20 μF L o = 10 mH
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMC 2014/30/EU
EMC emissions and susceptibility -
EN61326:2013
EN61326-2-3:2013
EMM Issue 13
Flowmetering
The EL2270 and EL2271 temperature probes can be used in applications where the process temperature is within the following limits.
Where greater temperatures and pressures are present, the temperature probe should be fitted with a pocket.
For air and steam applications, flow velocities must be below 45 m/s (32 m/s for fabricated pockets).
For liquids a recommended velocity is 5 m/s (700 mm and 200 mm non-flow applications only).
Pressure and temperature limits of temperature probe.

(ANSI 300 rated)

Temperature °C


Pressure bar g
3.5 Pressure and temperature limits of standard pockets.

16 (ANSI 600 rated)
D

A B
Temperature °C

C E

Pressure bar g

A-B-C Fabricated pocket
A-D-E Solid drilled pocket
EMM Issue 13
Flowmetering
TI-P170-01
EMM Issue 5
F50C
Isolating Valve
Description
The F50C is a needle type isolating valve designed for primary isolation in flowmetering applications with steam and other industrial
fluids. No spares are available.

½" screwed NPT.
Pressure/temperature limits 3.5

400
17
Temperature °C
300
200 Steam
saturation
100 curve
0
0 100 200 300 413
Pressure bar g
1
Maximum operating pressure 413 bar g (6 000 psi g)
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Body Carbon steel, zinc plated and passivated
2 Seals Graphoil (not shown)

Dimensions/weight
Kv values For conversion:
A B C Connections Weight
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
0.474 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
66 28 76* ½" NPT 0.5
*With valve open

Your attention is drawn to Safety information leaflet IM-GCM-10.
This document does not give sufficient information to install the product in a
safe manner.
See the relevant system Installation and Maintenance Instructions for full
details.
The F50C valve may be installed in any position, but the flow should be in the
direction of the arrow on the valve body.
When used as an isolating valve in a steam meter impulse line, it is important
C
to install the valve on the centre line of the flowmeter rather than below it, so
that the valve is in steam rather than water.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco F50C isolating valve.
B A
Flowmetering
3.5
18
Flowmetering
Vortex flowmeters
TI-P339-07
CMGT Issue 3
VIM20
Vortex Insertion Flowmeter
Description
The VIM20 Vortex Insertion Flowmeter utilises three primary sensing elements to measure the mass flowrate of steam, liquids and
gases:
- Vortex shedding velocity sensor - RTD temperature sensor - Solid-state pressure transducer
Principle of operation
Vortex flowmeters measure the flow of liquid, gas and steam by detecting the frequency at which vortices are alternately shed from a
bluff body. According to proven laws of physics, the frequency at which the vortices are alternately shed is directly proportional to the
flow velocity.
3.6
Insertion vortex flowmeters measure flow by detecting the local velocity at a strategically located position within the pipe. The VIM20
detects the frequency at which vortices are alternately shed from the bluff body located within the sensor head. 1
The VIM20 uses the local velocity, along with other parameters, such as fluid type, pipe size and Reynolds number to calculate the
average pipe velocity, and consequently, the volumetric flowrate.
VIM20 range and benefits

The VIM20-V delivers a direct reading of volumetric flowrate,
generally the most cost-effective solution for liquid flow monitoring, in
applications ranging from general water flows to hydrocarbon fuel flow
measurement.
The VIM20-VT integrates a precision 1000 platinum RTD

temperature sensor that can be used to calculate and output a
compensated mass reading. This device is typically used to measure
flowrates of saturated steam.
The VIM20-VTP offers you flow computer functionality in a compact

field device. This multivariable instrument incorporates temperature
and pressure sensors to provide an instantaneous reading of the
compensated mass flowrate of gases, liquids and steam. In addition to
outputs for totalized mass and alarm settings, the field-configurable
electronics deliver up to three analogue 4-20 mA outputs of five process
measurements, including volumetric flowrate, mass flowrate, pressure,
temperature and density.
The VIM20-EM Energy Monitoring option permits real-time

calculation of energy consumption for a facility or process. The
flowmeter can be programmed to measure steam, hot water or chilled
water. The VIM20-VTP-EM flowmeter monitors one side of the process,
either sent or returned, and uses the input from a second separate
temperature sensor on the opposite leg of the process to calculate the
change in energy. Selectable energy units include BTUs, joules,
calories, Watt-hours, Megawatt-hours and Horsepower-hours. The local
or remote electronics indicate two temperatures, delta T, mass total and
energy total.
Compliance
- Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
Flow
- Low Voltage Directive
- ATEX Directive
Page 1 of 11
Flowmetering
3 Vortex flowmeters
Approvals
Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D
FM and FMC Class II / III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G
Type 4X and IP66, T6, Ta = - 40 °C to + 70 °C
II 2 G Ex db IIB +H2 T6 T2 Gb
S Temp.
II 2 D Ex tb IIIB T85 °C Db
ATEX (optional)
II 2 G Ex db IIB +H2 85 °C 405 °C Gb
H Temp.
Ex d IIB + H2 T6 Gb
IECEx (optional)
Ex tb IIIB T85 °C Db, Ta = - 40 °C to + 60 °C
Sizes
Insertion style mounting permits installation in any pipe DN80 (3") and greater.
3.6
Technical data
2 316L stainless steel, plus:
• DuPont Teflon ® based thread sealant on models with pressure transducer
Wetted materials
• DuPont Teflon ® packing on standard temperature models with packing gland
• Graphite based packing on high temperature models with packing gland
Any gas, liquid or steam compatible with 316L stainless steel and other listed wetted materials.
Application
Not recommended for multi-phase fluids
S option - Standard -200 °C to +260 °C (-330 to +500 °F)

Where ATEX is required the lower temperature is further limited to -40 °C (-40 °F)
Temperature Process
H option - High +260 °C to +400 °C (+500 °F to +750 °F)
*The permissible temperatures may be further limited where explosion proof approvals are required
Operating -40 °C to +60 °C (-40 °F to +140 °F)

Temperature Ambient
Storage -40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to +185 °F)
Electrical Safety EN61010-1:2010
LVD Overvoltage Category II

Environmental
Pollution Degree 2
Emissions Group 1, Class A (Suitable for Industrial Environments only)

EMC
Immunity Suitable for Industrial Environments
Enclosure NEMA 4X, IP66
Full-scale operating pressure Maximum over-range pressure
2 bar a 30 psi a 4 bar a 60 psi a

Pressure transducer ratings
34 bar a 500 psi a 69 bar a 1 000 psi a
100 bar a 1 500 psi a 175 bar a 2 500 psi a
Page 2 of 11 TI-P339-07
CMGT Issue 3
VIM20 Vortex Insertion Flowmeter
Flowmetering
Vortex flowmeters 3
Technical data (continued)
Style connection Connection rating
2" Male NPT ASME Class 600
2" ASME B16.5 Class 150 or 2" EN1092-1 PN16

Compression fitting

Pressure ratings
Packing gland 2" ASME B16.5 Class 150 or 2" EN1092-1 PN16
Packing gland and 2" ASME B16.5 Class 150 or 2" EN1092-1 PN16
Permanent retractor 2" ASME B16.5 Class 300 or 2" EN1092-1 PN40
DL option - 12 to 36 Vdc, 25 mA, 1 W maximum, Loop powered (single output)

3.6
Power requirements DH option - 12 to 36 Vdc, 300 mA, 9 W maximum (multiple outputs)
AC option - 100 to 240 Vac, 50 / 60 Hz line power, 5 W maximum (multiple outputs)

3
Alphanumeric 2 line x 16 character LCD digital display
Six pushbuttons for full field configuration

Display
Pushbuttons can be operated with magnetic wand without removal of the enclosure covers
Display can be mounted in 90 ° intervals for better viewing
Analogue 4 - 20 mA
Alarm Solid state relay, 40 Vdc
Totalizer pulsem 50 millisecond pulse, 40 Vdc
Volumetric or Loop powered One analogue, one totalizer pulse, HART® , scaled frequency
Output signals mass output
Up to three analogue signals, three alarms, one totaliser

Multivariable option 1
pulse, HART® , scaled frequency output
Modus RTU or BACnet MS / TP compatible process

monitoring
Performance specifications
Accuracy Mass flowrate accuracy for gas and steam based on 50 - 100% of pressure range
Process variables Liquids Gas and steam Repeatability Stability over 12 months
Volumetric flowrate ± 1.2% of rate ± 1.5% of rate ± 0.1% of rate ± Negligible
Mass flowrate ± 1.5% of rate ± 2.0% of rate ± 0.2% of rate ± 0.2% of rate
Temperature ± 1.0 °C (± 2.0 °F) ± 1.0 °C (± 2.0 °F) ± 0.1 °C (± 0.2 °F) ± 0.5 °C (± 0.9 °F)
Pressure ± 0.3% of full-scale ± 0.3% of full-scale ± 0.05% of full-scale ± 0.1% of full-scale
Density ± 0.3% of reading ± 0.5% of reading ± 0.1% of reading ± 0.1% of reading
Response time Adjustable from 1 to 100 seconds
TI-P339-07 Page 3 of 11
CMGT Issue 3
Flowmetering
3 Vortex flowmeters
Dimensions and weights (approximate) in mm and inches
Compression fitting models Weight (approximate) in kg and lbs
127 mm C S E
(5")
135 mm 81 mm kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs
(5.31") (3.19")
¾" NPT CNPT 5.7 13 6.2 14 6.7 15
conduit entry
C150, C16 6.8 15 7.3 16 7.8 17
Electronics enclosure
C300, 7.8 17 8.3 18 8.8 19
C40
Pressure transducer housing
(not present on VIM20 V, VT) C600, 8.2 18 8.7 19 9.2 20
C63
Orientation lever
Add 5 kg (11 lb) for remote electronics
102 mm
(4")
A
3.6
Compression fitting
4 2", DN50 mounting flange
2" male NPT
Stem
Vortex sensor head

C150 CNPT
C16
C300
C40
C600
C63
Dimensions (approximate) in mm and inches
C S E
Compact Length Standard Length Extended Length
VIM20 V and VT A B (max.) A B (max.) A B (max.)
mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches
Compression fitting, Male NPT 549 21.6 249 9.8 965 38 665 26.2 1 270 50 970 38.2
Compression fitting, 150 Ib, PN16 549 21.6 277 10.9 965 38 693 27.3 1 270 50 998 39.3
C S E
VIM20 VTP A B (max.) A B (max.) A B (max.)
Compression fitting, Male NPT 625 24.6 249 9.8 1041 41 685 26.2 1 346 53 970 38.2
Page 4 of 11 TI-P339-07
CMGT Issue 3
Flowmetering
Vortex flowmeters 3
Packing gland models - Please note that a removable retractor can be used with these models
203 mm Weight (approximate) in kg and lbs
(8")
135 mm 81 mm S E
(5.31") (3.19")
kg lbs kg lbs
¾" NPT conduit entry
PNPT 7.1 16 7.6 17
Electronics enclosure P150, P16 9.4 21 9.9 22
P300, P40 11.3 25 11.8 26
(not present on VIM20 V, VT) Add 5 kg (11 lb) for remote electronics
Orientation Lever
Stem
A
3.6
Stem clamp
5
Packing gland
2" male NPT

2", DN50 mounting flange
B
Vortex sensor head

P150 PNPT
P300
P16
P40
S E
VIM20 Standard Length Extended Length
V, VT and VTP
A B (max.) A B (max.)
mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches
Packing gland, Male NPT 1 029 40.5 546 21.5 1 334 52.5 851 33.5
Packing gland, 150 Ib, PN16 1 029 40.5 536 21.1 1 334 52.5 841 33.1
TI-P339-07 Page 5 of 11
CMGT Issue 3
Flowmetering
3 Vortex flowmeters
Packing gland models with permanent retractor
203 mm 203 mm 135 mm 81 mm
(8") (8") (5.31") (3.19")
Weight (approximate) in kg and lbs
¾" NPT conduit entry S E

Electronics kg lbs kg lbs
enclosure
PNPT 11.5 25 14.5 32
Pressure
transducer housing P150R, 13.7 30 16.7 37
(not present on P16R
VIM20 V, VT) P300R, 15.5 34 18.5 41
Orientation lever P40R
P600R, 16.0 35 19.0 42
P63R
Retractor
A Add 5 kg (11 lb) for remote electronics
3.6 Stem
6
Packing gland
Retractor
handle
2" male NPT
2", DN50 mounting flange
B
Vortex sensor head
P150R PNPTR
P16R
P300R
P40R
P600R
P63R
VIM20 S
Standard Length
E
Extended Length
V, VT and VTP mm
A
inches mm
B (max.)
inches mm
A
inches mm
B (max.)
inches
with permanent retractor
Packing gland, Male NPT 1 029 40.5 546 21.5 1 334 52.5 851 33.5
Remote electronics option 81 mm

127 mm 216 mm
(3.19")
(5") (8.5")
53 mm
(2.1")
145 mm
(5.7")
Remote cable
15 metres (50 ft)
8 mm
(0.315")
76 mm
'U' bolt (3")
provided
127 mm 12.7 mm
(5") (0.5")
76 mm
(3")
Remote electronics option available on all models
Page 6 of 11 TI-P339-07
CMGT Issue 3
Flowmetering
Vortex flowmeters 3
Typical Imperial
Typical Metric flowrates - VIM20 flowrates are
on page 8
Saturated steam flowrates (kg/hr)
Nominal Pipe Size

Pressure
80 mm 150 mm 200 mm 300 mm 400 mm 600 mm
Minimum 81 316 548 1 226 1 936 4 404

0 bar g
Maximum 938 3667 6 350 14 209 22 432 51 039
Minimum 187 729 1 263 2 826 4 461 10 151

5 bar g
Maximum 4 986 19 486 33 742 75 495 119 189 271 187
Minimum 249 972 1 683 3 767 5 947 13 530

10 bar g
Maximum 8 859 34 620 59 949 134 132 211 764 481 821 3.6
Minimum 298 1164 2 016 4 510 7 120 16 200 7
15 bar g
Maximum 12 700 49 629 85 939 192 283 303 570 690 705
Minimum 340 1329 2 301 5 148 8 128 18 493

20 bar g
Maximum 16 550 64 676 111 995 250 581 395 609 900 119
Minimum 413 1612 2 791 6 246 9 860 22 435

30 bar g
Maximum 24 357 95 187 164 827 368 789 582 234 1 324 739
Air (nm3 / h) at 20 °C
Nominal Pipe Size

Pressure
80 mm 150 mm 200 mm 300 mm 400 mm 600 mm
Minimum 89 347 601 1 345 2 124 4 833

0 bar g
Maximum 1 463 5 716 9 897 22 145 34 962 79 547
Minimum 217 847 1 467 3 282 5 181 11 788

5 bar g
Maximum 8 702 34 006 58 885 131 751 208 004 473 266
Minimum 294 1 148 1 987 4 446 7 020 15 972

10 bar g
Maximum 15 975 62 430 108 105 241 878 381 870 868 857
Minimum 355 1 385 2 399 5 368 8 474 19 282

15 bar g
Maximum 23 280 90 979 157 542 352 487 556 497 1 266 182
Minimum 407 1 589 2 751 6 156 9 718 22 112

20 bar g
Maximum 30 615 119 642 207 175 463 539 731 823 1 665 095
Minimum 495 1 934 3 349 7 493 11 829 26 915

30 bar g
Maximum 45 361 177 268 306 961 686 801 1 084 302 2 467 081
TI-P339-07 Page 7 of 11
CMGT Issue 3
Flowmetering
3 Vortex flowmeters
Typical Metric
Typical Imperial flowrates - VIM20 flowrates are
on page 7
Saturated steam (lb / h)
Nominal Pipe Size

Pressure
3" 6" 8" 12" 16" 24"
Minimum 205 800 1 385 3 099 4 893 11 132

5 psi g
Maximum 2 721 10 633 18 412 41 196 65 039 147 954
Minimum 468 1 831 3 170 7 092 11 197 25 472

100 psi g
Maximum 14 246 55 674 96 407 215 703 340 546 774 698
Minimum 632 2 471 4 278 9 572 15 111 34 377

200 psi g
3.6 Maximum 25 948 101 405 175 595 392 880 620 268 1 411 029
8 Minimum 762 2 976 5 153 11 530 18 203 41 410

300 psi g
Maximum 37 652 147 145 254 799 570 093 900 047 2 047 489
Minimum 873 3412 5 908 13 219 20 870 47 477

400 psi g
Maximum 49 494 193 420 334 930 749 382 1 183 103 2 691 404
Minimum 974 3 805 6 588 14 741 23 272 52 942

500 psi g
Maximum 61 543 240 507 416 468 931 816 1 471 125 3 346 615
Air (SCFM) at 70 °F
Nominal Pipe Size

Pressure
3" 6" 8" 12" 16" 24"
Minimum 56 220 381 852 1 345 3 059

5 psi g
Maximum 924 3 611 6 253 13 991 22 089 50 250
Minimum 157 615 1 065 2 383 3 763 8 560

100 psi g
Maximum 7 236 28 279 48 969 109 564 172 977 393 500
Minimum 216 843 1 460 3 266 5 156 11 729

200 psi g
Maximum 13 588 53 101 91 950 205 732 324 804 738 886
Minimum 262 1 022 1 770 3 960 6 251 14 221

300 psi g
Maximum 19 974 78 059 135 169 302 430 477 467 1 086 176
Minimum 301 1 175 2 034 4 551 7 186 16 346

400 psi g
Maximum 26 391 103 136 178 593 39 9588 630 859 1 435 121
Minimum 335 1 310 2 269 5 077 8 015 18 233

500 psi g
Maximum 32 834 128 314 22 2191 49 7136 784 865 1 785 464
Page 8 of 11 TI-P339-07
CMGT Issue 3
Flowmetering
Vortex flowmeters 3
Water flowrates
m3 / hr GPM
Size
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
80 mm 3" 5.2 157 20.6 618
150 mm 6" 20.4 614 81.3 2 437
Nominal 200 mm 8" 35.4 1 062 142.0 4 270

pipe size 300 mm 12" 79.2 2 337 317.0 9 501
400 mm 16" 125.0 3 753 501.0 15 043
600 mm 24" 284.0 8 537 1 138.0 34 144
Sizing considerations
Straight run piping requirements Upstream Downstream
One 90 ° elbow before the flowmeter 10 D 5D
Two 90 ° elbows before the flowmeter 15 D 5D
Two 90 ° elbows out of plane before the flowmeter 25 D 5D
Piping conditions Reduction before the flowmeter 10 D 5D

3.6
Expansion before the flowmeter 20 D 5D
Partially open valve 25 D 5D 9
D = Internal diameter of the pipe - If there is not a sufficient straight run of pipe, a flow rectifier
may be used to reduce the above diameter measurements.
Consult your local Spirax Sarco representative or the factory for your specific application.
Maximum 9 metres / second (30 feet / second)
Liquid
Minimum 0.3 metres / second (1 feet / second)
Maximum 90 metres / second (300 feet / second)
Velocity range
6.1 5
Gas or steam
Minimum density ( )
kg
m3
density ( )
lb
ft 3
Other installation considerations:

- Mounting position
The VIM20 may be installed in vertical, horizontal, or angled pipe sections. The flowmeter is attached perpendicular to the axis
of the pipe and should not be mounted 'upside-down' (with its top section hanging below the pipe mount). For liquid service, the
fluid must completely fill the pipe.
- Site selection
The flow measurement location should be selected to minimize turbulence and swirl. The extent of these flow disturbances
depends upon the piping configuration. Valves, elbows, pumps, and other piping components may add disturbances to the flow.
- Hot-tap compatibility
With the removable or permanent retractor assembly the VIM20 is ‘hot-tappable’ and can be installed and removed without
shutting down the process. An isolation valve with a pipe mounting kit is used to isolate the flowmeter from the process.
Accessories
Removable Retractor
For models without a permanent retractor, one removable retractor must be used if the process pressure is >3.4 bar g (50 psi g).
Removable retractor
Removable retractor options
Extended length removable retractor – For use with extended length probes
How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco VIM20 - Removable retractor.
TI-P339-07 Page 9 of 11
CMGT Issue 3
Flowmetering
3 Vortex flowmeters
How to order Selection:
Suffix Grey =
Category Description
code Standard
Flowmeter Insertion vortex flowmeter VIM20 VIM20
Volumetric flowmeter for liquid V
Velocity and temperature sensors VT
Velocity, temperature and pressure sensors VTP
Velocity, temperature and external 4 - 20 mA pressure input VTEP
Electronics Velocity, external RTD temperature input, external 4 - 20 mA pressure input VETEP V
Energy output options VTEM
Energy options with pressure sensor VTPEM
Energy options, velocity, temperature and external 4 - 20 mA pressure input VTEPEM
3.6 Energy options, velocity, external RTD temperature input, external 4 - 20 mA pressure input VETEPEM
10 Standard length S
Probe Compact length -

length Only available for compression fitting connections CNPT, C150, C300, C600, C16, C40 and C63
C S
Extended length E
NEMA 4X, IP66 enclosure L
Remote electronics NEMA 4X, IP66 25' cable with display R25
25' (7.6 m) Armored cable with glands V meter only A25

Electronics
enclosure
25' (7.6 m) Armored cable with glands VT, VTP meter only A25P L
Remote electronics NEMA 4X, IP66 50' cable with display R50
50' (15.2 m) Armored cable with glands V meter only A50
50' (15.2 m) Armored cable with glands VT, VTP meter only A50P
Display Digital display and programming buttons D D
12-36 Vdc, 25 mA. 1 W max, required on loop powered meters, 1HL only DL
Power
supply
12-36 Vdc, 300 mA, 9 W max. – use with 1H, 1M, 1B, 3H, 3M, 3B DH DL
100-240 Vac, 50 / 60 Hz line power, 5 W max – use with 1H, 1M, 1B, 3H, 3M, 3B AC
Loop powered option - one analogue output (4-20 mA),one alarm, one pulse, HART®, DL input power only 1HL
One analogue output (4-20 mA), one alarm, one pulse, HART® Communication Protocol, DH or AC option only 1H
Output
One analogue output (4-20 mA), one alarm, one pulse, MODBUS Communication Protocol, DH or AC option only 1M
signal
Inclusive of the One analogue output (4-20 mA), one alarm, one pulse, BACnet Communication Protocol, DH or AC option only 1B 1HL
scaled
frequency
Three analogue outputs (4-20 mA), three alarms, one pulse, HART® (VT, VTP only), DH or AC option only 3H
output
Three analogue outputs (4-20 mA), three alarms, one pulse, MODBUS (VT, VTP only), DH or AC option only 3M
Three analogue outputs (4-20 mA), three alarms, one pulse, BACnet (VT, VTP only), DH or AC option only 3B
Page 10 of 11 TI-P339-07
CMGT Issue 3
Flowmetering
Vortex flowmeters 3
Process temperature -200 to 260 °C (-330 to 500 °F)
Standard temperature Add note below this line: S
Process
*Where ATEX is required the lower temperature is further limited to -40°C (-40°F) S
temperature
High temperature Process temperature 260 °C to 400 °C (500 °F to 750 °F) H
No pressure sensor P0
Maximum 2 bar a 30 psi a Proof 4 bar a 60 psi a P1

Pressure
sensor
P0
Maximum 34 bar a 500 psi a Proof 69 bar a 1 000 psi a P4
Maximum 100 bar a 1 500 psi a Proof 175 bar a 2 500 psi a P5
Compression, 2" NPT CNPT Packing gland, 2" NPT, retractor (use with E probe) PNPTR-E
Compression, 2" ASME 150 flange C150 Packing gland, 2" DN150 flange, retractor P150R
3.6
Compression, DN50 PN16 flange C16 Packing gland, 2" DN150 flange, retractor (E probe) P150R-E
Compression, 2" ASME 300 flange C300 Packing gland, DN50 PN16 flange, retractor P16R
11
Compression, DN50 PN40 flange C40 Packing gland, DN50 PN16 flange, retractor (E probe) P16R-E
Compression, 2" ASME 600 flange C600 Packing gland, 2" DN300 flange, retractor P300R
Compression, DN50 PN63 flange C63 Packing gland, 2" DN300 flange, retractor (E probe) P300R-E
Process
connections
PNPTR
Packing gland*, 2" NPT PNPT Packing gland, DN50 PN40 flange, retractor P40R
Packing gland*, 2" ASME 150 flange P150 Packing gland, DN50 PN40 flange, retractor (E probe) P40R-E
Packing gland*, DN50 PN16 flange P16 Packing gland, 2" DN600 flange, retractor P600R
Packing gland*, 2" ASME 300 flange P300 Packing gland, 2" DN600 flange, retractor (E probe) P600R-E
Packing gland*, DN50 PN40 flange P40 Packing gland, DN50 PN63 flange, retractor P63R
Packing gland, 2" NPT, retractor PNPTR Packing gland, DN50 PN63 flange, retractor (E probe) P63R-E
* One removable retractor must be ordered if the process pressure is >3.4 bar g (50 psi g).
FM/FMC and CE marked S

Approvals S
ATEX/IECEx/FM/FMC and CE marked A
Selection example: VIM20 - V - S - L - D - DL - 1HL - S - P0 - PNPTR - S
How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco VIM20 - V - S - L - D - DL - 1HL - S - P0 - PNPTR - S - vortex insertion flowmeter.
TI-P339-07 Page 11 of 11
CMGT Issue 3
Flowmetering
3 Vortex flowmeters
3.6
12
Flowmetering
Turbine flowmeters
TI-P198-04
CMGT Issue 4
RIM20
Rotor Insertion Flowmeter
Description
The RIM20 multivariable insertion turbine flowmeter utilises three
primary sensing elements to measure the mass flowrate of steam,
liquids and gases:
- Turbine velocity sensor,
- RTD temperature sensor,
- Solid-state pressure transducer.

3.7
1
Insertion turbine flowmeters measure flow of liquid, gas, and steam by
detecting the frequency of rotation of the turbine blades. According to
the proven laws of physics, the frequency at which the turbine rotates
is directly proportional to the flow velocity.
Insertion turbine flowmeters measure flow by detecting the local velocity
at a strategically located position within the pipe. The RIM20 detects
the frequency within the sensor head. It uses the local velocity, along
with other parameters such as fluid type, pipe size, and Reynolds
Number to calculate the average pipe velocity, and consequently, the
volumetric flowrate.
Compliance
- Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
- Low Voltage Directive
- ATEX Directive
Approvals
Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D
FM and FMC Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G
Type 4X and IP66, T6, Ta = -40 °C to +60 °C
II 2 G Ex db IIB + H2 T6…T2 Gb
S Temp.
ATEX
II 2 G Ex db IIB + H2 85 °C…459 °C Gb
H Temp.
Ex d IIB +H2 T6 Gb
IECEx
EX tb IIIB T85 °C Db, Ta= -40 °C to +60 °C Turbine
blades
Sizes
Insertion style mounting permits installation in any pipe DN80 (3")
and greater.
Page 1 of 13
Flowmetering
3 Turbine flowmeters
RIM20 range and benefits
The RIM20-V delivers a direct reading of volumetric flowrate, generally the most cost-effective solution for liquid flow monitoring,
in applications ranging from general water flows to hydrocarbon fuel flow measurement.
The RIM20-VT integrates a precision 1 000 Ω platinum RTD temperature sensor that can be used to calculate and output a
compensated mass reading. This device is typically used to measure flowrates of saturated steam.
The RIM20-VTP offers you flow computer functionality in a compact field device. This multivariable instrument incorporates
temperature and pressure sensors to provide an instantaneous reading of the compensated mass flowrate of gases, liquids and steam.
In addition to outputs for totalized mass and alarm settings, the field-configurable electronics deliver up to three analogue 4 - 20 mA
outputs of five process measurements, including volumetric flowrate, mass flowrate, pressure, temperature and density.
The RIM20-EM Energy Monitoring option permits real-time calculation of energy consumption for a facility or process. The flowmeter
can be programmed to measure steam, hot water or chilled water. The RIM20-VTP flowmeter monitors one side of the process, either
sent or returned, and uses the input from a second separate temperature sensor on the opposite leg of the process to calculate the
change in energy. Selectable energy units include BTUs, joules, calories, Watt-hours, Megawatt-hours and Horsepower-hours. The
local or remote electronics indicate two temperatures, delta T, mass total and energy total.
Technical data
3.7 316L, 302, and 17-4PH, and 18-8 stainless steel, tungsten carbide, sapphire, plus:
2 Wetted materials
• DuPont Teflon ® based thread sealant on models with pressure transducer
• DuPont Teflon ® packing on standard temperature models with packing gland
• Graphite based packing on high temperature models with packing gland
Any gas, liquid or steam compatible with 316L stainless steel and other listed wetted materials.
Application
Not recommended for multi-phase fluids
S option - Standard -55 °C to +238 °C (-67 °F to +460 °F)

*Where ATEX is required the lower temperature is further limited to -40 °C (-40 °F).
Temperature Process
H option - High -267 °C to +454 °C (-448 °F to +850 °F)
*Where ATEX is required the lower temperature is further limited to -40 °C (-40 °F).
Operating -40 °C to +60 °C (-40 °F to +140 °F)

Temperature Ambient
Storage -40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to +185 °F)
Electrical Safety EN61010-1:2010
LVD Overvoltage Category II

Environmental
Pollution Degree 2
Emissions Group 1, Class A (Suitable for Industrial Environments only)

EMC
Immunity Suitable for Industrial Environments
Enclosure NEMA 4X, IP66
Full-scale operating pressure Maximum over-range pressure

Pressure transducer
ratings 20 bar a 300 psi a 41 bar a 600 psi a
34 bar a 500 psi a 69 bar a 1 000 psi a
100 bar a 1 500 psi a 175 bar a 2 500 psi a
Page 2 of 13 TI-P198-04
CMGT Issue 4
RIM20 Rotor Insertion Flowmeter
Flowmetering
Turbine flowmeters 3
Technical data (continued)
Style connection Connection/Rating
2" ASME B16.5 Class 150 or DN50 EN1092-1 PN16

Compression fitting

Pressure ratings
Packing gland 2" ASME B16.5 Class 150 or DN50 EN1092-1 PN16
Packing gland and 2" ASME B16.5 Class 150 or DN50 EN1092-1 PN16
Permanent retractor
DL option - 12 to 36 Vdc, 25 mA, 1 W maximum, Loop powered (single output)
Power requirements DH option - 12 to 36 Vdc, 300 mA, 9 W maximum, (multiple outputs)

3.7
AC option - 100 to 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz line power, 5 W maximum (multiple outputs) 3
Alphanumeric 2 line x 16 character LCD digital display
Six pushbuttons for full field configuration

Display
Pushbuttons can be operated with magnetic wand without removal of the enclosure covers
Display can be mounted in 90° intervals for better viewing
Analogue 4 - 20 mA
Alarm Solid state relay, 40 Vdc
Totalizer pulse 50 millisecond pulse, 40 Vdc
Volumetric
One analogue, one totalizer pulse, HART® , scaled frequncy
Output signals or
output
Loop powered mass
Up to three analogue signals, three alarms, one totalizer

pulse, HART ®, scaled frequency output
Modus RTU or BACnet MS/TP compatible process

monitoring
Performance specifications
Accuracy Mass flowrate accuracy for gas and steam based on 50 - 100% of pressure range
Stability over 12
Process variables Liquids Gas and steam Repeatability
months
Volumetric flowrate ± 1.2% of rate ± 1.5% of rate ± 0.1% of rate ± Negligible
Mass flowrate ± 1.5% of rate ± 2.0% of rate ± 0.2% of rate ± 0.2% of rate
Temperature ± 1.0 °C (± 2.0 °F) ± 1.0 °C (± 2.0 °F) ± 1.0 °C (± 2.0 °F) ± 0.5 °C (± 0.9 °F)
Pressure ± 0.3% of full-scale ± 0.3% of full-scale ± 0.05% of full-scale ± 0.1% of full-scale
Density ± 0.3% of reading ± 0.5% of reading ± 0.1% of reading ± 0.1% of reading
Response time Adjustable from 1 to 100 seconds
TI-P198-04 Page 3 of 13
CMGT Issue 4
Flowmetering
C S E
RIM20 V and VT A B (max) A B (max) A B (max)
Compression fitting, Male NPT 536 21.1 229 9.0 953 37.5 645 25.4 1 257 49.5 950 37.4
Compression fitting, 150 Ib, PN16 536 21.1 257 10.1 953 37.5 673 26.5 1 257 49.5 978 38.5
C S E
RIM20 VTP A B (max) A B (max) A B (max)
3.7 Compression fitting, Male NPT 612 24.1 229 9.0 1 029 40.5 645 25.4 1 334 52.5 950 37.4
Compression fitting, 150 Ib, PN16 612 24.1 257 10.1 1 029 40.5 673 26.5 1 334 52.5 978 38.5
4 Compression fitting, 300 Ib, PN40 612 24.1 254 10.0 1 029 40.5 671 26.4 1 334 52.5 975 38.4
Compression fitting, 600 Ib, PN63 612 24.1 244 9.6 1 029 40.5 660 26.0 1 334 52.5 965 38.0
Compression fitting models Weight (approximate) in kg and lbs

127 mm
(5")
135 mm 81 mm
C S E
(5.31") (3.19")
kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs
¾" NPT conduit entry CNPT 5.7 13 6.2 14 6.7 15

Electronics enclosure C150, C16 6.8 15 7.3 16 7.8 17
C300, C40 7.8 17 8.3 18 8.8 19

(not present on RIM20 V, VT) C600, C63 8.2 18 8.7 19 9.2 20
Orientation Lever
Add 5 kg (11 lb) for remote electronics
102 mm (4")
Compression fitting
2" male NPT
2" DN50 mounting flange
Stem
B
Turbine sensor head
C150 CNPT
C16
C300
C40
C600
C63
Page 4 of 13 TI-P198-04
CMGT Issue 4
Flowmetering
S E
RIM20 Standard Length Extended Length
V, VT and VTP
A B (max) A B (max)
mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches
Packing gland, Male NPT 1 016 40.0 526 20.7 1321 52.0 831 32.7
Packing gland, 150 Ib, PN16

1 016 40.0 516 20.3 1321 52.0 820 32.3
Packing gland, 300 Ib PN40
Packing gland models - Please note that a removable retractor can be used with these models
203 mm Weight (approximate) in kg and lbs
(8")
135 mm 81 mm S E
(5.31") (3.19")
kg lbs kg lbs
PNPT 7.1 16 7.6 17
Electronics enclosure
P150, P16 9.4 21 9.9 22
3.7
Pressure transducer housing P300, P40 11.3 25 11 .8 26 5
(not present on RIM20 V, VT)
Orientation Lever Add 5 kg (11 lb) for remote electronics
Stem
A
Stem clamp
Packing gland
2" male NPT

B
Turbine sensor head

P150 PNPT
P300
P16
P40
Remote 81 mm
(3.19") 127 mm 216 mm
electronics (5") (8.5")
53 mm
option (2.1")
145 mm
(5.7")
Remote cable 15 metres
(50 ft)
8 mm
(0.315")
76 mm
'U' bolt
(3")
provided
127 mm 12.7 mm
(5") (0.5")
76 mm
(3")
Remote electronics option available on all models
TI-P198-04 Page 5 of 13
CMGT Issue 4
Flowmetering
RIM20 S
Standard Length
E
Extended Length
V, VT and VTP A B (max) A B (max)
with permanent retractor mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches
Packing gland, Male NPT 1 016 40.0 526 20.7 1321 52.0 831 32.7
Packing gland, 300 Ib, PN40 1 016 40.0 516 20.3 1321 52.0 820 32.3
Packing gland models with permanent retractor Weight (approximate) in kg and lbs
S E
3.7 203 mm
(8")
203 mm
(8")
kg lbs kg lbs
6 135 mm
(5.31")
81 mm
(3.19")
PNPTR 11.5 25 14.5 32
P150R, P16R 13.7 30 16.7 37
Electronics
enclosure P300R, P40R 15.5 34 18.5 41
Pressure transducer P600R, P63R 16.0 35 19.0 42

housing (not present
on RIM20 V, VT) Add 5 kg (11 lb) for remote electronics
Orientation lever
Retractor
A
Stem
Packing gland
Retractor
handle
2" male NPT
B
Turbine
sensor head P150R PNPTR
P300R
P600R
P16R
P40R
P63R
Page 6 of 13 TI-P198-04
CMGT Issue 4
Flowmetering
Typical Metric flowrates
Saturated steam (kg/h)
Nominal pipe size
Rotor Pressure
80 mm 150 mm 200 mm 300 mm 400 mm 600 mm
Minimum 17 72 127 297 491 1 219

1.4 bar g
Maximum 225 929 1 642 3 817 6 270 15 367
Minimum 42 173 306 713 1 176 2 907

R40 5 bar g
Maximum 537 2 216 3 915 9 090 14 905 36 400
Minimum 75 310 549 1 279 2 106 5 194

10 bar g
Maximum 962 3 963 6 999 16 239 26 600 64 815
Minimum 20 82 146 341 563 1 396

1.4 bar g
Maximum 329 1 358 2 399 5 575 9 149 22 384
Minimum 48 198 350 817 1 347 3 328 3.7

R30 5 bar g
Maximum 785 3 237 5 716 13 265 21 735 52 993
7
Minimum 86 355 629 1 465 2 411 5 943
10 bar g
Maximum 1 405 5 786 10 215 23 687 38 771 94 337
Minimum 35 146 259 604 995 2 463

1.4 bar g
Maximum 530 2 187 3 863 8 968 14 704 35 898
Minimum 85 350 620 1 444 2 377 5 856

R20 5 bar g
Maximum 1 265 5 207 9 194 21 322 34 903 84 940
Minimum 152 628 1 111 2 586 4 252 10 448

10 bar g
Maximum 2 261 9 303 16 419 38 049 62 227 151 156
Minimum 61 253 448 1 045 1 721 4 247

1.4 bar g
Maximum 1 098 4 522 7 985 18 520 30 320 73 805
Minimum 147 606 1 072 2 496 4 103 10 082

R10 5 bar g
Maximum 2 615 10 755 18 979 43 967 71 883 174 497
Minimum 263 1 087 1 921 4 466 7 335 17 975

10 bar g
Maximum 4 672 19 197 33 862 78 386 128 050 310 382
Typical Imperial flowrates are on pages 9 and 10
TI-P198-04 Page 7 of 13
CMGT Issue 4
Flowmetering
Typical Metric flowrates

Air (nm3 /h) at 20 °C
Nominal pipe size
Rotor Pressure
80 mm 150 mm 200 mm 300 mm 400 mm 600 mm
Minimum 12 49 87 204 337 838

1.4 bar g
Maximum 154 639 1 130 2 628 4 320 10 607
Minimum 74 305 540 1 259 2 072 5 107

R40 5 bar g
Maximum 946 3 898 6 884 15 969 26 152 63 694
Minimum 137 567 1 002 2 332 3 835 9 423

10 bar g
Maximum 1 751 7 205 12 718 29 476 48 216 117 169
Minimum 14 56 100 234 386 960

1.4 bar g
Maximum 226 934 1 651 3 839 6 306 15 455
3.7 Minimum 84 350 619 1 441 2 373 5 844

R30 5 bar g
8 Maximum 1 382 5 690 10 046 23 290 38 115 92 698
Minimum 157 649 1 148 2 671 4 390 10 779

10 bar g
Maximum 2 556 10 511 18 548 42 965 70 237 170 473
Minimum 24 100 178 415 684 1 696

1.4 bar g
Maximum 365 1 505 2 660 6 179 10 139 24 794
Minimum 150 618 1 094 2 544 4 182 10 271

R20 5 bar g
Maximum 2 224 9 149 16 145 37 407 61 166 148 520
Minimum 278 1 146 2 026 4 709 7 731 18 929

10 bar g
Maximum 4 110 16 888 29 789 68 956 112 643 273 032
Minimum 42 174 308 718 1 184 2 927

1.4 bar g
Maximum 756 3 115 5 502 12 768 20 919 50 995
Minimum 259 1 069 1 890 4 393 7 214 17 668

R10 5 bar g
Maximum 4 595 18 874 33 290 77 048 125 842 304 938
Minimum 480 1 980 3 499 8 125 13 323 32 541

10 bar g
Maximum 8 481 34 799 61 349 141 871 231 535 560 318
Page 8 of 13 TI-P198-04
CMGT Issue 4
Flowmetering
Typical Imperial flowrates
Saturated steam (lb/h)
Nominal pipe size
Rotor Pressure
3" 6" 8" 12" 16" 24"
Minimum 22 91 162 378 625 1 555

5 psi g
Maximum 287 1 187 2 098 4 883 8 029 19 727
Minimum 119 496 878 2 046 3 371 8 328

R40 100 psi g
Maximum 1 540 6 350 11 216 26 034 42 668 104 092
Minimum 220 913 1 615 3 761 6 191 15 249

200 psi g
Maximum 2 827 11 643 20 558 47 681 78 064 190 027
Minimum 25 105 186 434 717 1 782

5 psi g
Maximum 420 1 735 3 068 7 135 11 721 28 745
Minimum 137 568 1 006 2 344 3 861 9 530 3.7

R30 100 psi g
Maximum 2 251 9 272 16 373 37 984 62 207 151 526
9
Minimum 253 1 046 1 850 4 308 7 088 17 446
200 psi g
Maximum 4 129 16 994 29 996 69 532 113 761 276 542
Minimum 45 186 330 770 1 270 3 150

5 psi g
Maximum 677 2 797 4 943 11 485 18 849 46 119
Minimum 243 1 005 1 778 4 140 6 811 16 762

R20 100 psi g
Maximum 3 623 14 915 26 328 61 035 99 870 242 834
Minimum 447 1 848 3 268 7 601 12 492 30 657

200 psi g
Maximum 6 643 27 317 48 203 111 658 182 535 443 035
Minimum 78 323 572 1 334 2 199 5 440

5 psi g
Maximum 1 405 5 790 10 227 23 736 38 897 94 870
Minimum 421 1 739 3 075 7 153 11 755 28 849

R10 100 psi g
Maximum 7 490 30 791 54 325 125 807 205 605 498 759
Minimum 774 3 195 5 647 13 123 21 541 52 728

200 psi g
Maximum 13 719 56 341 99 362 229 926 375 467 909 528
TI-P198-04 Page 9 of 13
CMGT Issue 4
Flowmetering
Typical Imperial flowrates

Air (SCFM) at 70 °F
Nominal pipe size
Rotor Pressure
3" 6" 8" 12" 16" 24"
Minimum 7 31 55 129 213 529

5 psi g
Maximum 98 404 714 1 660 2 729 6 702
Minimum 62 255 451 1 051 1 730 4 257

R40 100 psi g
Maximum 790 3 252 5 741 13 313 21 791 53 019
Minimum 117 484 857 1 992 3 273 8 031

200 psi g
Maximum 1 494 6 146 10 846 25 128 41 083 99 739
Minimum 9 36 63 148 244 606

5 psi g
Maximum 143 590 1 043 2 426 3 984 9 765
3.7 Minimum 71 292 517 1 204 1 980 4 871

R30 100 psi g
10 Maximum 1 153 4 746 8 376 19 412 31 753 77 152
Minimum 134 555 981 2 281 3 747 9 186

200 psi g
Maximum 2 181 8 964 15 814 36 617 59 832 145 094
Minimum 15 63 112 262 432 1 071

5 psi g
Maximum 230 951 1 680 3 904 6 406 15 665
Minimum 125 517 913 2 124 3 489 8 557

R20 100 psi g
Maximum 1 855 7 628 13 458 31 168 50 942 123 591
Minimum 237 979 1 730 4 020 6 595 16 126

200 psi g
Maximum 3 506 14 397 25 389 58 747 95 927 232 348
Minimum 26 110 195 454 748 1 849

5 psi g
Maximum 478 1 968 3 476 8 067 13 217 32 219
Minimum 216 893 1 578 3 666 6 016 14 715

R10 100 psi g
Maximum 3 831 15 728 27 734 64 166 104 762 253 698
Minimum 410 1 691 2 987 6 933 11 362 27 714

200 psi g
Maximum 7 230 29 650 52 259 120 804 197 092 476 732
Typical Imperial flowrates are on pages 7 and 8
Page 10 of 13 TI-P198-04
CMGT Issue 4
Flowmetering
Water flowrates m3 /hr GPM
Size
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
80 mm 3" 2.62 157.0 12 691
150 mm 6" 12.30 614.0 54 2 701
Nominal 200 mm 8" 24.80 1 062.0 109 4 678

pipe size 300 mm 12" 56.00 2 402.0 247 10 575
400 mm 16" 87.60 3 753.0 386 16 524
600 mm 24" 199.00 8 538.0 877 37 590
Sizing Straight run piping requirements Upstream Downstream

considerations
One 90° elbow before the flowmeter 10 D 5D
Two 90° elbows before the flowmeter 15 D 5D

D = Internal diameter
Piping Two 90° elbows out of plane before the flowmeter 30 D 5D
of the pipe -
If there is not a conditions
Reduction before the flowmeter 10 D 5D
sufficient straight run
of pipe, a flow rectifier Expansion before the flowmeter 20 D 5D
3.7
may be used to reduce
the above diameter Partially open valve 30 D 5D 11
measurements.
Consult your local Maximum 9 metres/second (30 feet/second)
Liquid
Spirax Sarco Minimum 0.15 metres/second (0.5 feet/second)
representative or the Velocity
factory for your specific range Maximum 13 to 62 metres/second (43 to 205 feet/second) depending on rotor pitch
Gas or
application. steam Minimum 1 to 3.7 metres/second (3.5 to 12 feet/second) depending on rotor pitch
Other installation Mounting position: The RIM20 may be installed in vertical, horizontal, or angled pipe sections. The
flowmeter is attached perpendicular to the axis of the pipe and should not be mounted 'upside-down'
considerations (with its top section hanging below the pipe mount). For liquid service, the fluid must completely fill
the pipe.
Site selection: The flow measurement location should be selected to minimize turbulence and swirl.
The extent of these flow disturbances depends upon the piping configuration. Valves, elbows, pumps,
and other piping components may add disturbances to the flow.
Hot-tap compatibility: With the removable or permanent retractor assembly the RIM20 is ‘hot-
tappable’ and can be installed and removed without shutting down the process. An isolation valve with
a pipe mounting kit is used to isolate the flowmeter from the process.
Accessories
Removable retractor Removable retractor
Removable options Extended length removable retractor – For use with extended length probes
retractor
For models without a How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco RIM20 - Removable retractor.
permanent retractor,
one removable
Rotor assembly, liquid, 40° pitch L40
retractor must be used
if the process pressure Rotor assembly, steam/gas, 10° pitch R10
is >3.4 bar g (50 psi g).
Rotor assembly, steam/gas, 15° pitch R15
Replacement
Rotor spares Rotor assembly, steam/gas, 20° pitch R20
rotors
How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco RIM20 - L40 – Rotor Assembly.
TI-P198-04 Page 11 of 13
CMGT Issue 4
Flowmetering
Suffix Grey =
Category Description
code Standard
Flowmeter Insertion multivariable mass turbine flowmeter RIM20 RIM20

Volumetric flowmeter for liquid V
Velocity and temperature sensors VT
Velocity, temperature and pressure sensors VTP
Velocity, temperature and external 4 - 20 mA pressure input VTEP
Velocity, external RTD temperature input, external 4 - 20 mA pressure input VETEP

Electronics V
Energy output options VTEM
Energy options with pressure sensor VTPEM
Energy options, velocity, temperature and external 4 - 20 mA pressure input VTEPEM
Energy options, velocity, external RTD temperature input, external 4 - 20 mA pressure

VETEPEM
input
Standard length S
3.7 Compact length - Only available for compression fitting connections CNPT, C150, C300,
Probe length C S
12
C600, C16, C40 and C63
Extended length E
Local mount NEMA 4X, IP66 Enclosure L
Remote electronics NEMA 4X, IP66 25' cable with display -

R25
(not suitable for ATEX/IECEx)
25' (7.6 m) armored cable with glands 'V' flowmeter only A25
Electronics
enclosure 25' (7.6 m) armored cable with glands 'VT', 'VTP' flowmeter only A25P L
mounting
Remote electronics NEMA 4X, IP66 50' cable with display -
R50
(not suitable for ATEX/IECEx)
50' (15.2 m) armored cable with glands 'V' flowmeter only A50
50' (15.2 m) armored cable with glands 'VT', 'VTP' flowmeter only A50P
Display Digital display and programming buttons D D

12 - 36 Vdc, 25 mA, 1 W maximum required on loop powered flowmeters, 1HL only DL
Power supply 12 - 36 Vdc, 300 mA, 9 W maximum - use with 1H, 1M, 1B, 3H, 3M, 3B DH DL
100 - 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz line power, 5 W maximum - use with 1H, 1M, 1B, 3H, 3M, 3B AC
Loop powered option - one analogue output (4 - 20 mA), one alarm, one pulse, HART ®,
1HL
DL input power only
One analogue output (4 - 20 mA), one alarm, one pulse, HART ® communication protocol,
1H
DH or AC option only
One analogue output (4 - 20 mA), one alarm, one pulse, MODBUS communication
1M
protocol, DH or AC option only
Output signal
Inclusive of the One analogue output (4 - 20 mA), one alarm, one pulse, BACnet communication protocol,
scaled frequency DH or AC option only
1B 1HL
output
Three analogue outputs (4 - 20 mA), three alarms, one pulse, HART ® ('VT', 'VTP' only),
3H
Three analogue outputs (4 - 20 mA), three alarms, one pulse, MODBUS ('VT', 'VTP'
3M
only), DH or AC option only
Three analogue outputs (4 - 20 mA), three alarms, one pulse, BACnet ('VT', 'VTP' only),
3B
Standard temperature Process temperature

Further temperature limitations S
Process -55 °C to 238 °C -67 °F to 460 °F
temperature
are applicable where ATEX is S
High temperature Process temperature required. H
-267 °C to 454 °C -448 °F to 850 °F
Page 12 of 13 TI-P198-04
CMGT Issue 4
Flowmetering
No pressure sensor P0

Pressure sensor P0
Maximum 34 bar a 500 psi a Proof 69 bar a 1 000 psi a P4
Maximum 100 bar a 1 500 psi a Proof 175 bar a 2 500 psi a P5
Packing gland, 2" NPT, retractor (use with

Compression, 2" NPT CNPT PNPTR-E
E probe)
Compression, 2" ASME 150 Packing gland, 2" ASME 150 flange,
C150 P150R
flange retractor
Compression, DN50 PN16 Packing gland, 2" ASME 150 flange,

C16 P150R-E
flange retractor (E probe)
Compression, 2" ASME 300 Packing gland, DN50 PN16 flange,

C300 P16R
flange retractor
Compression, DN50 PN40 Packing gland, DN50 PN16 flange,

3.7
C40 P16R-E
flange retractor (E probe)
Compression, 2" ASME 600 Packing gland, 2" ASME 300 flange,
flange
C600
retractor
P300R
13
Compression, DN50 PN63 Packing gland, 2" ASME 300 flange,
Process C63 P300R-E
flange retractor (E probe) PNPTR
connections
Packing gland, DN50 PN40 flange,
Packing gland*, 2" NPT PNPT P40R
retractor
Packing gland*, 2" ASME Packing gland, DN50 PN40 flange,

P150 P40R-E
150 flange retractor (E probe)
Packing gland*, DN50 PN16 Packing gland, 2" ASME 600 flange,
P16 P600R
flange retractor
Packing gland*, 2" ASME Packing gland, 2" ASME 600 flange,
P300 P600R-E
300 flange retractor (E probe)
Packing gland*, DN50 PN40 Packing gland, DN50 PN63 flange,

P40 P63R
flange retractor
Packing gland, 2" NPT, Packing gland, DN50 PN63 flange,

PNPTR P63R-E
retractor retractor (E probe)
* One removable retractor must be ordered if the process pressure is >3.4 bar g (50 psi g).
FM/FMC and CE marked S

Approvals S
ATEX/IECEx/FM/FMC and CE marked A
Gas or Steam Vmin = 1.07 m/s (3.5 ft/sec) Vmax = 13.1 m/s (43 ft/sec) 40° pitch R40
Gas or Steam Vmin = 1.2 m/s (4.0 ft/sec) Vmax = 19.0 m/s (62.5 ft/sec) 30° pitch R30
Rotor options Gas or Steam Vmin = 2.1 m/s (7.0 ft/sec) Vmax = 30.5 m/s (100 ft/sec) 20° pitch R20 R40
Gas or Steam Vmin = 2.6 m/s (8.5 ft/sec) Vmax = 41.0 m/s (134.6 ft/sec) 15° pitch R15
Liquid Vmin = 0.3 m/s (1.0 ft/sec) Vmax = 9.1 m/s (30 ft/sec) 40° pitch L40
Selection example: RIM20 - V - S - L - D - DL - 1HL - S - P0 - PNPTR - S - R40
How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco RIM20 - V - S - L - D - DL -1HL - S - P0 - PNPTR - S -R40 rotor insertion flowmeter.
TI-P198-04 Page 13 of 13
CMGT Issue 4
Flowmetering
3.7
14
Flowmetering
Electromagnetic flowmeters
TI-P309-01
EMM Issue 3
ELM
ElectroMagnetic Inductive Flowmeter
Description
An electrically conductive medium induces a voltage while flowing through
an arranged magnetic field in accordance to the Faraday's induction law.
A magnetic inductive flowmeter consits of an isolated lining tube, flown
through by a conductive liquid, a magnetic field coil and two electrodes. The
electrode measuring-circuit voltage is proportional to the flow velocity and
therefore to the volume flow.
The electrode voltage is detected by a transmitter and converted into standard
electrical signals as 4-20 mA or pulses.
3.8
The magnetic-inductive flow sensor EP is used to measure the volume flow 1
of liquids, slurries, pastes and other electrically conductive media without
any pressure drop.
Pressure, temperature, density and viscosity do not affect the volume
measurements.
Portions of solid particles and small gas bubbles should be avoided.

The ELM is available in wafer design, suitable for fitting between the following
flanges:
DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50 EN 1092-1 PN40
DN65, DN80, DN100, DN150 and DN200 EN 1092-1 PN16
1", 1¼", 1½" and 2" ASME B16.5 Class 300
2½", 3", 4" 6" and 8" ASME B16.5 Class 150

DN25 - DN50 PN40 Flowmeter body Steel coated / painted
Maximum process pressure
DN65 - DN200 PN16
Lining PTFE
Maximum process temperature 150 °C
Electrodes Hastelloy C4
Minimum process temperature -20 °C
Maximum electronics ambient temperature 60 °C Electronics housing Die cast aluminium, painted
Technical data
IP rating IP67 (EN60529)
Power supply 24 Vdc 10 W
1 x 0 / 4 - 20 mA active with galvanic isolation
Outputs
1 x Pulse / state passive, with galvanic isolation. 24 V, 60 mA
Communication HART ® (optional)
Diagnosis functions Empty pipe detection, coil current monitoring
Performance
Uncertainty ±0.3% of measured value ±0.01% (Q at 10 m / s) under reference conditions
Repeatability ±0.15% of measured value ±0.005% (Q at 10 m / s) under reference conditions
>= 5 µS / cm
Conductivity
>= 20 µS / cm with demineralized water
Page 1 of 3
Flowmetering
3 Electromagnetic flowmeters
Dimensions / weights (approximate in mm and kg)
205 115
108
D 158
L
DN M20 x 1.5
Dimensions
Size Weight *
D A L
DN25 1" 72 158 104 2
3.8 DN32 1¼" 82 168 124 2

PN40 and ASME 300
2 DN40 1½" 92 179 124 2
DN50 2" 107 192 124 3
DN65 2½" 127 212 124 3
DN80 3" 142 227 124 4
PN16 and ASME 150 DN100 4" 162 247 124 4
DN150 6" 218 303 154 8
DN200 8" 274 359 219 10
* Please note: 2.4 kg must be added to account for the transmitter.
Sizing information
Litres / sec m3 / h
Size
Q min Q max Q min Q max
DN25 1" 0.24 4.89 0.88 17.6
DN32 1¼" 0.40 8.03 1.45 28.9
DN40 1½" 0.54 10.75 1.94 38.7
DN50 2" 0.87 17.33 3.12 62.4
DN65 2½" 1.56 31.11 5.61 112.00
DN80 3" 2.27 45.28 8.17 163.00
DN100 4" 4.00 80.00 14.42 288.00
DN150 6" 9.00 186.00 33.96 671.00
DN200 8" 17.00 330.00 59.99 1188.00
Please note that Min/Max figures are typical based on reference flow conditions. Actual min/max
values will be listed on product label and will be confirmed at time of order.
EMM Issue 3
ELM ElectroMagnetic Inductive Flowmeter
Flowmetering
Electromagnetic flowmeters 3
How to order
Selection:
Category Description Suffix code Grey = Standard
Product ELM ELM
Lining material PTFE -20 °C to 150 °C (-4 °F to 302 °F) P P
DN25 1" 0309
DN32 1¼" 0313

EN 1092-1 PN40 ASME Class 300
DN40 1½" 0317
DN50 2" 0321
Size DN65 2½" 0325 0325
DN80 3" 0330
DN100 EN 1092-1 PN16 4" ASME Class 150 0335
DN150 6" 0345

3.8
DN200 8" 0350
3
Flange material Wafer type design 0 0
Electrode material Hastelloy C-4 including grounding electrode HH HH
Transmitter mounting Integrated transmitter 1 1
Without 0
Approval certification 0
Inspection / material certificate 3.1 DIN / EN 10204: 2004 B
Mounting Integrated B B
Display and control unit Integrated 1 1
Power supply 24 Vdc (±15%) 4 4
Current output 1: 0(4) - 20 mA
Pulse output: Passive Um = 24 Vdc F
State output: Passive Um = 24 Vdc

Output F
Current output 1: 4 - 20 mA with HART® protocol
Pulse output: Passive Um = 24 Vdc G
State output: Passive Um = 24 Vdc
Branding Spirax Sarco 0BX 0BX
Selection example: ELM - P - 0325 - 0 HH 1 - 0 - B 1 4 - F - 0BX

1 off Spirax Sarco ELM-P-0325-0HH1-0-B14-F-0BX electromagnetic inductive flowmeter for installation between EN 1092 PN16 flanges.
EMM Issue 3
ELM ElectroMagnetic Inductive Flowmeter
Flowmetering
3 Electromagnetic flowmeters
3.8
4
C ontrol systems 4
Section 4
4.1 Control valves
4.2 Pneumatic actuators
4.3 Electric actuators
4.4 Positioners and controllers

4
4.5 Self-acting controls
4.6 Pressure reducing/surplussing valves
4.7 Safety valves
4.8 Desuperheaters
4.9 Magnetic level indicators

44 Control systems
Control systems
Control valves
TI-S24-60
CTLS Issue 7
Spira-trol TM Two-port Control Valves

EN Standard JE, JF and JL DN15 to DN200 and
ASME Standard JEA, JFA and JLA ½" to 8"
Description
Spira-trol TM is a range of two-port single seat globe valves with
cage retained seats conforming to EN and ASME standard.
These valves are available in three body materials in sizes
ranging from DN15 to DN200 (½" to 8"). When used in conjunction
with a pneumatic or electric linear actuator they provide
characterized modulating or on/off control.
Spira-trolTM valve characteristic - options:

Equal percentage (E) - Suitable for most modulating
JE process control applications providing good control at
all flowrates.
4.1
JF Fast opening (F) - For on / off applications only.
Linear (L) - Primarily for liquid flow control where the

1
JL
differential pressures across the valve is constant.
Important note: Throughout this document, reference has been

made to the standard JE control valve. With the exception of
trim type, the JE, JF and JL control valves are identical.
Spira-trol TM valve options:

PTFE chevron seals Standard
Stem sealing
Graphite packing High temperature applications
431 stainless steel - standard

Metal-to-metal
316L stainless steel
Seating Up to 200 °C - PTFE for Class VI shut-off

Soft seating
Up to 250 °C - PEEK for Class VI shut-off
Hard facing 316L stainless steel with Stellite 6 facing -for more arduous applications
Standard bonnet
Bonnet type
Extended bonnet for large pipe lagging or hot/cold applications
Standard trim
Trim
Low noise and anti-cavitation trim
Spira-trolTM valves are compatible with the following actuators and positioners:
Electric AEL5 and AEL6
Pneumatic PN9000, TN2000 and PN1000
Refer to relevant Technical Information sheet for further details
Page 1 of 15
44 Control systems
Control valves
Standards
Designed in accordance with EN 60534. This product fully complies with the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Equipment
Directive (PED) and carries the mark when so required.
Certification
Technical data Typical flow characteristic curves

Plug design Parabolic 100
Class IV
Metal-to-metal Fast opening Linear
Class V
Leakage
Balanced Class IV
Soft seal
Flow %
Unbalanced Class VI
50
Rangeability 50:1 Equal percentage
DN15 to DN50 20 mm
Travel DN65 to DN100 30 mm
4.1 DN125 to DN200 70 mm

0
0 50 100
2 Valve opening %

EN JE, JF and JL DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80, DN100, DN125, DN150 and DN200
Standard
ASME JEA, JFA and JLA ½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½", 2", 2½", 3", 4", 5", 6" and 8"
EN Standard EN 1092 PN63 and PN100

Flanged
ASME Standard ASME B 16.5 Class 600, B22-20 JIS/KS 30 and JIS/KS 40
Butt-weld ASME B 16.25 Schedule 40 and Schedule 80
Socket weld ASME B 16.11
Raised face
Facing Standard
Other facing is available on request.
Flanged EN Standard EN 558 Series 2.

face-to-face ASME Standard ISA-S75-03.
CTLS Issue 7
Spira-trol TM Two-port Control Valves EN Standard JE, JF and JL DN15 to DN200 and ASME Standard JEA, JFA and JLA ½" to 8"
Control systems
Control valves 4
Materials
2c
Standard with PTFE packing

4.1
3
Extended bonnet
Type No. Part Material
JE43 Carbon steel EN 10213 1.0619+N
JEA43 Carbon steel ASTM A216 WCB
JE63 Stainless steel EN 10213 1.4408

1 Body
JEA63 Stainless steel ASTM A351 CF8M
JE83 Alloy steel EN 10213 1.7357
JEA83 Alloy steel ASTM A217 WC6
JE43 Carbon steel EN 10213 1.0619+N

JE
and JEA43 Carbon steel ASTM A216 WCB
JEA JE63 Stainless steel EN 10213 1.4408
2 Cover
JEA63 Stainless steel ASTM A351 CF8M
JE83 Alloy steel EN 10213 1.7357
JEA83 Alloy steel ASTM A217 WC6
JE43 and JEA43 Carbon steel A105
2c Extended bonnet JE63 and JEA63 Stainless steel A316L
JE83 and JEA83 Stainless steel A316L
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
Control valves
Materials
3 Stem lock-nut Stainless steel AISI 316
4 Bonnet gasket Graphite/stainless steel
5 Seat retainer Stainless steel with the exception of the full peek option
Seating version T Stainless steel AISI 431 S29
Seating versions P and K PEEK

6 Valve seat ring
Seating version W Stainless Steel 316L + Stellite 6
All others Stainless steel 316L
7 Seat gasket Graphite/stainless steel
Stainless steel with the exception of the Nitronic bush

Body stainless steel
8 Valve plug and stem option
All others Stainless steel 431
DN15 - DN100 (½" - 4") PTFE

9* Lower stem guide
DN125 - DN200 (5" - 8") Stellite 6
10 Lower stem wiper DN15 - DN100 (½" - 4") PTFE
11 Packing guard washer Stainless steel AISI 316L

4.1 All versions
12 Spring Stainless steel BS 2056 316 S42
using
4 PTFE seals 13 * Packing spacer Stainless steel AISI 316
14 * Chevron packing set PTFE
15 Outer 'O' ring Viton
16 Inner 'O' ring Viton
17 * Gland flange Stainless steel AISI 304
18 * Gland follower Stainless steel
19 Gland nut Stainless steel A2-70
20 Gland stud Stainless steel
21 Actuator clamp nut Plated carbon steel
JE43 and JEA43 Carbon steel Grade 2H
22 Bonnet nut JE63 and JEA63 Stainless steel Grade 8M
JE83 and JEA83 Alloy steel Grade 7
JE43 and JEA43 Carbon steel Grade B7
23 Bonnet stud JE63 and JEA63 Stainless steel Grade B8M2
JE83 and JEA83 Alloy steel Grade B16
* Graphite packing * Graphite packing
Type No. Part Material Type No. Part Material
9 Lower stem guide Stellite 6 15

Not used
13 Packing spacer Stainless steel
16
High 14 Graphoil packing Graphite ring High
temperature temperature Extension gasket (only
packing 18 Gland follower Stainless steel packing 24 Graphite
used with part 2c)
11
Not used Extension bolting (only Stainless
25
12 used with part 2c) steel
CTLS Issue 7
Control systems
Control valves 4
3 Optional
19 20 graphite
8 packing
17
16
18
18
21
23
15
14 22
14
13
12
13
4
11
10
9
5
3
20
19 4.1
17
21
5
7 6 18
Standard with PTFE packing

14
24
25
23
22
13
8
4
5
9
* PTFE stem sealing
PTFE stem sealing for vacuum service
7 6
Extended bonnet
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
Control valves
Pressure/temperature limits - JE43 and JEA43
Temperature °C
PN63
PN100 Steam
saturation
curve
-10
Pressure bar g
Pressure psi g
ASME 600
Temperature °C
Temperature °F
JIS/KS 30
JIS/KS 40
Steam
Butt-weld saturation
Socket weld curve

Pressure bar g
4.1
6 The product must not be used in this region.
High temperature packing required for use on this region.
Extended cover is required for use in this region
Notes: 1. Where the process fluid temperature is sub-zero and the ambient temperature is below +5 °C (+41 °F), the external
moving parts of the valve and actuator must be heat traced to maintain normal operation.
A - D Flanged JIS/KS 30
A - E Flanged JIS/KS 40
A - F Flanged ASME 600, Butt-weld and Socket weld
CTLS Issue 7
Control systems
Control valves 4
Body design conditions PN100/ASME Class 600
PN63 JE43 63 bar g @ 50 °C

EN
PN100 JE43 100 bar g @ 50 °C
102.1 bar g @ 38 °C(1480 psi g @ 100
and ASME 600, Butt-weld and Socket weld JEA43
°F)
JIS/KS 30 JEA43 51 bar g @ 120 °C
JIS/KS 40 JEA43 68 bar g @ 120 °C
PTFE soft seat (G) 7 bar
Maximum differential pressure design PEEK soft seat (K) 7 bar
Full PEEK seat (P) 19 bar
EN JE43 400 °C
ASME 600, Butt-weld and Socket weld JEA43 425 °C (797 °F)
TMA Maximum allowable temperature
JIS/KS 30 JEA43 425 °C
Minimum allowable temperature -29 °C (-20 °F)
Standard packing PTFE chevron (Stem sealing - Options P and N) 250 °C 4.1
High temperature packing (Stem sealing - Option H) 425 °C 7
Maximum operating temperature Extended bonnet (E) with PTFE chevron 250 °C
(For clarification of the options
TMO Extended bonnet (E) with graphite packing 425 °C
G, H, K and P see the Spira-trolTM
selection guide on page 9) PTFE soft seat (Seating - Option G) 200 °C
PEEK soft seat (Seating - Options K and P) 250 °C
Minimum operating temperature Note: For lower operating temperatures consult Spirax Sarco. -29 °C (-20 °F)
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 156 bar g (2 262 psi g)
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
Control valves
Pressure/temperature limits - JE63 and JEA63
Temperature °C
PN63
PN100 Steam
saturation
curve
-10
Pressure bar g
Temperature °C
JIS/KS 30
JIS/KS 40 Steam
saturation
curve
Pressure bar g
4.1 Pressure psi g
8
Temperature °C
Temperature °F
ASME 600
Butt-weld Steam
Socket weld saturation
curve

Pressure bar g
Notes: 1. Where the process fluid temperature is sub-zero and the ambient temperature is below +5 °C (+41 °F), the external
moving parts of the valve and actuator must be heat traced to maintain normal operation.
CTLS Issue 7
Control systems
Control valves 4
PN63 JE63 63 bar g @ 100 °C

EN
PN100 JE63 100 bar g @ 100 °C
99.3 bar g @ 38 °C (1440 psi g @ 100
and ASME 600, Butt-weld and Socket weld JEA63
°F)
JIS/KS 30 JEA63 51 bar g @ 120 °C
JIS/KS 40 JEA63 68 bar g @ 120 °C
EN JE63 580 °C
ASME 600, Butt-weld and Socket weld JEA63 538 °C (1 000 °F)
Maximum operating temperature
(For clarification of the options Extended bonnet (E) with PTFE chevron 250 °C
TMO
G, H, K and P see the Spira-trol Extended bonnet (E) with graphite packing
TM
580 °C
selection guide on page 9)
PTFE soft seat (Seating - Option G) 200 °C
Minimum operating temperature Note: For lower operating temperatures consult SpiraxSarco. -29 °C (-20 °F)
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
Control valves
Pressure/temperature limits - JE83/JEA83
A B C
Temperature °C
PN63
PN100 Steam
saturation
curve
B C
-10
Pressure bar g
E
* A * JIS/KS 40 only
D
Temperature °C
JIS/KS 30
JIS/KS 40 Steam
saturation
curve DE
Pressure bar g
4.1 Pressure psi g
10 A F
Temperature °C
Temperature °F
ASME 600
Butt-weld Steam
Socket weld saturation
curve
F
Pressure bar g
Notes: 1. Where the process fluid temperature is sub-zero and the ambient temperature is below +5 °C (+41 °F), the external moving
parts of the valve and actuator must be heat traced to maintain normal operation.
Page 10 of 15 TI-S24-60
CTLS Issue 7
Control systems
Control valves 4
PN63 JE83 63 bar g @ 300 °C

EN
PN100 JE83 100 bar g @ 300 °C
and ASME 600, Butt-weld and Socket weldJEA83 103.4 bar g @ 38 °C (1499 psi g @ 100 °F)
JIS/KS 30 JEA83 51 bar g @ 120 °C
JIS/KS 40 JEA83 68 bar g @ 120 °C
EN JE83 490 °C
ASME 600, Butt-weld and Socket

JEA83 538 °C (1 000 °F)
TMA Maximum allowable temperature weld
Maximum operating temperature Extended bonnet (E) with PTFE
(For clarification of the options 250 °C
TMO chevron
G, H, K and P see the Spira-trolTM
selection guide on page 9) Extended bonnet (E) with graphite packing 538 °C
PTFE soft seat (Seating - Option G) 200 °C
Minimum operating temperature Note: For lower operating temperatures consult SpiraxSarco. -29 °C (-20 °F)
TI-S24-60 Page 11 of 15
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
Control valves
Kv values
Valve size DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100 DN125 DN150 DN200
High capacity Equal % 4.9 7.2 11.0 17.5 31.0 46.0 90 115 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Equal % 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25.0 36.0 63.0 100 160 245 370 580
Full port Linear 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25.0 36.0 63.0 100 160 260 390 640
Fast opening 4.0 6.3 10.0 18.0 28.0 50.0 85.0 117 180 260 390 640
Equal % 2.5 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25.0 36.0 63 100 200 287 370
Reduced trim 1
Linear 2.5 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25.0 36.0 63 100 200 287 550
Standard Equal % 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25.0 36 63 100 154 232
Reduced trim 2
trim Linear 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25.0 36 63 100 154 232
Equal % 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25 36 63 103 163
Reduced trim 3
Linear 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25 36 63 103 163
Equal % 1.0 1.6 4.0 6.3 16
Reduced trim 4
Linear 1.0 1.6 4.0 6.3 16
Equal % 1.0 4.0
Reduced trim 5
Linear 1.0 4.0
0.5 0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2 0.2
4.1 Microflute 0.1 0.1 0.1
12 0.07 0.07 0.07

0.01 0.01 0.01
Note: See TI-S24-59 for low noise and anti-cavitation trims. Special Kv values are available on request.
C v (US) values
Valve size DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100 DN125 DN150 DN200
High capacity Equal % 5.7 8.3 12.7 20.2 36.0 53.0 104.0 133.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A
Equal % 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 73.0 116.0 185.0 283 433 679
Full port Linear 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 73.0 116.0 185.0 300 456 749
Fast opening 4.6 7.3 12.0 21.0 32.0 58.0 98.0 135.0 208.0 300 456 749
Equal % 2.9 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 73.0 116.0 231 336 433
Reduced trim 1
Linear 2.9 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 73.0 116.0 231 336 635
Standard Equal % 1.8 2.9 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 73.0 120 154 271
Reduced trim 2
trim Linear 1.8 2.9 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 73.0 120 154 271
Equal % 1.2 1.8 2.9 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 75 154 191
Reduced trim 3
Linear 1.2 1.8 2.9 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 75 154 191
Equal % 1.2 1.8 4.6 7.3 18.0
Reduced trim 4
Linear 1.2 1.8 4.6 7.3 18.0
Equal % 1.2 4.6
Reduced trim 5
Linear 1.2 4.6
0.58 0.58 0.6
0.23 0.23 0.23
Microflute 0.12 0.12 0.12
0.081 0.081 0.081
0.012 0.012 0.012
Note: See TI-S24-59 for low noise and anti-cavitation trims. Special C v values are available on request.
Page 12 of 15 TI-S24-60
CTLS Issue 7
Control systems
Control valves 4
Dimensions/weights (approximate) in mm and kg D
C B
Extended
Standard
bonnet
A A
4.1
Dimensions Weights 13
A B C D
ASME 600 EN 1092 Standard Extended bonnet ASME 600 PN100 Butt-weld
Size JIS/KS 30 PN63
JIS/KS 40 PN100 Carbon Stainless
Socket weld
Butt-weld steel steel
Socket weld
Alloy
steel
DN15 203 210 172 261 321 64 M8 9.5 10 6
DN20 206 230 172 261 321 64 M8 10.2 12 6
DN25 210 230 172 261 321 64 M8 10.8 13 6
DN32 251 260 201 278 338 69 M8 16.5 19 11
DN40 251 260 201 278 338 69 M8 18.5 22 11
DN50 286 300 196 278 338 69 M8 22.0 27 13
DN65 311 340 282 470 587 81 M12 46.5 51 31
DN80 337 380 282 470 587 81 M12 51.5 58 35
DN100 394 430 297 513 605 81 M12 83.0 79 46
DN125 457 500 382 663 783 125 M30 133.0 124 74
DN150 508 550 400 681 801 125 M30 176.0 168 108
DN200 610 650 466 747 867 125 M30 300.0 306 197
TI-S24-60 Page 13 of 15
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
Control valves
Spare parts
Spira-trolTM A
The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn
in a grey line are not supplied as spares.
Note: When placing an order for spare parts please specify

clearly the full product description as found on the label of the
valve body, as this will ensure that the correct spare parts are
supplied.
Available spares – JE and JEA

Actuator clamping nut A C2
Gasket set B, G C C1
PTFE packing C
Graphite seal set C2
Equal percentage trim

D, E
Fast opening trim

Plug stem and seat kit D1, E
Linear trim
D2, E
4.1 (No gaskets supplied) D1 D2
Soft seat arrangement H

14
How to order spares
Always order spares by using the description given in the column
headed 'Available spares', and state the size and type of valve
including the full product description of the product.
Example: 1 - Plug stem and seat kit for a Spirax Sarco DN32
Spira-trol TM JE43PTSUSS.2 Kv 16 two-port control valve having
flanged PN63 connections.
How to fit spares
Full fitting instructions are given in the Installation and
Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare. B
D Soft seat
arrangement
G
H
* PTFE stem sealing
PTFE stem sealing for vacuum service
Page 14 of 15 TI-S24-60
CTLS Issue 7
Control systems
Control valves 4
Spira-trolTM selection guide:
DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50, DN65*, DN80, DN100, DN125, DN150,
EN standard =
Valve size DN200 DN25
ASME standard = ½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½", 2", 2½", 3", 4", 5", 6" and 8"
Valve series J = J series 2-port control valve J
E = Equal percentage
Valve characteristic F = Fast opening E
L = Linear
Blank = EN (PN)
Flange type Blank
A = ASME
Blank = under
Flow Blank
T = over
4 = Carbon steel
8 = Alloy steel
1 = Screwed
2 = Socket weld
Connections 3
3 = Flanged
4 = Butt weld
H = Graphite 4.1
Stem sealing
N = PTFE and Nitronic bearing (Available for DN15 to DN50 size range only)
P 15
P = PTFE
V = PTFE for Vacuum
G = PTFE soft seat
K = PEEK soft seat
P = Full PEEK
Seating T
S = 316L stainless steel (Available for DN15 to DN100 size range only)
T = 431 stainless steel
W = 316L with stellite 6 facing
A1 = 1 stage anti-cavitation
P1 = 1 stage low noise trim
Type of trim S
S = Standard trim
B = Balanced
Trim balancing U
U = Unbalanced
E = Extended
Bonnet type S
S = Standard
Series 2 = .2 0.2
Kvs To be specified Kv 10
Flanged
Connection type To be specified
PN63
* Please note: The PN63 flanges for the JE43 sizes have 4 bolt holes as standard; 8 bolt holes are available on request.
Selection example:
DN32 - J E 4 3 P T S U S S .2 - Kv 16 - Flanged PN63
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco Spira-trol TM DN32 JE43PTSUSS.2 Kv 16 two-port control valve having flanged PN63 connections.
TI-S24-60 Page 15 of 15
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
Control valves
4.1
16
Control systems
Control valves
TI-S24-71
CTLS Issue 13
Spira-trolTM Two-port Control Valves

EN Standard K and L Series DN15 to DN100
Description
Spira-trolTM is a range of two-port single seat globe valves with cage retained seats conforming to EN standard. These valves are available
in four body materials in sizes ranging from DN15 to DN100. When used in conjunction with a pneumatic or electric linear actuator they
provide characterised modulating or on / off control.
Important note: Throughout this document, reference has been made to the standard KE or LE control valve. With the exception of trim
type, the KE, LE, KF, LF, KL and LL control valves are identical.
4.1
17
L Series K Series
DN15 to DN100 DN15 to DN100

Screwed Flanged
BSP PN16 PN16 PN25 PN40 JIS/KS10 JIS/KS20
Valve Series Material
DN65 and
Up to DN50 DN15-DN100
DN100 1
Cast Iron • • •
L Series Carbon Steel • •
Stainless Steel • •
SG Iron • • • •
K Series Carbon Steel • •
Stainless Steel • • •
1
For others size use PN25 body which are dimensionally identical to PN16.
Standards
Designed in accordance with EN 60534. This product fully complies with the requirements of the EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK
Pressure Equipment (Safety) Regulations and carries the mark when so required.
Certification
Page 1 of 23
44 Control systems
Control valves
KE and LE Equal percentage (E) - Suitable for most modulating process control applications providing good control at all flowrates.
KF and LF Fast opening (F) - For on / off applications only.
KL and LL Linear (L) - Primarily for liquid flow control where the differential pressures across the valve is constant.
Spira-trolTM valve options:

PTFE chevron seals (P-N) Standard
Graphite packing (H) High temperature applications
Bellows / PTFE (B) Zero emissions and thermal fluids PN25 - Up to 300 °C
Stem sealing
Zero emissions, high temperature applications and
Bellows / graphite (C) PN25 - Up to 400 °C
thermal fluids
Bellows/graphite secondary seals (D) Zero emissions and high temperature applications PN16 - Up to 300 °C

Metal-to-metal
Up to 170 °C - PTFE for Class VI shut-off for applications like compressed

air or water where there is no temperature.
Seating Soft seating
Up to 220°C - PEEK (C and P) for Class VI shut-off
4.1 Up to 250 °C - PEEK (K) for Class VI shut-off
18
316L stainless steel with Stellite TM 6 facing - for more arduous
Hard facing
applications
Standard bonnet
Bonnet type
Standard trim
Trim
Low noise and anti-cavitation trim (see TI-S24-59). Not available with Reverseable PEEK Seat (C)
Spira-trol™ is a modular valve based on 4 body sizes covering DN15-100 (DN15-25, DN32-50, DN65-80, DN100) sizes in order to reduce
the number of spare parts. The valves are available with a range of accessories including actuators, positioners, solenoid valves, limit
switches.
Please refer to respective data sheets.
For Special trims please refer to TI-S24-59

For ASME version please refer to TI-S24-72
For smart positioner please refer to TI-P343-34 and TI-P343-36
For pneumatic positioners please refer to TI-P370-14
For electro-pneumatic positioners please refer to TI-P343-43 and TI-P343-45
For large size Spira-trol™ please refer to TI-S24-73
Materials - DN15 to DN100 (½" to 4")

LE3 KE7 LE-KE4 LE-KE6
DN15-50 DN65-100 DN15-100 DN15-50 DN65-100 DN15-50 DN65-100
EN1563 : EN10273 : EN10213 :

1 Body EN1563 : ENGJS-400-18 EN10213 : 1.4408
ENGJS-400-18LT 1.0460 1.0619N
EN1563 : EN1561 : EN1563 :

2 Bonnet EN10213 : 1.0619N EN10213 : 1.4408
ENGJS-400-18 ENGJL-250 ENGJS-400-18LT
2a Bonnet extension EN10213 : 1.0619N EN10213 : 1.4408
Bonnet option
2b Bellows Stainless steel 316L
B-C-D
2c Extended bonnet EN10213 : 1.0619N EN10213 : 1.4408
CTLS Issue 13
Spira-trolTM Two-port Control Valves EN Standard K&L Series DN15 to DN100
Control systems
Control valves 4
KE valve with extended
bonnet (E) * Graphite packing
Lower and
9
upper stem Stelite 6
16
High guide
temperature 14 Grafoil packing Graphite rings
packing
10, 11, 12, 15, 17 and 19
Not used
2c Extended
bonnet (E)
KE valve with PTFE

4.1
packing
19
2a
DN15 - DN100 KE with

2b bellows seal (B) and (C)
* PTFE stem sealing
PTFE stem sealing

for vacuum service
KE valve with bellows seal (D)
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Control valves
Materials - DN15 to DN100 (½" to 4") continued
3 Stem lock-nut Stainless steel A2-70

4 Bonnet gasket Graphite and stainless steel
5 Seat retainer Duplex stainless steel ASME A994 CD4MCuN
Seat option T Stainless steel 431
Seat option S Stainless steel 316L
Seat option W Stainless steel 316L + StelliteTM 6
6 Valve seat ring
Seat option C and P PEEK
Seat option K Stainless steel 316L + PEEK
Seat option G Stainless Steel 316L + PTFE
7 Seat gasket Graphite and stainless steel
Valve plug and
8 Seat option W Stainless steel 316L + StelliteTM 6
stem
Stainless steel 316L for Stainless steel valve and Stainless steel 431 for all other
Seat option C/G/K/P
materials
Bonnet option P - B PTFE glass filled
9 Lower stem guide Bonnet option N NitronicTM 60
4.1 Bonnet option H - C StelliteTM 6
20 10 Lower stem wiper Bonnet option P - N - B PTFE

11 Packing guard washer Stainless steel 316L
12 Spring Bonnet option P - N - B Stainless steel 316L
13 Packing spacer Stainless steel 316L
Bonnet option P - N - B PTFE chevron
14 Packing set
Bonnet option H - C Graphite rings
15 Outer 'O' ring Bonnet option P - N - B VITONTM
16 Upper stem guide Bonnet option N NitronicTM 60
Bonnet option H - C StelliteTM 6
17 Inner 'O' ring Bonnet option P - N - B VITONTM
Stainless steel 316L for stainless steel valve and stainless steel 431 for all
18 Gland nut
others materials
19 Scrapper ring Bonnet option P - N - B PTFE
Stainless steel valve Nickel plated carbon steel
20 Actuator clamp nut
All others Zinc plated carbon steel
22 Bonnet extension gasket Graphite and stainless steel
23 Top plate (used on bonnet extension only) Stainless steel 316L
24 Lower spindle bearing housing Stainless steel
25 Lower spindle bearing StelliteTM 6 for stainless steel valve and stainless steel 431 for all others materials
26 Spindle lock and anti-rotation nut Stainless steel
Bolting option S Stainless steel A2-70 for stainless steel valve and carbon steel Gr.8 for all others
27 Nut
Bolting option H Stainless steel A2-70
Bolting option S Stainless steel A2-70 for stainless steel valve and carbon steel 8.8 for all others
28 Stud
Bolting option S Stainless steel A2-70
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
Control valves 4
KE valve with extended
bonnet (E) * Graphite packing
KE valve with graphite
Lower and
packing 9
16
High guide
3
packing
10, 11, 12, 15, 17 and 19
18 Not used
14
4.1
KE valve with PTFE 21
packing 3
18
19
20 8
17
15 16 14
28
14
27
13 2
12
11
10 4
9
DN15 - DN100 KE with

bellows seal (B) and (C)
1 6 7 5
22
* PTFE stem sealing
PTFE stem sealing

for vacuum service
KE valve with bellows seal (D)
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Control valves
Kv values
DN15 DN32 DN40 DN65 DN100
Valve size DN20 (¾") DN25 (1") DN50 (2") DN80 (3")
(½" ) (1¼") (1½") (2½") (4")
High capacity Equal % 4.9 7.2 11.0 17.5 31.0 46.0 90 115
Equal % 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25.0 36.0 63 100 160
Linear 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25.0 36.0 63 100 160

Full port
Fast
4.9 7.2 11.0 18.0 31.0 50.0 90 117 180
opening
Reduced Equal % 2.5 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25.0 36 63 100

trim 1 Linear 2.5 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25.0 36 63 100
Reduced Equal % 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25 36 63

Standard
trim trim 2 Linear 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 25 36 63
Reduced Equal % 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10.0 16 25 36

trim 3 Linear 1.0 1.6 2.5 4.0 6.3 10.0 16 25 36
Reduced Equal % 1.0 1.6 4.0 6.3 16

trim 4 Linear 1.0 1.6 4.0 6.3 16
Reduced Equal % 1.0 4.0

trim 5 Linear 1.0 4.0
0.5 0.5 0.5
4.1 0.2 0.2 0.2

Microflute
22 (not available with C Seat option)
0.1 0.1 0.1
0.07 0.07 0.07
0.01 0.01 0.01
Note: For low noise and anti-cavitation Kv please see TI-S24-59
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
Control valves 4
For Full Temperature/pressure Operating Curves, please refer to IM-S24-42
Spira-trol series valve

Nominal Pressure PN16 PN25 PN16 PN40 PN16 PN40
Body Material LE3 KE7 LE4 KE4 LE6 KE6
PN16 DN15-100 DN65 and 100 DN15-100 DN15-100 N/A
PN25 DN15-100
Flanged PN40 DN15-100 DN15-100

Connection type
JIS/KS10 DN15-100 DN15-100 DN15-100 DN15-100 N/A
JIS/KS20 DN15-100 DN15-100
Threaded BSP DN15-50 DN15-50 DN15-50
16 bar 16 bar 16 bar 16 bar

PN16 @ @ @ @
120 °C 120 °C 50 °C 100 °C
25 bar
PN25 @
120 °C
40 bar 40 bar
Flanged PN40 @ @
Maximum
operating
50 °C 100 °C
4.1
pressure 13,7 bar 13,7 bar 14 bar 14 bar
JIS/KS10 @ @ @ @ 23
120 °C 120 °C 120 °C 120 °C
34 bar 34 bar
JIS/KS20 @ @
120 °C 120 °C
16 bar 25 bar 40 bar

Threaded BSP @ @ @
120 °C 120 °C 100 °C
PEEK C and P 220 °C
PEEK
K 250 °C
insert
Maximum PTFE
G 170 °C
operating Seat insert
temperature 431S29 T
316L S
400 °C
316L/
W
Stellite6
Std.
-10 to +300 °C -10 to +300 °C -10 to +300 °C -10 to +300 °C
Bonnet
Operating temperature range
Ext.
-10 to +300 °C -10 to +350 °C -10 to +400 °C -10 to +400 °C
Bonnet
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Control valves
Body Material LE3 KE7 LE4 KE4 LE6 KE6
P and N and B 250 °C

Maximum
operating Stem Seal H and C 300 °C 350 °C 400 °C
temperature
Bellows D 300 C
PN16 300 °C 350 °C 400 °C 400 °C N/A
PN25 350 °C
Maximum operating Flanged PN40 400 °C 400 °C

temperature JIS/KS10 220 °C 300 °C 300 °C 300 °C
JIS/KS20 400 °C 400 °C
Threaded BSP 300 °C 350 °C 400 °C 400 °C
PN16 12,9 bar g 14,6 bar g 13,3 bar g 13,4 bar g
PN25 22,5 bar g
Flanged PN40 31,1 bar g 32,2 bar g

Body
Maximum JIS/KS10 11 bar g 12,4 bar g 13 bar g N/A 13 bar g
saturated
JIS/KS20 30,1 bar g 30,1 bar g
4.1 steam
service Threaded BSP 12,9 bar g 22,5 bar g 32,2 bar g
24 Seat C, K and P 19 bar g
B and C 20,2 bar g 20,6 bar g

Bellows
D 13,3 bar g 13,4 bar g
PEEK
Class VI
PTFE
Leakage In accordance to
Metal
class IEC 60534-4 Class IV (Class V on request)
StelliteTM
Balanced Class IV
Characteristic Equal % Linear Fast Acting
Rangeability 50 : 1 30 : 1 10 : 1
DN15 to DN50 : 20 mm
Travel
DN65 to DN100 : 30 mm
CTLS Issue 13
Valve DN DN15 - 25
Actuator Kvs 0.01 - 0.07 - 0.1 - 0.2 0.5 - 1.0 1.6 2.5 4
TI-S24-71
type Stem sealing
CTLS Issue 13
N P H B C D N P H B C D N P H B C D N P H B C D N P H B C D
Actuator trust
PN9126E
960 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 29.5 16.0
(1.0 - 2.0)
PN9123E
1920 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.7 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 8.3 16.0
(2.0 - 4.0)
PN9220E
680 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.7 16.0 40.0 40.0 11.7 16.0 31.3 31.3 4.8 16.0
(0.2 - 1.0)
PN9220E
1360 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0
(0.4 - 1.2)
PN9226E
3400 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0
(1.0 - 2.0)
standard trim - (Pneumatic Actuators)
PN9223E
6800 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0
(2.0 - 4.0)
Valve DN DN15 - 25
Actuator Kvs 4.9 - 6.3 7.2 10 11

type Stem sealing
N P H B C D N P H B C D N P H B C D N P H B C D
Actuator trust
PN9126E
960 27.8 27.8 12.9 16.0 20.5 20.5 8.7 16.0 15.4 15.4 5.8 11.2 11.4 11.4 3.7 8.0
(1.0 - 2.0)
PN9123E
1920 40.0 40.0 40.0 0.9 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 36.4 16.0 36.2 36.2 28.5 16.0
(2.0 - 4.0)
PN9220E
680 13.8 13.8 7.4 9.5 9.5 4.4 6.5 6.5 2.3 4.2 4.2 0.8
(0.2 - 1.0)

PN9220E
1360 40.0 40.0 32.7 16.0 36.2 36.2 24.4 16.0 28.1 28.1 18.6 16.0 21.7 21.7 14.0 16.0
(0.4 - 1.2)
PN9226E
3400 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0
(1.0 - 2.0)
PN9223E
6800 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0
Maximum differential pressures for Class IV shut-off - Metal Seat (T & S) - Flow under -
(2.0 - 4.0)
Control valves
Control systems
Page 9 of 23
25
4.1
4
44
26
4.1
Valve DN DN32 - 50
Kvs 4 6.3 10 16 17.5 - 18

Actuator type
Stem sealing
Page 10 of 23
Actuator trust
PN9126E
960 40.0 40.0 31.5 16.0 30.3 30.3 15.4 16.0 17.4 17.4 7.8 13.2 13.5 13.5 5.6 10.1 9.5 9.5 3.4 6.9
Control valves
(1.0 - 2.0)
Control systems
PN9123E
1920 40.0 40.0 40.0 11.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 3.4 16.0 40.0 40.0 38.4 16.0 38.8 38.8 30.9 16.0 29.1 29.1 23.0 16.0
(2.0 - 4.0)
PN9220E
680 33.2 33.2 7.6 16.0 16.3 16.3 1.4 9.9 8.5 8.5 4.3 6.2 6.2 2.7 3.8 3.8 1.2
(0.2 - 1.0)
PN9220E
1360 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 35.2 16.0 30.1 30.1 20.6 16.0 24.1 24.1 16.2 16.0 17.7 17.7 11.6 15.0
(0.4 - 1.2)
PN9226E
3400 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 22.6 16.0
(1.0 - 2.0)
PN9223E
6800 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0
(2.0 -4.0)
standard trim - (Pneumatic Actuators) (continued)
Valve DN DN32 - 50
Kvs 25 31 - 36 46 - 50
Actuator type
Stem sealing
N P H B C D N P H B C D N P H B C D
Actuator trust
PN9126E
960 3.6 3.6 2.2 2.3 2.3 1.2 1.0 1.0
(1.0 - 2.0)
PN9123E
1920 14.2 14.2 10.9 12.7 10.8 10.8 8.1 9.6 7.0 7.0 5.1 6.2
(2.0 - 4.0)
PN9220E
680 0.5 0.5
(0.2 - 1.0)

PN9220E
1360 8.0 8.0 4.7 6.6 5.8 5.8 3.2 4.7 3.5 3.5 1.6 2.7
(0.4 - 1.2)
PN9226E
3400 30.5 30.5 27.2 13.9 10.6 16.0 23.8 23.8 21.2 10.6 8.0 16.0 16.3 16.3 14.4 6.9 5.0 15.5
(1.0 - 2.0)
PN9223E
6800 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 37.7 37.7 35.8 25.0 25.0 16.0
(2.0 -4.0)
CTLS Issue 13
TI-S24-71
Valve DN DN65 - 100
Kvs 16 25 36 63 - 90 100 - 115 - 117 160 - 180
TI-S24-71
Actuator type
Stem sealing
CTLS Issue 13
P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
Actuator trust
PN9230E
680 2.8
(0.2 - 1.0)
PN9230E
1360 16.6 6.3 5.4 0.9 3.2 0.9
(0.4 - 1.2)
PN9236E
3400 40.0 40.0 15.4 5.0 5.0 23.4 18.9 4.9 0.4 0.4 16.0 12.8 2.8 8.2 6.4 0.7 4.7 3.5 2.5 1.8
(1.0 - 2.0)
PN9233E
6800 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 37.4 34.2 24.2 21.0 16.0 20.2 18.4 12.8 11.0 11.0 12.4 11.2 7.6 6.5 6.5 7.3 6.6 4.3 3.6 3.5
(2.0 - 4.0)
PN9330E
1340 16.2 5.9 5.2 0.7 3.0 0.9
(0.2 - 1.0)
PN9330E
2680 40.0 33.2 0.8 17.0 12.5 11.5 8.3 5.6 3.8 3.1 1.9 1.5 0.7
(0.4 - 1.2)
PN9336E
6700 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 36.7 33.5 23.5 20.3 16.0 19.8 18.0 12.4 10.3 10.6 12.2 11.0 7.4 6.3 6.3 7.1 6.4 4.2 3.5 3.5
standard trim - (Pneumatic Actuators) (continued)
(1.0 - 2.0)
PN9337E
16750 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 34.9 33.8 25.0 25.0 16.0 21.3 20.6 18.4 17.6 16.0
(2.5 - 3.5)

Control valves
Control systems
Page 11 of 23
27
4.1
4
44
28
4.1
Valve DN DN15 - 25
Kvs 0.01 - 0.07 - 0.1 - 0.2 0.5 -1.0 1.6 2.5 4

Actuator type
Stem sealing
Page 12 of 23
Actuator trust
AEL3 2000 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 15.4 16.0
Control valves
AEL51 1000 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 33.1 16.0
Control systems
AEL52 2000 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 15.4 16.0
AEL62 2300 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 15.4 16.0
AEL53/63 4500 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0
AEL54/64 8000 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0
standard trim - (Electric Actuators)
Valve DN DN15 - 25
Kvs 4.9 - 6.3 7.2 10 11

Actuator type
Stem sealing
N P H B C D N P H B C D N P H B C D N P H B C D
Actuator trust
AEL3 2000 40.0 40.0 40.0 4.9 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 2.4 16.0 40.0 40.0 38.9 0.7 16.0 38.3 38.3 30.5 16.0
AEL51 1000 29.8 29.8 14.8 16.0 22.0 22.0 10.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 7.1 12.5 12.4 12.4 4.7 9.1
AEL52 2000 40.0 40.0 40.0 4.9 16.0 40.0 40.0 10.2 2.4 16.0 40.0 40.0 38.9 0.7 16.0 38.3 38.3 30.5 16.0
AEL62 2300 40.0 40.0 40.0 19.8 4.9 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 14.2 2.4 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 10.3 0.7 16.0 40.0 40.0 38.3 7.3 16.0
AEL53/63 4500 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0
AEL54/64 8000 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0

CTLS Issue 13
TI-S24-71
Valve DN DN32 - 50
Kvs 4 6.3 10 16 17.5 - 18
TI-S24-71
Actuator type
Stem sealing
CTLS Issue 13
Actuator trust
AEL3 2000 40.0 40.0 40.0 17.8 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 7.4 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 2.7 16.0 40.0 40.0 33.0 1.4 16.0 30.7 30.7 24.6 0.1 16.0
AEL51 1000 40.0 40.0 34.9 16.0 32.3 32.3 17.3 16.0 18.6 18.6 9.1 14.5 14.6 14.6 6.7 11.2 10.3 10.3 4.2 7.7
AEL52 2000 40.0 40.0 40.0 17.8 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 7.4 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 2.7 16.0 40.0 40.0 33.0 1.4 16.0 30.7 30.7 24.6 0.1 16.0
AEL62 2300 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 17.8 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 22.3 7.4 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 12.3 2.7 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 9.3 1.4 16.0 36.8 36.8 30.7 6.3 0.1 16.0
AEL53/63 4500 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0
AEL54/64 8000 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0
AEL55/65 14000 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0
Valve DN DN32 - 50
Kvs 25 31 - 36 46 - 50
standard trim - (Electric Actuators) (continued)
Actuator type
Stem sealing
N P H B C D N P H B C D N P H B C D
Actuator trust
AEL3 2000 15.0 15.0 11.7 13.6 11.5 11.5 8.8 10.3 7.5 7.5 5.6 6.7
AEL51 1000 4.0 4.0 0.7 2.6 2.7 2.7 1.5 1.2 1.2 0.4
AEL52 2000 15.0 15.0 11.7 13.6 11.5 11.5 8.8 10.3 7.5 7.5 5.6 6.7
AEL62 2300 18.3 18.3 15.0 1.8 16.0 14.1 14.1 11.5 0.9 13.0 9.4 9.4 7.5 8.6
AEL53/63 4500 40.0 40.0 39.3 25.0 22.8 16.0 33.5 33.5 30.9 20.3 17.7 16.0 23.2 23.2 21.3 13.8 11.9 16.0
AEL54/64 8000 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0
AEL55/65 14000 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0

Control valves
Control systems
Page 13 of 23
29
4.1
4
44
30
4.1
Valve DN DN65 - 100
Kvs 16 25 36 63 - 90 100 - 115 - 117 160 - 180

Actuator type
Stem sealing
Page 14 of 23
Actuator trust
AEL51 1000 9.3 2.2 0.9

Control valves
AEL52 2000 29.7 19.3 11.0 6.6 7.2 4.0 3.2 1.4 1.5 0.4 0.5
Control systems
AEL62 2300 35.8 25.4 13.7 9.2 9.1 5.9 4.3 2.5 2.2 1.0 0.9 0.2
AEL53/63 4500 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 33.1 28.6 14.6 10.0 10.1 22.9 19.7 9.7 6.5 6.5 12.1 10.2 4.6 2.8 2.8 7.2 6.0 2.4 1.3 1.3 4.0 3.3 1.1 0.3 0.3
AEL54/64 8000 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 24.4 22.6 17.0 15.2 15.2 15.0 13.9 10.3 9.2 9.2 9.0 8.2 6.0 5.3 5.3
AEL55/65 14000 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 28.7 27.5 23.9 22.8 16.0 17.4 16.7 14.5 13.8 13.8
AEL56/66 25000 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 33.0 32.2 25.0 25.0 16.0

CTLS Issue 13
TI-S24-71
Valve DN DN15 - 25
Kvs 0.01 - 0.07 0.1 - 0.2 0.5 1 1.6 2.5 4 4.9 - 6.3 7.2 10 11
TI-S24-71
Actuator type
Stem sealing
N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D
CTLS Issue 13
Actuator trust
PN9126E (1.0 - 2.0) 960 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 17.6 16.0 19.0 13.8 16.0 18.6 10.9 15.3
PN9123E (2.0 - 4.0) 1920 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0
PN9220E (0.2 - 1.0) 680 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 18.1 16.0 19.0 8.9 16.0 18.3 6.6 13.2 14.5 4.9 10.3 11.4 3.6 8.0
PN9220E (0.4 - 1.2) 1360 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0
Valve DN DN32 - 50
Kvs 4 6.3 10 16 17.5 - 18 25 31 - 36 46 - 50
Actuator type
Stem sealing
N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
Actuator trust
standard trim - (Pneumatic Actuators)
PN9126E (1.0 - 2.0) 960 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 13.8 16.0 19.0 11.1 15.6 14.3 8.2 11.7 7.1 3.8 5.7 5.5 2.8 4.3 3.6 1.7 2.8
PN9123E (2.0 - 4.0) 1920 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 17.7 14.4 16.0 13.9 11.3 0.7 12.8 9.7 7.8 8.8
PN9220E (0.2 - 1.0) 680 19.0 17.4 16.0 19.0 8.9 16.0 14.5 4.9 10.3 11.6 3.7 8.2 8.6 2.5 6.0 4.0 0.7 2.6 3.0 0.4 1.9 1.9 1.1
PN9220E (0.4 - 1.2) 1360 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 16.4 16.0 11.5 8.2 10.1 9.0 6.4 7.9 6.1 4.3 5.3
PN9226E (1.0 - 2.0) 3400 19.0 19.0 13.8 11.1 16.0 19.0 17.1 9.5 7.7 16.0
Valve DN DN65 - 100

Kvs 16 25 36 63 - 90 100 - 115 - 117 160 - 180
Actuator type
Stem sealing
Actuator trust
PN9230E (0.2 - 1.0) 680 7.6 2.6 1.6 0.5 0.1
PN9230E (0.4 - 1.2) 1360 19.0 11.1 8.6 4.1 5.8 2.6 2.9 1.1 1.7 0.5 0.9 0.1
PN9236E (1.0 - 2.0) 3400 19.0 19.0 19.0 9.8 9.8 19.0 19.0 8.0 3.5 3.5 18.7 15.5 5.5 2.2 2.2 10.2 8.4 2.7 0.9 0.9 6.3 5.1 1.5 0.4 0.4 3.7 3.0 0.8 0.7 0.7

PN9233E (2.0 - 4.0) 6800 19.0 19.0 14.8 13.0 13.0 14.0 12.8 9.2 8.1 8.1 8.5 7.8 5.6 4.9 4.9
PN9330E (0.2 - 1.0) 1340 19.0 10.7 8.4 3.9 5.7 2.5 2.9 1.1 1.6 0.5 0.8 0.1
PN9330E (0.4 - 1.2) 2680 19.0 15.7 1.7 14.1 10.9 0.9 7.6 5.8 0.2 4.7 3.5 2.7 2.0
Maximum differential pressures for Class VI shut-off - Soft Seat (P & C) - Flow under -
PN9336E (1.0 - 2.0) 6700 19.0 19.0 14.4 12.6 12.6 13.8 12.6 9.0 7.9 7.9 8.4 7.7 5.4 4.7 4.7
PN9337E (2.5 - 3.5) 16750 19.0 19.0 19.0 18.9 16.0
Control valves
Control systems
Page 15 of 23
31
4.1
4
44
32
4.1
Valve DN DN15 - 25
Kvs 0.01 - 0.07 0.1 - 0.2 0.5 1 1.6 2.5

Actuator type
Stem sealing
Page 16 of 23
N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
Actuator trust
AEL3 2000 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 9.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 4.7 16.0
Control valves
AEL51 1000 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0
Control systems
AEL52 2000 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 9.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 4.7 16.0
AEL62 2300 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 9.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 4.7 16.0
AEL63 4500 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 9.9* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 4.7* 16.0*
Valve DN DN15 - 25
standard trim - (Electric Actuators)
Kvs 4 4.9 - 6.3 7.2 10 11

Actuator type
Stem sealing
N-P H B C D N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B D
Actuator trust
AEL3 2000 19.0 19.0 19.0 2.2 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 11.3 16.0 19.0 19.0 8.7 16.0 19.0 19.0 6.7 16.0
AEL51 1000 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 15.1 16.0 19.0 11.9 16.0
AEL52 2000 19.0 19.0 19.0 2.2 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 11.3 16.0 19.0 19.0 8.7 16.0 19.0 19.0 6.7 16.0
AEL62 2300 19.0 19.0 19.0 2.2 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 11.3 16.0 19.0 19.0 8.7 16.0 19.0 19.0 6.7 18.0
AEL63 4500 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 2.2* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 14.9 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 11.3 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 8.7* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 6.7* 19.0*
*Note: Actuator Thrust must be set to 50% of maximum.

CTLS Issue 13
TI-S24-71
Valve DN DN32 - 50
Kvs 4 6.3 10 16
Actuator type
TI-S24-71
Stem sealing
N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
CTLS Issue 13
Actuator trust
AEL3 2000 19.0 19.0 19.0 2.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 8.7 16.0 19.0 19.0 6.9 16.0
AEL51 1000 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 15.1 16.0 19.0 12.1 16.0
AEL52 2000 19.0 19.0 19.0 2.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 8.7 16.0 19.0 19.0 6.9 16.0
AEL62 2300 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 14.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 18.3 8.7 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.8 6.9 16.0
AEL63 4500 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 14.9* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 18.3* 8.7* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 13.5* 6.9* 16.0*
Valve DN DN32 - 50
Kvs 17.5 - 18 25 31 - 36 46 - 50
Actuator type
Stem sealing
Actuator trust
AEL3 2000 19.0 19.0 4.9 16.0 18.6 15.3 2.1 16.0 14.6 12.0 1.4 13.5 10.2 8.3 0.7 9.4
AEL51 1000 15.1 9.0 12.5 7.6 4.3 6.1 5.8 3.2 4.7 3.9 2.0 3.1
AEL52 2000 19.0 19.0 4.9 16.0 18.6 15.3 2.1 16.0 14.6 12.0 1.4 13.5 10.2 8.3 0.7 9.4
AEL62 2300 19.0 19.0 11.1 4.9 16.0 19.0 18.6 5.4 2.1 16.0 17.3 14.6 4.1 1.4 16.0 12.1 10.2 2.6 0.7 11.2
AEL63 4500 19.0* 19.0* 10.0* 4.9* 16.0* 19.0* 18.0* 5.4* 2.1* 16.0* 17.3* 14.6* 4.1* 1.4* 16.0* 12.1* 10.2* 2.6* 0.7* 11.2*
Valve DN DN65 - 100

Kvs 16 25 36 63 - 90 100 - 115 - 117 160 - 180
Actuator type
Stem sealing
P H P H P H P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
Actuator trust
AEL51 1000 14.1 3.7 5.4 0.9 3.6 0.4 1.7 0.9 0.4
AEL52 2000 19.0 19.0 14.2 9.7 9.9 6.6 5.2 3.4 3.1 2.0 1.8 1.0

AEL62 2300 19.0 19.0 16.9 12.4 11.7 8.5 6.3 4.5 3.8 2.6 2.2 1.5
AEL63 4500 19.0* 19.0* 16.9* 12.4* 11.7* 8.5* 14.1 12.2 6.6 4.8 4.8 8.8 7.6 4.0 2.9 2.9 5.3 4.6 2.3 1.6 1.6
AEL53 4500 14.1 12.2 6.6 4.8 4.8 8.8 7.6 4.0 2.9 2.9 5.3 4.6 2.3 1.6 1.6
AEL54/64 8000 16.7 15.5 11.9 10.8 10.8 10.2 9.5 7.3 6.6 6.6
AEL55/65 14000 18.7 18.0 15.7 15.0 15.0
*Note: Actuator Thrust must be set to 50% of maximum.

Control valves
Control systems
Page 17 of 23
33
4.1
4
44 Control systems
Control valves
Dimensions for the Spira-trolTM two-port control valve approximate in mm and (inches)
Screwed Flanged
BSP
Valve size
A B C A1 C1 D E F
All LE43/63 Thread Bellows Extended
(except JIS/KS10 seals bonnet
LE43/LE63
JIS/KS10)
DN15 (½") 130 40 103 130 124 103

237 336
DN20 (¾") 155 45 103 150 144 103
(9") (13.25")
DN25 (1") 160 50 103 160 160 103 69
M8
DN32 (1¼") 185 60 132 180 176 132 (2¾")
267 354
DN40 (1½") 205 65 132 200 198 132
(10½") (13.94")
DN50 (2") 230 80 127 230 222 127
Bellows
368 sealed or
DN65 (2½") 290 290 201 extended
(14½") 416
bonnet
81 368 (16.38")
version
DN80 (3") 310 310 201 M12
(3") (14½")
E
381 431
4.1 DN100 (4") 350 350 216
(15") (17")
34 Screwed version Flanged version

D
E E
D D
C C1
A A1
Weights KE valves LE valves Additional bellows and

approximate Valve size
KE43 KE61 KE63 KE71 KE73 LE31 LE33 LE43 LE63 Extended bonnet
in kg (and lbs)
DN15 (½") 6.0 4.5 5.5 4.5 5.5 4.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
DN20 (¾") 6.8 5.5 6.8 5.5 6.8 5.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 4.5 (10)
DN25 (1") 7.0 6.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 5.5 6.5 6.5 6.5
DN32 (1¼") 13.5 11.5 13.5 11.5 13.5 9.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
DN40 (1½") 14.0 12.0 14 12.0 14.0 10.0 12.8 12.8 12.8 5.5 (12)
DN50 (2") 17.0 13.0 17.0 13.0 17.0 11.0 15.0 15.0 15.0
DN65 (2½") 35.0 35.0 35.0 - 32.0 32.0 32.0

10 (21)
DN80 (3") 40.0 40.0 40.0 - 36.0 36.0 36.0
DN100 (4") 54.0 54.0 54.0 - 53.0 53.0 53.0 13 (28)
Page 18 of 23 TI-S24-71
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
Control valves 4
Dimensions/weights for the PN actuator range approximate in mm and kgs (inches and lbs)
Weight
Actuator range F G H J
Actuator With handwheel
and variants
mm inches mm inches mm inches mm inches kg lbs kg lbs
PN9100E 55 2 " +5.86 +13.00

170 6 A" 275 10⅞"" 225 8 " 6 13.25
PN9100R 140 5½" +2.50 +5.50
PN9200E 55 2 " +7.20 +15.75

300 11 " 300 11⅞" 225 8 " 17 37.50
PN9200R 140 5½" +3.77 +8.50
PN9320E 65 2 " +7.20 +15.75

390 15½" 325 12⅞" 350 13¾" 27 59.50
PN9320R 150 15 " +3.77 +8.50
PN9330E 65 2 " +7.20 +15.75

390 15½" 335 13 " 350 13¾" 27 59.50
PN9330R 150 15⅞" +3.77 +8.50
TN2000E +5.00 +11.25

284 11¼" 334 13 " 144 5 " 350 13¾" 18 40.50
TN2000R +6.00 +13.50
TN2000DA 284 11¼" 334 13 " 16 36.00
TN2100E
4.1
405 16" 369 14½" 402 15 " 330 13" 37 83.25 +23.00 +51.75
TN2100R
TN2100DA 405 16" 369 14½" 30 67.50

35
F
J Dimensions/weights
for the AEL actuator ranges
H approximate in mm and kgs (and in inches and lbs)
F
Actuator F G Weight
Actuator
H J range mm inches mm inches kg lbs
Actuator 230 9"

G
AEL3 x x 283 11 ¼" 5.7 12.5
149 6"
G
AEL55
and 180 7" 557 22" 10.0 22.0
AEL65
AEL51,
AEL52,
AEL53,
177 7" 459 18" 5.0 11.0
AEL62
and
AEL63
AEL54
and 177 7" 490 19" 7.0 15.5
AEL64
Top mounted handwheel Side mounted handwheel AEL56
and 226 9" 760 30" 20.0 44.0
AEL66
TI-S24-71 Page 19 of 23
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Control valves
Spare parts
Spira-trolTM two-port control valve

DN15 to DN100 - ½" to 4"
The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn in broken line are not supplied as spares.
Note: When placing an order for spare parts please specify clearly the full product description as found on the label of the valve body, as
this will ensure that the correct spare parts are supplied.
Available spares - K series

Actuator clamping nut A A
PTFE packing C
* Equal percentage trim

D, E
(No gaskets supplied) C
C2
C1
Plug stem and seat Fast opening trim
D1, E
kit (No gaskets supplied)
Linear trim
4.1 (No gaskets supplied)
D2, E
36 PTFE soft seat seal H D1 D2
Specify if reduced trim.
How to order spares

* Always order spares by using the description given in the column
Example: 1 - PTFE stem seal kit for a Spirax Sarco DN25 Spira-
trolTM two-port KE43 PTSUSS.2 Kv 10 control valve.
How to fit spares D

Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare. Soft Seat
G&K B
arrangement
H
E
G
* PTFE stem sealing
PTFE stem sealing

for vacuum service
Page 20 of 23 TI-S24-71
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
Control valves 4
Spare parts
Spira-trolTM two-port control valve with bellows seal - Type D

DN15 to DN100 - ½" to 4"
Note: When placing an order for spare parts please specify clearly the full product description as found on the label of the valve body, as
this will ensure that the correct spare parts are supplied.

Gasket set (Bellows sealed) B, G

C3
Stem seal kit Graphite secondary seal and gasket set C3
*Equal percentage trim

D6, E
A
Plug stem and Fast opening trim
D7, E
seat kit (No gaskets supplied)
Linear trim
D8, E
Bellows seal assembly F
*
PTFE soft seat seal H 4.1
Specify if reduced trim. 37
How to order spares
'Available spares', and state the size and type of valve including the full
product description of the product.
Example: 1 - Graphite stem seal kit for a Spirax Sarco DN25 Spira-trolTM
two-port KE43B TSUSS.2 Kv 10 control valve.
How to fit spares

F
D7 D8
D6
Soft Seat B
G&K
arrangement
H
E
G
TI-S24-71 Page 21 of 23
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Control valves
Spare parts A
Spira-trolTM two-port control valve with bellows seal - Types B and C

DN15 to DN100 - ½" to 4"
The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn in grey line are not
supplied as spares.
Note: When placing an order for spare parts please specify clearly the full product C
C2
spare parts are supplied. C1

PTFE packing C
* Equal percentage trim (No gaskets supplied) D9, E B
Plug stem and seat kit Fast opening trim (No gaskets supplied) D10, E B
Linear trim (No gaskets supplied) D11, E F

4.1 Bellow seal assembly F
38 PTFE soft seat seal H
How to order spares

* Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares',
and state the size and type of valve including the full product description of the product.
Example: 1 - PTFE stem seal kit for a Spirax Sarco DN25 Spira-trol TM two-port KE43B
TSUSS.2 Kv 10 control valve.
How to fit spares

Full fitting instructions are given in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied
with the spare.
D10 D11
B
Soft Seat
G&K
arrangement D9
E
G
Page 22 of 23 TI-S24-71
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
Control valves 4
Valve size EN standard = DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80 and DN100 DN25
K = K series 2-port control valve
Valve series K
L = L series 2-port control valve
L = Linear
Flange type Blank = EN (PN) Blank
Blank = under
Flow Blank
T = over
3 = Cast iron
4 = Carbon steel
Body material 4
6 = Stainless steel
7 = SG iron
1 = Screwed
Connections 3
3 = Flanged
B = Bellows/PTFE secondary seals
C = Bellows/graphite secondary seals
D = Bellows/graphite secondary seals
Stem sealing H = Graphite P
N = PTFE with Nitronic bush - DN15 to DN50 only 4.1
P = PTFE
39
V = PTFE for vacuum service
C = Reverseable PEEK seat
G = PTFE soft seat
K = PEEK soft seat
Seating P = Full PEEK T
S = 316L stainless steel
W = 316L with stelliteTM 6 facing
P1 = 1 stage low noise cage
Type of trim S
S = Standard trim
B = Balanced (not available with seating option C)
Trim balancing U
U = Unbalanced
E = Extended
Bonnet type S
S = Standard
H = High temperature
Bolting S
S = Standard
Blank = Standard
Finish
N = ENP coating
Series 2 = .2 .2
Kvs To be specified Kv 16
Connection type To be specified Flanged PN40
Selection example:
DN32 - K E 4 3 P T S U S S .2 - Kv 16 - Flanged PN40
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco Spira-trolTM DN32 KE43PTSUSS.2 Kv 16 two-port control valve having flanged PN40 connections.
TI-S24-71 Page 23 of 23
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Control valves
4.1
40
Control systems
Control valves
TI-S24-73
CTLS Issue 2

K Series DN125 to DN300 and 6" to 12"
Description
Spira-trol TM is a range of two-port single seat globe valves with
cage retained seats conforming to EN and ASME standard.
These valves are available in three body materials in sizes
ranging from DN125 to DN300 (6" to 12"). When used in
conjunction with a pneumatic or electric linear actuator they
provide characterized modulating or on / off control.
Important note: Throughout this document, reference has

been made to the standard KE or KEA control valve. With the
exception of trim type, the KE, KEA, KF, KFA, KL and KLA
control valves are identical.
KE, KF and KL
DN125 to DN300 4.1
KEA, KFA and KLA
6" to 12"
41

Valve
Material PN16 PN25 PN40 JIS/KS10 JIS/KS20 ASME150 ASME300
Series
SG Iron DN125 - DN200 DN125
KE Carbon Steel DN125 - DN300
Stainless Steel DN125 - DN200
Carbon Steel 6" - 12" 6" - 12"

KEA
Stainless Steel 6" and 8" 6" and 8"
ASME 150 and ASME 300 are available with Flat face for use with ASME 125 and ASME 250 Flange.
Standards
Certification
This product is available with certification to EN 10204 3.1. Optional seat leak test is available on request.
CTLS Issue 2
Spira-trol TM Two-port Control Valves K Series DN125 to DN300 and 6" to 12"
44 Control systems
Control valves
KE and KEA Equal percentage (E) - Suitable for most modulating process control applications providing good control at all flowrates.
KF and KFA Fast opening (F) - For on / off applications only.
KL and KLA Linear (L) - Primarily for liquid flow control where the differential pressures across the valve is constant.

PTFE chevron seals Standard
Stem sealing
Graphite packing High temperature applications
Metal-to-metal 431 stainless steel - standard
Up to 170 °C (338 °F) - PTFE for Class VI shut-off

(for applications like compressed air or water where there is no temperature)
Seating Soft seating
Up to 250 °C (482 °F) - PEEK for Class VI shut-off
Up to 220 °C (428 °F) - PEEK (P) for Class VI shut-off
Hard facing 316L stainless steel with Stellite TM 6 facing - for more arduous applications
Standard bonnet
Bonnet type
Standard trim
4.1 Trim
Low noise and anti-cavitation trim (see TI-S24-59)
42
Spira-trolTM valves are compatible with the following actuators:
Electric AEL5 and AEL6 series
Pneumatic PN1000, PN2000, PN9000 and TN2000 series
Note: Reference the product specific Technical Information sheet for further details.
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves 4
Materials - DN125 to DN300 (6" to 12")
Body
material
1 Body Cast steel BS EN 10213 GP 240GH+N (1.0619N)
KE43
Carbon 2 Bonnet Cast steel BS EN 10213 GP 240GH+N (1.0619N)
steel 1 Body Cast steel ASTM A216 WCB
KEA43
2 Bonnet Cast steel ASTM A216 WCB
1 Body Stainless
KE63 steel
EN 10213 (1.4408)
Stainless 2 Bonnet
steel 1 Body Stainless
KEA63 steel
ASTM A351 CF8M
2 Bonnet
1 Body
KE73 SG iron EN-GJS-400-18U-LT
2 Bonnet
SG iron
1 Body
KEA73 SG iron ASTM A395
2 Bonnet
DN125 4.1
unbalanced valve 43
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
Materials - DN125 to DN300 (6" to 12") (continued)
Body
material
All others Stainless steel AISI 431

Plug and
3 stem KE63 Stainless steel AISI 316L
assembly
Seating version W Stellite TM
6
4 Cage Stainless steel
Seating version T Stainless steel AISI 431 S29

Valve seat
6 Seating versions P and K PEEK
ring
All others Stainless steel Stellite TM 6
9 Bearing Stellite TM
10 Spacer (not used in DN125 valves) Stainless steel
11 Gland nut Stainless steel AISI 416
14 Washer Stainless steel AISI 316L
15 Bonnet gasket Stainless steel/graphite
16 Seat gasket Stainless steel/graphite
20 Stem nut Stainless steel AISI 316
4.1 KE43 Carbon steel BS EN ISO 898-1 Grade 8.8

All versions
44 KE63 Stainless steel A2-80
KE73 Carbon steel BS EN ISO 898-1 Grade 8.8

Standard bonnet nut
21 KEA43 Carbon steel ASTM A194 2H
KEA63 Stainless steel ASTM A194 8M
KEA73 Carbon steel ASTM A194 2H
High temperature bonnet nut Stainless steel DIN ISO 3506 A2
KE63 Stainless steel A2

Standard stud
KEA43 Carbon steel ASTM A193 B7
22
KEA63 Stainless steel ASTM A193 B8M2
KEA73 Carbon steel ASTM A193 B7
High temperature KE43

Stainless steel DIN ISO 3506 A2-80
bonnet nut
KE73
8 Spring Stainless steel
PTFE gland 12 Chevron packing set PTFE

versions 17 Stem 'O' ring Viton TM
18 Bonnet 'O' ring Viton TM
High
temperature 26 Gland packing Graphite
gland versions
3a Plug and stem assembly Stainless steel
Balanced
29 Cage Stainless steel
versions
31 Balanced seal Graphite
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves 4
DN125
20
unbalanced valve
17 11
18
12 14
8
9 15
10
4.1
45
16 6
22
21
31
3a
DN125
balanced valve
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
Kv values
Valve size DN125 DN150 DN200 DN250 DN300
Equal % 245 370 580 700 1 000
Full port Linear 260 390 640 780 1 100
Fast opening 260 390 640 780 1 100
Equal % 200 287 370 580 700

Reduced trim 1
Linear 200 287 550 640 780
Equal % 100 132 232 370 580

Reduced trim 2
Standard trim Linear 100 132 232 550 640
Equal % 63 103 163 232 370

Reduced trim 3
Linear 63 103 163 232 550
Equal % 163 232

Reduced trim 4
Linear 163 232
Equal % 163
Reduced trim 5
Linear 163
Note: For low noise and anti-cavitation Kv please see TI-S24-59
4.1 C v (US) values

C v (US) = C v (UK) x 1.2009
46
Valve size DN150 DN200 DN250 DN300
Equal % 433 679 809 1 156
Full port Linear 456 749 902 1 272
Fast opening 456 749 902 1 272
Equal % 336 433 670 809

Reduced trim 1
Linear 336 636 740 902
Equal % 154 271 428 670

Reduced trim 2
Standard trim Linear 154 271 636 740
Equal % 120 191 268 428

Reduced trim 3
Linear 120 191 268 636
Equal % 188 268

Reduced trim 4
Linear 188 268
Equal % 188
Reduced trim 5
Linear 188
Note: For low noise and anti-cavitation C v please see TI-S24-59
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves 4
Pressure / temperature limits - KE43 (Carbon steel)
A E D C B
Temperature °C
F
Steam
saturation
curve F E D C B
Pressure bar g
High temperature packing is required for use in this region.
High temperature bolting and packing is required for use in this region
A - B Flanged EN 1092 PN40.
A - C Flanged JIS/KS 20K.
A - D Flanged EN 1092 PN25.
A - E Flanged EN 1092 PN16. 4.1

A - F Flanged JIS/KS 10K. 47
Notes:
1. Where the process fluid temperature is sub-zero and the ambient temperature is below +5 °C, the external moving parts of the
valve and actuator must be heat traced to maintain normal operation.
2. When selecting a valve with a bellows sealed bonnet, the pressure / temperature limits of the bellows must be read in conjunction
with the valve pressure / temperature limits shown in table below.
PTFE soft seat (G) 170 °C
PEEK soft seat (P) 220 °C
Standard packing PTFE chevron
Maximum operating temperature PEEK seat (K) 250 °C
Extended bonnet (E) with PTFE chevron
High temperature packing (H)

400 °C
Extended bonnet (E) with graphite packing
Note: We recommend that an extended bonnet (E) with graphite packing is used where valve operation is above 300 °C.
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
Pressure / temperature limits - KE63 (Stainless steel)
A E D C B
Temperature °C
F
Steam
saturation
curve F E D C B

Pressure bar g
A - B Flanged EN 1092 PN40.
4.1 A - E Flanged EN 1092 PN16.
48 A - F Flanged JIS/KS 10K.
Notes:

400 °C
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves 4
Pressure / temperature limits - KE73 (SG iron)
A

F
Temperature °C

Steam
saturation
curve
F E D

Pressure bar g
A - E Flanged EN 1092 PN16.
A - F Flanged JIS / KS 10.
Notes: 4.1
49

350 °C
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
Pressure / temperature limits - KEA43 (Carbon steel)
Pressure psi g

A

Temperature °C
Temperature °F
E

Steam
saturation
curve
E D C B

Pressure bar g
Graphite stem sealing is required for use in this region
A - B Flanged ASME 300.
A - C Flanged JIS / KS 20.
A - D Flanged ASME 150.
E - E Flanged JIS / KS 10.

4.1
Notes:
50 1. Where the process fluid temperature is sub-zero and the ambient temperature is below +5 °C, the external moving parts of the
with the valve pressure / temperature limits shown above.
3. As standard the KEA, KFA, KLA series two-port control valves are supplied with the PTFE stem sealing option.
Body design conditions ASME 150 and ASME 300
ASME 150 19.6 bar g @ 38 °C (284 psi g @ 100 °F)

Maximum design pressure
ASME 300 51.1 bar g @ 38 °C (740 psi g @ 100 °F)
Maximum design temperature 425 °C (800 °F)
Minimum design temperature -29 °C (-20 °F)
PTFE soft seat (G) 170 °C (338 °F)
PEEK soft seat (P) 220 °C (428 °F)
PEEK seat (K) 250 °C (482 °F)

Graphite packing (H)
Extended bonnet (E) with graphite 425 °C (800 °F)

packing
Note: We recommend that an extended bonnet (E) with graphite packing is used where valve operation is above 300 °C (572 °F).
Page 10 of 15 TI-S24-73
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves 4
Pressure / temperature limits - KEA63 (Stainless steel)
Pressure psi g
A

Temperature °C
Temperature °F
D

E

Steam
saturation
E C curve D B

Pressure bar g
Graphite stem sealing is required for use in this region
A - B Flanged ASME 300.
A - C Flanged JIS / KS 20.
D - D Flanged ASME 150.
E - E Flanged JIS / KS 10.

4.1
Notes:
51
with the valve pressure / temperature limits shown above.
3. As standard the KEA, KFA, KLA series two-port control valves are supplied with the PTFE stem sealing option.
Body design conditions ASME 150 and ASME 300
ASME 150 (6" to 8" only) 19.6 bar g @ 38 °C (275 psi g @ 100 °F)
ASME 300 49.6 bar g @ 38 °C (720 psi g @ 100 °F)
Maximum design temperature 538 °C (1 000 °F)
Minimum design temperature -29 °C (-20 °F)
PTFE soft seat (G) 170 °C (338 °F)
PEEK soft seat (P) 220 °C (428 °F)
Maximum operating temperature PEEK seat (K) 250 °C (482 °F)
Graphite packing (H)

538 °C (1 000 °F)
Note: We recommend that an extended bonnet (E) with graphite packing is used where valve operation is above 300 °C (572 °F).
TI-S24-73 Page 11 of 15
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
Dimensions for the Spira-trol TM two-port control valve approximate in mm and (inches)
Flanged
Valve size KE valves KEA valves
A1 C1 A1 C1 D E F
PN16 JIS / KS KS 10 KS 20 Thread Extended
PN25 bonnet
PN40 10 20 ASME ASME
125 and 150 250 and 300
DN125 (5") 400 403 425 257 538 (21 1/5")
DN150 (6") 480 451 473 275 451 (17¾") 473 (18 5 / 8 ") 279 (11") 556 (21 7/8")
DN200 (8") 600 543 568 341 543 (213 / 8 ") 568 (22 3 / 8 ") 343 (13½") 125(4 7 / 8 ") M30 621 (24½")
DN250 (10") 730 673 708 344 673 708 344 (13½") 622 (24½")
DN300 (12") 850 737 775 355 737 775 355 (14") 634 (25")
4.1
52 E
D
F
C1
A1 A1
Flanged version Extended bonnet version
Weights for the Spira-trol TM two-port control valve approximate in kg (and lbs)
KE valves KEA valves Additional Additional

Extended balanced
Valve size KE43 KE63 KE73 KEA43 KEA63 KEA73 bonnet
16 2
DN125 (5") 81 81 81
(35) (4.4)
16 3
DN150 (6") 121 121 121 130 (286) 130 (286) 130 (286)
(35) (7)
16 10
DN200 (8") 210 210 210 210 (462) 210 (462) 210 (462)
(35) (22)
16 10
DN250 10") 228 242 (533)
(35) (22)
16 16
DN300 12") 451 465 (1025)
(35) (35)
Page 12 of 15 TI-S24-73
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves 4
Weight
and variants
PN1500 and PN2500 405 16" 1 114 46" 55 121.00
PN1600 and PN2600 465 18 " 1 116 46" 70 154.00
PN9400E
732 28¾" 465 18 1 / 3 " 60 132.00
PN9400R
TN2277E 532 21" 863 34" 330 13" 330 13" 116 255.00 +21.00 +46.00
TN2277NDA 532 21" 863 34" 98 216.00
F
J
Actuator F
4.1
H J
53
G
Actuator
Top mounted
handwheel Side mounted handwheel
Dimensions/weights for the EL and AEL actuator ranges approximate in mm and kgs (and in inches and lbs)
F G Weight
Actuator range
mm inches mm inches kg lbs
AEL56 and AEL66 226 9" 760 30" 20.0 44.0
TI-S24-73 Page 13 of 15
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
Spare parts
Spira-trol TM two-port control valve

Balanced and unbalanced
DN125 to DN300 and 6" to 12"
Note: When placing an order for spare parts please specify clearly the full product description as found on the label of the valve body,
as this will ensure that the correct spare parts are supplied.

Gasket set Balanced A, B, G
Non bellows sealed Unbalanced B, G
PTFE chevrons C3
Graphite packing
Stem seal kit c o nve r s i o n k i t ( D N15 to C4 C5
DN100) C4
C3
Balanced
A, D, E
Plug stem and seat kit
Unbalanced
D, E
D4 D5
54 How to order spares

Example: 1 - PTFE stem seal kit for a Spirax Sarco DN150 A

Spira-trol TM two-port KE43 PTSBSS.2 Kvs 370 control valve.
How to fit spares

Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare.
D3
H J
E
G
Exploded view of
soft seat arrangement
Page 14 of 15 TI-S24-73
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves 4
EN standard = DN125, DN150, DN200, DN250 and 300
Valve size DN150
ASME standard = 6", 8", 10" and 12"
Valve series K = K series 2-port control valve K
L = Linear
A = ASME
Flange type Blank
Blank = EN (PN)
Blank = under
Flow Blank
T = over
4 = Carbon steel
7 = SG iron
Connections 3 = Flanged
H = Graphite
Stem sealing P = PTFE
4.1
G = PTFE soft seat
K = PEEK soft seat 55
Type of trim S
S = Standard trim
B = Balanced
Trim balancing U
U = Unbalanced
E = Extended
Bonnet type S
S = Standard
Bolting S
S = Standard
Finish Blank = Standard
Series 2 = .2 .2
Kvs To be specified Kvs 370
Connection type To be specified Flanged PN40
Selection example:
DN150 - K E 4 3 P T S U S S .2 - Kvs 370 - Flanged PN40
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco Spira-trol TM DN150 KE43PTSUSS.2 Kvs 16 two-port control valve having flanged PN40 connections.
TI-S24-73 Page 15 of 15
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
4.1
56
Control systems
Control valves
TI-S24-72
CTLS Issue 2

ASME Standard K and L Series ½" to 4"
Description
Spira-trol TM is a range of two-port single seat globe valves with cage retained seats conforming to ASME standard. These valves
are available in four body materials in sizes ranging from (½" to 4"). When used in conjunction with a pneumatic or electric linear
actuator they provide characterized modulating or on / off control.
Important note: Throughout this document, reference has been made to the standard LEA or KEA control valve. With the exception
of trim type, the LEA, KEA, LFA, KFA, LLA and KLA control valves are identical.
4.1
57

Screwed Flanged
Valve SW
Material NPT ASME250 ASME125 ASME125 ASME150 ASME300 KS10 KS20
Series
Up to 2" Up to 2" 1" and 1½" to 4" ½" to 4" (excluding 1¼") ½" to 4"
Cast Iron • • •
L Series Carbon Steel • •
Stainless Steel • •
SG Iron • • • •
K series Carbon Steel • • • •
Stainless Steel • • • •
Standards
Certification
This product is available with certification to EN 10204 3.1. Seat leakage test certificate is available on request.
Page 1 of 24
44 Control systems
Control valves
LEA and KEA Equal percentage (E) - Suitable for most modulating process control applications providing good control at all flowrates.
LLA and KFA Fast opening (F) - For on / off applications only.
LFA and KLA Linear (L) - Primarily for liquid flow control where the differential pressures across the valve is constant.

PTFE chevron seals (P-N) Standard
Graphite packing (H) High temperature applications
Bellows / PTFE (B) Zero emissions and thermal fluids PN25 - up to 572 °F
Stem sealing
Zero emissions, high temperature applications and thermal fluids
Bellows / graphite (C)
PN25 - up to 797 °F
Bellows/graphite secondary seals (D) Zero emissions and high temperature applications PN16 - up to 572 °F

Metal-to-metal
Up to 338 °F - PTFE for Class VI shut-off for applications like compressed

Seating air or water where there is no temperature
Soft seating
Up to 482 °F - PEEK (K) for Class VI shut-off
Up to 428 °F PEEK (CandP) for Class VI shut-off

4.1 Hard facing 316L stainless steel with Stellite TM 6 facing - for more arduous applications
58 Standard bonnet
Bonnet type
Standard trim
Trim
Low noise and anti-cavitation trim (see TI-S24-59) Note: Not available with Reverseable PEEK Seat (C)
Spira-trol™ is a modular valve based on 4 body sizes covering DN15-100 sizes (½" - 1", 1¼" - 2", 2½" - 3" and 4") in order to reduce
the number of spare parts. The valves are available with a range of accessories including actuators, positioners, solenoid valves,
limit switches.
Please refer to respective data sheets.
Special trims, please refer to TI-S24-59

EN version, please refer to TI-S24-71
Smart positioner, please refer to TI-P343-34 and TI-P343-36
Pneumatic Positioners please refer to TI-P370-14
For electro-pneumatic positioners please refer to TI-P343-43 and TI-P343-45
For large size Spira-trol™, please refer to TI-S24-73
Materials - ½" to 4"
LEA3 KEA7 LEA-KEA4 LEA-KEA6

½" to 4" ½" to 4" ½" to 2" 2½" - 4" ½" to 4"
1 Body A126 ClassB A395 A216 WCB A351 CF8M
2 Bonnet A395 A395 A105N A216 WCB A351 CF8M
2a Bonnet extension A216 WCB A351 CF8M
2b Bellows Bonnet option B-C-D Stainless steel 316L
2c Extended bonnet A216 WCB A351 CF8M
3 Stem lock-nut Stainless steel A2-70
4 Bonnet gasket Graphite and Stainless steel
CTLS Issue 2
Spira-trol TM Two-port Control Valves ASME Standard K and L Series ½" to 4"
Control systems
Control valves 4
KEA valve with
extended bonnet (E) * Graphite packing
KEA valve with
Lower and
graphite packing 9
16
High guide
3 packing
10, 11, 12, 15, 17 and 19
Not used
2c
Extended
bonnet (E)
KEA valve with

4.1
PTFE packing
3 59
2a
4
DN15 - DN100 KEA with

2b bellows seal (B) and (C)
* PTFE stem sealing
PTFE stem sealing

for vacuum service
KEA valve with bellows seal (D)
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
Materials - ½" to 4" (continued)
5 Seat retainer DUPLEX Stainless steel ASME A994 CD4MCuN
Seat option W Stainless steel 316L + StellitTM 6

6 Valve seat ring
Seat option CandP PEEK
Seat option G PTFE + Stainless Steel 316L
Seat option K PEEK + Stainless Steel 316L
7 Seat gasket Graphite and stainless steel

8 Valve plug and stem Seat option W Stainless steel 316L + StellitTM 6
Stainless steel 316L for Stainless steel valve and Stainless steel 431
Seat option C/P/K/G
for all other materials
9 Lower stem guide Bonnet option N NitronicTM 60
Bonnet option H - C Stellite TM 6

4.1 10 Lower stem wiper Bonnet option P - N - B PTFE
60 11 Packing guard washer Stainless steel 316L
12 Spring Bonnet option P - N - B Stainless steel 316L
13 Packing spacer Stainless steel 316L
Bonnet option P - N - B PTFE chevron

14 Packing set
Bonnet option H - C Graphite rings
15 Outer 'O' ring Bonnet option P - N - B VITON TM
16 Upper stem guide Bonnet option N Nitronic TM 60
Bonnet option H - C StelliteTM 6
17 Inner 'O' ring Bonnet option P - N - B VITON TM
Stainless steel 316L for stainless steel valve and stainless steel 431
18 Gland nut
for all others materials
19 Scrapper ring Bonnet option P - N - B PTFE
Stainless steel valve Nickel plated carbon steel

20 Actuator clamp nut
All others Zinc plated carbon steel
22 Bonnet extension gasket Graphite and stainless steel
23 Top plate (used on bonnet extension only) Stainless steel 316L
24 Lower spindle bearing housing Stainless steel
Stellite TM 6 for stainless steel valve and stainless steel 431 for all others
25 Lower spindle bearing
materials
26 Spindle lock and anti-rotation nut Stainless steel
Stainless steel A194 Gr8M for Stainless Steel valve and A194 2H for
27 Nut
others valves
Stainless steel A193 GrB8M2 for Stainless Steel valve and A193 B7 for
28 Stud
others valves
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves 4
KEA valve with
extended bonnet (E) * Graphite packing
KEA valve with
Lower and
graphite packing 9
16
High guide
packing
10, 11, 12, 15, 17 and 19
18 Not used
14
4.1
KEA valve with 61
PTFE packing
18
19
20 8
17
15 16 14
28
14
27
13 2
12
11
10
9
DN15 - DN100 KEA with

bellows seal (B) and (C)
6 7 5
22
* PTFE stem sealing
PTFE stem sealing

for vacuum service
KEA valve with bellows seal (D)
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
C v (US) values
C v (US) = C v (UK) x 1.2009
Valve size ½" ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 2" 2½" 3" 4"
High capacity Equal % 5.7 8.3 12.7 20.2 36.0 53.0 104.0 133.0
Equal % 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 73.0 116.0 185.0
Linear 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 73.0 116.0 185.0
Full port
Fast
5.7 8.3 12.7 21.0 36.0 58.0 104.0 135.0 208.0
opening
Reduced Equal % 2.9 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 73.0 116.0
trim 1 Linear 2.9 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 73.0 116.0
Equal % 1.8 2.9 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 73.0
Standard Reduced
trim trim 2 Linear 1.8 2.9 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0 73.0
Reduced Equal % 1.2 1.8 2.9 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0
trim 3 Linear 1.2 1.8 2.9 4.6 7.3 12.0 18.0 29.0 42.0
Reduced Equal % 1.2 1.8 4.6 7.3 18.0

trim 4 Linear 1.2 1.8 4.6 7.3 18.0
Reduced Equal % 1.2 4.6

trim 5 Linear 1.2 4.6
4.1 0.58 0.58 0.6
62 0.23 0.23 0.23
Microflute
0.12 0.12 0.12
(not available with C Seat option)
0.081 0.081 0.081
0.012 0.012 0.012
Note: For low noise and anti-cavitation C v please see TI-S24-59
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves 4
Spira-trol Series Valve
Nominal
DN ½" - 2" 2½" - 4" ½" - 2" 2½" - 4" ½" - 2" 2½" - 4" ½" - 2" 2½" - 4"
Size
Travel mm 20 30 20 30 20 30 20 30
Nominal Pressure Class 125 Class 250 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300
Body Material LEA3 KEA7 LEA4 KEA4 LEA6 KEA6
For Full Temperature/pressure operating curves, please refer to IM-S24- 42
ASME125 200 psi g 200 psi g
ASME250 500 psi g
ASME150 285 psi g 275 psi g

Flanged
Maximum Operating ASME300 740 psi g 720 psi g
Pressure KS10 189 psi g 189 psi g 203 psi g 203 psi g
KS20 493 psi g 493 psi g
Threaded NPT 200 psi g 500 psi g 740 psi g 720 psi g
SW 740 psi g 720 psi g
Std. Bonnet -20 to +450 °F -20 to +450 °F -20 to +482 °F -20 to +482 °F
Operating temperature range Ext. Bonnet -20 to +450 °F -20 to +450 °F -20 to +800 °F -20 to +800 °F
4.1
Bellows -20 to +450 °F -20 to +450 °F -20 to +800 °F -20 to +800 °F
PEEK C 428 °F
63
PEEK P 428 °F
PEEK
K 482 °F
insert
PTFE
Seat G 338 °F
insert
Maximum
Operating 431S29 T
temperature 316L S
800 °F
316L/
W
StelliteTM 6
P and N and B 482 °F

Stem
H and C 572 °F 800 °F
seal
Bellows D 572 °F
ASME125 450 °F 450 °F
ASME250 450 °F
ASME150 800 °F 800 °F

Flanged
Maximum operating ASME300 800 °F 800 °F
temperature KS10 428 °F 450 °F 572 °F 572 °F
KS20 752 °F 752 °F
Threaded NPT 450 °F 450 °F 800 °F 800 °F
SW 800 °F 800 °F
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
Spira-trol Series Valve
Body Material LEA3 KEA7 LEA4 KEA4 LEA6 KEA6
364 °F @ 364 °F @
ASME125
147 psi g 147 psi g
415 °F @
ASME250
279 psi g
389 °F @ 386 °F @
ASME150
203 psi g 196 psi g
Flanged
490 °F @ 468 °F @
ASME300
607 psi g 490 psi g
Body
Maximum 364 °F @ 379 °F @ 383 °F @ 383 °F @
KS10
Saturated 147 psi g 180 psi g 189 psi g 189 psi g
Steam
457 °F @ 457 °F @
Service KS20
437 psi g 437 psi g
364 °F @ 415 °F @ 490 °F @ 468 °F @

Threaded NPT
147 psi g 279 psi g 607 psi g 490 psi g
490 °F @ 468 °F @
SW
607 psi g 490 psi g
Seat C/K/P 414 °F @ 276 psi g
BandC 389 °F @ 203 psi g 386 °F @ 196 psi g

4.1 Bellows
D 385 °F @ 193 psi g 386 °F @ 196 psi g
64 PEEK
Class VI
PTFE
Leakage In accordance to
Metal
Class IEC 60534-4 Class IV (Class V on request)
Stellite TM
Balanced Class IV
Characteristic Equal % Linear Fast Acting
Rangeability 50 : 1 30 : 1 10 : 1
CTLS Issue 2
Valve DN DN15 - 25 (¼" - 1")
Cv 0.012-0.081 0.12-0.23 0.58 1.2 1.8 2.9
TI-S24-72
Actuator type
Stem sealing
CTLS Issue 2
N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
Actuator trust
PN9120E 0.2-1.0 192 51.1 50.2
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 384 51.1 16.0 51.1 16.0 51.1 16.0 51.1 16.0 26.5 0.6 12.2
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 384 51.1 16.0 51.1 16.0 51.1 16.0 51.1 16.0 26.5 0.6 12.2
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 960 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 47.3 16.0
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 1920 51.1 51.1 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.7 16.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 680 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 25.7 16.0 49.8 11.7 16.0
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 1360 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 3400 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6800 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
Valve DN DN15 - 25 (¼" - 1")
Cv 4.6 5.7-7.3 8.3 12 12.7

Actuator type
Stem sealing
N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
Actuator trust
Differential pressure Class IV metal seat standard trim
PN9120E 0.2-1.0 192
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 384 5.1
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 384 5.1
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 960 51.1 29.5 16.0 27.8 12.9 16.0 20.5 8.7 15.4 15.4 5.8 11.2 11.4 3.7 8.0
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 1920 51.1 51.1 8.3 16.0 51.1 51.1 0.9 16.0 51.1 46.4 16.0 45.9 36.4 16.0 36.2 28.5 16.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 680 31.3 4.8 16.0 13.8 7.4 9.5 4.4 6.5 2.3 4.2 0.8
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 1360 51.1 51.1 16.0 47.7 32.7 16.0 36.2 24.4 16.0 28.1 18.6 16.0 21.7 14.0 16.0
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 3400 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6800 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
Control valves
Control systems
Page 9 of 24
65
4.1
4
44
66
4.1
Valve DN DN32 - 50 (1¼" - 2")
Cv 4.6 7.3 12 18
Actuator type
Stem sealing
Page 10 of 24
Actuator type
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 384 7.9

Control valves
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 384 7.9

Control systems
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 960 51.1 31.5 16.0 30.3 15.4 16.0 17.4 7.8 13.2 13.5 5.6 10.1
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 1920 51.1 51.1 11.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 3.4 16.0 47.9 38.4 0.2 16.0 38.8 30.9 16.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 680 33.2 7.6 16.0 16.3 1.4 9.9 8.5 4.3 6.2 2.7
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 1360 51.1 51.1 16.0 50.2 35.2 16.0 30.1 20.6 16.0 24.1 16.2 16.0
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 3400 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6800 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
Valve DN DN32 - 50 (1¼" - 2")
Cv 20.2-21 29 36-42 53-58

Actuator type
Stem sealing
Actuator type
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 384
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 384
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 960 9.5 3.4 6.9 3.6 0.3 2.2 2.3 1.2 1.0
Differential pressure Class IV metal seat standard trim (continued)
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 1920 29.1 23.0 16.0 14.2 10.9 12.7 10.8 8.1 9.6 7.0 5.1 6.2
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 680 3.8 1.2 0.5
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 1360 17.7 11.6 15.0 8.0 4.7 6.6 5.8 3.2 4.7 3.5 1.6 2.7
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 3400 51.1 51.1 25.0 22.6 16.0 30.5 27.2 13.9 10.6 16.0 23.8 21.2 10.6 8.0 16.0 16.3 14.4 6.9 5.0 15.5
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6800 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 37.7 35.8 25.0 25.0 16.0
CTLS Issue 2
TI-S24-72
Valve DN DN65 - 100 (2½" - 4")
Cv 18 29 42 73 - 104 116 - 133 - 135 185 - 208
TI-S24-72
Actuator type
Stem sealing
CTLS Issue 2
Actuator type
PN9230E 0.2-1.0 680 2.8
PN9230E 0.4-1.2 1360 16.6 6.3 5.4 0.9 3.2 0.9
PN9236E 1.0-2.0 3400 51.1 47.8 15.4 5.0 5.0 23.4 18.9 4.9 0.4 0.4 16.0 12.8 2.8 8.2 6.4 0.7 4.7 3.5 2.5 1.8
PN9233E 2.0-4.0 6800 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 48.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 37.4 34.2 24.2 21.0 16.0 20.2 18.4 12.8 11.0 11.0 12.4 11.2 7.6 6.5 6.5 7.3 6.6 4.3 3.6 3.6
PN9330E 0.2-1.0 1340 16.2 5.9 5.2 0.7 3.0 0.9
PN9330E 0.4-1.2 2680 43.5 33.2 0.8 17.0 12.5 11.5 8.3 5.6 3.8 3.1 1.9 1.5 0.7
PN9336E 1.0-2.0 6700 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 48.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 36.7 33.5 23.5 20.3 16.0 19.8 18.0 12.4 10.6 10.6 12.2 11.0 7.4 6.3 6.3 7.1 6.4 4.2 3.5 3.5
PN9337E 2.5-3.5 16750 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 34.9 33.8 25.0 25.0 16.0 21.3 20.6 18.4 17.6 16.0
Differential pressure Class IV metal seat standard trim (continued)
Control valves
Control systems
Page 11 of 24
67
4.1
4
44
68
4.1
Valve DN DN15 - 25 (½" - 1")
Actuator Cv 0.012 - 0.081 - 0.12 - 0.23 0.58-1.2 1.8 2.9 4.6

type
Actuated
Stem sealing
Page 12 of 24
N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
Actuator trust
AEL3 2000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 15.4 16.0
Control valves
AEL51 1000 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 51.1 16.0 51.1 33.1 16.0
Control systems
AEL52 2000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 15.4 16.0
AEL62 2300 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 15.4 16.0
AEL53/63 4500 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
AEL54/64 8000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
AEL55/65 14000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
Valve DN DN15 - 25 (½" - 1")
Actuator Cv 5.7-7.3 8.3 12 12.7

type Stem sealing
Actuator trust
AEL3 2000 51.1 51.1 4.9 16.0 51.1 49.5 2.4 16.0 48.5 38.9 0.7 16.0 38.3 30.5 16.0
AEL51 1000 29.8 14.8 16.0 22.0 10.2 16.0 16.6 7.1 12.5 12.4 4.7 9.1
AEL52 2000 51.1 51.1 4.9 16.0 51.1 49.5 2.4 16.0 48.5 38.9 0.7 16.0 38.3 30.5 16.0
AEL62 2300 51.1 51.1 19.8 4.9 16.0 51.1 51.1 14.2 2.4 16.0 51.1 48.5 10.3 0.7 16.0 46.0 38.3 7.3 16.0
AEL53/63 4500 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
AEL54/64 8000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
AEL55/65 14000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
Differential pressure CLASS IV metal seat - (TandS) - Flow Under - standard trim - Electric
CTLS Issue 2
TI-S24-72
Actuator Valve DN DN32 - 50 (1¼" - 2")
type
Orifice size 4.6 7.3 12 18 20.2 - 21
TI-S24-72
Stem sealing N P H B C N P H B C N P H B C N P H B C N-P H B C D
CTLS Issue 2
Actuator type
AEL3 2000 51.1 51.1 17.8 16.0 51.1 51.1 7.4 16.0 50.5 40.9 2.7 16.0 40.9 33.0 1.4 16.0 30.7 24.6 0.1 16.0
Actuated (continued)
AEL51 1000 51.1 34.9 16.0 32.3 17.3 16.0 18.6 9.1 14.5 14.6 6.7 11.2 10.3 4.2 7.7
AEL52 2000 51.1 51.1 17.8 16.0 51.1 51.1 7.4 16.0 50.5 40.9 2.7 16.0 40.9 33.0 1.4 16.0 30.7 24.6 0.1 16.0
AEL62 2300 51.1 51.1 25.0 17.8 16.0 51.1 51.1 22.3 7.4 16.0 51.1 50.5 12.3 2.7 16.0 48.8 40.9 9.3 1.4 16.0 36.8 30.7 6.3 0.1 16.0
AEL53/63 4500 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
AEL54/64 8000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
AEL55/65 14000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
Actuator Valve DN DN32 - 50 (1¼" - 2")

type
Orifice size 29 36 - 42 53 - 58
Stem sealing N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
Actuator type
AEL3 2000 15.0 11.7 13.6 11.5 8.8 10.3 7.5 5.6 6.7
AEL51 1000 4.0 0.7 2.6 2.7 0.0 1.5 1.2 0.4
AEL52 2000 15.0 11.7 13.6 11.5 8.8 10.3 7.5 5.6 6.7
AEL62 2300 18.3 15.0 1.8 16.0 14.1 11.5 0.9 13.0 9.4 7.5 8.6
AEL53/63 4500 42.6 39.3 25.0 22.8 16.0 33.5 30.9 20.3 17.7 16.0 23.2 21.3 13.8 11.9 16.0
AEL54/64 8000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 45.2 43.3 25.0 25.0 16.0
AEL55/65 14000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
Control valves
Control systems
Page 13 of 24
69
4.1
4
44
70
4.1
Actuator Valve DN DN65 - 100 (2½" - 4")
type
Cv 18 29 42 73 - 104 116 - 133 - 135 185 - 208
Stem sealing P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
Page 14 of 24
Actuator type
AEL51 1000 9.3 2.2 0.9

Control valves
Actuated (continued)
AEL52 2000 29.7 19.3 11.0 6.6 7.2 4.0 3.2 1.4 1.5 0.4 0.5
Control systems
AEL62 2300 35.8 25.4 13.7 9.2 9.1 5.9 4.3 2.5 2.2 1.0 0.9 0.2
AEL53/63 4500 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 33.1 28.6 14.6 10.1 10.1 22.9 19.7 9.7 6.5 6.5 12.1 10.2 4.6 2.8 2.8 7.2 6.0 2.4 1.3 1.3 4.0 3.3 1.1 0.3 0.3
AEL54/64 8000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 44.9 41.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 24.4 22.6 17.0 15.2 15.2 15.1 13.9 10.3 9.2 9.2 9.0 8.2 6.0 5.3 5.3
AEL55/65 14000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 45.7 43.8 25.0 25.0 16.0 28.7 27.5 23.9 22.8 16.0 17.4 16.7 14.5 13.8 13.8
AEL56/66 25000 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 51.1 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 33.0 32.2 25.0 25.0 16.0
CTLS Issue 2
TI-S24-72
Actuator type Valve DN DN15 - 25 (½" - 1")
Cv 0.012 - 0.081 0.12 - 0.23 0.58 1.2 1.8 2.9 4.6 5.7 - 7.3 8.3 12 12.7
TI-S24-72
Stem sealing N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D
CTLS Issue 2
Actuator thrust (N)
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 960 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 17.6 16.0 19.0 13.8 16.0 18.6 10.9 15.3
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 1920 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 680 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 18.1 16.0 19.0 8.9 16.0 18.3 6.6 13.2 14.5 4.9 10.3 11.4 3.6 8.0
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 1360 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0
Actuator type Valve DN DN32 - 50 (1¼" - 2")

Cv 4.6 7.3 12 18 20.2 - 21 29 36-42 53-58
Stem sealing N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
Actuator thrust (N)
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 960 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 13.8 16.0 19.0 11.1 15.6 14.3 8.2 11.7 7.1 3.8 5.7 5.5 2.8 4.3 3.6 1.7 2.8
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 1920 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 17.7 14.4 16.0 13.9 11.3 0.7 12.8 9.7 7.8 8.8
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 680 19.0 17.4 16.0 19.0 8.9 16.0 14.5 4.9 10.3 11.6 3.7 8.2 8.6 2.5 6.0 4.0 0.7 2.6 3.0 0.4 1.9 1.9 1.1
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 1360 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 16.4 16.0 11.5 8.2 10.1 9.0 6.4 7.9 6.1 4.3 5.3
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 3400 19.0 19.0 13.8 11.1 16.0 19.0 17.1 9.5 7.7 16.0
Actuator type Valve DN DN65 - 100 (2½" - 4")

Cv 18 29 42 73-104 116-133-135 185-208
Stem sealing P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
Actuator thrust (N)
PN9230E 0.2-1.0 680 7.6 2.6 1.6 0.5 0.1
PN9230E 0.4-1.2 1360 19.0 11.1 8.6 4.1 5.8 2.6 2.9 1.1 1.7 0.5 0.9 0.1
PN9236E 1.0-2.0 3400 19.0 19.0 19.0 9.8 9.8 19.0 19.0 8.0 3.5 3.5 18.7 15.5 5.5 2.2 2.2 10.2 8.4 2.7 0.9 0.9 6.3 5.1 1.5 0.4 0.4 3.7 3.0 0.8 0.7 0.7
PN9233E 2.0-4.0 6800 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.8 13.0 13.0 14.0 12.8 9.2 8.1 8.1 8.5 7.8 5.6 4.9 4.9
PN9330E 0.2-1.0 1340 19.0 10.7 8.4 3.9 5.7 2.5 2.9 1.1 1.6 0.5 0.8 0.1
PN9330E 0.4-1.2 2680 19.0 15.7 1.7 14.1 10.9 0.9 7.6 5.8 0.2 4.7 3.5 2.7 2.0
PN9336E 1.0-2.0 6700 19.0 19.0 14.4 12.6 12.6 13.8 12.6 9.0 7.9 7.9 8.4 7.7 5.4 4.7 4.7
PN9337E 2.5-3.5 16750 19.0 19.0 19.0 18.9 16.0
Differential pressure Class VI (PandC) - Flow Under - Standard Trim - Pneumatic Actuated
Control valves
Control systems
Page 15 of 24
71
4.1
4
44
72
4.1
Actuator Type Valve size DN15 - 25 (½" - 1")
Cv 0.012 - 0.081 0.12 - 0.23 0.58 1.2 1.8 2.9
Stem sealing N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
Page 16 of 24
Actuator thrust (N)
AEL3 2000 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 9.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 4.7 16.0
Control valves
AEL51 1000 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0
Control systems
AEL52 2000 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 9.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 4.7 16.0
AEL62 2300 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 9.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 4.7 16.0
AEL63 4500 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 9.9* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 4.7* 16.0*
Actuator Type Valve size DN15 - 25 (½" - 1")

Cv 4.6 5.7-7.3 8.3 12 12.7
Stem sealing N-P H B C D N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B D
Actuator thrust (N)
AEL3 2000 19.0 19.0 19.0 2.2 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 11.3 16.0 19.0 19.0 8.7 16.0 19.0 19.0 6.7 16.0
AEL51 1000 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 15.1 16.0 19.0 11.9 16.0
AEL52 2000 19.0 19.0 19.0 2.2 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 11.3 16.0 19.0 19.0 8.7 16.0 19.0 19.0 6.7 16.0
AEL62 2300 19.0 19.0 19.0 2.2 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 11.3 16.0 19.0 19.0 8.7 16.0 19.0 19.0 6.7 18.0
AEL63 4500 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 2.2* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 14.9 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 11.3 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 8.7* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 6.7* 19.0*
Differential pressure Class VI (PandC) - Flow Under - Standard trim - Electric Actuated
CTLS Issue 2
TI-S24-72
Actuator Type Valve size DN32 - 50 (1¼" - 2")
Cv 4.6 7.3 12 18
TI-S24-72
Stem sealing N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
(continued)
CTLS Issue 2
Actuator thrust (N)
AEL3 2000 19.0 19.0 19.0 2.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 8.7 16.0 19.0 19.0 6.9 16.0
AEL51 1000 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 15.1 16.0 19.0 12.1 16.0
AEL52 2000 19.0 19.0 19.0 2.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 8.7 16.0 19.0 19.0 6.9 16.0
AEL62 2300 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 14.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 18.3 8.7 16.0 19.0 19.0 14.8 6.9 16.0
AEL63 4500 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 19.0* 14.9* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 18.3* 8.7* 16.0* 19.0* 19.0* 13.5* 6.9* 16.0*
Actuator Type Valve size DN32 - 50 (1¼" - 2")

Cv 20.2 - 21 29 36 - 42 53 - 58
Stem sealing N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
Actuator thrust (N)
AEL3 2000 19.0 19.0 4.9 16.0 18.6 15.3 2.1 16.0 14.6 12.0 1.4 13.5 10.2 8.3 0.7 9.4
AEL51 1000 15.1 9.0 12.5 7.6 4.3 6.1 5.8 3.2 4.7 3.9 2.0 3.1
AEL52 2000 19.0 19.0 4.9 16.0 18.6 15.3 2.1 16.0 14.6 12.0 1.4 13.5 10.2 8.3 0.7 9.4
AEL62 2300 19.0 19.0 11.1 4.9 16.0 19.0 18.6 5.4 2.1 16.0 17.3 14.6 4.1 1.4 16.0 12.1 10.2 2.6 0.7 11.2
AEL63 4500 19.0* 19.0* 10.0* 4.9* 16.0* 19.0* 18.0* 5.4* 2.1* 16.0* 17.3* 14.6* 4.1* 1.4* 16.0* 12.1* 10.2* 2.6* 0.7* 11.2*
Actuator Type Valve size DN65 - 100 (2½" - 4")

Cv 18 29 42 73 - 104 116 - 133 - 135 185 - 208
Stem sealing P H P H P H P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
Actuator thrust (N)
AEL51 1000 14.1 3.7 5.4 0.9 3.6 0.4 1.7 0.9 0.4
AEL52 2000 19.0 19.0 14.2 9.7 9.9 6.6 5.2 3.4 3.1 2.0 1.8 1.0
AEL62 2300 19.0 19.0 16.9 12.4 11.7 8.5 6.3 4.5 3.8 2.6 2.2 1.5
AEL63 4500 19.0* 19.0* 16.9* 12.4* 11.7* 8.5* 14.1 12.2 6.6 4.8 4.8 8.8 7.6 4.0 2.9 2.9 5.3 4.6 2.3 1.6 1.6
AEL53 4500 14.1 12.2 6.6 4.8 4.8 8.8 7.6 4.0 2.9 2.9 5.3 4.6 2.3 1.6 1.6
AEL54/64 8000 16.7 15.5 11.9 10.8 10.8 10.2 9.5 7.3 6.6 6.6
AEL55/65 14000 18.7 18.0 15.7 15.0 15.0
Differential pressure Class VI (PandC) - Flow Under - Standard trim - Electric Actuated
Note* Actuator Thrust must be set to 50% of maximum.

Control valves
Control systems
Page 17 of 24
73
4.1
4
44 Control systems
Control valves
Dimensions for the Spira-trol TM two-port control valve approximate in mm and (inches)
Screwed Flanged
NPT
Valve size
A B C A1 C1 D E F
KS 10 KS 20
ASME 125 ASME 250 Thread Bellows Extended
and 150 and 300 seals bonnet
DN15 (½") 165 (6½") 44 (1¾") 102 (4") 184 (7"1/4) 190 (7½") 102 (4")
DN20 (¾") 165 (6½") 44 (1¾") 102 (4") 184 (7"1/4) 190 (7½") 102 (4") 237 (9") 336 (13.25")
DN25 (1") 197 (7¾") 57 (2¼") 102 (4") 184 (7¼") 197 (7¾") 102 (4")
69 (2¾") M8
DN32 (1¼") 216 (8½") 57 (2¼") 127 (5") 222 (8"3/4) 127 (8"3/4) 127 (5")
DN40 (1½") 235 (9¼") 63 (2½") 127 (5") 222 (8¾) 235 (9¼") 127 (5") 267 (10½") 354 (13.94)
DN50 (2") 267 (10½") 76 (3") 127 (5") 254 (10") 267 (10½") 127 (5")
DN65 (2½") 267 (10½) 292 (11½") 200 (7 ") 368 (14½")
416 (16.38")
DN80 (3") 298 (11¾) 317 (12½") 200 (7 ") 81 (3") M12 368 (14½")
DN100 (4") 349 (13¾) 368 (14½") 216 (8½") 381 (15") 431 (17")
E
Bellows sealed or
4.1
extended bonnet version
Screwed version Flanged version D
74 E E
D D
C C1
A A1
Weights approximate in kg (and lbs)
KEA valves LEA valves Additional bellows

KEA43 KEA63 KEA73 KEA41 LEA31 LEA33 LEA43 LEA63 and Extended
KEA42 bonnet
Valve size KEA61
KEA62
KEA71
DN15 (½") 7.3 (16) 7.3 (16) 7.3 (16) 7.3 (16) 7.3 (16) 7.3 (16) 7.3 (16) 7.3 (16)
DN20 (¾") 8.2 (18) 8.2 (18) 8.2 (18) 7.3 (16) 7.3 (16) 8.2 (18) 8.2 (18) 8.2 (18) 4.5 (10)
DN25 (1") 9.1 (20) 9.1 (20) 9.1 (20) 10 (22) 10 (22) 13.2 (29) 13.6 (30) 13.6 (30)
DN32 (1¼") 14.1 (31) 14.1 (31) 13.2 (29) 11.3 (25) 11.3 (25) 13.6 (30) 14.1 (31) 14.1 (31)
DN40 (1½") 16.3 (36) 16.3 (36) 14.1 (31) 14.1 (31) 14.1 (31) 14.1 (31) 16.3 (36) 16.3 (36) 5.5 (12)
DN50 (2") 17.2 (38) 18.1 (40) 17.2 (38) 15 (33) 15 (33) 17.2 (38) 17.2 (38) 17.2 (38)
DN65 (2½") 35.4 (78) 35.4 (78) 38.1 (84) 38 (84) 38 (84) 38 (84)
10 (21)
DN80 (3") 39 (86) 40.4 (89) 41.3 (91) 41 (91) 40 (89) 40 (89)
DN100 (4") 56.2 (124) 56.2 (124) 59.9 (132) 60 (132) 56 (124) 56 (124) 13 (28)
Page 18 of 24 TI-S24-72
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves 4
Weight
and variants
PN9100E 55 2 " +5.86 +13.00

170 6 A" 275 10⅞"" 225 8 " 6 13.25
PN9100R 140 5½" +2.50 +5.50
PN9200E 55 2 " +7.20 +15.75

300 11 " 300 11⅞" 225 8 " 17 37.50
PN9200R 140 5½" +3.77 +8.50
PN9320E 65 2 " +7.20 +15.75

390 15½" 325 12⅞" 350 13¾" 27 59.50
PN9320R 150 15 " +3.77 +8.50
PN9330E 65 2 " +7.20 +15.75

390 15½" 335 13 " 350 13¾" 27 59.50
PN9330R 150 15⅞" +3.77 +8.50
TN2000E +5.00 +11.25

284 11¼" 334 13 " 144 5 " 350 13¾" 18 40.50
TN2000R +6.00 +13.50
TN2000DA 284 11¼" 334 13 " 16 36.00
TN2100E
4.1
405 16" 369 14½" 402 15 " 330 13" 37 83.25 +23.00 +51.75
TN2100R
TN2100DA 405 16" 369 14½" 30 67.50

75
F Dimensions/weights
J AEL actuator ranges
for the
approximate in mm and kgs (and in inches and lbs)
H
Actuator F G Weight
Actuator F range mm inches mm inches kg lbs
H J 230 9"
AEL3 x x 283 11 ¼" 5.7 12.5
149 6"
G
Actuator
AEL55
and 180 7" 557 22" 10.0 22.0
G AEL65
AEL51,
AEL52,
AEL53,
177 7" 459 18" 5.0 11.0
AEL62
and
AEL63
AEL54
and 177 7" 490 19" 7.0 15.5
AEL64
AEL56
Top mounted and 226 9" 760 30" 20.0 44.0
handwheel Side mounted handwheel AEL66
TI-S24-72 Page 19 of 24
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
Spare parts
Spira-trol TM two-port control valve

DN15 to DN100 - ½" to 4"
The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn in broken line are not supplied as spares.

Actuator clamping nut A A
PTFE packing C
* Equal percentage trim

D, E
(No gaskets supplied) C
C2
C1
D1, E
Linear trim
D2, E
76 PTFE soft seat seal H D1 D2
How to order spares

* Always order spares by using the description given in the column
Example: 1 - PTFE stem seal kit for a Spirax Sarco DN25

Spira-trol TM two-port KE43 PTSUSS.2 Kv 10 control valve.
How to fit spares D

Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare. Soft seat
(G and K) B
arrangement
H
E
G
* PTFE stem sealing
PTFE stem sealing

for vacuum service
Page 20 of 24 TI-S24-72
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves 4
Spare parts
Spira-trol TM two-port control valve with bellows seal - Type D

DN15 to DN100 - ½" to 4"


C3
Graphite secondary seal and gasket
Stem seal kit C3
set
*Equal percentage trim

D6, E A

D7, E
Linear trim
D8, E
Bellows seal assembly F
* PTFE soft seat seal H

4.1
77
How to order spares
headed 'Available spares', and state the size and type of valve including
the full product description of the product.
Example: 1 - Graphite stem seal kit for a Spirax Sarco DN25 Spira-
trol TM two-port KE43B TSUSS.2 Kv 10 control valve.
How to fit spares

F
D7 D8
D6
Soft Seat B
(G and K)
arrangement
H
E
G
TI-S24-72 Page 21 of 24
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
Spare parts A
Spira-trol TM two-port control valve with bellows seal - Types B and

C
DN15 to DN100 - ½" to 4"
The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn in grey line are not
supplied as spares.
C
C2
Note: When placing an order for spare parts please specify clearly the full product
C1
spare parts are supplied.

PTFE packing C
Graphite seal set C2 B

* Equal percentage trim (No gaskets supplied) D9, E B
Plug stem and seat kit Fast opening trim (No gaskets supplied) D10, E
F
4.1 Linear trim (No gaskets supplied) D11, E
78 Bellow seal assembly F
PTFE soft seat seal H
* How to order spares

spares', and state the size and type of valve including the full product description of the
product.
Example: 1 - PTFE stem seal kit for a Spirax Sarco DN25 Spira-trol TM two-port KE43B
TSUSS.2 Kv 10 control valve.
How to fit spares

Full fitting instructions are given in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied
with the spare. D10 D11
B
Soft seat
(G and K)
arrangement D9
E
G
Page 22 of 24 TI-S24-72
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves 4
ASME
Valve size = ½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½", 2", 2½", 3" and 4" 1"1/2
standard
K = K series 2-port control valve

Valve series K
L = L Series 2-port control valve
L = Linear
Flange type A = ASME A
Blank = under
Flow Blank
T = over
3 = Cast iron
4 = Carbon steel
Body material 4
6 = Stainless steel
7 = SG iron
1 = Screwed
Connections 2 = Socket weld 3

4.1
3 = Flanged
B = Bellows/PTFE secondary seals

79
C = Bellows/graphite secondary seals
D = Bellows/graphite secondary seals
Stem sealing H = Graphite P
N = PTFE with NitronicTM bush - DN15 to DN50 only
P = PTFE
C = Reverseable PEEK Seat
G = PTFE soft seat
K = PEEK soft seat
W = 316L with stelliteTM 6 facing

Type of trim S
S = Standard trim
TI-S24-72 Page 23 of 24
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
B = Balanced (not available with seating option C)

Trim balancing U
U = Unbalanced
E = Extended
Bonnet type S
S = Standard
Blank = Standard
Finish
N = ENP coating
Series 2 = .2 .2
Cv To be specified Cv29
Flanged
Connection type To be specified Class
300
Selection example:
1"1/2 - K E A 4 3 P T S U S S .2 - Cv29 - Flanged Class 300
How to order
4.1 Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco Spira-trol TM KEA43PTSUSS.2 Cv29 two-port control valve having flanged Class 300 connections.
80
Page 24 of 24 TI-S24-72
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Control valves
TI-S24-59
CH Issue 4
Balanced and Multi-stage Trim Options

for Spira-trolTM
Two-port Control Valves
Description
The Spira-trol TM range of two-port valves is available with
2 stage
alternative trim options to make it possible to select a valve Low noise balanced trim
configuration to suit an individual application. This Technical
Information sheet covers balanced and multi-stage trim options Page 4
and should be used in conjunction with the appropriate valve
Technical Information sheet. Low noise unbalanced trim
Pages 6 and 7
Please see the product specific Technical Information (TI) sheet
for valve limitations.
4.1
81
1 stage
Parabolic balanced trim
Anti-cavitation balanced trim
Pages 2 and 3
Page 4
Anti-cavitation unbalanced trim
Pages 6 and 7
Low noise balanced trim
Anti-cavitation balanced trim
Pages 4 and 5
3 stage
Low noise balanced trim
Low noise unbalanced trim
Page 8
Anti-cavitation unbalanced trim
Low noise unbalanced trim
Pages 4 and 5
Page 8
Page 1 of 9
44 Control systems
Control valves
1 stage parabolic balanced trim
Model availability
This trim is available for the Spira-trolTM JE, JEA, KE, KEA and LEA only.
Sizes
DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80, DN100, DN125, DN150, DN200, DN250 and DN300.

Trim design Parabolic 100
Metal-to-metal Class IV Fast opening
Leakage
Soft seal Class IV
Flow %
Equal % 50:1 50 Linear
Rangeability Linear 30:1
Fast 10:1 Equal percentage
DN40 to DN50 20 mm 00 50 100

Travel DN65 to DN100 30 mm Valve opening %
DN125 to DN300 70 mm
4.1
82
3 2
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Cage gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
2 Plug seal Graphite
3 Cage retainer CF8M
4 Plug and stem 431 stainless steel / 316L stainless steel / 316L with stellite 6 facing
5 Seat ring PTFE soft seat / PEEK soft seat / Full PEEK / 431 stainless steel / 316L stainless steel / 316L with stellite facing
Page 2 of 9 TI-S24-59 CH Issue 4
Balanced and Multi-stage Trim Options for Spira-trolTM Two-port Control Valves
Control systems
Control valves 4
1 stage parabolic balanced trim (continued)
Kv (Cv US) values
For conversion: C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
Trim DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100 DN125 DN150 DN200 DN250 DN300
Equal 25 36 63 100 160 245 370 580 700 1 000

percentage (30) (45) (75) (120) (190) (283) (433) (679) (809) (1 156)
Full port
25 36 63 100 160 260 390 640 780 1 100
Linear
(30) (45) (75) (120) (190) (300) (456) (749) (902) (1 272)
Equal 25 36 63 100 200 287 370 580 700

percentage (33) (48) (85) (130) (231) (336) (433) (670) (809)
Reduction 1
25 36 63 100 200 287 550 640 780
Linear
(33) (48) (85) (130) (231) (336) (433) (740) (902)
Equal 25 36 63 100 132 232 370 580 4.1

percentage (36) (50) (90) (116) (154) (271) (428) (670)
Reduction 2 83
25 36 63 100 132 232 550 640
Linear
(36) (50) (90) (116) (154) (271) (636) (740)
Equal 25 36 63 103 163 232 370

percentage (38) (53) (73) (120) (191) (268) (428)
Reduction 3
25 36 63 103 163 232 550
Linear
(38) (53) (73) (120) (191) (268) (636)
Equal 163 232

percentage (188) (268)
Reduction 4
163 232
Linear
(188) (268)
Equal 163
percentage (188)
Reduction 5
163
Linear
(188)
28 50 85 117 180 260 390 640 780 1 100

Fast opening (32) (50) (88) (136) (210) (300) (456) (749) (902) (1 272)
TI-S24-59 CH Issue 4 Page 3 of 9
44 Control systems
Control valves
1 stage perforated trim
Model availability
This trim is available for the Spira-trolTM JE, JEA, KE, KEA, LE and LEA.
Sizes
DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80, DN100, DN125, DN150, DN200, DN250 and DN300.

Trim design Perforated 100
Metal-to-metal Class IV Fast opening
Leakage Soft seal Unbalanced Class VI
Flow %
Balanced Class IV 50 Linear
Rangeability 50:1
DN40 to DN50 20 mm Equal percentage
Travel DN65 to DN100 30 mm 00 50 100

DN125 to DN300 70 mm Valve opening %
4.1
84
Anti-cavitation
1 stage
balanced trim
Low noise 1 stage Low noise 1 stage
balanced trim unbalanced trim
1
1
3
3 3 2
3 4
2
4 4
4 5
5 5 5
For DN15 to DN25

Anti-cavitation are only available
unbalanced with parabolic plug
Anti-cavitation
1 stage
unbalanced trim
Materials
No. Part Material
2 Plug seal Graphite 3

4
4 Plug and stem 431 stainless steel / 316L stainless steel / 316L with stellite 6 facing
PTFE soft seat / PEEK soft seat / Full PEEK / 431 stainless steel / 5
5 Seat ring
316L stainless steel / 316L with stellite facing
Control systems
Control valves 4
1 stage perforated trim (continued)
Kv (Cv US) values
Trim DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100 DN125 DN150 DN200 DN250 DN300
Full port 4 6.3 10 16 25 25 50 80 551 787

Equal percentage (4.6) (7.3) (11.6) (18.5) (29) (29) (58) (92) (637) (909)
Full port 4 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 70 90 245 300 516 622 890

Linear (4.6) (7.3) (11.6) (18.5) (29) (42) (73) (81) (104) (283) (347) (596) (719) (1 028)
Reduction 1 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 36 50 63 219 255 457 551

Equal percentage (2.9) (4.6) (7.3) (11.6) (18.5) (29) (42) (58) (73) (253) (295) (528) (637)
Reduction 1 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 63 219 255 457 516 622

Linear (2.9) (4.6) (7.3) (11.6) (18.5) (29) (42) (73) (73) (253) (295) (528) (596) (719)
Reduction 2 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 36 50 115 200 350 457

Equal percentage (1.8) (2.9) (4.6) (7.3) (11.6) (18.5) (29) (42) (58) (133) (231) (405) (528)
and Linear
Reduction 2 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 36 50 115 200 350 457 4.1

Linear (1.8) (2.9) (4.6) (7.3) (11.6) (18.5) (29) (42) (58) (133) (231) (405) (528)
85
Reduction 3 1.0 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 16 25 36 152 265 350 457
Equal percentage 75 (87)
(1.2)* (1.8) (2.9) (4.6) (7.3) (11.6) (18.5) (29) (42) (176) (306) (405) (528)
and Linear
Reduction 4 0.5 1.0 1.6 4 6.3 16 16 265 457

Equal percentage (0.6)* (1.2)* (1.8) (4.6) (7.3) (18.5) (18.5) (306) (528)
and Linear
Reduction 5 0.2 0.5 1.0 4 175 350

Equal percentage (0.2)* (0.6)* (1.2)* (4.6) (203) (405)
and Linear
Reduction 6 0.1 0.2 0.5 100 265

Equal percentage (0.1)* (0.2)* (0.6)* (116) (306)
and Linear
Reduction 7 0.1 0.2 175

Equal percentage (0.1)* (0.2)* (203)
and Linear
Reduction 8 0.1 100

Equal percentage (0.1)* (116)
and Linear
* Only available in Anti-cavitation
44 Control systems
Control valves
2 stage perforated trim
Model availability
This trim is available for the Spira-trolTM JE, JEA, KE, KEA, LE and LEA.
Sizes
DN32, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80, DN100, DN125, DN150, DN200, DN250 and DN300.

Trim design Perforated 100
Leakage Hard facing Class IV Fast opening
Rangeability 50:1
Flow %
DN40 to DN50 20 mm 50 Linear
DN125 to DN300 70 mm Equal percentage
00 50 100
Valve opening %
4.1
86 Low noise 2 stage
balanced trim Anti-cavitation
2 stage
balanced trim
1
1
3
2 3
4
2
5 4
5 Anti-cavitation
2 stage
unbalanced trim
Low noise 2 stage
unbalanced trim
3
4
4 5
Materials
No. Part Material
4 Plug and stem 431 stainless steel / 316L with stellite 6 facing
5 Seat ring 316L with stellite 6 facing / Full PEEK
Control systems
Control valves 4
2 stage perforated trim (continued)
Kv (Cv US) values
Trim DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100 DN125 DN150 DN200 DN250 DN300
Full port 16 16 16 44 44 63 125 160 280 305 386

Equal percentage (18.5) (18.5) (18.5) (51) (51) (73) (145) (185) (324) (353) (446)
Full port 16 16 16 50 50 63 125 160 280 305 436

Linear (18.5) (18.5) (18.5) (58) (58) (73) (145) (185) (324) (353) (504)
Reduction 1 10 10 10 36 36 36 100 100 160 280 305

and Linear
Reduction 2 6.3 6.3 6.3 25 25 25 63 63 100 160 280

and Linear
4.1
Reduction 3 4 4 4 16 16 16 36 36 63 100 160
Equal percentage
and Linear
(4.6) (4.6) (4.6) (18.5) (18.5) (18.5) (42) (42) (73) (116) (185) 87
Reduction 4 10 10 10 25 36 63 100
Equal percentage (11.6) (11.6) (11.6) (29) (42) (73) (116)
and Linear
Reduction 5 6.3 6.3 36 63

Equal percentage (7.3) (7.3) (42) (73)
and Linear
Reduction 6 36
Equal percentage (42)
and Linear
44 Control systems
Control valves
3 stage low noise trim
Model availability Low noise 3 stage
This trim is available for the Spira-trol TM JE, JEA, KE, KEA,LE balanced trim
and LEA.
Low noise 3 stage
unbalanced trim
Sizes
DN32, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80, DN100, DN125, DN150, DN200,
DN250 and DN300.
Technical data 4
Trim design Perforated
1 3
Leakage Hard facing Class IV
Rangeability 50:1 3
DN40 to DN50 20 mm
2
DN125 to DN300 70 mm 4
Typical flow characteristic curves 5
4.1 100
88 Fast opening
Materials
Flow %
50 Linear No. Part Material

Equal percentage
00 50 100 3 Cage retainer CF8M
Valve opening %
4 Plug and stem 316L with stellite 6 facing
5 Seat ring 316L with stellite 6 facing / Full PEEK

Kv (Cv US) values
For conversion: Cv (UK) = Kv x 0.963
Trim DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100 DN125 DN150 DN200 DN250 DN300
Full port 13 13 13 25 25 36 78 100 180 223 282

Equal percentage (15) (15) (15) (29) (29) (42) (90) (116) (208) (258) (326)
Full port 13 13 13 25 25 36 78 100 180 282 319

Linear (15) (15) (15) (29) (29) (42) (90) (116) (208) (326) (369)
Reduction 1 10 10 10 16 16 25 63 63 160 180 223

Equal percentage and Linear (11.6) (11.6) (11.6) (18.5) (18.5) (29) (73) (73) (185) (208) (258)
Reduction 2 6.3 6.3 6.3 10 10 16 36 36 100 160 180

Equal percentage and Linear (7.3) (7.3) (7.3) (11.6) (11.6) (18.5) (42) (42) (116) (185) (208)
Reduction 3 4 4 4 6.3 6.3 10 25 25 36 100 160

Equal percentage and Linear (4.6) (4.6) (4.6) (7.3) (7.3) (11.6) (29) (29) (42) (116) (185)
Reduction 4 4 4 6.3 16 36 100

Equal percentage and Linear (4.6) (4.6) (7.3) (18.5) (42) (116)
Reduction 5 10 36
Equal percentage and Linear (11.6) (42)
Control systems
Control valves 4
Spira-trolTM selection guide
Valve size DN15 to DN300 DN40
J = J series 2-port control valve

Valve series K = K series 2-port control valve K
L = L series 2-port control valve
Valve
F = Fast opening E
characteristic
L = Linear
Blank = EN
Type of flange A
A = ASME (ANSI)
Blank = Flow under

Flow T
T = Flow over
3 = Cast iron
4 = Carbon steel
7 = SG iron
8 = Alloy steel
1 = Screwed
2 = Socket Welded
Connections 3
3 = Flanged
4 = Butt Welded
N
P
=
=
PTFE / Nitronic bush
PTFE 4.1
H = Graphite
Stem sealing
D = Bellows / Graphite secondary seals
D
89
B = Bellows / PTFE chevron seals
C = Bellows / Graphite seals

P = Full PEEK seat
G = PTFE soft seat
Seating K
K = PEEK soft seat
S = Standard trim
P1 = Low noise cage 1 stage
Type of trim P1
A1 = Anti-cavitation cage 1 stage
A2 = Anti-cavitation cage 2 stage
U = Unbalanced
Trim balancing B
B = Balanced
S = Standard
Bonnet type S
E = Extended high temperature
S = Standard
Bolting S
Blank = Standard
Finish
N = ENP coating
Series .2 = .2 .2
Kvs (Cv) To be specified C v30
Connection type To be specified Flanged ASME 300
Selection example:
DN40 - K E A T 4 3 D K P1 B S S .2 - Cv 30 - Flanged ASME 300
Available spares
Balanced gasket set Parts 1, 2
44 Control systems
Control valves
4.1
90
Control systems
Control valves
TI-P359-14
CTLS Issue 5
QLM and QLD Series

Three-port Control Valves
Description
The QLM and QLD are three-port control valves which have linear characteristics for mixing
or diverting service. These valves can be used on thermal oil, compressed air, steam,
condensate and some other fluids.They are available in four body materials: cast iron, SG
iron, carbon steel or stainless steel. All valves can be supplied with the standard metal-to-
metal seats, stellite facing for increased resistance to wear or soft seats for tight shut-off.
The standard stem sealing is by spring adjusted PTFE chevrons but high temperature
graphite seals or metal bellows with supplementary safety packing may also be specified.
The QLM and QLD three port control valves can be used with the following actuators:
PN5700 series EL7200 series
4.1
PN6700 series Electric: AEL5
PN7000 series AEL6
Pneumatic:
PN8000 series 91
PN9000E series
PN9000R series
Technical data
Plug design "V" Port
Plug characteristic Linear
Metal- to-metal seal EN 60534-4 Class IV
Leakage class Stellite faced Maximum of 0.005% of Kv
PTFE soft seal EN 60534-4 Class VI
Rangeability 30:1
DN15 - DN50 20 mm
Travel DN65 - DN100 30 mm
DN125 - DN200 50 mm

All valve flanges referred to in this document are in accordance with EN 1092.
Note: JIS and ASME flange options are also available on request.
Type Body material Connection Size range
QL33M Cast iron PN16 DN15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150 and 200
QLM: * Note: QL43M,

QL43M* Carbon steel PN25/PN40 DN15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150 and 200
Mixing QL43D, QL63M
service QL63M* Stainless steel PN25/PN40 DN15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150 and 200 and QL63D
three-port control
QL73M SG iron PN16/PN25 DN15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150 and 200 valves are also
available with PN16
QL33D Cast iron PN16 DN25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150 and 200 flanges by special
order.
QLD: QL43D* Carbon steel PN25/PN40 DN25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150 and 200
Diverting
service QL63D* Stainless steel PN25/PN40 DN25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150 and 200
QL73D SG iron PN16/PN25 DN25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150 and 200
Page 1 of 11
44 Control systems
Control valves
Operating limit conditions
QL33M and QL33D (cast iron)
Bonnet
Body Standard Extended Bellows
PTFE Graphite PTFE Graphite PN16 PN25
Pressure
16 13 16 13 16 13 - - 16 13 -
(bar)
Temperature
-5/+120 200 -5/+120 200 -5/+120 200 - - -5/+120 200 -
( °C)
QL73M and QL73D (SG iron)

Bonnet
Pressure
25 15 25 18.7 25 18 25 18 25 15 16 11 25 15
(bar)
Temperature
-10/+120 300 -5/+120 232 -5/+120 250 -10/+120 250 -10/+120 300 -10/+120 300 -10/+120 300
( °C)
QL43M and QL43D (carbon steel)

Bonnet
4.1
92 Pressure
40 21 40 33 40 32 40 32 40 21 16 10 25 16
(bar)
Temperature
-29/+120 400 -5/+120 232 -5/+120 250 -29/+120 250 -29/+120 400 -10/+120 350 -10/+120 350
( °C)
QL63M and QL63D (stainless steel)

Bonnet
Pressure
40 22.1 40 26.8 40 26.2 40 26.2 40 22 16 10 25 16
(bar)
Temperature
-29/+120 400 -5/+120 232 -5/+120 250 -29/+120 250 -29/+129 400 -10/+120 350 -10/+120 350
( °C)
Differential pressure
For the maximum available differential pressures, see the relevant pneumatic or electrical actuator Technical Information sheets.
Page 2 of 11 TI-P359-14
CTLS Issue 5
QLM and QLD Three-port Control Valves
Control systems
Control valves 4
A
A - B Flanged PN16
Temperature °C
QL33M and QL33D
(cast iron)
Pressure bar g
A - B Flanged PN25
Temperature °C
A - C Flanged PN16
QL73M and QL73D
(SG iron) Steam saturation curve
Pressure bar g
A - B Flanged PN40
4.1
Temperature °C
A - C Flanged PN25
QL43M and QL43D
(carbon steel) 93
Pressure bar g
A - B Flanged PN40
Temperature °C
A - C Flanged PN25
QL63M and QL63D
(stainless steel)
Pressure bar g
High temperature packing is required.
QL33M and QL33D PN16
Body design conditions QL43M, QL43D, QL63M and QL63D PN40
QL73M and QL73D PN25
Maximum differential pressures See specific actuator Technical Information Sheet.
PTFE Maximum 232 °C

Standard bonnet
Graphite Maximum 250 °C
Stem seal:
PTFE Maximum 250 °C
Extended bonnet
Graphite Maximum 400 °C
TI-P359-14 Page 3 of 11
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Control valves
Materials - Cast iron, SG iron and carbon steel valves
Material designation
ASTM/DIN STD
1 Body Cast iron EN-GJL-250
Cast iron Standard bonnet SG iron EN-GJS-400-18

2
Extended bonnet Carbon steel 1.0460
1 Body SG iron EN-GJS-400-18
SG iron Standard bonnet SG iron EN-GJS-400-18

2
1 Body Carbon steel 1.0619
Carbon steel Standard bonnet Carbon steel 1.7131

2
3 Plug(s) Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
4 Valve seats Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
Valve stem Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29

5
Bellows Stainless steel AISI 316 L
4.1 6 Spacer Stainless steel AISI 304
94 7 Stuffing box gasket Graphite
8 Lock-nut Stainless steel AISI 304
9 Stuffing box Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
10 Mounting nut Zinc plated steel NFA 35553 XC 18S

Cast iron 11 Packing PTFE/graphite PTFE/graphite
SG iron 12 Spring Stainless steel BS 2056 316 S42
Carbon steel 13 Bonnet gasket Graphite
14 Stud Carbon steel A193 B7M
15 Nut Carbon steel A194 Gr. 2H
17 Guide bush PTFE
18 Stem guide bush Stainless steel Hardened AISI 440B
20 Pin Stainless steel AISI 316
21 Gasket Graphite
22 Anti-rotation screw Stainless steel AISI 304
Page 4 of 11 TI-P359-14
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
Control valves 4
77
1111
1919
1010
2222
2121
22
55
88
55
77 99
1111 1010
1717
Bellows
Bellowsgland
glandseal
seal 1212 1414
1515
22
1313
1818
11
44
4.1
AA AB
AB
95
33
88 1616
55
99 BB
1010
1111 QLM
QLMMixing
Mixingvalve
valve
1717
1212 1414
1515
22
1313
11
1818
2020
1616
33
44 66
AA AB
AB
44 33
1616
BB
QLD
QLDDiverting
Divertingvalve
valve
TI-P359-14
TI-P359-14 Page
Page5 5ofof1111
CTLS
CTLSIssue
Issue5 5
QLM
QLMand
andQLD
QLDThree-port
Three-portControl
ControlValves
Valves
44 Control systems
Control valves
Materials - Stainless steel valves
Material designation
ASTM/DIN STD
1 Body Stainless steel 1.4552
Standard bonnet Stainless steel 1.4552

2
Extended bonnet Stainless steel ASTM A182 F316
3 Valve plug Stainless steel ASTM A351 CF8M
4 Valve seat Stainless steel ASTM A276 316L
Valve stem Stainless steel ASTM A276 316L

5
Bellows Stainless steel AISI 316 L
6 Spacer Stainless steel AISI 316
7 Stuffing box gasket Stainless steel AISI 304
9 Stuffing box Stainless steel AISI 316
10 Mounting nut Zinc plated steel NFA 35553 XC 18S

Stainless steel
11 Packing PTFE/graphite PTFE/graphite
4.1 12 Spring Stainless steel BS 2056 316 S42
96 13 Bonnet gasket Graphite
14 Stud Stainless steel A193 B8
15 Nut Stainless steel A194 Gr. 304
17 Guide bush PTFE
18 Stem guide bush Stainless steel Hard faced AISI 316
20 Pin Stainless steel AISI 316
21 Gasket Graphite
22 Anti-rotation screw Stainless steel AISI 304
Page 6 of 11 TI-P359-14
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
Control valves 4
7
11
19
10
22
21
2
5
8
5
7 9
11 10
17
Bellows gland seal 12 14
15
2
13
18
1
4
4.1
A AB
97
3
8 16
9 B
10
11 QLM Mixing valve
17
12 14
15
2
13
1
18
20
16
3
4 6
A AB
4 3
16
B
QLD Diverting valve
TI-P359-14 Page 7 of 11
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Control valves
Kv flowrate coefficients and travel
Nominal size DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100 DN125 DN150 DN200
Travel mm 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 50 50 50
Mixing service Kv 4 6 10 17 25 35 62 100 130 195 310 450
Diverting service Kv - - 10 17 25 35 62 100 130 195 310 450
Kv flowrate coefficients are shown in metric units (Kv = water flowrate in m 3 /h with 1 bar differential pressure).
For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Dimensions and weights (approximate) in mm and kg

Weights (kg)
Dimensions (mm)
Size Bonnets
A D C C1* Standard Extended/Bellows
DN15 130 90 105 166 7.0 166.0
DN20 150 95 105 166 6.9 8.3

4.1 DN25 160 100 109 170 8.8 10.2
98 DN32 180 105 124 185 11.0 12.4
DN40 200 115 137 190 14.5 15.9
DN50 230 125 143 196 18.5 20.0
DN65 290 145 160 357 31.0 33.0
DN80 310 155 165 361 40.8 42.8
DN100 350 175 180 373 48.5 50.5
DN125 400 200 280 445 78.0 81.0
DN150 480 225 300 463 115.0 118.0
DN200 600 275 370 554 143.0 147.0
Note: The C1 dimension shown refers to valves fitted with an extended bonnet, with or without PN16 and PN25 bellows.
C, C1
Page 8 of 11 TI-P359-14
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
Control valves 4
Q series control valve selection guide:
DN15 and DN20 (mixing service only)
Valve size DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80, DN100, DN120, DN25
DN150 and DN200 (mixing and diverting service)
Valve series Q = Q series 3-port Q
L = Linear
Valve characteristic L
3 = Cast iron
4 = Carbon steel
7 = SG iron
Connections 3 = Flanged 3
D = Diverting
3-port design M = Mixing M
Blank = Standard PTFE chevron
H = Graphite packing
B1 = PN16 bellows seal

Stem sealing
B2 = PN25 bellows seal
4.1
Blank = Standard metal-to-metal
W = Hard facing (stellite)

99
Seating option
G = Soft seal (PTFE)
Blank = Standard
Other options
X = Extended bonnet
Flow coefficient To be specified Kv10
Connection type To be specified PN40
Selection example:
DN25 Q L 4 3 M Kv10 PN40
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN25 QL43M Kvs10 flanged to PN40.
TI-P359-14 Page 9 of 11
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Control valves
Spare parts
The spare parts available are in heavy outline. Parts drawn in broken line are not supplied as spares.
These spares are for the following valves:-
QL33D, QL43D, QL63D, QL73D Diverting DN25 to DN200
QL33M, QL43M, QL63M, QL73M Mixing DN15 to DN200
Available spares
A B
PTFE gland seal kit for DN15 to DN50 only B
(gasket, chevrons, spring, upper and lower bearings and 'O' ring)
PTFE gland seal kit for DN65 to DN100 only B1

(gasket, chevrons, guide bush, spring)
PTFE gland seal kit for DN125 to DN200 only B2

(gasket, chevrons, guide bush, spring)
Graphite gland seal kit for DN15 to DN200 C

(graphite stem seals and stuffing box gasket)
Stem, plug and bonnet gasket D, E C

B1
Bonnet gasket (packet of 3) E B
Seats (1 off top and bottom) F
4.1 Note: PTFE and graphite seal kits are suitable for stuffing box and
extended bonnet versions.
100
Mixing
Diverting E
Page 10 of 11 TI-P359-14
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
Control valves 4
Available spares for valves with bellows seal
Graphite gland seal kit (packing set) AS
Seats (2 items) BS
Bonnet gasket (packet of 3) CS
Bellows gasket (packet of 3) DS
Bellows, stem, plug Mixing valves FS, CS, DS
and bellows gasket Diverting valves FS, CS, DS
AS
DS
ES/FS
CS
4.1
101
How to order spares
Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares', and state the size and type of valve including
the date code of the product.
Example: 1 - PTFE gland seal kit for a Spirax Sarco DN65 QL43M three port control valve. Date coded C03.
How to fit spares

Full fitting instructions are given in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare.
TI-P359-14 Page 11 of 11
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Control valves
4.1
102
Control systems
Control valves
TI-P183-02
CTLS Issue 9
Steri-trol Aseptic Service

'S' series Two-port Pneumatic Control Valves -
DN15 (½") to DN100 (4")
Description
Steri-trol 'S' series are two-port control valves manufactured using 316L stainless steel. They are designed for modulating control of
clean steam, pure steam and process fluids. The valve is operated by a pneumatic actuator and may be interfaced with a control system
using any of the Spirax Sarco range of positioners.
Available types
SB Two-port angle pattern design with aseptic steam sanitized bonnet
SA Two port angle pattern design (for chemical free steam)
Valve characteristics - options:

4.1
SBE Equal percentage (E) - Suitable for most modulating process
SAE control applications good control providing at low flowrates. 103
SBL Linear (L) - Primarily for liquid flow control where the
SAL differential pressure across the valve is constant.
Approvals and certification

Compliant to ASME BPE SF4 2019, internal surface finish 0.375 μm,
FDA, and USP 26 Class VI approved sealing materials.
EN 10204 type 3.1 certificates supplied as standard. Surface finish
certificate supplied as standard.
Valve seating - options

S Metal-to-metal (as standard) - Stainless steel
V Soft seal - White Viton to provide a tight shut-off
Valve stem sealing - options

V White Viton - USP 26 Class VI approved
The Steri-trol can be used with the following actuators

Pneumatic PNS3000, PNS4000, PN9000E and PN9000R series
Refer to the relevant actuator Technical Information sheet for further

details.
TI-P183-02 CTLS Issue 9 Page 1 of 15
Steri-trol Aseptic Service 'S' series Two-port Pneumatic Control Valves - DN15 (½") to DN100 (4")
44 Control systems
Control valves
Technical data
Plug design DN15 to DN100 Parabolic
Metal-to-metal (0.01% of Kv)

Leakage
Soft seal IEC 534-4 Class VI
Equal percentage 50:1

Rangeability
Linear 30:1
DN15 to DN50 (½" to 2") 20 mm

Travel
DN65 to DN100 (2½" to 4") 30 mm
Internal (Mechanical or electro polished) < 0.375 μ m

Surface finish
External < 0.6 μ m
Sizes and end connections

Connections Size range
Butt weld/tube weld, screwed, flanged and DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80 and DN100
sanitary clamp
½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½", 2", 2½", 3" and 4"
Notes: - DN15, DN20 and DN32 is not available for certain end connections - see page 13.
4.1 - If you require a pipe end connection which has not been mentioned within this document, please contact Spirax Sarco
sales office for further advice and information regarding availability.
104
Page 2 of 15 TI-P183-02 CTLS Issue 9
Control systems
Control valves 4
Materials
23
4 1
16 2
3 6
7 8
10 15
14 12
11
PNS3000 series
8
10
3 1
7 9
4 2
4.1
16
24 105
15
14
11
12
PNS4000 series
PNS3000 and PNS4000 series actuators

1 Diaphragm housing Stainless steel 304 13 Yoke Stainless steel 304
2 Diaphragm Reinforced nitrile rubber 14 Gasket Non asbestos fibre
3 Diaphragm plate Pressed steel 15 Fixing screwed Stainless steel
4 Springs Spring steel 16 Housing bolts and nuts Stainless steel
5 Spindle Stainless steel 17 Top adaptor Stainless steel
6 Lock-nut Stainless steel 18 Lock-nut Stainless steel
7 Spacer Zinc plated steel 19 Bottom adaptor Stainless steel
8 'O' ring Rubber 20 Connectors Stainless steel
9 Spring guide Zinc plated steel 21 Connectors bolts and nuts Stainless steel
10 Diaphragm clamp Zinc plated steel 22 Travel indicator Aluminium
11 Bearing Bronze 23 Cap (with vent hole) Nickel plated brass
12 'V' ring Rubber 24 Spacer Zinc plated steel
44 Control systems
Control valves
Materials (continued) 16
2
5
21
28
32
22
and
PN9000 23 24
8
3 9
4
7 29
31 17
30
18
6
15 25
10
19 and 20
12
26 and 27 13 and 14
1 11
4.1
106
PN 9000 series actuators
1 Yoke SG iron 18 Seal Polyurethane
Upper diaphragm 19 Pan head screw Carbon steel (plated)

2 Carbon steel (plated)
housing
20 Nyloc nut Carbon steel (plated)
3 Diaphragm plate Aluminium
21 Bolt Carbon steel (plated) Gr. 8.8
4 Diaphragm Reinforced NBR
Hex. head screw
22 Carbon steel (plated) Gr. 8.8
5 Spring Spring steel (short)
6 Spindle Stainless steel Hex. head screw

23 Carbon steel (plated) Gr. 8.8
(long)
7 Washer Carbon steel (plated)
24 Nut Carbon steel (plated) Gr. 8.8
8 Spacer Carbon steel (plated)
25 Lock-nut Carbon steel (plated)
9 'O' ring Viton
Socket head
10 Connector Carbon steel (plated) 26 Carbon steel (plated) Gr. 8.8
screw
11 Adaptor Carbon steel (plated) 27 Nut Carbon steel (plated) Gr. 8.8
12 Collar Carbon steel (plated) 28 Washer Carbon steel (plated)
13 Clamp front Stainless steel 29 Screw Carbon steel (plated) Gr. 8.8
14 Clamp rear Stainless steel 30 Gasket Reinforced graphite
15 Scale Stainless steel Lower diaphragm
31 Carbon steel (plated)
housing
16 Vent plug Brass
32 Lifting eye Cast steel
17 Bearing PTFE/steel composite
Control systems
Control valves 4
Materials (continued)
SA and SB control valves

31
No. Part Material 30
25 Body Stainless steel ASTM A479-316L
Stainless steel ASTM A479-316L 27

Valve plug, stem and 30
26 32
soft seal Stainless steel 316L 29 28
27 Bonnet Stainless steel ASTM A479-316L
28 Body seal Viton (FKM)
29 Stem seal Viton (FKM)
30 Stem bushes PTFE-FC 25

31 Seal washer White Viton or EPDM
26
32 Body clamp Stainless steel 304
SA 2-port control valve
4.1
107
31 27
30
32 32
29 28
26
25
28
SB 2-Port control valve with

aseptic steam sanitized bonnet
(Provided as standard)
44 Control systems
Control valves
Temperature °C
Steam saturation curve The product must not be used in this region.
Viton (V) stem seals must be selected for use in this region.
Pressure bar g
Maximum operating temperature Viton (FKM) (V) 170 °C
Minimum operating temperature

-10 °C
Maximum differential pressure See pages 7 to 9

4.1
Kv values (SB and SA models)
108
Kv by valve size and trim reduction
Valve size
Flow characteristic DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100
Travel 20 mm 30 mm
Standard 4 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 100 160
Equal percentage Reduction 1 - 4 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 100

and linear Reduction 2 - - 4 6.3 10 16 25 36 63
Reduction 3 - - - 4 6.3 10 16 25 36
Micro-flow trim for all valves ≤ DN25

Micro-flow trim Travel 20 mm
Trim size 1/8" 3/16" ¼" ¼" 3/8"
Linear characteristic Kv 0.4 0.63 1.0 1.6 2.5
For conversion: Kv = C v (US) x 0.855 C v(UK) = C v (US) x 0.833
Control systems
Control valves 4
Maximum differential pressures for Class IV shut-off SB and SA valves
PNS3000 spring-to-extend actuators
Valve size DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100
Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 100 160
Travel mm 20 mm 30 mm
Spring Positioner
Actuator Maximum differential pressure Class IV (bar)
range required
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 8.3 4.1 1.4

PNS3220
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 14.0 7.1 4.0 2.4
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 4.0 2.4

PNS3320
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 11.4 7.6 3.8
PNS3326 1.0 - 3.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 12.8 16.0 16.0 12.7
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 7.7 5.0 2.3

PNS3420
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 12.8 6.8
PNS3426 1.0 - 3.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
PNS3430 0.4 - 1.2 Optional 3.4 2.0 1.2 4.1

109
PNS3436 1.0 - 3.0 Yes 10.7 6.9 4.6
PN9000 spring-to-extend actuators
Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 100 160
Spring Positioner
range required
PN9120E 0.4 - 1.2 Optional 14.0 8.0 4.0 2.0 1.0 -
PN9126E 1.0 - 2.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 15.0 9.0 6.0 3.0
PN9123E 2.0 - 4.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 15.0 8.0
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 16.0 10.0 6.0 3.0 1.0

PN9220E
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 15.0 10.0 5.0
PN9226E 1.0 - 2.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
PN9223E 2.0 - 4.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 14.0 10.0 5.0

PN9320E
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 12.0
PN9330E 0.4 - 1.2 Yes 6.0 4.0 3.0
PN9336E 1.0 - 2.0 Yes 16.0 12.0 8.0
PN9337E 2.5 - 3.5 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0
44 Control systems
Control valves
Maximum differential pressures for Class IV shut-off SB and SA valves
PNS4000 spring-to-retract actuators

Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 100 160
Minimum
Spring Positioner
Actuator air Maximum differential pressure Class IV (bar)
range required
pressure
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 1.4 16.0 14.0 7.1 4.0 2.4
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 2.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 15.1 10.2 5.3
PNS4220
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 3.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 12.7
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 4.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 1.4 16.0 16.0 16.0 11.4 7.6 3.8
PNS4320 0.2 - 1.0 Yes 2.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 12.7
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 3.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 1.4 16.0 16.0 16.0 6.8
PNS4420 0.2 - 1.0 Yes 2.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0

4.1 0.2 - 1.0 Yes 3.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
110 0.2 - 1.0 Optional 1.4 3.4 2.0 1.2
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 2.0 10.7 6.9 4.6

PNS4430
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 3.0 16.0 15.0 10.2
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 4.0 16.0 16.0 15.8
PN9000 spring-to-retract actuators

Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 100 160
Spring Positioner
range required
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0

PN9120R
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
PN9126R 1.0 - 2.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
PN9123R 2.0 - 4.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 8.0
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0

PN9220R
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
PN9226R 1.0 - 2.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
PN9223R 2.0 - 4.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0

PN9320R
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
PN9330R 0.4 - 1.2 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0
PN9336R 1.0 - 2.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0
PN9337R 2.5 - 3.5 Yes 8.0 5.0 3.0
Control systems
Control valves 4
Maximum differential pressures for Class VI shut-off (soft seat seal only) SB and SA valves
PNS3000 spring-to-extend actuators

Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 100 160
Spring Positioner Maximum differential pressure Class VI (bar)

Actuator
range required
PNS3220 0.4 - 1.2 Optional 12.1 8.4 3.0 2.3 1.3 - - - -
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 12.1 8.4 3.0 2.3 1.3 - - - -

PNS3320
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 9.1 7.4 5.1 2.3 - - -
PNS3326 1.0 - 3.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 8.4 - - -
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 14.9 6.0 4.8 3.2 1.3 - - -

PNS3420
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 15.1 12.4 8.8 4.4 - - -
PNS3426 1.0 - 3.0 Yes - - 16.0 16.0 16.0 13.5 - - -
PNS3430 0.4 - 1.2 Optional - - - - - - 2.2 1.7 -
PNS3436 1.0 - 3.0 Yes - - - - - - 7.4 5.9 3.7
4.1
PN9000 spring-to-extend actuators
111
Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 100 160

Actuator
range required
PN9120E 0.4 - 1.2 Optional 7.0 4.0 1.0 1.0 - - - - -
PN9126E 1.0 - 2.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 7.0 6.0 4.0 2.0 - - -
PN9123E 2.0 - 4.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 15.0 10.0 5.0 - - -
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 11.0 4.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 - - -

PN9220E
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 12.0 10.0 7.0 3.0 - - -
PN9226E 1.0 - 2.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 11.0 - - -
PN9223E 2.0 - 4.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 - - -
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 16.0 11.0 9.0 7.0 3.0 - - -

PN9320E
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 15.0 8.0 - - -
PN9330E 0.4 - 1.2 Yes - - - - - - 4.0 3.0 2.0
PN9336E 1.0 - 2.0 Yes - - - - - - 13.0 10.0 6.0
PN9337E 2.5 - 3.5 Yes - - - - - - 16.0 16.0 16.0
PN9337E 2.5 - 3.5 Yes - - - - - - 16.0 16.0 16.0
44 Control systems
Control valves
Maximum differential pressures for Class VI shut-off (soft seat seal only) SB and SA valves
PNS4000 spring-to-retract actuators

Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 100 160
Minimum Maximum differential pressure Class VI (bar)

Spring Positioner
Actuator air
range required
pressure
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 1.4 12.1 8.4 3.0 2.3 1.3 - - - -
PNS4220
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 2.0 16.0 16.0 12.1 9.9 6.9 3.3 - - -
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 3.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 8.4 - - -
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 4.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 13.5 - - -
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 1.4 16.0 16.0 9.1 7.4 5.1 2.3 - - -
PNS4320 0.2 - 1.0 Yes 2.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 8.4 - - -
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 3.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 - - -
4.1 0.2 - 1.0 Optional 1.4 - - 15.1 12.4 8.8 4.4 - - -
112 PNS4420 0.2 - 1.0 Yes 2.0 - - 16.0 16.0 16.0 13.5 - - -
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 3.0 - - 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 - - -
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 1.4 - - - - - - 2.2 1.7 -
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 2.0 - - - - - - 7.4 5.9 3.7

PNS4430
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 3.0 - - - - - - 16.0 13.1 8.4
0.2 - 1.0 Yes 4.0 - - - - - - 16.0 16.0 13.1
PN9000 spring-to-retract actuators

Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 100 160

Actuator
range required
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 - - -

PN9120R
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 15.0 - - -
PN9126R 1.0 - 2.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 12.0 - - -
PN9123R 2.0 - 4.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 5.0 - - -
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 - - -

PN9220R
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 - - -
PN9226R 1.0 - 2.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 - - -
PN9223R 2.0 - 4.0 Yes 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 - - -
0.2 - 1.0 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 - - -

PN9320R
0.4 - 1.2 Optional 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 - - -
PN9330R 0.4 - 1.2 Yes - - - - - - 16.0 16.0 16.0
PN9336R 1.0 - 2.0 Yes - - - - - - 16.0 16.0 14.0
PN9337R 2.5 - 3.5 Yes - - - - - - 6.0 4.0 3.0
Control systems
Control valves 4
Valve dimensions (approximate in mm)
Connection and Dimensions
Valve Size Tube end Threaded Sanitary clamp Dimensions common to all connections
A B A and B A and B C D
DN15 70 24 - 42.0 64 43
DN20 70 26 - 44.0 64 43
DN25 70 40 55 60.3 73 57
DN32 70 43 66 64.5 75 57
DN40 70 49 70 69.9 80 57
DN50 85 54 82 88.9 91 65
DN65 105 68 105 88.9 95 85
DN80 105 83 110 95.3 121 85
DN100 130 96 150 114.3 133 97
Valve weights (kg)
Model SB, SA 4.1

Valve size 113
Sanitary clamp and screwed Tube end
DN15 1.5 1.0
DN20 1.5 1.0
DN25 2.5 2.0
DN32 3.0 2.0
DN40 3.0 2.5
DN50 4.0 3.0
DN65 6.5 5.5
DN80 8.0 7.0
DN100 11.0 10.0
Actuator dimensions and weights (approximate) in mm and kg

Actuator type F G Weight
PNS3200 and PNS4200 series 209 240 7.2
PNS3530 series 405 367 22.6
PNS3630 series 465 400 38.0
44 Control systems
Control valves
Actuator range F G Weight
PN9100E and variants 275 170 6
PN9100R and variants 275 170 6
4.1
114
Actuator and SB valve A D
Control systems
Control valves 4
Connection codes
The codes specified below represent a small selection of pipe end connections that are available. If the connection required is not
specified below please contact Spirax Sarco.
Note: All sizes are available for each connection/specification unless otherwise stated.
Connection Specification Code
DIN 11850 (Series 2) OO

Butt weld and Tube weld
ASME BPE
OD
(Not available for size DN32)
ASME BPE (Tri-clamp ®)

AO
(Not available for size DN32)
Sanitary clamp
DIN 32676 A SO
DIN 32676 B BO
DIN 11864 T1 Form A GS
DIN 11864 TI Form B GT

Aseptic-thread (fitted on pipe)
DIN 11887 (11851) GU
SMS 1146
GV
(Not available for the DN15 and DN20 sizes)
4.1
115
44 Control systems
Control valves
How to order
Ordering a control valve
DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80 and DN100
Valve size DN15
Note: DN15, DN20 and DN32 is not available for certain end connections - see page 13
SB = Two-port angle pattern design with Aseptic Steam Sanitized Bonnet

Valve series SB
SA = Two-port angle pattern design
Valve characteristic E
L = Linear
Body material 6 = 316L stainless steel 6
Connection standard To be specified - See page 13 OO
Seating option S = Stainless steel S
Stem and body sealing option V = White Viton (FDA, USP 26 Class VI approved) V
Internal surface finish 0 = Standard 0.375 μm mechanical polishing (ASME BPE SFV4) 0
Kv To be speciﬁed 4
Ordering a PNS, PN or PNP pneumatic actuator
4.1 PNS pneumatic actuator PNS = Pneumatic stainless steel
Type PN = Pneumatic epoxy coated PN

116 PN or PNP pneumatic actuator
PNP = Pneumatic electroless nickel plated (ENP)
3 = 3000 multi-spring (spring-to-extend)

Series and PNS pneumatic actuator
4 = 4000 multi-spring (spring-to-retract) 3
action
PN or PNP pneumatic actuator 9 = 9000 series
2 = 310 cm2
PNS pneumatic actuator 3 = 490 cm 2
Diaphragm 4 = 710 cm 2
1
area 1 = 100 cm 2
PN or PNP pneumatic actuator 2 = 340 cm 2
3 = 670 cm 2
2 = 20mm
PNS pneumatic actuator
3 = 30mm
Travel 2
2 = 20mm
PN or PNP pneumatic actuator
3 = 30mm
0 = 0.2 to 1.0 bar (0.4 to 1.2 bar)

PNS pneumatic actuator
6 = 1.0 to 3.0 bar
0 = 0.2 to 1.0 bar (0.4 to 1.2 bar)

Spring range 0
3 = 2.0 to 4.0 bar
PN or PNP pneumatic actuator
6 = 1.0 to 2.0 bar
7 = 2.5 to 3.5 bar
E = Spring to extend
Travel E
R = Spring to retract
Ordering example:
1 off Spirax Sarco Steri-trol type DN15 SBE6OOSV04 and 1 pneumatic actuator type PNS3320. Having a spring range of 0.4 to 1.2 bar.
Control systems
Control valves 4
Spare parts
The available spares are identified by the part numbers listed below. When placing an order for spare parts, always specify the actuator
or the valve model (shown on the data plate) and the name of the part as described below.
Available spares for the SA and SB control valves and the PNS3000 and PNS4000 series actuators
Description Part number
Stem seal kit ('O' ring and 'V' ring) 8 and 12
Diaphragm kit (diaphragm, 'O' ring and 'V' ring) 2, 8 and 12
Actuator Travel indicator 22
Spring kit (set of springs, included 3 off longer hex, head bolts and nut on some spring range) 4 and 16
Linkage kit (lock-nut, top adaptor connectors, bolts and nuts) 17, 18, 19, 20 and 21
Valve stem seal set (excluding bonnet seal) 29, 30 and 31
Valve SA and SB models Bonnet seal Viton (packet of 3) 28
Plug and stem (Equal percentage or Linear) 26
Spare parts ordering example:

1 off Valve stem seal set for a Steri-trol DN15 SBE6OOSV04 two-port control valve.
1 off Stem seal kit for a type PNS3320 pneumatic actuator having a spring range 0.4 to 1.2 bar.
4.1
4 117
16 2
12
18
22
17
20
21
19
31
30
30
28
29
26
Actuator and SA valve
Note: For PN9000 actuator spares please refer to TI-P357-30
44 Control systems
Control valves
4.1
118
Control systems
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Control valves 4
TI-P373-14
CH Issue 4
PF51G
Bronze Piston Actuated
On / Off Valves
Description
A 2-port pneumatically actuated on /off bronze valve for use on
water, air, oil and gases. It can also be used on lower specification
steam applications.
A pneumatic signal acts on the actuator piston to open or close
the valve with a spring return action. The valve plugs have a PTFE
soft seal (G) to provide a tight shut-off. A valve position indicator
is included on standard and flow regulator models.
Valves are available with one of three sizes of actuator:
Type 1 (45 mm), Type 2 (63 mm) and Type 3 (90 mm) with the
following action options:
- NC (Normally Closed)
These valves are designed for flow over the seat (port 1 to 2). 4.1
Caution: Not recommended for waterhammer prevention.
- NO (Normally Open) 119
These valves are designed for flow under the seat (port 2 to 1).
Can be used to prevent waterhammer on valve closure in liquid
applications.
- BD (Bi-Directional normally closed)
These valves are designed for special applications that require
flow in both directions and incorporates an anti-waterhammer
design for liquid applications f lowing under the seat
(por t 2 to 1). Note: To help prevent the possibility of
waterhammer on liquid applications flowing over the seat
(port 1 to 2) the pressure should not exceed 1 bar g.
Optional extras (see 'Valve selection guide', page 7):

- Travel switch.
- Flow regulator.
Available range - sizes, pipe connections and actuator combinations

Valve Pipe Valve Actuator Sizes
type connections action type Model ½" ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"
1 PF51G - 1NC • • •
NC - Normally Closed
2 PF51G - 2NC • • • • • •
(flow over seat)
3 PF51G - 3NC • • • •
1 PF51G - 1NO • • •
Screwed NO - Normally Open
PF51G 2 PF51G - 2NO • • • • • •
BSP or NPT (flow under seat)
3 PF51G - 3NO • • • •
1 PF51G - 1BD • • •
BD - Bi-Directional normally closed
2 PF51G - 2BD • • • • • •
(flow over or flow under seat)
3 PF51G - 3BD • • • •
Page 1 of 8
44 Control systems
Control valves

A B C

Temperature °C
Steam
saturation
curve

A B C

Pressure bar g
A-A Maximum operating pressure on saturated steam 9 bar g

B-B Maximum operating pressure on size 2" 16 bar g
C-C Maximum operating pressure on sizes ½" to 1½" 25 bar g
½" - 1½" PN25

Body design conditions Screwed BSP or NPT
2" PN16
PMA Maximum allowable pressure 25 bar g
TMA Maximum allowable temperature 180°C
PMO Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service 9 bar @ 180°C
TMO Maximum operating temperature 180°C
Minimum operating temperature (Note: For lower operating temperatures consult Spirax Sarco.) -10°C
4.1 Ambient temperature limits

Maximum
Minimum
60°C
-10°C
120 DPMX Maximum differential pressure (see page 4)
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 1.5 x PMA (PN rating)
Note: With internals fitted, test pressure must not exceed DPMX
Technical details
Leakage PTFE soft seal ANSI class V1
Flow characteristic Fast opening On / off
PF51G-NC Flow over seat Port 1 to 2
PF51G-NO Flow under seat Port 2 to 1
Flow direction
Flow over seat Port 1 to 2
PF51G-BD
Flow under seat Port 2 to 1
Pilot media Air or water 60°C maximum
Actuator rotation 360°
Pilot connection Maximum pilot pressure
Type 1 = 45 mm diameter " BSP 10 bar g
Actuator type and size
Type 2 = 63 mm diameter ¼" BSP 10 bar g
Type 3 = 90 mm diameter ¼"BSP 8 bar g
Kvs values
Size ½" ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"
Kvs 4.5 8 15.6 24.6 42 57
For conversion: Cv (UK) = Kv x 0.963 Cv (US) = Kv x 1.156
TI-P373-14 CH Issue 4 PF51G Bronze Piston Actuated On / Off Valves Page 2 of 8

Control systems
Control valves 4
NC (Normally Closed)
NO (Normally Open)
8
8
10
10 9
9
2 2
5
6 5
6
11 and 12 3
3 11 and 12
1 4
1
4
4.1
121
BD (Bi-Directional normally closed) Materials

No. Part Material
1 Body Bronze EN 1982 CC491K
Bronze EN 1982 CC491K
½" and 1"
8 2 Bonnet
Brass EN 12165 CW617N
¾", 1¼", 1½" and 2"
3 Plug Stainless steel AISI 316L
10
4 Plug seal PTFE
9
5 Valve stem Stainless steel AISI 316
6 Stem seals PTFE chevrons
*7 Stem 'O' ring Viton

2
8 Actuator housing Glass filled polyamide
5 9 Piston Glass filled polyamide

6
10 Piston lip seal Viton
11 Gasket PTFE
3 11 and 12
1 * Note: Item 7 is not shown.
4

44 Control systems
Control valves
DPMX - Maximum differential pressures for PF51G piston actuated valves
PF51G-NC (Normally closed)

Maximum
Actuator Flow differential Pilot Pressure
Model Valve size diameter direction pressure Minimum Maximum
(mm) (port 1 to 2) (bar) (bar) (bar)
½" 45 over seat 16 1.8 10
PF51G-1NC
¾" 45 over seat 16 1.8 10
1" 45 over seat 16 1.8 10
½" 63 over seat 20 1.5 10
¾" 63 over seat 20 1.5 10
1" 63 over seat 20 1.5 10
PF51G-2NC
1¼" 63 over seat 16 3.0 10
1½" 63 over seat 16 3.0 10
2" 63 over seat 11 3.0 10
1" 90 over seat 20 1.0 8
1¼" 90 over seat 16 2.5 8
PF51G-3NC
1½" 90 over seat 16 2.5 8
2" 90 over seat 15 2.5 8
4.1 PF51G-NO (Normally open)
122 Actuator Flow

Maximum
differential Pilot Pressure
Model Valve size diameter direction pressure Minimum Maximum
(mm) (port 2 to 1) (bar) (bar) (bar)
½" 45 under seat 16 1.8 10
PF51G-1NO
¾" 45 under seat 16 1.8 10
1" 45 under seat 16 1.8 10
½" 63 under seat 16 1.5 10
¾" 63 under seat 16 1.5 10
1" 63 under seat 16 1.5 10
PF51G-2NO
1¼" 63 under seat 16 1.5 10
1½" 63 under seat 16 1.5 10
2" 63 under seat 12 1.5 10
1" 90 under seat 16 1.0 8
1¼" 90 under seat 16 1.0 8
PF51G-3NO
1½" 90 under seat 16 1.0 8
2" 90 under seat 16 1.0 8
PF51G-BD (Bi-Directional normally closed)

Maximum Maximum
differential differential
Actuator Flow pressure Flow pressure Pilot pressure
Model Valve size diameter direction (port 1 to 2) direction (port 2 to 1) Minimum Maximum
(mm) (port 1 to 2) (bar) (port 2 to 1) (bar) (bar) (bar)
½" 45 over seat 16 under seat 16.0 5.0 10
PF51G-1BD
¾" 45 over seat 16 under seat 7.0 5.0 10
1" 45 over seat 16 under seat 5.0 5.0 10
½" 63 over seat 16 under seat 16.0 3.8 10
¾" 63 over seat 16 under seat 16.0 3.8 10
PF51G-2BD
1¼" 63 over seat 16 under seat 6.0 3.8 10
1½" 63 over seat 12 under seat 4.0 3.8 10
1¼" 90 over seat 16 under seat 12.0 3.3 8
PF51G-3BD
1½" 90 over seat 16 under seat 8.0 3.3 8

Control systems
Control valves 4
Pilot / media pressure relationship
PF51G-NC (Normally Closed) PF51G-NO (Normally Open)
PF51G-1NC flow over seat (1 to 2) PF51G-1NO flow under seat (2 to 1)

1"
Pilot pressure
(bar)
Pilot pressure
(bar)

1"
¾" ¾"
½" ½"

Media pressure (bar) Media pressure (bar)

2" 1½"
2" 1½"
Pilot pressure
(bar)
Pilot pressure
(bar)

1¼"
1¼" 1" 1"
¾" ¾"
½" ½"


2"
2" 4.1
Pilot pressure
(bar)
Pilot pressure
(bar)

1½"
1½"
1¼" 123
1¼" 1"
1"

PF51G-BD (Bi-Directional normally closed)

PF51G-1BD flow over seat (1 to 2)
1"
¾"
Pilot pressure
(bar)

½"

Media pressure (bar)
PF51G-2BD flow over seat (1 to 2)

1½" 1¼"
2"
Pilot pressure
(bar)

1"
½"
¾"

PF51G-3BD flow over seat (1 to 2) 2"

Pilot pressure
(bar)
1½"
1¼"
1"


44 Control systems
Control valves

Valve size Actuator type and size A1 B1 C D Weight*
1 (45 mm) 65 144 136 123 0.8
½"
2 (63 mm) 65 192 184 171 1.2
1 (45 mm) 75 149 142 126 0.9
¾"
2 (63 mm) 75 198 192 176 1.3
1 (45 mm) 90 168 161 141 1.1
1" 2 (63 mm) 90 212 205 185 1.5
3 (90 mm) 90 223 216 196 2.2
2 (63 mm) 110 225 217 193 1.9
1¼"
3 (90 mm) 110 234 227 202 2.4
2 (63 mm) 120 230 225 198 2.4
1½"
3 (90 mm) 120 239 235 207 2.6
2 (63 mm) 150 248 241 207 2.9
2"
3 (90 mm) 150 257 250 216 3.3
Notes: * Add 0.2 kg for travel switch or flow regulator options (not available for use with the Type 1 actuator).
4.1
* Travel switch * Flow regulator
124
77 mm 83 mm
B1
2 1
A1

Control systems
Control valves 4
Valve selection guide
Valve size ½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½" and 2" 1"
Valve type P = Piston valve P
Valve
F = Fast opening F
characteristic
Body
5 = Bronze 5
material
Connections 1 = Screwed BSP or NPT 1
Valve
G = PTFE G
plug seal
1 = 45 mm diameter (for valve sizes ½" to 1")

Actuator 2 = 63 mm diameter (for valve sizes ½" to 2") 2
type
3 = 90 mm diameter (for valve sizes 1" to 2")
NC = Normally Closed
Valve NO = Normally Open NC
position
BD = Bi-Directional
Blank = No options required
Provides indication of open or closed valve position through a magnetic reed switch
with volt free contacts.
4.1
I = Travel switch Maximum rating: Voltage (V) = 500 V,
Current (I) = 0.5 A, 125
Optional Power (P) = 30 VA.
Available on Type 2 and Type 3 actuators with suffix 'I' if this option is required.
Provides manual control of maximum flow through the valve.

R = Flow regulator Can also provide manual shut-off on normally open valves.
Available on Type 2 and Type 3 actuators with suffix 'R' if this option is required.
Note: Shaded areas represent fixed parameters
Valve selection guide example 1" PF5 1 G - 2 NC - Screwed BSP
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco 1" PF51G-2NC bronze piston actuated on/off valve having screwed BSP connections.
Spare parts
A seal kit is available for all valve and actuator sizes comprising: Piston lip seal, stem 'O' ring, valve head seal (PTFE), body seal.
How to order spare seal kits
Always order spares by specifying the valve size, type and date code (given on the actuator label i.e. 120 = week 12, year 2000).
Example: 1 off Seal kit for a 1" PF51G-2NC, date code 120.

For full details, see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the product.
Installation note: These valves can be mounted in any orientation. The actuator can be rotated 360° in the direction indicated on the product
label to facilitate easy pilot mounting connection.

44 Control systems
Control valves
Pilot solenoid
Type DM 3-port two way electropneumatic pilot solenoid valve that can be directly mounted (banjo connection) to the PF51G-NC, NO
and BD series piston actuated valves to provide actuator pilot pressure to open normally closed or close normally open valves. Suitable for
air or water operating media. The valve is supplied with a DIN connector. For full details refer to the relevant Technical Information Sheet.
Available types
Model Type Actuator Voltage / Frequency Connection
DM11 1 45 mm 230 / 50 or 240 / 60 Vac 1
/8" BSP
DM12 1 45 mm 110 / 50 or 120 / 60 Vac 1
/8" BSP
DM13 1 45 mm 24 / 50 or 24 / 60 Vac 1
/8" BSP
DM14 1 45 mm 24 Vdc 1
/8" BSP
DM21 2 63 mm 230 / 50 or 240 / 60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM22 2 63 mm 110 / 50 or 120 / 60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM23 2 63 mm 24 / 50 or 24 / 60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM24 2 63 mm 24 Vdc ¼" BSP
DM31 3 90 mm 230 / 50 or 240 / 60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM32 3 90 mm 110 / 50 or 120 / 60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM33 3 90 mm 24 / 50 or 24 / 60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM34 3 90 mm 24 Vdc ¼" BSP
4.1
126

Control systems
Control valves
TI-P373-13
CMGT Issue 13
PF6
Stainless Steel
Piston Actuated On/Off Valves
Description
A 2-port pneumatically actuated on/off stainless steel valve for use on steam, water, air, oil and gases. A pneumatic signal acts on the
actuator piston to open or close the valve with a spring return action. A valve position indicator is included on standard and flow regulator
models.
Standard versions have PTFE stem seals for operation up to 180 °C.
Optionally, high temperature stem seals (H) can be provided for operation up to 200 °C.
Valves are available with one of three sizes of actuator:
Type 1 (45 mm), Type 2 (63 mm) and Type 3 (90 mm) with the following action options:
- NC (Normally Closed) - Designed for flow over the seat (port 1 to 2).
Caution: Not recommended for waterhammer prevention.
- NO (Normally Open) - Designed for flow under the seat (port 2 to 1). Can be used to prevent waterhammer on valve closure in
4.1
127
liquid applications.
- BD (Bi-Directional normally closed) - Designed for special applications that require flow in both directions and incorporates an
anti-waterhammer design for liquid applications flowing under the seat (port 2 to 1).
Note: To help prevent the possibility of waterhammer on liquid applications flowing over the seat (port 1 to 2) the pressure should
not exceed 1 bar g.
Optional extras (see 'Valve selection guide', page 12):

Travel switch Flow regulator Position module
TI-P373-13 Page 1 of 13
CMGT Issue 13
PF6 Stainless Steel Piston Actuated On / Off Valves
44 Control systems
Control valves
Sizes, pipe connections and actuator combinations
Actuator type and DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50
Valve type and pipe connections
version ½" ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"
PF60G Threaded spigots to ISO 228 /1 (DN50 to ISO 338) 1 PTFE version • •
PF61G Screwed to BSP or NPT PTFE version • • • • • •
2
PF62G Butt weld to DIN 11850 pipe, H version • • •
ASME B 36.10/ISO 65 pipe
PTFE version • • • •
3
H version • • •
PTFE version • • • • • •
2
Flanged to EN 1092 or ASME Class 150
PF63G
(welded on flanges)
PTFE version • • • •
3
Available range
Screwed Flanged
Valve action Butt weld Threaded spigots
(BSP or NPT) (EN 1092 or ASME)
4.1 PF61G-1NC PF62G-1NC PF60G-1NC

NC - Normally Closed
128 (flow over seat)
PF61G-2NC PF62G-2NC PF63G-2NC PF60G-2NC
PF61G-3NC PF62G-3NC PF63G-3NC PF60G-3NC
PF61G-1NO PF62G-1NO PF60G-1NO

NO - Normally Open
PF61G-2NO PF62G-2NO PF63G-2NO PF60G-2NO
(flow under seat)
PF61G-3NO PF62G-3NO PF63G-3NO PF60G-3NO
PF61G-1BD PF62G-1BD PF60G-1BD

BD - Bi-Directional normally closed
PF61G-2BD PF62G-2BD PF63G-2BD PF60G-2BD
(flow over or under seat)
PF61G-3BD PF62G-3BD PF63G-3BD PF60G-3BD
Page 2 of 13 TI-P373-13
CMGT Issue 13
Control systems
Control valves 4
A B C D

A - A PN10
Temperature °C

Steam B - B PN16 and ASME 150
saturation
curve C - C PN25

D - D PN40

A B C D

Pressure bar g
The product must not be used in this region or beyond the body design conditions quoted in the table below as damage to the
internals will occur.
High temperature stem seals (Option H) are required for use in this region.
DN15 - DN25 (½" - 1") PN40

Screwed, butt weld, threaded spigots and
DN32 and DN40 (1¼" - 1½") PN25
Body design conditions flanged EN 1092
DN50 (2") PN16
Flanged ASME DN15 - DN50 (½" - 2") Class 150
Maximum design pressure Refer to the graph above

4.1
Minimum design temperature -10 °C 129
Maximum operating pressure for Standard seals 9 bar g @ 180 °C
saturated steam service High temperature seals - Option H 14.5 bar g @ 200 °C
Standard seals 180 °C @ 9 bar g

High temperature seals - Option H 200 °C @ 14.5 bar g
Minimum operating temperature (Note: For lower operating temperatures consult Spirax Sarco) -10 °C
Maximum 60 °C
Ambient temperature limits
Minimum -10 °C
Note: Protection from environmental influences (e.g. UV radiation, humidity, chemicals) is required. Ensure that adequate shelter is
provided for outdoor installations
Maximum differential pressure (see page 6)
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 1.5 x PMA (PN rating)
Maximum test pressure is equal to the maximum differential pressure
Temperature degredation
Ambient temperature °C
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220
Media temperature °C
TI-P373-13 Page 3 of 13
CMGT Issue 13
44 Control systems
Control valves
Technical details
Leakage TFM 1600 soft seal ASME Class VI
Flow characteristic Fast opening On/off
PF6_G-NC Flow over seat Port 1 to 2
PF6_G-NO Flow under seat Port 2 to 1

Flow direction
Flow over seat Port 1 to 2
PF6_G-BD
Flow under seat Port 2 to 1
Pilot media Instrument air or inert gases - For use with other flow media contact Spirax Sarco 60 °C maximum
NC & BO NO
Actuator type and size Type 1 = 45 mm diameter " BSP 10 bar g (145 psi g) 10 bar g (145 psi g)
Type 2 = 63 mm diameter ¼" BSP 10 bar g (145 psi g) 8 bar g (116 psi g)
Type 3 = 90 mm diameter ¼"BSP 8 bar g (116 psi g) 8 bar g (116 psi g)
Kvs values
4.1 Size DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50
130
½" ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"
Kvs 4.5 8.0 15.6 24.6 42.0 57.0
For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Page 4 of 13 TI-P373-13
CMGT Issue 13
Control systems
Control valves 4
Materials
No.Part Material * Note Item 7 is not shown.
1 Body Stainless steel AISI 316L ** Note Optional stainless steel actuator available on request.
2 Bonnet Stainless steel AISI 316L

NC (Normally Closed)
4 Valve plug seal Modified PTFE G500
5 Valve stem Stainless steel AISI 316L
PTFE + 25% carbon graphite filled

Standard PTFE
Stem
6 + FKM chevron 8
seals
10
25% carbon graphite filled
Option H
PTFE + FKM chevron 9
7 *
Stem 'O' ring FKM
30% glass filled polyamide

8 ** Actuator housing
(for H version PA66)
2
9 Piston 50% glass filled polyamide
10 Piston lip seal NBR

5 6
11 and 12
11 Gasket PTFE
12 'O' ring FKM

3 4.1
4 131
BD (Bi-Directional normally closed) NO (Normally Open)
8 8
10
10
9
9
2
2
5
5
6
6
11 and 12 3 11 and 12
3
4
4 1 1
TI-P373-13 Page 5 of 13
CMGT Issue 13
44 Control systems
Control valves
∆PMX - Maximum differential pressures for PF6 piston actuated valves
* Notes:
1. Maximum differential pressure for saturated steam service is 11.5 bar g and 14.5 bar g for high temperature valve versions.
2. ASME flange connections are limited to ASME 150 pressure rating.
PF6_G-NC (Normally closed)

Pilot Pressure
Actuator Maximum differential pressure
diameter Flow direction (bar) Minimum Maximum
Model Valve size (mm) (port 1 to 2) (see Notes at the top of this page) (bar) (bar)
DN15 - (½") 45 over seat 16 1.8 10
DN20 - (¾") 45 over seat 16 1.8 10

PF6_G-1NC
DN15 - (½") 63 over seat 20 3.9 10
DN20 - (¾") 63 over seat 20 4.6 10
DN25 - (1") 63 over seat 20 5.2 10
DN32 - (1¼") 63 over seat 16 5.7 10
PF6_G-2NC DN40 - (1½") 63 over seat 16 8.8 10
DN50 - (2") 63 over seat 11 7.8 10
DN25 - (1") 90 over seat 20 3.0 8
4.1 DN32 - (1¼") 90 over seat 16 3.0 8
PF6_G-3NC DN40 - (1½") 90 over seat 16 4.0 8

132 DN50 - (2") 90 over seat 15 5.8 8
PF6_G-NO (Normally open)

Pilot Pressure
Actuator Maximum differential pressure
diameter Flow direction (bar) Minimum Maximum
Model Valve size (mm) (port 1 to 2) (see Notes at the top of this page) (bar) (bar)
DN15 - (½") 45 under seat 16 1.8 10
DN20 - (¾") 45 under seat 16 1.8 10

PF6_G-1NO
DN15 - (½") 63 under seat 16 2.8 10
DN20 - (¾") 63 under seat 16 4.5 10
DN25 - (1") 63 under seat 16 5.7 10
DN32 - (1¼") 63 under seat 16 6.7 10
PF6_G-2NO DN40 - (1½") 63 under seat 12 8.8 10
DN50 - (2") 63 under seat 8 9.6 10
DN25 - (1") 90 under seat 16 4.5 8
DN32 - (1¼") 90 under seat 16 4.0 8
PF6_G-3NO DN40 - (1½") 90 under seat 16 5.4 8
DN50 - (2") 90 under seat 10 7.0 8
Page 6 of 13 TI-P373-13
CMGT Issue 13
Control systems
Control valves 4
PF6_G-BD (Bi-Directional normally closed)
* Maximum * Maximum Pilot pressure
differential differential
Actuator Flow pressure Flow pressure
diameter direction (port 1 to 2) direction (port 2 to 1) Minimum Maximum
Model Valve size (mm) (port 1 to 2) (bar) (port 2 to 1) (bar) (bar) (bar)
DN15 - (½") 45 over seat 16 under seat 16.0 5.0 10
DN20 - (¾") 45 over seat 16 under seat 7.0 5.0 10

PF6_G-1BD
DN15 - (½") 63 over seat 16 under seat 16.0 4.2 10
DN20 - (¾") 63 over seat 16 under seat 16.0 4.2 10
DN25 - (1") 63 over seat 16 under seat 11.0 4.2 10
DN32 - (1¼") 63 over seat 16 under seat 6.0 4.2 10
PF6_G-2BD DN40 - (1½") 63 over seat 12 under seat 4.0 4.2 10
DN32 - (1¼") 90 over seat 16 under seat 12.0 3.8 8
PF6_G-3BD DN40 - (1½") 90 over seat 16 under seat 8.0 3.8 8
* Notes:
4.1
1. Maximum differential pressure for saturated steam service is 11.5 bar g and 14.5 bar g for high temperature valve versions.
133
TI-P373-13 Page 7 of 13
CMGT Issue 13
44 Control systems
Control valves
Pilot/media pressure relationship
PF6_G-NC (Normally Closed) PF6_G-NO (Normally Open)

PF6_G-1NC flow over seat (1 to 2) PF6_G-1NO flow under seat (2 to 1)
10
Pilot pressure
(bar)
Pilot pressure
(bar)
8
¾" 6 ¾"
½" 4 ½"
2
1.8
0
0 4 8 12 16

10
Pilot pressure
(bar)
2" 1½"
Pilot pressure
(bar)
2" 1½"
8
1¼"
1¼" 1" 6 1"
¾"
½" 4 ¾"
2 ½"
0
0 4 8 12 16
4.1 7
Pilot pressure
2" (bar) 2"
Pilot pressure
1½" 1½"
5
134 1¼" 1¼"
(bar)
1"
3 1"
1
0
0 4 8 12 16
PF6_G-BD (Bi-Directional normally closed)

PF6_G-1BD flow over seat (1 to 2)
10
Pilot pressure
(bar)
8 ¾"
6 ½"
5
4
2
0
0 4 8 12 16

10
Pilot pressure
(bar)
2" 1½"
8 1¼" 1"
6 ¾"
4 ½"
2
0
0 4 8 12 16

2"
7
Pilot pressure
(bar)
1½"
5
1¼"
3 1"
1
0
0 4 8 12 16
Page 8 of 13 TI-P373-13
CMGT Issue 13
Control systems
Control valves 4
Notes:
* Add 0.2 kg for travel switch or flow regulator options (not available for use with the Type 1 actuator).
Add 0.45 kg for the position module.
Screwed and Butt weld Flanged
EN ASME EN ASME
Actuator type * 1092 150 1092 150 *
Valve size and size A1 B1 C Weight A3 A4 B3 B4 C Weight
1 (45 mm) 65 144 123 0.8 - - - - - -

DN15 - ½"
2 (63 mm) 65 192 171 1.2 130 139.7 229.0 226.2 202.1 2.6
1 (45 mm) 75 155 126 0.9 - - - - - -

DN20 - ¾"
2 (63 mm) 75 198 176 1.3 150 152.4 235.9 232.7 207.4 3.0
2 (63 mm) 90 212 185 1.5 160 165.1 249.2 247.6 216.2 3.8
DN25 - 1"
3 (90 mm) 90 223 196 2.0 160 165.1 260.2 258.6 227.2 4.4
2 (63 mm) 110 225 193 1.9 180 184.2 262.0 259.9 224.0 5.6
DN32 - 1¼"
3 (90 mm) 110 234 202 2.4 180 184.2 273.0 270.9 235.0 6.0
2 (63 mm) 120 230 198 2.1 200 203.2 267.0 266.5 229.0 6.5
DN40 - 1½"
3 (90 mm) 120 239 207 2.6 200 203.2 278.0 277.5 240.0 7.0 4.1
DN50 - 2"
2 (63 mm) 150 248 207 2.9 230 228.6 288.2 237.3 237.8 8.7
135
3 (90 mm) 150 257 216 3.3 230 228.6 299.2 298.3 248.8 9.1
Threaded spigot (to ISO 228 /1)
Actuator type *
Valve size and size A5 B5 C Ø Spigot Weight
1 (45 mm) 90 148 123 G ¾" 0.90 77 mm

DN15 - ½"
2 (63 mm) 90 196 171 G ¾" 1.30
1 (45 mm) 110 156 126 G 1" 1.00

DN20 - ¾" * Travel switch
2 (63 mm) 110 206 176 G 1" 1.40
2 (63 mm) 118 217 185 G 1¼" 1.65

DN25 - 1"
3 (90 mm) 118 228 196 G 1¼" 2.15
2 (63 mm) 130 226 193 G 1½" 2.00

DN32 - 1¼"
3 (90 mm) 130 237 202 G 1½" 2.50
2 (63 mm) 140 224 198 G 1¾" 2.20

DN40 - 1½" 95 mm
3 (90 mm) 140 235 207 G 1¾" 2.70
2 (63 mm) 175 246 207 G2 " 3.10 * Position module

DN50 - 2" **
3 (90 mm) 175 257 216 G2 " 3.50
** Note: The DN50 threaded spigot is to ISO 338.
Height min = 57mm

Height max = 85mm
* Flow regulator
TI-P373-13 Page 9 of 13
CMGT Issue 13
44 Control systems
Control valves
PF6 piston actuated valves - opening/closing times (seconds)
Notes:
1. Pilot pressure is 6 bar
2. Pressure in the body 0 bar
B1 (Screwed and Butt weld)

B5 (Threaded spigot)
B3 (Flanged EN 1092)
B4 (Flanged ASME 150)
Ø
Spigot
4.1
136 E F
A1
(Screwed and Butt weld)
A5
(Threaded spigot)
A3 (EN 1092) and A4 (ASME 150)
Actuator Ø45 mm Actuator Ø63 mm Actuator Ø90 mm
Valve size NC valves NO valves NC valves NO valves NC valves NO valves
opening closing opening closing opening closing opening closing opening closing opening closing
DN15 - ½" 0.09 0.22 0.22 0.09 0.14 0.30 0.30 0.14 - - - -
DN20 - ¾" 0.09 0.22 0.22 0.09 0.20 0.30 0.30 0.20 - - - -
DN25 - 1" - - - - 0.32 0.34 0.34 0.32 0.32 0.34 0.34 0.32
DN32 - 1¼" - - - - 0.34 0.38 0.38 0.34 0.36 0.40 0.40 0.36
DN40 - 1½" - - - - 0.34 0.38 0.38 0.34 0.40 0.46 0.46 0.40
DN50 - 2" - - - - 0.36 0.38 0.38 0.36 0.40 0.46 0.46 0.40
Page 10 of 13 TI-P373-13
CMGT Issue 13
Control systems
Control valves 4
Pilot solenoid
Type DM 3-port two way electropneumatic pilot solenoid valve that can be directly mounted (banjo connection) to the PF61G-NC,
NO and BD series piston actuated valves to provide actuator pilot pressure to open normally closed or close normally open valves.
Suitable for air or water operating media. The valve is supplied with a DIN connector. For full details refer to the relevant Technical
Information Sheet.
Please refer to TI-P373-04 or IM-P373-12 for more information.
Available types
Model Type Actuator Voltage/Frequency Connection
DM11 1 45 mm 230/50 or 240/60 Vac " BSP
DM12 1 45 mm 110/50 or 120/60 Vac " BSP
DM13 1 45 mm 24/50 or 24/60 Vac " BSP
DM14 1 45 mm 24 Vdc " BSP
DM21 2 63 mm 230/50 or 240/60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM22 2 63 mm 110/50 or 120/60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM23 2 63 mm 24/50 or 24/60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM24 2 63 mm 24 Vdc ¼" BSP
DM31 3 90 mm 230/50 or 240/60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM32 3 90 mm 110/50 or 120/60 Vac ¼" BSP

4.1
DM33 3 90 mm 24/50 or 24/60 Vac ¼" BSP 137
DM34 3 90 mm 24 Vdc ¼" BSP
TI-P373-13 Page 11 of 13
CMGT Issue 13
44 Control systems
Control valves
Valve size DN15 (½"), DN20 (¾"), DN25 (1"), DN32 (1¼"), DN40 (1½") and DN50 (2") DN25
Valve
F = Fast opening F
characteristic
0 = Threaded spigots to ISO 228 /1
1 = Screwed BSP or NPT
Note: state pipeline connection - DIN 11850 pipe

Connections 2 = Butt weld 3
when ordering: - ASME B 36.10/ISO 65 pipe
3 = Flanged EN 1092 or ASME Class 150 (welded on flanges)
4 =
Valve plug seal G = Modified PTFE G500 soft seat G
Blank = PTFE + 25% carbon graphite filled PTFE + FKM chevron (standard)
Stem seal 25% carbon graphite filled PTFE + FKM chevron
H =
Note: Option H is not available for valves fitted with Type 1 actuators.
1 = 45 mm diameter
4.1 Actuator type 2 = 63 mm diameter 2
3 = 90 mm diameter
138
NC = Normally Closed
Valve position NO = Normally Open NC
BD = Bi-Directional
Blank = No options required
Position module
Change-over contacts, max. tension Provides indication of open
A = with mechanical
230 Vac, Max. current 6 A and closed valve position
switch
through an inductive or
Position module mechanical switch. Available
PNP, supply 14 - 12 Vdc power
B = with inductive on all actuators types.
13 mA max.
switch
Provides indication of open or closed valve position through a magnetic

reed switch with volt free contacts.
Optional
Voltage (V) = 500 V,
I = Travel switch Maximum rating: Current ( I ) = 0.5 A,
Power (P) = 30 VA.
Available on Type 2 and Type 3 actuators with suffix 'I' if this option is
required.
Provides manual control of maximum flow through the valve.

Can also provide manual shut-off on normally open valves.
R = Flow regulator
Available on Type 2 and Type 3 actuators with suffix 'R' if this option is
required.
Valve selection guide example DN25 - P - F - 6 - 3 - G - - 2 - NC - - Flanged EN 1092 PN40
Page 12 of 13 TI-P373-13
CMGT Issue 13
Control systems
Control valves 4
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN25 PF63G-2NC stainless steel piston actuated on/off valve having flanged EN 1092 PN40 connections.
Spare parts
A seal kit is available for all valve and actuator sizes comprising: Piston lip seal, stem 'O' ring, valve head seal (Modified PTFE G500),
body seal and 'O' ring.

Always order spares by specifying the valve size, type and date code (given on the actuator label i.e. 02/14 = Month 02, Year 2014).
Example: 1 off Seal kit for a 1" PF61G-2NC, date code 05/22.

Installation note: These valves can be mounted in any orientation. The actuator can be rotated 360° in the direction indicated on the
product label to facilitate easy pilot mounting connection.
4.1
139
TI-P373-13 Page 13 of 13
CMGT Issue 13
44 Control systems
Control valves
4.1
140
Control systems
Control valves
TI-P373-17
CMGT Issue 4
PM6
Stainless Steel
Piston Actuated Modulating Control Valves
Description
The PM6 is a 2-port pneumatically actuated modulating stainless steel control valve designed for use on steam, water, air, oil, gases
and vacuum applications. As standard it is fitted with a PEEK plug seal for operation up to 180°C, and both the body and shaped-plug
have undergone a hardening treatment.
Valves are available with one of two sizes of actuator:
Type 2 (63 mm) and Type 3 (90 mm) with the following action:
NC - Normally Closed Designed for flow under the seat (port 2 to 1).
Valves are available with the following fail safe options:

C- Closed The valve fails in the closed position 4.1
M- Maintained
141
The valve fails in the last known operating position
Page 1 of 7
44 Control systems
Control valves
Sizes, pipe connections and actuator combinations
Actuator DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50
Pipe connections Valve type C or Valve type M
type ½" ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"
PM61GC or PF61G - 1GM -2NC • •

Screwed to BSP or NPT
PM61GC or PF61G - 1GM -3NC • • • •
Butt weld to DIN 11850 PM62GC or PF62G - 1GM -2NC • •
pipe, ASME B 36.10/ISO 65
pipe or ISO 4200 pipe PM62GC or PF62G - 1GM -3NC • • • •
Flanged to EN 1092 or PM63GC or PF63G - 1GM -2NC • •
ASME Class 150
(welded on flanges) PM63GC or PF63G - 1GM -3NC • • • •
Socket weld to ASME B
36.10/ISO 65 pipe
PM64GC or PF64G - 1GM -3NC • • • •
*Sanitary clamp to ISO
2852 or ASME BPE or
PM65GC PF65G - 1GM -3NC • • • •
4.1
142
CMGT Issue 4
PM6 Stainless Steel Piston Actuated Modulating Control Valves
Control systems
Control valves 4
A B C D

A - A PN10
Temperature °C

Steam B - B PN16 and ASME 150

saturation
curve C - C PN25

D - D PN40

A B C D

Pressure bar g
The product must not be used in this region or beyond the body design conditions quoted in the table below as damage to
the internals will occur.
DN15 - DN32 (½" - 1") PN40

Screwed, butt weld, socket weld and flanged
DN32 and DN40 (1¼" - 1½") PN25
EN 1092
Body design conditions DN50 (2") PN16
Flanged ASME DN15 - DN50 (½" - 2") Class 150
Sanitary clamp compatible connections DN15 - DN50 (½" - 2") PN10
Maximum design pressure Refer to graph above

4.1
Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service 9 bar g @ 180 °C 143
Maximum 60 °C
Ambient temperature limits
Minimum -10 °C
Note: Protection from environmental influences (e.g. UV radiation, humidity, chemicals) is required. Ensure that adequate shelter is
provided for outdoor installations.
Maximum differential pressure (see bottom of page)
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 1.5 x Maximum design pressure (PN rating)
Technical details
Leakage PEEK soft seal ASME Class VI
Flow characteristic Equal percentage
Flow direction Flow under seat Port 2 to 1
Pilot media Instrument air quality 60 °C maximum
Actuator type and size Type 2 = 63 mm diameter Push-in type to suit Ø6 mm pipe 8 bar g
Type 3 = 90 mm diameter Push-in type to suit Ø6 mm pipe 8 bar g
CMGT Issue 4
44 Control systems
Control valves
Kvs values
Size DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 For conversion:
½" ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 2" C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Kvs 4.5 8.7 12.7 19.8 29.7 36.3
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Body Stainless Steel AISI 316L
2 Bonnet Stainless Steel AISI 316L
4 Valve plug seal PEEK
5 Valve stem Stainless steel AISI 316L
6 Stem seals PTFE + Carbographite
7* Stem 'O' ring FKM
8 Actuator housing 30% glass filled polyamide
9 Piston Aluminium
4.1 10 Piston 'O' ring NBR
144 11 Gasket PTFE
12 'O' ring FKM
* Note: Item 7 is not shown.
11
5
1
3
4
6 9 10 8
12
CMGT Issue 4
Control systems
Control valves 4
∆PMX - Maximum differential pressures for PM6 piston actuated valves
Notes:
1. Maximum differential pressure for saturated steam service is 9 bar g.
2. Sanitary clamp connections are limited to PN10 pressure rating.
PF51G-NC (Normally closed)

Pilot Pressure
Actuator
diameter Flow direction Maximum differential pressure Minimum Maximum
Model Valve size (mm) (port 2 to 1) (bar) (bar) (bar)
PF6_GC-2NC DN15 - (½") 63 under seat 16 4.5 8

and
PM6_GM-2NC DN20 - (¾") 63 under seat 16 4.5 8
DN25 - (1") 90 under seat 14 4.5 8
PF6_GC-3NC DN32 - (1¼") 90 under seat 12 4.5 8

and
PM6_GM-3NC DN40 - (1½") 90 under seat 8 4.5 8
DN50 - (2") 90 under seat 6 4.5 8
4.1
145
CMGT Issue 4
44 Control systems
Control valves
Valve size Actuator type and size A1 B1 C D Weight*
DN15 - ½" 2 (45 mm) 65 144 136 123 0.8
DN20 - ¾" 2 (45 mm) 75 49 142 126 0.9
DN25 - 1" 3 (45 mm) 90 168 161 141 1.1
DN32 - 1¼" 3 (63 mm) 110 225 217 193 1.9
DN40 - 1½" 3 (63 mm) 120 230 25 198 2.4
DN50 - 2" 3 (63 mm) 150 248 241 207 2.9
*Note: Add 0.2 kg for travel switch or flow regulator options (not available for use with the Type 1 actuator).
B1 (Screwed, socket weld and butt weld) B2 (Sanitary clamp) and B3, B4 (Flanged)
4.1
C C
146
E F F
D D Note: Dimensions D is for

socket weld connections only.
(Sanitary clamp)
A2
A1 A3 and A4
(Screwed, socket (Flanged)
weld and butt
weld)
Valve size Sanitary clamp (to ISO 2852) Sanitary clamp (ASME BPE)
Actuator type
and size A2 B2 C E E Weight A2 B2 C E E Weight
DN15 - ½" 2 (63 mm) 102 313.0 269.0 34.0 17.2 2.5 102 313.0 269.0 25.0 9.4 2.5
DN20 - ¾" 2 (63 mm) 114 320.5 274.0 34.0 21.3 2.7 114 320.5 274.0 25.0 15.75 2.7
DN25 - 1" 3 (90 mm) 140 341.0 285.0 50.5 25.0 3.7 140 341.0 285.0 50.5 22.1 3.7
DN32 - 1¼" 3 (90 mm) 159 353.5 292.5 50.5 33.7 4.1 - - - - - -
DN40 - 1½" 3 (90 mm) 159 353.5 297.5 64.0 40.0 4.5 159 353.5 297.5 50.5 34.8 4.5
DN50 - 2" 3 (90 mm) 190 372.0 306.5 64.0 51.0 5.3 190 372.0 306.5 64.0 47.5 5.3
CMGT Issue 4
Control systems
Control valves 4
Valve size DN15 (½"), DN20 (¾"), DN25 (1"), DN32 (1¼"), DN40 (1½") and DN50 (2") DN25
Valve
M = Modulating M
characteristic
Body
6 = Stainless steel 6
material
1 = Screwed BSP or NPT
- DIN 11850 pipe
2 = Butt weld Note: state pipeline connection when ordering - ASME B 36.10/ISO 65 pipe
- ISO 4200 pipe

Connections 3
EN 1092 or ASME Class 150 (welded on flanges)
3 = Flanged
4 = Socket weld ASME B 36.10 / ISO 65 pipe
5 = Sanitary clamp Note: state pipeline connection ISO 2852 or ASME BPE when ordering
Valve plug
G = PEEK G
seal
C = Closed
Fail safe
position M = Maintained
C 4.1
2 = 63 mm diameter 147
Actuator type 2
3 = 90 mm diameter
Valve
NC = Normally Closed NC
position
Control
mA = 4 - 20 mA mA
signal
Valve selection guide example DN25 - P - M - 6 - 3 - G - C - 2 - NC - Flanged EN 1092 PN40
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN25 PM63GC-2NC-mA stainless steel piston actuated modulating valve having flanged EN 1092 PN40
connections
Spare parts
Electronic board spare kit
Transducer spare kit
Inlet microvalve spare kit
Outlet microvalve spare kit
A seal kit is available for all valve and actuator sizes comprising: Piston 'O' ring, stem 'O' ring, valve head seal, PEEK body seal and
'O' ring.

Always order spares by specifying the valve size, type and date code (given on the actuator label i.e. 120 = week 12, year 2000).
Example: 1 off Seal kit for a 1" PM61GC-2NC-mA, date code 120.

Installation note: These valves can be mounted in any orientation. The actuator can be rotated 360° in the direction indicated on the
product label to facilitate easy pilot mounting connection.
CMGT Issue 4
44 Control systems
Control valves
4.1
148
Control systems
Control valves
TI-P373-04
CTLS Issue 5
DM Type
Solenoid Valves
for use with Piston Actuated Valves
Description
A 3-port two way electropneumatic pilot solenoid valve that can be directly mounted (banjo connection) to the PF51G and PF61G-NC,
NO and BD series piston actuated valves.
Suitable for air or water operating media. The valve is supplied with a DIN connector and fitted with manual override as standard.
Available types
Model Actuator Voltage/Frequency Connection
DM11 45 mm 230/50 or 240/60 Vac 1/8" BSP
DM12 45 mm 110/50 or 120/60 Vac 1/8" BSP
DM13 45 mm 24/50 or 24/60 Vac 1/8" BSP
DM14 45 mm 24 Vdc 1/8" BSP
4.1
DM21 63 mm 230/50 or 240/60 Vac ¼" BSP 149
DM22 63 mm 110/50 or 120/60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM23 63 mm 24/50 or 24/60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM24 63 mm 24 Vdc ¼" BSP
DM31 90 mm 230/50 or 240/60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM32 90 mm 110/50 or 120/60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM33 90 mm 24/50 or 24/60 Vac ¼" BSP
DM34 90 mm 24 Vdc ¼" BSP
Technical details
Mounting Banjo connection
Manual override Fitted as standard
Type B DM11, DM12, DM13 and DM14
DIN connector Type B DM21, DM22, DM23 and DM24
Type A DM31, DM32, DM33 and DM34
DM11 to DM14
Pilot media Push in type to suit 6 mm dia.
DM21 to DM24
connection nylon or copper tube
DM31 to DM34
DM11, DM12, ac 10 VA (holding)
ac 16 VA (maximum)
DM13 and DM14
dc 7 Watts
ac 10 VA (holding)
DM21, DM22,
Coil consumption ac 16 VA (maximum)
DM23, and DM24
dc 7 Watts
ac 18 VA (holding)
DM31, DM32,
ac 36 VA (maximum)
DM33 and DM34
dc 14 Watts
44 Control systems
Control valves
Limiting conditions
Maximum media temperature 60 °C
Minimum media temperature -10 °C
Protection class IP65 (with connector)
Operating pressure 0 bar g min. to 10 bar g max.
Materials
Part Material
Body ELNP Niploy coated brass
Seal FKM
Spares parts
No spares are available for this product.
Installation
The valve can be directly mounted (banjo connection) onto the actuator.
4.1
Type A B C Weight
DM11, DM12, DM13 and DM14 31 77 27 0.27
DM21, DM22, DM23 and DM24 35 78 27 0.27
DM31, DM32, DM33 and DM34 35 95 27 0.38
Earth
terminal
B
DIN
connector
C A
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DM21 solenoid valve 240 Vac.
TI-P373-04
CTLS Issue 5
DM Type Solenoid Valves for use with Piston Actuated Valves
Control systems
Pneumatic actuators
TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13
PN9000 Series
Pneumatic Actuators
for use with Spira-trol TM Control Valves
Description
The PN9000 series actuators are a compact range of linear actuators that are available in 3 diaphragm sizes for matching the requirements
of valves at various differential pressures.
Each actuator is fitted with a mechanical travel indicator and incorporates a fully-rolling diaphragm, which provides good linearity over
the operating stroke.
PN = Standard Suffix E = Spring-extend

Available types
PNP = Electroless nickel plated Suffix R = Spring-retract
I m p o r t a n t n o t e: Throughout this
Manual handwheel Suffix H document, reference has been made to
Optional extra the PN actuator.
Stainless steel bolting Suffix S
Fast speed Suffix F

4.2
1
PN9100 PN9200EH PN9336EH
Page 1 of 29
44 Control systems
Pneumatic actuators
Actuator force available in relation to motive air pressure
Area of Spring force Actuator force available in relation

Actuator diaphragm Spring rating E = Closed / R = Opened to motive air pressure (N)
(cm²) (bar) (N) 1 2 3 4 5 6
PN91_0 _ 96 0.2 1.0 192 968 1920 2880 3840 4800
PN91_0 _ 96 0.4 1.2 384 768 1728 2688 3648 3840
PN91_6 _ 96 1.0 2.0 960 960 1920 2880 3840
PN91_3 _ 96 2.0 4.0 1920 960 1920
PN92_0 _ 340 0.2 1.0 680 3400 6800 10200 13600 17000
PN92_0 _ 340 0.4 1.2 1360 2720 6120 9520 12920 16320
PN92_6 _ 340 1.0 2.0 3400 3400 6800 10200 13600
PN92_3 _ 340 2.0 4.0 6800 3400 6800
PN93_0 _ 670 0.2 1.0 1340 6700 13400 20100
PN93_0 _ 670 0.4 1.2 2680 5360 12060 18760
PN93_6 _ 670 1.0 2.0 6700 6700 13400
PN93_7 _ 670 2.5 3.5 16750 3350
Technical data
4.2 Temperature range - 20 °C to +110 °C
PN9100 6 bar g
2 Maximum operating inlet pressure
PN9200 6 bar g
PN9300E 4 bar g
PN9300R 2.7 bar g
Air supply connection ¼" NPT
PN9100 20 mm
Actuator travel PN922_ and PN932_ 20 mm
PN923_ and PN933_ 30 mm
Page 2 of 29 TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13
PN9000 Series Pneumatic Actuators for use with Spira-trol TM Control Valves
Control systems
Pneumatic actuators 4
Materials
16
2
5
8
3 9
4
7
15
10
12
13 and 14
1 11
4.2
3
No. Part Material
1 Yoke SG iron
2 Upper diaphragm housing Carbon steel (plated)
3 Diaphragm plate Aluminium
4 Diaphragm Reinforced NBR
5 Spring Spring steel
6 Spindle Stainless steel
8 Spacer Carbon steel (plated)
9 'O' ring Viton
10 Connector Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
11 Adaptor Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
PN9000 Carbon steel
12 Collar PNP9000 Stainless steel 1.4057 or AISI 420
PN9000S Stainless steel 316L
13 Clamp front Stainless steel BS 3100 Pt 2 304 C15
14 Clamp rear Stainless steel BS 3100 Pt 2 304 C15
15 Scale Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
16 Vent plug Brass
TI-P357-30 Page 3 of 29
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Pneumatic actuators
32
21
28
22
and
23 24
29
31 17
30
18
25
19 and 20
26 and 27
4.2
4 No. Part Material
17 Bearing PTFE/steel composite
18 Seal Polyurethane
PN9000 Carbon steel (plated)
19 Pan head screw
PNP9000 Stainless steel A2 - 70
20 Nyloc nut
PN9000S Stainless steel A2 - 70
21 Bolt Carbon steel (plated) Gr. 8.8
22 Hex. head screw (short) PN9000 Carbon steel (plated) Gr. 8.8
23 Hex. head screw (long) PNP9000 Stainless steel A2 - 70
24 Nut PN9000S Stainless steel A2 - 70
PN9000 Carbon steel (plated)
25 Lock-nut PNP9000 Stainless steel A2 - 70
PN9000 Carbon steel (plated) Gr. 8.8
26 Socket head screw
PNP9000 Stainless steel A2 - 70
27 Nut
29 Hex. head screw Carbon steel (plated) Gr. 8.8 (Gr. 10.9 for PN9300R)
30 Gasket Reinforced Graphite
31 Lower diaphragm housing Carbon steel (plated)
PN9000 Cast steel
32 Lifting eye PNP9000 Cast steel
PN9000S Stainless steel 316L
33 Thrust plate PN9300R only Carbon steel
33
(PN9300R only)
Page 4 of 29 TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
K
K
J
H
H
G
F F F
PN9100 G G
PN9200EH PN9336EH
4.2
J Weight 5
Actuator range F G H (Handwheel K
lifted) Actuator With handwheel
PN9100E and variants 275 170 55 75 225 6 + 5.86

PN9100R and variants 275 170 120 140 225 6 + 2.50
PN9200E and variants 300 300 65 85 350 17 + 7.20
PN9200R and variants 300 300 132 152 350 17 + 3.77
PN9230E and variants 335 300 65 95 350 17 + 3.77
PN9230R and variants 335 300 122 152 350 17 + 3.77
PN9320E and variants 325 390 65 85 350 27 + 7.20
PN9320R and variants 325 390 132 152 350 27 + 3.77
PN9330E and variants 335 390 65 95 350 27 + 7.20
PN9330R and variants 335 390 122 152 350 27 + 3.70
PN9336E and variants 335 390 65 95 350 27 + 7.20
PN9336R and variants 335 390 122 152 350 27 + 3.77
PN9337E and variants 335 390 410 410 350 27 + 21.00
How to use the sizing data on pages 6 to 25:

The following tables supply guidance as to the sizing of the PN9000 when it is used on a Spira-trolTM control valve.
Two conditions are illustrated in tabular form:

Class IV shut-off - Providing shut-off of the valve to the requirements of BS 5793-4 (IEC 60534-4) class IV.
Class VI shut-off - Providing shut-off of the valve to the requirements of BS 5793-4 (IEC 60534-4) class VI.
To select a suitable actuator:

- Identify the column containing the valve and gland material selected.
- Identify the maximum operating pressure condition, including any transient pressures likely to occur, within the selected column.
- Read back to the left hand side of the table to identify the suitable actuator for the application.
For conditions outside of those illustrated please contact Spirax Sarco.
TI-P357-30 Page 5 of 29
CTLS Issue 13
6
44
4.2
Maximum differential pressures for Class IV shut-off - Metal Seated (T&S) Spira-trol -
DN15-25 (½'' - 1'') - Flow under - PN9000E
shut-off
Class IV
PN9000E -
Page 6 of 29
Cage Type Standard cage (S)
Valve size DN15-25 (½"-1")

Spring
Actuator 0.01-0.07 (0.012-0.081) 0.1-0.2 (0.12-0.23) 0.5 (0.58) 1.0 (1.2) 1.6 (1.8) 2.5 (2.9)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Control systems
Maximum
pressure N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
(bar g)
Pneumatic actuators
PN9120E 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 50.2

PN9120E 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 16.0 103.4 16.0 96.6 16.0 67.6 16.0 26.5 0.6 12.2
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 6.0 103.4 16.0 103.4 16.0 96.6 16.0 67.6 16.0 26.5 0.6 12.2
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 81.4 16.0 85.5 47.3 16.0
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.7 16.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 94.6 16.0 103.4 66.1 16.0 85.4 25.7 16.0 49.8 11.7 16.0
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 98.2 16.0
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 95.7 16.0
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
Cage Type Standard cage (S) Low noise cage - P1

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 4.9-6.3 (5.7-7.3) 7.2 (8.3) 10 (12) 11 (12.7) 2,5-4-6,3-10 (2.9-4.6-7.3-12)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120E 0.2-1.0 6.0
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 6.0 5.1
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 6.0 5.1
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 56.0 29.5 16.0 27.8 12.9 16.0 20.5 8.7 15.4 15.4 5.8 11.2 11.4 3.7 8.0 11.4 3.7 8.0
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 8.3 16.0 75.5 60.6 0.9 16.0 58.2 46.4 16.0 45.9 36.4 16.0 36.2 28.5 16.0 36.2 28.5 16.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 31.3 4.8 16.0 13.8 7.4 9.5 4.4 6.5 2.3 4.2 0.8 4.2 0.8
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 91.4 64.9 16.0 47.7 32.7 16.0 36.2 24.4 16.0 28.1 18.6 16.0 21.7 14.0 16.0 21.7 14.0 16.0
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 93.0 83.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 74.4 66.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 74.4 66.7 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 89.6 63.1 16.0 46.7 31.8 16.0 35.4 23.6 16.0 27.5 17.9 16.0 21.2 13.5 16.0 21.2 13.5 16.0
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 98.4 25.0 23.8 16.0 88.1 76.3 25.0 17.3 16.0 70.1 60.6 22.4 12.8 16.0 55.8 48.1 17.1 9.3 16.0 55.8 48.1 17.1 9.3 16.0
CTLS Issue 13
TI-P357-30
DN15-25 (½''-1'') - Flow Under - PN9000R
shut-off
Class IV
PN9000R -
TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13

Spring
Actuator 0.01-0.07 (0.012-0.081) 0.1-0.2 (0.12-0.23) 0.5 (0.58) 1.0 (1.2) 1.6 (1.8) 2.5 (2.9)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9120R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9125R 0.4-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9126R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9123R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.7 16.0
PN9220R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9220R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9226R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.2-1.0 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.4-1.2 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
Cage Type Standard cage (S) Low noise cage - P1

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 4.9-6.3 (5.7-7.3) 7.2 (8.3) 10 (12) 11 (12.7) 2,5-4-6,3-10 (2.9-4.6-7.3-12)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 102.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 102.9 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9120R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 97.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 97.9 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9125R 0.4-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 97.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 85.8 78.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 85.8 78.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9126R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 97.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 85.8 78.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 85.8 78.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9123R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 8.3 16.0 75.5 60.6 0.9 16.0 58.2 46.4 16.0 45.9 36.4 16.0 36.2 28.5 16.0 36.2 28.5 16.0
PN9220R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9220R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9226R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.2-1.0 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.4-1.2 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
Pneumatic actuators
Control systems
Page 7 of 29
7
4
4.2
8
44
4.2
DN32-50 (1¼"-2'') - Flow under - PN9000E
shut-off
Class IV
PN9000E -
Page 8 of 29
Valve size DN32-50 (1¼"-2")

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 6.3 (7.3) 10 (12) 16 (18) 17.5 - 18 (20.2-21) 25 (29)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Control systems
Maximum
(bar g)
Pneumatic actuators
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.9

PN9125E 0.4-2.0 6.0 7.9
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 57.2 31.5 16.0 30.3 15.4 16.0 17.4 7.8 13.2 13.5 5.6 10.1 9.5 3.4 6.9 3.6 0.3 2.2
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 11.0 16.0 78.0 63.1 3.4 16.0 47.9 38.4 0.2 16.0 38.8 30.9 16.0 29.1 23.0 16.0 14.2 10.9 12.7
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 33.2 7.6 16.0 16.3 1.4 9.9 8.5 4.3 6.2 2.7 3.8 1.2 0.5
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 91.4 65.7 16.0 50.2 35.2 16.0 30.1 20.6 16.0 24.1 16.2 16.0 17.7 11.6 15.0 8.0 4.7 6.6
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 95.0 85.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 77.7 69.8 25.0 25.0 16.0 59.2 53.1 25.0 22.6 16.0 30.5 27.2 13.9 10.6 16.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 67.9 64.6 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 89.7 64.0 16.0 49.2 34.3 16.0 29.5 19.9 16.0 23.5 15.6 16.0 17.3 11.1 14.6 7.8 4.5 6.3
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 100.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 72.1 62.6 24.4 14.8 16.0 58.8 50.9 19.3 11.4 16.0 44.6 38.4 14.0 7.9 16.0 22.5 19.2 6.0 2.7 16.0
Low noise cage

P1-P2-P3-A1-A2
Spring
Actuator
range bar Kvs (Cv) 31-36 (36-42) 46-50 (53-58) All Kvs
Maximum
pressure N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
(bar g)
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 6.0
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 6.0
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 2.3 1.2 1.0 1.0
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 10.8 8.1 9.6 7.0 5.1 6.2 7.0 5.1 6.2
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 5.8 3.2 4.7 3.5 1.6 2.7 3.5 1.6 2.7
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 23.8 21.2 10.6 8.0 16.0 16.3 14.4 6.9 5.0 15.5 16.3 14.4 6.9 5.0 15.5
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6.0 53.8 51.2 25.0 25.0 16.0 37.7 35.8 25.0 25.0 16.0 37.7 35.8 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 5.7 3.0 4.5 3.4 1.5 2.5 3.4 1.5 2.5
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 17.5 14.8 4.3 1.6 16.0 11.8 9.9 2.3 0.5 11.0 11.8 9.9 2.3 0.5 11.0
CTLS Issue 13
TI-P357-30
DN32-50 (1¼"-2'') - Flow under - PN9000R
shut-off
Class IV
PN9000R -
TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 6.3 (7.3) 10 (12) 16 (18) 17.5 - 18 (20.2-21) 25 (29)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 87.7 81.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 45.9 42.6 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9120R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 101.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 83.8 77.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 43.8 40.5 25.0 23.9 16.0
PN9125R 0.4-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 99.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 89.3 81.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 68.2 62.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 35.3 32.0 18.8 15.5 16.0
PN9126R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 99.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 89.3 81.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 68.2 62.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 35.3 32.0 18.8 15.5 16.0
PN9123R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 11.0 16.0 78.0 63.1 3.4 16.0 47.9 38.4 0.2 16.0 38.8 30.9 16.0 29.1 23.0 16.0 14.2 10.9 12.7
PN9220R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9220R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9226R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 67.9 64.6 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.2-1.0 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.4-1.2 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 100.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
Low noise cage

P1-P2-P3-A1-A2
Spring
Actuator
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120R 0.2-1.0 6.0 36.2 33.5 23.0 20.3 16.0 25.1 23.2 15.7 13.8 16.0 25.1 23.2 15.7 13.8 16.0
PN9120R 0.4-1.2 6.0 34.5 31.8 21.3 18.6 16.0 23.9 22.0 14.5 12.6 16.0 23.9 22.0 14.5 12.6 16.0
PN9125R 0.4-2.0 6.0 27.7 25.1 14.5 11.8 16.0 19.1 17.2 9.6 7.8 16.0 19.1 17.2 9.6 7.8 16.0
PN9126R 1.0-2.0 6.0 27.7 25.1 14.5 11.8 16.0 19.1 17.2 9.6 7.8 16.0 19.1 17.2 9.6 7.8 16.0
PN9123R 2.0-4.0 6.0 10.8 8.1 9.6 7.0 5.1 6.2 7.0 5.1 6.2
PN9220R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 101.8 99.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 101.8 99.9 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9220R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 97.5 95.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 97.5 95.7 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9226R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 80.4 78.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 80.4 78.6 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223R 2.0-4.0 6.0 53.8 51.2 25.0 25.0 16.0 37.7 35.8 25.0 25.0 16.0 37.7 35.8 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.2-1.0 2.7 94.3 91.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 66.5 64.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 66.5 64.7 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.4-1.2 2.7 82.5 79.8 25.0 25.0 16.0 58.1 56.2 25.0 25.0 16.0 58.1 56.2 25.0 25.0 16.0
Pneumatic actuators
Control systems
Page 9 of 29
9
4
4.2
44
10
4.2
DN65-100 (2½"-4'') - Flow under - PN9000E
shut-off
Class IV
PN9000E -
Page 10 of 29
Valve size DN65-100 (2½"-4")

Spring
Actuator 16 (18) 25 (29) 36 (42) 63-90 (73-104) 100-115-117 (116-133-135)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Control systems
Maximum
pressure P H B C D N-P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
(bar g)
Pneumatic actuators
PN9230E 0.2-1.0 6.0 2.8

PN9230E 0.4-1.2 6.0 16.6 6.3 5.4 0.9 3.2 0.9
PN9236E 1.0-2.0 6.0 58.2 47.8 15.4 5.0 5.0 23.4 18.9 4.9 0.4 0.4 16.0 12.8 2.8 8.2 6.4 0.7 4.7 3.5
PN9233E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 53.4 48.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 37.4 34.2 24.2 21.0 16.0 20.2 18.4 12.8 11.0 11.0 12.4 11.2 7.6 6.5 6.5
PN9330E 0.2-1.0 4.0 16.2 5.9 5.2 0.7 3.0 0.9
PN9330E 0.4-1.2 4.0 43.5 33.2 0.8 17.0 12.5 11.5 8.3 5.6 3.8 3.1 1.9
PN9336E 1.0-2.0 4.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 52.5 48.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 36.7 33.5 23.5 20.3 16.0 19.8 18.0 12.4 10.6 10.6 12.2 11.0 7.4 6.3 6.3
PN9337E 2.5-3.5 4.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 99.9 96.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 55.4 53.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 34.9 33.8 25.0 25.0 16.0
Low noise cage

P1-P2-P3-A1-A2
Valve size DN65-100 (2½"-4") DN65-80 DN100
Spring
Actuator
range bar Kvs (Cv) 160-180 (185-208) All Kvs All Kvs
Maximum
pressure P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
(bar g)
PN9230E 0.2-1.0 6.0
PN9230E 0.4-1.2 6.0
PN9236E 1.0-2.0 6.0 2.5 1.8 4.7 3.5 2.5 1.8
PN9233E 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.3 6.6 4.3 3.6 3.6 12.4 11.2 7.6 6.5 6.5 7.3 6.6 4.3 3.6 3.6
PN9330E 0.2-1.0 4.0
PN9330E 0.4-1.2 4.0 1.5 0.7 3.1 1.9 1.5 0.7
PN9336E 1.0-2.0 4.0 7.1 6.4 4.2 3.5 3.5 12.2 11.0 7.4 6.3 6.3 7.1 6.4 4.2 3.5 3.5
PN9337E 2.5-3.5 4.0 21.3 20.6 18.4 17.6 16.0 34.9 33.8 25.0 25.0 16.0 21.3 20.6 18.4 17.6 16.0
CTLS Issue 13
TI-P357-30
DN65-100 (2½"-4'') - Flow under PN9000R
shut-off
Class IV
PN9000R -
TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13
Valve size DN65-100 (2½"-4")

Spring
Actuator 16 (18) 25 (29) 36 (42) 63-90 (73-104) 100-115-117 (116-133-135)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
pressure P H B C D N-P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
(bar g)
PN9230R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 101.5 98.3 25.0 25.0 16.0 56.3 54.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 35.5 34.3 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9230R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 97.2 94.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 53.9 52.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 33.9 32.8 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9236R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 80.1 76.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 44.2 42.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 27.8 26.6 23.0 21.9 16.0
PN9233R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 53.4 48.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 37.4 34.2 24.2 21.0 16.0 20.2 18.4 12.8 11.0 11.0 12.4 11.2 7.6 6.5 6.5
PN9330R 0.2-1.0 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 93.8 89.3 25.0 25.0 16.0 66.2 63.0 25.0 25.0 16.0 36.4 34.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 22.8 21.6 18.0 16.9 16.0
PN9330R 0.4-1.2 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 82.0 77.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 57.8 54.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 31.7 29.9 24.3 22.4 16.0 19.7 18.6 15.0 13.8 13.8
PN9336R 1.0-2.0 2.7 84.5 74.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 34.8 30.3 16.3 11.8 11.8 24.1 20.9 10.9 7.7 7.7 12.7 10.9 5.3 3.5 3.5 7.6 6.5 2.9 1.7 1.7
Cage Type Standard cage (S) Low noise cage (P1-A1-P2-A2-P3)
Valve size DN65-100 (2½"-4") DN65-80 DN100

Spring
Actuator 160-180 (185-208) All Kvs All Kvs
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
pressure P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
(bar g)
PN9230R 0.2-1.0 6.0 21.7 20.9 18.7 18.0 16.0 35.5 34.3 25.0 25.0 16.0 21.7 20.9 18.7 18.0 16.0
PN9230R 0.4-1.2 6.0 20.7 20.0 17.7 17.0 16.0 33.9 32.8 25.0 25.0 16.0 20.7 20.0 17.7 17.0 16.0
PN9236R 1.0-2.0 6.0 16.9 16.2 13.9 13.2 13.2 27.8 26.6 23.0 21.9 16.0 16.9 16.2 13.9 13.2 13.2
PN9233R 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.3 6.6 4.3 3.6 3.6 12.4 11.2 7.6 6.5 6.5 7.3 6.6 4.3 3.6 3.6
PN9330R 0.2-1.0 2.7 13.8 13.0 10.8 10.1 10.1 22.8 21.6 18.0 16.9 16.0 13.8 13.0 10.8 10.1 10.1
PN9330R 0.4-1.2 2.7 11.9 11.1 8.9 8.2 8.2 19.7 18.6 15.0 13.8 13.8 11.9 11.1 8.9 8.2 8.2
PN9336R 1.0-2.0 2.7 4.3 3.6 1.3 0.6 0.6 7.6 6.5 2.9 1.7 1.7 4.3 3.6 1.3 0.6 0.6
Pneumatic actuators
Control systems
Page 11 of 29
11
4
4.2
44
12
4.2
Maximum differential pressures for Class VI shut-off - Soft Seated (P&C) Spira-trol -
DN15-25 (½''-1'') - Flow under - PN9000E
shut-off
PN9000E -
Class VI
Page 12 of 29

Spring
Actuator 0.01-0.07 (0.012-0.081) 0.1-0.2 (0.12-0.23) 0.5 (0.58) 1.0 (1.2) 1.6 (1.8) 2.5 (2.9)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Control systems
Maximum
pressure N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B D
(bar g)
Pneumatic actuators
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16

PN9123E 1.0-2.0 6.0 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 1.6 16 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 16
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16
Cage Type Standard cage (S) Low noise cage (P1-A1)

Spring 2,5-4-6,3-10
Actuator
range bar Kvs (Cv) 4.0 (4.6) 4.9-6.3 (5.7-7.3) 7.2 (8.3) 10 (12) 11 (12.7)
(2.9-4.6-7.3-12)
Maximum
pressure N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B D
(bar g)
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 17.6 16 19 13.8 16 18.6 10.9 15.3 18.6 10.9 15.3
PN9123E 1.0-2.0 6.0 19 19 19 16 19 19 10.9 16 19 19 8.1 16 19 19 6.2 16 19 19 4.7 16 19 19 4.7 16
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 19 18.1 16 19 8.9 16 18.3 6.6 13.2 14.5 4.9 10.3 11.4 3.6 8 11.4 3.6 8
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16
CTLS Issue 13
TI-P357-30
DN32-50 (1¼"-2'') - Flow under - PN9000E
shut-off
PN9000E -
Class VI
TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 10 (12) 17.5 - 18 (20.2-21) 25 (29)
range bar Kvs (Cv) 6.3 (7.3) 16 (18)
Maximum
pressure N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
(bar g)
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 13.8 16.0 19.0 11.1 15.6 14.3 8.2 11.7 7.1 3.8
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 10.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 6.2 16.0 19.0 19.0 4.8 16.0 19.0 19.0 3.3 16.0 17.7 14.4 1.2 16.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 19.0 17.4 16.0 19.0 8.9 16.0 14.5 4.9 10.3 11.6 3.7 8.2 8.6 2.5 6.0 4.0 0.7 2.6
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 16.4 16.0 11.5 8.2 10.1
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 19.0 16.0 19.0 15.9 16.0 11.3 8.0 9.9
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0
Low noise cage

P1-P2-P3-A1-A2
Spring
Actuator
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 5.5 2.8 4.3 3.6 1.7 2.8 3.6 1.7 2.8
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 13.9 11.3 0.7 12.8 9.7 7.8 0.2 8.8 9.7 7.8 0.2 8.8
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 3.0 0.4 1.9 1.9 1.1 1.9 1.1
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 9.0 6.4 7.9 6.1 4.3 5.3 6.1 4.3 5.3
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 19.0 19.0 13.8 11.1 16.0 19.0 17.1 9.5 7.7 16.0 19.0 17.1 9.5 7.7 16.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 8.8 6.2 7.7 6.0 4.1 5.2 6.0 4.1 5.2
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 8.8 6.2 7.7 6.0 4.1 5.2 6.0 4.1 5.2
Pneumatic actuators
Control systems
Page 13 of 29
13
4
4.2
44
14
4.2
DN65-100 (2½"-4'') - Flow under - PN9000E
shut-off
PN9000E -
Class VI
Page 14 of 29
Valve size DN65-100 (2½-4")

Spring
Actuator 16 (18) 25 (29) 36 (42) 63-90 (73-104) 100-115-117 (116-133-135)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Control systems
Maximum
pressure N-P H N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
(bar g)
Pneumatic actuators
PN9230E 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.6 2.6 1.6 0.5 0.1

PN9230E 0.4-1.2 6.0 19.0 11.1 8.6 4.1 5.8 2.6 2.9 1.1 1.7 0.5
PN9236E 1.0-2.0 6.0 19.0 19.0 8.0 3.5 3.5 18.7 15.5 5.5 2.2 2.2 10.2 8.4 2.7 0.9 0.9 6.3 5.1 1.5 0.4 0.4
PN9233E 2.0-4.0 6.0 19.0 19.0 14.8 13.0 13.0 14.0 12.8 9.2 8.1 8.1
PN9330E 0.2-1.0 4.0 19.0 10.7 8.4 3.9 5.7 2.5 2.9 1.1 1.6 0.5
PN9330E 0.4-1.2 4.0 19.0 15.7 1.7 14.1 10.9 0.9 7.6 5.8 0.2 4.7 3.5
PN9336E 1.0-2.0 4.0 19.0 19.0 14.4 12.6 12.6 13.8 12.6 9.0 7.9 7.9
PN9337E 2.5-3.5 4.0
Cage Type Standard cage (S) Low Noise Cage (P1-A1-P2-A2-P3)
Valve size DN65-100 (2½-4") DN65-80 DN100

Spring
Actuator 160-180 (185-208) All Kvs All Kvs
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9230E 0.2-1.0 6.0 0.1
PN9230E 0.4-1.2 6.0 0.9 0.1 1.7 0.5 0.9 0.1
PN9236E 1.0-2.0 6.0 3.7 3.0 0.8 0.1 0.1 6.3 5.1 1.5 0.4 0.4 3.7 3.0 0.8 0.1 0.1
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 8.5 7.8 5.6 4.9 4.9 14.0 12.8 9.2 8.1 8.1 8.5 7.8 5.6 4.9 4.9
PN9123E 1.0-2.0 6.0 0.8 0.1 1.6 0.5 0.8 0.1
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 2.7 2.0 4.7 3.5 2.7 2.0
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 8.4 7.7 5.4 4.7 4.7 13.8 12.6 9.0 7.9 7.9 8.4 7.7 5.4 4.7 4.7
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 18.9 16.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 18.9 16.0
CTLS Issue 13
TI-P357-30
Maximum differential pressures for Class VI shut-off - Soft Seated (G&K) Spira-trol -
DN15-25 (½''-1'') - Flow under - PN9000E
shut-off
PN9000E -
Class VI
TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13

Spring
Actuator 0.01-0.07 (0.012-0.081) 0.1-0.2 (0.12-0.23) 0.5 (0.58) 1.0 (1.2) 1.6 (1.8) 2.5 (2.9)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120E 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.2 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 4.2 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 1.5 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 0.5 7.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
Cage Type Standard cage (S) Low noise cage (P1)

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 4.9-6.3 (5.7-7.3) 7.2 (8.3) 10 (12) 11 (12.7) 2,5-4-6,3-10 (2.9-4.6-7.3-12)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120E 0.2-1.0 6.0 6.5 3.3 2.5 1.9 1.5 1.5
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.4 7.0 4.9 7.0 3.9 6.4 3.1 6.4 3.1
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.4 7.0 4.9 7.0 3.9 6.4 3.1 6.4 3.1
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 0.1 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 -0.3 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.3 7.0 7.0 6.3 7.0
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
Pneumatic actuators
Control systems
Page 15 of 29
15
4
4.2
44
16
4.2
DN15-25 (½''-1'') - Flow under - PN9000R
shut-off
Class VI
PN9000R -
Page 16 of 29

Spring
Actuator 0.01-0.07 (0.012-0.081) 0.1-0.2 (0.12-0.23) 0.5 (0.58) 1.0 (1.2) 1.6 (1.8) 2.5 (2.9)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Control systems
Maximum
(bar g)
Pneumatic actuators
PN9120R 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9120R 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9125R 0.4-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9126R 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9123R 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.2 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 4.2 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 1.5 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 0.5 7.0
PN9220R 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9220R 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9226R 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9223R 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320R 0.2-1.0 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320R 0.4-1.2 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 4.9-6.3 (5.7-7.3) 7.2 (8.3) 10 (12) 11 (12.7) 2,5-4-6,3-10 (2.9-4.6-7.3-12)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120R 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9120R 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9125R 0.4-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9126R 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9123R 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 0.1 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9220R 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9220R 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9226R 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9223R 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320R 0.2-1.0 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320R 0.4-1.2 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
CTLS Issue 13
TI-P357-30
DN32-50 (1¼"-2'') - Flow under - PN9000E
shut-off
PN9000E -
Class VI
TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 6.3 (7.3) 10 (12) 16 (18) 17.5 - 18 (20.2-21) 25 (29)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120E 0.2-1.0 6.0 6.2 3.3 1.9 1.5 1.1 0.4
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.4 7.0 3.9 6.6 3.1 5.0 2.3 2.5 1.1
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.4 7.0 3.9 6.6 3.1 5.0 2.3 2.5 1.1
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 5.6 7.0
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 0.1 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 5.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 2.9 7.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.5 7.0 7.0 4.9 7.0 5.8 2.5 4.4
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
Low noise cage (P1-P2-P3-

A1-A2)
Spring
Actuator
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120E 0.2-1.0 6.0 0.3 0.1 0.1
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 6.0 2.0 0.8 1.3 0.5 1.3 0.5
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 6.0 2.0 0.8 1.3 0.5 1.3 0.5
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 4.4 5.9 5.0 3.1 4.1 5.0 3.1 4.1
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 2.3 7.0 7.0 7.0 1.6 7.0 7.0 7.0 1.6 7.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 4.6 1.9 3.4 3.2 1.3 2.4 3.2 1.3 2.4
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 5.6 6.7 7.0 5.6 6.7
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 5.5 6.5 7.0 5.5 6.5
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.4 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.3 4.5 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.3 4.5 7.0
Pneumatic actuators
Control systems
Page 17 of 29
17
4
4.2
44
18
4.2
DN32-50 (1¼''-2'') - Flow under - PN9000R
shut-off
Class VI
PN9000R -
Page 18 of 29

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 6.3 (7.3) 10 (12) 16 (18) 17.5 - 18 (20.2-21) 25 (29)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Control systems
Maximum
(bar g)
Pneumatic actuators
PN9120R 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9120R 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9125R 0.4-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9126R 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9123R 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 0.1 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 5.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 2.9 7.0
PN9220R 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9220R 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9226R 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9223R 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320R 0.2-1.0 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320R 0.4-1.2 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0

Spring
Actuator 31-36 (36-42) 46-50 (53-58) All Kvs
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120R 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9120R 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9125R 0.4-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9126R 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9123R 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 2.3 7.0 7.0 7.0 1.6 7.0 7.0 7.0 1.6 7.0
PN9220R 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9220R 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9226R 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9223R 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320R 0.2-1.0 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9320R 0.4-1.2 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
CTLS Issue 13
TI-P357-30
DN65-100 (2½"-4'') - Flow under - PN9000E
shut-off
PN9000E -
Class VI
TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13

Spring
Actuator 16 (18) 25 (29) 36 (42) 63-90 (73-104) 100-115-117 (116-133-135) 160-180 (185-208)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9230E 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 4.1 2.9 1.5 0.9 0.5
PN9230E 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 5.6 7.0 4.0 3.9 2.1 2.5 1.3 1.5 0.8
PN9236E 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 5.1 5.1 7.0 7.0 6.8 3.6 3.6 7.0 7.0 3.7 1.9 1.9 7.0 5.9 2.3 1.2 1.2 4.4 3.7 1.4 0.7 0.7
PN9233E 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.2 5.5 5.5
PN9330E 0.2-1.0 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 5.5 7.0 3.8 3.9 2.1 2.4 1.3 1.5 0.7
PN9330E 0.4-1.2 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 3.3 7.0 7.0 2.3 7.0 6.8 1.2 5.5 4.3 0.7 3.4 2.6 0.4
PN9336E 1.0-2.0 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.1 5.3 5.3
PN9337E 2.5-3.5 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
Cage Type Low Noise Cage (P1-A1-P2-A2-P3)
Valve size DN65-80 DN100

Spring
Actuator All Kvs All Kvs
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
pressure N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
(bar g)
PN9230E 0.2-1.0 6.0 0.9 0.5
PN9230E 0.4-1.2 6.0 2.5 1.3 1.5 0.8
PN9236E 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 5.9 2.3 1.2 1.2 4.4 3.7 1.4 0.7 0.7
PN9233E 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.2 5.5 5.5
PN9330E 0.2-1.0 4.0 2.4 1.3 1.5 0.7
PN9330E 0.4-1.2 4.0 5.5 4.3 0.7 3.4 2.6 0.4
PN9336E 1.0-2.0 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.1 5.3 5.3
PN9337E 2.5-3.5 4.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
Pneumatic actuators
Control systems
Page 19 of 29
19
4
4.2
44
20
4.2
DN65-100 (2½"-4'') - Flow under PN9000R
shut-off
Class VI
PN9000R -
Page 20 of 29

Spring
Actuator 16 (18) 25 (29) 36 (42) 63-90 (73-104) 100-115-117 (116-133-135) 160-180 (185-208)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Control systems
Maximum
(bar g)
Pneumatic actuators
PN9230R 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9230R 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9236R 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9233R 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.2 5.5 5.5
PN9330R 0.2-1.0 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9330R 0.4-1.2 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9336R 1.0-2.0 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.5 6.5 7.0 7.0 5.3 4.1 4.1 6.2 5.5 3.2 2.5 2.5

Spring
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9230R 0.2-1.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9230R 0.4-1.2 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9236R 1.0-2.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9233R 2.0-4.0 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.2 5.5 5.5
PN9330R 0.2-1.0 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9330R 0.4-1.2 2.7 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0
PN9336R 1.0-2.0 2.7 7.0 7.0 5.3 4.1 4.1 6.2 5.5 3.2 2.5 2.5
CTLS Issue 13
TI-P357-30
Maximum differential pressures for Class IV shut-off - Hard Facing (W) Spira-trol -
DN15-25 (½''-1'') - Flow under - PN9000E
shut-off
Class IV
PN9000E -
TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13

Spring
Actuator 0.01-0.07 (0.012-0.081) 0.1-0.2 (0.12-0.23) 0.5 (0.58) 1.0 (1.2) 1.6 (1.8) 2.5 (2.9)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120E 0.2-1.0 6.0 92.8
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 16.0 103.4 16.0 64.6 39.8 6.5
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 6.0 103.4 16.0 103.4 16.0 64.6 39.8 6.5
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 61.4 16.0 69.5 31.3 16.0
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 13.7 16.0 103.4 103.4 0.7 16.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 62.6 16.0 103.4 38.3 16.0 65.4 5.7 16.0 33.8 16.0
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 82.2 16.0
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 103.4 16.0 103.4 79.7 16.0
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 4.9-6.3 (5.7-7.3) 7.2 (8.3) 10 (12) 11 (12.7) 2,5-4-6,3-10 (2.9-4.6-7.3-12)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120E 0.2-1.0 6.0
PN9120E 0.4-1.2 6.0
PN9125E 0.4-2.0 6.0
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 42.7 16.2 16.0 17.8 2.9 11.3 11.6 6.5 7.4 3.2 4.2 0.8 4.2 0.8
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 101.1 16.0 65.5 50.6 16.0 49.3 37.5 16.0 37.9 28.4 16.0 29.0 21.3 16.0 29.0 21.3 16.0
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 17.9 6.5 3.8 0.6
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 78.1 51.5 16.0 37.7 22.7 16.0 27.3 15.5 16.0 20.1 10.6 16.0 14.5 6.8 11.2 14.5 6.8 11.2
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 95.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 85.0 75.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 67.2 59.5 25.0 20.7 16.0 67.2 59.5 25.0 20.7 16.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 76.3 49.8 16.0 36.7 21.8 16.0 26.5 14.7 16.0 19.5 9.9 15.3 14.0 6.3 10.7 14.0 6.3 10.7
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.3 88.4 25.0 13.8 16.0 79.2 67.4 20.2 8.4 16.0 62.1 52.6 14.4 4.8 16.0 48.6 40.9 9.9 2.1 16.0 48.6 40.9 9.9 2.1 16.0
Pneumatic actuators
Control systems
Page 21 of 29
21
4
4.2
44
22
4.2
DN15-25 (½''-1'') - Flow under - PN9000R
shut-off
Class IV
PN9000R -
Page 22 of 29

Spring
Actuator 0.01-0.07 (0.012-0.081) 0.1-0.2 (0.12-0.23) 0.5 (0.58) 1.0 (1.2) 1.6 (1.8) 2.5 (2.9)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Control systems
Maximum
(bar g)
Pneumatic actuators
PN9120R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9120R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9125R 0.4-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9126R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9123R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 13.7 16.0 103.4 103.4 0.7 16.0
PN9220R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9220R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9226R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.2-1.0 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.4-1.2 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 4.9-6.3 (5.7-7.3) 7.2 (8.3) 10 (12) 11 (12.7) 2,5-4-6,3-10 (2.9-4.6-7.3-12)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 95.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 95.7 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9120R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 98.4 90.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 98.4 90.7 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9125R 0.4-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 99.0 89.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 78.6 70.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 78.6 70.9 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9126R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 99.0 89.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 78.6 70.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 78.6 70.9 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9123R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 101.1 16.0 65.5 50.6 16.0 49.3 37.5 16.0 37.9 28.4 16.0 29.0 21.3 16.0 29.0 21.3 16.0
PN9220R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9220R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9226R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.2-1.0 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.4-1.2 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
CTLS Issue 13
TI-P357-30
DN32-50 (1¼"-2'') - Flow under - PN9000E
shut-off
Class IV
PN9000E -
TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 6.3 (7.3) 10 (12) 16 (18) 17.5 - 18 (20.2-21) 25 (29)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0 40.8 15.1 16.0 17.8 2.9 11.3 7.4 3.2 4.4 1.0 1.5
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 97.2 16.0 65.5 50.6 16.0 37.9 28.4 16.0 29.7 21.8 16.0 21.1 15.0 16.0 8.3 5.0 6.8
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0 16.8 5.7 3.8
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 75.0 49.3 16.0 37.7 22.7 16.0 20.1 10.6 16.0 15.0 7.1 11.5 9.7 3.6 7.0 2.1 0.7
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 85.0 75.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 68.6 60.7 25.0 21.3 16.0 51.2 45.1 20.7 14.6 16.0 24.6 21.3 8.1 4.8 16.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 62.0 58.7 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 73.3 47.6 16.0 36.7 21.8 16.0 19.5 9.9 15.3 14.4 6.5 11.0 9.3 3.1 6.6 1.9 0.5
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.3 88.4 25.0 13.8 16.0 62.1 52.6 14.4 4.8 16.0 49.7 41.8 10.2 2.3 16.0 36.6 30.4 6.0 16.0 16.7 13.3 0.1 15.2
Low noise cage

(P1-P2-P3-A1-A2)
Spring
Actuator
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9126E 1.0-2.0 6.0
PN9123E 2.0-4.0 6.0 5.5 2.9 4.4 2.6 0.7 1.7 2.6 0.7 1.7
PN9220E 0.2-1.0 6.0
PN9220E 0.4-1.2 6.0 0.6
PN9226E 1.0-2.0 6.0 18.6 15.9 5.3 2.7 16.0 11.9 10.0 2.4 0.5 11.0 11.9 10.0 2.4 0.5 11.0
PN9223E 2.0-4.0 6.0 48.6 45.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 33.2 31.4 23.8 21.9 16.0 33.2 31.4 23.8 21.9 16.0
PN9320E 0.2-1.0 4.0 0.4
PN9320E 0.4-1.2 4.0 12.2 9.6 11.1 7.3 5.4 6.5 7.3 5.4 6.5
Pneumatic actuators
Control systems
Page 23 of 29
23
4
4.2
44
24
4.2
DN32-50 (1¼"-2'') - Flow under PN9000R
shut-off
Class IV
PN9000R -
Page 24 of 29

Spring
Actuator 4.0 (4.6) 6.3 (7.3) 10 (12) 16 (18) 17.5 - 18 (20.2-21) 25 (29)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Control systems
Maximum
(bar g)
Pneumatic actuators
PN9120R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 97.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 79.7 73.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.0 36.7 23.5 20.2 16.0
PN9120R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 100.4 92.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 75.8 69.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 37.9 34.6 21.4 18.1 16.0
PN9125R 0.4-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 99.0 89.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 80.2 72.3 25.0 25.0 16.0 60.2 54.1 25.0 23.5 16.0 29.4 26.1 12.9 9.6 16.0
PN9126R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 99.0 89.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 80.2 72.3 25.0 25.0 16.0 60.2 54.1 25.0 23.5 16.0 29.4 26.1 12.9 9.6 16.0
PN9123R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 97.2 16.0 65.5 50.6 16.0 37.9 28.4 16.0 29.7 21.8 16.0 21.1 15.0 16.0 8.3 5.0 6.8
PN9220R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9220R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9226R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 62.0 58.7 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.2-1.0 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.4-1.2 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 97.8 94.5 25.0 25.0 16.0
Low noise cage

(P1-P2-P3-A1-A2)
Spring
Actuator
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9120R 0.2-1.0 6.0 30.9 28.3 17.7 15.0 16.0 20.7 18.8 11.2 9.3 16.0 20.7 18.8 11.2 9.3 16.0
PN9120R 0.4-1.2 6.0 29.2 26.6 16.0 13.4 16.0 19.5 17.6 10.0 8.1 16.0 19.5 17.6 10.0 8.1 16.0
PN9125R 0.4-2.0 6.0 22.5 19.8 9.2 6.6 16.0 14.6 12.7 5.2 3.3 13.8 14.6 12.7 5.2 3.3 13.8
PN9126R 1.0-2.0 6.0 22.5 19.8 9.2 6.6 16.0 14.6 12.7 5.2 3.3 13.8 14.6 12.7 5.2 3.3 13.8
PN9123R 2.0-4.0 6.0 5.5 2.9 4.4 2.6 0.7 1.7 2.6 0.7 1.7
PN9220R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 97.4 95.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 97.4 95.5 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9220R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 93.1 91.2 25.0 25.0 16.0 93.1 91.2 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9226R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 76.0 74.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 76.0 74.1 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9223R 2.0-4.0 6.0 48.6 45.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 33.2 31.4 23.8 21.9 16.0 33.2 31.4 23.8 21.9 16.0
PN9320R 0.2-1.0 2.7 89.0 86.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 62.1 60.2 25.0 25.0 16.0 62.1 60.2 25.0 25.0 16.0
PN9320R 0.4-1.2 2.7 77.2 74.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 53.7 51.8 25.0 25.0 16.0 53.7 51.8 25.0 25.0 16.0
CTLS Issue 13
TI-P357-30
Maximum differential pressures for Class IV shut-off - Hard Facing (W) Spira-trol - DN65-
100 (2½"-4'') - Flow under PN9000E
shut-off
Class IV
PN9000E -
TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13

Spring
Actuator 16 (18) 25 (29) 36 (42) 63-90 (73-104) 100-115-117 (116-133-135) 160-180 (185-208)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9230E 0.4-1.2 6.0 8.6 0.1
PN9236E 1.0-2.0 6.0 50.2 39.8 7.4 18.1 13.6 11.5 8.3 4.8 3.0 2.0 0.9 0.4
PN9233E 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 48.1 43.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 32.9 29.7 19.7 16.5 16.0 16.9 15.0 9.4 7.6 7.6 9.7 8.6 5.0 3.8 3.8 5.2 4.5 2.2 1.5 1.5
PN9330E 0.2-1.0 4.0 8.2
PN9330E 0.4-1.2 4.0 35.5 25.2 11.8 7.3 7.0 3.8 2.3 0.5 0.4
PN9336E 1.0-2.0 4.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 47.2 42.7 25.0 24.2 16.0 32.3 29.1 19.1 15.9 15.9 16.5 14.7 9.1 7.3 7.3 9.5 8.3 4.7 3.6 3.6 5.0 4.3 2.1 1.3 1.3
PN9337E 2.5-3.5 4.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 95.5 92.3 25.0 25.0 16.0 52.0 50.2 25.0 25.0 16.0 32.2 31.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 19.2 18.5 16.2 15.5 15.5

Spring
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9230E 0.4-1.2 6.0
PN9236E 1.0-2.0 6.0 2.0 0.9 0.4
PN9233E 2.0-4.0 6.0 9.7 8.6 5.0 3.8 3.8 5.2 4.5 2.2 1.5 1.5
PN9330E 0.2-1.0 4.0
PN9330E 0.4-1.2 4.0 0.4
PN9336E 1.0-2.0 4.0 9.5 8.3 4.7 3.6 3.6 5.0 4.3 2.1 1.3 1.3
PN9337E 2.5-3.5 4.0 32.2 31.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 19.2 18.5 16.2 15.5 15.5
Pneumatic actuators
Control systems
Page 25 of 29
25
4
4.2
44
26
4.2
DN65-100 (2½"-4'') - Flow under - PN9000R
Page 26 of 29

Spring
Actuator 16 (18) 25 (29) 36 (42) 63-90 (73-104) 100-115-117 (116-133-135) 160-180 (185-208)
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Control systems
Maximum
(bar g)
Pneumatic actuators
PN9230R 0.2-1.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 97.1 93.9 25.0 25.0 16.0 52.9 51.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 32.8 31.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 19.6 18.8 16.6 15.9 15.9
PN9230R 0.4-1.2 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 92.8 89.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 50.5 48.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 31.3 30.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 18.6 17.9 15.6 14.9 14.9
PN9236R 1.0-2.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 75.7 72.5 25.0 25.0 16.0 40.9 39.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 25.1 24.0 20.4 19.2 16.0 14.8 14.0 11.8 11.1 11.1
PN9233R 2.0-4.0 6.0 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 48.1 43.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 32.9 29.7 19.7 16.5 16.0 16.9 15.0 9.4 7.6 7.6 9.7 8.6 5.0 3.8 3.8 5.2 4.5 2.2 1.5 1.5
PN9330R 0.2-1.0 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 88.6 84.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 61.8 58.6 25.0 25.0 16.0 33.1 31.3 25.0 23.9 16.0 20.1 19.0 15.4 14.2 14.2 11.6 10.9 8.7 8.0 8.0
PN9330R 0.4-1.2 2.7 103.4 103.4 25.0 25.0 16.0 76.8 72.3 25.0 25.0 16.0 53.4 50.2 25.0 25.0 16.0 28.3 26.5 20.9 19.1 16.0 17.1 15.9 12.3 11.2 11.2 9.8 9.0 6.8 6.1 6.1
PN9336R 1.0-2.0 2.7 76.5 66.1 25.0 23.3 16.0 29.5 25.0 11.0 6.5 6.5 19.7 16.5 6.5 3.2 3.2 9.4 7.6 2.0 0.2 0.2 4.9 3.8 0.2 2.2 1.5

Spring
range bar Kvs (Cv)
Maximum
(bar g)
PN9230R 0.2-1.0 6.0 32.8 31.7 25.0 25.0 16.0 19.6 18.8 16.6 15.9 15.9
PN9230R 0.4-1.2 6.0 31.3 30.1 25.0 25.0 16.0 18.6 17.9 15.6 14.9 14.9
PN9236R 1.0-2.0 6.0 25.1 24.0 20.4 19.2 16.0 14.8 14.0 11.8 11.1 11.1
PN9233R 2.0-4.0 6.0 9.7 8.6 5.0 3.8 3.8 5.2 4.5 2.2 1.5 1.5
PN9330R 0.2-1.0 2.7 20.1 19.0 15.4 14.2 14.2 11.6 10.9 8.7 8.0 8.0
PN9330R 0.4-1.2 2.7 17.1 15.9 12.3 11.2 11.2 9.8 9.0 6.8 6.1 6.1
PN9336R 1.0-2.0 2.7 4.9 3.8 0.2 2.2 1.5
CTLS Issue 13
TI-P357-30
Control systems
PN9000 series selection guide:
Before making your PN9000 series selection please reference pages 6 to 25 - Sizing data
How to use the sizing data:

The tables supply guidance as to the sizing of the PN9000 when it is used on a SPIRA-TROL control valve.
Two conditions are illustrated in tabular form:

Class IV shut-off - Providing shut-off of the valve to the requirements of BS 5793-4 (IEC 60534-4) class IV.
Class VI shut-off - Providing shut-off of the valve to the requirements of BS 5793-4 (IEC 60534-4) class VI.

- Identify the maximum operating pressure condition, including any transient pressures likely to occur, within the selected column.
- Read back to the left hand side of the table to identify the suitable actuator for the application.
For conditions outside of those illustrated please contact Spirax Sarco.
PN = Polyester powder coated (standard)

Type PNP
PNP = Electroless nickle plated
Series 9 = 9000 series 9
1 = 100 cm2
Actuator size 2 = 340 cm2 3
3 = 670 cm2 4.2

2 = 20 mm 27
Valve travel 3
3 = 30 mm
0 = 0.2 to 1.0 bar (option for 0.4 to 1.2 bar)
3 = 2.0 to 4.0 bar
5 = 0.4 to 2.0 bar (PN9100 series only) 7

Spring rating
6 = 1.0 to 2.0 bar
7 = 2.5 to 3.5 bar (PN933_ series only
E = Spring-extend
Spring action E
R = Spring-retract
Blank = Spira-trolTM K and L Series (M34)

Yoke type
(DN15 - DN50)
B = Spira-trolTM J Series (M50)
Manual override H = Handwheel (optional)
Stainless steel bolting S = Stainless steel bolting (optional)
Fast Speed F = version with the higher capacity of speed (possible only PN92_ and PN93_)
How to order / selection example:

1 off Spirax Sarco PNP9337E pneumatic actuator.
TI-P357-30 Page 27 of 29
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Pneumatic actuators
Fast speed version
Fast speed versions are available for PN92xx and PN93xx. The fast speed version is a modified version of the existing PN but it also
need to have the right pipe diameter of the air inlet as an example: DN65 PTSUSS + PN9320 air inlet= " without
Time to close Time to open
Standard 2.5s 5.1s
Fast 1.4s 2.9s

Same with ¼” air inlet.
Fast 0.8s 1.5s
With a positioner, the fastest time to close/open will be limited by itself.
Same with ¼” air inlet SP500.
Fast 1.4s 2.9s
For fail safe fast speed function, the below lay at could be used to shortcut the positioner.
Actuator
4.2 Electric command 1D 2
28 +
-
Pneumatic command
3 1
Air inlet
Page 28 of 29 TI-P357-30
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
Spare parts
The only spares available are clearly indicated below and are common for both spring-extend and spring-retract versions.
Available spares
Stem seal kit 17, 18, 30
Diaphragm kit 4, 9
Travel indicator kit 15, 19, 20
Spring kit 5
Linkage kit (suitable for Mk1 and Spira-trolTM valves) 10, 13, 14, 26, 27
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the actuator model.
Example: 1 - Stem seal kit for a PN9120 pneumatic actuator.
4.2
5 29
30
9 17
18
15, 19 and 20
10
26 and 27 13 and 14
TI-P357-30 Page 29 of 29
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Pneumatic actuators
4.2
30
Control systems
Pneumatic actuators
TI-P327-01
CTLS Issue 5
TN2000 Series
Pneumatic Piston Actuators for DN125 to DN300
SPIRA-TROL Series Control Valves
Description
The TN2000 series pneumatic piston actuators are designed for use with DN125 to DN300 SPIRA-TROL control valves. There are
three versions available: Single-acting (with spring), Double-acting (with spring) and Double-acting (no spring) for matching the
requirements of valves at various differential pressures and in a variety of applications.
Available types
SE = Single-acting, spring-extend
SR = Single-acting, spring-retract
DE = Double-acting, spring assisted (extend)
DR = Double-acting, spring assisted (retract) 4.2

DA = Double-acting, no spring 31
Optional extra
Manual handwheel
Technical data
Temperature range - 15 °C to +110 °C
Maximum operating inlet temperature 10 bar g
Air supply connection " screwed NPT
Actuator level 70 mm
Note: Volume booster is recommended for use with this type of actuator.
Page 1 of 7
44 Control systems
Pneumatic actuators
Materials
32 21
15
23
3
16 10
31
19
9
18 29
8 5
6
17 30
31 10
16
2 15
26 7
22, 27, 28
24
25
4.2 33
12
14
11
32 13
1
1 Yoke SG iron 18 Nut and threaded

Carbon steel (plated)
bar
2 Lower cylinder end SG iron BS EN 1563 GJS 400
cap 18U-LT 19 Threaded bar M12 Carbon steel (plated)
3 Upper cylinder end SG iron BS EN 1563 GJS 400 20 " NPT vent plug
LD Polyethylene
cap 18U-LT (not shown)
4 Cylinder Composite tube 21 Cover PVC
5 Piston SG iron 22 Scale Stainless steel
6 Spring Chrome vanadium steel 23 Nut M12 Carbon steel (plated)
7 Spindle Stainless steel 24 Lock-nut M20 Stainless steel
8 Spindle sleeve Carbon steel (plated) 25 Cap screw Carbon steel (plated)
9 Lock-nut M27 Carbon steel (plated) 26 Bolt M12 Stainless steel
10 Bearing and seal 27 Pan head screw Carbon steel (plated)

Carbon steel (plated)
insert
28 Nut M2.5 Carbon steel (plated)
11 Indicator plate Stainless steel
29 'O' ring Fluorocarbon rubber (Viton)
12 Top connector Carbon steel (plated)
13 Bottom connector Carbon steel (plated)
14 Connector Stainless steel
32 Spring washer M12 Carbon steel (plated)
15 Rod seal wiper Polyurethane
33 Spring washer M10 Carbon steel (plated)
16 DU plain bearing PTFE/steel composite
17 Long nut Carbon steel (plated)
TN2000 Series Pneumatic Piston Actuators for DN125 to DN300 SPIRA-TROL Series Control Valves
Control systems
Weight
Actuator range A B C D
TN2277SE and variants 863 532 1197 330 116 + 21
TN2277DE and variants 863 532 1197 330 116 + 21
TN2277SR and variants 863 532 1132 330 116 + 19
TN2277DR and variants 863 532 1132 330 116 + 19
TN227NDA and variants 863 532 - 330 98 -
B D
4.2
33
TN2277SE TN2277SRH
44 Control systems
Pneumatic actuators
How to use the sizing data:
The following tables supply guidance as to the sizing of the TN2000 when it is used on the SPIRA-TROL series control valves.
There are three applications:

Unbalanced flow under applications Unbalanced on/off flow over applications Balanced flow under applications
Two conditions are illustrated in tabular form in each of the applications:

Class IV shut-off - Providing shut-off of the valve to the requirements of EN 60534-4 (IEC 60534-4) Class IV.
Class VI shut-off - Providing shut-off of the valve to the requirements of EN 60534-4 (IEC 60534-4) Class VI.
Class V shut-off - Providing shut-off of the valve to the requirements of EN 60534-4 (IEC 60534-4) Class V.

- Identify and compare the maximum operating pressure condition, including any transient pressures likely to occur, within the
selected column.
Note: Flow over the plug for modulating control is not recommended. Flow over is only suitable for on/off applications.
4.2 For conditions outside of those illustrated, including double acting versions, please contact Spirax Sarco.
34 Note: For TN2277SR, the values in the following tables are based on the air pressure indicated below the product nomenclature of the
specific unit. For double acting actuators in the event of air failure you will require an air pressurised tank to position the valve.
For fluctuating pressure control applications, or applications requiring rapid response (e.g. accumulator control)a pneumatic volume
booster is recommended.
Control systems
Valve maximum differential pressure
TN2277SE DN125 DN150 DN200

DN250
DN300 full
DN300 reduced
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Flow
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
Metal seated (T, W) Class IV 7.8 7 4.8 4.2 2.2 1.9
Metal seated (T, W) Class V** 3,0 2,2 0,8 0,3

Unbalanced
Under Soft seated (G, K) Class VI 10,9 10,0 7,3 6,7 4,1 3,7 1,4 1,3
Soft seated (P) Class VI 10,4 9,6 6,9 6,3 3,8 3,4 1,3 1,1
Balanced All seated (T, W, P, K, G) Class IV 103,4 96,2 71,6 64,8 32,5 29,3 11,8 10,4
Unbalanced Over All seated (T, W, P, K, G) Class IV, V, VI 29,8 29,0 19,6 19 10,8 10,5 3,9 3,8
Flow over : on/off application only with unbalanced trim only.

For flow over maximum differential pressure, 6bar g air supply is considered for others air pressure please consult Spirax Sarco.
Valve maximum differential pressure

TN2277SR DN125 DN150 DN200
DN250
DN300 full
with 6 bar air supply*
DN300 reduced 4.2
35
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Flow
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
Metal seated (T, W) Class IV 24,7 23,8 16,1 15,5 8,6 8,3 2,6 2,5
Metal seated (T, W) Class V** 19,9 19,0 12,1 11,6 5,6 5,3 0,7 0,9
Unbalanced
Under Soft seated (G, K) Class VI 27,7 26,9 18,6 18,0 10,4 10,1 3,8 3,7
Soft seated (P) Class VI 27,2 26,4 18,2 17,6 10,1 9,8 3,6 3,5
Balanced All seated (T, W, P, K, G) Class IV 103,4 96,2 71,6 64,8 32,5 29,3 11,8 10,4
Unbalanced Over All seated (T, W, P, K, G) Class IV, V, VI 11,8 10,9 7,7 7,2 4,3 3,9 1,5 1,4
*For other air supply pressures please consult Spirax Sarco.

Flow over are for on/off application only and unbalanced trim only.
** Class V has an additional cost impact on the valve. Please contatct Spirax Sarco for details.
Note: The differential pressures stated are at 100% of actuator thrust. It is recommended that valve assemblies are not selected to
operate at the absolute maximum differential pressure, especially for steam applications where the downstream pressure can operate
in vacuum. Please contact Spirax Sarco for further information.
44 Control systems
Pneumatic actuators
How to order
Ordering a TN2000 Series Actuator

Type TN TN
Actuator size 2 = 993 cm 2 2
Valve travel 7 = 70 mm 7
7 = with spring
Spring rating 7
N = double-acting (no spring)
SE = Single-acting, spring-extend
SR = Single-acting, spring-retract
Action DE = Double-acting, spring assisted (extend)

SE
DR = Double-acting, spring assisted (retract)
DA = Double-acting, no spring
Manual override H = Handwheel (optional) not available for the NDA version
Ordering example:
4.2 1 off Spirax Sarco TN2277SE pneumatic piston actuator.
36
Control systems
Spare parts
The spare parts available are common across the range of actuators detailed in this document. No other parts are available as spares.
Available spares
'O' ring kit 15, 29, 30, 31
Travel indicator kit 22, 27, 28
Spring 6
Handwheel A
EH kit B
RH kit C
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the actuator model.
Example: 1 - 'O' ring kit for a Spirax Sarco TN2277SE pneumatic piston actuator.
A
4.2
37
B
C
15, 29, 30 and 31

6
22, 27 and 28
44 Control systems
Pneumatic actuators
4.2
38
Control systems
Electric actuators
TI-P344-02
CTLS Issue 4
AEL3
Electric Actuators
Description
The AEL3 is a stepper motor controlled, electric actuator with non-serviceable maintenance free gearbox.
For use on DN15-DN50 Spira-trol 2-port valves and on DN15-DN50 QL 3-port valves.
Available types
The actuators are available as standard with 24 Vac/dc. 230 Vac and 100-110 Vac modules can be installed into the actuator. The standard
version is available for VMD (Valve Motor Drive), 4 - 20 mA or 0 - 10 Vdc input control signals, (2-10 Vdc for 24 Vac/dc actuators only).
Other variants are Spring Extend, Spring Retract and No Spring.
These actuators can be used with the following valves:
2-port Spira-trol TM
DN15 to DN50 Note: For fluid temperatures between 130 °C and 240 °C
Control valves
3-port QL valves DN15 to DN50 with centralising ring high temperature extension kits are required.
4.3
1
4 Materials
No. Part Material
1 Housing Polycarbonate
2 Pillars Stainless steel
3 3 Mounting Flange Stainless Steel
4 Adaptor Stainless Steel
CTLS Issue 4
AEL3 Electric Actuators
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
Technical data
Supply voltage 24 Vac/dc (modules for 230 Vac, 100-110 Vac,) (+/-15%)
Supply frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz/continuous
Maximal power consumption W 12 W (24 Vac/dc)

Note: power consumption is relative to 50/60 Hz/continuous respectively 28 VA (230 and 100-110 Vac)
Stroke mm (maximum) 20
Actuator speed mm/s (s/mm)

0.5 (Factory set), 0.25 or 0.16 (2, 4 or 6)
Note: Speed is selectable within the actuator.
Enclosure rating IP66 EN60529
Actuator thrust kN (maximum) 2
Ambient limits -10 °C to +55 °C, <95% humidity
Storage temperature -20 °C to +70 °C
Valve control input VMD: 24 V, 100-110 V or 230 V. Signal: 4 - 20 mA or 0 - 10 Vdc
Active valve position feedback 0 - 10 Vdc; load > 2500 Ohm
Status indication 2 LEDs indicate the status and error
Duty cycle spring return >40,000 cycles
4.3
2 Optional extras
For fluid temperatures between 130 °C and 180 °C.
High temperature extension kits
For fluid temperatures between 180 °C and 240 °C.
Auxiliary switches
Power modules For 230 Vac and 100-110 Vac
Split-Range unit 2-10 Vdc input control signal (24 Vdc actuators only)
Approvals
Type of protection IP66 (EN60529)
Protection class III (IEC 60730)
EMC Directive: 2014/30/EU and UK Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
LV Directive: 2014/35/EU and UK Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016, EN 60730-1, EN 60730-2-14
Over-voltage categories III

Degree of contamination III
(UL - UL873)*
(cUL - CSA-C22.2 No. 24-93)*
*Does not apply to Auxiliary switches, Split Range Units and Power Modules 230 Vac and 100-110 Vac
CTLS Issue 4
Control systems
Electric actuators 4
Maximum differential pressures
Class IV Shut off, Flow under – Maximum differential pressure for Spira-trol valve with metal seat*
Theoretical Maximum Differential Pressure (bar)
DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50

Actuator Min thrust
designation (N)
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
AEL3E
AEL3R 2000 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 39.1 31.2 30.7 24.6 11.5 8.8 7.5 5.6
AEL3X
* Refer to technical information section for temperature limitations.
Class VI Shut off, Flow under – Maximum differential pressure for Spira-trol valve with soft seat*
Theoretical Maximum Differential Pressure (bar)

Actuator Min thrust
designation (N)
4.3
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
3
AEL3E
AEL3R 2000 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 38.5 35.5 29.4 14.6 12.0 10.2 8.3
AEL3X
* Refer to technical information section for temperature limitations.
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
15.5 60 73* * For AEL3X 230

this dimension
is 60 mm
283
AEL3R no power position
AEL3E no power position
AEL3E
shown
4.3 70 90
High temperature
extension kit for 180 °C
60
High temperature
AEL3E/AEL3R 5.7 extension kit for 240 °C
AEL3X 4.2
180 °C kit 0.4 100
240 °C kit 0.7
CTLS Issue 4
Control systems
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions that are supplied with the product.
AEL3 actuators - Product nomenclature and selection example:
Product A = Actuator A
Type E = Electric E
Movement L = Linear (Selectable within the actuator) L
Series 3 3
E = Spring extend
Failure mode R = Spring retract E
X = No spring
24 Vac/dc
Supply voltage 230 Vac
100-110 Vac
Selection example AEL3 E 24 Vac/dc

4.3
Customer requirement example:
24 Vac Electric actuator sprung closed for 12 bar steam on DN50 Spira-Trol valve, operating with 2-10 Vdc input control signal, plus,
5
additional position switches.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco AEL3E 24 Vac/dc Electric Actuator + 1 off 2-10 Vdc Split-Range unit + 1 off AEL3 Auxiliary Switch + 1 off
AEL3 High Temp. Ext. Kit <240°C
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
4.3
6
Control systems
Electric actuators
TI-P358-25
CMGT Issue 4
AEL5 Series
Electric Linear Actuators
for DN15 to DN100 Control Valves
Description
The AEL5 series electric actuators are reversible having linear output.
Available types
AEL5 actuators are available with 4 supply variants, 230 Vac, 115 Vac,
24 Vac and 24 Vdc all being suitable for a VMD (Valve Motor Drive) input power
signal. At extra cost, actuators can be fitted with a positioner input card that can
accept a 4 - 20 mA or 2 - 10 Vdc control signal - Please note that this option is
not available for the 24 Vdc supply variant.
AEL5 actuators can be ordered with or without a potentiometer, those ordered
with will be fitted with a 1 kΩ potentiometer as standard.
The potentiometer can be used in conjunction with the positioner for a
2 - 10 V or 4 - 20 mA input signal, or as feedback for VMD. Also available are
auxiliary limit switches and anti-condense heater. See TI-P358-28 for further
4.3
details on the accessories.
7
These actuators can be used with the following valves, in conjunction with
an appropriate valve adaptor and mounting flange.
2-port SPIRA-TROL or C Series
Valves
3-port QL33, QL43, QL63 and QL73 mixing and diverting valves
Note: A mounting flange and valve adaptor is required to mount the actuator to
a valve. See the associated tables below:
Mounting flange selection

Actuator
AEL51_ AEL56_
Valve type and size AEL52_
AEL53_
AEL54_
AEL55_
KE and KEA
LE and LEA DN15 to DN50 EL5970
QL
KE and KEA QL DN65 to DN100 EL5971 EL5972
DN15 to DN50 EL5971 J

JE and JEA
DN65 to DN100 EL5972 J EL5972
Page 1 of 18
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
Materials
4.3
8 Spindle Nut
Valve adaptor
Mounting flange
No. Part Material
1 to 8 kN Polycarbonate
1 Case
14 to 25 kN Die-cast aluminium
2 Housing Die-cast aluminium
Actuator Spindle Nut Material

AEL6221_ POM-C
AEL6321_ POM-C
AEL6323_ POM-C
3 Spindle Nut
AEL6421_ Bronze and Aluminium
AEL6631_ Bronze and Aluminium-Zinc alloy
Page 2 of 18 TI-P358-25
CMGT Issue 4
AEL5 Series Electric Linear Actuators for DN15 to DN100 Control Valves
Control systems
Valve adaptor selection
Valve type and size Valve stem AEL51_ AEL52_ AEL53_ AEL54_ AEL55_ AEL56_
KE and KEA DN15 to DN50 M8 thread AEL6911 AEL6911 AEL6911 AEL6911 AEL6911
LE and LEA
QL DN65 to DN100 M12 thread Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated EL5945
DN15 to DN50 M8 thread AEL6911 J AEL6911 J AEL6911 J AEL6911 J AEL6911 J

JE and JEA
DN65 to DN100 M12 thread AEL6912 J AEL6912 J AEL6912 J AEL6912 J AEL6912 J EL5945
Technical data
Actuator type AEL51_ AEL52_ AEL53_ AEL54_ AEL55_ AEL56_
Supply voltage 230 Vac, 115 Vac, 24 Vac, (24 Vdc) ±10%
Supply frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz/(continuous)
Maximal power
consumption VA Note:
25.5/25.9 / 37/40 / 44/47 / 72/68 / 53/55 / 100/86 /
power consumption is
(41) (24) (41) (41) (93) (NA)
relative to 50/60 Hz /
(continuous) respectively
Stroke mm 50 50 50 50 65 100
Actuator speed mm/s

Note: Speed is relative to 0.25/0.3 / 0.5/0.6 / 0.5/0.6 / 1/1.2 /
4.3
0.65/0.78/(0.5) 0.45/0.54/(0.5)
50/60 Hz / (continuous)
respectively
(1) (0.5) (1) (1)
9
Enclosure rating IP65 (for outdoor installations provide adequate shelter)
Actuator trust kN 1 2 4.5 8 14 25
Ambient limits -20°C to 60°C (Caution: -20°C to 50°C with positioner card fitted)
Synchronous motor for 1 to 14 kN, Asynchronous motor for 25 kN (Alternative current) or

Motor
Brushed direct current motor (Direct current)
Terminations 1.5 mm²
Manual overide Handwheel
Conduit entries 2 x M20 x 1.5 (for 1 to 14 kN) and 3 x M20 x 1.5 (for 25 kN)
Positioner power
1
consumption VA
For alternative speed versions please contact Spirax Sarco
Approvals
This equipment is CE marked and conforms to the following:
- EN 50081-1 and EN 50082-2 (EMC)
- EN 61010-1/A2 (Safety), following the provisions of directives 89/336/EEC amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC (EMC) and
72/73/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC (LVD).
TI-P358-25 Page 3 of 18
CMGT Issue 4
44
10
4.3
Cage
type Standard Cage (S)
Valve
DN15 to DN25 (½" to 1")
Page 4 of 18
size
Actuator
type Kvs 0.01-0.07 0.1-0.2 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.5
(Cv) (0.012-0.081) (0.12-0.23) (0.58) (1.2) (1.8) (2.9)
Actuator
Control systems
thrust N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D

Electric actuators
(N)
AEL51 1000 103.4 103.4 16 103.4 103.4 16 103.4 103.4 16 103.4 103.4 16 103.4 89.4 16 90.6 52.4 16
AEL52 2000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 2.9 16 103.4 103.4 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 16
AEL53 4500 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
Cage
Low Noise Cage - P1
Valve
DN15 to DN25 (½" to 1")
size
Actuator
type Kvs 4.0 4.9-6.3 7.2 10 11 2,5- 4-6,3-10
(Cv) (4.6) (5.7-7.3) (8.3) (12) (12.7) (2.9- 4.6-7.3-12)
Actuator
(N)
Maximum differential pressures for Class IV shut-off -
AEL51 1000 59.6 33.1 16 29.8 14.8 16 22 10.2 16 16.6 7.1 12.5 12.4 4.7 9.1 12.4 4.7 9.1
AEL52 2000 103.4 103.4 15.4 16 79.5 64.6 4.9 16 61.3 49.5 2.4 16 48.5 38.9 0.7 16 38.3 30.5 16 38.3 30.5 16
AEL53 4500 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 102.9 95.1 25 25 16 102.9 95.1 25 25 16
Metal Seated (T&S) Spira-trol - FLOW UNDER
(½" to 1")
DN15 to DN25
CMGT Issue 4
TI-P358-25
* Not to be used with 316L plug and stem
Cage
Valve
TI-P358-25
DN32 to DN50 (1¼" to 2")
size
CMGT Issue 4
Actuator
(continued)
type Kvs 4.0 6.3 10 16 17.5 - 18

(Cv) (4.6) (7.3) (12) (18) (20.2-21)
Actuator
thrust N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
(N)
AEL51 1000 60.6 34.9 49.5 32.3 17.3 25.8 18.6 9.1 14.5 14.6 6.7 11.2 10.3 4.2 7.7
AEL52 2000 103.4 103.4 17.8 16 82 67.1 7.4 16 50.5 40.9 2.7 16 40.9 33 1.4 16 30.7 24.6 0.1 16
AEL53 4500 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 98.8 25 25 16 81.6 75.5 25 25 16
AEL54* 8000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
AEL55* 14000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
Cage
Valve Low Noise Cage
DN32 to DN50 (1¼" to 2") (P1-P2-P3-A1-A2)
size
Actuator
type Kvs 25 31-36 46-50
All Kvs
(Cv) (29) (36- 42) (53-58)
Actuator
thrust N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D N-P H B C D
(N)
AEL51 1000 4 0.7 2.8 2.7 1.5 1.2 0.4 1.2 0.4
AEL52 2000 15 11.7 13.6 11.5 8.8 10.3 7.5 5.6 6.7 7.5 5.6 6.7
AEL53 4500 42.6 39.3 25 22.8 16 33.5 30.9 20.3 17.7 16 23.2 21.3 13.8 11.9 16 23.2 21.3 13.8 11.9 16
AEL54* 8000 81.1 77.8 25 25 16 64.4 61.7 25 25 16 45.2 43.3 25 25 16 45.2 43.3 25 25 16
AEL55* 14000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 83 81.1 25 25 16 83 81.1 25 25 16
Electric actuators
Control systems
Page 5 of 18
(1¼" to 2")
DN32 to DN50

11
4
4.3
44
12
4.3
Cage
Valve
DN65 to DN100 (2½" to 4")
Page 6 of 18
size
Actuator
(continued)
type Kvs 16 25 36 63-90

(Cv) (18) (29) (42) (73-104)
Actuator
Control systems
thrust P H B C D N-P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
Electric actuators
(N)
AEL51 1000 9.3 2.2 0.9
AEL52 2000 29.7 19.3 11 6.6 7.2 4 3.2 1.4
AEL53 4500 80.6 70.2 25 25 16 33.1 28.6 14.6 10.1 10.1 22.9 19.7 9.7 6.5 6.5 12.1 10.2 4.6 2.8 2.8
AEL54 8000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 64 59.5 25 25 16 44.9 41.7 25 25 16 24.4 22.6 17 15.2 15.2
AEL55* 14000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 82.6 79.4 25 25 16 45.7 43.8 25 25 16
AEL56* 25000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 84.6 82.8 25 25 16
Cage Low Noise Cage

type Standard Cage (S) (P1-A1-P2-A2-P3)
Valve DN65 to DN100

DN65-80 DN100
size (2½" to 4")
Actuator
type Kvs 100-115-117 160-180

All Kvs All Kvs
(Cv) (116-133-135) (185-208)
Actuator
thrust P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
(N)
AEL51 1000
AEL52 2000 1.5 0.4 0.5 1.5 0.4 0.5
AEL53 4500 7.2 6 2.4 1.3 1.3 4 3.3 1.1 0.3 0.3 7.2 6 2.4 1.3 1.3 4 3.3 1.1 0.3 0.3
AEL54 8000 15.1 13.9 10.3 9.2 9.2 9 8.2 6 5.3 5.3 15.1 13.9 10.3 9.2 9.2 9 8.2 6 5.3 5.3
AEL55* 14000 28.7 27.5 23.9 22.8 16 17.4 16.7 14.5 13.8 13.8 28.7 27.5 23.9 22.8 16 17.4 16.7 14.5 13.8 13.8
AEL56* 25000 53.6 52.4 25 25 16 33 32.2 25 25 16 53.6 52.4 25 25 16 33 32.2 25 25 16

DN65 to DN100
(2½" to 4")
CMGT Issue 4
TI-P358-25
Cage
Valve DN15 to DN25
TI-P358-25
size (½" to 1")
CMGT Issue 4
Actuator
type Kvs 0.1-0.7 0.1-0.2 0.5 1 1.6 2.5
(Cv) (012-081) (0.12-0.23) (0.58) (1.2) (1.8) (2.9)
Actuator
(N)
AEL51 1000 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16
AEL52 2000 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 9.9 16 19 19 19 4.7 16
Cage
Low Noise Cage
Valve DN15 to DN25
(P1-A1)
size (½" to 1")
Actuator
type Kvs 4 4.9-6.3 7.2 10 11 2,5- 4-6,3-10
(Cv) (4.6) (5.7-7.3) (8.3) (12) (12.7) (2.9- 4.6-7.3-12)
Actuator
(N)
AEL51 1000 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 15.1 16 19 11.9 16 19 11.9 16

Maximum differential pressures for Class VI shut-off -
AEL52 2000 19 19 19 2.2 16 19 19 14.9 16 19 19 11.3 16 19 19 8.7 16 19 19 6.7 16 19 19 6.7 16
Soft Seated (P&C) Spira-trol - FLOW UNDER
Electric actuators
Control systems
Page 7 of 18
(½" to 1")
DN15 to DN25
'* Not to be used with 316L plug and stem

13
4
4.3
44
14
4.3
Cage
Valve DN32 to DN50
Page 8 of 18
size (1¼" to 2")
Actuator
(continued)
type Kvs 4.0 6.3 10 16 17.5 - 18

(Cv) (4.6) (7.3) (12) (18) (20.2-21)
Actuator
Control systems

Electric actuators
(N)
AEL51 1000 19 19 16 19 19 16 19 15.1 16 19 12.1 16 15.1 9 12.5
AEL52 2000 19 19 19 2 16 19 19 14.9 16 19 19 8.7 16 19 19 6.9 16 19 19 4.9 16
Cage
Valve DN32 to DN50 Low Noise Cage
size (1¼" to 2") (P1-P2-P3-A1-A2)
Actuator
type Kvs 25 31-36 46-50
All Kvs
(Cv) (29) (36- 42) (53-58)
Actuator
(N)
AEL51 1000 7.6 4.3 6.1 5.8 3.2 4.7 3.9 2 3.1 3.9 2 3.1
AEL52 2000 18.6 15.3 2.1 16 14.6 12 1.4 13.5 10.2 8.3 0.7 9.4 10.2 8.3 0.7 9.4
(1¼" to 2")
DN32 to DN50
CMGT Issue 4
TI-P358-25
Cage Low Noise Cage
Valve DN65 to DN100
TI-P358-25
DN65-80 DN100
size (2½" to 4")
CMGT Issue 4
Actuator
(continued)
type Kvs 16 25 36 63-90 100-115-117 160-180

All Kvs All Kvs
(Cv) (18) (29) (42) (73-104) (116-133-135) (185-208)
Actuator
thrust P H P H P H P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
(N)
AEL51 1000 14.1 3.7 5.4 0.9 3.6 0.4 1.7 0.9 0.4 0.9 0.4
AEL52 2000 19 19 14.2 9.7 9.9 6.6 5.2 3.4 3.1 2 1.8 1 3.1 2 1.8 1
AEL53 4500 14.1 12.2 6.6 4.8 4.8 8.8 7.6 4 2.9 2.9 5.3 4.6 2.3 1.6 1.6 8.8 7.6 4 2.9 2.9 5.3 4.6 2.3 1.6 1.6
AEL54 8000 16.7 15.5 11.9 10.8 10.8 10.2 9.5 7.3 6.6 6.6 16.7 15.5 11.9 10.8 10.8 10.2 9.5 7.3 6.6 6.6
AEL55* 14000 18.7 18 15.7 15 15 18.7 18 15.7 15 15

Electric actuators
Control systems
Page 9 of 18
DN65 to DN100
(2½" to 4")

15
4
4.3
44
16
4.3
Cage
Valve
DN15 to DN25 (½" to 1")
size
Page 10 of 18
Actuator
type Kvs 0.01-0.07 0.1-0.2 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.5
(Cv) (0.012-0.081) (0.12-0.23) (0.58) (1.2) (1.8) (2.9)
Actuator
Control systems

Electric actuators
(N)
AEL51 1000 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
AEL52 2000 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
AEL53 4500 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Cage
Low Noise Cage
Valve
DN15 to DN25 (½" to 1") (P1)
size
Actuator
type Kvs 4.0 4.9-6.3 7.2 10 11 2,5- 4-6,3-10
(Cv) (4.6) (5.7-7.3) (8.3) (12) (12.7) (2.9- 4.6-7.3-12)
Actuator
(N)
AEL51 1000 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
AEL52 2000 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 3.7 7 7 7 7 2.8 7 7 7 7 2.2 7 7 7 7 1.7 7 7 7 7 1.7 7
AEL53 4500 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Soft Seated (G&K) Spira-trol - FLOW UNDER
(½" to 1")
DN15 to DN25
CMGT Issue 4
TI-P358-25
Cage
Valve DN32 to DN50
TI-P358-25
size (1¼" to 2")
CMGT Issue 4
Actuator
(continued)
type Kvs 4.0 6.3 10 16 17.5 - 18

(Cv) (4.6) (7.3) (12) (18) (20.2-21)
Actuator
(N)
AEL51 1000 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
AEL52 2000 7 7 7 6.9 7 7 7 7 3.7 7 7 7 7 2.2 7 7 7 7 1.7 7 7 7 7 1.2 7
AEL53 4500 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Cage
size (1¼" to 2") (P1-P2-P3-A1-A2)
Actuator
type Kvs 25 31-36 46-50
All Kvs
(Cv) (29) (36- 42) (53-58)
Actuator
(N)
AEL51 1000 7 6 7 7 4.8 6.3 5.2 3.3 4.4 5.2 3.3 4.4
AEL52 2000 7 7 3.8 0.5 7 7 7 3 0.4 7 7 7 2.1 0.2 7 7 7 2.1 0.2 7
AEL53 4500 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Electric actuators
Control systems
Page 11 of 18
(1¼" to 2")
DN32 to DN50

17
4
4.3
44
18
4.3
Cage Low Noise Cage
Valve DN65 to DN100

DN65-80 DN100
size (2½" to 4")
Page 12 of 18
Actuator
(continued)
type Kvs 16 25 36 63-90 100-115-117 160-180

All Kvs All Kvs
(Cv) (18) (29) (42) (73-104) (116-133-135) (185-208)
Actuator
Control systems
thrust P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
Electric actuators
(N)
AEL51 1000 7 6.1 7 2.5 4.9 1.7 2.7 0.9 1.7 0.5 1 0.3 1.7 0.5 1 0.3
AEL52 2000 7 7 7 7 7 7 6.2 4.4 3.9 2.8 2.4 1.7 3.9 2.8 2.4 1.7
AEL53 4500 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 5.8 5.8 7 7 4.8 3.7 3.7 5.9 5.2 3 2.2 2.2 7 7 4.8 3.7 3.7 5.9 5.2 3 2.2 2.2
AEL54 8000 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
DN65 to DN100
(2½" to 4")
CMGT Issue 4
TI-P358-25
Cage
Valve DN15-25
TI-P358-25
size (1/2"-1")
CMGT Issue 4
Actuator
type Kvs 0.01-0.07 0.1-0.2 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.5
(Cv) (0.012-0.081) (0.12-0.23) (0.58) (1.2) (1.8) (2.9)
Actuator
(N)
AEL51 1000 103.4 103.4 16 103.4 103.4 16 103.4 103.4 16 103.4 103.4 16 103.4 69.4 16 74.6 36.4 16
AEL52 2000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 8.1 16 103.4 103.4 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 16 103.4 103.4 10.9 16
AEL53 4500 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
Cage
Low Noise Cage
Valve DN15-25
(P1-A1)
size (1/2"-1")
Actuator
type Kvs 4.0 4.9-6.3 7.2 10 11 2,5- 4-6,3-10
(Cv) (4.6) (5.7-7.3) (8.3) (12) (12.7) (2.9- 4.6-7.3-12)
Actuator
(N)
AEL51 1000 46.2 19.7 16 19.8 4.8 13.3 13.1 1.4 8 8.6 4.5 5.2 1.9 5.2 1.9
AEL52 2000 103.4 103.4 2 16 69.5 54.6 16 52.4 40.7 16 40.5 30.9 16 31.1 23.3 16 31.1 23.3 16
AEL53 4500 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 95.7 87.9 25 25 16 95.7 87.9 25 25 16
Hard Facing (W) Spira-trol - FLOW UNDER
Electric actuators
Control systems
Page 13 of 18
(½"-1")
DN15-25

19
4
4.3
44
20
4.3
Cage
Valve DN32-50
size (1¼" to 2")
Page 14 of 18
Actuator
(continued)
type Kvs 4.0 6.3 10 16 17.5 - 18

(Cv) (4.6) (7.3) (12) (18) (20.2-21)
Actuator
Control systems

Electric actuators
(N)
AEL51 1000 44.2 18.5 16 19.8 4.8 13.3 8.6 4.5 5.5 2.1 2.3
AEL52 2000 103.4 103.4 1.4 16 69.5 54.6 16 40.5 30.9 16 31.8 23.9 16 22.7 16.6 16
AEL53 4500 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 97.6 89.7 25 25 16 73.6 67.5 25 25 16
AEL54* 8000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
AEL55* 14000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
Cage
Valve DN32-50 Low Noise Cage
size (1¼" to 2") (P1-P2-P3-A1-A2)
Actuator
type Kvs 25 31-36 46-50
All Kvs
(Cv) (29) (36- 42) (53-58)
Actuator
(N)
AEL51 1000
AEL52 2000 9.2 5.9 7.7 6.2 3.6 5.1 3.1 1.2 -6.4 -8.3 2.2 3.1 1.2 2.2
AEL53 4500 36.7 33.4 20.2 16.9 16 28.3 25.6 15 12.4 16 18.8 16.9 9.3 7.5 16 18.8 16.9 9.3 7.5 16
AEL54* 8000 75.2 71.9 25 25 16 59.1 56.5 25 25 16 40.8 38.9 25 25 16 40.8 38.9 25 25 16
AEL55* 14000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 78.5 76.6 25 25 16 78.5 76.6 25 25 16
(1¼" to 2")
DN32 to 50
CMGT Issue 4
TI-P358-25
Cage
Standard Cage (S)
type
Valve DN65-100
TI-P358-25
size (2½" to 4")
CMGT Issue 4
Actuator
(continued)
type Kvs 16 25 36 63-90

(Cv) (18) (29) (42) (73-104)
Actuator
(N)
AEL51 1000 1.3
AEL52 2000 21.7 11.3 5.8 1.3 2.7
AEL53 4500 72.6 62.2 25 19.4 16 27.8 23.3 9.3 4.8 4.8 18.5 15.3 5.3 2.1 2.1 8.7 6.9 1.3
AEL54 8000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 58.7 54.2 25 25 16 40.5 37.3 25 24.1 16 21.1 19.3 13.7 11.9 11.9
AEL55* 14000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 78.2 75 25 25 16 42.3 40.5 25 25 16
AEL56* 25000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 81.2 79.4 25 25 16
Cage Low Noise Cage

Standard Cage (S)
type (P1-A1-P2-A2-P3)
Valve DN65-100
DN65-80 DN100
size (2½" to 4")
Actuator
type Kvs 100-115-117 160-180

All Kvs All Kvs
(Cv) (116-133-135) (185-208)
Actuator
(N)
AEL51 1000
AEL52 2000
AEL53 4500 4.5 3.4 1.9 1.2 4.5 3.4 1.9 1.2
AEL54 8000 12.4 11.3 7.7 6.5 6.5 6.9 6.1 3.9 3.2 3.2 12.4 11.3 7.7 6.5 6.5 6.9 6.1 3.9 3.2 3.2
AEL55* 14000 26 24.9 21.3 20.1 16 15.3 14.6 12.4 11.6 11.6 26 24.9 21.3 20.1 16 15.3 14.6 12.4 11.6 11.6
AEL56* 25000 50.9 49.8 25 25 16 30.8 30.1 25 25 16 50.9 49.8 25 25 16 30.8 30.1 25 25 16
Electric actuators
Control systems
Page 15 of 18
(2½" to 4")
DN65 to 100

21
4
4.3
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
Maximum differential pressures for modulating duties only - QL 3-port valves
with PTFE or Graphite stem seal

Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 100 160
Valve travel 20 mm 30 mm
Maximum differential pressure bar

Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
Actuator Voltage
AEL51211 230 26.6 12 26.6 12 15.3 6.4 9.2 3.7 5.6 2 3.2 1 1.1 0.4 0.1
AEL51212 115 26.6 12 26.6 12 15.3 6.4 9.2 3.7 5.6 2 3.2 1 1.1 0.4 0.1
AEL51213 24 26.6 12 26.6 12 15.3 6.4 9.2 3.7 5.6 2 3.2 1 1.1 0.4 0.1
AEL52211 230 40 39.6 40 39.6 32.1 23.2 19.5 14 12.3 8.8 7.4 5.2 3.7 2.3 2.3 1.3 1.1 0.6
AEL52212 115 40 39.6 40 39.6 32.1 23.2 19.5 14 12.3 8.8 7.4 5.2 3.7 2.3 2.3 1.3 1.1 0.6
AEL52213 24 40 39.6 40 39.6 32.1 23.2 19.5 14 12.3 8.8 7.4 5.2 3.7 2.3 2.3 1.3 1.1 0.6
4.3 AEL53211 230 40 40 40 40 29.2 25.7 17.9 15.7 10.3 8.9 7 6 3.7 3.2
22 AEL53212 115 40 40 40 40 29.2 25.7 17.9 15.7 10.3 8.9 7 6 3.7 3.2
AEL53213 24 40 40 40 40 29.2 25.7 17.9 15.7 10.3 8.9 7 6 3.7 3.2
AEL54211 230 40 32.6 30.3 19.6 18.2 13.5 12.5 7.4 6.9
AEL54212 115 40 32.6 30.3 19.6 18.2 13.5 12.5 7.4 6.9
AEL54213 24 40 32.6 30.3 19.6 18.2 13.5 12.5 7.4 6.9
AEL55311 230 40 30.2 28.8 20.9 20 11.6 11.1
AEL55312 115 40 30.2 28.8 20.9 20 11.6 11.1
AEL55313 24 40 30.2 28.8 20.9 20 11.6 11.1
AEL56411 230 40 40 25.3 24.7
AEL56412 115 40 40 25.3 24.7
AEL56413 24 40 40 25.3 24.7
Page 16 of 18 TI-P358-25
CMGT Issue 4
Control systems
Dimensions/weights (approximately) in mm and kg
B
Model A B C Weight
C
AEL51_ 460 177 138 4.5
AEL52_ 460 177 138 4.8
AEL53_ 460 177 138 5.2
AEL54_ 506 177 150 7.0
AEL55_ 569 225 231 10.0
AEL56_ 807 227 280 20.0
4.3
23

Installation and wiring note:

The valve should be installed in the horizontal line. The position of the actuator will depend on the type of valve to which it is fitted and
the temperature of the media. However, it is not recommended that the actuators be fitted directly below the valve or in a wet environment.
Disposal
This product is recyclable. No ecological hazard is anticipated with the disposal of this product, providing due care is taken.
TI-P358-25 Page 17 of 18
CMGT Issue 4
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
Selection example
Control valve DN20 KE43 PTSUSS.2 Kv 6.3 flanged PN40
Maximum DP 20 bar
Electrical supply 230 Vac
Control signal 4 - 20 mA
Actuator selected AEL51211
Positioner required AEL5961
Valve adaptor AEL6911
Mounting flange EL5970
How to order
Type E = Electric E
Movement L = Linear L
Series 5 5
4.3 1 = 1 kN
2 = 2 kN
24 3 = 4.5 kN
Thrust (kN) 1
4 = 8 kN
5 = 14 kN
6 = 25 kN
2 = 50 mm (AEL51_, AEL52_, AEL53_ and AEL54_ series only)
Stroke (mm) 3 = 65 mm (AEL55_ series only) 2
4 = 100 mm (AEL56_ series only)
Maximum speed (mm/s) 1 = 0 - 1.0 mm/s 1
1 = 230 Vac
2 = 115 Vac
Supply voltage 1
3 = 24 Vac
4 = 24 Vdc (not available for AEL56_)
F = Integral 24 V VMD (only for actuators with 24 V supply voltage)
Control signal* G = Integral 115 V VMD (only for actuators with 115 V supply voltage) J
J = Integral 230 V VMD (only for actuators with 230 V supply voltage)
Failure mode X = No mechanical/electrical fail safe device X
A = With 1 kΩ potentiometer
Potentiometer A
S = Without
* For 0/2 - 10 Vdc and 0/4 - 20 mA modulating control signal the appropriate positioner card must be ordered at time of order.

1 off Spirax Sarco AEL51211JXA electric linear actuator for use with a DN100 SPIRA-TROL two-port KE43 control valve.
Page 18 of 18 TI-P358-25
CMGT Issue 4
Control systems
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Electric actuators 4
TI-P358-28
CH Issue 3
Accessories
for the AEL5 Series
of Electric Linear Actuators
Available types and technical data
AEL5961 230 Vac positioner card Power consumption 1 VA
AEL5962 115 Vac positioner card Power consumption 1 VA
24Va c p o s i t i o n e r c a r d (exc e p t f o r
AEL5963 Power consumption 1 VA
AEL54213 _ , AEL55313 _ and AEL56413 _ )
24 Vac positioner card (for AEL54213 _ ,
AEL5964 Power consumption 1 VA
AEL55313 _ and AEL56413 _ actuators only)
AEL5951 2 auxiliary limit switches (Electronic card) 5 A - 230 Vac - including cams, mounting kit and PCB
AEL5952 Auxiliary feedback potentiometer 1000 ohms, 20 to 30 mm stroke, including mounting kit and pinion
AEL5952.1 Tandem feedback potentiometer 2 x 1000 ohms 20 to 30 mm stroke, including mounting kit and pinion
AEL5952.2 Tandem feedback potentiometer 2 x 1000 ohms 25 mm maximum stroke, including mounting kit and pinion
AEL5952.3 Auxiliary feedback potentiometer 2000 ohms 20 to 30 mm stroke, including mounting kit and pinion 4.3
AEL5952.4 Tandem feedback potentiometer 2 x 2000 ohms 20 to 30 mm stroke, including mounting kit and pinion
AEL5952.5 Auxiliary feedback potentiometer 500 ohms 20 to 30 mm stroke, including mounting kit and pinion 25
20 to 30 mm and 30 to 50 mm stroke,
AEL5953 Tandem feedback potentiometer 2 x 1000 ohms
including mounting kit and pinion
AEL5954 115 - 230 V anti-condensate heater
AEL5956 24 V anti-condensate heater
AEL5981 Position transmitter 2 wire 4 - 20 mA
AEL5982 Position transmitter 3 wire 0 / 4 - 20 mA
The potentiometer must use its whole range (almost 1 full turn). To facilitate different actuator strokes replacement pinion kits are
available. Please contact Spirax Sarco for further information.
Pinion 25 teeth with AEL5 _ For stroke <= 20 mm
Pinion 30 teeth with AEL5 _ For stroke between 20 mm to 30 mm
Special parts Pinion 50 teeth with AEL5 _ For stroke between 30 mm to 50 mm
For information on AEL5 series actuators see TI-P358-25
Page 1 of 3
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
Wiring diagrams
(Note: X0, X4, X5, X6, X8 and X9 refer to termination board location)
AEL5951 auxiliary switches AEL5952 feedback potentiometer and

X6 AEL5953 1st output from tandem potentiometer
1 2 3 4 5 6 X4 16 14 15
X11 1 2 3
Brown Green White
Extend position
Retract Extend
switch switch
Retract position
Anti-condense heater AEL5953

4.3 AEL5954 110 - 250 V and AEL5956 12 - 36 V 2nd output from tandem potentiometer
26 L N
X9 1 2 3
1 2 3
X0 1 2 3
Brown Green White
Extend
position
Retract
position
TI-P358-28 CH Issue 3 Accessories for the AEL5 Series of Electric Linear Actuators Page 2 of 3
Control systems
Positioner card layout
Positioners input impedance

Signal Resistance
2-10 V 50 kW
4 - 20 mA 100 W
Power supply x5 / 1
(Phase and neutral)
x5 / 4
x5 / 2
Feedback position
4.3
x4 / 1
27
x4 / 2
x4 / 3
+
4 - 20 mA
-
2 - 10 V
TI-P358-28 CH Issue 3 Accessories for the AEL5 Series of Electric Linear Actuators Page 3 of 3
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
4.3
28
Control systems
Electric actuators
TI-P358-23
CTLS Issue 7
AEL6 Series
Smart Electric Actuators
AEL6221_
AEL6321_
AEL6323_
AEL6421_
AEL6422_
AEL6532_
AEL6631_
4.3
29
Description
The AEL6 series electric actuators are
reversible having linear output.
Available types
The actuators are available with 4 supply variants: 230 vac, 115 vac, 24 vac and
24 Vdc. The standard version is available for VMD (Valve Motor Drive), 0 / 4 - 20 mA
or 0/2 - 10 Vdc input control signals.
These actuators can be used with the following valves, in conjunction with an
appropriate valve adaptor and mounting flange:
2-port Spira-trol TM
Control valves
3-port QL43 and QL73 mixing and diverting valves
Note: A mounting flange and valve adaptor is required to mount the actuator to a
valve. See the associated tables below:
Mounting flange selection

Actuator
AEL62_, AEL66_
Valve type and size AEL63_,
AEL64_,
AEL65_
KE and KEA
DN15 to DN50 EL5970
LE and LEA QL
KE and KEA QL DN65 to DN100 EL5971 EL5972
DN15 to DN50 EL5971J

JE and JEA
DN65 to DN100 EL5972J EL5972
TI-P358-23 Page 1 of 18
CTLS Issue 7
AEL6 Series Smart Electric Actuators for DN15 to DN100 Control Valves
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
Valve adaptor selection
Valve type and size Valve stem AEL62_ AEL63_ AEL64_ AEL65_ AEL66_
KE and KEA DN15 to DN50 M8 thread AEL6911 AEL6911 AEL6911 AEL6911

LE and LEA
QL DN65 to DN100 M12 thread Integrated Integrated Integrated Integrated EL5945
DN15 to DN50 M8 thread AEL6911J AEL6911J AEL6911J AEL6911J

JE and JEA
DN65 to DN100 M12 thread EL6912J EL6912J EL6912J EL6912J EL5945
Materials
No. Part Material
2.3 to 8 kN Polycarbonate
1 Case
14 to 25 kN Die-cast aluminium
2 Housing Die-cast aluminium AEL6631_ 1

Actuator Spindle nut material
AEL6221_ POM-C
AEL6321_ POM-C
4.3 3
AEL6323_ POM-C

30 AEL6422_ Bronze and Aluminium

2
AEL6631_ Bronze and Aluminium-Zinc alloy
AEL6221_
AEL6321_ 3
AEL6323_
AEL6421_
AEL6422_
AEL6532_
Page 2 of 18 TI-P358-23
CTLS Issue 7
Control systems
Technical data
Actuator type AEL6221_ AEL6321__ AEL6323_ AEL6421_ AEL6422_ AEL6532_ AEL6631_
Supply voltage 230 vac, 115 vac, 24 vac, 24 Vdc
Supply frequency 50 Hz/60 Hz/continuous
Maximal power consumption VA

Note: power consumption is relative 13 19 57 25 72 65 88
to 50/60 Hz/continuous respectively
1 Amp - 24 vac/dc 3 Amp - 24 vac/dc 4 Amp - 24 vac/dc 5 Amp - 24 vac/dc
Current consumed by the 0.25 Amp - 110 vac 0.6 Amp - 110 vac 0.8 Amp - 110 vac 1 Amp - 110 vac
actuator 0.15 Amp - 220 vac 0.3 Amp - 220 vac 0.4 Amp - 220 vac 0.5 Amp - 220 vac
Current which is necessary for 1 Amp - 24 vac/dc 1 Amp - 24 vac/dc 3 Amp - 24 vac/dc
0.25 Amp - 110 vac 0.3 Amp - 110 vac 0.7 Amp - 110 vac
the power supply 0.15 Amp - 220 vac 0.2 Amp - 220 vac 0.35 Amp - 220 vac
Stroke mm 50 50 50 50 50 65 95 *
Actuator speed mm/s

Note:
0.9 0.9 4.5 0.7 1.7 1.3 0.4
Speed is relative to 50/60 Hz/
continuous respectively
Enclosure rating IP65 (for outdoor installations adequate shelter)
Actuator trust kN 2.3 4.5 4.5 8 8 14 25
Ambient limits -20 °C to 60 °C
Analog position set valve input Adjustable: 0/4 - 20 mA or 0/2 - 10 Vdc

4.3
Positioner function
Dead-band ajustable between 0.5 - 5% of set value range, 31
maximum resolution 0.1 mA or 0.05 V at 50 mm stroke
Active valve position feedback Adjustable: 0/4 - 20 mA or 0/2 - 10 Vdc
Drives to torque dependant stop(s) and moves throught the whole valve travel.
Automatic commissioning
Autoscale of set value and feedback in accordance to valve travel
Characteristic curve correction Up to 16 interpolation points, input inccuracy 1%
Torque increase Adjustable up to 150% torque for up to 2.5s to break away a valve in the end position
Status indication 2 LEDs under actuator cover
Internal fault monitoring Torque, position set value, active position value, position, temperature of electonic board
Stores cumulated operation data (motor and total running time, number of motor starts) and
Diagnostics function
data sets of current values (set value, feedback value, torque, temperature)
*Notes:
1. 115 vac and 230 vac models of the AEL6631_ have a stroke limited to 95 mm.
2. 24 vac and 24 Vdc models of the AEL6631_ are capable of up to 100 mm stroke.
Optional extras:
- Additional position switches - AEL6951 (NC) and AEL6952 (NO)
- Local control - (non retrofitable for the AEL66_) - AEL6955 (2.3 to 14 kN) and AEL6956 (25 kN)
- Fault indicator relay - AEL6973 (non retrofitable)
- Communication software including data cable - AEL6957
- Space heater - AEL6953 (24 vac) and AEL6954 (115 vac and 230 vac)
Approvals
This equipment is CE marked and conforms to the following:
- EEC regulation 89/336 - EEC for Electromagnetical compatibility and 72/23 - EEC for low voltage directive.
- EN 61000 - 2 -2/2001 and EN 61000 - 6 - 4 for EMC, and 61010 - 1/1995 for safety.
TI-P358-23 Page 3 of 18
CTLS Issue 7
44
32
4.3
Cage
Type Standard Cage (S)
Valve DN15 to DN25
Page 4 of 18
size (½" to 1")
Actuator
Type Kvs 0.01-0.07 0.1-0.2 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.5
(Cv) (0.012-0.081) (0.12-0.23) (0.58) (1.2) (1.8) (2.9)
Actuator
Control systems

Electric actuators
(N)
AEL62 2300 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
AEL63 4500 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
Cage
Valve DN15 to DN25
size (½" to 1")
Actuator Low Noise Cage - P1
Type Kvs 4.0 4.9-6.3 7.2 10 11 2,5- 4-6,3-10
(Cv) (4.6) (5.7-7.3) (8.3) (12) (12.7) (2.9- 4.6-7.3-12)
Actuator
(N)
Maximum differential pressures for Class V1 shut-off -
AEL62 2300 103.4 103.4 25 15.4 16 94.4 79.5 19.8 4.9 16 73.1 61.3 14.2 2.4 16 58 48.5 10.3 0.7 16 46 38.3 7.3 16 46 38.3 7.3 16
AEL63 4500 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 102.9 95.1 25 25 16 102.9 95.1 25 25 16
(½" to 1")
DN15 to DN25
CTLS Issue 7
TI-P358-23
Cage
Valve DN32 to DN50
TI-P358-23
CTLS Issue 7
size (1¼" to 2")
Actuator
(continued)
Type Kvs 4.0 6.3 10 16 17.5 - 18

(Cv) (4.6) (7.3) (12) (18) (20.2-21)
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300 103.4 103.4 25 17.8 16 96.9 82 22.3 7.4 16 60 50.5 12.3 2.7 16 48.8 40.9 9.3 1.4 16 36.8 30.7 6.3 16
AEL63 4500 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 98.8 25 25 16 81.6 75.5 25 25 16
AEL64* 8000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
AEL65* 14000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
Cage
size (1¼" to 2") (P1-P2-P3-A1-A2)
Actuator
Type Kvs 25 31-36 46-50
All Kvs
(Cv) (29) (36- 42) (53-58)
Actuator

(N)
AEL62 2300 18.3 15 1.8 16 14.1 11.5 0.9 13 9.4 7.5 8.6 9.4 7.5 8.6
AEL63 4500 42.6 39.3 25 22.8 16 33.5 30.9 20.3 17.7 16 23.2 21.3 13.8 11.9 16 23.2 21.3 13.8 11.9 16
AEL64* 8000 81.1 77.8 25 25 16 64.4 61.7 25 25 16 45.2 43.3 25 25 16 45.2 43.3 25 25 16
AEL65* 14000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 83 81.1 25 25 16 83 81.1 25 25 16
Electric actuators
Control systems
Page 5 of 18
(1¼" to 2")
DN32 to DN50

33
4
4.3
44
34
4.3
Cage
Valve DN65 to DN100
Page 6 of 18
size (2½" to 4")
Actuator
(continued)
Type Kvs 16 25 36 63-90

(Cv) (18) (29) (42) (73-104)
Actuator
Control systems
thrust P H B C D N-P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
Electric actuators
(N)
AEL62 2300 35.8 25.4 13.7 9.2 9.1 5.9 4.3 2.5
AEL63 4500 80.6 70.2 25 25 16 33.1 28.6 14.6 10.1 10.1 22.9 19.7 9.7 6.5 6.5 12.1 10.2 4.6 2.8 2.8
AEL64 8000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 64 59.5 25 25 16 44.9 41.7 25 25 16 24.4 22.6 17 15.2 15.2
AEL65* 14000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 82.6 79.4 25 25 16 45.7 43.8 25 25 16
AEL66* 25000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 84.6 82.8 25 25 16
Cage Low Noise Cage

Type Standard Cage (S) (P1-A1-P2-A2-P3)
Valve DN65 to DN100

DN65-80 DN100
size (2½" to 4")
Actuator
Type Kvs 100-115-117 160-180
All Kvs All Kvs
(Cv) (116-133-135) (185-208)
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300 2.2 1 0.9 0.2 2.2 1 0.9 0.2
AEL63 4500 7.2 6 2.4 1.3 1.3 4 3.3 1.1 0.3 0.3 7.2 6 2.4 1.3 1.3 4 3.3 1.1 0.3 0.3
AEL64 8000 15.1 13.9 10.3 9.2 9.2 9 8.2 6 5.3 5.3 15.1 13.9 10.3 9.2 9.2 9 8.2 6 5.3 5.3
AEL65* 14000 28.7 27.5 23.9 22.8 16 17.4 16.7 14.5 13.8 13.8 28.7 27.5 23.9 22.8 16 17.4 16.7 14.5 13.8 13.8
AEL66* 25000 53.6 52.4 25 25 16 33 32.2 25 25 16 53.6 52.4 25 25 16 33 32.2 25 25 16
DN65 to DN100
(2½" to 4")
CTLS Issue 7
TI-P358-23
Cage
Valve DN15 to DN25
TI-P358-23
CTLS Issue 7
size (½" to 1")
Actuator
Type Kvs 0.01-0.07 0.1-0.2 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.5
(Cv) (0.012-0.081) (0.12-0.23) (0.58) (1.2) (1.8) (2.9)
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 19 16
AEL63 4500 19* 19* 19* 19* 16* 19* 19* 19* 19* 16* 19* 19* 19* 19* 16* 19* 19* 19* 19* 16* 19* 19* 19* 19* 16* 19* 19* 19* 19* 16*
Cage
Low Noise Cage
Valve DN15 to DN25 (P1-A1)
size (½" to 1")
Actuator
Type Kvs 4.0 4.9-6.3 7.2 10 11 2.5- 4-6,3-10
(Cv) (4.6) (5.7-7.3) (8.3) (12) (12.7) (2.9- 4.6-7.3-12)
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 14.9 16 19 19 19 11.3 16 19 19 18.3 8.7 16 19 19 14.5 6.7 16 19 19 14.5 6.7 16
AEL63 4500 19* 19* 19* 19* 16* 19* 19* 19* 12.4* 16* 19* 19* 19* 9.3 16* 19* 19* 16.7* 7.1* 16* 19* 19* 13.2* 5.4* 16* 19* 19* 13.2 5.4* 16*
Electric actuators
Control systems
(½" to 1")
Page 7 of 18
DN15 to DN25
Note* Actuator Thrust must be set to 50% of maximum.

35
4
4.3
44
36
4.3
Cage
Valve DN32 to DN50
Page 8 of 18
size (1¼" to 2")
Actuator
(continued)
Type Kvs 4.0 6.3 10 16

(Cv) (4.6) (7.3) (12) (18)
Actuator
Control systems

Electric actuators
(N)
AEL62 2300 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 14.9 16 19 19 18.3 8.7 16 19 19 14.8 6.9 16
AEL63* 4500 19* 19* 19* 19* 16* 19* 19* 19* 12.4 16* 19* 19* 16.7* 7.1* 16* 19* 19* 13.5* 5.6* 16*
Cage
size (1¼" to 2") (P1-P2-P3-A1-A2)
Actuator
Type Kvs 17.5 - 18 25 31-36 46-50
All Kvs
(Cv) (20.2-21) (29) (36- 42) (53-58)
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300 19 19 11.1 4.9 16 19 18.6 5.4 2.1 16 17.3 14.6 4.1 1.4 16 12.1 10.2 2.6 0.7 11.2 12.1 10.2 2.6 0.7 11.2
AEL63* 4500 19* 19* 10* 3.9* 16* 19* 18* 4.8* 1.5* 16* 16.9* 14.2* 3.6* 1* 15.7* 11.7* 9.9* 2.3* 0.4* 10.9* 11.7* 9.9* 2.3* 0.4* 10.9
(1¼" to 2")
DN32 to DN50
CTLS Issue 7
TI-P358-23
* Actuator thrust must be set to 50% of maximum
Cage
Valve DN65 to DN100
TI-P358-23
CTLS Issue 7
size (2½" to 4")
Actuator
(continued)
Type Kvs 16 25 36 63-90 100-115-117

(Cv) (18) (29) (42) (73-104) (116-133-135)
Actuator
thrust P H P H P H P H B C D P H B C D
(N)
AEL62 2300 19 19 16.9 12.4 11.7 8.5 6.3 4.5 3.8 2.6
AEL63 4500 19* 19* 16.4* 11.9* 11.4* 8.2* 14.1 12.2 6.6 4.8 4.8 8.8 7.6 4 2.9 2.9
AEL64 8000 16.7 15.5 11.9 10.8 10.8
AEL65 14000
Cage Low Noise Cage

Valve DN65 to DN100

DN65-80 DN100
size (2½" to 4")
Actuator
Type Kvs 160-180
All Kvs All Kvs
(Cv) (185-208)
Actuator
thrust P H B C D P H B C D P H B C D
(N)
AEL62 2300 2.2 1.5 3.8 2.6 2.2 1.5
AEL63 4500 5.3 4.6 2.3 1.6 1.6 8.8 7.6 4 2.9 2.9 5.3 4.6 2.3 1.6 1.6
AEL64 8000 10.2 9.5 7.3 6.6 6.6 16.7 15.5 11.9 10.8 10.8 10.2 9.5 7.3 6.6 6.6
AEL65 14000 18.7 18 15.7 15 15 18.7 18 15.7 15 15
DN65 to DN100
Electric actuators
Control systems
(2½" to 4")
Page 9 of 18
* Actuator thrust must be set to 50% of maximum
37
4
4.3
44
38
4.3
Cage
Valve DN15 to DN25
size (½" to 1")
Page 10 of 18
Actuator
Type 0.01-0.07 0.1-0.2 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.5
Kvs (Cv)
(0.012-0.081) (0.12-0.23) (0.58) (1.2) (1.8) (2.9)
Actuator
Control systems

Electric actuators
(N)
AEL62 2300 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
AEL63 4500 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Cage
Valve DN15 to DN25
size (½" to 1")
Actuator Low Noise Cage (P1)
Type Kvs 4.0 4.9-6.3 7.2 10 11 2,5- 4-6,3-10
(Cv) (4.6) (5.7-7.3) (8.3) (12) (12.7) (2.9- 4.6-7.3-12)
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
AEL63 4500 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
(½" to 1")
DN15 to DN25
CTLS Issue 7
TI-P358-23
Cage
Valve DN32 to DN50
TI-P358-23
size (1¼" to 2")
CTLS Issue 7
Actuator
(continued)
Type 4.0 6.3 10 16 17.5 - 18

Kvs (Cv)
(4.6) (7.3) (12) (18) (20.2-21)
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
AEL63 4500 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Cage
size (1¼" to 2") (P1-P2-P3-A1-A2)
Actuator
Type Kvs (Cv) 25 (29) 31-36 (36- 42) 46-50 (53-58) All Kvs
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300 7 7 7 3.8 7 7 7 5.6 3 7 7 7 4 2.1 7 7 7 4 2.1 7

AEL63 4500 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Electric actuators
Control systems
Page 11 of 18
(1¼" to 2")
DN32 to DN50

39
4
4.3
44
40
4.3
Cage
Valve DN65 to DN100
size (2½" to 4")
Page 12 of 18
Actuator
(continued)
Type Kvs 16 25 36 63-90

(Cv) (18) (29) (42) (73-104)
Actuator
Control systems
Electric actuators
(N)
AEL62 2300 7 7 0.2 7 7 7 7 7 5.5
AEL63 4500 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 5.8 5.8
AEL64 8000 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Cage Low Noise Cage

Valve DN65 to DN100

DN65-80 DN100
size (2½" to 4")
Actuator
Type Kvs 100-115-117 160-180
All Kvs All Kvs
(Cv) (116-133-135) (185-208)
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300 4.6 3.4 2.8 2.1 4.6 3.4 2.8 2.1
AEL63 4500 7 7 4.8 3.7 3.7 5.9 5.2 3 2.2 2.2 7 7 4.8 3.7 3.7 5.9 5.2 3 2.2 2.2
AEL64 8000 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
DN65 to DN100
(2½" to 4")
CTLS Issue 7
TI-P358-23
Cage
Valve DN15 to DN25
TI-P358-23
CTLS Issue 7
size (½" to 1")
Actuator
Type Kvs 0.01-0.07 0.1-0.2 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.5
(Cv) (0.012-0.081) (0.12-0.23) (0.58) (1.2) (1.8) (2.9)
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 10.9 16
AEL63 4500 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
Cage
Valve DN15 to DN25
Low Noise Cage
size (½" to 1")
Actuator (P1-A1)
Type Kvs 4.0 4.9-6.3 7.2 10 11 2,5- 4-6,3-10
(Cv) (4.6) (5.7-7.3) (8.3) (12) (12.7) (2.9- 4.6-7.3-12)
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300 103.4 103.4 25 2 16 84.4 69.5 9.8 16 52.4 5.3 16 50 40.5 2.3 16 38.8 31.1 16 38.8 31.1 16
AEL63 4500 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 95.7 87.9 25 25 16 95.7 87.9 25 25 16
Electric actuators
Control systems
(½" to 1")
Page 13 of 18
DN15 to DN25

41
4
4.3
44
42
4.3
Cage
Valve DN32 to DN50
size (1¼" to 2")
Page 14 of 18
Actuator
(continued)
Type Kvs 4.0 6.3 10 16 17.5 - 18

(Cv) (4.6) (7.3) (12) (18) (20.2-21)
Actuator
Control systems

Electric actuators
(N)
AEL62 2300 103.4 103.4 25 1.4 16 84.4 69.5 9.8 16 50 40.5 2.3 16 39.7 31.8 16 28.8 22.7 16
AEL63 4500 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 97.6 89.7 25 25 16 73.6 67.5 25 25 16
AEL64* 8000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
AEL65* 14000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16
Cage
Low Noise Cage
Valve DN32 to DN50 (P1-P2-P3-A1-A2)
size (1¼" to 2")
Actuator
Type Kvs 25 31-36 46-50
All Kvs
(Cv) (29) (36- 42) (53-58)
Actuator

(N)
AEL62 2300 12.5 9.2 11 8.9 6.2 7.7 4.9 3.1 4.1 4.9 3.1 4.1
AEL63 4500 36.7 33.4 20.2 16.9 16 28.3 25.6 15 12.4 16 18.8 16.9 9.3 7.5 16 18.8 16.9 9.3 7.5 16
AEL64* 8000 75.2 71.9 25 25 16 59.1 56.5 25 25 16 40.8 38.9 25 25 16 40.8 38.9 25 25 16
AEL65* 14000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 78.5 76.6 25 25 16 78.5 76.6 25 25 16
(1¼" to 2")
DN32 to DN50
CTLS Issue 7
TI-P358-23
Cage
Valve DN65-100
TI-P358-23
CTLS Issue 7
size (2½" to 4")
Actuator
(continued)
Type Kvs 16 25 36 63-90

(Cv) (18) (29) (42) (73-104)
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300 27.8 17.4 8.4 3.9 4.6
AEL63 4500 72.6 62.2 25 19.4 16 27.8 23.3 9.3 4.8 4.8 18.5 15.3 5.3 2.1 2.1 8.7 6.9 1.3
AEL64 8000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 58.7 54.2 25 25 16 40.5 37.3 25 24.1 16 21.1 19.3 13.7 11.9 11.9
AEL65* 14000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 78.2 75 25 25 16 42.3 40.5 25 25 16
AEL66* 25000 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 103.4 103.4 25 25 16 81.2 79.4 25 25 16
Cage Low Noise Cage

Valve DN65 to DN100

DN65-80 DN100
size (2½" to 4")
Actuator
Type Kvs 100-115-117 160-180
All Kvs All Kvs
(Cv) (116-133-135) (185-208)
Actuator
(N)
AEL62 2300
AEL63 4500 4.5 3.4 1.9 1.2 4.5 3.4 1.9 1.2
AEL64 8000 12.4 11.3 7.7 6.5 6.5 6.9 6.1 3.9 3.2 3.2 12.4 11.3 7.7 6.5 6.5 6.9 6.1 3.9 3.2 3.2
AEL65* 14000 26 24.9 21.3 20.1 16 15.3 14.6 12.4 11.6 11.6 26 24.9 21.3 20.1 16 15.3 14.6 12.4 11.6 11.6
AEL66* 25000 50.9 49.8 25 25 16 30.8 30.1 25 25 16 50.9 49.8 25 25 16 30.8 30.1 25 25 16
DN65 to DN100
Electric actuators
Control systems
(2½" to 4")
Page 15 of 18
43
4
4.3
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
Maximum differential pressures for Class IV shut-off – QL 3-port valves
with PTFE or Graphite stem seal
Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36 63 100 160
Valve travel 20 mm 30 mm

graphite
graphite
graphite
graphite
graphite
graphite
graphite
graphite
graphite
Actuator
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
AEL6221- 40.0 39.6 40.0 39.6 32.1 23.2 19.5 14.0 12.3 8.8 7.4 5.2 3.7 2.3 2.3 1.3 1.1 0.6
AEL6321- * 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 29.2 25.7 17.9 15.7 10.3 8.9 7.0 6.0 3.7 3.2
AEL6323- * 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 29.2 25.7 17.9 15.7 10.3 8.9 7.0 6.0 3.7 3.2
AEL6421- * 40.0 40.0 32.6 30.3 19.6 18.2 13.5 12.5 7.4 6.9
AEL6422- * 40.0 40.0 32.6 30.3 19.6 18.2 13.5 12.5 7.4 6.9
AEL6532- 40.0 40.0 30.2 28.8 20.9 20.0 11.6 11.1
4.3 AEL6631- 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.3 24.7
44 * Please note that although the AEL6321- and the AEL6323- have the same maximum differential pressure values, they have different
operating speeds. The same applies to the AEL6421- and the AEL6422-. Please refer to the technical data table on page 1 for full details.
Dimensions/weights (approximately) in mm and kg

B
Model A B C Weight C
AEL6221- 459 177 150 7
AEL6231- 459 177 150 7
AEL6323- 459 177 150 7
AEL6421- 490 177 150 10
AEL6422- 490 177 150 10
AEL6532- 557 180 172 12 A

AEL6631- 760 226 277 20h
Page 16 of 18 TI-P358-23
CTLS Issue 7
Control systems
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions that are supplied with the product.
Installation and wiring note:

The valve should be installed in a horizontal pipeline. The position of the actuator will depend on the type of valve to which it is fitted
and the temperature of the media. However, it is not recommended that the actuators be fitted at more than 90° from the vertical position
or in a wet environment.
Mounting position
90° 90°
4.3
45
TI-P358-23 Page 17 of 18
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
AEL6 series actuators - Product nomenclature and selection example:
Type E = Electric E
Movement L = Linear L
Series 6 6
2 = 2.3
3 = 4.5
Thrust (kN) 4 = 8 2
5 = 14
6 = 25
2 = 50
Stroke (mm) 2
3 = 65 (AEL65 only), 95/100 (AEL66 only)
1 = 0 - 1.0 (AEL62_, AEL63_, AEL64 and AEL66_ series only)

4.3 Maximum speed (mm/s) 2 = 1.1 - 2.0 (AEL64_ and AEL65_ series only) 1
46 3 = 2.1 - 4.5 (AEL63_ series only)
1 = 230 vac
Supply voltage 2 = 115 vac 1
3 = 24 vac and 24 Vdc
F = 24 V VMD, 0/2 - 10 Vdc and 0/4 - 20 mA (supply voltage 3 only)
G = 115 V VMD, 0/2 - 10 Vdc and 0/4 - 20 mA (supply voltage 2 only)
Control signal H = 24 V VMD, 0/2 - 10 Vdc and 0/4 - 20 mA (supply voltage 2 only) J
J = 230 V VMD, 0/2 - 10 Vdc and 0/4 - 20 mA (supply voltage 1 only)
K = 24 V VMD, 0/2 - 10 Vdc and 0/4 - 20 mA (supply voltage 1 only)
X = No mechanical/electrical fail safe device

Failure mode S
S = Super capacitor fail safe (non retrofittable)
How to order/selection example:
Example : A 230 vac fail safe electric actuator to suit a DN25 control valve with PTFE stem seals, to have class IV shut-off against a
10 bar differential pressure. There is no requirement for high actuating speed, the control signal is 230 V VMD.
Selection:
1 off Spirax Sarco AEL62211JS electric actuator.
Page 18 of 18 TI-P358-23
CTLS Issue 7
Control systems
Electric actuators
TI-P358-30
CTLS Issue 3
AEL56 and AEL66 Series

Electric Actuators
Description
The AEL56 and AEL66 series electric actuators are reversible having linear output. For further product specific data of the actuator,
see the following Technical Information sheets: TI-P358-25 for the AEL5 or TI-P358-23 for the AEL6.
Available types
The actuators are available with 5 supply variants: 230 Vac, 115 Vac, 24 Vac, 24 Vac and 24Vdc. The standard version is suitable
for VMD (Valve Motor Drive) input power signal. If required the actuator can be fitted with a positioner input card that can accept
(4 - 20 mA or 2 - 10 Vdc) control signals.
All the actuators are fitted with a 1 kW potentiometer as standard. This can either be used in conjunction with the positioner for
2 - 10 V or 4 - 20 mA input signals, or as feedback for VMD. Also available are auxiliary limit switches and anti-condense heater.
See TI-P358-28 for further details on the accessories.
4.3
K series control valves (mk1)
2-port DN125, DN150 and DN200 C series control valves 47

Spira-trol TM K and J series control valves
3-port DN125, DN150 and DN200 QL series control valves
Technical data
Model AEL56411 AEL56412 AEL56413 AEL66311 AEL66312 AEL66313
Supply voltage 230 Vac 115 Vac 24 Vac 230 Vac 115 Vac 24 Vac/24 Vdc
Supply frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Power consumption 100 VA 135 VA 135 VA 135 VA
Enclosure rating IP65 IP65
Actuator speed 1 mm/s 0.2 - 0.4 mm/s 0.2 - 0.4 mm/s 0.2 - 0.4 mm/s
Stroke 100 mm 95 mm 95 mm 100 mm
Actuator thrust 25 kN 25 kN
Ambient limits -20 to +60 °C -20 to +60 °C
Motor Asynchronus capacitor reversing motor dc brushed motor
Terminations 1.5 mm² 1.5 mm²
Manual overide Handwheel Handwheel
Conduit entries 3 x PG16 3 x PG16
Card power consumption 1 VA
Approvals
This equipment is marked, and conforms to EN 50081-1 and EN 50082-2 (EMC), EN 61010-1/A2 (Safety), following the provisions
of directives 89/336/EEC amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC (EMC) and 72/73/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC (LVD).
Page 1 of 3
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
Mounting parts
Control valves Mounting flange Coupling part
QL series
EL5973 EL5946
K series (mk1)
C series EL5973 EL5948
Spira-trol TM
K and J series EL5974 EL5955
AEL56 or AEL66 actuator maximum differential pressures - bar

Actuators should be sized against Kvs rather than valve size
KE and QL series control valves
Valve size DN125 DN150 DN200
Travel 50 30 50 30 50 30
Full Reduced Kvs Full Reduced Kvs Full Reduced Kvs

Valve seat sizes
Kvs 1 2 3 Kvs 1 2 3 Kvs 1 2 3
16.2 24.6 38 40 11.1 16.2 24.6 38 6.2 11.1 16.2 24.6

Maximal DP *
4.3
(15.8) (24.1) (37.2) (37.2) (10.9) (15.8) (24.1) (37.2) (6.1) (10.9) (15.8) (24.1)
48 * Note: Differential pressures are shown in brackets for a valve with high temperature graphite stem sealing.
C series control valves
Valve size DN125 DN150 DN200
Travel 65 50 38 38 65 65 50 38 75 65 65 50
Full Reduced Kvs Full Reduced Kvs Full Reduced Kvs

Valve seat sizes
Kvs 1 2 3 Kvs 1 2 3 Kvs 1 2 3
Unbalanced valve Maximal DP 18 23.6 38.4 54.5 12.3 17.7 23.2 37.7 6.7 11.8 17.1 22.3
Balanced valve Maximal DP 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Spira-trolTM K and J series control valves
Valve size DN125 DN150 DN200 DN250 DN300
Travel 70 70 70 70 70
Kv all all all all full reduced
Unbalanced PTFE 15.0 8.2 3.6 3.6 0.4 3.6

valve Maximal DP
graphite 14.6 8.0 3.5 3.5 0.3 3.5
Balanced PTFE 103.4 103.4 95.6 95.6 31.2 95.6

valve Maximal DP
graphite 103.4 103.4 93.4 93.4 30.4 93.4
CTLS Issue 3
AEL56 and AEL66 Series Electric Actuators for DN125 to DN300 Control Valves
Control systems
Selection example
Control valve DN150 KE43 2-port valve
Maximum DP 8 bar
Electrical supply 220 Vac

Please note:
Control signal 4 - 20 mA For further product specific data of the
actuator, see the following Technical
Actuator selected AEL56411JXA Information sheets:
Positioner required AEL5961 - TI-P358-25 for the AEL5.
Valve adaptor EL5955 or
Mounting flange EL5974 - TI-P358-23 for the AEL6.
Dimensions (approximate) in mm Weight 20 kg
227
280
Engage button for handwheel
4.3
49
Handwheel
807
Valve adaptor
(coupling nut, spring disks and locked nut)
Mounting flange
CTLS Issue 3
AEL56 and AEL66 Series Electric Actuators for DN125 to DN300 Control Valves
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
4.3
50
Control systems
Electric actuators
TI-P321-13
CTLS Issue 7
EL3500 Series
Electric Actuators
Description
The EL3500 series actuators are suitable for on/off Actuators with spring reserve
control, modulating control with valve motor drive (SR and SE)
controller or modulating control with its integral
valve positioner electronics.
This actuator range can be used with the following
valves:
SPIRA-TROL
2-port
BX, BM, SB, KA, KB, KC and NS
3-port TW
4.3
Operation
The drive of a synchronous motor is converted into
51
a linear motion of the actuator stem by using a spur
gear transmission. An integrated spring package
limits the stem force to a 600 N thrust in both
directions. Installed torque switches, switch off the
actuator automatically, when the specified stem
force is reached.
Available types
The EL3500 series actuators are available in the
following configurations:
Spring reserve actuators have the suffix SR or SE
appended to t he basic ac tuator c o de e.g. Actuators without spring reserve
EL3501SE. Where:
SR = Spring retract.
SE = Spring extend.
EL3501 230 Vac operating voltage for ON/OFF control or modulating control with external valve motor drive
controller.
EL3502 24 Vac operating voltage for ON/OFF control or modulating control with external valve motor drive
controller.
EL3501SE 230 Vac operating voltage for ON/OFF control or modulating control with external valve motor drive
controller with the benefit of spring extend on power failure.
EL3502SE 24 Vac operating voltage for ON/OFF control or modulating control with external valve motor drive
controller with the benefit of spring extend on power failure.
EL3512, EL3512SR, EL3512SE 24 Vac operating voltage with 0 to 10 Vdc, or 2 to 10 Vdc control signal. For 4 - 20 mA control signal
use a 500 W resistance across the signal source, see Installation and Maintenance Instructions for
full details. Modulating control from any controller providing this control signal.
Page 1 of 4
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
Approvals
This equipment is marked, and conforms to EN 50081-1 and 50082-2 (EMC), EN 60730-1 (safety), following the provisions of
directives 89/336/EEC amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC (EMC) and 72/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC.
Ambient limits
Storage temperatures -40 to +70 °C at 5 to 95 % RH
* For temperatures up to 250 °C an EL3905 high
Operating temperatures -10 to +50 °C at 5 to 95 % RH
temperature kit must be used.
Maximum valve medium temperature +150 °C*
Materials
Actuators with spring reserve
No. Part Material (SR and SE)
1 Yoke Aluminium die casting 3
2 Base Glass fibre reinforced plastic
3 Cover ABS-FR
2
4 Handle ABS-FR
4.3 Protection
4
52 IP rating IP54
Insulation for EN 60730 Class II
Flame resistant to UL 94-V0 (with metal cable gland) 3
Actuators without spring reserve
Specifications
Model EL3501 EL3502 EL3501SE EL3502SE EL3512 EL3512SE EL3512SR
230 Vac +10% 230 Vac +10%

24 Vac ±15% 24 Vac ±15% 24 Vac ±15% 24 Vac ±15% 24 Vac ±15%
Supply voltage -15% -15%
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Power consumption 6.5 VA 4 VA 12 VA 11 VA 5 VA 12 VA 12 VA
Actuator speed 0.32 mm/s 0.32 mm/s 0.19 mm/s 0.19 mm/s 0.32 mm/s 0.19 mm/s 0.19 mm/s
0 - 10 Vdc 0 - 10 Vdc 0 - 10 Vdc
Control signal VMD VMD VMD VMD 2 - 10 Vdc 2 - 10 Vdc 2 - 10 Vdc
(4 - 20 mA) (4 - 20 mA) (4 - 20 mA)
Spring reserve NO NO YES YES NO YES YES
Manual handle YES YES NO NO YES NO NO
CTLS Issue 7
EL3500 Series Electric Actuator
Control systems
Maximum differential pressures (p) bar for SPIRA-TROL valves
(KE, LE, KEA and LEA with PTFE or graphite stem seal)
Notes:
1) Refer to the valve TI for maximum valve operating pressures.
2) The actuator differential pressures shown in the table below also apply to the spring reserve versions.
Valve travel 20 mm
Kvs value 4 6.3 10 16 25 36
EL3500 series
actuator and PTFE Graphite PTFE Graphite PTFE Graphite PTFE Graphite PTFE Graphite PTFE Graphite
derivatives
Modulating duty*
24.8 9.5 19.5 7.8 13.0 5.2 10.0 4.0 4.4 1.7 3.1 1.2
(metal-to-metal)
Class IV shut-off
9.8 - 6.3 - 2.2 - 2.1 - - - - -
(metal-to-metal)
Class VI shut-off
24.4 9.5 19.3 7.5 12.8 5.0 9.9 3.8 4.2 1.6 3.0 1.1
(soft seating)
* Modulating duty - For pure control applications providing control across the full valve operating range but not guaranteeing shut-off
to a greater level than the minimum flowrate based on the valve 50:1 turndown.
4.3
53
135 x (161) 135 x (161)
284
242
233
192
141
67.4 67.4
Actuator with spring reserve (SE and SR) Actuators without spring reserve
Weight Weight
Spring reserve (SE and SR) 2.4 kg Non spring reserve 1.3 kg
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
Installation and wiring
The valve should be installed in the horizontal line. The position of the actuator will depend on the type of valve to which it is fitted
and the temperature of the media. However, it is not recommended that the actuators be fitted directly below the valve or in a wet
environment. Full Installation and Maintenance Instructions are supplied with the product.
Termination details
See Installation and Maintenance Instructions for more details.
Accessories
All EL3500 actuators are supplied (as standard) with a linkage kit suitable for LE/KE valves. However, the following optional extras
are also available at extra cost:
EL3904 spare linkage kit For LE/KE valves.
EL3906 spare linkage kit For SPIRA-TROL control valves
EL3808 linkage kit For the self-acting range of valves BX, BM, SB, KA KB, KC, NS and TW (DN15 to DN50 for TW only).
EL3809 linkage kit For the self-acting range of valves TW (DN80 to DN100).
EL3901 (10kW) or EL3902 (220W) are available for mounting on site. They can be used as a
Auxiliary potentiometer feedback potentiometer and/or to provide remote indication of the valve position. A cable gland is
supplied with this.
4.3
Their switching points are adjustable over the full length of the actuator stroke. The switches can be
EL3903 auxiliary switches
used e.g. to provide remote indication of any stroke position. A cable gland is supplied with this.
54 EL3905 high temperature kit Enables all EL3500 to be used for valve medium temperatures from 150 °C to 250 °C.
How to order
LE or KE valve, order: 1 - EL3501 actuator
TW DN20 to DN50, or BX,

To receive this actuator for use with; 1 - EL3501 actuator and 1 - EL3808 linkage kit
BM, SB, KA, KB, KC, NS valves, order:
TW DN80 to DN100 valve, order: 1 - EL3501 actuator and 1 - EL3809 linkage kit
CTLS Issue 7
Control systems
Electric actuators
TI-P358-14
CH Issue 4
EL7200 Series
Electric Actuators
Description
EL7200 series electric actuators are available for use with the following supply voltages: 230
Vac, 115 Vac and 24 Vac. This range of electric actuators has three user-configurable control
modes as standard:
- (VMD) Valve Motor Drive,
- (0 / 4 - 20 mA) modulating control or
- (0 / 2 - 10 Vdc) modulating control.
When they have been fitted to a control valve they provide modulating control or on / off action.
EL7200 series electric actuators can be used with the following valves:
2-port
Spira-trol TM
BX, BM, SB, KA, EL7200
Mounting flange (DN15 - DN50) EL7021
Linkage LE, KE
4.3
(DN15 - DN50) EL7020
KB, KC and NS Series
55
TW valves For self-acting
Adaptor (DN15 - DN50) EL7012
(DN20 - DN50) valves
3-port
QLD and QLM
(DN15 - DN50)
Operation
The drive mechanism consists of a stepper motor and a planetary gearbox that converts a
rotary motion to a linear motion. An integrally installed contactless hall-sensor for permanent
positioning control, switches off the motor in the maximum travel position of the valve.
Options and accessories

IP65 construction.
24 Vdc motor for rectified ac.
EL7211A-SE
Technical data
Model EL7211A-SE EL7212A-SE EL7213A-SE
Supply voltage 230 Vac 115 Vac 24 Vac
Frequency Hz 50 / 60 Hz ± 5%
Travel 20 mm
Power consumption VA 20 VA 25 VA 20 VA
Enclosure rating IP54
Actuator speed 0.17 - 0.25 mm/s
Actuator thrust 1.0 kN
Ambient limitations -10 °C to + 60 °C
Motor Stepper motor
Terminations 1.5 mm
1 x M16 x 1.5
Conduit entries
1 x M20 x 1.5
0 - 10 Vdc
2 - 10 Vdc
Control signal
4 - 20 mA
VMD
Spring reserve Yes
Manual override Yes
Page 1 of 3
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
Maximum differential pressures for Class IV shut-off (metal-to-metal)
KE, LE, KEA and LEA with PTFE or Graphite stem seal
Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36
Valve travel 20 mm
Differential pressure (bar)
Valve
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Actuator type Voltage
type
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
EL7211A-SE 230 29.7 14.8 22 10 12 4.8 10.3 4.2 2.6 1.2
KE 2-port
and EL7212A-SE 115 29.7 14.8 22 10 12 4.8 10.3 4.2 2.6 1.2
LE 2-port
EL7213A-SE 24 29.7 14.8 22 10 12 4.8 10.3 4.2 2.6 1.2
Maximum differential pressures for Class VI shut-off (soft seal)
KE, LE, KEA and LEA with PTFE or Graphite stem seal
4.3 Valve size DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50
56 Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36
Valve travel 20 mm
Valve
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
type
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
EL7211A-SE 230 40 29.7 35 23.2 23 15.5 18 11.9 7.7 5.1 5.5 3.6
KE 2-port
and EL7212A-SE 115 40 29.7 35 23.2 23 15.5 18 11.9 7.7 5.1 5.5 3.6
LE 2-port
EL7213A-SE 24 40 29.7 35 23.2 23 15.5 18 11.9 7.7 5.1 5.5 3.6
Maximum differential pressures for Modulating duty only
QLD and QLM 3-port valves with PTFE or Graphite stem seal
Kv 4.0 6.3 10 16 25 36
Valve travel 20 mm
Valve
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite
Graphite

type
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
PTFE
EL7211A-SE 230 26.6 12 26.6 12 15.3 6.4 9.2 3.7 5.6 2 3.2 1
QLD 3-port
and EL7212A-SE 115 26.6 12 26.6 12 15.3 6.4 9.2 3.7 5.6 2 3.2 1
QLM 3-port
EL7213A-SE 24 26.6 12 26.6 12 15.3 6.4 9.2 3.7 5.6 2 3.2 1
Page 2 of 3 TI-P358-14 CH Issue 4
EL7200 Series Electric Actuators

Control systems
Materials
No. Part Material B
C
1 Actuator case Glass filled Polymer
2 Handwheel POM
3
3 Cable inlet PA
4 Pillar
5 Linkage Steel BZP passivated

1
6 Mounting flange
Dimensions / weights (approximately) in mm and kg

Actuator range A B C* Weight
EL7211A-SE 471 100 140 3.0 2

EL7212A-SE 471 100 200 3.0
EL7213A-SE 446 100 200 3.0
* Actuator cover removal distance A
4.3
EL7200 series selection guide
57
Ordering a control valve 4
Type EL = Electric EL
Actuator thrust 2 = 1.0 kN 2

5
Actuator travel 1 = 20 1
1 = 230 Vac
Voltage 2 = 115 Vac 1
3 = 24 Vac
Control mode A = 0/4 - 20 mA + 0/2 - 10 Vdc + VMD A 6

Failure mode SE = Spring extend SE
EL7211A-SE
How to order
Example: 1 off EL7211A-SE 230 Vac electric actuator with spring extend.
Spares
Spare parts are available as indicated. No other parts are available as
spares.
Linkage (DN15 to DN50) 5
Mounting flange (DN15 to DN50) 6
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given above and state exactly
which product they are for.
Example: 1 - Mounting flange for a EL7211A-SE 230 Vac electric actuator.
TI-P358-14 CH Issue 4 Page 3 of 3
EL7200 Series Electric Actuators

44 Control systems
Electric actuators
4.3
58
Control systems
Electric actuators
TI-P321-02
CTLS Issue 4
EL5060 and EL5061 Series

Electric Actuators (Spring Reserve)
Description
The EL5060 and EL5061 series actuators are reversible actuators having a linear output with power fail, spindle extend. These actuators
are suitable for either two position or modulating control dependent on the controller or other switching device providing the input signal.
These actuators can be used with the following valves:
2-port KE31, KE33, KE43, KE71, KE73 and R63, RB33, RB43, RB63, RB73
3-port Q33, Q43, Q73, QB33, QB43 and QB73
Note: Fixing kit EL3806 is required when using DN15 to DN50 KE type valves.
4.3
59
1
EL3806 fixing kit
(For use with with DN15 to DN50 KE valves)
Available types
Actuator operation Actuator type
Spring reserve 220/240 Vac EL5060
Spring reserve 24 Vac EL5061
110 V version available on request.
Technical data
Model EL506_ 2
Supply voltage 220/240 Vac + 20% - 10% or 24Vac ± 10%
Supply frequency 50 Hz
Power consumption 6.8 W (run) 15 W (hold)
Actuator speed (mm/s) 0.29 Under power
Ambient limits 0-50 °C
Reseat time 8.5 30 mm stroke EL506_

at no voltage (seconds) 5.5 20 mm stroke
Motor Split phase capacitor reversing Materials

Terminations (accept) 1 x 4 mm² cable No. Part Material
Transfer switching 5 A, 250 Vac (2 switches) 1 Case Polycarbonate
Conduit entries 4 x Pg11 connections with plastic covers 2 Housing Steel
Page 1 of 3
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
Available accessories
EL5804 - Anti-condense heater.
EL5806 - 2 switch pack.
EL5807 - Auxiliary feedback potentiometer and gear.
EL5808 - Auxiliary feedback potentiometer without gear.
Technical data
Accessory type Specification
EL5804 4 watt
EL5806 15 A resistive at 250 Vac
EL5807 and EL5808 1000 ohms, 4 watt
Wiring diagrams
EL5804 anti-condense heater EL5807 and EL5808 auxiliary potentiometers
7
30 27
29 26
28 25
8
4.3 Anti-condense heater 1000 feedback potentiometers
60 EL5806 auxiliary switches
16 19
17 20
18 21
Adjustable travel switches
How to order
Example: 1 off EL5807 auxiliary feedback potentiometer and gear train.
CTLS Issue 4
EL5060 and EL5061 Series Electric Actuators (Spring Reserve)
Control systems
How to select
EL5000 Series Valve type Valve material Actuator voltage Actuator speed Valve sizes and differential pressures (∆p) bar
and PN rating ac/50 Hz mm/s
Size DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Stroke mm 20 30
0.4 1.0
Kvs value 6.3 10 16 25† 36 63 100 160
1.6 4.0
Spring return
CI PN16
EL5060 2-port CS PN40 220/240
SS PN40
EL5061 24 0.29 18.0 18.0 10.3 7.4 3.6 2.0 1.2 0.5 0.3
EL5060 CI PN16 220/240

3-port
EL5061 CS PN40 24
† Note: Kvs value of 6.3, 10 and 16 available on demand for DN40 valves.
Selection example Dimensions/weights

Control valve: DN20 KE43 2-port valve
Model A B C Weight
Max ∆p: 12 bar
EL506_ 445 162 170 8.7
Electrical supply: 240 Vac
4.3
Actuator selected: EL5060
EL3806 linkage
61
C
B
Wiring diagram
for power fail return actuators: EL5060 and EL5061
M
M
200/240 or 24 Vac 40
41
A
0 Vac N N
1
42
Switched lives 2 Retract
220/240 or Manual adjustment
24 Vac 3 buttons (for adjustment
under power)
12 Extend
15
Installation and wiring

The actuator should preferably be mounted above the valve, but in any case should not be mounted below it. Ensure the actuator is
coupled to the valve before power is applied and wiring meets local regulations.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco EL5060 spring reserve electric actuator.
CTLS Issue 4
EL5060 and EL5061 Series Electric Actuators (Spring Reserve)
44 Control systems
Electric actuators
4.3
62
Control systems
Positioners and controllers

TI-P706-01
CTLS Issue 4
SP7-10, SP7-11 and SP7-12

Smart Positioners
Description
The SP7-1* smart positioner can control any valve that is
actuated by a linear or rotary pneumatic actuator that conforms
with NAMUR. It guarantees an exact proportionality between
the stroke of the valve and the value of the electrical input signal
(mA) into the positioner.
The SP7-1* has a cast aluminium housing that is also treated

for outdoor installation. The unit can be mounted onto pneumatic
actuators either rotary -57 to 57° or linear -28 to 28°.
The positioner can be supplied without a mounting kit or with a

kit for rotary or linear actuators, the type must be specified when 4.4
ordering.
The positioner can be supplied without a pressure gauge block

1
or with a pressure gauge block, the type must be specified when
ordering.
The positioner is supplied for a control signal in mA and for an air supply pressure from 1.4 to 6 bar.
The SP7-1* positioner can also be used to reverse the action of the control signal.
The positioner has a local communication interface (LCI) as standard in the SP7-10. Additionally, a ‘HART® communication’ option
for communication via the 20 mA signal is available. Both communications are based on the HART® Protocol. Alternatively, HART® 5
or HART®7 are available.
Other available options are the SP7-11 with a PROFIBUS PA module or the SP7-12 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus module.
In addition to its input for the analog position set point, the positioner is equipped with a digital input which can be used to activate
control system functions in the device. A digital output allows you to output collective messages (alarms/faults).
Note: Throughout the document SP7-1* is written where the information is relevant to all versions; the SP7-10, SP7-11 and SP7-12.
Where the information is specific it will be referenced as the version appropriate.
Air supply
T h e S P 7-10 p o s i t i o n e r m u s t b e
provided with a high quality air supply
to ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:3 ATEX rating II 2 G Ex ib IIC T6, T4...T1 Gb
Intrinsically safe
Applications
The SP7-1* can be used with any
actuator that conforms to NAMUR, this
includes all of the following Spirax
Sarco pneumatic actuators:
Materials
BVA300 rotary Part Material Finish
PN1600 series Case - Anti-corrosive paint, Black

Case and cover Die cast aluminium
PNS3000 and PNS4000 series Cover - Anti-corrosive paint to RAL9016
PN9000 series Mouting kits Stainless steel -
TN2000 series Follower pin cone Nylon -
CTLS Issue 4
SP7-10, SP7-11 and SP7-12 Smart Positioners
44
Technical data
Input signal 4-20 mA (split range minimum amplitude 8 mA) or PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Impedance Max 485 +/- 15 Ω (for 4-20mA input signal only)
Air supply 1.4 to 6.0 bar
Air quality ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:3
Output pressure 0 to 100% supply pressure
Actuator stroke 20 mm to 150 mm or 55 ° to 90 °
Action Single acting/fail vent/Double acting
Operating temperature −40 to 85 °C
Air connections ¼" NPT female
Deviation ≤ 0.5 %
Tolerance band 0.3 to 10 %, adjustable
0.1 to 10 %, adjustable for 4-20 mA, HART and PROFIBUS PA, 0.1 to 5 % for FOUNDATION
Configurable dead zone
Fieldbus
Resolution (AD-conversion) > 16,000 steps
Sampling frequency 20 ms (for 4-20 mA, HART and PROFIBUS PA only)
Ambient temperature effect ≤ 0.5 % per 10 K

4.4 Reference temperature 20 °C
2 Influence of vibration ≤ 1 % to 10 g and 80 Hz
Linear mounting kit - 0.78 kg
Weight Rotary mounting kit - 0.4 kg
Positioner (without mounting kits or gauge blocks) - 1.7 kg
SP7-10 - 4-20 mA or 4-20 mA with HART
Basic positioner options SP7-11 - Profibus PA
SP7-12 - Foundation fieldbus
CTLS Issue 4
4
Dimensions (approximate) in mm (and inches)
Ø 8 mm (0.31") h9
14.5 mm (0.57")
1 mm (0.04")
104.5 mm (4.11")
168.5 mm (6.63")
4.4
50 mm
(1.97") 65 mm
3
(2.56")
89.5 mm 25 mm
(3.52") (0.98")
)
7"
.9
(1
110.75 mm (4.36")
m
23 mm (0.91")
m
50
Ø 26 mm (1.02")
58 mm (2.28")
8 - 0.015 mm
25 mm
(0.32" - 0.00059")
(0.98")
7 +/- 0.1
(0.28 +/- 0.0039)
Threaded hole M8 (10 mm [0.39"] deep)
Threaded hole M6 (8 mm deep [0.31"])
Threaded hole M5 x 0.5 (air outputs for direct mount)
Sensor shaft (shown larger than scale)
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
92 mm (3.62") 10 mm (0.39")
M5
14 mm (0.55")
14 mm (0.55")
18 mm (0.71")
2 mm
(0.08")
14 mm (0.55") 9 mm (0.35")
29 mm (1.14") 3 mm (0.12")
Pneumatic connections, NPT ¼ in-18
4.4
4
25 mm (0.98")
30/53 mm
(1.18/2.09") 75 mm 45 - 75 mm
(2.95") (1.77 - 2.95") B*
A*
* Dimensions A and B depend on the rotary actuator
Rotary positioner mounting kits

Actuator mounting dimensions Spirax kit nomenclature
80/20 mm AKR13
For BVA actuators the AKR14 mounting
80/30 mm AKR14
kit is required.
130/30 mm AKR15
130/50 mm AKR16
CTLS Issue 4
Control systems
Positioners and controllers 4
Positioner options for SP7-10 - 4-20 mA or 4-20mA with HART
Case made of aluminium, varnished, for mounting to linear actuators acc. DIN/IEC 534/NAMUR or to
10
rotary actuators acc. VDI/VDE 3845
Case/Mounting Case made of aluminium, varnished, with mechanical position indicator, for mounting to linear actuators
20
acc. DIN/IEC 534/NAMUR or to rotary actuators acc. VDI/VDE 3845
Remote sensor control unit (Note 1) 70
Input 4 ... 20 mA, two-wire, with connector plug for LKS adapter 1
Input/Communication
Port
Input 4 ... 20 mA, two-wire, with connector plug for LKS adapter and FSK module for HART communication 2
Without 0
Explosion Protection ATEX II 2 G Ex ib IIC T6, T4...T1 Gb 1
IECEx Ex ib IIC T6, T4...T1 Gb 5
Single acting, fail safe 1

Output/Safe Position
Single acting, fail freeze 2
(in case of an
electrical power
Double acting, fail safe (Note 2) 4
failure)
4.4
Double acting, fail freeze (Note 2) 5
Standard Cable: Thread ½-14 NPT, air pipe: Thread ¼-18 NPT 2
Connections 5
Cable: Thread M20 x 1.5, air pipe: Thread ¼-18 NPT 5
Without 0
Plug-in module for analog position feedback, signal range 4 ... 20 mA, two-wire 1
Option Modules for
Analog or Digital
Plug-in module for digital position feedback 3
Position Feedback
Plug-in module for analog position feedback, signal range 4 ... 20 mA, two-wire, and digital position
5
feedback
Without 00
Optional Mechanical
Kit for Digital Position Mechanical kit for digital position feedback with proximity switches SJ2-SN (NC or logical 1) (Note 3) 10
Feedback
Mechanical kit for digital position feedback with 24 V AC/DC microswitches (change-over contacts) (Note 4) 50
Standard 1
Higher Stiffness + Lower Air Capacity H

Design
(Varnish/Coding)
Protection Class IP 66/NEMA 4X P
Increased Corrosion Protection incl. Protection Class IP66 S
Positioner options continued on next page
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
Positioner options for SP7-10 - 4-20 mA or 4-20mA with HART (continued)
Stainless steel 18.5 x 65 mm (0.73 x 2.56") (Note 7) MK1

Device Identification
Label
Sticker 11 x 25 mm (0.43 x 0.98") MK3
Basic unit (Note 8) RS

Remote Sensor
Basic unit with position indicator (Note 8) RD
Remote Sensor
Extended ambient temperature range -40 ... 100 °C (-40 ... 212 °F) (Note 8) RT
Temperature Range
Optional
Remote Sensor
Advanced vibration range 2 g @ 300 Hz (Note 8) RV
Vibration Resistance
Remote Sensor
Protection class IP 67 (Note 8) RP
Protection Class
5 m cable enclosed (Note 8) R5

Remote Sensor Cable
10 m cable enclosed (Note 8) R6
SP7-10 Note 1: With standard characteristic curve, if delivered without remote sensor
Note 2: Not for for integral mounting
Note 3: Only for model with mechanical position indicator
4.4 Note
Note
4: Not for explosion protected version and only for model with mechanical position indicator
5: Details on request
Note 7: Plain text, max. 16 letters
6 Note 8: Only with remote sensor control unit
Ordering Code Example: SP7-10 - 20 1 0 1 5 0 00 1
CTLS Issue 4
Control systems
Positioner options for SP7-11 - PROFIBUS PA
10
Case/Mounting
Case made of aluminium, varnished, with mechanical position indicator, for mounting to linear actuators
20
Input/Communication
PROFIBUS PA 3
Port
Without 0
IECEx Ex ib IIC T6, T4...T1 Gb M

Single acting, fail freeze 2
(in case of an
electrical power
Double acting, fail safe 4
failure)
Standard Double acting, fail freeze 5
Cable: Thread ½-14 NPT, air pipe: Thread ¼-18 NPT 2

Connections
Cable: Thread M20 x 1.5, air pipe: Thread ¼-18 NPT 5 4.4
Option Module for
Without 0
7
Shutdown Function
Without 00
Optional Mechanical
Mechanical kit for digital position feedback with proximity switches SJ2-SN (NC or logical 1) (Note: 1) 10
Kit for Digital Position
Feedback
Mechanical kit for digital position feedback with 24 V AC/DC microswitches (change-over contacts)
50
(Note: 2)
Standard 1
Design
(Varnish/Coding)
Stainless steel 18.5 x 65 mm (0.73 x 2.56") (Note: 4) MK1

Optional Label
Sticker 11 x 25 mm (0.43 x 0.98") MK3
SP7-11 Note 1: Only for model with mechanical position indicator

Note 2: Not for explosion protected version and only for model with mechanical position indicator
Note 3: (Details on request)
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
Positioner options for SP7-12- FOUNDATION Fieldbus
10
Case/Mounting
20
Input/Communication
FOUNDATION Fieldbus 4
Port
Without 0
IECEx Ex ib IIC T6, T4...T1 Gb M
Output/Safe Position Single acting, fail freeze 2

(in case of an electrical
power failure) Double acting, fail safe 4
Double acting, fail freeze 5

Standard
Cable: Thread ½-14 NPT, air pipe: Thread ¼-18 NPT 2
Connections
4.4 Cable: Thread M20 x 1.5, air pipe: Thread ¼-18 NPT 5
8 Option Module for

Shutdown Function
Without 0
Without 00
Optional Mechanical
Mechanical kit for digital position feedback with proximity switches SJ2-SN (NC or logical 1) (Note: 1) 10
Feedback
Mechanical kit for digital position feedback with 24 V AC/DC microswitches (change-over contacts)
50
(Note: 2)
Standard 1
Design (Varnish/
Coding)
CCC Certification 3CC for Ex i & CCC for Ex d CCC
Stainless steel 18.5 x 65 mm (0.73 x 2.56") (Note: 4) MK1

Optional Label
Sticker 11 x 25 mm (0.43 x 0.98") MK3
SP7-12 Note 1: Only for model with mechanical position indicator

Note 2: Not for explosion protected version and only for model with mechanical position indicator
Note 3: (Details on request)
CTLS Issue 4
Control systems
Full details are contained in the SP7-1* digital positioner Installation and Maintenance Instructions.
Mounting/linkage kit : Positioner mounting kits will be supplied for central mounting as standard.
Actuator Model Valve Models Valve Sizes Spirax kit Nomenclature
PN9100 DN15 to DN50 AKL10

Spira-trol two port and QL three port
TN2150 DN15 to DN100 AKL10
Spira-trol two port and QL three port DN125 to DN300 AKL17

TN2300
DN125 to DN300 AKL17

TN2400
TN2270
DN125 to DN300 AKL17 4.4
9
PN3000 Sprg Ext DN15 to DN100 AKL10
LE, LEA and Steri-trol
PN4000 Sprg Ret DN15 to DN100 AKL10
PN5000 DN15 to DN100 AKL10 +UBC

KE, KEA, LE and LEA
PN6000 DN15 to DN100 AKL10 + UBC

QL three port

'C' series
PN1600 Spira-trol DN125 to DN300 AKL11
Gauge blocks
Spirax Nomenclature Weight
6 bar/87 psi Single acting GBS6A 0.28 kg

NPT ¼" Double acting GBD6A 0.32 kg
0.6 MPa/87 psi Single acting GBS06A 0.28 kg

NPT ¼" Double acting GBD06A 0.32 kg
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco SP7-10-2010150001 Smart positioner with AKL10 mounting kit and GBS6A gauge block..
Caution: The SP7-1* positioner must have a high quality air supply to ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:3.
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
4.4
10
Control systems

TI-P706-04
CTLS Issue 2
SP7-20, SP7-21 and SP7-22

Smart Positioner
Description
The SP7-2* is an electronically configurable positioner with communication capabilities designed for mounting on pneumatic linear or
rotary actuators. It features a small and compact design, a modular construction, and an excellent cost-performance ratio. Fully automatic
determination of the control parameters and adaptation to the positioner allow for considerable time savings as well as optimum control
behaviour.
The positioner has a local communication interface (LCI) as standard in the SP7-20. Additionally, a ‘HART® communication’ option for
communication via the 20 mA signal is available. Both communications are based on the HART® Protocol. Alternatively, HART® 5 or
HART®7 are available.
Other available options are the SP7-21 with a PROFIBUS PA module or the SP7-22 with FOUNDATION Fieldbus module.
In addition to its input for the analog position set point, the positioner is equipped with a digital input which can be used to activate
control system functions in the device. A digital output allows you to output collective messages (alarms/faults).
4.4
11
Throughout the document
SP7-2* is written where the
information is relevant to all
versions; the SP7-20, SP7-21
and SP7-22.
Where the information is

specific it will be referenced
as the version appropriate.
Air supply
The SP7-2* positioner must be provided with a high quality air supply to ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:3
Approvals
ATEX rating II 2 G Ex db IIC T4/T5/T6 Gb
IECEx rating Ex db IIC T4/T5/T6 Gb
Applications Materials
The SP7-2* can be used with any actuator that conforms to
NAMUR, this includes all of the following Spirax Sarco pneumatic Part Material Finish
actuators:
Case - Anti-corrosive
BVA300 rotary Die cast paint, Black
Case and cover
aluminium Cover - Anti-corrosive
PN1600 series
paint to RAL9016
PNS3000 and PNS4000 series
Stainless
Mounting kits -
PN9000 series steel
CTLS Issue 2
SP7-20, SP7-21 and SP7-22 Smart Positioner
44 Control systems
Technical data
Input signal 4-20 mA (split range minimum amplitude 8 mA) or PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Impedance Max 485 +/- 15 Ω (for 4-20mA input signal only)
Air supply 1.4 to 6.0 bar
Deviation ≤ 0.5 %
Configurable dead zone 0.1 to 10 %, adjustable for 4-20 mA, HART and PROFIBUS PA, 0.1 to 5 % for FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Sampling frequency 20 ms (for 4-20mA input signal only).
4.4 Ambient temperature effect ≤ 0.5 % per 10 K
Reference temperature 20 °C
12 Influence of vibration ≤ 1 % to 10 g and 80 Hz
Weight Rotary mounting kit - 0.4 kg
Positioner (without mounting kits or gauge blocks) - 3.0 kg
SP7-20 4-20 mA or 4-20 mA with HART
Basic positioner options SP7-21 PROFIBUS PA
SP7-22 FOUNDATION Fieldbus
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
.
.
Threaded hole M8 (10 mm (0.39") deep) Threaded hole M5 x 0.5 (air outputs for integral mount)
Threaded hole M6 (8 mm (0.31") deep) Sensor shaft (shown larger than scale)
4.4
. .
13
.
.
.
.
.
.
NPT ½" or M20 x 1.5 Pneumatic connections, NPT ¼" - 18 oder G¼"
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
4.4
14
Dimensions A and B depend on the rotary actuator

80/20 mm AKR13
80/30 mm AKR14
kit is required.
130/30 mm AKR15
130/50 mm AKR16
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Positioner options - SP7-20 - 4-20mA or 4-20 mA with HART
Case made of aluminium, varnished, for mounting to linear actuators acc. DIN/IEC 534/NAMUR or to rotary
10
actuators acc. VDI/VDE 3845
Case/Mounting
20
Operation With operator panel and display integrated in the enclosure cover 1
ATEX II 2G Ex db II C T4/T5/T6 Gb 1
Explosion Protection
IECEx Ex db II C T4/T5/T6 Gb 6

(in case of an Single acting, fail freeze 2
electrical power Double acting, fail safe 3
failure)
Cable: Thread M20 x 1.5, air pipe: Thread 1/4-18 NPT 2

Connections
Cable: Thread 1/2-14 NPT, air pipe: Thread 1/4-18 NPT 3
Without 0
Standard Option Modules for Plug-in module for analog position feedback, signal range 4 ... 20 mA, two-wire 1
Analog or Digital
Position Feedback Plug-in module for digital position feedback 3 4.4
Plug-in module for analog position feedback, signal range 4 ... 20 mA, two-wire, and digital position feedback 4
15
Without 0
Optional Mechanical
Kit for Digital Position Mechanical kit for digital position feedback with proximity switches SJ2-SN (NC or logical 1) 1
Feedback
Parameter Setting/Bus
Factory setting for HART devices 1
Address
Standard 1
Design
(Varnish/Coding)
Protection Class IP 66 P
Without 0
Label (Note 3) 1
Label
Stainless steel 18.5 x 65 mm (0.73 x 2.56 in.) (Note 3) 2
SIL2 - Declaration of
SIL2 - Declaration of Conformity (Note 4) CS2
Conformity
Optional
CCC Certification 3CC for Ex i & CCC for Ex d CCC
SP7-20 Note 1: Only with cable connection NPT thread

Note 2: Only for Ex d version
Note 4: With single acting, fail safe pneumatic only
Ordering Code Example: SP7-20 10 1 1 3 2 0 1 1 1 2
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Positioner options - SP7-21 - PROFIBUS PA
10
Case/Mounting
20

failure)

Connections
Standard Cable: Thread 1/2-14 NPT, air pipe: Thread 1/4-18 NPT 3
Option Module for

Without 0
Shutdown Function
Without 03
4.4 Optional Mechanical
Kit for Digital Position Mechanical kit for digital position feedback with proximity switches SJ2-SN (NC or logical 1) 13
16 Feedback
Standard 1
Design
(Varnish/Coding)
Without 0
Label including text, with separate sticker (Note 3) 1
Label
Optional CCC Certification 3CC for Ex i & CCC for Ex d CCC

Ordering Code Example: SP7-21 20 1 1 2 2 0 0 3 1 0
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Positioner options - SP7-22 - FOUNDATION Fieldbus
10
Case/Mounting
20

failure)

Connections
Standard Cable: Thread 1/2-14 NPT, air pipe: Thread 1/4-18 NPT 3
Option Modules for

Without 0
Shutdown Function
Without 04
Optional Mechanical
Mechanical kit for digital position feedback with proximity switches SJ2-SN (NC or logical 1) 14
4.4
Feedback Mechanical kit for digital position feedback with 24 V AC/DC microswitches (change-over contacts)
34
17
(Note 2)
Standard 1
Design
(Varnish/Coding)
Without 0
Label including text, with separate sticker (Note 3) 1
Label
Optional CCC Certification 3CC for Ex i & CCC for Ex d CCC

Ordering Code Example: SP7-22 10 1 1 3 2 0 34 P 2
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Mounting/linkage kit : Positioner mounting kits for central mounting


TN2300

TN2400
TN2270
4.4 PN3000 Sprg Ext

DN15 to DN100 AKL10

18
KE, KEA, LE and QL three port

QL three port

''C' series
BVA actuators
For BVA actuators the AKR14 mounting kit is required.
Gauge blocks
Spirax Nomenclature Weight
6 bar/87 psi Single acting GBS6A 0.28 kg

NPT¼" Double acting GBD6A 0.32 kg
0.6 Mpa/87 psi Single acting GBS06A 0.28 kg

NPT¼" Double acting GBD06A 0.32 kg
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco SP7-20-10113201112 Smart positioner with AKL10 mounting kit and GBS6A gauge block.
Caution: The SP7-20 positioner must have a high quality air supply to ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:3.
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems

TI-P707-02
CTLS Issue 1
SP8-10
Smart Positioner
4.4
19
Description
The SP8-10 is an electronically configurable positioner with communication capabilities designed for mounting on pneumatic linear or
rotary actuators. It features a small and compact design, a modular construction, and an excellent cost-performance ratio. Fully automatic
determination of the control parameters and adaptation to the positioner allow for considerable time savings as well as optimum control
behavior.
An I/P module with subsequent pneumatic amplifier is used to control the pneumatic actuator. The well-proven I/P module proportionally
converts the permanent electrical set point signal from the CPU into a pneumatic signal used to adjust a 3/3-way valve. Dosing of the
air flow for pressurizing or depressurizing the actuator is continuously adjusted. As a result, excellent control results are achieved.
When reaching the set point, the 3/3-way valve is closed in centre position to minimize the air consumption. The pneumatic system can
be supplied in four versions: for single acting and double acting actuators and each with the ‘fail-safe’ / ‘fail-freeze’ safety function.
In addition to its input for the analogue position set point, the positioner is equipped with a digital input which can be used to activate
control system functions in the device. A digital output allows you to output collective messages (alarms / faults).
Applications
The SP8-10 can be used with any
actuator that conforms to NAMUR, this
includes all of the following Spirax
Sarco pneumatic actuators:
Materials
BVA300 rotary Part Material Finish
PN1600 series Case - Anti-corrosive paint, Black

PNS3000 and PNS4000 series Cover - Anti-corrosive paint to RAL9016
PN9000 series Mouting kits Stainless steel -
Page 1 of 7
44 Control systems
Technical data
Input signal range 4-20 mA (split range minimum amplitude 8 mA)
Impedance 485 ohms at 20mA
Output pressure 0 to 10 bar (0 to 145 psi)
Actuator stroke Min. and max. limits, freely configurable in range 0 to 100 %
Deviation ≤ 0.5 %
Configurable dead zone 0.1 to 10 %, adjustable
Sampling frequency 20 ms
Ambient temperature effect ≤ 0.5 % per 10 K
Reference temperature 20 °C
Influence of vibration ≤ 1 % to 10 g and 80 Hz

4.4 Degree of protection IP65
20 Weight
Rotary mounting kit - 0.4 kg
CTLS Issue 1
SP8-10 Smart Positioner
Control systems
206 mm (8.11")
104 mm (4.09")
104.5 mm (4.11")
60 mm (2.36")
33.5 mm 4.4
(1.32")
21
25 mm
(0.98")
7 mm 2 mm
(0.28") 62 mm 50 mm
(0.08") (2.56") (1.97")
50
23 mm (0.91")
mm )
(1.
97
"
58 mm (2.28")
CTLS ISSUE 1
44 Control systems
1.8 mm (0.07")
115.5 mm 10 mm
14.5 mm (0.39") 28 mm
(4.5")
(0.57") (1.10")
14 mm (0.55")
28.5 mm
2 mm (1.12")
(0.07")
44 mm
(1.73")
4.4
22
25 mm
(0.98")
30/53 mm
(1.18/2.09") 45-75 mm
(1.77 - 2.95")
75 mm
(2.95")

80/20 mm AKR13
80/30 mm AKR14
kit is required.
130/30 mm AKR15
130/50 mm AKR16
CTLS Issue 1
Control systems
Positioner options for SP8-10
Without Y0
ATEX II 1G Ex ia IIC / II 1D Ex ia IIIC A1
ATEX II 3G Ex nA IIC B2
ATEX II 2D Ex tb IIIC B3
FM / CSA Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III Div. 1 Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G F1
IECEx Ex ia IIC Ga / Ex ia IIIC Da M1
Explosion Protection Certification IECEx Ex nA IIC Gc N2
IECEx Ex tb IIIC Db N3
NEPSI - EX ia II C T4/T6 Ga S1
KOSHA Korea - Ex ia II C T6 S5
UKCA Ex ia IIC Ga / Ex ia IIIC Da U1

Standard
UKCA Ex nA IIC Gc U2
UKCA Ex tb IIIC Db U3
4 ... 20 mA A
Input Signal / Communication Port
HART digital communication and 4 ... 20 mA H
Pneumatic Output Type

Single acting 1
4.4
Double acting 2
Fail-safe S
23
Safe Position
Fail-freeze F
Air Pipe Connection Thread 1/4-18 NPT female (Note: 1) 2
Thread M20 x 1.5 female C

Cable Conduits
Thread NPT 1/2 in. female (Note: 1) D
Analogue feedback output A1
Option Module Slot 1 Digital feedback output A2
Analogue universal input A3
Analogue feedback output B1
Digital feedback output B2

Option Module Slot 2
Analogue universal input B3
Emergency shutdown module B4
Option, Air Power 50kg/h L5

Optional
Usage Certifications SIL 2 - Declaration of Conformity (Note: 2) CS
CCC Certification CCC- approval for Ex i CC
Position Indicator Visual Indicator, integrated into cover D1
Microswitches (Note: 3) F1
Limit Switches
Proximity switches (NC) SJ2-SN (Note: 4) F2
Housing Material Stainless steel H1
With integrated (contactless) position sensor K1

Position Sensor Type
Control Unit for remote position sensor (Note: 3) K2
When the stainless steel housing material is selected, gauge blocks will automatically be S/S
Positioner options for SP8-10 continued on next page
CTLS ISSUE 1
44 Control systems
Positioner options for SP8-10 (continued)
EDP300 ON / OFF available from Q2 /2020 P7
Operation with natural gas (Note: 5) P8

Special Applications
Operation with natural gas (Housing Material: Stainless steel) (Note: 5) P8
With noise reduction P9
0 ... 1 MPa (0 ... 10 bar, 0 ... 145 psi) R3

Pressure Gauge Block Type
0 ... 1 MPa (0 ... 10 bar, 0 ... 145 psi) (Housing Material: Stainless steel) R3
Diagnosis Module Pressure sensors S3
Stainless steel 18.5 mm x 65 mm (0.73 in. x 2.5 in.) T1

Additional TAG Plate
Optional Sticker 11 mm x 25 mm (0.44 in. x 1 in.) (Note: 3) T3
Mounting Options Prepared for integral mounting V1
Basic unit RS
Remote Sensor
Basic unit (Housing Material: Stainless steel) RS
Remote Sensor Temperature Range Extended ambient temperature range -40 ... 100 °C (-40 ... 212 °F) RT
Remote Sensor Vibration Resistance Advanced vibration range 2 g @ 300 Hz RV
Remote Sensor Protection Class Protection class IP 66 RP
4.4 5 m cable enclosed R5

2Remote Sensor Cable
24 10 m cable enclosed R6
SP8-10 Note 1: Needed for FM / CSA certification

Note 2: With single acting, fail safe pneumatic only
Note 3: Not for Ex-versions
Note 4: Not for IECEx-versions
Note 5: Only with Explosion protection
Ordering Code Example: SP8-10 Y0 H 2 F 2 C
CTLS Issue 1
Control systems
Full details are contained in the SP8-10 digital positioner Installation and Maintenance Instructions.


TN2300

TN2400
TN2270
PN3000 Sprg Ext

DN15 to DN100 AKL10
4.4
25
KE, KEA, LE and LEA

QL three port

'C' series
Gauge blocks
Spirax Spirax
Material Weight Material Weight
Nomenclature Nomenclature
GBS1A 0.28 kg GBS10A 0.28 kg
1,0 MPa/145 psi GBD1A 0.32 kg 10 bar/145 psi Stainless GBD10A 0.32 kg
Aluminium
NPT¼" GBS1S 0.50 kg NPT¼" steel GBS10S 0.50 kg
GBD1S 0.52 kg GBD10S 0.52 kg
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco SP8-10-Y0H2F2C Smart positioner with AKL10 mounting kit and GBS6A gauge block.
Caution: The SP8-10 positioner must have a high quality air supply to ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:3.
CTLS ISSUE 1
44 Control systems
4.4
26
Control systems

TI-P343-43
CTLS Issue 2
EP500
Standard
Electropneumatic Positioner
4.4
EP500 with front cover closed EP500 with front cover opened to display the inside
27
Description
With the highest precision the EP500 electropneumatic positioner can control any valve that is actuated by a linear pneumatic actuator
that conforms with NAMUR. It guarantees an exact proportionality between the stroke of the valve and the value of the electrical input
signal (mA) into the positioner.
Simple construction and high operational reliability make-up this high precision unit which further offers simplicity of maintenance and
calibration.
The EP500 has a cast aluminium housing that is also treated for outdoor installation. The unit can be mounted onto pneumatic actuators
that have a stroke limit of between 10 and 100 mm.
As standard the unit is supplied with a mounting kit for actuators that have a stroke limit of between 10 to 70 mm; however if specified
at the at the time of order placement the unit can be supplied with a kit to facilitate strokes up to 100 mm.
As standard the EP500 is equipped with two gauges to indicate the supply air pressure and the air pressure command sent to the
pneumatic actuator.
The positioner is supplied for a control signal in mA and for an air supply pressure up to 6 bar.
With simple calibration the positioners can be arranged for sequential operation of two or more pneumatic valves in such a way that
the stroke of each valve is obtained by a split-range control signal. For example: 4 to 12 and 12 to 20 mA in the case of two valves; and
4 to 9, 9 to 14 and 14 to 20 mA with three valves, etc..
The EP500 electropneumatic positioner can also be used to reverse the action of the control signal.
Air supply
The EP500 positioner must be provided with a high quality air supply. A Spirax Sarco MPC2 filter regulator with coalescing filter or
equivalent must be used. A fixing kit is available to mount the MPC2 filter regulator onto the actuator.
For further product data regarding the MPC2 see Technical Information sheet TI-P054-04.
The EP500 can be used with any actuator
that conforms to NAMUR, this includes all Part Material Finish
of the following Spirax Sarco pneumatic
Case and cover Die cast aluminium Anti-corrosive paint to RAL9006
actuators:
PN1000 and PN2000 series
PN9000 series
TN2000 series
Page 1 of 3
44 Control systems
Technical data
4-20 mA (split range minimum Steady state air
Input signal range 0.1 Nm 3 / h @ 1.4 bar
amplitude 4 mA) consumption
Input resistance 228 Ω Air connections ¼" NPT female
1.4 to 6.0 bar (regulate 5 to 10 psi Sensitivity ≤ 0.2% F.S. (Full Scale)
Air supply
above actuator spring range)
Histerisis ≤ 0.4% F.S.
Air quality Air must be free of water, oil and dust
Linearity ≤ 1.0% F.S.
Repeatability ≤ 0.5% F.S
Actuator stroke 10 mm to 100 mm
Electrical Cable gland M20 internal terminals for
Action Single acting / fail vent connections conductors from 0.5 to 2.5 mm 2 wire
Operating Degree of protection IP65

-20 °C to +75 °C
temperature
Characteristic Linear
Air flow 3.20 Nm 3 / h @ 1.4 bar
Shipping weight 2.35 kg
Dimensions
(approximate) in mm Mounting kit
4.4
28
153 mm
110 mm
211 mm
OUT ¼" NPT
125.5 mm
IN ¼" NPT

Full details are contained in the EP500 electropneumatic positioner Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-P343-44) supplied with
the product.
EP500 Standard Electropneumatic Positioner

Control systems
Available spares
Full-scale 0 to 2 bar
Gauges Full-scale 0 to 4 bar
Full-scale 0 to 7 bar How to order spares

Always order spares by using the adjacent description and state which unit it is
Back plate, gasket and screw intended for.
For example: 1 off Amplifying relay set for an EP500 standard electropneumatic
Amplifying relay set positioner.
Gasket set
Mounting kit
Positioner nomenclature guide

Positioner series EP500S = Standard electropneumatic positioner EP500S
1 = Linear, single action for a maximum stroke limit of 70 mm

Movement / action 1
Enclosure 0 = Standard 0
Approvals 0 = Standard 0
G2 = Full-scale 2 bar 4.4

Gauges G4 = Full-scale 4 bar G4
29
G7 = Full-scale 7 bar
Selection example: EP500S 1 0 0 G4
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco EP500S100G4 standard electropneumatic linear positioner having a stroke limit of 70 mm supplied
equipped with gauges for a full scale pressure reading of 4 bar.
Caution: The EP500 positioner must have a high quality air supply. A Spirax Sarco MPC2 filter regulator with coalescing filter
or equivalent must be used inclusive of fixing kit - See Technical Information sheet TI-P054-04 for further data and How to order.
EP500 Standard Electropneumatic Positioner

44 Control systems
4.4
30
Control systems

TI-P343-45
CTLS Issue 2
EP500
Advanced
ATEX Electropneumatic Positioner
4.4
EP500 with front cover closed EP500 with front cover opened to display the inside 31
Description II 2G Ex d mb IIC T6 Gb
With the highest precision the EP500 electropneumatic positioner
can control any valve that is actuated by a linear pneumatic II 2D Ex tb mb IIIC T76 °C Db
actuator that conforms with NAMUR. It guarantees an exact ATEX rating
proportionality between the stroke of the valve and the value of II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 Gb
the electrical input signal (mA) into the positioner.
Simple construction and high operational reliability make-up this II 2D Ex ia IIIC T76 °C Db
high precision unit which further offers simplicity of maintenance
Ui = 30 V, i = 110 mA,
and calibration. Ex ia circuit parameters Pi = 0.82 W, Li = 0, Ci = 0
The EP500 has a cast aluminium housing that is also treated for
outdoor installation. The unit can be mounted onto pneumatic
actuators that have a stroke limit of between 10 and 100 mm.
As standard the unit is supplied with a mounting kit for actuators that have a stroke limit of between 10 to 70 mm; however if specified
at the at the time of order placement the unit can be supplied with a kit to facilitate strokes up to 100 mm.
As standard the EP500 is equipped with two gauges to indicate the supply air pressure and the air pressure command sent to the
pneumatic actuator.
The flow of the output signal is adjustable by means of a valve damping adjustment screw.
With simple calibration the positioners can be arranged for sequential operation of two or more pneumatic valves in such a way that
the stroke of each valve is obtained by a split-range control signal. For example: 4 to 12 and 12 to 20 mA in the case of two valves; and
4 to 9, 9 to 14 and 14 to 20 mA with three valves, etc..
The EP500 electropneumatic positioner can also be used to reverse the action of the control signal.
Air supply
The EP500 positioner must be provided with a high quality air supply. A Spirax Sarco MPC2 filter regulator with coalescing filter or
equivalent must be used. A fixing kit is available to mount the MPC2 filter regulator onto the actuator.
For further product data regarding the MPC2 see Technical Information sheet TI-P054-04.
that conforms to NAMUR, this includes all Part Material Finish
of the following Spirax Sarco pneumatic Case and cover Die cast aluminium Anti-corrosive paint to RAL9016
actuators:
PN1000 and PN2000 series
PN9000 series
TN2000 series
Page 1 of 3
44 Control systems
Technical data
4-20 mA Steady state air
Input signal range 0.1 Nm 3 / h @ 1.4 bar
(split range minimum amplitude 4 mA) consumption
Input resistance 292 Ω Air connections ¼" NPT female
1.4 to 6.0 bar (regulate 5 to 10 psi Sensitivity ≤ 0.2% F.S. (Full Scale)
Air supply
above actuator spring range)
Histerisis ≤ 0.4% F.S.
Air quality Air must be free of water, oil and dust
Linearity ≤ 1.0% F.S.
Repeatability ≤ 0.5% F.S
Actuator stroke 10 mm to 100 mm
Electrical Cable gland M20 internal terminals for
Action Single acting / fail vent connections conductors from 0.5 to 2.5 mm 2 wire
Operating Degree of protection IP65

-20 °C to +75 °C
temperature
Air flow 3.20 Nm 3 / h @ 1.4 bar
Dimensions
(approximate) in mm Mounting kit
4.4
32
153 mm
110 mm
211 mm
OUT ¼" NPT
125.5 mm
IN ¼" NPT

Full details are contained in the EP500 electropneumatic positioner Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-P343-46) supplied
with the product.
EP500 Advanced ATEX Electropneumatic Positioner

Control systems
Available spares
Full-scale 0 to 2 bar
Gauges Full-scale 0 to 4 bar
Full-scale 0 to 7 bar How to order spares

Always order spares by using the adjacent description and state which unit it is
Back plate, gasket and screw intended for.
For example: 1 off Amplifying relay set for an EP500 standard electropneumatic
Amplifying relay set positioner.
Gasket set
Mounting kit

Positioner series EP500A = Advanced ATEX electropneumatic positioner EP500A

Movement / action 1
Approvals 3 = Explosion proof + intrinsic safety 3
G2 = Full-scale 2 bar 4.4

Gauges G4 = Full-scale 4 bar G4
33
G7 = Full-scale 7 bar
Selection example: EP500A 1 0 3 G4
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco EP500A103G4 advanced ATEX electropneumatic linear positioner having a stroke limit of 70 mm
supplied equipped with gauges for a full-scale pressure reading of 4 bar.
Caution: The EP500 positioner must have a high quality air supply. A Spirax Sarco MPC2 filter regulator with coalescing filter
EP500 Advanced ATEX Electropneumatic Positioner

44 Control systems
TI-P370-14
CH Issue 7
PP5
Pneumatic / Pneumatic Positioner
4.4 POS PP5

ITIO
Mad NER
34
e in
Italy
Description Accessories
The PP5 positioner is a single acting unit, requiring a 0.2 to 1 bar A fixing kit is available to mount an air filter / regulator to the pneumatic
signal and is for use with linear pneumatic actuators. The positioner actuator.
compares the output signal from a pneumatic controller (or Fixing kit Actuator type
transducer) with the valve position feedback, and varies the
FK21 PN9100 Series
pneumatic output signal to the actuator accordingly. The valve position
is, therefore, guaranteed for any controller output signal and the FK28 PN9200 or PN9300 Series
effects of varying valve differential pressure, stem friction and
diaphragm hysteresis are overcome. The positioners can also be How to order
used where the controller output signals are of too low a magnitude Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco PP5 pneumatic /pneumatic positioner.
to be used directly with high pressure actuators. A mounting kit is
supplied with each positioner for mounting to either columns or yoke Dimensions (approximate) in mm
in accordance with NAMUR standard. Safety covers are provided. Weight 2.8 kg
165
Applications
The positioners can be used with the following actuators:
PN9000 Series
Actuator types
TN2000 Series 110
Technical data
Input signal range 0.2 bar to 1 bar
110 175
Output signal range 0 to 100% supply air pressure
Supply air pressure 1.4 bar to 6 bar
Stroke range 10 mm to 100 mm 30.5
Amplification Adjustable
Air consumption 0.7 m³ / h at 6 bar FK21 / FK28 fixing kit 40
Pneumatic connections ¼" NPT
Ambient conditions -20°C to +80°C
61.5
Materials
Die cast aluminium with
Body and cover anti-corrosive paint
Control systems
Installation
Full details are contained in the appropriate Installation and
Maintenance Instructions supplied with the product.
Air connections (rear view)

Air connection ¼" NPT
Positioner (Rear view)
Gauge
block S
connections
4.4
35
Gauge block
51 mm
Gauge block (Front view)

Spares
Gauge 0-2 bar output
1
15
1.5
10 20
0.5
lb/in 2
Springs and pneumatic tube set 5 25
I Input from controller
Set of gaskets, diaphragms and orifice
0 30 2
0
Amplifying relay set
Block for gauges bar
100 mm S Supply
3 4
5
2 40 60
lb/in 2
1 20 80 6 O Output to actuator
0 100 7
0
bar
51 mm
TI-P370-14 CH Issue 7 PP5 Pneumatic / Pneumatic Positioner

44 Control systems
TI-P343-36
CH Issue 3
SP400
Electropneumatic Smart Positioner
Description
The SP400 is a loop powered digital valve positioner for linear and
quarter-turn pneumatic valves. It has been designed for users that
want the benefits of a smart digital positioner but do not need all
the functionality and extra features of the SP500.
Precise control is maintained through valve position feedback that
automatically varies the pneumatic output pressure to overcome For the
the effects of stem friction and flow forces to maintain programmable
the desired valve position. Indication of valve position is provided functions see
page 2
through a continuous digital display of % travel.
The pneumatics are based on piezo-valve technology giving high
resolution, high reliability, vibration insensitivity and class-leading
4.4 low air consumption.
The SP400 includes straightforward functionality that can be easily
SP400 with front cover closed
36 set up through the screen and keypad. The absence of mechanical
linkages greatly reduces the time required for the mounting
procedure and the software has been designed to simplify
operations as much as possible: commissioning requires just
assembling the SP400 to the valve and pressing one button.
The SP400 is supplied with a NAMUR standard mounting kit for
attachment to yoke or pillar mounted actuators. For quarter-turn
valves, a mounting kit compliant to VDI / VDE 3845 is supplied.
Air supply
The SP400 smart positioner must be provided with a high
quality air supply. A Spirax Sarco MPC2 filter regulator with
coalescing filter or equivalent must be used. A fixing kit is
available to mount the MPC2 filter regulator onto the actuator.
For further product data regarding the MPC2 see Technical
Information sheet TI-P054-04. SP400 with front cover removed
Applications Technical data

The SP400 can be used with the following pneumatic actuators: Input signal range 4 - 20 mA nominal
PN1000 and PN2000 series Minimum input signal 3.6 mA
PNS3000 and PNS4000 series 1.4 - 7.0 bar
Air supply pressure
PN9000 series (5-10 psi above spring range pressure)
Air supply must be dry, oil and dust free
Air quality
to ISO 8573-1 class 2:3:1
Optional extras Output pressure 0 to 100% supply pressure
Complete manifold block with two Linear valves 10 mm to 100 mm
Stroke range
Gauge block two pressure gauges (supply pressure Quarter turn valves 5° to 120°
and pressure to the actuator) Action Single action / fail vent
Operating temperature -10°C to +80°C
4.2 normal m3 / h at 1.4 bar g
Maximum air flow
Materials 8.5 normal m3 / h at 6.0 bar g
Part Material Finish Steady state air consumption Less than 0.016 normal m3 / h
Anti-corrosive paint to Air connections Screwed ¼" NPT
RAL5010
Cable gland M20
Magnet bracket Die cast aluminium
Spring clamp terminals for
Electrical connections 0.2 to 1.5 mm² wire
Characteristics Linear
Resolution (maximum) 0.1% F.S. (Full Scale)
Shut-off 1%
Control systems
F
A B C D E F G
145 113 105 40 109 30 172
B E
Programmable functions
Autostroke Automatic commissioning routine
Valve type 2-port or 3-port
Selectable 0 - 100% or 100% - 0%
% travel
depending on valve / actuator configuration A D
Control action Direct or reverse action (4 - 20 or 20 - 4 mA)
OFF range 4 - 20 mA
Centre bolt for 'U' bolts for pillar
Split range Low range 4 - 13 mA yoke mounted mounted actuators
High range 11 - 20 mA actuators
0.5%
1.5%
Deadband
3.0%
5.0%
Reset Resets all programmed values
Input signal Visualisation of input mA signal
G
4.4
Available spares
Pressure gauge only C 37
Pressure gauge Available ranges:
0 to 2 bar, 0 to 4 bar or 0 to 7 bar
Filter plug kit Plug plus 3 off filters and 'O' rings

Full details are contained in the SP400 electropneumatic smart positioner Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-P343-37)

Positioner series SP400 SP400
Movement / action 0 = Linear, single action 0

1 = Rotary, single action
Retransmission + 0 = Not mounted 0
software switches
24 V power supply 0 = Not mounted 0
Remote sensor 0 = No 0
Extended stroke 0 = No 0
0 = Not mounted
G2 = Full scale 2 bar
Gauge block G4
Selection example: SP400 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G4
How to order
Please include all the required optional extras as described on the first page.
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco SP400 000 000 0G4 electropneumatic smart linear positioner equipped with gauge block for full scale
pressure of 4 bar.
Caution: The SP400 smart positioner must have a high quality air supply. A Spirax Sarco MPC2 filter regulator with coalescing filter
TI-P343-36 CH Issue 3 SP400 Electropneumatic Smart Positioner

44 Control systems Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.

TI-P343-34
CTLS Issue 5
SP500
Electropneumatic Smart Positioner
Description
The SP500 smart valve positioner is a loop powered device
that is able to drive linear and quarter turn pneumatic valves.
A 4-20 mA input signal determines the valve set point.
Precise control is maintained through valve position feedback SP500
that automatically varies the pneumatic output pressure to overcome with front cover
the effects of stem friction and flow forces to maintain desired valve closed
position. Indication of valve position is provided through a continuous
digital display of % travel. Valve position feedback is retrieved by
means of a non contact technology based on Hall effect. The
pneumatics are based on piezovalve technology - Therefore, high For the programmable
resolution, high reliability, vibration insensitivity and extremely low functions see page 2
air consumption is guaranteed at steady state.
The SP500 includes many smart functions that can be fully
4.4 programmed through menu driven software using an integral keypad
and LCD alphanumeric data. Valve commissioning is simplified
38 through an autostroke routine and LCD data of programming status,
software travel switch status, mA input signal and valve diagnostics SP500
data. Moreover, the absence of mechanical linkages between the with front cover
valve stem and the positioner, drastically simplifies and reduces the removed
time required for the mounting procedure. The SP500 is supplied
with a NAMUR standard mounting kit for attachment to yoke or pillar
mounted actuators. For quarter turn valves, a mounting kit compliant
to VDI/VDE 3845 is supplied.
The SP500 smart valve positioner supports optional expansion to
include the HART® communication protocol, enabling complete
configuration using a PC or handheld device Technical data
Input signal range 4 - 20 mA nominal
Air supply Minimum input signal 3.4 mA
The SP500 smart positioner must be provided with a high
quality air supply. A Spirax Sarco MPC2 filter regulator with 1.4 - 7.0 bar
Air supply pressure
coalescing filter or equivalent must be used. A fixing kit is (5-10 psi above spring range pressure)
available to mount the MPC2 filter regulator onto the actuator. HART® communication protocol
For further product data regarding the MPC2 see Technical Communication protocol
superimposed over dc current signal
Information sheet TI-P054-04.
Air supply must be dry, oil and dust free
Air quality
to ISO 8573-1 class 2:3:1
Applications
The SP500 can be used with the following pneumatic actuators: Output pressure 0 to 100% supply pressure
PN1000 and PN2000 series Linear valves 10 mm to 100 mm
Stroke range
PNS3000 and PNS4000 series Quarter turn valves 5° to 120°
PN9000 series Action Single action/fail vent
Operating temperature -10 °C to +80 °C
Optional extras 4.2 normal m 3/ h at 1.4 bar g
Maximum air flow
Complete manifold block with two 8.5 normal m 3/ h at 6.0 bar g
Gauge block two pressure gauges (supply pressure
Steady state air consumption Less than 0.016 normal m 3/h
and pressure to the actuator
Air connections Screwed ¼" NPT
Retransmission 4 - 20 mA valve position retransmission
and switch board and 2 adjustable software switches Cable gland M20
Allows 4 wire configuration: Electrical connections Spring clamp terminals for
Power supply 2 for 4 - 20 mA input signal and 0.2 to 1.5 mm² wire
board 2 for independent 24 V power supply Enclosure rating IP65
reducing positioner impedance to 50 Ω Linear, Equal % (ratio 1:50) or
Characteristics Fast opening (ratio 50:1)
Enables communication using the
HART ® board
HART ® protocol Resolution (maximum) 0.1% F.S. (Full Scale)
Tolerance ±0.5% F.S. (Full Scale)
Materials 4 - 20 mA retransmission
4 - 20 mA retransmit (optional)
Part Material Finish of valve position
Anti-corrosive paint to Software travel Two software configured 1 x normally closed
RAL5010 switches (optional) travel switches 1 x normally open
Magnet bracket Die cast aluminium Shipping weight 2.2 kg
Control systems
Programmable functions Dimensions (approximate) in mm
Autostroke Automatic commissioning routine A B C D E F G
Valve type 2-port or 3-port 145 113 105 40 109 30 172
Selectable 0 - 100% or 100% - 0%
% travel
depending on valve/actuator configuration F
Control action Direct or reverse action (4 - 20 or 20 - 4 mA)
Travel limits Setting of minimum and maximum travel limits
4 - 20 mA or split ranged
Signal span
(minimum span 4 mA)
Positional accuracy
Deadband B E
(minimum 0.2% to max. 10% of valve travel)
Tight shut-off Fully vent or inflate at preset input signals
Linear, = % or fast opening
Characteristic
input signal to valve travel relationship
Travel time Slows down valve opening or closing
Software configured travel switch setting A D
Travel switches
(range 0 - 100%)
Reset Resets all programmed values Centre bolt for 'U' bolts for pillar
Calibrate Centering yoke mounted mounted actuators
actuators
Input signal Visualisation of input mA signal
Auto operation/vent Option of automatic operation or

vent (actuator) whilst reprogramming
Diagnostic record of total number of valve
Data logging
strokes and completed hours run time
Available spares G
4.4
Pressure gauge
Pressure gauge only
Available ranges:
39
0 to 2 bar, 0 to 4 bar or 0 to 7 bar C
Filter plug kit Plug plus 3 off filters and 'O' rings
Retransmission 4 - 20 mA valve position retransmission
and switch board and 2 adjustable software switches
Allows 4 wire configuration:
Power supply 2 for 4 - 20 mA input signal and
board 2 for independent 24 V power supply Safety information, installation and maintenance
reducing positioner impedance to 50 Ω Full details are contained in the SP500 electropneumatic smart
enables communication using the HART® positioner Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-P343-35)
HART board
®
protocol supplied with the product.

SP500 = SP500
Positioner series SP501 = SP500 with HART® communication protocol SP500
Movement/action 0 = Linear, single action 0

1 = Rotary, single action
Retransmission + 0 = Not mounted R
software switches (optional) R = Mounted
0 = Not mounted
24 V power supply (optional) 0
P = Mounted
Remote sensor 0 = No 0
Extended stroke 0 = No 0
0 = Not mounted
Gauge block G2 = Full scale 2 bar G4
Selection example: SP500 0 R 0 0 0 0 0 G4
How to order
Please include all the required optional extras as described on the first page.
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco SP500 0R00000G4 electropneumatic smart positioner equipped with retransmission and software
switches board plus gauge block for full scale pressure of 4 bar.
Caution:TRANSLATION
The SP500 smartRUN OVER must have a high quality air supply. A Spirax Sarco MPC2 filter regulator with coalescing filter
positioner
TI-P343-34
CTLS Issue 5
SP500 Electropneumatic Smart Positioner
44 Control systems
4.4
40
Control systems

TI-P703-01
CTLS Issue 2
EP6
Electro-pneumatic Positioner
4.4
41
Description
The EP6 Electro-pneumatic positioner can control any valve that is actuated by a linear or rotary pneumatic actuator that conforms
with NAMUR. It guarantees an exact proportionality between the stroke of the valve and the value of the electrical input signal (mA)
into the positioner.
The EP6 has a cast aluminium housing that is also treated for outdoor installation. The unit can be mounted onto pneumatic actuators
either rotary 55-90° or linear 20 to 150 mm.
The positioner can be supplied without a mounting kit or with a kit for rotary or linear actuators, the type must be specified when ordering.
As standard the EP6 is equipped with a pressure gauge to indicate the air pressure command sent to the pneumatic actuator.
The EP6 positioner can also be used to reverse the action of the control signal.
Air supply
The EP6 positioner must be provided with a high quality air supply to ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:2
that conforms to NAMUR, this includes Part Material Finish
all of the following Spira x Sarc o
pneumatic actuators: Case and cover Die cast aluminium Anti-corrosive paint to RAL9016
BVA300 rotary Mounting bracket Steel EP protected
PN1600 series Feedback pin Stainless steel
PNS3000 and PNS4000 series Feedback lever Stainless steel
PN9000 series Feedback pin locator Stainless steel
TN2000 series Screws Stainless steel
CTLS Issue 2
EP6 Electro-pneumatic Positioner
44 Control systems
Technical data
Input signal range 4-20 mA (split range minimum amplitude 8 mA)
Impedance Max 250 +/- 15 Ω
Air supply 1.4 to 7.0 bar (regulate 5 to 10 psi above actuator spring range)
Standard temperature -20 °C to +70 °C

Operating temperature
High temperature -20 °C to +120 °C
Air flow 80 LPM @ 1.4 bar
Steady state air consumption 2.4 LPM @ 1.4 bar
Single : +/- 0.2% F.S. (Full Scale)

Sensitivity
Double : +/- 0.5% F.S
Hysteresis +/- 1% F.S.
4.4 Linearity
Single +/- 1% F.S.
42 Double +/- 2% F.S.
Repeatability +/- 0.5% F.S
Electrical connections Cable gland M20 internal, terminals for conductors from 0.5 to 2.5 mm 2 wire
Linear 2.8 kg (positioner only)
Shipping weight Mounting Kits for Linear EY3 and EY4 - 1.3 kg, UY1,2,3 - 0.9 kg, UBC - 0.2 kg
Rotary 4.1 kg (Positioner and mounting kit)
Positioner options
Basic model Aluminium enclosure EP6
Single acting S
Acting type Single Acting + Reduced Orifice Ø 1 A
Double acting D
Linear - See page 4 for Mounting Kit selection L

Mounting type
Rotary - Mounting Kit included R
Hazardous area protection Safe area S
Electrical and Air connection M20 -¼" NPT 1
Standard model A
Standard Model + Supply Pressure Gauge B

Non standard features
High Temp Model (-20 °C to +120 °C) H
High Temp Model (-20 °C to +120 °C) + Supply Pressure Gauge K
Ordering Code Example: EP6 S L S 1 - A
CTLS Issue 2
EP6 LINEAR CENTRAL MOUNT
Control systems
EP6 LINEAR LEFT HAND MOUNT

EP6 LINEAR LEFT HAND MOUNT EP6 LINEAR CENTRAL MOUNT
169 180
167
UY1= 331 or UY2=413 or UY3=257 EY4=265
Linear left mounted Linear centrally mounted
154
4.4
43
207
168
129
230 126
167 174
Rotary mounted
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Mounting Position Actuator Model Valve Models Valve Sizes Spirax kit Nomenclature
PN9100 DN15 to DN50
PN9200 Spira-trol TM EY3

DN15 to DN100
PN9300 two port and QL three port
PN9400 DN125 to DN300 EY4
TN2150 DN15 to DN100 EY3
TN2300 Spira-trol TM
TN2400 two port and QL three port DN125 to DN300 EY4
Central
TN2270
PN3000 Sprg Ext

LE, LEA and Steri-trol DN15 to DN100 EY3
PN4000 Sprg Ret
PN5000
KE, KEA, LE and LEA DN15 to DN100 EY3 + UBC
PN6000
PN5000 Spira-trol TM
DN125 to DN200 EY4 + UBC
PN6000 QL three port
4.4
PN9100 DN15 to DN50
44 PN9200 Spira-trol TM UY3
DN15 to DN100
PN9400 DN125 to DN300 UY1
TN2150 DN15 to DN100 Not Compatible
TN2400 two port and QL three port DN125 to DN300 UY1
TN2270
Left side PN3000 Sprg Ext

LE, LEA and Steri-trol DN15 to DN100 UY3
PN4000 Sprg Ret
PN5000
KE, KEA, LE and LEA DN15 to DN100 UY3 + UBC
PN6000
DN125 to DN200 UY1 + UBC
PN1600 'C' series DN65 to DN100 UY1
PN1600 'C' series DN125 to DN200

UY2
PN1600 Spira-trol TM DN125 to DN300

1 off Electro-pneumatic positioner for use with single acting PN9300 actuator, having 30 mm stroke.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco EP6SLS1-A Electro-pneumatic Positioner + EY3 mounting kit.
Caution: The EP6 positioner must have a high quality air supply to ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:2.
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems

TI-P703-03
CTLS Issue 3
EP6
ATEX Electro-pneumatic Positioner
Description
The EP6 Electro-pneumatic positioner can control any valve that
is actuated by a linear pneumatic actuator that conforms with
NAMUR. It guarantees an exact proportionality between the
stroke of the valve and the value of the electrical input signal
(mA) into the positioner.
The EP6 has a cast aluminium housing that is also treated for
outdoor installation. The unit can be mounted onto pneumatic
actuators either rotary 55-90° or linear 20 to 150 mm.
The positioner can be supplied without a mounting kit or with a
kit for rotary or linear actuators, the type must be specified when
ordering.
4.4
As standard the EP6 is equipped with a pressure gauge to
indicate air pressure command sent to the pneumatic actuator.
The positioner is supplied for a control signal in mA and for an
45
air supply pressure up to 7 bar.
The EP6 positioner can also be used to reverse the action of the
control signal.
ATEX rating
Flameproof. II 2G Ex db mb IIB T5 Gb
Not intrinsically safe.
Air supply
The EP6 positioner must be provided with a high quality air supply
to ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:3.
INMETRO (Brazil) Ex db mb IIB T5 Gb

Applications
The EP6 can be used with any actuator that conforms to NAMUR,
this includes all of the following Spirax Sarco pneumatic
actuators:
CCC Ex d mb IIB T5 Gb
BVA300 rotary
(China)
PN1600

UKEX rating
PN9000 series Flameproof. II 2G Ex db mb IIB T5 Gb
Not intrinsically safe.
TN2000 series
Materials
Part Material Finish
Case and cover Die cast aluminium Anti-corrosive paint to RAL9016
Mounting bracket Steel EP protected
Feedback pin Stainless steel
Feedback lever Stainless steel
Feedback pin locator Stainless steel
Screws Stainless steel
CTLS Issue 3
EP6 ATEX Electro-pneumatic Positioner
44 Control systems
Technical data
Input signal range 4-20 mA
Impedance Max 250 +/- 15 Ω
Air supply 1.4 to 7.0 bar (regulate 0.4 to 0.7 bar above actuator spring range)
Actuator stroke 20 mm to 150 mm or 55° to 90°
Steady state air consumption 2.5 LPM @ 1.4 bar
Single +/- 0.2% F.S. (Full Scale)

Sensitivity
Double +/- 0.5%
Hysteresis +/- 1% F.S.
Single +/- 1%F.S.

Linearity
4.4 Double +/- 2% F.S.
46 Repeatability +/- 0.5% F.S
Electrical connections Cable gland M20 internal, terminals for conductors from 0.5 to 2.5 mm 2 wire
Shipping weight Mounting Kits for Linear EY3 and EY4 - 1.3 kg, UY1,2,3 - 0.9 kg, UBC - 0.2 kg
Positioner options
Basic model Aluminium enclosure EP6
Single acting S
Acting type Double acting D
Single Acting + Reduced Orifice Ø 1 A

Mounting type
Flameproof Ex d (UKEX, ATEX, IECEx, KCs) A
Hazardous area protection Flameproof Ex d (CCC, NEPSI, UKEX, ATEX, IECEx ) C
Flameproof Ex d (INMETRO) M
Electrical and Air connection M20 -¼” NPT 1
Standard model A
Non standard features
Standard Model + Supply Pressure Gauge B
Ordering Code Example: EP6 S L A 1 - A
CTLS Issue 3
Control systems
EP6 LINEAR ATEX LEFT HAND MOUNT Positioners and controllers
EP6 LINEAR ATEX CENTRAL MOUNT
4
Full details are contained in the EP6 Electro-pneumatic positioner Installation and Maintenance Instructions.
Dimensions (approximate) inHAND

EP6 LINEAR ATEX LEFT mm MOUNT EP6 LINEAR ATEX CENTRAL MOUNT
EP6 LINEAR ATEX LEFT HAND MOUNT EP6 LINEAR ATEX CENTRAL MOUNT
224 236
167
UY1=386 or UY2=468 or UY3=312 EY1=142 or EY2 =265
Linear left mounted Linear centrally mounted 4.4

209 47
168 207
129
285 126
167 174
Rotary mounted
CTLS Issue 3
44 Control systems
Mounting/linkage kit : Positioners mounting kits will be supplied for central mounting as standard.
PN9100 DN15 to DN50
PN9200 Spira-trol TM EY3

DN15 to DN100
PN9400 DN125 to DN300 EY4
TN2150 DN15 to DN100 EY3
TN2400 two port and QL three port DN125 to DN300 EY4
Central
TN2270
PN3000 Sprg Ext

LE, LEA and Steri-trol DN15 to DN100 EY3
PN4000 Sprg Ret
PN5000
KE, KEA, LE and LEA DN15 to DN100 EY3 + UBC
PN6000
PN5000
QL three port DN125-DN200 EY4 + UBC
PN6000
4.4
PN9100 DN15 to DN50
DN15 to DN100
TN2150 DN15 to DN100 Not compatible
TN2400 two port and QL three port DN125 to DN300 UY1
TN2270

PN4000 Sprg Ret
PN5000
PN6000
PN5000
QL three port DN125-DN200 EY4 + UBC
PN6000

UY2

1 off Electro-pneumatic positioner for use with single acting PN9300 actuator, having 30 mm stroke and ATEX approved.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco EP6SLA1-A Electro-pneumatic Positioner + EY3 mounting kit.
Caution: The EP6 positioner must have a high quality air supply to ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:2.
CTLS Issue 3
Control systems

TI-P704-01
CTLS Issue 2
PP6
Pneumatic Positioner
4.4
49
Description
The PP6 positioner can control any valve that is actuated by a linear or rotary pneumatic actuator that conforms with NAMUR. It
guarantees an exact proportionality between the stroke of the valve and the value of the pneumatic input signal into the positioner.
The PP6 has a cast aluminium housing that is also treated for outdoor installation. The unit can be mounted onto pneumatic actuators
either rotary 55-90° or linear 20 to 150 mm.
The positioner can be supplied without a mounting kit or with a kit for rotary or linear actuators, the type must be specified when ordering.
As standard the PP6 is equipped with two pressure gauges to indicate air pressure command sent to the pneumatic actuator and the
air pressure supplied to the positioner.
The PP6 is supplied for a pneumatic control signal 0.2 to 1.0 bar and for an air supply pressure up to 7 bar.
The positioners can be arranged for sequential operation of two or more pneumatic valves in such a way that the stroke of each valve
is obtained by a split-range control signal.
For example: 0.2 to 0.6 bar and 0.6 to 1.0 bar in the case of two valves.
The PP6 can also be used to reverse the action of the control signal.
ATEX II 2G Ex h IIC T6 Gb
Air supply rating EX h IIIC T85°C Db
The PP6 positioner must be provided with a high quality air
supply to ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:2.
The PP6 can be used with any actuator
that conforms to NAMUR, this includes Part Material Finish
all of the following Spirax Sarco
pneumatic actuators: Case and cover Die cast aluminium Anti-corrosive paint to RAL9016
BVA300 rotary Mounting bracket Steel EP protected
PN1600 Feedback pin Stainless steel
PNS3000 and PNS4000 series Feedback lever Stainless steel
PN9000 series Feedback pin locator Stainless steel
TN2000 series Screws Stainless steel
CTLS Issue 2
PP6 Pneumatic Positioner
44 Control systems
Technical data
Input signal range 0.2 - 1.0 bar (3 - 15 psi)
Air supply 1.4 to 7.0 bar (regulate 0.4 to 0.7 bar (5 to 10 psi) above actuator spring range)
Air quality ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:2.
Actuator stroke 20 mm to 150 mm or 55° to 90°
Steady state air consumption 2.5 LPM @ 1.4 bar supply
Single acting is +/- 0.2%

Sensitivity
Double Acting and Rotary are +/- 0.5%
Hysterisis +/-1% F.S.
Single acting is +/- 1%

Linearity
Double Acting and Rotary are +/- 2%
4.4 Repeatability +/- 0.5% F.S

50 Characteristic Linear
Shipping weight Mounting Kits for Linear PY3 and PY4 - 1.3 kg, UY1,2,3 - 0.9 kg, UBC - 0.2 kg
Positioner options
Aluminium enclosure
Basic model PP6
Safe Area or Explosion proof protection method
Single acting S
Acting type
Double acting D

Mounting type
Air connection ¼” NPT 1
Non standard features Standard model A
Ordering code example: PP6 S L 1 - A

Full details are contained in the PP6 pneumatic positioner Installation and Maintenance Instructions.
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
187 197
167
273 PY3 =143 or PY4 = 265
Linear left mounted Linear centrally mounted
4.4
172
51
184
127
107
89
242 90
136
167
Rotary mounted
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
PN9100 DN15 to DN50
PN9200 Spira-trol TM PY3

DN15 to DN100
PN9400 DN125 to DN300 PY4
TN2150 DN15 to DN100 PY3
TN2300 Spira-trol TM PY4
TN2400 two port and QL three port DN125 to DN300 Not compatible
Central
TN2270 PY4
PN3000 Sprg Ext

LE, LEA and Steri-trol DN15 to DN100 PY3
PN4000 Sprg Ret
PN5000
KE, KEA, LE and LEA DN15 to DN100 PY3 + UBC
PN6000
DN125 to DN200 PY4 + UBC
4.4
PN9100 DN15 to DN50
DN15 to DN100
TN2150 DN15 to DN100 Not compatible
TN2300 Spira-trol TM UY1
TN2400 two port and QL three port DN125 to DN300 Not compatible
TN2270 UY1

PN4000 Sprg Ret
PN5000
PN6000
DN125 to DN200 UY1 + UBC

UY2

1 off Pneumatic positioner for use with single acting PN9300 actuator, having 30 mm stroke.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco PP6SL1-A Pneumatic-Pneumatic Positioner + PY3 mounting kit.
Caution: The PP6 positioner must have a high quality air supply to ISO 8573-1:2010 Class 3:3:2
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems

TI-P705-01
CTLS Issue 3
IPC6 and IPC6 ATEX

Convertor
4.4
53
Description
The IPC6 convertor is a two wire, Wall, DIN rail or 2" pipe mount (option), pneumatic convertor requiring a 4 - 20 mA (0-10 Vdc only on
Safe version) input signal to provide a pneumatic air output signal.
Features
- Field Reversible to provide output which is directly or inversely proportional to the input signal.
- 3 output pressure ranges to meet final control element requirements
Materials
Part Material
Body and housing Aluminium
Trim Zinc plated steel
Diaphragm Nitrile
Orifice Nickle plated brass
Wall bracket Steel zinc plated
Din rail bracket Plastic
CTLS Issue 3
IPC6 and IPC6 ATEX Convertor
44 Control systems
Technical data
Input signal range (See Table 1 below)
Output signal range Dependant on version selected
Minimum 1.5 bar g (20 psi g)

Supply air pressure
Maximum 8.0 bar g (120 psi g)
Flow rate 18.7 m 3 /h
Air consumption 0.17 Nm 3 /h (average)
Pneumatic connections ¼" NPT
Electrical connections EN 175301-803
Working temperature -40 °C to +70 °C
Input impedance (See Table 1 below)
Maximum current 93 mA
Linearity +0.5% FS
Hysteresis 0.25% FS
The IPC6-ATEX convertor is certified as intrinsically safe to:

4.4 - ATEX/IECEx II 1 G D Ex ia IIC T4 Ga/Ex ia IIIC T135 °C Da (Ta = -40 °C to +70 °C).
54 - CCC/NEPSI Ex ia IIC T4 Ga/Ex iaD 20 T135 ° (Ta = -40 °C to +70 °C)
- UKEX II 1 G D Ex ia IIC T4 Ga/Ex ia IIIC T135 °C Da (Ta = -40 °C to +70 °C).
Table 1
psi g 3 - 15 3 - 27 6 - 30
Output range bar 0.2 - 1.0 0.2 - 1.8 0.4 - 2.0
kPa 20 - 100 20 - 180 40 - 200
psi g 20 - 120 32 - 120 35 - 120
Supply pressure bar 1.5 - 8.0 2.2 - 8.0 2.4 - 8.0
kPa 150 - 800 220 - 800 240 - 800
psi g 5 10 10
Minimum span bar 0.35 0.7 0.7
kPa 35 70 70
4-20 mA 197 204 204

Impedance (OHMS)
0-10 Vdc 1100 1064 1064
Note: 0-10 Vdc not available for hazardous area use.
CTLS Issue 3
Control systems
Dimensions
The IPC6 is supplied with a wall mounting kit and a DIN Rail Mounting Kit.
Mounting Kit PMK is available when installing the unit on a 2" pipe
1 1/2 1 1/2 7 7
38 38
38.1 38.1 7
Mounting kit 1 1/2
38
38.1 19 19
(Included with unit) 3/4 3/4 19
19
19.1
19
19.1
3/4
19
19.1 Use twoUse M6two M6
Screws
Use twoScrews
for for
M6
Use two M6
Mounting
Screws Mounting
for
Screws for
57 57 (not
123 included
114Mounting
114 123 (not included
Mounting
in mounting(notkit) kit)
in mounting
57 114 123 (not included
included in
in mounting kit)
mounting kit) 62 62
62
7 7
Mounting Kit 7
Includes the following:
Two 10-32 x 5/16" Screws Fig. 3Fig.
Mounting
3 Mounting
Kit (Included
Kit (Included
with Unit)
with Unit)
Mounting Bracket Two ¼" NPT
Fig.Pipe Plugs Kit (Included with Unit)
3 Mounting
Two 5 mm thick washers
4.4
DIN Rail mounting kit
(Included with unit)
DIN DIN
DIN
DIN DIN
DIN
DIN DIN
DIN
EN-50022
EN-50022
55
EN-50035
DIN EN-50045
EN-50035
DIN EN-50045
DIN
EN-50035 EN-50045 EN-50022
EN-50022
EN-50035 EN-50045
34.5 34.5 35 35 32 32
34.5 35 32
Din Rail Mounting

53/64
20.9 53/64
20.9 19/32
14.9 19/32
14.9 Configuration
21 21 15 15 16 16
20.9 20.9 19/32
53/64
20.9 14.9 14.9
14.9 15.6 15.6 shown with Model IPC6
21 15 16
20.9 14.9 15.6 and DIN EN-50045
Fig. 4Fig.
DIN 4Rail
DINMounting
Rail Mounting
Kit (Included
Kit (Included
with Unit)
with Unit)
Mounting kit Fig. 4 DIN Rail Mounting Kit (Included with Unit)
(Sold separately) 89 2" Pipe Mounting Configuration
21/ shown with Model IPC6
68
.
1
25
25 9
11/32
8.6
Mounting Kit PMK
includes the following:
Mounting Bracket 2" Pipe Clamp
Two 10-32 x 5/16" Screws
Weight
IPC6 including all mountings apart from PMK - 0.79 kg
Mounting Kit PMK- 0.2 kg.
CTLS Issue 3
44 Control systems
Full details are contained in the appropriate Installation and Maintenance Instructions.
Electro-pneumatic convertor options

Aluminium enclosure
EN 17 5301-803 electrical connection, IP65
Basic model IPC6
Wall & DIN rail mounts included
Instrinsically safe (UKEX, ATEX, IECEx) A
Hazardous area protection Intrinsically safe (CCC, NEPSI, UKEX, ATEX, IECEx) C
Safe area only S
0-10 Vdc (Safe area only) 0

Electrical input
4-20 mA 1
0.2 - 1.0 bar g (3 - 15 psi g) 0
Air output range 0.2 - 1.8 bar g (3 - 27 psi g) 1
0.4 - 2.0 bar g (6 - 30 psi g) 2
Non standard features Standard model A
4.4 Ordering code example: IPC6 A 1 0 - A
56
Electro-pneumatic convertor mount option
2" Pipe mounting kit PMK

1 off Electro-pneumatic convertor, ATEX intrinsically safe protection, having 0.2 - 1.0 bar g output range.
How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco IPC6A10-A Electro-pneumatic convertor.
CTLS Issue 3
Control systems
Positioners
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. and controllers 4
TI-P323-28
CH Issue 2
SX80
Process Controller
Description
The SX80 controller is a 1/16 DIN panel mounted unit, suitable for single and multiple set point applications utilising the Spirax Sarco
range of pneumatic or electric control valves and electrical and electropneumatic instruments. The SX80 has both VMD (3 point)
and analogue (4 - 20 mA) outputs in the same unit and features quick start codes for ease of commissioning.
4.4
57
SX80 features:
- Universal input - Resistance thermometers, thermocouples, mA and mV.
- Universal output - VMD (valve motor drive), mA and voltage for continuous, relay and logic for switching control.
- Auxiliary power supply - For external transmitter requiring 18 Vdc.
- Text messages - Scrolling text messages can be configured to alert the user to process conditions.
- Quick codes - 5-digit quick codes enable easy set-up and commissioning of the controllers.
Approvals
These controllers conform to the Council Directive 93 / 68 / EEC and the regulations on the essential protection requirements in
Electrical Apparatus EN 61010-1: 90
- EMC emissions specification: EN 61326-1: 1997 Class B (including amendments A1, A2 and A3).
- EMC immunity specification: EN 61326-1: 1997 Industrial locations (including amendments A1, A2 and A3).
See overleaf for SX80 Process Controller technical data
48 mm 101 mm
Panel cut-out
48 mm 45 mm -0.0
+0.6
90 mm 45 mm -0.0
+0.6
How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco SX80 process controller.
Page 1 of 3
44 Control systems
Technical data
General details
Mounting arrangement Panel mounted 1/16 DIN
Power supply 85 to 265 Vac, 6 W maximum
Electrical connections Screw connection terminal block
Panel sealing IP65 – plug in from front panel, NEMA 4X
Operating temperature / humidity 0 to 55°C, 5 to 85% RH
Atmospheres Not suitable for use in explosive or corrosive atmospheres
Electromagnetic compatibity (EMC) EN 61326
Electrical safety BS EN 61010 Installation Category II
Weight 250 g
Approvals CE
Process variable inputs

Calibration accuracy < ±0.25% reading ±1 LSD
Resolution < 0.5 μV with 1.6 second filter
Input filter Off to 59.9 seconds
RTD 3 wire Pt100 DIN 43760
Bulb current 0.2 mA
Universal linear mA 4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, using external shunt resistor 2.49 W
Linear input range -10 to 80 mV
4.4 Thermocouples
Sampling rate
K, J, N, R, S, B, L, T, C, custom
4 Hz (250 ms)
58 Cold junction accuracy < ±1°C at 25°C ambient
Accuracy linear mA < 0.1% reading
Input impedance 100 MW
Number of set points 3
User calibration 2 point gain and offset
Transmitter power supply

Isolation 300 Vac double isolated
Output voltage 18 V ±15%
Current 30 mA maximum
Load regulation < 1 V over 25 mA
Control action
Proportional band 1 - 9999 Engineering units or 0.01 to 300 %age or 0.1 - 3000
Integral time Off - 9999
Derivative time Off - 9999
One shot tune, or natural frequency tune. The controller will automatically select the best
Error band
method according to the process conditions.
Auto tuning Hysteresis from 0.01 to 300.0 or 0.1 to 3000 Engineering units
On-off control 1 - 9999 Engineering units or 0.01 to 300 %age or 0.1 - 3000
Cut back To minimise overshoot on critical processes.
Auto / manual modes Selectable from keyboard.
Relays
Isolation 300 Vac double insulated
Output range 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA
Resolution 13.5 bits
Contact rating Maximum 2 A @ 264 Vac resistive
Note: Maximum 2 A per terminal limit applies where relays have common terminals (2 amps maximum for terminal AB).
Logic inputs (x2)

Open >1200R
Contact closure
Closed <300R
Isolated dc output
Output range 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA
Resolution 13.5 bits
TI-P323-28 CH Issue 2 SX80 Process Controller Page 2 of 3

Control systems
Wiring diagrams
Warning: Safe operation of this product can only be guaranteed if it is properly installed, commissioned, used and maintained by
qualified personnel as stated in the IMI supplied with the unit. It is the duty of the Company Safety Officer to ensure that the product
specific data and Safety information within the supplied IMI has been fully understood and complied with.
Terminal diagram
Digital inputs A and B
IO1 1A LA AA
Relay output A
Output 3
1B LB AB Normally open relays
B Output 4
+ 2A LC AC
Output 2
Analogue
- 2B VI
Sensor input
+ R = 2.49W
Line supply
L HE V+
+
+ 4.4
100 to 230 Vac ±15% V
48 to 62 Hz
N HF V-
R 59
- -
Pt100 mA Thermocouple
Transmitter power supply RTD mV mV Tc

18 V ±15%
Wiring diagram for connecting a 4 - 20 mA transmitter
1A LA AA
1B LB AB
2A LC AC
2B Transducer VI
supply
L V+
HE +24v
V = 10-50 mV 2 R49
N 0v V-
HF
i < 30 mA i = 4-20 mA
1 (+) (-) 2
4 Screen
4-20 mA sensor

44 Control systems
4.4
60
Control systems
Positioners
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. and controllers 4
TI-P323-30
CH Issue 3
SX90
Process Controller
Description
The SX90 is a panel mounted 1/8th DIN controller, suitable for constant set point control of systems having fixed pre-programmed
set points. The controller has universal inputs, and outputs using PID for close control of industrial processes. The SX90 controller is
for use with the Spirax Sarco range of pneumatic and electric control valves and electrical and electropneumatic instruments.
SX90 features:
- Universal input - Resistance thermometers, thermocouples, mA and mV.
- Universal output - VMD (valve motor drive), mA and voltage for continuous (split
range function), relay and logic for switching control.
- Auxiliary power supply - For external transmitter requiring 24 Vdc.
- Set point - The SX90 can operate with local set point, remote set point, or a choice
of 4 set points can be selected.
- Ramps - There are 2 independent ramps (ramp up and ramp down) for rate of change
from one set point to another.
4.4
- Remote set point - For cascade control (master / slave) using 2 controllers working
together, or to remotely control the set point. 61
- Retransmission - For retransmission of the process value, set value, or as second
analogue output.
- Event alarm - 4 programmable relay outputs for deviation, band, and process alarms.
- Quick codes - 5-digit quick codes enable easy set-up and commissioning of the
controllers
- Serial communications - For connecting via a serial port RS 485 (5 wire), up to
64 controllers into a supervisory system.
- Auto / man - The automatic to manual mode can be changed via the key board, or
logic inputs.
- Logic inputs - 3 logic inputs to provide a variety of selectable functions.
- Potentiometer Input - For feedback of valve position.
- Text messages - Scrolling text messages can be configured to alert the user to
process conditions.
- Forced output - Forced output level defined by instrument parameter and activated
by a logic input or by writing to the parameter.
- Split range function - Can work with 2 valves (split range). Please note that
this function is only available if the SX90 is running the 1.05 software or newer
(the software version on your unit will be displayed during start-up).
Approvals
These controllers conform to the Council Directive 93 / 68 / EEC and the regulations on the essential protection requirements in
Electrical Apparatus EN 61010-1.90.
- EMC emissions specification: EN 61326-1: 1997 Class B (including amendments A1, A2 and A3).
- EMC immunity specification: EN 61326-1: 1997 Industriallocations (including amendments A1, A2 and A3).
See pages 2 and 3 for the SX90 process controller technical data
Dimensions 48 mm 101 mm
(approximate) in mm Panel cut-out
96 mm 92 mm -0.0
+0.8
90 mm 45 mm
-0.0
How to order example: 1 off Spirax Sarco SX90 process controller. +0.6
Page 1 of 5
44 Control systems
Technical data
General details
Mounting arrangement Panel mounted 1/8 DIN
Power supply 85 - 265 Vac, 9 W maximum
Electrical connections Screw connection terminal block
Panel sealing IP65 – plug in from front panel, NEMA 4X
Operating temperature / humidity 0 to 55°C, 5 to 85% RH
Atmospheres Not suitable for use in explosive or corrosive atmospheres
Electromagnetic compatibity (EMC) EN 61326
Electrical safety BS EN 61010 Installation Category II
Weight 350 g
Approvals CE
Process variable inputs

Resolution < 0.5 μV with 1.6 second filter
RTD 3 wire Pt100 DIN 43760
Bulb current 0.2 mA
Universal linear mA 4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, using external shunt resistor 2.49 W
Linear input range -10 to 80 mV
4.4 Thermocouples K, J, N, R, S, B, L, T, C, custom
Sampling rate 4 Hz (250 ms)
62 Cold junction accuracy < ±1°C at 25°C ambient
Accuracy linear mA < 0.1% reading
Input impedance 100 MW
Number of set points 3 plus remote set point
Transmitter power supply

Isolation 300 Vac double isolated
Output voltage 18 V ±15%
Current 30 mA maximum
Load regulation < 1 V over 25 mA
Control action
Proportional band 1 - 9999 Engineering units or 0.01 to 300 %age or 0.1 - 3000
Integral time Off - 9999
Derivative time Off - 9999
One shot tune, or natural frequency tune. The controller will automatically select the best
Error band
method according to the process conditions.
Auto tuning Hysteresis from 0.01 to 300.0 or 0.1 to 3000 Engineering units
On-Off control 1 - 9999 Engineering units or 0.01 to 300 %age or 0.1 - 3000
Cut back To minimise overshoot on critical processes.
Auto / manual modes Selectable from keyboard.
Split range 2 parameters that give: The full opened valve 1 and The start-up valve 2
Relays
Logic inputs (x3)

Contact closure Open > 1200R, Closed < 300R
Comms
Isolation 300 Vac double isolation
Hardware EIA 485 5 wire (EIA 422 compatible)
Protocol Modbus RTU slave

Control systems
Remote set point input

Isolation 300 Vac double isolation
Sampling rate 4 Hz (250 ms)
Resolution > 14 bits - 0.5 mV for 0 - 10 V input, 2 μA for 4 - 20 mA
Input impedance > 222 KΩ (Volts) 2.49 Ω (Current)
Linear input range 0 - 10 V, 0 - 20 mA
Zero offset User adjustable over full range
Pot input
Pot resistance range 100 - 10 kW
Excitation voltage 0.46 - 0.54 V
Resolution 0.006% of Span (> 14Bits)
Sample rate 1 Hz
Short circuit pot detection < 25 W
Open circuit pot detection > 2 MW
Open circuit wiper detection > 5 MW
Maximum 2 A @ 264 Vac resistive
Contact rating Note: Maximum 2 A per terminal limit applies where relays have common terminals. 4.4
(2 amps maximum for terminal AB)
63
Outputs
Output 1 SPST N / O contact
Output 2 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA, 300 Vac double insulated, 13.5 bits resolution (< 550 W)
Output 3 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA, 300 Vac double insulated, 13.5 bits resolution (< 550 W)
Output 4 Changeover relay contacts
Outputs 5 and 6 (VMD) 2 SPST interlocked N / O relays
Zero offset User adjustable over full range
Open circuit wiper detection > 5 MW

44 Control systems
Wiring diagrams
Warning: Safe operation of this product can only be guaranteed if it is properly installed, commissioned, used and maintained by
qualified personnel as stated in the IMI supplied with the unit. It is the duty of the Company Safety Officer to ensure that the product
specific data and Safety information within the supplied IMI has been fully understood and complied with.
Terminal diagram
Digital inputs C and D
1A 4A AA
IO1 C
Relay output
1B 4B AB Output 4
(Changeover relay)
D
2A 4C AC
Output 2
Analogue 4-20 mA
2B 5A RV
4.4 LB
Outputs
5B RI V
Remote setpoint input
0-10 V; 4-20 mA
5 and 6
64 Digital
input B
LC 5C RC
+ 3A PH
Output 3
Analogue 4-20 mA Potentiometer input
3B HB PW Valve position control
-
+ 3C HC PL
Transmitter supply
V
24 V ±10%
3D HD VI
- Sensor input
R = 2.49 W
+
L HE V+ +
Line supply
100 to 230 Vac R
48 to 62 Hz
N HF V- -
-
Pt100 mA Thermocouple
RTD mV mV Tc
Digital communications
EIA 422

Control systems
Wiring diagram for connecting the 4 - 20 mA transmitter
1A 4A AA
1B 4B AB
2A 4C AC
2B 5A RV
LB 5B RI
LC 5C RC
3A PH
4.4
3B HB PW
65
Transmitter supply
3C +24 V HC PL
3D HD VI
0V
L HE V+
V = 10 - 50 mV 2R49
N HF V-
i < 30 mA i = 4-20 mA
1 (+) (-) 2
4 Screen
4-20 mA sensor

44 Control systems
4.4
66
Control systems

TI-P320- 47
CTLS Issue 6
PN600 Series
Pneumatic Controllers
Description
The PN600 series pneumatic controllers provide temperature or pressure control providing a 0.2 bar to 1 bar output signal with
proportional (plus manual reset) or proportional plus integral control action. An optional stainless steel pocket type W30S is available
for use with tempertature sensors.
The range of pneumatic controllers can be used in conjunction with PN9000 series linear actuators and PP6 pneumatic positioners.
Available types
Temperature control
Model Control function Scale range
662-T5-M5* Proportional (+ Manual reset) 0 - 100 °C 15
0.5
10 20
4.4
5
0 30
662-T5-M5 Proportional (+ Manual reset) 50 - 150 °C 0
bar
662-T5-M5* Proportional (+ Manual reset) 25 - 125 °C

67
662-T5SY-M5 Proportional (+ Manual reset) 25 - 125 °C
663-T5-M5* Proportional + Integral 0 - 100 °C
663-T5-M5 Proportional + Integral 50 - 150 °C
663-T5-M5* Proportional + Integral 25 - 125 °C 25

45 65
85 105 125
663-T5SY-M5 Proportional + Integral 25 - 125 °C
T5 = Nitrogen filled sensing bulb and capillary
SY = Sensing bulb for sterile applications
M5 = 5 metres capillary tube (* Option of 10 metres - Suffix 'M10')
Pressure control
622 Proportional (+ Manual reset) 0 - 7 bar
622 Proportional (+ Manual reset) 0 - 20 bar Optional pocket type W30S
623 Proportional + Integral 0 - 7 bar
623 Proportional + Integral 0 - 20 bar
Other options available include:-

Pneumatic receiver for 0.2 to 1 bar (or 3 to 15 psi g) input signal.
Electromechanical receiver for 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc, RTD Pt100 or
thermocouple input signal.
Other scale ranges available:-

Pressure (bar) Scale span options up to 0 to 500 bar
Temperature (°C) Scale span options for:-

50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300 and 400 °C
TI-P320- 47 Page 1 of 3
CTLS Issue 6
PN600 Series Pneumatic Controllers
44 Control systems
Measuring elements Technical data
Pressure Controller
Bourdon tube AISI 316L stainless steel IP54 (Standard)
Enclosure rating
IP55 (Optional)
Connection ¼" BSP
Scale length 100 mm
Maximum pressure +25% of scale range
Measured value - black
Pointers
Set point - red
Temperature
Gauges Output signal pressure (bar/psi g)
AISI 316L stainless steel
Proportional (5-200% of scale range)
Bulb and - Cylindrical bulb for liquids Control mode
Integral (0.1 to 20 repeats per minute)
capillary - Sanitary bulb for sterile applications
Output signal 0.2 - 1 bar
(Option available with spiral bulb for air/gas)
Direct or reverse action -
Control action
Bulb connection ¾" BSP Field reversable
5 metres Set point adjustment Manual adjustment
Capillary length 10 metres (in some ranges) Accuracy 1% of range span
(Other options available) Sensitivity 0.2% of range span
Max. measured temperature +25% of scale range Repeatability 0.5% of range span
Linearity 0.5% of range span

4.4 Pocket - Type W30S (optional)
Air supply 1.4 bar
Material AISI 316L Stainless steel
68 Connection ½" BSP
Air consumption 0.2 Nm³/h (average)
Air connections ¼" NPT

Maximum pressure PN40
Ambient temperature
-15 °C to 65 °C
limits
Mounting Wall or flush panel mounted
Weight 3.5 kg
15
0.5
10 20
5
0 30
0
bar
25
45 65
85 105 125
Optional pocket type W30S
Page 2 of 3 TI-P320- 47
CTLS Issue 6
Control systems
Dimensions (mm)
Controller Temperature sensing bulb

A B C D E F G
202 144 136 17 200 120 13
E
¾" BSP No groove on
¾" BSP SY sterile bulb
G
F
Connector
A
D
B C
Panel mounting cut-out Pocket

4.4
H J K L
16 188 16 210 69
L
½" BSP
¾" BSP K
TI-P320- 47 Page 3 of 3
CTLS Issue 6
44 Control systems
4.4
70
Control systems

TI-P102-01
CTLS Issue 5
37D and 37DE

Pilot Operated
Temperature Control Valve with SG Iron Body
Description
The 37D is a pilot operated temperature control valve suitable for use on steam applications and comes complete with 2 m of capillary
tube as standard (other lengths are available on request - see 'Optional extras').
By virtue of it's pilot operation, it has a comparatively small control band.
The sensor of the control system will need to be mounted by either a union kit, pocket or wall mounting bracket - see 'Optional extras'.
Available types of valve

37D Temperature control
37DE Temperature control with electrically operated solenoid valve
Note: For 'Optional extras' see overleaf.

4.4
71
½"LC, ½", ¾" and 1" screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT.
DN15LC, DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50 flanged:
DN15 - DN20 BS 4504/DIN PN25
Standard flanges
DN25 - DN50 BS 10 Table H and ANSI 300
DN15 - DN50 JIS 10/16 and ANSI 150
Also available DN15 - DN20 BS 10 Table F
DN15 ANSI 300
Temperature ranges
Range A 16 °C to 49 °C
Range B 38 °C to 71 °C
Range C 49 °C to 82 °C
Range D 71 °C to 104 °C
Range E 93 °C to 127 °C
Limiting conditions
25 bar @ 120 °C
Technical data
Maximum body design conditions 20 bar @ 250 °C
Voltages 220/240 ± 10% Vac or 110/120 ± 10% Vac
14 bar @ 350 °C available (others available on request)
37D 17 bar @ 232 °C Frequency 50/60 Hz

Maximum upstream conditions
37DE 10 bar @ 190 °C Power Inrush 45 VA
consumption Holding 23 VA
Page 1 of 8
44 Control systems
Materials
No. Part Material
14 Internal strainer Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S 16
15 Body gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
16 Main valve return spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S 25
17 Main valve Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
18 Main valve seat Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
20 Main valve body SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
BS 4439 Gr. 8.8

21 Main body securing studs and nuts Steel (M10 x 25 mm)
BS 1492 Gr. 8
22 Main diaphragm chamber SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
BS 1492 Gr. 8.8

23 Main diaphragm securing bolts and nuts Steel (M12 x 50 mm)
BS 1492 Gr. 8
24 Main diaphragms Phosphor bronze BS 2870 PB 102
25 Main diaphragm plate Hot brass stamping BS EN 12165 CW617N
26 Push rod Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
27 Pipe assembly Brass and copper
4.4 28 Plug 1" BSP Steel
72 30 Lock-nut Steel BS 1492 Gr. 8
34 Packless gland housing Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
35 Pilot valve plunger Bakelite synmould S 67S
36 Pilot valve seat ring Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
37 Pilot valve closure member Stainless steel AISI 440 B
38 Pilot valve housing SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
BS 4439 Gr. 8.8

39 Pilot valve housing securing studs and nuts Steel (M10 x 25 mm)
BS 1492 Gr. 8
40 Locking ring Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
41 Control head Bakelite synmould S 67S
42 Control head securing screws Stainless steel (2 BA x ¾")
43 Capillary tube Copper PVC covered
44 Sensor Brass EN 12451 CW707R H130/170
Optional extras
Conversion kit: A standard kit comprising of a solenoid valve and the necessary pipe and fittings for converting an existing 37D to a
37DE temperature control valve.
Capillary tubes: Available in multiples of 2 m up to a max. of 14 m.
Union kit: Comprising of union nipple (U), compression ring (V) and a gland nut (W). The union nipple is screwed ¾" BSP.
Pockets: Are available in copper with brass union nipple or stainless steel. Union nipple U forms the top of the pocket and carries
compression ring V and gland nut W. The union nipple is screwed ¾" BSP.
Special long pockets are available having minimum length of 0.5 m and a maximum of 1 m. They are sealed at the top by a rubber bung.
Glass pockets are also available complete with bracket and sealed by a rubber bung.
Wall mounting bracket: Inclusive of cover.

For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-P304-01-EN-ISS1) supplied with the product.
37D and 37DE Pilot Operated Temperature Control Valve with SG Iron Body
Control systems
Union kit
43
W
Pocket W
40
41
35
42
34
4.4
39
37 73
38
15 36
16 14
17
42
42
40
26
27
23
30
Glass pocket
17 21 24 25 28
37D version shown
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN20 37D pilot operated temperature control valve having a temperature range A. The flange connections
are to be ANSI 300.
44 Control systems
Screwed BS 10 H PN25 ANSI BS 10 F ANSI JIS Weight
300 150 10/16
Size A A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 B D E F Screwed Flanged
DN15LC 160 - 130 126.6 117 120.2 122 185 408 278 130 12.0 12.8
DN15 160 - 130 126.6 117 120.2 122 185 408 278 130 12.0 12.8
DN20 160 - 150 - 133 139.4 142 185 408 278 130 12.0 13.7
DN25 180 160 160 160 - 160.0 152 207 432 284 148 13.0 16.0
DN32 - 180 180 180 - 176.0 176 207 432 284 148 - 17.0
DN40 - 200 200 200 - 199.0 196 255 476 298 178 - 29.0
DN50 - 230 230 230 - 228.0 222 255 476 298 178 - 31.5
A
A1
4.4
74
E
Union Metal Wall Glass

kit pocket mounting pocket
W
V
O
K M
L N P
K L M N O P V W
142 17.5 150 22.3 195 35 575 117
Control systems
Steam capacities in kg/h
10% Pressure drop line
Critical pressure drop line
* Note: The 37DE is limited to a maximum pressure of 10 bar.

Upstream pressure bar
Kv values
Size Kvs
DN15LC 1.0
4.4
DN15 2.8 75
DN20 5.5
DN25 8.1
DN32 12.0
DN40 17.0
DN50 28.0
The capacity varies for both the 37D and 37DE according to the pressure drop across them. The chart above enables the capacity to
be read off for different pressure drops. The maximum capacity occurs when the downstream pressure is at, or below 58% of the
absolute upstream pressure (Critical pressure drop). For many applications, valves can be satisfactorily sized on 10% pressure drop,
i.e. with a downstream which is 90% of the absolute upstream and a 10% pressure drop line is included in the chart to allow this to be
done easily.
How to use the chart

The way in which the chart is used is explained by examples:
Example 1. Firstly, to find the size of control valve required to pass 200 kg/h with an upstream pressure of 8 bar and a permissable
pressure drop of 2 bar (downstream pressure = 6 bar)
Find the point at which the curved 8 bar upsteam pressure line intersects a horizontal line drawn from a downstream pressure of 6 bar
and read vertically downwards. It will be seen that a DN15 valve will pass 200 kg/h and is the correct size to choose.
Example 2. A DN50 valve is operating on an upstream pressure of 10 bar and has to pass 3 500 kg/h. It is required to know the
downstream pressure and hence the pressure drop across the valve.
The flowrate 3 500 kg/h is read off the horizontal line at the bottom of the chart giving the capacity of the DN50 valve using the vertical
guide line read upwards from the 3 500 kg/h figure until you strike the curved 10 bar upstream pressure line and from this point read
horizontally to the left to meet the downstream pressure scale. This is at the 7 bar reading and the pressure drop across the DN50 valve
when passing 3 500 kg/h of steam is 3 bar giving a downstream pressure of 7 bar.
Example 3. Finally, if a 10% pressure drop is satisfactory and a valve is required to pass 1 000 kg/h with an upstream pressure of
14 bar find the point where the 14 bar curved upstream pressure line intersects the 10% pressure drop line. From this point read vertically
downwards and it will be seen that a DN32 valve is the correct size.
44 Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
Maintenance kit: A stand-by set of spares for general maintenance purposes and covers all spares marked *
Main diaphragm * (2 off) A
Pilot valve assembly B, C, D, E
Pilot valve packless gland set * H, J
Main valve assembly K, L
Internal strainer * M
Main valve return spring * N
Range A 16 °C − 49 °C
Range B 38 °C − 71 °C
Control head Range C 49 °C − 82 °C Z (3 off), Y
Range D 71 °C − 104 °C
Range E 93 °C − 127 °C
When ordering state range and length of capillary tube. Normally stocked in capillary lengths of 2 m.
Available in multiples of 2 m up to a maximum of 14 m (at extra cost).
'O' ring for sensor bulb adaptor (packet of 3) U

4.4 Control pipe assembly * P
76 Gasket set * (3 off) R
Set of pilot valve housing securing stud and nuts (set of 4) S
Set of main body studs and nuts (set of 4) T
DN15 to DN32 (set of 10)

Set of diaphragm securing bolts and nuts Valve sizes: V
Set of control head securing screws (set of 3) Y
Solenoid valve type 37DE only W
Coil X1
Valve seat and core assembly X2, X3, X4, X5
How to order
Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type (37D or 37DE)
of temperature control valve and whether screwed or flanged.
Example: 1 - Main valve assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN25 Type DP37D temperature control valve.
How to fit
See the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the product. Further copies are available on request.
For 'Interchangeability of spares' go to page 8.
Control systems
Pilot valve packless gland set

H
Y U
S
Pilot valve assembly
E
R
D 4.4
C
77
B
Solenoid valve complete

X1
P
T
N W
Main valve assembly
T
cover assembly
K
Valve seat and
L V
X4
X3
A X1
M X1
44 Control systems
Interchangeability of spares
The following table shows how in certain sizes some parts are interchangeable. For example in the line headed 'Main diaphragm' the
diaphragm used in the screwed valves ½" and ¾" is common to these sizes by the letter 'a', the letter 'c' indicates that one diaphragm
is common to the DN40 and DN50 valves. All spares marked † are interchangeable with the DP17 pressure reducing valve. Spares
marked 'o' are interchangeable with the DP17T and DP17TE pilot operated pressure/temperature control valves.
Screwed Flanged
Size DN
½"LC ½" ¾" 1" 15LC 15 20 25 32 40 50
Maintenance kit a a a b f f a b c d e
Main diaphragm †o a a a b a a a b b c c
Pilot valve assembly †o a a a a a a a a a a a
Pilot valve packless gland set †o a a a a a a a a a a a
Main valve assembly †o a b c d a b c d e f g
Internal strainer †o a a a b f f a b c d e
Main valve return spring †o a a a b a a a b b c c
Control head o a a a a a a a a a a a
'O' ring for sensor bulb adaptor o a a a a a a a a a a a
Control pipe assembly a a a b f f a b c d e
Gasket set † a a a a a a a a a b b
4.4 Set of pilot valve housing securing studs and nuts † a a a a a a a a a b b
78 Set of main body studs and nuts †o a a a a a a a a a b b
Set of diaphragm securing bolts and nuts †o a a a a a a a a a b b
Set of control head securing screws †o a a a a a a a a a a a
Control systems
Self-acting controls
TI-S21-07
CTLS Issue 4
2-Port Self-acting Temperature

Control Valve Selection
for Heating and Cooling Applications
How to select a system
Valve selection:
1. Is the application for heating or cooling?
A heating application will require a valve that is normally open and will close with rising temperature.
A cooling application will require a valve that is normally closed and will open with rising temperature.
2. Is the valve to be used on steam or water applications?

For steam applications use the sizing chart in Table 1.
For water heating applications use the chart in Table 2.
For water cooling applications use the chart in Table 3.
4.5
3. Determine the pressure upstream of the valve (P1) for normal running conditions.
1
4. Determine the pressure downstream of the valve (P2) for normal running conditions.
5. Determine the required flowrate of the steam or water.

6. Determine the size and basic type of control valve using the sizing charts
in Tables 1, 2 and 3. A sizing example is illustrated for each of these charts
under each of these Tables.
Please note that at this point only the valve size and basic valve type has been
selected. It is now necessary to refer to Tables 4, 5, and 6 to check the following:
7. What body material is required?

Pressure temperature limitations for each material (gunmetal, cast iron and
P P
cast carbon steel) are shown in Table 4. Economics may also influence the
choice of body material.
Please note:
8. What end connections are required - screwed or flanged? the pressures given on the sizing
Choices are shown in the valve selection Tables 5 and 6. charts are in bar g only
9. Normally closed valves may have a bleed which allows a small flow to reach
the sensor so that it can react to a temperature rise. This will depend on the
application.
10. What is the maximum differential pressure across the control valve?
In a heating application with a normally open valve a rise in temperature at
the sensor will cause the valve to close. In order to ensure that the valve
closes fully the sensor must be able to overcome the force generated on
the valve plug by the maximum differential pressure across the control valve See page 2 for
(P1 max - P2 min). This is often substantially greater than the normal running
pressure drop across the control valve. Similarly, for a cooling application Table locations
using a normally closed valve, the return spring must be able to close the
valve against the maximum differential pressure. The maximum differential
pressure for each valve is shown in Tables 5 and 6. The maximum
differential pressure of a valve may be increased by incorporating a
balancing bellows, details of which are also indicated in Tables 5 and 6
under the column titled 'Balanced'.
Control system selection and Typical order information

are on page 2
Page 1 of 17
44 Control systems
Control system selection
The control system consists of the sensor, capillary tube and actuator. Tables 5 and 6 show which control systems are compatible with
each valve:
11. From Table 7, select a temperature range which allows adjustment on both sides of the control point.
12. From Table 7, choose the configuration of the control system to suit the application.
13. From Table 7, choose the length of capillary tube.
14. Choose any ancillaries (pockets, mounting brackets etc.) from Table 8.
Typical order information

1 off Spirax Sarco self-acting temperature control comprising:
- DN20 KA43 control valve flanged to EN 1092 PN40,
- SA121 control system, range 2,
- 2 m capillary tube length,
- Stainless steel pocket.
Table locations
Table 1 - Valve sizing for heating applications using steam Page 3
4.5 Table 2 - Valve sizing for heating applications using water Page 4
2 Table 3 - Valve sizing for cooling applications using water Page 5
Table 4 - Pressure/temperature limits for different valve materials Page 6
Table 5 - Normally open valves for heating applications Page 7
Table 6 - Normally closed valves for cooling applications Page 12
Table 7 - Control system selection Page 15
Table 8 - Control system ancillaries Pages 16 and 17
CTLS Issue 5
2-Port Self-acting Temperature Control Valve Selection for Heating and Cooling Applications
Control systems
Self-acting controls 4
Table 1 Valve sizing for heating applications using steam
Kvs Size
Type
value DN
BX2/
Cr A 0.38 15 BMF2/
itic
Inlet pressure bar g
al BM2
pr
Di
es
f fe
su
re
re
BX3/
dr
nt P 1 -
op B 0.64 15 BMF3/
ial
(
BM3
pr 2)
es
P
su
r
BX4/
eb
C 1.03 15 BMF4/
ar
BM4
BX6/
D 1.65 15 BMF6/
BM6
Steam flow kg/h
E 2.58 15 SB
F 2.9 15 KA
G 3.86 20 SB
4.5
H 4.64 20 KA
3
I 6.8 25 SB
A
J 9.8 25 KA/KB
B
KA/
K 16.48 32
C KB/KC
D L 16.48 40 KC
E
F M 23.7 40 KA/KB
G
H
KA/
N 34 50
I KB/KC
P O N L, K J O 65 65 NS
M
Sizing example P 94 80 NS
Given:
- Pressure at valve inlet P1 = 6 bar g
- Pressure at valve outlet P 2 = 4 bar g
- The required steam flowrate = 280 kg / h

Flow
To size the valve:
P P
1. Determine the differential pressure across the valve P1 - P 2 = 6 - 4 = 2 bar.
2. Enter the upper section of the chart with the inlet pressure (P1) at 6 bar g and draw a horizontal line to intersect the differential pressure (P1 - P 2) line at 2 bar.
From this intersection draw a vertical line downwards.
3. Enter the lower section of the chart with the steam flowrate at 280 kg / h and draw a horizontal line to intersect the vertical line produced in step 2. From this
intersection draw a line parallel to the diagonal lines in the direction of the valve selection box.
4 From the valve selection boxes choose the valve with the higher Kvs value i.e. size DN20 'KA' type valve with a Kvs of 4.64
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Table 2 Valve sizing for heating applications using water
A Kvs Size
Type
value DN
B
A 94 80 NS
C B 65 65 NS
D KA/
C 34 50 KB/
E, KC
F
E D 23.7 40 KA/KB
G
H E 16.48 32 KA/KB
I
F 16.48 40 KC
J
K G 9.8 25 KA/KB
L
H 6.8 25 SB
Flow m³/h
M
Flow l/s
I 4.64 20 KA
4.5 N
4 J
O 3.86 20 SB
K 2.9 15 KA
P
L 2.58 15 SB
BX6/
M 1.65 15 BMF6/
BM6
BX4/
N 1.03 15 BMF4/
BM4
BX3/
O 0.64 15 BMF3/
BM3
BX2/
P 0.38 15 BMF2/
BM2

Differential pressure bar (x 10 = m wg, x 100 = kPa)
Sizing example Differential pressure

Given:
- Pressure at valve outlet P 2 = 13 bar g Flow
- The required steam flowrate = 3 litres/second P P
To size the valve:

1. Determine the differential pressure across the valve P1 - P 2 = 14 - 13 = 1 bar
2. Enter the chart with a flowrate of 3 litres/second and draw a horizontal line to intersect the differential pressure line at 1 bar.
From this intersection draw a line parallel to the diagonal lines in the direction of the valve selection boxes.
3. From the valve selection boxes choose the valve with the higher Kvs value i.e. size DN32 'KA' or 'KB' type valve with a Kvs of 16.48
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
Table 3 Valve sizing for cooling applications using water
A Kvs Size
Type
value DN
B
A 94 80 NSRA
C B 65 65 NSRA
D
C 34 50 KX/KY
E
D 23.7 40 KX/KY
E
F E 16.48 32 KX/KY
G
F 9.8 25 KX
H
I G 6.8 25 SBRA
J
K H 4.64 20 KX
Flow m³/h
Flow l/s
I 3.86 20 SBRA
J 2.9 15 KX 4.5
L
K 2.58 15 SBRA 5
BXRA/
L 0.59 15 BMFRA/
BMRA

Differential pressure bar (x 10 = m wg, x 100 = kPa)
Sizing example Differential pressure

Given:
- Pressure at valve outlet P 2 = 13 bar g Flow
- The required steam flowrate = 3 litres/second P P
To size the valve:

1. Determine the differential pressure across the valve P1 - P 2 = 14 - 13 = 1 bar
2. Enter the chart with a flowrate of 3 litres/second and draw a horizontal line to intersect the differential pressure line at 1 bar.
From this intersection draw a line parallel to the diagonal lines in the direction of the valve selection boxes.
3. From the valve selection boxes choose the valve with the higher Kvs value i.e. size DN32 'KX' or 'KY' type valve with a Kvs of 16.48
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Table 4 Pressure/temperature limits for different valve materials
Note: Materials for the various valve types are shown in Tables 5 and 6 on the following pages.
Control valve body material Gunmetal Cast iron Cast carbon steel Stainless steel
Body design conditions PN25 PN16 PN25 PN40 PN40
Maximum design temperature 260 °C 220 °C 300 °C 300 °C 260 °C
Maximum cold hydraulic test 38 bar g 24 bar g 38 bar g 60 bar g 60 bar g
260
Temperature °C
200 Note: The KB51 and KY51 control valves have

a maximum design temperature limit of 232 °C.
150 Steam saturation curve
Gunmetal
100
50
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Pressure bar g
4.5 220
200
Temperature °C
6 150
Cast iron 100
50
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Pressure bar g
300
Temperature °C
250
Note: The KB43 and KY43 control valves have
Cast 200 a maximum design temperature limit of 232 °C.
carbon 150 Steam saturation curve
steel 100
50
0
0 10 20 30 40
Pressure bar g
260
Note: The KA61 and KA63 and KC63 control
Temperature °C
200 valves have a maximum design temperature

Stainless 150 Steam saturation curve limit of 232 °C.
steel 100
50
0
0 10 20 30 37 40
Pressure bar g
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
Valve selection data
Table 5 Normally open valves for heating applications
For pressure temperature relationships please refer to the pressure/temperature charts in Table 4.
*Please note:
The KB31, KB33, KB43, and KB51 control valves can also be used on water applications where high P conditions exist.
BM (DN15 flanged)
SB (DN15 - DN25 screwed) BMF (DN15 flanged)
BX (DN15 screwed)
4.5
KA31 (DN15 - DN25 screwed)
KA33 (DN15 - DN25 flanged)
KB31 (DN25 screwed)*
KB33 (DN25 flanged)
7
KA51 (DN25 screwed)
KB51 (DN25 screwed)*

KB33 (DN32 - DN50 flanged)*
KB43 (DN32 - DN50 flanged)*
KC43 (DN32 - DN50 flanged)
KC63 (DN32 - DN50 flanged)
KB31 (DN32 - DN50 screwed)*

NS (DN65 - DN80 flanged) KB51 (DN32 - DN50 screwed)*
NS (DN65 - DN80 screwed) KC31 (DN40 - DN50 screwed)
KC51 (DN40 - DN50 screwed)
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Gunmetal
Size and pipe connections Control system options
Valve Screwed Flanged Body Balanced Kvs Maximum Stroke
SA422
SA423
SA122
SA128
SA123
SA121
model BSP/NPT PN25/ANSI 150 design P (bar) mm
rating
BX2 ½" PN25 0.38 17.2 2.2 • • • • • •
BX3 ½" PN25 0.64 17.2 3.2 • • • • • •
BX4 ½" PN25 1.03 17.2 3.2 • • • • • •
BX6 ½" PN25 1.65 17.2 3.2 • • • • • •
½" PN25 2.58 17.2 3.2 • • • • • •
SB ¾" PN25 3.86 10.3 4.0 • • • • • •
1" PN25 6.80 6.8 5.0 • • • • • •
1" PN25 9.80 4.5 5.6 • • • • • •
1¼" PN25 16.48 3.0 8.0 • • • •

KA51
4.5
1½" PN25 23.70 2.0 9.0 • • • •
2" PN25 34.00 1.5 9.5 • • • •

8 1" PN25 • 9.80 10.0 5.6 • • • • • •
KB51*
Balanced by 1¼" PN25 • 16.48 9.0 8.0 • • • •
phosphor
bronze 1½" PN25 • 23.70 8.2 9.0 • • • •
bellows
2" PN25 • 34.00 6.9 9.5 • • • •
KC51 1½" PN25 • 16.48 16.0 9.0 • • • •

Balanced by
stainless
steel 2" PN25 • 34.00 13.8 9.5 • • • •
bellows
NS double 2½" DN65 PN25 65.00 10.0 9.5 • • • •

sealed valve 3" DN80 PN25 94.00 10.0 9.5 • • • •
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
Cast iron
Valve Screwed Flanged Body Balanced Kvs Maximum Stroke
SA422
SA423
SA122
SA128
SA123
SA121
model BSP/NPT PN16 design P (bar) mm
rating
BMF2 DN15 PN16 0.38 16.0 2.2 • • • • • •
BMF3 DN15 PN16 0.64 16.0 3.2 • • • • • •
BMF4 DN15 PN16 1.03 16.0 3.2 • • • • • •
BMF6 DN15 PN16 1.65 16.0 3.2 • • • • • •
½" DN15 PN16 2.90 13.0 3.2 • • • • • •
¾" DN20 PN16 4.64 10.3 4.0 • • • • • •

KA31
screwed and 1" DN25 PN16 9.80 4.5 5.6 • • • • • •
KA33 1¼" DN32 PN16 16.48 3.0 8.0 • • • •
flanged
1½" DN40 PN16 23.70 2.0 9.0 • • • •
2" DN50 PN16 34.00 1.5 9.5 • • • •

4.5
KB31* 1" DN25 PN16 • 9.80 10.3 5.6 • • • • • •
screwed and
KB33* 1¼" DN32 PN16 • 16.48 9.0 8.0 • • • • 9
flanged
1½" DN40 PN16 • 23.70 8.2 9.0 • • • •
balanced by
phosphor
bronze 2" DN50 PN16 • 34.00 6.9 9.5 • • • •
bellows
KC31 DN40 PN16 • 16.48 13.0 9.0 • • • •

Balanced by
stainless
steel DN50 PN16 • 34.00 13.0 9.5 • • • •
bellows
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Cast carbon steel

Body
Maximum Stroke
design Balanced Kvs
SA422
SA423
SA122
SA128
SA123
SA121
Valve P (bar) mm
Flanged rating
model
PN25 PN40 ANSI 300
BM2 DN15 DN15 PN25 0.32 17.2 2.2 • • • • • •
BM3 DN15 DN15 PN40 0.64 17.2 3.2 • • • • • •
BM4 DN15 DN15 PN40 1.03 17.2 3.2 • • • • • •
BM6 DN15 DN15 PN40 1.65 17.2 3.2 • • • • • •
DN15 DN15 PN40 2.90 17.0 3.2 • • • • • •
DN20 DN20 PN40 4.64 10.0 4.0 • • • • • •
DN25 DN25 PN40 9.80 4.5 5.6 • • • • • •

KA43
4.5 DN32 DN32 PN40 16.48 3.0 8.0 • • • •
10 DN40 DN40 PN40 23.70 2.0 9.0 • • • •
DN50 DN50 PN40 34.00 1.5 9.5 • • • •
DN25 DN25 PN40 • 9.80 10.0 5.6 • • • • • •

KB43*
Balanced by DN32 DN32 PN40 • 16.48 9.0 8.0 • • • •
phosphor
bronze DN40 DN40 PN40 • 23.70 8.2 9.0 • • • •
bellows
DN50 DN50 PN40 • 34.00 6.9 9.5 • • • •
KC34 DN32 DN32 PN40 • 16.48 16.0 8.0 • • • •

Balanced by
stainless DN40 DN40 PN40 • 16.48 16.0 9.0 • • • •
steel
bellows DN50 DN50 PN40 • 34.00 13.8 9.5 • • • •
Page 10 of 17 TI-S21-07
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
Stainless steel
Control system options
Body
Valve Maximum Stroke
design Balanced Kvs
SA422
SA423
SA122
SA128
SA123
SA121
model P (bar) mm
Screwed Flanged rating
BSP/NPT PN40/ANSI 300
½" PN40 2.90 17.0 3.2 • • • • • •
KA61 ¾" PN40 4.64 10.0 4.0 • • • • • •
1" PN40 9.80 4.5 5.6 • • • • • •
DN15 PN40 2.90 17.0 3.2 • • • • • •
DN20 PN40 4.64 10.0 4.0 • • • • • •
DN25 PN40 9.80 4.5 5.6 • • • • • •

KA63
DN32 PN40 16.48 3.0 8.0 • • • •
DN40 PN40 23.70 2.0 9.0 • • • •

4.5
DN50 PN40 34.00 1.5 9.5 • • • •
11
KC63 DN32 PN40 • 16.48 16.0 8.0 • • • •
Balanced by
stainless DN40 PN40 • 23.70 16.0 9.0 • • • •
steel
bellows DN50 PN40 • 34.00 13.8 9.5 • • • •
TI-S21-07 Page 11 of 17
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Valve selection data
Table 6 Normally closed valves for cooling applications
For pressure temperature relationships please refer to the pressure/temperature charts in Table 4, page 6.
Gunmetal
Valve Screwed Flanged Body design Balanced Kvs Maximum Stroke
SA422
SA423
SA122
SA128
SA123
SA121
model BSP/NPT PN25/ANSI 150 rating P (bar) mm
BMF2 ½" PN25 0.59 10.3 3.2 • • • • • •
SBRA ½" PN25 2.58 12.0 3.2 • • • • • •

Optional
¾" PN25 3.86 7.0 4.0 • • • • • •
bleed
available 1" PN25 6.80 4.7 5.0 • • • • • •
NRSA 2½" DN65 PN25 65.00 2.7 9.5 • • • •

4.5 Double
seated valve 3" DN80 PN25 94.00 2.0 9.5 • • • •
12 1" PN25 9.80 3.5 5.6 • • • • • •

KX51
Optional 1¼" PN25 16.48 2.3 8.0 • • • •
bleed 1½" PN25 23.70 1.7 9.0 • • • •
available
2" PN25 34.00 1.1 9.5 • • • •
KY51* 1¼" PN25 • 16.48 9.0 8.0 • • • •

Balanced by
phosphor
bronze 1½" PN25 • 23.70 8.2 9.0 • • • •
bellows.
Optional
bleed 2" PN25 • 34.00 6.9 9.5 • • • •
available
Page 12 of 17 TI-S21-07
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
Cast iron
Valve Screwed Flanged Body design Balanced Kvs Maximum Stroke
SA422
SA423
SA122
SA128
SA123
SA121
model BSP/NPT PN16 rating P (bar) mm
BMFRA ½" PN16 0.59 10.3 3.2 • • • • • •
½" DN15 PN16 2.90 12.0 3.2 • • • • • •

KX31 ¾" DN20 PN16 4.64 7.0 4.0 • • • • • •
Screwed
and KX33 1" DN25 PN16 9.80 3.5 5.6 • • • • • •
flanged.
Optional 1¼" DN32 PN16 16.48 2.3 8.0 • • • • • •
bleed
available 1½" DN40 PN16 23.70 1.7 9.0 • • • • • •
2" DN50 PN16 34.00 1.1 9.5 • • • • • •
KY31*
Screwed 1¼" PN16 • 16.48 9.0 8.0 • • • •
and KY33*
flanged by
phosphor
bronze
1½" PN16 • 23.70 8.2 9.0 • • • •
4.5
bellows.
Optional 13
bleed 2" DN16 • 34.00 6.9 9.5 • • • •
available
* Please note: The KY31, KY33, and KY51 can also be used on water applications where high P conditions exist.
TI-S21-07 Page 13 of 17
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Cast carbon steel

Valve Flanged
SA422
SA423
SA122
SA128
SA123
SA121
model Body design Maximum Stroke
Balanced Kvs
rating P (bar) mm
PN25 PN40
BMRA DN15 PN25 0.59 10.3 3.2 • • • • • •
DN15 PN40 2.90 12.0 3.2 • • • • • •
DN20 PN40 4.64 7.0 4.0 • • • • • •

KX43
Optional DN25 PN40 9.80 3.5 5.6 • • • • • •
bleed DN32 PN40 16.48 2.3 8.0 • • • •
available
DN20 PN40 23.70 1.7 9.0 • • • •
DN50 PN40 34.00 1.1 9.5 • • • •
KY43
DN32 PN40 • 16.48 9.0 8.0 • • • •
Balanced by
phosphor
bronze DN40 PN40 • 23.70 8.2 9.0 • • • •
4.5 bellows.
Optional
14 bleed
available.
DN50 PN40 • 34.00 6.9 9.5 • • • •
KY51 (DN32 - DN50 screwed) KX31 (DN15 - DN25 screwed)

KY31 (DN32 - DN50 screwed) KX33 (DN15 - DN25 flanged)
KY33 (DN32 - DN50 screwed) KX51 (DN25 screwed)
KY43 (DN32 - DN50 flanged)
BXRA (DN15 screwed)

BMFRA (DN15 flanged) SBRA (DN15 - DN25 screwed)
BMRA (DN15 flanged)
NSRA (DN65 - DN80 screwed) KX31 (DN32 - DN50 screwed)

NSRA (DN65 - DN80 flanged) KX33 (DN32 - DN50 flanged)
KX43 (DN15 - DN50 flanged)
KX51 (DN32 - DN50 screwed)
Page 14 of 17 TI-S21-07
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
Table 7 Control system selection
The control systems are available in four configurations as shown below.
Each type is available with either a dial or knob type temperature adjustment except the Type 422 (dial only).
Dimensions are approximate in mm
Actuator Actuator
SA121, SA128 SA122
271 310 (SA121) 25

185 178 (SA128) 415
Setting knob
17
Sensor 240
Capillary Sensor
Capillary Setting knob
Actuator Actuator
SA123, SA423 Type 422
Setting knob
Capillary
25
248
4.5
271
25
Capillary 326
Sensor 395
270 Sensor
15
Capillary Setting dial
Specifications
Standard
Weight
Type Range Temperature Maximum sensor temperature Material capillary
kg
tube (m)
1 - 15 to 50 °C
SA121 2 40 to 105 °C 55 °C over set value to max. 190 °C Brass 2.0 2, 4, 8 and 20
3 95 to 160 °C
1 - 20 to 120 °C
SA122 55 °C over set value Brass 1.8 2, 4, 8 and 20
2 40 to 170 °C
1 - 15 to 50 °C
SA123 2 40 to 150 °C 55 °C over set value Brass 2.5 2, 4, 8 and 20
3 95 to 160 °C
1 - 20 to 120 °C
SA128 55 °C over set value to max. 190 °C Brass 1.8 2, 4, 8 and 20
2 40 to 170 °C
1 - 20 to 120 °C
SA422 55 °C over set value Stainless steel 1.4 2.4 or 4.8*
2 40 to 170 °C
1 - 15 to 50 °C
Stainless steel
SA423 2 40 to 150 °C 55 °C over set value sensor 2.5 2, 4, 8 and 20
remainder brass
3 95 to 160 °C
* Longer lengths up to 9.6 m are available to special order
TI-S21-07 Page 15 of 17
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Table 8 Control system ancillaries
Control system type

Mounting options and ancillaries
SA121 SA122 SA123 SA128 SA422 SA423
1" shown Standard pocket

315 258 258 258 180 326
immersion length (mm)
Size (BSP or NPT) 1" ¾" 1" 1" 1" 1"
Wall mounting bracket • • • •
Union kit for sensor

¾" 1"
immersion without pocket • • • • • •
Mild steel pocket • • • •

longer pocket option
* • •
¾"
Stainless steel pocket • • • • •
longer pocket option
* • • •
4.5 Copper pocket longer • • • •

1" pocket option
• •
16 *
Brass pocket longer • • • •

pocket option
* • •
Glass pocket with bracket

and rubber bung • • •
Duct fixing kit • • •
Twin sensor adaptor • • • • • •

When coupled to a valve allows
operation by two actuators
Twin sensor adaptor
Twin sensor adaptor
Manual
actuator
* Special long pockets are available in lengths from 0.5 m to 1 m.
Page 16 of 17 TI-S21-07
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
Table 8 Control system ancillaries (continued)
Control system type

Mounting options and ancillaries
SA121 SA122 SA123 SA128 SA422 SA423
Manual actuator
When coupled to a valve, it
enables the valve to be
manually operated.
• • • • • •
Manual
actuator
Manual
actuator
4.5
17
TI-S21-07 Page 17 of 17
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
4.5
18
Control systems
TI-P036-01
CTLS Issue 6
BM, BMRA, BMF and BMFRA

Self-acting Control Valves
Description and available types
BM Cast steel, normally open, single seat with 4 orifice sizes: BM2, BM3, BM4 and BM6.
BMRA Cast steel, normally closed, single seat.
BMF Cast iron, normally open, single seat with 4 orifice sizes: BMF2, BMF3, BMF4 and BMF6.
BMFRA Cast iron, normally closed, single seat.
Materials Sizes and pipe connections

No. Part Material BM
and DN15 standard flange:
EN 1092 PN25 4.5
BMF Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 20 and ANSI 300
19
BMRA
1 Body
BM Cast steel DIN 17245 GS C25 Note: ANSI 150 connections are available to special order
for both BM and BMRA self-acting control valves.
2 Valve closure member Stainless steel AISI 440 B
BMF
3 Valve seat ring Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
and DN15 standard flange: EN 1092 PN16
4 Valve seat gasket Mild steel BS 1449 CS4 BMFRA
5 Ball return spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S26
6 Main return spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S26
7 Bonnet Steel DIN 17243 C22.8
8 Bonnet gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
1 BM and BMF
2 3
BMRA and BMFRA
1 54
2
8 8
6
6
7 7
Page 1 of 4
44 Control systems
BM and BMRA BMF and BMFRA
A A

Temperature °C

Temperature °C

Steam
Steam saturation
saturation curve
curve C B D


When the valve is operated with a self-acting temperature control system in this region a Spirax Sarco spacer must be used
in conjunction with the system.
A - B Flanged EN 1092 PN25 and ANSI 300
A - C Flanged ANSI 150
A - D Flanged EN 1092 PN16
BM and BMRA PN25

BMF and BMFRA PN16
4.5 Fitted to a Spirax Sarco spacer 350 °C

BM and BMRA
20 Maximum design temperature Fitted directly to the actuator 232 °C
BMF and BMFRA 220 °C
BM 17.2 bar
BMRA 10.3 bar

Maximum differential pressure
BMF 16.0 bar
BMFA 10.3 bar
BM and BMRA 38 bar g

BMF and BMFRA 24 bar g
Kv values
BM2 BM3 BM4 BM6 BMRA For conversion:
BMF2 BMF3 BMF4 BMF6 BMFRA C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
0.38 0.64 1.03 1.65 0.59 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Capacities
For saturated steam sizing capacities, see TI-GCM-08.
For water sizing capacities, see TI-GCM-09.
A
BS 4504
DIN PN16 and PN25 ANSI 300
Size A A B Weight
DN15 130 127 87 3.6
CTLS Issue 6
BM, BMRA, BMF and BMFRA Self-acting Control Valves
Control systems
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-S21-01) supplied with the product.
Installation note
The valve should be fitted in a horizontal line. The actuator position will depend on the type fitted to the valve.
Maintenance note
How to fit general:
- Remove the control system sensor from the plant and allow it to cool (SA systems).
- Disconnect the actuator from the valve.
- Before attempting to carry out any repairs, make sure that the valve is fully isolated.
- It is important always to renew the complete assembly as listed in 'Spare parts' and to make sure that all the joint faces are clean.
- Always reassemble using new gaskets lightly coated with a suitable jointing compound (preferably of a non-graphited type).
Valve seat assembly:
- To replace the valve seat assembly unscrew the bonnet (7).
- Remove the valve seat (3) from the body (1) and replace it with a new one using a box spanner 18 mm A/F.
- Unscrew the spindle retaining nut and withdraw it from the bonnet ball head and spindle assembly. The ball head and spindle
assembly of the BM and BMF valves are preassembled and set to the correct length. No further adjustment is necessary.
- Replace the new assembly or spring (BMRA and BMFRA).
- Tighten the spindle retaining nut. 4.5

- Refit the bonnet to the valve body using a new gasket. 21
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN15 BMRA self-acting control valve having flanged EN 1092 PN25 connections.
CTLS Issue 6
44 Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
BM and BMF 3, 4, 6, 8
Valve seat assembly
BMRA and BMFRA 3, 4, 6, 8
Gasket set (3 of each in a packet) 4, 8
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of valve.
Example: 1 - Valve seat assembly for a DN15 BMRA self-acting control valve.
4.5
22
BM BMRA
BMF BMFRA
4 4
3
3
Spindle
retaining
6 nut 6
Recommended tightening torques
or
Item Part Nm
mm
3 Valve seat 18 A/F 40 - 50
7 Bonnet 70 - 80 7
CTLS Issue 6
Control systems
TI-P036-02
CTLS Issue 6
BX and BXRA
Gunmetal
Description
The BX range of two-port valves are used in conjunction with Spirax Sarco SA control systems to provide a self-acting temperature
control unit.
Available types
BX Normally open, single seat with four different orifice sizes: BX2, BX3, BX4 and BX6.
BXRA Normally closed, single seat.

½" screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT. 4.5
23
BX BXRA
➧ ➧
Page 1 of 4
44 Control systems
Materials BX BXRA
➧ ➧
4 5
3 2
4
3
2
1
1
8 8
6
6
7
7
4.5 No. Part Material

24 1 Body Gunmetal CC491 K or CC491 K M
2 Valve closure member Stainless steel AISI 440B
4 Valve seat gasket Copper BS 2870 C102
6 Main return spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S26
7 Bonnet Brass BS 2872 CZ 122

Temperature °C
When the valve is operated with a self-acting temperature

control system in this region, a Spirax Sarco spacer must
Steam saturation curve be used.
Pressure bar g
Fitted to a Spirax Sarco spacer 260 °C

Maximum design temperature
Fitted directly to an actuator 232 °C
BX 17.2 bar
BXRA 10.3 bar
CTLS Issue 6
BX and BXRA Gunmetal Self-acting Control Valves
Control systems
Kv values
BX2 BX3 BX4 BX6 BXRA For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
0.38 0.64 1.03 1.65 0.59 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Capacities

A
Size A B Weight
½" 80 83 0.7
4.5
25

Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco ½" screwed BSP BX4 self-acting control valve with gunmetal body and stainless steel trim.
CTLS Issue 6
44 Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
BX valve 3, 4, 6, 8
Valve seat assembly
BXRA valve 3, 4, 6, 8
Gasket set (packet of 3 each) 4, 8
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Valve seat assembly for a ½" BXRA self-acting control valve.
BX BXRA
4.5 4 4
26
3
3
Spindle
retaining
nut
6 6
or
Item Part Nm
mm
3 Valve seat 18 A/F 40 - 50
7 Bonnet 40 - 50 7
CTLS Issue 6
Control systems
TI-P078-02
CTLS Issue 12
KA31, KA33, KB31, KB33 and KC31

Cast Iron
KB31, KB33
and KC31
balanced trim
4.5
KA31 and KA33
unbalanced trim
27
Description
The KA, KB and KC range of two-port valves are used in conjunction with Spirax Sarco SA control systems to provide a self-acting
temperature control unit.
Available types
KA31 Normally open with screwed connections.
KA33 Normally open with flanged connections.
KB31 Normally open with phosphor bronze balancing bellows and screwed connections.
KB33 Normally open with phosphor bronze balancing bellows and flanged connections.
KC31 Normally open with stainless steel balancing bellows and screwed connections.
Note: Pressure balancing bellows enables the valve to operate against higher differential pressures.
Standards
These products fully comply with the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) and carry the mark when so
required.
Certification
As standard these products are available with a manufacturers’ Typical Test Report.
Page 1 of 5
44 Control systems
Screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT:
KA31 ½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½" and 2"
KB31 1", 1¼", 1½" and 2"
KC31 1½" and 2"
Flanged EN 1092 PN16 and BS 10 Table F:
KA33 DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50
KB33 DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50
Temperature °C
Pressure bar g
4.5
Maximum design pressure 16 bar g @ 120°C
Maximum design temperature 220°C @ 13.8 bar g

28 Minimum design temperature -10°C
Maximum operating temperature 220°C
Note: For lower operating temperatures consult Spirax Sarco
Size DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50
KA31 13.0 10.3 4.5 3.0 2.0 1.5
KA33 13.0 10.3 4.5 3.0 2.0 1.5

KB31 - - 10.3 9.0 8.2 6.9
KB33 - - 10.3 9.0 8.2 6.9
KC31 - - - - 13.0 13.0
Kv values
KA31, KA33 2.90 4.64 9.80 16.48 23.70 34.00 For conversation
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
KB31, KB33 - - 9.80 16.48 23.70 34.00 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
KC31 - - - - 16.48 34.00
Capacities
For saturated steam sizing capacities see TI-GCM-08.
For water valve sizing capacities see TI-GCM-09.
CTLS Issue 12
A31, KA33, KB31, KB33 and KC31 Cast Iron Self-acting Control Valves
Control systems
Materials
1
1
4
4
5
5 3
3
7
14
6
8
8
12
13
2 2
15
7
16
KA31 and KA33 KB31, KB33 and KC31
unbalanced trim balanced trim
No. Part Material

4.5
1 Body Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 25 29
KA and KB Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 25
2 Bonnet KC - 1½" Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 25
KC - 2" Steel EN 10213 GP240 GH+N
3 Valve head Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
4 Valve seat ring Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
DN15-DN25 Mild steel BS 1449 CS 4

5 Valve seat gasket DN32-DN50 Reinforced exfoliated graphite
6 Return spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S 26
KA and KB Brass BS 2874 CZ 121

Stem
7 KC Stainless steel BS 970 321S20
Bonnet studs Steel BS 4439 Gr. 8.8

12 Bonnet nuts Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
KB Phosphor bronze EN 12449 Cu Sn 6

Bellows
13 KC Stainless steel AISI 316 L
14 Bellows gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
15 Bonnet bush Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
16 Plunger Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
CTLS Issue 12
KA31, KA33, KB31, KB33 and KC31 Cast Iron Self-acting Control Valves
44 Control systems
A1
(Flanged KA33 and KB33)
A
(Screwed KA31, KB31 and KC31)
4.5
30
PN16 BS 10'F' Weight
Size A A1 A1 B C Scr. Flg.
DN15-½" 90 130 130 105 37 1.3 3.3
DN20-¾" 104 150 147 105 37 1.6 4.3
DN25-1" 136 160 157 107 51 3.2 5.7

KA31 and KA33
DN32-1¼" 144 180 180 110 - 5.1 8.8
DN40-1½" 150 200 200 110 - 6.3 11.0
DN50-2" 180 230 230 110 - 7.8 13.0
DN25-1" 136 160 157 138 51 3.4 5.9
DN32-1¼" 144 180 180 152 51 5.7 9.1

KB31, KB33 and KC31
DN40-1½" 150 200 200 152 62 6.9 11.2
DN50-2" 180 230 230 152 71 8.8 13.4

Installation note:
The valve should be fitted in a horizontal line with the actuator vertically below the pipeline.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco 1¼" screwed BSP KA31 self-acting control valve with cast iron body.
CTLS Issue 12
A31, KA33, KB31, KB33 and KC31 Cast Iron Self-acting Control Valves
Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
KA31 and KA33
Valve seat assembly A, D, E, L
Set of all gaskets E, L
Set of bonnet studs and nuts (set of 4) S
KB31, KB33 and KC31
Valve seat assembly A, B, C, D, E, L, U, G

(excluding bellows and stem assembly)
E
Bellows and stem assembly G, L, N, H
Set of all gaskets B, C, E, L, U, G

D
KB31, KB33 KA31 and
and KC31 KA33
How to order spares
'Available spares' and state the size and type of valve. C
U
Example: 1 - Valve seat assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN32 KB31 self- A
acting control valve. B
4.5
A
31
H
CTLS Issue 12
KA31, KA33, KB31, KB33 and KC31 Cast Iron Self-acting Control Valves
44 Control systems
4.5
32
Control systems
TI-P078-06
CTLS Issue 7
KA43, KB43 and KC43

Steel
Description
Available types KB43 Normally open with phosphor bronze pressure balancing bellows with flanged connections.
KC43 Normally open with stainless steel pressure balancing bellows with flanged connections.
Standards 4.5
required. 33
Certification
As standard these products are available with a manufacturers’ Typical Test Report. Additionally, at extra cost, certification to
EN 10204 3.1 can be supplied.

KA43 DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50 Standard flanges:
KB43 DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50 EN 1092 PN25 and EN 1092 PN40,
KC43 DN32, DN40 and DN50 ASME 300 and BS 10 Table H.
The following flanges are available on request: ASME 150.
KA43 KB43 and KC43
Page 1 of 5
44 Control systems
A

Temperature °C

Steam
saturation
curve C B

Pressure bar g

A - B Flanged EN 1092 PN40, ASME 300 and BS 10 Table H.
A - C Flanged EN 1092 PN25 and ASME 150
A-B 300 °C @ 25.8 bar g

4.5 Maximum operating temperature
A-C 300 °C @ 10.0 bar g
34 Minimum operating temperature

0 °C
KA43 17.0 10.0 4.5 3.0 2.0 1.5

KB43 - - 10.0 9.0 8.2 6.9
KC43 - - - 16.0 16.0 13.8
Kv values
KA43 2.90 4.64 9.80 16.48 23.70 34.00 For conversion:

C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
KB43 - - 9.80 16.48 23.70 34.00 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
KC43 - - - 16.48 16.48 34.00
Capacities
CTLS Issue 7
KA43, KB43 and KC43 Steel Self-acting Control Valves
Control systems
Materials
1 1
4
4
5
5
3 3
7 5
7
6 8
8
13
2 12
12
2
15
15
KA43 KB43 and KC43
16
No. Part Material
1 Body Steel EN 10213 GP240 GH+N 4.5

2 Bonnet
DN15 - DN25 Steel DIN 17243 C22.8
35
DN32 - DN50 Steel EN 10213 GP240 GH+N
3 Valve head Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
DN15 to DN25 Mild steel BS 1449 CS 4

5 Valve seat gasket
DN32 to DN50 Reinforced exfoliated graphite
KA and KB Brass BS 2872 CZ 121

7 Stem
KC Stainless steel BS 970 321 S20

12
Bonnet nuts Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
KB Phosphor bronze EN 12449 Cu Sn 6

13 Bellows
KC Stainless steel AISI 316 L
14 Bellows gasket (not shown) Reinforced exfoliated graphite
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
4.5
36
PN25 KB43 Weight

PN40 ASME 300 Table 'H' KA43 KC43
Size
KB43/
A A A B B KA43 KC43
DN15 130 130 130 105 4.3
DN20 150 150 150 105 6.3
DN25 160 162 162 105 138 8.0 8.2
DN32 180 180 180 110 152 8.7 9.1
DN40 200 202 198 110 152 9.7 10.1
DN50 230 232 228 110 152 14.6 15.0

Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN20 KA43 self-acting control valve with steel body having flanged EN 1092 PN40 connections.
CTLS Issue 7
Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
KA43 Set of gaskets E, L
Valve seat assembly (excluding bellows and stem assembly) A, B, C, D, E, L, U, G

KB and KC43
Set of gaskets B, C, E, L, U, G
How to order spares

spares' and state the size and type of valve.
Example: 1 - Valve seat assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN20 KB43 self-acting
control valve.
4.5
E 37
D
KB43 and KC43 KA43
C
U
A
B
A
X
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
4.5
38
Control systems
TI-P078-04
CTLS Issue 8
KA51, KB51 and KC51

Bronze
Self-Acting Control Valves
Description
Available types
KA51 Normally open
KB51 Normally open + phosphor bronze pressure balancing bellows
KC51 Normally open + stainless steel pressure balancing bellows
4.5
Standards
These products fully comply with the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) and carry the mark when so 39
required.
Certification

KA51 and KB51: 1", 1¼", 1½" and 2" KC51: 1½" and 2"
Screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT connections.
KA51 KB51 and KC51
Page 1 of 4
44 Control systems
Temperature °C
Pressure bar g
Maximum operating temperature 260 °C @ 10.5 bar g

0 °C
Size 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"

4.5
KA51 4.5 3.0 2.0 1.5
40 Maximum differential pressure bar
KB51 10.0 9.0 8.2 6.9
KC51 - - 16.0 13.8
Kv values
Size 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"
For conversion:
KA51 and KB51 9.80 16.48 23.70 34.00 C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
KC51 - - 16.48 34.00
Capacities
CTLS Issue 8
KA51, KB51 and KC51 Bronze Self-Acting Control Valves
Control systems
Materials
1 1
4
4
5
5 3
3
7
6 14
8
8
13
12
2
KA51 KB51 and KC51 2
7
16
4.5
1 Body Bronze CC 491 KM
KA51, KB51 and 1½" KC51 Bronze CC 491 KM

2 Bonnet
KC51 2" Steel EN 10213 GP240 GH+N
3 Valve head Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
1" Mild steel BS 1449 CS 4

5 Valve seat gasket
1½" to 2" Reinforced exfoliated graphite
KA51 and KB51 Brass BS 2874 CZ 121

7 Stem
KC51 Stainless steel BS 970 321 S20
Studs Steel BS 4439 Gr. 8.8

12 Bonnet
Nuts Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
KA51 Phosphor bronze EN 12449 Cu Sn 6

13 Bellows
KC51 Stainless steel AISI 316L
CTLS Issue 8
44 Control systems
4.5 KB51 and KC51 shown
42
KA51 KB51 KC51 Weight
Size
A B B B C KA51 KB51 KC51
1" 136 107 138 - 51 3.96 4.17 -
1¼" 144 110 152 - 51 6.20 7.00 -
1½" 150 110 152 152 62 7.52 8.32 8.32
2" 180 110 152 189 71 9.35 10.30 10.60

For full details see the Installation and Maintenance instructions supplied with the product.
Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco 1¼" screwed BSP KA51 self-acting control valve with bronze body.
CTLS Issue 8
Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
KA51 Set of gaskets E, L

KB51 and KC51
Set of gaskets B, C, E, L, U
How to order spares

spares' and state the size and type of valve.
Example: 1 - Valve seat assembly for a Spirax Sarco 1¼" KB51 self-acting control
valve.
4.5
E 43
KB51 and KC51

C
U KA51
A
B
A
X
CTLS Issue 8
44 Control systems
4.5
44
Control systems
TI-P078-01
CTLS Issue 9
KX31, KX33, KY31 and KY33

Cast Iron
Description
The KY31 and KY33 incorporate a pressure balancing bellows, which enables the valve to operate against higher differential pressures.
Available types
KX31 Normally closed with screwed connections. KY31 Normally closed with balancing bellows and screwed connections.
KX33 Normally closed with flanged connections. KY33 Normally closed with balancing bellows and flanged connections
Optional extras
Fixed bleed bypass on DN15 to DN50 valves for water systems:
KX31B, KX33B, KY31B and KY33B
The 'B' denotes the internal fixed bleed, if requested.
4.5
Standards
45
required.
Certification
KX31 KY31
Sizes ½" - 1" Sizes 1¼" - 2"
KX31
Sizes 1¼" - 2"
Optional extra
Optional extra
Page 1 of 5
44 Control systems
KX31 ½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½" and 2"
KY31 1¼", 1½" and 2".
Screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT.
KX33 DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50
KY33 DN32, DN40 and DN50.
Flanged EN 1092 PN16 and BS 10 Table F.
Temperature °C
Pressure bar g
4.5 Maximum design temperature 220 °C @ 13 bar g

46 Maximum operating temperature 220 °C

0 °C
KX31 12.0 7.0 3.5 2.3 1.7 1.1
Maximum differential pressure bar KX33 12.0 7.0 3.5 2.3 1.7 1.1
KY31 - - - 9.0 8.2 6.9
KY33 - - - 9.0 8.2 6.9
CTLS Issue 9
KX31, KX33, KY31 and KY33 Cast Iron Self-acting Control Valves
Control systems
Materials
KX31 KX31
Sizes ½" - 1" Sizes 1¼" - 2"
9
2
6
6
8 8
1
3 3
4 4
5 5
1
7
7
8
8
2
2
4.5
47
No. Part Material
KY31
Sizes 1¼" - 2"
1 Body Cast iron DIN 1691 GG25
2 Bonnet Cast iron DIN 1691 GG25
Stainless
3 Valve head BS 970 431 S29
steel 6 2
Stainless 9
4 Valve seat ring BS 970 431 S29
steel
10
Valve DN15 - DN25 Mild steel BS 1449 CS 4 1
5 seat
DN32 - DN50 Reinforced exfoliated graphite 8
gasket
11
Stainless
6 Return spring BS 2056 302 S 26 3
steel
4
7 Stem Brass BS 2874 CZ 121 5
7
8 Bonnet gaskets Reinforced exfoliated graphite
9 Bonnet DN32 - DN40 M10 BS 3692 Gr. 8

8
nuts DN50 M12 BS 3692 Gr. 8
2
Phosphor
10 Bellows EN 12449 Cu Sn 6
bronze
CTLS Issue 9
44 Control systems
KX31 and KX33 KX31 and KX33 KY31 and KY33

DN15 - DN25 DN32 - DN50
C C
C1
B B
B
A A
A1 A
A1
A1
NPT / BSP PN16 BS 10 'F' Weight
Size A A1 A1 B C C1 KX31 KX33 KY31 KY33
DN15-½" 90 130 130 68 106 - 1.5 3.4 - -
DN20-¾" 104 150 147 68 106 - 1.8 4.4 - -
DN25-1" 136 160 157 80 108 - 3.3 5.8 - -
4.5 DN32-1¼" 144 180 180 80 112 154 5.3 8.9 6.1 9.2
48 DN40-1½" 150 200 200 90 112 154 6.4 11.1 7.3 11.3
DN50-2" 180 230 230 100 112 154 7.9 13.1 9.0 13.5
Kv values
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
Kv 2.90 4.64 9.80 16.48 23.70 34.0 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Capacities

Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco 2" KY31 self-acting control valve having screwed BSP connections.
CTLS Issue 9
Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
Valve and seat assembly A1, D1, E, J, F, L1
(DN25) L1, L2, E

KX31 and KX33 Set of all gaskets
(DN32 - DN50) E, L1, L2, B, U, C
Valve and seat assembly A1, B, C, D1, E, L1, U
Bellows and seat assembly H, G, L1, B, C, U, J

KY31 and KY33
Set of all gaskets B, C, U, E, G, L1, L2
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Valve and seat assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN40 KY33 self-acting control valve.
S
4.5
49
S
J
KY KX31
1¼" - 2" 1¼" - 2"
J
G
H
F
F
A1 X
D1
E
B
L1
A1
U
C
D1
L1 E
L2
L2
KX31
½" - 1"
CTLS Issue 9
44 Control systems
4.5
50
Control systems
TI-P078-05
CTLS Issue 9
KX43 and KY43

Steel
Description
The KX and KY range of two-port valves are used in conjunction with Spirax Sarco SA control systems to provide a self-acting temperature
control unit.
Available types
KX43 Normally closed
KY43 Normally closed. This valve incorporates a pressure balancing bellows, which enables the valve to operate against higher
differential pressures.
Standards
These products fully comply with the requirements of the EU Pressure Equipment Directive/ UK Pressure Equipment (Safety)
Regulations and carry the mark when so required.
4.5
Certification
51

KX43 DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50
KY43 DN32, DN40 and DN50
Flanged EN 1092 PN25 and PN40, ASME 300 and BS 10 Table H.
The following flange connection is available on request: ASME 150.
KX43 KY43
DN40 and DN50 shown
Page 1 of 5
44 Control systems
A
Temperature °C
Steam
saturation
curve C B
Pressure bar g

A - B Flanged EN 1092 PN40, ASME 300 and BS 10 Table H.
A - C Flanged EN 1092 PN25 and ASME 150.
A-B 300 °C @ 25.8 bar g

A-C 300 °C @ 10.0 bar g
4.5 A-B 300 °C @ 25.8 bar g

52 A-C 300 °C @ 10.0 bar g

0 °C
Maximum differential pressure bar KX43 12.0 7.0 3.5 2.3 1.7 1.1
KY43 - - - 9.0 8.2 6.9
Kv values
Size DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
KX and KY 2.90 4.64 9.80 16.48 23.7 34.0 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Capacities
CTLS Issue 9
KX43 and KY43 Steel Self-acting Control Valves
Control systems
Materials
KX43
DN40 and DN50 shown
12
7
3 KY43
4
5
2
1
2
8 12
15 13
8
14 4.5
7 3
53
4
5
1
2
8
15
No. Part Material
1 Body Steel EN 10213-2 GP240 GH+N
DN15 to DN25 Steel DIN 17243 C22.8

2 Bonnet
DN32 to DN50 Steel EN 10213-2 GP240 GH+N
DN15 to DN25 Mild steel BS 1449 CS 4

5 Valve seat gasket
7 Stem Brass BS 2872 CZ 121

12
Bonnet nuts Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
13 Bellows Phosphor bronze EN 12449 Cu Sn 6
CTLS Issue 9
44 Control systems
4.5
54 PN25 ASME ASME BS 10
PN40 150 300 H
Size A A A A B C Weight
DN15 130 124 130 130 68 106 4.4
DN20 150 142 150 146 68 106 6.4

KX43
DN25 160 156 162 162 80 108 8.1
DN32 180 180 180 178 80 112 8.8
DN40 200 198 202 198 90 112 9.8
DN50 230 228 232 228 100 112 14.7
PN25 ASME ASME BS 10

PN40 150 300 H
Size A A A A B C Weight
KY43 DN32 180 180 180 178 80 154 9.2
DN40 200 198 202 198 90 154 10.2
DN50 230 228 232 228 100 154 15.1

Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN50 KX43 self-acting control valve having flanged EN 1092 PN40 connections.
CTLS Issue 9
Control systems
Spare parts
The spare parts available are shown in solid outline.
Parts drawn in a grey line are not supplied as spares.
S
Available spares
Valve and seat assembly A1, D1, E, J, F, L1
Set of all (DN25) L1, L2, E KX43 KY43

KX43 gaskets (DN32 - DN50) E, L1, L2, B, U, C
Set of bonnet studs and nuts (set of 4) S L1

Valve and seat assembly A1, B, C, D1, E, L1, U J
J G
Bellows and stem
H, G, L1, B, C, U, J
assembly
KY43 H
Set of all gaskets B, C, U, G, L1, L2
Set of bonnet studs and nuts (set of 4) S F B
A1
How to order spares A1 A1
Always order spares by using the description given in the column U
headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of valve. D1 C D1
Example: 1 - Valve seat assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN40 KY43
self-acting control valve.
E
4.5
S
55
L2
CTLS Issue 9
44 Control systems
4.5
56
Control systems
TI-P078-03
CTLS Issue 11
KX51 and KY51

Bronze
Description
The KX51 and KY51 range of two-port valves are used in conjunction with Spirax Sarco SA control systems to provide a self-acting
Available types
KX51 Normally closed.
KY51 Normally closed.

The valve incorporates a pressure balancing bellows, which enables the valve to operate against higer differential pressures.
Optional extras
Fixed bleed bypass for water systems.
4.5
Standards
57
required.
Certification
KX51
Size 1" KY51
KX51
Sizes 1¼" - 2"
Optional
extra
Optional extra
Optional extra
Page 1 of 5
44 Control systems
KX51 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"
Screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT
KY51 1¼" 1½" 2"
Temperature °C
Pressure bar g

4.5 Minimum design temperature -10 °C
58 Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service 17.5 bar g
Maximum operating temperature 260 °C @ 10.5 bar g
Size 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"
Maximum differential pressure bar KX51 3.5 2.3 1.7 1.1
KY51 - 9.0 8.2 6.9
CTLS Issue 11
KX51 and KY51 Bronze Self-acting Control Valves
Control systems
Materials
KX51 KX51
Size 1" Sizes 1¼" - 2"
2
9
6 2
8 6
8
1
3
4 3
5 4
1 5
7
7
2 8
2
No. Part Material KY51 4.5

1 Body Bronze CC491 KM 59
2 Bonnet Bronze CC491 KM 2
3 Valve head Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29 6

9
Valve 1" Mild steel BS 1449 CS 4 10

5 seat 1
gasket 1¼ - 2" Reinforced exfoliated graphite
8
6 Return spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S 26 11
7 Stem Brass BS 2874 CZ 121 3

4
8 Bonnet gaskets Reinforced exfoliated graphite
5
7
9 Bonnet 1¼ and 1½" M10 x 35 mm BS 3692 Gr. 8
nuts 2" M12 x 35 mm BS 3692 Gr. 8
Phosphor
10 Bellows EN 12449 Cu Sn 6 8
bronze
2
CTLS Issue 11
44 Control systems
KX51 KX51 KY51

1" 1¼" - 2"
D1
D D
C C C
A A A
Weights
Size A C D D1 KX KY
1" 136 80 108 4.10 -
1¼" 144 80 112 154 6.32 7.25

4.5
1½" 150 90 112 154 7.62 8.57
60 2" 180 100 112 154 9.50 10.60
Kv values
Size 1" 1¼" 1½" 2" For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
Kv 9.80 16.48 23.70 34.0 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Capacities

Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco 2", KY51 self-acting control valve with bronze body having screwed BSP connections.
CTLS Issue 11
Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
Valve seat assembly A1, D1, E, J, F, L1
1" L1, L2, E

KX51 Set of all gaskets
1¼ - 2" E, L1, L2, B, U, C
Valve seat assembly A1, B, C, D1, E, L1, U
Bellows and stem assembly H, G, L1, B, C, U

KY51
Set of all gaskets B, C, U, E, G, L1, L2
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Valve seat assembly for a Spirax Sarco 1½" KY51 self-acting control valve.
S
KX51 4.5
1"
61
J
KY51 KX51
1¼" - 2" 1¼" - 2"
J
G
F
F
A1 X
D1
E
L1 B
A1
U
C
D1
E
L1
L2
L2
CTLS Issue 11
44 Control systems
4.5
62
Control systems
TI-P049-01
CTLS Issue 8
NS and NSRA
Gunmetal
Description
The NS range of two-port valve are used in conjunction with Spirax Sarco SA control systems to provide a self-acting temperature
control unit.
Available types
NS Normally open, double seat
NSRA Normally closed, double seat

2½" and 3" screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) (NPT to special order).
DN65 and DN80 flanged EN 1092 PN25 (ASME/ANSI 150 and BS 10 Table 'H', which meets the requirements of Table F, to
special order).
4.5
63
NS NSRA
Page 1 of 4
44 Control systems
Temperature °C
Steam
saturation
curve
Pressure bar g
A Spirax Sarco spacer is required for use in this region. (see TI-P033-01 for further details).
Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service 17.5 bar g
With spacer 260 °C @ 10.5 bar g
4.5
Without spacer 232 °C @ 15.5 bar g

-10 °C
DN65 - 2½" 10.0 bar

NS
DN80 - 3" 10.0 bar
DN65 - 2½" 2.7 bar
NSRA
DN80 - 3" 2.0 bar
Note: As supplied the test pressure must not exceed 25 bar g
Kv values
Size DN65 - 2½" DN80 - 3" For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
Kv 65.0 94.0 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Capacities/sizing chart
For saturated steam service see TI-GCM-08.
For water service see TI-GCM-09.

How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco 2½" NS control valve with gunmetal body and trim. Connections are to be screwed BSP.
CTLS Issue 8
NS and NSRA Gunmetal Self-acting Control Valves
Control systems
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Body Gunmetal BS 1400 LG2
2 Body gasket Semi-ridged graphite BS 2815 Gr. A
3 Valve closure member Gunmetal BS 1400 LG2
5 Plunger guide Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
7 Spring housing Gunmetal BS 1400 LG 2
8 Bonnet Gunmetal BS 1400 LG 2
Body studs Steel BS 4439 Gr. 8.8

10
Body nuts Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
7
7
6
6
5
4.5
5
2
65
2
4
4
1
1
3
3
9
9
2
2
8
8
10
10
NS NSRA
CTLS Issue 8
44 Control systems
BSP EN 1092
or PN25 BST
NPT ASME 150 F/H Weight
Size A B B C Screwed Flanged
DN65 (2½") 171 203 190 150 8.1 17.2
DN80 (3") 194 236 216 160 13.6 22.7
4.5
66
Spare parts
The body gaskets (see Materials item 2) are available as spares in packets of 6.
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Packet of body gaskets for a DN65 Spirax Sarco NS control valve.
CTLS Issue 8
Control systems
TI-P044-01
CTLS Issue 9
SB and SBRA
Gunmetal
Self-acting Temperature Control Valves
Description
The SB and SBRA range of two-port valve are used in conjunction with Spirax Sarco SA control systems to provide a self-acting
Available types:
SB Normally open, single seat valve
SBRA Normally closed, single seat valve or single seat valve with bleed
Optional extras
4.5
Extra bleed hole bypass
Standards
67
required.
Certification
The product is available with manufacturer's Typical Test Report.

½", ¾" and 1" screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT.
SB SBRA
Page 1 of 5
44 Control systems
Temperature °C
Pressure bar g
When the valve is operating with a self-acting temperature control system in this region, a Spirax Sarco spacer must be used.



0 °C
Size ½" ¾" 1"
Maximum differential pressure bar SB 17.2 10.3 6.8
SBRA 12.0 7.0 4.7
Kv values
DN15 DN20 DN25 For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
2.58 3.86 6.80 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Capacities
CTLS Issue 9
SB and SBRA Gunmetal Self-acting Temperature Control Valves
Control systems
Materials
SB SBRA
8
6
5
3
7
8
4
Optional extra
bleed hole
2
1 2
8 4
3
5
1
7
4.5
8
7
6
69
No. Part Material
1 Body Gunmetal BS 1400 LG2
2 Valve plug Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
4 Valve seat gasket Copper BS 2870 C102
5 Return spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S26
7 Bonnet Brass BS 2872 CZ 122
9 Cap Brass BS 2872 CZ 122
CTLS Issue 9
44 Control systems
A1
A2
SB SBRA
4.5
70 Size A1 A2 B C D E Weight
DN15 79 79 101 66 50 95 1.0
DN20 95 79 101 66 50 95 1.3
DN25 105 79 101 66 50 95 1.5

Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco 1" SB self-acting temperature control valve with bronze body having screwed BSP connections.
CTLS Issue 9
Control systems
Spare parts
The spare parts available are shown in heavy outline. Parts drawn in a grey line are not supplied as spares.
Available spares
SB A, D, E, L
Valve seat and stem assembly
SBRA A1, D1, E, T1, R, S
SB E, L
Set of all gaskets
SBRA L1, L2, E
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Valve seat and stem assembly for a ¾" SBRA self-acting temperature control valve.
L1
4.5
71
T1
A1
Valve seat and stem assembly

E
R
E
L
D1
L2
SB SBRA
CTLS Issue 9
44 Control systems
4.5
72
Control systems
TI-P047-01
CTLS Issue 13
TW
Three-port
Self-acting Control Valve for Liquid Systems
Description
The T W valve is a 3 -por t self-acting control valve for liquid systems (including sea water) and can be used for mixing or
diver ting applications. It is used in conjunction with a Spirax Sarco SA control system to provide a self-acting temperature
control unit.
Available types
Screwed ¾", 1" and 1½"
Bronze valves
Flanged DN50
Cast iron valves Flanged DN50, DN80 and DN100
4.5
¾", 1" and 1½" screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT.
73
Bronze valves
DN50 standard flange EN 1092 PN25 which also meets the face-to-face dimensions of PN16 and PN10.
DN50, DN80 and DN100 standard flange EN 1092 PN16 which also meets the face-to-face dimensions
Cast iron valves of PN10.
Page 1 of 5
44 Control systems
Cast iron valves - flanged PN16 Bronze valves - screwed and flanged PN25
Temperature °C
Temperature °C
Cast iron PN16

Bronze PN25
Cast iron 16 bar g @ 120 °C

Bronze 25 bar g @ 120 °C
Cast iron 200 °C @ 13.5 bar g

4.5 Bronze 200 °C @ 21.0 bar g
Cast iron -10 °C

74 Minimum design temperature
Bronze -90 °C
Cast iron 200 °C @ 13.5 bar g

Bronze 200 °C @ 21.0 bar g
Cast iron -10 °C

Bronze -20 °C
¾", 1" and 1½" 3.4 bar

DN50, DN80 and DN100 2.7 bar
Cast iron 24 bar g

Bronze 37.5 bar g
Leakage rate 1% of full Kv (see overleaf for Kv values)
Kv values
Size ¾" 1" 1½" DN50 DN80 DN100 For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
Kv 4.64 8.96 20.29 41.20 97.85 118.45 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Stroke mm
Size ¾" 1" 1½" DN50 DN80 DN100
Stroke 2.7 4.3 5.9 7.7 12.4 13.9
Sizing See TI-GCM-09.
CTLS Issue 13
TW Three-port Self-acting Control Valve for Liquid Systems
Control systems
Materials
O
O
X
8 6
7
2 1
X
1
5 3
2
3
Z
4 Z
7 10
11 12 13 8
4
9
12
14
11
No. Part Material
Bronze CC491 KM
1 Body
Cast iron EN GJL 250
2 Piston Bronze CC491 K or CC491 KM 4.5

3 Piston sealing ring FEP/PFA
75
DN20 - DN40 Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
4 Stem
DN50 - DN100 Bronze
5 Spacer piece Bronze BS 2874 PB 102
6 Lock-nut Bronze BS 2874 PB 102
DN20 - DN40 Brass BS 2874 CZ 121

8 Return spring cover
DN50 - DN100 Bronze BS 2874 BP 102
Bronze CC491 KM
9 Bonnet
Cast iron EN GJL 250
10 Cover sealing ring Reinforced exfoliated graphite
DN20 - DN25 Brass CW 617N

11 Bonnet
DN40 - DN100 Bronze CC491 KM
12 Bonnet gasket Nickel reinforced exfoliated graphite
Steel
Cover studs
13 " UNF x 12" (35 mm) BS 2693 / 1
Cover nuts Steel BS 1768 / R
14 Back seal Bronze BS 2874 PB 102
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Bronze screwed Screwed

A
Size A B C Weight
¾" 97 54 58 1.2 B
1" 114 57 61 1.9
1½" 151 70 76 3.8

C
Bronze flanged PN25 Flanged

A
Size A B C Weight
DN50 201 144 133 15.0

B
Cast iron flanged PN16
Size A B C Weight
DN50 219 153 133 13.7 C
4.5 DN80 250 176 135 25.0
DN100 351 151 140 32.0

76

Installation note:
The valve should be fitted in a horizontal line with the actuator vertically below the line. Note that the ports are marked X, Z and O.
O
O
X
Z Z
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN50, TW 3-port self-acting control valve having a bronze body and flanged connections to PN25.
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
Spare parts
The spare parts available are shown in heavy outline. Parts drawn in broken line are not supplied as spares.
Available spares
¾" to 1½" C, F, E
Piston sealing ring set
DN50 to DN100 C, D, E
¾" to 1½" A, C, E, F
Piston set
DN50 to DN100 A, B, C, D, E, J, H
Set of cover studs and nuts P
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Piston set for a Spirax Sarco DN50 TW 3-port self-acting control valve.
4.5
77
Detail of
piston ring
X
J
B
F H
C
A
A
D
E
G
G
E
Valve size
¾" - 1½"
Valve size
DN50 - DN100
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Self-acting controls Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.
TI-P073-03
CH Issue 7
Type 130 and HL10

'Safeguard High Limit Control'
Description Control valve options:
The Spirax Sarco safeguard high limit control system is supplied set 2-port:
to cut-out at approximately 60°C and is designed to protect plant SB, SBRA, KA, KB, KC,
from overheating. Note: the settings can easily be altered to initiate KX, KY or NSRA and
cut-out at anywhere between 0°C and 100°C. 3-port:
The system comprises of a Type 130 control system coupled to an TW DN25, 40 and 50
HL10 high limit cut-out unit complete with 2 m of capillary tube as
standard. Note: the Type 130 control system is only suitable for use
with the HL10 high limit cut-out unit. 9
For correct installation it is essential to use a sensor pocket (see
'Optional extras'), which can be supplied at extra cost.
The system is designed for use with any one of the following 2-port 13
or 3-port control valves: Type 130
4.5 Available types of control valve
Note: For full technical data of the valves mentioned below see the
Control system
78 relevant Technical Information sheet (TI).

SB, KA, KB and KC:- 2-port normally open valves (to close on
temperature rise).
SBRA, KX, KY and NSRA:- 2-port normally closed valves (to open on
temperature rise). Note: These valves must be installed in a separate 11
bypass pipeline unimpeded by any other control valve when used
with the safeguard high limit control. 12
TW DN25, 40 and 50:- 3-port mixing / diverting valve. HL10
High limit cut-out
Optional extras 9 10
Capillary tube (12): In multiples of 2 m to a maximum length of 10 m.
Note: The capillary tube should be kept to a minimum to avoid the 8
system being affected by ambient temperature.
6
Pockets (16): Are available in copper or stainless steel having a
¾" BSP (BS 21 taper) or API thread. Union nipple (Y) forms the top W
5
of the pocket and carries a rubber washer (X), and gland nut (W).
4 X
Microswitch (14): This can be connected into an alarm system, using
7
a Kopex conduit connector and flexible conduit (not supplied with the Y
product), and can be arranged to either make or break the electrical
circuit on firing of the cut-out (see the 'Current rating table' overleaf). ¾" BSP
The microswitch has a degree of protection to IP67 (dust tight and
protected against the effects of immersion) under BS 5490. 16 (optional)
1
The microswitch can be added to an HL10 unit originally
supplied without it by purchasing a conversion kit: which 2
includes a conduit entry bracket and two screws for attachment. 3
Materials Microswitch (optional)

No. Part Material Conduit
entry
1 Body Bronze BS 1400 LG2 bracket
2 Main spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S26 15
3 Piston Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
4 Ball Stainless steel AISI 440 B 14
6 Bellows Stainless steel AISI 316L
7 Piston insert Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29 Materials for optional extras
8 Bonnet Brass BS 2872 CZ 122 No. Part Material
9 Valve coupling nut Brass BS 2872 CZ 122 14 Microswitch
10 Sensor Brass EN 12451 CW707R H130 /170 15 Cover Aluminium BS 1470 1200 H2
11 Actuator Stainless steel BS 3605 CFS 316S18 Copper BS 2871 C 106
12 Capillary tube PVC covered copper 16 Pocket Mild steel BS 980 CEW-2
13 Adjustment head cover Polypropylene plastic Stainless steel BS 3605 CFS 316S18
Control systems
Dimensions (approximate) in mm Weights (approximate) in kg
HL10 high limit cut-out unit 2.2
Control valve options: Type 130 control system 1.7
2-port: Type 130 control system
SB, SBRA, KA, KB, KC,
KX, KY or NSRA and
3-port:
TW DN25, 40 and 50
64
83
235 110
235
4.5
Withdrawal distance 75 61
79
150
60
HL10 high limit cut-out

21
Current rating table - Microswitch Spare parts

Load amps The spare parts available are shown in heavy outline. Parts drawn
Voltage Resistive Inductive in broken line are not supplied as spares.
125 Vac 5 5 Available spares
250 Vac 5 5 Microswitch assembly A, B (2 off)
up to 15 Vdc 10 10 Conversion kit A, B (2 off), C (2 off), D
30 Vdc 5 3 Pack of warning labels (6 off)
50 Vdc 1 1
75 Vdc 0.75 0.25 How to order spares
125 Vdc 0.50 0.06 Always order spares by using the description given in the column
headed 'Available spares' and state the type of high limit cut-out.
250 Vdc 0.25 0.03 Example: 1 - Microswitch assembly for a Spirax Sarco HL10.
Safety information, installation and maintenance B

For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions A
C
(IM-P073-08) supplied with each unit.
B
How to order D
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco Type 130 and HL10 safeguard high
limit control complete with 2 metres of capillary tubing for fitment
to SA 2 or 3-port valves, inclusive of a microswitch for the HL10 C
and a stainless steel pocket threaded ¾" BSP for the sensor.
Indicator
housing
Indicator
window
Note
A label will be affixed to the
outside of the indicator housing
for record purposes.
TI-P073-03 CH Issue 7 Type 130 and HL10 'Safeguard High Limit Control'
44 Control systems
4.5
80
Control systems
TI-P046-01
CTLS Issue 15
SA121, SA122, SA123, SA128 and SA1219

Self-acting Temperature Control Systems
Description SA121, SA1219
A range of self-powered control systems that incorporate sensor, SA123
actuator, set point adjustment / indicator for use with the following valve and SA128
types:-
2-port KA, KB, KC, KX, KY, SB, SBRA, BX and BXRA, BM, BMRA,
BMF, BMFRA, NS and NSRA
3-port TW
Available types 4.5

Set point adjustment at sensor
2-port valves DN15 to DN80

81
SA121 For use on
SA1219 For use on 3-port valves DN80 and DN100

SA128 For use on
3-port valves DN20 and DN25
Set point adjustment at valve

SA122 For use on
3-port valves DN20 and DN25
Remote set point adjustment

SA123 For use on
SA122
Optional extras
Union kit Direct immersion
Pocket Indirect immersion
Pocket material options include copper and stainless steel.

A glass option is also available for the SA122 and SA123 only.
Wall bracket
Duct adaptor Duct mounting
Nickel plating
Dial type set point adjuster Dial

adjustment
SA122TP and SA123TP incorporate an internal pocket to option
Pt100 temperature sensor
accept a Pt100 sensor
Page 1 of 4
44 Control systems
Materials
SA121, SA1219 SA123 SA122 Dial adjustment

and SA128 option
4
4
3
2 2
6
7
1
4.5 1
82 1 3
No.Part Material
1 Sensor Brass
2 Actuator Brass
3 Capillary tube Copper with PVC coated armoured covering
4 Adjustment head Polypropylene
5 * Union kit Brass
6 Mounting bracket Steel
7 Clip Polypropylene
8 * Adaptor plate (Duct fixing adaptor) Steel
Copper BS 2871 C106
9 * Pocket Stainless steel BS 3605 CFS 316S 18
Glass
10 Liquid fill Kerosene
* Items 5, 8 and 9 are shown on page 3
CTLS Issue 15
SA121, SA122, SA123, SA128 and SA1219 Self-acting Temperature Control Systems
Control systems
Temperature ranges
Range 1 -15 °C to 50 °C
SA121,SA1219 and SA123 Range 2 40 °C to 105 °C
Range 3 95 °C to 160 °C
55 °C over set value to 190 °C maximum

Over temperature protection
215 °C maximum for SA123
Range 1 -20 °C to 120 °C

SA122
Range 2 40 °C to 170 °C
Over temperature protection 55 °C over set value
Range 1 -20 °C to 110 °C

SA128
Range 2 40 °C to 170 °C
Over temperature protection 55 °C over set value to 190 °C maximum
Minimum -35 °C
Note - Ambient design temperature
Maximum +50 °C
Capillary tube
Standard length 2 m, 4 m, 8 m and maximum special length is 16m.
SA121, SA1219 SA122TP SA122 SA123TP SA123 Pockets

4.5
and SA128
Glass
83
J
B
A
C A H
C E
C
D 6
D 6
(optional)
(Included)
For a wall mounted D
sensor

Control system Metal pockets Glass pockets Weight Metal
Model A B C D E F G H J excluding pocket
SA121 252 185 310 25 - 333 28 - - 2.0
SA1219 350 185 310 25 - 333 28 - - 2.3

F
SA122 441 - 240 17 - 271 20 575 117 1.8
SA122TP 441 - 255 17 - 271 20 - - 2.0
SA123 252 - 248 25 272 276 28 575 117 2.5
SA123TP 252 - 255 25 272 276 28 - - 2.7

G
SA128 252 185 178 25 - 196 28 - - 1.8
CTLS Issue 15
44 Control systems
Union kit (for sensor immersion without pocket) Union kit
Includes gland nut, compression ring and union nipple.
Z W
SA121, SA1219, SA123 and SA128 Items Z, Y and X Y V
5 5
SA122 Items W, V and U U
X
1" BSP or NPT ¾" BSP or NPT

Pockets (for indirect immersion) Z
W
Includes pocket, gland nut and compression ring. Y
V
SA121, SA1219, SA123 and SA128 Items T, Z and Y
9
SA122 Items S, W and V. 1" BSP ¾" BSP 9
or NPT or NPT
Available materials Copper and stainless steel
Pocket
(metal)
Long pockets (SA122 and SA123 only)
To special order only. T
Having a minimum length 0.5 m, maximum length to order. S
Includes pocket, bracket and rubber bung
SA122 and SA123 Items S, V, W and T, Z, Y
Available materials Copper and stainless steel
4.5 SA121,
SA1219,
Glass pockets (SA122 and SA123 only) SA123 SA122
84 To special order only.
Includes pocket, bracket and rubber bung
and
SA128
SA122 and SA123 Items R, O and P
Pocket
(glass)
P
Wall mounting bracket (Item 6)
O
SA121, SA1219, SA122, SA123 and SA128 Optional
Duct fixing adaptor (for air sensing within ducts)

Includes adaptor plate, union nipple, compression ring and gland nut.
SA121, SA1219, SA123 and SA128 Items 8, X, Y and Z
SA122 Not available
R
the product.
How to order
Example: 1 - Spirax Sarco SA121 temperature control system, having temperature
range 2, 2 m capillary and stainless steel pocket.
8
112 mm X Y Z
Duct fixing
adaptor
112 mm
CTLS Issue 15
Control systems
TI-P380-01
CTLS Issue 5
SA422
Stainless Steel
Self-acting Temperature Control System
Description
The SA422 is an immersion type of self-powered control system that incorporates sensor, actuator, set point adjustment / indicator for
use with the following valve types:-
2-port KA, KB, KC, KX, KY, SB, SBRA, BX, BXRA, BM, BMRA, BMF, BMFRA, NS, NSRA
3-port TW
The sensor will need to be mounted through a union kit (available as an optional extra) when immersed through the wall of a vessel
containing the fluid under control.
Available types Union kit 4.5

Set point adjustment at valve
2-port valves DN15 to DN80 Z 85
SA422 For use on
Y
2 3 5
Optional extras X
Union kit Direct immersion
Comprising union nipple X, compression ring Y and gland nut Z
Dial adjustment
Dial adjustment
option
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Sensor Stainless steel ASTM A269 TP 316
2 Actuator Stainless steel ASTM A269 TP 321
3 Capillary tube Stainless steel ASTM A269 TP 304
4 Adjustment head Polypropylene
5 Union kit Stainless steel ASTM A582 303 1
4
44 Control systems
Knob Dial
A A C D Weight
397 428 165 25 1.5
Temperature ranges C
A
Range 1 -20 °C to +120 °C
SA422
Range 2 +40 °C to +170 °C
D
Overtemperature protection 55 °C over set value
Capillary tube
Standard length 2.4 m or 4.8 m.
Longer lengths to a maximum 6 m are available to special order.

Application warning:
4.5 On installations where the sensor is immersed directly into the solution to which temperature control is required, we would not recommend
the unit be subjected to:-
86 Aqueous solutions containing chloride, fluoride, halogen salt, hydrochloric acid or sulphuric acid.
The above applies to complete immersion, liquid level lines and spash zones.

1 - Spirax Sarco SA422 control system, temperature range 1, having 2.4 m capillary, plus:-
1 - Union kit with NPT connections.
TI-P380-01 CTLS Issue 5
SA422 Stainless Steel Self-acting Temperature Control System

Control systems
TI-P350-01
CTLS Issue 4
TA10A and TA10P

Steam Tracing
Temperature Control Systems
Description TA10
The TA10 is a stainless steel temperature control valve that has been
designed for use on tracing applications. The TA10A and TA10P are the
temperature control systems that are required to operate the valve - These
are sold seperately.
1
Available types of temperature control system: 2
TA10A For air temperature sensing. 4
5
Immersion/remote sensor for product sensing. 3
TA10P Note: the TA10P is supplied with a 1 m capillary tube for remote 7
sensing. 6
TA10P 4.5
Temperature ranges:
Range 1 0 °C to 50 °C (TA10A and TA10P) 9
87
Range 2 20 °C to 70 °C (TA10P only)
Note: The maximum temperature overrun is 50 °C

½" and ¾" screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT.
TA10
Materials
8
No. Part. Material
1 Body Stainless steel AISI 420 F
2 Bonnet Stainless steel ASTMA582 Gr.416
3 Valve stem Stainless steel ASTMA276 Gr.431
Seal Bellows housing Stainless steel ASTMA276 Gr.431

4
assembly Bellows Stainless steel AISI 316L TA10A
5 Valve closure member Stainless steel AISI 440B
9
6 Return spring Stainless steel ASTMA313Type302
7 Adjustment head Stainless steel ASTMA582 Gr.4Ib
Stainless steel
8 Capillary tube ASTMA269 Gr.304
seamless tube
9 Sensor Stainless steel ASTMA 269 Gr.316
Page 1 of 4
44 Control systems
200
Temperature °C
150 Steam
saturation
100
curve
50
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Pressure bar g
TMA Maximum allowable temperature 200 °C
Minimum allowable temperature 0 °C
TMO Maximum operating temperature 200 °C

0 °C
DPMX Maximum differential pressure 10 bar g

4.5 Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 38 bar g
88
Weight
Size A B C D E F G H TA10A TA10P
½" 70 16 58 38 120 72 13 170 1.06 1.08
¾" 80 20 62 38 120 72 13 170 1.33 1.35
D
C
E
(TA10P) G
H
(TA10A) F
TA10P only
CTLS Issue 4
TA10A and TA10P Steam Tracing Temperature Control Systems
Control systems
1
Capacities
Cr
Inlet pressure bar (abs)

3 iti
ca
lp
4 re
ss
ur
5 e
dr
op
(b
ar
)
10
0 .1
1
0.
ba
5
ba
r
r
0.0
3
4 0.0
4
5 0.0
5
Steam flow kg/h
Kv
=0
.1
10
0.3 4.5
10
20
0.2
89
0.4
10
30 0.5
40 Kv
=1
50
100 3
4
5
200
Example of how to use the capacities chart

Where: - Example load = 20 kg/h
- Upstream gauge pressure 5 bar = 6 bar abs.
Method: - Draw a horizontal line from 6 bar abs.
- Draw a horizontal line from 20 kg/h
- Drop a vertical line from the 6 bar x critical pressure crossing point until it crosses 20 kg/h horizontal.
- The Kv for valve selection is given at this crossing point as Kv 0.3
- From the P-band table below a ¾" valve has 4 °C P-band.
Kv at P-band in °C
Size 1 °C 2 °C 4 °C 6 °C 8 °C Maximum lift Kv
For conversion:
½" 0.18 0.22 0.27 0.29 0.32 0.55 at 15 °C Xp C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
¾" 0.20 0.23 0.29 0.29 0.33 0.87 at 15 °C Xp
Operating temperature at design Kv = Set value - Xp
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco ½" TA10 steam tracing temperature control valve having screwed BSP connections supplied with
a TA10P range 2 temperature control system.
Spare parts
Available spares
Internal assembly A, B, C
Control system (state type and temperature range) D
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size, type and temperature
range of the control valve.
Example: 1 - Internal assembly for a Spirax Sarco ½" TA10 steam tracing temperature control valve.
TA10 TA10A TA10P
4.5
90
C
D D
CTLS Issue 4
Control systems
4
TI-P033-01
CH Issue 6
Temperature Control Ancillaries
Twin Twin
Sensor Sensor
Adaptor Adaptor
Manual
Actuator
4.5
91
Manual
Actuator
Twin sensor adaptor

When coupled to a 2-port or 3-port valve allows the valve to be
operated by either actuator.
Materials 5
No. Part Material
1 Body Brass BS 2872 CZ 122
2 Connector Brass BS 2874 CZ 121 4
3 Lower body Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
4 Nipple Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
5 Valve coupling nut Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
6 Body sealant Loctite retainer 620 - Green
7 Push rod Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
3
6
Dimensions / weights (approximate) in mm and kg 8
A B Weight
108 60 0.72 1
A
2
B
44 Control systems
Manual actuator
When coupled to a 2-port or 3-port valve, it enables the valve to be
manually operated.
Tamper proof
The unit is provided with a removable drive screw to avoid
unauthorised personnel tampering with the setting.
Materials
Brass with plastic adjustment head.

A B Weight
125 54 0.2
4.5
A Manual actuator
92
TI-P033-01 CH Issue 6 Temperature Control Ancillaries

Control systems
TI-P078-08
CTLS Issue 7
KA61, KA63 and KC63

Stainless Steel
4.5
93
KA61 screwed and KA63 flanged KC63 flanged
Description
The KA and KC range of two-port valves are used in conjunction with Spirax Sarco SA control systems to provide a self-acting temperature
control unit.
Available types
KA61 Normally open with screwed connections.
KC63 Normally open with stainless steel pressure balancing bellows with flanged connections.
Standards
These products fully comply with the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) and carry the mark when
so required.
Certification

KA61 Screwed ½", ¾" and 1" BSP or NPT.
KA63 Flanged DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50. The following flange is also available on request:
KC63 Flanged DN32, DN40 and DN50. ASME 150.
Flanged EN 1092 PN40 and ASME 300.
Page 1 of 5
44 Control systems
A
Temperature °C
Steam
saturation
curve
C B
Pressure bar g

A - B Screwed, flanged EN 1092 PN40 and ASME 300.
A - C Flanged ASME 150.
A-B 260 °C @ 27.7 bar g

A-C 260 °C @ 11.5 bar g
4.5
A-B 260 °C @ 27.7 bar g
A-C 260 °C @ 11.5 bar g
0 °C
KA61 17.0 10.0 4.5 - - -

KA63 17.0 10.0 4.5 3.0 2.0 1.5
KC63 - - - 16.0 16.0 13.8
Kv values
KA61 and KA63 2.90 4.64 9.80 16.48 23.70 34.00
KC63 - - - 16.48 16.48 34.00
For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Capacities
CTLS Issue 7
KA61, KA63 and KC63 Stainless Steel Self-acting Control Valves
Control systems
Materials
1
KC63 flanged
1
5
4
3
8
5
2 4
9 3
6 11
8
12
7
9
4.5
KA61 screwed and KA63 flanged 10
2
95
12
No. Part Material
1 Body Stainless steel DIN 17445 G-X5 Ni Mo Nb 19-11-2 (WS14581)
2 Bonnet Stainless steel DIN 17440 X5 Cr Ni Mo 17-12-2 (WS14401)
3 Head Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29 ASTM A276 431
DN15 to DN25 Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29 ASTM A276 431
4 Seat DN32 to DN40 Stainless steel BS 3146 ANC2
DN50 Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29 ASTM A276 431
5 Valve seat gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
7 Pushrod Stainless steel Z15 CN 16 02 (BS 970 431 S29)
Bonnet nuts Stainless steel DIN ISO 3506 A2-80
Stainless steel DIN ISO 3506 A2-80
Bonnet studs DN15 - DN20 M10 x 30

9
DN25 - DN40 M10 x 35
DN50 M12 x 35
10 Bellows assembly Stainless steel AISI 316L
12 Plunger Stainless steel BS 970 431S29 ASTM A276 431
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
Size A A1 C1 C2 Weight
PN40 ASME 300

KA61 KA63/KC63 KA63/KC63 KA61/KA63 KC63 KA61 KA63 KC63
DN15 90 133 130 120 - 1.6 4.6 -
DN20 104 154 150 120 - 1.9 6.6 -
DN25 138 161 162 129 - 3.5 8.3 -
DN32 - 182 184 132 152 - 9.0 9.1
DN40 - 200 205 132 152 - 11.3 10.1
DN50 - 234 235 133 187 - 14.9 15.0
KA61 and KA63 KC63

A1 A1
A
4.5
96
C1 C2

Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN20 KA63 stainless steel control valve having flanged connections to EN 1092 PN40.
CTLS Issue 7
Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
KA61 and KA63 Set of all gaskets E, L

KC63
Set of all gaskets B, C, E, L, U, G
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Valve seat assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN20 KC63 stainless steel self-acting control valve.
4.5
97
C
U
A
B
KC63 A KA61 and KA63
X
G
N
CTLS Issue 7
44 Control systems
4.5
98
Control systems
TI-P073-11
CTLS Issue 3
HL17
High Limit Cut-out
Description
The HL17 high limit cut-out is a solenoid operated shut-off valve
which can be activated by any device capable of interrupting the
supply of current to the solenoid coil, such as a thermostat.
Technical data (Solenoid valve)

220/240 ±10% Vac or 110/120 ±10% Vac
Voltages available
(others available on request)
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Inrush 45 VA
4.5
99
Power consumption
Holding 23 VA
Capacities
Using the saturated steam sizing chart from TI-GCH-03, establish
the required Kv and then select the next highest valve Kv from
the table below.
DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN80
4.0 6.2 9.5 16 22 30 75
For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156

Temperature °C

Steam
saturation
curve

DN15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50 and 80
Screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or API (DN15 to 25 only)
Pressure bar g
DN15 - 50 EN 1092 PN16 and PN25
DN15 - DN50 PN25 Flanges DN25 - 50 BS 10 Table H and ANSI 300

DN80 PN40 DN80 - EN 1092 PN40 and ANSI 300
Maximum design temperature 190 °C DN15 - 50 JIS 10/16 and ANSI 150
Maximum operating pressure 10 bar g DN15 - 20 BS 10 Table F

Also available
DN15 - DN50 38 bar g DN15 - ANSI 300
Designed for a maximum cold
hydraulic test pressure of: DN80 60 bar g DN80 - JIS 20, BS 10 Table J and ANSI 150
Page 1 of 3
44 Control systems
Materials
No. Part Material
SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3

1 Body
Steel * DIN 17245 GSC 25
Upper SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3

2 diaphragm 4
chamber Steel * DIN 17245 GSC 25
Lower SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3 19

3 diaphragm 9
chamber Steel * DIN 17245 GSC 25
8
4 Body cap SG iron
31
Hot brass
BS EN 12165 CW617N 7
Diaphragm stamping
5
plate 6
Stainless steel * BS 970 431 S29
1
6 Push rod Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
7 Valve seat Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29 19

2
23, 24
4.5
Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S25
100 9
Return
spring
10 Lock-nut Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
Phosphor
BS 2870 PB 102 1980
Diaphragms bronze 21, 22 3 5 10 11
11
(2)
Stainless steel reinforced

19 Gaskets (2)
exfoliated graphite
Diaphragm Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8.8 30

21 chamber
bolts Steel * BS 4882 Gr. 2H
Diaphragm Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8

22 chamber
nuts Steel * BS 3692 Gr. 2H 23, 24
Steel BS 4439 Gr. 8.8

23 Body bolts
Steel * BS 4439 Gr. B7
Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8

24 Body nuts
Steel * BS 3692 Gr. 2H
Solenoid
30 Brass 1.4305
valve
Internal
31 Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
strainer
Items marked * apply to the DN80 valve size only.
HL17 High Limit Cut-out

Control systems
Screwed BS 10 H PN16/25 ANSI BS 10 F ANSI JIS Weight
300 150 10/16
DN15 160 - 130 126.6 117 120.2 122 185 301 171 130 11.0 11.8
DN20 160 - 150 - 133 139.4 142 185 301 171 130 11.0 12.7
DN25 180 160 160 160.0 - 160.0 152 207 325 177 148 12.0 15.0
DN32 - 180 180 180.0 - 176.0 176 207 325 177 148 16.0
DN40 - 200 200 200.0 - 199.0 196 255 369 191 178 28.0
DN50 - 230 230 230.0 - 228.0 222 255 369 191 178 30.5
PN40 BS 10 J
DN80 - - 310 319.0 325 310.0 - 350 473 215 259 - 100.0
A
A1
4.5
E
101

Installation note:
The valve should be installed in a horizontal pipeline with the direction of flow as indicated by the arrow on the valve body.
Spare parts See IM-P278-01-EN-ISS1.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN32 HL17 high limit cut-out flanged to EN 1092 PN25, fitted with a 110 Vac solenoid.
HL17 High Limit Cut-out

44 Control systems
4.5
102
Control systems
Pressure reducing/surplussing valves

TI-P045-14
CTLS Issue 6
BRV2S and BRV2B

SG Iron
Pressure Reducing Valves
Description
The BRV2S and BRV2B are direct acting pressure reducing valves designed for applications using steam or gases such as compressed
air. This range of pressure reducing valves have SG iron bodies and are available with screwed or flanged connections.
Available types
BRV2S Stainless steel bellows
BRV2B Phosphor bronze bellows
BRV2SP Stainless steel bellows

With external pressure sensing connection
BRV2BP Phosphor bronze bellows
BRV2 pressure reducing valves are supplied with one of three colour coded springs which are identified by the disc (18) located on the
4.6
adjustment handwheel.
Note: Where control spring ranges overlap always use the lower range to give better control: 1
Grey For downstream pressure control: 0.14 to 1.7 bar g 18
Green For downstream pressure control: 1.40 to 4.0 bar g
Orange For downstream pressure control: 3.50 to 8.6 bar g
Standards
This product fully complies with the requirements of the Pressure
Equipment Directive (PED).
Certification
This product is available with a manufacturers' Typical Test Report.
Note: All certification/inspection requirements must be stated at the
time of order placement.

½", ¾" and 1" screwed BSP (BS 21 Rp) or NPT.
DN15, DN20 and DN25 flanged EN 1092 PN25.
Page 1 of 6
44 Control systems

Temperature °C

Steam
saturation
curve

Pressure bar g
Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service 19 bar g @ 210 °C
Maximum operating temperature 210 °C @ 19 bar g

0 °C
4.6 Maximum downstream reduced pressure 8.6 bar g
2 Maximum differential pressure 19 bar
Maximum recommended turndown ratio 10:1 at maximum flow
Note: With internals fitted, test pressure must not exceed: 19 bar g
CTLS Issue 6
BRV2S and BRV2B SG Iron Pressure Reducing Valve
Control systems
Pressure reducing/surplussing valves 4
Materials
18
2 20
* BRV2SP and
BRV2BP only
3
17*
1
7
Note: 16*
Items 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 and 19 are
all part of one assembly.
4
6 9
5
8 19
10
12
11
13
14
15 4.6
3
No. Part Materials
1 Spring housing Aluminium epoxy coated LM 24
2 Adjustment handwheel Polypropylene
3 Top spring plate Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 20
4 Pressure adjustment spring Silicon chrome spring steel BS 2803 685 A55 Range 2
Stainless steel 316Ti/316L

5 Bellows assembly
Phosphor bronze/brass BS 2872 Cz 122
6 Bellows assembly gasket Stainless steel reinforced exfoliated graphite
7 Hex. bolt (M8 x 25 mm) Steel zinc plated BS 3692 Gr. 8.8
8 Body SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
10 Pushrod Stainless steel ASTM A276 316L
11 Valve seat Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
12 Valve seat gasket Stainless steel BS 1449 316 S11
13 Valve Stainless steel AISI 420
14 Valve return spring Stainless steel BS 20056 316 S42
15 Strainer screen Stainless steel BS 1449 316 SH
16 Blanking plug Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
17 Compression fitting Brass
18 Spring range ID disc Polypropylene
19 Bulkhead plate Stainless steel 316L
20 Tamper-proof pin Mild steel copper plated
CTLS Issue 6
44 Control systems
Capacities for safety valve sizing
Size DN15 DN20 DN25 For conversions:
Full lift capacities for safety valve sizing purposes: C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
Kvs 1.5 2.5 3.0 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Steam and compressed air capacities

Downstream pressure bar g (x 100 = kPa)
4.6 Upstream pressure bar g

(x 100 = kPa)
4
½" - DN15
Steam capacity
kg/h ¾" - DN20
1" - DN25
½" - DN15
Compressed air
capacity dm 3 /s* ¾" - DN20
free air
1" - DN25
* dm 3 /s = I/s, 1 I/s d 2 c.f.m.

The curved lines labelled 2, 3, 4, 5 etc., represent upstream pressures. Downstream pressures are read along the vertical line on the
left hand side of the chart.
How to use the chart is best described by an example:-

Required, a pressure reducing valve to pass 120 kg/h reducing from 8 to 6 bar. From the downstream pressure of 6 bar on the left hand
side of the chart extend out horizontally until the line meets the curved 8 bar upstream line. At this point read vertically downwards
where it will be seen that a ½" BRV2 will be required.
CTLS Issue 6
Control systems
Weight
Size A B C D E F
Scr Flg
DN15 - ½" 83 150 60 130 25 97 1.60 3.90
DN20 - ¾" 96 150 60 130 25 107 1.70 4.25
DN25 - 1" 108 160 60 130 25 117 1.95 4.65
E Withdrawal distance
C C
4.6
5
A B

Installation note:
BRV2SP and BRV2BP: When external pressure sensing is used, remove the blanking plug (16) and fit the 1/8" /6 mm O/D compression
fitting (17 supplied). The other end of the 6 mm sensing pipe should be connected into the downstream pipework at least 1 m downstream
from the valve.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN15 BRV2S pressure reducing valve with SG iron body flanged EN 1092 PN25, stainless steel bellows
and fitted with an orange spring for downstream pressure control of 3.5 to 8.6 bar g.
CTLS Issue 6
44 Control systems
Spare parts 18
Available spares
Grey 0.14 to 1.7 bar g 4, 18
Pressure
* adjustment Green 1.40 to 4.0 bar g 4, 18
spring
Orange 3.50 to 8.6 bar g 4, 18
Bellows Stainless steel or

* assembly specify type
phosphor bronze
5, 6
* Spring housing hex. bolts (set of 4) 7
Valve and seat assembly 6, 11, 12, 19

Pressure 7
* Gasket set 6, 12
adjustment Spring housing
spring hex. bolts
* Common to all sizes.
How to order spares

'Available spares' and state the size, type and pressure range of the
reducing valve.
Example: 1 off Pressure adjustment spring (orange), having a
downstream pressure range of 3.5 to 8.6 bar g for a Spirax Sarco DN15
4.6 BRV2S pressure reducing valve.
4
Bellows
assembly
6
6
6
19
Valve and seat Gasket set

assembly
11
12 12
or
Item Part Nm
mm
7 Hex. bolts M8 x 25 18 - 24
11 Valve seat 32 A/F 108 - 132
CTLS Issue 6
Control systems

TI-P045-09
CTLS Issue 8
BRV2S5 and BRV2B5

Gunmetal
Description
The BRV2S5 and BRV2B5 are direct acting pressure reducing valves 18
designed for applications using steam or gases such as compressed air.
Available types
BRV2S5 Stainless steel bellows
BRV2B5 Phosphor bronze/brass bellows
BRV2S5 and BRVB5 pressure reducing valves are supplied with one of three
colour coded springs which are identified by the disc (18) located on the
4.6
adjustment handwheel;
Note: where control spring ranges overlap always use the lower range to give
better control:
7
Grey For downstream pressure control: 0.14 to 1.7 bar g
Standards
This product fully complies with requirements of the Pressure Equipment
Directive (PED).
Certification
This product is available with a manufacturers' Typical Test Report.
Note: All certification/inspection requirements must be stated at the time of
order placement.

½", ¾" and 1" screwed BSP (BS 21) or NPT
Page 1 of 6
44 Control systems
Temperature °C
Pressure bar g
Maximum allowable pressure 25 bar g @ 120 °C
Maximum allowable temperature 210 °C @ 17 bar g
Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service 17 bar g @ 210 °C

0 °C
Maximum downstream reduced pressure 8.6 bar g

4.6 Maximum differential pressure 17 bar
8 Maximum recommended turndown ratio 10:1 at maximum flow
CTLS Issue 8
BRV2S5 and BRV2B5 Gunmetal Pressure Reducing Valves
Control systems
Materials
18
20
2
3
7 4
1
Note:
Items 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 and 19 are
all part of one assembly.
6
10 5
19
12
11
13
15
14
8
17
16 4.6
No. Part Materials
9
1 Spring housing Aluminium epoxy coated LM 24
2 Adjustment handwheel Polypropylene
3 Top spring plate Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 20
4 Pressure adjustment spring Silicon chrome spring steel BS 2803 685 A55 Range 2
Phosphor bronze BS 2872 CZ 122

5 Bellows assembly
Stainless steel 316Ti/316L
6 Bellows assembly gasket Stainless steel reinforced exfoliated graphite
7 Hex. bolt (M8 x 25 mm) Steel zinc plated BS 3692 Gr. 8.8
8 Body Gunmetal BS EN 1982 CC491K or BS 1400 LG2
10 Pushrod Stainless steel ASTM A276 316L
13 Valve Stainless steel AISI 420
16 Cap Brass BS 2872 CZ 122
17 Cap gasket Stainless steel reinforced exfoliated graphite
18 Spring range ID disc Polypropylene
19 Bulkhead plate Stainless steel 316L
CTLS Issue 8
44 Control systems
Full lift capacities for safety valve sizing purposes: C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
Kv 1.5 2.5 3.0 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156


(x 100 = kPa)
10
½" - DN15
Steam capacity
kg/h ¾" - DN20
1" - DN25
½" - DN15
Compressed air
free air
1" - DN25
* dm 3 /s = I/s, 1 I/s d 2 c.f.m.


where it will be seen that either a ½" BRV2S5 or BRV2B5 will be required.
CTLS Issue 8
Control systems
½" 83 32 62 130 25 40 2
¾" 96 32 62 130 25 40 2
1" 108 32 62 130 25 40 2
4.6
C 11
B F Withdrawal distance

Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco ½" BRV2S5 pressure reducing valve with gunmetal body, screwed BSP connections, stainless steel
bellows and fitted with an orange spring for downstream pressure control of 3.5 to 8.6 bar g.
CTLS Issue 8
44 Control systems
Spare parts 18
Available spares
Grey 0.14 to 1.7 bar g 4, 18
Pressure
* adjustment Green 1.40 to 4.0 bar g 4, 18
spring
Bellows Stainless steel or

* assembly specify type
phosphor bronze
5, 6
* Spring housing hex. bolts (set of 4) 7
Valve and seat assembly 6, 11, 12, 19

Pressure 7
* Gasket set 6, 12, 17 adjustment Spring housing
spring hex. bolts
How to order spares

'Available spares' and state the size, type and pressure range of the
reducing valve.
Example: 1 off Pressure adjustment spring (orange), having a 4

4.6 downstream pressure range of 3.5 to 8.6 bar g for a Spirax Sarco ½"
BRV2S5 pressure reducing valve.
12
Bellows
assembly
6
6
19 6
Valve and seat

assembly Gasket set
11
12 12
or
Item Part Nm
mm
7 Hex. bolts 13 A/F M8 x 25 18 - 24 7
11 Valve seat 32 A/F 108 - 132
16 Bottom cap 32 A/F 65 - 75
CTLS Issue 8
Control systems

TI-P186-05
CTLS Issue 8
SRV2S
Stainless Steel
Pressure Reducing Valve
18
4.6
13
Description
The SRV2S is a compact, stainless steel, direct acting pressure
reducing valve designed for applications using steam or gases such as
compressed air. All wetted parts are constructed in 316L stainless steel.
SRV2S pressure reducing valves are supplied with one of three colour
coded springs which are identified by the disc (18) located on the
adjustment handwheel (2):
Note: Where control spring ranges overlap always use the lower range to give better control.
Standards
This product fully complies with the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED).
Certification

½", ¾" and 1" screwed BSP ( BS 21 Rp ) or NPT.
DN15, DN20 and DN25 Flanged EN 1092 PN25 and ANSI 150.
Page 1 of 6
44 Control systems
Temperature °C
Steam
saturation
curve
Pressure bar g
Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service 19 bar g

0 °C
4.6 Maximum downstream reduced pressure 8.6 bar g

CTLS Issue 8
SRV2S Stainless Steel Pressure Reducing Valve
Control systems
Materials
18
20
2
3
LM6
1 Spring housing Aluminium 4
Electroless nickel finish 23
2 Adjustment handwheel Plastic Polypropylene 7
DIN 1691 GG 20 1
3 Top spring plate Cast iron
Electroless nickel finish
BS 2803 685 A55 6

Pressure adjustment Silicon chrome
4 Range 2
spring spring steel 5
Electroless nickel finish 10
19
5 Bellows assembly Stainless steel 316Ti/316L
9
Bellows assembly
6 Reinforced exfoliated graphite
gasket 12
11
Hex. bolt
7 Stainless steel BS 6105 A 270 13
(M8 x 25 mm)
15
DIN 1.4404 14
BS 3100 316 C12 8
8 Body Stainless steel
ASTM A351 CF 3M
External electropolish finish
17 16 4.6
9 Guide bush Graphite filled PTFE
ASTM A276 316L

15
10 Pushrod Stainless steel
BS 3100 316 C 12 Note:
Items 9, 10, 11, 13, 14 and 15 are all part of
ASTM A351 CF 3M
11 Valve seat Stainless steel DIN 1.4404 one assembly.
13 Valve Stainless steel 316L
16 Bottom cap Stainless steel ASTM A276 316L
17 Bottom 'O' ring PTFE
Spring range identity

18 Plastic Polypropylene
disc
BS 1449 316 S13

19 Bulkhead plate Stainless steel
AISI 316L
DIN 1.4404
Flanges BS 3100 316 C12
21 Stainless steel
(not shown) ASTM A351 CF 3M
Electropolish finish
22 Washer Stainless steel 316L
BS 970 230 M07

23 Drive spindle Carbon steel
Electroless nickel finish
CTLS Issue 8
44 Control systems
Full lift capacities for safety valve sizing purposes : C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
Kv 1.5 2.5 3.0 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156


(x 100 = kPa)
16
½" - DN15
Steam capacity
kg/h ¾" - DN20
1" - DN25
½" - DN15
Compressed air
free air
1" - DN25
* dm 3 /s = I/s, 1 I/s d 2 c.f.m.


where it will be seen that a ½" SRV2S will be required.
CTLS Issue 8
Control systems
Size Weight
* *
A B C D E1 E2 F Screwed Flanged
½" BSP/NPT 83 - - 62 130 25 15 - 1.48 -
PN25 - 150 - 62 130 25 15 97 - 3.1

DN15
ANSI 150 - - 140 62 130 25 15 91 - 2.4
¾" BSP/NPT 96 - - 62 130 25 15 - 1.58 -
PN25 - 150 - 62 130 25 15 107 - 3.8

DN20
ANSI 150 - - 140 62 130 25 15 100 - 2.8
1" BSP/NPT 108 - - 62 130 25 15 - 1.70 -
PN25 - 160 - 62 130 25 15 117 - 4.4

DN25
ANSI 150 - - 153 62 130 25 15 110 - 3.6
* Note: E1 and E2 are withdrawal distances for maintenance.
* E1
4.6
17
D
C C
* E2
A B

Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco ½" screwed BSP SRV2S pressure reducing valve with stainless steel body and bellows, fitted with an
orange spring for a downstream pressure control of 3.5 to 8.6 bar g.
CTLS Issue 8
44 Control systems
Spare parts 18
The spare parts available are shown in heavy outline.
Available spares
Grey 0.14 to 1.7 bar g 4, 18 Spring housing
Pressure adjustment hexagon bolts
* spring Green 1.40 to 4.0 bar g 4, 18
7
* Bellows (Stainless steel) 5, 6
* Spring housing hex. bolts (set of 4) 7 Pressure

adjustment
Valve and seat assembly 6, 11, 12, 15, 19 spring
* Set of gaskets/'O' rings 6, 12, 17
How to order spares

headed 'Available spares' and state the size, type and pressure
range of the reducing valve.
downstream pressure range of 3.5 to 8.6 bar g for a Spirax Sarco
DN15 SRV2S pressure reducing valve.
4.6 4
18
5
Bellows set
6 6
19
Valve
and seat
assembly 11
12
12
15
Gasket set
17
CTLS Issue 8
Control systems

TI-P210-01
CTLS Issue 5
BRV71 and BRV73

SG Iron
Description
The BRV71 (screwed) and BRV73 (flanged) are SG iron bodied direct acting pressure reducing valves designed for applications
using steam.
The BRV71 and BRV73 pressure reducing valves are supplied with one of three colour coded springs which are identified by the
disc (13) located on the adjustment handwheel:

Note: Where control spring ranges overlap always use the lower
range to give better control.
4.6
Sizes and pipe connections 19
1", 1¼", 1½" and 2" screwed BSP and NPT.
DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50 flanged PN16, JIS 10 and ANSI 150.
13
Page 1 of 6
44 Control systems
184
Temperature °C
150
Steam
100 saturation
curve
50
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Pressure bar g
Maximum allowable pressure 16 bar g @ 120 °C
Maximum allowable temperature 184 °C @ 10 bar g
Minimum allowable temperature - 10 °C

0 °C
4.6 Maximum downstream reduced pressure 9 bar g
CTLS Issue 5
BRV71 and BRV73 SG Iron Pressure Reducing Valves
Control systems
Materials
15
13
6
5
4
7
2
21
8
9 3
11
1
12
17
16
4.6
25
10
21
26
19
20
24 23 18 22
DIN 1693 GGG 40.3 13 Printed cap Polypropylene

1 Body assembly SG iron
ELNP coated
15 Locking pin Copper
Pressure
Silicon Head
2 adjustment BS 2803 685 A55
chrome 16* (incorporating Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
control spring
seal Pt No.27)
Carbon
3 Adjustment screw BS 970 230 M07 17 Screen Stainless steel 316L
steel
Stainless 18 Lower pushrod Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29

4 Plain washer Gr.18/10/3-4A
steel
DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
19 End cap SG iron
5 Adjustment knob Mineral filled nylon 66 10B 140 ELNP coated
Chrome plated 20 Screw Zinc plated steel BS 3692 Gr. 8.8

6 Spirol pin AISI 420
stainless steel
21 Screw Zinc plated steel BS 3692 Gr. 8.8
7 Spring plate Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 20
22 Washer Stainless steel BS 1449 304 515
8 Spring housing Aluminium 2ELNP coated
23 Guide bush PTFE 15% graphite filled
9 Upper gasket Semi-rigid graphite laminated
10 Lower gasket Semi-rigid graphite laminated
25 PTFE washer Virgin PTFE BS 6564 Type 2 Gr. B
11 Bellows assembly Stainless steel 316L
26 'O' ring seal EPDM E 0962-90
Bellows/pushrod Stainless steel/PTFE
12 316L 27* Head 'O' ring seal EDPM E 0962-90
assembly 15% graphite fill
*Note: Parts 16 and 27 are not shown.
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Steam and compressed air capacity chart
10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
5 6
5
4
4
3
3 Upstream pressure bar g
(x 100 = kPa)
2
4.6 2
22 1
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
1" - DN25
Steam 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 1¼" - DN32
capacity
kg/h 0 200 400 600 800 1 000 1½" - DN40
0 200 400 600 800 1 000 1 200 1 400 2" - DN50
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 1" - DN25

Compressed air 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 1¼" - DN32
capacity dm 3 /s*
free air 0 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 1½" - DN40
0 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 440 2" - DN50
* dm 3 /s = I/s, 1 I/s  2 c.f.m.


where it will be seen that DN25 BRV71 or BRV73 will be required.
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
Kv values
Full lift capacity for safety valve sizing purposes are shown below:
Size 1" - DN25 1¼"- DN32 1½"- DN40 2" - DN50 For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
Kv 9.3 11.1 15.7 16.2 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156

Scr. BSP/NPT PN16 ANSI 150 JIS 10 Weight
Size A B B B C D E F G Scr. *Flg
DN25 - 1" 134 174 170 170 67 153 90 25 84 4.40 5.90
DN32 - 1¼" 134 179 174 175 67 153 90 25 84 4.20 7.65
DN40 - 1½" 134 186 183 180 67 153 90 25 84 4.95 8.55
DN50 - 2" 134 186 186 180 67 153 90 25 84 4.75 9.40

*Note: Flanged weights are typical of the BRV73 model and the figures quoted are based on the PN16 version.
4.6
23
G
A
B
F Withdrawal distance

Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco 1" screwed BSP BRV71 pressure reducing valve with SG iron body, stainless steel bellows and fitted with
an orange spring for a downstream pressure control of 3.5 to 9.0 bar g.
CTLS Issue 5
44 Control systems
Spare parts Q
Available spares
Note the spares listed are common to all sizes L
Grey 0.14 to 1.7 bar g K, Q
Pressure adjustment spring Green 1.40 to 4.0 bar g K, Q
Orange 3.50 to 9.0 bar g K, Q
Control bellows - Stainless steel J
Bellows pushrod assembly,

E, C, H
(Sub assembly, head, 'O' rings, lower pushrod and balancing bellows)
Bottom cap B
Strainer screen G
Return spring and gasket set F
Spring housing (Set of 4) L K

Bolt set
Bottom cap (Set of 4) A
Return spring D J
F
4.6 How to order spares
spares' and state the size, type and pressure range of the reducing valve.
24 Example: 1 off Pressure adjustment spring (orange), having a downstream pressure
H
range of 3.5 to 9.0 bar g for a Spirax Sarco 1" BRV71 pressure reducing valve.
F
Gasket
set
D
F
CTLS Issue 5
Control systems
4.6
25
44 Control systems
Pressure reducing/surplussing
Local regulations mayvalves
restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.
TI-P001-07
CH Issue 5
LRV2B and LRV2S

Gunmetal
Description
The LRV2B and LRV2S are direct acting pressure reducing valves 19
suitable for liquid applications. 21
Available types
LRV2B Phosphor bronze / brass bellows 2
LRV2S Stainless steel (316 Ti / 316L) bellows
LRV2B and LRV2S pressure reducing valves are supplied with one
of three colour coded springs which are identified by the disc (19)
located on the adjustment handwheel:
3
4
Orange For downstream pressure control: 3.50 to 8.6 bar g 7
4.6 Note: where control spring ranges overlap always use the
range to give better control.
lower
1
26 Sizes and pipe connections
½", ¾" and 1" Screwed BSP (BS 21 Rp) or NPT.

6
Temperature °C
9

5

20
10

Pressure bar g 8
12
This product must not be used in this region.
11
16
14
PMO Maximum operating pressure 14 bar g @ 75°C
TMO Maximum operating temperature 75°C @ 14 bar g 15
Minimum operating temperature 0°C 13
18
DPMX Maximum differential pressure is limited to the PMO
17
Note: With internals fitted, test pressure must not exceed 17 bar g
Materials No. Part Materials

No. Part Materials 10 Push rod Stainless steel ASTM A276 316L
1 Spring housing Aluminium epoxy coated LM 24 11 Valve seat Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
2 Adjustment handwheel Polypropylene 12 Valve seat gasket Stainless steel BS 1449 316 S11
3 Top spring plate Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 20 13 Piston Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
4 Pressure adjustment Silicon chrome BS 2803 685 A55 14 Valve head Nitrile rubber
spring spring steel Range 2 15 Piston return spring Stainless steel BS 2056 Gr. 302 S26
Stainless steel 316Ti / 316L 16 Strainer screen Stainless steel BS 1449 316 S16
5 Bellows assembly
Phosphor bronze BS 2872 CZ 122 17 Cap Brass BS 2872 CZ 122
Stainless steel reinforced Stainless steel reinforced
6 Bellows assembly gasket 18 Cap gasket
exfoliated graphite exfoliated graphite
7 Hex. bolt (M8 x 25 mm) Steel zinc plated BS 3692 Gr. 8.8 19 Spring range ID disc Polypropylene
8 Body Gunmetal BS 1400 LG2 20 Bulkhead plate Stainless steel 316L
9 Cone shaped washer Stainless steel ASTM A276 316L 21 Tamper-proof pin Mild steel copper plated
Control systems
Capacities Spare parts
Full lift capacity for safety valve sizing purposes are shown below: The spare parts available are shown in heavy outline. Parts drawn
Size ½" ¾" 1" in broken line are not supplied as spares.
Kvs 2.1 3.6 4.3 Available spares

For conversion: Cv (UK) = Kv x 0.963 Cv (US) = Kv x 1.156 * Pressure Grey 0.35 to 1.7 bar g 4, 19
adjustment Green 1.40 to 4.0 bar g 4, 19
Dimensions / weight (approximate) in mm and kg spring Orange 3.50 to 8.6 bar g 4, 19
Size A B C D E F Weight Stainless steel or
* Bellows assembly specify type 5, 6, 9
½" 83 32 62 130 25 40 2.0 phosphor bronze
¾" 96 32 62 130 25 40 2.1 * Spring housing hex. bolts (set of 4) 7
Valve and seat assembly 6, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20
1" 108 32 62 130 25 40 2.4
* Gasket set 6, 12, 18
* Strainer screen 16
E Withdrawal * Common to all sizes.

distance How to order spares
headed 'Available spares' and state the size, type and pressure range
of the reducing valve.
downstream pressure range of 3.5 to 8.6 bar g for a Spirax Sarco
½" LRV2S pressure reducing valve.
19
D
7 4.6
Spring housing
Pressure
hex. bolts 27
adjustment
spring
B F Withdrawal
distance
9
A Bellows assembly
5
6 6
Safety information, installation and maintenance 6
(IM-P001-08) supplied with the product. 20
Installation note: 11
The valve should be installed in a horizontal pipeline with the
direction of flow as indicated by the arrow on the valve body. 12 12
Valve
How to order and seat
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco ½" LRV2S pressure reducing valve assembly
with gunmetal body, screwed BSP connections, stainless steel Gasket set
bellows and fitted with an orange spring for downstream pressure
control of 3.5 to 8.6 bar g.
Please note that the only certification that is available for this
product is a manufacturer's Typical Test Report. Note: All 13, 14, 15
certification / inspection requirements must be stated at the
time of order placement. 18
16

or
Item no. Part Nm
mm
7 Hex. bolts 13 A/ F M8 x 25 13 - 15
11 Valve seat 32 A/ F 108 - 132
16 Bottom cap 32 A/ F 65 - 75
TI-P001-07 CH Issue 5 LRV2B and LRV2S Gunmetal Pressure Reducing Valves

44 Control systems
4.6
28
Control systems

TI-P203-01
CTLS Issue 19
DRV4 and DRV4G

Cast Steel
Description
The DRV4 is a cast steel direct acting bellows sealed pressure reducing valve. The standard version has an EPDM diaphragm and
is suitable for steam, water and air applications. The DRV4 is available with a Nitrile rubber diaphragm (suffix 'N') for oil applications.
A Nitrile rubber soft seated version (suffix 'G', limited to 90 °C) is also available for applications that require tight shut-off. It is
recommended that for these applications, a maximum pressure turndown ratio of 10:1 is observed.
Note: To protect the actuator diaphragm on steam applications a WS4 water seal pot must be installed in the downstream pressure
signal line to the actuator. Refer to TI-S12-03 for details.
Available types
DRV4 and DRV4G are available in 6 pressure ranges (suffix 1-6).
Downstream pressure ranges:

Range Valve type Actuator Spring Pressure PN
4.6
type colour range
(bar)
rating
29
1 DRV4(G)B1(N) 1 or 1N Yellow *0.1 - 0.6 2.5
2 DRV4(G)B2(N) 2 or 2N Yellow **0.2 - 1.2 2.5
3 DRV4(G)B3(N) 3 or 3N Blue 0.8 - 2.5 6.0
4 DRV4(G)B4(N) 4 or 4N Blue 2.0 - 5.0 16.0
5 DRV4(G)B5(N) 5 or 5N Blue 4.5 - 10.0 25.0
6 DRV4(G)B6(N) 5 or 5N Red 8.0 - 20.0 25.0
* DN32 to DN50 Range 0.15 - 0.6, DN65 to DN100 Range 0.3 - 0.6
** DN65 to DN100 Range 0.4 - 1.2.

Flanged EN 1092 PN40.
JIS and ASME 150 and ASME 300 flanges are also available on request.
Certification
Note : All certification/inspection requirements must be stated at the time
of order placement.
Kvs values
Size DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Kvs 3.4 6.5 11.4 16.4 24 40 58 92 145
Note: The Kvs values shown above are full capacities and should be used
for safety valve sizing purposes where they are required.
Page 1 of 11
44 Control systems
A B C
Temperature °C
Steam Maximum design pressure 40 bar g @ 50 °C

saturation
curve DRV4 300 °C @ 25.8 bar g
F F DRV4G 90 °C @ 37.3 bar g
E D
Pressure bar g
DRV4 300 °C @ 25.8 bar g
The product must not be used in this region. DRV4G 90 °C @ 37.3 bar g
A-C-D Flanged EN 1092 PN40 and ASME 300. Minimum operating temperature 0 °C
A-B-E Flanged ASME 150.
DN15 - DN50 25 bar
F-F The DRV4G is limited to 90 °C. DN65 - DN100 20 bar
4.6
Materials
30
No. Part Material
1 Body Cast steel GP 240 GH
2 Bonnet Cast steel DIN 17425 GS C25
DN15 Stainless steel
4 Seat gasket DN20 and DN25 Mild steel
DN32 to DN50 Reinforced exfoiliated graphite
DRV4 Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29

5 Valve head
DRV4G (soft seated) Stainless steel/Nitrile BS 970 431 S29
6 Valve head screw DN15 and DN20 Stainless steel BS 6105 A2
7 Valve head seal Arlon 1555
8 Bush DN15 and DN20 Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
9 Bush (part of item 10) DN25 to DN100 Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
10 Balancing bellows assembly DN25 to DN100 Stainless steel AISI 316 (L)
11 Balancing bellows gasket DN25 to DN100 Reinforced exfoiliated graphite
12 Bonnet gasket Reinforced exfoiliated graphite
13 Bonnet nuts Steel DIN 267 Pt13 Gr. 8
DN15 to DN40 M10
14 Bonnet studs DN50 and DN65 M12 Steel DIN 267 Pt13 Gr. 8.8
DN80 and DN100 M16
15 Pillars Steel zinc plated BS 970 230 M07
16 Pillars nuts Steel zinc plated BS 3693 Gr. 8
17 Spring adjuster Cast iron zinc plated DIN 1691 GG 25
Page 2 of 11 TI-P203-01
CTLS Issue 19
DRV4 and DRV4G Cast Steel Pressure Reducing Valves
Control systems
6 (DN15 and DN20 only)
3 4
5
7
11
9 8
12
2
10 13
(DN25 to DN100) 14
17 DN15 and DN20
4.6
12 31
16
15 11
DN65 to DN100
DN25 (parts 15 and 16 not shown)
For part numbers 18 to 46, please go to page 4
TI-P203-01 Page 3 of 11
CTLS Issue 19
44 Control systems
Materials
For part numbers 1 to 17, please go to page 2
No. Part Material
18 Spring(s) Chrome Vanadium
19 Bush (part of 20) PTFE/steel composite
20 Sealing bellows assembly Stainless steel AISI 316(L)
DN15 and DN20 Stainless steel 'S' type

21 Sealing bellows gasket
22 Clamp nut DN25 to DN100 Steel zinc plated BS 970 230 M07
DN32 to DN50 Steel zinc plated BS 970 230 M07

25 Lock-nut DN15 to DN25,
Steel zinc plated BS 3692 Gr. 8
DN65 to DN100
26 Spring plate Steel zinc plated BS 1449 Pt1 HR14
27 Needle bearing Steel
28 Setting nut Steel zinc plated BS 970 230 M07
29 Bearing plate DN32 to DN50 Steel zinc plated BS 1449 Pt1 HR14
4.6 30 Circlip DN32 to DN50 Steel zinc plated
32 31 Mounting plate Steel zinc plated BS 1449 Pt1 HR14
32 Housing Types 1(N) to 4(N) Steel DIN 1514 St W24
Type 5(N) Steel BS EN 10025 S355 J2G3
Types 1(N) Steel zinc plated BS 3692 Gr. 5.6

33 Housing screws
Types 2(N), 3(N), 4(N)
Steel zinc plated BS 3692 Gr. 8.8
and 5(N)
Types 1(N) Steel zinc plated BS 3692 Gr. 5

34 Housing nuts Types 2(N), 3(N), 4(N)
Steel zinc plated BS 3692 Gr. 8
and 5(N)
Diaphragm EPDM fabric reinforced

35
Diaphragm suffix 'N' Nitrile fabric reinforced
36 Hex. headed bolt Stainless steel BS 6105 A2
37 Sealing washer Fibre
38 Diaphragm clamp Stainless steel ASTM A351 CF8M
39 Piston Steel zinc plated BS 1449 Pt1 HR14
40 Spindle Steel zinc plated BS 970 230 M07
41 Mounting nuts Steel zinc plated BS 3692 Gr. 8
42 Coupling Steel zinc plated
43 Thread insert DN15 and DN20 Stainless steel DTD 734
44 Self-locking nut DN25 to DN100 Stainless steel BS 6105 A2
45 Clamp plate DN65 to DN100 Stainless steel ASTM A276 316L
46 Clamp plate gasket DN65 to DN100 Reinforced exfoliated graphite
Page 4 of 11 TI-P203-01
CTLS Issue 19
Control systems
43
44
DN15 and DN20
18 20
4.6
22
33
21 19
25
27
26
28
31
40
41
DN65 to DN100
32
39
34
33
46
42
45
35 38 37 36
DN25 (parts 15 and 16 not shown)

30
29
25
28
DN32 to DN50
TI-P203-01 Page 5 of 11
CTLS Issue 19
44 Control systems
Spare parts for the DN15 and DN20 valves
The spare parts available for sizes DN15 and DN20 valves are detailed below. No other parts are supplied as spares.
The listed parts are for the following valve types:
DRV4 Stainless steel seated

Valve assemblies
DRV4G Nitrile soft seated
Types 1 to 5 EPDM diaphragm

Actuator assemblies
Types 1N to 5N Nitrile diaphragm
Available spares
Coupling A
Diaphragm set Diaphragm and sealing washer. B, C
Needle bearing D
Sealing bellows set Sealing bellows assembly, sealing bellows gasket and bonnet gasket. E, F, G
4.6 Control spring(s) I
34 Seat/head set Seat, seat gasket, head, bonnet gasket and head seal. J, K, L, G, H
Gasket set Sealing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket and seat gasket. F, G, K
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Gasket set for a Spirax Sarco DN15 DRV4B1 pressure reducing valve.
How to fit spares

Full fitting instructions are given in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare(s).
Page 6 of 11 TI-P203-01
CTLS Issue 19
Control systems
DN15 to DN20
K J
L H
4.6
F
35
C A
TI-P203-01 Page 7 of 11
CTLS Issue 19
44 Control systems
Spare parts for the DN25 to DN100 valves
The spare parts available for sizes DN25 to DN100 valves are detailed below. No other parts are supplied as spares.

Valve assemblies

Actuator assemblies
Available spares
Coupling A
Needle bearing D
Sealing bellows set DN65 to DN100. Sealing bellows assembly, sealing bellows gasket, and clamp plate gasket E, F, R
4.6 Control spring(s) I
36 Seat/head set DN25 to DN50 Seat, seat gasket, head, self-locking nut, head seal and bonnet gasket. J, K, L, W, H, G
Head, self-locking nut, head seal, bonnet gasket and balancing bellows
Head set DN65 to DN100 L, W, H, G, M
gasket.
Balancing bellows assembly, balancing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket,

DN25 to DN50 N, M, G, H, W, F
head seal, self-locking nut, and sealing bellows gasket.
Balancing
bellows set
Balancing bellows assembly, balancing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket,
DN65 to DN100 N, M, G, W, H
self-locking nut and head seal.
Sealing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket, seat gasket and balancing

DN25 to DN50 F, G, K, M
bellows gasket.
Gasket set
Sealing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket, balancing bellows gasket and
DN65 to DN100 F, G, M, R
clamp plate gasket.
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Gasket set for a Spirax Sarco DN25 DRV4B1 pressure reducing valve.
How to fit spares

Full fitting instructions are given in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare(s).
Page 8 of 11 TI-P203-01
CTLS Issue 19
Control systems
J K W
W
L L
H
H
M
G N G
I
N I
E
E 4.6
37
F
D
D
C B A B C A
DN65 to DN100
TI-P203-01 Page 9 of 11
CTLS Issue 19
44 Control systems
Flanged Actuator type
Size 1 2 3 4 5+6
EN 1092 PN40 ASME 300 ASME 150
A1 A1 A1 B C B C B C B C B C
DN15 130 130 127 537 305 511 250 426 208 426 168 411 143
DN20 150 150 143 537 305 511 250 426 208 426 168 411 143
DN25 160 162 153 546 305 520 250 435 208 435 168 420 143
DN32 180 181 176 608 305 582 250 497 208 497 168 482 143
DN40 200 203 198 608 305 582 250 497 208 497 168 482 143
DN50 230 233 229 611 305 585 250 500 208 500 168 485 143
DN65 290 297 295 633 305 607 250 522 208 522 168 507 143
DN80 310 319 314 639 305 613 250 528 208 528 168 513 143
DN100 350 366 350 744 305 718 250 633 208 633 168 618 143
A1
4.6
38
DRV with
Type 1/1N or
Type 2/2N
actuator B
Type 3/3N and 4/4N actuator arrangement Type 5/5N actuator arrangement
Page 10 of 11 TI-P203-01
CTLS Issue 19
Control systems
Valve weight (kg)
Yellow spring 11 12.4 14.6 19.8 21.2 25.2 35.5 41.3 58.3
Blue spring 11 12.4 14.6 19.8 21.2 25.2 35.5 41.3 58.3
Red spring 12 13.4 15.6 21.2 22.6 26.6 37.3 43.1 60.9
Actuator weight (kg)

Actuator type 1 or 1N 2 or 2N 3 or 3N 4 or 4N 5 or 5N
Weight 12.3 6.5 3.9 2.5 2.6
Note:
To calculate the total product weight add the valve and actuator weights together.

Installation note:
Caution - To protect the actuator diaphragm on steam applications a WS4 series water seal pot must be installed in the
downstream pressure signal line to the actuator. Refer to TI-S12-03 for details.
The valve should be mounted vertically downwards in a horizontal pipeline with the direction of flow as indicated by the arrow on the
valve body. For applications with downstream temperatures below 125 °C the valve can alternatively be mounted vertically upwards. 4.6
39
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN40 DRV4B3 direct acting pressure reducing valve flanged PN40.
Note: Add suffix 'N' if the Nitrile rubber diaphragm is required. i.e. DRV4B3N.
TI-P203-01 Page 11 of 11
CTLS Issue 19
44 Control systems
4.6
40
Control systems

TI-P204-01
CTLS Issue 15
DRV7 and DRV7G

SG Iron
Description
The DRV7 is an SG iron direct acting bellows sealed pressure reducing valve. The standard version has an EPDM diaphragm and is
suitable for steam, water and air applications. The DRV7 is available with a Nitrile rubber diaphragm (suffix 'N') for oil applications.
A Nitrile rubber soft seated version (suffix 'G', limited to 90 °C) is also available for applications that require tight shut-off. It is
recommended that for these applications a maximum pressure turndown ratio of 10:1 is observed.
Note: To protect the actuator diaphragm on steam applications a WS4 water seal pot must be installed in the downstream pressure
signal line to the actuator. Refer to TI-S12-03 for details.
Available types:
DRV7 and DRV7G are available in 6 pressure ranges (suffix 1-6).
Downstream pressure ranges: 4.6

Range Valve type Actuator Spring Pressure PN Rating
type colour range bar 41
1 DRV7(G)B1(N) 1 or 1N Yellow *0.1 - 0.6 2.5
2 DRV7(G)B2(N) 2 or 2N Yellow **0.2 - 1.2 2.5
3 DRV7(G)B3(N) 3 or 3N Blue 0.8 - 2.5 6.0
4 DRV7(G)B4(N) 4 or 4N Blue 2.0 - 5.0 16.0
5 DRV7(G)B5(N) 5 or 5N Blue 4.5 - 10.0 25.0
6 DRV7(G)B6(N) 5 or 5N Red 8.0 - 20.0 25.0
* DN32 to DN50 Range 0.15 - 0.6, DN65 to DN100 Range 0.3 - 0.6
** DN65 to DN100 Range 0.4 - 1.2.

DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80 and DN100.
Standard flanges: EN 1092 PN16 and PN25
Flanges available on request: ASME 150 and JIS
Kv values
Size DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Kv 3.4 6.5 11.4 16.4 24 40 58 92 145
Note: The Kv values shown above are full capacities and should be used for safety
valve sizing purposes where they are required.
Flanged
DN15 to DN100
Page 1 of 10
44 Control systems
A B C D

Temperature °C

1
Steam
saturation
H H
curve G F E 4
3

Pressure bar g

A-D-E Flanged EN 1092 PN25
A-C-G Flanged EN 1092 PN16 2
A-B-F Flanged ASME 150.
H-H The DRV7G is limited to 90 °C
Maximum design DRV7 300 °C @ 17.5 bar g

temperature DRV7G 90 °C @ 25 bar g
4.6 Minimum design
0 °C
42 temperature
Maximum operating DRV7 300 °C @ 17.5 bar g

temperature DRV7G 90 °C @ 25 bar g

Note: For lower operating temperatures 0 °C
consult Spirax Sarco
Maximum differential DN15 - DN50 25 bar

pressure DN65 - DN100 20 bar
DN25
No. Part Material
DN15 to DN50 SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3

1 Body
DN65 to DN100 SG iron ENG JS 400-18-LT
2 Bonnet SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3

Valve seat
4 DN20 and DN25 Mild steel
gasket
Page 2 of 10 TI-P204-01
CTLS Issue 15
DRV7 and DRV7G SG Iron Pressure Reducing Valves
Control systems
No. Part Material
Stainless
DRV7 BS 970 431 S29
steel
5 Valve head DRV7G Stainless
(soft steel / BS 970 431 S29
seated) Nitrile
5
Valve head DN15 and Stainless 7
6 BS 6105 A2
screw DN20 steel * 11
7 Valve head seal Arlon 1555 9
12
DN15 and Stainless
8 Bush BS 970 431 S29 2
DN20 steel
* 10 13
Bush DN25 to Stainless 14
9 BS 970 431 S29
(part of item 10) DN100 steel
Balancing 17
DN25 to Stainless
10 bellows AISI 316 (L)
DN100 steel
assembly
Balancing DN25 to Reinforced exfoiliated 18 20

11
bellows gasket DN100 graphite
Reinforced exfoiliated
12 Bonnet gasket
graphite 4.6
43
DN15 to
M10
DN40
22
DN50 and
14 Bonnet studs M12 Steel DIN 267 Pt13 Gr. 8.8 21 19
DN65
DN80 and
M16
DN100
Steel zinc
15 Pillars BS 970 230 M07
plated
Steel zinc
16 Pillars nuts BS 3693 Gr. 8
plated
Cast iron
17 Spring adjuster zinc DIN 1691 GG25
plated
18 Spring(s) Chrome Vanadium
19 Bush (part of 20) PTFE / steel composite
Stainless
20 Sealing bellows assembly AISI 316(L)
steel
DN15 and DN25

Stainless steel 'S' type
Sealing bellows DN20
21
gasket DN25 to Reinforced exfoiliated
DN100 graphite
* Please note:
DN25 to Steel zinc
22 Clamp nut BS 970 230 M07 Parts numbered 10 and 11 are for DN25 to DN100 only
DN100 plated
TI-P204-01 Page 3 of 10
CTLS Issue 15
44 Control systems
Steel zinc
DN32 to DN50 BS 970 230 M07
plated
25 Lock-nut
DN15 to DN25, Steel zinc
BS 3692 Gr. 8
DN65 to DN100 plated
Steel zinc
26 Spring plate BS 1449 Pt1 HR14
plated
44
Steel zinc
28 Setting nut BS 970 230 M07
plated
Steel zinc
29 Bearing plate DN32 to DN50 BS 1449 Pt1 HR14
plated
30 Circlip DN32 to DN50 Steel zinc plated
Steel zinc
31 Mounting plate DN25 to DN50 BS 1449 Pt1 HR14
plated
Types 1(N) to
Steel DIN 1514 St W24
4(N)
32 Housing
BS EN 10025 S355
Type 5(N) Steel
J2G3
4.6 Types 1(N)

Steel zinc
plated
BS 3692 Gr. 5.6
44
33 Housing screws
Types 2(N), 3(N), Steel zinc
BS 3692 Gr. 8.8
4(N) and 5(N) plated
Steel zinc
Types 1(N) BS 3692 Gr. 5
plated
34 Housing nuts
Types 2(N), 3(N), Steel zinc
BS 3692 Gr. 8
4(N) and 5(N) plated
25
Diaphragm EPDM fabric reinforced
35 27
Diaphragm suffix 'N' Nitrile fabric reinforced
26
Stainless 28
36 Hex. headed bolt BS 6105 A2 31
steel 40
37 Sealing washer Fibre 41
Stainless 32
38 Diaphragm clamp ASTM A351 CF8M 39
steel
34
Steel zinc
39 Piston BS 1449 Pt1 HR14 33
plated
Steel zinc 42
40 Spindle BS 970 230 M07
plated
Steel zinc
41 Mounting nuts BS 3692 Gr. 8
plated 35 38 37 36
42 Coupling Steel zinc plated DN25

Stainless
43 Thread insert DN15 and DN20 DTD 734
steel
Stainless
44 Self-locking nut DN25 to DN100 BS 6105 A2
steel
Page 4 of 10 TI-P204-01
CTLS Issue 15
Control systems
No. Part Material
Valve head DN15 and Stainless

6 BS 6105 A2
screw DN20 steel
DN15 and Stainless

8 Bush BS 970 431 S29
DN20 steel
Balancing DN25 to Reinforced exfoiliated

11
bellows gasket DN100 graphite 12
16
Reinforced exfoiliated
12 Bonnet gasket
graphite
Steel zinc
15 Pillars BS 970 230 M07 11
plated
Steel zinc
16 Pillars nuts BS 3693 Gr. 8 15
plated
DN32 to Steel zinc

BS 970 230 M07
DN50 plated
25 Lock-nut DN15 to
DN25, Steel zinc
BS 3692 Gr. 8
DN65 to plated
DN100
28 Setting nut
Steel zinc
plated
BS 970 230 M07
DN65 to DN100
4.6
29 Bearing plate
DN32 to Steel zinc
BS 1449 Pt1 HR14
45
DN50 plated
DN32 to
30 Circlip Steel zinc plated
DN50
DN15 and Stainless

43 Thread insert DTD 734
DN20 steel
6 (DN15 and DN20 only)

29
30
28
25
43
DN15 and DN20 DN32 to DN50
TI-P204-01 Page 5 of 10
CTLS Issue 15
44 Control systems
The spare parts available for sizes DN15 and DN20 valves are detailed below. No other parts are supplied as spares.

Valve assemblies
Actuator assemblies
Available spares
Coupling A
Needle bearing D
Sealing bellows set Sealing bellows assembly, sealing bellows gasket and bonnet gasket. E, F, G
Control spring(s) I
Seat/head set Seat, seat gasket, head, bonnet gasket and head seal. J, K, L, G, H

46 headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of valve.
K J
Example: 1 - Gasket set for a Spirax sarco DN15 DRV7B1
L H
pressure reducing valve.
How to fit spares G

Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare(s).
C
A
DN15 and DN20
Page 6 of 10 TI-P204-01
CTLS Issue 15
Control systems
The spare parts available for sizes DN25 to DN100 valves are
detailed below. No other parts are supplied as spares.
The listed parts are for the following valve types: J K

W
L
Valve DRV7 Stainless steel seated H
M
assemblies DRV7G Nitrile soft seated
G N
Actuator Types 1 to 5 EPDM diaphragm

assemblies Types 1N to 5N Nitrile diaphragm
Available spares
Coupling A
E
I
Diaphragm set
B, C
Diaphragm and sealing washer.
Needle bearing D
F
Sealing bellows set
Sealing bellows assembly, and sealing E, F
bellows gasket. D
Control spring(s) I
Seat / head set DN25 to DN50

Seat, seat gasket, head, self-locking nut, J, K, L, W, H, G B 4.6
head seal and bonnet gasket.
Head set DN65 to DN100

47
Head, self-locking nut, head seal, bonnet L, W, H, G, M A
C
gasket and balancing bellows gasket.
Balancing bellows set DN25 to DN50 DN25 to DN50

Balancing bellows assembly, balancing
N, M, G, H, W, F
bellows gasket, bonnet gasket, head seal,
self-locking nut, sealing bellows gasket.
Balancing bellows set DN65 to DN100

N, M, G, W, H
bellows gasket, bonnet gasket, self-locking
nut and head seal.
Gasket set DN25 to DN50

Sealing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket, F, G, K, M
seat gasket and balancing bellows gasket.

Sealing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket and F, G, M
balancing bellows gasket.
Available spares for DN65 to DN100 on the next page
TI-P204-01 Page 7 of 10
CTLS Issue 15
44 Control systems
Available spares
Coupling A
Diaphragm set W
B, C
Needle bearing D
L
H
Sealing bellows set
Sealing bellows assembly, and sealing E, F
bellows gasket.
G
Control spring(s) I
Seat / head set DN25 to DN50 M

Seat, seat gasket, head, self-locking nut, J, K, L, W, H, G N
head seal and bonnet gasket.
Head set DN65 to DN100

Head, self-locking nut, head seal, bonnet L, W, H, G, M
gasket and balancing bellows gasket.
Balancing bellows set DN25 to DN50 I

N, M, G, H, W, F
bellows gasket, bonnet gasket, head seal,
self-locking nut, sealing bellows gasket. E
Balancing bellows set DN65 to DN100

4.6 bellows gasket, bonnet gasket, self-locking
N, M, G, W, H
F
nut and head seal.
48 Gasket set DN25 to DN50
Sealing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket, F, G, K, M
seat gasket and balancing bellows gasket.

D
Sealing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket and F, G, M
balancing bellows gasket.
How to order spares

headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of valve.
Example: 1 - Gasket set for a Spirax sarco DN25 DRV7B1

pressure reducing valve.
How to fit spares

Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare(s). B C A
DN65 to DN100
Page 8 of 10 TI-P204-01
CTLS Issue 15
Control systems
Flanged Actuator type
EN 1092 ASME
Size 1 2 3 4 5+6
PN25 150
A1 A1 B C B C B C B C B C
DN15 130 127 537 305 511 250 426 208 426 168 411 143
DN20 150 143 537 305 511 250 426 208 426 168 411 143
DN25 160 153 546 305 520 250 435 208 435 168 420 143
DN32 180 176 608 305 582 250 497 208 497 168 482 143
DN40 200 198 608 305 582 250 497 208 497 168 482 143
DN50 230 229 611 305 585 250 500 208 500 168 485 143
DN65 290 295 633 305 607 250 522 208 522 168 507 143
DN80 310 314 639 305 613 250 528 208 528 168 513 143
DN100 350 350 744 305 718 250 633 208 633 168 618 143
A1
4.6
49
DRV with Type 3 / 3N or 4 / 4N Type 5 / 5N actuator

flanged connections and actuator arrangement arrangement
Type 1 / 1N or 2 / 2N actuator
TI-P204-01 Page 9 of 10
CTLS Issue 15
44 Control systems
Valve weight (kg)
Yellow spring 10.8 11.8 14 18.8 20.4 23.0 31.7 38.2 53.9
Weight Blue spring 10.8 11.8 14 18.8 20.4 23.0 31.7 38.2 53.9
Red spring 11.8 12.8 15 20.2 21.8 24.4 33.5 40.0 56.5
Reduction for Screwed body -1.7 -2.2 -2.2 -3.6 -3.9 -5.5 - - -
Note: To calculate the total product weight add the valve and actuator weights together.

Actuator type 1 or 1N 2 or 2N 3 or 3N 4 or 4N 5 or 5N
Weight 12.3 6.5 3.9 2.5 2.6

Installation note:
downstream pressure signal line to the actuator. Refer to TI-S12-03 for details.
4.6 The valve should be mounted vertically downwards in a horizontal pipeline with the direction of flow as indicated by the arrow on the
valve body. For applications with downstream temperatures below 125 °C the valve can alternatively be mounted vertically upwards.
50
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN40 DRV7B3 direct acting pressure reducing valve having flanged PN40 connections.
Note: Add suffix 'N' if the Nitrile rubber diaphragm is required. i.e. DRV7B3N.
Page 10 of 10 TI-P204-01
CTLS Issue 15
Control systems

TI-P186-01
CTLS Issue 11
SRV461S and SRV463S

Stainless Steel
Direct Acting Pressure Reducing Valves
Description
Types SRV461S and SRV463S are direct acting pressure reducing valves with all wetted parts in AISI 316L/1.4404, 1.4408 and 1.4462
stainless steel. For steam, liquid or gas applications.
Typical applications include: Clean steam, gas and liquid supplies to centrifuges, freeze dryers, sterilisers, autoclaves, process tanks,
humidifiers and culinary equipment.

½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½" and 2"
SRV461S
Screwed NPT, BSP

SRV463S
Flanged ASME (ANSI) 150, EN 1092 PN16 4.6
51
Pressure ranges
The SRV461S and SRV463S are available 0.02 - 0.12 bar g
for use within the downstream pressure
ranges shown. 0.10 - 0.50 bar g
0.30 - 1.10 bar g

Note: The pressure range required needs
to be specified at the time of order 0.80 - 2.50 bar g
placement:
2.00 - 5.00 bar g
4.00 - 8.00 bar g
6.00 - 12.00 bar g
Page 1 of 6
44 Control systems

Temperature °C
A B

D
SRV461S
Steam E
saturation
curve C F

Pressure bar g

Temperature °C
A B

D
SRV463S
Steam E
saturation
curve C F

Pressure bar g
The product should not be used in this region or beyond its operating range as damage to the internals may occur.
4.6 A-B-C Maximum operating conditions for steam
52 D-E-F Maximum operating conditions for liquids and gases
SRV461S PN40
SRV463S PN16
SRV461S 38 bar g @ 38 °C
SRV463S 15.2 bar g @ 50 °C
SRV461S 300 °C @ 23.2 bar g

SRV463S 300 °C @ 9 bar g
Steam 190 °C @ 10.9 bar g

Liquid and gases 130 °C @ 12 bar g

-10 °C
Note: for lower operating temperatures consult Spirax Sarco
Permissible reduction ratio (maximum P1/P 2)

Setting range Nominal diameter
(bar g)
G½" - 1" G1¼" - 2"
DN15 - DN25 DN32 - DN50
0.02 - 0.12 80:1 50:1
0.10 - 0.50 40:1 25:1
0.30 - 1.10 30:1 18:1
0.80 - 12.00 20:1 12:1
SRV461S 60 bar g
SRV463S 24 bar g
CTLS Issue 11
SRV461S and SRV463S Stainless Steel Direct Acting Pressure Reducing Valves
Control systems
Materials
3
No. Part Material Werkstoff AISI
No. Equivalent 9
1 Body Stainless 1.4404 316L

steel
5
2 Spring Stainless 1.4404 316L 16
4
housing steel
3 Cap Stainless 1.4571 316Ti

steel
4 Valve seat Stainless 1.4404 316L

steel
1
5 Valve Stainless 1.4404 316L
steel
6 Diaphragm EPDM/PTFE 10
14
8
7 'O' ring EPDM 7
8 'O' ring EPDM

6
9 'O' ring EPDM 11
10 Piston Stainless
steel
1.4571 316Ti 4.6
11 Top spring Stainless 1.4571 316Ti
53
plate steel
2
12 Spring Stainless 1.4310 301*
steel
13 Adjustment Stainless 1.4404 316L

screw steel
12
14 V band Stainless AISI 300
clamp steel series 17
15 Flange (not Stainless 1.4404 316L

shown) steel
16 Soft seal Fluoraz

13
(FEPM) =
17 Spring clip Stainless 1.4301 304

steel
* Not a direct equivalent, nearest AISI specification is given.
= For hydrocarbon applications an optional soft seal is available in FPM (Viton) - please consult Spirax Sarco.
CTLS Issue 11
44 Control systems
A1 A1
A A
B B
Sensing pipe connection Sensing pipe connection

¼" BSPT ¼" BSPT
C C
Leakage line connection Leakage line connection

¼" BSPT (option) ¼" BSPT (option)
D D
Size All pressure Pressure range (bar) Pressure range (bar)

ranges
0.02 - 0.12 0.1 - 0.5 0.3 - 1.1 0.8 - 2.5 4-8
4.6 and
2-5
and
8 - 12
54 A A1 B C ØD C ØD C ØD C ØD C ØD
DN15 ½" 85 130 76 300 360 300 264 300 200 235 138 235 138
DN20 ¾" 91 150 76 300 360 300 264 300 200 235 138 235 138
DN25 1" 85 160 76 300 360 300 264 300 200 235 138 235 138
DN32 1¼" 130 180 80 300 360 300 264 300 200 235 138 235 138
DN40 1½" 145 200 80 300 360 300 264 300 200 235 138 235 138
DN50 2" 185 230 80 300 360 300 264 300 200 235 138 235 138
½" - 1" Screwed 13.5 7.1 6.1 3.1 3.1
DN15 - DN25 Flanged 15.3 8.9 7.9 4.9 4.9
1¼"- 2" Screwed 14.4 8.0 7.0 4.0 4.0
DN32 - DN50 Flanged 18.4 12.0 11.0 8.0 8.0
Kv values
Valve size ½" ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"
Kv at 20% offset 4.0 5.6 6.4 17.6 17.6 17.6
Maximum Kv 5.0 7.0 8.0 22.0 22.0 22.0
To maximise the control accuracy (especially for large load variations) use the Kv values given at 20% offset. For safety valve sizing
use the maximum Kv values. Leakage rate £ 0.05% of the maximum Kv value.
CTLS Issue 11
Control systems
The required Kv can be calculated from the following formulae.
Where:
= Steam mass flow (kg/h)
= Liquid volume flow (m 3 /h)
= Gas flow at standard conditions: 0 °C @ 1.013 bar a (m³/h)
= Upstream pressure (bar absolute)
= Downstream pressure (bar absolute)
P1 - P 2
= (pressure drop factor)
P1
= Specific gravity
= Absolute average gas temperature (Kelvin = °C + 273)
Selecting valve type and nominal diameter

Using the required maximum flowrate and smallest differential pressure P1 - P2 , calculate the required Kv from one of the adjacent
formulae. Select a valve whose Kv value is 30% greater than the calculated K v. The optimum working range of the selected valve should
ideally be within the range of 10 to 70% of its Kv.
4.6
You should also note the reduction ratio (inlet pressure P1 divided by outlet pressure P2). If this exceeds the quoted pressure reduction
ratio for the valve being considered the valve will not close. 55
Critical pressure drop: P2 £ 0.58 P1
KV
P1
Steam
Non-critical pressure drop: P2  0.58 P1
KV
P1 2
KV
Gas P1 P2 P1 P2
KV
Liquid P1 P2
Steam Saturated 10 to 40 m/s Superheated 15 to 60 m/s
Recommended fluid velocities Gas up to 2 bar g 2 to 10 m/s above 2 bar g 5 to 40 m/s
Liquids 1 to 5 m/s
CTLS Issue 11
44 Control systems
Installation note:
Note that for use on steam, the spring housing must be below the pipework. A downstream pressure sensing pipe is also required.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco ½" NPT SRV461S direct acting pressure reducing valve having a pressure range of 0.8 to 2.5 bar g.
Spare parts
Available spares
Diaphragm and 'O' ring kit 6, 7, 8, 9, 16
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size, model and pressure
range.
Example: 1 - Diaphragm and 'O' ring kit for a Spirax Sarco DN15 SRV463S direct acting pressure reducing valve with FEPM seat seal
and having a pressure range of 0.8 to 2.5 bar g.
4.6 9
56
16
8
7
CTLS Issue 11
Control systems

TI-P205-01
CTLS Issue 12
DEP7
SG Iron
Excess Pressure Valve
Description
The DEP7 is an SG iron direct acting bellows sealed excess
pressure valve. The standard version has an EPDM diaphragm
limited to 125 °C and is suitable for steam and water
applications. Also available for oil applications is a Nitrile rubber
diaphragm (suffix 'N' i.e. DEP7B1N which is limited to 90 °C) .
Note: To protect the actuator diaphragm on steam
applications a WS4 water seal pot must be installed in the
upstream pressure signal line to the actuator.
Refer to TI-S12-03 for further details.
Standards
The products listed below comply with the requirements of the EU
4.6
Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment (Safety)
Regulations and carry the mark when so required.
57
Certification
This product is available with a manufacturers' Typical Test
Report.
Available types:
DN15 to DN100 flanged connections.
The DEP7 is also available in a choice of 6 pressure ranges
(suffix 1 - 6): Flanged
DN15 to DN100
Upstream pressure ranges:

Pressure range (bar)
Range Valve type Actuator type Spring colour PN Rating
DN15 - DN40 DN50 - DN80 DN100
1 DEP7B1 11 or 11N Yellow 0.1 - 0.5 0.1 - 0.3 0.1 - 0.3 2.5
2 DEP7B2 12 or 12N Yellow 0.2 - 0.8 0.2 - 0.5 0.2 - 0.5 2.5
3 DEP7B3 13 or 13N Blue 0.5 - 1.7 0.4 - 1.3 0.4 - 1.0 6
4 DEP7B4 14 or 14N Blue 1.4 - 3.4 1.0 - 2.6 0.8 - 2.5 16
5 DEP7B5 15 or 15N Blue 3.2 - 7.5 2.3 - 5.5 2.3 - 5.0 25
6 DEP7B6 15 or 15N Red 7.0 - 16.0 5.0 - 15.0 4.0 - 10.0 25

Standard flanges: EN 1092 PN16 or PN25
Flanges available on request: ASME 150 and JIS
Page 1 of 11
44 Control systems
A B C D
Temperature °C
G F E
Pressure bar g
A-D-E Flanged EN 1092 PN25
A-C-G Flanged EN 1092 PN16
A-B-F Flanged ASME 150
Note: In the case of liquid service, this product is to be used only on intermittent duty. Applications such as continuous pump recirculation
may cause valve and pipework damage due to cavitation which is not covered under the terms of our warranty.
4.6 Minimum design temperature 0 °C
EPDM diaphragm 125 °C

58 Maximum operating temperature
Nitrile diaphragm 90 °C
Minimum operating temperature (ambient)

0 °C
DN15 - DN50 25 bar

DN65 - DN100 20 bar
Kvs values
Size DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Kvs 3.4 6.5 11.4 16.4 24 40 58 92 145
Note: The Kvs values shown above are full capacities and should be used for safety valve sizing purposes where they are required.
Page 2 of 11 TI-P205-01
CTLS Issue 12
DEP7 SG Iron Excess Pressure Valve
Control systems
Materials
6
8
DN25 to DN50
1
15
DN15 to DN20
4
3
5
7
11
12 9
12
2
13 11
10
14
4.6
15
59
DN65 and DN100
No. Part Material
DN15 to DN50 SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3

1 Body
DN65 to DN100 SG iron ENG JS 400-18-LT
2 Bonnet SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
4 Valve seat gasket DN20 and DN25 Mild steel
8 Bush DN25 to DN20 Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
10 Balancing bellows assembly DN25 to DN100 AISI 316L
11 Balancing bellows gasket DN25 to DN100 Reinforced exfoliated graphite
DN15 to DN40 M10
14 Bonnet studs DN50 and DN65 M12 Steel DIN 267 Pt13 Gr. 8.8
DN80 and DN100 M16
15 Pillars Zinc plated steel BS 970 230 M07
Materials are continued on the next page
TI-P205-01 Page 3 of 11
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
No. Part Material
16 Pillars nuts Zinc plated steel BS 3693 Gr. 8
17 Spring adjuster Zinc plated cast iron DIN 1691 GG25
18 Spring(s) Chrome vanadium
19 Bush (part of item 20) PTFE/steel composite
20 Sealing bellows assembly Stainless steel AISI 316L

22 Clamp nut DN25 to DN100 Zinc plated steel BS 970 230 M07
25 Lock-nut Zinc plated steel BS 970 230 M07
26 Spring plate Zinc plated steel BS 1449 Pt 1 HR14
28 Setting nut Zinc plated steel BS 970 230 M07
29 Bearing locator Zinc plated steel BS 970 230 M07
30 Adjuster sleeve Zinc plated steel
4.6 31 Mounting plate (not shown) Zinc plated steel BS 1449 Pt 1 HR14
60 32 Housing
Types 11(N) to 14(N) Steel DIN 1514 St W24
Types 11(N) to 12(N) Zinc plated steel BS 3692 Gr. 5.6

33 Housing screws
Types 13(N), 14(N) and 15(N) Zinc plated steel BS 3692 Gr. 8.8

34 Housing nuts
Types 13(N), 14(N) and 15(N) Zinc plated steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
35 Spindle guide Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
36 Diaphragm EPDM fabric reinforced or suffix 'N' Nitrile fabric reinforced
37 Hexagon headed bolt Stainless steel BS 6105 A2
40 Piston Zinc plated carbon steel BS 1449 Pt 1 HR14
41 Spindle Zinc plated carbon steel BS 970 230 M07
42 Mounting nuts Zinc plated steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
43 Coupling Zinc plated steel
45 Self-locking nut DN25 to DN100 Zinc plated steel BS 1449 CR4
46 Washer Type 12(N) only Zinc plated steel BS 1449 CR4
47 Circlip Zinc plated steel
48 Spindle seal 'O' ring EPDM or suffix 'N' Nitrile
49 Bearing bush PTFE/steel composite
Page 4 of 11 TI-P205-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
No. Part Material
DN25 to DN50
(Parts 42 and 46 are not shown) Housing
50 seal 'O' EPDM or suffix 'N' Nitrile
ring
51 Vent plug Plastic
Coupling Zinc plated

52 ASTM A216 Gr. WCB
clamp steel
53 Spring Spring steel BS 5216 Gr. M4
45 Clamp Zinc plated

54 BS 4168 Gr. 12.9
screw steel
16
30 4.6
61
17
44
18
16
20
22
DN15 to DN20
21 19
25
28
54
53
52
27
26 29
31
41 49
47 39
50 43
35
34
48
33
40
36
38 51
37 32
TI-P205-01 Page 5 of 11
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
Sizing and selection for steam applications
The sizing chart below can be used to determine the Kv value of the valve for steam applications by plotting:
- Upstream pressure.
- Maximum valve pressure drop.
- Maximum steam load.
Where the Kv value is known, the chart can be used to determine pressure drop across the valve for any given flowrate.
Kv sizing example:
Maximum flowrate 1 500 kg/h
Upstream pressure 9 bar g (10 abs)
Maximum pressure drop 0.5 bar
Draw a horizontal line A - B at 10 abs.

At intersection with 0.5 pressure drop draw a vertical line C - D. Note: The sizing chart is
Draw a vertical line E - F at 1 500 kg/h. empirical and should not be
At intersection G, read the required Kv = 28. used for critical applications.
Valve size required DN50 having the next highest Kv of 40.
Inlet pressure bar a (abosolute)
Cr i
tic a
4.6 Pr
l pr
ess
ure
es dro
62 Example
line
su
re
p li
ne
dr
op
A ba
r
Steam flow kg/h (÷ 3 600 = kg/s)
Page 6 of 11 TI-P205-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
Sizing and selection for water applications
The sizing chart below can be used to determine the Kv value of the valve for water applications by plotting:
- Maximum flowrate.
Kv sizing example:
Maximum flowrate 10 m 3 /h.
Maximum allowable pressure drop 0.3 bar.
Draw a horizontal line A - B at 10 m 3 /h.

Draw a vertical line C - D at 0.3 bar pressure drop. Note: The sizing chart is
At intersection E, read the required Kv = 19. empirical and should not be
Valve size required DN40 having the next highest Kv of 24. used for critical applications.
4.6
63
Example
line
A
Water flow l/s

Water flow m 3 /h
Pressure drop kPa
Pressure drop m wg
Pressure drop bar
TI-P205-01 Page 7 of 11
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
The spare parts available for sizes DN15 and DN20 valves are detailed below. No other parts for these sizes are supplied as spares.
Available spares How to order spares

Coupling A headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of valve.
Example: 1 - Gasket set for a Spirax Sarco DN15 DEP7B1
Needle bearing D express pressure valve.
Sealing bellows How to fit spares

assembly, sealing Full fitting instructions are given in the Installation and
Sealing bellows set E, F, G, H
bellows gasket, bonnet Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare(s).
gasket and head seal.
Control spring(s) I
Seat, seat gasket,

Seat/head set head, bonnet gasket J, K, L, G, H
and head seal.
Sealing bellows gasket, bonnet

Gasket set F, G, K
gasket and seat gasket.
Spindle guide, bearing K

Actuator spindle bush, spindle seal 'O' J
P, R, S, T, V L
guide assembly ring, housing seal 'O'
ring and circlip. H
G
4.6
64
D
P
R A
T
V
C B
DN15 and DN20
Page 8 of 11 TI-P205-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
Available spares How to order spares

Coupling A headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of valve.
Example: 1 - Gasket set for a DN25 DEP7B1 excess pressure
Needle bearing D valve.
Sealing bellows Sealing bellows assembly and

E, F How to fit spares
set sealing bellows gasket Full fitting instructions are given in the Installation and
Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare(s).
Control spring(s) I
Seat, seat gasket, head,

Seat/head set
self-locking nut, head J, K, L, W, H, G
DN25 to DN50
seal and bonnet gasket.
Head, head seal,

Head set DN65 self-locking nut, bonnet
L, H, W, G, M
to DN100 gasket and balancing
bellows gasket.
Balancing bellows
Balancing
assembly, balancing
bellows set
bellows gasket, bonnet N, M, G, H, F
DN25 to DN50
gasket, head seal and
sealing bellows gasket.
Balancing Balancing bellows

4.6
65
bellows set assembly, balancing
N, M, G, H
DN65 to DN100 bellows gasket,bonnet
gasket and head seal.
Sealing bellows gasket,

Gasket set DN25 bonnet gasket, seat
F, G, K, M
to DN50 gasket and balancing
bellows gasket. W
L
H
Sealing bellows gasket, bonnet
Gasket set DN65
gasket and balancing bellows F, G, M G
to DN100
gasket.
Spindle guide, bearing M

Actuator
bush, spindle seal 'O'
spindle guide P, R, S, T, V
ring, housing seal 'O' ring
assembly N
and circlip.
R
V T
P A
D
S
C B
DN25 to DN100
TI-P205-01 Page 9 of 11
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
Flanged Upstream pressure range
EN 1092 ASME
Size 1 2 3 4 5+6
PN25 150
A1 A1 B C B C B C B C B C
DN15 130 127 553 305 516 250 459 208 459 168 459 143
DN20 150 143 553 305 516 250 459 208 459 168 459 143
DN25 160 153 562 305 525 250 468 208 468 168 468 143
DN32 180 176 632 305 595 250 538 208 538 168 538 143
DN40 200 198 632 305 595 250 538 208 538 168 538 143
DN50 230 229 635 305 598 250 541 208 541 168 541 143
DN65 290 295 635 305 598 250 541 208 541 168 541 143
DN80 310 314 637 305 600 250 543 208 543 168 543 143
DN100 350 350 744 305 707 250 650 208 650 168 650 143
A1
4.6
66
DEP
with flanged connections
and
Type 13/13N or 14/14N actuator
Page 10 of 11 TI-P205-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
Valve weight (kg)
Yellow spring 12.1 12.8 15.7 20.3 22.3 25.5 33.7 38.3 62.3
Weight Blue spring 12.1 12.8 15.7 20.3 22.3 25.5 33.7 38.3 62.3
Red spring 13.6 14.3 17.2 21.8 23.8 27.0 35.4 40.0 64.9
Reduction for screwed body -1.7 -2.2 -2.2 -3.6 -3.9 -5.5 - - -

Actuator type 11 or 11N 12 or 12N 13 or 13N 14 or 14N 15 or 15N Note: To calculate the total product
weight add the valve and actuator
Weight 12.6 6.5 4.0 2.6 2.7 weights together.
Type 11/11 or 12/12N Type 15/15N

actuator arrangement actuator arrangement
4.6
67

For full details see IM-S12-10 supplied with the product.
Installation note:
Caution: To protect the actuator diaphragm on steam applications a WS4 series water seal pot must be installed in the
upstream pressure signal line to the actuator, refer to TI-S12-03 for details.
valve body. For applications with upstream temperatures below 125 °C the valve can alternatively be mounted vertically upwards.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN40 DEP7B3 direct acting pressure reducing valve having flanged PN25 connections.
Note: Add suffix 'N' if the Nitrile rubber diaphragm is required. i.e. DEP7B3N.
TI-P205-01 Page 11 of 11
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
4.6
68
Control systems

TI-P206-01
CTLS Issue 13
DEP4
Cast Steel
Excess Pressure Valve
Description
The DEP4 is a cast steel direct acting bellows sealed excess pressure valve. The standard
version as an EPDM diaphragm (limited to 125 °C) and is suitable for steam and water applications.
Also available for oil applications is a Nitrile rubber diaphragm (suffix 'N' i.e. DEP4B1N which is
limited to 90 °C).
Note: To protect the actuator diaphragm on steam applications a WS4 water seal pot
must be installed in the pressure signal line to the actuator. Refer to TI-S12-03 details.
Standards
The products listed below comply with the requirements of the European Pressure Equipment
Directive (PED) and carry the mark when so required.
Certification 4.6
This product is available with a manufacturers' Typical Test Report and a certifcate of conformity
to EN 10204 3.1 as an optional extra.
69
Available types
DN15 - DN100 flanged connections having 6 pressure ranges (suffix 1 - 6).
Upstream pressure ranges:

Range Valve Actuator Spring Pressure range (bar) PN
type type colour DN15 DN50 DN100 rating
- -
DN40 DN80
1 DEP4B1 11 or 11N Yellow 0.1 - 0.5 0.1 - 0.3 0.1 - 0.3 2.5
2 DEP4B2 12 or 12N Yellow 0.2 - 0.8 0.2 - 0.5 0.2 - 0.5 2.5
3 DEP4B3 13 or 13N Blue 0.5 - 1.7 0.4 - 1.3 0.4 - 1.0 6
4 DEP4B4 14 or 14N Blue 1.4 - 3.4 1.0 - 2.6 0.8 - 2.5 16
5 DEP4B5 15 or 15N Blue 3.2 - 7.5 2.3 - 5.5 2.3 - 5.0 25
6 DEP4B6 15 or 15N Red 7.0 - 16.0 5.0 - 15.0 4.0 - 10.0 25

Standard flange: EN 1092 PN40
Flanges available on request: ASME 150, ASME 300 and JIS.
Kv values
Size DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Kv 3.4 6.5 11.4 16.4 24 40 58 92 145
Note: The Kv values shown above are full capacities and should be used for safety valve sizing purposes where they are required.
Page 1 of 13
44 Control systems
A B C
Temperature °C
Steam
saturation
curve E D
Pressure bar g

A-C-D Flanged EN 1092 PN40 and ASME 300
A-B-E Flanged PN16
Note: In the case of liquid service, this product is to be used only on intermittant duty. Applications such as continuous pump recirculation
may cause valve and pipework damage due to cavitation which is not covered under the terms of our warranty.

EPDM diaphragm 125 °C
Nitrile diaphragm 90 °C
70 Minimum operating temperature (ambient)
0 °C
DN15 - DN50 25 bar

DN65 - DN100 20 bar
Page 2 of 13 TI-P206-01
CTLS Issue 13
DEP4 Cast Steel Excess Pressure Valve
Control systems
Size EN 1092 Flanged ASME Downstream pressure range
PN40 ASME 300 150 1 2 3 4 5+6
A1 A1 A1 B C B C B C B C B C
DN15 130 130 127 553 305 516 250 459 208 459 168 459 143
DN20 150 150 143 553 305 516 250 459 208 459 168 459 143
DN25 160 162 153 562 305 525 250 468 208 458 168 468 143
DN32 180 181 176 632 305 595 250 538 208 538 168 538 143
DN40 200 203 198 632 305 595 250 538 208 538 168 538 143
DN50 230 233 229 635 305 598 250 541 208 541 168 541 143
DN65 290 297 295 635 305 598 250 541 208 541 168 541 143
DN80 310 319 314 637 305 600 250 543 208 543 168 543 143
DN100 350 366 350 744 305 707 250 650 208 650 168 650 143
DEP with Type 13/13N or Type 14/14 actuator

A1
4.6
71
Type 11/11N and Type 15/15N

12/12N actuator arrangement
actuator arrangement
Valve weight (kg)

Yellow spring 11.6 13.3 16.7 21.4 23.7 26.3 37.7 46.0 69.8
Weight Blue spring 11.6 13.3 16.7 21.4 23.7 26.3 37.7 46.0 69.8
Red spring 13.6 14.8 18.2 22.9 25.2 27.8 39.4 47.7 72.5

Actuator type 1 or 1N 2 or 2N 3 or 3N 4 or 4N 5 or 5N Note:
To calculate the total product weight add the valve
Weight 12.3 6.5 4.0 2.6 2.7 and actuator weights together.
TI-P206-01 Page 3 of 13
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Body Cast steel GP 240 GH
2 Bonnet Cast steel DIN 17245 GSC25
4 Valve seat gasket DN20 and DN25 Mild steel
8 Bush DN15 and DN20 Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
10 Balancing bellows assembly DN25 to DN100 AISI 316L
11 Balancing bellows gasket DN25 to DN100 Reinforced exfoliated graphite
4.6 13 Bonnet nuts Steel DIN 267 Pt13 Gr. 8
DN15 to DN40 M10

72 14 Bonnet studs DN50 and DN65 M12 Steel DIN 267 Pt13 Gr. 8.8
DN80 and DN100 M16
15 Pillars Zinc plated steel BS 970 230 M07
16 Pillar nuts Zinc plated steel BS 3693 Gr. 8
17 Spring adjuster Zinc plated cast iron DIN 1691 GG25
18 Spring(s) Chrome vanadium
19 Bearing bush (part of item 20) PTFE/steel composite
20 Sealing bellows assembly Stainless steel AISI 316L

22 Clamp nut DN25 to DN100 Zinc plated steel BS 970 230 M07
25 Lock-nut Zinc plated steel BS 970 230 M07
26 Spring plate Zinc plated steel BS 1449 Pt 1 HR14
28 Setting nut Zinc plated steel BS 970 230 M07
29 Bearing locator Zinc plated steel BS 970 230 M07
30 Adjuster sleeve Zinc plated steel
31 Mounting plate Zinc plated steel BS 1449 Pt 1 HR14
Page 4 of 13 TI-P206-01
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
4
3 6
5
8
7
11 16
9
12 2
13 15
10 14
30
DN15 and DN20
17
18
20
4.6
22
73
21 19
25
28
12
11
27
26
29
31
DN65 to DN100
DN25 to DN50 (part 46 is not shown)
Materials are continued on the next page
TI-P206-01 Page 5 of 13
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
No. Part Material
Types 11(N) to 14(N) Steel DIN 1514 St W24

32 Housing

33 Housing screws
Types 13(N), 14(N) and 15(N) Zinc plated steel BS 3692 Gr. 8.8
Types 11(N) and 12(N) Zinc plated steel BS 3692 Gr. 5.6
34 Housing nuts
Types 13(N), 14(N) and 15(N) Zinc plated steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
35 Spindle guide Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
36 Diaphragm EPDM fabric reinforced or suffix 'N' Nitrile fabric reinforced
37 Hexagon headed bolt Stainless steel BS 6105 A2
40 Piston Zinc plated carbon steel BS 1449 Pt 1 HR14
41 Spindle Zinc plated carbon steel BS 970 230 M07
42 Mounting nuts Zinc plated steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
4.6 43 Coupling Zinc plated steel

74 45 Self-locking nut DN25 to DN100 Zinc plated steel BS 1449 CR4
46 Washer Type 12(N) only Zinc plated steel BS 1449 CR4
47 Cirlclip Zinc plated steel
48 Spindle seal 'O' ring EPDM or suffix 'N' Nitrile
49 Bearing bush PTFE/steel composite
50 Housing seal 'O' ring EPDM or suffix 'N' Nitrile
51 Vent plug Plastic
52 Coupling clamp Zinc plated steel ASTM A216 Gr. WCB
53 Spring Spring steel BS 5216 Gr. M4
54 Clamp screw Zinc plated steel BS 4168 Gr. 12.9
55 Clamp plate DN65 to DN100 only Stainless steel ASTM A276 316L
56 Clamp plate gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
Page 6 of 13 TI-P206-01
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
45
44
DN15 and DN20
4.6
75
52 53
54
41
49
47
42
43 50
35
48
34
33
51
DN65 to DN100
40 49 37 38 32 36
DN25 to DN50 (part 46 is not shown)

56
55
TI-P206-01 Page 7 of 13
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Sizing and selection for steam applications
The sizing chart below can be used to determine the Kv value of the valve for steam applications by plotting:
- Upstream pressure.
- Maximum steam load.
Kv sizing example:
Maximum flowrate 1 500 kg/h
Upstream pressure 9 bar g (10 abs)
Maximum pressure drop 0.5 bar
Draw a horizontal line A - B at 10 abs.

At intersection with 0.5 pressure drop draw a vertical line C - D.
Draw a vertical line E - F at 1 500 kg/h.
At intersection G, read the required Kv = 28.
Inlet pressure bar a (absolute)
Cr i
tic a
l pr
ess
ure
4.6
Pr
es dro
Example su p li
re ne
line
76 A
dr
op
ba
r
Steam flow kg/h (÷3 600 = kg/s)
Note: The sizing chart is empirical and should not be used for critical applications.
Page 8 of 13 TI-P206-01
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
Sizing and selection for water applications
The sizing chart below can be used to determine the Kv value of the valve for water applications by plotting:
- Maximum flowrate.
Kv sizing example:
Maximum flowrate 10 m 3 /h.
Maximum allowable pressure drop 0.3 bar.
Draw a horizontal line A - B at 10 m 3 /h.

Draw a vertical line C - D at 0.3 bar pressure drop.
At intersection E, read the required Kv = 19.
4.6
77
Example
line
A
Water flow l/s

Water flow m3/h
Pressure drop kPa
Pressure drop m wg
Pressure drop bar
Note: The sizing chart is empirical and should not be used for critical applications.
TI-P206-01 Page 9 of 13
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
Available spares
Coupling A
Needle bearing D
Sealing bellows set Sealing bellows assembly, sealing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket and head seal. E, F, G, H
Control spring(s) I
Seat/head set Seat, seat gasket, head, bonnet gasket and head seal. J, K, L, G, H
Actuator spindle guide assembly Spindle guide, bearing bush, spindle seal 'O' ring, housing seal 'O' ring and circlip. P, R, S, T,
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in
the column headed ‘Available spares’ and state the size
and type of valve.
Example: 1 - Gasket set for a Spirax Sarco DN15

DEP4B1 express pressure valve.
J
4.6 How to fit spares
K
L
Full fitting instructions are given in the Installation and H
78 Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare(s). G
S R
A
Y V
D
C B
DN15 and DN20
Page 10 of 13 TI-P206-01
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
The spare parts available for sizes DN25 to DN100 valves are detailed below. No other parts for these sizes are supplied as spares.
Available spares
Coupling A
Diaphragm set B, C
Needle bearing D
Sealing bellows set E, F, X

Sealing bellows assembly, sealing bellows gasket: - Clamp plate gasket DN65 to DN100.
Control spring(s) I
Seat/head set DN25 to DN50 J, K, L, W, H, G

Seat, seat gasket, head, self-locking nut,head seal and bonnet gasket.
Balancing bellows set DN25 to DN50 N, M, G, H, F

Balancing bellows assembly, balancing bellows gasket,bonnet gasket, head seal, sealing bellows gasket.
Gasket set DN25 to DN50 F, G, K, M

Sealing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket, seat gasket, balancing bellows gasket.
Actuator spindle guide assembly P, R, S, T, V

Spindle guide, bearing bush, spindle seal 'O' ring, housing seal 'O' ring and circlip.
How to order spares 4.6

headed ‘Available spares’ and state the size and type of valve.
79
Example: 1 - Gasket set for a DN25 DEP4B1 excess pressure
W
valve.
K
J
L
How to fit spares H
For full fitting instructions see the Installation and Maintenance G
Instructions supplied with the spare(s).
M
I
E
D
R
P
V T
A
S
C B
DN25 to DN50
TI-P206-01 Page 11 of 13
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems
The spare parts available for sizes DN65 to DN100 valves are detailed below. No other parts for these sizes are supplied as spares.
Available spares
Coupling A
Diaphragm set B, C
Needle bearing D
Sealing bellows set E, F, X

Sealing bellows assembly, sealing bellows gasket: - Clamp plate gasket DN65 to DN100.
Control spring(s) I
Head set DN65 to DN100 L, H, W, G, M

Head, head seal, self-locking nut, bonnet gasket and balancing bellows gasket.
Balancing bellows set DN65 to DN100 N, M, G, H

Balancing bellows assembly, balancing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket and head seal.
Gasket set DN65 to DN100 F, G, M, X

Sealing bellows gasket, bonnet gasket, balancing bellows gasket and clamp plate gasket.
Actuator spindle guide assembly P, R, S, T, V

Spindle guide, bearing bush, spindle seal 'O' ring, housing seal 'O' ring and circlip.

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed ‘Available spares’ and state the size and type of valve.
80 Example: 1 - Gasket set for a DN25 DEP4B1 excess pressure valve.
How to fit spares

For full fitting instructions see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the spare(s).
L W
H
G
I
E
X
F F
DN65 to DN100 R
V T
A
P S
C B
DN65 to DN100
Page 12 of 13 TI-P206-01
CTLS Issue 13
Control systems
Installation note:
upstream pressure signal line to the actuator. Refer to TI-S12-03 for details.
valve body. For applications with downstream temperatures below 125 °C the valve can alternatively be mounted vertically upwards.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN40 DEP4B3 direct acting excess pressure valve having flanged PN40 connections.
Note: Add suffix 'N' if the Nitrile rubber diaphragm is required. i.e. DEP4B3N.
4.6
81
TI-P206-01 Page 13 of 13
CTLS Issue 13
44 Control systems Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.

TI-S12-03
CTLS Issue 6
WS4
Water Seal Pot
Description
To be used in conjunction with the DRV or DEP direct acting pressure control valves when process temperature exceeds the maximum
operating temperature of the actuator.
For applications where there is rapid fluctuation of pressures or loads the WS4-3 is recommended.
Available types
WS4 The WS4 is for normal applications up to a volume of 1 litre.
WS4-3 The WS4-3 has a larger 3 litre volume and is recommended where there is rapid fluctuation of pressure or load.
4.6 Sizes and pipe connections

82 Screwed WS4
" BSP Male BS 21
" NPT Male
½" BSP Male BS 21

Inlet Screwed WS4-3
½" NPT Male
WS4 DN10
Butt weld
WS4-3 DN15
Outlet Screwed " BSP Female BS 21 with 8 mm compression fitting.
Materials
No. Part Material 2
1 Housing Carbon steel DIN 1614 St W24
2 Connector Steel
3 Coupling Steel zinc plated

4
4 Plug Steel
5 Tube Carbon steel DIN 1629 St 52
3
Control systems
225
Temperature °C
150 Steam
saturation
100 curve
50
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Pressure bar g

0 °C
Note: With internals fitted, test pressure must not exceed: 25 bar g 4.6
83
A B Weight
WS4 127 157 1.6
WS4-3 127 365 5.4
2 B
WS4-3
4
B
WS4
Available spare
Part No. 3 - Coupling
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco " WS4 water seal pot having screwed BSP connections.
TI-S12-03
CTLS Issue 6
WS4 Water Seal Pot
44 Control systems
4.6
84
Control systems

TI-P006-01
CTLS Issue 14
DP143, DP143G, DP143H and DP143Y

Pilot Operated
Pressure Reducing Valves with Cast Steel Bodies
Description
The DP143, DP143G, DP143H and DP143Y pilot operated pressure reducing valves have been manufactured using cast steel.
DP143 Suitable for steam applications
Is a soft seal version available for compressed air and inert industrial gases. Note: It is not recommended
DP143G
Available types for oxygen service.
DP143H Is a high temperature version for use up to 350 °C.
DP143Y Having a lower rate pressure control spring, making it suitable for steriliser/autoclave applications
4.6
DN15LC - Low Capacity version, DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50 and DN80. 85
Standard flanges: EN 1092 PN40, BS 10 Table 'J' and ANSI 300.
Available on request: ANSI 150 and JIS 20.
Kv values
The Kv maximum values shown below are full capacities and should be used for safety
valve sizing purposes only.
DN15LC DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN80

1.0 2.8 5.5 8.1 12.0 17.0 28.0 64.0
For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Note: Where the internal balance pipe is used the valve capacity will be reduced.
Page 1 of 9
44 Control systems
A B D

Temperature °C

Steam
saturation
curve
F
C G E

bar g
Pressure
Due to the material strength of the main diaphragm chamber the product must not be used in this region.
Use the high temperature DP143H version in this region.
A-D-E Flanged EN 1092, PN40, ANSI 300 and BS 10 Table J.
A-B-C Flanged ANSI 150.
F-G DP143G limited to 120 °C @ 26 bar g.
Note: Two colour coded pressure adjustment springs are available for the following downstream pressure ranges:
Red 0.2 bar g to 17 bar g
4.6
Grey 16.0 bar g to 24 bar g
Yellow 0.2 to 3.0 bar g (DP143Y only)

86
A-B-C 18.9 bar g @ 20 °C

A-D-E Limited to 26 bar g
A-D-E 26 bar g
Maximum upstream pressure for saturated steam service
A-B-C 14 bar g
DP143 300 °C @ 26 bar g
Maximum operating temperature DP143G 120 °C @ 26 bar g
DP143H 350 °C @ 24 bar g

0 °C
A-D-E 26 bar
A-B-C 14 bar
CTLS Issue 14
DP143, DP143G, DP143H and DP143Y Pilot Operated Pressure Reducing Valves with Cast Steel Bodies
Control systems
Materials 1
2
DN15 to DN50
3
4
No. Part Material 5
1 Adjustment screw Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8.8

6
2 Adjustment lock-nut Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
12
3 Washer Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
4 Spring housing Cast steel DIN 17245 GS C25 8

5 Top spring plate Stainless steel BS 970 220 Mo7 7
9
6 Pressure adjustment spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S25 10
11
7 Bottom spring plate Steel BS 970 220 Mo7 21
19
Securing 13
Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
nuts
Spring 15
8
housing Steel BS 4439 Gr. 8.8 14
Securing
studs DN15 to DN80 M10 x 30 mm 16
17
9 Pilot diaphragm Stainless steel BS 1449 316 S31
18
Steel 20 4.6
10 Pilot valve housing DN15 to DN50 DIN 17245 GS C25
DN80 GP 240 GH+N

87
11 Pilot valve plunger Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
12 Spring housing cover Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S12

13 Pilot valve and seat unit
DP143G is stainless steel/nitrile
14 Internal strainer Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
Stainless steel reinforced exfoliated

15 Body gasket
graphite
16 Main valve return spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S16

17 Main valve

18 Main valve seat
19 Balance pipe assembly Stainless steel BS 3605 304 S14
20 Main valve body Cast steel DIN 172 45 GS C25
Securing
Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
nuts

Pilot valve
21
housing Securing DN15 and DN20 M10 x 25 mm
studs DN25 to DN50 M12 x 30 mm For DN15 to DN50, parts 22 to 30, see page 4
DN80 M12 x 40 mm For DN80 parts, see page 4
CTLS Issue 14
44 Control systems
Materials
No. Part Material
22 Main diaphragm chamber Cast steel DIN 17245 GS C25
Securing nuts Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
DN15 and DN20 M12 x 50 mm

23 Main diaphragm
Securing bolts DN25 and DN32 M12 x 60 mm
DN80 M12 x 80 mm
24 Main diaphragms Stainless steel BS 1449 316 S31
25 Main diaphragm plate Stainless steel BS EN 10088-3 1.4307
26 Push rod Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
27 Control pipe assembly Stainless steel BS 3605 304 S14
28 Plug " BSP Steel
29 Pressure pipe union Steel
4.6

88 45 Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
Body nuts
DN15 to DN80 M12 x 40 mm
46 Upper main diaphragm chamber Cast steel 1.0619+N
DN80
26
27
30
25 23
24
22
28
DN15 to DN50
45
46
For DN15 to DN50, parts 1 to 21, see page 3
CTLS Issue 14
Control systems
4.6
89
EN 1092 ANSI 300 ANSI 150 BS 10 Table J

PN40
Sizes A A A A B D E F Weight
DN15 LC 130 130 122 130 175 405 277 128 15
DN15 130 130 122 130 175 405 277 128 15
DN20 150 150 142 150 175 405 277 128 16
DN25 160 160 156 164 216 440 288 152 23
DN32 180 183 176 184 216 440 288 152 25
DN40 200 209 200 209 280 490 305 185 40
DN50 230 236 230 243 280 490 305 185 42
DN80 310 319 310 325 350 580 322 258 103
CTLS Issue 14
44 Control systems
Steam capacities chart

Downstream pressure bar

4.6
90

DN15LC
DN15
DN20

Capacity kg/h
DN25
DN32
DN40
DN50
DN80
Note
The capacities quoted above are based on valves fitted with an external pressure sensing pipe. Reliance on the internal balance pipe
will mean that capacities may be reduced. In the case of low downstream pressure this reduction could be up to 30% of the valve
capacity.

Saturated steam
A valve is required to pass 600 kg/h reducing from 6 bar to 4 bar. Find the point at which the curved 6 bar upstream pressure line
crosses the horizontal 4 bar downstream pressure line. A perpendicular dropped from this point gives the capacities of all DP sizes
under these conditions. A DN32 valve, is the smallest size which will carry the required load.
Superheated steam
Because of the higher specific volume of superheated steam a correction factor must be applied to the figure obtained from the chart
above. For 55 °C of superheat the factor is 0.95 and for 100 °C of superheat the factor is 0.9.
Using the example given for saturated steam, the DN32 valve would pass 740 x 0.95 = 703 kg/h if the steam had 55 °C of superheat.
It is still big enough to pass the required load of 600 kg/h.
CTLS Issue 14
Control systems
Compressed air capacities chart


4.6

91

DN15LC
DN15

Capacity dm 3 /s free air
DN20
DN25
DN32
DN40
DN50
DN80

Capacities are given in cubic decimetres of free air per second (dm 3 /s). The use of the capacity chart can be best explained by an
example. Required, a valve to pass 100 dm 3 /s of free air reducing from 12 bar to 8 bar.
Find the point at which the curved 12 bar upstream pressure line crosses the horizontal 8 bar downstream pressure line. A perpendicular
dropped from this point shows that whereas a DN15LC valve will only pass 57 dm 3 /s and is therefore not large enough, a DN15 valve
will pass approximately 120 dm 3 /s under these conditions and is the correct valve size to choose.

Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN32 DP143 pilot operated pressure reducing valve fitted with a red pressure adjustment spring and
having flanged EN 1092 PN40 connections.
CTLS Issue 14
44 Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
Maintenance kit
A stand-by set of spares for general maintenance purposes and covers all spares marked*
* Main diaphragm (2 off) A
* Pilot diaphragm (2 off) B
Pilot valve seal assembly C
* Pilot valve and plunger assembly D, E
Main valve assembly F, H
* Main valve return spring G
Red DP143, DP143G, DP143H 0.2 to 17 bar
Pressure adjustment spring J
Grey DP143, DP143G, DP143H 16 to 24 bar
Control pipe assembly K
Balance pipe assembly M, N
* Body gasket (packet of 3) O
* Set of spring housing securing studs and nuts (set of 4) P
* Set of pilot valve housing securing studs and nuts (set of 4) Q
(set of 10) DN15 and DN20
Set of diaphragm chamber securing bolts and nuts R
4.6 (set of 20) DN80
92 Set of main body studs and nuts (DN80) (set of 6) T

Pushrod and main diaphragm plate assembly V, W, X
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of pressure
reducing valve.
Example: 1 - Main valve assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN15 DP143 pressure reducing valve.
How to fit. See the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the pressure reducing valve. Further copies are available
on request.
diaphragm used in the following sizes: DN15LC, DN15 and DN20 is common to these sizes by the letter 'a'. The letter 'b' indicates that
sizes DN25 and DN32 use one common diaphragm.
Some parts, particularly pilot and main valve assemblies are specific to particular models e.g. DP143G Interchangeability is therefore
restricted to model type for some parts.
† Please note for storage purposes: The spare parts marked † are not the same material as those for the DP163, consequently they
may not be compatible for interchangeability.
**
Size DN15LC DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN80
Main diaphragm a a a b b c c d
Pilot diaphragm a a a a a a a a
Pilot valve seal assembly a a a a a a a a
Pilot valve and plunger assembly a a a a a a a a
Main valve assembly a b c d e f g h
Main valve return spring a a a b b c c d
Pressure adjustment spring a a a a a a a a
† Control pipe assembly a a b c d e f g
† Balance pipe assembly a a b c d e f g
† Body gasket a a a b b c c d
† Set of spring housing securing studs and nuts a a a a a a a a
† Set of pilot valve housing securing studs and nuts a a a b b c c d
† Set of diaphragm chamber securing bolts and nuts a a a b b c c d
† Set of main body studs and nuts − − − − − − − a
** Not available for the DP143G
CTLS Issue 14
Control systems
P
V
M
K
O
E W
X
P
G 4.6
F
A 93
H
B R
arrangement of main diaphragm chamber DN80 size only.
CTLS Issue 14
44 Control systems
4.6
94
Control systems

TI-P107-01
CTLS Issue 12
DP163, DP163G and DP163Y

Pilot Operated
Pressure Reducing Valves with Stainless Steel Bodies
Description
The DP163, DP163G and DP163Y pilot operated pressure reducing valves have been manufactured using stainless steel.
Available types
DP163 Suitable for steam applications
Is a soft seal version available for compressed air and inert industrial gases.
DP163G
Note: It is not recommended for oxygen service.
DP163Y Having a lower rate pressure control spring is suitable for steriliser/autoclave applications
Standards
This product fully complies with the requirements of the EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment (Safety) Regulations
4.6
and carries the mark when so required. 95
Certification

DN15LC - Low Capacity version, DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50 and DN80.
Standard flanges: EN 1092 PN25 and PN40, BS 10 Table 'J' and ASME (ANSI) 300.
Available on request: ASME (ANSI) 150 and JIS 20.
Kv values
The Kv maximum values shown below are full capacities and should be used for safety valve
sizing purposes only.

1.0 2.8 5.5 8.1 12.0 17.0 28.0 64.0
For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Page 1 of 12
44 Control systems
D
A B
Temperature °C
F
C G E
Pressure bar g

A-D-E Flanged EN 1092 PN40, BS 10 Table J and ASME (ANSI) 300.
A-B-C Flanged ASME (ANSI) 150.
F-G DP163G limited to 120 °C @ 26 bar g.
Yellow 0.2 bar g to 3.0 bar g (DP163Y only)

4.6
96 Body design conditions PN40
A-D-E 36.4 bar g @ 20 °C

A-B-C 18.9 bar g @ 20 °C
A-D-E 25 bar g
A-B-C 14 bar g
A-D-E 250 °C @ 24 bar g

A-B-C 250 °C @ 12.1 bar g

0 °C
A-D-E 25 bar g
A-B-C 14 bar g
Page 2 of 12 TI-P107-01
CTLS Issue 12
DP163, DP163G and DP163Y Pilot Operated Pressure Reducing Valve with Stainless Steel Bodies
Control systems
Materials 1
2
3
4
5
12
8
7
9
10
11
13
14
DN15 to DN50
4.6
97
No. Part Material
1 Adjustment screw Stainless steel BS 6105 A4/80
2 Adjustment lock-nut Stainless steel BS 6105 A4/80
3 Washer Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
4 Spring housing Stainless steel DIN 3100 316 C12
5 Top spring plate Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
6 Pressure adjustment spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S25
7 Bottom spring plate Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
Securing nuts Stainless steel BS 6105 A4/80
8 Spring housing Stainless steel BS 6105 A4/80

Securing studs
10 Pilot valve housing Stainless steel BS 3100 316 C12
13 Pilot valve and seat unit Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
14 Internal strainer Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
Materials continued on the next page
TI-P107-01 Page 3 of 12
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
19
Internal balance pipe
21
15
16
17
18
DN15 to DN50 20
4.6
98
22
No. Part Material
15 Body gasket Stainless steel reinforced exfoliated graphite
16 Main valve return spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S25
17 Main valve Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
18 Main valve seat Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
19 Balance pipe assembly Stainless steel BS 3605 304 S14
20 Main valve body Stainless steel BS 3100 316 C12
Securing nuts Stainless steel BS 6105 A4/80
Stainless steel BS 6105 A4/80
21 Pilot valve housing DN15 and DN20 M10 x 25 mm

Securing studs
DN80 M12 x 40 mm
22 Main diaphragm chamber Cast stainless steel BS 3100 316 C12
Page 4 of 12 TI-P107-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
29
External downstream pressure
sensing pipe union
DN15 to DN50
26
4.6
27 99
30
25 23
24
28
No. Part Material
Securing nuts Stainless steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
Stainless steel BS 6105 A4/80

23 Main diaphragm
Securing bolts DN25 and DN32 M12 x 60 mm
DN80 M12 x 80 mm
24 Main diaphragms Stainless steel BS 1449 316 S31
25 Main diaphragm plate Stainless steel BS EN 10088-3 1.4307
26 Pushrod Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
27 Control pipe assembly Stainless steel BS 3605 304 S14
28 Plug 1/8" BSP Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
29 Pressure pipe union Stainless steel BS 970 316 S31
30 Lock-nut Stainless steel BS 6105 A4/80
TI-P107-01 Page 5 of 12
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
DN80
45
4.6 46
100
No. Part Material
Body nuts Stainless steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
45 Stainless steel BS 6105 A4/80

Body studs
DN80 only M12 x 40 mm
46 Upper main diaphragm chamber Stainless steel BS 3100 316 C12
Page 6 of 12 TI-P107-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
4.6
F 101
EN 1092 PN40 ASME 300 ASME 150 BS 10 Table J
DN15 LC 130 130 122 130 175 405 277 128 15
DN15 130 130 122 130 175 405 277 128 15
DN20 150 150 142 150 175 405 277 128 16
DN25 160 160 156 164 216 440 288 152 23
DN32 180 183 176 184 216 440 288 152 25
DN40 200 209 200 209 280 490 305 185 40
DN50 230 236 230 243 280 490 305 185 42
DN80 310 319 310 325 350 580 322 258 103
TI-P107-01 Page 7 of 12
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
Steam capacities
chart
4.6
102
DN15LC
DN15
DN20
Capacity kg/h
DN25
DN32
DN40
DN50
DN80
Note
The capacities quoted above are based on valves fitted with an external pressure sensing pipe. Reliance on the internal balance
pipe will mean that capacities may be reduced. In the case of low downstream pressure this reduction could be up to 30% of the
valve capacity.

Saturated steam
Superheated steam
Page 8 of 12 TI-P107-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
Compressed air
capacities chart
4.6
103
DN15LC
DN15
DN20
DN25
DN32
DN40
DN50
DN80


Installation note: The valve should be installed in a horizontal pipeline with the direction of flow as indicated by the arrow on the
valve body.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN32 DP163 pilot operated pressure reducing valve fitted with a red pressure adjustment spring and
TI-P107-01 Page 9 of 12
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
Maintenance kit
* Main valve return spring G
Red DP163 and DP163G 0.2 to 17 bar
Grey DP163 and DP163G 16 to 21 bar J

Pressure adjustment spring
Yellow DP163Y and DP163G 0.2 to 3 bar
* Control pipe assembly K
* Balance pipe assembly M, N
4.6 Set of spring housing securing studs and nuts (set of 4) P
104 Set of pilot valve housing securing studs and nuts (set of 4) Q

(set of 20) DN80
Set of main body studs and nuts (DN80) (set of 6) T
Pushrod and main diaphragm plate assembly V
How to order spares

reducing valve.
Example: 1 - Main valve assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN15 DP163 pressure reducing valve.
How to fit - See the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the pressure reducing valve. Further copies are available
on request.
Page 10 of 12 TI-P107-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
P
V
M
K
O
P
G
4.6
F
A
105
H
B R
Arrangement of main diaphragm chamber DN80 size only.
TI-P107-01 Page 11 of 12
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
Some parts, particularly pilot and main valve assemblies are specific to particular models e.g 'DP163G'. Interchangeability is therefore
Please note for storage purposes: The spare parts marked † are not of the same material as those for the DP143, consequently they
are not compatible for interchangeability.
**
Size
Control pipe assembly † a a b c d e f g
Balance pipe assembly † a a b c d e f g
4.6 Body gasket † a a a b b c c d
Set of spring housing securing studs and nuts † a a a a a a a a

106
Set of pilot valve housing securing studs and nuts † a a a b b c c d
Set of diaphragm chamber securing bolts and nuts † a a a b b c c d
Set of main body studs and nuts † − − − − − − − a
** Not available for the DP163G
Page 12 of 12 TI-P107-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems

TI-P208-01
CTLS Issue 4
DPP17E and DPP17EE

Pilot Operated
Pressure Reducing Valves with SG Iron Bodies
Description
The DPP17E is an SG iron pilot operated pressure reducing valve fitted with an additional pressure control pilot. This allows the valve
to reduce the pressure to a lower level when required.
The high pressure pilot is fitted to the main valve body. The reduced pressure pilot is fitted to the side of the main valve. Change over
is achieved by electrical switching of the solenoid.
The DPP17EE has an additional solenoid valve fitted which allows the main valve to be opened and closed by a remote signal.
Sizes and pipe connections Capacities

DN15LC, DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50. See TI-P006-03 for steam and compressed air sizing. A low
Screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT (DN15 to DN25 only). capacity version of the DN15 is available: Type DN15LC. The Kv
Standard DN15 - DN50 BS 4504 PN16 and PN25

maximum values shown below are full capacities and should be
used for safety valve sizing purposes only. 4.6
flanges: DN25 - DN50 BS 10 Table H and ANSI 300 DN15LC 1
107
DN15 - DN50 JIS 10/16 and ANSI 150 DN15 2.8
Available on
DN15 - DN20 BS 10 Table F DN20 5.5
request:
For conversion:
DN15 ANSI 300 DN25 8.1 C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
DN32 12
DPP17E DN40 17
DN50 28
Note: Where the internal downstream pressure sensing pipe is

used the valve capacity will be reduced.
DPP17EE
Page 1 of 9
44 Control systems
Voltages available 230 ±10% Vac or 115 ±10% Vac (others available on request).
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Inrush 45 VA
Power consumption
Holding 23 VA
Temperature °C
Steam saturation
curve
Pressure bar g
Due to the restrictions of the solenoid, the product should not be used in this region.
4.6 Note: The pressure adjustment spring provides the required downstream pressure between 0.2 bar - 17 bar.
PMA Maximum allowable pressure @ 120 °C 25 bar g
PMO Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service 10 bar g

PMX Maximum differential pressure is limited to the PMO
CTLS Issue 4
DPP17E and DPP17EE Pilot Operated Pressure Reducing Valves with SG Iron Bodies
Control systems
Materials 1
2
3
DPP17E
4
5
6
12
7
9
11
10
13
14
16
15
4.6
109
* Note: This product is also available in cast steel.
No. Part Material
3 Washer Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S 16
4* Spring housing SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40
5 Top spring plate Brass BS 2872 CZ 122
6 Pressure adjustment spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S 25
7 Bottom spring plate Brass BS 2872 CZ 122
BS 4439 Gr. 8.8

8 Spring housing securing studs and nuts Steel M10 x 50 mm
BS 3692 Gr. 8
9 Pilot diaphragms Phosphor bronze BS 2870 PB 102 1980
10 * Pilot valve housing SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
11 Pilot valve plunger Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
12 Spring housing cover Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S 12 2A
Pilot valve and seat unit Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29

13
Filter element (not shown) Brass
14 Internal strainer Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S 16
15 Body gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
Materials continued on next page
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
DPP17E
31
29
17
18 32
33
20
26
27
21
4.6 22
30
110 23
24
25
28
No. Part Material
20 * Main valve body SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
BS 4439 Gr. 8.8

21 Main body securing studs and nuts Steel M10 x 25 mm
BS 3692 Gr. 8
22 * Main diaphragm chamber SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
BS 3692 Gr. 8.8

23 Main diaphragm securing bolts and nuts Steel M12 x 50 mm
BS 3692 Gr. 8
24 Main diaphragms Phosphor bronze BS 2870 PB 102 1980
25 Main diaphragm plate Brass BS 2872 CZ 122
26 Push rod Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
28 Plug 1/8" BSP Steel
29 Pressure pipe union Brass
31 Solenoid valve
32 Lower pressure pilot bottom housing SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
33 Connecting nipple Steel
CTLS Issue 4
Control systems
Materials
DPP17EE
31
33
29
31
30
4.6
111
No. Part Material
29 Pressure pipe union Brass
31 Solenoid valve
32 * Lower pressure pilot bottom housing SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
33 * Connecting nipple Steel
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
Screwed BS PN16 ANSI BS ANSI JIS Weight

10 H PN25 300 10 F 150 10/16
Size A A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 B D E F G H Screwed Flanged
DN15LC 160 - 130 126.6 117 120.2 122 185 404 234 130 115 40 15.5 16.0
DN15 160 - 130 126.6 117 120.2 122 185 404 234 130 115 40 15.5 16.0
DN20 160 - 150 - 133 139.4 142 185 404 234 130 115 40 15.5 17.2
DN25 180 160 160 160.0 - 160.0 152 207 428 240 148 115 40 16.5 19.5
DN32 - 180 180 180.0 - 176.0 176 207 428 240 148 115 40 20.5
DN40 - 200 200 200.0 - 199.0 196 255 473 255 178 115 40 32.5
DN50 - 230 230 230.0 - 228.0 222 255 473 255 178 115 40 35.0
H G
4.6
112
A
E
A1

Installation note:
Optional extras
Soft seated main valves and pilot valves can be supplied at additional cost. These are recommended for compressed air and other gas
duties. Maximum temperature with soft seating is 125 °C.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN32 DPP17E pilot operated pressure reducing valve flanged BS 4504 PN25. Fitted with blue and red
pressure adjustment springs and 110 Vac solenoid valve.
CTLS Issue 4
Control systems
For
'Available spares',
'How to order'
and
'How to fit'
go to page 8
is common to the DN40 and DN50 valves. All spares are interchangeable with the DP17T and where marked † are interchangeable
with the 37D temperature control.**
** Note: This does not apply to DP17G soft seat pilot valve or main valve assemblies.
Screwed Flanged
*** **
Size DN ½"LC ½" ¾" 1" 15LC 15 20 25 32 40 50
Main diaphragm a a a b a a a b b c c 4.6

Pilot diaphragms † a a a a a a a a a a a
113
Pilot valve chamber assembly a a a a a a a a a b b
PTFE seals a a a a a a a a a a a
Main valve assembly † a b c d a b c d e f g
Internal strainer † a a a b f f a b c d e
Main valve return spring † a a a b a a a b b c c
Pressure adjustment spring a a a a a a a a a a a
Control pipe assembly † a a a b f f a b c d e
Balance pipe assembly a a a b f f a b c d e
Body gasket † a a a a a a a a a b b
Set of spring housing securing studs and nuts a a a a a a a a a b b
Set of main body studs and nuts † a a a a a a a a a b b
Set of diaphragm securing bolts and nuts † a a a a a a a a a b b
Push rod and main diaphragm plate assembly a a a b a a a b b c c
*** Not available for DP17G
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
Maintenance kit
A stand-by set of spares for general maintenance purposes and covers all spares marked *
Pilot diaphragm * (2 off) B
Pilot valve chamber assembly * C
PFTE seals (packet of 6) E
Yellow 0.2 to 3 bar

Pressure adjustment spring (Not required for DP17R)
Blue 2.5 to 7 bar O
Choice of spring to suit reduced pressure:
Red 6 to 17 bar
Control pipe assembly P
Balance pipe assembly * Q

4.6 Body gasket * (3 off) R
114 Set of spring housing/actuating chamber cover securing studs and nuts * (set of 4) S
½" - DN32 (set of 10)

Set of diaphragm securing bolts and nuts Valve sizes V
DN40 and DN50 (set of 12)
Push rod and main diaphragm plate assembly Y
Type DP17E only

Solenoid valve complete W
Replacement coil X1
Valve seat and core assembly X2
How to order spares

reducing valve.
Example: 1 - Main valve assembly for a 1" Spirax Sarco Type DP17 pressure reducing valve.
How to fit.
See Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the pressure reducing valve. Further copies are available on request.
CTLS Issue 4
Control systems
S
O
DP17R
S

E B
E X1
Q C W
4.6
115
R
X2
T
R
N
Main valve assembly
V
T
K
M Y
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
4.6
116
Control systems

TI-P004-01
CTLS Issue 8
SDP143
Pilot Operated
Pressure Surplussing Valve with Cast Steel Body
4.6
117
Description
The SDP143 is a cast steel pilot operated pressure surplussing valve suitable for steam, air and industrial gasses (Note: It is not
suitable for oxygen service). The SDP143 controls by sensing the upstream pressure through a pressure sensing pipe taken from
the union 29 which is clearly identified on page 4.

DN15LC - Low Capacity version, DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50 and DN80.
Flanged to EN 1092 PN40, BS 10 Table 'J', ANSI 300 and ANSI 150.
Kv values
The Kv maximum values shown below are full capacities and should be used for safety valve sizing purposes only.
DN15LC DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN80 For conversion:
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
1.0 2.8 5.5 8.1 12.0 17.0 28.0 64.0 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Page 1 of 10
44 Control systems
A B D
Temperature °C
Steam
saturation
curve C E
Pressure bar g
Due to the material strength of the main diaphragm chamber the product must not be used in this region.
A-D-E Flanged EN 1092 PN40, ANSI 300 and BS 10 Table J.
A-B-C 17.2 bar g @ 40 °C

4.6 Maximum design pressure
A-D-E Limited to 26 bar g
118 Maximum design temperature 300 °C @ 26 bar g
A-D-E 26 bar g
A-B-C 14 bar g

0 °C
A-D-E 26 bar
A-B-C 14 bar
Page 2 of 10 TI-P004-01
CTLS Issue 8
SDP143 Pilot Operated Pressure Surplussing Valve with Cast Steel Body
Control systems
Materials 1 DN15 to DN50
2
3
4
5
12
8
7
9
10
11
4.6
119
No. Part Material
3 'C' washer Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
4 Spring housing Cast steel DIN 17245 GS C25
5 Top spring plate Steel BS 970 220 Mo7
6 Pressure adjustment spring Stainless steel BS 2056302 S25
7 Bottom spring plate Steel BS 970 220 Mo7
8 Spring housing Steel BS 4439 Gr. 8.8

Securing studs
DIN 17245 GS C25

10 Pilot valve housing Steel
GP 240 GH + N
TI-P004-01 Page 3 of 10
CTLS Issue 8
44 Control systems
Materials
(continued)
No. Part Material Arrangement of main

valve assembly as used
Pilot valve in sizes DN40 and
13 Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29 DN50.
and seat unit
Internal
strainer
Stainless steel reinforced exfoliated

15 Body gasket
graphite
13
16
Main valve
16 Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S25 17
return spring
17 Main valve Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
Main valve
seat DN15 to DN50
Main valve
20 Cast steel DIN 17245 GS C25
body
Securing
Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
nuts
4.6 21
Pilot valve DN15 and
M10 x 25 mm
housing Securing DN20
120 studs DN25 to
M12 x 30 mm
DN50 29
DN80 M12 x 40 mm
Cast
22 Main diaphragm chamber DIN 17245 GS C25
steel 21
Securing 13
Steel BS 3692 Gr.8
nuts 15
14
Steel BS 4882 Gr. 2H
16
DN15 and
M12 x 50 mm 17
Main DN20 18
23
diaphragm Securing DN25 and
M12 x 60 mm 20
bolts DN32
DN40 and 26
M12 x 65 mm
DN50
DN80 M12 x 80 mm 27
30
Main
diaphragms 23
Main
25 diaphragm Stainless steel BS EN 10088-3 1.4307 22
plate
26 Pushrod Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29 28

24 25
Control pipe
assembly
Pressure pipe
29 Steel
union
Page 4 of 10 TI-P004-01
CTLS Issue 8
Control systems
Materials DN80
(continued)
No. Part Material

45 Body nuts
Steel BS 3692 Gr. 2H
M12 x 40 mm
Upper main
46 diaphragm Cast steel DIN 17245 GS C25
chamber
45
46
4.6
121
EN 1092 ANSI ANSI BS 10

PN40 300 150 Table J
DN15LC 130 130 122 130 175 405 277 128 15
DN15 130 130 122 130 175 405 277 128 15
DN20 150 150 142 150 175 405 277 128 16
E DN25 160 160 156 164 216 440 288 152 23
DN32 180 183 176 184 216 440 288 152 25
DN40 200 209 200 209 280 490 305 185 40
DN50 230 236 230 243 280 490 305 185 42

D
DN80 310 319 310 325 350 580 322 258 103
TI-P004-01 Page 5 of 10
CTLS Issue 8
44 Control systems


4.6
122

DN15LC
DN15
DN20

Capacity kg / h
DN25
DN32
DN40
DN50
DN80

Saturated steam
Superheated steam
Page 6 of 10 TI-P004-01
CTLS Issue 8
Control systems


4.6

123

DN15LC
DN15
DN20

Capacity dm3/s free air
DN25
DN32
DN40
DN50
DN80

example. Required, a valve to pass 100 dm3/s of free air reducing from 12 bar to 8 bar.
TI-P004-01 Page 7 of 10
CTLS Issue 8
44 Control systems
Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN32 SDP143 pilot operated pressure surplussing valve fitted with a red pressure adjustment spring and
Spare parts
Available spares
Maintenance kit
4.6 * Main valve return spring G
124 Pressure adjustment spring

Red 0.2 to 17 bar
J
Grey 16 to 24 bar
* Control pipe assembly K
Set of spring housing securing studs and nuts (set of 4) P
Set of pilot valve housing securing studs and nuts (set of 4) Q

(set of 20) DN80
Set of main body studs and nuts (DN80) (set of 6) T
Pushrod and main diaphragm plate assembly V, W, X
How to order spares

reducing valve.
Example: 1 - Main valve assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN15 SDP143 pilot operated pressure surplussing valve.
How to fit: See Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the pressure reducing valve. Further copies are available on
request.
Page 8 of 10 TI-P004-01
CTLS Issue 8
Control systems
P
V
K
O
D
4.6
E
125
W
P X
G
A
F
B R
arrangement of main diaphragm chamber DN80 size only.
TI-P004-01 Page 9 of 10
CTLS Issue 8
44 Control systems
Some parts, particularly pilot and main valve assemblies are specific to particular models e.g 'SDP' 'G'. Interchangeability is therefore
† Please note for storage purposes: The spare parts marked † are not of the same material as those for the DP143 and DP163,
consequently, they are not compatible for interchangeability.
Size DN15LC DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN80
Control pipe assembly † a a b c d e f g
Body gasket † a a a b b c c d
4.6 Set of spring housing securing studs and nuts † a a a a a a a a
126 Set of pilot valve housing securing studs and nuts † a a a b b c c d
Set of diaphragm chamber securing bolts and nuts † a a a b b c c d
Set of main body studs and nuts † − − − − − − − a
Page 10 of 10 TI-P004-01
CTLS Issue 8
Control systems

TI-P186-08
CTLS Issue 15
SRV66
Sanitary Pressure Reducing Valve
Description
The SRV66 is an angle pattern self-draining sanitary pressure regulating valve of all 316 type stainless steel construction suitable for
use on steam, water and inert industrial gases. It is available with sanitary clamp compatible connections, requires no external pressure
sensing line and has clean in place (CIP) and sterilise in place (SIP) capability.
Typical applications include: Clean steam, gas and liquid supplies to bioreactors, centrifuges, freeze dryers, sterilisers, autoclaves,
process tanks, humidifiers and culinary equipment.
Valve tightness
Valve tightness is in accordance with VDI / VDE guideline 2174 (leakage rate < 0.5% of Kvs value).
Standard surface finish and cleaning

Internal wetted parts - Ra < 3.2 µm ultrasonically cleaned.
4.6
Available options, supplied on request at extra cost: 127
For food, pharmaceutical and superclean
Polished version applications with surface roughness:
Ra ≤ 0.25, 0.4 or 0.8 µmA351 CF8
Viton (FEPM) Elastomer soft seat
Aseptic
ASME BPE clamp
ASME or JIS flanges

Special connections
DIN32676 A & B clamps
NPT screwed
Welding spigots
Note: Other connections / constructions available upon request
Oil and grease free
FDA approved diaphragm material
Certification options
The following are available at an additional cost:
- EN10204 3.1 Documentation Pack
- FDA approval for wetted parts
- USP class VI approval for wetted parts
- Surface roughness certificate for wetted surfaces
- Confirmation that the parts in this product contain only

animal-free derivatives

Sizes and connections

CTLS Issue 15
SRV66 Sanitary Pressure Reducing Valve
44 Control systems
Temperature °C
Pressure bar g
Inlet PN10
Outlet see 'Pressure setting range' below
Maximum design pressure 9.5 bar @ 50 °C
Maximum design temperature 300 °C @ 5.8 bar
4.6
Maximum operating pressure (inlet) 8 bar g

128 Minimum operating temperature -10 °C
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of 15.2 bar g
Size DN15 - DN50
Inlet/outlet rating PN10/PN2.5 PN10/PN6 PN10/PN10
Spring range 0.3 - 1.1 bar g 0.8 - 2.5 bar g 1.0 - 5.0 bar g
Maximum permitted outlet pressure = 1.5 times set pressure
Kv values
To maximise the control accuracy (especially for large load variations) use the Kv values given at 20% offset. For safety valve sizing
use the maximum Kv values.
Kv at 20% offset 2.0 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.2
Maximum Kv 2.6 3.9 4.6 5.2 5.9 6.8
CTLS Issue 15
Control systems
Sizing
The required Kv can be calculated from the following formulae:
where:
= Liquid volume flow (m3/h)
= Gas flow at standard conditions: 0 °C @ 1.013 bar a (m3/h)
P1 = Upstream pressure (bar absolute)
P2 = Downstream pressure (bar absolute)
P1 - P2
c = (pressure drop factor)
P1
S = Specific gravity
T = Absolute average gas temperature (Kelvin = °C + 273)
Critical pressure drop: P 2 ≤ 0.58 P1
Steam
Non-critical pressure drop: P 2 ≥ 0.58 P1
4.6
129
Gas
Liquid
Calculating the Kv and selecting a suitable valve

Using your maximum flowrate and smallest differential pressure (P1 – P2), calculate the required Kv from one of the above formulae.
Select a valve Kv that is 30% greater than the calculated Kv. The optimum working range of the selected valve should ideally be within
the range of 10 to 70% of its Kv.
Recommended fluid velocities

Saturated 10 to 40 m/s
Steam
Superheated 15 to 60 m/s
up to 2 bar g 2 to 10 m/s
Gas
above 2 bar g 5 to 40 m/s
Liquids 1 to 5 m/s
CTLS Issue 15
44 Control systems
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Body (integral seat) Stainless steel 1.4404 (316L)
2 Main valve Stainless steel 1.4404 (316L)
3 Spring housing Stainless steel 1.4404 (316L)
4 Adjustment screw Stainless steel BS 6105 A4 70
5 Spring Stainless steel 1.4301 (304)
6 Spring clip Stainless steel 1.4301 (304)
7 Diaphragm nut Stainless steel BS 6105 A4 70
8 Diaphragm plate Stainless steel 1.4404 (316L)
9 'V' band clamp Stainless steel 1.4404 (316L)
10 Diaphragm FPM (Viton) / PTFE
11 'O' ring PTFE
12 'V' band clamp screw Stainless steel BS 6105 A4 70
4.6 4
130
10
12 7
9
8
2 11
1
CTLS Issue 15
Control systems
Dimensions/Weights (approximate) in mm and kg
Pressure range Size A B C Weight B
DN15 - DN25 90 138 200 2.0
1.0 to 5.0 bar and 08. to 2.5 bar DN32 - DN40 120 138 200 2.5
DN50 120 138 200 3.0

C
DN15 - DN25 120 200 200 3.0
0.3 to 1.1 bar DN32 - DN40 120 200 200 3.5
DN50 120 200 200 4.0

Installation note:
The SRV66 should always be fitted with the inlet vertical and the spring housing directly above the valve.
How to order example 4.6

1 off Spirax Sarco DN25 SRV66 direct acting sanitary pressure reducing valve having a pressure range of 1 – 5 bar g a PN10/PN6
rating, FPM diaphragm and ISO 2852 sanitary clamp compatible connections. 131
Spare parts
Available spares
Diaphragm and 'O' ring 10, 11
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size, model and pressure
range.
Example: 1 - Diaphragm and 'O' ring for a Spirax Sarco DN25 SRV66 direct acting pressure reducing valve having a pressure range
of 1 - 5 bar, a PN10/PN6 rating and an FPM diaphragm.
10
12
CTLS Issue 15
44 Control systems
4.6
132
Control systems

TI-P186-10
CMGT Issue 4
SRV66HC
High Capacity
Sanitary Pressure Reducing Valve
Description
The SRV66HC all stainless steel sanitary pressure reducing
valve is a double seated, high capacity, spring loaded
proportional control valve which also benefits from having
a quick release body clamp ring. It is designed for sanitary
applications in the food processing, brewing/beverage and
pharmaceutical industries. The angle design allows for complete
draining with no dead pockets and is suitable for use in CIP and
SIP systems. The valve does not require an external pilot line.
Valve tightness
Valve tightness is in accordance with VDI/VDE guideline 2174
(leakage rate < 0.5% of Kvs value).
4.6
Standard surface finish
Internal wetted parts - standard surface finish of Ra < 3.2 µm. 133
Available options
End connections; ASME BPE hygienic clamp, flanged ASME
or EN 1092, Aseptic thread, welding spigots.
PN10 rated inlet flange for DN65 – DN100 sizes.
Internal surface finishes; Ra 1.6 µm, 0.80 µm, 0.40 µm and

0.25 µm, electropolished.
EPDM diaphragm and 'O' ring seals for gas and liquid service.
Maximum operating temperature when this option is used: 130 °C.
Sealed bonnet with leakage line for toxic or hazardous

media.
For sizes DN65 – DN100 with PN16/PN2.5 (0.3 – 1.1 bar g),
PN16/PN6 (0.8 – 2.5 bar g) and PN10 (2.0 – 5.0 bar g).

ISO 2852 sanitary clamp compatible.
See overleaf
Page 1 of 5
44 Control systems
Materials
1 Body Stainless steel
2 Seat Stainless steel
3 Spacer, upper Stainless steel 1.4404 316L 12
4 Spacer, lower Stainless steel 13

5 Diaphragm disc Stainless steel
6 Spring Stainless steel 1.4310 301
7 Spring cap Stainless steel CrNiMo
8 Adjusting screw Stainless steel A4-70
9 Lower stem Stainless steel 1.4404 316L
10 'O' ring Elastomer

FEPM 75
11 'O' ring Elastomer
19
12 Diaphragm Elastomer FPM
8
13 Protective film PTFE PTFE
14 Upper stem Stainless steel 1.4404 316L

4.6 15 Spring washer Stainless steel A2 7
134 16 Nut Stainless steel A4-70 6

17 'O' ring Elastomer FEPM 75 15, 16
18 Clamp Stainless steel 3, 5

1.4404 316L
19 Screw Stainless steel
20 Gasket Composite Nova-Uni 18

4 17
14
11
9
10
2
CMGT Issue 4
SRV66HC High Capacity Sanitary Pressure Reducing Valve
Control systems
Temperature °C
A B
D
E
Pressure bar g
A-B-C Maximum operating conditions for steam
D-E-C Maximum operating conditions for liquids and gases
Inlet PN16
Outlet see 'Pressure setting range' below
Maximum design pressure 15.2 bar @ 50 °C
4.6
EPDM diaphragm 130 °C 135

FPM diaphragm 180 °C
Maximum operating pressure (inlet) 8 bar g
Pressure setting range

Size DN40 - DN100 DN25 - DN100 DN25 - DN100
Inlet/outlet PN16 / PN2.5 PN16 / PN6 PN16 / PN10
Spring range 0.3 - 1.1 bar g 0.8 - 2.5 bar g 2.0 - 5.0 bar g
Kv values
To maximise the control accuracy (especially for large load variations) use the Kv values given at 20% offset.
For safety valve sizing use the maximum Kv values.

For conversion:
Kv at 20% offset 3.1 16.9 16.9 46.2 53.9 61.6 C v (UK) = Kv x 0.93
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Maximum Kv 4.0 22.0 22.0 60.0 70.0 80.0
CMGT Issue 4
44 Control systems
Dimensions/weights
B
Size A B C Weight
Leakage line, " BSP
DN25 100 138 305 2.5
DN40 115 200 345 6.5
DN50 125 200 355 6.5
DN65 175 240 690 26.0
DN80 175 240 690 26.0
DN100 175 240 690 26.0

C
Sizing
The required Kv can be calculated from the following formulae,
Where:
s
= Liquid volume flow (m 3 /h) A
= Gas flow at standard conditions: 0 °C @ 1.013 bar a (m³/h)

4.6 g
P1 = Upstream pressure (bar absolute)

136 P2 = Downstream pressure (bar absolute)
A
P1 - P 2
c = (pressure drop factor)
P1
S = Specific gravity
T = Absolute average gas temperature (Kelvin = °C + 273)
Critical pressure drop: P2 0.58 P1
Steam Non-critical pressure drop: P2 0.58 P1
Gas
Liquid
Calculating the Kv and selecting a suitable valve

Using your maximum flowrate and smallest differential pressure (P1 – P2), calculate the required Kv from one of the above formulae.
Select a valve Kv that is 30% greater than the calculated Kv. The optimum working range of the selected valve should ideally be within
the range of 10 to 70% of its Kv.
Saturated 10 to 40 m/s
Steam
Superheated 15 to 60 m/s
Recommended fluid velocities up to 2 bar g 2 to 10 m/s

Gas
above 2 bar g 5 to 40 m/s
Liquids 1 to 5 m/s
CMGT Issue 4
Control systems
How to order
Example: 1 off, Spirax Sarco DN40 SRV66HC direct acting pressure reducing valve having a pressure range of 0.8 – 2.5 bar g and
a PN16 / PN6 rating and FPM diaphragm.
Spare parts
The spare parts available are detailed below.
No other parts are supplied as spares.
Available spares
Diaphragm, 'O' ring and gasket kit 10, 11, 12, 13, 17, 20
12
How to order spares
headed 'Available spares' and state the size, model, pressure 13
range and PN rating.
Example: 1 - Diaphragm, 'O' ring and gasket kit for a Spirax

Sarco DN40 SRV66HC direct acting pressure reducing valve
having a pressure range of 0.8 – 2.5 bar g and a PN16 / PN6 rating
and FPM diaphragm.
4.6
137
17
11
10
CMGT Issue 4
44 Control systems
4.6
138
Control systems

TI-P470-08
CTLS Issue 4
DP27T and DP27TE

Pilot Operated Pressure/Temperature
Control Valves with SG Iron Bodies
Description
The DP27T and DP27TE are combined pressure/temperature control valves for use on steam applications. They are designed to be
used in conjunction with a 2 m length of capillary which is available separately (other lengths are available on request - see 'Optional
extras'). They combine a temperature and pressure pilot valve in one unit. This controls the main valve so that the temperature is
maintained while the maximum steam pressure is limited.
A variable rate conical pressure adjustment spring is fitted providing a downstream pressure range of 0.2 - 17 bar g.
Notes:
1. The valve can be supplied with a blank undrilled flange if required.
2. The sensor of the control system will need to be mounted by either

a union kit, pocket or wall mounting bracket - see 'Optional extras'.
Available types of valve

4.6
DP27T Pressure/temperature control 139
Pressure/temperature control with electrically operated
DT27TE
solenoid valve

230 ±10% Vac or 115 ±10% Vac
Voltages available
(others available on request)
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Inrush 45 VA
Power consumption
Holding 23 VA
DP27T shown
For 'Optional extras' - go to page 5
Page 1 of 12
44 Control systems
Temperature ranges
Range A Range B Range C Range D Range E
16 °C to 49 °C 38 °C to 71 °C 49 °C to 82 °C 71 °C to 104 °C 93 °C to 127 °C

DN15LC - Low Capacity version, DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50 screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT (DN15 to DN25 only).
Standard flanges: DN15 - DN50 EN 1092 PN25 DN25 - DN50 BS 10 Table H and ANSI 300
Available on request: DN15 - DN50 JIS 10, JIS 16 and ANSI 150 DN15 - DN20 BS 10 Table F DN15 ANSI 300
A D
B
Temperature °C
G
Steam
saturation
curve
G C E
Pressure bar g
4.6 The product must not be used in this region.
140 A-D-E Screwed and flanged EN 1092 PN25, ANSI 300, and BS 10 Table H.
G-G The DP27TE is limited to 10 bar g @ 190 °C.
A-D-E 25 bar g @ 120 °C

A-B-C 17.2 bar g @ 40 °C
DP27T 17 bar g
DP27TE 10 bar g
DP27T 232 °C @ 17 bar g

DP27TE 190 °C @ 10 bar g

0 °C
DP27T 17 bar
DP27TE 10 bar
DP27T and DP27TE Pilot Operated Pressure / Temperature Control Valves with SG Iron Bodies
Control systems
Materials
No. Part Material
3 Spring housing SG iron DIN1693 GGG 40.3
4 Top spring plate Stainless steel ASTM A351/A351M CF8M
5 Pressure adjustment spring Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S 25
6 Bottom spring plate Hot brass stamping BS EN 12165 CW617N
Steel
7 Spring housing
Securing studs DN15 to DN32 M10 x 95 mm BS 4439 Gr. 8.8
8 Pilot diaphragms Phosphor bronze BS 2870 PB102 1980
DP27T
For items 9 to 44,
go to page 4 4.6
1
6
141
2
44 Control systems
Materials (cont'd)
No. Part Material
9 Pilot valve chamber SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
10 Pilot valve plunger Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
11 Pilot valve seat with integral seal Stainless steel + PTFE BS 970 431 S 29
12 Pilot valve ball Stainless steel AISI 420
13 Pilot valve spring Stainless steel BS 2057 302 S 25
14 Pilot valve clip Stainless steel BS 1449 301 S 21
15 Pilot filter cap gasket Stainless steel BS 1449 316 S 11
16 Pilot filter cap Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
17 Pilot filter element Brass
21 Balance pipe assembly Copper BS 2871 C 106 ½H
4.6 23 Main body

Steel
142 Securing studs DN15 to DN32 M10 x 25 mm BS 4439 Gr. 8.8
24 Main diaphragm chamber SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3

25 Main diaphragm
Securing studs DN15 to DN32 M12 x 50 mm
26 Main diaphragms Phosphor bronze BS 2870 PB 102
28 Pushrod Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
29 Control pipe assembly Brass and copper
33 Solenoid valve
34 Packless gland housing Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
35 Pilot valve plunger Phenolic resin ISO (BS) PF2C3
36 Pilot valve seat ring Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
37 Pilot valve closure member Stainless steel AISI 440 B
38 Pilot valve housing SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
39 Pilot valve housing Steel

Securing studs BS 4439 Gr. 8.8
40 Locking ring Brass BS 2874 CZ 122
41 Adjustment head Phenolic resin ISO (BS) PF2C3
42 Adjustment head securing screws Cadium plated 2 BA x ¾"
43 Capillary tube Copper PVC covered
44 Sensor Brass EN 12451 CW707R H130/170
Control systems
9
15
16
17
Please note that the pilot valve chamber (9) has

been shown out of position to identify items 15, DP27T
16 and 17.
Exploded view of item 11
43
10
45
46
40
47
41
35
48
42
11
34 4.6
39
12
37 143
13 9
38
21 36
14 44
18
29
19
20 22
28
24
23
32
25
26
27 30
DP27TE
Materials - DP27T/TE
See DP27 items list on pages 3 and 4 for common components 33
No. Part Material
43 Pilot valve assembly with integral seal
45 Circlip Stainless steel 1.4116
46 Retainer Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
47 Variseal Composite elastomer/stainless steel Turcon T40/AQISI 302
48 Pilot seat Stainless steel + PTFE BS 970 431 S 29
44 Control systems
Pressure sensing pipe
The DP27 controls by sensing the downstream pressure through a pressure sensing pipe taken from the union (31) or through the
internal balance pipe (21) provided. Fitting is described in the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the valve.
Optional extras
Capillary tubes: Available in multiples of 2 m up to a maximum of 14 m.
Conversion kit: Comprising of a solenoid valve and the necessary pipe and fittings for converting an existing DP27T to DP27TE.
Union kit: Comprising of union nipple (U), compression ring (V) and a gland nut (W). The union nipple is screwed ¾" BSP.
Pockets: Are available in copper with brass union nipple, mild steel or stainless steel. Union nipple U forms the top of the pocket and
carries compression ring V and gland nut W. The union nipple is screwed ¾" BSP.
Special long pockets are available having minimum length of 0.5 m and a maximum of 1 m. They are sealed at the top by a rubber
bung. Glass pockets are also available complete with bracket and sealed by a rubber bung.
Wall mounting bracket: inclusive of cover.
4.6
144 DP27T
31 (not visible)
Union kit Pocket Glass pocket


W
V
21
U
Control systems
Size Flanged Weight
Screwed BS 10 H PN25 ANSI 300 BS 10 F ANSI 150 JIS 10/16
A A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 B D F G Screwed Flanged
DN15LC 160 - 130 126.6 117 120.2 122 185 404 130 130 15.7 16.5
DN15 160 - 130 126.6 117 120.2 122 185 404 130 130 15.7 16.5
DN20 160 - 150 - 133 139.4 142 185 404 130 130 15.7 17.4
DN25 180 160 160 160.0 - 160.0 152 207 428 148 130 17.2 19.7
DN32 - 180 180 180.0 - 176.0 176 207 428 148 130 - 20.7
DN40 - 200 200 200.0 - 199.0 196 255 473 178 139 - 32.2
DN50 - 230 230 230.0 - 228.0 222 255 473 178 139 - 35.2
Union kit Metal pocket
4.6
145
K M
D
L N
Union kit Metal pocket

K L M N
F 142 17.5 150 22.3
Wall mounting Glass pocket

W
B
A
A1
V
O
Wall mounting Glass pocket

O P V W
195 35 575 117
44 Control systems


4.6
146

DN15LC
DN15
DN20

Capacity kg/h
DN25
DN32
DN40
DN50
DN80
Note
The capacities quoted above are based on valves fitted with an external pressure sensing pipe. Reliance on the internal balance pipe
will mean that capacities may be reduced. In the case of low downstream pressure this reduction could be up to 30% of the valve
capacity.

Saturated steam
Superheated steam
Control systems


4.6
147

DN15LC
DN15

DN20
DN25
DN32
DN40
DN50
DN80


Installation note:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN20 DP27T pilot operated pressure/temperature control valve having flanged EN 1092 PN25 connections
and a temperature range A.
44 Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
Maintenance kit: A stand-by set of spares for general maintenance purposes and covers all spares marked *
Pilot diaphragms * (2 off) B
Pilot valve assembly * C, C1
Pilot valve filter and gasket (packet of 3 of each) E, F
Pilot valve assembly for temperature control unit B2, C2, D2, E2
Pilot valve packless gland set * H2, J2
Main valve assembly DN15 to DN50 K, L
Pushrod and main diaphragm plate assembly G
Pressure adjustment spring 0.2 - 17 bar O
Range A 16 °C to 49 °C
Range B 38 °C to 71 °C
4.6 Control head (3 pieces) Range C 49 °C to 82 °C Y, Z
Range D 71 °C to 104 °C
148 Range E 93 °C to 127 °C
When ordering state range and length of capillary tube. Normally stocked in capillary lengths of 2 m.
Available in multiples of 2 m up to a maximum of 14 m (at extra cost).
Union sub assembly (3 pieces) U
Control pipe assembly * P
Balance pipe assembly Q
Body gasket set * (3 off) R
Pilot valve block gasket temperature control unit (3 pieces) * R1
Set of spring housing/actuating chamber cover securing studs and nuts (set of 4) S
DN15 to DN32 (set of 10) V

Set of diaphragm securing bolts and nuts Valve sizes:
Set of temperature pilot valve housing securing studs and nuts (set of 4) S1
Set of adjustment head securing screws (set of 3) Y
Type DP27TE only Replacement coil X1
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of the pilot
operated pressure/temperature control valve.
Example: 1 - Main valve assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN15 Type DP27T pilot operated pressure/temperature control valve.
How to fit: See the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the product. Further copies are available on request.
Control systems
packless gland set

Pilot valve
H2
Z J2
O
S E2
D2
Y C2
S B2
Q S1
B U
Shown 180° out of
position for clarity
C1
4.6
Pilot valve chamber
F E
R 149
assembly
R1
P
Main valve assembly
N R
K
L T
Coil
V X1

M
G W
assembly
Core
X2
A
44 Control systems
is common to the DN40 and DN50 valves. Spares which are marked † are interchangeable with the DP17 and DP27 pressure reducing
valves. Spares marked 'o' are interchangeable with the 37D temperature control valve.
Screwed Flanged
Size DN
½"LC ½" ¾" 1" 15LC 15 20 25 32 40 50
Main diaphragm †o a a a b a a a b b c c
Pilot diaphragm †o a a a a a a a a a a a
Pilot valve assembly for pressure control unit †o a a a a a a a a a a a
Pilot valve filter and gasket a a a a a a a a a a a
Pilot valve assembly for temperature control unit o a a a a a a a a a a a
Pilot valve packless gland set o a a a a a a a a a a a
Main valve assembly †o a b c d a b c d e f g
Internal strainer †o a a a b f f a b c d e
Main valve return spring †o a a a b a a a b b c c
Pressure adjustment spring † a a a a a a a a a a a
4.6 Control head o a a a a a a a a a a a
150 'O' ring for sensor bulb adaptor o a a a a a a a a a a a
Control pipe assembly a a a b f f a b d e f
Balance pipe assembly † a a a b f f a b c d e
Gasket set † a a a a a a a a a b b
Pilot valve block gasket a a a a a a a a a a a
Set of spring housing securing studs and nuts † a a a a a a a a a b b
Set of main body studs and nuts †o a a a a a a a a a b b
Set of diaphragm securing bolts and nuts †o a a a a a a a a a b b
Set of temperature pilot valve housing
Securing studs and nuts a a a a a a a a a a a
Set of adjustment head securing screws o a a a a a a a a a a a
Control systems

TI-P470-01
CTLS Issue 12
DP27, DP27E, DP27G, DP27GY,

DP27R & DP27Y Pilot Operated
Pressure Reducing Valves with SG Iron Bodies
Description
DP27, DP27E, DP27G, DP27GY, DP27R and DP27Y pilot operated pressure reducing valves have bodies manufactured using SG iron.
These products are not suitable for oxygen service.
DP27 Suitable for steam or compressed air applications.
Suitable for steam applications. It incorporates an electrical solenoid valve in the pipe assembly allowing
DP27E
remote closure by means of a switching or timer device.
Suitable for compressed air and inert industrial gas applications. Its design incorporates a nitrile soft
DP27G
seal pilot and main valve. Note: it is not available with a solenoid valve.
Available types Suitable for compressed air, inert industrial gas and critical low pressure control applications. Its design
incorporates a nitrile soft seal pilot and main valve, and uses a lower rate control spring with a downstream
DP27GY
pressure range of 0.2 - 3.0 bar. Note: it is not available with a solenoid valve. 4.6
DP27R
This can be remotely adjusted by varying a pressure signal to the pilot diaphragm. This is usually achieved
using a Spirax-Monnier pressure regulator and an instrument air supply.
151
Suitable for steriliser or critical low pressure control applications. It uses a lower rate control spring with
DP27Y
a downstream pressure range of 0.2 - 3.0 bar.
Standards
This product fully complies with the requirements of the EU Pressure Equipment Directive/
UK Pressure Equipment (Safety) Regulations and carries the mark when so required.
Certification
This product is available with a manufacturer's Typical Test Report.

DN15LC - Low Capacity version (not available for DP27G or DP27GY)
Screwed
BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT (DN15 to DN25 only)
Standard flanges:
DN15 - DN50 EN 1092 PN16 and PN25
DN25 - DN50 BS 10 Table H and ASME 300
Flanges available on request:
DN15 - DN15 to DN40 JIS 10/16
- DN50 JIS10 and JIS16
- DN15 to 50 ASME 150
DN15 - DN20 BS 10 Table F
DN15 - ASME 300 DP27 shown
Page 1 of 14
44 Control systems
DP27, DP27E, DP27R and DP27Y DP27G and DP27GY
A B D

Temperature °C
Temperature °C

G
F F

F Steam saturation curve F

G C E E


A-D-E Screwed and flanged EN 1092 PN25, ASME 300 and BS 10 Table H.
A-B-C Flanged ASME 150.
F-F-E The DP27G and DP27GY are limited to 120 °C.
G-G The DP27E is limited to 10 bar g @ 190 °C.
Note: A variable rate conical pressure adjustment spring is fitted providing a downstream pressure range of 0.2 - 17 bar g. For the
DP27Y downstream pressure range is 0.2 - 3 bar g.
4.6 Body design conditions PN25
152 Maximum design pressure

A-D-E 25 bar g @ 120 °C
A-B-C 17.2 bar g @ 40 °C
Maximum upstream pressure for saturated steam service DP27, DP27R and DP27Y 17 bar g
For ASME 150, see A-B-C above DP27E 10 bar g
Maximum upstream pressure for compressed air and inert industrial gas service DP27G and DP27GY 25 bar g
DP27, DP27Y 232 °C @ 21 bar g

DP27E 190 °C @ 10 bar g
For ASME 150, see A-B-C above
DP27G, DP27GY 120 °C @ 25 bar g

0 °C
DP27, DP27R and DP27Y 17 bar
Maximum differential pressure DP27G and DP27GY 25 bar g
DP27E 10 bar
Page 2 of 14 TI-P470-01
CTLS Issue 12
DP27, DP27E, DP27G, DP27GY, DP27R & DP27Y Pilot Operated Pressure Reducing Valves with SG Iron Bodies
Control systems
Materials - DP27 and DP27Y (Parts 1 to 14)
No. Part Material
3 Spring housing SG iron DIN1693 GGG 40.3
4 Top spring plate Stainless steel ASTM A351/A351M CF8M
5 Pressure adjustment spring Stainless steel BS EN 10270-3:2001 302 S 26
6 Bottom spring plate Hot brass stamping BS EN 12165 CW617N

7 Spring housing
Securing studs DN15 to DN32 M10 x 95 mm
8 Pilot diaphragms Phosphor bronze BS 2870 PB102 1980
9 Pilot valve chamber SG iron EN JS 1025
4.6
2
153
Exploded view of 3
item 11
4
*10
5
11
7
6
9
*12 8
11
*13
*14
* Note:
Items 10, 12, 13 and 14 are shown on the exploded view, as they
are hidden by the pilot filter on the main illustration.
No. Part Material
Pilot valve
10 * Stainless steel BS 970 321 S 31
plunger
Pilot valve seat Stainless steel +

11 BS 970 431 S 29
with integral seal PTFE
12 * Pilot valve ball Stainless steel AISI 420
Stainless
13 * Pilot valve spring BS 2057 302 S 26
steel
Stainless
14 * Pilot valve clip BS EN 10088-2 1995 1.4310
steel
TI-P470-01 Page 3 of 14
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
No. Part Material
15 Pilot filter cap gasket Stainless steel BS 1449 316 S 11
16 Pilot filter cap Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
17 Pilot filter element Brass
18 Internal strainer Stainless steel ASTM A240 TP 304
19 Body gasket Stainless steel reinforced exfoliated graphite
23 Balance pipe assembly Copper BS 2871 C 106 ½H
4.6
154
23
15
16
17
19
18
20
24 21
22
19
Securing
Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8
nuts
25 Main body Steel BS 4439 Gr. 8.8

Securing
studs
Page 4 of 14 TI-P470-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
No. Part Material
26 Main diaphragm chamber - upper SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
27 Main diaphragm chamber - lower SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3

28 Main diaphragm
Securing bolts DN15 to DN32 M12 x 50 mm
29 Main diaphragms Phosphor bronze BS 2870 PB 102 1980
31 Pushrod Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
33 Control pipe assembly Brass and copper
34 Plug 1/8" BSP Steel Note: This item is hidden from view
4.6
155
33
31
32 28
26
30
29
27
TI-P470-01 Page 5 of 14
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
Materials - DP27E
See DP27 items list on pages 3 to 5 for common components
No. Part Material
43 Pilot valve assembly with integral seal
45 Circlip Stainless steel 1.4116
46 Retainer Stainless steel BS 970 431 S 29
47 Variseal Composite elastomer/stainless steel Turcon T40/AQISI 302
48 Pilot seat Stainless steel + PTFE BS 970 431 S 29
49 Solenoid assembly
Exploded view of item 43
10
4.6
45
156 46
47 49
48
43
12
13
44
14
No. Part Material
Pilot valve Stainless

10 * BS 970 321 S 31
plunger steel

12 * AISI 420
ball steel

13 * BS 2057 302 S 26
spring steel

14 * BS EN 10088-2 1995 1.4310
clip steel
Page 6 of 14 TI-P470-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
Materials - DP27G and DP27GY
No. Part Material
35 Pilot valve chamber SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
36 Pilot valve assembly Brass/PTFE/Nitrile
37 Main valve assembly Stainless steel/Nitrile BS 970 431 S29
DP27G
1
2
3
DP27R
5
7
7 38 40
39 42 4.6
6 8, 41
33 8
35
33 9
157
19 36
18 15
16 23
20 17 11
37 19
22 18
31 20
23
21
22
31
24
19
25 24
32 28
19
30 26
25
32 28
27
30 26
29
27
Materials - DP27R 29
No. Part Material
38 Actuating chamber cover SG iron DIN 1693 GGG 40.3
39 Actuating air supply union Brass
40 Diaphragm spring Stainless steel BS 2056 Gr. 302 S26
41 Actuating chamber gasket Stainless steel reinforced exfoliated graphite BS 2815 Gr. A
42 Spring plate Hot brass stamping BS EN 12165 CW617N
TI-P470-01 Page 7 of 14
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
Voltages available 220/240 ±10% Vac or 110/220 ±10% Vac (others available on request)
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Inrush 45 VA
Power consumption
Holding 23 VA
Kv values
The Kv maximum values shown below are full capacities and should be used for safety valve sizing purposes only.
DN15LC DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 DN40 DN50 For conversion:

C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
1.0 2.8 5.5 8.1 12.0 17.0 28.0 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156

A
A1
DP27, DP27E and DP27Y
4.6
158
E
Screwed Flanged Weight
BS 10 H PN16/25 ASME BS 10 F ASME JIS

300 150 10/16
DN15LC 160 - 130 126.6 117 120.2 122 185 406 276 130 13.2 14.0
DN15 160 - 130 126.6 117 120.2 122 185 406 276 130 13.2 14.0
DN20 160 - 150 - 133 139.4 142 185 406 276 130 13.2 14.9
DN25 180 160 160 160.0 - 160.0 152 207 430 282 148 14.2 17.2
DN32 - 180 180 180.0 - 176.0 176 207 430 282 148 - 18.2
DN40 - 200 200 200.0 - 199.0 196 255 475 297 178 - 30.2
DN50 - 230 230 230.0 - 228.0 222 255 475 297 178 - 32.2
Page 8 of 14 TI-P470-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
A
A1
DP27G and DP27GY
A
A1
DP27R
E
E
F
F
B B
4.6
DP27G and DP27GY 159

300 150 10/16
DN15 160 - 130 126.6 117 120.2 122 185 364 234 130 12.0 12.8
DN20 160 - 150 - 133 139.4 142 185 364 234 130 12.0 13.7
DN25 180 160 160 160.0 - 160.0 152 207 388 240 148 13.0 16.0
DN32 - 180 180 180.0 - 176.0 176 207 388 240 148 - 17.0
DN40 - 200 200 200.0 - 199.0 196 255 433 255 178 - 29.0
DN50 - 230 230 230.0 - 228.0 222 255 433 255 178 - 31.5
DP27R

300 150 10/16
DN15LC 160 - 130 126.6 117 120.2 122 185 296 166 130 12.2 13.0
DN15 160 - 130 126.6 117 120.2 122 185 296 166 130 12.2 13.0
DN20 160 - 150 - 133 139.4 142 185 296 166 130 12.2 13.9
DN25 180 160 160 160.0 - 160.0 152 207 320 172 148 13.2 16.2
DN32 - 180 180 180.0 - 176.0 176 207 320 172 148 - 16.2
DN40 - 200 200 200.0 - 199.0 196 255 364 186 178 - 29.2
DN50 - 230 230 230.0 - 228.0 222 255 364 186 178 - 31.7
TI-P470-01 Page 9 of 14
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems


4.6 * * Note: The DP27E
is limited to 10 bar.
160 Upstream pressure bar
DN15LC
DN15
DN20

Capacity kg/h
DN25
DN32
DN40
DN50
Note
The capacities quoted above are based on valves fitted with an external pressure sensing pipe. Reliance on the internal pressure
sensing pipe will mean that capacities may be reduced. In the case of low downstream pressure this reduction could be up to 30% of
the valve capacity.

Saturated steam
Superheated steam
Page 10 of 14 TI-P470-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems


4.6
161
DN15LC
DN15

DN20
DN25
DN32
DN40
DN50

Capacities are given in cubic decimetres of free air per second (dm3 /s). The use of the capacity chart can be best explained by an
example. Required, a valve to pass 100 dm3 /s of free air reducing from 12 bar to 8 bar.
dropped from this point shows that whereas a DN15LC valve will only pass 57 dm3 /s and is therefore not large enough, a DN15 valve
will pass approximately 120 dm3 /s under these conditions and is the correct valve size to choose.

For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-P100-05 for the DP27G and DP27GY, or IM-P470-03 for the
DP27E, DP27R and DP27Y) supplied with the product.
Installation note:
The pilot operated pressure reducing valve should be installed in a horizontal pipeline, protected by a strainer and a separator, with
the direction of flow as indicated by the arrow on the valve body.

1 off Spirax Sarco DN32 DP27 pilot operated pressure reducing valve having a 0.2 - 17 bar spring and flanged EN 1092 PN25 connections.
TI-P470-01 Page 11 of 14
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
Spare parts
Available spares
Maintenance kit
Pilot diaphragm * (2 off) B
Pilot valve assembly inclusive of filter element *

C
(Pilot valve chamber assembly for the DP27G and DP27GY)
Pilot filter element and cap gasket * (packet of 3 off each) E, F

(Not required for the DP27G and DP27GY) DP27G and DP27GY only - PTFE seals (packet of 6) E
Main valve return spring N
DP27, DP27E and DP27G 0.2 to 17 bar O

Pressure adjustment spring (Not required for DP27R)
DP27Y and DP27GY 0.2 to 3 bar
Control pipe assembly * P
Balance pipe assembly * Q

4.6 Body gasket (3 off) * R
162 Pilot valve block gasket (DP27R only) R1
Set of spring housing/actuating chamber cover securing studs and

(set of 4) S
nuts
½" - DN32 (set of 10) V

Set of diaphragm securing bolts and nuts Valve sizes
DN40 and DN50 (set of 12)
Pushrod and main diaphragm plate assembly Y
Type DP27E only
Replacement coil X1
How to order spares

reducing valve.
Example: 1 - Main valve assembly for a 1" Spirax Sarco Type DP27 pressure reducing valve.
How to fit. See Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the pressure reducing valve. Further copies are available on
request.
Page 12 of 14 TI-P470-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
DP27, DP27G, DP27GY, DP27Y
S S
DP27E R1
DP27R
O
X1
W DP27E
4.6
B
C
DP27G, DP27GY 163
X2
C
E
P C
E S
Q
R
N
Main valve assembly
R
K T
L T
V
M
A Y
TI-P470-01 Page 13 of 14
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
is common to the DN40 and DN50 valves. All spares are interchangeable with the DP27T and where marked † are interchangeable
with the 37D temperature control.**
** Note: This does not apply to the DP27G and DP27GY soft seat pilot valve or main valve assemblies.
Screwed Flanged
Size DN ½"LC ½" ¾" 1" 15LC 15 20 25 32 40 50
Main diaphragm a a a b a a a b b c c
Pilot diaphragms † a a a a a a a a a a a
Pilot valve chamber assembly a a a a a a a a a b b
Pilot filter element a a a a a a a a a a a
Pilot filter cap gaskets a a a a a a a a a a a
PTFE seals a a a a a a a a a a a
Main valve assembly † a b c d a b c d e f g
Internal strainer † a a a b f f a b c d e
4.6 Main valve return spring † a a a a a a a a a c c
Pressure adjustment spring a a a a a a a a a a a

164 Control pipe assembly † a a a b f f a b c d e
Balance pipe assembly a a a b f f a b c d e
Body gasket † a a a a a a a a a b b
Set of spring housing securing studs and nuts a a a a a a a a a b b
Set of main body studs and nuts † a a a a a a a a a b b
Set of diaphragm securing bolts and nuts † a a a a a a a a a b b
Pushrod and main diaphragm plate assembly a a a b a a a b b c c
Not available for the DP27G or the DP27GY
Page 14 of 14 TI-P470-01
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
Safety valves
TI-P316-01
CTLS Issue 18
SV615
Safety Valve
Description
The SV615 full lift, full nozzle safety valve is suitable for
steam, air, inert industrial gas and non-hazardous liquid
service.
Applications
The SV615 is suitable for the protection of steam or hot
water boilers, generators, vessels, receivers and air
compressors, autoclaves, downstream of pressure
reducing valves and for general pressure relief applications.
Available types
Valves are available in sizes ranging from DN15 to DN50
4.7
and have a bronze body with female screwed connections
and a stainless steel nozzle. There is also the option of a 1
1" sanitary clamp inlet connection on the smaller sizes. All
valves have a closed bonnet with either a lifting lever or
closed cap (gas tight cap option). An optional soft seal is
available in Nitrile, EPDM or Viton. Where frequent
wa s h d ow n o c c u r s o r a e st h et i c a p p e a r a n c e i s a
consideration, this product can also be supplied with an
electroless nickel plated (ELNP) finish to the body, lever Screwed female version 1" Sanitary clamp version
housing (or sealed cap) and lever. A mechanically fastened
stainless steel name-plate can also be provided - For full
details contact Spirax Sarco.
Standards and approvals

The SV615 complies with the requirements of EN ISO 4126:2004 and carries the mark indicating full compliance with the
requirements of the EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment (Safety) Regulations.
The Approval Authority and Notified Body is the Royal and Sun Alliance.
Seat tightness complies with ASME/API STD 527- Revision 2002.
Certification
A manufacturers' Typical Test Report is provided as standard for each valve which will include valve set and hydraulic test pressure.
Also available on request is material certification in accordance with EN 10204 3.1.

DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50.
Inlet connections
Screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT female connections.
1" Sanitary clamp compatible (DN15, DN20 and DN25 sizes only)
BS 4825/ISO 2852/DIN 32676 - Safety valves with these connections have a surface finish of 0.8 µm on primary wetted parts.
Outlet connections
Screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT female connection.
Page 1 of 10
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Temperature °C
Pressure bar g
Maximum set pressure for 1½" and 2" SV615 Maximum set pressure for ½" to 1¼" SV615
A-A Maximum operating temperature with metal seat.
B-B Maximum operating temperature with Viton seat.
C-C Maximum operating temperature with EPDM seat.
D-D Maximum operating temperature with Nitrile seat.
4.7 Body design conditions PN25
½" to 1¼" 18 bar g

2 Set pressure range
Maximum
1½" and 2" 14 bar g
Minimum 0.3 bar g
Minimum -90 °C
Metal seat
Maximum +230 °C
Minimum -30 °C
* Nitrile seat
Maximum +120 °C
Temperature Minimum -50 °C
* EPDM seat
Maximum +150 °C
Minimum -20 °C
* Viton seat
Maximum +200 °C
Steam 5%
Overpressure Gas 10%
Liquid 10%
Performance data Steam, gas 10%

Blowdown limits
Liquids 20%
Steam, gas 0.71

Derated coefficient of discharge values
Liquid 0.52
Maximum permitted backpressure 10% of set pressure
Tested at a maximum inlet cold hydraulic test pressure of: 37.5 bar g
* Note: Soft seal inserts are not suitable for steam applications.
Page 2 of 10 TI-P316-01
CTLS Issue 18
SV615 Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Materials
4
Gas tight cap option
10
7
5
8
Soft seal disc 6

4.7
version
3
3
1" Sanitary
clamp inlet
Screwed female inlet
No. Part Material
1 Body Bronze BS EN 1982 CC491KM
DN15 and DN20 Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
2 Nozzle DN25 to DN50 Stainless steel BS 3146 Pt2 Gr. ANC2
Sanitary connections Stainless steel ASTM A276 316L
3 Disc Stainless steel ASTM A276 316L
4 Lever housing Bronze BS EN 1982 CC491KM
5 Spring Chrome-vanadium alloy steel BS 2803 735 A50 HS
6 Stem guide Brass BS 2872 CZ 121
7 Spring end plate Brass BS EN 12165 - CW617N
8 Stem Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
9 Adjustment screw Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
10 Lever SG iron Zinc plated
TI-P316-01 Page 3 of 10
CTLS Issue 18
SV615 Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
11
Gas tight cap option
15
13
16
18
4.7 Soft seal disc

12
4 version
17
19
14
1" Sanitary
clamp inlet
Screwed female inlet
No. Part Material
11 Pivot pin Stainless steel AISI 304
12 Circlip Stainless steel BS 2056 316 S42
13 Adjuster lock-nut Brass BS 2872 CZ 121
Stainless steel/Nitrile insert ASTM A276 316/bonded Nitrile 4490 (90 IRHD)
14 Soft seal disc Stainless steel/EPDM insert ASTM A276 316/bonded EPDM 2064 (75 IRHD)
Stainless steel/Viton insert ASTM A276 316/bonded Viton F81 (85 IRHD)
15 Sealed cap Bronze BS EN 1982 CC491KM
16 Cap seal Nitrile
17 Skirt Brass BS 2874 CZ 121
18 Grub screw Steel
19 Ball Stainless steel
Page 4 of 10 TI-P316-01
CTLS Issue 18
SV615 Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Table 1 - SV615 flow capacity for saturated steam in kilogrammes per hour (kg/h)
(calculated in accordance with EN ISO 4126:2004 at 5% overpressure)
Derated coefficient of discharge (Kdr) = 0.71
Valve size DN in/out 15/20 20/32 25/40 32/50 40/65 50/80
Flow area (mm 2) 113 314 452 661 1 075 1 662
Set pressure (bar g) Flow capacity for dry saturated steam kg/h
0.5 71 198 285 417 678 1 049
1.0 95 263 379 554 901 1 393
1.5 118 328 472 690 1 122 1 734
2.0 141 392 564 824 1 341 2 073
2.5 164 455 655 959 1 559 2 410
3.0 187 519 747 1 092 1 776 2 746
3.5 209 582 838 1 225 1 993 3 081
4.0 232 645 929 1 358 2 008 3 414
4.5 255 708 1 019 1 490 2 424 3 747
5.0 277 771 1 109 1 622 2 638 4 079
5.5 300 833 1 199 1 754 2 853 4 410
6.0 322 896 1 289 1 886 3 067 4 741

4.7
6.5 345 958 1 379 2 017 3 280 5 071 5
7.0 367 1020 1 469 2 148 3 494 5 401
7.5 390 1083 1 559 2 279 3 707 5 731
8.0 412 1145 1 648 2 410 3 920 6 060
8.5 434 1 207 1 737 2 541 4 132 6 389
9.0 457 1 269 1 827 2 672 4 345 6 717
9.5 479 1 331 1 916 2 802 4 557 7 046
10.0 501 1 393 2 005 2 933 4 769 7 374
11.0 546 1 517 2 184 3 194 5 194 8 030
12.0 591 1 641 2 362 3 454 5 618 8 685
13.0 635 1 765 2 540 3 715 6 042 9 340
14.0 680 1 888 2 718 3 975
15.0 724 2 012 2 897 4 236
16.0 769 2 136 3 075 4 496
17.0 813 2 260 3 253 4 757
18.0 858 2 384 3 431 5 018
TI-P316-01 Page 5 of 10
CTLS Issue 18
SV615 Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Table 2 - SV615 flow capacity for air in litres per second (normal I /s) at 0 °C and 1.013 bar a
(calculated in accordance with EN ISO 4126 : 2004 at 10% overpressure)
Flow area (mm )2

113 314 452 661 1 075 1 662
Set pressure (bar g) Flow capacity for air I/s
0.5 24 67 97 142 230 356
1.0 33 91 131 191 311 481
1.5 41 115 165 241 392 606
2.0 50 138 199 291 473 732
3.0 67 186 267 391 635 982
4.0 84 233 335 490 797 1 233
5.0 101 280 403 590 959 1 483
6.0 118 328 472 690 1 121 1 734
7.0 135 375 540 789 1 283 1 984
8.0 152 422 608 889 1 446 2 235

4.7
9.0 169 470 676 988 1 608 2 485
6 10.0 186 517 744 1 088 1 770 2 736
11.0 203 564 812 1 188 1 932 2 986
12.0 220 612 880 1 287 2 094 3 237
13.0 237 659 948 1 387 2 256 3 487
14.0 254 706 1 017 1 487 2 418 3 738
16.0 288 801 1 153 1 686
18.0 322 896 1 289 1 885
Page 6 of 10 TI-P316-01
CTLS Issue 18
SV615 Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Table 3 - SV615 flow capacity for water in kilogrammes per hour (kg/h) at 20 °C
(calculated in accordance with EN ISO 4126:2004 at 10% overpressure)
Flow area (mm 2) 113 314 452 661 1 075 1 662
Set pressure (bar g) Flow capacity for water kg/h
0.5 2 216 6 159 8 866 12 965 21 086 32 599
1.0 3 135 8 710 12 538 18 335 29 819 46 102
1.5 3 839 10 668 15 356 22 456 36 521 56 463
2.0 4 433 12 318 17 731 25 930 42 171 65 198
3.0 5 429 15 086 21 717 31 758 51 649 79 851
4.0 6 269 17 420 25 076 36 671 59 639 92 204
5.0 7 009 19 476 28 036 40 999 66 678 103 088
6.0 7 678 21 335 30 712 44 913 73 042 112 927
7.0 8 293 23 045 33 173 48 511 78 895 121 975
8.0 8 866 24 636 35 463 51 861 84 342 130 397
9.0 9 404 26 130 37 614 55 006 89 458 138 307

4.7
10.0 9 912 27 544 39 649 57 982 94 297 145 788 7
11.0 10 396 28 888 41 584 60 812 98 900 152 904
12.0 10 858 30 172 43 433 63 516 103 298 159 703
13.0 11 302 31 405 45 207 66 110 107 515 166 224
14.0 11 728 32 590 46 913 68 605 111 574 172 499
16.0 12 538 34 840 50 152 73 342
18.0 13 299 36 954 53 194 77 791
TI-P316-01 Page 7 of 10
CTLS Issue 18
SV615 Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Table 4 - SV615 flow capacities for hot water in kilowatts (kW) at or above 100 °C
(calculated in accordance with EN ISO 4126:2004)
Flow area (mm 2) 113 314 452 661 1 075 1 662
Set pressure (bar g) Flow capacity for hot water kW
0.5 29.96 83.26 119.86 175.27 285.06 440.71
1.0 40.60 112.81 162.39 237.47 386.21 597.09
1.5 51.23 142.36 204.92 299.66 487.36 753.47
2.0 61.86 171.96 247.45 361.86 588.51 909.86
3.0 83.13 230.99 332.51 486.24 790.81 1 222.62
4.0 104.39 290.08 417.57 610.63 993.11 1 535.38
5.0 125.66 349.17 502.63 735.02 1 195.42 1 848.15
6.0 146.92 408.26 587.69 859.41 1 397.72 2 160.91
7.0 168.19 467.36 672.75 983.80 1 600.12 2 473.67
8.0 189.45 526.45 757.81 1 108.18 1 802.32 2 786.43

4.7 9.0 210.72 585.54 842.88 1 232.57 2 004.62 3 099.20
8 10.0 231.98 644.63 927.94 1 356.96 2 206.92 3 411.96
11.0 253.25 703.72 1 013.00 1 481.35 2 409.22 3 724.72
12.0 274.51 762.81 1 098.06 1 605.74 2 611.52 4 037.49
13.0 295.78 821.90 1 183.12 1 730.12 2 813.82 4 350.25
14.0 317.04 880.99 1 268.18 1 854.51 3 016.12 4 663.01
16.0 359.58 999.17 1 438.30 2 103.29
18.0 402.11 1 117.36 1 608.42 2 352.06

Refer to:- http://www.spiraxsarco.com/prs/product-sizing.asp
Page 8 of 10 TI-P316-01
CTLS Issue 18
SV615 Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Connection Flow
Size Inlet Outlet A B C* EØ DØ Weight
DN15 ½" ¾" 40 40 194 - 12 1.3
DN20 ¾" 1¼" 55 44 229 - 20 2.4

Screwed
BSPF x BSPF DN25 1" 1½" 60 48 242 - 24 2.9
or DN32 1¼" 2" 70 58 279 - 29 4.2
NPTF x NPTF
DN40 1½" 2½" 81 67 365 - 37 8.8
DN50 2" 3" 96 80 420 - 46 13.0
DN15 1" ¾" 40 55 209 50.5 12 1.4
Sanitary clamp DN20 1" 1¼" 55 60 245 50.5 20 2.6
DN25 1" 1½" 60 64 258 50.5 24 3.1
* Applies to sealed cap and lever designs.
4.7
9
C C
B
B
EØ
D DØ
A A
Screwed version Sanitary clamp version
TI-P316-01 Page 9 of 10
CTLS Issue 18
SV615 Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Installation note:
The safety valve should always be fitted with the centre line of the spring housing vertically above the valve. Ensure the discharge
pipework system is sized correctly.
SV615 safety valve selection guide:

Model type SV615 SV615
A = Closed bonnet/easing lever

Configuration A
B = Closed bonnet/sealed cap
S = Stainless steel
N = Nitrile
Seal material N
E = EPDM
V = Viton
P = Electroless nickel plated (ELNP)

Finish
Q = ELNP and stainless steel name-plate
Size DN15, DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40 and DN50 DN15

4.7 BSPF x BSPF BSPF
Connections (Inlet x Outlet) NPTF x NPTF x
10 Clamp x BSPF BSPF
Selection example
SV615 A N DN15 BSPF x BSPF
If ELNP finish is required, add 'P'.

1 off Spirax Sarco SV615AN safety valve having DN15 screwed BSPF x BSPF connections, set at 6 bar g.
Page 10 of 10 TI-P316-01
CTLS Issue 18
SV615 Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves
TI-S13-27
CTLS Issue 15
SV60
Safety Valve
Description
The SV60 is a range of full lift flanged safety valves suitable for use on steam, inert industrial gas and water services. Please contact
Spirax Sarco for suitability of any other media.
Available types
Model and material Bonnet and cap configuration
Open type easing lever

Closed bonnet
SV604 Carbon steel Sealed cap 4.7
SV607 SG iron
Open bonnet
Packed easing lever -
DN20 to DN100 only 11
Open type easing lever
Applications
The SV60 is suitable for the protection of steam boilers, pipelines, pressure
vessels, compressors and receivers and most general process industry
applications.
Certification
A manufacturers' Typical Test Report is provided as standard for each valve
which will include valve set and hydraulic test pressure. Also available on
request is material certification in accordance with EN 10204 3.1.

The SV60 carries the mark and complies with the requirements of the
EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment (Safety)
Regulations falling within Category 4 for Group 2 gases.
Seat tightness to ASME/API Standard 527-1992.
Lloyds Register (LR) type approval - Certificate number 01/00125 (E2).
The SV604 (PN flanged) is approved by the TÜV to AD-Merkblatt A2,
AD-Merkblatt A4, TRD 421, Vd TÜV 100, 100/4.

Inlet sizes: DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80, DN100, DN125 and DN150.
Valve type Inlet connection Outlet connection
PN16 (DN65 to DN150 only) PN16 Standard PN flanges are to EN 1092

SV607
PN25 PN16 and ASME 300 flanges to EN 1759-1.
PN40 PN16
SV604
ASME 300 ASME 150
CMGT Issue 15
SV60 Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Pressure/temperature limits - SV604
The product must not be used in
Temperature °C
this region.
PN40 inlet A tungsten alloy spring must be

used in this region.
Consult Spirax Sarco for further
information.
Pressure bar g
Size Saturated steam Air Water
DN20 x DN32 29 bar g 40 bar g 40 bar g
Set pressure range maximum DN50 x DN80 29 bar g 40 bar g 40 bar g

PN40
4.7 DN80 x DN125 29 bar g 32 bar g 32 bar g

12
Set pressure range minimum 0.2 bar g
Maximum 400°C
Temperature
Minimum -10°C
Steam 5%
Overpressure
Liquids and gas 10%
Performance data Steam and gas 10%

Blowdown limit
Liquids 20%
Backpressure limit 10% of set pressure
Designed for a maximum inlet cold hydraulic test pressure of: 60 bar g
CMGT Issue 15
SV60 Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Pressure/temperature limits - SV607
Temperature °C
this region.
PN25 inlet Steam saturation curve A tungsten alloy spring must be

used in this region.
Consult Spirax Sarco for further
information.
Pressure bar g
Temperature °C
PN16 inlet Steam saturation curve
Pressure bar g
Body design conditions PN16 or PN25
Size Saturated steam Air Water
DN20 x DN32 22.5 bar g 25 bar g 25 bar g 4.7

13
DN25 x DN40 22.5 bar g 25 bar g 25 bar g

PN25

Set pressure range maximum
PN16 DN100 x DN150 14.6 bar g 16 bar g 16 bar g
Set pressure range minimum 0.2 bar g
Maximum 350°C
Temperature
Minimum -10°C
Steam 5%
Overpressure
Liquids and gas 10%
Performance data Steam and gas 10%

Blowdown limit
Liquids 20%
Backpressure limit 10% of set pressure
Designed for a maximum inlet cold hydraulic test PN25 38 bar g

pressure of: PN16 24 bar g
CMGT Issue 15
SV60 Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Materials
4
4
4
14
15
6
Sealed cap
9
3
Packed easing lever
12 (DN20 to DN100 only)
11
7
10
5
8
2
4.7
14
1
No. Part Material SV607/SV604
1 Body SG iron/carbon steel GJS-400-18LT/1.0619 + N
DN20 - DN100 1.4057 or for

DN125 - DN150 ANC2
3 Bonnet SG iron/carbon steel GJS-400-18LT/1.0619 + N
4 Cap SG iron GJS-400-15
Stainless steel,
DN20 - DN100 1.4021 or for
5 Disc hardened 47-52 HRC
DN125 - DN150 CA15
(Hardened Rockwell 'C' Scale)
Standard Chrome-vanadium alloy steel

6 Spring
For temperatures above 230°C Tungsten alloy steel
7 Guide plate SG iron GJS-400-15
DN20 - DN100 1.4301 or for

8 Skirt Stainless steel
DN125 - DN150 1.4308
9 Stem Stainless steel 1.4021
10 Body bolts Steel CK35
11* Spring plate Carbon steel C45E
12* Bearing ring (DN80 to DN150 only) Stainless steel 1.4021
13 Spacer Stainless steel 1.4021
14 Adjustment screw Stainless steel 1.4021
15 Lock-nut Zinc plated carbon steel
CMGT Issue 15
SV60 Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Materials
32 31 30
26, 27
17 19, 20
29
28
18 16
18
34
35
Sealed cap
Packed easing lever

(DN20 to DN100 only)
22
33
21
23
36
4.7
15
No. Part Material SV607/SV604
16 Screw Zinc plated steel
17 Collar Zinc plated carbon steel
18 Lever SG iron GJS-400-15
19 Cross pin Zinc plated carbon steel
20 Circlip Spring steel
21 Disc pin Spring steel DIN 7343, A304
22 Collets Stainless steel 1.4021
23 Stem ball Stainless steel
26 Collar pin Zinc plated carbon steel
27 Collar circlip Spring stainless steel
28 Packed lever spindle Stainless steel ASTM A276 431
29 Lifting fork Carbon steel
30 Gland packing Graphite
31 Gland Stainless steel ASTM A276 304
32 Gland nut Carbon steel
33 Guide plate gaskets (2 off) Reinforced exfoliated graphite
34 Sealed cap gasket Universal SA
35 Packed lever cap gasket Universal SA
36 Body drain plug ½ BSP Steel
* Note: The spring plate (11) and bearing ring design (12) varies according to the valve size and set pressure.
CMGT Issue 15
SV60 Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Table 1 - SV60 flow capacity for dry saturated steam in kilogrammes per hour (kg/h)
(calculated at 10% overpressure. In accordance with EN ISO 4126)
Valve size DN in/out 20/32 25/40 32/50 40/65 50/80 65/100 80/125 100/150 125/200 150/250
Flow area (mm²) 230 445 740 1140 1979 2734 4185 6504 8659 12272
Set pressure (bar g) Dry saturated steam, kg/h
0.5 129 269 401 525 875 1 357 1 889 3 053 4 299 6 203
1.0 192 403 608 812 1 315 2 014 2 831 4 635 6 380 9 190
1.5 254 538 816 1 102 1 764 2 726 3 793 6 190 8 502 12 235
2.0 312 661 1 005 1 363 2 187 3 367 4 775 7 775 10 665 15 337
2.5 369 789 1 187 1 636 2 631 3 981 5 652 9 162 12 791 18 388
3.0 427 911 1 354 1 867 3 002 4 609 6 551 10 651 14 805 21 278
3.5 485 1 023 1 521 2 097 3 372 5 251 7 471 12 139 16 864 24 233
4.0 538 1 148 1 688 2 326 3 801 5 825 8 289 13 662 18 709 26 883
4.5 591 1 261 1 854 2 555 4 175 6 398 9 104 15 006 20 549 29 527
5.0 644 1 374 2 019 2 783 4 548 6 970 9 917 16 347 22 385 32 165
5.5 697 1 487 2 185 3 011 4 920 7 540 10 729 17 685 24 217 34 798
6.0 750 1 599 2 350 3 239 5 291 8 110 11 539 19 021 26 046 37 427
4.7 6.5 802 1 711 2 514 3 466 5 662 8 678 12 349 20 354 27 873 40 052
16 7.0 855 1 823 2 679 3 693 6 033 9 246 13 157 21 687 29 697 42 673
7.5 907 1 935 2 843 3 919 6 403 9 814 13 964 23 017 31 519 45 291
8.0 959 2 047 3 007 4 145 6 773 10 380 14 771 24 346 33 339 47 907
8.5 1 012 2 158 3 172 4 372 7 143 10 947 15 577 25 675 35 159 50521
9.0 1 064 2 270 3 336 4 598 7 512 11 513 16 382 27 003 36 976 53133
9.5 1 116 2 381 3 499 4 824 7 881 12 078 17 187 28 329 38 793 55 743
10.0 1 169 2 493 3 663 5 049 8 250 12 644 17 991 29 655 40 608 58 352
11.0 1 273 2 715 3 991 5 501 8 987 13 774 19 599 32 305 44 237 63 566
12.0 1 377 2 938 4 318 5 952 9 724 14 903 21 206 34 955 47 866 68 780
13.0 1 482 3 161 4 645 6 402 10 460 16 032 22 812 37 601 51 490 73 989
14.0 1 586 3 383 4 972 6 853 11 197 17 161 24 419 40 250 55 117 79 199
15.0 1 690 3 606 5 299 7 304 11 934 18 290 26 025 42 898 58 743 84 410
16.0 1 795 3 829 5 626 7 755 12 671 19 420 27 633 45 547 62 371 89 623
17.0 1 899 4 051 5 954 8 206 13 408 20 549 29 240 48 196 65 999 -
18.0 2 004 4 274 6 281 8 658 14 146 21 680 30 849 50 847 69 630 -
19.0 2 108 4 497 6 609 9 110 14 884 22 812 32 460 53 504 73 267 -
20.0 2 213 4 721 6 937 9 562 15 623 23 944 34 070 56 158 76 902 -
21.0 2 318 4 944 7 266 10 015 16 363 25 078 35 684 58 818 - -
22.0 2 423 5 168 7 594 10 468 17 103 26 212 37 298 61 479 - -
23.0 2 528 5 392 7 924 10 922 17 844 27 348 38 915 64 144 - -
24.0 2 633 5 616 8 253 11 376 18 587 28 487 40 535 66 814 - -
25.0 2 738 5 841 8 584 11 831 19 331 29 626 42 156 69 487 - -
26.0 2 844 6 065 8 914 12 286 20 074 30 766 43 777 - - -
27.0 2 949 6 291 9 245 12 743 20 820 31 909 45 404 - - -
28.0 3 058 6 524 9 587 13 214 21 590 33 089 47 083 - - -
29.0 3 163 6 748 9 917 13 669 22 333 34 228 48 704 - - -
CMGT Issue 15
SV60 Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Table 2 - SV60 flow capacity for air - normal m3/h at 0°C and 1013 mbar
(calculated in accordance with AD-MERKBLATT A2 and TRD 421)
Orifice (mm) 17.0 23.8 30.6 38.0 50.1 59.0 73.0 91.0 105 125
Flow area (mm²) 230 445 740 1 140 1 979 2 734 4 185 6 504 8 659 12 272
 w (P > 4 bar) 0.78 0.86 0.76 0.68 0.64 0.71 0.66 0.70 0.72 0.73
Set pressure (bar g) Flow capacity for air m³/h
0.5 145 304 456 472 996 1 521 2 115 3 466 4 809 6 955
1.0 227 480 728 973 1 578 2 419 3 383 5 514 7 621 10 975
1.5 303 643 975 1 323 2 125 3 251 4 572 7 434 10 267 14 753
2.0 377 802 1 211 1 657 2 657 4 062 5 742 9 328 12 885 18 509
2.5 450 956 1 438 1 978 3 171 4 853 6 892 11 195 15 467 22 232
3.0 522 1 107 1 656 2 289 3 672 5 627 8 026 13 015 18 018 25 924
3.5 593 1 255 1 868 2 591 4 161 6 388 9 146 14 837 20 542 29 590
4.0 660 1 411 2 074 2 858 4 670 7 157 10 184 16 785 22 986 33 029
4.5 728 1 554 2 285 3 149 5 145 7 884 11 219 18 491 25 321 36 385
4.7
5.0 795 1 697 2 496 3 439 5 619 8 611 12 254 20 196 27 657 39 741
5.5 862 1 841 2 706 3 730 6 094 9 338 13 289 21 902 29 992 43 097
17
6.0 929 1 984 2 917 4 020 6 568 10 065 14 324 23 607 32 328 46 452
6.5 996 2 127 3 128 4 310 7 043 10 793 15 359 25 313 34 663 49 808
7.0 1 063 2 271 3 339 4 601 7 517 11 520 16 393 27 018 36 999 53 164
7.5 1 130 2 414 3 549 4 891 7 992 12 247 17 428 28 724 39 334 56 520
8.0 1 197 2 557 3 760 5 182 8 466 12 974 18 463 30 429 41 670 59 876
8.5 1 264 2 701 3 971 5 472 8 941 13 701 19 498 32 135 44 005 63 232
9.0 1 332 2 844 4 182 5 763 9 415 14 428 20 533 33 840 46 341 66 588
9.5 1 399 2 987 4 392 6 053 9 890 15 156 21 567 35 546 48 677 69 944
10.0 1 466 3 131 4 603 6 343 10 365 15 883 22 602 37 251 51 012 73 300
11.0 1 600 3 417 5 025 6 924 11 314 17 337 24 672 40 662 55 683 80 012
12.0 1 734 3 704 5 446 7 505 12 263 18 791 26 741 44 073 60 354 86 724
13.0 1 868 3 990 5 868 8 086 13 212 20 246 28 811 47 484 65 025 93 436
14.0 2 003 4 277 6 289 8 667 14 161 21 700 30 881 50 895 69 696 100 148
15.0 2 137 4 564 6 711 9 248 15 110 23 154 32 950 54 306 74 367 106 860
16.0 2 271 4 850 7 132 9 828 16 059 24 609 35 020 57 717 79 038 113 572
17.0 2 405 5 137 7 554 10 409 17 008 26 063 37 090 61 129 83 709 -
18.0 2 539 5 424 7 975 10 990 17 957 27 517 39 159 64 540 88 380 -
19.0 2 674 5 710 8 397 11 571 18 906 28 972 41 229 67 951 93 051 -
Continued on next page
CMGT Issue 15
SV60 Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Table 2 - SV60 flow capacity for air - normal m3/h at 0°C and 1013 mbar
Orifice (mm) 17.0 23.8 30.6 38.0 50.1 59.0 73.0 91.0 105 125
Flow area (mm²) 230 445 740 1 140 1 979 2 734 4 185 6 504 8 659 12 272
 w (P > 4 bar) 0.78 0.86 0.76 0.68 0.64 0.71 0.66 0.70 0.72 0.73
Set pressure (bar g) Flow capacity for air m³/h
20.0 2 808 5 997 8 818 12 152 19 855 30 426 43 299 71 362 97 723 -
21.0 2 942 6 284 9 240 12 733 20 804 31 880 45 368 74 773 - -
22.0 3 076 6 570 9 661 13 314 21 753 33 335 47 438 78 184 - -
23.0 3 210 6 857 10 083 13 894 22 702 34 789 49 507 81 595 - -
24.0 3 345 7 144 10 504 14 475 23 651 36 243 51 577 85 006 - -
25.0 3 479 7 430 10 926 15 056 24 600 37 698 53 647 88 417 - -
26.0 3 613 7 717 11 347 15 637 25 549 39 152 55 716 - - -
27.0 3 747 8 004 11 769 16 218 26 498 40 606 57 786 - - -
4.7 28.0 3 882 8 290 12 190 16 799 27 447 42 061 59 856 - - -
29.0 4 016 8 577 12 612 17 379 28 397 43 515 61 925 - - -

18 30.0 4 150 8 864 13 033 17 960 29 346 44 969 63 995 - - -
31.0 4 284 9 150 13 455 18 541 30 295 46 424 66 064 - - -
32.0 4 418 9 437 13 876 19 122 31 244 47 878 68 134 - - -
33.0 4 553 9 724 14 298 19 703 31 907 - - - - -
34.0 4 687 10 010 14 719 20 284 32 865 - - - - -
35.0 4 821 10 297 15 141 20 865 33 809 - - - - -
36.0 4 955 10 583 15 562 21 445 34 749 - - - - -
37.0 5 089 10 870 15 984 22 026 35 690 - - - - -
38.0 5 224 11 157 16 405 22 607 36 631 - - - - -
39.0 5 358 11 443 16 826 23 188 37 572 - - - - -
40.0 5 492 11 730 17 248 23 769 38 514 - - - - -
CMGT Issue 15
SV60 Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Table 3 - SV60 flow capacity for water in tonnes/h at 25% overpressure
Orifice (mm) 17.0 23.8 30.6 38.0 50.1 59.0 73.0 91.0 105 125
Flow area (mm²) 230 445 740 1140 1979 2734 4185 6504 8659 12272
w 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Set pressure (bar g) Flow capacity for water tonnes / h
0.5 4.6 8.9 14.9 22.9 39.8 55.0 84.1 130.8 174.1 246.7
1.0 6.5 12.6 21.0 32.4 56.3 77.7 119.0 184.9 246.2 348.9
2.0 9.2 17.9 29.8 45.8 79.6 109.9 168.3 261.5 348.2 493.5
3.0 11.3 21.9 36.5 56.1 97.5 134.6 206.1 320.3 426.4 604.4
4.0 13.1 25.3 42.1 64.8 112.6 155.5 238.0 369.9 492.4 697.9
5.0 14.6 28.3 47.1 72.5 125.8 173.8 266.1 413.5 550.5 780.2
6.0 16.0 31.0 51.6 79.4 137.8 190.4 291.5 453.0 603.1 854.7
7.0 17.3 33.5 55.7 85.8 148.9 205.7 314.9 489.3 651.4 923.2
8.0 18.5 35.8 59.5 91.7 159.2 219.9 336.6 523.1 696.4 986.9
4.7
9.0 19.6 37.9 63.1 97.2 168.8 233.2 357.0 554.8 738.6 1 046.8
10.0 20.6 40.0 66.6 102.5 178.0 245.8 376.3 584.8 778.6 1 103.4
19
11.0 21.7 42.0 69.8 107.5 186.6 257.8 394.7 613.3 816.6 1 157.3
12.0 22.6 43.8 72.9 112.3 194.9 269.3 412.2 640.6 852.9 1 208.7
13.0 23.5 45.6 75.9 116.9 202.9 280.3 429.1 666.8 887.7 1 258.1
14.0 24.4 47.3 78.8 121.3 210.6 290.9 445.3 691.9 921.2 1 305.6
15.0 25.3 49.0 81.5 125.5 218.0 301.1 460.9 716.2 953.5 1 351.4
16.0 26.1 50.6 84.2 129.7 225.1 310.9 476.0 739.7 984.8 1 395.7
17.0 26.9 52.2 86.8 133.7 232.0 320.5 490.7 762.5 1 015.1 -
18.0 27.7 53.7 89.3 137.5 238.8 329.8 504.9 784.6 1 044.6 -
19.0 28.5 55.1 91.7 141.3 245.3 338.8 518.7 806.1 1 073.2 -
20.0 29.2 56.6 94.1 145.0 251.7 347.6 532.2 827.0 1 101.1 -
21.0 29.9 58.0 96.5 148.6 257.9 356.2 545.3 847.4 - -
22.0 30.6 59.3 98.7 152.0 264.0 364.6 558.2 867.4 - -
23.0 31.3 60.7 100.9 155.5 269.9 372.8 570.7 886.9 - -
24.0 32.0 62.0 103.1 158.8 275.7 380.8 583.0 906.0 - -
25.0 32.6 63.2 105.2 162.1 281.4 388.7 595.0 940.0 - -
26.0 33.3 64.5 107.3 165.3 287.0 396.4 606.8 - - -
27.0 33.9 65.7 109.4 168.4 292.4 403.9 618.4 - - -
28.0 34.6 66.9 111.4 171.5 297.8 411.3 629.7 - - -
29.0 35.2 68.1 113.3 174.6 303.1 418.6 640.9 - - -
CMGT Issue 15
SV60 Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Table 3 - SV60 flow capacity for water in tonnes/h at 25% overpressure
Orifice (mm) 17.0 23.8 30.6 38.0 50.1 59.0 73.0 91.0 105 125
Flow area (mm²) 230 445 740 1140 1979 2734 4185 6504 8659 12272
w 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Set pressure (bar g) Flow capacity for water tonnes / h
30.0 35.8 69.3 115.3 177.6 308.2 425.8 651.8 - - -
31.0 36.4 70.4 117.2 180.5 313.3 432.8 662.6 - - -
32.0 36.9 71.6 119.1 183.4 318.3 439.7 673.2 - - -
33.0 37.5 72.7 120.9 186.2 323.3 - - - - -
34.0 38.1 73.8 122.7 189.0 328.1 - - - - -
35.0 38.6 74.8 124.5 191.8 332.9 - - - - -
36.0 39.2 75.9 126.3 194.5 337.7 - - - - -
37.0 39.7 76.9 128.0 197.2 342.3 - - - - -
4.7 38.0 40.3 78.0 129.7 199.8 346.9 - - - - -
39.0 40.8 79.0 131.4 202.4 351.4 - - - - -

20 40.0 41.3 80.0 133.1 205.0 355.9 - - - - -
Table 4 w/Kdr values for SV60 safety valves
Set pressure (bar g)
Size 0.2 - 0.49 0.5 - 0.99 1.0 - 1.49 1.5 - 1.99 2.0 - 2.49 2.5 - 2.99 3.0 - 3.49 3.5 - 3.99 Above 4.0
DN20 x DN32 0.56 0.62 0.69 0.73 0.75 0.76 0.77 0.78 0.78
DN25 x DN40 0.62 0.67 0.75 0.80 0.82 0.84 0.85 0.85 0.86
DN32 x DN50 0.56 0.60 0.68 0.73 0.75 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.76
DN40 x DN65 0.45 0.51 0.59 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.68
DN50 x DN80 0.47 0.49 0.55 0.59 0.61 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.64
DN65 x DN100 0.50 0.55 0.61 0.66 0.68 0.69 0.70 0.71 0.71
DN80 x DN125 0.45 0.50 0.56 0.60 0.63 0.64 0.65 0.66 0.66
DN100 x DN150 0.48 0.52 0.59 0.63 0.66 0.67 0.68 0.69 0.70
DN125 x DN200 0.50 0.55 0.61 0.65 0.68 0.70 0.71 0.72 0.72
DN150 x DN250 0.51 0.56 0.62 0.66 0.69 0.71 0.72 0.73 0.73
Page 10 of 12 TI-S13-27
CMGT Issue 15
SV60 Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4

Size Dimensions Weight
Inlet/Outlet Flow Ø SV604 SV607
A B C D
DN20 - DN32 85 95 385 17.0 10.5 10.5
DN25 - DN40 100 105 435 23.8 12.5 11.5
DN32 - DN50 110 115 450 30.6 16.0 15.0
DN40 - DN65 115 140 520 38.0 18.0 18.0
DN50 - DN80 120 150 535 50.1 20.0 22.0
DN65 - DN100 140 170 710 59.0 40.0 38.0
DN80 - DN125 160 195 790 73.0 56.0 53.0
DN100 - DN150 180 220 835 91.0 77.0 75.0
DN125 - DN200 200 250 1042 105.0 120.0 115.0
DN150 - DN250 225 285 1165 125.0 190.0 180.0
4.7
21
D
A
TI-S13-27 Page 11 of 12
CMGT Issue 15
SV60 Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Installation note:
The safety valve should always be fitted with the centre line of the spring housing vertically above the valve.
Open bonnet valves are recommended for all steam boiler applications and must be used for valves fitted with Tungsten alloy springs.
SV60 safety valve selection guide:

4 = Carbon steel
Body material 4
7 = SG iron
A = Closed bonnet/easing lever
B = Closed bonnet/sealed cap

Configuration A
C = Closed bonnet/packed lever (DN20 to DN100 only)
D = Open bonnet/easing lever
S = Stainless steel with chrome-vanadium alloy steel spring

Seal material S
T = Stainless steel with tungsten alloy steel spring
Size DN20 to DN150 DN20
4.7 Inlet connection PN16 (DN65 to DN150 only), PN25, PN40 or ASME (ANSI) 300 PN40
22 Selection example SV60 4 A S DN20 PN40

1 off Spirax Sarco SV604AS, DN20 flanged PN40 safety valve with a set pressure of 6 bar g.
Page 12 of 12 TI-S13-27
CMGT Issue 15
SV60 Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves
TI-P317-02
CTLS Issue 5
SV60H
Safety Valve
4.7
Description 23
The SV60H is a range of full lift safety valves suitable for the protection of hot water
generators. The construction is characterised by an EPDM bellows and elastomer seat
seal to ensure leak free operation.
Available types
Set pressure range 1 to 10 bar g (in 0.5 bar increments)
SV604H Carbon steel

Body materials
SV607H SG iron
'O' ring seat seals in accordance with Vd TÜV-Merkblatt SV100/4 EPDM, Viton
Applications
The SV60H is designed to protect hot water generators from overpressure in accordance
with DIN 4751, Side 2, for temperatures up to 120 °C.
Certification
A manufacturers' Typical Test Report is provided as standard for each valve which will
include valve set and hydraulic test pressure.
Also available on request is material certification in accordance with EN 10204 3.1.

The SV60H carries the mark and complies with the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) and falls within
Category 4 for Group 2 gases.
The SV60H is approved by the TÜV to TRD 421, TRD 721 and Vd TÜV Merkblatt SV100 and 100/4.
Size and end connections

Inlet sizes DN20, DN25, DN32, DN40, DN50, DN65, DN80, DN100, DN125 and DN150
Valve type Inlet connection Outlet connection
PN16 (DN65 to DN150 only) PN16

SV607H
PN25 PN16
SV604H PN40 PN16
Page 1 of 7
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Please contact Spirax Sarco, when so required, for relevant details regarding the maximum allowable limits that the shell can withstand.
Temperature °C
SV604H PN40 inlet this region.
Pressure bar g

Temperature °C

SV607H PN25 inlet

Pressure bar g
4.7
24
Temperature °C

SV607H PN16 inlet

Pressure bar g
SV604H PN40
SV607H PN16 or PN25
Maximum 10 bar g
Set pressure range
Minimum 1 bar g
Minimum 5 °C
EPDM seat
Maximum 120 °C
Temperature
Minimum 5 °C
Viton seat
Maximum 120 °C
Overpressure 10%
Blowdown limit 10% of set pressure

Performance data
Derated coefficient of discharge values 0.5
Backpressure limit Up to 10% of set pressure
PN40 60 bar g
Designed for a maximum inlet cold hydraulic test pressure of: PN25 38 bar g
PN16 24 bar g
CTLS Issue 5
SV60H Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Materials
13
3
10
5
10
11
7
2
9 4.7
25
5
7
2 No. Part Material
SV604H Carbon steel 1.0619 + N

1 Body
SV607H SG iron GJS-400-18 LT
DN20 - DN100 Stainless steel 1.4057

1 2 Seat
DN125 - DN150 Stainless steel ANC2
SV604H Carbon steel 1.0619 + N

3 Bonnet
SV607H SG iron GJS-400-18 LT
4 Cap SG iron GJS-400-15

5 Disc
DN150 Stainless steel CA15
6 Spring Chrome-vanadium alloy steel

7 Skirt
8 Stem Stainless steel 1.4021
9 Body bolts Steel CK35
10 Spring plate Carbon steel C45E
11 Collets Steel 1.4021
13 Adjustment screw Stainless steel 1.4021
CTLS Issue 5
SV60H Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
26
17
39
19, 20
35 15 44 44
14
18
21
16
23
45
32
4.7 35 9 46
26 44
35
43
15
21
16
23
45
32
46 No. Part Material
14 Lock-nut Zinc plated carbon steel

22
15 Guide plate SG iron GJS-400-15
17 Collar Zinc plated carbon steel
18 Lever SG iron GJS-400-15
19 Lever cross pin Zinc plated carbon steel
20 Circlip Spring steel
21 Disc pin Spring steel
22 Body drain plug ½" BSP Steel DIN 7343, A304
23 Stem ball Stainless steel
26 Collar pin Zinc plated carbon steel
32 'O' ring washer Stainless steel 1.4021
35 Guide plate gasket (2 off) Reinforced exfoliated graphite
39 Collar circlip Spring steel
43 Bellows EPDM
44 Hose clamp Stainless steel
45 'O' ring EPDM/Viton
46 Nut Stainless steel
CTLS Issue 5
SV60H Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Table 1 - SV60H flow capacities for hot water in kilowatts (kW) at or above 100 °C
(calculated in accordance with TRD 721)
Valve size DN 20/32 25/40 32/50 40/65 50/80 65/100 80/125 100/150 125/200 150/250
Orifice (mm) 17.0 23.8 30.6 38.0 50.1 59.0 73.0 91.0 105 125
Area (mm²) 230 445 740 1140 1979 2734 4185 6504 8659 12272
Set pressure (bar g) Flow capacity for hot water kW
1.0 122 236 327 504 875 1 172 1 795 3 050 4 061 5 756
1.5 149 288 437 673 1 168 1 569 2 402 3 733 4 970 7 044
2.0 176 341 531 818 1 421 1 883 2 882 4 416 5 879 8 333
2.5 204 394 580 894 1 552 2 143 3 281 5 099 6 789 9 621
3.0 229 443 653 1 005 1 745 2 411 3 691 5 737 7 637 10 824
3.5 256 496 730 1 125 1 953 2 698 4 131 6 419 8 546 12 112
4.0 282 545 803 1 237 2 147 2 966 4 541 7 057 9 395 13 315
4.5 307 594 875 1 349 2 341 3 234 4 951 7 694 10 244 14 518
5.0 333 643 948 1 460 2 535 3 502 5 361 8 332 11 092 15 720
5.5 358 693 1 020 1 572 2 729 3 770 5 771 8 969 11 941 16 923
6.0 382 738 1 088 1 676 2 909 4 019 6 152 9 561 12 729 18 040
4.7
6.5 414 802 1 181 1 819 3 158 4 363 6 679 10 380 13 820 19 586 27
7.0 431 833 1 228 1 891 3 283 4 536 6 943 10 790 14 365 20 359
7.5 456 882 1 300 2 003 3 477 4 804 7 353 11 428 15 214 21 562
8.0 480 928 1 368 2 107 3 657 5 052 7 734 12 019 16 002 22 679
8.5 500 967 1 425 2 195 3 810 5 263 8 056 12 520 16 669 23 624
9.0 529 1 023 1 507 2 322 4 031 5 569 8 525 13 249 17 638 24 998
9.5 556 1 076 1 585 2 442 4 239 5 856 8 964 13 932 18 548 26 287
10.0 574 1 111 1 637 2 522 4 378 6 048 9 257 14 387 19 154 27 146
Table 2 - TRD 721 sizing

The safety valve discharge capacity expressed as heat output p of the heat generator in kW is calculated according to the following
formula:
P = Ao . w . K
Valve size DN 20/32 25/40 32/50 40/65 50/80 65/100 80/125 100/150 125/200 150/250
Orifice (mm) do 17.0 23.8 30.6 38.0 50.1 59.0 73.0 91.0 105 125
Area (mm²) Ao 230 445 740 1140 1979 2734 4185 6504 8659 12272
Set pressure bar g w values
1.0 0.79 0.79 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.64 0.64 0.70 0.70 0.70
1.5 0.79 0.79 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70
2.0 0.79 0.79 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.71 0.71 0.70 0.70 0.70
2.5 to 10 0.79 0.79 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70
CTLS Issue 5
SV60H Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Constant K depending on the set pressure (bar g)
Set pressure bar g K
1.0 0.67
1.5 0.82
2.0 0.97
2.5 1.12
3.0 1.26
3.5 1.41
4.0 1.55
4.5 1.69
5.0 1.83
6.0 2.10
7.0 2.37
8.0 2.64
9.0 2.91
10.0 3.16
4.7
Dimensions Weight
Size
Flow Ø
Inlet - Outlet
A B C D SV604H SV607H
DN20 - DN32 85 95 385 17.0 10.5 10.5
DN25 - DN40 100 105 435 23.8 12.5 11.5
DN32 - DN50 110 115 450 30.6 16.0 15.0
DN40 - DN65 115 140 520 38.0 18.0 18.0
DN50 - DN80 120 150 535 50.1 20.0 22.0
DN65 - DN100 140 170 710 59.0 40.0 38.0
DN80 - DN125 160 195 790 73.0 56.0 53.0 C
DN100 - DN150 180 220 835 91.0 77.0 75.0
DN125 - DN200 200 250 1042 105.0 120.0 115.0
DN150 - DN250 225 285 1165 125.0 190.0 180.0
CTLS Issue 5
SV60H Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Installation note: The safety valve should always be fitted with the centre line of the spring housing vertically above the valve.

In accordance with TRD 721. See Tables 1 and 2, page 5.
SV60H safety valve selection guide:

4H = Carbon steel
Body material 4H
7H = SG iron
Configuration A = Closed bonnet / easing lever A
E = EPDM
Seal material E
V = Viton
Size DN20 to DN150 DN20
PN16 (DN65 to DN150 only)

Inlet connection PN40
PN25, PN40
4.7
Selection example SV60 - 4H - A - E - DN20 - PN40
29
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco SV604HAE, DN20 flanged PN40 safety valve with a set pressure of 6 bar g.
CTLS Issue 5
SV60H Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
4.7
30
Control systems
Safety valves
TI-P315-04
CTLS Issue 4
SVL606
Stainless Steel
Safety Valve
Description
The SVL606 is a stainless steel, full lift TÜV approved flanged safety valve suitable
for use with steam, gas and liquids.
4.7
Available types
31
Two main variations of the valve are available:
SVL606-B with a sealed cap for liquid service.
SVL606-C with a packed easing lever for steam (or other services where a
lever is specified).
Note: Both designs have closed bonnets.
Applications
The SVL606 is suitable for the overpressure protection of steam boilers, pipelines,
pressure vessels and most general process industry applications, particularly
where a valve of all stainless steel construction is required to minimise
contamination of the process media or where hygienic considerations and aesthetic
qualities are prerequisites. This valve is also suitable for cryogenic service.

Approved by the TÜV to AD Merkblatt A2, TRD 421.
The requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) have been satisfied
and the valve belongs to Category 4, having been designed for use with fluids in
Group 1 and 2 (gases and liquids). Always consult Spirax Sarco for fluid
compatibility.

Inlet size DN 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 Flanged EN 1092 PN40
Outlet size DN 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 Flanged EN 1092 PN16
Optional extras
Flanges: ANSI B 16.5 flanges are available on request.
Soft seals are available (contact Spirax Sarco for pressure/temperature limitations).
Special springs to extend the set pressure range on certain sizes can be provided.
Page 1 of 7
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Materials
No. Part Material 9
1 Body Stainless steel 1.4408
Seat Stainless steel 1.4404

2 11
Disc Stainless steel 1.4404
3 Disc with 'O' ring (when specified) EPDM (FDA approved)
4 Guide Stainless steel 1.4404 8
5 Bonnet Stainless steel 1.4408
6 Spindle Stainless steel 1.4404
7 Spring plate Stainless steel 1.4404

7
Adjustment screw Stainless steel 1.4404
8
with bush PTFE
5
9 Cap Stainless steel 1.4404
11 Easing lever Stainless steel 1.4408
12 Bolt Stainless steel 1.4401 10

4.7 13 Nut Stainless steel 1.4401
32 14 Body gasket Laminated graphite
12
13
14
4
3
Optional
EPDM soft seat seal
CTLS Issue 4
SVL606 Stainless Steel Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
A
Temperature °C
B
C
Pressure bar g

A-B Metal seat
B-C EPDM seat seal is limited to a maximum operating temperature of 130 °C.
Maximum 40 bar g
DN25 to DN40
Minimum 0.1 bar g
Maximum 33 bar g
DN50
Minimum 0.1 bar g
Maximum 28 bar g
4.7
Set pressure DN65
Minimum 0.1 bar g 33
Please note: That higher set pressures are
available with special springs. Maximum 13.6 bar g
Consult Spirax Sarco. DN80
Minimum 0.1 bar g
Maximum 15 bar g
DN100 and DN125
Minimum 0.1 bar g
Maximum 7 bar g
DN150
Minimum 0.1 bar g
Maximum +300 °C
Metal seat
Minimum -270 °C
Temperature
Maximum +130 °C
EPDM seat
Minimum -45 °C
Overpressure Steam, gas, liquid Maximum 10%
Blowdown limits Steam, gas, liquid Maximum 10%

Performance data
Steam, gas 0.70
Liquid 0.45
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Table 1 - SVL606 flow capacity for dry saturated steam in kilogrammes per hour (kg/h)
(calculated at 10% overpressure in accordance with EN ISO 4126)
Valve size DN in/out 25/40 32/50 40/65 50/80 65/100 80/125 100/150 125/200 150/250
mm 2 416 661 1 075 1 662 2 827 4 301 6 648 7 543 12 272

Flow area
in 2
0.645 1.024 1.666 2.576 4.382 6.667 10.3 11.69 19.02
0.2 151 240 390 604 1 027 1 562 2 415 2 740 4 457
0.5 214 341 554 857 1 457 2 217 3 427 3 888 6 325
1.0 319 507 825 1 275 2 169 3 300 5 100 5 787 9 415
2.0 504 801 1 303 2 015 3 427 5 213 8 058 9 143 14 875
3.0 678 1 077 1 751 2 707 4 605 7 006 10 829 12 297 19 991
4.0 843 1 339 2 177 3 366 5 726 8 711 13 465 15 277 24 855
5.0 1 007 1 599 2 601 4 022 6 840 10 407 16 086 18 252 29 694
6.0 1 170 1 859 3 023 4 674 7 951 12 096 18 697 21 214 34 514
7.0 1 333 2 118 3 444 5 325 9 058 13 781 21 300 24 168 39 320
4.7 8.0 1 495 2 376 3 864 5 975 10 162 15 461 23 898 27 115
34 9.0 1 658 2 634 4 284 6 623 11 265 17 138 26 491 30 057
10.0 1 820 2 891 4 702 7 270 12 366 18 813 29 080 32 995
12.0 2 143 3 406 5 539 8 563 14 565 22 160 43 252 38 863
13.6 2 402 3 817 6 207 9 596 16 323 24 834 38 385 43 553
15.0 1 628 4 176 6 792 10 501 17 861 42 003 47 657
16.0 2 790 4 433 7 210 11 147 18 960
18.0 3 114 4 947 8 046 12 440 21 159
20.0 3 438 5 462 8 883 13 733 23 360
22.0 3 762 5 978 9 722 15 030 25 565
CTLS Issue 4
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Table 2 - SVL606 flow capacity for air - normal m3/h at 0 °C and 1013 mbar
(calculated in accordance with AD-MERKBLATT A2)
mm 2 416 661 1 075 1 662 2 827 4 301 6 648 7 543 12 272

Flow area
in 2
0.645 1.024 1.666 2.576 4.382 6.667 10.3 11.69 19.02
Set pressure (bar g) Flow capacity for air m 3 /h
0.2 162 258 420 649 1 105 1 680 2 597 2 947 4 794
0.5 263 418 680 1 051 1 789 2 721 4 206 4 772 7 764
1.0 388 617 1 004 1 552 2 641 4 017 6 209 7 045 11 461
3.0 854 1 357 2 209 3 414 5 809 8 836 13 657 15 497 25 212
5.0 1 289 2 050 3 337 5 157 8 774 13 346 20 629 23 407 38 082
7.0 1 725 2 742 4 464 6 900 11 739 17 857 27 600 31 317 50 951
10.0 2 379 3 781 6 155 9 514 16 187 24 622 38 057 43 183
12.0 2 814 4 474 7 283 11 257 19 152 29 152 45 028 51 093
13.6 3 163 5 028 8 185 12 651 21 524 32 747 50 617 57 431
15.0 3 468 5 305 8 974 13 872 23 600 55 498 62 970 4.7

16.0 3 686 5 859 9 538 14 743 25 082 35
18.0 4121 6 552 10 666 16 486 28 047
20.0 4 557 7 245 11 793 18 228 31 012
22.0 4 993 7 938 12 921 19 971 33 977
26.0 5 864 9 323 15 176 23 457 39 908
28.0 6 300 10 016 16 304 25 200 42 873
30.0 6 736 10 708 17 431 26 942
32.0 7 171 11 401 18 559 28 685
33.0 7 389 11 747 19 123 29 565
36.0 8 043 12 786 20 814
40.0 8 914 14 172 23 069
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Table 3 - SVL606 flow capacity for water in kilogrammes per hour (kg/h) at 20 °C
(calculated in accordance with AD-MERKBLATT A2 at 10% overpressure)
mm 2 416 661 1 075 1 662 2 827 4 301 6 648 7 543 12 272

Flow area
in 2
0.645 1.024 1.666 2.576 4.382 6.667 10.3 11.69 19.02
0.2 5 210 8 280 13 500 20 800 15 500 53 000 85 300 94 600 154 000
0.5 7 370 11 700 19 100 29 500 50 100 76 300 118 000 134 000 218 000
1.0 9 970 15 900 25 800 39 900 67 900 103 000 160 000 181 000 295 000
3.0 17 300 27 500 44 700 69 100 118 000 179 000 276 000 314 000 510 000
5.0 22 300 35 500 57 700 89 200 152 000 231 000 357 000 405 000 659 000
7.0 19 900 42 000 68 300 106 000 180 000 273 000 422 000 479 000 779 000
10.0 31 500 50 100 81 600 126 000 215 000 326 000 505 000 573 000
12.0 34 600 54 900 89 400 138 000 235 000 358 000 553 000 627 000
13.6 36 700 58 300 94 800 147 000 249 000 379 000 586 000 665 000
4.7 15.0 38 600 61 300 99 700 154 000 262 000 616 000 699 000
36 16.0 39 900 63 400 103 000 160 000 272 000
18.0 42 300 67 300 110 000 169 000 288 000
20.0 44 600 70 900 115 000 178 000 304 000
22.0 46 800 74 400 121 000 187 000 318 000
26.0 50 900 80 900 132 000 203 000 346 000
28.0 52 800 83 900 137 000 211 000 359 000
30.0 54 600 86 800 141 000 219 000
32.0 56 400 89 700 146 000 226 000
33.0 57 300 91 100 148 000 229 000
36.0 59 800 95 100 155 000
40.0 63 100 100 000 163 000
CTLS Issue 4
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Valve size A B C
SVL606B SVL606C
Inlet Outlet Centreline at Centreline at Overall height, Overall height, Additional height Weight
inlet to outlet outlet to inlet Gas tight cap packed lever with bellows
flange face flange face design design
DN25 DN40 100 105 337 339 39 9
DN32 DN50 110 115 430 437 42 12
DN40 DN65 115 140 496 503 38 16
DN50 DN80 120 150 553 560 46 22
DN65 DN100 140 170 651 699 70 32
DN80 DN125 160 195 753 801 59 56
DN100 DN150 180 220 835 883 56 75
DN125 DN200 200 250 865 913 56 85
DN150 DN250 225 285 1 020 1 020 58 131
Installation
4.7
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the
product. 37
SVL606 safety valve selection guide
Model type SVL60 SVL60
B = Closed bonnet/gas tight cap

Configuration B
C = Closed bonnet/packed easing lever
S = Stainless steel
Seal material S
E = EPDM
Inlet connection PN40 = Flanged PN40
SVL606 - B - S - PN40
C
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN25 x 40 SVL606-B-S-PN40 safety valve with a
set pressure of 15.5 bar g.
CTLS Issue 4
44 Control systems
Safety valves
4.7
38
Control systems
Safety valves
TI-S13-25
CTLS Issue 13
SV73
Cast Iron
Safety Valve
4.7
39
Description
The SV73 cast iron series valves are built in conformance to Section I and VIII of
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. They are primarily intended for use
on power boilers and unfired pressure vessels where ASME Section I and VIII
stamped valves are required.
Applications
Protection of steam systems downstream of pressure regulating stations, on inlet
to such equipment as air coils, heat exchangers and process vessels. Also for use
on flash recovery vessels on condensate return systems to protect vessels. Air
systems to protect accumulation vessels and air equipment from overpressurisation.
Steam boilers and generators.
Available types
The SV73 is available with cast iron body and stainless steel trim in orifice sizes
from 'J' to 'R'. It has an open bonnet and easing lever and is available with screwed
or flanged connections.
Certification
A manufacturers' Typical Test Report is provided as standard for each valve which
will include valve set and hydraulic test pressure. Also available on request is
material certification in accordance with EN 10204 3.1.

Approved by National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Sections I and VIII.
Seat tightness is in accordance with ANSI/API STD 527-1992.
If National Board 'V' or 'UV' stamp is required, then this must be specified at the time of ordering.
Important note: SV73 safety valves are not marked and therefore not to be used within the EEA.

1½" x 2½" to 3" x 4" Inlet/outlet screwed female NPT.
1½" x 2½" to 3" x 4" Inlet flanged ANSI class 250 RF, Outlet screwed female NPT.
3" x 4" to 6" x 8" Inlet flanged ANSI class 250 RF, Outlet flanged ANSI class 125 FF.
Page 1 of 8
44 Control systems
Safety valves
A
Temperature °F
C
Steam
saturation
curve
D B
Pressure psi g

A - B Limit for valves with a flanged inle
C - D Limit for valves with a screwed inlet.
Body design conditions ANSI 250
Maximum 250 psi g

Set pressure range
Minimum 5 psi g
Screwed inlet 406 °F

Maximum
Temperature Flanged inlet 446 °F
4.7 Minimum -20 °F
ASME I Steam 3%
40 Overpressure Steam 10%
ASME VIII
Air/gas 10%
ASME I Steam 2 - 6%
Performance data
Blowdown limits Steam 7%
ASME VIII
Air/gas 7%
Steam 0.955
Air/gas 0.955
Maximum permitted backpressure up to: 10% of set pressure
Tested at a maximum inlet cold hydraulic test pressure of: 600 psi g
CTLS Issue 12
SV73 Cast Iron Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Materials
No. Part Material
4
26 ASTM A126
1 Body Cast iron
16 Class B
24, 25
ASTM A351
Grade CF8
14 ASTM A126
3 Bonnet Cast iron
15 Class B
18 20
ASTM A126
4 Cap Cast iron
Class B
ASTM A217
5 Disc Stainless steel
CA15
6
3 ASTM A351
7 Upper adjusting ring Stainless steel
Grade CF8
10
ASTM A351
8 Lower adjusting ring Stainless steel
Grade CF8
12
13 ASTM A182/
11 9 Stem (lower) Stainless steel A182M-18 F6A
Class 3
27
40
10 Stem (upper) Stainless steel
ASTM A479 4.7
9 Type 410
5
7 11 Spring washers (2 off) Steel ASTM A105
41
21
ASTM A193
17 23 12 Bonnet stud Steel
Grade B7
22 8
ASTM A194
13 Bonnet nut Steel
Grade 2H
2 ASTM A479
14 Adjusting screw Stainless steel
Type 410
15 Adjusting screw nut Carbon steel

1
16 Release ring Carbon steel
17 Lock-nut (2 off) Carbon steel
18 Lever Grey iron
27 5 20 Cap set screw Carbon steel
21 Upper adjusting ring pin Stainless steel
22 Lower adjusting ring pin Stainless steel

40
23 Disc ball Stainless steel
9
24 Pin washer Carbon steel
7 25 Lever pin Carbon steel
21
26 Lock-nut Carbon steel
17 27 Guide plate Carbon steel
22 40 Stem pin Carbon steel
23 8
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Capacities
1. lb/h steam, 90% of actual capacity at 3% accumulation in accordance with ASME Code, Section I.
Orifice J K L M
Area Sq. In. 1.374 1.968 3.054 3.846
Real flow Real flow Real flow Real flow

Steam saturation
Set pressure psi g lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h
temperature ºF
3% 10% 3% 10% 3% 10% 3% 10%
250 15 1 833 1 897 2 625 2 717 4 074 4 216 5 131 5 308
259 20 2 146 2 231 3 074 3 196 4 770 4 959 6 007 6 244
267 25 2 459 2 566 3 522 3 675 5 466 5 702 6 883 7 180
274 30 2 772 2 900 3 971 4 153 6 162 6 446 7 760 8 116
281 35 3 085 3 234 4 419 4 632 6 858 7 189 8 636 9 052
287 40 3 398 3 569 4 868 5 111 7 554 7 932 9 513 9 987
292 45 3 711 3 903 5 316 5 590 8 250 8 675 10 389 10 923
298 50 4 025 4 237 5 764 6 069 8 945 9 418 11 265 11 859
303 55 4 338 4 572 6 213 6 548 9 641 10 162 12 142 12 795
307 60 4 651 4 906 6 661 7 027 10 337 10 905 13 018 13 730
312 65 4 964 5 240 7 110 7 506 11 033 11 648 13 894 14 666
316 70 5 277 5 575 7 558 7 985 11 729 12 391 14 771 15 602
4.7 320 75 5 590 5 909 8 007 8 464 12 425 13 134 15 647 16 538
324 80 5 903 6 244 8 455 8 943 13 121 13 878 16 524 17 474
42 328 85 6 216 6 578 8 904 9 422 13 817 14 261 17 400 18 409
331 90 6 529 6 912 9 352 9 901 14 513 15 364 18 276 19 345
335 95 6 842 7 247 9 800 10 379 15 209 16 107 19 153 20 281
338 100 7 155 7 581 10 249 10 858 15 905 16 850 20 029 21 217
341 105 7 469 7 915 10 697 11 337 16 600 17 594 20 905 22 152
344 110 7 782 8 250 11 146 11 816 17 296 18 337 21 782 23 088
347 115 8 293 8 584 11 594 12 295 17 992 19 080 22 658 24 024
350 120 8 408 8 918 12 043 12 774 18 688 19 823 23 535 24 960
353 125 8 721 9 253 12 491 13 253 19 384 20 566 24 411 25 896
356 130 9 034 9 587 12 940 13 732 20 080 21 310 25 287 26 831
358 135 9 347 9 922 13 388 14 211 20 776 22 053 26 164 27 767
361 140 9 660 10 256 13 836 14 690 21 472 22 796 27 040 28 703
363 145 9 973 10 590 14 285 15 169 22 168 23 539 27 916 29 639
366 150 10 286 10 925 14 733 15 648 22 864 24 282 28 793 30 574
368 155 10 599 11 259 15 182 16 127 23 559 25 026 29 669 31 510
371 160 10 913 11 593 15 630 16 605 24 255 25 769 30 546 32 446
373 165 11 226 11 928 16 079 17 084 24 951 26 512 31 422 33 382
375 170 11 539 12 262 16 527 17 563 25 647 27 255 32 298 34 317
377 175 11 852 12 597 16 976 18 042 26343 27 998 33 175 35 253
380 180 12 165 12 931 17 424 18 521 27 039 28 742 34 051 36 189
382 185 12 478 13 265 17 872 19 000 27 735 29 485 34 927 37 125
384 190 12 791 13 600 18 321 19 479 28 431 30 228 35 804 38 061
386 195 13 104 13 934 18 769 19 958 29 127 30 971 36 680 38 996
388 200 13 417 14 268 19 218 20 437 29 823 31 714 37 557 39 932
390 205 13 728 14 600 19 663 20 912 30 513 32 452 38 426 40 868
392 210 14 043 14 937 20 115 21 395 31 214 33 201 39 309 41 804
394 215 14 354 15 269 20 560 21 870 31 905 33 938 40 179 42 739
396 220 14 670 15 606 21 008 22 352 32 606 34 687 41 062 43 675
398 225 14 980 15 937 21 456 22 827 33 296 35 424 41 931 44 611
399 230 15 296 16 275 21 908 23 310 33 998 36 174 42 815 45 547
401 235 15 606 16 606 22 353 23 785 34 688 36 911 43 684 46 483
403 240 15 922 16 943 22 805 24 268 35 390 37 660 44 568 47 418
404 245 16 232 17 275 23 250 24 743 36 080 38 397 45 436 48 354
406 250 16 548 17 612 23 702 25 226 36 782 39 146 46 320 49 290
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
Safety valves 4
2. lb/h steam, 90% of actual capacity at 10% accumulation in accordance with ASME Code, Section VIII.
Orifice N P Q R
Area Sq. In. 4.633 6.830 11.811 17.123
Real flow Real flow Real flow Real flow

Steam saturation Set pressure
lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h
temperature ºF psi g
3% 10% 3% 10% 3% 10% 3% 10%
250 15 6 181 6 395 9 111 9 427 15 756 16 302 22 842 23 634
259 20 7 236 7 522 10 668 11 089 18 447 19 176 26 744 27 800
267 25 8 292 8 649 12 224 12 751 21 139 22 050 30 646 31 966
274 30 9 348 9 776 13 780 14 413 23830 24 923 34 548 36 133
281 35 10 403 10 904 15 337 16 074 26 521 27 797 38 449 40 299
287 40 11 459 12 031 16 893 17 736 29 213 30 671 42 351 44 465
292 45 12 515 13 158 18 449 19 398 31 904 33 545 46 253 48 631
298 50 13 570 14 286 20 006 21 060 34 595 36 418 50 155 52 797
303 55 14 626 15 413 21 562 22 722 37 287 39 292 54 057 56 964
307 60 15 682 16 540 23 118 24 383 39 978 42 166 57 958 61 130
312 65 16 738 17 667 24 675 26 045 42 670 45 040 61 860 65 296
316 70 17 793 18 795 26 231 27 707 45 361 47 913 65 762 69 462
320 75 18 849 19 922 27 567 29 369 48 052 50 787 69 664 73 629 4.7
324 80 19 905 21 049 29 344 31 031 50 744 53 661 73 565 77 795
328 85 20 960 22 176 30 900 32 693 53 435 56 535 77 467 81 961 43
331 90 22 016 23 304 32 456 34 354 56 126 59 408 81 369 86 127
335 95 23 072 24 431 34 013 36 016 58 818 62 282 85 271 90 294
338 100 24 128 25 558 35 569 37 678 61 509 65 156 89 173 94 460
341 105 25 183 26 685 37 125 39 340 64 200 68 030 93 074 98 626
344 110 26 239 27 813 38 682 41 002 66 892 70 903 96 976 102 792
347 115 27 295 28 940 40 238 42 663 69 583 73 777 100 878 106 958
350 120 28 350 30 067 41 001 44 325 72 274 76 651 104 780 111 125
353 125 29 406 31 194 43 351 45 987 74 966 79 525 108 681 115 291
356 130 30 462 32 322 44 907 47 649 77 657 82 398 112 583 119 457
358 135 31 518 33 449 46 463 49 311 80 348 85 272 116 485 123 623
361 140 32 573 34 576 48 020 50 973 83 040 88 146 120 387 127 790
363 145 33 629 35 704 49576 52 634 85 731 91 020 124 288 131 956
366 150 34 685 36 831 51 132 54 296 88 422 93 893 128 190 136 122
368 155 35 740 37 958 52 689 55 958 91 114 96 767 132 092 140 288
371 160 36 796 39 085 54 245 57 620 93 805 99 641 135 994 144 454
373 165 37 852 40 212 55 801 59 282 96 496 102 515 139 896 148 621
375 170 38 907 41 340 57 358 60 943 99 188 105 388 143 797 152 787
377 175 39 963 42 467 58 914 62 605 101 879 108 262 147 699 156 953
380 180 41 019 43 594 60 470 64 267 104 570 111 136 151 601 161 119
382 185 42 075 44 722 62 027 65 929 107 262 114 010 155 503 165 286
384 190 43 130 45 849 63 583 67 591 109 953 116 883 159 404 169 452
386 195 44 186 46 976 65 139 69 253 112 644 119 757 163 306 173 618
388 200 45 242 48 103 66 696 70 914 115 336 122 631 167 208 177 784
390 205 46 290 49 231 68 240 72 576 118 007 125 505 171 080 181 951
392 210 47 353 50 358 69 808 74 238 120 718 128 378 175 012 186 117
394 215 48 401 51 485 71 352 75 900 123 389 131 252 178 883 190 283
396 220 49 465 52 612 72 921 77 562 126 101 134 126 182 815 194 449
398 225 50 512 53 740 74 465 79 223 128 770 137 000 18 685 198 615
399 230 51 576 54 867 76 034 80 885 131 484 139 874 190 619 202 782
401 235 52 623 55 994 77 577 82 547 134 152 142 747 194 487 206 948
403 240 53 687 57 122 79 146 84 209 136 866 145 621 198 422 211 114
404 245 54 734 58 249 80 689 85 871 139 534 148 495 202 289 215 280
406 250 55 799 59 376 82 259 87 533 142 249 151 369 206 226 219 447
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Safety valve sizing information
Formulas:
For steam service: For organic fluid vaporizers - lb/h:
Where:
A = Required orifice area in square inches
Relieving pressure in pounds per square inch absolute = set pressure (psi g) + overpressure + 14.7 where the overpressure is
P =
3% or 2 psi, whichever is the greater. P = 1.03 x set pressure + 14.7 or P = set pressure + 2 psi + 14.7.
T = Inlet temperature, °F. Absolute ( °F plus 460).
= Required steam capacity in pounds per hour.
= Required vapor capacity in pounds per hour.
Kd = Coefficient of discharge, 0.955 for steam, air and vapour service.
K sh = Steam superheat correction factor.
M = Average molecular weight of vapour.
C = Gas or vapour flow constant.
Compressibility factor corresponding to T and P. If this factor is not available, compressibility correction can be safely ignored
Z =
using a value of Z = 1.0.
4.7
Table 1 Ksh superheat correction factor
44
Set pressure psi g
Total steam 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 250
temperature
°F Saturated steam temperature °F
250 259 287 308 324 338 350 361 371 380 388 395 403 406
280 1.00 1.00
300 1.00 1.00 1.00
320 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
340 0.99 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00
360 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00
380 0.98 0.98 0.99 0.99 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
400 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.99 0.99 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
420 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Refer to:- http: // www.spiraxsarco.com / resources / steam-engineering-tutorials / safety-valves / safety-valve-sizing.asp
Dimensions, weights and orifice sizes (approximate) in inches and lbs

Valve inlet Valve outlet Orifice A A1 B C Weight
Size Connection Size Connection letter ins ins ins ins lbs
1½" NPT 2½" NPT J 3.5 - 4.3 15.8 33
2" NPT 3" NPT K 4.0 - 4.6 17.1 46
2½" NPT 4" NPT L 4.6 - 5.5 18.5 66
3" NPT 4" NPT M 5.1 - 5.6 24.3 93
1½" ANSI 250 2½" NPT J 3.5 - 4.3 15.8 38
2" ANSI 250 2½" NPT J 3.5 - 4.3 15.8 40
2" ANSI 250 3" NPT K 4.0 - 4.6 17.1 49
2½" ANSI 250 3" NPT K 4.0 - 4.6 17.1 51
2½" ANSI 250 4" NPT L 4.6 - 5.5 19.5 71
3" ANSI 250 4" NPT L 4.6 - 5.5 19.5 73
3" ANSI 250 4" NPT M 5.1 - 5.4 24.3 101

4.7
3" ANSI 250 4" ANSI 125 L - 5.5 5.5 19.5 82
3" ANSI 250 4" ANSI 125 M - 5.5 5.4 24.3 110
45
4" ANSI 250 6" ANSI 125 N - 7.1 6.8 26.5 187
4" ANSI 250 6" ANSI 125 P - 7.1 6.8 28.5 196
6" ANSI 250 8" ANSI 125 Q - 9.3 9.3 34.5 355
6" ANSI 250 8" ANSI 125 R - 10.0 10.9 43.9 595
Note: Drain hole connection ½" NPT on all valve sizes
C
C
B
B
A1
CTLS Issue 12
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Installation note: The safety valve should always be fitted with the centre line of the spring housing vertically above the valve.
SV7 safety valve selection guide

Series number SV7 SV7
Construction 3 = Cast iron 3
V = ASME Code Section I
ASME section U = ASME Code section VIII V
Blank = Valve without code stamp
A = 1½" NPT x 2½" NPT
B = 2" NPT x 3" NPT
C = 2½" NPT x 4" NPT
D = 3" NPT x 4" NPT
E = 1½" ANSI 250 x 2½" NPT
F = 2" ANSI 250 x 2½ NPT
Size and connection G = 2" ANSI 250 x 3" NPT A

4.7 H = 2½" ANSI 250 x 3" NPT
46 I = 2½" ANSI 250 x 4" NPT
J = 3" ANSI 250 x 4 NPT
L = 3" ANSI 250 x 4 ANSI 125
N = 4" ANSI 250 x 6" ANSI 125
Q = 6" ANSI 250 x 8" ANSI 125
J = 1.374
K = 1.968
L = 3.054
M = 3.846
Actual orifice area Sq. In. J
N = 4.633
P = 6.830
Q = 11.811
R = 17.123
Set pressure Specify set pressure from 5 psi g to 250 psi g 180
SV7 3 - V - A J - 180
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco SV73-V-AJ-180 safety valve having a set pressure of 180 psi g.
CTLS Issue 12
Control systems
Safety valves
TI-S13-30
CTLS Issue 16
SV74
Carbon Steel
Safety Valve
4.7
47
Description
The SV74 steel series safety valves are built in conformance to Section I and
VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. They are primarily intended
for use on power boilers and unfired pressure vessels where ASME Section I
and VIII stamped valves are required.
Applications
Protection of steam systems downstream of pressure regulating stations, on
inlet to such equipment as air coils, heat exchangers and process vessels.
Also for use on flash recovery vessels on condensate return systems to protect
vessels. Air systems to protect accumulation vessels and air equipment from
overpressurisation. Steam boilers and generators.
Available types
The SV74 is available with carbon steel body and stainless steel trim in orifice
sizes from 'F' to 'R'. It has an open bonnet and easing lever and flanged
connections.
Certification
A manufacturers' Typical Test Report is provided as standard for each valve
which will include valve set and hydraulic test pressure. Also available on

Approved by National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Sections I and VIII.
Seat tightness is in accordance with ASME/API STD 527-1992.
If National Board 'V' or 'UV' stamp is required, then this must be specified at the time of ordering.
The SV74 fully complies with the requirements of the EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment (Safety) Regulations
and carries the mark when so required.

Inlet Flanged ASME class 300 RF
½" x 2" to 6" x 8"
Outlet Flanged ASME class 150 RF
Page 1 of 9
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Temperature °F
A B
Pressure psi g

A - B To avoid spring damage, do not exceed an operating temperature of 446 °F.
Maximum 300 psi g

Set pressure range
Minimum 5 psi g
Maximum 750 °F
Design temperature
Minimum -20 °F
4.7 Operating temperature Maximum 446 °F
ASME I Steam 3%
48 Overpressure Steam 10%
ASME VIII
Air/gas 10%
ASME I Steam 2 - 6%
Performance data
Blowdown limits Steam 7%
ASME VIII
Air/gas 7%
Steam 0.955
Air/gas 0.955
Maximum permitted backpressure up to: 10% of set pressure
Tested at a maximum inlet cold hydraulic test pressure of: 1015 psi g
CTLS Issue 16
SV74 Carbon Steel Safety Valve
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Materials
4
10
12
13
11
9
7 4.7
5
49
8
No. Part Material
1 Body Carbon steel ASME SA 216 Gr. WCB
F to H orifice Stainless steel ASTM A182/A182M-18 F6A Class 3

2 Seat
J to R orifice Stainless steel ASTM A351 Grade CF8
3 Bonnet Carbon steel ASME SA 216 Gr. WCB
4 Cap Cast iron ASTM A126 Class B
F to H orifice Stainless steel ASTM A182/A182M-18 F6A Class 3

5 Disc
J to R orifice Stainless steel ASTM A217 CA15
7 Upper adjusting ring Stainless steel ASTM A351 Grade CF8
8 Lower adjusting ring Stainless steel ASTM A351 Grade CF8
9 Stem (lower) Stainless steel ASTM A182/A182M-18 F6A Class 3
10 Stem (upper) Stainless steel ASTM A479 Type 410
11 Spring washers (2 off) Steel ASTM A105
12 Bonnet stud Steel ASTM A193 Grade B7
13 Bonnet nut Steel ASTM A194 Grade 2H
Materials continued on next page
CTLS Issue 16
44 Control systems
Safety valves
26
16
24, 25
18
14
15
20
27
40
4.7 21
50 17 23
22
No. Part Material
14 Adjusting screw Stainless steel ASTM A479 Type 410
15 Adjusting screw nut Carbon steel
16 Release ring Carbon steel
17 Lock-nuts (2 off) Carbon steel
18 Lever Grey iron
20 Cap set screw Carbon steel
21 Upper adjusting ring pin Stainless steel
22 Lower adjusting ring pin Stainless steel
23 Disc ball Stainless steel
24 Pin washer Carbon steel
25 Lever pin Carbon steel
26 Lock-nut Carbon steel
27 Guide plate Carbon steel
40 Stem pin Carbon steel
CTLS Issue 16
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Capacities
Orifice F G H J K L
Area Sq. In. 0.328 0.537 0.841 1.374 1.968 3.054
Steam Set pressure Real flow Real flow Real flow Real flow Real flow Real flow
saturation psi g lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h
temperature
ºF 3% 10% 3% 10% 3% 10% 3% 10% 3% 10% 3% 10%
250 15 438 453 716 741 1 122 1 161 1 833 1 897 2 625 2 717 4 074 4 216
259 20 512 533 839 872 1 314 1 366 2 146 2 231 3 074 3 196 4 770 4 959
267 25 587 612 961 1 003 1 505 1 570 2 459 2 566 3 522 3 675 5 466 5 702
274 30 662 692 1 083 1 133 1 697 1 775 2 772 2 900 3 971 4 153 6 162 6 446
281 35 737 772 1 206 1 264 1 888 1 980 3 085 3 234 4 419 4 632 6 858 7 189
287 40 811 852 1 328 1 395 2 080 2 184 3 398 3 569 4 868 5 111 7 554 7 932
292 45 886 932 1 451 1 525 2 272 2 389 3 711 3 903 5 316 5 590 8 250 8 675
298 50 961 1 012 1 573 1 656 2 463 2 594 4 025 4 237 5 764 6 069 8 945 9 418
303 55 1 035 1 091 1 695 1 787 2 655 2 798 4 338 4 572 6 213 6 548 9 641 10 162
307 60 1 110 1171 1 818 1 917 2 847 3 003 4 651 4 906 6 661 7 027 10 337 10 905
312 65 1 185 1 251 1 940 2 048 3 038 3 208 4 964 5 240 7 110 7 506 11 033 11 648
316 70 1 260 1 331 2 062 2 179 3 230 3 412 5 277 5 575 7 558 7 985 11 729 12 391
320 75 1 334 1 411 2 185 2 309 3 422 3 617 5 590 5 909 8 007 8 464 12 425 13 134
324 80 1 409 1 490 2 307 2 440 3 613 3 822 5 903 6 244 8 455 8 943 13 121 1 3878
328 85 1 484 1 570 2 429 2 571 3 805 4 026 6 216 6 578 8 904 9 422 13 817 14 261 4.7
331 90 1 559 1 650 2 552 2 702 3 996 4 231 6 529 6 912 9 352 9 901 14 513 15 364
335 95 1 633 1 730 2 674 2 832 4 188 4 436 6 842 7 247 9 800 10 379 15 209 16 107 51
338 100 1 708 1 810 2 797 2 963 4 380 4 640 7 155 7 581 10 249 10 858 15 905 16 850
341 105 1 783 1 890 2 919 3 094 4 571 4 845 7 469 7 915 10 697 11 337 16 600 17 594
344 110 1 858 1 969 3 041 3 224 4 763 5 050 7 782 8 250 11 146 11 816 17 296 18 337
347 115 1 932 2 049 3 164 3 355 4 955 5 254 8 293 8 584 11 594 12 295 17 992 19 080
350 120 2 007 2 129 3 286 3 486 5 146 5 459 8 408 8 918 12 043 12 774 18 688 19 823
353 125 2 082 2 209 3 408 3 616 5 338 5 663 8 721 9 253 12 491 13 253 19 384 20 566
356 130 2 157 2 289 3 531 3 747 5 530 5 868 9 034 9 587 12 940 13 732 20 080 21 310
358 135 2 231 2 368 3 652 3 878 5 721 6 073 9 347 9 922 13 388 14 211 20 776 22 053
361 140 2 306 2 448 3 775 4 008 5 913 6 277 9 660 10 256 13 836 14 690 21 472 22 796
363 145 2 381 2 528 3 898 4 139 6 104 6 482 9 973 10 590 14 285 15 169 22 168 23 539
366 150 2 456 2 608 4 020 4 270 6 296 6 687 10 286 10 925 14 733 15 648 22 864 24 282
368 155 2 530 2 688 4 143 4 400 6 488 6 891 10 599 11 259 15 182 16 127 23 559 25 026
371 160 2 605 2 768 4 265 4 531 6 679 7 096 10 913 11 593 15 630 16 605 24 255 25 769
373 165 2 680 2 847 4 387 4 662 6 871 7 301 11 226 11 928 16 079 17 084 24 951 26 512
375 170 2 755 2 927 4 510 4 792 7 063 7 505 11 539 12 262 16 527 17 563 25 647 27 255
377 175 2 829 3 007 4 632 4 923 7 254 7 710 11 852 12 597 16 976 18 042 26 343 27 998
380 180 2 904 3 087 4 754 5 054 7 446 7 915 12 165 12 931 17 424 18 521 27 039 28 742
382 185 2 979 3 167 4 877 5 184 7 638 8 119 12 478 13 265 17 872 19 000 27 735 29 485
384 190 3 053 3 246 4 999 5 315 7 829 8 324 12 791 13 600 18 321 19 479 28 431 30 228
386 195 3 128 3 326 5 122 5 446 8 021 8 529 13 104 13 934 18 769 19 958 29 127 30 971
388 200 3 203 3406 5 244 5 577 8 212 8 733 13 417 14 268 19 218 20 437 29 823 31 714
392 210 3 352 3 566 5 489 5 838 8 816 9 143 14 043 14 937 20 115 21 395 31 214 33 201
396 220 3 502 3 725 5 733 6 099 8 979 9 552 14 670 15 606 20 416 22 352 32 606 34 687
399 230 3 651 3 885 5 978 6 361 9 362 9 961 15 296 16 275 21 908 23 310 33 998 36 174
403 240 3 801 4 045 6 223 6 622 9 746 10 371 15 922 16 943 22 805 24 268 35 390 37 660
406 250 3 950 4 204 6 468 6 883 10 129 10 780 16 548 17 612 23 702 25 226 36 782 39 146
409 260 4 100 4 364 6 712 7 145 10 512 11 189 17 174 18 281 24 599 26 184 38 174 40 633
413 270 4 249 4 524 6 957 7 406 10 895 11 599 17 801 18 950 25 496 27 142 39 565 42 119
416 280 4 399 4 683 7 202 7 667 11 279 12 008 18 427 19 618 26 393 28 100 40 957 43 606
417 290 4 548 4 843 7 446 7 929 11 662 12 417 19 053 20 287 27 290 29 057 42 349 45 092
422 300 4 698 5 003 7 691 8 190 12 045 12 827 19 679 20 956 28 187 30 015 43 741 46 578
Capacities continued on next page
CTLS Issue 16
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Capacities (continued)
Orifice M N P Q R
Area Sq. In. 3.846 4.633 6.830 11.811 17.123
Steam Set pressure Real flow Real flow Real flow Real flow Real flow
saturation psi g lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h lb/h
temperature
ºF 3% 10% 3% 10% 3% 10% 3% 10% 3% 10%
250 15 5 131 5 308 6 181 6 395 9 111 9 427 15 756 16 302 22 842 23 634
259 20 6 007 6 244 7 236 7 522 10 668 11 089 18 447 19 176 26 744 27 800
267 25 6 883 7 180 8 292 8 649 12 224 12 751 21 139 22 050 30 646 31 966
274 30 7 760 8 116 9 348 9 776 13 780 14 413 23 830 24 923 34 548 36 133
281 35 8 636 9 052 10 403 10 904 15 337 16 074 26 521 27 797 38 449 40 299
287 40 9 513 9 987 11 459 12 031 16 893 17 736 29 213 30 671 42 351 44 465
292 45 10 389 10 923 12 515 13 158 18 449 19 398 31 904 33 545 46 253 48 631
298 50 11 265 11 859 13 570 14 286 20 006 21 060 34 595 36 418 50 155 52 797
303 55 12 142 12 795 14 626 15 413 21 562 22 722 37 287 39 292 54 057 56 964
307 60 13 018 13 730 15 682 16 540 23 118 24 383 39 978 42 166 57 958 61 130
312 65 13 894 14 666 16 738 17 667 24 675 26 045 42 670 45 040 61 860 65 296
316 70 14 771 15 602 17 793 18 795 26 231 27 707 45 361 47 913 65 762 69 462
320 75 15 647 16 538 18 849 19 922 27 567 29 369 48 052 50 787 69 664 73 629
324 80 16 524 17 474 19 905 21 049 29 344 31 031 50 744 53 661 73 565 77 795
4.7 328 85 17 400 18 409 20 960 22 176 30 900 32 693 53 435 56 535 77 467 81 961
331 90 18 276 19 345 22 016 23 304 32 456 34 354 56 126 59 408 81 369 86 127
52 335 95 19 153 20 281 23 072 24 431 34 013 36 016 58 818 62 282 85 271 90 294
338 100 20 029 21 217 24 128 25 558 35 569 37 678 61 509 65 156 89 173 94 460
341 105 20 905 22 152 25 183 26 685 37 125 39 340 64 200 68 030 93 074 98 626
344 110 21 782 23 088 26 239 27 813 38 682 41 002 66 892 70 903 96 976 102 792
347 115 22 658 24 024 27 295 28 940 40 238 42 663 69 583 73 777 100 878 106 958
350 120 23 535 24 960 28 350 30 067 41 001 44 325 72 274 76 651 104 780 111 125
353 125 24 411 25 896 29 406 31 194 43 351 45 987 74 966 79 525 108 681 115 291
356 130 25 287 26 831 30 462 32 322 44 907 47 649 77 657 82 398 112 583 119 457
358 135 26 164 27 767 31 518 33 449 46 463 49 311 80 348 85 272 116 485 123 623
361 140 27 040 28 703 32 573 34 576 48 020 50 973 83 040 88 146 120 387 127 790
363 145 27 916 29 639 33 629 35 704 49 576 52 634 85 731 91 020 124 288 131 956
366 150 28 793 30 574 34 685 36 831 51 132 54 296 88 422 93 893 128 190 136 122
368 155 29 669 31 510 35 740 37 958 52 689 55 958 91 114 96 767 132 092 140 288
371 160 30 546 32 446 36 796 39 085 54 245 57 620 93 805 99 641 135 994 144 454
373 165 31 422 33 382 37 852 40 212 55 801 59 282 96 496 102 515 139 896 148 621
375 170 32 298 34 317 38 907 41 340 57 358 60 943 99 188 105 388 143 797 152 787
377 175 33 175 35 253 39 963 42 467 58 914 62 605 101 879 108 262 147 699 156 953
380 180 34 051 36 189 41 019 43 594 60 470 64 267 104 570 111 136 151 601 161 119
382 185 34 927 37 125 42 075 44 722 62 027 65 929 107 262 114 010 155 503 165 286
384 190 35 804 38 061 43 130 45 849 63 583 67 591 109 953 116 883 159 404 169 452
386 195 36 680 38 996 44 186 46 976 65 139 69 253 112 644 119 757 163 306 173 618
388 200 37 557 39 932 45 242 48 103 66 696 70 914 115 336 122 631 167 208 177 784
392 210 39 309 41 804 47 353 50 358 69 808 74 238 120 718 128 378 175 012 186 117
396 220 41062 43 675 49 465 52 612 72 921 77 562 126 101 134 126 182 815 194 449
399 230 42 815 45 547 51 576 54 867 76 034 80 885 131 484 139 874 190 619 202 782
403 240 44 568 47 418 53 687 57 122 79 146 84 209 136 866 145 621 198 422 211 114
406 250 46 320 49 290 55 799 59 376 82 259 87 533 142 249 151 369 206 226 219 447
409 260 48 073 51 161 57 910 61 631 85 372 90 856 147 632 157 116 214 029 227 779
413 270 49 826 53 033 60 022 63 885 88 484 94 180 153 014 162 864 221 833 236 111
416 280 51 579 54 905 62 133 66 140 91 597 97 503 158 397 168 611 229 636 244 444
417 290 53 331 56 776 64 245 68 394 94 710 100 827 163 780 174 359 237 440 252 776
422 300 55 084 58 648 66 356 70 649 97 822 104 151 169 163 180 106 245 243 261 109
CTLS Issue 16
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Safety valve sizing information
Formulas:
For steam service: For organic fluid vaporizers - lb/h:
Where:
A = Required orifice area in square inches
P = Relieving pressure in pounds per square inch absolute = set pressure (psi g) + overpressure + 14.7 where the
overpressure is 3% or 2 psi, whichever is the greater. P = 1.03 x set pressure + 14.7 or P = set pressure + 2 psi + 14.7.
T = Inlet temperature, °F. Absolute ( °F plus 460).
s = Required steam capacity in pounds per hour.
= Required vapor capacity in pounds per hour.
Kd = Coefficient of discharge, 0.955 for steam, air and vapour service.
K sh = Steam superheat correction factor. See Table 1 below.
M = Average molecular weight of vapour.
C = Gas or vapour flow constant.
Z = Compressibility factor corresponding to T and P. If this factor is not available, compressibility correction can be safely
ignored using a value of Z = 1.0.
Table 1 K sh superheat correction factor 4.7

Set pressure psi g
Total steam 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300
53
temperature
°F Saturated steam temperature °F
250 259 287 308 324 338 350 361 371 380 388 395 403 409 416 422
280 1.00 1.00
300 1.00 1.00 1.00
320 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
340 0.99 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00
360 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00
380 0.98 0.98 0.99 0.99 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
400 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.99 0.99 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
420 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
440 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 1.00 1.00
460 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.99 0.99
Do not exceed the maximum operating temperature of 446 °F.
CTLS Issue 16
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Dimensions, weights and orifice sizes (approximate) in inches and lbs

Valve inlet Valve outlet Orifice A B C Weight
letter ins ins ins Ibs
Size Connection Size Connection
1½" ASME 300 2" ASME 150 F 4.25 4.5 15.7 31
1½" ASME 300 2" ASME 150 G 4.25 4.5 15.7 31
1½" ASME 300 2½" ASME 150 H 4.90 4.8 16.2 46
1½" ASME 300 2½" ASME 150 J 4.90 4.8 16.2 46
2" ASME 300 3" ASME 150 K 5.60 5.1 18.5 62
2½" ASME 300 4" ASME 150 L 6.40 6.1 20.1 90
3" ASME 300 4" ASME 150 M 6.50 6.5 25.0 117
4" ASME 300 6" ASME 150 N 7.50 7.2 26.7 198
4" ASME 300 6" ASME 150 P 8.30 7.1 28.7 212
6" ASME 300 8" ASME 150 Q 9.40 9.9 34.8 384
6" ASME 300 8" ASME 150 R 10.00 10.9 43.9 633
4.7 Note: Drain hole connection ½" NPT on all valve sizes
54
CTLS Issue 16
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Installation note:
The safety valve should always be fitted with the centre line of the spring housing vertically above the valve.
SV7 safety valve selection guide

Series number SV7 SV7
Construction 4 = Cast steel 4
V = ASME Code Section I
ASME section U = ASME Code section VIII V
Blank = Valve without code stamp
S = 1½" ASME 300 x 2" ASME 150
T = 1½" ASME 300 x 2½" ASME 150
U = 2" ASME 300 x 3" ASME 150
V = 2½" ASME 300 x 4" ASME 150 X

Size and connection
W = 3" ASME 300 x 4" ASME 150
X = 4" ASME 300 x 6" ASME 150
Y = 6" ASME 300 x 8" ASME 150 4.7

F = 0.328
55
G = 0.537
H = 0.841
J = 1.374
K = 1.968
Actual orifice area Sq. In. L = 3.054 P
M = 3.846
N = 4.633
P = 6.830
Q = 11.811
R = 17.123
Set pressure Specify set pressure from 5 psi g to 250 psi g 180
SV7 3 - V - A Z - 180
How to order
Example 1: 1 off Spirax Sarco SV74-V-XP-180 safety valve having a set pressure of 180 psi g.
CTLS Issue 16
44 Control systems
Safety valves
4.7
56
Control systems
Safety valves
TI-P315-03
CTLS Issue 11
SVL488
Stainless Steel
Sanitary Safety Valve
Description
The SVL488 is a soft seated stainless steel, full lift, TÜV approved
safety valve suitable for steam, gas and liquid applications.
Applications
The SVL488 is suitable for the overpressure protection of low pressure
steam equipment, pipelines and pressure vessels, particularly within
the brewing and beverage industries where extremely high standards
of hygiene and cleanliness are required to maintain product quality and
to minimise contamination of the process media.
Available types
Two main variations of the valve are available: 4.7
SVL488-B with a sealed cap for liquid service.
SVL488-C with a packed easing lever for steam (or other services where
a lever is specified).
57
Note: Both designs have a closed bonnet and EPDM soft seat seal and
bellows as standard.
Certification
A manufactures' Typical Test Report is provided as standard for each
valve including valve set and hydraulic pressure. Also available on

- Approved by the TÜV to AD Merkblatt A2, TRD 421 and Vd TÜV SV100.
- EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment (Safety)

Regulations have been satisfied.
- The valve belongs to Category 4, having been designed for use with
fluids in Group 1 and 2 (gases and liquids).
Always consult Spirax Sarco for fluid compatibility.

Nominal inlet size DN 25 40 50 65 80 100
Nominal outlet size DN 40 65 80 100 125 150
Inlet clamp inch 1½ 2 2½ 3 4 4½
Outlet clamp inch 2 3 4 4½ 5 6
Pipe connections: Valves are available with flanged DIN 2633 PN16 or sanitary clamp ISO 2852 (ISO 2037 pipe standard) connections.
Please state connection required when placing an order.
Optional extras
The standard inlet wetted surface finish is 0.75 µm Ra. Other finishes are available on request - Please contact Spirax Sarco.
CTLS Issue 11
SVL488 Stainless Steel Sanitary Safety Valve
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Cap/lifting lever types
Gastight cap
All sizes
4.7
58
Gastight lifting device

DN25 only
Packed lever
DN40 and larger
CTLS Issue 11
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Materials No. Part Material
1 Body Stainless steel 1.4404 316L
Seat Stainless steel 1.4404 316L

2
Disc Stainless steel 1.4404 316L
3 Disc 'O' ring EPDM (FDA approved)

9
4 Guide/bush Stainless steel 1.4404 316L/PTFE + 15% Glass
5 Bonnet Stainless steel 1.4404 316L
6 Stem Stainless steel 1.4404 316L
7 Spring plates (2) Stainless steel 1.4404 316L

8
Adjustment screw Stainless steel 1.4404 316L
8
with bush PTFE + 15% glass
11
9 Cap Stainless steel 1.4404 316L

7
11 Packed lever Stainless steel 1.4404 316L
5
12 Clamp Stainless steel 1.4401 316
4.7
13 Bellows EPDM (FDA approved)
59
6
14 Body gasket Laminated graphite
10
12
4
14
13
3
EPDM soft seat seal
CTLS Issue 11
44 Control systems
Safety valves

Temperature °C
Pressure bar g
Maximum 16 bar g
DN25 and DN40
Minimum 0.1 bar g
Maximum 15 bar g
DN50
Minimum 0.2 bar g
Set pressure range
Maximum 10.34 bar g
DN65 and DN80
Minimum 0.1 bar g
Maximum 8.2 bar g

DN100
4.7 Minimum 0.1 bar g
60 Temperature
With EPDM soft seat Maximum 150 °C
All versions Minimum -45 °C
Steam, gas Maximum 10%

Overpressure
Liquid Maximum 10%
Steam, gas Maximum 10%

Performance data Blowdown limits
Liquids Maximum 20%
Steam, gas 0.70

Derated coefficient of discharge values d
Liquid 0.45
Maximum permitted backpressure 10% of set pressure
Table 1 - SVL488 flow capacity for dry saturated steam in kilogrammes per hour (kg/h)
(calculated at 10% overpressure. In accordance with EN ISO 4126)
Valve size DN in/out DN25/40 DN40/65 DN50/80 DN65/100 DN80/125 DN100/150

Flow diameter (mm) 23 37 46 60 74 92
Flow area (mm²) 416 1 075 1 662 2 827 4 301 6 648

0.2 151 390 604 1027 1562 2415
0.5 214 554 857 1457 2217 3427
1.0 319 825 1 275 2 169 3 300 5 100
2.0 504 1 303 2 015 3 427 5 213 8 058
3.0 678 1 751 2 707 4 605 7 006 10 829
4.0 843 2 177 3 366 5 726 8 711 13 465
CTLS Issue 11
Control systems
Safety valves 4
Table 2
SVL488 flow capacity for air or normal cubic meters per hour (Nm 3/h) at 0 °C and 1013 mbar

Flow area (mm²) 416 1 075 1 662 2 827 4 301 6 648
Set pressure (bar g) Flow capacity for air Nm 3 /h

1.0 386 999 1 545 2 628 3 998 6 179
2.0 625 1 617 2 499 4 251 6 467 9 995
3.0 852 2 204 3 406 5 795 8 816 13 626
4.0 1 069 2 768 4 278 7 278 11 071 17 111
5.0 1 287 3 331 5 149 8 761 13 326 20 597
6.0 1 505 3 895 6 021 10 243 15 581 24 083
7.0 1 723 4 459 6 892 11 726 17 836 27 568
8.0 1 941 5 023 7 763 13 208 20 091 31 054
8.2 1 985 5 136 7 937 13 505 20 542 31 752
9.0 2 159 5 587 8 635 14 691 22 346
10.0 2 377 6 150 9 506 16 173 24 601
10.34 2 451 6 334 9 793 16 658 25 343
12.0 2 812 7 278 11 249 4.7
14.0 3 248 8 405 12 992
15.0 3 466 8 957 14 735
The product must not be used in this region. 61
16.0 3 684 9 533
Table 3 - SVL488 flow capacity for water in kilogrammes per hour (kg/h) at 20 °C
(calcualted in accordance with AD-MERKBLATT A2 and TRD 421 at 10% overpressure)

Flow area (mm²) 416 1 075 1 662 2 827 4 301 6 648

1.0 9 970 25 800 39 900 67 900 103 000 160 000
2.0 14 100 36 500 56 400 96 000 126 000 226 000
3.0 17 300 44 700 69 100 118000 179 000 276 000
4.0 19 900 51 600 79 800 136 000 206 000 319 000
5.0 22 300 57 700 89 200 152 000 231 000 357 000
6.0 24 400 63 200 97 700 166 000 253 000 391 000
7.0 26 400 68 300 106 000 180 000 273 000 422 000
8.0 28 200 73 000 113 000 192 000 292 000 451 000
8.2 28 500 73 900 114 000 194 000 292 000 458 000
9.0 29 900 77 400 120 000 204 000 310 000
10.0 31 500 81 600 126 000 215 000 326 000
10.34 32 000 82 700 128 000 218 000 334 000
12.0 34 600 89 400 138 000
14.0 37 300 96 600 149 000
15.0 38 600 99 700 154 000
16.0 39 900 103 000
CTLS Issue 11
44 Control systems
Safety valves
Valve size A B C
Inlet Outlet DIN 2633 ISO 2852 DIN 2633 ISO 2852 SVL488B SVL488C Weight
Flanged Sanitary Flanged Sanitary sealed Packed lever
PN16 clamp PN16 clamp cap design design
DN25 DN40 134 112 99 75 264 332 9.0
DN40 DN65 170 147 114 92 398 518 20.0
DN50 DN80 170 147 123 99 406 534 21.7
DN65 DN100 170 153 132 109 415 552 26.5
DN80 DN125 195 178 148 124 496 640 47.0
DN100 DN150 198 181 166 149 514 684 56.0
4.7
62
the product. C
Installation note:
The safety valve should always be fitted with the centre line of the housing
vertically above the line.
SVL488 safety valve selection guide

B
Model type SVL488 SVL488
A = Closed bonnet/pneumatic Lever
Configuration B = Closed bonnet/sealed cap B

A
C = Closed bonnet/packed easing lever
E = EPDM (FDA) 'O' Ring and bellows

Seal material E
V = FKM 'O' ring and bellows
PN16 = Flanged PN16
N = ANSI #150 RF ASME Flanged
Inlet connection T = ISO2852/ISO2037 Clamp Ends PN16
S = ASME BPE Clamp Ends
D = DIN32676/DIN11850 Clamp Ends
SVL488 - B - E - PN16
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN50 SVL488-B-E-PN16 safety valve with a set pressure of 10 bar g. (If the bellows is not required,
please add 'without bellows').
CTLS Issue 11
Control systems
Desuperheaters
TI-P475-01
TES Issue 4
Direct Contact Desuperheaters

Description
Spirax Sarco direct contact desuperheaters reduce the temperature of superheated steam to produce steam temperatures approaching
saturation temperature. To cool the superheated steam, water is entrained and flashed into vapour by absorbing heat from the steam.
Typical applications:
- To reduce the temperature of steam discharged from turbine by-pass
systems on power plants for heat exchangers, dump stations etc.
- To improve heat transfer of indirect contact heat exchangers - shell and tube
, plate type, reactor heating jackets etc.
- To reduce the temperature of steam on direct contact applications - food

cooking kettles, in-line steam heaters, tobacco drying plant and paper mills. 4.8
Send us your requirements using our Desuperheater Enquiry Form available from 1
our website.
Features:
- Low cost simple, robust design.
- No moving parts to wear.
- Minimal steam pressure drop.
- Flexible design options.

Spirax Sarco desuperheaters are available built to ASME B 31.3 design code. Also available are ASME Division 1.
This product fully complies with the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU and carries the mark when
so required.
Welding is in accordance with ASME IX.

Connections (EN 1092 or ASME B16.5) are sized to suit the process conditions.
Standard ASTM materials of construction include: Carbon steel, Stainless steel, Chrome molybdenum steel etc.,
Certification (included as standard):

1. Desuperheater general arrangement drawing.
2. Installation, operation and maintenance instructions.
3. Hydrostatic test certificate.
4. Letter of conformity.
The following certificates / documents can be supplied at an additional cost.
5. Material certificates to EN 10204 3.1 with a corresponding material location diagram.
6. NDT reports.
Page 1 of 9
44 Control systems
Desuperheaters
Spirax Sarco desuperheaters are bespoke products, individually designed to meet user defined process conditions.
Mechanical design pressure and mechanical design temperature limitations are stated on the desuperheater data sheet available from
our online sizing software. These limits are also stated on the product nameplate.
Pressure / temperature ratings for these products will be in accordance with ASME B16.5-1996 or EN 1092-1:2013 as appropriate.
Available types
Spray type desuperheaters

A simple type of in-line desuperheater with cooling water injected into the centre of the unit via an atomizing nozzle sprayed in the
direction of the steam flow. Spirax Sarco spray type desuperheaters are available in two options:-
1. Spray nozzle desuperheater (SND)

The assembly is designed for mounting on a suitable flanged branch on the steam pipework. A thermal sleeve installed downstream
of the unit is recommended.
Applications:
Steam flow
- Relatively constant load handling duties.
- Retrofitting a desuperheater to an existing steam line

(steam line and thermal sleeve by others).
- Large steam lines where an STD could be cost
4.8 prohibitive.
Simple spray nozzle type

desuperheater (SND)
Mechanical design temperature and flange rating

<374 °C ASME 150, ASME 300, ASME 600, ASME 900, ASME 1500 + PN16, PN25, PN40, PN63 and PN100 Slip-on
374 - 425 °C ASME 150, ASME 300, ASME 600, ASME 900, ASME 1500 + PN16, PN25, PN40, PN63 and PN100 Weld neck
375 - 570 °C ASME 150, ASME 300, ASME 600, ASME 900, ASME 1500 Weld neck (Slip-on N/A)
Materials
Mechanical design temperature Mechanical design temperature
Component
up to and including 425 °C above 425 °C up to and including 570 °C
Pipe ASTM A106 Grade B ASTM A335 P11
Flanges ASTM A105N ASTM A182 F11
Spray nozzle ASTM A182 F316L ASTM A182 F11
Nozzle holder ASTM A350 LF2N ASTM A182 F11
TES Issue 4
Control systems
Desuperheaters 4
2. Spray type desuperheater (STD)
A complete Desuperheater ready for installation, including spray nozzle, nozzle housing, thermal sleeve and flanged shell.
Thermal sleeve
Superheated Desuperheated
steam steam
Spray nozzle assembly
Cooling water
Standard STD has welded spray nozzle assembly. Item shown above is STD with removable spray nozzle.
4.8
Applications: 3
- Relatively constant load handling duties.
- Dumping steam application.
- Control of downstream temperature not critical.

<374 °C ASME 150, ASME 300, ASME 600 + PN16, PN25, PN40 Slip-on (Weld neck optional)
374 - 525 °C ASME 150, ASME 300, ASME 600 + PN16, PN25, PN40 Weld neck (Slip-on N/A)
375 - 570 °C ASME 150, ASME 300, ASME 600, ASME 900, ASME 1500 Weld neck (Slip-on N/A)
Materials
Component
Shell ASTM A106 Grade B ASTM A335 P11
Water branch ASTM A106 Grade B ASTM A335 P11
Spray nozzle ASTM A182 F316L ASTM A182 F11
Nozzle holder ASTM A350 LF2N ASTM A182 F11
Thermal sleeve ASTM A312 TP316L ASTM A335 P11
TES Issue 4
44 Control systems
Desuperheaters
Venturi type desuperheaters (VTD)
The venturi principle is used to create regions of high velocity and turbulence which produces intimate contact between the steam and
cooling water.
Internal diffuser Main diffuser
Internal nozzle
Steam flow
Seals
Cooling water
Application
- Suitable for most general plant applications, except where high turndowns on cooling water are required.
- Flow turndowns between 3:1 and 10:1 depending on conditions.
4.8
4
375 - 570 °C ASME 300, ASME 600, ASME 900, ASME 1500 + PN10, PN16, PN25, PN40, PN63 and PN100 Weld neck (Slip-on N/A)
Materials
Component
Sizes 1 to 2: ASTM A350 LF2N Sizes 1 to 2: ASTM A182 F11

Shell
Size 3 and above: ASTM A106 Grade B Size 3 and above: ASTM A335 P11
Sizes 1 to 2: ASTM A350 LF2N Sizes 1 to 2: ASTM A182 F11

Water branch
Size 3 and above: ASTM A106 Grade B Size 3 and above: ASTM A335 P11
Sizes 1 to 2: ASTM A350 LF2N

Flanges ASTM A182 F11
Size 3 and above: ASTM A105N
Nozzle ASTM A182 F316L ASTM A182 F11
Sizes 1 to 2: Not applicable Sizes 1 to 2: Not applicable

Internal diffuser
Size 3 and above: ASTM A182 F316L Size 3 and above: ASTM A182 F11
Sizes 1 to 2: Not applicable Sizes 1 to 2: Not applicable

Internal housing
Size 3 and above: ASTM A350 LF2N Size 3 and above: ASTM A182 F11
Sizes 1 to 4: ASTM A350 LF2N

Sizes 6 and 8: ASTM A240 / ASTM A312 316L Sizes 1 to 4: ASTM A182 F11
Main diffuser
Size 10: BS EN 10130:2006 DC01 Sizes 6 and above: ASTM A387 Gr11
Size 12 and above: ASTM A516 Gr70
Internal seals Soft copper Soft copper
TES Issue 4
Control systems
Desuperheaters 4
Steam atomizing desuperheaters (SAD)
A high pressure auxiliary steam supply is used to atomize the incoming water within the diffuser of the unit.
The auxiliary steam pressure needs to be at least 1.5 times the desuperheater inlet pressure with a minimum pressure of 3 bar g.
Internal
nozzle
Internal diffuser
Steam flow
Steam flow
Seals
Atomising steam Cooling water
Application
- High turndown applications where auxiliary steam is available, eg ;combined pressure reducing/desuperheating stations. 4.8
5
Materials
Component
Shell ASTM A106 Grade B ASTM A335 P11
Atomising steam branch ASTM A106 Grade B ASTM A335 P11
Water branch ASTM A106 Grade B ASTM A335 P11
Nozzle ASTM A182 F316L ASTM A182 F11
Diffuser ASTM A182 F316L ASTM A182 F11
Internal housing ASTM A350 LF2N ASTM A182 F11
Internal seals Soft copper Soft copper
TES Issue 4
44 Control systems
Desuperheaters
There are a number of factors which must be considered in determining the best type of desuperheater for each application. Such
factors are:-
1. Residual superheat.
2. Turndown.
With so many factors, it is not an easy task to develop a decision
3. Accuracy of final temperature. tree to aid selection, but the charts below have been developed
to assist engineers in desuperheater selection.
4. Available pressure drop.
Please read this first chart in conjunction with the note at the
5. Cooling water pressure. bottom of the page.
6. Auxiliary higher pressure steam available for atomising.
7. Cost.
Desuperheater selection chart
Turndown 1:1 2:1 3:1 4:1 5:1 7:1 10:1 20:1 50:1
Approach
Spray type desuperheater (STD) to
Spray nozzle type desuperheater (SND) saturation
4.8 Tsat +5 °C Tsat +5 °C Tsat +7 °C
6 'Cost effective option for turndown duties'

Minimum water pressure: Steam +0.5 bar Max. W.P: Max. W.P: Max. W.P:
Steam +4.5 bar Steam +8 bar St +12.5 bar
Vertical
Venturi type desuperheater (VTD) installations
only
Tsat +3 °C Tsat +3 °C Tsat +5 °C Tsat +7 °C
'Our most popular desuperheater, ideal for most duties'

Minimum water pressure: Steam +0.1 bar
Max. W.P: Max. W.P: Max. W.P: Max. W.P:
Steam +0.9 bar Steam +2.5 bar St +4.9 bar St +10 bar
Steam atomising type desuperheater (SAD)
Atomising steam required at 1.5 x SAD

Tsat +3 °C Tsat +3 °C
Desuperheater inlet steam pressure or 3 bar g minimum (with recycle)
'Special desuperheater for high turndown duties'
Required water pressure: Same as steam pressure
Note: For VTD’s, turndowns above 7:1 must not be offered until design checks have been made by Spirax Sarco.
TES Issue 4
Control systems
Desuperheaters 4
Which desuperheater is right for my application?
This is a general guide and does not represent every option available.
Please contact us if you have any queries regarding selection for your specific application.
Start
Are process parameters Yes

relatively fixed?
SND or STD
Turndown < 2:1
No
Is residual superheat? Yes

> 75 °C
No
Is turndown? Yes
VTD or SAD
without recycle
< 4:1
4.8
No 7
Is turndown? Yes Yes
Is application part of a
pressure reducing station?
< 5:1
No No
Yes Is turndown? Yes

Is it a vertical installation?
> 50:1
No No
Yes Yes
Is application part of a Is auxillary steam available SAD
pressure reducing station? as an atomising source? without recycle
No
Yes
Is auxillary steam available SAD
as an atomising source? with recycle
No Consider a number of
appropriate units in
parallel
Sizing and selection software

It is necessary to use our online sizing and selection software so that the desuperheater can be correctly specified and ordered.
The software will generate a desuperheater data sheet and general assembly detail drawing of the resulting product. Please refer
to TI-P475-06 'Desuperheater Online Programme Sizing Guidance' for further information.
TES Issue 4
44 Control systems
Desuperheaters
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instruction that are supplied with the product.
Installation note
Desuperheaters may be installed either horizontally or vertically with the steam flowing upwards.
Spirax Sarco strongly advises against installations in which the steam flow is vertically downwards.
In the case of a horizontal installation the cooling water connection (and the atomising steam connection on a steam atomising
desuperheater) should ideally point downwards, as this gives the best orientation for drainage of fluids in a shutdown situation. Other
orientations are acceptable for satisfactory operation, but drainage is not as effective.
In a vertical installation we recommend that, the cooling water pipework (and atomising steam pipework, if applicable) should be brought
to the Desuperheater from below the corresponding connections on the desuperheater. This will provide the best layout for drainage
of fluids on shutdown.
Desuperheating and pressure reducing stations

Spirax Sarco can provide complete desuperheating and pressure reducing stations including control valves, temperature sensors,
pressure transmitters, instrumentation and pipework, all mounted on a support skid.
4.8
Pressure
controller
Pressure regulating control valve
8
Desuperheater
TS PT
Steam supply
Temperature regulating control valve
Temperature
Cooling water controller
Combined desuperheating and pressure reducing station for venturi and spray type desuperheaters
TES Issue 4
Control systems
Desuperheaters 4
Sizes
Spirax Sarco desuperheaters are specified by their nominal inlet and outlet size in inches. For example an 80 mm connection is referred
to as Size 3, a 250 mm would be Size 10.
Dimensions and weights

Please refer to the general assembly detail drawing generated by the sizing and selection software for details of specific desuperheaters.
Selection guide
Example
Desuperheater type STD, SND, VTD and SAD VTD
Steam inlet / outlet size, mm 20 mm - 450 mm 080
CS - Carbon steel A106 Grade B. For VTD sizes 1 to 2, CS = A350 LF2N material
Shell / pipe material CS
CM - Chrome molybdenum A182 F11
ASME 150, ASME 300, ASME 600, ASME 900, ASME 1500
Steam end connections A600
PN16, PN25, PN40, PN63 and PN100
Flange style Weld neck or slip-on WN
4.8
How to order
1 off Spirax Sarco Size 3 desuperheater model VTD080CS having ASME 600 RF weld neck flanged connections. (Attach the 9
desuperheater Data Sheet with your order).
Spare parts
For units with fixed internals, spare parts are not available.
Spare parts and internal diffuser removal tools are available for units fitted with removable internals.
For guidance ;
SAD of 6" and larger and VTD of 10" and larger are of a fully welded construction, hence spare parts are not available. There are no
spares available for SND or STD with fixed nozzle assembly.
Please quote the equipment model number and serial number from the nameplate when requesting parts.
TES Issue 4
44 Control systems
Desuperheaters
4.8
10
Control systems
Desuperheaters
TI-P605-10
TES Issue 4
DA Series
Variable Area Desuperheaters
Desuperheater overview
Spirax Sarco direct contact desuperheaters reduce the temperature of superheated steam to produce steam temperatures approaching
saturation temperature. Spray water is injected directly into the steam, flashing into vapour by absorbing heat from the steam.
The DA series desuperheater is designed to precisely and economically control the downstream steam temperature by injecting cooling
water directly into the superheated steam flow. It consists of a single actuator and a spray control valve integrated into a single unit.
Typical applications:
- High turndown applications that are beyond the scope of fixed area desuperheaters.
- To safely reduce the steam temperature to allow the operation of downstream process equipment designed for lower temperatures,
maintaining a constant temperature for processes precise temperature control
- To reduce the temperature of steam discharge from turbine by-pass systems on power plants for heat exchangers, dump stations etc. 4.8
- To improve heat transfer of indirect contact heat exchangers- shell and tube, plate type, reactor heating jackets, etc. 11
Features:
- Easy installation - Wide Cv range - Rapid evaporation to minimise over spray
- Low maintenance - Minimal steam pressure drop - Flexible design options
- Robust design
Standard and approvals

- Pressure rating and connections according to ASME B16.34 and ASME B16.5, EN12516-1 and EN1092-1.
- The products listed comply with the requirements of The EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure
Equipment (Safety) Regulations and carry the / mark when so required.
- Welding is in accordance with ASME IX.
- Connections are sized to suit the process conditions.
- Standard ASTM materials of construction include: carbon steel, stainless steel and chrome molybdenum
steel. Special materials are available on request.
Documentation and certification:

Each Spirax Sarco DA will be supplied with the following documentation & certification pack:
- Material traceability certificates to EN 10204 3.1 for body assembly, plug, stem, and nozzles
- Quality certificate indicating hydrostatic test and seat leakage (Class IV) test results
- Warranty terms & conditions
NDT reports are available on request
Class V leakage certification available upon request.
For up to date information on product compliance please visit: www.spiraxsarco.com/product-compliance
TI-P605-10 Page 1 of 10
TES Issue 4
DA Series Variable Area Desuperheaters
44 Control systems
Desuperheaters
Standard scope of supply and main
component identification
Actuator
4.8
12
Water flange
Valve
Steam flange
Nozzle cylinder
Page 2 of 10 TI-P605-10
TES Issue 4
Control systems
Desuperheaters 4
Technical Specifications
1" (DN25) Water Connection
Diameters
3" (DN80) Steam Connection
FR Raised Face
End Connections RTJ Ring Type Seal
(RTJ end flanges option available only for ASME 600 and ASME 900 at additional cost)
ASME B16.34 – Class 150, 300, 600, 900 – ASME A216 WCB, ASME A217 WC9
and ASME A351 CF8M
EN1092-1 - PN40 - ASME A216 WCB and ASME A351 CF8M

Pressure Rating/Materials EN1092-1 - PN63 - PN100 - EN 10213 GP240GH (1.0619) and EN 10213
GX5CrNiMo19-11-2 (1.4408)
EN 12516-1 - PN40 - ASME A217 WC9
EN 12516-1 - PN63 - PN100 - EN 10213 G17CrMo9-10 (1.7379)
Steam Pipe Diameter 6" (DN150) to 24" (DN600)
Maximum Turndown 15:1
Rangibility Up to 50:1
Class IV standard
Leakage Class
Class V optional - maximum ΔP 30 bar (435.1 psi)
Minimum 3.5 bar (50.76 psi)

Differential pressure between water and steam
Maximum 75 bar (1087.78 psi)
Maximum allow water pressure
Minimum recommended water temperature

95 bar (1377.86 psi)
50 °C (122 °F)
4.8
Maximum recommended water temperature 180 °C (356 °F) 13
Up to 232 °C (449.6 °F) without the need of steam thermal sleeve
Differential Temperature between water and
steam Above 232 °C (449.6 °F) we recommend the use of steam thermal sleeve¹
¹Optional, upon request.
Material Maximum temperature Pressure Rating Maximum allowable pressure
ASME 150 19.6 bar g (284.2 psi g)
ASME 300 51.1 bar g (741.1 psi g)

425 °C (797.0 °F)
ASME A216 WCB ASME 600 102.1 bar g (1480.8 psi g)
ASME 900 153.2 bar g (2222 psi g)
400 °C (752 °F) PN40 40.0 bar g (580.1 psi g)
EN 10213 GP240GH PN63 63.0 bar g (913.7 psi g)

400 °C (752 °F)
(1.0619) PN100 100.0 bar g (1450.3 psi g)
ASME 150 19.8 bar g (287.1 psi g)
ASME 300 51.7 bar g (749.8 psi g)

Body Materials²
ASME A217 WC9 538 °C (1000.4 °F) ASME 600 103.4 bar g (1499.6 psi g)
ASME 900 155.1 bar g (2249.5 psi g)
PN40 40.0 bar g (580.1 psi g)
EN 10213 G17CrMo9-10 PN63 63.0 bar g (913.7 psi g)

538 °C (1000.4 °F)
(1.7379) PN100 100.0 bar g (1450.3 psi g)
ASME 150 19 bar g (275.5 psi g)
ASME 300 49.6 bar g (719.3 psi g)
ASME A351 CF8M 538 °C (1000.4 °F) ASME 600 99.3 bar g (1440.2 psi g)
ASME 900 148.9 bar g (2159.6 psi g)
PN40 40.0 bar g (580.1 psi g)
TI-P605-10 Page 3 of 10
TES Issue 4
44 Control systems
Desuperheaters
Technical Specifications (continued)
EN 10213 PN63 63.0 bar g (913.7 psi g)

Body Materials² GX5CrNiMo19-11-2 538 °C (1000.4 °F)
(1.4408) PN100 100.0 bar g (1450.3 psi g)
Cylinder
Trim Materials³ Plug Seat Gasket Nozzles Temperature
(Nozzles)
³Special materials
538 °C
upon request. SS 410 Stellite Inconel SS 410 SS 416
(1000.4 °F)
Nozzle 6A 6A1 9A1 6B 9B 6C 6D 3C6D 6E 3C6E 9E

Flow Coefficient
Cv 0.19 0.30 0.45 0.80 1.20 2.10 3.18 4.00 5.40 6.20 8.10
- Cv
Kv 0.16 0.26 0.39 0.69 1.04 1.81 2.75 3.46 4.67 5.36 7.00
Supplied as standard with a pneumatic spring return actuator that closes the water supply in the event of pneumatic of
Actuator control signal failure. An optional hand wheel (mechanical override) actuator is available upon request. Electric actuators
can also be supplied upon request.
Actuator temperature range -10 °C to +80 °C (14 °F to 176 °F)
Actuator maximum pressure 6.21 bar (90 psi)
Actuator spring range 2.07 bar to 3.45 bar (30 psi to 50 psi)
4.8 For full operational limitations of the DA by material and pressure rating, please refer to IM-P605-11.
14 Alternatively, please contact your local Spirax Sarco office.
Page 4 of 10 TI-P605-10
TES Issue 4
Control systems
Desuperheaters 4
Sizes (mm)
A
(Central line Total insertion
Nozzle
insertion distance
distance)
6A
6A1 395 445
9A1
6B
402 457
9B 790
Water flange Steam flange
6C 411 477
6D
415 485
3C6D
6E
3C6E 417 489
9E
130 By
Hiter
4.8
By
customer 15
X
66 mm 140
A*
90°
Steam
ØD
A* = Approximate distance to steam pipe centre
Branch height X calculation

ØD* *Note: For pipes over 24”. X = 83 mm (3¼ ”)
X=A-
2
TI-P605-10 Page 5 of 10
TES Issue 4
44 Control systems
Desuperheaters
Typical installation (mm)
Nozzle ØD (Piping diameter)
6A/6A1/9A1 6" to 24"

6B/9B (DN150 to DN600)
6C
8" to 24"
6D/3C6D
(DN200 to DN600)
6E/3C6E/9E
4.8 Thermal sleeve
16
100 mm min.
Steam
500 mm
1500 mm
Pneumatic supply
The maximum allowable pressure of the actuator is 6.21 bar g (90 psi g). Higher pressures must be regulated in accordance with this
limitation. The DA position should be controlled by a positioner. In the event of a pneumatic or signal failure, the actuator will fail to a
position that closes the water supply to the steam.
Positioners
Positioners are available upon request.
Page 6 of 10 TI-P605-10
TES Issue 4
Control systems
Desuperheaters 4
Actuator parts list 3
Item Description
2
1 Cylinder
2 Cover 4
3 Blanking bolt (Thread 5/16/18 UNC)

5
4 Bolt (cover)
10
5 Washer (cover)
6 Bolt (piston)
6
7 Washer (piston)
7
8 Piston
9* 'O' ring (piston) 9
10* 'O' ring (cover)

8
11 Spring
12 Stem 11
13 Bushing guide
12
14 Stroke indicator
15 Bolt (stroke indicator) 25 4.8

16 Screw (stroke nameplate)
17 Stroke nameplate 1
17
18 Nameplate
13
19 Yoke
23* Split ring 24
24 Screw lock (cylinder)

23
25 Stroke limiter
39 Bolt (yoke) 15
* Recommended spare parts (see page 9) 14
18
19
16
17
39
TI-P605-10 Page 7 of 10
TES Issue 4
44 Control systems
Desuperheaters
26
27
28
29
30
31
40
32
4.8 Valve parts list

18 Item Description
26 Nut (stem)
27 Bolt (packing)
28 Nut (packing)
29 Packing flange
30 Packing follower
31* Packing set
32 Body assembly
33* Plug/stem assembly
34 Sleeve
37* Sealing ring 33

38 Cylinder/nozzle assembly
34
40 Retainer ring
* Recommended spare parts (see page 9) 37
38
Page 8 of 10 TI-P605-10
TES Issue 4
Control systems
Desuperheaters 4
How to order
Product DA DA
Nominal Diameter 3 3
Code Nozzle Stroke (mm)
6A ²Cv = 0.19 ²Kv = 0.16 40.90
6A1 ²Cv = 0.30 ²Kv = 0.26 40.90
9A1 ²Cv = 0.45 ²Kv = 0.39 40.90
6B ²Cv = 0.80 ²Kv = 0.69 54.10
9B ²Cv = 1.20 ²Kv = 1.04 54.10
Nozzle and Stroke (mm) 6A1
6C ³Cv = 2.10 ³Kv = 1.81 72.40
6D ³Cv = 3.18 ³Kv = 2.75 80.30
3C6D ³Cv = 4.23 ³Kv = 3.46 80.30
6E ³Cv = 5.40 ³Kv = 4.67 84.80
3C6E ³Cv = 6.45 ³Kv = 5.36 84.80
9E ³Cv = 8.10 ³Kv = 7.00 84.80
Code Class (Steam and Water) Standard
150 ASME 150 ASME B16.5
300 ASME 300 ASME B16.5
Class (Steam and Water) 600 ASME 600 ASME B16.5
150
and Standard 900 ASME 900 ASME B16.6
PN40 PN40 EN1092-1
4.8
PN63 PN63 EN1092-1 19
PN100 PN100 EN1092-1
Code Steam End Flange Standard
Steam Connection FR Raised Face ASME B16.5/EN1092-1 FR
¹RTJ Ring Joint Face ASME B16.5
Code Water End Flange Standard
Water Connection FR Raised Face ASME B16.5/EN1092-1 FR
¹RTJ Ring Joint Face ASME B16.5
Code Body Material
WCB ASME SA-216 Gr. WCB /EN 10213 GP240GH (1.0619) 4
Body Material WC9
WC9 ASME SA-217 Gr. WC9/EN 10213 G17CrMo9-10 (1.7379) 4
CF8M ASME SA-351 Gr. CF8M/EN 10213 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2 (1.4408) 4
Flange SOL Integral SOL
Trim Material Temperature
Code Plug and
Trim Material and Stem Seal Ring Min. Max.
seat 1
Temperature (◦C)
SS410 0 °C 538 °C
1 SS316 Inconel
and Stellite (32 °F) (1000.4 °F)
Code Actuator
Actuator 0 Pneumatic actuator with spring return 0
3 Pneumatic actuator with spring return and handwheel (available on request)
Spring Range and Code Spring Range Maximum Differential Pressure
C
Differential Pressure C 2.07 bar to 3.45 bar (30 psi to 50 psi) 75 bar (1087.78 psi)
Notes:
¹ RTJ end flanges available on request, only for ASME 600 and ASME 900.
² Steam pipe: 6" (minimum)/24" (maximum)
³ Steam Pipe: 8" (minimum)/24" (maximum)
4
Material available for PN63 and PN100 only
TI-P605-10 Page 9 of 10
TES Issue 4
44 Control systems
Desuperheaters
Water connection
Water flange
Steam
Standard assembly position
Ordering example: DA 3 6A1 150 FR FR WC9 SOL 1 0 C
Desuperheater DA 3 inch nominal diameter with a Cv = 0.30, Steam and water ASME 150, flanged connections, body material ASME
SA-217 Gr. WC9, integral flange, standard trim material, pneumatic spring return actuator with standard spring range.
4.8 For safety, installation and maintenance information please refer to the Installation and Maintenance Instructions that are supplied with
the product.
20
Spare parts
10
Item Description
9 'O' ring (piston)
10 'O' ring (cover)
13 Bushing guide 9
23 Split ring
31 Packing set
31
33 Plug/stem assembly
37 Sealing ring (set of 3)
38 Cylinder/nozzle assembly
33
13
Valve 37 Actuator
38 23
Page 10 of 10 TI-P605-10
TES Issue 4
Control systems
Magnetic level indicators

TI-P329-01
CTLS Issue 2
Colima Visco
and Colima Viscorol
Magnetic Level Indicators
Description Indicator body sizes
Colima Visco and Colima Viscorol magnetic level indicators have
been designed for optical viewing of liquid levels in most industrial 25 Ø tube 25 - R type only
applications. They are also suitable for high pressure and high
50 Ø tube 48 - Maximum pressure 12 bar g
temperature applications and the range is complemented by Steel
having a pharmaceutical grade option available when requested. 60 Ø tube 60
The indicators can be equipped with electrical contacts or
with a potentiometer transmitter for full automation of process 70 Ø tube 76
management, including pressurised tanks, vats, boilers, for the
control of pumps, valves and alarm systems. Plastic 70 Ø tube 76 - Maximum pressure 16 bar g
Mounting
The Colima Visco and Colima Viscorol magnetic level indicators 4.9
are installed on the side of the tank (bypass system) or vertically
on the top of the tank. 1
Available types
LL Side/side mounted
LF Side/base mounted
LT Side/top mounted
TF Top/base mounted
R Top insertion only
GV Side/side mounted. Specifically designed to control

GDV methane-gas odorant
Options
Electrical bistable reed switch contacts, placed at the required
levels, thus allowing control of several operating points with a
single instrument.
When equipped with a potentiometer transmitter, they allow
continuous reading of liquid level.
Standards and certification

Colima Visco and Colima Viscorol magnetic level indicators
comply with the following European Directives:
- PED 97/23/EC - up to Class IV.

Colima Visco Colima Viscorol
- ATEX 94/9/EC (for electrical equipment only).
- 73/23 CEE (for electrical equipment only).
- Products intended for use in the Naval and Marine sectors are RINA and M.M.I (Italian navy) approved.
Page 1 of 11
44 Control systems
Body sizes and end connections
Flanged: DN20, DN25, DN40, DN50, DN65 and DN80
Screwed, socket weld and butt weld: ½", ¾", 1", 1½", 2", 2½" and 3"
Please note: See page 3 for the full data regarding the range of connections available.
1
1
Colima Colima
Visco Viscorol
2
2
3 3
4 5
4.9 Materials
2 No. Part Material
1 Indicator body 304/316L/316Ti/PVC/PP/PVDF
2 Scale Graduated or neutral
3 Glass tube Polycarbonate or Pyrex
4 Two colour indicator Plastic or alnico
5 Two colour rollers Plastic or aluminium
316L/316Ti/Titanio/Hastelloy PVC/PP/
6 Float (not shown)
PVDF/Buna N
Design conditions
Steel -25 to +350 °C
PVC -20 to +70 °C

Plastic PP -20 to +105 °C
PVDF -20 to +130 °C
Steel < 125 bar g

Plastic < 16 bar g
Steel and plastic > 0.8 kg/l

Specific gravity of fluid
Buna N/Titanium > 0.5 kg/l
Polycarbonate T < 180 °C

Two-colour line marker material and rollers
Aluminium T < 350 °C
Page 2 of 11 TI-P329-01
CTLS Issue 2
Colima Visco and Viscorol Magnetic level indicators
Control systems
Magnetic level indicators 4
Body sizes and end connections
Flanged, screwed, socket weld and butt weld
½", ¾", 1", 1½", 2", 2½" and 3"
Side process connections (types LL, LF, LT)

Please note that other screwed and flanged connections are available on request.
Flanged (FL) EN 1092 and ASME (ANSI)

UA DN20 PN16 AA ¾" Class 150
UB DN20 PN40 AB ¾" Class 300
UC DN20 PN64 AC ¾" Class 600
UD DN20 PN100 AD ¾" Class 1500
UE DN25 PN16 AE 1" Class 150
UF DN25 PN40 AF 1" Class 300
EN 1092 ASME
UG DN25 PN64 AG 1" Class 600
UH DN25 PN100 AJ 1" Class 1500
UI DN40 PN16 AK 1½" Class 150
UL DN40 PN40 AH 1½" Class 300
UM DN40 PN64 AI 1½" Class 600
UN DN40 PN100 AL 1½" Class 1500
Screwed (TH) Socket weld (SW) or Butt weld (BW)

GA ½" SA ½" 4.9
GB ¾" SB ¾"
Gk M
GC 1"
SW
SC 1" 3
GD 1½" SD 1½"
NA ½" BA ½"
NB ¾" BB ¾"
NPT-M BW
NC 1" BC 1"
ND 1½" BD 1½"
Top and bottom process connections (types TF, LF, LT)

Please note that other screwed and flanged connections are available on request.
Flanged (FL) EN 1092 and ASME (ANSI)

UA DN50 PN16 AA 2" Class 150
UB DN50 PN40 AB 2" Class 300
UC DN50 PN64 AC 2" Class 600
UD DN50 PN100 AD 2" Class 1500
UE DN65 PN16 AE 2½" Class 150
UF DN65 PN40 AF 2½" Class 300
EN 1092 ASME
UG DN65 PN64 AG 2½" Class 600
UH DN65 PN100 AH 2½" Class 1500
UI DN80 PN16 AI 3" Class 150
UL DN80 PN40 AJ 3" Class 300
UM DN80 PN64 AK 3" Class 600
UN DN80 PN100 AL 3" Class 1500
Screwed (TH) on the counterflange Socket weld (SW) or Butt weld (BW) on the counterflange
GA ½" SA ½"
Gk M GB ¾" SW SB ¾"
GC 1" SC 1"
NA ½" BA ½"
NPT-M NB ¾" BW BB ¾"
NC 1" BC 1"
Connection type R
External diameter flange: minimum 100 mm
TI-P329-01 Page 3 of 11
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Minimum length 200

A
Maximum length 5700
B Minimum 100
C Depending on fluid specific gravity and pressure Starting from 250
D Depending on fluid specific gravity and pressure Starting from 80
E Depending on fluid specific gravity and pressure Starting from 85
Weights Dependent on dimension A
Side process connection
4.9
4
Side process connection
Page 4 of 11 TI-P329-01
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Accessories
Contacts
Bistable SPDT or DPDT contacts, fixed onto the guide system fitted outside of the indicator body.
Also available in explosion-proof type, ATEX II 1/2 G EEx d IIC T6, T5 resp. T4 certified. Protection degree IP67.
Operation points are always field adjustable.
SPDT execution
DPDT execution (two simultaneous SPDT contacts)
Reed switch contact
Ermetically sealed in inert gas
Contact data Tungsten, Rhodio coated.
60 W/VA 1A 250 V @
Shock and vibration resistance: 30 g 11 ms
Transmitter
Potentiometer transmitter with 5, 10, 20 mm resolution for the continuous evaluation of the liquid level inside the tank.
Valves
The indicators are supplied with a hole and ss plug or with a ¼" drainage valve. A vent can also be supplied on request.
Isolation or check valves between the indicator attachments and the tank should be installed to aid maintenance work. 4.9
5
Characteristics Colima Viscorol contact Characteristics Colima Visco contact
DPDT bistable reed

switch contact (two
SPDT contacts
alongside each other).
Fluid rising up
The position of the
contacts is always field
Bistable
adjustable
Fluid rising up
1 3 2
Bistable
Green
White
Brown
Fluid falling down

Bistable
1 3 2
SPDT bistable reed
switch contact.
The position of the
Green
White
Brown
Fluid falling down

Bistable
contact is always field

adjustable
TI-P329-01 Page 5 of 11
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Potentiometer transmitter characteristics
A potentiometer is placed in the vertical weather-proof tube outside the level indicator.
The total resistance of a known value is measured at the ends of this potentiometer.
The float, following the liquid level trend, activates the potentiometer’s reed contact chain through its own magnetic field, locally closing
the signal.
The total value of the resistance is measured 100% at its maximum level and 0% at its minimum level.
The end poles of the potentiometer are connected to a converter that transforms the input value into Ohm and the output into mA.
5 mm
Reading resolution available 10 mm
20 mm
Resistance input 1 k ÷ 100 k Ohm
4.9
6
Page 6 of 11 TI-P329-01
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Converter's housings
Housing for safe area
Weather-proof IP65, plastic.
Housing for safe area, low/high temperature
Special type suitable to low temperatures or installation in high concentration saline

environments and for use in the food industry.
Entirely in stainless steel.
Protection degree IP67.
On request IP68.
Up to two cable entrances.
Housing for hazardous area, ATEX certified
ATEX certified II 1/2 G EEx d IIC T6, T5 resp. T4 for use in hazardous areas.
In pressure die-cast aluminium with a polyamide paint.
Protection degree IP67.
Up to two cable entrances.
Converter types 4.9

7
Converter for safe area
Field set using two trimmers [for the Z (zero) gauging and G (gain) gauging], without
resorting to interconnecting systems.
Converter for inbuilt safe area
Field set using two trimmers [for the Z (zero) gauging and G (gain) gauging], without
resorting to interconnecting systems.
Converter Hart ® protocol
Converter regulated with an interconnection cable.
Current output 4÷20 mA
TI-P329-01 Page 7 of 11
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Typical vessel installations
4.9
8
Page 8 of 11 TI-P329-01
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Product selection and order placement
Each unit is identified by a unique alphanumeric code that defines the manufacturing characteristics that best suites the application.
Range Colima Colima
V Visco
Model V
R Viscorol
LL Side/side mounted
LF Side/base mounted
LT Side/top mounted
Type TF Top/base mounted LL
R Top insertion only
GV only Colima Visco type
GDV only Colima Visco type
Ø 25 (only R type)
Ø 50
Body diameter 60
Ø 60
Ø 70
Steel
4.9
1 304L stainless steel
9
2 316L stainless steel
3 316Ti stainless steel

Indicator body material 2
Plastic
4 PVC
5 PP
6 PVDF
Centre-to-centre measurement Insert required distance 700
FL Flanged
TH Screwed
Connection type FL
SW Socket weld
BW Butt weld
Attachment rating UA UA
A 316L stainless steel
B 316Ti stainless steel
C Titanium
D Hastelloy
Float material A
E PVC
F PP
G PVDF
H Buna N
To continue with 'Product selection and order placement' and see the 'Order example',
please go to the next page
TI-P329-01 Page 9 of 11
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
Product selection and order placement (continued)
A Drain valve
Valves VA
B Vent valve
R1 Colima Viscorol SPDT contact
R2 Colima Viscorol DPDT contact

Electrical equipment contact R1
V1 Colima Visco SPDT contact
V2 Colima Visco DPDT contact
T5 5 mm
T10 10 mm
T20 20 mm
A Housing for safe area
Electrical equipment transmitter C Housing for safe area, low/high temperature T10-A-C3
B Housing for hazardous area
C3 Converter for safe area
C4 Converter for in built safe area
4.9 C5 Converter Hart® protocol
10
1 off Spirax Sarco Colima Visco V - LL - 60 - 2 - 700 - FL - UA - A - VA - R1 - T10-A-C3
Page 10 of 11 TI-P329-01
CTLS Issue 2
Control systems
Spare parts
The available spare parts are detailed below.
Available spare s
Float 5
Tube with rollers/indicator 2, 3 and 4
Scale 1
Electric components 6 and 7
7 6
4
4.9
11
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size and serial number of the
unit which is indicated on the name-plate.
Example: 1 Float for a Spirax Sarco Colima Visco having the following serial number: ..........................................
TI-P329-01 Page 11 of 11
CTLS Issue 2
44 Control systems
4.9
12
Control systems

TI-S54-01
CTLS Issue 1
Colima Magnetic Level Indicator

Viscorol-PH
Description
Magnetic level indicator Viscorol-PH is designed to control and manage fluid’s level in pharmaceutical or biotechnological applications.
It works based on the communicating vessels principle.
It can be fitted with electrical contacts and/or transmitter for a complete automatic management of vessels, tanks, boilers and for the
control of pumps, valves, alarm systems.
Viscorol PH is a certified product, which can be supplied complete with a specific documentation pack, to guarantee material’s traceability,
surface electropolishing and elastomers compliance to FDA standard.
Mounting Available layouts

Magnetic level indicator Viscorol-PH can be fitted on the external
LL SIDE-SIDE process connections to vessel
4.9
side of vessels or tanks.
13
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3

SIDE-SIDE (connections A/B/C/D) TOP/E-BOTTOM/E (connections A/B) TOP/T-BOTTOM/E (connections A/B/C)
Side-side connections, vent and drain Top Elbow-Bottom Elbow connections Top Tee-Bottom Elbow connections
end tubes
CTLS Issue 1
Colima Magnetic Level Indicator Viscorol-PH
44 Control systems
Options
Magnetic level indicator Viscorol-PH can be equipped with electrical devices, becoming a complete instrument.
Fitted with electrical contacts reed switch bistable type, placed at the required threshold alarms, Viscorol-PH can control several
intervention points with one single instrument only.
Equipped with a transmitter with 4-20mA output signals, Viscorol-PH can ensure the continuous remote reading of liquid’s level.
Certification and Conformity Declarations

Magnetic level indicator Viscorol-PH complies with the following European Directives and Standards:
- PED 2014/68/EU (up to Class IV), plastic materials excluded
- 2014/30/UE Electromagnetic Compatibility
- 2014/35/UE Low Tension (for electrical components only).
Level indicator body’s diameter

60 tube Ø 60 mm
Stainless Steel material
70 tube Ø 76 mm
Material
4.9
No. Part Material
14 1 Vertical chamber 316L 1
2 Scale Stainless Steel
3 Indicating scale tube Polycarbonate

1
4 Bicolour rolling cylinders Plastic
2
Float (not shown) 316L
3
2
4 3
Colima Colima Viscorol

Viscorol PH
Maximum allowable conditions

TMA Maximum allowable temperature Ø 60-70 -25 +191.7 °C
7 bar 191.7 °C
10 bar 184.1 °C
Fluid Density > 0,8 kg/l
CTLS Issue 1
Control systems
Process connections according to ASME-BPE, sizes
C
C
A
4.9
B 15
B
D
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3
SIDE-SIDE (connections A/B/C/D) TOP/E-BOTTOM/E (connections A/B) TOP/T-BOTTOM/E (connections A/B/C)

Side-side connections, vent and drain Top Elbow-Bottom Elbow connections Top Tee-Bottom Elbow connections
end tubes
Inlet/outlet Inlet/outlet Vent

Inlet/outlet Vent Drain
Item A/B Item A/B C
Item A/B C D
½" ½" ½"
½" ½" ½"
¾" ¾" ¾"
¾" ¾" ¾" Size Size
Size 1" 1" 1"
1" 1" 1"
1½" 1½" 1½"
- 1½" 1½"
DIN connections available on request
CTLS Issue 1
44 Control systems
Minimum dimension 440
A Maximum dimension B
2000
(For longer dimensions, please apply to our Engineering)
B Minimum 100
C Based on fluid’s density and on design pressure Minimum 100
D Based on fluid’s density and on design pressure Minimum 80
D
C
4.9
16
Fig. 1
A A
D D
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
CTLS Issue 1
Control systems
Accessories
Contacts
Bistable SPDT contacts, fixed on the guide system fitted outside of level indicator body.
Enclosure IP65.
Operation points are always adjustable on site.
Reed switch contact
Ermetically sealed in inert gas
Contact data Tungsten, Rhodio coated
60 W/VA 1A 250 V
Shock and vibration resistance : 30 g 11 ms
Transmitter
Each level indicator can be equipped with a transmitter, piezoresistive type with 5mm resolution for the direct level reading of the liquid
contained into the vessel.
Handling
We recommend to handle with care subject accessories, in order to avoid any possible damage due to impact during installation and/
or handling.
Piezoresistive transmitter
A potentiometer (a printed circuit board with a reed chain contact/resistances, welded on it) is placed in a seal tight vertical tube, fitted
outside level indicator.
The total resistance of a known value is measured at the end poles of the potentiometer.
4.9
The float, moving up and down into the level indicator’s vertical chamber, according to
17
the liquid’s level, activates the potentiometer’s reed chain, thanks to its magnetic field,
by closing the signal locally.
The total resistance value is 100% at its maximum level and 0% at its minimum level.
The end poles of the potentiometer are connected to a converter transforming level
reading into 4-20mA output.
Transmitter’s characteristics
Available reading resolutions 62 mm 5 mm
(according to the involved distance between process connections)
Output signal 4-20 mA

80 mm
Max allowable temperature -20 °C +100 °C
0%
Converter’s housing details
Ø 110 mm
Housing 100%
Fully in Stainless Steel material,
Enclosure IP67 70 mm
Cable entries: M20. 4-20 mA
0%
Converter Ø110 mm
Adjustable on site model, equipped with two
10-turns trimmers for the Z (zero) setting and the
G (gain) setting, without any interconnection
system. 135 mm100%
4-20 mA
Output 4 ÷ 20 mA
4-20 mA
0%
100%
CTLS Issue 1
44 Control systems
Examples of installation
Example 1
Vertical tank installation
4.9
18
Example 2
Horizontal tank installation
CTLS Issue 1
Control systems
Product selection and order placement
Each level indicator is identified by one only alphanumeric code defining the manufacturing characteristics that best suites the application.
Operating pressure = Density = Operating pressure =
Design pressure = Fluid viscosity = Design temperature =
Fluid type =
VISCOROL PH Level Indicator - selection guide

Level Indicator Code Code
Conformance ASME A not required 0

Drain connection - Type
60 6 clamp 4
Body Diameter
70 7 not applicable 0
AB B 15 1
Layout ABC C Drain connection - Size 20 2
ABCD D 25 3
Process connection - Type Clamp 4 40 4
15 1 Drain connection - Rating not applicable 0
20 2 Housing enclosure IP65 1 4.9

Process connection - Size
25 3
SPDT Contacts (2 pieces)
No 1 19
40 4 Yes 2
Process connection - Rating not applicable 0 Float AISI 316 1
not required 0 High Temperature not applicable 1

Vent connection - Type
clamp 4 distance between
Center to center distance
connections to be
not required 0 (mm)
specified
15 1
Vent connection - Size 20 2
25 3
40 4
Vent connection - Rating not applicable 0
Example: VISCOROL PH A 6 B 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
VISCOROL-PH-A-6-B- 4-2-0-0-0-0-0-0-0-1-1-1-0
Description:
Level indicator model VISCOROL-PH,
Design according to ASME standard,
Body diameter 60mm,
Connections layout AB,
Clamp process connections size 3/4”,
Without vent connection, without drain connection,
Enclosure IP65
Equipped with 2 pcs contacts SPDT type
Float material AISI 316
Center to center distance = … (to be specified)
CTLS Issue 1
44 Control systems
4.9
20
C ompressed air produc ts 5
Section 5
5.1 Filters
5.2 Regulators
5.3 Lubricators
5.4 Filter/regulators
5.5 Isolation valves, drain traps and ancillaries

5
Compressed air products
5
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Filters 5
TI-P504-01
CH Issue 2
Manual
Drain
MF2M International Symbol
Monnier Miniature
Compressed Air Filter
Description
The MF2M Monnier miniature compressed air filter provides high
quality compressed air for general purpose pneumatic applications.
Principal features:
- Compact unit suitable where space is limited and air flow is small.
- Multi-bladed whirl disc for improved moisture separation.
- Polycarbonate bowl.
- Long life 5 µm element.
- External black anodised finish.
Optional extras
For further technical information regarding the following options see
page 2:
- Type 3 mounting bracket.
- Easy fit stainless steel bowl guard.

¼" screwed BSP (BS 21-Rp).
Operating limits 5.1

Maximum working pressure
Maximum working temperature
10 bar g
50°C
1
Materials
Part Material
Bowl Polycarbonate
Head Aluminium
Element Sintered polypropylene
Bowl guard Stainless steel
Dimensions (approximate) in mm and kg

A B C E E1 Weight
Capacities
10 98 38 25 76 0.155
Air flow scfm
C
A

Pressure drop bar
Pressure drop psi

B

E Without bowl guard

Withdrawal distance: E1 With bowl guard
Air flow dm³/s
Page 1 of 3
5 Filters
Optional extras Principle of operation

Type 3 mounting bracket Monnier air line filters are built to ensure solid and liquid
This is a zinc plated, mild steel angle bracket which can be attached contaminants are removed from compressed air. All Monnier
to any flat surface by means of screws or bolts. filters are engineered with the exclusive Whirl-Away design
which creates high centrifugal force with low pressure drop. The
whirling action forces all liquids and solids against the bowl wall
causing them to run down below the quiet-zone baffle where
they can be drained out. The air then flows through the element
where the smaller particles are removed and the filtered air
passes downstream. The leak proof drain valve has an o-ring
seal that can be opened and closed without tools.
A B C D E F
75 50 25 65 13 20
E D
C
B
A
5.1
Bowl guard
2 In the interest of safety Spirax Sarco recommend that a bowl
guard should be fitted - see the 'Warning' under 'Safety information,
installation and maintenance'.

Warning:
Polycarbonate bowls are attacked by phosphate ester fluids, solvents, paint thinners and carbon tetrachloride. These and similar
substances should never be allowed to come into contact with the bowl. Certain compressor lubricating oils also contain additives harmful
to polycarbonate and, where there is any doubt we recommend, in the interests of safety, that a bowl guard should be fitted.
Installation note:
Fit into a horizontal pipeline with the air flow in the direction of the arrow and the bowl vertically downwards, as close as possible to the
equipment it is protecting.
How to order
Example: 1 off MF2M Monnier miniature compressed air filter having ¼" screwed BSP connections.
Note: If any optional extras are required they must be clearly specified when placing an order.
TI-P504-01 CH Issue 2 MF2M Monnier Miniature Compressed Air Filter Page 2 of 3

Filters 5
Spare parts
The spare parts available are detailed below. No other parts are
supplied as spares.
Available spares
Bowl assembly A, B
Element set 5 micron (packet of 3) B, C
Bowl guard assembly D, E
How to order spares
headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of unit.
Example: 1 - Element set (5 microns) for a ¼" MF2M Monnier
miniature compressed air filter.
5.1
A
3
TI-P504-01 CH Issue 2 MF2M Monnier Miniature Compressed Air Filter Page 3 of 3

5 Filters
5.1
4
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Filters 5
TI-P504-11
CH Issue 2
IF2M and IF2AM

IF2DM
IF2M, IF2AM and IF2DM International Symbol
Monnier
International Compressed Air Filters
Description
The IF Monnier international range of filters provides high quality
compressed air (free from liquid and solid contaminants) for general
purpose pneumatic systems.
Available types:
IF2M Only available with a metal bowl and having a manual drain.
IF2AM Having a pilot operated automatic drain.
IF2DM Having a semi-automatic dump valve with quick action
manual override.
Principal features:
- Internal and external high quality black anodised finish.
- Large filter element for long life and low pressure drop.
- Shrouded whirl disc for efficient separation.
- 5 micron large surface area element.
- Options of metal bowl with sight level. 5.1
Optional extras
For further technical information regarding the following options see
below:
5
- Metal bowl with / without sight glass.
- Bowl guard.

¼", " and ½" screwed BSP (BS 21 - Rp).
Operating limit
Polycarbonate bowl 10 bar g
Metal bowl 17 bar g
Polycarbonate bowl 50°C
Metal bowl 80°C
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Bowl Polycarbonate or aluminium (anodised)
2 Head Anodised aluminium
3 Element 5 µm Melamine impregnated cellulose
4 'O' rings Nitrile rubber
5 Auto-drain Plastic IF2DM shown
Page 1 of 5
5 Filters
Optional extras Dimensions /weights (approximate) in mm and kg

Metal bowl Polycarbonate bowl
with sight level
Unit A B C E Weight
IF2AM 17 152 64 55 0.463
IF2DM 17 152 64 55 0.670
B Polycarbonate
bowl
Bowl guard
In the interest of safety Spirax Sarco recommend that a bowl guard
should be fitted to polycarbonate bowls - see the 'Warning' under
'Safety information, installation and maintenance'.
5.1
6 Withdrawal distance E
Metal bowl
Unit A B C E Weight
IF2M 17 152 64 39 0.606
IF2AM 17 152 64 39 0.626
IF2DM 17 152 64 39 0.670
B Metal bowl
Withdrawal distance E
TI-P504-11 CH Issue 2 IF2M, IF2AM and IF2DM Monnier International Compressed Air Filters Page 2 of 5
Filters 5
Capacities
5 µm element
¼"
Air flow scfm
Pressure drop bar
Pressure drop psi

1.6 bar g (23 psi g)
Air flow dm3 /s
"
Air flow scfm
5.1
7
Pressure drop bar
Pressure drop psi

Air flow dm3 /s
½"
Air flow scfm
Pressure drop bar
Pressure drop psi

Air flow dm3 /s
5 Filters
Monnier air line filters are built to ensure solid and liquid
contaminants are removed from compressed air. All Monnier filters
are emgineered with the exclusive Whirl-Away design which
creates high centrifugal force with low pressure drop. The whirling
action forces all liquids and solids against the bowl wall causing
them to run down below the quiet-zone baffle where they can be 1
drained out. The air then flows through the elements where the
smaller particles are removed and the filtered air passes
downstream. The leak proof drain valve has an 'O' ring seal that
can be opened and closed without tools.

Warning:
Polycarbonate bowls are attacked by phosphate ester fluids,
solvents, paint thinners and carbon tetrachloride. These and similar
substances should never be allowed to come into contact with the
bowl. Certain synthetic and standard compressor lubricating oils
also contain additives harmful to polycarbonate and, where there is
any doubt we recommend, in the interests of safety, that a metal
bowl or a bowl guard should be fitted.
Installation note:
Fit into a horizontal pipeline with the air flow in the direction of the
arrow and the bowl vertically downwards, as close as possible to
the equipment it is protecting.
How to order
5.1 Example: 1 off IF2AM Monnier international compressed air filter
having a female ½" screwed BSP (BS 21 - Rp) connection.
8 Note 1: The product will be supplied with a 5 µm element and
polycarbonate bowl as standard. If a metal bowl is required (with or
without sight level) it must be clearly specified on the order. The
IF2M manual drain is available with metal bowl only.
Note 2: If any optional extras are required, they must be clearly
specified on the order.
IF2DM
Filters 5
Spare parts
supplied as spares.
Available spares
Bowl assembly including the appropriate drain - A, B
state polycarbonate or metal (with or without sight level)
Element set (packet of 3 of each) 5 µm B, C
Auto-drain (IF2AM only) Not shown
How to order spares

Example: 1 off Polycarbonate bowl assembly for a ½" IF2DM
Monnier international compressed air filter.
Metal bowl with sight level

(Standard for the IF2M)
5.1
9
5 Filters Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.
TI-P504-21
CH Issue 2
IX1M
Monnier
International Compressed Air Filter
5.1
10
Capacities
Do not exceed the flowrates shown on the performance curves at
any pressure.
Air flow scfm
*

Pressure psi

Pressure bar

Air flow dm3 /s
Filters 5
Principle of operation Spare parts
Monnier air line filters are built to ensure solid and liquid The spare parts available are detailed below. No other parts are
contaminants are removed from compressed air. All Monnier supplied as spares.
filters are engineered with the exclusive Whirl-Away design Available spares
which creates high centrifugal force with low pressure drop. The
whirling action forces all liquids and solids against the bowl wall Bowl Polcarbonate bowl A, B
causing them to run down below the quiet-zone baffle where assembly Metal bowl (with or without sight level) B, H
they can be drained out. The air then flows through the element
where the smaller particles are removed and the filtered air Element set B, C, D
passes downstream. The leak proof drain valve has an 'O' ring Bowl guard assembly F, G (2 pieces)
seal that can be opened and closed without tools.
How to order spares
Inlet flow Outlet flow Example: 1 - Polycarbonate bowl assembly for a ½" IX1M
Monnier international compressed air filter.
C
5.1
11
Polycarbonate bowl
A B C E E1 Weight
17 152 64 49 73 0.6 B
Metal bowl
A B C E E1 Weight
25 170 64 38 - 0.7
C C
Withdrawal distance: E, E1
Withdrawal distance: E without bowl guard , E1 with bowl guard

(IM-P504-22) supplied with the product. G
Installation note:
Fit in a horizontal pipework with the air flow in the direction of the
F
How to order
Example: 1 off IX1M Monnier international compressed air filter
having ¼" screwed BSP connections.
Note: If any optional extras are required they must be clearly
specified when placing an order.
TI-P504-21 CH Issue 2 IX1M Monnier International Compressed Air Filter

5 Filters Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.
TI-P504-13
CH Issue 2
Manual Auto
Drain Drain
IC3AM, IC3DM, IC4AM and IC4DM International Symbol
Monnier
International Ultraclean Compressed Air Filters
Description
The Monnier International Ultraclean high ef ficiency oil
removing filters have been designed to provide high quality
compressed air (free from liquid and solid contaminants) for
pneumatic systems.
For use in applications where compressed air of a particularly
high quality is required. Typical examples include air bearings
on machine tools, air gauging equipment, instrument air
supplies, breathing air, etc.
Principal features:
- Maximum flow 15.57 dm 3/s (33 scfm).
- Efficiency testing carried out in accordance with ISO 12500 at
51 mg/m 3 (40 ppm) inlet concentration.
- Oil efficiency = 99.95%.
- Oil carryover less than 0.025 5 mg/m3 (0.02 ppm).
- Particle efficiency = 99.6%.
5.1 - 100% water removal in liquid or aerosol form at line temperature.
12 Available types:
IC3AM With pilot operated automatic drain.
With semi-automatic dump valve for quick action
IC3DM
manual override.
With pilot operated automatic drain and a unique
IC4AM colour change indicator (changes from white to yellow)
fitted to show the condition of the element.
With semi-automatic dump valve for quick action manual
override. This filter is supplied complete with a unique
IC4DM
colour change indicator (changes from white to yellow)
fitted to show the condition of the element.
Optional extras
For further technical information regarding the following options
see page 2:
- Metal bowl with or without sight level.

¼", " and ½" screwed BSP (BS 21-Rp).
Operating limits
Metal bowl 17 bar g
Metal bowl 80°C
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Bowl Polycarbonate or aluminium (anodised) IC4AM
2 Head Anodised aluminium
Borosilicate glass with polypropylene
3 Element
support core
4 Auto-drain Plastic
Page 1 of 4
Filters 5
Optional
Optional
extras
extras Dimensions
Dimensions
/weights
/weights
(approximate)
(approximate)
in mminand
mmkg
and kg
MetalMetal
bowl bowl Polycarbonate
Polycarbonate
bowl bowl
with bowl
with bowl
guardguard
with sight
with level
sight level Unit Unit
A1 A1 A2 A2 B B C C E E E1 E1
WeightWeight
IC3AMIC3AM
- - 17 17152 15264 64 39 39 82 820.90 0.90
IC3DMIC3DM
- - 17 17152 15264 64 39 39 79 790.88 0.88
IC4AMIC4AM
50 50 - - 152 15264 64 39 39 82 820.97 0.97
IC4DMIC4DM
50 50 - - 152 15264 64 39 39 79 790.95 0.95
C C
A1 A1
A2 A2
Bowl Bowl
guardguard
In theIn
interest
the interest
of safety
of safety
SpiraxSpirax
SarcoSarco
recommend
recommend
that athat
bowla guard
bowl guard
shouldshould
be fitted
be fitted
to polycarbonate
to polycarbonate
bowlsbowls
- see -the
see'Warning'
the 'Warning'
underunder B B
'Safety
'Safety
information,
information,
installation
installation
and maintenance'.
and maintenance'.
5.1
13
E without
E without
bowl guard
bowl guard
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
distance:
distance:
E1 with
E1bowl
with guard
bowl guard
MetalMetal
bowl bowl
Unit Unit A1 A1 A2 A2 B B C C E EWeightWeight
IC3AMIC3AM - - 17 17 152 152 64 64 39 39 0.95 0.95
IC3DMIC3DM - - 17 17 152 152 64 64 39 39 0.93 0.93
IC4AMIC4AM50 50 - - 152 152 64 64 39 39 1.02 1.02
IC4DMIC4DM50 50 - - 152 152 64 64 39 39 1.00 1.00
C C
Capacities
Capacities
- For -allFor
sizes
all sizes
5 μm 5element
μm element
Air flow
Airscfm
flow scfm
A1 A1
A2 A2
Pressure drop bar
Pressure drop bar
Pressure drop psi
Pressure drop psi
B B
Withdrawal
Withdrawal distance
distance E E
Air flow
Airdm
flow
3
/sdm3 /s
TI-P504-13
TI-P504-13 CH 2IssueIC3AM,
CH Issue 2 IC3AM,
IC3DM,
IC3DM,
IC4AM
IC4AM
and IC4DM
and IC4DM
Monnier
Monnier
International
International
Ultraclean
Ultraclean
Compressed
Compressed
Air Filters
Air Filters
Page Page
2 of 42 of 4
5 Filters
Application
Monnier Oil-Coalescing Filters remove more than 99.95% of all
oil and dirt from the air you use. Oil vapors and aerosols are
removed by coalescent action, forming them into drops heavy
enough to be separated by gravity. Unlike absorption filters, they
do not become filled with oil, and will not clog on oil alone. If dirt
particles are removed upstream, these filters will separate oil
from air indefinitely.

Warning:
Polycarbonate bowls are attacked by phosphate ester fluids,
solvents, paint thinners and carbon tetrachloride. These and similar
substances should never be allowed to come into contact with the
bowl. Certain compressor lubricating oils also contain additives
harmful to polycarbonate and, where there is any doubt we
recommend, in the interests of safety, that a metal bowl or a bowl
guard should be fitted.
Installation note:
It is advisable to fit a conventional pneumatic auto-filter,
(International IF2M) immediately upstream of the coalescing filter
to extend the life of the filter cartridge. On new installations, it is
as well to blow through the pipework before fitting the filter to
ensure that the initial pipescale and dirt is removed.
Points to note:
5.1 1. Coalescing filters should be installed as close as possible to
the equipment they are protecting.
14 2. Do not exceed the maximum flowrate (for any given pressure)
as shown on the graphs or there is chance that some of the
coalesced liquids will be re-entrained and carried on downstream.
3. Do not overload the filter cartridge or there will be a reduction
in its efficiency and/or life. It is advisable to fit a conventional
pneumatic auto-filter (International IF2AM) immediately in front of
the coalescing filter for maximum efficiency and life.
4. For hydrocarbon vapour and odour removal use the Monnier
IX1M International compressed air filter - For specific product data
see Technical Information sheet TI-P504-21.
How to order
Example: 1 of f IC3AM Monnier international ultraclean
compressed air filter having a female ½" screwed BSP (BS 21 - Rp)
connection.
Note 1: The product will be supplied with a polycarbonate bowl as
standard. If a metal bowl is required (with or without sight level) it
must be clearly specified on the order.
IC4DM
shown
TI-P504-13 CH Issue 2 IC3AM, IC3DM, IC4AM and IC4DM Monnier International Ultraclean Compressed Air Filters Page 3 of 4
Filters 5
Spare parts
supplied as spares.
Available spares
D
Bowl assembly including the appropriate drain - A, B
Element set 5 µm B, C
Flow indicator assembly (IC4DM and IC4AM only) D, E, F
Auto-drain (IC3AM and IC4AM only) Not shown E
How to order spares

Example: 1 off Polycarbonate bowl assembly for a ¼" IC4DM
Monnier international ultraclean compressed air filter. F
5.1
15
TI-P504-13 CH Issue 2 IC3AM, IC3DM, IC4AM and IC4DM Monnier International Ultraclean Compressed Air Filters Page 4 of 4
5 Filters
5.1
16
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Regulators 5
TI-P504-09
CH Issue 2
Self- Non-
relieving relieving
MR1M, MRN1M and MR2M International Symbol
Monnier Miniature
Compressed Air Regulators
Description
The MR_M Monnier range of miniature compressed air regulators
provide accurate pressure control for general purpose pneumatic
systems where space is restricted and flowrates are low.
Principal features:
- Good flow characteristics.
- Good regulation characteristics.
- Fast response.
- Dead tight shut-off on no-flow.
- For bracket or panel mounting.
Available types:
MR1M Self-relieving MR1M shown
MRN1M Non-relieving
MR2M Self-relieving
Optional extras
5.2
1
see page 2:
- Type 8 mounting bracket (MR2M) and aluminium mounting ring.
- Type 4 mounting bracket (MR1M and MRN1M only).
- Pressure gauges.
- Mounting kit.

¼" screwed BSP (BS 21-Rp)

Type A B C Weight
MR1M 11 89 36 0.095
MRN1M 11 89 36 0.095
MR2M 11 78 36 0.085
Spring range (operating pressure range)

All regulators can be adjusted to zero pressure, or up to the
figures shown. The operating range is marked on the unit.
Standard spring 0.7 - 9.0 bar g

MR1M, MRN1M and MR2M 0.2 - 2.0 bar g
Optional spring
0.3 - 4.0 bar g
MR2M shown Note: The MR_M and MRN1M range of miniature compressed air
regulators will be supplied with the standard spring unless an
alternative option has been specified when placing an order.
B Operating limits
Maximum primary pressure 21 bar g
Maximum working temperature 70°C
Materials
Part Material
MR1M and MRN1M Aluminium
Body
A MR2M Aluminium and polycarbonate
Valve Nitrile
Page 1 of 3
5 Regulators
Optional extras
Mounting kit - The MR1M, MR2M and MRN1M regulators may be Pressure gauges for panel mounting
used with an optional mounting kit consisting of bracket (Type 8 or With chromium plated bezel available in two ranges, the face being
Type 4), mounting ring and pressure gauge (see options below). marked in bar and psi as follows:-
Mounting kits are supplied separately. Fasteners are not included.
0 to 2 bar 0 to 30 psi
Pressure ranges
Type 8 mounting bracket and mounting ring (MR2M only) 0 to 7 bar 0 to 100 psi
For panel mounting: An aluminium
mounting ring is to be specified.
For bracket mounting: A Type 8 mounting A B C D
bracket and aluminium mounting ring 53 56 48 R
is to be specified.
Mounting ring B
Dimensions (approximate) in millimetres A C
12.7 12.7
38 5 Clamping yoke
10
31 29
64 51
Type 4 mounting bracket (MR1M only)

An angle bracket in zinc plated mild steel to enable the regulator to
be mounted behind the panel. The regulator is attached to the bracket
by a screwed nipple.
5.2
2
A
B
D
E
D C
A B C D EØ
69 15.9 27 9.5 4BA (3.6 mm)
Pressure gauges
Available in two sizes, with 4 pressure ranges. The face is marked
in both bar and psi. The 40 mm gauge will be supplied unless the
50 mm is specified on the order.
Pressure ranges With system pressure on, the regulator poppet valve assembly is
in the closed position when the adjusting knob is turned fully
0 to 21 bar 0 to 300 psi (50 mm size only) counter clockwise (no spring load). By turning the adjusting knob
Dimensions (approximate) in mm clockwise, the diaphragm / piston moves downward allowing flow
Size A B C Size A B C to come in through the orifice created between the poppet
assembly and seat. The control diaphragm / piston offsetting the
40 mm 40 47 R " 50 mm 49 45 R " load spring senses pressure downstream. Increasing downstream
pressure causes the poppet assembly to move upward until the
load of the spring and diaphragm / piston are balanced. The outlet
pressure has now been reduced. If a valve is opened downstream,
C the increased demand for pressure creates a reduced pressure
under the control diaphragm / piston. The poppet assembly moves
downward due to the load of the control spring opening the seat
A area and air is allowed to meet the downstream pressure demand.
Thus, the area of the opening meters the downstream flow.
B
TI-P504-09 CH Issue 2 MR1M, MRN1M and MR2M Monnier Miniature Compressed Air Regulators Page 2 of 3
Regulators 5
Capacities
For safety valve sizing purposes the full lift capacity for the MR1M and MR2M is 0.21 KVS.
Performance (with primary pressure 10 bar)
Air flow scfm

Secondary pressure bar
Secondary pressure psi

5.2
3
Air flow dm3/s

Installation note:
The regulator should be sited as close as possible to the equipment it is serving. Connect the regulator so that air flow is in the direction
shown by the arrow on the body. A pressure gauge (supplied as an accessory, when ordered) fitted to one of the gauge ports is
recommended to show the secondary pressure. A filter should be installed in front of the regulator to keep dirt out.
Panel mounting the MR2M
The panel must not exceed 8 mm thick. The required hole is 31 mm.
How to order
Example: 1 off MR1M Monnier miniature compressed air regulator having ¼" screwed BSP connections and a 0.2 to 2 bar control spring.
Note: The MR1M or MR2M regulator will be supplied with a 0.7 to 9 bar spring as standard.
TI-P504-09 CH Issue 2 MR1M, MRN1M and MR2M Monnier Miniature Compressed Air Regulators Page 3 of 3
5 Regulators
5.2
4
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Regulators 5
TI-P504-19
CH Issue 2
IR1 IRN1
IR1M and IRN1M International

Symbol

Monnier
International Compressed Air Regulators
Description
The IR1M and IRN1M Monnier international compressed air
regulators provide accurate pressure control for general purpose
pneumatic systems.
Principal features:
- Good flow characteristics.
- Good regulation characteristics.
- Fast response.
- Dead tight shut-off on no-flow.
- For line, bracket or panel mounting.
Available types:
IR1M Self-relieving
IRN1M Non-relieving
Optional extras
see page 2:
5.2
- Tamper-proof cap.
- Type 21 mounting bracket. 5
- Mounting ring - Aluminium.
- Pressure gauges.

A B C D E F Weight
90 117 64 46 18 30 0.45
Withdrawal distance F
D

All regulators can be adjusted to zero pressure, or above the figures
shown. The operating range is marked on the unit.
Standard spring 0.5 - 10 bar g

Optional spring 0.2 - 3.5 bar g
A Note: The IR range will be supplied with the standard spring unless
an alternative option has been specified when placing an order.
B
Operating spring limits
Maximum working pressure 20 bar g
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Body Machined aluminium, anodised
C 2 Valve Brass and nitrile 'O' ring
Withdrawal distance E 3 Diaphragm Reinforced nitrile rubber
Page 1 of 4
5 Regulators

Tamper-proof cap
An aluminium tamper-proof cap can be fitted to prevent unauthorised
pressure adjustment
53
Dimensions (approximate) in mm 54
Type 21 mounting bracket

A zinc plated mild steel bracket can be attached to the regulator,
using the plastic mounting ring supplied with the regulator.
Please note: An aluminium mounting ring can be supplied, at extra
cost, and must be specified at the time of order placement.
A B C D E
44 19 32 12 6
If the regulator is to be panel mounted a hole is required in the panel
48 mm diameter, and the panel thickness must not exceed 8 mm.
Mounting ring D
C
E
5.2 A
6 Pressure gauges
in both bar and psi. Please state, size and pressure range when With system pressure on, the regulator poppet valve assembly is
placing an order. in the closed position when the adjusting knob is turned fully
counter clockwise (no spring load). By turning the adjusting knob
clockwise, the diaphragm / piston moves downward allowing flow
0 to 7 bar 0 to 100 psi to come in through the orifice created between the poppet
Pressure ranges
0 to 11 bar 0 to 160 psi assembly and seat. The control diaphragm / piston offsetting the
0 to 21 bar 0 to 300 psi (50 mm size only) load spring senses pressure downstream. Increasing downstream
pressure causes the poppet assembly to move upward until the
Dimensions (approximate) in millimetres load of the spring and diaphragm / piston are balanced. The outlet
Size A B C Size A B C pressure has now been reduced. If a valve is opened downstream,
40 mm 40 47 R " 50 mm 49 45 R " the increased demand for pressure creates a reduced pressure
under the control diaphragm / piston. The poppet assembly moves
downward due to the load of the control spring opening the seat
C area and air is allowed to meet the downstream pressure demand.
Pressure gauges for panel mounting

With chromium plated bezel available in two ranges, the face being
marked in bar and psi as follows:-
Pressure ranges
A B C D
53 56 48 R
A C
TI-P504-19 CH Issue 2 IR1M and IRN1M Monnier International Compressed Air Regulators Page 2 of 4
Regulators 5
Capacities
The full lift capacities for safety valve sizing purposes is 0.21 Kvs.
Performance selection (with primary pressure 10 bar)

For any specified primary filtration pressure, there is a maximum recommended air flowrate. Keeping within this, will ensure that the
element performance maintains the stated high efficiency levels.
¼"
Air flow scfm

Secondary pressure psi g

Secondary pressure bar g

8.0 bar g (116 psi g)

Air flow dm3/s
"
Air flow scfm

5.2

7


8.0 bar g (116 psi g)

Air flow dm3/s
½"
Air flow scfm


8.0 bar g (116 psi g)

Air flow dm3/s
The graph utilises some typical values for secondary flow / pressure to demonstrate droop
Pressure droop
Droop = @ Relevant flowrate
Set point
5 Regulators
Spare parts
Available spares
Repair kit consisting of: - Diaphragm assembly
- Poppet valve seat
- Valve seat 'O' ring
- Valve stem and poppet assembly
- Poppet valve spring
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of unit.
Example: 1 off repair kit for a ½" IR1M Monnier international compressed air regulator.

Installation note:
Fit into a horizontal pipeline with the air flow in the direction of the arrow, and bowl vertically downwards. A Monnier MF2M filter should
be fitted upstream to prevent any contaminants reaching the regulator it is recommended that a pressure gauge is fitted to one of the ports
to display the secondary pressure.
How to order
Example: 1 off IR1M Monnier self-relieving international compressed air regulator having a 0.5 to 10 bar spring assembly and female
½" screwed BSP (BS 21 - Rp) connections.
Note: If any optional extras are required, they must be clearly specified on the order.
5.2
8
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Lubricators 5
TI-P504-03
CH Issue 3
ML3M International Symbol
Monnier Miniature
Compressed Air Lubricator
Description
The ML3M Monnier miniature compressed air lubricator provides lubrication for pneumatic systems where space is restricted and flowrates are low.
Principal features:
- Once set compensates for varying air flowrates.
- Easy setting of oil / air ratio: approximately 5% of each oil drop enters the air stream.
- Tamper-proof feature; prevents unauthorised adjustment.
- Non-return valve in oil pick up system ensures lubrication for short air flows.
Tamper-proof feature
As standard, each lubricator is supplied with a " diameter tamper-proof ball that may
be pressed or tapped into the top of the sight dome adjustment area after the oil rate
has been set (See 'Principle of operation', page 2). This prevents any further adjustment
by unauthorized personnel. 5.3
Optional extras:
For further technical information regarding the following options, see page 2: 1
- Mounting bracket.
Operating limits
Dimensions, capacity and weights

(approximate) in mm, ml and kg
A B B1 C E E1 Bowl capacity Weight
48 130 139 38 10 40 20 0.15
Materials
B Part Material
Head Aluminium
Bowl Polycarbonate
Capacity valve Acetal
Bowl guard (optional extra) Stainless steel
E Without bowl guard

Withdrawal distance: E1 With bowl guard
Page 1 of 4
5 Lubricators
Optional extras: Principle of operation

Type 3 mounting bracket Insert tamper-proof
This is a zinc plated, mild steel angle bracket which can be attached 6 " diameter ball
to any flat surface by means of screws or bolts. as indicated
1
A B C D E F
75 50 25 65 13 20
Maximum
oil level
5.3
2
2
F
D
E
Hole diameter C
E
Bowl guard
In the interest of safety Spirax Sarco recommend that a bowl Monnier lubricators are used to maintain the proper ratio of oil
guard should be fitted - See the 'Warning' under 'Safety information and air and to maximize the performance and guarantee long life
installation and maintenance'. of pneumatic machinery.
Once the oil rate has been set, a Monnier lubricator provides
reliable automatic lubrication. The Monnier design ensures efficient
and dependable performance.
The Monnier Venturi valve (1) automatically maintains the ratio

of oil to air that the user selects. It assures lubrication even
at the lowest possible air flow (see Capacities on page 3). By
automatically increasing the air pressure behind the oil in the
main reservoir (2) in proportion to the increased air flow, the
Venturi valve provides the desired degree of lubrication
regardless of air flowrate.
The Monnier sight dome (3) is moulded from transparent

polycarbonate that can be viewed at a full 360°. It includes an
adjustment screw (4) for setting the oil rate, and a sight-feed
tube (5) where the oil can be visually measured, drop by drop.
As standard, each lubricator is supplied with a " diameter

tamper-proof ball (6) that may be pressed or tapped into the top
of the sight dome adjustment area after the oil rate has been set.
This prevents any further adjustment by unauthorized personnel.
TI-P504-03 CH Issue 3 ML3M Monnier Miniature Compressed Air Lubricator Page 2 of 4

Lubricators 5
Capacities
Minimum flowrate scfm

Pressure bar
Pressure psi

Minimum flowrate dm3/s
Air flow scfm

5.3

3

Pressure drop bar
Pressure drop psi

Air flow dm3/s

Warning:
Polycarbonate bowls are attacked by phosphate ester fluids, solvents, paint thinners and carbon tetrachloride. These and similar
substances should never be allowed to come into contact with the bowl. Certain compressor lubricating oils also contain additives harmful
to polycarbonate and, where there is any doubt, we recommend, in the interest of safety that a bowl guard be fitted.
Lubricant:
The oil used must be compatible with the equipment being served by the lubricator, and with the materials of construction of the lubricator
itself.
Installation note:
Fit into a horizontal pipeline with the air flow in the direction of the arrow, and bowl vertically downwards. The lubricator should be fitted
as close as possible to the unit it is serving. A Monnier MF2M filter should be fitted upstream to prevent any contaminants reaching the
system to be lubricated.
How to order
Example: 1 off ML3M Monnier miniature compressed air lubricator having ¼" screwed BSP connections.
Note: If any optional extras are required, they must be clearly specified on the order.

5 Lubricators
Spare parts
supplied as spares.
Available spares C
Bowl assembly A, B
Sight dome assembly C, D, E
Bowl guard assembly (optional extra) X, Y
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column D
Example: 1 off Bowl assembly for a ¼" ML3M Monnier miniature E
compresed air lubricator.
5.3
4
A

Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Lubricators 5
TI-P504-15
CH Issue 3
IL1M International Symbol
Monnier
International Compressed Air Lubricator
Description
The IL1M Monnier international compressed air lubricator injects
oil at a controlled rate into compressed air for the lubrication of
pneumatic equipment.
Principal features:
- Once set, compensates for varying air flowrates.
- Oil injected to give maximum atomisation.
- Operates over a wide range of pressures and flowrates.
- Easy sensitive adjustment.
- Tamper-proof feature; prevents unauthorised adjustment.
- Polycarbonate or metal bowl.
- Easy fit metal bowl guard available.
- Internal and external black anodised finish.
- Metal bowl, option of sight level.
Tamper-proof feature 5.3
As standard, each lubricator is supplied with a " diameter tamper-
proof ball that may be pressed or tapped into the top of the sight 5
dome adjustment area after the oil rate has been set (See 'Principle
of operation', page 3). This prevents any further adjustment by
unauthorized personnel.
Optional extras
see page 2:
- Metal bowl.
- Stainless steel bowl guard.

Operating limits
Metal bowl 17 bar g
Metal bowl 70°C
Materials
Part Material
Head Aluminium
Bowl Polycarbonate or Aluminium (Epoxy coated)
Seal Nitrile rubber
Capacity valve Acetal
Bowl guard Stainless steel
(optional extra)
Page 1 of 4
5 Lubricators
Optional extras Dimensions, capacity and weight

Metal bowl (approximate) in mm, ml and kg
with sight level Polycarbonate bowl
Bowl Weight
A B C E E1 F capacity Poly With bowl
bowl guard
43 138 64 30 82 16 150 0.432 0.508
C
F
Bowl guard
In the interest of safety Spirax Sarco recommend that a bowl guard
should be fitted to polycarbonate bowls - see the 'Warning' under
'Safety information, installation and maintenance'.
B Polycarbonate bowl
5.3
6
Withdrawal distance: E Without bowl guard
E1 With bowl guard
Metal bowl
Bowl
A B C E F capacity Weight
Capacities - For all sizes 43 138 64 30 16 0.150 0.593
Air flow scfm

C
F
A
Pressure drop bar
Pressure drop psi
Air flow dm3 /s

¼" Maximum recommended flow
" Maximum recommended flow
½" Maximum recommended flow Withdrawal distance E
TI-P504-15 CH Issue 3 IL1M Monnier International Compressed Air Lubricator Page 2 of 4

Lubricators 5
Monnier lubricators are used to maintain the proper ratio of oil Tamper-proof " diameter ball
and air and to maximize the performance and guarantee long life
6
of pneumatic machinery.
Once the oil rate has been set, a Monnier lubricator provides
reliable automatic lubrication. The Monnier design ensures efficient 6
and dependable performance.
4
The Monnier Venturi valve (1) automatically maintains the ratio of
oil to air that the user selects. It assures lubrication even at the 3
lowest possible air flow (see Capacities on page 2). By
automatically increasing the air pressure behind the oil in the
main reservoir (2) in proportion to the increased air flow, the 5
Venturi valve provides the desired degree of lubrication
regardless of air flowrate.
The Monnier sight dome (3) is moulded from transparent
polycarbonate that can be viewed at a full 360°. It includes an
adjustment screw (4) for setting the oil rate, and a sight-feed
tube (5) where the oil can be visually measured, drop by drop. 1
As standard, each lubricator is supplied with a " diameter
tamper-proof ball (6) that may be pressed or tapped into the top
of the sight dome adjustment area after the oil rate has been set.
This prevents any further adjustment by unauthorized personnel.
The automatic air control valve allows you to fill the oil reservoir
(2) while the unit is pressurised and without shutting down.

5.3
Warning: 2 7
Polycarbonate bowls are attacked by phosphate ester fluids, paint
thinners and carbon tetrachloride. These and similar substances
should never be allowed to come into contact with the bowl. Certain
compressor lubricating oils also contain additives harmful to
polycarbonate and, where there is any doubt, we recommend, in
the interest of safety that a metal bowl or bowl guard be fitted.
Lubricant:
The oil used must be compatible with the equipment being served
by the lubricator and with the materials of construction of the
lubricator itself. Generally the oil will be of the free fogging type in
the viscosity rang of 7.5 to 64 centistokes (45 to 280 seconds
Redwood No. 1) at 38°F.
Installation note:
arrow and bowl vertically downwards. The lubricator should be
fitted as close as possible to the unit it is serving. A Monnier
international filter (MF2M) should be fitted upstream to prevent
any contaminants reaching the system to be lubricated.
How to order
Example: 1 off IL1M Monnier international compressed air
lubricator having a female ½" screwed BSP (BS 21 - Rp)
connection.
Note 1: The product will be supplied with a polycarbonate bowl
as standard. If a metal bowl is required (with or without sight level)
it must be clearly specified on the order.

5 Lubricators
Spare parts
supplied as spares.
Available spares C
Bowl assembly A, B
Sight dome and filler plug assembly C, D
How to order spares D
Example: 1 off Polycarbonate bowl assembly for a ½" IL1M
Monnier international compressed air lubricator.
5.3
8

Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Filter/regulators 5
TI-P504-05
CH Issue 2
MP2M and MPN2M International Symbol
Monnier Miniature
Compressed Air Filter / Regulators
Description
The Monnier miniature compressed air filter / regulators provide
high quality compressed air, with accurate pressure control, for
general purpose pneumatic systems where space is restricted and
flowrates are low.
Principal features:
- Compact combined miniature filter / regulator.
- Long life 5 µm element.
- Improved moisture separation with multi-bladed whirl disc.
- Fast response.
- Good flow and regulation characteristics.
Available types:
MP2M Self-relieving 5.4
MPN2M Non-relieving
Optional extras MP2M 1

For further technical information regarding the following options, shown with optional
see page 2: pressure gauge
- Airset kit.

A B C E E1 Weight
67 156 38 25 45 0.2
A Spring range (operating pressure range)

All regulators can be adjusted to zero pressure, or up to the
0.2 - 2.0 bar g
Optional spring
0.3 - 4.0 bar g
B
Note: The MP2M will be supplied with the standard spring unless
Operating limits
Materials
Part Material
Body Aluminium and polycarbonate
Valve Nitrile rubber
Bowl Polycarbonate
Withdrawal distance: E Without bowl guard
E1 With bowl guard Element (5 µm) Sintered polypropylene
Bowl guard (optional extra) Stainless steel
Page 1 of 4
5 Filter/regulators

Airsets - The MP2M, MPN2M regulators are also available as With system pressure on, the regulator poppet valve assembly
airsets consisting of Type 8 bracket, mounting ring and pressure is in the closed position when the adjusting knob is turned fully
gauge (see options below). counter clockwise (no spring load). By turning the adjusting knob
clockwise, the diaphragm / piston moves downward allowing
Type 8 mounting bracket and mounting ring filtered air to flow in through the orifice created between the poppet
The filter / regulator can be mounted using a zinc plated mild steel assembly and seat. The control diaphragm / piston offsetting the
bracket and aluminium mounting ring (not shown). Both items must load spring senses pressure downstream. Increasing downstream
be specified when placing an order. pressure causes the poppet assembly to move upward until the
load of the spring and diaphragm / piston are balanced. The outlet
Dimensions (approximate) in millimetres pressure has now been reduced. If a valve is opened downstream,
the increased demand for pressure creates a reduced pressure
12.7 12.7 under the control diaphragm / piston. The poppet assembly moves
38
5 downward due to the load of the control spring opening the seat
area and air is allowed to meet the downstream pressure demand.
10
29
31
64 51
Pressure gauge
in both bar and psi. Please state, size and pressure range when
placing an order.
Pressure ranges
5.4 0 to 21 bar
0 to 300 psi (2" size only)
2
R "
1½" version 40 mm
2" version 48 mm
1½" version 47 mm
2" version 45 mm
Pressure gauges for panel mounting

With chromium plated bezel available in two ranges, the face being
marked in bar and psi as follows:-
Pressure ranges
A B C D
53 56 48 R
A C
Clamping yoke
Bowl guard
In the interest of safety Spirax Sarco
recommend that a bowl gaurd
should be fitted. See the 'Warning'
under 'Safety information,
installation and maintenance'.
TI-P504-05 CH Issue 2 MP2M and MPN2M Monnier Miniature Compressed Air Filter / Regulators Page 2 of 4
Filter/regulators 5
Capacities
The full lift capacities for safety valve sizing purposes is 0.21 Kvs.

element performance maintains the stated high efficiency levels.
Air flow scfm


5.4
3
Air flow dm3/s
The graph utilises some typical values for secondary flow/pressure to demonstrate droop
Pressure droop
Set point

Warning
Polycarbonate bowls are attacked by phosphate ester fluids, solvents, paint thinners and carbon tetrachloride. These and similar substances
should never be allowed to come into contact with the bowl. Certain compressor lubricating oils also contains additives harmful to polycarbonate
and, where there is any doubt we recommend, in the interests of safety, that a bowl guard be fitted.
Installation note:
Fit in a horizontal pipe, with the bowl vertically downwards, as close as possible to the equipment it is serving. Connect the unit so that the air
flow is in the direction shown by the arrow cast on the body. A pressure guage fitted to one of the ports is recommended (to show the secondary
pressure). The port(s) not in use should be blanked off with the plugs supplied.
Panel mounting:
The panel must not exceed 8 mm thick. The required hole is 31 mm diameter.
How to order
Please state quantity, size and type and any options which are required. Unless otherwise stated, the filter/regulator will be supplied with
the 0.7 - 9.0 bar g control spring and a polycarbonate bowl with drain.
Example:
1 off MP2M Monnier self-relieving miniature compressed air filter / regulator having a 0.2 - 2.0 bar g control spring and ¼" BSP connections.
1 off Bowl guard.
5 Filter/regulators
Spare parts
Available spares
Polycarbonate bowl assembly A, B
Element set 5 micron (packet of 3) B, C
Stainless steel bowl guard and 2 off spring clips (optional extra) X, Y
Panel / bracket mounting ring D
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Element set (5 micron) for a ¼" Monnier MP2M self-relieving miniature compressed air filter / regulator.
D Panel / bracket mounting ring.
5.4 B B
4 Element set (5 micron)
Polycarbonate bowl assembly.
X
Optional extra
Bowl guard - In the interest of
safety Spirax Sarco recommend
that a bowl guard should be
fitted to polycarbonate bowls.
Y
TI-P504-07
CH Issue 2
MPC1M, MPC2M and MPC2AM

Monnier
High Efficiency Compressed Air Filter / Regulators
Descriptions
The MPC_M Monnier range of (self-relieving) high efficiency oil
removing filter / regulators provide very high quality compressed
air, with accurate pressure control, for pneumatic actuators and
general purpose systems.
Principal features:
- Compact miniature oil removing filter / regulator.
- Self-relieving.
- High efficiency - Exceeding 99.95% against D.O.P. tests.
- Efficiency3 testing carried out in accordance with ISO 12500 at
51 mg / m (40 ppm) inlet concentration.
- Oil carryover less than 0.0255 mg / m3 (0.02 ppm). MPC2M
- 100% water removal at line temperature. shown with optional
- Polycarbonate bowl. pressure gauge.
- Particle effiency: 99.96%
- Inlet dry pressure drop: 1.5 psi d.
Available types supplied as standard
5.4
MPC1M ATEX compatible. Metal bowl with manual drain and
tamper-proof cap.
MPC2M Polycarbonate bowl with manual drain.
MPC2AM Metal bowl with autodrain. 5
Applications
The MPC_M is used to provide very high quality compressed air.
There are many applications where compressed air of a particularly
high quality is required. Typical examples include air bearings on Materials
machine tools, air gauging equipment, instrument air supplies, fluidic
systems, breathing air, pneumatic positioners, etc. Part Material
Body Aluminium - anodised
The MPC1M compressed air filter / regulator is ATEX compatible -
Bowl Polycarbonate or aluminium alloy
Directive 94 / 9 / EC (ATEX95) Declaration Bonnet assembly Aluminium
The MPC1M is intended for use in potentially explosive
environments as defined by Equipment Group II Category 2. Filter element Microfibre / stainless steel
• We have determined the MPC1M is a 'simple' mechanical
product. It is therefore not covered by the scope of the Valve Nitrile
ATEX directive and consequently does not need to carry
any marking. Dimensions (approximate) in mm and kg
As part of our conformity assesment, an ignition hazard analysis
to EN 13463-1 was conducted with the following outcome: Unit Size A B C E E1 Weight
• We have determined the MPC1M does not have its own MPC1M ¼" 75 167 38 25 - 0.2
effective sources of ignition - even in the event of rare
failures. MPC2M ¼" 67 156 38 25 45 0.2
Note: As defined by the European ATEX Standing MPC2AM ¼" 75 167 38 25 - 0.2
Committee... "Electrostatic charges caused by the flow-
through of a medium are not considered as "own" ignition
source in the sense of Directive 94 / 9 / EC." C
The MPC1M may be used in a potentially explosive
environment, as defined by Equipment Group II
Category 2, when used in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h i t s
Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-P504-08). A

¼" screwed BSP (BS 21-Rp, ISO 7).
All regulators can be adjusted to zero pressure, or above the B
0.2 - 2.0 bar g
Optional spring
0.3 - 4.0 bar g
Note: The MPC_M will be supplied with the standard spring unless
Operating limits
Maximum Polycarbonate bowl 10 bar g @ 50°C Withdrawal distance: E Without bowl guard
E1 With bowl guard
pressure / temperature Metal bowl 17 bar g @ 80°C
Page 1 of 4
5 Filter/regulators
Optional extras
Airsets
The MPC2M, MP2AM filter / regulators are also available as airsets,
consisting of Type 8 or FK21 bracket, mounting ring and pressure
gauge (see the 'MPC_M optional extras' table below).
MPC optional extras - Selection table

S = Supplied as standard OE = optional extra = not available
Feature MPC1M MPC2M MPC2AM

Polycarbonate Without drain OE
bowl With manual drain S
Bowl guard OE
Metal bowl With manual drain S OE
(no sight glass) With autodrain S
Tamper-proof
cap With locking seal S OE OE
50 mm Ø OE OE
Pressure gauge
40 mm Ø S OE OE
Type 8 mounting bracket OE OE
FK21 fixing kit S OE OE
Aluminium mounting ring S OE OE
Note: A tamper-proof cap with locking seal is recommended

as an optional extra for MPC2M and MPC2AM airsets.
Tamper-proof cap Ø37

(Standard on MPC1M)
5.4
Dimensions
6 (approximate) in millimetres 51
Type 8 mounting bracket and mounting ring

For general installation.
The filter / regulator can be mounted using this zinc plated mild steel
bracket and aluminium mounting ring. Both items must be specified
when placing an order.
12.7 12.7
38
5
10
29
31
64 51 Optional pressure gauge (Not for MPC2AM)

Available in two sizes (1½" and 2"), with 3 pressure ranges. The
face is marked in both bar and psi. Please state, size and pressure
range when placing an order.
FK21 fixing kit
The FK21 fixing kit is required to mount the MPC_M onto the 0 to 2 bar 0 to 30 psi
Spirax Sarco range of PN pneumatic actuators. The aluminium Pressure ranges 0 to 7 bar 0 to 100 psi
mounting ring must also be specified.
Dimensions (approximate) in millimetres Dimensions (approximate) in millimetres
30.5 Ø8.2
R "
6
4 50
8
40 2
10
bar 1½" version 40 mm
0 0 2" version 48 mm
32 1½" version 47 mm
2" version 45 mm
61.5
MPC1M, MPC2M, MPC2AM Monnier
TI-P504-07 CH Issue 2 High Efficiency Compressed Air Filter / Regulators Page 2 of 4
Filter/regulators 5
element performance maintains the stated high efficiency levels, particularly for the removal of oli and water contaminants.
Maximum secondary flow at peak performance

Air flow scfm

Secondary bar g
Secondary psi g

Air flow dm3/s
Use of the product in this region may reduce the oil removing efficiency.
5.4
Droop characteristics 7
Air flow scfm

Secondary bar g
Secondary psi g

Air flow dm3/s
Graph utilises some typical values for secondary flow / pressure to demonstrate droop
Pressure droop
Set point

How to order
Please state quantity, size and type and any options which are required. Unless otherwise stated, the filter / regulator will be supplied with
the 0.7 - 9.0 bar g control spring and a polycarbonate bowl with drain.
Example:
1 off ¼" MPC2M Monnier high efficiency compressed air filter / regulator having a 0.3 - 4.0 bar g control spring.
1 off Airset kit for fitting an MPC2M onto a Spirax Sarco PN pneumatic actuator.

5 Filter/regulators
Spare parts
Available spares
Polycarbonate bowl / metal bowl / drain assembly (specify with or without drain) 1, 2
Element and 'O' ring set 2, 3
Bowl guard assembly (optional extra) 4, 5
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Element and 'O' ring set for a ¼" MPC2M Monnier high efficiency compressed air filter / regulator.
5.4 2 2
8
Element and 'O' ring set
Polycarbonate bowl /
metal bowl / drain assembly
(specify manual, autodrain or
without a drain).
3
Optional extra
5 Bowl guard (MPC2M only).
In the interest of safety
Spirax Sarco recommend that
4 a bowl guard should be fitted
to polycarbonate bowls.

TI-P504-17
CH Issue 2
IP2M, IP2AM and IP2DM

Monnier
International Compressed Air Filter / Regulators
Description
The IP_M range of Monnier international compressed air filter/
regulators provide high quality compressed air with accurate
pressure control for general purpose pneumatic systems.
Principal features:
- Internal and external black anodised finish.
- Compact combined filter / regulator.
- Shrouded whirl disc for efficient separation.
- Option of sight level on metal bowled units.
- 5 micron large surface area element.
- Good flow and regulation characteristics.
- Easy fit stainless steel bowl guard available.
Available types:
IP2AM Having a pilot operated automatic drain.
IP2DM
IP2M
Having a semi-auto dump valve.
Having a manual drain (metal bowl only).
5.4
Note: The IP2_M Monnier range are supplied self-relieving as
standard (the non-relieving version is available on request).
9
Optional extras
see page 2:
- Tamper-proof cap.
- Type 21 mounting bracket.
- Pressure gauges.
- Discharge tube adaptor - IP2AM only.
- Metal bowl.
- Bowl guard.

All regulators can be adjusted to zero pressure, or above the
Standard spring 0.5 - 10 bar g
Optional spring 0.2 - 3.5 bar g
Note: The IP2_M Monnier range will be supplied with the standard
spring unless an alternative option has been specified when
placing an order.
Operating limits
Maximum Polycarbonate bowl 10 bar g
working pressure Metal bowl 17 bar g
Maximum Metal bowl 80°C
working temperature
Metal bowl with sight level 70°C
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Body Machined aluminium (anodised)
2 Valve Brass rubber faced
3 Bowl Polycarbonate or aluminium (anodised)
4 Element (5 µm) Melamine impregnated cellulose
5 Diaphragm Reinforced nitrile rubber
Page 1 of 6
5 Filter/regulators
Optional extras
Tamper-proof cap Pressure gauges for panel mounting
An aluminium tamper-proof cap can be fitted to prevent unauthorised With chromium plated bezel available in two ranges, the face being
pressure adjustment. marked in bar and psi as follows:-
Dimensions (approximate) in mm 0 to 2 bar 0 to 30 psi
Pressure ranges
53 0 to 11 bar 0 to 160 psi
A B C D
53 56 48 R
54
D
Type 21 mounting bracket
A plated mild steel bracket which can be attached to the filter /
regulator by the plastic mounting ring supplied. A C
Note: An aluminium mounting ring can be supplied at extra cost, and
must be specified, if required, on order placement.
Dimensions (approximate) in mm Clamping yoke
A B C D E
44 19 32 12 6
If the regulator is to be panel mounted a hole is required in the panel Discharge tube adaptor IP2AM only
48 mm diameter, and the panel thickness must not exceed 8 mm. An adaptor can be supplied for the auto-drain on the IP2AM models,
to accept 8 mm O/D copper or plastic tube.
D
5.4 E
10 B
A
Metal bowl
with sight level
Mounting ring
Pressure gauge
in both bar and psi. Please state, size and pressure range when
placing an order.
Pressure ranges
0 to 20 bar 0 to 300 psi (2" size only)
Bowl guard
Dimensions (approximate) in mm In the interest of safety Spirax Sarco recommend that a bowl guard
should be fitted to polycarbonate bowls - see the 'Warning'
Size A B C under 'Safety information, installation and maintenance' page 5.
1½" 40 47 R "
2" 49 45 R "
TI-P504-17 CH Issue 2 IP2, IP2A and IP2D Spirax-Monnier International Compressed Air Filter / Regulators Page 2 of 6
Filter/regulators 5
Dimensions
Dimensions
/weights
/weights
(approximate)
(approximate)
in mm
in and
mm kg
and kg
Polycarbonate
Polycarbonate
bowlbowl
C C
Weights
Weights
Unit Unit A A B B C C E E E1 E1 IP_MIP_M IP_MIP_M
+ +
bowlbowl
guard
guard
IP2AM
IP2AM
95 95 165 165 64 64 39 39 82 82 0.7300.730 0.8080.808
IP2DM
IP2DM
95 95 165 165 64 64 39 39 79 79 0.7300.730 0.8080.808
A A
B B
E Without
E Without
bowl bowl
5.4
guardguard
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
distance:
distance:
E1 With
E1 With
bowl bowl
guardguard
11
MetalMetal
bowlbowl
C C
Unit Unit A A B B C C E E Weight
Weight
IP2MIP2M 82 82 143 143 76 76 39 39 0.9130.913
IP2AM
IP2AM
82 82 152 152 76 76 39 39 0.9130.913
IP2DM
IP2DM
82 82 145 145 76 76 39 39 0.9130.913
A A
B B
Withdrawal
Withdrawal
distance E E
distance
TI-P504-17
TI-P504-17
CH Issue
CH Issue
2 IP2,
2 IP2,
IP2AIP2A
and and
IP2DIP2D
Spirax-Monnier
Spirax-Monnier
International
International
Compressed
Compressed
Air Filter
Air Filter
/ Regulators
/ Regulators
PagePage
3 of 6
3 of 6
5 Filter/regulators
Capacities
With primary pressure 10 bar and 5 μm element
¼"
Air flow scfm



8.0 bar g (116 psi g)

Air flow dm3/s
"
Air flow scfm

5.4
12


8.0 bar g (116 psi g)

Air flow dm3/s
½"
Air flow scfm




8.0 bar g (116 psi g)

Air flow dm3/s
Filter/regulators 5
Principle of operation IP2DM
With system pressure on, the regulator poppet valve assembly is
in the closed position when the adjusting knob is turned fully
counter clockwise (no spring load). By turning the adjusting knob
clockwise, the diaphragm / piston moves downward allowing filtered
air to flow in through the orifice created between the poppet Adjustment knob
assembly and seat.
Auto-drain - IP2AM
The Monnier internal auto-drain is a pilot operated unit. As the
water level in the bowl rises, the float (13) lifts, allowing line
pressure to act on a piston, which opens the main discharge valve.
As the liquid level falls, the float closes and line pressure shuts
the main valve. Under zero pressure conditions, the automatic
drain will be in the open position, allowing any liquid to drain away.
Automatic dump valve - IP2DM
This is a spring loaded valve which will allow the filter / regulator
to automatically drain when the pressure in the bowl drops
below 0.06 bar (i.e. when air to the plant is shut off).
The units can also be drained manually by pushing the protrouding
valve stem sideways or upwards.

Warning:
Polycarbonate bowls and sight levels on metal bowls can be
attacked by phosphate ester fluids, solvents, paint thinners and
carbon tetrachloride. These and similar substances should never
be allowed to come into contact with the bowl. Certain compressor
lubricating oils also contain additives harmfull to polycarbonate
and where there is any doubt we recommend, in the interests of 5.4
safety that a metal bowl or bowl guard should be fitted.
Installation note:
13
Fit into a horizontal pipeline, with the bowl vertically downwards,
as close as possible to the equipment it is serving. Connect the
unit so that the air flow is in the direction shown by the arrow cast
on the body. A pressure guage fitted to one of the ports is
recommended (to show the secondary pressure). The port(s) not
in use should be blanked off with the plugs supplied (P).
How to order
Example: 1 off IP2AM Monnier international compressed air filter
/ regulator having a female ½" screwed BSP (BS 21 - Rp)
connection.
Note 1: Unless otherwise instructed, the filter / regulator will be
supplied with a polycarbonate bowl, 0.5 to 10 bar control spring,
5 μm element and polycarbonate bowl as standard. If a metal bowl
is required (with or without sight level) it must be clearly specified
on the order. The IP2M manual drain is available with metal bowl
only.
IP2M
(having a metal bowl)
13
IP2AM
5 Filter/regulators
Spare parts
Available spares
Pressure control spring set - State pressure range E
Valve and diaphragm assembly F, G
Polycarbonate bowl assembly including appropriate drain A, B
Metal bowl (with or without sight level) B, D
Element set (packet of 3 of each) B, C, (IP2M, IP2AM and IP2DM only)
Auto-drain (IP2AM only) H
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares'
and state the size and type of unit.
Example: 1 off Pressure control spring set (0.5 - 10 bar) for a ½" IP2M Monnier international
compressed air filter / regulator.
IP2DM Metal bowl with sight level

for IP2M, IP2AM and IP2DM
E D
5.4 G
F
14
C
Isolation valves, drain traps and ancillaries

TI-P610-05
CMGT Issue 11
Airodyn
Compressed Air Drain Trap
Description
The Airodyn is a thermodynamic type compressed air drain 5.5
trap. The external body surfaces are electroless nickel plated
(ENP) which is oxidation resistant. 1
Operating media
The Airodyn is designed for use on air or gases within PED
group 2.
Note: The Airodyn is not suitable for use on PED group 1 liquids
or gases.
Optionally
Airodyn S The Airodyn S has been designed for ultra clean applications. This trap has a fine lap disc (item 3).
Airodyn HD The Airodyn HD has been designed for particularly oil contaminated air systems.
Standards
This product fully complies with the requirements of the EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment (Safety) Regulations.
Certification

½" screwed BSP or NPT
Airodyn Airodyn HD ½" screwed BSP
¾" screwed NPT
CMGT Issue 11
Airodyn Compressed Air Drain Trap
5 Isolation valves, drain traps and ancillaries

Temperature °C

Pressure bar g
PMO Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service 63 bar g @ 120°C
Maximum backpressure should not exceed 80% of the inlet pressure under any conditions of operation other wise the
PMOB
trap may not shut-off.
Minimum operating differential pressure for satisfactory operation 0.25 bar

5.5
2
CMGT Issue 11
Isolation valves, drain traps and ancillaries 5
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Body Stainless steel ASTM A743 Gr. CA40F

5.5
2 Cap Stainless steel AISI 416 3
3 Disc Stainless steel BS 1449 420 S45
4 Strainer screen Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
5 Strainer cap Stainless steel AISI 416
6 Strainer cap gasket Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
CMGT Issue 11
Size A B E G H Weight
½" 41 78 55 85 20 0.77
¾" 44 85 60 100 20 0.95
Withdrawal distance for cap Capacities

B
H

A
Condensate kg/h

E G

Withdrawal distance for strainer

Differential pressure bar (x 100 = kPa)
Kv values
5.5
Size ½" ¾" For conversion:
4 Kv 3.09 3.09
C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156

Installation note:
Preferably fitted in a horizontal pipe but can be fitted in vertically downwards pipe.
Operation
One side of the disc (3) is plain with a single scribe towards the outer edge, whereas the other side of the disc has a machined circular groove.
The Airodyn is supplied with the circular grooved side of the disc towards the seating face and is suitable for clean operating conditions with
the exception of the 'HD' version which has been designed for particularly contaminated air system having the scribed disc facing the seat.
If the operation conditions are dirty, probably with heavy oil contamination, unscrew the cap, using preferably a ring spanner and turn over
the disc so that the plain side with a bleed scribe is towards the seating face. Replace cap - no gasket is required but a suitable high temperature
anti-sieze grease should be applied to the threads.
Tighten the cap to the recommended torque. Do not use a wrench of the Stillson type which may distort the cap.
In extremely dirty conditions it may be necessary to deepen the bleed scribe or to make additional scribes up to
a maximum of 3 thus.
The scribe should be over the area covered by and extending beyond the outer seat face.
Disposal
The product is recyclable. No ecological hazard is anticipated with disposal of this product providing due care is taken.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco ½" screwed BSP Airodyn compressed air drain trap.
CMGT Issue 11
Spare parts
Available spares
2
Disc (packet of 3) 3
Strainer screen and gasket 4, 6
Strainer cap gasket (packet of 3) 6

3
How to order spares
Always order spares by using the desciption given in the column
headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of trap.
Example: 1 - Strainer screen for a Spirax Sarco ½" Airodyn

compressed air drain trap.
4
6 5.5
or
5
Item Part Nm
mm
2 Cap 36 A/G 150

5
5 Strainer cap 32 A/F M28 170 -190
CMGT Issue 11
5.5
6
Isolation
Local regulations may restrict the use valves,
of this product to below drain
the conditions quoted. traps and ancillaries
5
TI-P610-10
ST Issue 7
BRoil
Description
The BRoil is a maintainable thermodynamic type compressed air
drain trap, specifically designed to remove small quantities of oil
contaminated condensate, for use on railway rolling stock. 2
3
Standards
This product fully complies with the requirements of the European
Pressure Equipment Directive 97 / 23 / EC.
Certification 1

½" screwed BSP or NPT.
Optional extras
The silencer, complete with elbow and reducer is available as an BRoil air trap 5.5
7
optional extra.

Temperature °C

Pressure bar g
The product must not be used in this region. 4

TMA Maximum allowable temperature 400°C
PMO Maximum operating pressure 63 bar g BRoil air trap
TMO Maximum operating temperature 400°C complete with optional silencer
(British Rail Cat. No 15 / 07220)
Maximum backpressure should not exceed 80% of the
PMOB inlet pressure under any conditions of operation otherwise
the trap may not shut-off.
5
DPMN Minimum operating differential pressure
for satisfactory operation 0.25 bar
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of 95 bar g 6
Kv values Materials
Size ½" No. Part Material
Kv 0.25 1 Body Stainless steel AISI 420 F
For conversion: Cv (UK) = Kv x 0.963 Cv (US) = Kv x 1.156 2 Cap Stainless steel AISI 416
4 Elbow Malleable iron
Part nos. 4, 5 and 6
5 Reducer and gasket Brass
are optional extras
6 Silencer Brass
Dimensions /weights (approximate) in mm and kg Spare parts

Weight The spares parts available are shown in heavy outline. Parts drawn
Size A B C D E F (without silencer) (silencer included) in broken line are not supplied as spares.
½" 38 65 15 56 109 40 0.47 0.63 Available spares
Disc (packet of 3) 3
Withdrawal How to order spares
distance Always order spares by using the description given in the column
for cap
E
Example: 1 - Packet of 3 discs for a Spirax Sarco ½" BRoil
F B compressed air drain trap screwed BSP.
D BRoil air trap with silencer
3
Diamond scribed disc
5.5
8 Capacities
800
700
600
500
400
Condensate kg / h
300
200
100
90
80
70
0.1 0.20.3 0.5 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 63 Recommended tightening torques
Differential pressure bar (x 100 = kPa) Item A /F mm Nm
2 36 135 - 150
5 24 30 - 40
6 11 5-8
(IM-S48-06) supplied with the product.
Installation note:
The trap is designed to be installed horizontally. Check the flow
direction arrow for the correct orientation.
Disposal
The product is recyclable no ecological hazard is anitcipated with
the disposal of this product, providing due care is taken.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco ½" BRoil compressed air drain trap
screwed BSP complete with optional elbow and silencer.
TI-P610-10 ST Issue 7 BRoil Compressed Air Drain Trap

Isolation
Local regulations may restrict the use valves,
of this product to below drain
the conditions quoted. traps and ancillaries
5
TI-P610-03
ST Issue 5
BRair
Description
The BRair is a thermodynamic type compressed air drain trap,
specifically for use on railway rolling stock (British Rail Cat. no.
61/41955). The external body surfaces have electroless nickel 3
preparation (ENP) which is oxidation resistant.
2
Standards
This product fully complies with the requirements of the European
Pressure Equipment Directive 97 / 23 / EC.
1
Certification
This product is available with a manufacturer’s Typical Test Report
for the body and cap as standard and EN 10204 3.1 if specified at

½" screwed NPT, BSP and ISO 228-1. 4 5.5
400 9
Temperature °C
300
200
100 6
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 63
Pressure bar g 5
This product must not be used in this region.

PMO Maximum operating pressure 63 bar g
Maximum backpressure should not exceed 80% of the
PMOB inlet pressure under any conditions of operation otherwise
the trap may not shut-off.
Minimum operating differential pressure
DPMN 0.25 bar
for satisfactory operation
Material
No. Part Material
1 Body Stainless steel ASTM A743 Gr. CA40F
2 Cap Stainless steel AISI 416
4 Strainer screen Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
5 Strainer cap Stainless steel AISI 416
6 Strainer cap gasket Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
Capacities Spare parts

1 000 The spare parts available are shown in heavy outline. Parts drawn
800 in broken line are not supplied as spares.
600 Available spares

500 Disc (packet of 3) 3
400 Strainer screen and gasket 4, 6
300 Strainer cap gasket (packet of 3) 6
Condensate kg / h

Always order spares by using the desciption given in the column
Example: 1 - Strainer screen for a Spirax Sarco ½" Brair compressed
100 air drain trap.
80
60
50 2
40
0.25 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 63
Kv values
3
Size ½"
Kv 3.09
For conversion: Cv (UK) = Kv x 0.963 Cv (US) = Kv x 1.156

5.5 Size A B E G H Weight
½" 41 78 55 85 41 0.77
10 Withdrawal distance for cap
B
H
6
E G
Withdrawal distance for strainer 5

(IM-S48-06) supplied with the product.
Installation note:
Preferably fitted in a horizontal plane with the cover at the top but or
can be fitted in vertically downwards pipe. Item Nm
mm
Disposal 2 36 150
The product is recyclable. No ecological hazard is anticipated with
disposal of this product providing due care is taken. 5 32 M28 170 - 190
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco ½" BRair compressed air drain trap
having screwed BSP connections.
TI-P610-03 ST Issue 5 BRair Compressed Air Drain Trap


TI-P148-15
CMGT Issue 5
CA10S
Air and Gas Trap
Description ½" Tapping for balance pipe
The CA10S is a float type automatic liquid drain trap for air and
gas systems. It has a cast iron body and cover with stainless steel
valve head for use on high temperature or where corrosive
condensate would adversely affect a rubber valve.
4
Certification
The product is available with material certification to EN 10204
2.2 for body and cover as standard. 1

¾" screwed BSP (BS 21 parallel) or NPT.
A ½" tapping is provided for a balance pipe.
Optional extras
Drain cock tapping: The cover can be drilled and tapped 3/8"
BSP or NPT to enable a drain cock to be fitted.
5.5
11
220
200
Temperature °C
150
8 11 9 7 3 12 5 6 10 2
100 Material
50 No.Part Material
0 1 Body Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 20
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Pressure bar g
2 Cover bolts Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8.8
The product must not be used in this region. 3 Cover gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
4 Cover Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 20

7 Pivot frame assembly Stainless steel BS 6102 Gr. A2
TMO Maximum operating temperature 220 °C set screws Class 50
∆PMX Maximum differential pressure 14 bar 8 Ball float and lever Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of 24 bar g 9 Pin Stainless steel B 970 431 529
10 Support frame Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16

∆PMX Maximum differential pressure
11 Pivot frame Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
Depending on the specific gravity of the liquid being drained.
12* Valve cone Stainless steel
Specific gravity 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
*Note: The valve cone of the CA10S is permanently attached to
∆PMX bar 14.0 13.8 11.7 8.6 5.0
the ball float and lever.
Page 1 of 3
Capacities Dimensions/weight
Size A B C D E F G Weight
¾" 60 111 77 195 165 217 50 6.8

Condensate kg/h
D A

G
B

C

Differential pressure bar (x 100 = kPa) F E Withdrawal distance
Pressure
Before attempting any maintenance of the trap, consider what is or may have been in the pipeline. Ensure that any pressure is isolated
upstream and downstream of the trap and safely vented to atmospheric pressure before attempting to maintain the trap. This is easily
achieved by fitting Spirax Sarco depressurisation valves type DV (see separate literature for details). Do not assume that the system
5.5 is depressurised even when a pressure gauge indicates zero.
12 Temperature
Allow time for temperature to normalise after isolation to avoid the danger of burns and consider whether protective clothing (including
safety glasses) is required.
Installation
The air and gas trap must always be fitted with the inlet at the top so that the float mechanism is rising and falling in a vertical plane.
The high point of the cover is provided with ½" tapping for a balance pipe which is essential for satisfactory operation. From the tapping
provided at the high point of the cover a balance pipe having a continuous rise must be fitted and connected into the space being
drained.
Maintenance
How to fit the main valve assembly
- Isolate, undo cover bolts, remove existing mechanism.
- Using a little jointing paste on the thread and gasket, fit the new valve seat to the body.
- Attach the support frame, and pivot frame to the body with assembly set screws, but do not tighten.
- Fit the float arm to the pivot frame using the pin and by moving the complete assembly centre the valve head onto the seat orifice.
- Hold the assembly firmly in place and tighten up set screws to the recommended tightening torque.
- Check operation by raising and lowering the float several times making sure that the valve head is centring properly on the seat.
- Make sure all joint faces are clean, apply a thin coating of jointing paste to seat threads.
- Tighten cover bolts uniformly to the recommended tightening torque. Open up isolating valve slowly.
Disposal
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco ¾" screwed BSP CA10S drain trap with cast iron body and cover.
CMGT Issue 5
CA10S Air and Gas Trap
Spare parts
The spare parts available are shown in solid outline. Parts drawn in grey line are not supplied as spares.
Available spares
Main valve assembly with float 5, 6, 7, 8 + 12, 14, 15, 16
Gasket set (packet of 3 sets) 3, 6
How to order spares

Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of trap.
Example: 1 off main valve assembly for ¾" Spirax Sarco CA10S air and gas trap.
5.5
13
2 3 6 5 9 10 11 7 8 + 12
Main valve assembly with float
or
Item Nm
mm
2 17 M10 x 30 29 - 32
5 17 M12 x 8 50 - 55
7 Cheesehead M5 x 20 2.5 - 2.8
CMGT Issue 5
CA10S Air and Gas Trap
5.5
14

TI-P148-12
CMGT Issue 9
CA14
SG Iron
Air and Gas Trap ½" and ¾" (Screwed)
9 4 3 1 2
Description
The CA14 is a range of float type automatic liquid drainers for air
and gas systems. The body and cover are of SG iron and the
complete unit is readily maintainable.
The standard version with a Viton valve cone is designated CA14.
A stainless steel valve cone version is designated CA14S.
Operating media
The CA14 is designed for use on air or gases within PED group 2.
Note: The CA14 is not suitable for use on PED group 1 liquids or
gases.
5.5
Standards
The product fully complies with the requirements of the EU Pressure 15
Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment (Safety) Regulations.
Certification
The product is available with material certification to EN 10204 2.2.
Note: All certification/inspection requirements must be stated at
11 5 10 7 6 8
½" and ¾" screwed BSP or NPT.
Material
No. Part Material
1 Body SG iron EN-GJS-400-15
2 Cover bolt Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8.8
3 Cover gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
4 Cover SG iron EN-GJS-400-15
CA14 Synthetic rubber Viton

5 Main valve cone
CA14S Stainless steel AISI 440B
7 Main valve seat gasket Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S11
8 Main valve assembly screws Stainless steel BS 6105 Cl A270
9 Ball float and lever Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
11 Pivot pin Stainless steel
CMGT Issue 9
CA14 SG Iron Air and Gas Trap ½" and ¾" (Screwed)

B F
Temperature °C

A J

C

Pressure bar g

A-J-C CA14 screwed BSP or NPT.
B-F-C CA14S screwed BSP or NPT.
CA14 200 °C @ 14.7 bar g

TMO Maximum operating temperature:
CA14S 250 °C @ 13.9 bar g
5.5 ∆PMX Maximum differential pressure bar, depending on the specific gravity of the liquid being drained:
16
Specific gravity 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 Min. 0.6
∆PMX bar 14.0 14.0 14.0 9.0 5.0
∆PMN Minimum differential pressure 0.1 bar
Capacities

Condensate kg/h

CMGT Issue 9
Dimensions (approximate) in mm and kg
A
C
B E Withdrawal distance
½" 147 114 80 114 105 60.5 2.5
¾" 147 114 80 114 105 60.5 2.5
Safety information, Installation and Maintenance

For full details see the Installation and Maintanence Instructions (IM-P144-02) supplied with the product.
5.5
Installation note:
The CA14 must be installed with the direction of flow as indicated on the body, and with the float arm in a horizontal plain so that it rises
17
and falls vertically.
Disposal
If a product which contains a Viton component has been subjected to a temperature approaching 315 °C or higher, then it may have
decomposed and formed hydrofluoric acid. Avoid skin contact and inhalation of any fumes as the acid will cause deep skin burns and
damage to the respiratory system. Viton must be disposed of in a recognised manner as stated in the Installation and Maintenance
Instructions. No other ecological hazard is anticipated with the disposal of this product providing due care is taken.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco ½" CA14 having screwed BSP connections with SG iron body and cover.
CMGT Issue 9
Spare parts
Available spares
CA14 3, 5+9, 6, 7, 8 (2 off), 10, 11
Maintenance kit
CA14S 3, 5+9, 6, 7, 8 (2 off), 10, 11
Seal kit CA14 3, 5
How to order spares

Example: 1 off Maintenance kit for a Spirax Sarco ½" CA14 air and gas trap.
5.5
2
18 Not an available spare
7
6
10
11
58
or
Item Nm
mm
2 17 A/F M10 x 30 47 - 50
6 17 A/F 50 - 55
8 Pozidrive M4 x 6 2.5 - 3.0
CMGT Issue 9

TI-P148-36
CMGT Issue 6
CA14
SG Iron
Air and Gas Trap DN15 to DN25 (Flanged)
CA14 (R-L)
DN15 and DN20 shown
5.5
19
DN25 main valve assembly
Description
The CA14 is a range of float type automatic liquid drainers for air and gas systems. The body and cover are of SG iron and the complete
unit is readily maintainable. The cover will be drilled and tapped ½" BSP or NPT for the purpose of fitting a balance line. The standard
version with a Viton valve cone is designated CA14 (DN15 and DN20 only). A stainless steel valve cone version is designated CA14S.
Both are available with horizontal flanged connections with flow from right to left CA14 (R-L) or from left to right CA14 (L-R).
Operating Media
The CA14 is designed for use on air or gases within PED group 2.
Note: The CA14 is not suitable for use on PED group 1 liquids or gases.
Standards
The product fully complies with the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED).
Certification
The product is available with a manufacturer's Typical Test Report.

DN15, DN20 and DN25.
Flanged EN 1092 PN16, ASME 150 and JIS/KS 10K.
CMGT Issue 6
CA14 SG Iron Air and Gas Trap DN15 to DN25 (Flanged)
Materials
CA14 (R-L) 9 4 3
DN15 and DN20 shown
6
13 12
1
5 11 10 8 7 DN25 main valve assembly
No. Part Material
1* Body SG iron EN-GJS-400-15, EN 1563, EN JS1030 (GGG 40.3)

5.5 2 Cover bolts Steel BS 3692 Gr. 8.8
20 3 Cover gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
4 Cover SG iron EN-GJS-400-15, EN 1563, EN JS1030 (GGG 40.3)

5 Main valve cone
CA14S Stainless steel AISI 440B
7 Main valve seat gasket Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S11
8 Main valve assembly screws Stainless steel BS 6105 Cl A2-70
12 * Erosion deflector (DN25 only) Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
13 * Valve spring (DN25 only) Stainless steel BS 2056 302 S26
Note: Item 12 is pressed into item 1 (DN25 only).
CMGT Issue 6
B F E C
250
Temperature °C
200
A K H J
150 A-J-D CA14 flanged PN16
100
A-K-G CA14 flanged JIS/KS 10K
50
G D A-H-D CA14 flanged ASME 150
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 B-C-D CA14S flanged PN16
Pressure bar g
B-F-G CA14S flanged JIS/KS 10K
B-E-D CA14S flanged ASME 150
PMO Maximum operating pressure 16 bar g @ 120 °C
CA14 200 °C @ 14.7 bar g

CA14S 250 °C @ 13.9 bar g
ΔPMX Maximum differential pressure bar, depending on the specific gravity of the liquid being drained:

5.5
ΔPMX bar 14.0 14.0 14.0 9.0 5.0 21
ΔPMX Minimum differential pressure 0.1 bar
Capacities
Safety information, installation and
maintenance
For full details see the Installation and Maintanence Instructions
Installation note:

The CA14 must be installed with the direction of flow as indicated
on the body, and with the float arm in a horizontal plain so that it
Condensate kg/h
rises and falls vertically.

Disposal
If a product which contains a Viton component has been
subjected to a temperature approaching 315 °C or higher, then
it may have decomposed and formed hydrofluoric acid. Avoid
skin contact and inhalation of any fumes as the acid will cause
deep skin burns and damage to the respiratory system. Viton
must be disposed of in a recognised manner as stated in the
Installation and Maintenance Instructions. No other ecological
hazard is anticipated with the disposal of this product providing
due care is taken.

How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN15 CA14 with SG iron body with
cover flanged to EN 1092 PN16. Note: Unless specified at the
time of ordering, a right to left flow will be supplied e.g. CA14
(R-L).
CMGT Issue 6
DIN/ASME JIS/KS
Size A A B C D E F G Weight
DN15 150 150 107 101 51 47 26.5 115 4.5
DN20 150 150 107 101 55 47 26.5 115 5.0
DN25 160 170 117 70 100 10 21.0 120 6.5
B DN25
Withdrawal Withdrawal
A D E distance D E distance
DN15 and DN20 C G C G
Spare parts
Available spares
CA14 3, 5+9, 6, 7, 8 (2 off), 10, 11

Maintenance kit
CA14S 3, 5+9, 6, 7, 8 (2 off), 10, 11, 13 (DN25 only)
5.5 Seal kit CA14 3, 5

Example: 1 off Maintenance kit for a Spirax Sarco DN15 CA14 air and gas trap.
Item or mm Nm
2 17 A/F M10 x 30 47 - 50
5 17 A/F M12 x 12 50 - 55
8 Pozidrive M4 x 6 2.5 - 3.0
Note: Item 2 is not an available spare.
*2 7 6 11 10 8 13 5 9 3
Main valve assembly

Note: Item 13 is required for DN25 size only
CMGT Issue 6

TI-P148-35
CMGT Issue 4
CA14S
Air and Gas Trap
DN40 and DN50 (Flanged)
Description
The CA14S is a cast iron ball float air and gas trap. It is
available with a metal valve cone given designation CA14S
having horizontal flanged connections. The cover will be
drilled and tapped ½" BSP or NPT for the purpose of fitting
a balance line.
Operating Media
The CA14 is designed for use on air or gases within PED
group 2.
Note: The CA14 is not suitable for use on PED group 1
liquids or gases.
Standards
This product fully complies with the requirements of the
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED).
Certification
5.5
Note: All certification/inspection requirements must be
23
stated at the time of order placement.

CA14S DN40 and DN50
Standard flanges are BS 4504 PN16.
On request ANSI B 16.1/BS 1560 class 125 and JIS/KS 10 flanges with drilled and tapped bolt holes can be provided.
PN flanges will be provided with BSP balance line and ANSI, JIS/KS with NPT balance line.
A B C A
200
Temperature °C
150 PMA Maximum allowable pressure 16 bar g
100 TMA Maximum allowable temperature 220 °C

50 Minimum operating temperature 0 °C
0 C B A
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of 24 bar g
Pressure bar g
Where the trap is to handle a liquid having a specific gravity of
less than 1, the following maximum differential pressures will
The product must not be used in this region. apply.
A-A-A Flanged BS 4504 PN16.
Specific gravity
A-B-B Flanged ANSI B 16.1/BS 1560 class 125 having flat faces.
Trap 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
A-C-C Flanged JIS/KS 10.
CA14S- 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.4 2.0
CA14S-10 10.0 9.5 6.8 5.5 3.4
CA14S-14 14.0 14.0 11.0 8.0 5.0
Page 1 of 5
Materials
1 2
14 12 3 13 7 4
No. Part Material
1 Body Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 25
2 Cover studs and nuts Carbon steel BS 3692 Gr. 8.8
5.5 3 Cover gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
24 4 Cover Cast iron DIN 1691 GG 25
5* Valve seat Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
6* Pivot frame assembly bolts Stainless steel BS 4183 18/8
7 Ball and float lever Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
8* Valve cone Stainless steel AISI 440B
9* Pivot frame Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
10 * Support frame Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
11 * Pivot Stainless steel
12 Mounting plate Stainless steel BS 1449 316L S29
13 Mounting plate fastening bolts Carbon steel BS 3692 Gr. 8.8
14 Main valve assembly gasket Reinforced exfoliated graphite
Note: Items 5, 6, 8, 9, 10 and 11 are shown more clearly in spare parts.
CMGT Issue 4
CA14S Air and Gas Trap DN40 and DN50 (Flanged)
Capacities
Note: The capacities provided here are calculated using water at ambient temperature.
The discharge capacity is affected with a change in specific gravity, for further information contact Spirax Sarco.
1
-2
S
A 46
.5
-4 1/C
S -2
46 S
/ CA A 44
- 4. 5 0C 2
4S D N5 -3
4 6 S
CA a nd A4
.5/ 40 2 /C
-4 N -3
14
S ,D 4S
25 4
0 CA -1
0 DN CA
D N5 6S N5
0
nd A4 dD
a 0 /C n
N 40 -1 4 4 0a
,D 4 4S -1 DN
5 S ,
N2 0/ CA 46 25
D
-1
A DN
S 4 /C
14 -1 .5
0 CA 44
S
-4
5 A S
DN 4 /C A4
6
nd -1 5 /C
a S
Condensate kg/h
4 .
N4
0 A1 -4
,D 0C 46
5.5
5 5 C A
DN
2 DN .5/
a nd -4
S
40 44 0
25
, DN 0 CA 6 S
-1
25
N2 A4
DN dD 0 /C
n 1
15
a 6- -1
4
DN C A4 6S
0 / A 4
-1 /C
4S - 14
4 6
CA A4
N 20 4 /C
dD -1 1
an 4 4S -2
1 5 A 6 S
C 2
DN 20 A4 -3
N 1 /C 6 S
D -2
nd A4
5a A 46 2 /C
1 3
DN 1/C 6-
-2 A4
4 S / C
A4 2
-3
2 0C 4 S
DN A4
a nd 3 2 /C
15 4-
DN C A4
20
d DN
an
15
DN
CMGT Issue 4
ANSI JIS/ Flange bolt hole
PN16 125 KS 10 tappings
Size A A A ANSI 125 B C D E F G Weight
DN40 230 221 228 ½" - 13 UNC-2B 128 110 312 200 187 230 21.5
DN50 230 220 228 " - 11 UNC-2B 140 126 324 200 219 239 30.5
A F
D E
Withdrawal distance

Disposal
5.5
How to order
26 Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN40 CA14S-14 air and gas trap flanged to BS 4504 PN16 with cast iron body and cover.
CMGT Issue 4
Spare parts
The spare parts available are shown in heavy outline.
Parts drawn in broken line are not supplied as spares.
Available spares
Main valve assembly with float 5, 6, 7+8, 9, 10, 11, 14
Complete set of gaskets (packet of 3 sets) 3, 14
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Main valve assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN40 CA14S -14 air and gas trap.
2 Dowel 3 13
5.5
27
14 11 5 9 10 6 8 7
2
or
Item Part Qty Nm
mm
DN40 6 19 M12 60 - 66
2
DN50 6 24 M16 80 - 88
5 DN40, DN50 1 17 M12 50 - 55
6 DN40,DN50 2 Cheesehead M5 x 20 2.5 - 2.8
DN40 4 10 M6 10 - 12
13
DN50 4 13 M8 20 - 24
CMGT Issue 4
5.5
28

TI-P148-02
CMGT Issue 13
CA44 and CA44S

Carbon Steel
Air and Gas Traps Flanged DN15 to DN25
Description
The CA44 is a carbon steel bodied ball float air and gas trap having stainless steel working internals. It is available with a soft valve
cone given designation CA44 or with a metal valve cone given designation CA44S both having horizontal flanged connections. The
cover is drilled and tapped ½" BSP as standard for the purpose of fitting a balance line, alternatively it can be drilled ½" NPT on
request and must be specified when placing your order. The body and cover castings are produced by a TÜV approved foundry. The
trap is supplied with integrally flanged connections and can be maintained without disturbing the pipework.
Available options:
CA44 - Having a soft valve cone
CA44S - Having a metal valve cone
CA44 and CA44S

DN15 and DN20
EN flange
5.5
CA44S
DN25
29
EN flange
Operating media
The CA44 and CA44S are designed for use on air or gases within PED group 2.
Note: The CA44 and CA44S are not suitable for use on PED group 1 liquids or gases.
Optional extras
The bottom of the cover can be drilled and tapped ½" BSP or NPT for the purpose of fitting a drain cock if requested at the
point of order.
Standards
Certification
This product is available with a manufacturer's Typical Test Report and certification to EN 10204 3.1.
CMGT Issue 13
CA44 and CA44S Carbon Steel Air and Gas Traps Flanged DN15 to DN25
CA44 DN15 and DN20
CA44S DN15, DN20 and DN25
Standard flanges are EN 1092 PN40 with face-to-face dimensions in accordance with EN 26554 (Series 1), ASME B 16.5 Class 150,
ASME B 16.5 Class 300 and JIS/KS 20 are also available with face-to-face dimensions in accordance with EN 26554 (Series 1).
On request ASME B 16.5 Class 150, ASME B 16.5 Class 300 flanges with drilled and tapped bolt holes with face-to-face dimensions
in accordance with EN 26554 (Series 1).
PN and JIS/KS flanges will be provided with BSP balance line and ASME flanges with an NPT balance line.
ASME/JIS/KS flanges are supplied with tapped holes to receive flange bolts. ASME flanges have UNC threads and JIS/KS have metric
threads.
Materials 2 1 3 16 8 4
No. Part Material
DN15
to Carbon steel 1.0619+N/WCB
1 Body DN20
DN25 Carbon steel 1.0619+N/WCB
Cover studs Steel DN 17240 21 Cr Mo V57

2
Cover nuts Steel EN 10269 25 Cr Mo 4 9
5
5.5 DN15
30 4 Cover
to
DN20
Carbon steel 1.0619+N/WCB CA44 and CA44S
DN15 and DN20
EN flange 7
DN25 Carbon steel 1.0619+N/WCB
15 14 6 17
Pivot frame
7 assembly and Stainless steel BS 4183 18/8
set screws
Ball float and

lever
CA44S
DN25
EN flange
No. Part Material

9 Valve cone
CA44S (permanently attached to the ball float and lever) Stainless steel
16 Pivot Stainless steel
17 Erosion deflector Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
CMGT Issue 13
CA44 CA44S
400 400
A
Temperature °C
Temperature °C
300 300
200 200
A
100 100
D C B D C B
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

A - B Flanged EN 1092 PN40 and ASME 300
A - C Flanged JIS/KS 20
A - D Flanged ASME 150

CA44 200 °C
5.5
CA44S 400 °C

31
Specific gravity
Trap 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
DPMX CA44-32 32.0 32.0 29.0 20.0 12.0

CA44S- 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.4 2.0
Depending on the specific gravity
of the liquid being drained. CA44S-10 10.0 9.5 6.8 5.5 3.4
CA44S-14 14.0 14.0 11.0 8.0 5.0
CA44S-21 21.0 19.0 15.0 10.0 6.5
CA44S-32 32.0 30.0 23.0 16.5 10.0
PN40 60 bar g
Designed for a maximum cold ASME 300 60 bar g

hydraulic test pressure of: ASME 150 30 bar g
JIS/KS 20 49 bar g
Note: With internals fitted, test pressure must not exceed DPMX
CMGT Issue 13
CA44 and CA44S

DN15 and DN20
EN flange
G
F
E
Withdrawal
A D distance
CA44S
DN25
5.5 EN flange
G
32
F
E
Withdrawal
A D distance
PN40 ASME ASME JIS/ PN40 ASME 300 PN40 ASME 300 PN40 ASME 300
300 150 KS 20 ASME 150 ASME 150 ASME 150
JIS/KS 20 JIS/KS 20 JIS/KS 20
DN15 150 209 203 206 80 80 215 163 120 155 100 155 100 10.8
DN20 150 209 205 210 80 80 225 163 120 165 100 165 100 10.8
DN25 160 212 208 210 115 85 282 209 170 195 125 215 145 15.0
CMGT Issue 13
Capacities
5.5
S-
10 33
Condensate kg/h
4
CA4
25
DN
CMGT Issue 13
Installation note:
The trap should be fitted in the horizontal plane below what it is draining, with the direction of flow as indicated on the body so that the
float mechanism is free to rise and fall in a vertical plane.
One of the advantages of the float trap for draining air and gas systems is that no bleed is required for satisfactory operation. However,
because the trap has no bleed a separate balance line is needed to prevent it becoming air or gas locked.
Make sure that the balance line is piped back to the upstream side.
A balance line is essential for the correct operation of this product.
For convenience of maintenance it is recommended that a union is fitted in the balance line near to the trap cover.
Disposal:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN25 CA44S-32 air and gas trap flanged to EN 1092 PN40 with carbon steel body and cover.
Spare parts
Available spares
Soft valve cone CA44 (packet of 3) 9
CA44 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 14, 15, 16

Main valve assembly with float *
CA44S 5, 6, 7, 8+9, 14, 15, 16
* Note: The erosion deflector is pressed into the body during manufacture and not available as a spare.
34 Always order spares by using the description given in the column headed 'Available spares' and state the size and type of trap.
Example: 1 - Main valve assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN25 CA44S-32 air and gas trap.
Dowel 3 or
Item Nm
mm
2 2 17 A/F M10 x 60 19 - 21
(not an available spare)
5 17 A/F M12 x 8 50 - 55
6 16 5 15 14 7 9 8
CMGT Issue 13

TI-P148-23
CMGT Issue 5
CA44S
Carbon Steel
Air and Gas Trap 1" Screwed
Description 2 1 3 16 8+9 4
The CA44S is a carbon steel ball float air and gas trap with a
stainless steel valve cone and has horizontal screwed or socket
weld connections. The cover will be drilled and tapped ½" BSP
or NPT (socket weld also available) for the purpose of fitting a
balance line. Body and cover castings are produced by a TÜV
approved foundry.
Standards
This product fully complies with the requirements of the Pressure
Equipment Directive (PED) and carries the mark when so
required.
Certification
5.5
Sizes and pipe connection 35
1" Screwed BSP or NPT with BSP or NPT balance line.
1" Socket weld BS 3799 class 3000 with NPT or

Socket weld balance line. 15 14 17 65 7
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Body Carbon steel DIN 17245 GS-C25N

2
Cover nuts Steel EN 10269 25 Cr Mo 4
4 Cover Carbon steel DIN 17245 GS-C25N
7 Pivot frame assembly set screws Stainless steel BS 4183 18/8
9 Valve cone CA44S* Stainless steel
17 Erosion deflector Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
* Note: The valve cone in the CA44S is permanently attached to the ball float and lever.
Page 1 of 4
400
Temperature °C
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40
Pressure bar g
DPMX Maximum differential pressure bar, depending on the specific gravity of the liquid being drained:
CA44S- 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.4 2.0

5.5 CA44S-10 10.0 9.5 6.8 5.5 3.4
36 CA44S-14 14.0 14.0 11.0 8.0 5.0
CA44S-21 21.0 19.0 15.0 10.0 6.5
CA44S-32 32.0 30.0 23.0 16.5 10.0
DPMN Minimum differential pressure 0.1 bar

F
A B C D E F Weight
165 115 85 208 170 146 12.5
A D E
Withdrawal distance
CMGT Issue 5
CA44S Carbon Steel Air and Gas Trap 1" Screwed
Capacities
Condensate kg/h
5.5
37
CMGT Issue 5
Installation note:
The trap should be fitted in the horizontal plane below what it is draining with the direction of flow as indicated on the body so that the
Advice on welding of socket weld variants is provided with the installation and maintenance instructions.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco 1" socket weld CA44S-32 air and gas trap with carbon steel body and cover.
Spare parts
Available spares
* Main valve assembly with float 5, 6, 7, 8 + 9, 14, 15, 16
* Note: The erosion deflector is pressed into the body during manufacture and not available as a spare.
How to order spares

5.5 Example: 1 - Main valve assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN25 CA44S-32 air and gas trap.
38
or
Item Nm
mm
3 Dowel 2
2 17 M10 x 60 19 - 21
5 17 M12 50 - 55
8+9 7 14 15 5 16 6
CMGT Issue 5

TI-P148-03
CMGT Issue 10
CA44S
Carbon Steel
Air and Gas Trap DN40 and DN50
DIN flange shown

5.5
39
Description
The CA44S is an carbon steel ball float air and gas trap. It has a metal valve cone and is available with horizontal flanged connections.
The cover will be drilled and tapped ¾" BSP or NPT for the purpose of fitting a balance line. Body and cover castings are produced by
a TÜV approved supplier in accordance with AD-Merkblatt WO/TRD100.
Standards
Certification

DN40 and DN50
Standard flanges are:
EN 1092-1 PN40 with DIN face-to-face dimensions and ASME 150, ASME 300 and JIS/KS 20K flanges with drilled and tapped bolt
holes with DIN face-to-face dimensions.
PN and JIS/KS flanges will be provided with BSP balance line and ASME flanges with NPT balance line.
CMGT Issue 10
CA44S Carbon Steel Air and Gas Trap DN40 and DN50
Materials 2 1 16 4
DIN flange shown
6 5 7 3 8
No. Part Material
1 Body Carbon steel WCB 1.0619+N

5.5
40 2
Cover nuts Steel DN 17240 24 Cr Mo5
4 Cover Carbon steel WCB 1.0619+N
6 Mounting plate gasket Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S11
Valve cone
9 Stainless steel
(The valve cone is permanently attached to the ball float and lever)
16 Pivot Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29/ASTM A276 431
18 Mounting plate Stainless steel BS 970 431 S29
DN40 bolts
19 Mounting plate fasteners Carbon steel GR8.8
DN50 studs and nuts
Note: Parts 9, 14, 15, 18 and 19 are shown in 'Spare parts'.
CMGT Issue 10
400
A,D
Temperature °C
300
200
100
D C B
0
0 10 20 30 40
Pressure bar g
A - B Flanged EN 1092-1 PN40 and ASME 300.
D - D Flanged ASME 150.
PMO Maximum operating pressure for saturated steam service 40 bar g @ 120 °C

5.5
DPMX Maximum differential pressure bar, depending on the specific gravity of the liquid being drained:
41
CA44S- 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.4 2.0
CA44S-10 10.0 9.5 6.8 5.5 3.4
CA44S-14 14.0 14.0 11.0 8.0 5.0
CA44S-21 21.0 19.0 15.0 10.0 6.5
CA44S-32 32.0 30.0 30.0 16.5 10.0
DPMX Maximum operating temperature 0.1 bar
PN40 60 bar g
ASME 300 60 bar g

ASME 150 30 bar g
JIS/KS 20K 49 bar g
CMGT Issue 10
Capacities
Condensate kg/h
5.5
42
CMGT Issue 10
Size ASME ASME
ASME
150/300 150/300
ASME ASME JIS/KS 150/300
PN40 PN40 PN40 PN40
150 300 20K JIS/KS
JIS/KS JIS/KS
20K
20K 20K
A A A A B C D D E F F G G Weight
DN40 230 321 327 322 130 116 326 248 200 200 154 242 164 33
DN50 230 313 320 311 141 123 332 251 200 225 158 248 167 43
F E
5.5
A D
43
Flange bolt hole tappings
Size ASME 150 ASME 300 JIS/KS 20K
DN40 ½" - 13 UNC - 2B ¾" - 10 UNC - 2B M16 x 2 - 6H
DN50 " - 11 UNC - 2B " - 11 UNC - 2B M16 x 2 - 6H

For full details, see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-P148-37) supplied with the product.
Installation note:
The trap must be fitted in the horizontal plane below what it is draining with the direction of flow as indicated on the body so that the
because the trap has no bleed a seperate balance line is needed to prevent it becoming air or gas locked.
It should be noted that the balance line is piped back to the upstream side.
It is recommended that a non-return valve is fitted when discharging condensate into return lines where backpressure is experienced.
It is also recommended that a diffuser is fitted when discharging to atmosphere.
For convenience of maintenance it is recommended that a union is fitted in the balance line near to the trap cover and consideration
should be given to fitting isolation valves upstream and downstream of the trap.
The CA44S must not be insulated.
Disposal
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN50 CA44S-32 air and gas trap flanged to EN 1092-1 PN40 having a carbon steel body and cover.
CMGT Issue 10
Spare parts
Available spares
Main valve assembly with float CA44S 5, 6, 7, 8 + 9, 14, 15, 16
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Main valve assembly with float for a Spirax Sarco DN50 CA44S-32 air and gas trap.
*19 3 Dowel *2
*2
5.5
* Note:
44 Items 2 and 19 are not available as spares.
8 9 7 15 14 5 16 6
or
Item Size Nm
mm
DN40 24 A/F M16 x 85 60 - 66

2
DN50 24 A/F M16 x 85 80 - 88
3 17 A/F M12 x 8 50 - 55
DN40 10 A/F M6 x 20 10 - 12
19
DN50 13 A/F M8 x 20 20 - 24
CMGT Issue 10

TI-P148-38
CMGT Issue 4
CAS14 and CAS14S

Austenitic Stainless Steel
Ball Float Air and Gas Traps
Description
The CAS14 and CAS14S are austenitic stainless steel ball float
gas/air drain traps.
They provide efficient condensate drainage from compressed air
and other gas systems, allowing the process to operate to its
optimum potential.
The connections are in the vertical plane for flow downwards.
Body and cover castings are produced by a TÜV approved
supplier in accordance with AD-Merkblatt WO/TRD100.
Operating media
The CAS14 and CAS14S are designed for use on air or gases
within PED group 2.
Note: The CAS14 and CAS14S are not suitable for use on PED
group 1 liquids or gases.
5.5
Available types
CAS14 fitted with a viton valve cone ½" and ¾" 45
CAS14S fitted with a stainless steel valve cone ½", ¾" and 1"
Optional extra
An integral screen.
Standards
These products fully comply with the requirements of the EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment (Safety) Regulations
and carry the mark when so required.
Certification
This product is available with certification to EN 10204 3.1.B.

½", ¾" and 1" Screwed BSP (BS 21 and DIN 2999) or NPT (ANSI B 1.20.1).
½", ¾" and 1" Socket weld ends to ANSI B 16.11, BS 3799 Class 3000 and DIN 3239.
CMGT Issue 4
CAS14 and CAS14S Austenitic Stainless Steel Ball Float Air and Gas Traps
Materials
4 10
8 14 7
12 15
No. Part Material
5.5 1 Body Austenitic stainless steel (316)

EN 10213-4 (1.4408)
ASTM A351 CF8M
46 2 Cover bolts Stainless steel BS EN 3506 A2-70
EN 10213-4 (1.4408)
4 Cover Austenitic stainless steel (316)
ASTM A351 CF8M
6 Main valve seat gasket Stainless steel
7 Main valve assembly screws Stainless steel
CAS14 Viton
9* Valve cone
CAS14S Stainless steel AISI 440B
10 Blanking plug Stainless steel
12 Pivot frame Stainless steel
15 'O' ring FDA approved viton to FDA regulation 177.2600
16 * Valve spring (1" only) Stainless steel
* Note: Items 9 and 16 are clearly identified on page 4.
CMGT Issue 4
Pressure/temperature limits (ISO 6552)
300
A
Temperature °C
225
200 B
100
C
0
0 5 10 14* 15 20 25
Pressure bar g
The Viton soft seat versions should not be used in this region.
A - C CAS14S
B - C CAS14
*PMO Maximum operating pressure 14 bar g
CAS14 200 °C 5.5

CAS14S 225 °C 47
DPMX Maximum differential pressure
The maximum differential pressure depends on the specific gravity of the liquid being drained.
Specific Gravity
Trap 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
CAS14 14.0 14.0 14.0 9.0 5.0
CAS14S 14.0 14.0 14.0 9.0 5.0
Minimum specific gravity of liquid 0.6
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 37.5 bar g
CMGT Issue 4
Withdrawal distance
½" 135 97 48 162 135 3.73
¾" 135 97 48 162 135 3.73
1" 139 113 51 179 145 4.23
A D
C E
Capacities

Condensate kg/h
1"

5.5
¾"
48
½"

and


How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco ½" CAS14 austenitic stainless steel ball float air and gas trap having screwed BSP connections.
CMGT Issue 4

TI-P148-04
CMGT Issue 10
CA46 and CA46S

Air and Gas Traps Flanged DN15 to DN25
Description
The CA46 is an austenitic stainless steel ball float air and gas trap. It is available with a soft valve cone given designation CA46 or with
a metal valve cone given designation CA46S both having horizontal flanged connections. The cover will be drilled and tapped ½" BSP
or NPT for the purpose of fitting a balance line. Body and cover castings are produced by a TÜV approved foundry.
Standards
This product fully complies with the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) and carries the mark when so
required.
Certification

CA46 - DN15 and DN20
CA46S - DN15, DN20 and DN25
5.5
- EN 1092 PN40 with DIN face-to-face dimensions.

49
- ASME 150, ASME 300 and JIS/KS 20 flanges are provided with drilled and tapped bolt holes with DIN face-to-face dimensions.
Balance line - PN flanges will be provided with BSP balance line and ASME and JIS/KS 20 flanges with NPT balance line.
CA46 and CA46S

DN15 and DN20
DIN flange
CA46S
DN25
DIN flange
Page 1 of 7
CA46 - DN15 and DN20 flanged CA46S - DN15, DN20 and DN25 flanged
400 400
A
Temperature °C
Temperature °C
300 300
200 200
A
100 100
C B C B
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

A - B Flanged EN 1092 PN40 and ASME 300.
A - C Flanged ASME 150 and JIS/KS 20K.
CA46 200 °C @ 29 bar g

CA46S 400 °C @ 20 bar g
5.5 TMO Maximum operating temperature

CA46 200 °C @ 29 bar g
CA46S 400 °C @ 20 bar g

50 Minimum operating temperature 0 °C
Specific gravity
Trap 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
CA46-32 32.0 32.0 29.0 20.0 12.0
DPMX Maximum differential pressure CA46S- 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.4 2.0
The maximum differential pressure depends on the specific CA46S-10 10.0 9.5 6.8 5.5 3.4
gravity of the liquid being drained.
CA46S-14 14.0 14.0 11.0 8.0 5.0
CA46S-21 21.0 19.0 15.0 10.0 6.5
CA46S-32 32.0 30.0 23.0 16.5 10.0
PN40 60 bar g
ASME 300 60 bar g

Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: ASME 150 30 bar g
JIS/KS 20K 49 bar g
Caution: The trap in its complete operational form must not be subjected to a pressure of greater than 48 bar otherwise damage to
the internal mechanism may result.
CMGT Issue 10
CA46 and CA46S Austenitic Stainless Steel Air and Gas Traps Flanged DN15 to DN25
Materials
2 1 4
2 1 4
CA46 and CA46S

DN15 and DN20
DIN flange
CA46S 5.5
DN25
DIN flange 51
No. Part Material
1 Body Austenitic stainless steel (316) 1.4408/CF8M
Cover stud Austenitic stainless steel BS 6105 A2-70

2
Cover nut Austenitic stainless steel BS 6105 A2
3 Cover gasket (shown on page 4) Austenitic stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
4 Cover Austenitic stainless steel 1.4408/CF8M
Materials continued on page 4
CMGT Issue 10
Dowel
3 6 16 5 15 14 7 9 8
Internals that are common to all sizes
5.5
52
No. Part Material
7 Pivot frame assembly Stainless steel set screws BS 4183 18/8
9 Valve cone CA46S

(The valve cone in the CA46S is permanently attached Stainless steel
to the ball float and lever)
CMGT Issue 10
Capacities
.5
-4
4 6S
5 CA
D N2
Condensate kg/h
A4
6 S
-1
5.5
5C
DN
2
-1
4 -4
.5 53
S
6S 46
A4 A
C 0C
25 2
DN DN
a nd
15
DN 0
-1
S
46
0 CA
N2 4
dD -1
an 6 S
N15 C A4
D 20
N
n dD
a
15
DN 1
-2
S 2
46 -3
C A
4 6S
N 20 CA
dD nd
an 3 2a
N15 4 6-
D
0 CA
D N2
a nd
15
DN
CMGT Issue 10
DN15 150 80 80 215 120 155 155 10.8
DN20 150 80 80 225 120 165 165 10.8
DN25 160 115 85 282 170 215 215 15.0
CA46S DN25 DIN flange

ä G ä
ä
B
ää
C
ä
ä A ä ä F ä ä E ä
Withdrawal distance
CA46 and CA46S DN15 and DN20 DIN flange

ä G ä
ä
B
ä
ä
5.5
ä
ä A ä ä F ä
54 ä D ää E ä
Withdrawal distance

Size ASME 150 ASME 300 JIS/KS 20
DN15 ½" - 13 UNC - 2B ½" - 13 - UNC - 2B M12
DN20 ½" - 13 UNC - 2B ½" - 13 - UNC - 2B M12
DN25 ½" - 13 UNC - 2B 5/8" - 11 - UNC - 2B M16
CMGT Issue 10
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-P148-37) supplied with this product.
Installation note:
The trap should be fitted in the horizontal plane below what it is draining, with the direction of flow as indicated on the body so that the
Disposal:
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN25 CA46S-32 air and gas trap flanged to EN 1092 PN40 with austenitic stainless steel body and cover.
Spare parts
Available spare
Soft valve cone CA46 (packet of 3) 9
CA46 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 14, 15, 16
CA46S 5, 6, 7, 8 + 9, 14, 15, 16
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Main valve assembly for a Spirax Sarco DN25 CA46S-32 air and gas trap.
5.5
55
Item or mm Nm
Dowel 3
2 17 M10 x 60 29 - 33
2 (not an available spare)
5 17 M12 x 8 50 - 55
2 (not an available spare)
6 16 5 15 14 7 9 8
CMGT Issue 10
5.5
56

TI-P148-07
CMGT Issue 11
CA46S
Air and Gas Trap DN40 and DN50
Description 2 1 16 4
The CA46S is an austenitic stainless steel ball float air and gas
trap. It has a metal valve cone and is available with horizontal
flanged connections. The cover will be drilled and tapped ¾" BSP
or NPT for the purpose of fitting a balance line. Body and cover
castings are produced by a TÜV approved supplier in accordance
with AD-Merkblatt WO/TRD100.
Standards
This product fully complies with the requirements of the EU
Regulations and carries the mark when so required.
Certification
5.5
Sizes and pipe connections DIN flange shown 6 57 3 8
DN40 and DN50
57
EN 1092 PN40 with DIN face-to-face dimensions and
ASME 150, ASME 300 and JIS/KS 20K flanges with drilled and tapped bolt holes with DIN face-to-face dimensions.
PN and JIS/KS flanges will be provided with BSP balance line and ASME flanges with NPT balance line.
Materials
No.Part Material
1 Body Austenitic stainless steel (316) 1.4408/CF8M
Cover studs Austenitic stainless steel A2.70

2
Cover nuts Austenitic stainless steel A2.70
3 Cover gasket Austenitic stainless steel BS 1449 304 S16
4 Cover Austenitic stainless steel (316) 1.4408/CF8M
6 Mounting plate gasket Stainless steel BS 1449 304 S11
Valve cone
9 Stainless steel
(The valve cone is permanently attached to the ball float and lever)
18 Mounting plate Stainless steel 316L
DN40 bolts Stainless steel A2-70

19 Mounting plate fasteners
DN50 studs and nuts Stainless steel A2-70
Note: Parts 9, 14, 15, 18 and 19 are shown overleaf.
CMGT Issue 11
CA46S Austenitic Stainless Steel Air and Gas Trap DN40 and DN50
400
Temperature °C
300
A
200
100
D D C B
0
0 10 20 30 40
Pressure bar g
A - B Flanged EN 1092 PN40 and ASME 300.
A - D Flanged ASME 150.
Minimum operating temperature for satisfactory operation is 0 °C
5.5 Specific gravity
58 Trap 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6
CA46S- 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.4 2.0

DPMX Maximum differential pressure
CA46S-10 10.0 9.5 6.8 5.5 3.4
The maximum differential pressure depends on the specific CA46S-14 14.0 14.0 11.0 8.0 5.0
gravity of the liquid being drained.
CA46S-21 21.0 19.0 15.0 10.0 6.5
CA46S-32 32.0 30.0 23.0 16.5 10.0
PN40 60 bar g
ASME 300 60 bar g

ASME 150 30 bar g
JIS/KS 20K 49 bar g
Caution: The trap in its complete operational form must not be subjected to a pressure of greater than 48 bar otherwise damage to
the internal mechanism may result.
CMGT Issue 11
Capacities
Condensate kg/h
5.5
59
CMGT Issue 11
DN40 230 130 116 326 200 200 242 33
DN50 230 141 123 332 200 225 248 43
F E
A D

Size ASME 150 ASME 300 JIS/KS 20K
DN40 ½" - 13 UNC - 2B ¾" - 10 UNC - 2B M16 x 2 - 6H
DN50 " - 11 UNC - 2B " - 11 UNC - 2B M16 x 2 - 6H

5.5 For full details, see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IM-P148-37) supplied with the product.
60 Installation note:
The trap must be fitted in the horizontal plane below what it is draining with the direction of flow as indicated on the body so that the
because the trap has no bleed a seperate balance line is needed to prevent it becoming air or gas locked.
It should be noted that the balance line is piped back to the upstream side.
It is recommended that a non-return valve is fitted when discharging condensate into return lines where backpressure is experienced.
It is also recommended that a diffuser is fitted when discharging to atmosphere.
For convenience of maintenance it is recommended that a union is fitted in the balance line near to the trap cover and consideration
should be given to fitting isolation valves upstream and downstream of the trap.
The CA46S must not be insulated.
Disposal
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco DN50 CA46S-32 air and gas trap flanged to EN 1092 PN40 having an austenitic stainless steel body and
cover.
CMGT Issue 11
Spare parts
Available spares
Main valve assembly with float CA46S 5, 6, 7, 8 + 9, 14, 15, 16
How to order spares

Example: 1 - Main valve assembly with float for a Spirax Sarco DN50 CA46S-32 air and gas trap.
*19 3 Dowel *2
*2
5.5
61
8 9 7 15 14 5 16 6
* Note: Items 2 and 19 are not an available spare.
or
Item Size Nm
mm
DN40 24 A/F M16 x 85 60 - 66

2
DN50 24 A/F M16 x 85 80 - 88
5 17 A/F M12 x 8 50 - 55
DN40 10 A/F M6 x 20 10 - 12
19
DN50 13 A/F M8 x 20 20 - 24
CMGT Issue 11
5 Isolation valves, drainLocal
traps and
regulations ancillaries
may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.
TI-P560-01
CH Issue 5
Venting and Non-venting Ball Valve
5
3
5
5.5
62
(V)
5 4 1 2
Description Sizes and end connections

A full bore ball valve suitable for compressed air and other fluids
and gases compatible with the materials of construction and V - Venting ¼", ", ½", ¾", and 1" screwed BSP
pressure/temperature limits (contact Spirax Sarco for details).
NV - Non-venting ¼", ", ½", ¾", 1", 1¼", 1½" and 2" screwed BSP
It is designed to provide dead tight shut-off for pneumatic and
other applications.
When the valve is moved to the closed position (supply off) on
self-venting models, the downstream pressure will slowly exhaust
Materials
through the vent orifice (V). Self-venting models carry a flow No. Part Material
direction arrow.
The illustration shows the self-venting valve in the closed position. 1 Body Brass nickel plated
Principal features: 2 Cap Brass nickel plated
- Full bore for good flow characteristics (to BS 5351). 3 Spindle Brass nickel plated
- Suitable for inert industrial gases.
4 Ball Brass chrome plated
- Suitable for water and other similar fluids.
5 Seals PTFE
- All PFTE seals.
- Hard chrome self-cleaning ball. 6 Handle Steel chrome plated blue PVC sleeve
- Anti blow-out stem and inner seal.
Pressure /temperature limits
Venting Non-venting
Maximum operating pressure 10 bar 40 bar
Maximum operating temperature 100°C 110°C
Minimum operating temperature -20°C -20°C
Kv values
Size ¼" " ½" ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 2"
Kv 5.9 9.4 17 41 70 121 200 292
For conversion: C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963 C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
Installation
Always install the valve with the flow direction as indicated on the body of the self-venting models.
Non-venting types Self-venting types

Size A B C D Weight Size A B C D Weight 5.5
¼" 46.0 41 20.0 89 0.143 ¼" 52 42 22.5 96 0.17
63
" 46.0 41 20.0 89 0.126 " 52 42 22.5 96 0.2
½" 56.7 48 25.0 88 0.207 ½" 62 46 29.5 96 0.22
¾" 67.0 55 32.0 84 0.308 ¾" 69 58 32.0 121 0.36
1" 78.0 55 39.5 125 0.464 1" 83 62 40.5 121 0.55
1¼" 88.0 80 49.0 140 0.735
1½" 99.3 87 56.0 140 0.960
2" 121.0 92 69.0 165 1.537
How to order
Example: 1 off screwed BSP self-venting ball valve.
TI-P560-01 CH Issue 5 Venting and Non-venting Ball Valve

5.5
64

TI-P509-06
CMGT Issue 5
ADV
Spirax-Monnier
Automatic Drain Valve
Description
The Spirax-Monnier ADV automatic drain valve has been designed to remove condensate from any low points in a compressed air
system where automatic drainage should be provided. Condensate is a mixture of water, oil and dirt, with the thickness or viscosity
increasing with low temperatures.
Principal features: - Variable discharge frequency.
- Variable discharge time.

-

Low power comsumption.

- LED showing operational status.

- Reliable, long life, solid state timers.

- Manual test facilities.
- Minimal maintenance.
5.5
- Simple installation.
65
Applications
The Spirax-Monnier ADV automatic drain valve can be installed at any low
point in a compressed air system where condensate forms or is collected.
These include after coolers, separators, receivers, large filter units and drain
legs, etc. Typical installations are shown on page 4.

¼", 2" and ½" screwed BSP.
Optional extras: - Solenoid valve.
- DIN connector.
Technical data Product complies to:-

Ambient temperature -10 °C > +50 °C EN 50081-1: 1995
Operating temperature range EMC Generic emission standard -
Media temperature -10 °C > +130 °C Residential, commercial and light industry
230 Vac 50 Hz 16 bar EN 50081-1: 1995
EMC Generic immunity standard -
Mains voltage/pressure 110 Vac 50 Hz 16 bar
Residential, commercial and light industry
120 Vac 60 Hz 16 bar
EN 61010-1/A2: 1995
Discharge time variable 0.5 to 10 seconds Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control and laboratory use.
Discharge frequency variable 0.5 to 45 minutes
This product may be affected by electromagnetic
Connector DIN 43650 - ISO 4400/6952 interference in an industrial environment.
The Spirax-Monnier ADV can be used with
Insulation Class F (155 °C) compressed air, oils and water, and some
non-corrosive gases.
Enclosure IP65
Conforms to E.U. directives on low voltage and E.M.C.
CMGT Issue 5
ADV Spirax-Monnier Automatic Drain Valve
Materials Kv values
No. Part Material Valve size ¼" 2" ½"
1 Solenoid body Nylon Kv value 1.12 1.75 1.72
2 Timer body ABS
For conversion:
3 Valve body Brass C v (UK) = Kv x 0.963
C v (US) = Kv x 1.156
4 DIN connector ABS
Typical maximum capacity

2

Capacity litres/m

1
4

5.5 3
Pressure bar g
66
How the ADV works
The Spirax-Monnier ADV trap consists of: - A poppet valve.
- A direct acting solenoid.
- Twin solid state variable timers, with LED status indication.
- Plug connector.
- Brass valve body.
With the correct power supply connected, and the system pressurized, the timers can be set:
- The 'On' timer (1) controls the discharge period (0.5 to 10 seconds).
- The 'Off' timer (2) determines the frequency of discharge (0.5 to 45 minutes).
- Site conditions (quantity of condensate to be discharged, and amount and type of contamination) will determine the timer setting.
- The LED indicates which timer circuit is live (3 and 4). Operation of the 'test' facility will energise the 'On' timer circuit, opening the
discharge valve.The valve will remain open as long as the test button is depressed. This action also resets the 'Off' timer to its start
position. The condensate can be discharged to atmosphere (5) or piped away to a suitable container.
Installation note
On systems with high levels of solid particulate contamination, it is recommended that a strainer (Spirax Sarco Fig 12 Brass) be fitted
immediately upstream of the ADV. To simplify routine maintenance and cleaning, a self-venting isolating ball valve should be installed,
before the ADV (Spirax-Monnier venting ball valve).
All connections should be made with 0.4/1.5 mm² 3 core wire of a rating to suit the supply voltage.
The unit should be installed with the timer and solenoid sections vertical and the main brass valve body horizontal. The valve body can
be rotated horizontally through 360° relative to the solenoid, for ease of installation. Note: the direction of flow arrow on the valve body.
Recommended fuse protection 1 amp.
CMGT Issue 5
A B C D E F G Weight
90 120 44 20 54 83 15.5 0.55
A
C D
Spare parts
The spare parts available are detailed below. G
Available spares B
Timer A
F
230 Vac 50 Hz
Solenoid coil and gasket Specify voltage 110 Vac 50 Hz B
120 Vac 60 Hz
E
Connector C
How to order spares

Example: 1 off timer for a Spirax-Monnier ADV automatic drain valve.
2 4
A B

5.5
1
C
67

3

Not available as spares
How to order
Please state the quantity of Spirax-Monnier ADV units and the solenoid voltage required.
Example: 4 off Spirax-Monnier ½" ADV automatic drain valves having a set voltage of 230 Vac.
Note: If ordering an ADV valve and solenoid only, a DIN connector must also be ordered.
CMGT Issue 5
Typical installations
ADV
Ball valve Strainer

Draining a receiver or large filter
5.5
68
ADV
Ball valve Strainer

Draining a compressed air main relay point
ADV
Ball valve Strainer

Draining a separator on a compressed air main
CMGT Issue 5
TI-P504-23
CH Issue 2
Dri-Line Mk3
Monnier
Description
The Monnier Dri-Line Mk3 is an automatic float actuated drain
used to drain air line drain legs and filters.
It is a normally open valve that is rated for use up to 17 bar g
and 80°C. The valve is held closed by line pressure.
The pilot valve is never submerged in water, and its discharge
is operated by system air pressure, producing a strong on-off
action. The float which is extremely light, can't leak or hold fluid.
All parts are corrosion proof.
The unit has a manual override to check proper functioning.
Discharge is easily piped to remote locations. When the
compressed air system is shut down, the valve returns to its
normally open condition and water will drain away by gravity.
Principal features:
- Blast action discharge.
- High discharge capacity.
- Built-in strainer screen.
- Discharge can be piped to drain.
- Black anodised finish - internal and external.
Sizes and pipe connections 5.5
½" screwed BSP (BS 21 - Rp).
Optional extras 69
Discharge tube adaptor: to accept " o /d copper or plastic tube
to discharge condensate to drain facility.
Operating limits
Maximum discharge capacity 20 L /h @ 6 bar
Materials
No. Part Material
1 Body Anodised aluminium LM25WP
2 Autodrain mechanism Acetal plastic / Stainless steel
3 Strainer screen 0.8 mm perforated 316L
4 'O' ring Nitrile
Dimensions /weights (approximately) in mm and kg

Size A B G Weight
½" 64 81 " NPTF 0.46
Safety information, installation and maintenance Spare parts

For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions The spare parts available are detailed below. No other parts are
(IM-P504-24) supplied with the product. supplied as spares.
Installation note: Available spares

The Dri-Line should be fitted with the inlet port at the top, so that the Internal autodrain mechanism and strainer cap 'O' ring A, B
float mechanism can rise and fall vertically.
How to order spares
Typical installations: headed 'Available spares', and state the type of trap.
Example: 1 - Internal autodrain mechanism and strainer cap
'O' ring for a Dri-Line Mk3 Monnier compressed air drain trap.
" minimum diameter
Self-venting
ball valve
Dri-Line Mk3 draining a receiver or larger filter
5.5
70
" minimum diameter
Self-venting ball valve
A1
Dri-Line Mk3 draining

a compressed air main
relay point
A2
" minimum diameter
Self-venting
ball valve
Dri-Line Mk3 draining a separator on a compressed air main
How to order
Example: 1 off Dri-Line Mk3 Monnier compressed air drain trap having
a female ½" screwed BSP (BS 21 - Rp) connection.
Note: If any optional extras are required, they must be clearly specified
on the order.
A3
Dri-Line Mk3 Monnier Compressed Air Drain Trap TI-P504-23 CH Issue 2

Heat transfer solutions 6
Section 6
6.1 Clean steam generators
6.2 Heat exchangers
6.3 Thermocompressors
6
Heat transfer solutions
6
Clean steam generators

TI-P663-01
TES Issue 7
CSG-HS
Clean steam generation system
for Healthcare
6.1
1
Description
The Spirax Sarco CSG-HS Clean Steam Generator range has been specifically designed for sterilisation applications within the
Healthcare sector and to produce high quality steam under a wide variety of operating conditions. The system operates using plant
steam as the primary heating medium. All Systems are supplied packaged and ready to install with simple commissioning.
Product range
CSG-HS - 020 nominal production capacity 200 kg/h (441 lbs/hr)*

Size:
Versions/Applications: HS Healthcare sterilisation.
(*) max steam production at reference operating conditions: primary steam at 9 bar g (130 psi g), production at 4 bar g (58 psi g), feed water
at 20 °C (68 °F).
TES Issue 7
CSG-HS Clean steam generation system for Healthcare
6 Clean steam generators
Construction and main features
- System complete, functional and safe
- Compact design
- Modulating pressure and level control: pressure stability and steam quality improvement
- Intelligent PLC with SIMS technology, easy maintenance
- Packaged system with on board wired control panel: easy installation
- Automated start up/commissioning sequence
- High quality dryness exceeds EN285 and ST79 on performance
- Configurable options to suit individual needs
- System diagnostics
- Preventive maintenance
- Preheater can reduce plant steam usage by a minimum of 8% at peak flow
- Spirax Sarco's worldwide service
- Compliances available but not standard in all geographies EMEA Americas Asia Pacific
STD On STD On STD On

request request request
- mark with EU declaration of conformity according to the following directives: l l
- 2014/68/EU (PED) l l
- 2014/35/EU (LVD) l l
- 2014/30/EU (EMC) l l
-
6.1 ASME design with U stamp certification l
- Chinese GB national standard l

2
Design conditions
Design pressure 12.8 bar g (187 psi g)
Primary side
Design temperature 194.4 °C (382 °F)
Design pressure 8 bar g (116 psi g)
Secondary side Design temperature 194.4 °C (382 °F) For a bespoke design,
Safety valve set pressure 7 bar g (101.5 psi g) contact Spirax Sarco
Feedwater without pump 110 °C (230 °F)

Design temperature
with pump 100 °C (212 °F)
TES Issue 7
Clean steam generators 6
Maximum operating conditions
Without pump With pump
Clean saturated steam, up to 6 bar g/165.0 °C

Production
(Clean saturated steam, up to 97 psi g/206 °F)
Plant steam, up to 12 bar g/191.7 °C

Primary side
(Plant steam, up to 174 psi g/345 °F)
P min. ≥ P clean steam + 0.5 bar g Net positive suction head required
(P min. ≥ P clean steam + 7.2 psi g) (see IM)
Feedwater
P max 8 bar g/T max 110 °C P max 8 bar g/T max 80 °C
(P max 116 psi g/T max 230 °F) (P max 116 psi g/T max 176 °F)
Minimum ambient temperature: 0 °C

Designed for indoor installation only, protect from freezing.
Note: Feedwater is recommended to be demineralised or Reverse Osmosis quality to ensure high performance.
Utilities
Unit without pump Unit with pump
3 x 380 to 500 V +N
1 x 230 V +N 50/60 Hz
Electrical supply
50/60 Hz 1 kW (sizes 020-055) (inst.)
(cabinets)
0.4 kW (inst.) 1.5 kW (size 125) (inst.)
2 kW (size 180) (inst.)
Minimum 5 bar g (72.5 psi g) to maximum 7 bar g (101.5 psi g)

Air supply (filters)
(only for the unit with pneumatic actuators)
6.1
3
TES Issue 7
Performance of the units without preheater option

Clean steam pressure/bar g
Max clean steam production (kg/h), with feedwater at 20 °C:
4.5 4.0 3.5
10.0 220 254 292
9.5 200 234 271
CSG-HS - 020 9.0 180 214 250
8.5 159 192 229
8.0 137 170 207
10.0 583 677 788
9.5 531 620 727
CSG-HS - 055 9.0 480 566 666
8.5 426 511 606
8.0 370 456 548
Plant steam pressure/bar g
10.0 1,292 1,516 1,627
9.5 1,171 1,385 1,490
CSG-HS - 125 9.0 1,044 1,254 1,490
8.5 930 1,126 1,350
8.0 823 996 1,213
10.0 1,884 2,210 2,542
9.5 1,692 2,016 2,361
CSG-HS - 180 9.0 1,501 1,818 2,162
8.5 1,313 1,619 1,959
8.0 1,134 1,417 1,750
6.1
4 Max clean steam production (lbs/hr), with feedwater at 68 °F:
Clean steam pressure/psi g
65.3 58.0 50.8
145.0 485 559 643
137.8 441 515 598
CSG-HS - 020 130.5 396 471 551
123.3 350 424 504
116.0 303 376 456
145.0 1285 1,492 1,736
137.8 1170 1,368 1,602
CSG-HS - 055 130.5 1058 1,248 1,468
123.3 940 1,127 1,336
116.0 815 1,006 1,208
Plant steam pressure/psi g
145.0 2,849 3,341 3,587
137.8 2,581 3,052 3,285
CSG-HS - 125 130.5 2,302 2,764 3,285
123.3 2,051 2,483 2,977
116.0 1,814 2,195 2,673
145.0 4,153 4,872 5,603
137.8 3,731 4,445 5,206
CSG-HS - 180 130.5 3,309 4,009 4,767
123.3 2,894 3,569 4,319
116.0 2,500 3,124 3,858
TES Issue 7
Dimensions approximate in mm and weights kg of a standard unit
Dimensions Weights
L W H E xxx Empty In Maximum

Length Width Height Clearance for tube bundle Clearance height for operation
extraction de-aerator extraction
CSG-HS 020 2000 850 1850 1250 485 730 830 980
CSG-HS 055 2350 850 1850 1300 520 940 1140 1340
CSG-HS 125 2450 1450 2060 1600 630 1300 1650 1900
CSG-HS 180 2950 1450 2065 2000 630 1550 2050 2450
Dimensions approximate in mm and weights kg with preheater

Dimensions Weights

CSG-HS 020 2300 850 1850 1250 485 780 850 1030
CSG-HS 055 2650 850 1850 1300 520 960 1160 1360
CSG-HS 125 2450 1450 2060 1600 630 1300 1650 1900
CSG-HS 180 2950 1450 2065 2000 630 1550 2050 2450
Dimensions and weights of the units with EENV option - insulation 100 mm
Dimensions Weights

CSG-HS 020 2500 950 1975 1250 485 920 1000 1200 6.1
CSG-HS 055 2750 1100 2050 1300 520 1090 1300 1500 5
CSG-HS 125 2550 1450 2200 1600 630 1520 1850 2100
CSG-HS 180 3100 1500 2240 2000 630 1700 2150 2500
Indicated dimensions are the maximum dimensions for

a specific configuration of the package.
For detailed dimensions of the unit, size and position

E
of the connections, clearance for the tube bundle
extraction, weights and other constructive information,
refer to the specific general arrangement drawing of
the product.
L
For dimensions and weights
in inches and lbs, W
please go the next page
TES Issue 7
Dimensions approximate in inches and weights lbs of a standard unit
Dimensions Weights

CSG-HS 020 79 33 73 49 19 1610 1830 2161
CSG-HS 055 93 33 73 51 20 2073 2514 2955
CSG-HS 125 96 57 81 63 25 2867 3638 4190
CSG-HS 180 116 57 81 79 25 3418 4520 5402
Dimensions approximate in inches and weights lbs with preheater

Dimensions Weights

CSG-HS 020 91 33 73 49 19 1720 1874 2271
CSG-HS 055 104 33 73 51 20 2117 2558 2999
CSG-HS 125 96 57 81 63 25 2867 3638 4190
CSG-HS 180 116 57 81 79 25 3418 4520 5402
Dimensions Weights

6.1 CSG-HS 020 98 37 78 49 19 2029 2205 2646
6 CSG-HS 055 108 43 81 51 20 2403 2867 3308
CSG-HS 125 100 57 87 63 25 3352 4079 4631
CSG-HS 180 122 59 88 79 25 3749 4741 5513
Indicated dimensions are the maximum dimensions for

a specific configuration of the package.
For detailed dimensions of the unit, size and position

E
of the connections, clearance for the tube bundle
extraction, weights and other constructive information,
refer to the specific general arrangement drawing of
the product.
L
For dimensions and weights
in mm and kg, W
please go the previous page
TES Issue 7
Connections
Metric Imperial
020 055 125 180 020 055 125 180
Plant steam inlet DN32 DN50 DN80 DN100 1¼" 2" 3" 4"
connection PN16 PN16 PN16 PN16 ANSI 150 ANSI 150 ANSI 150 ANSI 150
Condensate outlet DN25 DN25 DN40 DN40 1" 1" 1½" 1½"
Clean steam outlet DN50 DN80 DN125 DN150 2" 3" 5" 6"
Feedwater inlet DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 ½" ¾" 1" 1¼"
Safety valve 1" DN50 DN80 DN80 1" 1¼" 3" 3"
discharge G-f PN16 PN16 PN16 NPT NPT* NPT NPT
Not condensable ¼" ¼" ¼" ¼" ¼" ½" ¼" ¼"
vent connection G-f G-f G-f G-f NPT NPT NPT NPT
DN25 DN25 DN25 DN25 1" ¾" 1" 1"

Drain connection
PN40 PN40 PN40 PN40 ANSI 300 ANSI 300 ANSI 300 ANSI 300
Plant steam
DN15 DN15 DN15 DN15 ½" ½" ½" ½"
condensate drain
connection
TDS Blowdown DN15 DN15 DN15 DN15 ½" ½" ½” ½"

Sampling system
½" BSP - ½" BSP - ½" BSP - ½" BSP - ½" ½" ½" ½"
(cooling water in/
6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm BSP BSP BSP BSP
out - sample out)
Options
6.1
7
TES Issue 7
Product nomenclature and selection guide
The product nomenclature is based on the characteristics of the main elements and options, identified as follows:
Basic configuration
E EN
A ASME
Design code
G GB
J JBA
Shell type F Flanged openable
020 Up to 200 kg/h (441 lbs/hr) (at the reference operating conditions ^)
055 Up to 550 kg/h (1212 lbs/hr)

Unit size:
125 Up to 1250 kg/h (2756 lbs/hr)
180 Up to 1800 kg/h (3968 lbs/hr)
PN Pneumatic (fail-safe)
Valve actuation type
EL Electric (fail-safe)
P1 ABB AC500 series + 7" display
P2 Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1700 series + 7" display

Control
P3 Siemens S7.1200 series + 7" display
P4 Selective Control Panel (with PLC ABB AC500 series + 7" display)
C0 None
C1 BACnet IP
C2 Profinet
C3 Modbus TCP/IP
6.1 Communication interface C4 BACnet MSTP
8 C5 Profibus
C6 Modbus RTU
C7 BACnet (BTL cert.) IP
C8 BACnet (BTL cert.) MSTP
0 Base and cabinet made of carbon steel, painted
1 Open frame and cabinet made of carbon steel, painted
2 Frame w. side panels and cabinet made of carb. steel, painted

Unit frame/Electrical cabinet
3 Base and cabinet made of stainless steel (304) *, **
4 Open frame and cabinet made of stainless steel (304) *, **
5 Frame with side panels and cabinet made of stainless steel (304) *, **
Control Panel location S Side
Insulation: 1 Steam generator body only

(aluminium cladding if carbon steel
frame and electrical cabinet is 2 Steam generator and hot piping
selected, stainless steel 304 if 3 Insulation to EEnv specifcation
stainless steel 304 frame and
electrical cabinet is selected) 0 Not insulated
* This configuration will include pressure safety valve on CSG with body and internals made of stainless steel
** This option/configuration is not allowed with P4 control (Selective Control Panel)
Product nomenclature and selection guide continued on next page
TES Issue 7
Product nomenclature and selection guide (continued)
N None (only plates with anchor holes are provided)
Handling wheels and feet F Adjustable feet
W Pivoting wheels, lockable, with feet
M Manual stop valve

Plant steam inlet shut-off valve
AE Automatic isolation valve electrical **
N None
Plant steam line trapping
T Plant steam line trapping station
1 Timed TDS blowdown
TDS control system 2 TDS control with external probe (discontinuous metering) **
3 TDS control system w. internal probe (continuous metering) **
N None
Sampling cooler
S Sample-cooler and sampling valve
N None (water P > clean steam P + 0,5 bar g)

Feedwater pressurisation system
P Pump with VFD **
N None
Independent downstream plant
L Self-monitoring low level probe LP30 (available only with LP20) **
protection
T Temperature limiter **
N None
Feedwater pre-heating
PR Feed water pre-heating by heat recovery from primary condensate **
N None
I1 System diagnostics **
6.1
Intelligent diagnostics
I3 Integrity test ** 9
I4 System diagnostics + Integrity test **
N None
Clean steam outlet shut-off valve M Manual stop valve
AE Automatic stop valve electrical **
S EU PED test and CE marking of the assembly
U ASME U stamp
M MOM compliance
K KGS compliance
Test and certifications
D DOSH compliance
GC GB standard in Chinese language
GE GB standard in English language
SF None (as assembly)
V Viscorol (Magnetic Level Indicator)

Level indicator
L LP20 (Capacitance Level Probe)
** This option/configuration is not allowed with P4 control (Selective Control Panel)
Product nomenclature example

CSG-HS E F 020 - PN P3 C1 - 1 F 2 F - AE T - 3 S P L N I7 - AE S L
Not all configurations are available in every country. Please contact your local Spirax Sarco representative for more details.
TES Issue 7
6.1
10

TI-P664-01
TES Issue 5
CSG-FB
Clean steam generation system
for Food & Beverage
6.1
11
Description
Spirax Sarco has created a new range of steam generators for food and beverage applications to deliver food quality steam,
specifically for direct injection processes within the food & beverage industry sector, where steam is considered as an ingredient.
Primary heating medium is plant steam and the secondary steam should be generated from either de-mineralised or reverse osmosis
quality water. All generators are supplied as packaged solutions ready to install and commission.
Designed, manufactured and approved for Steam and Condensate applications. This product complies with EC1935:2004 Food
Contact Materials. It also complies with regulation EC2023:2006 on good manufacturing practice for materials and articles intended
to come into contact with food.
Product range
CSG-FB-020 nominal production capacity 200 kg/h (440 lbs/hr)*

Size:
Versions/Applications: FB Food and Beverage steam injection
(*) max steam production at reference operating conditions: primary steam at 10 bar g (145 psi g), production at 5 bar g (73 psi g), feed water
at 20 °C (68 °F).
TI-P664-01 Page 1 of 10
TES Issue 5
CSG-FB Clean steam generation system for Food & Beverage
- Compact design
- Spirax Sarco's worldwide service.
Compliances available but not standard in all geographies

EMEA Americas Asia Pacific
On On On
STD STD STD
request request request
-
mark with EU declaration of conformity according to the following directives: l l
- 2014/68/EU (PED) l l
- 2014/35/EU (LVD) l l
- 2014/30/EU (EMC) l l
6.1 - EC1935/2004 requirements as products intended to come into contact with food. l
12 - ASME design with U stamp certification l
- FDA requirements as products intended to come into contact with food. l
- Chinese GB national standard l
- GB4806 requirements as products intended to come into contact with food. l
Design conditions
Design pressure 12.8 bar g (187 psi g)
Primary side
Design temperature 194.4 °C (382 °F)
Secondary side Design temperature 194.4 °C (382 °F)

For a bespoke design,
contact Spirax Sarco
Safety valve set pressure 7 bar g (101.5 psi g)
Feedwater without pump 110 °C (230 °F)

Design temperature
with pump 100 °C (212 °F)
Page 2 of 10 TI-P664-01
TES Issue 5
Clean saturated steam, up to 6 bar g/165.0 °C

Production
(Clean saturated steam, up to 97 psi g/206 °F)
Minimum ambient
Plant steam, up to 12 bar g/191.7 °C temperature: 0 °C
Primary side
(Plant steam, up to 174 psi g/345 °F) Designed for indoor
installation only,
P min. ≥ P clean steam + 0.5 bar g Net positive suction head required protect from freezing.
(P min. ≥ P clean steam + 7.2 psi g) (see IM)
Feedwater
P max 8 bar g/T max 110 °C P max 8 bar g/T max 80 °C
(P max 116 psi g/T max 230 °F) (P max 116 psi g/T max 176 °F)
Note: Feedwater is recommended to be demineralised or Reverse Osmosis quality to ensure high performance.
Utilities
3 x 380 to 500 V +N
1 x 230 V +N 50/60 Hz
Electrical supply
50/60 Hz 1 kW (sizes 020-050) (inst.)
(cabinets)
0.4 kW (inst.) 1.5 kW (size 110) (inst.)
2 kW (size 160) (inst.)

(only for the unit with pneumatic actuators or Integrity test option)
6.1
13
TI-P664-01 Page 3 of 10
TES Issue 5
Performance of the units
4.5 4.0 3.5
10.0 225 259 297
9.5 205 239 276
CSG-FB-020 9.0 185 219 255
8.5 164 197 236
8.0 142 175 212
10.0 588 682 783
9.5 536 625 732
CSG-FB-050 9.0 485 571 671
8.5 431 516 611
8.0 375 461 553

Plant steam pressure/bar g
10.0 1,302 1,526 1,637
9.5 1,181 1,395 1,500
CSG-FB-110 9.0 1,054 1,264 1,500
6.1 8.5 940 1,136 1,360
14 8.0 833 1,006 1,223
10.0 1,894 2,220 2,552
9.5 1,702 2,026 2,371
CSG-FB-160 9.0 1,511 1,828 2,172
8.5 1,323 1,629 1,969
8.0 1,144 1,427 1,760
Page 4 of 10 TI-P664-01
TES Issue 5
Performance of the units (continued)

Max clean steam production (lbs/hr), with feedwater at 68 °F:
65.3 58.0 50.8
145.0 496 570 654
137.8 452 526 609
CSG-FB-020 130.5 407 482 562
123.3 361 435 515
116.0 314 387 467
145.0 1296 1,503 1,747
137.8 1181 1,379 1,613
CSG-FB-050 130.5 1069 1,259 1,479
123.3 951 1,138 1,347
116.0 826 1,017 1,219

Plant steam pressure/psi g
145.0 2,871 3,363 3,599
137.8 2,603 3,074 3,307
CSG-FB-110 130.5 2,324 2,786 3,307
123.3 2,073 2,503 2,999 6.1

116.0 1,836 2,217 2,695 15
145.0 4,175 4,894 5,625
137.8 3,753 4,467 5,228
CSG-FB-160 130.5 3,331 4,031 4,789
123.3 2,916 3,581 4,341
116.0 2,522 3,146 3,880
TI-P664-01 Page 5 of 10
TES Issue 5
Dimensions and weights
approximate in mm (inches) and kg (lbs) of a standard unit
Dimensions Weights
mm (inches) kg (lbs)
L W H E Empty In operation Maximum

Length Width Height Clearance for tube
bundle extraction
2000 850 1840 1250 550 650 (800)

CSG-FB 020
(79) (33) (72) (49) (1213) (1433) (1764
2350 850 1840 1300 850 1050 1250

CSG-FB 050
(93) (33) (72) (51) (1874) (2315) (2756)
2450 1450 2060 1600 1100 1450 1700

CSG-FB 110
(96) (57) (81) (63) (2425) (3197) (3748)
2950 1450 2060 2000 1550 2050 2450

CSG-FB 160
(116) (57) (81) (78) (3417) (4519) (5401)
Indicated dimensions are the maximum dimensions for a specific configuration of the package.
For detailed dimensions of the unit, size and position of the connections, clearance for the tube bundle extraction, weights and other
constructive information, refer to the specific general arrangement drawing of the product.
6.1
16
H
Page 6 of 10 TI-P664-01
TES Issue 5
approximate in mm (inches) and kg (lbs)
Dimensions Weights

Length Width Height Clearance for tube
bundle extraction
2100 950 1950 1250 700 800 950

CSG-FB 020
(83) (37) (77) (49) (1543) (1764) (2094)
2500 1100 2000 1300 1000 1200 1400

CSG-FB 050
(98) (43) (79) (51) (2205) (2646) (3086)
2550 1450 2250 1600 1300 1600 1850

CSG-FB 110
(100) (57) (89) (63) (2866) (3527) (4079)
3100 1500 2250 2000 1650 2200 2550

CSG-FB 160
(122) (59) (89) (79) (3638) (4850) (5622)
6.1
17
H
TI-P664-01 Page 7 of 10
TES Issue 5
Connections
Metric Imperial
020 050 110 160 020 050 110 160
Plant steam inlet DN32 DN50 DN80 DN100 1¼" 2" 3" 4"
Condensate outlet DN25 DN25 DN40 DN40 1" 1" 1½" 1½"
Clean steam outlet DN50 DN80 DN125 DN150 2" 3" 5" 6"
Feedwater inlet DN15 DN20 DN25 DN32 ½" ¾" 1" 1¼"
Safety valve 1" DN50 DN80 DN80 1" 1¼" 3" 3"
discharge G-f PN16 PN16 PN16 NPT NPT* NPT NPT
DN25 DN25 DN25 DN25 1" ¾" 1" 1"

Drain connection
Plant steam
DN15 DN15 DN15 DN15 ½" ½" ½" ½"
condensate drain
connection
TDS Blowdown DN15 DN15 DN15 DN15 ½" ½" ½” ½"

Sampling system
½" BSP- ½" BSP- ½" BSP- ½" BSP- ½" ½" ½" ½"
(cooling water in/
6 mm 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm BSP BSP BSP BSP
out-sample out)
Options
6.1
18
Page 8 of 10 TI-P664-01
TES Issue 5
Basic configuration
E EN
A ASME
Design code
G GB
J JBA
Shell type S Flanged openable-shell and tube, flanged openable without integrated deaerator
020 Up to 200 kg/h (440 lbs/hr)
050 Up to 500 kg/h (1002 lbs/hr)

Unit size (at the reference operating conditions)
110 Up to 1100 kg/h (2425 lbs/hr)
160 Up to 1600 kg/h (3527 lbs/hr)
PN Pneumatic (fail-safe)
Valve actuation type
EL Electric (fail-safe)
P1 ABB AC500 series + 7" display
P2 Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1700 series + 7" display

Control
P3 Siemens S7.1200 series + 7" display
P4 Selective Control Panel (with PLC ABB AC500 series + 7" display)
C0 None
C1 BACnet IP
C2 Profinet
C3 Modbus TCP/IP
Communication interface C4 BACnet MSTP

6.1
C5 Profibus 19
C6 Modbus RTU
0 Base and cabinet made of carbon steel, painted
1 Open frame and cabinet made of carbon steel, painted
2 Frame w. side panels and cabinet made of carb. steel, painted

Unit frame/Electrical cabinet
3 Base and cabinet made of stainless steel (304) *
4 Open frame and cabinet made of stainless steel (304) *
5 Frame with side panels and cabinet made of stainless steel (304) *
Control Panel location S Side
1 Steam generator body only
2 Steam generator and hot piping

Insulation
3 Insulation to EEnv specification
0 Not insulated
* This option/configuration is not allowed with P4 control (Selective Control Panel)
TI-P664-01 Page 9 of 10
TES Issue 5
N None (only plates with anchor holes are provided)
Handling wheels and feet F Adjustable feet
W Pivoting wheels, lockable, with feet
M Manual stop valve

Plant steam inlet shut-off valve
AE Automatic electric isolation valve *
N None
Plant steam line trapping
1 Timed TDS blowdown

TDS control system
2 TDS control with external probe (discontinuous metering) *
N None
Sampling cooler
S Sample-cooler and sampling valve
N None (water P > clean steam P + 0,5 bar g)

Feedwater pressurisation system
P Pump with VFD *
Independent downstream plant N None

protection T Temperature limiter *
Feedwater pre-heating N None
N None
I1 System diagnostics *
Intelligent diagnostics
I3 Integrity test *
I4 System diagnostics + Integrity test *

6.1 N None
20 Clean steam outlet shut-off valve M Manual stop valve
AE Automatic electric isolation valve *
S EU PED test and CE marking of the assembly
U ASME U stamp
M MOM compliance
K KGS compliance
Test and certifications D DOSH compliance
GC GB standard in Chinese language
GE GB standard in English language
SF None (as assembly)
U ASME U stamp in line with FDS requirements.
Level indicator V Viscorol (Magnetic Level Indicator)
* This option/configuration is not allowed with P4 control (Selective Control Panel)

CSG-FB E S 020-PN P3 C1-1 S 2 F-AE T-2 S P T N I1-AE S V
Page 10 of 10 TI-P664-01
TES Issue 5

TI-P664-05
TES Issue 1
CSG-FBHP
High pressure clean steam generation system
for Food & Beverage
6.1
21
Description
Spirax Sarco has created a new range of steam generators to deliver food quality steam, specifically for direct injection processes
within the food & beverage industry sector, where steam is considered as an ingredient. Primary heating medium is plant steam and
the secondary steam should be generated from either de-mineralised or reverse osmosis quality water. All generators are supplied as
packaged solutions ready to install and commission.
Product range
CSG FBHP-130 maximum production capacity 1300kg/h (2866 lbs/h)*
Size: CSG FBHP-300 maximum production capacity 3000kg/h (6614 lbs/h)*
CSG FBHP- 470 maximum production capacity 4700kg/h (10,362 lbs/h)*
CSG FBHP-600 maximum production capacity 6000kg/h (13,228 lbs/h)*
Versions/Applications: FBHP Food and Beverage steam injection for high pressure applications
(*) max steam production at reference operating conditions: primary steam at 10.7 bar g (155.2 psi g), production at 8 bar g (116 psi g ), feed
water at 20 °C (68 °F).
TES Issue 1
CSG-FBHP High pressure clean steam generation system for Food & Beverage
- Compact design
Compliances available but not standard in all geographies
STD On request
-
mark with EU declaration of conformity according to the following directives: -
- 2014/68/EU (PED) -
- 2014/35/EU (LVD) -
- 2014/30/EU (EMC) -
- EC1935/2004 requirements as products intended to come into contact with food. -
6.1
22 Design conditions
Primary side
Design temperature 200 °C
Secondary side Design temperature 200 °C
Safety valve set pressure 12 bar g
Feedwater without pump 200 °C

Design temperature
with pump 80 °C
For a bespoke design, contact Spirax Sarco
TES Issue 1
Operating limits
Clean saturated steam, up to 8 bar g/175 °C

Production
(Clean saturated steam, up to 125 psi g /353 °F)
Plant steam, up to 12 bar g/191.7 °C

Primary side
(Plant steam, up to 174 psi g/345 °F)
Ambient Temperature:
P min. ≥ P clean steam + 2 bar g Net positive suction head required 0-40 °C
(P min. ≥ P clean steam + 29 psi g) (see IM) Designed for indoor
installation only,
P max 12 bar g/T max 200 ºC P max 12 bar g/T max 100 ºC
protect from freezing.
(P max 174 psi g/T max 392 ºF P max 174 psi g/T max 212 ºF
Feedwater quality:
pH 5.5 ÷ 7.5 (at 20 ºC/68 ºF)
Hardness ≦ 0.02 mmol/l
Chloride Please refer to the table below
Feedwater Conductivity ≦ 20 μS/cm
Chlorides concentration limit in inlet feedwater
Inlet feedwater pH
Blowdown set
pH = 5.5 pH = 6.5 pH = 7.5
5% ≦ 0.5 mg/l ≦ 1 mg/l ≦ 3 mg/l
10% ≦ 1 mg/l ≦ 2 mg/l ≦ 6 mg/l
3 x 380 to 500 V + N
1 x 230 V +N
Electrical supply 50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
(cabinets) (0.37kW - 5.5kW) + 0.4kW depending
0.4 kW (instr.)
upon package size and csg pressure

(only for the unit with pneumatic actuators or Integrity test option)
6.1
23
TES Issue 1

8 7 6 5
10.7 1345 1275 1191 1095
9 - 1275 1191 1095

CSG-FBHP-130
7.6 - - 1191 1095
6.5 - - - 1062*
10.7 1883 1785 1668 1533
9 - 1785 1668 1533

CSG-FBHP-185
7.6 - - 1668 1533
6.5 - - - 1514*
10.7 2354 2231 2085 1916
9 - 2231 2085 1916

CSG-FBHP-235
7.6 - - 2085 1916
6.5 - - - 1916
10.7 3027 2868 2680 2463
9 - 2868 2680 2463

CSG-FBHP-300 Plant steam pressure/bar g
7.6 - - 2642* 2463
6.5 - - - 2338*
10.7 3767 3569 3335 3065
6.1 CSG-FBHP-375
9 - 3569 3335 3065
7.6 - - 3335 3065

24 6.5 - - - 3065
10.7 4708 4461 4169 3832
9 - 4461 4169 3832

CSG-FBHP- 400
7.6 - - 4169 3832
6.5 - - - 3832
10.7 6034* 5736 5360 4926
9 - 5251* 5286* 4926

CSG-FBHP-600
7.6 - - 4550* 4586*
6.5 - - - 4027*
*primary pipe velocity limited to 40ms-1

Note: Plant steam pressure must be sufficiently greater than clean steam pressure for clean steam production
TES Issue 1
Performance of the units (continued)

Max clean steam production (lbs/hr), with feedwater at 68 °F:
116 102 87 73
155 2965 2811 2626 2414
131 - 2811 2626 2414

CSG-FBHP-130
110 - - 2626 2414
94 - - - 2341*
155 4151 3935 3677 3380
131 - 3935 3677 3380

CSG-FBHP-185
110 - - 3677 3380
94 - - - 3338*
155 5190 4919 4597 4224
131 - 4919 4597 4224

CSG-FBHP-235
110 - - 4597 4224
94 - - - 4224
155 6673 6323 5908 5430
131 - 6323 5908 5430

CSG-FBHP-300 Plant steam pressure/psi g
110 - - 5825* 5430
94 - - - 5154*
155 8305 7868 7352 6757
6.1
131 - 7868 7352 6757
CSG-FBHP-375
110 - - 7352 6757
94 - - - 6757
25
155 10379 9835 9191 8448
131 - 9835 9191 8448

CSG-FBHP- 400
110 - - 9191 8448
94 - - - 8448
155 13303* 12646 11817 10860
131 - 11576* 11654* 10860

CSG-FBHP-600
110 - - 10031* 10110*
94 - - - 8878*
*primary pipe velocity limited to 40ms-1

Note: Plant steam pressure must be sufficiently greater than clean steam pressure for clean steam production
TES Issue 1
Dimensions and weights approximate in mm (inches) and kg (lbs) of a standard unit
Dimensions Weights
L W H Empty In operation Maximum

Length Width Height
130 2800 (110) 1000 (39) 2400 (94) 2100 (4630) 2250 (4960) 2400 (5291)
185 3100 (122) 1000 (39) 2450 (96) 2346 (5172) 2500 (5512) 2700 (5952)
235 3400 (134) 1100 (43) 2550 (100) 2573 (5672) 2750 (6063) 2900 (6393)
300 3700 (146) 1100 (43) 2060 (81) 2800 (6173) 3000 (6614) 3200 (7055)
375 3900 (154) 1100 (43) 2070 (81) 4968 (10953) 5200 (11464) 5400 (11905)
470 4000 (157) 1100 (43) 2080 (82) 5095 (11233) 5300 (11685) 5600 (12346)
600 4200 (165) 1100 (43) 2090 (82) 5350 (11794) 5600 (12346) 5900 (13007)
Indicated dimensions are the maximum dimensions for a specific configuration of the package.
For detailed dimensions of the unit, size and position of the connections,
weights and other constructive information, refer to the specific general
arrangement drawing of the product.
6.1
26
TES Issue 1
Connections - Metric
130 185 235 300 375 470 600
DN50 * DN65 DN80 DN80 DN100 DN100 DN100

Plant steam Inlet
PN16 PN16 PN16 PN16 PN16 PN16 PN16

Preheater Condensate Outlet

CSG Condensate Outlet

Feedwater Inlet

Drain Outlet

Blowdown Outlet /TDS
DN80 DN100 DN125 DN125 DN150 DN150 DN200

Clean Steam Outlet
PN40/PN25** PN40/PN25** PN40/PN25** PN40/PN25** PN40/PN25** PN40/PN25** PN25
¾" ¾" ¾" 1" 1" 1" 1"

Clean Steam Safety Valve Discharge Outlet
NPT-F NPT-F NPT-F NPT-F NPT-F NPT-F NPT-F
Plant Steam Condensate Outlet (Drain) DN15 PN40
Comp. Air Line for Integrity Test ¼" NPT-F
Pneumatic Air Supply Inlet ¼" BSP-F
Sampling system
½" BSP- 6 mm
(cooling water in/out-sample out)
Options
* If the Auto Plant Steam Isolation is selected, then this should be PN40
** Clean steam outlet connection is PN40 or PN24 on sizes 130, 185, 235, 300, 375 and 470, depending if the option of automatic 6.1
clean steam isolation is selected. However, PN25 and PN40 flange connections on these sizes are interchangeable.
27
TES Issue 1
Design code E EN EN
Shell Type W Welded – not openable W
130 Up to 1300 kg/h (X lbs/hr)
185 Up to 1850kg/h (X lbs/hr)
Unit Size 375 Up to 3750kg/h (X lbs/hr) 130.10.1
Plant steam Kv 10, 16, 36, 46, 63, 100, 160
Feedwater Kv 1, 1.6, 2.5, 4, 6.3
PN Pneumatic (fail safe)

Control Valve Actuation PN
EL Electric (fail safe)
P1 ABB AC500 + 7" Display
Control P2 Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1700 + 7" Display P1
P3 Siemens S7.1200 + 7" Display
C0 None
C1 BACnet IP
C2 Profinet
6.1 C3 Modbus TCP/IP
28 Communication interface C4 BACnet MSTP C0
C5 Profibus
C6 Modbus RTU
0 Basement and cabinet made of carbon steel, painted *

Frame and cabinet 0
3 Base and cabinet made of stainless steel (304)
Control Panel Location S Side S
1 Steam Generator Body only to EnEV (100 mm)
Insulation 3 Steam Generator Body to EnEV + Piping (50mm) 1
0 Not insulated
N None (plates with anchor holes provided)

Wheels and feet N
F Adjustable feet
M Manual stop valve

Plant steam inlet shut-off M
AE Automated stop valve (Electric)
N None
Plant steam line trapping N
TES Issue 1
1 Timed TDS Blowdown (no control)

TDS Control 1
2 TDS Control with external probe (discontinuous metering)
N None
Sample Cooler N
S Sample Cooler and Sampling Valve
N None (water P = clean steam P + 2.0 barg)
P1 Pump with VFD (for 1 barg clean steam)
Feedwater pressurisation P4 Pump with VFD (for 4 barg clean steam) N
N None
Plant protection L Self monitoring low level probe LP30 (available only with LP20) N
V Viscorol with low level limit switch
Feedwater pre-heating N Pre-heating from primary steam supply N
N None
I1 System Diagnostics
Intelligent diagnostics N
I3 Integrity test
I4 System diagnostics + Integrity test

6.1
N None 29
Clean steam shut off M Manual stop valve N
AE Automatic stop valve (electric)
EU PED test and marking of the assembly and conformity

Test and certification S S
declaration according to EC1935
V Viscorol (Magnetic Level Indicator)

Level indicator V
L LP20 (Capacitance Level Probe)

CSG-FBHP EN W 130.10.1 PN P1 C0 0 S 1 N M N 1 N N N N N N S V
TES Issue 1
6.1
30

TI-P486-08
TES Issue 2
CSM-K
High Capacity Clean Steam Generator
The typical package shown below is for illustration purposes only
6.1
31
Description
The CSM-K range of high capacity clean steam generators has been designed to provide sterilizer grade clean steam from suitably
treated feedwater using plant steam as the heating medium. Units using other fluids on the heating media can be provided to special
order.
The range covers outputs up to 3 800 kg/h.
The pressure vessel is manufactured in accordance with the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) and is supplied with a standard
package of documentation. The primary medium passes through a tube bundle which can be extracted for cleaning and maintenance.
All secondary wetted parts are manufactured from 316 stainless steel.
Applications
Suitable for process applications, laundries, food and beverage applications, hospital sterilizers, laboratories and humidification. The
CSM-K can also be used in a number of electronic production processes, pharmaceutical and general biotechnological applications.
Please refer to our general sales brochure on clean steam for information on other products that can be used in association with the
clean steam generator.
Principle features:
- Produces clean steam for sterilization, humidification, and culinary or clean processes, from standard plant steam.
- Fully assembled skid-mounted with all essential safety systems.
- PLC for accurate steam and feedwater pressure control.
- All clean steam wetted parts in 316 stainless steel to avoid contamination.
- Produces steam to HTM 2031 standards.
- Automatic blowdown controls - TDS and bottom blowdown.
Page 1 of 5
Materials
Primary steam header Carbon steel
Primary side pipework and fittings SG iron and carbon steel
Tube sheet Stainless steel AISI 316L
Gaskets Reinforced graphite
Tube bundle Stainless steel AISI 316L
Shell Stainless steel AISI 316L
Shell side flanges Stainless steel AISI 316L
Support frame Carbon steel
Insulation (optional extra) Rock wool + Cover in Aluminium (standard) or stainless steel 304
Maximum steam pressures

Maximum primary steam pressure 12 bar g
Maximum clean steam pressure 7 bar g
Technical data
Compressed air: A 6 bar g compressed air supply is required; where this is unavailable an optional compressor
Pneumatics
can be supplied with the unit (at extra cost).
Electrical requirements: 400 V 3-phase 50 Hz. A fused isolator of the correct rating must be incorporated in the
Electrical supply line as near as possible to the unit. Information on the installed load for each individual unit will be supplied
by Spirax Sarco.
Property Maximum value

6.1 Ammonium 0.2 mg/l
32 To meet the requirements of HTM 2031 we would

Heavy metals substitute 0.1 mg/l
recommend the use of de-mineralised or reverse Chloride 0.5 mg/l
osmosis feedwater.
Feedwater quality It is advised that analysis of the feedwater is Nitrate 0.2 mg/l
undertaken prior to installation and commissioning.
Whilst not mandatory the table opposite gives a Residue on evaporation 30.0 mg/l
guide to recommended typical values.
Phosphate 0.1 mg/l
Silicate 0.1 mg/l
Electrical conducivity at 25 °C 35.0 µS/cm
Control The unit is PLC controlled with the generator having pressure and level control.
TES Issue 2
CSM-K High Capacity Clean Steam Generator
Dimensions (approximate in mm) and standard output production (approximate in kg/h)
Standard output production is based on the following conditions: - Primary steam pressure 10 bar g;
- Clean steam pressure 3.5 bar g;
- Feedwater inlet temperature 20 °C
Engineering drawings, including holding down details, will be provided after ordering 'for approval' and as 'final certified' (as built).
Model CSM-K 401 402 403 Model CSM-K 702 703 704
Maximum Length L 2 900 3 400 3 700 Maximum Length L 3 900 4 150 4 900
dimensions dimensions
Width W 1 400 1 400 1 400 Width W 1 800 1 800 1 800
(guidance) (guidance)
in mm Height H 1 600 1 600 1 600 in mm Height H 2 050 2 050 2 050
Clean steam output (kg/h) 260 320 370 Clean steam output (kg/h) 1 730 2 000 2 630
Model CSM-K 501 502 503 Model CSM-K 802 803 804
Maximum Length L 3 000 3 500 3 800 Maximum Length L 4 000 4 000 5 000
dimensions dimensions
Width W 1 500 1 500 1 500 Width W 1 900 1 900 1 900
(guidance) (guidance)
in mm Height H 1 700 1 700 1 700 in mm Height H 2 250 2 250 2 250
Clean steam output (kg/h) 500 620 700 Clean steam output (kg/h) 2 600 2 900 3 800
Model CSM-K 601 602 603 604
Maximum Length L 3 300 3 800 4 000 4 750

dimensions
Width W 1 700 1 700 1 700 1 700
(guidance)
in mm Height H 1 900 1 900 1 900 1 900 6.1
Clean steam output (kg/h) 930 1 150 1 300 1 700
33
W L
TES Issue 2
Note: To meet the requirements of HTM 2010 and HTM 2031 T1 T2

it is recommended that the feedwater entering the generator Primary steam temperature Clean steam temperature
is a minimum of 85 °C. We would recommend the use of the
CSM-PD preheat and degasser system.
Sizing and selection example

A CSM-K is required to generate 1000 kg/h clean steam @ 4.5 bar g (T2) with
steam @ 9 bar g after the control valve (T1).
The water inlet temperature (T3) is 30 °C
T3
From Table 1: Water inlet temperature
The water corrective factor @ 30 °C = 1.1
Consequently, the steam load = 1000 kg/h (T2) x 1.1 = 1100 kg/h
Table 1 Corrective factor for water inlet temperatures

10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 70 °C 80 °C 90 °C 100 °C 110 °C 120 °C
1.12 1.11 1.10 1.08 1.065 1.05 1.035 1.02 1.00 0.96 0.94 0.93
T1 (primary steam pressure) at 9 bar g = 180 °C

From steam tables: T2 (clean steam pressure) at 4.5 bar g = 156 °C
T1 - T2 = 24 °C
From Table 2 select the unit: - Follow the T1 - T2 heading to 24 °C
- Follow the column downwards from 24 °C until you reach a figure either the same as the
required steam load or larger. For this example it is 1198 kg/h.
- Follow the line to the left hand side of the Table to select the correct unit for your application.
6.1
- Model selected = CSM-K604
34
Table 2
CSM-K sizing and selection in kg/h @ 20 °C water inlet temperature and 10 bar g primary steam pressure
T1-T2 52 °C 37 °C 28 °C 26 °C 24 °C 20 °C 16 °C 12 °C 11 °C
CSM-K401 403 278 219 202 184 149 110 75 63
CSM-K402 500 350 273 250 230 185 137 93 78
CSM-K403 571 397 308 285 262 211 156 105 88
CSM-K501 752 522 409 377 346 279 207 140 118
CSM-K502 936 652 509 469 431 347 256 173 146
CSM-K503 1 058 738 573 530 487 393 291 196 165
CSM-K601 1 400 974 760 701 645 519 385 259 219
CSM-K602 1 737 1 210 945 871 803 645 479 322 271
CSM-K603 1 976 1 372 1 069 985 907 730 540 364 307
CSM-K604 1 810 1 413 1 300 1 198 962 720 476 404
CSM-K702 2 512 1 887 1 470 1 355 1 246 1 003 743 501 422
CSM-K703 2 120 1 651 1 531 1 408 1 129 840 564 476
CSM-K704 2 700 2 178 2 017 1 844 1 489 1 109 743 625
CSM-K802 3 354 2 727
CSM-K803 3 063 2 390 2 206 2 030 1628 1 212 813 687
CSM-K804 3 604 3 145 2 885 2 632 2 139 1 592 1 062 901
TES Issue 2
Typical specification
The clean steam provider shall be a Spirax Sarco clean steam generator CSM-K704 designed and built to produce steam to the
HTM 2031 standard, dependant upon feedwater.
To raise 2 000 kg/h of clean steam at 3 bar g when supplied with plant steam at 8 bar g.
All items are to be pre-assembled and mounted on to a compact frame.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco CSM-K704 clean steam generator.
Please provide details of primary steam pressure, clean steam pressure, clean steam flowrate and feedwater system.
Ancillary items to be used depending on installation:
- Blowdown vessel and system.
- Clean steam check valves.
- Clean steam isolation valves.
- Primary steam isolation valves.
- Clean steam and primary steam trapsets.
- CSM-PD preheater and degasser unit.
Other items may be required, please contact Spirax Sarco to discuss the full installation.
6.1
35
TES Issue 2
6.1
36

TI-P486-20
TES Issue 4
m-CSG
Ultra-compact
Clean Steam Generation System
Description
The m-CSG series of indirect mini clean steam generators are very compact units, designed to produce up to 300/600 kg/h (at nominal
operating conditions) of clean steam, using plant steam as primary medium. The units are supplied ready for installation into the
application.
Versions and applications:

300 Unit for the nominal production of 300 kg/h*
Size:
600 Unit for the nominal production of 600 kg/h*
H "Humidification": humidification (AHU), sterilization of containers, generic use of clean steam.
Versions/ "Food&Beverage" - EC 1935/2004 Compliant: direct steam injection in food products (e.g. cooking), other
Applications: F applications where it is required the compliance with the EC directive as products intended to come in contact
with food.
(*) max steam production at reference operating conditions: primary steam at 9-10 bar g, production at 3 bar g, feed water at 20 °C.
6.1
37
Page 1 of 7
- Ultra-compact design: space saving
- Modulating pressure and level control: pressure stability and

steam quality improvement
- Tube-bundle extractable: possible replacement, easy

maintenance
- Packaged system, assembled on a metal base, with on board

wired control panel: easy installation
- Gaskets on clean steam and water side in PTFE, FDA compliant
- Stop valves on the inlets/outlets of the fluids: possible partial or total system isolation (e.g. for maintenance)
- Strainers upstream: to protect the control valves, steam traps and other sensitive equipment from possible damage caused by
impurities that drag from the fluids
- Heating ramp: to avoid material stress during start-up from cold
- System supplied properly insulated
- Engineered, built and tested by Spirax Sarco Italy, according to the following European Union Directives:
- 2014/68/EU (PED)
- 2014/35/EU (LVD)
- 2014/30/EU (EMC)
- CSG design/construction code: EN 13445
- Unit classified as ASSEMBLY, supplied with a nameplate bearing the mark and comes complete with EC Declaration of
Conformity.
6.1
Design conditions
38 Design pressure (PS): 12.8 bar g
Plant steam side (primary)
Design temperature (TS): 194.4 °C
Design pressure (PS): 8 bar g
Clean steam side Design temperature (TS): 194.4 °C
Safety valve setting: 6 bar g
Design pressure (PS): 8 bar g

Feedwater side
Design temperature (TS): 110 °C
For a bespoke design, contact Spirax Sarco
TES Issue 4
m-CSG Ultra-compact Clean Steam Generation System
Production Clean saturated steam, up to 5 bar g at 159 °C
Primary side Plant steam, up to 12 bar g/191.7 °C
Net positive suction head required

Feedwater P min ³ P clean steam + 0.5 bar g (refer to IM-P486-21)
Pmax 8 bar g/Tmax 110 °C
Minimum ambient temperature : 0 °C

Designed for indoor installation only, protect from freezing.
Utilities
Without pump With fixed speed With fixed speed With variable speed
pump 50 Hz pump 60 Hz pump
Electrical supply: 1x230V + N 3x400V + N 3x380V + N 3x380-500V + N

(to electrical cabinet) 50/60Hz 50Hz 60Hz 50/60Hz
0,4 kW (inst.) 0,8 kW (inst.) 0,8 kW (inst.) 0,8 kW (inst.)
Air supply: min. 3 bar - max 15 bar

(to filters) (only for the units with pneumatics actuators)

Clean steam production pressure (bar g)
300
5 4 3 2 1
12 260 300/330 320/430 N/A N/A

6.1
10 180 250 320/330 320/420 N/A
Plant steam
8 100 160 240 320/340 290 39
pressure (bar g)
6 - 75 140 230 290
4 - - - 120 210
Clean steam production pressure (bar g)

600
5 4 3 2 1
12 490/540 500/660 500/700 N/A N/A
10 490 500/660 500/700 470/730 N/A

Plant steam
8 270 440 500/600 470/730 510/650
pressure (bar g)
6 - 200 380 470/520 510/650
4 - - - 310 430
Max productions refer to clean generator clean, without blowdowns.
The double flowrate (Q1/Q2) means respectively with supply water at +0.5/1.0 bar g than the pressure of the steam generated.
For the units equipped with pump, consider the production Q2.
N/A = not recommended operating condition, it is necessary to reduce the primary steam pressure.
TES Issue 4
Dimensions and weights (approximate in mm and kg)
Dimensions (mm) Weights (kg)

Length Width Height Clearance for tube bundle extraction
300 1472 860 1615 950 350-400 * 430-480 * 520-570 *
600 1945 905 1800 - 1950 * 1050 450-500 * 600-650 * 700-750 *
* Depending on what configuration is chosen
For detailed dimensions of the unit, size and position of the

connections, clearance for the tube bundle extraction,
weights and other constructive information, refer to the
specific general arrangement drawing of the product. F
D
H
Main parts (basic unit)
The unit comprises the following main parts:
Steam generator and instrumentation/ C
1 accessories, protection and safety devices
E
Primary steam control group and line
2 accessories B
3 Steam trap group and line accessories.
Feedwater control group and line

4 accessories G
5 Electrical control panel

6.1 L
40
W
5
2
Main connections
300 600
A Clean steam outlet: DN50 PN16 DN80 PN40
B Feedwater inlet: DN15 PN16 DN20 PN16
C Generator drain: DN25 PN16 DN25 PN16
vers."H":
1 DN40 PN16
D Safety valve discharge: 1" G-F
vers."F":
DN50 PN16
3
E (spare) ½"G-F ½"G-F
Plant steam inlet
F DN32 PN16 DN50 PN16
(primary):
G Condensate outlet: DN25 PN16 DN25 PN16
Primary steam
4 H
condensate drain: (*)
DN15 PN40 DN15 PN40
I TDS discharge: (*) DN15 PN40 DN15 PN40

Sample cooler: (*)
½" BSP ½" BSP
J (cooling water inlet/
- 6 mm - 6 mm
outlet – sample outlet)
UNI-EN 1092-1 PN16/40 flanged connections
(*) options
TES Issue 4
Automation
The unit is equipped with an electrical control panel.
The process variables (pressure and level) are maintained by digital regulators or PLC control logic.
Front panel controls/lights: main switch, emergency push-button, switch for local/remote system start with system in operation light,
blocks reset button, power supply and alarms lights.
Feed-back available (SPDT contacts): power supply, system in operation, alarm (cumulative).
Digital input (stable contacts): external consent/alarm, remote system start.
Piping and instrumentation diagram (solution with pneumatic valves and without a pump)
On field instrument/probe
Electrical controller
Alarm with signalling
Safety interlock by alarm
CSG pressure regulator

SP
4-20 mA
Clean steam
CSG high
pressure
4-20 mA alarm PSV
setting
6 bar g Discharge to a
EV1
CV1 safe location
Instrument air
VB
Plant steam
N.C.
CSG
level regulator 6.1
VB
Clean steam generator
CSG pressure control
valve (with shut-off m-CSG SP 41
function) 4-20 mA
CSG
Power supply
high
Monophase, 230 V/50-60 Hz CSG
level
or 3 phase 400 V +N/50-60 Hz low
Electrical alarm
0.4 kW (inst.) level
system alarm
control
panel
Pneumatic air Drain

supply
Minimum - 3 bar g 4-20 mA
Maximum - 15 bar g EV2
(to the air filter/reducers of Condensate CV2
the control valves)
Instrument air
Supply water
N.C.
CSG level control valve P water P clean steam + 0.5 bar g
(with shut-off function)
TES Issue 4
Materials
Body made of AISI 316
Tube-bundle made of AISI 316
Steam generator Head (primary) made of carbon steel
Gasket tube-bundle/body in PTFE
Mounting supports made of AISI 304
Equipment with AISI 316 body/parts in contacts

Accessories fitted on board
Gaskets in PTFE
Equipment with AISI 316 body and internal parts
Feedwater line Piping schedule 10s made of AISI 316
Gaskets in PTFE
Equipment with cast iron body and stainless steel internal parts
Primary steam and condensate lines Piping schedule 40 made of carbon steel, painted
Gaskets in graphite, reinforced
Control panel cabinet Carbon steel, painted RAL 7035 (stainless steel as option)
Skid basement / supports Carbon steel, painted Jet-black (stainless steel as option)
Ceramic fibre
Insulation
Stainless steel (AISI 304) cladding
Available accessories/options:
- Clean steam intake stop valve
- Control valves with electrical actuators

6.1 - Timed TDS blow-down system or TDS discontinuous control system with probe and dedicated controller inside control panel
42 - Sample cooler
- Primary steam pipeline trap group
- Handling wheels
- Feedwater pressurization system with fixed speed pump (50 or 60 Hz) or with variable speed pump with integrated VFD
- Control panel with PLC logic and possible serial-bus communication interface
- Frame and control panel cabinet made of stainless steel
- Feedwater RO system (as an auxiliary unit).
Documentation/certifications
The unit will be supplied complete with:
- Process and instrument diagram (P&ID) with the complete list of associated equipment used to assemble the unit
- Dimensional drawing (G.A. drawing)
- Wiring diagram of the control panel
- Installation and Maintenance Instructions (IMI)
- Additional instructions (e.g. unit with PLC logic)
- Technical specifications and manuals for all of the associated equipment used to assemble the unit
- Assembly 'EC' Declaration of Conformity (PED)
- Assembly EC 1935/2004 Declaration of Conformity ("F" version)
For any other document/certification, please contact: Spirax Sarco Technical Department
TES Issue 4
Size Configuration Options
mCSG 300 - h 1 1 - 0 0 0 7 0 1 1 0 1
Basic configuration
- 300: Unit for nominal production of 300 kg/h 300
Size:
- 600: Unit for nominal production of 600 kg/lh 600
- H: "Humidification'" - general use of clean steam * H
Version
- F: "Food&Beverage" - EC 19135/2004 compliant F
- Pneumatic (fail-safe) * 1
Valves actuation
- Electric (fail-safe) 2
- Control valve only (P water> P clean steam+ 0.5 bar g) * 1
- Control valve + pump 50 Hz (0.1 bar g < P water< 1 bar g) 2
Feedwater group:
- Control valve + pump 60 Hz (0.1 bar g < P water< 1 bar g) 3
- Control valve + pump+ VFD (0.1 bar g < P water< P clean steam) 4
Options (* = default selection)
- None * 0
Clean steam outlet stop valve:
- Ball valve (manual) 1
- None * 0
- TDS control system w. CP10 probe and BC3150 controller 1
TDS control/Sampling: - Sample cooler 2
- TDS control system (CP10/BC3150) + sample-cooler 3
- Timed TDS blowdown (no control) 4
- None * 0
Plant steam line trap (primary side):
- Steam trap station with pocket 1
- Electronic controllers SX80 (no more available) 1
- Electronic controllers SX90 (with remote SP and PV rtx) 2
- PLC logic = ABB AC500 series with 7" display touch-screen 3
- PLC logic = Eaton XV102 series with 7" ,display touch-screen 4
Control: - PLC logic = Siemens S7.300 series with 7" display touch-screen (no
more available)
5
6.1
- PLC logic = Siemens S7.1200 series with 7" display touch-screen 6
- Electronic controller SX1650 * 7 43
- Other (bespoke unit) 9
- None * (default with electronic regulators) 0
- Modbus RTU 1
- BACnet MS/TP 2
- Modbus TCP/IP 3
Communication interface (only with - DeviceNet (no more available) 4

PLC control logic): - CANopen (no more available) 5
- BACnet IP 6
- Profibus DP 7
- Profinet 8
- Other (if feasible, bespoke unit) 9
- Carbon steel, painted * 1
Unit frame/Control panel cabinet:
- Stainless steel (AISI 304) 2
- None 0
Insulation:
- Steam generator insulated * 1
- None* 0
Handling wheels:
- Wheels, lockable (carbon steel) 1
PED test/certification of the
- PED test/certification of the assembly and '"CE" marked * 1
assembly (EU Directive 2014/68/EU):
- Standard built (default selection) *
Customisation:
- Bespoke unit (to be specified) S
Product selection example

mCSG 300 - H 1 1 - 0 0 0 7 0 1 1 0 1

1 off Spirax Sarco mCSG 300-H11-000701101 mini clean steam generation system.
TES Issue 4
6.1
44

TI-P486-12
TES Issue 2
CSM-PD
Pre-heating and Degassing System
for use with Clean and Pure Steam Generators
6.1
45
Description
The pre-heating and degassing packaged system is available in several tank capacities enabling suitable feedwater to be supplied for
clean and pure steam generators up to a steam production rate of 4200 kg/h. Larger capacities are available upon request.
The unit comes tested and ready to commision once connected to available services.
Available types
CSM-PD500 Shell capacity 500 litres (working capacity 370 litres)
CSM-PD packages are also available using superheated water as the primary heating medium. Details are available on request from
Spirax Sarco.
Applications
The use of a pre-heating and degassing unit, for use with feedwater in unfired clean or pure steam generators solves a number of
problems, reducing the life cycle costs of a steam generation system. In these systems chemicals cannot be used for treating or
degassing the feedwater and therefore 'thermophysical/mechanical' systems are used instead, such as pre-heating of the generator
feedwater to a temperature above 85 °C.
Principal features:
- External heat exchanger
- Microprocessor feedwater control
- All components in contact with clean water are stainless steel
Page 1 of 4
Connection size
CSM-PD500
Connection Connection type
CSM-PD1000
CSM-PD2000
Plant steam Flanged PN16 DN20 - DN40
Treated water Flanged PN16 DN25 - DN50
Condensate drain Flanged PN16 DN20 - DN32
Feedwater Flanged PN16 DN25 - DN32
Drain Flanged PN16 DN25
Air supply Push fit for nylon pipe 8 mm ØD
Pre-heat tank overflow Flanged PN16 DN40
Pressure 10 bar g
Working
Temperature 184 °C
Primary side (plant steam)
Pressure 10 bar g
Design
Temperature 200 °C
Pressure 0.5 - 4 bar g

Working
Temperature 0 - 100 °C
Secondary side (feedwater) and heat exchanger
Pressure 10 bar g
Design
Temperature 110 °C
6.1 Working
Pressure 0 bar g
46 Secondary side (treated water)

Temperature 0 - 100 °C
Pressure 0.49 bar g

Design
Temperature 110 °C
Materials
Part Material
Pre-heat tank Stainless steel 304L
Heat exchanger tubes Stainless steel 316L
Frame Mild steel Fe 360, painted
Feedwater pipework Stainless steel 316L
Cabinet enclosure Carbon steel, painted
Insulation covers Aluminium
Insulation Glass fibre
Pre-heat tank overflow pipework Stainless steel 316L
TES Issue 2
CSM-PD Pre-heating and Degassing System for use with Clean and Pure Steam Generators
Technical date
Compressed air: A 6 bar g compressed air supply is required; where this is unavailable an optional compressor
Pneumatics
can be supplied with the unit (at extra cost).
Electrical requirements: 400 V 3-phase 50 Hz ( + NEUTRAL). A fused isolator must be incorporated in the
Electrical
supply line as near as possible to the unit.
If the CSM-PD is to form part of a system to meet the HTM 2010 and HTM 2031 requirements we would
recommend operating at >85 °C and using the following feedwater quality/purity.
Whilst not mandatory the table below gives a guide to recommended typical values.
Property Maximum value
Ammonium 0.2 mg/l
Heavy metals substitute 0.1 mg/l

Feedwater quality Chloride 0.5 mg/l
Nitrate 0.2 mg/l
Residue on evaporation 30.0 mg/l
Phosphate 0.1 mg/l
Silicate 0.1 mg/l
Electrical conducivity at 25 °C 35.0 μS/cm
The control unit in addition to the logic and temperature and level PID controllers, include;
- Minimum and maximum water level alarms
- Visual level indication

Control
- Water temperature alarms
- Lock-out devices
- Interface with supervision system (BMS) 6.1

47
For full details see the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the unit.
For spares information refer to the Installation and Maintenance Instructions supplied with the pre-heating and degassing package.
The CSM-PD package is to provide a clean or pure steam generator designed and built to produce steam to the HTM 2031 standard.
The operating condition of the steam generator is to raise 600 kg/h of clean steam at 3 bar g when supplied with plant steam at
8 bar g. The CSM-PD will provide a minimum of 20 minutes autonomy. All items are to be pre-assembled and mounted on to a
skid base.
Sizing
Sizing is totally dependant upon the clean steam generation requirements (secondary, clean steam production flowrate)
For example: A clean steam generator producing 600 kg/h clean steam will require a CSM-PD500.
That is: 600 kg/h multiplied by a factor of 0.33 = 200 kg/20 min = CSM-PD500 (working capacity = 370 litres).
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco CSM-PD500 pre-heating and degassing package.
Please provide details of primary steam pressure, clean steam pressure, clean steam flowrate, feedwater system and flowrate.
Ancillary items to be used depending on installation:

- Isolation valves
- Separators
- Strainers
Other items may be required, please contact Spirax Sarco to discuss the full installation.
TES Issue 2
Model reference A B C Weight kg
Dry Wet
CSM-PD500 1950 1500 2200 700 1300
CSM-PD1000 1950 1900 2700 1100 2300
CSM-PD2000 2400 2100 3100 1400 3600
Please note: to allow for safe and comfortable working access we would recommend that at least 500 mm is kept clear of obstacles
at the front and the back of the unit.
A
Back
6.1
48
C
B Front
TES Issue 2
Heat exchangers
TI-P481-02
CTLS Issue 3
Spirax EasiHeatTM DHW

EN Potable and Process Water Heating System
Compact Heat Transfer Solution
Potable and process water heating system
The Spirax EasiHeat™ DHW incorporating SIMS technology is a complete, compact system for accurate heating of potable hot water
or hot water for process. These systems can be sized for any heating duty from 50 kW to approximately 1.1 MW and are supplied fully
assembled and pressure tested ready for installation.
The standard Spirax EasiHeat™ system is expandable by the inclusion of additional items such as steam pressure reduction, safety
valve and safety high limit shut-off should be selected separately.
Principal features and benefits:

- Energy monitoring, CO 2 emission, Communications, Remote monitoring and SMS or E-mail of system alarms.
- Designed with integral condensate sub-cooling for maximum efficiency and no flash steam loss.
- Precisely engineered system and matched components that provides accurate temperature control even with wide and sudden load
changes.
- Guaranteed performance.
- Fully assembled and tested ready to install.
- Options to suit all applications.

6.2
1
Page 1 of 5
6 Heat exchangers
Heat exchanger Temperature control
One of the components that guarantees system performance is The steam flowrate is modulated to exactly match the heat
the heat exchanger, which is precisely engineered to match the demand. The control valve is pneumatically or electrically
specific duty requirements. actuated and the system uses a fast response P t10 0
With a high efficiency and low volume to pressure ratio. The plate temperature sensor and PLC controller for precise control. The
and frame heat exchanger ensures reduced inspection system can incorporate an energy monitoring system to
requirements whilst being fully maintainable and expandable. measure energy usage.
Control panel
The Spirax EasiHeat™ DHW now features our new
innovative control system incorporating SIMS
technology, delivering increased monitoring and
communications.
A colour touch screen provides ease of use and clear
visual access to all system parameters and access
to energy data.
Metering
A key c omponent guaranteeing ac curate
measurement of energy usage, CO 2 emissions and
cost control. The TVA flowmeter is specifically
designed for large turndown on steam applications.
Condensate management
Spirax Sarco’s range of combined mechanical fluid
pump and steam trap units provide the total solution
to all stall conditions, by removing condensate under
all operating conditions.
6.2
2
Pipework Pressure and temperature limits

All pipework is correctly sized for the application and is fabricated using
modern welding techniques, approved welders and weld procedures. Pipework design PN16
Flanged products are used where possible for reliability and easy Maximum saturated steam supply pressure 10 bar a
maintenance.
Maximum secondary pressure 10 bar a
Maximum secondary temperature 105 °C

Materials
Maximum gasket temperature 180 °C
Steam and condensate pipework Carbon steel
Steam control valve and condensate pump-trap SG iron
Secondary pipework, circulation valve and pump Stainless steel
Electrics and pneumatics

All control equipment is pre-wired and piped ready for connection to the air supply and power source.
Power supply 110-240 Vac/50-60 Hz
Electrical supply
Supply fuse 5A (T)
Electric 24 Vac/50-60 Hz
Actuators
Pneumatic 4 to 6 bar g
Spirax EasiHeatTM DHW EN Potable and Process Water Heating system Compact Heat Transfer Solution
Heat exchangers 6
Support frame
The Spirax EasiHeat™ DHW system is delivered pre-assembled on a compact frame and baseplate ready to move with a fork lift truck
to the position of installation. Optionally, the unit can be fitted with wheels for ease of moving when supplied.
Potable and process water

The fast (instantaneous) response and accuracy of control of the DHW system ensures no additional storage vessels are required.
Scale formation
Spirax Sarco adapt systems to overcome scaling problems and in addition incorporates CIP connections as standard.
Heat load (kW) Type Valve Maximum dimensions Piping connections DN
actuation
Steam Condensate
Min Max H L W Pump trap Steam

trap
50 180 EHD1 EL and PN 1324 1625 825 DN50 DN40 DN25
Notes: 1. The height of the system will increase by 25 mm if the wheels are fitted.
2. The heat load has been based on a steam inlet pressure of 5 bar g and 1 bar backpressure.
6.2
3
W
L
6 Heat exchangers
Spirax EasiHeatTM DHW nomenclature
Domestic hot water EHD = Spirax EasiHeat™ DHW EHD
1 = DN20
2 = DN25
3 = DN32
CV size 2
4 = DN40
5 = DN50
6 = DN65
Compulsory selection Control valve trim L = Low noise trim L
Pressure vessel code P = PED P
EL3 = Electric spring return
Actuation EL4 = Electric super capacitor EL4
PN = Pneumatic
ST = Steam trap
Condensate removal PT = Pump trap ST
PTHC = Pump trap high capacity
HL = Integrated high limit

High limit HL
IHL = Independent high limit
High limit actuation B = Battery back-p

C
(EL4 only) C = Super capacitor
V1 = Ball valve
Isolation V2 = BSA V2
Mechanical options V3 = DBB3

6.2 G1 = EPDMP
4 Gasket material
G2 = Heatseal
G1
G3 = WRAS FKMFF (UK only)
G4 = WRAS EPDMFF (UK only)
W = Wheels
Extras W
S = EN 12828 safety option
T2 = SIMS technology touch screen

Control panel T2
P2 = Process controller
Energy monitoring E = With energy monitoring E

Panel options
R1 = Level 1 – SMS and E-mail
Remote access R2 = Level 2 – Full web access R2
R3 = Level 3 – SMS + Remote
C1 = Modbus RTU
C2 = BACnet MS / TP
C3 = Modbus TCP / IP
Communications C4 = DeviceNet C2
C5 = CANopen
C6 = BACnet IP
C7 = Profibus
Spirax EasiHeatTM DHW nomenclature example:

EHD 2 L P EL4 ST - HL C V2 G1 W - T2 E R2 C2
Heat exchangers 6
The potable and process water system shall be a Spirax EasiHeat™ compact heat transfer system complete with PLC functionality and
SIMS technology to provide energy monitoring and remote access. The system will be pre-assembled and mounted on a compact frame
with either pneumatic or electric control option.
In order to meet EU standards for Temperature Control Devices and Temperature Limiters For Heat Generating Systems, the selection
of Independent High Limit (IHL) control is a compulsory selection for packages installed within the EU.
How to order
All systems are designed for the required heat load with controls to suit the application. The best way of ensuring that we have all the
necessary information for quotation and manufacture is to complete our enquiry data sheet. Copies can be supplied on request and
special requirements should be detailed.
6.2
5
6 Heat exchangers
6.2
6
Heat exchangers
TI-P481-01
CTLS Issue 3
Spirax EasiHeat TM HTG (Condensate Control)

EN Heating System
Heating system
Our Spirax EasiHeat™ HTG incorporating SIMS technology is a complete, compact and ready-to-use steam to water heat transfer
solution that delivers superior energy efficient performance. For applications with stable load conditions such as closed circuit heating
applications.
Spirax EasiHeat™ HTG can help you lower costs, tackle waste and mitigate your environmental impact by reducing your CO 2 emissions
and carbon footprint, making a positive change towards a more sustainable future.

- Compact heat transfer solution incorporating SIMS technology.
- Energy monitoring, CO 2 emission, Communications, Remote monitoring and SMS or E-mail of system alarms.
- Produces hot water for heating and process.
- Designed for sub-cooling condensate to provide high efficiency.
- Maintains a stable temperature.
- Fully assembled and tested ready to install. 6.2

7
Page 1 of 4
6 Heat exchangers
Heat exchanger Control panel
One of the components that guarantees system performance The Spirax EasiHeat™ HTG now features our new innovative
is the heat exchanger, which is precisely engineered to match control system incorporating SIMS technology, delivering
the specific duty requirements. increased monitoring and communications.
With a high efficiency and low volume to pressure ratio. The A colour touch screen provides ease of use and clear visual
plate and frame heat exchanger ensures reduced inspection access to all system parameters and access to energy data.
requirements whilst being fully maintainable and expandable.
Metering
The TVA flowmeter has been specifically
designed for large turndown on steam
applications and is a key component of the
Spirax EasiHeat™ HTG guaranteeing accurate
measurement of energy usage.
6.2
8
Condensate control Materials

One of the components that guarantees system performance is
the correctly selected control valve with either electric or Steam and condensate pipework Carbon steel
pneumatic actuation, and ensures all of the useful energy in the Steam control valve Cast iron
steam is used within the unit, there’s less waste than other
available alternatives which, in turn, reduces both fuel demand Secondary pipework Carbon steel
and your CO 2 emissions.
Pressure and temperature limits

Pipework design condition PN16
Maximum saturated steam supply pressure to heat

4 bar a
exchanger
Spirax EasiHeat TM HTG (Condensate Control) EN Heating System Compact Heat Transfer Solution
Heat exchangers 6
Pipework
All pipework is correctly sized for the application and is fabricated using modern welding techniques, approved welders and weld
procedures. Flanged products are used for reliability and easy maintenance.

Electrical supply
Supply fuse 5A (T)
Electric 24 Vac/50-60Hz
Actuators
Support frame
The whole system is delivered pre-assembled on a compact frame and baseplate, option of fitted wheels for ease of moving the unit
into position, alternatively with a fork lift truck.
actuation
Min. Max. H L W Steam Water Condensate
50 550 EHHCC1 EL or PN 1321 1 281 684 DN50 DN50 DN15
550 1 500 EHHCC2 EL or PN 1414 1 420 834 DN100 DN100 DN20 or DN25
1 500 2 500 EHHCC3 EL or PN 1414 1 706 834 DN100 DN100 DN20 or DN25
2. The heat load has been based on a steam inlet pressure of 2 bar g and 0 bar backpressure.
6.2
9
W
L
6 Heat exchangers
Spirax EasiHeat TM HTG nomenclature
Building heating unit EHHCC = Spirax EasiHeat™ HTG condensate control EHHCC
1 = DN15
Control valve size 2 = DN20 2
Compulsory selection 3 = DN25
EL4 = Electric
Actuation EL4
PN = Pneumatic

High limit IHL
High limit actuation B = Battery back-up

B
(EL only) C = Super capacitor
V1 = Ball valve
Mechanical options
V3 = DBB3
Gasket material G1 = EPDMPC G1
W = Wheels
Extras W
Control panel T2 = SIMS technology touch screen T2
Panel options R1 = Level 1 – SMS and E-mail
6.2 Remote access R2 = Level 2 – Full web access R2
10
C1 = Modbus RTU
C2 = BACnet MS / TP
C3 = Modbus TCP / IP
C5 = CANopen
C6 = BACnet IP
C7 = Profibus
Spirax EasiHeat TM HTG nomenclature example:

EHHCC 2 P EL4 - IHL B V2 G1 W - T2 E R2 C2
The heating system shall be a Spirax EasiHeatTM compact heat transfer system complete with PLC functionality and SIMS technology
to provide energy monitoring and remote access. The system will be pre-assembled and mounted on a compact frame with either
pneumatic or electric control option.
How to order
Heat exchangers
TI-P481-11 CTLS Issue 2
Spirax EasiHeatTM HTG (Steam Side Control)

EN Heating System
Heating system
Our Spirax EasiHeat™ HTG incorporating SIMS technology is a complete, compact and ready-to-use steam to water heat transfer
solution that delivers superior energy efficient performance. For applications with stable load conditions such as closed circuit heating
applications. Spirax EasiHeat™ HTG can help you lower costs, tackle waste and mitigate your environmental impact by reducing your
CO2 emissions and carbon footprint, making a positive change towards a more sustainable future.

- Compact heat transfer solution incorporating SIMS technology.
- Energy monitoring, CO2 emission, Communications, Remote monitoring and SMS or E-mail of system alarms.
- Produces hot water for heating and process.
- Designed for sub-cooling condensate to provide high efficiency.
- Maintains a stable temperature.
- Fully assembled and tested ready to install.

6.2
11
Page 1 of 5
6 Heat exchangers
Heat exchanger Temperature control
One of the components that guarantees system performance is The steam flowrate is modulated to exactly match the heat
the heat exchanger, which is precisely engineered to match the demand. The control valve is pneumatically or electrically
specific duty requirements. actuated and the system uses a fast response Pt100 temperature
With a high efficiency and low volume to pressure ratio. The plate sensor and PLC controller for precise control. The system can
and frame heat exchanger ensures reduced inspection incorporate an energy monitoring system to measure energy
requirements whilst being fully maintainable and expandable. usage.
Control panel
The Spirax EasiHeat™ HTG now features our new
innovative c ont rol system inc or p orating SI M S
technology, delivering increased monitoring and
communications.
A colour touch screen provides ease of use and clear
visual access to all system parameters and access to
energy data.
Metering
A key component guaranteeing accurate measurement
of energy usage, CO 2 emissions and cost control. The
TVA flowmeter is specifically designed for large
turndown on steam applications.
Condensate management
Spirax Sarco’s range of combined mechanical fluid
pump and steam trap units provide the total solution to
all stall conditions, by removing condensate under all
operating conditions.
6.2
12
Pipework Pressure and temperature limits

All pipework is correctly sized for the application and is fabricated using
modern welding techniques, approved welders and weld procedures. Pipework design PN16
Flanged products are used where possible for reliability and easy Maximum saturated steam supply pressure 10 bar a
maintenance.

Materials
Steam and condensate pipework Carbon steel
Steam control valve and condensate pump-trap SG iron
Secondary pipework, circulation valve and pump Stainless steel

Electrical supply
Supply fuse 5A (T)
Electric 24 Vac/50-60Hz
Actuators
Spirax EasiHeatTM HTG (Steam Side Control) EN Heating System Compact Heat Transfer Solution
Heat exchangers 6
Support frame
The Spirax EasiHeat™ HTG heating system is delivered pre-assembled on a compact frame and baseplate ready to move with a fork
lift truck to the position of installation. Optionally, the unit can be fitted with wheels for ease of moving when supplied.
actuation
Steam Condensate
Min Max H L W Pump trap Steam trap
50 191 EHHSC1 EL and PN 1324 1625 825 DN50 DN40 DN25
- - EHHSC6 EL and PN 1460 1675 825 DN50 DN50 DN40
2. The heat load has been based on a steam inlet pressure of 5 bar g and 1 bar backpressure (50 kPa pressure drop).
6.2
13
W L
6 Heat exchangers
Spirax EasiHeatTM HTG nomenclature
Building heating unit EHHSC = Spirax EasiHeat™ HTG steam side control EHHSC
1 = DN20
2 = DN25
3 = DN32
Control valve size 2
4 = DN40
5 = DN50
6 = DN65
Compulsory selection Control valve trim L = Low noise trim L
EL3 = Electric spring return
Actuation EL4 = Electric super capacitor EL4
PN = Pneumatic
ST = Steam trap
Condensate removal PT = Pump trap ST
PTHC = Pump trap high capacity

High limit HL
High limit actuation B = Battery back-p

C
(EL4 only) C = Super capacitor
V1 = Ball valve
Mechanical options V3 = DBB3

6.2 G1 = EPDMP
14 Gasket material
G2 = Heatseal
G1
G3 = WRAS FKMFF (UK only)
G4 = WRAS EPDMFF (UK only)
W = Wheels
Extras W
T2 = SIMS technology touch screen

Control panel T2
P2 = Process controller

Panel options
R1 = Level 1 – SMS and E-mail
Remote access R2 = Level 2 – Full web access R2
C1 = Modbus RTU
C2 = BACnet MS/TP
C3 = Modbus TCP/IP
C5 = CANopen
C6 = BACnet IP
C7 = Profibus
Spirax EasiHeatTM HTG nomenclature example:

EHHSC 2 L P EL4 ST - HL C V2 G1 W - T2 E R2 C2
Heat exchangers 6
The building heating unit shall be a Spirax EasiHeat™ HTG compact heat transfer system complete with PLC functionality and SIMS
technology to provide energy monitoring and remote access. The system will be pre-assembled and mounted on a compact frame with
either pneumatic or electric control option.
How to order
6.2
15
6 Heat exchangers
6.2
16
Heat exchangers
TI-P481-12
CH Issue 1
Universal Control Panel

incorporating
SIMSTM Technology
Description Approvals and
The universal control panel incorporating SIMSTM technology has been designed for installation Compliance:
to a variety of packaged heat exchanger systems. Due to the versatility in pre-programmed
controls logic it can operate with a range of different heat exchanger models and configurations. - UL Approval
- CUL Approval
SIMSTM technology sets the standards in monitoring, diagnostics and communications for
packaged systems. Delivering meaningful system performance data from enabling it to
- CE Approval
intelligently control and optimise a system. - EN12828 Compliant
- EN14597 Compliant
- BS EN 61439
Features and Benefits:
Different selectable heat exchanger Available options:
options - R1 - SMS or text alert
Single panel to provide flexibility for
packages - R2 - Remote access
- Communications protocols
Touch screen interface
Easy to view and navigate - Independent alarm
Live trending / diagnostics
Instant visibility of package performance Dimensions and weights
(approximate) 6.2
Communications Height 900 mm
Compatible with most customer interfaces
Width 450 mm
17
Pre-configured controls logic
Multiple array of configurations to suit Depth 200 mm
package design Weight 43 kg
Electrical specifications
Electrical supply: Refer to the name-plate on the unit
110 Vac / 60 Hz
Control panel supply voltage
240 Vac / 50 Hz
Control panel load requirements Internally fused at 5 amps
24 Vac
Electrical control actuator
4 - 20 mA control
-
Pneumatic control actuator
4 - 20 mA control
High Limit isolation valve (optional) 24 Vac
Steam flowmeter TVA (optional) 4 - 20 mA control
PT100 temperature sensors 3 wire
Note: Power supply 10 - 16 A
Electrical supply
All electrical wiring and connections should be carried out in accordance with National Regulations.
A lockable isolator / switch disconnect should be fitted adjacent to the unit.
Mains supply is directly connected to the primary side of the incoming control panel isolator.
6 Heat exchangers
Compatible with hundreds of configurable variations
The Universal Control Panel with SIMSTM technology, offers increased monitoring and control capabilities to a huge range of technologies
- A few of which are shown below:
View your
system status
from anywhere
in the world
Alarms sent directly

to your smart phone Hardwired or wireless
communication options available
Universal control for multiple technologies
Plate & frame Shell & plate Turflow 'U' tube Shell & coil
Steam side
6.2
heating
18
domestic hot
Steam side
water
Bypass steam EN 12828
control
condensate
Bypass
control
Condensate
control
TI-P481-12 CH Issue 1
Universal Control Panel incorporating SIMSTM Technology

Heat exchangers
TI-P222-03
TES Issue 6
VEP and VES

Turflow Heat Exchangers
Description
The Turflow heat exchanger range is a shell & tube design
consisting of straight corrugated tubes within a shell. The tubes
are secured at either end of the shell by fixed tube sheets.
The corrugated tube design promotes increased turbulent flow
conditions to provide the Turflow’s high heat transfer efficiency.
The shell incorporates a bellows type expansion joint that ensures
thermal stress does not damage the heat exchanger. The shell
is also fitted with drain and vent connections. The heat exchanger
is a gasket free design constructed wholly from stainless steel.
Normally the heated fluid will flow through the tubes and the
heating medium will be in the shell; both countercurrent and
concurrent flow paths can be accommodated, inclusive of
horizontal or vertical installation.
Standards
Turflow type heat exchangers fully comply with the requirements
of the EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment
(Safety) Regulations and carry the mark when so required.
All units are supplied with a Declaration of Conformity.
6.2
Turflow type heat exchangers fully comply with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and carry the "U" ASME
Stamp when so required. 19
Certification
A manufacturer’s Hydraulic Test Report and Material Certification documentation is available on request.
Note: All certification /inspection requirements must be stated at the time of order placement.
EN ASME GB National standard

CE mark with PED ASME VIII design with Chinese GB national
EU Pressure Equipment Directive/UK Pressure Equipment (Safety) Regulations U stamp certification standard
EC1935/2004 compliant tube side
DIN ASME
-10 °C to 200 °C 12 bar g (176 psi g) 12 bar g (176 psi g)
PMA Shell/Tube side 200 °C to 300 °C 6 bar g (87 psi g) 6 bar g (87 psi g)
This option is to be specified at the time of order placement.
12 bar g -10 °C to 200 °C (14 °F to 392 °F) -10 °C to 200 °C (14 °F to 392 °F)
TMA Shell/Tube side 6 bar g 200 °C to 300 °C (392 °F to 572 °F) 200 °C to 300 °C (392 °F to 572 °F)
This option is to be specified at the time of order placement.
21 bar g with design limit to 12 bar g 17.1 bar g with design limit to 12 bar g
(304.5 psi g with design limit to 174 psi g) (241 psi g) with design limit to 174 psi g)
Cold hydraulic test pressure
10.5 bar g with design limit to 6 bar g 8.55 bar g with design limit to 12 bar g
(152.2 psi g with design limit to 87 psi g) (124 psi g with design limit to 174 psi g)
Page 1 of 7
6 Heat exchangers
Turflow type heat exchangers
The VEP design is fitted with small diameter tubes.
The VES design is fitted with large diameter tubes.
Please contact Spirax Sarco for advice regarding selection – The most suitable unit will be selected by Spirax Sarco and will be
specific for the given application.
Materials
3
4
3 1 2 4
No. Part Material Surface finish

6.2 1 Shell Stainless steel ASTM A312 – TP304 Pickling
20 2 Expansion joint Stainless steel ASTM A240 – TP321 Pickling
3 Shell side flanges Stainless steel ASTM A182 F304 Pickling
Tube sheets/tube side flanges SX Stainless steel 316 ASTM A182 F316
4 (Different options available according to the Pickling
specific model) SS Stainless steel 304 ASTM A182 F304
Corrugated tubes SX Stainless steel 316 ASTM A249-TP316L

5 (Different options available according to the Pickling *
specific model) SS Stainless steel 304 ASTM A249-TP304
* Note "FB" version will undergo tube side passivation internal tube in addition to specified treatments.

Shell length Shell
Type Connections
(metres) Ø
VEP 0.6, 1, 1.5 and 2 * 1½", 2", 3" 4", 5", 6", 8" and 10" Flanged EN 1092 PN16 or ASME B16.5 Class 150
VES 1, 2 and 3 2", 3" 4", 5", 6", 8" and 10" Flanged EN 1092 PN16 or ASME B16.5 Class 150
* Note 0.6 and 1.5 shell lengths are not available for shell diameters 5" to 10".
TES Issue 6
VEP and VES Turflow Heat Exchangers
Heat exchangers 6
Dimension for shell size 1½" and 2" (approximate) in mm (inches)
Weight in Kg (Lbs) and Volume in Ltr (gal)
VEP VES
Shell Flange Dimensions Volume PED Volume PED
Weight Weight
Ø DN1 DN2 A B D L Tube Shell Cat. Tube Shell Cat.
600 11.2 0.21 0.84

SEP - - - -
(23½") (24.5) (0.05) (0.22)
1000 12.4 0.35 1.28

SEP - - - -
DN32 DN40 94 140 48.3 (39½") (27.3) (0.09) (0.33)
1½"
(1¼") (1½") (3½") (5½") (2") 1500 14 0.53 1.85
SEP - - - -
(59") (30.8) (0.14) (0.48)
2000 15.5 0.71 2.42

SEP - - - -
(78¾") (34) (0.18) (0.64)
600 13.9 0.46 1.18

SEP - - - -
(23½") (30.6) (1.12) (0.31)
1000 15.8 0.76 1.81 15 0.85 1.86

SEP SEP
(39½") (34.8) (0.20) (0.47) (33) (0.22) (0.49)
DN40 DN50 90 140 60.3 1500 18.2 1.15 2.59

2" SEP - - - -
(1½") (2") (3½") (5½") (2¼") (59") (40) (0.30) (0.68)
2000 20.5 1.53 3.88 19 1.69 3.42

SEP SEP
(78¾") (45) (0.40) (1.02) (42) (0.44) (0.90)
3000 22.9 2.54 4.98

- - - - I
(118") (50) (0.67) (1.31)
Table notes: B B 6.2

- Dimension tolerance:
A = ± 3 mm, 21
B = ± 3 mm,
L = ± 6 mm, A DN2 Vent
Flange rotation = ± 1°,
Connection alignment = ± 3 mm. DN1
- Flange sizes according to EN 1092-1 rating PN16, optional equivalent
diameter according to ASME B16.5 rating 150 lb.
- PED categorisation Group 2 according to the classification as per the EU

Regulations.
L
D
DN1
Drain
A DN2
TES Issue 6
6 Heat exchangers
Dimension for shell size 3" and 4" (approximate) in mm (inches)
VEP VES
Weight Weight
600 19.7 1.07 2.63

SEP - - - -
(23½") (43) (0.5) (0.7)
1000 22.5 1.79 3.95 23.9 2.0 4.3
SEP I
(39½") (49) (0.4) (1) (53) (0.52) (1.1)
DN65 DN80 110 160 88.9 1500 25.9 2.67 5.63
3" (2½") (3") (4¼") (6¼") (3½") (59") (57) (0.7) (1.5)
I - - - -
2000 29.3 3.57 7.24 32.1 3.9 7.7

I I
(78¾") (65) (0.9) (1.9) (70) (1) (2)
3000 40.3 5.9 11.1
- - - - I
(118") (88) (1.55) (2.93)
600 28.3 1.88 4.15
SEP - - - -
(23½") (62) (0.5) (1.1)
1000 35.3 3.14 6.25 32.3 3.7 6.4
I I
(39½") (78) (0.8) (1.6) (70) (0.98) (1.7)
DN80 DN100 125 180 114.3 1500 44.1 4.71 8.88
4" (3") (4") (5") (7") (4½") (59") (97) (1.2) (2.4)
I - - - -
2000 52.8 6.28 10.5 46.9 7.4 11.4

I I
(78¾") (116) (1.6) (2.7) (103) (1.9) (3)
3000 61.5 11.1 16.4
- - - - I
(118") (135) (2.93) (4.3)
6.2 Table notes: B B

22 A = ± 3 mm,
B = ± 3 mm,

Regulations.
L
D
DN1
Drain
A DN2
TES Issue 6
Heat exchangers 6
Dimension for shell size 5" and 6" (approximate) in mm (inches)
VEP VES
Weight Weight
1000 49 5.18 8.5 43.7 5.9 9.0

I I
(39½") (108) (1.3) (2.2) (96) (1.5) (2.3)
DN80 DN125 125 200 141.3 2000 77.6 10.36 16.07 67 11.7 16.6
5" (3") (5") (5") (8") (5½") (78¾") (171) (2.7) (4.2)
I
(147) (3) (4.3)
I
3000 90.3 17.6 24.2

- - - - II
(118") (198) (4.6) (6.4)
1000 67.7 7.73 11.88 58.7 8.1 13.4

I I
(39½") (149) (2) (3) (127) (2) (3.5)
DN100 DN150 140 220 168.3 2000 106.9 15.45 22.06 88.6 16.1 24.5
6" (4") (6") (5½") (8½") (6½") (78¾") (236) (4) (5.8)
II
(194) (4) (6.5)
II
3000 118.5 24.1 35.6

- - - - II
(118") (260) (6.3) (9.4)
Table notes: B B 6.2

A = ± 3 mm, 23
B = ± 3 mm,

Regulations.
L
D
DN1
Drain
A DN2
TES Issue 6
6 Heat exchangers
Dimension for shell size 8 and 10" (approximate) in mm (inches)
VEP VES
Weight Weight
1000 103.3 12.7 18.74 86 13.3 23.2

II II
(39½") (227) (3.3) (5) (189) (3.4) (6)
DN125 DN200 160 250 219.1 2000 168.9 25.6 35.5 132 26.5 42.8
8" (5") (8") (6¼") (10") (8½") (78¾") (372) (6.6) (9.3)
II
(291) (7) (11.3)
II
3000 178.4 39.7 62.5

- - - - II
(118") (392) (10.5) (16.5)
1000 171 20.2 29.1 142.2 19.3 35.6

II II
(39½") (377) (5.2) (7.6) (313) (5.1) (9.4)
DN150 DN250 180 280 273.0 2000 270.5 40.5 55 209.5 38.5 67.5
10" (6") (10") (7") (11") (10¾") (78¾") (595) (10.5) (14.5)
II
(461) (10) (17.8)
II
3000 276.7 57.7 99.3

- - - - III
(118") (608) (15.2) (26.2)
6.2 Table notes: B B

24 A = ± 3 mm,
B = ± 3 mm,

Regulations.
L
D
DN1
Drain
A DN2
TES Issue 6
Heat exchangers 6
Product nomenclature
VEP = Small diameter tubes
Turflow type VES
VES = Large diameter tubes
1½", 2", 3", 4", 5", 6", 8" and 10" = VEP range in inches
Shell diameter 2"
2", 3", 4", 5", 6", 8" and 10" = VES range in inches
SS = Stainless steel AISI 304

Tube and tube sheet material SX
SX = Stainless steel AISI 316L
0.6 , 1, 1.5, 2 = VEP range in metres

Tube length 3
1, 2, 3 = VES range in metres
F = UNI 2278/2229 PN16 flanges (*) (**)
Connections type FE = EN1092-1 PN16 flanges (**) FE
FA = ASME B16.5 Class 150 flanges (^)
Empty = VSR (*) (**)
Mechanical code E = EN13445 (**) E
A = ASME VIII Div.1 (*) (^)
V = 12 bar
Shell design pressure V
Empty = Other (*)
Empty = Expanding (^)

Tube to tube sheet coupling S
S = Welding
Empty = None
Certifications
FB = EC 1935 certificate (tube side) (**)
Empty = CE marking not supplied 6.2

25
PED category CI = Category I
CI
(not relevant for ASME version) CII = Category II
CIII = Category III
(*) = Option not standard for EN version – available on request

(**) = Option not standard for ASME version – available on request
(^) = Not available for "FB" version
Product selection example VES 2" SX 3 FE E V S CI
How to order
Contact your local Spirax Sarco office with your application details - We will provide the correct product selection, and quotation for
the Turflow exchanger that will provide optimum performance for your application.
TES Issue 6
6 Heat exchangers
6.2
26
Heat exchangers
TI-P222-02
TES Issue 6
Turflow Type Heat Exchanger

EVC (Exhaust Vapour Condenser)
6.2
27
Description
The Spirax Sarco EVC is based on the Turflow heat exchanger with an additional connection and utilises flash steam from discharge
and exhaust vent pipework to pre-heat make-up or process water thereby recovering valuable heat energy that would otherwise be
lost to atmosphere.
The Spirax Sarco EVC will improve steam system efficiency and is environmentally friendly, reducing CO 2 + carbon emissions and
removing visible discharges from the atmosphere whilst saving valuable energy. It is easy to install and provides an optimised heat
transfer solution when compared to other heat exchanger designs used in similar applications.
As standard the construction is completely stainless steel and the tube side is all in AISI 316. There are no gaskets (with the exception
of the piping connection) and no painted components.
The heat-exchanging surface is of straight corrugated tubes designed for low viscosity fluids and for turbulent flow working conditions.
The tube sheets are of an integral type and are supplied ready for installation.
Standards
Designed and manufactured in accordance with EN 13445 code and fully complies with the requirements of the Pressure Equipment
Directive (PED).
Turflow type heat exchangers fully comply with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and carry the "U"
ASME Stamp when so required.
Certification
This product is available with a manufacturers Typical Test Report.
EN ASME GB National standard

CE mark with Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) ASME VIII design with Chinese GB national
U stamp certification standard
TES Issue 6
Turflow Type Heat Exchanger EVC (Exhaust Vapour Condenser)
6 Heat exchangers
Available models
Steam mass flow Heat load Water flow
Heat exchanger
kg/h (lb/h) kW (MBtu/h) kg/h (Gal/m)
EVC 1½" - 1F 30 (66) 19 (0.06) 804 (3.5)
EVC 2" - 1F 50 (110) 31 (0.1) 1 350 (6)
EVC 3" - 1F 75 (165) 47 (0.16) 2 020 (9)
EVC 3" - 1F 100 (220) 62 (0.2) 2 690 (11.8)
EVC 4" - 1F 200 (440) 125 (0.42) 5 370 (23.5)
EVC 6" - 1F 300 (660) 187 (0.6) 8 060 (35.5)
EVC 8" - 1F 500 (1 102) 312 (1.06) 13 400 (59)
EVC 10" - 1F 750 (1 653) 469 (1.6) 20 100 (88.5)
* Performance sized with water from 50 °C to 70 °C (122 °F to 158 °F).

** Sized with maximum inlet steam velocity 15 m/s (49 ft/s).
Shell side 6 bar g (87 psi g) 300 °C (572 °F)
Tube side 12 bar g (174 psi g) 200 °C (392 °F)
Shell side
PMA Maximum allowable pressure -10 °C to +200 °C (14 °F to 392 °F) 12 bar g (174 psi g)
Tube side
The cold hydraulic tests are performed at 21 bar g with design limit to 12 bar g (304.5 psi g with design limit to 174 psi g) and
at 10.5 bar g with design limit to 6 bar g (152.2 psi g with design limit to 87 psi g). This pressure meets with the requirements of
Section 7.4, attachment 1, of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED).
6.2
Materials
28 No. Part Material ASTM designation
1 Shell Stainless steel A312 TP304
2 Expansion joint Stainless steel A240 TP321
3 Tubesheet Stainless steel A182 F316
4 Shell side connections Stainless steel A182 F304
5 Tubes (corrugated) Stainless steel A249 TP316
Vent into the atmosphere
5 4 5 3
Process water outlet
Process water inlet
1 2 Steam inlet
Condensation outlet
TES Issue 6
Heat exchangers 6
Dimensions/weights (approximate) in mm and kg (inches and lbs)
D
A A
DN1
DN2 C
DN3
Model DN1 DN2 DN3 A B C D Weight
32 40 15 94 140 48.3 1000 13.2

EVC 1½" - 1F
(1¼") (1½") (½") (3¾") (5½") (2") (39¼") (29)
40 50 15 90 140 60.3 1000 16.5

EVC 2" - 1F
(1½") (2") (½") (3½") (5½") (2¼") (39¼") (36)
65 80 15 110 160 88.9 1000 23.0

EVC 3" - 1F
(2½") (3") (½") (4¼") (6¼") (3½") (39¼") (50)
80 100 25 125 180 114.3 1000 36.4

EVC 4" - 1F
(3") (4") (1") (5") (7") (4½") (39¼") (80)
100 150 25 140 220 168.3 1000 68.2

EVC 6" - 1F
(4") (6") (1") (5½") (8½") (6½") (39¼") (138)
125 200 32 160 250 219.1 1000 106.0

6.2
EVC 8"- 1F
(5") (8") (1¼") (6¼") (9¾") (8½") (39¼") (233)
29
150 250 40 180 280 273.0 1000 145.0
EVC 10" - 1F
(6") (10") (1½") (7") (11") (10¾") (39¼") (319)
Table notes:
A = ± 3 mm,
B = ± 3 mm,
D = ± 6 mm,
Connection alignment = ± 3 mm.
- Flange sizes according to EN 1092-1 rating PN16, optional equivalent diameter according to ASME B16.5 rating 150 lb.
- PED categorisation assuming a 'not dangerous fluid', Group 2 according to the classification as per the Pressure Equipment Directive
(PED).
TES Issue 6
6 Heat exchangers
Installation note:
The installation depends on the application and on the service required; however the unit must always be installed horizontally.
It is always necessary that one end of the heat exchanger is allowed to move axially, in order to permit the normal expansion of the
exchangers tubes during operation.
We recommend that an air vent be fitted to the unit to continuously vent during start-up and operation.
Insulation is recommended, and it is absolutely necessary, if the shell temperature is much higher than the ambient one - If insulation
is required it is suggested that it be fitted on site to eradicate its damage whilst in transit.
Disposal
This product is recyclable. No ecological hazard is anticipated with the disposal of this product providing due care is taken.
Vent condenser
Make-up
Drain
Live steam Condensate return
6.2 Live steam

30
Chemical dosing
Flash steam
TES Issue 6
Heat exchangers 6
Spirax Sarco has developed integrated thermal modelling, sizing and selection software, to select and fully optimise an EVC heat
exchanger to precisely match your application needs. Trained technicians are available at your local Spirax Sarco company to ensure
the correct heat exchanger is always selected. Because of Spirax Sarco’s expertise and wide product range we can provide a complete
heat transfer solution, advising on the most suitable control system and ancillary equipment for your heat exchanger.
Our technicians can also advise on the suitability and sizing of heat exchangers for most gases, vapours and superheated liquids other
than water.
EVC product nomenclature:

Please note that other units are available on request to suit the specifics of a particular process application.
Turflow type EVC = Large diameter tubes EVC
Shell diameter 1½", 2", 3", 4", 6", 8", 10" = Range in inches 3"
Tube and tubesheet material SX = Stainless steel AISI 316 SX
Tube length 1 m (39") = Range in meter 1
F = UNI 2278/2229 PN16 flanges
Connection type FA = ANSI B16.5 Class 150 Flanges FE
FE = EN1092-1 PN16 flanges
Empty = VSR
Mechanical code E = EN13445 E
A = ASME VIII Div.1
Shell design pressure V = 12 bar g (174 psi g) V
Tube to tube sheet coupling Empty = Expanding
Empty = CE marking not supplied
PED category CI = Category I CI
CII = Category II 6.2

31
Product selection example EVC 3" SX 1 FE E V CI
TES Issue 6
6 Heat exchangers
6.2
32
Heat exchangers
TI-P593-02
TES Issue 1
U-tube bundle type shell and

tube heat exchangers UPI, UPC and UPF
Description
The heat exchangers with removable “U" type tube bundle
are among the most common units installed in hot-water
plants and in industrial processes, due to the low-cost of
manufacturing and solidity. The design of these heat
exchangers make them particularly suitable for applications
with saturated, superheated steam or diathermic oil as
primary fluid.
The primary fluid is always fed on the tube side. Mounted
on a single carbon steel tube sheet, the U-tube bundle
can be removed once the head is disassembled. The
standard design includes 16 bar as design pressure with
PN16 flanges; the tube bundle can be made of 316L
stainless steel (UPI series), copper (UPC series) and
carbon steel (UPF series).
The shell is made of carbon steel and the vent and exhaust connections are integrated in the coupling flange, while the rear side
connection can be lateral or, on request, axial. Special versions may be built on request (materials, design conditions, dimensions
other than the standard). The U-tube models design uses up-to-date technological and production methods, most advanced calculation
systems (thermodynamic calculation, vibration analysis) and all the acquired research knowledge. The design and construction are
in accordance with the European standard EN 13445 and 2014/68/EU - Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) for pressure systems
and with the marking when required. The products have been specifically designed for use on steam, air or water which are in Group 6.2
2 of the above mentioned Pressure Equipment Directive. Spirax Sarco should be contacted to confirm the suitability of the product
for use on alternative fluids and applications. Assembling of “U" series heat exchangers is made in Spirax Sarco factory in Via per
Cinisello, 18, in Nova Milanese, Italy.
33
PED categorisation of standard U-tube type heat exchangers

Heat exchanger Heat exchanger Generator
(diathermic oil or hot water as (steam or superheated water as (steam, diathermic oil or
primary fluid) primary fluid) superheated water as primary fluid)
Shell Ø"
Nominal length Nominal length Nominal length
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
5" SEP Cat. I Cat. II Cat. II Cat. III Cat. III
6" No CE marking Cat. I Cat. I Cat. III Cat. III

Art. 3 comma 3
8" Cat. II Cat. II Cat. III Cat. III
2014/68/UE Directive
10" Cat. II Cat. II Cat. II Cat. III Cat. III Cat. III
12" Cat. II Cat. II Cat. II Cat. III Cat. III
Definitions used in Directive 2014/68/EU (PED):

Heat exchangers = Pressure equipment used for producing hot water* at T ≤ 110°C in cold water circuit
Generators = Pressure equipment suitable for producing steam or superheated steam** at T > 110°C in both circuits
*Hot water = Liquid in Group 2 (non-hazardous) with steam saturation pressure ≤ 0.5 bar g at maximum temperature
**Superheated steam = Fluid in Group 2 (gases, liquefied gases, dissolved gases, liquids) with steam saturation pressure
> 0.5 bar g at maximum temperature
Page 1 of 6
6 Heat exchangers
Design conditions
TMA – Maximum operating temperature
Shell side 110 °C
Tube side 204.4 °C (300 °C*)
PMA – Maximum operating pressure
Shell side 16 bar g
Tube side 16 bar g (6 bar g*)
Cold hydraulic test pressure
Shell side 23 bar g
Tube side 23 bar g
Notes:
1 - Hydraulic test pressure is 23 bar g (for both sides); this value is in accordance with the attachment 1 of PED Directive.
2 - On request, 6 bar g - 300 °C tube side version is available for operation with diathermic oil.
Materials
No. Part Material Designation
1 Distributor (cast head *) Cast iron (5", 6", 8" models) ** EN GJL - 250 UNI EN 1561 – 1998
Carbon steel (10", 12" models) EN 10213-2 GP240GH
2 Tube sheet Carbon steel ASTM A 105
3 Shell/nozzles Carbon steel ASTM A106 Gr.B
4 Shell side flanges Carbon steel ASTM A 105
5 Tubes (and spacers) 316L stainless steel (mod. UPI models) ASTM A 249 Tp 316/316L
Copper (mod. UPC) EN12451 WDHP HS100
Carbon steel (mod. UPF) UNI EN10216 P235GH-TC1
6.2 6 Baffles Stainless steel AISI 304 (UPI e UPF models) ASTM A 240 - 304
Brass (UPC models) OTS 63
34 7 Tie rods Carbon steel UNI EN10025 Fe360
8 Gaskets Reinforced graphite (with stainless steel)
9 Support saddles (on request) Carbon steel
- Insulation (on request) Rock wool pad with 304 stainless steel cladding (th. 0.8 mm)
* Cylindrical distributor available on request 3

** Carbon steel distributor available on request
8
9
TES Issue 1
U-tube bundle type shell and tube heat exchangers UPI, UPC and UPF
Heat exchangers 6
Dimensions
L per each nominal length L per each nominal length Connections
nom Øe lateral version axial version
A C D X
Ø (mm)
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 DN1 DN2
5" 141.3 247 151 150 193 1132 1482 1982 1019 1369 1869 40 80
6" 168.3 268 166 175 221 1559 2059 1415 1916 50 100
8" 219.1 303 186 220 249 1632 2132 1464 1964 65 125
10" 273.0 342 201 270 289 1726 2226 2626 1550 2050 2448 80 150
12" 324.0 377 221 320 314 2301 2701 3201 2089 2497 2991 100 200
Note: DN1 and DN2 are EN1092-1 PN16 flanges.
Size (mm) Lateral version
DN2
DN1
D
Ø
C
DN1
X
A DN2
6.2
L
35
Size (mm) Axial version
DN2
DN1 DN2
Ø
C
DN1
A
TES Issue 1
6 Heat exchangers
Product nomenclature
Available standard units are defined by the nomenclature; special versions can be designed to satisfy particular process conditions.
Model UP = U-tube bundle type shell and tube heat exchanger UP
I = 316L stainless steel
Tubes material C = Copper I
F = Carbon steel
Shell diameter 5", 6", 8", 10", 12" = Diameter in inches 12
Tube bundle nominal length 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 = Nominal length 5
Empty* = UNI 2278/2229 PN16 flanges
Connections type FE = EN 1092-1 PN16 flanges FE
FA* = ASME B16.5 Class 150 flanges
Empty* = VSR
Mechanical code E = EN 13445 E
A* = ASME VIII Div. 1
P = Few
Baffles number P
M = Many
Connection on rear side of L = Lateral

L
the shell A = Axial
Empty = No CE marking
CI = Category I
PED category CII
CII = Category II
6.2 CIII = Category III
36 *Option not standard - available on request
Selection example = UP I 12 5 FE E P L CII
How to order
Contact your local Spirax Sarco office with your application details - We will provide the correct product selection and quotation for
the heat exchanger that provides optimum performance for your application.
TES Issue 1
Heat exchangers 6
Applications and typical installations
To system
Steam From system
Supply
Standard diagram for heating system with hot water of small/medium capacity, with self-regulation and steam as primary fluid.
All applicable safety requirements must be met.
To system Pressurisation
6.2
Compressed air
supply
37
Steam From system
Supply
Standard diagram for heating system with steam on primary side and superheated water on the secondary side. Pneumatic control and
expansion system. All applicable safety requirements must be met.
TES Issue 1
6 Heat exchangers
Applications and typical installations (continued)
220V - 50Hz Pressurisation
To system
Compressed
air supply
Supply
From system
Return Supply
Standard diagram for large size heating system with large volume on the scondary side, with expansion system. Primary fluid superheated
water (or diathermic oil) with electric/pneumatic control. All safety requirements must be met.
6.2
38 To system cold
water/process
From system
Supply
Supply
Return
Diagram of process water/conditioning water cooling system with direct-acting regulation.
TES Issue 1
Heat exchangers
TI-P599-01
TES Issue 1
P-Line heat exchanger
Description 6.2
P-line heat exchangers meet the highest requirements of the pharmaceutical industry. At the same time, they meet its stringent
hygiene standards imposed by inspection bodies. They have been designed to minimize the risk of contamination and to ensure safe 39
and sterile work. Tubes are connected to the tube sheets with pressure expanding method in which clean water under pressure up
to 6000 bar is used. This eliminates the risk of damaging the internal surface of the tubes. Stainless straight tubes with a diameter
of 8 mm (0.315") or 12.7 mm (0.5").
Certified Viton gaskets and triclamps, the clean side connections, in compliance with 3-A and American Food and Drug Administration
FDA. Expanded tubes are then welded to the external tube sheet with orbital using welding a pure argon shield method.

Full details are contained in the SP7-10 digital positioner Installation and Maintenance Instructions.
Applications
- Clean steam generation
- WFI generation
- WFI storage and distribution systems
- WFI point of use
- Food industry
- Dairy industry
- Brewing industry
TES Issue 1
6 Heat exchangers
Materials
Part Material Finish
Shell Stainless steel 316L (1.4404), polished mechanically, chemically etched and passivated
Tubes Stainless steel 316L (1.4404), polished mechanically, chemically etched and passivated
Gasket Viton
Note
All surfaces in contact with the clean medium (e.g. internal surface of tubes, heads, etc.) electropolished to Ra≤0,5 µm (20 µin)
Technical data
6.2 Pressure rating Maximum - 1 MPa (145 psi)
40 Tubes Maximum - 140 °C (284 °F)
Temperature rating (Viton gasket)
Minimum - -17 °C* (1.4 °F*)
*Parameters for P-050: min. temp. (Viton) -25 °C (-13 °F).
Pressure rating Maximum - 1 MPa (145 psi)
Shell Maximum - 200 °C (392 °F)

Temperature rating
Minimum - -25 °C (13 °F)
K4/K1 - inlet /outlet tube side (hygienic side)

Technical drawing Standard location of connections
K2/K3 –inlet /outlet shell side (service side)
TES Issue 1
Heat exchangers 6
K2
Dz
A K4
K1 Ø
K3
Type A B C ØDz
TYPE lP TYPE2P TYPE4P
mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in
P-050.070.08 176 6.93 709 27.91 880 34.65 60.3 2.37
P-050.110.08 176 6.93 1009 39.72 1180 46.46 60.3 2.37
P-050.140.08 176 6.93 1309 51.54 1480 58.27 60.3 2.37
P-080.070.08 300 11.81 518 20.39 1005 39.57 88.9 3.50 6.2
P-080.110.08
41
300 11.81 958 37.72 1445 56.89 88.9 3.50
P-080.140.08 300 11.81 1258 49.53 1745 68.70 88.9 3.50
P-100.070.08 325 12.80 518 20.39 1063 41.85 114.3 4.50
P-100.110.08 325 12.80 958 37.72 1503 59.17 114.3 4.50
P-100.140.08 325 12.80 1258 49.53 1803 70.98 114.3 4.50
P-125.110.08 350 13.78 958 37.72 1495 58.86 1294 50.95 139.7 5.50
P-125.140.08 350 13.78 1258 49.53 1795 70.67 1594 62.76 139.7 5.50
P-125.190.08 350 13.78 1728 68.03 2265 89.17 2064 81.26 139.7 5.50
P-150.110.08 370 14.57 960 37.80 1577 62.09 1268.5 49.94 159 6.26
P-150.140.08 370 14.57 1260 49.61 1877 73.90 1568.5 61.75 159 6.26
P-150.190.08 370 14.57 1730 68.11 2347 92.40 2038.5 80.26 159 6.26
P-200.110.08 460 18.11 924 36.38 1819 71.61 1272.5 50.10 1272.5 50.10 219.1 8.63
P-200.140.08 460 18.11 1224 48.19 2119 83.43 1572.5 61.91 1572.5 61.91 219.1 8.63
P-200.190.08 460 18.11 1694 66.69 2589 101.93 2042.5 80.41 2042.5 80.41 219.1 8.63
P-250.110.08 555 21.85 926 36.46 1962 77.24 1297.5 51.08 1297.5 51.08 273 10.75
P-250.140.08 555 21.85 1226 48.27 2262 89.06 1597.5 62.89 1597.5 62.89 273 10.75
P-250.190.08 555 21.85 1696 66.77 2732 107.56 2067.5 81.40 2067.5 81.40 273 10.75
Dimensions continued on next page
TES Issue 1
6 Heat exchangers
Dimensions (approximate) in mm (continued)
K2
Dz
A K4
K1 Ø
K3
Type A B C ØDz
TYPE lP TYPE2P TYPE4P
mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in
P-050.070.12 176 6.93 709 27.91 880 34.65 60.3 2.37
P-050.110.12 176 6.93 1009 39.72 1180 46.46 60.3 2.37
P-050.140.12 176 6.93 1309 51.54 1480 58.27 60.3 2.37
6.2 P-080.070.12 300 11.81 518 20.39 1005 39.57 88.9 3.50
P-080.110.12
42
300 11.81 958 37.72 1445 56.89 88.9 3.50
P-080.140.12 300 11.81 1258 49.53 1745 68.70 88.9 3.50
P-100.070.12 325 12.80 518 20.39 1063 41.85 114.3 4.50
P-100.110.12 325 12.80 958 37.72 1503 59.17 114.3 4.50
P-100.140.12 325 12.80 1258 49.53 1803 70.98 114.3 4.50
P-125.110.12 350 13.78 958 37.72 1495 58.86 1294 50.95 139.7 5.50
P-125.140.12 350 13.78 1258 49.53 1795 70.67 1594 62.76 139.7 5.50
P-125.190.12 350 13.78 1728 68.03 2265 89.17 2064 81.26 139.7 5.50
P-150.110.12 370 14.57 960 37.80 1577 62.09 1268.5 49.94 159 6.26
P-150.140.12 370 14.57 1260 49.61 1877 73.90 1568.5 61.75 159 6.26
P-150.190.12 370 14.57 1730 68.11 2347 92.40 2038.5 80.26 159 6.26
P-200.110.12 460 18.11 924 36.38 1819 71.61 1272.5 50.10 1272.5 50.10 219.1 8.63
P-200.140.12 460 18.11 1224 48.19 2119 83.43 1572.5 61.91 1572.5 61.91 219.1 8.63
P-200.190.12 460 18.11 1694 66.69 2589 101.93 2042.5 80.41 2042.5 80.41 219.1 8.63
P-250.110.12 555 21.85 926 36.46 1962 77.24 1297.5 51.08 1297.5 51.08 273 10.75
P-250.140.12 555 21.85 1226 48.27 2262 89.06 1597.5 62.89 1597.5 62.89 273 10.75
P-250.190.12 555 21.85 1696 66.77 2732 107.56 2067.5 81.40 2067.5 81.40 273 10.75
TES Issue 1
Heat exchangers 6
Mounting
Horizontal mounting
1P heat exchanger
2P and 4P heat exchanger
Vertical mounting
6.2
1P heat exchanger
43
2P heat exchanger
TES Issue 1
6 Heat exchangers
6.2
44
Thermocompressors
TI-P493-02
TES Issue 3
SJT
Steam Jet Thermocompressor
Description
In this environmentally conscious world, companies within the Process Industries Sector are becoming more aware of the additional
cost savings that can be made at the same time as committing to a friendly environment.
One such common area is the steam raising plant and the proportion of waste product that is put to atmosphere. If the amount of waste
can be reduced and thereby have an effect on the amount that is being generated in the first place, then the environment will be improved
and the running costs reduced. It is in this area of operation that the application of an SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor can be
advantageous.
Spirax Sarco has been designing innovative solutions for steam plant engineering and cost effective manufacturing for over 25 years.
The Steam Jet Thermocompressor is a prime example of this commitment; the SJT is an energy saving device that compresses low
pressure steam, often waste steam, to a higher useable pressure. All of Spirax Sarco's SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressors are designed
and built to the customers specific criteria, for their intended application, to provide optimum performance and return on investment.
An SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor can be described as a type of Ejector. It uses a jet of high pressure steam (called the Motive
pressure) to entrain low pressure water vapour (called the Suction pressure). The two medium's are intimately mixed and subsequently
discharged at a pressure that lies somewhere between the motive and suction pressures.
Advantages over electromechanical alternatives:

- Simple construction; SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressors can be made from any machineable materials for increased abrasion
6.3
resistance.
- Compact design and comparatively lightweight which enables overhead installations.
- Low capital cost and operating costs.

1
- No moving or rotating parts with minimal maintenance and therefore the units can be installed in remote or inaccessible locations.
- No specialist maintenance experience required.
- Discharge steam is oil free, no lubrication contamination.
- Suitable for hazardous areas, no explosion proof motors required.
- Recirculation without loss of heat or energy through reducing valves.
DN200 (8") SJT
Page 1 of 11
6 Thermocompressors
The following lists the applications where SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressors can be installed, typically for circulating and boosting
low pressure steam which would normally go to waste.
Drum dryers Paper and Board Industries
Flash evaporators Desalination
Condensate receivers Chemical, Petro-chemical, Oil and Power Generation
Vulcanisers Rubber Industry
Single and Multi-stage effect evaporators Food, Dairy, Pharmaceutical & Chemical Industries
Wort vessels Brewing Industry
Exhaust steam lines Most Process Industries
Blanching machines Food Industry
How the SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor (Ejector) works

The four steps below illustrates in a simple way how an 'Ejector' is created:
High pressure steam
Step 1 Static pressure
Kinetic energy - Velocity

6.3 High pressure steam
2
Step 2 High pressure steam to Velocity energy
High pressure steam Kinetic energy - Velocity
Step 3 Open ended pipe
Entrained low pressure water vapour
Kinetic energy - Velocity

High pressure steam
Step 4 Closed ended pipe - Side inlet
Entrained low pressure water vapour
Page 2 of 11 TI-P493-02
TES Issue 3
SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor
Thermocompressors 6
Low pressure water Please note that for clarity welds are not shown
vapour inlet
Diffuser
High pressure
steam inlet Intermediate pressure outlet
Diffuser
Nozzle
Typical example of the final design of an SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor
High pressure motive steam enters the SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor and passes through the nozzle where the high pressure
steam energy is converted into kinetic energy. On leaving the nozzle at high velocity, the steam enters the suction chamber where it is
brought in contact with the suction stream. There is then an exchange of momentum between the motive and suction streams, resulting
in an acceleration of the suction vapours, giving rise to their subsequent entrainment. A uniform mixture results at the narrowest part
of the diffuser (called the throat) and finally the reconversion of the velocity energy into pressure energy occurs in the diverging section
of the diffuser.
An SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor is a type of Ejector that uses high pressure (HP) steam to entrain low pressure water vapour
(LP) and discharges at a pressure (Pd) that lies somewhere between the HP and LP pressures.
Understanding SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor discharge pressures

6.3
3
An SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor can be represented by the adjacent diagram:
Motive Discharge
Suction
The SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor is designed to 'match' a specific discharge pressure. For example the following SJT is designed
to discharge against a backpressure of 18.5 bar g.
However, if the unit is allowed to discharge to atmosphere, the actual discharge pressure is atmospheric pressure, even though it was
designed to discharge at a higher pressure.
Actual Pd = 0 bar g Where: Pd = Discharge pressure
TI-P493-02 Page 3 of 11
TES Issue 3
6 Thermocompressors
Understanding SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor discharge pressures (continued)
If a small section of pipework is placed after the SJT which has a pressure drop of 0.1 bar, the pressure immediately downstream of
the SJT is 0.1 bar g. The pressure after the pipework is atmospheric.
Pd = 0.1 bar g
DP = 0.1 bar g
If we add a process after this pipework, for example a heat exchanger, with a pressure drop of 0.5 bar, the pressure at the discharge
branch of the SJT is 0.6 bar g.
Pd = 0.6 bar g
Heat
ä ä exchanger
DP = 0.1 bar g
DP = 0.5 bar
Now, if we take a process (or a steam header) that operates at a pressure of 16 bar g, and the pressure drop through the pipework
between the process and the SJT is 2.5 bar, the pressure at the discharge of the SJT is 18.5 bar g.
6.3
Steam header =
4 16 bar g
DP = 2.5 bar
For the purpose of this example the SJT is operating at its design discharge pressure as the unit was designed for a
discharge pressure of 18.5 bar g.
Please note that the SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor does not 'create' the discharge pressure. It is designed to match a
discharge pressure.
Page 4 of 11 TI-P493-02
TES Issue 3
Thermocompressors 6
Types of thermocompressor
There are two types of thermocompressor; Sonic and Subsonic. Although they look similar, they behave differently and must be controlled
differently.
Compression ratio
In order to determine what type of design the Thermocompressor will be, we need to calculate the 'Compression ratio'.
Discharge pressure (Pd)

Compression ratio (K) =
Suction pressure (Ps)
Is K > 1.8
Subsonic design Sonic design
For Example:
- The discharge pressure = 2.5 bar g = 3.513 bar a
- The suction pressure = 1.2 bar g = 2.213 bar a
- The Compression ratio (K) =

3.513
= 1.59
6.3
2.213
5
Subsonic designs: Sonic designs:
- Compression ratio (K) is less than 1.8 - Compression ratio (K) greater than 1.8
- With a subsonic design, the Motive (HP) steam - With a sonic design, the Motive (HP) steam flowrate is
flowrate can be varied to 'save' steam when process 'fixed'
conditions become more favourable
- The Suction (LP) steam flowrate can operate with full
- The Suction (LP) steam flowrate can operate with full turndown (100% to 0%)
turndown (100% to 0%)
- Spirax Sarco offer a special design called a 'Variable

Orifice' thermocompressor which has integrated Motive
steam control.
Therefore the subsonic design will provide the optimum performance and effectiveness for the given application.
TI-P493-02 Page 5 of 11
TES Issue 3
6 Thermocompressors
Control options
The schematic below illustrates every possible control option that could be used to control an SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor.
Motive
1 3
2
Discharge
4
6
Suction
Sonic designs:
Option 6 is usually used to maintain the Suction (LP) pressure (if required)
Options 4 or 5 are occasionally used instead
Option 3 can be used to bypass additional steam to the discharge
Please note that you cannot choose Options 1 or 2 if the SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor is 'Sonic'
6.3
Subsonic design
6 Option 2 can be used to control the Motive (HP) steam flow from 100% to 35%
Option 1 can be used to control the Motive (HP) steam flow from 100% to 80%
can be used to bypass additional steam to the discharge. Options 4 or 5 or 6 are occasionally used to maintain the
Option 3
Suction (LP) pressure.
Most applications will only use one of the options. Some applications do not require any control. An SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor
will always balance itself to the system pressures.
You should decide what parameter (pressure, flow etc.) you wish to control as this will determine what option is best for the given
application. Spirax Sarco can provide assistance in selecting the best control option for the intended application to provide optimum
performance and return on investment.
Page 6 of 11 TI-P493-02
TES Issue 3
Thermocompressors 6
Variable orifice SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressors
Spirax Sarco offers several types of Thermocompressor. The first is the fixed nozzle type which cannot be controlled to any great
extent, although some control is achievable by throttling the motive steam pressure via a separate valve upstream of the SJT Steam
Jet Thermocompressor (See Control Option 1, page 5, for subsonic units).
The other type relies on a motive steam regulating spindle to vary the cross sectional area of the motive steam nozzle (Control Option
2, page 5,). Unlike a throttling valve positioned upstream, the regulating spindle does not reduce the motive steam pressure, it simply
varies the area through which the steam is flowing. This approach maximises the energy per kg of motive steam that is available at the
nozzle to do the work. With an installation involving an upstream throttling valve, useful energy is lost in the throttling process.
SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressors utilizing a motive steam regulating spindle are often referred to as Variable Orifice Ejectors. The
spindle is operated automatically. These should be specified in cases where the suction load, suction pressure or discharge pressure
are continually varying, and it is necessary to control one or more of these process parameters as quickly as possible.
Note:
For cases which involve large variations in load, it is sometimes more cost effective to use several various sized units
connected in parallel, than to have one large controlled unit. It may also be necessary to install a bypass valve in some
applications.
Online calculation software
Example
A client wishes to recover 1 500 kg/h steam from a flash vessel which operates at 0.1 bar g and wants to compress it to 1.5 bar g to be
used in a process. HP steam is available at 20 bar g, dry and saturated.
The water flow to the flash vessel can vary. The pressure in the flash vessel must not fall below 0.5 bar a.
6.3
7

Flash vessel
Method SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor Quote

We can use the Spirax Sarco Online Sizing
Welcome to the online quote system. Please complete the details below:
Software to design a suitable unit (available at
www.spiraxsarco.com with password).
When the calculation button is pressed, the software

will calculate the required Motive (HP) steam flowrate
and the unit connection sizes.
The user will see a summary screen, at which point

the desired flange rating can be selected and then
the 'Save & Email' button can be pressed - A
Datasheet and GA Drawing, page 7, will then be sent
to your chosen e mail address.
The software will automatically determine if the unit

is Sonic or Subsonic and designed accordingly.
TI-P493-02 Page 7 of 11
TES Issue 3
6 Thermocompressors
Datasheet generated by the online software program
A typical example is illustrated below:
Spirax Sarco SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor Datasheet

1 Client: Spirax-Sarco Limited Client Project Ref:
2 Client's Ref: Plant Location:
3 Spirax Ref: SJT Example/SJT00824 Name-plate Tag No.
4 Description: Size 6 Steam Jet Thermocompressor No. OFF: 1
5 Unit Ref: SJT150CS4F0 Operation:
6 Drawing No: DE-SJT00824-1 Serial No:
7 Unit Body Size: 6
8 MOTIVE CONDITIONS MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
9 Pressure (bar g) 20.00 Main body Carbon Steel
10 Temperature (C) 215.0 Nozzle Stainless Steel
11 Flowrate (kg/hr) 2 580 Diffuser Carbon Steel
12 Flanges Carbon Steel
13 SUCTION CONDITIONS Gaskets Spirax Sarco to select
6.3 14 Pressure (bar g) 0.10 Bolts Carbon Steel (if applicable)
8 15 Temperature (C) 102.7 Name-plate Stainless Steel
16 Flowrate (kg/hr) 1 500
17 MECHANICAL DESIGN Motive Suction/Discharge
18 DISCHARGE CONDITIONS Side Side
19 Pressure (bar g) 1.50 Max Design Pressure 25 25 (bar g)
20 Temperature (C) 145.6 Max Design Temp 220 220 (C)
21 Flowrate (kg/hr) 4 080 Internal Corrosion

1.5 1.5 (mm)
Allowance
Page 8 of 11 TI-P493-02
TES Issue 3
Thermocompressors 6
Spirax Sarco SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor Datasheet (continued)
22 Mechanical Design Code ASME B31.3

DIFFUSER IS SONIC
23 Welding Standard ASME IX
24 External Surface Finish High Temp Silicone Aluminum
25 Weight TBC (kg)
26
27 DIMENSIONS CONNECTIONS DETAILS Size Rating
28 A - 245 mm Motive Steam (A) 2½ 300 LB
29 B - 290 mm Suction Steam (B) 6 300 LB
30 C - 1375 mm Discharge Steam (C) 6 300 LB
31 D - 1665 mm Flange Type ASME B 16.5 Slip-On
32 GA DRAWING
33
D
34
B C
35 6.3
BODY NAME-PLATE
36 9
37 A
38
39
GASKET
40
41 NOZZLE DIFFUSER
42
NOTE: Confirmed dimensions to be issued shortly after order placement

43
Selection example:
A Spirax Sarco Size 6 Steam Jet Thermocompressor has been selected. The required Motive (HP) steam flowrate is 2 580 kg/h.
Approximate dimensions are shown and the Motive, Suction and Discharge connection sizes have been calculated.
TI-P493-02 Page 9 of 11
TES Issue 3
6 Thermocompressors
Control
The compression ratio is 2.25 (see the example on page 4 that illustrates how to calculate the compression ratio) so the
SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor will be 'Sonic'. Therefore the calculated Motive (HP) steam flowrate must be fixed.
The SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor is designed for a Suction flowrate of 1 500 kg/h. Without control, if the Suction (LP) steam
flowrate falls, the SJT will try and suck harder and the Suction pressure will begin to fall. Consequently, in this application, we can
install a simple 'recycle' loop. This recycles some discharge steam back to the suction. By maintaining the Suction flow, the
SJT operates at its design point which keeps the Suction pressure constant.
Typical application drawings:

Motive steam
Steam line
To process
Flash
Process heat exchanger
Flash vessel
Condensate line
Condensate pump
Typical SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor application
6.3 Motive steam

10
Make-up steam valve
Flash blow through

Drying cylinder

Condensate line
Separator
Condensate pumped back to feedwater tank
Typical Paper Mill application
Page 10 of 11 TI-P493-02
TES Issue 3
Thermocompressors 6
Additional application opportunity
Thermodynamically, the process of recompressing low pressure steam using high pressure steam is similar to a pressure reducing
station. It is common that the discharge steam flow from the SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor contains some superheat. Depending
on how the discharge steam will be used, there is an opportunity to use a Spirax Sarco Desuperheater to reduce the outlet superheat.
To avoid complications with design and installation, Spirax Sarco recommends that a Desuperheater is installed after the SJT Steam
Jet Thermocompressor.
Use the Online Calculation Software and the discharge steam conditions shown on the SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor Datasheet
as the inlet conditions to the Desuperheater, and size as normal.
MP steam VTD, STD or SND Desuperheated

HP steam
Desuperheater MP steam
LP steam Cooling water
Maintenance
Maintenance of an SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor is simply a matter of fitting a spare nozzle to the unit at certain time intervals,
with these intervals depending on the nozzle material used and the steam condition.
The material chosen by Spirax Sarco in the manufacture of the steam nozzles for all of their SJT Steam Jet Thermocompressor's have
a history of delivering longevity in their application. As nozzle wear is usually a very slow process, it is recommended that nozzle wear
be monitored through a planned maintenance programme.
How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco Size 6 SJT150CS Steam Jet Thermocompressor having ASME 300 RF slip on flange connections.
6.3
Note: Attach the SJT Datasheet to the order.
11
TI-P493-02 Page 11 of 11
TES Issue 3
6 Thermocompressors
6.3
12
Thermocompressors
TI-P494-02
CH Issue 3
IJH
Instantaneous Jet Heater
Description
Direct contact heating of liquid is both efficient and instant. The range of heaters designed by Spirax Sarco has been developed to
operate on most industrial applications where the direct introduction of steam into liquid is permissible. The units are designed to be
silent in operation – a major advantage over conventional steam / liquid mixing.
Advantages
- Simple operation
- No moving parts
- Minimal noise and vibration – normally associated with collapsing steam
- Very efficient
- General process water heating
- Reactor jacket water heating
- Vegetable blanching
- Chemical heating
- Slurry heating
- Mining industry 6.3
13
Available types of IJH instantaneous jet heater

There are three types of instantaneous jet heater: Standard, Hygienic and Monobloc. They all behave the same but are suited to
different applications.
Suitable for most applications

Standard
Can be sized using Spirax Sarco's Online Software
Can be supplied with any type of connection – on termination or body i.e. Sanitary clamp / RJT / IDF
Flanges and screwed connections maybe acceptable on the steam side – usually stipulated by the customer
Internal and external surfaces usually polished – to the customers' specification i.e. Sateen / Mirror / Dull – to
Hygienic
eliminate small crevices ('bug' traps)
Limited to 6 bar g D/S steam maximum (thin wall stainless 1.6 mm thick)
Contact Spirax Sarco for sizing
Small, cost effective units for low pressure duties with a design pressure maximum of 10 bar g
Monobloc Available for unit sizes up to DN65 (2½") NB
Contact Spirax Sarco for sizing
Spirax Sarco's online calculation software

We recommend the use of our online sizing software to design a suitable unit (available at www.spiraxsarco.com with password).
Page 1 of 6
6 Thermocompressors
How does an IJH work
Pressurised cold liquid is introduced to the IJH Steam inlet
instantaneous jet heater and is immediately
accelerated through the combining nozzle, Pressure retaining shell
resulting in a local pressure drop.
Pressur ised steam enters the IJH and is
discharged into the liquid at high velocity, via a
number of jets around the combining tube. This
method of combining steam and liquid prevents Silent steam / water
'backing up' should the steam be under a much
higher pressure than the liquid. Cold water inlet mixing zone for Hot water outlet
instantaneous heating
Both the sensible and latent heat of the steam is
fully dissipated within the liquid, making Spirax
Sarco's IJH instantaneous jet heater very
efficient.
Spirax Sarco's IJH instantaneous jet heater are
also designed to combine the two streams,
Steam injection jets Combining venturi
silently and instantaneously to prevent undue
noise and wear normally associated with steam
'collapse'. Please note
For clarity welds are not shown.
Typical application
The schematic below illustrates a typical full
system.
6.3
14
Up- IJH Down-

stream stream
Installation considerations
Ensure that the pipe run is flat along its bottom to ensure condensate does not
Pipe run
collect in low points i.e. use eccentric not concentric reducers.
Steam pipeline
Main PRV It is recommended that the steam control valve be one or two pipe sizes below the
pressure reducing valve main steam feedline to the IJH branch size - Use eccentric reducers.
The non return valve should be situated adjacent to the IJH to prevent back flow of
Non return valve
steam on failure of the cold water supply pressure.
It is recommended that the temperature probe be sited 6 to 10 pipe diameters

Temperature probe
downstream of the IJH.
Water pipeline
Instruments Include suitable pressure gauge tapping points.
Drainage is important during shutdown always try to include a drainage facility on

Drainage
low points or ideally orientate the unit to be self- draining (discharge vertically up).
IJH Instantaneous Jet Heater

Thermocompressors 6
Design considerations
The fluid to be heated is usually water; however when the liquid is not water the density and heat capacity of the fluid must be known.
Liquid pressure drop

For most systems a 0.5 bar drop is considered reasonable; however the minimum pressure drop of 0.3 bar can be achieved. The pressure
drop selected only occurs when no steam is flowing (on start- up or when no heating is required). During normal operation, the pressure
drop is less as the steam gives the liquid a slight pressure 'boost'.
Steam pressure
When designing a unit, the steam pressure at the inlet flange of the IJH must be adequate to overcome the liquid pressure.
If the steam pressure becomes lower than the liquid pressure the liquid could enter the steam line causing vibration. It is therefore
important to consider the pressure drop across valves and equipment upstream of the IJH to ensure that the correct pressure at the
steam inlet flange is maintained.
Maximum liquid temperature

In general, the maximum temperature you can heat to is 5 - 10 ºC below the saturation temperature of the liquid. When the liquid is
heated beyond this temperature flashing can occur which can cause the unit to vibrate and become noisy.
However, if you want to calculate the maximum temperature, it can be calculated by the following method:
Saturation temperature = Steam pressure in the mixing zone x 0.85.
For example, if an IJH has a liquid- side inlet pressure of 2.5 bar g and the pressure drop is 0.5 bar, the pressure in the mixing zone is
2 bar g or 3.013 bar a.
0.85 x 3.013 = 2.56 bar a

Tsat @ 2.56 bar a = 128.2 ºC
Maximum liquid temperature = 128.2 ºC
Materials of construction
All of Spirax Sarco's IJH instantaneous jet heaters are designed and built to the customers specific criteria for their intended application
to provide optimum performance and return on investment. We can also offer alternative materials for the Combining tube. In our
experience the following three combinations of materials are the most popular:
- Carbon steel shell – Stainless steel internals

- Fully stainless steel
- Fully carbon steel
- Hastelloy
Typical pipework velocities
6.3
- Steam feed velocities for all of our IJH instantaneous jet heaters are preferably sized for a maximum of 50 m / s (never > 65 m / s). 15
Other considerations
Distances
The recommended straight length distance downstream of the IJH before any bends, sensors or equipment is 6 - 10 pipe diameters.
Please reference the typical application on page 2 which illustrates these recommended distances.
The pipework should always match the connection size of the unit. However if the pipework is a greater NB than the unit the pipework
after the discharge flange should be a minimum of 6 - 10 pipe diameters length before returning to the pipework NB.
Orientation of an IJH
The IJH can be installed and operated in almost any position but, the preferred orientation is to have the liquid flow horizontal with the
steam branch on the top of the unit to help with drainage. However, we do not recommend that the unit be installed vertically with the
flow downwards.
Steam traps
If the steam supply is known to be wet or contains less than 5 ºC of superheat, we strongly recommend the use of steam traps and
separators in the pipeline. If the condensate is inadequately removed, the internals of the IJH will be subjected to conditions which will
increase the wear rate, eventually resulting inefficient operation.
Strainers
We strongly recommend the incorporation of strainers in both the steam pipeline and cold liquid pipeline. The strainer in the steam
pipeline should be positioned upstream of any control valve and, the strainer in the liquid pipeline should be positioned upstream of the
unit but, no closer than 6 pipe diameters from the liquid inlet flange.
Connections
The IJH can be supplied with any type of connections on termination or body from flanged, screwed, sanitary clamp connections.
Maintenance
Providing the steam used for heating is dry and saturated (or slightly superheated) an IJH needs little maintenance and should provide
many years of service.
If, however, the liquid being heated is corrosive or abrasive, the steam is 'wet' or the unit is located within a harsh environment, the unit
may need additional inspection. If it is determined that the IJH 'body' is in good condition but the internals are worn, you would need
to evaluate its replacement or scope in its eventual replacement into the maintenance programme.

6 Thermocompressors
Online calculation software Steam
Example
Water is to be heated from 18 ºC at 2 bar g to 50 ºC. The water
flowrate is 282 m 3 /h and steam is available at 6 bar g 177 ºC.
Method
We can use Spirax Sarco's Online Sizing Software to design a
suitable unit (available at www.spiraxsarco.com with password).
As the liquid to be heated is water, click 'water' as the liquid type

and complete the following sections.
NOTE: note that the heat capacity and density sections are T1
blanked out. Water property data is automatically calculated
by the program.
When selecting the pressure drop across the unit the minimum
is 0.3 bar and the maximum is 2 bar. 0.5 bar is usually acceptable
and is the most common pressure drop to select.
If the steam is saturated click the saturated button, however as

the steam is above the saturation temperature at 6 bar g enter
the temperature into the field below.
Select an appropriate mechanical design conditions which must Fluid

be greater than the operating conditions.
IJH instantaneous jet heater quote Design summary page

When the calculation button is pressed, the software will calculate
Welcome to the Online Quote system. Please complete the details
the required Steam flowrate and the unit connection sizes.
below. If you are unsure how to use this program please use
The user will see a summary screen, at which point the desired
these instructions.
flange rating can be selected and then the 'Save & Email' button
can be pressed - A Datasheet and GA Drawing, pages 5 and 6,
6.3 will then be sent to your chosen e mail address.
16 Design summary
Here is a summary of the design you have requested.
Please note that you can increase the unit size to your
specification if required. You cannot reduce the unit
size this way. The only way to reduce the size of the unit
is by increasing the pressure drop across the unit. To
do this click the 'Go Back' button and increase the
pressure drop from 0.5 until the liquid side size reduces.
The steam branch size is fixed and cannot be reduced.
If you choose Save & E-mail the quote will be sent to your
registered customer email address and you will be given a quote
reference number in the event of any queries.

Thermocompressors 6
Datasheet generated by the online software program
A typical example is illustrated below:
Spirax Sarco IJH Instantaneous Jet Heater

Datasheet
1 Client: Spirax-Sarco Limited Client Project Ref:
2 Client's Ref: EXAMPLE Plant Location:
3 Spirax Ref: EXAMPLE/IJH00545 Nameplate Tag No.
4 Description: No. OFF: 1
5 Unit Ref: IJH250CS6F0 Operation:
6 Drawing No: DEIJH00545-1 Service:
7 Serial No:
8 Unit Size: 10
9 PERFORMANCE OF ONE UNIT
10 Fluid to be Heated: - Water
11 Density: (Kg/M 3) 998.6
12 Heat Capacity: (KJ/kg ºC) 4.186
13
14 Liquid Side Conditions:- Max
15 Flowrate (M /hr)
3
282
16 Inlet Temperature ( ºC) 18
17 Outlet Temperature ( ºC) 50
18 Inlet Pressure (bar g) 2
19 Pressure Drop (bar) 0.5
20
21 Steam Conditions:- Max
6.3
22 Flowrate (kg/h) 14603.1
23 Pressure (bar g) 6 17
24 Temperature ( ºC) 117
25 Notes
26
27
28 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
29 Shell Carbon Steel Flanges Carbon Steel
30 Combining Tube Carbon Steel Gaskets TSL to Select
31 Notes
32
33
34 MECHANICAL DESIGN CONNECTION DETAILS
35 Max. Design Pressure (bar g) 10 Size ("NB) Rating
36 Max. Design Temperature ( ºC) 200 Liquid Inlet 10 150 LB
37 Internal Corrosion Allowance (mm) 1.5 Liquid Outlet 10 150 LB
38 Mechanical Design Code - ASME B31.3 Steam Inlet 8 150 LB
39 Welding Standard - To Code Tapping 0.5 BSP
40 CE Marking Required TSL to determine Flange Type ASME B16.5 Slip-On
41 External Surface Finish - High Temp. Silicone Aluminium Notes
42 Weight (kg) TBC
Selection example:
A Spirax Sarco Size 10 IJH instantaneous jet heater has been selected. The required steam flowrate is 14,603 kg / h.

6 Thermocompressors
GA Drawing generated by the online software program
A typical example of the drawing created with approximate dimensions and connections is also emailed to you - See below:

6.3
18

How to order
Example: 1 off Spirax Sarco Size 10 IJH250CS instantaneous jet heater having ASME 150 RF slip-on flange connections.
Note: Attach the IJH Datasheet to the order.

General infor mation 7
Section 7
7.1 Steam tables
7.2 Conversion tables
7.3 Steam traps - International standards
7.4 Product limitations
7.5 Useful calculation data
7
General information
7
General information
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted. Steam tables 7
TI-GCM-01
CM Issue 6
Dry Saturated Steam Tables

Specific enthalpy Specific
Pressure Temperature volume
Water (hf) Evaporation (hfg) Steam (hg) steam
bar kPa °C kJ/kg kJ/kg kJ/kg m3/kg
0.30 30 69.1 289.33 2 335.28 2 624.61 5.230
0.50 50 81.3 340.58 2 304.77 2 645.35 3.241
0.75 75 91.8 384.47 2 278.10 2 662.57 2.218
0.95 95 98.2 411.52 2 261.38 2 672.91 1.778
1.00 100 99.6 417.55 2 257.63 2 675.18 1.694
1.013 25 101.325 100.0 419.10 2 256.66 2 675.76 1.674
0 0 100.0 419.10 2 256.66 2 675.76 1.674
0.1 10 102.7 430.33 2 249.62 2 679.95 1.533
0.2 20 105.1 440.76 2 243.05 2 683.81 1.414
0.3 30 107.4 450.51 2 236.86 2 687.37 1.313
0.4 40 109.6 459.68 2 231.02 2 690.69 1.226
0.5 50 111.6 468.33 2 225.47 2 693.80 1.150
0.6 60 113.6 476.53 2 220.19 2 696.72 1.083
0.7 70 115.4 484.34 2 215.13 2 699.47 1.024
0.8 80 117.2 491.78 2 210.29 2 702.07 0.971
0.9 90 118.8 498.90 2 205.64 2 704.54 0.923
1.0 100 120.4 505.73 2 201.16 2 706.88 0.880
1.1 110 122.0 512.28 2 196.83 2 709.12 0.841
1.2 120 123.5 518.60 2 192.65 2 711.25 0.806
1.3 130 124.9 524.69 2 188.60 2 713.29 0.773
1.4 140 126.3 530.57 2 184.67 2 715.25 0.743
1.5 150 127.6 536.27 2 180.86 2 717.13 0.715
1.6 160 128.9 541.78 2 177.15 2 718.93 0.690
1.7 170 130.2 547.13 2 173.54 2 720.67 0.666
1.8 180 131.4 552.32 2 170.02 2 722.34 0.644
1.9 190 132.6 557.37 2 166.58 2 723.96 0.623
7.1
2.0 200 133.7 562.29 2 163.23 2 725.52 0.603
2.2 220 135.9 571.74 2 156.74 2 728.48 0.568
2.4 240 138.0 580.74 2 150.53 2 731.27 0.537
2.6
2.8
260
280
140.0
141.9
589.33
597.56
2 144.55
2 138.80
2 733.89
2 736.36
0.509
0.484 1
3.0 300 143.8 605.45 2 133.24 2 738.70 0.461
3.2 320 145.5 613.04 2 127.87 2 740.92 0.440
3.4 340 147.2 620.36 2 122.67 2 743.02 0.422
3.6 360 148.9 627.42 2 117.61 2 745.03 0.404
3.8 380 150.4 634.24 2 112.70 2 746.94 0.389
4.0 400 152.0 640.85 2 107.92 2 748.77 0.374
4.5 450 155.6 656.52 2 096.49 2 753.00 0.342
5.0 500 158.9 671.12 2 085.70 2 756.82 0.315
5.5 550 162.1 684.81 2 075.47 2 760.28 0.292
6.0 600 165.1 697.72 2 065.72 2 763.44 0.272
6.5 650 167.9 709.94 2 056.39 2 766.33 0.255
7.0 700 170.6 721.56 2 047.43 2 768.99 0.240
7.5 750 173.0 732.64 2 038.81 2 771.45 0.227
8.0 800 175.5 743.24 2 030.49 2 773.72 0.215
8.5 850 177.8 753.40 2 022.43 2 775.83 0.204
9.0 900 178.0 763.17 2 014.63 2 777.80 0.194
9.5 950 182.1 772.58 2 007.05 2 779.62 0.185
10.0 1 000 184.2 781.66 1 999.67 2 781.33 0.177
10.5 1 050 186.1 790.43 1 992.49 2 782.92 0.170
11.0 1 100 188.0 798.93 1 985.48 2 784.41 0.163
11.5 1 150 189.9 807.17 1 978.63 2 785.80 0.157
12.0 1 200 191.7 815.17 1 971.94 2 787.11 0.151
12.5 1 250 193.4 822.95 1 965.38 2 788.33 0.146
13.0 1 300 195.1 830.52 1 958.96 2 789.48 0.141
13.5 1 350 196.8 837.89 1 952.67 2 790.56 0.136
14.0 1 400 198.4 845.08 1 946.49 2 791.57 0.132
14.5 1 450 199.9 852.09 1 940.42 2 792.51 0.128
15.0 1 500 201.5 858.95 1 934.46 2 793.40 0.124
15.5 1 550 202.9 865.65 1 928.59 2 794.24 0.120
16.0 1 600 204.4 872.20 1 922.82 2 795.02 0.117
17.0 1 700 207.2 884.91 1 911.53 2 796.44 0.110
18.0 1 800 209.9 897.12 1 900.57 2 797.68 0.105
19.0 1 900 212.5 908.87 1 889.89 2 798.77 0.100
20.0 2 000 214.9 920.22 1 879.49 2 799.71 0.095
21.0 2 100 217.3 931.19 1 869.32 2 800.51 0.091
22.0 2 200 219.6 941.82 1 859.38 2 801.20 0.087
23.0 2 300 221.8 952.13 1 849.65 2 801.77 0.083
General information
7 Steam tables
Specific enthalpy Specific

Gauge pressure Temperature volume
Water (hf) Evaporation (hfg) Steam (hg) steam
bar kPa °C kJ/kg kJ/kg kJ/kg m3/kg
24 2 400 224.0 962.13 1 840.11 2 802.24 0.078
25 2 500 226.1 971.87 1 830.74 2 802.62 0.077
26 2 600 228.1 981.36 1 821.55 2 802.91 0.074
27 2 700 230.1 990.60 1 812.51 2 803.11 0.071
28 2 800 232.0 999.62 1 803.61 2 803.24 0.069
29 2 900 233.9 1 008.44 1 794.86 2 803.30 0.067
30 3 000 235.7 1 017.06 1 786.23 2 803.28 0.064
31 3 100 237.5 1 025.49 1 777.72 2 803.21 0.062
32 3 200 239.3 1 033.74 1 769.32 2 803.07 0.061
33 3 300 241.0 1 041.83 1 761.04 2 802.87 0.059
34 3 400 242.7 1 049.77 1 752.85 2 802.62 0.057
35 3 500 244.2 1 057.55 1 744.77 2 802.32 0.055
36 3 600 245.8 1 065.20 1 736.77 2 801.97 0.054
37 3 700 247.4 1 072.71 1 728.86 2 801.57 0.052
38 3 800 248.9 1 080.09 1 721.04 2 801.13 0.051
39 3 900 250.4 1 087.35 1 713.29 2 800.64 0.050
40 4 000 251.9 1 094.50 1 705.62 2 800.12 0.049
41 4 100 253.3 1 101.53 1 698.02 2 799.55 0.047
42 4 200 254.7 1 108.46 1 690.49 2 798.95 0.046
43 4 300 256.1 1 115.28 1 683.02 2 798.30 0.045
44 4 400 257.5 1 122.01 1 675.62 2 797.63 0.044
45 4 500 258.8 1 128.64 1 668.28 2 796.92 0.043
46 4 600 260.2 1 135.19 1 660.99 2 796.18 0.042
47 4 700 261.5 1 141.64 1 653.76 2 795.40 0.041
48 4 800 262.7 1 148.02 1 646.58 2 794.60 0.040
49 4 900 264.0 1 154.31 1 639.45 2 793.76 0.039
50 5 000 265.2 1 160.53 1 632.36 2 792.90 0.039
51 5 100 266.5 1 166.68 1 625.33 2 792.00 0.038
52 5 200 267.7 1 172.75 1 618.33 2 791.08 0.037
53 5 300 268.8 1 178.75 1 611.38 2 790.14 0.036
54 5 400 270.0 1 184.69 1 604.48 2 789.16 0.036
55 5 500 271.2 1 190.56 1 597.60 2 788.17 0.035
56 5 600 272.3 1 196.37 1 590.77 2 787.14 0.034
57 5 700 273.4 1 202.12 1 583.97 2 786.10 0.034
58 5 800 274.5 1 207.82 1 577.21 2 785.03 0.033
59 5 900 275.6 1 213.45 1 570.48 2 783.94 0.032
60 6 000 276.7 1 219.04 1 563.78 2 782.82 0.032
61 6 100 277.8 1 224.56 1 557.12 2 781.68 0.031
62 6 200 278.8 1 230.04 1 550.48 2 780.52 0.031
63 6 300 279.9 1 235.47 1 543.87 2 779.34 0.030
64 6 400 280.9 1 240.85 1 537.29 2 778.14 0.030
65 6 500 281.9 1 246.19 1 530.73 2 776.92 0.029
7.1 66
67
6 600
6 700
282.9
283.9
1 251.48
1 256.72
1 524.20
1 517.69
2 775.67
2 774.41
0.029
0.028
68 6 800 284.9 1 261.93 1 511.20 2 773.13 0.028
2 69
70
6 900
7 000
285.9
286.8
1 267.09
1 272.21
1 504.74
1 498.29
2 771.82
2 770.50
0.027
0.027
71 7 100 287.8 1 277.29 1 491.87 2 769.16 0.027
72 7 200 288.7 1 282.34 1 485.47 2 767.80 0.026
73 7 300 289.7 1 287.34 1 479.08 2 766.42 0.026
74 7 400 290.6 1 292.31 1 472.71 2 765.03 0.025
75 7 500 291.5 1 297.25 1 466.36 2 763.61 0.025
76 7 600 292.4 1 302.15 1 460.03 2 762.18 0.025
77 7 700 293.3 1 307.02 1 453.71 2 760.73 0.024
78 7 800 294.2 1 311.86 1 447.40 2 759.26 0.024
79 7 900 295.1 1 316.67 1 441.11 2 757.78 0.024
80 8 000 295.9 1 321.45 1 434.83 2 756.27 0.023
81 8 100 296.8 1 326.19 1 428.56 2 754.75 0.023
82 8 200 297.6 1 330.91 1 422.31 2 753.22 0.023
83 8 300 298.5 1 335.60 1 416.06 2 751.66 0.022
84 8 400 299.3 1 340.26 1 409.83 2 750.09 0.022
85 8 500 300.1 1 344.90 1 403.60 2 748.50 0.022
86 8 600 301.0 1 349.51 1 397.39 2 746.90 0.021
87 8 700 301.8 1 354.09 1 391.18 2 745.27 0.021
88 8 800 302.6 1 358.65 1 384.98 2 743.64 0.021
89 8 900 303.4 1 363.19 1 378.79 2 741.98 0.020
90 9 000 304.2 1 367.70 1 372.61 2 740.31 0.020
92 9 200 305.8 1 376.66 1 360.25 2 736.91 0.020
94 9 400 307.3 1 385.53 1 347.92 2 733.45 0.019
96 9 600 308.8 1 394.32 1 335.60 2 729.93 0.019
98 9 800 310.3 1 403.04 1 323.30 2 726.34 0.018
100 10 000 311.8 1 411.68 1 311.00 2 722.68 0.018
102 10 200 313.2 1 420.25 1 298.70 2 718.95 0.017
104 10 400 314.6 1 428.76 1 286.40 2 715.16 0.017
106 10 600 316.1 1 437.20 1 274.10 2 711.30 0.017
108 10 800 317.4 1 445.59 1 261.79 2 707.37 0.016
110 11 000 318.8 1 453.92 1 249.46 2 703.38 0.016
112 11 200 320.1 1 462.20 1 237.12 2 699.31 0.015
114 11 400 321.5 1 470.43 1 224.75 2 695.18 0.015
116 11 600 322.8 1 478.61 1 212.36 2 690.97 0.015
118 11 800 324.1 1 486.76 1 199.94 2 686.70 0.014
120 12 000 325.4 1 494.86 1 187.48 2 682.35 0.014
TI-GCM-01 CM Issue 6 Dry Saturated Steam Tables

General information
Conversion tables
7
TI-GCM-03
CM Issue 6
Conversion Tables
The following conversion tables will provide a conversion between SI, metric, USA and Imperial systems. All the tables use a multiplying factor:
Table 1 Length
From To Ô millimetre centimetre metre kilometre inch foot yard mile
millimetre 1 0.1 0.001 - 0.03937 - - -
centimetre 10 1 0.01 - 0.393701 0.032808 - -
metre 1000 100 1 0.001 39.3701 3.28084 1.09361 -
kilometre - - 1000 1 - 3280.84 1093.61 0.621371
inch 25.4 2.54 - - 1 0.083333 0.027778 -
foot 304.8 30.48 0.3048 - 12 1 0.33333 -
yard 914.4 91.44 0.9144 0.000914 36 3 1 0.000568
mile - - 1609.344 1.609344 - 5280 1760 1
Table 2 Area
From To Ô cm2 m2 km2 in2 ft2 yd2 acre mile2
cm2 1 0.0001 - 0.155 0.001076 0.0001196 - -
m2 10000 1 0.000001 1550 10.7639 1.19599 0.0002471 -
km2 - 1000000 1 - - - 247.105 0.386102
in2 6.4516 0.000645 - 1 0.006944 0.000772 - -
ft2 929.03 0.092903 - 144 1 0.111111 0.000023 -
yd2 8361.27 0.836127 - 1296 9 1 0.0002066 -
acre - 4046.86 0.004047 - 43560 4840 1 0.001562
mile2 - - 2.589987 - - - 640 1
Table 3 Mass
From To Ô kg tonne lb UK cwt UK ton US cwt US ton 7.2
kg
tonne
1
1000
0.001
1
2.20462
2204.62
0.019684
19.6841
0.000984
0.984207
0.022046
22.0462
0.001102
1.10231 1
lb 0.453592 0.000454 1 0.008929 0.000446 0.01 0.0005
UK cwt 50.8023 0.050802 112 1 0.05 1.12 0.056
UK ton 1016.05 1.01605 2240 20 1 22.4 1.12
US cwt 45.3592 0.045359 100 0.892857 0.044643 1 0.05
US ton 907.185 0.907185 2000 17.8517 0.892857 20 1
Table 4 Volume and capacity

From To Ô cm3 m3 litre (dm3 ) in3 ft3 yd3 UK pint UK gall US pint US gall
cm3 1 - 0.001 0.061024 0.0000353 - 0.001760 0.00022 0.002113 0.000264
m3 - 1 1000 61023.7 35.3147 1.30795 1759.75 219.969 2113.38 264.172
litre (dm3 ) 1000 0.001 1 61.0237 0.035315 0.001308 1.75975 0.219969 2.11338 0.264172
in3 16.3871 - 0.016387 1 0.0005787 0.0000214 0.028837 0.003605 0.034632 0.004329
ft3 28316.8 0.028317 28.3168 1728 1 0.037037 49.8307 6.22883 59.8442 7.48052
yd3 764555 0.764555 764.555 46656 27 1 1345.429 168.1784 1615.793 201.974
UK pint 568.261 0.0005683 0.568261 34.6774 0.020068 0.000743 1 0.125 1.20095 0.150119
UK gall 4546.09 0.0045461 4.54609 277.42 0.160544 0.005946 8 1 9.6076 1.20095
US pint 473.176 0.0004732 0.473176 28.875 0.01671 0.000619 0.832674 0.104084 1 0.125
US gall 3785.41 0.0037854 3.785411 231 0.133681 0.004951 6.661392 0.832674 8 1
Table 5 Pressure
From To Ô atmos mm Hg mbar bar pascal in H2O in Hg psi
atmos 1 760 1013.25 1.0132 101325 406.781 29.9213 14.6959
mm Hg 0.0013158 1 1.33322 0.001333 133.322 0.53524 0.03937 0.019337
mbar 0.0009869 0.750062 1 0.001 100 0.401463 0.02953 0.014504
bar 0.9869 750.062 1000 1 100000 401.463 29.53 14.504
pascal 0.0000099 0.007501 0.01 0.00001 1 0.004015 0.0002953 0.000145
in H2O 0.0024583 1.86832 2.49089 0.002491 249.089 1 0.073556 0.036127
in Hg 0.033421 25.4 33.8639 0.0338639 3386.39 13.5951 1 0.491154
psi 0.068046 51.7149 68.9476 0.068948 6894.76 27.6799 2.03602 1
Note: 1 pascal = 1 N / m2
General information
7 Conversion tables
Table 6 Volume rate of flow

From To Ô L /sec
(dm3 /sec) L /h m3 /s m3 /h cfm ft3 /h UK gall /m UK gall /h US gall /m US gall /h
L /s
(dm3 /sec) 1 3600 0.001 3.6 2.118882 127.133 13.19814 791.8884 15.85032 951.019
L /h 0.000278 1 - 0.001 0.000588 0.035315 0.003666 0.219969 0.004403 0.264172
m3 /s 1000 3600000 1 3600 2118.88 127133 13198.1 791889 15850.3 951019
m3 /h 0.277778 1000 0.000278 1 0.588578 35.3147 3.66615 219.969 4.402863 264.1718
cfm 0.471947 1699.017 0.000472 1.699017 1 60 6.228833 373.73 7.480517 448.831
ft3 /h 0.007866 28.3168 - 0.028317 0.016667 1 0.103814 6.228833 0.124675 7.480517
UK gall /m 0.075768 272.766 0.0000758 0.272766 0.160544 9.63262 1 60 1.20095 72.057
UK gall /h 0.001263 4.54609 - 0.004546 0.002676 0.160544 0.016667 1 0.020016 1.20095
US gall /m 0.06309 227.125 0.0000631 0.227125 0.133681 8.020832 0.832674 49.96045 1 60
US gall /h 0.001052 3.785411 - 0.003785 0.002228 0.133681 0.013878 0.832674 0.016667 1
Table 7 Power
From To Ô Btu /h W kcal /h kW
Btu /h 1 0.293071 0.251996 0.000293
W 3.41214 1 0.859845 0.001
kcal /h 3.96832 1.163 1 0.001163
kW 3412.14 1000 859.845 1
Table 8 Energy
From To Ô Btu Therm J kJ Cal
Btu 1 0.00001 1055.06 1.055 251.996
Therm 100000 1 - 105 500 25 199 600
J 0.00094 - 1 0.001 0.2388
kJ 0.9478 0.000009478 1000 1 238.85
Cal 0.0039683 0.0039683 x 10-5 4.1868 - 1
Table 9 Specific heat
From To Ô Btu /lb °F J /kg °C
Btu /lb °F 1 4186.8
J /kg °C 0.00023 1
Table 10 Heat flowrate
From To Ô Btu /ft2h W /m2 kcal /m2h
Btu /ft2h 1 3.154 2.712
7.2 W /m2 0.3169 1 0.859
kcal /m2h 0.368 1.163 1
2 Table 11 Thermal conductance
From To Ô Btu /ft2 h °F W /m2 °C kcal /m2 h °C
Btu /ft2 h °F 1 5.67826 4.88243
W /m2 °C 0.176110 1 0.859845
kcal /m2 h °C 0.204816 1.163 1
Table 12 Heat per unit mass
From To Ô Btu /lb kJ /kg
Btu /lb 1 2.326
kJ /kg 0.4299 1
Table 13 Linear velocity
From To Ô ft /min ft /s m /s
ft /min 1 0.016666 0.00508
ft /s 60 1 0.3048
m /s 196.850 3.28084 1
Temperature conversion
Can be achieved by using the following formula: Fluid power users are sometimes confused by Nm³. This is not
°F = (°C x 1.8) + 32 Newton-metres³ but refers to meters³ ANR, i.e. a volume of air
°C = (°F - 32) 1.8 measured against the standard or normal atmosphere reference.
The equivalent imperial term is S.C.F. (Standard Cubic Feet).
Additional information
Litre
Atmosphere - (standard reference) The symbol l is being superceded by L to avoid confusion with 1 (one).
A.N.R. (Atmosphère Normale de Référence) ISO R558. 1 L = 1 dm³.
This is the agreed atmosphere to control specification values and
test results, as given in ISO R554. bar
Pneumatic fluid power uses 1013 mbar, 20°C, 65% RH (ISO R554). 1 bar = 100 kPa = 100 kN/m².
Compressor and pneumatic tool industries prefer 1000 mbar, 20°C,
65% RH (ISO 2787). kg /cm²
Aerospace, Petroleum and British Gas Industries prefer 1013 mbar, This unit is still used in some areas. The conversions are as follows:
15°C, Dry (ISO 2533 and ISO 5024). 1 kg /cm² = 0.980 665 bar = 0.967841 atmos = 14.2233 psi
TI-GCM-03 CM Issue 6 Conversion Tables

General information
Steam
Local regulations may restrict the use of this product to below thetraps - International standards
conditions quoted.
7
TI-F01-27
ST Issue 5
Steam Trap
International Standards
With so many steam trap manufacturers displaying a wide range of product information in many different formats it is easy to see why
many purchasers and specifiers find the selection of steam traps confusing. Many customers are also under pressure to comply with
local and Governmental legislation for their steam systems such as Pressurised Systems Regulations, The Factories Act, Health and
Safety Executive and the European Pressure Equipment Directive 97 / 23 / EC.
Misleading product information such as inaccurate condensate capacities are just one of the problems encountered. To make capacity figures
appear higher than they really are many manufacturers supply capacities for cold water and claim they are hot water capacities. In practice
hot water capacities are typically 60 - 70% lower than cold water capacities.
Products need to be clearly identified so that in the event of any problems the correct supplier can be contacted. It is hard to believe that in
todays quality conscious world there are many manufacturers who only mark their products with the pipe size and direction of flow - no
manufacturers identification at all.
The only safe and professional way to ensure that high quality, system safety and reliability is maintained is to install only products of proven
and guaranteed quality.
The following National /International standards apply to steam traps and are intended to ensure that any purchaser / specifier has the full
knowledge and confidence that the equipment used meets known legislation. The vast majority of steam trap manufacturers do not conform
to these International Standards.
Spirax Sarco are always at the forefront of steam trapping developments and together with the British Standards Institute have been very
active over the years, in their efforts to establish official standards for steam traps. In recent years certain British Standards have been modified
to comply with both European (EN) standards and International (ISO) standards. A brief description of each is given below.
Glossary of technical terms for automatic steam traps ISO 6552 : 1980
This standard establishes precise definitions for all technical terms and expressions used to describe steam traps under operating conditions.
Only by specifying these operating conditions can a customer be confident that the steam trap will safely operate within their system.
Permissible working pressure which is dependant on materials, design and working
PN Nominal pressure
temperatures / pressures.
PMA Maximum allowable pressure (bar) That the shell of the trap can withstand at a given temperature.
PMO Maximum operating pressure (bar)

Which is given by the manufacturer.
Sometimes restricted by the pressure limitations of internal mechanisms.
7.3
PO
POB
Operating pressure
Operating backpressure
Measured at the trap inlet (bar).
Measured at the outlet of the trap (bar).
1
PMOB Maximum operating backpressure (bar) Maximum permissible pressure at the trap outlet allowing correct operation.
DP Operating differential pressure (bar) Difference between operating pressure and operating backpressure (bar).
DPMX Maximum differential pressure (bar) Maximum difference between operating pressure and operating backpressure.
DPMN Minimum differential pressure (bar) Minimum difference between operating pressure and operating backpressure.
PT Test pressure (bar) Pressure applied to the steam trap under test.
PTMX Maximum test pressure (bar) Maximum cold hydraulic test pressure the trap can withstand, with internals fitted.
Maximum temperature to which the shell of the trap can be raised permanently, at a
TMA Maximum allowable temperature ( C) o
given pressure.
TMO Maximum operating temperature (oC) Maximum temperature for which the operation of the trap is guaranteed.
TO Operating temperature (oC) Temperature measured at the inlet of the trap being tested.
Marking of automatic steam traps EN 26553 : 1991 ISO 6553 : 1980

Establishes certain minimum basic requirements for the marking and identification of steam traps. To conform to this standard all traps should
be marked with the following :-
Manufacturer’s name and / or trade mark
Maximum allowable pressure (PMA)
Maximum allowable temperature (TMA)
Indication of the flow direction
Optional markings to include:-
Nominal pressure (PN)
Maximum operating pressure (PMO) or maximum differential pressure (DPMX)
Shell material designation
Nominal size (DN)
Maximum test pressure (PTMX)
If steam traps do not have this information clearly marked on them many insurance companies may not validate or insure the
steam system.
General information
7 Steam traps - International standards
Face-to-face dimensions for flanged automatic

steam traps EN 26554 : 1991 ISO 6554 : 1980
This standard specifies face-to-face dimensions for steam traps in the size range DN15 to DN50, for pressures up to PN40. It is mainly used
in European influenced markets. There are 6 series of dimensions with the most commonly used being Series 1.
The following face-to-face dimensions are specified for Series 1 steam traps:
Series 1 DN15 150 mm

DN20 150 mm
DN25 160 mm
DN32 230 mm
DN40 230 mm
DN50 230 mm Note: There is currently no ASTM / ASME equivalent for steam traps.
Face-to-face
Classification of automatic steam traps EN 26704 : 1991 ISO 6704 : 1982

Specification details the various types of operating principle for steam traps including mechanical, thermostatic and thermodynamic types.
Many manufacturers claim that a trap operates in a different manner than it actually does. This is not only confusing but may also lead
to operational problems. An example is where a bimetal trap (classed as a thermostatic trap) is incorrectly claimed to be a thermodynamic
trap. This implies that it discharges condensate at steam temperature when in fact it may cause subcooling by up to 40°C below steam
saturation temperature. This type of trap must not be confused with a true thermodynamic steam trap with a disc.
Determination of steam loss of

automatic steam traps EN 27841 : 1991 ISO 7841 : 1988
This specifies two alternative test methods to determine the steam loss of automatic steam traps. One of these was developed as a result of the
work that Spirax Sarco undertook with the National Engineering Laboratory in the UK. Steam trap buyers can now make comparisons of true
steam trap losses through various types of steam traps with the assurance that the figures published are accurate and all tests are conducted in
accordance with this standard. Spriax Sarco are able to undertake these tests if required. Any manufacturers test figures that are not obtained
within the parameters of this standard must be treated with caution.
It is important to understand that under normal conditions steam traps do not waste steam. Wastage can only occur if there is no load (not
practical even in a superheated system) or if the internals have been damaged. The following table shows the results of extensive testing to
determine steam wastage from all trap types at a pressure of 5 bar g. It can be clearly seen that radiation losses from the trap surface are much
greater than losses through the trap orifice!
Energy requirements of various steam traps - expressed in kg /h of steam at 5 bar

7.3 No-load Reasonable load
Traps Through trap From trap Total Through trap From trap Total
2 BPT / SM 0.5 0.50 1.00 0 0.50 0.50
FT 0.0 1.40 1.40 0 1.40 1.40
IB 0.5 1.20 1.70 0 1.20 1.20
TD 0.5 0.25 0.75 0 0.25 0.25
The purpose of the above table is not to establish the fact that one type of trap is marginally more efficient than another. It is simply to show that
steam traps require only a minimal amount of energy. Losses only become significant when traps are defective.
The important thing therefore is to combine selection, checking and maintenance to achieve reliability. Properly done, costs and
steam wastage will be minimised.
Determination of discharge capacity

of automatic steam traps EN 27842 : 1991 ISO 7842 : 1988
Like EN 27841and ISO 7841, this specifies two alternative test methods for use by manufacturers in order to determine discharge capacity for
steam traps. A manufacturer’s compliance with this standard will put an end to difficulties experienced in the past over trap selection. The customer
will no longer have to ask whether the capacity curves produced for any particular manufacturer of steam trap are based upon cold water or hot
water condensate tests. All steam traps manufactured in the UK and France by Spirax Sarco have capacity tests conducted in accordance with
this standard. By comparison some manufacturers will include the capacity of internal air vents in the overall capacity of their float traps - the air
vent is only open when condensate has subcooled.
Production and performance characteristic tests

for automatic steam traps EN 26948 : 1991 ISO 6948 : 1981
This standard specifies tests which are used to ensure that the steam trap functions correctly and that the performance is acceptable for the
design. The tests include product inspection, hydrostatic and operational checks. Testing of capacities and the identification of any steam losses
are also discussed.
Other standards are also used in the design and manufacture of Spirax Sarco steam traps. These include :-
TRB 801 Nr45, DIN 3548, DIN 2501, DIN 3840, AD 2000-Merkblatt, EN 287, EN 288, EN 289, EN 12569, BS 5500, ASME VIII,
ASME IX and TÜV.
TI-F01-27 ST Issue 5 Steam Trap International Standards

General information
Product limitations
TI-GCM-02
CM Issue 7
Pressure / Temperature Limits

Technical Information sheets (TIs) for products in pressurised systems contain a 'Pressure / temperature limits' diagram. This diagram
indicates the envelope of the product(s) at the full range of pressures and temperatures. The construction of the 'Pressure / temperature
limits' diagram is shown below. Note: A table 'Definition of technical terms' and a typical example (no specific product) is displayed
overleaf.

A Is the maximum allowable temperature (TMA) the body of the
Temperature °C
Note: This line will illustrate the A product can be raised to permanently, at a given pressure.
minimum operating temperature not
the minimum design temperature.
Pressure bar g

B Is the maximum allowable pressure (PMA) which can be
Temperature °C
B tolerated within the body of the product at a given temperature.

It is a function of the PN rating and body design / material.

Pressure bar g 7.4
1

C Is a prohibited area and the product must not be used in this
Temperature °C

C region and will be worded:

Pressure bar g

D
Temperature °C
The steam saturation curve is added (where relevant) to

enable users to easily find the specific operating points,
D e.g. 10 bar g saturated steam @ 185°C, 10 bar g steam
with 20°C superheat or 10 bar g / 250°C steam.

Pressure bar g
Page 1 of 3
General information
7 Product limitations
E Sometimes end connections or internal components may
Temperature °C
restrict the operating envelope of the product below the
standard rating. Care must therefore be taken in selecting
appropriate end connections. In this case the product should
not be used in area 'e' and will be worded:
E The product should not be used in this region
because...(the actual reason will depend on the
product being described).
Pressure bar g

F F If a product should not be used above a certain temperature,
Temperature °C
or an ancillary product is required to operate above a certain

limit then it will be tinted and worded appropriately. e.g.:
High temperature bolting required for use in this
region (the actual reason will depend on the product
being described).

Pressure bar g
An example of a finished diagram:

A

2
Temperature °C
1

Steam 4 5
saturation
curve 3
C B

Pressure bar g
2 High temperature bolting is required for use in this region.

7.4
3 The product should not be used in this region or beyond its operating range as damage to the internals may occur.
2
4 A - C Flanged end connections EN 1092 PN16.
5 A - B Flanged end connections EN 1092 PN25 or ANSI B 16.5 Class 300.
Warning:
Care must also be taken concerning Differential pressure limits and these are tabulated in addition to the 'Product / temperature limits'
diagram.
Page 2 of 3 TI-GCM-02 CM Issue 7

General information
Product limitations 7
Definition of technical terms
Permissible working pressure which is dependant on materials, design and
PN Nominal pressure
working temperatures/pressures.
PMA Maximum allowable pressure (bar) That the shell of the product can withstand at a given temperature.
Which is given by the manufacturer.
PMO Maximum operating pressure (bar)
Sometimes restricted by the pressure limitations of internal mechanisms.
PO Operating pressure (bar) Measured at the product inlet.
POB Operating backpressure Measured at the outlet of the product.
PMOB Maximum operating backpressure (bar) Maximum permissible pressure at the trap outlet allowing correct operation.
DPMX Maximum differential pressure (bar) Maximum difference between operating pressure and operating backpressure.
DPMN Minimum differential pressure (bar) Minimum difference between operating pressure and operating backpressure.
Maximum temperature to which the shell of the product can be raised
TMA Maximum allowable temperature (°C)
permanently, at a given pressure.
TMO Maximum operating temperature (°C) Maximum temperature for which the operation of the product is guaranteed.
TO Operating temperature (°C) Temperature measured at the inlet of the product being tested.
This is a cold hydraulic test applied to the body only, with no internals fitted.
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test Note: If, when the internals are fitted, the test pressure should be less, this figure
pressure of _ _ bar g should be clarified to the end user (see Typical pressure/temperature limits diagram
below)
A standard layout for the Pressure / temperature limits Pressure / temperature limits
information is shown opposite.
A D B

Temperature °C

Steam
saturation

curve

E C

Pressure bar g
The product must not be used in this region. 7.4

For further
'Pressure / temperature limits' diagram and table layouts,
The product should not be used in this region or beyond
its operating range as damage to the internals may occur. 3
see TI-S24-41, pages 4 and 5.
A-B-C Flanged PN25.
A-D-E Flanged ANSI 150.
Note: For hygienic / sanitary clamp ends the maximum
pressure / temperature may be restricted by the gasket or
sanitary clamp used. Please consult Spirax Sarco.

Maximum operating pressure PN25 19 bar g

PMO
for saturated steam service ANSI 150 13.5 bar g
XYZ14-14.5 4.5 bar
Maximum differential
DPMX pressure XYZ14-10 10 bar
XYZ14-14 14 bar
TI-GCM-02 CM Issue 7 Page 3 of 3

General information
7.4
4
General information
Product limitations
TI-S24-41
CH Issue 3

for Control Valves
Control valve Technical Information sheets (TIs) for products in pressurised systems contain a 'Pressure / temperature limits' diagram.
This diagram indicates the envelope of the product(s) at the full range of pressures and temperatures. The construction of the
'Pressure / temperature limits' diagram is shown below.
Note: A table 'Definition of technical terms used for control valves' and a typical example (no specific product) is displayed overleaf.

A Is the maximum design temperature the body of the product
Temperature °C
Note: This line will illustrate the A can be raised to permanently, at a given pressure.
Pressure bar g

B Is the maximum design pressure that the combined body
Temperature °C
B and end connections of the product can withstand at a

given temperature. It is a function of the PN rating and body
design / material.

Pressure bar g 7.4
5

Temperature °C


Pressure bar g

D
Temperature °C

D e.g. 10 bar g saturated steam @ 185 °C, 10 bar g steam
with 20 °C superheat or 10 bar g / 250 °C steam.

Pressure bar g
Page 1 of 5
General information
E Sometimes end connections or internal components may
Temperature °C
restrict the operating envelope of the product below the
standard rating. Care must therefore be taken in selecting
appropriate end connections. In this case the product
should not be used in area 'e' and will be worded:
E The product should not be used in this region
because...(the actual reason will depend on the
product being described).
Pressure bar g
F F If a product should not be used above a certain temperature,

Temperature °C

or an ancillary product is required to operate above a certain
limit then it will be tinted and worded appropriately. e.g.:
High temperature bolting required for use in this
region (the actual reason will depend on the product
being described).

Pressure bar g
An example of a finished diagram:

A

2
Temperature °C
1

Steam 4 5
saturation
curve 3
C B

Pressure bar g
2 High temperature bolting is required for use in this region.

7.4
3 The product should not be used in this region or beyond its operating range as damage to the internals may occur.
6
4 A - C Flanged end connections EN 1092 PN16.
5 A - B Flanged end connections EN 1092 PN25 or ANSI B 16.5 Class 300.
Pressure / Temperature Limits for Control Valves

General information
Definition of technical terms used for control valves
This is a combination of the product body and end connections and is the term used to describe
Body
the pressure containing envelope of the product.
The PN is the nominal working pressure / temperature (which is dependant on materials, design
Nominal pressure (PN)
and working temperatures/pressures) that can be tolerated by the body of the product.
This is the maximum allowable pressure that the body of the product can withstand at a given
temperature.
This is provided by the manufacturer when it is less than the maximum design pressure. For
Maximum operating pressure example the maximum design pressure may be reduced to the pressure limitation of the lowest
rated option chosen.
Maximum differential pressure This is dependant upon the chosen actuator up to the maximum design pressure of the product.
This is the maximum allowable temperature to which the body of the product can be raised
permanently, at a given pressure.
This is the maximum temperature for correct operation of the product. This is determined by the
lowest rated option chosen.
Minimum design temperature This is the minimum documented temperature the body of the product can withstand.
Minimum operating temperature This is the minimum temperature for correct operation of the product.
Designed for a maximum cold This is a cold hydraulic test applied to the body as supplied.
hydraulic test pressure of _ _ bar g Note: When Spirax Sarco have tested the product in an alternative form than that supplied, a
or psi g lower pressure will be given (see Typical pressure/temperature limits diagram below).
A standard layout for the Pressure / temperature limits Pressure / temperature limits
information is shown opposite.
A D B
For further layouts, depending on space available in the TI
or IMI, are shown on pages 4 and 5.
Temperature °C

Steam
saturation
curve
E C

Pressure bar g

7.4
High temperature packing is required for use in this 7
region.
The product should not be used in this region or beyond

its operating range as damage to the internals may occur.
A-B-C Flanged PN25.
A-D-E Flanged PN16.
Note: As standard the XYZ series two port control valves are
supplied with PTFE stem seal and metal-to-metal seats.

As standard 250 °C @ 22 bar g
Maximum With high temperature
300 °C @ 20 bar g
operating packing
temperature
With high temperature
350 °C @ 18 bar g
bolting and packing
Maximum differential pressure See relevant actuator TI

General information
If the chart is on a full single page, this layout is used

A D B

Temperature °C

Steam
saturation
curve
E C

Pressure bar g
A-B-C Flanged PN25.
A-D-E Flanged PN16.
Note: As standard the XYZ series two port control valves are supplied with PTFE stem seal and metal-to-metal seats.
Maximum operating temperature With high temperature packing 300 °C @ 20 bar g
With high temperature bolting and packing 350 °C @ 18 bar g
7.4 Minimum operating temperature

-10 °C
8 Maximum differential pressure See relevant actuator TI
Designed for a maximum cold hydraulic test pressure of: 37.5 bar g

General information
If the chart is on a single page, with limited space, this layout is used

A D B

Temperature °C
High temperature packing is required for use in this

region.
Steam
saturation The product should not be used in this region or beyond
curve its operating range as damage to the internals may occur.
E C
A-B-C Flanged PN25.

A-D-E Flanged PN16.
Pressure bar g
Note: As standard the XYZ series two port control valves are supplied with PTFE stem seal and metal-to-metal seats.
Maximum operating temperature With high temperature packing 300 °C @ 20 bar g
With high temperature bolting and packing 350 °C @ 18 bar g

-10 °C
Maximum differential pressure See relevant actuator TI

7.4
9

General information
7.4
10
General information
Product limitations
TI-S13-50
CH Issue 3

for Safety Valves
Safety valve Technical Information sheets (TIs) contain a 'Pressure / temperature limits' diagram. This diagram indicates the envelope
of the product(s) at the full range of pressures and temperatures. Note: The construction of this diagram and a typical example (no
specific product) is displayed below:
A A Is the maximum design temperature the body of the product

Temperature °C
Note: This line will illustrate the can be raised to permanently, at a given pressure.
Pressure bar g

B Is the maximum design pressure that the combined body
Temperature °C
B and end connections of the product can withstand at a

given temperature. It is a function of the PN rating and body
design / material.

Pressure bar g 7.4
11

Temperature °C


Pressure bar g

D
Temperature °C

D e.g. 10 bar g saturated steam @ 185 °C, 10 bar g steam
with 20 °C superheat or 10 bar g / 250 °C steam.

Pressure bar g
General information
Typical 'Pressure / temperature limits' diagram and table for a safety valve:

Please contact: Spirax Sarco, when so required, for relevant details regarding the maximum allowable limits that the body can withstand.

A

Temperature °C

Steam
saturation
curve

C B

Pressure bar g

A - B Flanged PN25.
A - C Flanged ANSI 150.
Note: For hygienic / sanitary clamp ends the maximum

pressure / temperature may be restricted by the gasket or
sanitary clamp used. Please consult Spirax Sarco.
DN15 - DN32 18 bar g

Set pressure Maximum
DN40 - DN50 14 bar g
range
Minimum 0.3 bar g
Minimum -90 °C
Metal seat
Maximum +300 °C
Minimum -30 °C
Nitrile seat
Maximum +120 °C
Temperature
7.4 EPDM seat
Minimum -50 °C
Maximum +150 °C
12 Minimum -20 °C
Viton seat
Maximum +200 °C
Steam 5%
Overpressure
Gas, liquid 10%
Performance Blowdown limits Steam, gas, liquid 10%
data
Derated Steam, gas 0.71
coefficient of
discharge values Liquid 0.52 For further
'Pressure / temperature limits' diagram and table layouts,
Designed for a maximum inlet cold hydraulic test pressure of 37.5 bar g see TI-S24-41, pages 4 and 5.
Note: If a test gag is fitted, test pressure must not exceed 25 bar g
TI-S13-50 CH Issue 3
Pressure / Temperature Limits for Safety Valves

General information
Useful calculation data
7
AI-GAB-03
AB Issue 4
The Cost of Steam

- Metric
The cost of steam is usually expressed in terms of the cost to raise 1 000 kg. The calculation itself is relatively straight forward and this AIS
simplifies the task by the use of a forced path calculation sheet. A blank format is available overleaf.
Example: Boiler operating pressure - 10 bar g, feedwater temperatures 80°C. Fuel used is heavy oil at £0.40 / litre and boiler efficiency is 80%.
Steam pressure 10 bar g Feedwater temperature 80 °C
Mathematical operation Units
Heat input required (see table 1) 2445 kJ / kg

.....................
x 1000 kg
.....................
= Total heat input 2445000 kJ

.....................
kJ / kg coal or oil
÷ Calorific value of fuel (see table 2) 42500 kJ / kWh gas
.....................
kg coal or oil
= Net fuel needed 57.53 kWh gas
.....................
85% x 1.18
x Boiler efficiency 80% x 1.25 1.25
75% x 1.34 .....................
70% x 1.43
kg coal or oil
= Actual fuel needed 71.9 kWh gas
.....................
COAL OIL GAS

7.5
Mathematical S.G Mathematical 1
operation Heavy 9.7 operation
Mathematical Medium 9.5
÷ 1000 kg / tonne operation Light 9.35
= tonne ÷ 0.97
..................... x pkWh
...................... .............
= 74.1
..................... litre
x ...................... £ / tonne x £0.40 £ / litre
.....................
£ / 1000 £ / 1000 ÷ 100 = £ / 1000
= ..................... kg steam = £29.65
..................... kg steam ............. kg steam
Table 1 Table 2
Heat input in Kilojoules (kJ) required to raise one kilogram (kg) Calorific value of various fuels (approximate values)
of steam.
Boiler Feedwater temperature °C TYPE CALORIFIC VALUE (kJ / kg)

pressure
bar g ANTHRACITE 32,500
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
COAL GOOD BITUMINOUS COAL 30,000
1 2665 2623 2581 2539 2497 2455 2413 2371 2329 2287 2245
GOOD AVERAGE
5 2715 2673 2631 2589 2548 2506 2464 2421 2381 2338 2295 INDUSTRIAL COAL 28,000
6 2722 2680 2638 2596 2555 2513 2471 2428 2388 2345 2302 POOR AVERAGE
INDUSTRIAL COAL 21,000
7 2727 2685 2643 2601 2560 2518 2476 2433 2393 2350 2307
VISCOSITY SPECIFIC CALORIFIC
GRADE
10 2740 2697 2655 2613 2573 2531 2489 2445 2406 2363 2319 GRAVITY VALUE (kJ / kg)
RED. 1
cSt SECS
12 2746 2704 2662 2620 2578 2536 2494 2452 2410 2368 2326
OIL GAS OIL 4 35 0.835 45,600
15 2752 2710 2668 2626 2584 2542 2500 2458 2416 2374 2332
LIGHT 50 210 0.935 43,500
17 2755 2713 2671 2629 2587 2545 2503 2461 2419 2377 2335
MEDIUM 230 950 0.95 43,000
20 2759 2717 2675 2633 2591 2549 2507 2465 2423 2381 2339 HEAVY 900 3500 0.97 42,500
25 2762 2720 2678 2636 2594 2552 2510 2468 2426 2384 2342 GAS 3,600 kJ / kWh
General information
7 Useful calculation data
Steam pressure bar g Feedwater temperature °C
Heat input required (see table 1) kJ / kg

.....................
x 1000 kg
.....................
= Total heat input kJ

.....................
kJ / kg coal or oil
÷ Calorific value of fuel (see table 2) kJ / kWh gas
.....................
kg coal or oil
= Net fuel needed kWh gas
.....................
85% x 1.18
x Boiler efficiency 80% x 1.25
75% x 1.34 .....................
70% x 1.43
kg coal or oil
= Actual fuel needed kWh gas
.....................
COAL OIL GAS

Mathematical S.G Mathematical
operation Light 9.35
÷ 1000 kg / tonne
÷ .....................
= ...................... tonne x pkWh
= litre .............
.....................
x ...................... £ / tonne x £ / litre
.....................
£ / 1000 ÷ 100 = £ / 1000
= £ / 1000 = kg steam
..................... kg steam ..................... kg steam .............
Table 1 Table 2
Heat input in Kilojoules (kJ) required to raise one kilogram (kg) Calorific value of various fuels (approximate values)
7.5 of steam.
Boiler Feedwater temperature °C TYPE CALORIFIC VALUE (kJ / kg)

2 pressure
bar g 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
ANTHRACITE 32,500

1 2665 2623 2581 2539 2497 2455 2413 2371 2329 2287 2245
GOOD AVERAGE
5 2715 2673 2631 2589 2548 2506 2464 2421 2381 2338 2295 INDUSTRIAL COAL 28,000
6 2722 2680 2638 2596 2555 2513 2471 2428 2388 2345 2302 POOR AVERAGE
7 2727 2685 2643 2601 2560 2518 2476 2433 2393 2350 2307
GRADE
10 2740 2697 2655 2613 2573 2531 2489 2445 2406 2363 2319 GRAVITY VALUE (kJ / kg)
RED. 1
cSt SECS
12 2746 2704 2662 2620 2578 2536 2494 2452 2410 2368 2326
OIL GAS OIL 4 35 0.835 45,600
15 2752 2710 2668 2626 2584 2542 2500 2458 2416 2374 2332
LIGHT 50 210 0.935 43,500
17 2755 2713 2671 2629 2587 2545 2503 2461 2419 2377 2335
MEDIUM 230 950 0.95 43,000
20 2759 2717 2675 2633 2591 2549 2507 2465 2423 2381 2339 HEAVY 900 3500 0.97 42,500
25 2762 2720 2678 2636 2594 2552 2510 2468 2426 2384 2342 GAS 3,600 kJ / kWh
AI-GAB-03 AB Issue 4 The Cost of Steam - Metric

General information
7
AI-GAB-04
AB Issue 3
The Cost of Steam

- Imperial
The cost of steam is usually expressed in terms of the cost to raise 1000lbs. The calculation itself is relatively straight forward and this AIS
simplifies the task by the use of a forced path calculation sheet. A blank format is available overleaf.
Example: Boiler operating pressure - 150 psi g, feedwater temperatures 180°F. Fuel used is heavy oil at £1.80 / gallon and boiler efficiency is 80%.
Steam pressure 150 psi g Feedwater temperature 180 °F
Heat input required (see table 1) 1049 Btu / lb

.....................
x 1000 lb
.....................
= Total Heat Input 1049000 Btu

.....................
Btu / lb coal or oil
÷ Calorific value of fuel (see table 2) 18300 Btu / Therm gas
.....................
lb coal or oil
= Net fuel needed 57.3 Therm gas
.....................
85% x 1.18
x Boiler efficiency 80% x 1.25 1.25
75% x 1.34 .....................
70% x 1.43
lb coal or oil
= Actual fuel needed 71.9 Therm gas
.....................
COAL OIL GAS

7.5
Mathematical S.G Mathematical 3
operation Light 9.35
÷ 2240 lb / ton
÷ 9.7
.....................
= ton x ............. £ / therm
...................... = 7.38 gallon
.....................
x £ / ton x £1.80 £ / gallon
...................... .....................
= £ / 1000
£ / 1000 £ / 1000 ............. lb steam
= lb steam = £13.28 lb steam
..................... .....................
Table 1 Table 2
Heat input in British Thermal Units (Btu) required to raise Calorific value of various fuels (approximate values)
one pound (lb) of steam.
Boiler Feedwater temperature °F TYPE CALORIFIC VALUE (Btu / lb)

pressure
psi g ANTHRACITE 14,000
50 70 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 212 250
15 1146 1126 1116 1096 1076 1056 1036 1016 996 984 946
GOOD AVERAGE
80 1169 1149 1139 1119 1099 1079 1059 1039 1019 1007 969 INDUSTRIAL COAL 12,000
90 1171 1151 1141 1121 1101 1081 1061 1041 1021 1009 971 POOR AVERAGE
100 1172 1152 1142 1122 1102 1082 1062 1042 1022 1010 972
150 1179 1159 1149 1129 1109 1089 1069 1049 1029 1017 979 GRADE
GRAVITY VALUE (Btu / kg)
RED. 1
170 1180 1160 1150 1130 1110 1090 1070 1050 1030 1018 980 cSt SECS
200 1182 1162 1152 1132 1112 1092 1072 1052 1032 1020 982 OIL GAS OIL 4 35 0.835 19,600
LIGHT 50 210 0.935 18,700
250 1185 1165 1155 1135 1115 1095 1075 1055 1035 1023 985
MEDIUM 230 950 0.95 18,500
300 1186 1166 1156 1136 1116 1096 1076 1056 1036 1024 986
HEAVY 900 3500 0.97 18,300
350 1187 1167 1157 1137 1117 1097 1077 1057 1037 1025 987
GAS 100,000 Btu / Therm
General information
Steam pressure psi g Feedwater temperature °F
Heat input required (see table 1) Btu / lb

.....................
x 1000 lb
.....................
= Total Heat Input Btu

.....................
Btu / lb coal or oil
÷ Calorific value of fuel (see table 2) Btu / Therm gas
.....................
lb coal or oil
= Net fuel needed Therm gas
.....................
85% x 1.18
x Boiler efficiency 80% x 1.25
75% x 1.34 .....................
70% x 1.43
lb coal or oil
= Actual fuel needed Therm gas
.....................
COAL OIL GAS

Mathematical S.G Mathematical
÷ 2240 lb / ton operation Light 9.35
÷ .....................
= ton x ............. £ / therm
...................... = gallon
.....................
x £ / ton x £ / gallon
...................... .....................
= £ / 1000
£ / 1000 £ / 1000 ............. lb steam
= = lb steam
..................... lb steam .....................
Table 1 Table 2
Heat input in British Thermal Units (Btu) required to raise Calorific value of various fuels (approximate values)
7.5 one pound (lb) of steam.
Feedwater temperature °F TYPE CALORIFIC VALUE (Btu / lb)
4
Boiler
pressure
psi g ANTHRACITE 14,000
50 70 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 212 250
15 1146 1126 1116 1096 1076 1056 1036 1016 996 984 946
GOOD AVERAGE
80 1169 1149 1139 1119 1099 1079 1059 1039 1019 1007 969 INDUSTRIAL COAL 12,000
90 1171 1151 1141 1121 1101 1081 1061 1041 1021 1009 971 POOR AVERAGE
100 1172 1152 1142 1122 1102 1082 1062 1042 1022 1010 972
150 1179 1159 1149 1129 1109 1089 1069 1049 1029 1017 979 GRADE
GRAVITY VALUE (Btu / kg)
RED. 1
170 1180 1160 1150 1130 1110 1090 1070 1050 1030 1018 980 cSt SECS
200 1182 1162 1152 1132 1112 1092 1072 1052 1032 1020 982 OIL GAS OIL 4 35 0.835 19,600
LIGHT 50 210 0.935 18,700
250 1185 1165 1155 1135 1115 1095 1075 1055 1035 1023 985
MEDIUM 230 950 0.95 18,500
300 1186 1166 1156 1136 1116 1096 1076 1056 1036 1024 986
HEAVY 900 3500 0.97 18,300
350 1187 1167 1157 1137 1117 1097 1077 1057 1037 1025 987
GAS 100,000 Btu / Therm
AI-GAB-04 AB Issue 3 The Cost of Steam - Imperial

General information

TI-GCM-08
CM Issue 2
Saturated Steam
Sizing Chart
Let: = Mass flow in kg/h
P1 = Upstream pressure in bar a
P2 = Downstream pressure in bar a
Kv = Valve flow coefficient.
P1 - P 2
= Pressure drop ratio =
P1
Note: To convert gauge pressure to absolute pressure, add 1, i.e. 10 bar g = 11 bar a.
The chart overleaf shows that with a given upstream pressure P1 and with a pressure drop across the valve more than is needed to
give critical flow conditions, or  > 0.42, the steam flowrate is directly proportional to the Kv of the valve. Conversely, with a given Kv,
the flowrate is directly proportional to the upstream pressure P1.
So for critical flow, we have:-
= C x Kv P1 and in the units shown, C = 12 (Constant).
Thus: = 12 Kv P1
With a smaller pressure drop, the flow is reduced until it becomes zero, at zero pressure drop. Many formulas are in current use to
predict the relationship between flowrate and the pressure drop ratio  under these conditions. One empirical formula which gives
results very close indeed to the British Standard method, but simplifies the calculation, is:-
= 12 K P
v 1
1 - 5.67 (0.42 - )² 7.5
If this formula is used when P2 is below the value which gives critical flow, then the term within the bracket (0.42 - ) becomes less than
zero. It is then taken as zero, and the function within the square root sign becomes 1.
5
Example 1: How to find Kv value for a critical flow application. page 2
How to use the chart Example 2: How to find the Kv value for a non-critical flow application. page 3
Example 3: How to find the pressure drop across a valve with a known Kv. page 4
Saturated steam sizing chart page 5
Page 1 of 5
General information
Example 1: How to find Kv value for a critical flow application.
Steam demand of heat exchanger = 800 kg/h
Steam pressure upstream of valve = 8 bar g = 9 bar a
Steam pressure required in exchanger = 3 bar g = 4 bar a
Using the selection chart:

Draw a horizontal line from 800 kg/h
Draw a horizontal line from 9 bar a to the critical pressure drop line, which is reached before a pressure drop line for (9 - 4 = 5 bar) and
drop a vertical line from the intersection to meet the 800 kg/h horizontal.
Read the Kv at this crossing point, i.e. Kv = 7.5
Refer to the Kv values given on the appropriate Technical

Information Sheet for each valve type.
Cr
itic
Pr
SA (self-acting), EL (electric/electronic) and PN (pneumatic) al
es
pre
valves may be selected using their maximum Kv values.
su
ss
ure
re
dro
dr
pl
op
ine
ba
r
Example 1
Example 1
Steam flow kg/h (÷ 3600 = kg/s)
7.5
6
Example 1
A complete sizing chart is shown on page 5.
For Water Sizing Chart see TI-GCM-09
Page 2 of 5 TI-GCM-08
CM Issue 2
Saturated Steam Sizing Chart
General information
Useful calculation data 7
Example 2: How to find the Kv value for a non-critical flow application.
Steam demand of heat exchanger = 230 kg/h.
Steam pressure required in exchanger = 4 bar g = 5 bar a

Draw horizontal lines from 230 kg/h, and from 6 bar a to pressure drop of (6 - 5 = 1 bar).
Drop a vertical line from the intersection to meet the 230 kg/h horizontal.
Read the Kv at this crossing point, i.e. Kv = 4.
Cr
itic
Pr
al
es
pre
su
ss
ure
re
dro
dr
pl
op
ine
ba
Example 2
Example 2
7.5
7
Example 2
TI-GCM-08 Page 3 of 5
CM Issue 2
General information
Example 3: How to find the pressure drop across a valve with a known Kv.
Steam demand of heat exchanger = 3 000 kg/h
Kv of valve to be used = 40

Draw horizontal lines from 11 bar a, and from 3 000 kg/h to meet Kv = 40 line.
Draw a vertical line upwards from the intersection to meet the 11 bar a horizontal.
Read the pressure drop at this crossing point, i.e. ∆P = 1 bar (approximately).
Cr
itic
Pr
al
es
pre
su
ss
ure
re
dro
dr
pl
op
ine
ba
r
Example 3
Example 3
7.5
8
Example 3
CM Issue 2
General information
Saturated steam sizing chart
This sizing chart is empirical and should not be used for critical applications
Cr
itic
al
pre
ss
Pr ure
es dro
pl
ine
su
re
dr
op
ba
r
7.5
9
TI-GCM-08 Page 5 of 5
CM Issue 2
General information
7.5
10
General information

TI-GCM-09
CM Issue 2
Water
Valve Sizing Chart
Note:
= K V √ P1
= Water flow (m 3 /h)
P1 = Pressure drop across the valve (bar)
KV = Flow coefficient (m 3 /h bar).
This chart assumes no cavitation after the control valve.

Note: the chart below is used for the following example only. A complete chart is shown overleaf.
Example:
The heat exchanger has a MTHW demand of = 10 m 3 /h
The full-load pressure drop P1 = 50 kPa (Established from 'Valve authority' (see page 2)
Go to the selection chart below:
- Draw a horizontal line from 10 m 3 /h
- Run a vertical line from 50 kPa until it crosses 10 m 3 /h line.
- Kv is given at this crossing point i.e. Kv  14 7.5

Refer to the Kv values given on the appropriate Technical Information Sheet for each valve type. 11
SA (self-acting), EL (electronic) and PN (pneumatic) controls should be sized on maximum Kv value.
Example
Water flow m 3 /h
Example
Pressure drop kPa
Page 1 of 3
General information
Valve authority
The ratio of pressure drop across the valve when fully open to that across the complete circuit is termed the 'Valve authority' (N) and
is expressed as:
P1
N =
P1 + P 2
Where: N = Valve authority
P1 = Pressure drop across the fully open valve
P2 = Pressure drop across the remainder of the circuit
The diagrams below illustrate P1 and P2 more fully.

Valve authority is a means of selecting a valve size on a water system with due regard to economic viability and good control. When
selecting a valve size, the valve authority should be between 0.2 and 0.5 (and preferably 0.5). This will ensure that each small valve
movement will influence some authority over the flow whilst not excessively increasing pumping power costs.
Valve authority will always relate to the circuit which has a varying flowrate.
P1
P2
Valve authority - Two-port valve
P1
7.5
12 P2
Valve authority - Three-port mixing valve
P1
P2
Valve authority - Three-port diverting valve
CM Issue 2
Water Valve Sizing Chart
General information
1000

200

500
400
100

300

200 50
40
100
30

20
50
40 10
30

20
5
4

3
10
2
/h
Water flow m3/h
Water
Water flow
4
1
3
flow l l/s
Water
2
/s
0.5
0.4
0.3
1
0.2

0.5

0.4 0.1
0.3
0.2
0.05 7.5

0.04
0.03
13
0.1

PHB2022 Vol 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PHB2022 Vol 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Product handbook

How to use the 2022 digital product handbook 1.1 1

Our global reach

Product overview sales brochure 1.4

Product highlight videos 1.5

Our capability videos 1.6

Section 2 Boiler house

Section 4 Control systems

Section 6 Heat transfer solutions

Section 7 General information

There are various options to look through the handbook:

- Use the buttons below

3 Download This option allows you to download single pages

Spirax-Sarco Limited, Charlton House, Cheltenham,

© Copyright 2022 Spirax Sarco is a registered trademark of Spirax-Sarco Limited

Some of the products may not be available in certain markets.

Operating Companies Manufacturing Sites

Sales Offices Distributors

DENMARK SPAIN LATIN

At Spirax Sarco, we aim to be the first choice

We aim to be the first choice provider through use of our

We aim to be the first choice provider by having a comprehensive

We aim to be the first choice provider by offering the right solution

It is the combination of expertise, comprehensive product offering and

Condensate pumps and energy recovery 18

High purity products 20

Complete integrated solutions

These services include:

• Installation of new and replacement products

Heat transfer solutions Packaged products

8 recognised standards using plant steam as the primary

• Bespoke heat transfer solutions

Pressure reducing valve system

Boiler control and systems

1. Feedtanks 4. Steam injection systems

3. Sample coolers 6. Feedpump check valves

7. Heat recovery systems 10. Blowdown vessels

1.4 1. Gilflo ILVA Flowmeters 4.TVA Flowmeters

They can be interfaced with flow computers to give

1. Electrically actuated control valves 3. Positioners

Pneumatic actuators are low profile to NAMUR standard, 5. Pneumatic controllers

6. High specification control valves 9. Safety valves

14 These valves are used in conjunction with high power,

1.4 1. Thermodynamic steam traps 3. Balanced pressure thermostatic steam traps

6. Bimetallic thermostatic steam traps 8. Quickfit steam traps

Condensate pumps and energy recovery

They are ideal for use in hazardous areas where electrical

1. Direct steam injection humidifiers 2. Hygromatik self-generative humidifiers 1.4

Models are available for use with mains or fully

High purity products

2. Sanitary control and instrumentation 4. Sanitary ancillary products

Pipeline sizes up to DN350.

5. Diffusers 10. Air vents and vacuum breakers

6. Strainers Pipeline sizes up to DN25.

22 Pipeline sizes up to DN250. 11. Ball valves

Did you know...

For more information, please visit our website at www.spiraxsarco.com

These videos are linked to

These videos are linked to

2.3 Level controls

2.4 TDS blowdown controls

2.5 Conductivity sensors

2.6 Sample coolers